JP2020069244A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of maintaining interest in a game.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 1 has a start pocket capable of receiving game balls hit into a game area 5a. When a game ball enters the start pocket, determination processing regarding winning is performed. Thereafter, variable display corresponding to a result of the determination processing is started and, if a winning pattern is displayed in the variable display, a winning game is executed. Accordingly, the pachinko machine 1 can perform a special performance as a performance associated with operation means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 60

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning drum type gaming machine (generally referred to as a “slot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine in which a special game is played in which a large number of prizes can be won when a winning is won, as seen in, for example, Patent Document 1.

  That is, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, first, it is determined whether or not there is a winning game ball in the starting opening. Then, when there is a prize for the game ball to the starting opening, a determination process for determining whether or not the hit is won is performed. At this time, the special symbols are variably displayed for a predetermined variation time on a predetermined display device. Then, when a predetermined variation time has elapsed, the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode showing that the winning is won, and the opening / closing member of the special winning opening is operated, thereby increasing the number of players. We will provide special games that can be won.

JP, 2017-006393, A

  In such a conventional gaming machine, the effect is often executed by the operating means, but it is required to further enhance the interest of the game when the effect is performed by the operating means.

  The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game.

Means 1: determination means for performing determination,
A privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege based on the determination result of the determining unit being a special result,
When a reception validity period can be generated and a reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid motion is made within the reception period, a reception period execution that can execute post-reception production according to the type of the generated reception period is executed. Means and
An operation target display unit capable of displaying an operation target display that suggests an operation target by the player during the reception period;
As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which the operation validity display is allowed without the operation target display being displayed,
Upon occurrence of the specific reception period, it is possible to output a reception permission sound indicating that the reception validity determination is allowed, or that the reception validity determination is allowed,
The reception period execution means can generate a predetermined reception period that is a reception period different from the specific reception period, and when the reception validity determination is made in the specific reception period and the reception validity determination is made in the predetermined reception period. A gaming machine characterized by executing post-reception production in a different mode from the case.

  In the above-described configuration, first, as the acceptance period, the acceptance validity determination that the action by the player is a valid action is allowed in a state in which the action target display (for example, the image showing the operating means) is not displayed. We decided to prepare a reception period. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from which timing the acceptance validity determination is permitted, and further whether the acceptance validity determination is already permitted or not. There is a concern that it can only be enjoyed by a player who is sensitive to performance (see paragraph 4794). In this respect, in the above configuration, when such a specific reception period occurs, an acceptance permission sound indicating that the acceptance validity determination is permitted or the acceptance validity determination is permitted is generated. Since it can be output, it is possible to fully recognize which target the player is operating by not displaying the operation target display (for example, the image showing the operation means). Although it is still in a situation where it is impossible to do, it becomes possible to recognize that the player is in a situation where some action is required (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given), and by doing so, The player is expected to enjoy the effect (see paragraph 4795).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as seen from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame as viewed from below with the left frame member omitted, and (b) is an exploded perspective view showing (a) in an exploded manner. is there. FIG. 7A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the front left. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line in FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of the production operation unit in a door frame, (b) is a right side view of the production operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which saw the production operation unit from the back. It is the explanatory view which saw the production operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line in FIG. 34 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line in FIG.34 (b). 34A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line FF in FIG. 34B, and FIG. 34B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and saw it from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the production operation unit for every main member and was seen from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the decoration board unit of the production operation unit and was seen from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in the cross section of the production | operation production unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, showing a part of the operation button cut away to hide a portion to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or button frame of the operation button. It is an explanatory view showing, and (b) is an explanatory view showing a portion which is about to be hidden by the first button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in a sectional view of a production operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the external appearance of the production operation unit by the perspective view seen from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production operation unit from the direction which the center axis of an operation button has extended. .. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the front, (c) is seen from the back of the door frame left side unit. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line in FIG. 47 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the front, (c) is the door frame right side unit seen from the back. FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from back. FIG. 52 is a sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). 51A is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51A, and FIG. 51B is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51A. (A) is a front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is a perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back. Is. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. FIG. 57 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. 56. It is a front view of a game board. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main composition, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the game board excluding the front unit and the back unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board of FIG. 63, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from that of FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for gaming balls or the like that relays electrical connection between a payout control board, which constitutes a main board, a CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of a peripheral control MPU. FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the vicinity of a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and sound control unit. It is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko machine. FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 75. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit. It is a circuit diagram showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a circuit diagram showing a circuit and the like of the payout control unit. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit. FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram illustrating a sequel to FIG. 81. It is a circuit diagram showing a payout motor drive circuit. It is a circuit diagram which shows a CR unit input / output circuit. FIG. 6 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from a main control board and various output signals to an external terminal board. It is a figure which shows the arrangement | sequence of the output terminal of an external terminal board. It is a circuit diagram which shows the liquid crystal module circuit which draws the display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. It is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board. 8 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board of FIG. 89 to the peripheral control board. It is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of main control side power supply turn-on. 92 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control-side power-on process in FIG. 92. It is a flow chart which shows an example of main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part power-on processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part blackout notice signal interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LOCKN signal history creation processing. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of connection failure determination processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of connection restoration processing. 7 is a timing chart illustrating the timing of outputting a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the upper plate side liquid crystal transmitter IC. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about special design and special electric auditors product control processing (Step S114). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting opening passage processing (Step S5322). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting opening passage processing (Step S5234). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing (Step S5238). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal processing (Step S5280). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about big hit judging processing (Step S5305). (A) is a diagram showing a big hit determination table, (B), (C) is a diagram showing a symbol determination table. It is the flowchart which shows the procedure regarding 1st special design stop design setting processing (step S5281). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting processing (Step S5282). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol change processing (Step S5283). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop processing (Step S5284). It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about a normal symbol and a normal electric auditors product control process (step S116). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about gate section passage processing (Step S5402). It is a flow chart which shows the procedure about normal design normal processing (Step S5403). It is the figure which shows the decision table T1 of the production pattern (variation production) which is referred to in the production design fluctuation start processing when it is in the normal game state. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the fixed channel system as a comparison object with respect to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by a fixed channel system. The relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel is shown. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound control by the automatic channel system as this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the sound definition table for implement | achieving the sound control by an automatic channel system. It is a figure showing a relation with a game state, a reproduced sound, and a priority. It is the timing chart which shows one example of the production time chart. It is a figure which shows an example of the work information for an automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. It is a figure which shows an example of a sound definition table. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing notification contents, notification modes, notification times, and conditions (cancellation conditions) at which notification ends, for each type of notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128. (A) is an example of the processing when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. FIG. (B) is an example of a process when one output of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced and the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied FIG. (C) is an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced FIG. (A) is a figure which shows an example about the process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound which belongs to a 2nd notification group is satisfy | filled, while the 1 notification sound which belongs to a 1st notification group is reproduced. Is. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 7C is a diagram showing an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. Is. FIG. 6D is a diagram showing an example of a process when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. Is. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a time chart which shows an example as a mode which notifies the state of a game machine. It is a figure explaining the contents of the notification process under production progress for every notification state of the pachinko machine 1 concerned. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. It is a figure explaining the content about the process regarding volume adjustment. 7 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation status of each channel when the suppressed operation sound output process is performed. It is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a right side view of a game machine provided with a sword effect operation unit. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection table of the production pattern in the production mode which can perform sword cutting production, (A) shows an example of the selection table which selects the presence or absence of sword removal preparation transition production according to the type of variation pattern, (B) ) An example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the unsheathed book production is shown. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation of the sword decoration when the aura member is provided on the sword part (sword blade part) itself, (A) Sword storage state, (B) First sword removal state, (C) Second Shows the sword removal state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a state transition diagram explaining the sword removal operation of the sword decoration body when an aura member is provided in a sheath part, showing (A) sword storage state, (B) first sword removal state, and (C) second sword removal state. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view explaining the operation of the aura member. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device and a movement transition of a sword decoration in a princess reach production. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining the screen transition of the production display device, the state transition of an operation button, and the movement transition of a sword ornament in the reach production including the operation production of the operation button used multilaterally. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining a screen transition of a production display device in a reach production, a state transition of an operation button, and a movement transition of a sword ornament. It is a figure explaining the form of the sword decoration used for a pseudo continuous production. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation production (reach production) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a transition example of reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. When it is determined that either the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production by lottery by the peripheral control board based on the variation production (reach production) of the variation pattern drawn by the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a transition example of reach effect in which the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed. Similar to the above-described first suggestion pattern, when it is determined that the operation button or the sword ornament is enabled during the reach production, the reach production of the pre-operation suggestion production of the second suggestion pattern is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition. Despite the fact that the second suggestion pattern was performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button of the sword decoration is not enabled and the operation button is once enabled, and then the sword decoration is enabled. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion production of a pattern. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 1st production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 2nd production mode about specific operation relation production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure showing the 3rd production mode about specific operation-related production. It is a figure which shows another example of a specific operation relevant effect. It is a figure explaining an example about the production when "specific operation relation production" is set up as the production object of a timer production. It is a time chart explaining an example of production contents for each type of production when a plurality of types (predecessor productions A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as a precursor production. It is the figure which shows those production contents regarding the production contents when the indication production which is not the specific operation connection production is done and the production contents when the indication production as the specific operation connection production is done. It is a figure which shows another example of the effect content when a specific operation related effect is performed as a precursor effect. It is a figure showing an example of an effect in which a button image BTG is displayed in a mode in which a princess character is added (a specific effect mode). It is a figure showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate | occur | produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure showing an example of an effect when an operation error between the 1st operation mode and the 2nd operation mode generate | occur | produces in the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation related effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect at the time of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect when a 1st omen effect is performed. It is a time chart which shows an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is the figure which shows the concrete example of the production where expectation degree is indicated by the automatic production function. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a figure for explaining operation standardization control in the automatic button production state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is a diagram for explaining the stable side automatic effect process in the automatic button effect state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm1 when a new symbol variation starts in the situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart which shows the processing content when the timing tm11 at which a special effect pattern is started arrives in a situation where a specific movable ornament is in an abnormal state. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) comes during the execution of the restoration operation. It is a time chart for explaining a mode when a new restoration operation time (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) comes during the execution of the restoration operation. 9 is a time chart showing an example of processing until the sword ornament 5001 is returned to the original position. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a state transition between a non-game state and a game execution state. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when an expected production in which a princess character is displayed large as a background image is performed during execution of a specific production pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when a help image is displayed in the state where the expected production shown in FIG. 200 is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display when the character image PG is displayed so that a display position may be changed by operation by a player. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the process when generating the production restriction period in the non-gaming state. It is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the effect restriction period is ended early. It is a time chart which shows an example about the processing concerning a special period (period for opening a store). It is a time chart which shows an example about the process at the time of the game being started when it is set to the store opening period (special period). It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1st operation acceptance production. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2nd operation acceptance production. It is a time chart showing an example of special operation reception effect. It is a time chart which shows the mode of channel allocation of the sound data containing acceptance permission sound. It is a time chart which shows the mode of channel allocation of the sound data containing acceptance permission sound. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the low expectation suppression reception production is executed in the automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the production content when the high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows the example about the production content when the high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example about the modification when high expectation suppression reception production is performed in an automatic reception mode. It is a time chart which shows an example of production in which a 1st permissible sound is output in a specific mode, when "non-suppression operation reception production (here non-suppression / non-automatic reception production)" occurs. It is a time chart which shows the example of production when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of production when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of production when a "weak suppression mode" and a "strong suppression mode" occur one by one in the production according to a high expectation change pattern. It is a time chart which shows the example of an effect (inhibition movement reception effect) which appears in "when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target" in the suppression / automatic reception effect. It is the time chart which shows the contents of the production which appear when fluctuation pattern 1 is selected with fluctuation pattern decision. It is a time chart which shows the contents of the effect which appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination. It is the time chart which shows the contents of the production which appear when fluctuation pattern 3 is selected with fluctuation pattern decision. The "inherent reception effect" is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated in the "non-suppression mode". It is a time chart which shows as an example an example of a processing procedure when various display effects are realized using scenario data and blocks. It is the flowchart which shows one example concerning the processing when operation detection is not done before and after the production acceptance period (effective period). It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started in the "m + 1" th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 226. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started in the "m-2" th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 226. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started in the "m-2" th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 226. It is a flow chart which shows an example about processing when operation is started from the "m-3" th frame during the production acceptance period (effective period) shown in Drawing 226. Regarding the effect reception period (effective period) in the case where the timing of performing the “operation (setting) operation of the operation state flag” in the frame is performed after the “determination process for effect reception” It is a flowchart which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the example about the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated moxibustion image from the start to the end of the effective period. It is a figure which shows the example of a display about the integrated moxibustion image from the start to the end of the effective period. It is a figure showing an example about production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing the modification about the production progress when the 1st effective period occurs. It is a figure showing an example about production progress when the 2nd effective period occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure which shows the modification about the production progress when the 2nd effective period arises. It is a figure explaining the modification about the production which suggests the expectation degree concerning an integrated image in steps. It is a figure which shows the example about the integrated image. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a figure which shows the example of production progress in the effective period in which an integrated image is displayed. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 2nd acceptance permission state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 1st acceptance permission state occurs. It is the figure which shows one example concerning the production contents when the 2nd acceptance permitted state occurs. It is the figure which shows one example concerning the production contents when the 1st acceptance permitted state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 4th acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when the 5th acceptance acceptance state occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first reception period (first reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second reception period (second reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third reception period (third reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth reception period (fourth reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth reception period (fifth reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth reception period (sixth reception production) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example of the production contents when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh reception period (seventh reception production) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which a 1st reception period (1st reception production) generate | occur | produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception production) produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which the 2nd reception period (2nd reception production) produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which the 4th reception period (4th reception production) produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which the 4th reception period (4th reception production) produces. It is a modification of the effect regarding the reception period. It is a modification of the effect regarding the reception period. It is a modification of the effect regarding the reception period. It is a modification of the effect regarding the reception period. It is a modification of the effect regarding the reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period A (reception production A) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period B (reception production B) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period C (reception production C) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period D (reception production D) occurs. It is a time chart which shows an example about the production contents when reception period D (reception production D) occurs. 9 is a table showing a setting example relating to the generation conditions of reception periods A to D. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which reception period A (reception production A) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which reception period B (reception production B) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which reception period C (reception production C) occurs. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which reception period D (reception production D) occurs. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the modification of the acceptance period D. It is a figure which shows the example of production in the fluctuation pattern which reception period E (reception production E) occurs. It is the figure which shows the production example within reception period E. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3B acceptance period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1B reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1B reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern which a 2B reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 3B reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 3B reception period produces. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1B acceptance period produces. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern which a 3B reception period produces. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 1C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 2C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a time chart which shows an example about the 3C reception period. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1st C acceptance period produces. It is a figure which shows the production example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1st C acceptance period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 2C reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 3C reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 3C reception period produces. It is a figure which shows the example of production of the fluctuation pattern which a 3C reception period produces. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern which a 1st C acceptance period produces. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern which a 3C reception period produces. It is a figure which shows another example of the fluctuation pattern which a 3C reception period produces.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 10. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine which is an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the back. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the pachinko machine. The door frame, the game board, the body frame, and the outer frame. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled and was seen from the back.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is openably and closably supported and is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 2, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is hit by.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, etc., the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20, which are vertically separated from each other and extend horizontally, and an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 that connect both ends of 20 and extend vertically are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other, and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and the curtain plate member 50. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end side of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 are provided. The main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached so as to be openable and closable by the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 is a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 that penetrates in the front-back direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door-frame base unit 100. A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and is operable by the player to drive a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and a through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The dish unit 320 which is attached to the lower part of the front surface on the lower side, and the player which is attached to the center of the dish unit 320 and which is changed by the game ball being driven into the game area 5a. An effect operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory effect, and an upper side of the plate unit 320, which is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side unit 530, a door frame right side unit 550 attached to the right side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side above the dish unit 320, and a door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 mounted on the upper side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 on the upper side of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that is partially insertable into the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. It is attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame 3 and the door frame. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge members 150 are respectively rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the front view left side surface of the main body frame base 600, and the main body frame base 600. A ball launching device 680 attached to the lower part of the front of the game board 5 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an outer frame 2 and a main body frame attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and a reverse L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the upper side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 as viewed from the front and pays out the game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, a board unit 900 attached to the lower portion of the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and a game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable on the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 and has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends leftward and rightward. A ball-shaped tank 802 that stores game balls supplied from a box-shaped island facility (not shown), and a game ball inside the ball tank 802 that is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802 to the left when viewed from the front. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left side of the payout unit base 801 when viewed from the front, and guides the game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820. A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 on the lower side and is guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on the instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout devices 830 are paid out one by one, and the game balls which are attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 are moved downward. An upper full tank ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges the game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball on the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and a payout unit. Attached to the lower end of the base 801 and guiding the game ball discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper tank ball path unit 850 forward and guiding it from the front end to the through ball passage 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. Guide the game ball discharged from the tank discharge port 850e to the front and guide it from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 and a lower portion for bass sound which is attached to the rear side of the body frame base 600 on the left side of the board unit base 910 when viewed from the front. A speaker unit 920 having a speaker 921, a power supply board box 930 in which a power supply board is housed inside and mounted on the rear side of the board unit base 910 on the right side in front view, and a power supply board box 930 mounted on the rear side of the speaker unit 920. An interface control board box 940 in which an interface control board is housed, a power supply board box 930, and a payout control board 951 which is mounted across the interface control board box 940 and which controls the payout of game balls are housed inside. And a payout control board box 950, There.

  As shown in FIG. 9 and FIG. 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a into which the game balls are driven, and places the game balls emitted from the ball emitting device 680 at the upper part of the game area 5a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 for guiding to, and a flat game panel 1100 attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a. There is.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game balls are stored in the upper plate 321, the game balls are moved with the strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the ball launching device 680. It is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Then, when the game balls hit in the game area 5a are received in the winning openings, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning openings. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out the game balls, the game balls in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the player can enjoy the game.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. 11 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as disassembled and seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame-side upper hinge member in the outer frame as seen from below with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. It is a figure. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the drawing, the outer frame 2 connects the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 that are vertically separated and extends to the left and right, and connects both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 to each other. A left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 extending in the direction. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same front and rear widths. Further, the vertical lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed longer than the horizontal lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. Further, the outer frame 2 is assembled such that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the left and right side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 face the same surface. Has been.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 in a front view, and a lock member 66 attached to a lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 in front view and the left frame member 30 is provided. The outer frame-side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 allow the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 to be openably and closably attached.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 to each other and is mounted to the front side of the lower frame member 20. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are respectively attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, a flat plate-shaped left sliding member 81 which is attached to a position on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 to the left from the left-right center, and a curtain. A flat plate-shaped right sliding member 82 attached to a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. The connecting member 85 is connected. Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 which are attached to the inside (left side surface side) of the right frame member 40 and to which an outer frame hook 703 of the locking unit 700 described later is locked. Is prepared.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (eg, wood, plywood, etc.). The upper frame member 10 is provided with engagement notches 11 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at the center in the front-rear direction at the left and right ends. Inside the engagement notch 11, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85 described later are attached. Further, the upper frame member 10 includes mounting step portions 12 that are recessed from the general surface on the upper surface and the front surface of the left end portion in front view. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material having a predetermined thickness (for example, wood, plywood, etc.). The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. Is formed to be longer than the width in front of and behind. The lower frame member 20 is provided with engagement notches 21 that vertically penetrate and are recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at positions on the left and right ends that are closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction. Inside the engagement notch 21, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  Further, the lower frame member 20 includes front end cutouts 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces of the left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end cutout 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to be the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. In the state where the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the portion between the left and right front end cutouts 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape member such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in mutually symmetrical shapes in a plan view. When assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inward on a side surface that is an outer side in the left-right direction from a position rearward with respect to the center in the front-rear direction to the vicinity of the rear end. The recesses 31 and 41 and the protrusions 32 and 42 that bulge from the opposite side surfaces of the recesses 31 and 41 and have a hollow interior are provided. The strength and rigidity of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced by the protrusions 32 and 42. Further, inside the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, is inserted and attached.

  Further, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on their surfaces. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported on an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily gripped by a worker's finger, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. It is possible to improve the design of the appearance of the machine 1.

[2-4. Curtain board member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape having an open rear side. The curtain plate member 50 has a rearward extending portion 51 extending rearward in the shape of a flat plate near the left end in front view on the upper surface, and a U-shape having a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rearward extending portion 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates vertically, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates vertically with a size allowing a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension portion 51, The standing wall portion 54 that extends upward in a flat plate shape from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and the front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 so that the front surface is upward. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to move rearward as it goes toward.

  The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the front side upper surface of the rear extending part 51 and the rear side extending part 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. The left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 74, which will be described later, of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state of being assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rearward extending portion 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting portion for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. And a part 57. On the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief-like decoration formed on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned by a plurality of ribs in a grid pattern, so that strength and rigidity are enhanced. Further, the curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be housed therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 has a horizontally extending flat plate shape and a rectangular outer fixing portion 61, and a flat plate shape extending forward from a front end of the upper fixing portion 61. Of the front extension portion 62, a bearing groove 63 extending vertically from the right end of the front extension portion 62 toward the center of the front extension portion 62, and penetrating vertically, and a plan view of the upper fixing portion 61. A plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from the end side from the left end to the front end of the front extending portion 62 to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is open. And a flat plate-shaped hanging portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). There is. Further, the front extending portion 62 extends forward of the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with a screw in a state of being inserted from the upper side into the recess 31 of the outer side surface of the left frame member 30.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 to move the body frame 4 by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63. It can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a strip plate-shaped lock main body 66a extending left and right with a predetermined width in the front-rear direction, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a, and then extending diagonally left front, and a mounting hole vertically extending near the rear end of the lock body 66a. 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by the attachment screw 67.

  The rear end of the lock body 66a is attached to the lock member 66 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 63 in the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end is the outer frame side upper hinge member. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with the portion of the hanging portion 65 of the portion 60 that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 63 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is biased by the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space for accommodating a main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operating portion 66b to rotate the lock body 66a in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, the lock body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in plan view, and the bearing groove 63 Can be in the state of being fully threaded. Thereby, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upright from a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 71 and a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 71 that is located rearward of the center in the front-rear direction. A rising flat plate-shaped rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and a horizontal portion 71 that vertically penetrates so that only one game ball can pass through. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape with an upper end narrowed at an upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to a position near the front end of the horizontal portion 71 on the left side. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to contact the center portion of the rising portion 72 in the front-rear direction and extend in an inverted U-shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 has substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 has a horizontal portion 71 that is placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and on the rear extending portion 51. However, it is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) that penetrate the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the projecting portion 32 by a screw (not shown). The outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is configured such that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is inserted into a lower-body-frame-side lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame-side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 so that the outer frame-side lower hinge pin 73 is moved upward. The main body frame 4 can be mounted so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, when the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 is aligned with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance between and is gradually narrowed, rolling is performed to the rear side with a wide interval, so that it can be discharged from the discharge hole 74. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By ejecting the game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 from the discharge hole 74, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from rolling rearward of the body frame 4, and the outer frame side. It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay in the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connection member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A connecting the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B connecting the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C connecting the 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D connecting the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 86, a plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the upper lateral fixing portion 87 of 86. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, in the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, two lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are provided spaced apart in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 while being in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch 21 of the upper frame member 10 and fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. Further, the front lower lateral fixing portions 88 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, which are on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower lateral fixing portions 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are inserted into the protrusions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and screwed from the outer side surface. Are fixed to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively.

  In the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 projects rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower horizontal fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. Further, the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 protruding from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper lateral fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to the inner side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 on the front side of the projecting portions 32 and 42, respectively. Further, the lower left fixing member 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower horizontal fixing member 88 of the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engaging notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces of the lower frame member 20 in the left-right direction. It

[2-9. Outer frame side upper hinge member lock mechanism]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the lock mechanism for the main frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, FIGS. It will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state in which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  In the state where the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66c contacts the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. The lock main body 66a closes a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a V shape, and the tip portion of the lock main body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. A space into which the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 can be inserted is formed in the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63.

  In the support mechanism of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in the present embodiment, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, and the front end of the lock main body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66a is close to the right side hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a and the right side hanging portion 65, and they are in contact with each other. In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end face of the lock body 66a are diagonally displaced and face each other. It is in a state.

  In this normal axial support state, the main body frame upper hinge pin 622, which supports the heavy main body frame 4, is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. Almost no load is applied from 622 to the front end face of the lock body 66a. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, when the operating portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates. There is. Further, in the figure, the arc center of the front end face of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in the direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a dogleg shape, and the abutment is made on the arc-shaped front end surface of the lock main body 66a, the acting force is exerted. F is a component force F1 (the normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a) acting on the contact portion between the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the arcuate front end surface, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the bearing groove 63. When the force is divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact surface with the inner surface of one side, and the direction of the component force F1 faces the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66). The moment that causes the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 to rotate in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not work, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 causes the front end portion of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 and one of the bearing grooves 63. Side Clamped state is maintained between the.

  Therefore, even when the lock member 66 is in the normal axial support state or the action force of the main body frame hinge pin 622 is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation due to creep of the elastic portion 66c to be prevented, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off the bearing groove 63 for a long period of time. Even if an unreasonable force is applied and the front end of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a comes into contact with the drooping portion 65 and further Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extension portion 62.

  Even if the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not arcuate in shape, the front end of the lock member 66 is directed to the outside of the front extension 62 at a position where no rotational moment is generated by the action of the component force F1 described above. By locating the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the shaft fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where a rotation moment for rotating the lock member 66 is generated, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not always loaded. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude to the outside of the front extending portion 62.

  When the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. Insert the hinge pin 622. When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the body frame upper hinge pin 622 comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is resisted against the biasing force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66a that closed the bearing groove 63 retracts to open the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame upper hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is biased by the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member 66 moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 is brought into a state of being housed in the space in the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the front end of the lock main body 66 a, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. It will be held (locked) in this state.

  When removing the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from the inside of the bearing groove 63, the operating portion 66b of the lock member 66 is operated to rotate the lock member 66 so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left, and the elastic portion The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the biasing force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening are in communication with each other, and the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member part]
Prevention of ball biting for preventing the game ball from being caught between the crime prevention mechanism in the outer frame 2 lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment. The mechanism will be described.

  In the assembled state of the outer frame 2, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 in front view. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame-side lower hinge member 70 is attached in a state of being placed on the vicinity of the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extension portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the rear side of the body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the illegal tool contacts the standing wall portion 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the illegal tool can be prevented from being inserted further rearward. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  In addition, since the upper end of the standing wall portion 54 is provided with the return portion 55 extending forward, when the illegal tool that abuts the standing wall portion 54 is bent upward, the return portion 55 causes the tip of the incorrect tool to be bent. Since it can be folded back further forward, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and a fraudulent act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be reliably prevented.

  By the way, when the standing wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is on the outer frame side with the main body frame 4 opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling onto the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game balls on the horizontal portion 71 are not discharged rearward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk that it will be caught between and. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the horizontal hole 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extending portion 51 of the curtain plate member 50 have a discharge hole 74 through which a game ball can pass and a left discharge hole 52. , And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 It is possible to reduce that the game ball is sandwiched between.

  Therefore, by sandwiching the game ball between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, and the main body frame 4 does not close in a normal state and the outer frame 2 It is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being made by using a gap between the main body frame 4 and the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 30. 19 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front right, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the front left, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. It is a figure. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and seen from the back.

  As shown in FIG. 29, FIG. 30, etc., the door frame 3 is attached to a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically, and to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100. Handle unit 300, a dish unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a performance operation unit 400 attached to the center of the dish unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the dish unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and door frame left side The door frame top mounted on the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It is provided with a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 that is a rectangle (quadrangle) whose front view extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and upper and lower ends on the left end side in front view of the reinforcing unit 130 and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable. An upper hinge member 140 on the door frame side and a lower hinge member 150 on the door frame side, a glass unit 190 attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 to close the through hole 111, and a security cover 200 covering the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, A door frame 3 and a body frame 4, and a body frame 4 and an outer frame 2, which are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward, and which can be opened and closed. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 for sending game balls to the ball launching device 680, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110. A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and discharges it to the lower plate 322 is provided.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the player rotates the rotatable handle 302 so that the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 are moved according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  The dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to a lower portion of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward, The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end of the center in the left-right direction. The plate unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 that stores game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball that is arranged below the upper plate 321 and is supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower plate 322 that can be stored, the upper plate ball removal button 327 for drawing the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the lower plate 322, and the balance of the cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine. A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning a cash or a prepaid card from which the amount of the game ball lent from the ball lending machine is returned, and a cash inserted in the ball lending machine. Ball return display unit 330 that displays the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., a production selection left button 331 and a production selection right button 332 that can be operated by the player at the time of presentation, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, can be pressed by the player, and presents effect images to the player. Is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail later, but a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that is arranged in the operation button 410 so that the player can visually recognize the effect image. And a display device 460.

  Although the details of the door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame left side unit 530 is attached to the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through hole 111 (above the dish unit 320). The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 is provided with a left unit decoration lens member (not shown) capable of light emission decoration.

  Although the details of the door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described later, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the front side on the upper side of the dish unit 320 with respect to the through hole 111 in the door frame base unit 100, and the through hole 111 ( The outside right side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes forward more than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can make the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of left and right upper speakers 573, a top middle decoration member 576 protruding forward at the center of the front surface, and a left and right side of the top middle decoration member 576. The decorative top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can decorate the top middle decoration member 576, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 with light emission decoration.

[3-1. Overall structure of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as seen from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so that the left side in front view closes the front surface of the main body frame 4 so that the door frame base unit 100 can be opened and closed (the hinge can be rotated). The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached on the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 on the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the outer right front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33 and the like, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction in a rectangular shape in which the outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side in a front view of the main frame 4 protruding forward from the door frame base 110. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150 rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and a front surface of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 mounted on the left side in the view and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110 at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300, and to the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190, and an open / close cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and project forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a one-shot button operation sensor 312, Ball lending button 328, return button 329, ball lending return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , The upper speaker 573, and the like, and a door body relay board for relaying the connection between the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900 in the body frame 4.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 has a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a substantially rectangular inner peripheral shape in a front view that extends vertically. The upper side and the left and right sides of the through-hole 111 forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is above and below the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is formed in a frame shape as a whole by the through holes 111 penetrating in the front and rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed at a lower right corner of the front surface when viewed from the front, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end side slightly projects forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through hole 111. And a cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and a recessed portion from the rear surface to the front near the right end in front view, and the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 penetrates back and forth in the cylinder mounting portion 113. Of the cylinder lock 211, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 penetrate forward and backward on the left side in a front view, and the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 are moved forward. And a ball feeding opening 115 for facing the above.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates to the left from the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction and at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112, and faces the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The through hole 116 for the lower plate and the front and rear of the door frame base 110 near the left end of the front side of the door frame base 110 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The plate passage opening 117, the glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted, which is recessed from the rear surface toward the front along the inner circumference of the through hole 111, and the left and right upper sides of the door frame base 110. A speaker insertion port 119 that penetrates in the front and rear at a corner and into which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 and 33 and the like. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 that extends along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and extends left and right, and a middle reinforcing member that extends under the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 that extends left and right. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 that is attached along the left side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcement that is attached vertically along the right side in front view on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame hook 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 by screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 by screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing metal plate 134 via a cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are each formed by appropriately bending a metal plate. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 has a notch 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although detailed illustration is omitted, the reinforcing unit 130 has a portion that is bent in the front-rear direction in each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, The strength and rigidity of the parts are enhanced, while preventing unauthorized entry of external tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The door frame side upper hinge member 140 includes a door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 having a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the door frame base 110 and vertically separated from each other, and a pair of the door frame upper hinge shaft brackets 141 protruding. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142, which penetrates the piece 141a and has an upper end inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, and a pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The disk-shaped flange member 143 mounted at a position between the two, and is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the hinge pin 142 on the door frame is installed. And a lock spring 144 that urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat plate-like mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of projecting pieces 141a, and has a shape whose side view is open to the front. It is formed in a letter shape. In the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141, a mounting piece connecting a pair of projecting pieces 141a is mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  A portion (upper end) of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620. Although not shown in the drawings, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in the horizontal direction at a portion projecting below the lower projecting piece 141a. The bent portion abuts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the door frame upper hinge pin 142.

  The flange member 143 is an E ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the hinge pin 142 on the door frame can be inserted, and its upper end abuts on the collar member 143 and its lower end abuts on the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and urges the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward through the flange member 143. ..

  The door frame upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is biased upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 141a by a predetermined amount.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is bent horizontally and is pulled downward against the biasing force of the lock spring 144 by the operator. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved downward as a whole, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be recessed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it out. You can Accordingly, by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620, the front left upper end of the door frame 3 in front view. The hinge can be rotatably supported with respect to the main body frame 4.

  Further, in the door frame side upper hinge member 140, the portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 supported by the pair of projecting pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 is a door frame of the door frame lower hinge member 150 described later. It is supported coaxially with the lower hinge pin 152. Accordingly, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 relative to the main body frame 4 in a good condition.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame lower hinge member 150 includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 that has a flat plate-shaped extending piece 151a that is attached to the door frame base 110 and extends forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A cylindrical door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end portion of the extending piece 151a is provided.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-shaped attachment piece (not shown) extended upward from the rear end of a horizontally extended flat plate-shaped extension piece 151a, and has an overall shape in a side view. Are formed in a substantially L shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has an attachment piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with a screw.

  The lower hinge pin 152 of the door frame is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed downward. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted from above into a door frame hinge hole 644 of a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame lower hinge member 150 allows the door frame 3 to be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported by.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decoration board]
The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32 and the like. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 on the left side of the through-hole 111 in front view. The door frame left side decoration board 160 extends vertically from the height of the door frame base 110 below the speaker insertion opening 119 on the left side in front view to the height near the vertical center of the through opening 111. The frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration extending vertically from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 to approximately the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. And a substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decoration substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration substrate 162 of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 are provided with a plurality of LEDs 161a, 162a capable of irradiating light to the front side, respectively. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decoration substrate 160 is located behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decoration lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be made to emit light.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for detachably attaching the glass unit 190. The glass unit mounting member 170 includes a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes from the base 171 in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. And a projecting portion 172 that is open.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the rear surface of the door frame base 110, below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119, and outside the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  The glass unit mounting member 170 is in a state in which the projecting portion 172 is rotated so as to project upward from the base portion 171, so that the projecting portion 172 is located outside the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in a rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171, with the glass unit 190 inserted in the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the projecting portion 172 becomes glass. When the glass unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a of the unit 190 and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, the glass unit 190 can be mounted on the door frame base 110.

  Since the protrusion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110, the center of gravity of the glass unit mounting member 170 is located inside the protrusion 172. .. From this, in the state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 becomes stable in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, when the projecting portion 172 is in the rotational position where it projects downward from the base 171, the projecting portion 172 restricts the rearward movement of the glass unit 190. Even if vibration or the like is applied to the member 170, the projection 172 does not entirely rotate so as to project upward from the base 171, and the rearward movement restriction of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes upward from the base 171, and the protrusion 172 is attached to the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 further outward, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved backward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction and an outward direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 181 from the rear end of the tubular portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends and a plurality of protrusions that project into the tubular portion 181 and extend over the entire axial length of the tubular portion 181 and that are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 ( In this example, three protrusions 183 are provided, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 181 are provided. ..

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with a screw in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110.

  The inner diameter of the tubular portion 181 is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 of the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the tubular portion 181, and the other two are provided on the lower side of the tubular portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the tubular portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 are aligned with the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301. The rotation position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) with respect to the door frame base 110 can be restricted.

  Since the axis line of the tubular portion 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 182, the handle attaching member 180 can be attached to the inclined handle attaching seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 so that the tubular portion The axis of 181 is inclined so as to extend to the right front, and the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in the same inclined state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The glass unit 190 closes the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 is a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the inside of the glass frame 191 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. And two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space therebetween (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending outward in a flat plate shape from positions below the upper left and right upper corners in a front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 191b. The attachment piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protrusion 172 of the glass unit attachment member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  In this glass unit 190, the locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 is inserted into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above from the rear side of the door frame base 110. , The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the projection 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by bringing it into contact with the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed in the reverse order of the above. As a result, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 190, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 202 protruding rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and separated from each other in the left and right directions. And a pair of locking pieces 203 projecting forward from the main body 201 and capable of being locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 when attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. It is formed so as not to project into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Therefore, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protruding piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear protrusion 202 that protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed along the part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 when assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 202 is not formed in a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the state of being assembled to the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 (the game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) does not come into contact with the rear protrusion 202 of the security cover 200, and within the game area 5a. It does not prevent the player from hitting the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thus, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  In the security cover 200 assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body portion 201 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191), and a portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body portion 201 is provided. The removed rear projecting piece 202 is in a state of being inserted into the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component member 1000 described later. Further, in the security cover 200, the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 is in a state of protruding rearward from the front surface of the front component member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front component member 1000. .. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Open / close cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33 and the like. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to the cylinder attachment portion 113 at a position between the through hole 111 and the handle attachment seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It works to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 has a cylinder-shaped cylinder lock 211 having a keyhole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and a lock unit attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 for rotating the key inserted in the keyhole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to the key cylinder 710 of the 700, and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate the key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the keyhole 211a. If the corresponding key is a clockwise key or a counterclockwise key when viewed from the front. It can be rotated by a predetermined angle in the direction of.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and extends from the rear end to the front at a position facing each other with the central axis interposed therebetween. It has a pair of notches 212a that are notched. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed so that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear side, and the projection of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. By doing so, the rotation of the rotation transmission member 212 (the key inserted in the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape projecting forward in a plan view. More specifically, the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 includes a rectangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 213a extending vertically in a front view and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from both right and left sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a plate shape in a direction away from each other from the rear sides of the pair of side plate portions 213b. The front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 is penetrated by the cylinder lock 211 from the rear at a position substantially in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. In the pair of mounting plate portions 213c of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the mounting plate portion 213c on the left side when viewed from the front is attached to the right end of the middle reinforcing metal plate 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and the mounting plate portion 213c on the right side when viewed from the front side of the reinforcing unit 130. It is attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. As a result, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 connects the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 to the reinforcing unit 130.

  In the state where the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. The front plate portion 213a and the pair of side plate portions 213b of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 are housed in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward while being inserted into 114 and protruding forward of the door frame base 110. ing.

[3-4. Overall configuration of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 to 41 and the like. 34A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 34B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. Further, FIG. 35A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 36 is an explanatory diagram of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 37 is a sectional view taken along the line DD in FIG. 34 (a), and FIG. 38 is a sectional view taken along the line EE in FIG. 34 (b). FIG. 39 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 34 (b), and FIG. 39 (b) is an enlarged view of a portion A in (a). FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view of the performance operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front part of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Is.

  The effect operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and is transparently formed on the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge, and the operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player, and the operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounding the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 arranged rearward of the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415, and a frame. A base unit 430 attached to the rear side of the unit 415 and having operation buttons 410 and a decorative substrate unit 420 attached to the front surface, and a base unit 430 attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation buttons 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image, Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. FIG. 42 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 42 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button disassembled and seen from the rear. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the height of the dish unit 320 in the vertical direction, and is transparent on the center side except the outer peripheral edge. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a spherical surface) so that the outer circumference is circular and the central side is bulged forward, and the front side of the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 that is attached is provided, and a cylindrical button base 413 that is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of a member that does not allow light to easily pass therethrough.

  The entire button lens 411 is formed to have a substantially constant thickness. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape with no unevenness on the front surface side. The button lens 411 extends a predetermined length toward the center side (inside) in a state of being recessed in a W-shaped cross section from the back surface at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412, and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. The one-button decoration portion 411a and the first button decoration portion 411a extend axially toward the center side in a state of being recessed from the back surface in an arcuate cross-section at a position on the outer peripheral side and extend in the circumferential direction within a predetermined angle range. A plurality of (six) second button decoration parts 411b are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 toward the center side when assembled to the operation button 410. It extends longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. The second button decoration portion 411b is formed so as to face the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412, and protrudes forward so that the front surface side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted due to the unevenness of the W-shaped cross section and the arc-shaped cross section formed on the back surface in the portions of the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and is provided with a plurality (six) of frame opening portions 412a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in an arc shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. The six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the six second button decorations 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 has a plated layer having metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b protruding outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a rear main body 413a from the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide boss portions 413c that are arranged rearward along the outer circumference of the columnar shape and are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body portion 413a from the rear side of the flange portion 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that project rearward in a strip shape and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and penetrate the flange portion 413b back and forth outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. And a plurality of (six) base openings 413e formed in the circumferential direction, and a cylindrical shape that extends from the front end of the main body 413a to the front and the front end side is the inner surface of the button lens 411. And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 and the front surface of the flange portion 413b. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively arranged at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction such that two detection pieces 413d are arranged on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the pressing detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413e are provided on each of the left and right sides, three each, and correspond to the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412. At the site of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extending portion 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. An inner diameter of a front end of the inner extending portion 413f that is narrowed inward is substantially equal to an inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is transparently formed, and the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged on the rear side. The display screen of can be viewed from the front. In the operation button 410, the four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431. Is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is prevented from further moving forward by contacting the front side of the outer peripheral edge with the frame unit 415 by the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the biasing force of the operation button spring 438 is restricted. By pressing against the front end, the rear end moves rearward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved rearward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the pressure detection sensor 440.

  Also, the operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 in the transparent button lens 411 to the center side in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made invisible to the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a front end opening of a cylindrical button base 413 closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and an operation button is attached by a button frame 412 attached to an outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear can be visually recognized is formed so as to be narrowed inward from the outer circumference. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  Further, in the state where the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body portion 413a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decorative substrate unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decorative substrate unit 420. It will be in a state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 is changed. It is possible to prevent the base 413 from leaking from the outside to the inside, and at the same time, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button bottom of the base unit 430 can be prevented. It is possible to prevent the light emitted from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from the front side from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Therefore, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent the LED mounted on the lower inner decoration substrate 436 from being light-emitted on portions other than the target area for light-emission decoration, and it is possible to perform light-emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 41 and the like. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 is formed in a shape whose outer shape matches the front end side of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 is a frame-shaped frame main body 416 that has a circular central opening 416a that is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and frame main bodies 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. And a pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 mounted from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 mounted from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. There is.

  The frame main body 416 has a circular central opening 416a which is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates forward and backward, and a central opening 416a which penetrates forward and backward on both left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b that extend in an arc shape along the peripheral edge of and are arranged in the circumferential direction, and a notch 416c that is notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. , Are provided. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same size as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. As a result, the front end side of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 can come into contact with the rear side of the outer periphery of the frame opening 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided on each of the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and three outer peripheral openings 416b are provided, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c also penetrates in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  Further, the frame main body 416 includes an inner cylindrical portion 416d having a substantially cylindrical shape that extends rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the cutout portion 416c is cut out. In the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the inner tubular portion 416d includes the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420. It is located between the first and second LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 38).

  Further, the frame main body 416 is provided with a pair of mounting portions 416e that extend outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and that are mounted to the performance operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In the frame main body 416 (production operation unit 400), the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c are attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320.

  The frame main body 416 has a metal on substantially the entire surface except for a portion having the same width as the cutout 416c on the side opposite to the cutout 416c side (the side where the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A plated layer having a luster is formed.

  The frame side lenses 417 close the outer peripheral openings 416b, which are formed on the left and right of the frame main body 416, three each from the rear side. The frame side lens 417 is formed such that the front surface side is a smooth surface without any unevenness, and the rear surface side is provided with a plurality of unevenness along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 39 and 46). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities, so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially rectangular outer shape so that the frame top lens 418 is fitted into the cutout portion 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The front surface side of the frame top lens 418 is formed smoothly. Further, in the frame top lens 418, a plurality of irregularities extending in a zigzag shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side are provided in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 37 and 46). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  In the frame unit 415, in the state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled, the pair of frame side lenses 417 has the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 of the decoration substrate unit 420. And the frame top lens 418 is located in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the frame top lens 418 allow light emission decoration. ..

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative substrate unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 43 and the like. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative board unit of the production operation unit as disassembled and seen from the front. The decorative substrate unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated. Vibration can be applied to the operation unit 400.

  The decorative board unit 420 includes a C-shaped board base 421 having an open upper side, an operation button left outside decoration board 422 and an operation button right outside decoration board 423 attached to the left and right front surfaces of the board base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424 are provided.

  The substrate base 421 is formed such that the inner peripheral side thereof is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side thereof is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413. Moreover, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted along the inner periphery of the substrate base 421 on the front surface side and an inner periphery of the substrate base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 422a. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along the same. The operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decoration board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421 and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 radially outside the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along the same. The operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 have white front and rear surfaces.

  An eccentric weight 424a is attached to the rotation shaft of the vibration motor 424, and vibration can be generated by rotating the weight 424a.

  In the state where the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the tubular body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are located behind the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, when assembled in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the respective first LEDs 422a, 423a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, and the respective second LEDs 422b, 423b. The inner cylindrical portion 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 38).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 causes only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 to emit light by the light from the respective first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, it is possible to light and decorate only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424 and vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effect of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 44 to 46 and the like. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where the operation button is pressed in the cross sectional view of the effect operation unit in FIG. 37. FIG. 45 (a) is a view of the effect operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut out to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is about to be hidden by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in the cross section of a production | operation operation unit. 46A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the effect operation unit in a perspective view as seen from the front, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the effect operation unit as seen from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. Is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show an effect image to the player according to a game state that changes when a game ball is hit in the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the operation image. It is possible to allow the player to participate in the effect presented to the player by operating the button 410 to entertain.

  The effect operation unit 400 is formed so that the overall height is substantially the same as the height of a portion of the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 below the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110. Moreover, the overall width of the effect operation unit 400 is formed to be slightly larger than 1/3 of the overall width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged in the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110) when viewed from the front.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. When the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320, a gap is formed between the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay substrate cover 442, which is the bottom surface, and the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. Are formed. That is, the effect operation unit 400 is attached only to the upper portion of the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner circumference of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. Is installed as. As a result, in the effect operation unit 400, the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) is an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined so as to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the dish unit 320 (production operation unit 400). Since it is located in front of the center of the game area 5a on the game board 5, the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to its front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). As a result, the operation button 410, the door frame side effect display device 460 and the like in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, respectively, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (a state in which the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to move to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with the rear surface of the frame body 416 near the central opening 416a.

  In the normal state, the production operation unit 400 has a central side (center axis CL side) from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 protruding forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. There is. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in the curved surface shape (partial shape of the substantially spherical surface) of the operation button 410, the portion that protrudes forward from the inner circumference (inner side) of the button frame 412 is The frame unit 415 projects forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 37 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end thereof) is located in the frame unit in the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410. It projects about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis line CL against the biasing force of the operation button spring 438. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the rearward movement is restricted and the rearward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, he or she pushes the button lens 411 which is bulged forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface).

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter as compared with the operation button for performance provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so that the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the central portion is pressed. Is likely to be. More specifically, the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is attached so that its central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis line CL is attached so as to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by an outlined arrow in FIG. 44, A portion of the operation button 410 away from the central axis line CL will be pressed.

  By the way, since the operation button for the effect in the conventional pachinko machine is formed in a flat surface for the player to press, if the operation button is enlarged with the part to be pressed kept flat. , When the part of the operation button that is deviated from the center is pressed, the pressing surface is tilted so that the pressed part retracts first, and the operation button cannot move back straight. There is a possibility that the pressing operation may not be possible.

  On the other hand, in the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment, the portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player has a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) bulging forward. Therefore, when a position away from the center of the operation button 410 is pressed, the force is dispersed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moving straight backward. You can Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. It is possible to fully enjoy the performance to operate.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the vibration motor 424 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the board base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a plate so that the effect operation unit 400 can be hung. Since it is attached to the performance operation unit attachment portion 326a of the unit cover 326, when the vibration motor 424 rotates the weight 424a to generate vibration, vibration is generated at a portion farthest from the attached portion. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is arranged immediately below the position (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 44) that the player can relatively easily press, the player who is pressing the operation button 410 can perform the operation. Strong vibrations can be transmitted to surprise the player and entertain the performance.

  Furthermore, the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326 are formed. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit downward. The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, and the like bending downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a abuts on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the effect operation unit 400 is restricted, and the attachment portion 416e of the frame unit 415 or the effect operation unit attachment of the dish unit cover 326 is attached. It is possible to prevent an unreasonable force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and prevent damage to the performance operation unit 400 and the like. Therefore, when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400, even if the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 etc. will not be damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage, suppress the decline in the interest of the player, and increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to damage. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 that is pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) protruding forward, the button lens 411 is formed in a flat plate shape. Compared with the case, the strength and rigidity are higher, and even when hit hard, the impact can be dispersed to the entire button lens 411, which makes it less likely to be damaged.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, as shown in FIG. 46, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, the frame top lens 418, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 are formed of transparent members, those The decoration by the unevenness such as the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the first button inner decoration portion 432f, and the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the back surface is the front side (player side). ) Can be seen from. In addition, in the portion where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is complicatedly refracted due to the change in the plate thickness, so that it is difficult to visually recognize the rear side through the portion where the uneven decoration is formed. ..

  Since the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner circumference of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 toward the center side, the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. With this, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear part in the outer peripheral part of the part inside the button lens 411. Behind the part where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (rear in the central axis CL direction), the inner peripheral surface of the main body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432. A gap is formed between the outer peripheral surface of 432a and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap. It can be hard to see. As a result, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button interior decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable, and it is possible to arrange the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, in the effect operation unit 400, the outer periphery of the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 is defined by the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412. The unit base 431, the decorative substrate unit 420, and the like, which are on the outer side and on the rear side (back side), are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 45, the part of the cross hatch surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is made invisible to the player. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outer side or the inner side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 is difficult to see and hidden. Therefore, it is possible to improve the appearance of the operation buttons 410, and by extension, the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis line CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in a row in the circumferential direction. Then, the second button inner decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button inner decoration member 432 arranged on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an octagonal shape centered on the central axis CL. Since they are arranged concentrically and are arranged concentrically, the uneven line of the first button decoration portion 411a and the uneven line of the second button inner decoration portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (direction in which the central axis CL extends), so that the first button decoration portion 411a is separated from the first button decoration portion 411a. With the second button decoration portion 432g, a geometric pattern having a three-dimensional feeling with a depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction, when the player's eyes move, the first button decoration portion 411a becomes uneven. Since the degree of overlap between the line and the uneven line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, the moving decoration can be shown to the player and the player can be entertained.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432. Since the pachinko machine 1 can be shown, the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing.

  In addition, the effect operation unit 400, inside the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412), behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button. An upper inner decorative board 435 and an operation button lower inner decorative board 436 are arranged, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface thereof are caused to emit light, whereby the operation button internal decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the inside of the operation button 410 can be illuminated by the operation button left inside decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inside decoration substrate 434, the operation button above inside decoration substrate 435, and the operation button below inside decoration substrate 436. As shown in FIG. 38, the LEDs mounted on the front surface of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis line CL extends, since it is arranged inside the tubular main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, light from them does not leak to the outside of the main body 413a. Therefore, only the inside of the operation button 410 can be favorably illuminated.

  Further, the effect operation unit 400 includes the operation button left outside decoration board 422 of the operation board unit 420 behind the second button decoration portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outside decoration substrate 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. You can As shown in FIG. 38, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the frame unit. It is positioned between the tubular inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame 415, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the body portion 413a or the outside of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be excellently light-emitting decorated.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board are provided behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. The second LED 423b of 423 is arranged, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame body 416. Since the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b is not leaked to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. ..

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the frame top lens decoration board 437 in the base unit 430 is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of frame top lens decoration boards 437 are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration board 437. The frame top lens 418 can be made to emit light by making the LED of the above emit light. From the lower side of the unit base 431 of the unit base 430 where the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 is attached, a flat light shielding wall portion 431c projects forward to the vicinity of the lower rear of the frame top lens 418, Light from the LED of the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be excellently illuminated and decorated.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50. 47A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 47B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 47C is a rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 48 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the rear. 50 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line LL in FIG. 47 (a). The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162 (door frame left side decoration board 160) above the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a vertically extending strip-shaped left unit base 531 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side in front view of the through hole 111, and a left unit base 531. A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface, and a translucent member arranged in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member that is attached to the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member and protrudes forward in a tubular frame shape and extends vertically. The decoration base 534 and the left unit decoration lens member are attached from the front side to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531. The left unit lower decorative base 535, which is shorter than the decorative base 534 and protrudes forward in a frame shape, and the front side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open rear side, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating in the front and rear direction on the front surface. As shown, the plurality of openings 531a have circular holes and vertically extending rectangular holes. The left unit base 531 includes LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160 (the door frame left side upper decoration board 161 and the door frame left side lower decoration board 162) from the plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is located at a substantially vertical center when assembled to the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  Further, the left unit base 531 has a left reflective standing wall portion 538 (see FIGS. 5 and 23) which is erected from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the left reflection standing wall portion 538, an inner side surface that is flat and has a surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. The reflecting surface may be provided not only by providing the inner side surface of the left side reflective wall portion 538 with a reflecting material such as metal or resin, but also by attaching a reflecting seal to the inner side surface. It is possible. As will be described later, the left reflective standing wall portion 538 is formed by the left unit base 531 and serves as a part (left side portion) of the above-described reflective standing wall portion 33.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is vertically divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531 and a square lens having a square shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. And a lens portion 532b. When the door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decoration board 160 are positioned immediately after the centers of the circular lens portion 532a and the rectangular lens portion 532b. Has been formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. With this circular lens portion 532a, it is possible to irradiate the light from the LEDs 161a, 162a arranged rearward to the front in a dot-like manner. By the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 includes a central diffusion reflection portion 532c which is recessed conically rearward at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusion lens portion 532d formed outside the central diffusion reflection portion 532c on the front surface. , An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape in the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases on the outer side of the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusion lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. More specifically, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d, the groove portion is recessed rearward in an arc shape in the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It bulges in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wavy shape. Further, the front diffusion lens portion 532d is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The cross-sectional shape of the front reflection portion 532f when cut along the radial direction is a sawtooth shape in which a mountain portion between the grooves is formed in a triangular shape having a rearward point. The front reflection portion 532f is formed so that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflection portion 532f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately located in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction as boundaries. The radially extending lines that are divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  In the rectangular lens portion 532b assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 are located immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  Light emitted from the LEDs 161a and 162a to the front of the rectangular lens portion 532b is input from the input lens portion 532e into the rectangular lens portion 532b. Since the input lens section 532e bulges backward in a curved surface shape (convex lens shape), the light that spreads forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel forward in parallel and the input light Almost all can be guided to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. Then, the light guided to the central diffuse reflection section 532c is in a direction perpendicular to the axis line extending forward and backward (parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration board 160) due to the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection section 532c. It is reflected so as to be diffused in various directions) and travels inside the rectangular lens portion 532b along the front surface thereof from the center side to the outside. Further, the light reflected by the central diffuse reflection portion 532c travels from the center side to the outside (direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side to the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decoration substrate 160 in the rectangular lens portion 532b reaches the saw-shaped front reflection portion 532f, the light is reflected by the surface of the front reflection portion 532f. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined such that the rear surface thereof moves forward as the distance from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c increases, the thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the front-rear direction becomes thinner as the distance from the center increases. (See FIG. 50). Accordingly, the light that is reflected outward in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c over the entire thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b is sequentially moved forward by the front reflection portion 532f from the center side toward the outside. Can be reflected.

  Then, the light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f passes through the front diffusion lens portion 532d and is emitted forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the rectangular lens portion 532b can be diffused. It is possible to irradiate the front surface (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) substantially uniformly from the front surface of the.

  In the prismatic lens portion 532b, in the front diffusion lens portion 532d and the front reflecting portion 532f, a plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are separated by the dividing lines. Are shifted in the radial direction so that concentric arcuate grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted forward from the front surface of the rectangular lens portion 532b has a concentric circular stripe pattern. It is possible to prevent the light from becoming light, and it is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the front. As a result, the front surface of the polygonal lens portion 532b of the left unit decoration lens member can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  The left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532, and the circular decorative portion formed in the front position of the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. And a multifaceted decorative portion formed on the portion. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends before and after the depression. In the polyhedral decoration, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped parts are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped part. It is formed in the shape as described above. The circular decoration portion and the multifaceted decoration portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decoration portion 561a and the multifaceted decoration portion 561b of the right unit decoration lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. Further, in the left unit decorative lens member, the circular decorative portion is forwarded from the circular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by the light emitted forward from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532. The light radiated to each of them causes a luminous decoration.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangle that extends vertically in a front view, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape that extends in the front-rear direction. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined such that a portion constituting a lower surface of the outer periphery thereof projects downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and the lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U-shape that is open upward when viewed from the front. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the substantially center in the vertical direction at the front end moves backward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decorative base 535 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends vertically over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decorative cover 536 is bent so that an intermediate portion in the up-down direction is recessed rearward, and a lower portion is bent rearward along the front end of the left unit upper decorative base 534, and a left portion is left. The upper part is bent backward so as to follow the front end of the unit lower decoration base 535, and the lower part of the upper dogleg part and the upper end of the lower dogleg part are connected. And a linear portion.

  The upper and lower ends of the left unit decorative cover 536 are attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decorative base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 537 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 537 is formed of a non-translucent member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 51 to 55 and the like. 51A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 51B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit seen from the front, and FIG. 51C is a rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. 52 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. 54 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 51 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a sectional view taken along line NN in FIG. 51 (a), and FIG. 55 (b) is a sectional view taken along line OO in FIG. 51 (a). The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a vertically extending box-shaped right unit base 551 attached to the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through hole 111 in front view, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decoration board 552 attached to the door frame and the front side of the door frame right side decoration board 552 are attached to the left side from the center in the front view of the front surface of the right unit base 551 and extend in the vertical direction and the front-back direction. A transparent plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-shaped right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and decorated, and a right unit left decorative member The transparent unit right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of the 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is a front side of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 and a right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 in a front view and a right side of the front view center and a right unit left diffusing lens in the front surface of the right unit base 551. The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is attached to the member 553 and extends in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and is attached to the right side surface of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is decorated. A sheet-shaped right unit right decoration member 557, and a transparent plate-shaped right unit right cover and 558 attached to the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decoration member 557. There is.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and is shallow in the front and right directions and is open in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction. A box-shaped non-translucent right unit left light-shielding member 559, and a light-transmitting light attached to the left side of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a right unit right light blocking member 560 having a flat plate shape.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right with a polyhedral decoration at the front end. It is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the unit decoration lens member 561, the left and right sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561, and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating in the front-rear direction, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover. And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although not shown, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically pass through the right unit base 551, and is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting to the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangle that is long in the vertical direction when viewed from the front, and extends in the shape of a rectangular tube that is short in the front-rear direction and is closed in the center in the front-rear direction. Has been done. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  Further, the right unit base 551 has a right reflection standing wall portion 568 (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 24) which is erected from the glass plate 192 arranged so as to close the through hole 111 toward the front side. ing. In the right side reflection standing wall portion 568, an inner side surface that is flat and has a surface facing the through hole 111 is provided as a reflection surface capable of reflecting light. In addition, this reflection surface is provided on the inner side surface of the right side reflection standing wall portion 568 itself from a reflecting material such as metal or resin, as well as on the inner side surface of the left side reflection standing wall portion 538. It can also be provided by attaching a seal for use. Then, as will be described later, the right reflection standing wall portion 568 is formed by the right unit base 551 and serves as a part (right side portion) of the reflection standing wall portion 33 described above.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a vertically extending strip plate shape. The door frame right side decoration board 552 is mounted on the front side in the left-right center with a plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side with the right LED 552b mounted on the right side with respect to the left-right center, and on the front side in the left-right center. And a plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 is for causing the right unit left decoration member 554 to emit light through the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. The right LED 552b is for allowing the right unit right decoration member 557 to emit light through the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for making the right unit decoration lens member 561 emit light.

  The front and rear surfaces of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 are formed in white. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is vertically divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative board 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame lower right side decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 553a extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall portion 553b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right side in front view in a short flat plate shape. A cutout portion 553c that is formed in a rectangular shape from the right end side of the rear wall portion 553b in a front view to the left side and is formed in plural at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body portion 553a in a front view. A housing recess 553d that is shallowly recessed so as to accommodate 554, an input lens portion 553e that is provided in a plurality in the up-down direction and that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a main surface portion 553a on the right side in front view. The input lens portion 553e is provided with a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so as to be located at the center in the vertical direction.

  The body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof becomes higher as it goes forward. It is formed in a shape that is inclined so as to move to. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 553a is entirely moved with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move rightward in front view as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 553a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end of the rear wall portion 553b extends to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  The plurality of cutout portions 553c are formed in the vertical direction at predetermined intervals, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. When assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 emits light favorably by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit left decoration member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decoration member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a. Specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 553 is equally divided in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved in a spherical shape. And a part. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body portion 553a.

  A plurality of (six) side reflection parts 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflection part 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves divided in the circumferential direction by a line extending radially around the input lens part 553e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 553e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side-face reflecting portion 553f is formed in a pointed triangular shape such that the mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 553e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 to the front proceeds from the rear surface of the input lens unit 553e into the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the left LED 552a so as to spread it, and the input lens portion 553e in the main body portion 553a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front as it moves forward. The light emitted from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative substrate 552 and entering the main body portion 553a from the input lens portion 553e strikes the flat left surface inside the main body portion 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the angle of incidence with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side surface reflection portion 553f side on the inner surface of the left surface. Becomes

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward in front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Note that light is emitted outward (to the right in front view) from the right surface of the body portion 553a (side surface reflection portion 553f), but the right unit left light shielding member 559 arranged on the right side of the body portion 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is emitted to the left side through the main body portion 553a. .. Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected to the left by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the light reflected from the side surface reflection portion 553f to the right side to the left side of the right unit left light shielding member 559 are left. The light that is reflected toward one side and passed through the main body portion 553a is emitted to the left side, so that the right unit left decoration member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflection portion 553f, the plurality of concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric circular arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric circular groove. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (to the left) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to illuminate the left side with a more uniform light and shade. As a result, the right unit left decoration member 554 housed in the housing recess 553d on the left side of the main body 553a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view left side of the main body 553a (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 553f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decoration member 554, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 553f of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit left decoration member 554 is transparent. This portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusion lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 556a extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction, and a rear wall projecting from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left side in front view in a short flat plate shape. The portion 556b, the rear wall portion 556b are cut out in a rectangular shape from the left end side in the front view to the right side, and a plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A housing recess 556d that is shallowly recessed so as to house the unit right decoration member 557, an input lens portion 556e that protrudes rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and is provided in the vertical direction, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. On the left surface side, a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f are arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is at the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end side of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side is upward as it goes forward. The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a main body portion 553a that is substantially the same in outer shape. Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the main body portion 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward when viewed from the front as it goes from the rear end side to the front side. It is slightly inclined. The front end of the main body portion 556a, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects forward more than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530.

  The rear wall portion 556b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to substantially the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is in contact with the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  The plurality of cutouts 556c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutout portions 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutout portions 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the rectangular opening that penetrates in the front and rear direction is formed by the cutout portion 553c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the cutout portion 556c of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Is formed, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 can be favorably illuminated and decorated by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape thereof is substantially the same as the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e project rearward at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a. Specifically, the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed at approximately the center in the vertical direction when the right diffusion lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle is projected rearward, and is recessed forward from the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion so as to be curved spherically. And a part. These input lens portions 556e are respectively positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration board 552 in a state of being assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Accordingly, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  The side surface reflection portion 556f is provided in a plurality (six) in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflection portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a line that extends radially around the input lens portion 556e. In each of the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves, the surface on the side closer to the input lens portion 556e in each groove is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface on the side far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side surface reflecting portion 556f has a cross-sectional shape formed in a pointed triangular shape such that a mountain portion between the grooves is directed to the center side when cut in the radial direction around the input lens portion 556e. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side surface reflection portion 556f is formed such that the groove portion and the mountain portion are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, the light emitted forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 goes from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. It is incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is curved forward, the curved surface refracts the light from the right LED 552b so as to spread the light, and the input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. It will be spread radially toward the front centering around.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to the line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decoration board 552 so that the entire main body portion 556a moves leftward when viewed from the front as it moves forward, The light emitted from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decoration substrate 552 and incident on the main body portion 556a from the input lens portion 556e strikes the flat right surface inside the main body portion 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted to the outside from the left surface of the main body 556a due to the angle of incidence with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, and should be reflected to the side surface reflection portion 556f side on the inner surface of the right surface. Becomes

  The light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected to the right in a front view by hitting the sawtooth side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Although light is emitted outward (left in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflecting portion 556f) of the main body 556a, the right unit right light shielding member 560 arranged on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Since it is a member, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is illuminated brightly, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is emitted to the right side through the main body 556a. .. Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the light reflected to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f to the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 The light that has been reflected toward one side and passed through the main body 556a is emitted to the right, so that the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side surface reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary to form the concentric arc-shaped grooves. Are arranged alternately in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the right surface of the main body portion 556a to the outside (to the right) is prevented from being light having the light and shade of a concentric stripe pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade to the right. As a result, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right side of the main body 556a can be light-emitted and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side surface reflection formed on the opposite side from the front view right side of the main body 556a (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern made up of a plurality of concentric arcuate grooves of the portion 556f and radially extending lines can be visually recognized. Therefore, when the transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decoration member 557, the pattern of the side surface reflection portion 556f of the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent portion in the right unit right decoration member 557 is transparent. Such a portion can be decorated by the side surface reflection portion 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer's logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo according to the concept of the effect presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. Has been applied. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decoration member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decoration member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. The decorations applied to the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have a shape in a side view that is substantially the same as the shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 in a side view. The right unit left light blocking member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides thereof open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-shaped main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-back direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right side in a front view in a short flat plate shape, and the rear portion. A plurality of cutouts 559c are formed by cutting out a rectangular shape from the right end side of the wall portion 559b to the left in a front view, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. A plurality of flat plate-shaped reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a are provided.

  The main body portion 559a of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 has a shape in a side view in which an upper corner of a vertically extending quadrangle is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and a lower side thereof is upward as it goes forward. The main unit 553a and 556a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 are formed to have substantially the same outer shape.

  The rear wall portion 559b, when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, has its left end extending to the right of the right unit base 551 substantially in the left-right direction. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part of them corresponds to the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552. The plurality of cutouts 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of cutouts 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. Therefore, in the state in which the door frame right side unit 550 is assembled, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552 faces forward through the plurality of notches 559c, and the plurality of middle LEDs 552c satisfactorily emit the right unit decoration lens member 561. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided in three sets with a pair of the reinforcing portions 559d that are separated from each other in the vertical direction at the same height as the left and right widths and are separated from each other in the vertical direction by a predetermined distance. The reinforcing portion 559d of each set is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The strength and rigidity of the entire door frame right side unit 550 are increased by the plurality of reinforcing portions 559d.

  The right unit right light-shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the vertically extending quadrangular front end is notched obliquely in a C-chamfered manner, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed to have an inclined shape, and has substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light blocking member 560 closes the right opening of the right unit left light blocking member 559, which is formed in a shallow box shape, to the right when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 55, when the right unit left light blocking member 559 and the right unit right light blocking member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, each of the main body portion 559a and the right unit right light blocking member 560 is replaced with the right unit. The left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556 are arranged so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-back direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. .. Light radiated forward from the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decoration board 552 through the space formed between the main body portion 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 is the right unit decoration. The rear side of the lens member 561 is irradiated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a non-translucent member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, respectively. The left light 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit left decoration member 554, the right unit right decoration member 557, and the right unit decoration lens member 561 respectively correspond to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and It can be illuminated and decorated only by the middle LED 552c.

  Further, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are arranged at the rear side of each of the divided spaces because the internal space is vertically divided into four by the three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. By the LED 552c in the door frame right side decoration substrate 552, it is possible to prevent light from interfering with each other, so that the portion of the right unit decoration lens member 561 located in front of each space can be prevented. , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it is possible to vertically divide into a plurality of (four) regions and individually light-embellish them.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a formed in a circular shape in a front view and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b extending vertically and formed with a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer circumference of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is recessed and extends shortly before and after. In the multifaceted decorative portion 561b, a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions are vertically arranged on the front surface of a vertically extending rectangular parallelepiped, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons are vertically arranged on both left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in the shape that it was installed.

  More specifically, in the right unit decorative lens member 561, a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-faced decorative portion 561b are divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top of the front part, the multi-faced decoration parts 561b are arranged on the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged at the center in the up-and-down direction. It is formed so that only the portion 561b is arranged.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is illuminated and decorated by the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 arranged rearward.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a tubular frame shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape that conforms to the shapes of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed so as to cover both left and right outer sides near the front ends of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556, and both right and left sides of the right unit decoration lens member 561. The front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly projects forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562 when assembled in the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so as to close the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 arranged on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends vertically short and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The decoration member 564 is formed of a non-translucent member. The three decoration members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (right unit decoration lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, protrudes largely in the plate shape forward of the door frame left side unit 530, and protrudes slightly forward of the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. There is. The door frame right side unit 550 independently includes a right unit left decoration member 554 and a right unit right decoration member 557 provided on both protruding left and right sides, and a right unit decoration lens member 561 provided at the front end. It can be made to emit light and be decorated.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes largely to the front, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the pachinko machine on the right side. It is possible to exert an effect like a partition between the spaces. As a result, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can be made to feel as if he / she is playing in a private room, and the other players around can play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation. You can

  Further, since the door frame right side unit 550 is largely projected forward, in the game hall where the pachinko machines 1 are arranged side by side, even if the pachinko machines 1 are not located in front of the pachinko machines 1, the island equipment The pachinko machine 1 can be visually recognized even from the lateral direction along the line, and the pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall where a large number of pachinko machines are lined up. Therefore, if the right unit left decoration member 554 and the right unit right decoration member 557 on both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are decorated with light emission, even if the book is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1, the book is viewed from a distance. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be highly appealing to the player.

  Furthermore, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a problem such as a ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both left and right sides. By illuminating the members 561 and the like in a peculiar manner, it is possible to immediately notify the attendant of the game hall of the occurrence of the defect and quickly respond to the defect. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be resolved at an early stage, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling annoyed and reducing the interest in the game.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 56 to 59 and the like. 56A is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, FIG. 56B is a perspective view of the door frame top unit seen from the front, and FIG. 56C is a view of the door frame top unit seen from the rear. It is a perspective view. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and seen from the rear. FIG. 59 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line P-P in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front side of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the through hole 111 at the center in the left-right direction, and at the left and right sides of the center base 571. A pair of side bases 572 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, respectively, and extending in the left-right direction, with the center in the left-right direction protruding forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at the front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 having a box-like rear opening, and a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a. Plural (three on each left and right) slips, each extending and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and separated vertically. A unit main body 271 that has a central base 571 and a pair of side bases 572 and that is mounted on the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573 and has a pair of openings 574a that are closed. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Here, although illustration is omitted, each of the pair of side bases 572 (the left side base 572a and the right side base 572b) has an internal space opened only toward the side where the opening window is provided. In the inner space of the above, the outer light emitting portion 34 (the left outer light emitting portion 34a, the right outer light emitting portion 34b) provided to emit light from the outer circumference into the outer circumference of the opening window, and from the outer circumference of the opening window. The outer peripheral light detecting section 35 (the left outer peripheral light detecting section 35a, the right outer peripheral light detecting section 35b) for detecting the light of the outer peripheral light is provided.

  The door frame top unit 570 is mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction and has a translucent top middle decoration member 576 and is mounted on the rear side of the top middle decoration member 576. A door frame top middle decoration board 577 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 are closed, and both left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 are closed. A plurality of transparent plate-shaped light guide members 578 (three in each of the left and right) extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decoration member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top left decorative lens member 579 attached to the left and right sides respectively and covering the front surfaces of a plurality (three) of light guide members 578. The top right decoration lens member 580, the top left decoration lens member 579, and the top right decoration lens member 580 are attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side, respectively. A top middle left decoration member 581 and a top middle right decoration member 582 respectively extending to the vicinity of the center side end part of the.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached inside the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271 respectively, and the LEDs are respectively mounted on the portions of the plurality (three) of light guide members 578 facing the left and right outer ends. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 that are present, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed respectively on the left and right sides of the center of the rear side of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction penetrate therethrough. A pair of substrate bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and a door having a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted on the front surfaces of the pair of substrate bases 585 and behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decoration board 586, door frame top middle right decoration board 587, door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and door frame top middle left decoration board 586 And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is provided on the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay substrate cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit main body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271, and the unit cover so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit main body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangle extending in the left and right direction in a front view. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the center base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573, when assembled to the door frame top unit 570, are obliquely attached such that the front surfaces of the upper speakers 573 move rearward near the center of the door frame top unit 570 in the left-right direction. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone-type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part near the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward as viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed such that the shape of the unit main body 271 in a front view is a rectangular shape that extends left and right, and is cut out in a trapezoidal shape that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has, in plan view, a quadrangle that extends to the left and right, and a portion that is approximately ½ of the entire width (length in the left-right direction) around the center in the left-right direction on the front end side of the quadrangle as the bottom. A trapezoid that protrudes forward and a quadrangle that protrudes forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Therefore, the unit main body 271 has a line connecting the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 to the left and right end portions of the front end of the unit main body 271 on both sides of the front protruding portion at the center in the left and right direction on the front surface. It is located behind (recessed).

  The unit main body 271 is formed with openings 574a penetrating in the front-rear direction at portions outside the left and right ends on the front surface to positions outside the front portion. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits that extend laterally at a predetermined height in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction in a portion that extends obliquely with respect to the frontwardly protruding trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion of the front surface of the unit main body 271 that extends obliquely forward to the left and right to the vicinity of the opening 574a. Further, the plurality of slits 574b are formed on both sides of the unit main body 271 at the center in the left-right direction, and three slits 574b are vertically spaced apart from each other.

  Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c which is cut out in a square shape from the rear end to the front in the center of the upper surface in the left-right direction, and a lower opening 574d which is cut out from the rear end in the left-right direction to the front in the lower surface. , Are provided. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  In addition, the unit main body 271 is provided with a top left decoration portion 574e and a top right decoration portion 574f that extend vertically at both left and right ends. The front surface of the top left decorative portion 574e is formed at a position in which the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that its front surface is located in front of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decoration member 576 is attached to the front end of the portion projecting forward in the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The decoration member 576 in the top has a shape in a front view that is bent so that the central portion of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends from the upper ends of the right and left sides of the variable pentagon to the outer side in the left-right direction. The right side of the pentagon is connected to the lower ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon to form a substantially right-angled triangle. The decoration member 576 in the top is inclined so that the part of the pentagonal shape on the front surface moves backward as it goes downward. The top middle decoration member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has a light-transmitting property.

  The door frame top middle decoration board 577 is arranged such that the front surface thereof is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the pentagonal part of the top middle decoration member 576. Mounted on the side. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the door frame top middle decoration board 577, and the top middle decoration member 576 can be made to emit light by making these LEDs emit light.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the left and right outer sides of the front end of the front portion of the unit main body 271 that protrudes forward. Explaining the side closer to the left and right ends of the unit main body 271 as the end side and the side closer to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 has a straight portion that extends straight left and right from the end side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end side on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. In the light guide member 578, the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and the depth in the front-rear direction is larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arcuate portion 578b. Further, the light guide member 578 is formed such that the height in the vertical direction is constant in the straight portion 578a, and the height in the vertical direction is decreased in the arc portion 578b so as to decrease toward the center side. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is located immediately before the opening 574a of the unit body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit body 271 from the front. There is.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffusive reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a and having a saw-like concavo-convex portion, and a diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, which has a plurality of irregularities. Is equipped with.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, both left and right outer ends face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input unit 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. When the light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 or the door frame top right decoration substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the left and right outer ends, the light is transmitted to the straight portion 578a. While advancing inside, the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a sequentially reflects the light forward from the end portion side, and the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a emits light forward. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is arranged in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion of these in front of the straight portion 578a is decorated with light emission.

  Further, the light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is widely diffused into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is emitted forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. As a result, the portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the arc portion 578b can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration board 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration board 586, or the door frame top right decoration board 584 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587. Light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided to light-emit the entire top left decorative lens member 579 or top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in the front in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are juxtaposed left and right.

  The top left decoration lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decoration portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decoration lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 through the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the center of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that individually accommodate the three light guide members 578 from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape following the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square truncated pyramid are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decoration lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decoration member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decoration portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 through the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decoration lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle left decoration member 581 is attached to the top left decoration lens member 579 so as to fill up the space between the three decoration lens portions 579a in the state where the top middle left decoration member 581 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The decoration lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decoration member 581 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 from the front of the top right decoration lens member 580 between the opening 574a on the right side in the front surface of the unit body 271 and the top middle decoration member 576. The top middle right decoration member 582 is attached so as to fill up between the three decoration lens portions 580a of the top right decoration lens member 580 in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front side near the center is the top right. The decoration lens member 580 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle right decoration member 582 is formed of a non-translucent member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached inside the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 583a can each independently emit light. By the LED 583a of the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the portion of the top left decoration lens member 579 located in front of the opening 574a on the left side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached inside the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end faces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction (see FIG. 59). ). The three LEDs 584a can each independently emit light. By the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, the portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 located in front of the opening 574a on the right side of the unit main body 271 is inserted through the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminous.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The board base 585 has a side wall that is substantially square in a side view and has sides that extend vertically and forward and backward, a rear wall that is a quadrangle in a front view that extends outward in the left-right direction at a right angle from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. A line that connects the upper side of the side wall to the middle is taken as a hypotenuse, and connects the upper side of the side wall and the upper side of the rear wall.The upper wall of the right-angled triangle is connected to the upper side of the side wall and the lower side of the rear wall. And a lower wall of a right-angled triangle, and is formed in a triangular columnar box shape with an opening between upper and lower hypotenuses. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the open portion is closed by the unit main body 271. The board base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 or the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 so that the open portion is closed.

  The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open part from the front in the board base 585 attached to the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle left decoration board 586 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface extends to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the left side of the left-right center of the unit main body 271 are formed in a state where the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 586a are mounted on the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state of being assembled to the door frame top unit 570 so that the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit main body 271. The door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 causes a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top left decoration lens member 579 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the board base 585 so as to close the box-shaped open portion from the front in the board base 585 that is attached to the right rear side from the left-right center of the unit main body 271. Be done. The door frame top middle right decoration board 587 is attached to the front surface of the board base 585, so that the front surface moves to the left and right so that the front surface moves forward toward the center of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. It will be tilted. Thus, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is a surface of a portion where the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction are formed when the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570. Is almost parallel to.

  A plurality of LEDs 587a are mounted on the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 at positions corresponding to the three slits 574b of the unit main body 271. As a result, when the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit body 271. The door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 causes a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light, thereby causing the portion near the top middle decoration member 576 of the top right decoration lens member 580 to emit light through the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light blocking members 588 are attached to the front rear side of the unit body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 and the unit body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed of a non-translucent member and are formed substantially symmetrically with each other. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower portions of the LEDs 586a, 587a of the door frame top middle left decoration board 586 and the door frame top middle right decoration board 587 arranged in a row corresponding to the three slits 574b in the unit body 271. It is partitioned. With this light-shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after each light guide member 578, and the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration are provided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay board 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decoration board 577, a door frame top left decoration board 583, a door frame top right decoration board 584, a door frame top middle left decoration board 586, and a door. The connection between the right decoration board 587 at the top of the frame and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 is provided with a top middle decoration member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are curved so as to be hollowed back. Therefore, it is possible to give the illusion of the player that only the top middle decoration member 576 is largely projected forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580, which decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 arranged in the center, and the left and right top middle decorative members 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to the top left decorative portion 574e and the top right decorative portion 574f formed at both left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal behind the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, respectively. Since the speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are vertically spaced apart from each other, the upper left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 can be heard by the player in a good state, and a good stereo sound can be enjoyed.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes the door frame top left decoration substrate 583, the door frame top right decoration by the plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decoration substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decoration substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decoration lens member 579 and the top right decoration lens member 580. 579 and the entire front surface of the top right decorative lens member 580 can be favorably illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can light and decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effect of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has a through hole 111 penetrating the door frame base 110 in the front and rear of the door frame base unit 100 in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The heights of the dish unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 in the vertical direction are reduced according to the expansion of the through-hole 111, and the widths of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 in the left and right direction. Is small. This allows the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 to be viewed as broadly as possible by the player (front) through the through hole 111 (glass unit 190). The game board 5 has a large game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has an effect operation unit 400 (a second effect operation unit 400A) that has a large hemispherical operation button 410 in the center of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the left-right direction below the through-hole 111. The front surface (the front surface of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the lower halves (the part below the upper plate 321) on the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 is recessed so as to be hollowed back (the plate unit It is formed in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on the left and right sides of the performance operation unit 400 are located rearward rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the performance operation unit 400). ing. As a result, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction appears to protrude significantly forward, and thus the effect operation unit 400 is conspicuously emphasized to the player. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 can be strongly focused.

  In the door frame 3, the effect operation unit 400 arranged on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through hole 111 is tilted so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 is directed obliquely upward and forward. Since the player is attached in a state, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his or her line of sight to direct the effect operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state close to the front, so that the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized intensely, and the sense of expectation for the effect using the operation button 410 can be increased. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image is sufficiently comfortable. Maseru can be.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with the operation button 410 that has a large diameter and is substantially rounded and bulges toward the front with a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the dish unit 320, when operating the operation button 410, it is possible to move the hand by a short distance. Since any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. Also, since the operation button 410 that is large in diameter and bulges forward in a circle, is attached in a tilted state, not only can it be pressed from above like the operation button of a conventional pachinko machine, but also left and right. On the other hand, the operation can be performed satisfactorily even from the front side, and the operation button 410 with good operability can make the effect using the operation button 410 more enjoyable.

  Further, the door frame 3 is mounted with the rendering operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320, and is provided with the vibration motor 424 for generating vibration in the lower portion of the rendering operation unit 400. When the vibration motor 424 is rotated to generate vibrations in accordance with the state, strong vibrations can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper portion of the operation button 410, which makes the player surprised. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (rendering operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is larger than the conventional pachinko machine. Since the lower plate 322 underneath becomes inconspicuous, it is possible to make it easier for a player who is familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that it is clearly different, and to appeal to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having high strength can be provided.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear of the effect operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is open on the left side of the effect operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls stored in the lower plate 322 can be secured. Further, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the effect operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand in the lower plate 322 or puts his finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it is difficult for the fingertip to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make the player less likely to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, and the size of the lower plate opening 326d is increased. It is possible to make a tactile sense that the lower plate 322 has a larger volume than that.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a lower plate for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 and the lower plate ball supply port 323c from which the game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is linearly arranged in the front-rear direction, and is arranged outside the right side of the lower plate opening 326d (right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400) in a front view. That is, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are connected to the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (outer right side of the lower plate opening 326d) of the plate unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower plate cover 340. Since it is arranged on the rear side such as the side, etc., the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a cannot be seen from the player side, and the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed, The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, since the door frame 3 has the lower dish ball removal hole 322a disposed below (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish 322, the lower plate bowl removal hole 322a is opened. Then, the game balls discharged from the upper plate 321 and the like to the lower plate 322 are immediately discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower dollar box or the like as soon as they enter the lower plate 322. At this time, since the player side cannot see the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 and the like through the lower dish 322 to the dollar box is also possible. I can't see. As a result, it is possible to give the player the illusion that the game balls of the upper plate 321 and the game balls etc. paid out from the payout device 830 when the upper plate 321 is full are directly discharged to the dollar box. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, and to restrain the player from degrading the interest by devoting himself / herself to the game (game ball driving operation, effect image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower tray 322a provided with a lower tray ball removal hole 322a at a position on the lower tray 322 which is located on the front left side of the lower tray ball supply port 323c, and the lower tray 322 on the right side of the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is erected. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly changed to the lower dish ball. It can be guided to the hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball hole 322a by being reflected by the wall portion on the right side. As a result, in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied to the lower dish 322 from the lower dish ball supply port 323c are areas on the left side of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a without entering the (lower plate first area A1), the lower plate 322 of the lower plate 322 can be seen without showing the game balls circulating in the lower plate 322 to the player. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is provided with a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit attachment 326a (effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his / her hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his / her hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker opening 326e is not blocked by the player's hand, so the main body frame 4 The sound from the lower speaker 921 of the board unit 900 can be favorably output to the front, and the sound of the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. Further, when the player puts his / her hand on or comes close to the lower plate 322, the player can tactilely feel the vibration due to the deep bass sound from the lower speaker 921, which is output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, It is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes largely forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door is opened. Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect like a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player playing the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. It is possible to give an illusion of being alive, and to let other players around play the game in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation.

  Further, the door frame 3 is a plate-like, and the front end and both the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550, which largely protrudes forward, can be light-embellished, so that the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a line in a game hall. Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, it can notify the presence of the pachinko machine 1 from a distance such as from the lateral direction along the island facility, and has a high appealing power to the player. It can be machine 1.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decoration member 576 that projects forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both left and right sides of the top middle decoration member 576 are A shape that is recessed so as to be hollowed backward (a straight center line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decoration member 576 is not the top middle decoration member of the door frame top unit 570. The front surface on both the left and right sides of 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that it is located rearward. As a result, since only the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 seems to be largely projected forward, the top middle decoration member 576 can be conspicuously emphasized to the player, It is possible to draw a strong attention to the middle decoration member 576.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other in the left and right are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111, a pair of upper parts whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 which extend from the left and right sides of the central top middle decorative member 576 to both ends in the left and right direction in front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be illuminated. As a result, the upper part of the front surface of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated, so that the pair of upper speakers 573 are inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration distinct from that of the conventional pachinko machine is applied. It is possible to make the player recognize at a glance that it is present and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. At the same time, the pair of upper speakers 573 allows the player to enjoy good stereo sound. it can.

  As described above, in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decoration member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 are provided below and above the through hole 111. , Each of them has a large protrusion to the front at the center in the left-right direction, so that it is possible to show the player a uniform decoration on the top and bottom where a virtual line passing through the center of the left-right direction is conspicuous, and a sophisticated feeling of decoration The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent than other pachinko machines and has high appeal.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 projects the front middle decoration member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 arranged vertically at the center in the left-right direction, the middle middle decoration member 576. When the effect operation unit 400 is decorated with light, the player can see a light emitting line extending vertically in the center of the front surface of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center of the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[5. Overall structure of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66 and the like. FIG. 60 is a front view of the game board. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main configuration and seen from the back. 63 is a front view of the game board without the front and back units, FIG. 64 is an exploded perspective view of the game board of FIG. 63 as seen from the front, and FIG. 65 is the game board of FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view disassembled and seen from back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory view showing an enlarged portion of the function display unit from the front in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is hit by the player operating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. Further, the game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and the front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game region 5a and has an outer shape of a substantially square shape in front view, and the rear end of the game region 5a. A partitioning plate-shaped game panel 1100, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear part of the game panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 are driven by driving the game balls into the game area 5a. And a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the contents of the game. On the front surface of the game panel 1100, a plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion that is inside the game area 5a (not shown).

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 visibly attached to the player side in the lower left corner of the front component member 1000, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of 1100, a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a front surface of the game panel 1100. Further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front panel 2000 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery thereof is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110, and the front component member 1000 A frame-shaped panel holder 1120 is attached to the rear side and the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

  The table unit 2000 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are always open so as to accept the game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 at different positions within the gaming area 5a. A first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive a ball, a gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects passage of the game ball, and the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003. A second start opening 2004 that allows the acceptance of game balls according to the result of the ordinary draw, and a first special that is selected by accepting the game balls into the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004. It is provided with a special winning opening 2005 that allows the game balls to be accepted in either case according to the result of the lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004, which are attached to the substantially center of the game area 5a, are provided.

  The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120, and is attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a in the rear wall, which is a box-like shape whose front is open. And a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the board side effect display device 1600.

  Further, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 that is attached upward from the vertical center on the left side in front view at the front end in the back box 3010, and a back unit below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A lower back rear movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached to the front view left side above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box. A rear left movable effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper attached to the front center right side in the left-right direction above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. Movable effect unit 3400 and a movable effect unit 3100 below the lower side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

[5-1. Previous component]
Next, the front component 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 and 65. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has an inner shape that penetrates in a substantially circular shape in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in a circular arc shape from a lower end on the left side to a left side in a front view in a clockwise direction and extends in an arc shape along a circumferential direction in a clockwise direction. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from a lower center in the left-right direction in a front view to an obliquely upper left portion in a front view, and a lower end of the inner rail 1002 on the right side in a front view. The out guide portion 1003 is formed at the lowest position in the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front constituent member 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end in front view of the out guiding portion 1003 to the vicinity of the right side of the front constituent member 1000. From the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper part is curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail. The upper end of 1001 is connected, and the stop part 1006 with which the game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 abuts is provided.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the outer rail 1001. A backflow preventing member that is rotated in a rotating direction to be rotatable only between an open position in which the outer rail 1001 and the outer rail 1001 are opened and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes: the outer side of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, which extends substantially vertically from the lower end, the outer side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each of the parts has a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protrusion 202 protruding rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. As a result, the space between the crime prevention cover 200 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion 202 of the crime prevention cover 200 and the crime prevention recess 1008 of the front component 1000, so that the game is played. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is made to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through the crime prevention cover 200 and the front component member 1000, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 or the crime prevention recess 1008. It is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 protruding rearward from the rear end of the inner rail 1002. By inserting these positioning protrusions 1009 into the inner rail fixing holes 1116 formed in the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, the inner rail 1002 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes a plurality of mounting bosses 1010 protruding rearward from the rear surface. The plurality of mounting bosses 1010 can be positioned between the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) by being inserted into the mounting holes 1128 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100.

  The front component 1000 also includes a notch 1011 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The notch portion 1011 matches the notch portion 1127 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch portions 1011 and 1127 penetrate the lower full tank path. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 of the unit 860 are arranged to face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
Next, the game panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62, 64 and 65, and the like. The game panel 1100 holds a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120, which is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached on the rear surface.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1150), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even if an obstacle nail is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. (8 to 10 mm). In this example, the panel plate 1110 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 is formed with an out recess 1111 that is recessed upward from the lower end at a position that is the lowest position in the game area 5a. Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of openings 1112 penetrating in the front-rear direction and for mounting the front unit 2000.

  In addition, the panel plate 1110 includes a plurality of fitting holes 1113, which are circular holes that are arranged near the outer periphery and penetrate in the front-rear direction, and elongated holes 1114 that are arranged near the outer periphery of the lower left part and penetrate the front-rear direction and extend in the vertical direction. , Are provided. The fitting hole 1113 and the long hole 1114 are arranged outside the game area 5a, and perform positioning with the panel holder 1120. Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with stepped engagement step portions 1115 having recessed front sides at both ends of the upper side and both ends of the lower side, respectively. These engaging step portions 1115 are notched to approximately half the plate thickness of the panel plate 1110, and are arranged outside the game area 5a like the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114, It is for engaging and fixing the panel plate 1110 to the panel holder 1120.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of inner rail fixing holes 1116 at predetermined positions. The inner rail 1002 can be fixed at a predetermined position by fitting and fixing the positioning protrusion 1009 protruding from the rear side of the inner rail 1002 into the inner rail fixing hole 1116.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 holds the panel plate 1110 in a detachable manner and has a holding step portion 1121 that is recessed from the front side toward the rear side, and has a size substantially equal to the game area 5a inside the holding step portion 1121 in the front-rear direction. And a through hole 1122 penetrating therethrough.

  The holding step portion 1121 of the panel holder 1120 has a depth from the front surface that is substantially the same as the thickness of the panel plate 1110, and the front surface of the panel plate 1110 held in the holding step portion 1121 corresponds to the panel holder 1120. It is almost flush with the front. Further, the holding step portion 1121 is formed such that the front inner peripheral surface thereof has a size such that a predetermined amount of clearance is formed with respect to the outer peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110. This clearance allows the expansion and contraction of the panel plate 1110 to be absorbed even if the panel plate 1110 relatively expands or contracts due to temperature changes or changes over time.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is arranged at a position corresponding to the fitting hole 1113 and the elongated hole 1114 formed in the panel plate 1110 held by the holding step portion 1121, and extends from the front surface of the holding step portion 1121 toward the front. A plurality of protruding pins 1123 that extend and can be fitted and inserted into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110 are provided. By fitting and inserting these protruding pins 1123 into the fitting holes 1113 and the long holes 1114 of the panel plate 1110, the panel holder 1120 and the panel plate 1110 can be positioned relative to each other.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with engagement claws 1124 and engagement pieces 1125 that engage with the engagement step portion 1115 at positions corresponding to the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110. More specifically, the engaging claw 1124 is arranged above the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120, corresponds to the upper engaging step 1115 of the panel plate 1110, and extends from the front side of the holding step 1121 to the front. It projects toward and is elastically engaged with the engagement step portion 1115. The engaging claw 1124 is sized so that the tip thereof does not protrude from the front surface of the panel holder 1120.

  The engagement piece 1125 of the panel holder 1120 is arranged below the holding step 1121 of the panel holder 1120 and corresponds to the lower engagement step 1115 of the panel plate 1110. The engagement piece 1125 is formed along the front surface of the panel holder 1120 with a gap having a size such that the engagement step portion 1115 of the panel plate 1110 can be inserted between the engagement piece 1125 and the front surface of the holding step portion 1121. A predetermined amount extends toward the center side). By engaging the engaging claws 1124 and the engaging pieces 1125 with the engaging step portions 1115 of the panel plate 1110, the panel plate 1110 is detachably held with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  In addition, the panel holder 1120 is provided with an out port 1126 penetrating back and forth in the lowest position in the game area 5a. In the panel holder 1120, the lower rear surface of the outlet 1126 has the same width as the outlet 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a notch 1127 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner when viewed from the front. The cutouts 1127 match the cutouts 1011 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the cutouts 1011 and 1127 penetrate the cutouts 1011 and 1127 of the lower full ball path unit 860. The front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full guide path 862 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1128 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1128, the panel holder 1120 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000, and the panel holder 1120 and the front constituent member 1000 can be mounted together. 1120 (game panel 1100) can be positioned.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided with a rectangular insertion hole 1129 penetrating in the front-rear direction above the cutout portion 1127. The rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted into the insertion hole 1129.

  When the game panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the out port 1126 of the panel holder 1120 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding section 1003, and discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-2a. Second embodiment of game panel]
Next, a game panel 1150 of an embodiment different from the above game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. 67 is an exploded perspective view of a game panel having a different form from FIG. 63 as viewed from the front together with a front component member, a substrate holder, and a main control unit. 68 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 67 seen from the rear. This game panel 1150 is formed of a wood plate material such as plywood having a predetermined thickness (for example, 18 mm to 21 mm). This game panel 1150 is formed to have the same thickness as the panel holder 1120 of the above-mentioned game panel 1100.

  The game panel 1150 is formed so that its outer shape is substantially the same as the outer shape of the front component member 1000. The game panel 1150 is provided with an out port 1151 penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the out guiding portion 1003 of the front component member 1000 at a lower portion substantially in the center in the left-right direction in front view. In the game panel 1150, the lower side of the rear surface of the outlet 1151 is recessed forward to the lower end with the same width as the outlet 1151.

  Further, the game panel 1150 penetrates laterally in the front-rear direction to the left side in the front view of the lower end and is opened downward and has a notch 1152 having the same shape as the notch 1011 of the front component member 1000, and a vertical direction above the notch 1152. And a square insertion hole 1153 through which the rear end of the function display unit 1400 is inserted.

  In addition, the game panel 1150 has a plurality of inner rails that penetrate through the positioning protrusions 1009 at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning protrusions 1009 that project rearward from the inner rails 1002 of the front component member 1000. The fixing hole 1154 is provided. Further, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of mounting holes 1155 penetrating in the front-rear direction at positions corresponding to the plurality of mounting bosses 1010 in the front component member 1000. By inserting the mounting bosses 1010 of the front constituent member 1000 into the plurality of mounting holes 1155, the gaming panel 1150 can be mounted on the rear side of the front constituent member 1000 and the gaming panel with the front constituent member 1000. The 1150 can be positioned.

  Further, although not shown, the game panel 1150 is provided with a plurality of openings penetrating the front and back for attaching the front unit 2000, similar to the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 in the above-mentioned game panel 1100. ing.

  The game panel 1150 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, and the out port 1151 is opened to the rear side of the out guide portion 1003 of the front component member 1000. As a result, the game ball flowing down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1151 by the out guiding portion 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1150 through the out port 1151.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with an open upper portion and a front portion, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to decrease toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 can cover the lower portion of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state of being assembled to the game board 5. As a result, it is possible to receive all the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the outlet 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000, and are formed on the bottom surface. It can be discharged downward from the discharged discharge part 1201.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 65 and the like. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents and payout of game balls, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms, and when the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, next, in order to open the main control board box 1320, the sealing mechanism is destroyed. Therefore, a trace of opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, the unauthorized opening / closing of the main control board box 1320 can be found by looking at the traces of the opening / closing, and the deterrence of the unauthorized act on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are provided as members having transparency so that they can be visually confirmed from the outside. There is. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in particular, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 or the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 which is inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since the mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various actions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-5. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 64 to 66 and the like. As shown, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 66). This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 to display a game status (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the function display unit 1400 includes a status indicator 1401 that is a single LED that displays a game status, and four LEDs that display a normal lottery result that is drawn by a game ball passing through the gate portion 2003. A normal symbol display 1402 made up of, a normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings related to the passage of the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and a lottery by receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. The first special symbol display 1403 consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery, and the first special holding consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings for receiving the game ball into the first starting opening 2002. It consists of a number indicator 1404 and eight LEDs that display the result of the second special lottery that is drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. A second special symbol display device 1405, a second special reservation number display device 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the reservation number related to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, and the first special lottery result or the second. It mainly includes a round indicator 1407 including three LEDs for displaying the number of times (the number of rounds) the opening / closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005 is repeated when the special lottery result is "big hit" or the like.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of holdings, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on and off, and turning on and off the provided LEDs.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described with reference to FIG. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. ing. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling an effect image. .

[5-7. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 to 62. The game board side effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. More specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the center of the rear wall of the back box 3010. This game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 with the game board 5 assembled. The game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display a still image or a moving image.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 includes two left fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the left side surface in front view and a right fixing piece 1602 protruding outward from the right side surface in front view. This game board side effect display device 1600 has two fixing grooves that are opened to the left inner peripheral surface in a front view in a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described later with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting the two left fixing pieces 1601 into the back box 3010 from the diagonal rear of the back box 3010, the right fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the right fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020 to lock. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding the mechanism 3020 downward.

[5-8. Table unit]
Next, the table unit 2000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The front unit 2000 of the game board 5 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end penetrates the opening 1112. And the panel plate 1110 projects rearward from the rear surface.

  In the table unit 2000 of the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that are capable of accepting game balls that have been driven into the gaming area 5a and are always open, and a plurality of general winning openings 2001 are within the gaming area 5a. The first starting opening 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball at different positions, the gate portion 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball, and the game ball is the gate The second starting opening 2004 that allows the game balls to be accepted according to the result of the ordinary drawing that is selected by passing through the section 2003, and the lottery by accepting the game balls to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. According to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result, the game ball can be accepted, and a special winning opening 2005 is provided.

  The plurality of general winning openings 2001 are arranged in the lower part of the game area 5a. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction. The gate portion 2003 is arranged substantially right below the hitting portion 1006 in the upper right of the front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged right below the gate unit 2003 to the right in front view. The special winning opening 2005 is arranged between the first starting opening 2002 and the out opening 1126.

  The table unit 2000 is mounted right above the outlet 1126 at the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction, and has a starting opening unit 2100 having a first starting opening 2002 and a special winning opening 2005, and a starting opening unit. The lower side unit 2200 that is attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the front side of 2100 and has a plurality of general winning openings 2001, and the side unit that is attached above the left end of the lower side unit 2200 in front view. An upper 2300 and a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 that is attached to the center of the game area 5a and has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004 are provided.

  The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged directly above the out opening 1126 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. In this starting opening unit 2100, the first starting opening 2002 is open upward with a size capable of accepting only one game ball at a time, and the special winning opening 2005 has a plurality of game balls at a time ( For example, 4 to 6 pieces) are extended to the left and right in a size that can be received, and are formed to be openable and closable according to the game state.

  The side unit lower 2200 extends in an arc shape along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The lower side unit 2200 has a plurality of general winning openings 2001 that can always receive game balls.

  The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front slightly downward from the vertical center at the upper left of the side unit lower 2200 in a front view in the game area 5a. The side unit upper 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the left end of the shelf is close to the inner rail 1002, and the game ball flowing down along the inner rail 1002 is moved to the right (the game area 5a). Can be guided to the left-right center).

  The center accessory 2500 is arranged in the game area 5a above the starting opening unit 2100 and the lower side unit 2200, slightly above the center in front view, and on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. Installed. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and visually recognizes from the front the game board side effect display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and the effect units and the like provided in the back unit 3000 through the frame. be able to. The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 and a second starting opening 2004.

  The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 has the entire circumference excluding the lower side projecting forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball hit in the game area 5a is in the frame. It is not possible to break in.

  The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2520 in which a game ball in the game area 5a is opened so as to enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side in front view, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2520 can be discharged into the frame. It is provided with a warp outlet 2522 that is open, and a stage 2530 that rolls the game ball emitted from the warp outlet 2522 in the left-right direction and then releases it into the game area 5a. The starting opening unit 2100 is arranged immediately below the stage 2530, and when the game ball is discharged downward from the center of the stage 2530, the game ball is received in the first starting opening 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-9. Back unit]
Next, the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100. Further, a game board side effect display device 1600 and a peripheral control unit 1500 are attached to the rear side of the back unit 3000.

  The back unit 3000 includes a back box 3010 attached to the back surface of the panel holder 1120 and having a front opening, and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the back wall, and a back side of the back box 3010 below the opening 3010a. And a box-shaped production drive board box 3042 which is attached so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the left-right direction and accommodates the production drive board.

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a back left middle decoration unit 3050 mounted on the front end of the back box 3010 at an upper side from the vertical center on the left side in front view, and a back unit below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. A rear lower back movable effect unit 3100 attached near the rear wall of the box 3010, a back upper left movable effect unit 3200 attached on the left side in front view above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back box A rear left movable effect unit 3300 mounted on the left side of the opening 3010a in the front view in 3010, and a back upper mounted on the rear box 3010 from the center in the left-right direction to the right end in the front view above the opening 3010a. Movable effect unit 3400 and a movable effect unit 3100 behind the back side below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. A subplantar before moving direction unit 3500 attached to the front, and a.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-shaped opening 3010a that is opened in the front and penetrates the back wall in a square shape, and a flat plate frame-shaped that protrudes rearward at a distance from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, and two fixing grooves 3010c that are recessed outward from the inside of the frame on the left side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b in rear view and into which the left fixing piece 1601 of the game board side effect display device 1600 is inserted. A cutout portion 3010d cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 at the vertical center of the right side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b as viewed from the rear side and to which the lock mechanism 3020 is mounted.

  The opening 3010a is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size such that the game board side effect display device 1600 can be fitted into the frame. In the back box 3010, the lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the rear surface of the notch 3010d on the rear surface so as to be vertically slidable.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat plate-shaped fixing piece portion 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece portion 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 in a state where the front surface is in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. The back box 3010 has bosses and mounting holes for mounting the movable effect units and the like formed at appropriate positions.

  The back unit 3000 appropriately uses the back lower back movable effect unit 3100, the back upper left movable effect unit 3200, the back left movable effect unit 3300, the back middle movable effect unit 3400, and the back lower front movable effect unit 3500. It is possible to perform a light emission effect, a movable effect, a display effect, and the like, and it is possible to entertain the player with various kinds of effects, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's interest in the game.

[6. Game contents]
Next, the game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 60 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3 so that the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are stored. , Is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 on the game board 5, and the game with the game ball is started. The game ball hit to the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. In addition, the driving strength of the game ball can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 302, and can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction, and a maximum of 100 game balls per minute in a row, that is, , You can hit a game ball at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game balls serve as obstacle nails. By abutting, the downflow speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates by abutting the game ball is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that has been driven into the upper part of the center character 2500 enters the left side in front view from the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown), The area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 flows down. Then, when the game ball flowing down the area on the left side of the center role object 2500 enters the warp entrance 2520 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role object 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth from side to side, and is discharged forward. When the game ball is discharged into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2530, it is located immediately above the first starting port 2002, so that it is received in the first starting port 2002 with a high probability. When the game balls are received in the first starting opening 2002, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is discharged into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the starting opening unit 2100. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received in the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the open special winning opening 2005, or the like.

  By the way, when the game ball flowing down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2520, the side unit upper 2300 pulls it toward the center in the left-right direction, and the general winning opening 2001 or the first winning unit of the side unit lower 2200. There is a possibility of being accepted in the starting port 2002 or the like. When the game balls are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. ..

  On the other hand, when the game ball hit in the upper part of the center character 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center character 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, the area where the gate portion 2003 and the second starting port 2004 are provided flows down.

  Then, when the game ball hit to the right passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the result of the ordinary draw is "normal win", the second starting opening 2004 is a predetermined time ( For example, during the period of 0.3 to 10 seconds), it is in the open state, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. When the game balls are received in the second starting opening 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of game balls are paid out from the payout device 830 to the upper plate 321 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. It

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game balls passing through the gate section 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0. 01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as a normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of this ordinary lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the elapse of the variable time.

  Further, if the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 after the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the result of the normal lottery is suggested, the suggestion of the result of the normal lottery cannot be started. The start of suggesting the result is held until the suggestion of the result of the ordinary drawing is completed. Further, the maximum number of holding of the ordinary lottery result is up to four, and if the number is more than that, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is received in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004, an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player on the main control board 1310 (for example, "big hit", " A lottery of the special lottery result for generating "middle hit", "small hit", "probability change hit", "time reduction hit", etc.) is performed. Then, the result of the selected special lottery is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as special variation time). The special lottery results that are drawn by accepting game balls in the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", and " 15R big hit, “probability change (probability change) hit”, “time reduction (time shortening) hit”, “probability change time short hit”, “probability change time short hit”, and the like.

  In the case where the special lottery results (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by receiving the game balls into the first start opening 2002 and the second start opening 2004 are the special lottery results that cause the advantageous gaming state. After the elapse of the special variation time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to receive the game balls in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game balls are received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls from the payout device 830 are received by the main control board 1310 and the payout board. Are dispensed to the upper plate 321. Therefore, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls, a large amount of the game balls can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

  When the special lottery result is "small hit", after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern for closing is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which a game ball can be received, or the special winning opening 2005 Accepting a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls, if any one of the conditions is satisfied, a predetermined opening and closing pattern (one opening and closing pattern is called one round) that makes the game ball unacceptable closed state Repeat the number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if the "2R jackpot" is 2 rounds, the "5R jackpot" is 5 rounds, the "15R jackpot" is 15 rounds, and so on.

  In the case of "big hit", change the probability that special lottery results such as "big hit" will be drawn after the big hit game ("probability change"), or change the display time of the effect image that suggests the special lottery result. (“Short-time winning”) There is a “hit”.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery by the receipt of the game balls to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 to the suggestion of the special lottery result selected by the lottery, the first start port 2002 and the (2) When the game ball is accepted in the starting opening 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is limited to four with respect to the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004, respectively. For more than that, the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening are provided. Even if the game ball is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without being held. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side due to the accumulation of reservations.

  The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the game board side effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest the special lottery result. In the suggestion of the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined time, and then the special lottery result is suggested by a combination of the LEDs that are lit.

  On the other hand, in the game board side effect display device 1600, based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 is indirectly controlled to suggest the special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed in a variable manner by changing each symbol row in a state where three symbol rows each consisting of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction. Each of the symbol rows is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows that are stopped and displayed are a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. If the special lottery result is other than "miss", after three symbols are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result selected by lottery.

  In addition, the time (LED blinking time (fluctuation time)) that suggests the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400, and the time that suggests the special lottery result on the game board side effect display device 1600 (the symbol sequence varies) The time until the confirmation image is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the game board side effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by the lottery. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various ornaments of center accessory 2500, various ornaments of back unit 3000, back lower back movable effect unit 3100, back upper left movable effect unit 3200, back left movable effect. By appropriately using the unit 3300, the back inside movable effect unit 3400, the back below movable effect unit 3500, etc., it is possible to perform a light emission effect, a move effect, a display effect, etc., and a game depending on various effects. It is possible to entertain the player and prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[Relationship between the present embodiment and the present invention]
The door frame 3 in the present embodiment is the door unit of the present invention, the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is the main body unit of the present invention, and the through hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the present invention. , The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 of the present embodiment is the bulging portion of the present invention, and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment. The button lens 411 corresponds to the first decorative body of the present invention, and the first button decorative portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the present embodiment corresponds to the first decorative portion of the present invention.

  Also, the decoration member in the operation button of the base unit in the present embodiment, the main screen 471 and the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A are the second decorative body of the present invention, and The second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432, the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, and the peripheral decoration member 478 respectively correspond to the second decoration portion of the present invention. .

  Further, each LED mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 and the sub-screen decoration board in this embodiment. The LED 477a of 477 is the light emitting body of the present invention, the door frame side effect display device 460 in the present embodiment is the back side decoration means of the present invention, the frame unit 415 in the present embodiment, the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, and The unit bases 451 of the second base unit 450 respectively correspond to the base portion of the present invention.

[8. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
Thus, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect operation unit 400 (or the second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the front surface of the plate unit 320 that bulges forward in the door frame 3. When the button lens 411 of the button 410 is viewed from the outside, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A). Peripheral decoration portion 472a, sub-screen decoration member 476, peripheral decoration member 478, etc.), the first button decoration portion 411a and the door frame side effect display device 460 overlap, etc. Since it is possible to show the player a decoration with a sense of perspective that is full of decorativeness, it is possible to strongly attract the player's interest. It can be a pachinko machine 1 highly appealing capable to differentiate from other pachinko machine.

  Further, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A (screen unit 470)), the door frame side effect display device 460, etc. are arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411 (operation button 410). In addition, since the button lens 411 is supported by the unit base 431 (unit base 451) so that it can be moved by the player's operation, the player operates (presses) the button lens 411 to move it. Then, since the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) come close to or apart from each other, The first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub Due to the change in the distance from the clean decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc., the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478). , Etc. can change the perspective of the decoration that appears to overlap, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration). The decoration (intersection mode) by the members 478, etc.) can be changed by the player himself, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outward, which is the opposite side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A), the button lens 411 becomes the first decoration body. Since a space is formed between the second decoration and the second decoration, the distance from the player to the first button decoration 411a of the button lens 411 and the second button of the operation button interior decoration member 432 are seen. The distance to the inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a of the screen unit 470, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the peripheral decoration member 478, etc.) is greatly different, and the button lens 411 is operated to move it. Even if the player's eyes are not moved, the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the peripheral decoration portion 472a, the sub button Clean decorative member 476, the peripheral edge decorative member 478, etc.) crossing embodiment (degree of overlap with) for changes, it is possible to show a movement decorated player can strongly attract the attention of the player.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the transparent button lens 411 is provided with the first button decoration portion 411a having a radial decoration toward the center, the center side of the button lens 411 where the first button decoration portion 411a is not provided. Through, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be favorably visually confirmed through the radial direction of the first button decoration portion 411a. The decoration of the player can direct the player's line of sight to the center of the button lens 411, and through the center of the transparent button lens 411, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) and the door frame. The player's interest can be strongly directed to the side effect display device 460.

  Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 is provided with the second button inner decoration portion 432g having a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, when viewed from the outside, the button lens 411 is formed. The decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a and the decoration of the second button decoration portion 432g of the operation button decoration member 432 intersect with each other, and the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 432g. It is possible to surely bring out the perspective of decoration by means of, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player by making the decoration by the first button decoration part 411a and the second button interior decoration part 432g stand out. it can.

  Further, since the decoration of the second button interior decoration portion 432g of the operation button interior decoration member 432 is provided with a plurality of concentric polygonal decorations centered on the center, the second button interior decoration portion 432g of By the decoration, the player's line of sight or interest can be directed to the door frame side effect display device 460 seen in the center of the operation button decoration member 432, and the decoration (effect image) of the door frame side effect display device can be enjoyed. it can.

  Further, the LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 (or the sub-screen decoration board 477). When the LED 477a) is made to emit light, the decoration member 432 (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) in the operation button can be made to emit light by the light, and further, the button lens 411 can also be made to emit light. In addition to the decoration of the button decoration portion 411a and the second button interior decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476), the player can be entertained by light emitting decoration. At this time, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inside by the second button inner decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476). Since the light from each LED (or LED 477a) of the decorative substrate 436 can be diffused, the operation button left inner decoration substrate 433, the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, and the operation button on the second button inner decoration portion 432g. The interior decoration substrate 435 and the operation button lower interior decoration substrate 436 are illuminated and decorated by direct light from each LED (or LED 477a), while the first button decoration portion 411a is used for the second button interior decoration. The portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) emits light by the indirect light diffused and decorated. Accordingly, the second button interior decoration portion 432g (sub-screen decoration member 476) is strongly illuminated while the first button decoration portion 411a is weakly illuminated, so that the operation button left interior decoration substrate 433, Each LED (or LED 477a) of the operation button right inner decoration substrate 434, the operation button upper inner decoration substrate 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration substrate 436 is illuminated from the outside with the first button decoration portion 411a. Looking at the decoration portion 432g (or the sub-screen decoration member 476) in the two-button, it is possible to show the decoration that emphasizes the perspective to the player, and the appealing power that strongly attracts the interest of the player. The pachinko machine 1 having a high price can be obtained.

  Further, since the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device 460A) is arranged in the moving direction of the button lens 411, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door). It is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 in a portion outside the outer periphery of the frame side second effect display device 460A), and the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (or the door frame) It is possible to widen the side second effect display device 460A) to the outside and make the size as large as possible, and the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (or the door frame side second effect display device) can be enlarged. 460A) can be highlighted. Further, as described above, since it is not necessary to secure a space for moving the button lens 411 outside, by arranging the frame unit 415 at a portion outside the button lens 411, the entire pachinko machine 1 can be operated. The pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced in decorativeness, has a good appearance, and has a high appealing power that can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Further, since the center of the button lens 411 is bulged outwardly, when the player hits the button lens 411 to impact on a part of the surface, the button lens 411 has a flat shape. Compared to the case, since the applied impact force is easily dispersed in the entire button lens 411, it is possible to make the button lens 411 hard to break (hard to break). Therefore, if the button lens 411 is damaged during the game, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted, causing some players to feel annoyed and less entertaining, and to damage the button lens 411. Since it becomes difficult, it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged in the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the front through the through hole 111. The unit base 431 (second base unit 450) of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 that bulges forward on the side has an outer diameter of 10 cm. An operation button 410 that is movable (advance and retreat) when operated by a player in a circular shape of approximately 15 cm that is within a range of -30 cm, and an operation button interior decoration that is visible from the front through a transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410. The member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the operation button 410 are arranged in the frame. Since the frame unit 415 having a frame shape is attached, the production operation unit 400 (the second operation operation unit 400 having the operation button 410 as large as possible at the position where the storage tray of the game ball stands out in the conventional pachinko machine. Since the production operation unit 400A) can be seen, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. The frame unit 415 is provided with a translucent frame side lens 417, and the translucent second button decoration is provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) so as to be adjacent to the frame side lens 417. The operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423, which are provided with the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration section 411b and are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450). The frame side lens 417 and the second button are provided with the first LEDs 422a and 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b emit light and the second LEDs 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 emit light. Of the frame main body 416 that partitions the space from the decorative portion 411b Since the cylindrical portion 416d, the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 that partition the second button decoration portion 411b and the center side of the button lens 411 are provided, the inner cylindrical portion 416d and the main body portion 413d are provided. The light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the center side of the frame side lens 417 and the button lens 411, and the light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b causes the second button decoration portion 411b to be illuminated by the 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. It is possible to prevent the light from illuminating, and the adjacent frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be independently illuminated and decorated. Therefore, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b can be clearly illuminated and decorated, and a good-looking luminous effect can be performed. Further, the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b that are adjacent to each other are appropriately combined with lights, lights, blinks, brightness, colors, and the like to perform light emission effects in various patterns. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired and to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game.

  Further, the first LED 422a, 423a for making the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 emit light and the second LED 422b, 423b for making the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 emit light are combined into one operation button left outside decoration. Since the board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are provided and the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the second button decoration portion is provided. Compared with the case where the substrate is provided for 411b (operation button 410), the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be kept away from the second button decoration portion 411b as much as possible, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a can be sufficiently supplied. It is possible to irradiate the second button decoration part 411b in a diffused state. . Therefore, since the second button decoration portion 411b can be uniformly light-emitted, it is possible to improve the appearance of the second button decoration portion 411b and the light emission decoration of the frame side lens 417, and attract the player's attention. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the operation button left outside decoration board 422 and the operation button right outside decoration board 423 are attached to the unit base 431 (second base unit 450), the operation button left outside decoration board 422 is moved as the operation button 410 moves back and forth. Also, the wiring connected to the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423 is not bent or extended, and the disconnection of the wiring due to fatigue can be eliminated. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 (second button decoration portion 411b) is moved, the wiring is not broken, so that the operation button 410 is moved (operated) and the frame side lens 417 and the second button decoration portion 411b are moved. It is possible to entertain the player with the light-emitting decoration without any problem, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, since the second button decoration portion 411b is provided on the outer edge of the transparent button lens 411 of the operation button 410, the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are passed through the transparent button lens 411. When (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is viewed, the outer edge of the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is set to the second button decoration portion 411b. Are decorated, and the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved. Then, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b are appropriately made to emit light, so that the operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be seen transparent. As described above, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 that decorate the outer edge of the button lens 411 can be luminescently decorated in various patterns. The door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be strongly attracted, and the light emission effect and the operation of the operation button 410, and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second It is possible to entertain an effect image or the like by the effect display device 460A) and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the player can operate the button lens 411 (operation button 410) having the second button decoration portion 411b on the outer edge, the operation button 410 can be operated by the player during execution of the player participation type effect. By performing the operation, it is possible to entertain the player with the operation of the operation button 410 (player participation type effect), and it is possible to prevent the player from having less interest in the game. Then, when the player participation type effect is executed, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are illuminated and decorated to attract the player's interest to the operation button 410. Therefore, the player can be prompted to operate the operation button 410, and the player can be entertained in the player participation type production and entertained.

  Further, since only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 is provided with the non-translucent main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f capable of emitting light by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the second portion of the operation button 410 The portion closer to the center than the button decoration portion 411b is not illuminated (illuminated) by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the operation button 410 (button lens 411) is arranged rearward because the center side becomes brighter. It is possible to prevent the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) from being hard to see from the front. Therefore, the second button decoration portion 411b can be light-emitted in a good state, and the rear operation button inner decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect) can be provided through the transparent button lens 411. The display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the inner cylindrical portion 416d extends from the rear side of the frame unit 415 including the frame side lens 417, the second button decoration of the frame side lens 417 and the operation button 410 is provided on the rear side of the frame unit 415. The inner tubular portion 416d can be completely partitioned from the portion 411b. On the other hand, at the end portions (rear end portions) of the inner tubular portion 416d on the side closer to the operation button left outer decoration substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decoration substrate 423, light from the first LEDs 422a, 423a and the second LEDs 422b, 423b is emitted. Since the rear end of the inner tubular portion 416d with respect to the diffusion range is located closer to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer Even if a gap is formed between the decoration substrate 423 and the front surface, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a illuminates the frame side lens 417, and the light from the second LED 422b 423b illuminates the second button decoration portion 411b. There is nothing to do. Therefore, it is possible to surely block light by the inner tubular portion 416d, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that surely exhibits the above-described effects.

  Further, since the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f of the button base 413 are configured to extend from the rear side of the operation button 410 (button lens 411), on the rear side of the operation button 410, the second button decoration portion 411b. It is possible to completely partition the space between and the center side of the button lens 411 by the main body portion 413a and the inner extending portion 413f. On the other hand, in the end portion (rear end portion) on the side close to the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 in the main body portion 413a, the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are Since the light also extends rearward, the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not dive at the rear end of the main body 413a, and the light can be completely blocked from entering the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410. You can Therefore, the second LED decoration portion 411b can be illuminated and decorated in a good state by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, and the rear operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (through the transparent button lens 411). The door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized in a good state, and the player can be fully entertained with decorations, light emission effects, and the like, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the second button decoration is provided in front of a portion outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) arranged behind the operation button 410 (button lens 411). Since the portion 411b is located, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second member) is inserted through the gap between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A). The member outside the effect display device 460A and the rear side (back side) can be made invisible by the second button decoration portion 411b, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from being deteriorated. In addition, at this time, when the second button decoration portion 411b is illuminated and decorated by the first LEDs 422a and 423a, the operation button inner decoration member 432 (the door frame side second effect) with respect to the brightness of the second button decoration portion 411b. Since the outer side and the rear side of the display device 460A) become relatively dark, it is possible to make the members on the outer side and the rear side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) less visible. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the frame unit 415, the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), etc. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, since the outer peripheral shape of the operation button 410 is circular, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer edge of the operation button 410 (button lens 411) and the frame adjacent to the second button decoration portion 411b. The side lens 417 has a form extending in an arc shape. Therefore, by appropriately causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light, a light emission effect in which light gurgles around the outer edge of the operation button 410, or light emission in which light spreads from the inside to the outside of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to show the player the effect and the light emitting effect in which the light is converged from the outer side to the inner side of the operation button 410, it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the various light emitting effects, and the player is entertained. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the stored game balls are driven into the game area 5a in the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 in the door frame 3 and the upper plate 321 used for the game is displayed. Along with the installation, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is detachably attached to the front side and the lower side of the upper plate 321, and the installation space of a predetermined space is provided behind the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The remaining space of the mounting space 326j is formed, and a part of the lower plate body 325 corresponding to the lower plate first area A1 is arranged on the left side of the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. A portion corresponding to the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate main body 325 is extended therein so that the lower plate 322 capable of storing game balls is attached. Therefore, when viewed from the front, the lower plate 322 looks small, the lower plate 322 can be made inconspicuous, and the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) can be made relatively easy to stand out. . Therefore, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen at a position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side in the conventional pachinko machine. However, it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal that can make the player recognize that it is different from the conventional pachinko machine at a glance and can attract the player's attention strongly. it can.

  Further, in the lower plate second region A2 portion of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from the outer periphery extends upward, and the mounting space 326j extends to the remaining space side. Since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls are provided, it is possible to prevent the game balls in the lower plate 322 from contacting the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). The game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 come into contact with or press the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Can be prevented. Therefore, the game ball does not contact the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is not damaged by the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being interrupted by the damage of the performance operation unit 400 (second performance operation unit 400A), and to prevent the player's interest from decreasing, and the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

  Further, in the lower plate main body 325 of the lower plate 322, a lower plate cover 340, 340A for restricting the movement of the game balls to the remaining space side of the main body standing wall portion 325b and the mounting space 326j in the lower plate second area A2 portion. Since it is provided with, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate body 325 into the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable or uncomfortable by the game ball entering the remaining space of the mounting space 326j. Can be suppressed.

  Moreover, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second region A2 of the lower plate body 325 of the lower plate 322, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 bounce in the lower plate 322. Even if it jumps up, it is possible to reliably prevent the mounting space 326j from entering the remaining space side, and it is possible to reliably obtain the above-described operational effects. Further, since the lower plate cover 340, 340A covers the lower plate second area A2 of the lower plate body 325, the player can operate the lower plate first area A1 side of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate opening portion). When the user puts his / her hand into the lower plate second area A2 from 326d), the lower plate covers 340, 340A can prevent the fingertips and the like from entering the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. It is possible to prevent the player from being injured by touching the lower surface of the upper plate 321 or the rear side of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), etc., and let the player play in a safe state. You can

  Furthermore, since there is a gap between the lower plate covers 340 and 340A and the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), impact and pressure due to contact of the game balls with the lower plate covers 340 and 340A, etc. Is not transmitted from the lower plate covers 340 and 340A to the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the damage of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is ensured. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is provided in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2 of the lower dish body 325 of the lower dish 322, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. In the state, the game ball discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 323c can be directly inserted into the lower plate ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), and the game ball is the main body of the lower plate body 325. It is possible to make it difficult to reach the front end side of the standing wall portion 325b. Even if the game ball jumps over the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, since the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided as described above, the game ball is the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since it is possible to prevent contact with the rear side, it is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged, reduce the interruption of the game, and reduce the interest of the player in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Further, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower tray body 325 near the front end of the lower tray 322 is higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325 is inclined. As it climbs the bottom surface, the moving speed of the game ball can be reduced. Therefore, since the speed of the game ball that abuts on the lower plate cover 340, 340A can be slowed down, the lower plate cover 340, 340A reliably restricts the game ball from moving to the remaining space side of the mounting space 326j. At the same time, it is possible to reduce the impact when the game ball comes into contact with the lower plate covers 340, 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b, and to prevent them from being damaged.

  Further, since at least the lower tray covers 340, 340A are separate members, when the lower tray covers 340, 340A are damaged, they can be easily repaired by simply replacing the lower tray covers 340, 340A. It is possible to reduce an increase in the load on the side of the game hall where 1 is installed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the center in the left-right direction of the front surface swells to the frontmost below the game area 5a of the game board 5 where a game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. The dish unit cover 326 of the ejected dish unit 320 is provided, and the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A are detachably attached to the most bulged portion of the dish unit cover 326, and the dish 321 is attached to the dish unit cover 326. And a lower plate 322, a storage plate capable of storing a game ball is provided, and the storage plate (upper plate 321 and lower plate 322) is located outside the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in a front view. The lower plate first area A1 and the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since it has the lower plate second area A2 located at, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) can be conspicuous and the storage plate (upper plate 321 can be conspicuous when viewed from the front. Also, the lower plate 322) can be made small to make it inconspicuous. Therefore, since the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) that stands out can be seen in the parts where the upper plate and the lower plate were visible in the conventional pachinko machine, the game machine different from the conventional pachinko machine to the player. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power that can be recognized at a glance and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Further, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the portion of the surface of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open is located. Although smaller, the first of the lower plate main body 325 having the lower plate second area A2 located in the rear space of the mounting space 326j that is behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) in front view. Since the additional part 325B, the second additional part 325C, and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are provided, it is possible to store the game balls in a range invisible from the front side of the lower plate 322 (lower plate second region A2). it can. Therefore, it is possible to secure a sufficient storage amount of the game balls contrary to the appearance from the front, so that the player can concentrate on the game without worrying about the remaining amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322. Therefore, it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the lower tray main body 325 and the main body portion 325A having the lower tray first area A1 are provided with the lower tray covers 340 and 340A having the lower tray second area A2, the first extension unit 325B, and the second extension. Since the lower plate 322 is configured by attaching (combining) the parts 325C, a plurality of lower plate covers 340, 340A having different sizes, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C are prepared in advance. By installing the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension section 325B, and the second extension section 325C of a size corresponding to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size of the mounting space 326j in the dish unit cover 326, The volume of the dish 322 can be optimized. Further, as described above, by rearranging (replacement) the lower tray covers 340, 340A, the first extension part 325B, and the second extension part 325C, it is possible to correspond to the size of the rear space of the mounting space 326j. Since the space of the rear space depends on the amount of rearward projection of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), various effect operation units 400 (second The lower plate 322 can be adapted to the effect operation unit 400A), and the versatility of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b that rises from the outer peripheral end of the bottom wall portion 325a, the lower plate 322 becomes a container shape that is recessed downward, and a game ball. Can be reliably stored. Further, since the lower tray covers 340, 340A have the cover standing wall portions 340a rising from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325, the lower tray covers 340, 340A of various shapes are prepared in advance. In addition, by combining (attaching) the lower tray covers 340, 340A having shapes according to the concept of the pachinko machine 1 and the size (shape) of the rear space of the attachment space 326j, various forms can be accommodated. It is possible to obtain the same effect as the above.

  In the lower tray 322 composed of the lower tray body 325 and the lower tray covers 340 and 340A, the lower tray covers 340 and 340A are combined (attached) to the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower tray body 325. Therefore, since the portion on the lower plate 322 on which the game balls are placed becomes the lower plate body 325, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A are placed on the portion where a larger amount of the game balls are loaded by the storage. No boundary (seam, division line PL) is located. Therefore, since the load of the stored game balls is received only by the lower plate body 325, a force that separates the lower plate covers 340 and 340A from the lower plate body 325 even if a large number of game balls are stored. There is no action, and it is possible to prevent the lower tray covers 340 and 340A from coming off from the lower tray body 325.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the upper plate capable of storing the game balls below and in front of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which the game is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like. 321 and the lower plate 322 are provided, and the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322 are provided by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) arranged at the center in the left-right direction. Since more than half of the lower plate 322 including and is difficult to be seen from the front (player) (makes it difficult to see), the pachinko machine 1 can have a clean appearance and a good appearance, which is of interest to the player. The pachinko machine 1 having a high appealing power capable of strongly attracting In addition, since it is difficult to visually recognize the game ball heading from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), it is possible for the player to play a game in the lower dish 322. It is possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being noticed and prevent the player from being distracted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A), the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish on the bottom surface of the lower dish 322 for guiding the game ball from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since it is difficult to visually recognize the part between the ball removing hole 322a, the game ball guided by the guiding means such as the ball guiding part 322c and the buffer part 322d, the lower plate ball removing hole 322a is left open. The game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 is guided by the guiding means and smoothly (immediately) discharged from the lower plate ball extracting hole 322a to the lower side. It is possible to make the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself / herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize more than half of the lower plate 322 including the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a from the front, it is probable. In addition, the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, and the like are located behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). That is, since more than half of the lower plate 322 is made to wrap around behind the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A), the actual lower plate is larger than the size of the lower plate 322 seen from the front. Since the size (capacity) of 322 is large, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 as compared with the appearance.

  Further, in a state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is open, the game balls discharged from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. Since it can be smoothly guided to the lower tray ball outlet 322a and discharged to the lower portion (dollar box) of the lower tray 322 by a portion between the lower tray 322a and the guide means such as the ball guide portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d. It is possible to prevent the game balls from circulating around the lower plate 322, and it is possible to reliably make the game balls circulating inside the lower plate 322 difficult to visually recognize from the front (player). Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the flow of the game balls in the lower plate 322, to prevent the player from being distracted, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Furthermore, if the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is left open, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower plate 322 are immediately noticed to the player by the ball guiding section 322c and the like. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, it gives the player the illusion that the game balls are discharged below the lower plate 322 (dollar box) without passing through the lower plate 322. You can As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel the annoyance that the game ball passes through the lower plate 322, and it is possible to prevent the player from devoting himself / herself to the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) makes it difficult to visually recognize from the front more than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in the plan view of the lower plate 322, the lower plate that can be seen from the front. The size of the actual lower plate 322 is more than twice as large as the size of the plate 322. Therefore, as with the lower plate of the conventional pachinko machine, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame 3 bulging forward in the front view lower side of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in which a game such as a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001 or the like is performed. Production operation unit attachment for attaching a large-scale production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having the same height as the overall height of the dish unit cover 326 in the center of the front side of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 of FIG. The plate front lower decorative portion 326c, which is provided with the portion 326a and is below the substantially center in the vertical direction on both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326, is recessed so as to be recessed rearward. Because of the shape, the effect operation unit 400 attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a (second effect operation unit 400A But it can be able to show as to protrude greatly forward to stand out staging operation unit 400 (second staging operation unit 400A). Therefore, in the conventional pachinko machine, the large production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be seen in an emphasized state at the position where the upper plate and the lower plate were seen side by side, so that the player can see it. On the other hand, at a glance, it can be recognized that the pachinko machine is different from the conventional pachinko machine, and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained. Then, the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward from the plate front lower decorative portion 326c which is recessed rearward on both the left and right outer sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326. Since a part of the production operation unit 400 (the second production operation unit 400A) is made to wrap around behind, it is possible to sufficiently secure the storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322 (volume of the lower plate 322). It is not necessary to play the game while being aware that the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls, the player can concentrate on the game, and it is possible to entertain the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, since a part of the lower plate 322 wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when the player puts his / her hand in the lower plate 322 from the front, the fingertips are in the lower plate. It is possible to make it difficult to touch the rear wall of the plate 322 (front surface of the plate unit base 323), the lower plate cover 340, and the like. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the storage amount of the game balls is sufficiently secured even by tactile sense, and in the state where the game balls are stored in the lower plate 322, the inside of the lower plate 322 is Since it is possible to recognize that a large number of game balls are stored in the game, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction, entertain the game, and suppress a decrease in interest. Further, since it is difficult for the fingertips of the hand placed in the lower plate 322 to touch the rear wall of the lower plate 322, the lower plate cover 340, etc., the player is given the same feeling as the lower plate in the conventional pachinko machine. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a feeling of strangeness given to a player who has become accustomed to a conventional pachinko machine, which can reassure the player and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is formed so as to become wider toward the back side (rear side), even if the front side is small, a sufficient storage amount of the game balls can be secured. In other words, since the portion of the lower plate 322 on the front end side is made small, the lower plate 322 is made inconspicuous on the front surface (the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) of the plate unit cover 326 where the lower plate 322 is open. Therefore, it is possible to make the effect operation unit 400 (the second effect operation unit 400A) relatively conspicuous. Therefore, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be provided while ensuring a sufficient storage amount of the game balls in the lower plate 322, and the appeal power to the player can be enhanced and the player It can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, since the lower plate cover 340 covers the side and the upper part of the portion of the lower plate 322 that wraps around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), the player can move the lower plate 322 into the lower plate 322. When putting a hand, it is possible to prevent a fingertip or the like from touching the inner surface of the dish unit cover 326 or the rear surface of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) or the like to injure the player. You can play in a safe state. Further, the lower plate cover 340 can prevent the game ball from entering (spilling) from the lower plate 322 into the plate unit cover 326.

  Furthermore, since the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is arranged at the center of the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the left-right direction, the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is placed from the player side. The pachinko machine 1 can be made more prominent and can attract the player's attention strongly, and the decoration by the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) can be easily seen. By doing so, it is possible to entertain the decoration and effect of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) and suppress a decrease in the player's interest.

  Further, since the lower plate 322 is provided with the lower plate ball supply port 323c capable of communicating with the upper plate 321, and the lower plate ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically so as to be opened and closed, the conventional pachinko machine is provided. Since it has the same function as the lower plate in, the player who is accustomed to the conventional pachinko machine does not get confused about the function of the lower plate 322 when playing with this pachinko machine 1, and is the same as the conventional one. It is possible to play the game with a feeling of feeling, and to allow the player to concentrate on the game and entertain the game. Further, since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are respectively arranged behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), when viewed from the front side, the lower plate ball supply port 323c is formed. The lower plate ball punching hole 322a is invisible from the player side, the appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be made clean and the appearance can be improved, and the pachinko machine with high appeal that can strongly attract the player's attention. It can be machine 1.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the dish unit 320 that bulges forward under the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 that faces the game area 5a of the door frame 3. Door frame side effect display device 460 capable of presenting effects to the player on the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) attached to the dish unit cover 326 of FIG. The operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) that decorates the outside of the operation button is attached, and the operation button inside decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) is surrounded so as to surround the outside. The diameter is about 15 cm, and the center is away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) (outward). The operation button 410 having the transparent button lens 411 is attached, and the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 are provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, and the button lens is also provided. Since the tubular button base 413 protruding from the 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration are formed by the first button decoration portion 411a, the button base 413, and the like. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the outer edge and the back side (rear side) of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A) from the gap between the member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to improve the appearance of the operation button 410. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the appearance of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 provided inside, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and the like. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the button base 413 of the operation button 410 allow the clearance between the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). Since it is possible to make the outer edge and the back side of the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) difficult to see, by increasing the outer diameter of the operation button 410, the button lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit). 470), even if the gap between them is relatively large, it can be well hidden by the first button decoration portion 411a, etc., so that while preventing the appearance from being deteriorated, a large operation button with an outer diameter of about 15 cm. 410 (button lens 411) can be embodied without problems. Therefore, since the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be upsized, the pachinko machine 1 can be made conspicuous and the player's interest is strong. The pachinko machine 1 can be attracted to and highly appealing.

  Further, since the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) that is cylindrically projected from the button lens 411 side to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side is provided, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( When the gap between the screen units 470) is viewed obliquely, the inner wall of the button base 413 can shield and hide those outside the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). The appearance of the button 410 can be further improved.

  Further, since the transparent button lens 411 has a three-dimensional shape (hemispherical body shape) that bulges in a direction (outward) away from the base unit 430 (second base unit 450), the button lens 411 near the outer peripheral edge The surface is a plane formed by an opening on the front end side of the button base 413 (a plane orthogonal to the direction in which the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) and the button lens 411 are aligned, that is, the forward / backward direction of the operation button 410). The light is easily refracted when viewed from the player side, since the light is inclined with respect to the plane (orthogonal plane). Therefore, by combining the button base 413 and the button base 413 with the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b provided on the outer peripheral edge, the button lens 411 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470). It is possible to make it difficult to see the outer edge, the back side, etc. of the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) through the gap between the inner side and the inner side of the operation button.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed in a three-dimensional shape that bulges outward, the volume inside the operation button 410 increases, so the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame arranged inside the operation button 410 are increased. It is possible to make the side effect display device 460 (the door frame side second effect display device 460A) larger or easier to move, and the door frame side effect display device to entertain the player with the operation button 410. It is possible to easily provide 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A), and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can further entertain the player.

  Further, since the button lens 411 is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the operation button 410 is provided with a design property (decorative property). Can be directed, and it is possible to easily select the present pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

  Further, in the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 provided on the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 is opaque, so that the button frame 412 has a button The back side of the operation button 410, the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), etc. can be surely hidden from the gap between the lens 411 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 (screen unit 470), and the operation can be reliably hidden. The appearance of the button 410 or the like can be reduced and the appearance can be improved.

  In addition, the button lens 411 is provided with an opaque button frame 412 with a predetermined width from the outer peripheral end to the inner side, and cooperates with the first button decoration portion 411a and the second button decoration portion 411b to cooperate with the player. Since the gap between the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 (screen unit 470) can be made invisible from the side, the main body 413a and the operation button inner decoration member 432 ( It is possible to increase the gap between the screen unit 470) and the screen unit 470), and it is possible to easily secure a space for moving the operation button 410 and the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Can be moved satisfactorily.

  Furthermore, since the outer periphery of the button lens 411 has a cylindrical shape, the directionality of the outer periphery is lost compared to the case where the button lens 411 has a polygonal shape, and thus the operation button 410 can be easily moved smoothly. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is enlarged, the pressing operation can be performed without any problem, and the player can surely enjoy the player participation type effect using the operation button 410 and suppress the deterioration of interest.

  Further, since the operation button 410 is upsized, it is easy to perform the player participation type effect that causes the player to operate the operation button 410 without operating the operation button 410 while checking the position of the operation button 410. Since it is possible to easily touch and press the operation button 410, it is possible to make the player easily participate in the player participation type production using the operation button 410, which makes the player entertaining and less entertaining. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) is provided in the operation button 410, the effect of the player is operated by presenting effect images according to the game state. It can be strongly attracted to the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the button 410, and by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). It is possible to entertain the effect, and it is possible to prompt the player to operate the operation button 410 by means of an effect image, light emission effect, or the like by the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A). , It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest by having the player actively participate in the player participation type production and entertaining. In addition, by executing the effect in the operation button 410, it can be thought that there is something good for some players, and it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game and suppress the decline in interest. You can

  In addition, the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) can be visually recognized through the transparent button lens 411 (the part inside the first button decoration portion 411a) of the large operation button 410. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the operation button 410 of the pachinko machine 1 is obviously different from the operation button of the conventional pachinko machine, which is highly appealing to the player. The pachinko machine 1 can be used, and the player's expectation for production using the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (door frame side second effect display device 460A) in the operation button 410 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to the preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various improvements can be made without departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. And the design can be changed.

  That is, in the above embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused, It may be applied, and even in this case, the same effect as the above can be obtained.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 has the first button decoration portion 411a formed on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The button lens 411 without the first button decoration portion 411a may be used.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the opaque button frame 412 is attached to the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the button frame 412 is not attached and the button frame 412 is not attached. A decorative portion for hiding the rear side may be formed over the entire circumference at a portion of the lens 411 corresponding to the button frame 412.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the operation button 410, the base unit 430 (the first unit) so as to surround the entire outer circumference of the operation button inner decorative member 432 and the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. Although the one including the button base 413 (main body portion 413a) projecting cylindrically toward the second base unit 450 side is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation button interior decoration member 432 and the door frame side second effect are shown. At least one of the display device 460A may be projected to the base unit 430 (second base unit 450) side so as to surround only a part of the entire outer circumference. The button base 413 may have a shape along the outer circumference of the button lens 411 or a shape not along the outer circumference of the button lens 411. The button base 413 may have a decoration (planar decoration by sticking or printing a seal, three-dimensional decoration by unevenness such as relief) on at least the inner wall side. Further, the button base 413 may be translucent or non-translucent. The button base 413 may be colored or may be colorless and transparent. Further, when the button base 413 is made transparent, it is desirable that at least one of the inner wall side and the outer wall side be subjected to light diffusion processing such as grain, slit, prism and the like.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward only from the left outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 has been shown. The lower plate is not limited to the above, but is recessed rearward from both left and right sides of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and is connected to each other behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). 322 may be used, or it may be recessed rearward only from the right outer side portion of the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A), and part of it may go around behind the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). You may want to stay.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the shape of the portion (the shape of the plate front lower decorative portion 326c) in which the lower plate 322 is recessed rearward on the front surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the shape of the front end of the lower plate 322) is curved backward. Although the example in which it is recessed in the shape is shown, the invention is not limited to this, and it may be a polygonal prismatic surface or a front surface recessed in a polyhedral shape.

  Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached to the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “operation dial, touch panel, etc. "Equipment with an operating device", "equipment with a rotating body having a decoration on the surface", "equipment with a decoration and a movable device for moving the decoration", "game Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the machine, those with a decorative body that sculpt the scene (diorama) etc. "," Characters, items, logos according to the concept of the gaming machine A member such as a unit or a panel provided with "or the like, etc., which is decorated by a seal or printing" may be attached. Further, the number of members to be mounted in the mounting space 326j (production operation unit mounting portion 326a) does not have to be one, and a plurality of (two or more) members may be mounted. For example, separate members may be attached, such as a member attached to the upper half of the attachment space 326j and a member attached to the lower half of the attachment space 326j.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the dish unit cover 326 is formed with the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a that is open to the front for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). However, the dish unit cover (for example, a panel-shaped cover portion) does not have an opening (effect operation unit attachment portion 326a) for attaching the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A). A space corresponding to the mounting space 326j (or the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) may be formed behind the dish unit cover. It should be noted that the front surface of such a plate unit cover may be decorated with characters, items, logos, predetermined patterns, etc. according to the concept of the gaming machine by sticking, printing, attaching decorative members, etc. desirable.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an area slightly larger than half of the storage area (storage area) of the game balls in plan view of the lower plate 322 is defined by the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) as the covering portion. Although the example of covering from the front to be difficult to see is shown, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to make the area less than half of the storage area of the game balls in the lower plate 322 difficult to see from the front. The entire plate 322 may be made difficult to be visually recognized from the front.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 are partially provided in the circumferential direction, but have an arc shape. However, the second button decoration portion 411b and the frame side lens 417 may have an annular shape extending over the entire circumference.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as the second button internal decoration portion 432g of the operation button internal decoration member 432 of the effect operation unit 400, a decoration having a plurality of concentric polygons centered on the center is shown. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second button interior decoration portion 432g may be decoration having a plurality of concentric circles (including an ellipse) centered on the center.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the transparent button lens 411 (front member) of the operation button 410 is used, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, the door frame side effect display device 460, and the door frame side second effect are arranged on the rear side. Although the rear member such as the display device 460A is always visible, the present invention is not limited to this, and at least one of the front member and the rear member arranged at the front and rear (or the upper and lower) is provided under predetermined conditions. It is also possible to adopt a configuration having variable light transmission means that allows the rear side to be visually recognized when the above condition is satisfied. Here, as the variable light transmission means, "a rear surface can be visually recognized due to a difference in brightness between the front side and the rear side like a magic mirror", "a transparent state by turning on / off a power source like a liquid crystal film" And becomes opaque so that the rear side can be visually recognized. " The front member and the rear member may be movable or may not be relatively movable.

  By providing the variable light transmitting means in at least one of the front member and the rear member, in a normal state, only the front member or the front member and the rear member are in a visible state, The decoration of the visible member can be shown to the player. In a special state, by satisfying a predetermined condition, a rear member (a rear member or a member arranged on the rear side of the rear member) that cannot be seen in a normal state can be seen. The member and the rear member, or the front member, the rear member, and the rear member of the rear member can show the overlapping decoration. Therefore, various decorations (decorative effects) can be shown to the player by using the front member and the rear member, the player can be prevented from getting bored, and the player can be entertained. It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the user.

  More specifically, for example, when the front member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, by darkening the rear side of the front member, only the decoration of the front member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Then, when the front member and the rear member or the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the satisfaction condition of the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the rear member is passed through the front member. The members can be visually recognized, and the player can see the decoration in which the decoration of the front member and the decoration of the rear member overlap each other.

  Alternatively, when the front member is made transparent and the rear member is provided with a variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, the surface of the rear member can be seen through the front member in a normal state. The player can see the decoration by the surface of the player. Then, when the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the rear member is satisfied, and the rear side can be visually recognized through the rear member. Through the member, a member on the rear side of the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character) can be shown to the player.

  Furthermore, when both the front member and the rear member have variable light transmitting means such as a magic mirror, in a normal state, only the decoration of the front member can be shown to the player, When the space between the rear member and the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED, the condition for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member is satisfied, and the surface of the rear member can be visually recognized through the front member. The player can show the decoration by the rear member. On the other hand, the rear side of the rear member is brightened by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED (or the space between the front member and the rear member and the rear side of the rear member are simultaneously illuminated by the light of the light emitting portion such as the LED. ) And the conditions for satisfying the variable light transmitting means in the front member and the rear member, respectively, are satisfied, and a member on the rear side of the rear member through the front member and the rear member (for example, a display device, a decorative body such as a character). Can be shown to the player. With this, by appropriately selecting the part to be brightened by the light of the light emitting part, the visible range can be changed in multiple stages, and the player can enjoy various decorations.

  In the above specific example, since the variable light transmitting means is like a magic mirror, it looks like a mirror in the state where the back side is dark, so that the surface of the front member or the rear member is Glittering decorations can be shown to the player.

  Further, in the above-mentioned specific examples, the variable light transmitting means is described as a magic mirror, but the same effect can be obtained even when the variable light transmitting means is a liquid crystal film. Further, when a variable light transmitting means such as a liquid crystal film is used, light can be transmitted even in an opaque state (has a light transmitting property). If the rear side of the member can be made brighter (or light-emitted) by the light of a light-emitting portion such as an LED, the player can be shown a variety of light-emission effects and decoration effects. .

[7. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 74. 69 is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board, FIG. 70 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 71 is a payout control board, a CR unit, and a frequency forming the main board. FIG. 72 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board for playing balls or the like that relays electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 72 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 69, and FIG. 73 is FIG. 74 is a block diagram showing an outline of a peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 74 is a block diagram around a VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 1 has, as shown in FIG. 69, a first control unit MCG that performs a control power supply (for example, + 5V) generation processing and a game-related control including payout of prize balls. , And a second control unit SCG that produces an effect relating to the game progressed by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. A payout control board 951 and a power supply board 931 are provided, and a peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. The 2 control unit SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[7-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game controls the power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. 69. Main control MPU1310a which is a microprocessor in which various control programs such as a main control program for controlling game operations and ROMs for storing various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data are built, and various A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids. , A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring signs of a predetermined voltage power failure or momentary power failure, Te are provided.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT 1310af") that monitors the operation (system) thereof, a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM stores in advance a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only once in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten even by using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a is a hard random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in”, which updates the big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game by hardware. Hard random number circuit 1310an "). The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 32767 as the maximum value is preset). A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit is configured so that a different value is set every time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (which is input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator, which will be described later), at high speed, other values within a predetermined numerical range are sequentially extracted without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. After that, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, without overlapping with other values within the predetermined numerical range. Extract one after another. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the main control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the main control input circuit 1310b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, which will be described later, so that the various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate etc. are input to the various input terminals. Reset control main control output circuit 1310ca having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the stored information, and no reset control main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset terminal provided with no reset terminal It consists of and. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. In other words, the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function outputs information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like by being reset by a main control system reset, which will be described later. Is configured as a circuit in which a signal based on is not output at all from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function outputs the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like because the information is not reset by the main control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  As shown in FIG. 60, a first starting port sensor 4002 for detecting a game ball entering the first starting port 2002, a second starting port sensor 4004 for detecting a game ball entering the second starting port 2004, and general. The detection signal from the general winning hole sensor 4020 that detects the game ball that entered the winning hole 2001 and the signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e are input terminals of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. Has been entered in. In addition, in the gate sensor 4003 which detects the game sphere which passes the gate section 2003 which is shown in Figure 60, the count sensor 4005 which detects the game sphere which entered into the special winning a prize 2005, and the back unit 3000 which is shown in FIG. The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached and detects fraudulent activity using a magnet is a predetermined input of the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5 and the main control input circuit 1310b. It is input to the input terminal of the port.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on the detection signal from each of these switches, thereby the main control output circuit with reset function. 1310ca outputs a control signal to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and outputs a drive signal from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the attacker solenoid 2108 via the panel relay board 4161, or a predetermined output port thereof. By outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function through the panel relay board 4161 and the function display unit 1400, the first special symbol display device 1403. It outputs a drive signal to the second special symbol display device 1405, the first special reserved number display device 1404, the second special reserved number display device 1406, the normal symbol display device 1402, the status display device 1401, and the round display device 1407. ..

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information regarding the game (game information) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, so that the payout control is performed from the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. By outputting various information (game information) about the game to the board 951 and outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, the main function with reset function A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the count sensor 4005. Contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switches are used as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020. This is because the game ball frequently enters the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and The detection of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003 also frequently occurs. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is used for the first starting port sensor 4002, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. In addition, when the big hit game state which is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball is frequently entered, so that the count sensor 4005 also frequently detects the game ball. Therefore, the count sensor 4005 also uses a proximity switch having a long life. On the other hand, the general winning opening 2001 or 201 does not frequently enter the gaming ball, and the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020 do not frequently detect it. For this reason, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used as the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the substrate 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 normally receives various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payer ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payment main ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data at the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with a reset function. The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to the control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Here, the main serial transmission port for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as serial data will be briefly described. The main control MPU 1310a is mainly configured by a main control CPU core 1310aa. In addition to the main control built-in RAM, the main control serial transmission port 1310ae, which is one of various main control serial I / O ports, etc., connects the bus 1310ah. It is connected via a circuit (see FIG. 79). The main serial transmission port 1310ae is for transmitting various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 as main serial data, and mainly includes a transmission shift register 1310eaa, a transmission buffer register 1310aeb, a serial management unit 1310aec, etc. 79). The main control CPU core 1310aa sets the command in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and outputs the transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec. The data is transferred to the transmission shift register 1310eaa and started to be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circulation serial data. In this embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb is 32 bytes. The main control CPU core 1310aa continuously transmits a plurality of commands to the peripheral control board 1510 by setting a plurality of commands in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb and then outputting a transmission start signal to the serial management unit 1310aec.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is cut off. BC0 (see FIG. 75). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM in the power-off processing even when the power is turned off. Various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 to be described later is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Is output from the payout control board 951 and is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. With this, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases the data from the main control internal RAM. It is supposed to be (cleared).

[7-2. Discharge control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, as shown in FIG. 70, a payout control board 951 for controlling the payout of gaming balls and the like, and a payout control unit 952 for performing various controls related to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED indicator 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. The operation switch 954, which also has a function as a RAM clear switch, is a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) based on a detection signal output by being operated. The RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in (.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 70, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls related to payout controls the power-on process that is executed when the power is turned on, and also pays out the game medium that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Detecting from a payout control MPU 952a, which is a microprocessor having a ROM for storing various control programs including a payout control program for controlling operations and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and various detection switches for payout. A payout control input circuit 952b to which a signal is input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external board, and a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830. CR unit input for exchanging various signals between 952d and CR unit 6 It includes a power circuit 952E, a. The payout control MPU 952a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

  Under the control of the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control program serially outputs various kinds of information (game information) about a game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about payout as a main pay serial data reception signal through the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Further, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to a first error occurrence command) when an error occurs in the payout operation of the game ball, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error canceling unit. A 16-bit (2-byte) error cancel navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancel command) is created based on the signal (detection signal), and these error occurrence command and error cancel navigation command are transmitted to the payer serial data, respectively. The signal is output as serial data of a serial system to the receiving port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmitting means). In addition, this payout control program executes payout control after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs in the operation, the error is canceled based on the detection signal generated by the operation of the operation switch 954, and the output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  Further, the payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, this payout control program sends a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command) when a detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. In addition to outputting, a body frame closing command (first body frame closing command) is output when a detection signal (body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the information input with the detection signals from the various detection switches to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, in the payout control input circuit 952b, the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals is not reset by the payout control system reset described later, and thus various signals based on the information are changed. It is configured as a circuit output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to the various input terminals. Dispensing control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, which has a reset function for forcibly resetting the generated information, and a dispensing control output circuit 952cb without a reset function, which has no reset terminal and has no reset function. It consists of and. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, in the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like is reset by a payout control system reset to be described later, and thus the information is output. Is configured as a circuit in which no signal based on is output from its various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is configured as a circuit to which the system reset signal from the payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function has the information for outputting various signals input to its various input terminals to an external board or the like not to be reset by the payout control system reset described later. It is configured as a circuit in which the base signal is output from its various output terminals.

  A ball-out detection sensor 827 that detects a ball out of a game ball in the supply passage of the ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800, and a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball released from the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 will be simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 in this specification.

  Further, the detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the body frame opening switch 619 that detects the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output to the payout control input circuit 952b. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the.

  In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 which detects whether or not the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands related to the payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b at the input terminal of the serial input port in the serial data system, or the operation signal (detection signal of the operation switch 954). Signal) to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a completes the normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a signal (payment main ACK signal) to that effect is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control output with a reset function. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to the main control board 1310.

Further, the payout control MPU 952a transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data from the output terminal of the serial output port to the reset functionless payout control output circuit 952cb, thereby performing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310.
When the main control board 1310 normally receives various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, it outputs a signal (main payout ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payout ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. From the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the error LED indicator. By outputting the drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the error LED indicator 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays alphanumeric characters and figures to indicate the state of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it indicates that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it indicates that "connection is abnormal" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and That there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 951 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "out of ball" (specifically, out of ball). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, it notifies that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is "ball ball" (specifically At the entrance of the distribution space that communicates with the supply passage of the payout device 830 based on the detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, the payout rotating body and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance, and the payout rotating body becomes difficult to rotate. Number) When "3" is displayed, the fact that there is a "payout detection sensor error" (specifically, that there is a problem with the payout detection sensor 842 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. , When the number “5” is displayed, it informs that it is a “retry error” (specifically, that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number “6” is displayed. When it is displayed, it is "full" (specifically, it is full with game balls in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279). When the number "7" is displayed, it means that "CR is not connected" (electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number "9" is displayed, it means "in stock (award ball stock (unpaid) is available)" (specifically, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid is set in advance. That the number of balls is reached).

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of balls of the game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to thereby output the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. It outputs the number of balls actually paid out to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Further, the payout control board 951 outputs various kinds of information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of unillustrated photocouplers (which are configured by incorporating an infrared LED and a photo IC), and through these plural photocouplers, a game hall (hall). ), The number of balls of the game ball and various information (game information, error content regarding the payout operation of the game ball or the fact that there was an error) is transmitted to the hall computer.
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated from each other by a plurality of photo couplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer. The computer does not malfunction or break down, and the hall computer uses the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 as a main control board 1310 for advancing a game and a payout control board 951 for controlling payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to prevent malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 329 are, first, the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the game ball lending device connection terminal board. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of balls to be lent out according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 in a serial manner via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is the CR unit. It is adapted to be inputted to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of balls of the rented gaming balls, and at the same time, outputs a signal for displaying the remaining amount on the ball loan display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball loan display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball lending / returning display section 330 is configured such that the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 is input via the gaming ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 75) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. There is. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. The various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is such that when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, the operation signal is a predetermined signal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. The payout control MPU 952a, which is input to the input terminal of the input port, determines it as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. It is supposed to be completely erased. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and is also output from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to the main control board 1310.

[7-2-2. Exchange of various signals with the terminal connection device for lending equipment such as game balls]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display plate 365 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. As shown in FIG. 71, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 not only relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951 but also the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. The electrical connection between the boards is also relayed (more precisely, the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880. , The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay The terminal board 880 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control substrate 951, between the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay The board with the terminal board 880, and the board with the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by respective wirings (harnesses). In addition, AC24V described later from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL (DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) in this embodiment) from the supplied AC24V by a built-in voltage creating circuit (not shown), together with the ground LG. , While supplying to the payout control board 951 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, while supplying to the frequency display plate 365 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 .

  The frequency display plate 365 is provided with a ball lending button 328, which is a push button switch, at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328 on the component surface, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the ball lending unit 360. The return button 329 is mounted, and the ball return display section 330, which is a segment display, is mounted at a position corresponding to the unpaid balance display section 363 of the ball rental unit 360.

  The ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 switches on (turns on), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game. It is adapted to be input to the CR unit 6 via the ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is turned on (turned on), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection. Input is made to the CR unit 6 via the terminal plate 869.

  The ball lending / returning display unit 330 has three segment indicators arranged in a line, and one of the three-digit segment indicators is sequentially driven, so-called a dynamic lighting method. The digit segment display is controlled to light. By such lighting control, the ball loan display unit 330 displays the balance of the prepaid card inserted in the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball lending / returning display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (three signals in total) for designating a 1-digit segment display out of the 3-digit segment display and the designated 1-digit segment display. Segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the content to be displayed by lighting, and the CR unit 6 are connected to the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the main door relay terminal. When input through the plate 880, the one-digit segment display sequentially emits light according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, and these three-digit segment displays are displayed. The contents due to the light emission of the container can be visually confirmed through the remaining lending display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365d is mounted on the frequency display plate 365 adjacent to the ball loan display unit 330. In the CR unit lamp 365d, the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is input via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending enable signal TDL through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creating circuit, and when the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending enable signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually confirmed through the remaining loan display portion 363. In addition, the segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball loan display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When input, BRDY, which is a ball rental request signal, is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball or similar lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the CR unit 6 issues a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of lent balls (25 balls in the present embodiment, which corresponds to 100 yen in amount) in one payout operation. BRQ is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the lending device connection terminal board 869 for gaming balls. The payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input is EXS which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has started or ended, and a game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. Through the, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or for notifying that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible or impossible, is connected to the rental ball connection terminal board for the game ball, etc. It outputs to CR unit 6 via 869. Note that, for example, when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, a game ball for 200 yen is paid out, and when the hall clerk or the like presets the CR unit 6, the payout operation is performed once. It is supposed to be performed twice consecutively, and if 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen will be paid out continuously, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen will be paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display plate 365 through the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. Then, the prepaid card is ejected from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of gaming balls dispensed as a result of pressing the ball lending button 328.

[7-3. Power board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 of the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 includes a power supply switch 934 capable of electrically connecting and disconnecting AC 24 V (AC 24 V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and a power supply control unit 935 that generates various power supplies. The firing control unit 953 performs the firing control by the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball firing device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

[7-3-1. Power control unit]
The power supply controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the synchronous rectification circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the electric power rectified by the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. A power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c that smoothes the power whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 935b, and various direct currents that are supplied from the power smoothed by the smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates. And a power generation circuit 935d that generates a power source.

[7-3-2. Firing controller]
A firing control unit 953 that performs firing control by the firing solenoid 682 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 255 mainly includes a firing control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a, an operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (firing strength) at which the game ball is launched toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and the palm of the handle 302. A detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 that detects whether or not a finger is touching, and a single-shot button operation sensor 312 that detects whether to forcibly stop the launch (launch) of the game ball according to the player's intention. And the detection signal from the input terminal are input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to the launch control circuit 953a, a CR connection signal indicating that fact is input via the payout control board 951. ..

  The firing control circuit 953a controls the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307, and outputs the adjusted drive current to the launch solenoid 682. Meanwhile, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper tray 321 of the dish unit 320, The game ball received by the ball-sending member is controlled to be sent to the hitting ball launcher 650 side.

[7-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs performance control based on various commands from the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 72, and 19, a peripheral display control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data) with an effect display drive board 4450 that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a game board side effect display device 1600, and a door. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 while controlling the sound such as the music and the sound effect that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the calendar information and the hour and minute that specify the date. A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information that specifies seconds and a lower speaker 92. And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the volume knob portion such as music or sound effects flowing from upper speaker 573.

[7-4-1. Peripheral controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs the effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. A peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various control programs such as sub-control programs that are executed and controls production operation, various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information that continues over the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and various LED light emission modes) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information for the purpose, and various information that continues over the day (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the jackpot gaming state, information for managing special effect flags, etc.) ) Is stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, and a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control external WDT 1511e") for monitoring whether the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have it.

  The peripheral control RAM 1511c can hold the stored content only for a time such that an instantaneous power failure occurs and the power is immediately restored, and the power is cut off for a long time (when a long power failure occurs. ), The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power from a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) (hereinafter referred to as “SRAM electrolytic capacitor”) provided on the power supply substrate 931. By doing so, the stored contents can be retained for about 50 hours. By providing the electrolytic capacitor for SRAM on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d, so the peripheral control SRAM 1511d stores the stored contents. You can no longer hold and lose its contents.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is out of control, and when this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. That is, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a does not output the clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, it can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, and therefore is not reset.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of built-in parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, etc. When receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, each decorative board of the game board 5 is based on these various commands. Lamp light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided in the lamp from a lamp drive board serial I / O port via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) The game board side motor drive data for transmitting to the drive board 4170 or outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serial for the motor drive board. It is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the electric power of the dial drive motor 414 or the like provided on the door frame 3 is transmitted. The door side motor drive data for outputting the drive signal to the dynamic drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Door-side light emission data for transmitting to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the LED or outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs or the like provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3. The frame decoration drive amplifier board transmits to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 from the LED serial I / O port.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). In addition, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 provided in the effect operation unit 400, and the press detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405. Detection signal is serialized by a door side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized production operation unit detection data is output from the door side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, to the serial operation I / O port for detecting the effect operation unit of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photosensors) for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are game board sides (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. It is serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the game board side serial transmission circuit to the motor control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a through the peripheral control input circuit. There is. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to exchange various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as "peripheral control built-in WDT"), and its own system runs out of control by using the peripheral control built-in WDT and the peripheral control external WDT1511e together. Is diagnosed.

[7-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, which is a microcomputer, will be described. As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a peripheral control CPU core 1511aa as a center, a peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and various peripheral control serial I. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data from / into the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via the internal bus 1511ah, while at the same time, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control internal WDT 1511af, Peripheral control Various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak are read / written with various data via internal bus 1511ah, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai.

  Further, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data into the peripheral control ROM 1511b through the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are read. Then, various data is read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I. It is a dedicated controller that independently transfers data between the I / O port 1511ag and the input / output device such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ DMA3 has four channels.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control internal serial I / O ports 1511ae, and peripheral control internal WDT 1511af included in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. , Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, and other input / output devices, to independently perform data transfer without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. Further, while reading / writing to / from the storage device of the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab via the internal bus 1511ah, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511 are provided. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  Further, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os incorporated in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, and other input / output devices without intervening peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, In order to independently perform data transfer, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and the external bus 1511h are provided to the storage devices such as the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Then, while reading and writing, the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak Reading and writing is performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral bus 1511ai, and the external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, the peripheral control internal RAM 1511ab, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control. Various devices such as a storage device such as an SRAM 1511d and various input / output devices such as peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller for exchanging various data between them.

  Peripheral control Various serial I / O ports 1511ae include serial I / O ports for lamp drive boards, serial I / O ports for motor drive boards, serial I / O ports for frame decoration drive amplifier board motors, frame decoration drive amplifier board LEDs. Serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, a main control board serial I / O port, and a production operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (WDT with built-in peripheral control) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of peripheral control MPU1511a is out of control. When this timer is up, it is reset by hardware. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer within a certain period (until the timer expires) to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af and resets the signal. Will be required. When the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs the clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the timer count can be restarted, so that it is not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, Detection signals from various detection switches for detecting original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and the serial signals are serialized. It outputs a movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the game board side serial transmission circuit at the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for notifying that the occurrence of the big hit game state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically directly connected, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for the lighting control of the LED, which has a significant meaning in the game. It should be noted that the LED lighting control is executed in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs except this LED are executed in the peripheral control unit steady process described below. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotating position of the knob is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0 to 6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk of the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1 and contents related to game performance are announced. (For example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or it is announced that there is a high possibility that the game state will shift to an advantageous game state for the player). The notification sound and the notification sound are also output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion. It is possible to adjust the volume of the sound by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of advertising sound is reduced so that it does not interfere with music and sound effects, while There is a possibility of increasing the volume of sound played to increase the volume of music and sound effects, and also to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to shift to a game state advantageous for the player. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[7-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, various data, various control data, and various schedule data. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating various LED light emission modes, and music. And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating drive modes of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining a screen configuration in time series, and defines the order of screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Has been done. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by time-sequentially arranged light emission data that defines the light emission modes of various LEDs. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to be described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source, a track number for instructing which track the sound data such as music and sound effect is to be incorporated is defined. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and executed, and may be copied to various control program copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later at the time of power-on. Some of them are read and executed. Also, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or when power is turned on to various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later. In some cases, the copied one is read out.

  Further, in the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 is corrected according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to secular change of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the LED type backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is mounted. , The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the brightness setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired brightness setting information is based on the correction information To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the set game board side effect display device 1600 is included, and for example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time. Therefore, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness is obtained. When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80%, which is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed from the date and time when the effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information is acquired. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on with the luminance of 75%, the luminance is set to 85% by adding 10% which is the correction information acquired to this 75%. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information.

[7-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 73, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that stores, among the various types of information that are updated by executing various control programs, those to be backed up. A management target work area 1511ca, a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc for exclusively storing a copy of various information stored in this backup management target work area 1511ca, and a peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control program copy areas 1511cd for exclusively storing the copied various control programs and various data, various control data, various schedule data, etc. stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Various control data copy area 1511ce that stores the copied data exclusively, and a backup non-management target that stores only the information that is not the backup target among various information updated by executing the various control programs A work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the managed work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on status command (see FIG. 89) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And the game state (for example, to instruct the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is performance information (1fr) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later is input. ) Is dedicatedly stored as a backup target, and the performance information (1 ms), which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later, is backed up. It is composed of Bank 0 (1 ms) which is exclusively stored as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information, and is referred to as “Bank”. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511cb to a backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It is meant to have a size. As will be described later, “(1fr)” means that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU1511a. Since a V blank signal indicating that it is in a state in which the screen data from can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in other words, each time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame). From the place where the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each, it is added to "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3", and "Bank4", respectively (effect information (1fr) and effect described later. The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As will be described later, “(1 ms)” means that the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, so that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, And “Bank4” (the same meaning is used for effect information (1 ms) and effect backup information (1 ms) described later).

  Bank0 (1fr) has a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is output. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting for a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is set. A door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is a storage area in which a received command storage area 1511cac receives various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 and stores the received various commands. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, which is a storage area to be set, has an RTC control unit 4165 (RTC4165a described later). This is a storage area in which various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). A storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, various schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy areas 1511ce are read and set, and in other cases, various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. There are also things that are set.

  In Bank 0 (1 ms), a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. A storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid that operates various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is a storage area in which the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various kinds of information obtained from the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies are set, and a production operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511. In ai, various information obtained by acquiring the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the production operation unit 400 (for example, production operation A storage area in which the rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, which are created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, are set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the effect display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510, and judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect, the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect are produced. A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  The lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of Bank0 (1fr), and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf of Bank0 (1ms). The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Every time the processing is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral controller steady processing is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and the door-side light emission data STL. -When DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It Peripheral control unit regular processing is executed, for example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in this peripheral control section regular processing, When the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed last time, the processing is advanced based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is provided with a door in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is set in the first and second areas of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT are alternately set. The peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process of this time, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. When it is set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time is set. The processing is carried out based on this.

  When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag sets the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Then, when the next peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Every time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed, for example, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing this time, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Sometimes, when the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed last time, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like this.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc that exclusively store the copied copy of the effect information, which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks are managed as one page. Performance information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as performance backup information (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, the performance information (1 ms) which is the content which is copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is placed in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511cb has two pairs of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), which are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) at high speed, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  In the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) and one pair of Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) are managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and is stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is such that each time the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The page consistency is determined by whether the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms), that is, two pairs in total. The backup second area 1511cc is an area for managing as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has two pairs of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for managing as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) which is a storage area that is normally used, is the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame) as effect backup information (1fr). Every time the regular processing is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area that is normally used. The production information (1ms) is, as production backup information (1ms), a backup first area 1511cb and a backup second area 1511cc each time the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1ms timer interrupt occurs. Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in the present embodiment, the effect information (1fr) and the effect information (1ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[7-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
The peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores a backup target among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc, which exclusively store a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, are provided. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to momentary power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 89). Is an instruction to start the RAM clear effect and a game state (for example, to instruct the start of an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 69 is operated within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. Even when) is not cleared to zero. This point is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are zero-cleared. Further, when the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It is supposed to be done. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, for each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, a history of occurrence of a jackpot gaming state). While the contents can be cleared, the contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. In this respect also, the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are completely different.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is performance information (SRAM) that is various information that continues over days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit game state and special performance flags). (For example, information) is dedicatedly stored as a backup target in Bank 0 (SRAM). Here, the name of Bank0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. “Bank” is the minimum management unit indicating the size of the storage area for storing various types of information, as described above. The following "0" means that it is a storage area that is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. Then, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, and “Bank4” provided in an area extending from a backup first area 1511db to a backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since "(SRAM)" is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, "Bank0", "Bank1", "Bank2", "Bank3". , And “Bank4” (also used for production information (SRAM) and production backup information (SRAM) described later with the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc that exclusively store the copied copy of the production information (SRAM) that is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair and one pair as one page. The effect information (SRAM) that is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, is used as effect backup information (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of the two banks forming the page match.

  Specifically, the backup first area 1511db has Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) peripheral control DMA every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  Further, the backup second area 1511dc has Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). It is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511dc is an area for managing one pair of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[7-4-2. LCD display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control of music and sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is shown in FIG. As described above, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”), and drawing of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. In addition to a VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) 1512a with a sound source for controlling, various character data of the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, various kinds of music and sound effects Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing sound data, and serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data The audio data transmission IC 1512c that transmits to the decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the drawing data serialized to the door frame side effect display device 460 are attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and the door frame side effect display is displayed. Door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of the device 460 and is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320, and serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e for differentially converting the LOCKN signal output request data into a positive signal and a negative signal, and the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, a signal from the differential circuit 1512e. Is input and the signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected to transmit this signal, while when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f connected to the circuit. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, ring image data used to display a ring-shaped display object (annular display object) as sprite data used to display a screen or an image described later, and an operation menu background image described later. The operation menu background image data to be used, the selection display object image data used to display at least one selection display object described later, the tone adjustment background image data used to display the volume adjustment screen including the volume scale described below, and the volume adjustment icon described below. In addition to the volume setting icon image data used for display, the main frame back image data used for displaying the main frame back image where the positions of the respective parts on the back of the main frame 4 are visible to the player, and the display of the service mode screen Image of the service mode screen used for and the break used to display the break timer setting screen Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation section 405 (operation section) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. 1511cae is set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various types of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and outputted to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the schedule data is triggered by the input of a V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy area 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c according to the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae, and the sound source is built-in. Output to VDP1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, screen data arranged in time series in the screen generation schedule data is input every time the V blank signal is input. Then, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source one by one.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the sound command data at the beginning of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. The extracted sound command data is set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral. The schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal after the data is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. According to the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the first sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to generate the sound source. Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. In this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is input with the V blank signal for the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae. In each case, the sound command data at the head is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a one by one.

[7-4-2a. VDP with built-in sound source]
In addition to the above-described built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and based on the input screen data, as shown in FIG. Side character data and upper plate side character data are extracted to create sprite data to generate drawing data for one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. VRAM for doing so is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as "built-in VRAM"). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 from the drawing data generated in the built-in VRAM from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and for the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data from a channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, while the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is relayed from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Performance display that is arranged near the terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door frame side performance display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive board 4450. As described above, since the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600 as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display device 1600 are Although attached to the game board 5, the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short, but the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. Since the length of the wiring required for the path from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive substrate 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d has "V-by-One (V-by-One By adopting a differential type communication called "registered trademark", the structure is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a differential interface by a serial method called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses an interface by a parallel method. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. It is serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. Then, various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In this way, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data of one screen (for one frame) to be displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a becomes Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data, and one screen worth (1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The drawing data (for frames) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and of the generated drawing data, the image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side Image data for effect display device 460 from channel CH2 Not output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, the "screen data for one screen (for one frame)" means the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. It is the data to be generated above.

  Further, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and at the same time, displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Not output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When (transmitted), the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be received is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In the present embodiment, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, so that the V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which will be described later, when the V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal size of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Also, in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 in which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent.

  The VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source adopts a frame buffer method. This "frame buffer method" holds drawing data for one screen (one frame) drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  When the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on the command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives the music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting the sound data such as sound effect and sound effect and controlling the built-in sound source, the sound data such as music and sound effect are embedded in the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and used according to the output channel number. The output channel is set and the music, the effect sound, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  It should be noted that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated, and a plurality of tracks in the internal sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a have sound effects such as music and sound effects. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the clerk in the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the effect sound, the above-described substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to shift to a setting mode described later.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the internal sound source of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source have a plurality of master volume values in the sound source with a built-in VDP1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound is In fact, the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a fixed value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is the maximum volume, the master volume value is amplified to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The volume is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the effect sound, as a sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used among the plurality of tracks and the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used. The set volume control volume 1510a is combined with the board volume adjusted by rotating the knob, and the volume of the combined effect sound is actually the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To the master volume value, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used, Volume control set as a sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used. The maximum volume that is completely independent of the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a is combined, and the combined volume of the notification sound is actually compared with the volume that flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. To a master volume value, the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Here, in the case where the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, it is easy to perform the control of outputting the alarm sound to notify the clerk in the hall of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent activity on the pachinko machine 1. To explain, first, forcibly set the sub volume value of the track containing the effect sound to mute, and the sound data of the track in which this effect sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set to that sound, and the notification. The sound data of the track in which the sound is incorporated and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume are combined, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound are actually It is amplified to the master volume value that is the volume that flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized. And outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as Iodeta.

  That is, in reality, only the notification sound of the maximum volume is played as the sound played through the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, it does not flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the effect sound is proceeding according to the above-described sound generation schedule data. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the sound generation that has been compulsorily set to silence is generated. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding in accordance with the operation schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value, which is the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. When the operation mode 401 or the pressing operation section 405 is operated to shift to the setting mode and is adjusted, the sub volume value of the adjusted effect sound is set), and the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are used. It's flowing.

  In this way, when the effect sound is being output from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound is played to notify the store clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, Although the volume of the effect sound is muted and the notification sound flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, since the effect sound that has been muted progresses according to the sound generation schedule data, the notification sound has passed a predetermined period. When the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 stop flowing, the effect sound does not start to flow again from where the notification sound started to flow, but according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has elapsed since the notification sound started to flow. It started to flow again from the place where it progressed.

[7-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 74, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is for playing the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[7-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source is input, the audio data transmission IC 1512c uses a peripheral control output circuit (not shown) and a frame peripheral relay as differential system serial data in which the right audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 through the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and is also used as differential serial data in which the left audio data is a plus signal and a minus signal. , The frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194. As a result, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are stereo-reproduced from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential systems between the boards from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a plus signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, when the noise component carried on the positive signal and the noise component carried on the negative signal are combined by the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 into one left audio data, Since the noise components are removed by canceling each other, it is possible to take measures against noise.

[7-4-2d. Door frame side production transmitter IC]
As shown in FIG. 74, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses the parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three sync signals of a horizontal sync signal, a vertical sync signal, and a clock signal. The green video signal, the blue video signal, and the blue video signal each have 8 bits, that is, 24 bits in total. In this embodiment, since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, that is, 18 bits in total, the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for the human eye to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalid although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals that are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, that is, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals that are a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Is input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d causes the three video signals of the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal, the horizontal synchronization signal, and the vertical synchronization signal. Signal and clock signal and three synchronization signals are serialized into differential serial signals (serial data) called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. and only a differential 1 pair cable is used. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the periphery of the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the wiring length required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source includes the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the door. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first The length of the wiring required for the second route) is much longer than the length of the wiring required for the first route. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported on the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 so as to be openable and closable, the door frame 3 is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side, which is the side, for example, from the peripheral control board 1510 included in the game board 5 mounted on the main body frame 4 to the main body frame 4 side such as the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 included in the door frame 3. It is necessary to pass various wirings that electrically connect the various boards provided and the various boards provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is the game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can guide the paid out game balls to the lower tray 322 side when the tank is full is arranged.
Further, below the main body frame 4, there is arranged the payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. 6 to which power is supplied from the pachinko island facility is integrated into a unit. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931 and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the noise caused by electrostatic discharge by the game ball and the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It is in an environment where it is subject to noise, etc.

  Therefore, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data becomes extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, " By adopting differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the structure is less susceptible to noise. In the present embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described below included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting between the connections, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. However, this differential 1-pair cable has two wirings. Is a twisted pair cable, not just parallel lines provided in parallel. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, a case where parallel lines are adopted as the differential 1-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source, in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if the mechanism of differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of Co., Ltd. is adopted and it is hard to be influenced by noise, the hardware configuration alone causes electrostatic discharge of the game ball. When serial data in parallel lines is affected by noise, noise invading the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., a performance display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For the door frame side effect provided on the drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when received by the Shiba ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 while being affected, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as irregular data different from the regular one, and in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sandstorm-like image is displayed and no image is displayed. There is a problem that it is impossible to recognize whether there is any.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the length of the wiring for transmitting the drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, and the channel frame CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source has a door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510. In the transmitter IC for rendering 1512d, differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make the mechanism less susceptible to noise, and in addition to such a hardware configuration, Then, even if the serial data by the differential method is affected by the noise that has entered the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected by the twisted pair cable due to noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game balls, noise that has entered the power line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when it is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of No. 3, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. Accordingly, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) noise, it is possible to prevent an image that makes it impossible to recognize what kind of image such as a sandstorm is displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game due to the influence of noise.

  In the present embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to be described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are described. A frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between and, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not integrally configured, but are assembled separately, and the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. After the work of attaching the door frame 3 to the door frame 4, electrically connecting various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 provided on the body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the door frame 3 is detached from the body frame 4 for maintenance of the body frame 4 and the door frame 3. If it can be done and the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 in place of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various boards provided on the'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the body frame 4 side, various boards provided on the body frame 4 side and various boards provided on the door frame 3'side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics, Inc. In addition to such a hardware configuration, even if serial data by the differential method is affected by noise that has entered the wiring, the noise is canceled (removed) on the receiving side. ) Can be used as a differential 1 pair cable that electrically connects between the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and between the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the performance display drive. The substrates 4450 and 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other wirings for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. Therefore, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are formed with the above-described video transmission wiring patterns, which are separated from the power supply wiring pattern and the various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. In the path from the transmitter to the receiver, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 cross over a plurality of relay terminal plates, so that the video transmission formed on these relay terminal plates. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, a part of the signal for transmitting serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal decreases. Occurs. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. The board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450 are electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the wiring of the power supply and other various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Of the twisted pair cable, one wiring is red and the other wiring is gray, and the wiring for supplying power in the harness is red and the other wirings are gray. . Note that the wiring for supplying power may be yellow instead of red.

[7-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
The signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is supplied to the compulsory switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is adapted to be transmitted to the stored effect display drive substrate 4450. In addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the forced switching circuit 1512f also outputs LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Are differentially input to the plus signal and minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later included in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. , Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connection between the ,, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit these two signals when two signals which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, while the differential circuit 1512f is differentially connected. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the digitization circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are connected in a circuit. Has been done. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted. , From the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, while being transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e. When two signals, which are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal, are not input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, and therefore the door frame side effect transmitter. The signal output from the IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives the serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, which will be described later, and is serialized. It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal module circuit 4450V which restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, and when it judges that the received drawing data is abnormal data, it sends a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, to that effect to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. , And outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the input LOCKN signal, the peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source to generate an image for notifying that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and outputs the image to the game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed and notified in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 outputs the LOCKN signal described later to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It outputs to the peripheral control board 1510 via the. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not defective when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and the dish unit of the door frame 3 is detected. While it is possible to determine that the performance display drive board 4450 housed in the 320 does not have a problem, when the LOCKN signal is not input, it is determined that a problem has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 has a problem, and a notification image (for example, “a problem occurs in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device” is notified. Please call the clerk.))), And control the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source to perform on the game board side. Along with outputting to the display device 1600, a notification sound (for example, "a problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device") indicating that is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound is emitted from the speaker provided on the door frame 3. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

[7-4-3. RTC controller]
As shown in FIG. 72, the RTC control unit 4165, which holds calendar information for specifying the date and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second, is mainly composed of the RTC 4165a. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter, referred to as "RTC built-in RAM 4165aa"). The RTC 4165a is adapted to be supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is adopted) as a driving power supply and a backup power supply for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1) without being supplied with power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). As a result, the RTC 4165a can update and hold the calendar information and the time information by the power supply from the battery 4165b even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets them in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c described above, and sets them in the acquired calendar information and time information. Based effects can be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As such an effect, for example, on December 25, the screen of the Christmas tree or the reindeer is unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, or on New Year's Eve, the New Year countdown is performed. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. The calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to the calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds the brightness setting information of the LED when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type. There is. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with the LED type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and performs the brightness adjustment of the backlight by PWM control. . The brightness setting information is brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the currently set game. The board side effect display device 1600 and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the door frame side effect display device 460, are included.

  In addition to the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, the time information, and the brightness setting information as the information of the year, month, day, and hour, minute, second that are first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are equipped with cold cathode tube type backlights, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set to ON / OFF control or only ON of the backlight. It is supposed to do.

  Various information such as calendar information, time information, brightness setting information, and input date / time information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa is set on the manufacturing line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, the year when the input date and time information is input as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on. It is set to the manufacturing date and time which is month and day and hour, minute and second.

  Thus, in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, in addition to the calendar information and the time information, the brightness setting information and the input date and time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is equipped with an LED type backlight. , Information that needs to be maintained can be stored and retained independently of model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, probability of occurrence of big hit game state in low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information and the like stored and held in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright with the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 set to the manufacturing date and time depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. , It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the brightness of the backlight to a predetermined brightness. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the calendar information and the time information are reset, and the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is desired. You can adjust the brightness. The desired brightness of the backlight of the adjusted game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the brightness of the LED stored in the brightness setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the LED type, the game board side effect is displayed. The decrease in brightness due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the input date and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, identifies the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and the calendar information and the time for identifying the date. Time information specifying minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time is specified, and the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in 5% steps in a range from 100% to 70%. The brightness setting information having the brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set is acquired. The acquired brightness setting information is corrected based on the correction information stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b in advance.

  For example, when June has already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted on the basis of the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 80% which is obtained by further adding 5% which is the acquired correction information. Then, when 12 months have already passed from the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is obtained from 1b, and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, this 75% is set. The brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted on the basis of the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness becomes 85%, which is obtained by further adding 10% which is the correction information acquired. Light.

  Note that the current date and time may be specified by directly acquiring the calendar information specifying the date and the time information specifying the hour, minute, and second from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition processing of step S1002 in the control unit power-on processing. And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to specify the current date and time.

[834. Volume control volume]
As described above, the volume adjusting volume 1510a can adjust the volume of the music, the effect sound, etc. flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a has a variable resistance value when the knob portion is rotated, and the peripherally-controlled A / D converter 1511ak electrically connected to the knob portion has a knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and are managed as the substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the board volume 0 toward the board volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volumes 0 to 6, so that music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects are made to flow from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In addition, in the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a clerk or the like in the hall of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or a fraudulent act on the pachinko machine 1, and a game effect. The contents related to, etc. (for example, the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 is rendered as a more powerful one, or there is a high possibility that the player is in a gaming state advantageous to the player). Etc.) also flows from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound do not depend on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all, and the sound is muted. To the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. Accordingly, for example, even when a store clerk in the hall or the like rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, the music or sound effects flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are produced. Although the sound is low, when the pachinko machine 1 is out of order or the player is cheating, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a, and in addition to the dial operating unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400, By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music or sound effect. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, if the dial operation section 401 or the pressing operation section 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period in which the demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of this setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value, and Then, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There is. This adjusted sound volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music and sound effect is included among a plurality of tracks in the sound source with built-in sound source VDP1512a, and the effect sound is changed. Although it is reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the above, it is not reflected in the adjustment in the volume of the above-mentioned notification sound and notification sound.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effect is adjusted by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation portion 401 or the pressing operation portion 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods: a case where the volume of music or a sound effect is adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of. Since the volume control volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, the main body frame 4 must be opened from the outer frame 2 without fail. Then, the clerk of the hall can rotate the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the clerk in the hall, the player may feel small and may be difficult to hear the music or the sound effect, or the player may feel large and feel the music or the sound effect loud. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, within a predetermined time, the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 are operated, or the customer waits for a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within the period in which the operation is performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the screen of the setting mode, the volume of music or sound effect can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thereby, the player can adjust the volume of the music or the sound effect to a desired volume. Therefore, when it is difficult for the clerk in the hall to hear the adjusted sound volume and hear the music or the sound effect, the effect operation unit 400 When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 is operated to increase the volume to a desired level, and when the clerk in the hall feels the volume adjusted to be loud and the music or the sound effect is noisy, the effect operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game for a predetermined time, becomes a customer waiting state, and is repeatedly demonstrated by the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and playing a game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume is adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. As a result, if the player, who was seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and was playing a game, feels the volume is low and it is difficult to hear music or sound effects, this time he or she sits in front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the push operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired volume, and last time, sit down on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to play the game. If the player feels the adjusted volume to be loud and the music and the sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front of the pachinko machine 1 and plays the game this time uses the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or The pressing operation section 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[8. Power system]
Next, the power supply system of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76. 75 is a block diagram showing the power supply system of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 76 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 75. First, the power supply board 931 will be described, and then the power supply to each control board and the like will be described. The grounds (GND) of various boards and the grounds (GND) of various terminal boards are electrically connected to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 931 and are the same ground (GND).

[8-1. Power board 931]
The power board 931 is electrically connected to a power cord, and the plug of this power cord is inserted into the power outlet of the Pachinko island facility. When the power switch 934 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power board 931 so that the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 75, the power supply board 931 includes a power supply control section 935 and a firing control section 953. The power supply control unit 935 is a circuit that creates various DC voltages from AC 24V (AC24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies backup power to the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The portion 953 is a circuit for driving and controlling the firing solenoid 682 of the hitting ball launching device 650 shown in FIG. 5 and the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 shown in FIG.

  The power supply control unit 935 includes a synchronous rectification circuit 935a, a power factor correction circuit 935b, a smoothing circuit 935c, a power supply generation circuit 935d, and capacitors BC0 and BC1. The AC 24V supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the power supply substrate 931 and is also supplied to the synchronous rectification circuit 935a. The synchronous rectification circuit 935a rectifies 24 V AC (AC 24 V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and supplies the rectified AC power to the power factor correction circuit 935b. The power factor correction circuit 935b improves the power factor of the rectified power to generate direct current + 37V (DC + 37V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 37V") and supplies it to the smoothing circuit 935c. The smoothing circuit 935c removes the supplied + 37V ripple to smooth + 37V and supplies the smoothed + 37V to the firing control circuit 953a and the power generation circuit 935d of the firing control unit 953.

  The capacitor BC0 supplies backup power to the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the capacitor BC1 is built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951. The backup power is supplied to the specified RAM (RAM with built-in payout control).

  The launch control circuit 953a of the launch control unit 953 uses the + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c as a driving power source, and the gaming ball 5a shown in FIG. The drive current for launching (firing) toward the ball is adjusted and output to the firing solenoid 682, while a constant current is output to the ball feeding solenoid 255 of the ball feeding unit 250 to output the ball of the ball feeding unit 250. The sending member receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and controls to send the game ball received by the ball sending member to the hitting ball launching device 650 side.

  The power supply generation circuit 935d is DC + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”), DC + 12V (DC + 12V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 12V”) from + 37V supplied from the smoothing circuit 935c, and DC. + 24V (DC + 24V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 24V") is created and supplied to the payout control board 951 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, respectively. The power supply system supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line, the power supply system supplied with + 12V is a + 12V power supply line, and the power supply system supplied with + 24V is a + 24V power supply line.

  + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the payout control board 951 as described later. The + 5V supplied to the payout control board 951 is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control filter circuit 951a and to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM via the diode PD0. ing. The + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from + 12V from the payout control board 951. The + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control filter circuit 1310h and to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM via the diode MD0. ing.

  The minus terminal of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the plus terminal of the capacitor BC1 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control board 951 and is paid out. The cathode terminal of the diode PD0 of the control board 951 is also electrically connected. That is, + 5V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply substrate 931 causes a current to flow toward the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the forward direction of the power supply terminal of the payout control RAM by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1. Electric current flows to the plus terminal. As described above, the capacitor BC1 is + 5V by an electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 returns to the payout control board 951 and again from the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. Are supplied and can be recharged. As a result, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charges charged in the capacitor BC1 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as the payout VBB. Therefore, although the current does not flow to the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a due to the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the payout control internal RAM to retain the stored contents. It has become so.

  The negative terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 931 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0 is electrically connected to the power supply terminal of the main control internal RAM of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. And is also electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 of the main control board 1310. In other words, + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g has a current flowing toward the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM in the forward direction by the diode MD0 and the positive terminal of the capacitor BC0. The electric current is designed to flow toward. As described above, the capacitor BC0 is supplied with + 5V by the electrical connection method in which + 5V generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g is supplied from the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 to the power supply board 931. You can do it. As a result, + 12V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g can create + 5V. When it disappears, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied as the main VBB to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a has a diode at the power supply terminal. Although the current is blocked by MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the main VBB is supplied to the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM so that the stored contents are retained. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power supply to the main control built-in RAM is composed of the diode MD0 and the capacitor BC0.

[8-2. Voltage supplied to each control board, etc.]
Next, an outline of the voltage supplied to each control board and the like will be described, and subsequently, the voltage supplied to the payout control board and the voltage supplied to the main control board will be described.

  The three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the payout control board 951 as shown in FIG. 75, and among these three types of voltage, + 12V and Two types of voltage of +24 V are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951. Further, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 are supplied to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the surroundings via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. It is supplied to the control board 1510 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, respectively.

  The three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 are, as shown in FIG. 76A, the lamp drive circuit 4170a of the lamp drive board 4170 and the drive source drive circuit of the motor drive board 4180. 4180a, respectively. The lamp driving circuit 4170a of the lamp driving board 4170 outputs various signals such as a lighting signal, a blinking signal and a gradation lighting signal to various decorative boards of the game board 5, and the driving source driving circuit 4180a of the motor driving board 4180 is a game. A drive signal is output to an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid of the board 5.

  The peripheral control board 1510 includes a + 3.3V generating circuit 1510b for generating a direct current 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as "+ 3.3V") from + 5V supplied from the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. ing. The + 3.3V generated by the + 3.3V generation circuit 1510b is supplied to the liquid crystal module 1600a of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, + 12V supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 is supplied to the backlight power supply 1600b of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  On the other hand, the three types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 are supplied to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, as shown in FIG. The frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 includes a + 9V creation circuit 194a that creates a direct current + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”) from + 12V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. In addition to + 9V created by the + 9V creation circuit 194a, a total of four types of voltages of + 5V, + 12V, and + 24V supplied from the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are supplied to various decorative substrates of the door frame 3.

  In addition, + 12V supplied to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 is supplied to the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x. The upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x creates + 3.3V from + 12V. The + 3.3V generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x is supplied to various electronic components forming the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V shown in FIG. 74, and the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y. And door frame side effect display device 460. The voltage generated by the upper plate side liquid crystal module backlight power supply circuit 4450y is supplied to the door frame side effect display device 460.

[8-2-1. Voltage supplied to payout control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the payout control board 951 includes a payout control filter circuit 951a and the like in addition to the payout control MPU 952a and the like. The payout control filter circuit 951a is supplied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 and removes noise from this + 5V. The + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode PD0, and is also supplied to, for example, the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control unit 952. + 12V from the power supply board 931 is supplied to, for example, the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952, and is also supplied to the external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 via the payout control board 951. The external communication circuit 784a of the external terminal board 784 is a circuit that outputs a signal that conveys the number of game balls dispensed by the pachinko machine 1 and game information of the pachinko machine 1 to a hall computer installed in a game hall (hall). Is. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1 from the signal output from the external communication circuit 784a. Note that +24 from the power supply board 931 is not used in the payout control board 951 and is supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951.

[8-2-2. Voltage supplied to main control board]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 includes a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, a main control filter circuit 1310h, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, and the like in addition to the main control MPU 1310a and the like. The + 5V creation circuit 1310g is supplied with + 12V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and creates + 5V, which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a, from this + 12V. In the main control board 1310, the power supply system generated by the + 5V generation circuit 1310g and supplied with + 5V is a + 5V power supply line. In this embodiment, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 and the + 5V power supply line created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 are not electrically connected. Since the circuit is configured as described above, the + 5V power supply line created by the power supply creation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 is not electrically connected to various electronic components of the main control board 1310, and + 5V of the main control board 1310 is not provided. The + 5V power supply line created by the creating circuit 1310g is not electrically connected to various electronic components such as other boards except the main control board 1310.

  The main control filter circuit 1310h is supplied with + 5V created by the + 5V creation circuit 1310g, and removes noise from this + 5V. This + 5V is supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 via the diode MD0, and is also supplied to the main control MPU 1310a and the like, for example. + 12V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control input circuit 1310b, and + 24V from the payout control board 951 is supplied to, for example, the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and monitors the signs of power failure or momentary power failure of these + 12V and + 24V. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure notification signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notification when detecting signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure notice signal is input to the payout control MPU 952a via the main control board 1310 and the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control board 951. Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Also, the power failure notice signal is input to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 as shown in FIG. 76 (b). At the same time, it is adapted to be input to the decoration board of the door frame or the like via the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e applies the voltage to one of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line by monitoring the voltage applied to the two power lines of the + 12V power line and the + 24V power line, respectively. Compared with the case of monitoring the applied voltage, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of power failure such as power failure or momentary power failure.

[9. Main control board circuit]
Next, the circuit of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79. 77 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the main control board, FIG. 78 is a circuit diagram showing a power failure monitoring circuit, and FIG. 79 is a circuit showing a communication interface circuit between the main control board and the peripheral control board. It is a figure. First, the main control filter circuit 1310h shown in FIG. 75 will be described, and subsequently, the power supply created by the main control board 1310, the main control system reset, the main control crystal oscillator, the main control input circuit, the power failure monitoring circuit, and the main control MPU. Various input / output signals to and from the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a, a main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e, a + 5V generation circuit 1310g, and a main control circuit shown in FIGS. In addition to the control filter circuit 1310h, as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. 77, a main control system reset MIC1 that outputs a reset signal, and a main control crystal oscillator MX0 that outputs a clock signal (in the present embodiment, 24 MHz (MHz) )) Is mainly composed.

[9-1. Main control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 77, the main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control 3-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and is magnetically shielded by ferrite and has excellent attenuation characteristics. The main control 3-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal to which + 5V created by the + 5V creating circuit 1310g is applied, its second terminal grounded to the ground (GND), and the noise component removed from its third terminal. + 5V is output. The + 5V applied to the first terminal is first electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded (GND), so that the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage) is removed first. Have been smoothed.

  The + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). By being connected to, the ripple is further removed and smoothed. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the like. In addition, in the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the pachinko island facility is shut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. It is adapted to be applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing ripples. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the capacitor MC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode MD0. A cathode terminal of the diode MD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and one end of which is connected to the ground (GND) to form a capacitor MC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode MD0 and the other end of the capacitor MC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC0 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. That is, + 5V, which has been smoothed by removing the noise component by the main control filter circuit 1310h, is applied to the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and via the diode MD0, the VBB terminal of the main control internal RAM and the capacitor BC0. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, + 12V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is not supplied to the + 5V generation circuit 1310g of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 and + 5V is generated. When the circuit 1310g cannot generate + 5V, the electric charge charged in the capacitor BC0 is supplied to the main control board 1310 as the main VBB, so that the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the VDD terminal. Although the current is blocked by the diode MD0 and the current does not flow and the main control MPU 1310a does not operate, the stored contents are held by applying the main VBB to the VBB terminal of the RAM with built-in main control.

[9-2. Main control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the power supply terminal of the main control system reset MIC1. The main control system reset MIC1 resets the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function, and has a delay circuit built therein. The delay capacitance terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time by the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of this capacitor MC5. Is able to. Specifically, the main control system reset MIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the main control system reset MIC1 is electrically connected to the SRST terminal which is the reset terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR1 electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is a capacitor grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the other end of MC6. The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC6. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is higher than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output with reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 1310ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRST terminal of the main control MPU 1310a and the reset terminal of the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function are both negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the main control MPU 1310a and the reset function are provided. The associated main control output circuit 1310ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[9-3. Main control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 77, + 5V in which the noise component has been removed and smoothed by the main control filter circuit 1310h is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0. The VDD terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V input to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. In addition to the VDD terminal, the smoothed + 5V is applied to the output frequency selection terminals A terminal, B terminal, C terminal and ST terminal, respectively. The main control crystal oscillator MX0 outputs a clock signal of 24 MHz from an F terminal, which is an output terminal, by applying +5 V to each of the A terminal, the B terminal, the C terminal, and the ST terminal.

  The F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is electrically connected to the CLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, and the clock signal of 24 MHz is input. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0, is grounded to the ground (GND), and the D terminal for outputting the divided frequency of the F terminal of the main control crystal oscillator MX0 is not electrically connected to the outside. It is in a state.

[9-4. Main control input circuit]
The main control input circuit 1310b detects from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, and the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. In addition to the signal, this is a circuit to which an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from an operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each switch is input is the same, the circuit to which the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 is input will be described here.

[9-4-1. Circuit to which operation signal (RAM clear signal) from operation switch is input]
First, as described above, the operation switch 954 includes a RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and a main control of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is designed to be operated when clearing the RAM (RAM with built-in main control) built in the MPU 1310a, or when an error is reported after the power is turned on, it is operated to cancel the error. Function to perform RAM clear within a predetermined period after power is turned on, and error release after power is turned on (after the period when the RAM clear function is achieved, that is, after a predetermined period has passed from power on) And the function of performing. Since the main control board 1310 does not have the function of releasing the error that the payout control board 951 has, the main control board 1310 does not operate when the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. A process for clearing the main control built-in RAM is performed by judging it as a RAM clear signal for clearing the built-in RAM.

  To the main control board 1310, an operation signal whose logic is LOW is input from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is not operated, while a logic signal is output from the payout control board 951 when the operation switch 954 is operated. The operation signal in which HI becomes HI is input from the payout control board 951 (detailed description of this point will be described later).

  As shown in FIG. 77, the transmission line for transmitting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 provided on the payout control board 951 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on has a pull-up with one end electrically connected to the + 12V power line. It is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR2 and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 via the resistor MR3. The base terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the resistor MR3, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR4 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR5 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC10 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC10 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC10A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit for outputting the operation signal from the operation switch 954 in the payout control board 951 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the transmission of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is transmitted. The line is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. In the main control board 1310, when the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW, and the operation switch 954 is operated. In the meantime, the operation signal from the payout control board 951 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2, and the logic becomes HI and is input.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR3 and MR4 and the transistor MTR0 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, whereby the transistor MTR0 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR5, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a must instruct to perform RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is HI. to decide.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal which is pulled up to the +12 V side by the pull-up resistor MR2 and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0 to turn on the transistor MTR0, The circuit will also turn on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the operation signal from the operation switch 954 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. To be done. The main control MPU 1310a is for instructing to perform a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control internal RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW. To judge.

  The operation signal from the operation switch 954 is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor MR2. This is because the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input through the payout control board 951. That is, between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is higher than the control reference voltage of +5 V in order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards. The signal reliability is enhanced by using + 12V which is the voltage. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensor 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, and the second starting opening sensor 4004, which are directly input to the main control board 1310, are moved to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor. While being pulled up, the detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 4024, the count sensor 4005, the general winning opening sensor 4020, and the gate sensor 4003, which are input via the panel relay board 4161 shown in FIG. 69, are sent to the main control board 1310. Since it is not directly input, like the operation signal from the operation switch 954, it is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor.

[9-5. Blackout monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 75, the main control board 1310 is supplied with two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931 via the payout control board 951, and + 12V and + 24V are input to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. ing. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors the signs of + 12V and + 24V power failure or momentary power failure, and when detecting the sign of power failure or momentary power failure, a power failure notice signal is sent as a power failure notice to the main control MPU 1310a and the payout control board. It is output to the payout control MPU 952a of 951 and the peripheral control board 1510. Here, first, the configuration of the power failure monitoring circuit will be described, and then the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 24V, the power failure or instantaneous power failure of + 12V, and the output of the power failure warning signal will be described.

[9-5-1. Configuration of power failure monitoring circuit]
As shown in FIG. 78, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e mainly includes a shunt type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, an open collector output type comparator MIC21, a D type flip-flop MIC22, and transistors MTR20 to MTR23.

  The REF terminal which is the reference voltage input terminal and the K terminal which is the cathode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20 are electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. + 5V is applied, and the current input to the REF terminal is limited by the resistor MR20. The K terminal outputs a reference voltage Vref (2.495 V is set in the present embodiment) which is a comparison reference voltage of the comparator MIC21. The K terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the reference voltage Vref output from the K terminal is rippled (multiplied to the voltage by the capacitor MC20). AC component) is removed and smoothed. The A terminal, which is the anode terminal of the shunt-type stabilized power supply circuit MIC20, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The comparator MIC21 includes two voltage comparison circuits, one of which (MIC21A) is used to compare the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V and the reference voltage Vref, and the other one (MIC21B). , + 12V monitor voltage V2 and reference voltage Vref are used for comparison. The monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied to the third terminal which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the second terminal which is the negative terminal of the MIC21A. The monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V is applied to the 5th terminal which is the plus terminal of the MIC 21B, and the reference voltage Vref is applied to the 6th terminal which is the minus terminal of the MIC 21B. The results of these comparisons are input to the D type flip-flop MIC22. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 includes two D-type flip-flop circuits, one of which (MIC22A) is used in this embodiment. The Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC21 whose one end is grounded (GND), and +5 V applied to the Vcc terminal which is the power supply terminal of the comparator MIC21 is The ripple is removed and smoothed by the capacitor MC21, and the GND terminal which is the ground terminal of the comparator MIC21 is grounded to the ground (GND).

[9-5-2. + 24V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 24V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21A of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 24V monitoring voltage V1 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the third terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 to which the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR21 electrically connected to the + 24V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR22 that is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and the other end of the capacitor MC23 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 24V monitoring voltage V1 applied to the third terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is + 24V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR21 and MR22, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC23. . The values of the resistors MR21 and MR22 are set to a preset power failure detection voltage V1pf (21.40V in the present embodiment) when the voltage of + 24V is interrupted or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage starts to drop from + 24V. Then, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The first terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21, is an open collector output, and is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and One end is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24, which is grounded to the ground (GND), and is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The capacitor MC24 plays a role as a low-pass filter.

  When the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitor voltage V1 of + 24V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the first terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 24V is smaller than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, the monitoring voltage V1 of + 24V becomes smaller than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-3. + 12V power failure or momentary power failure monitoring]
As described above, the + 12V power failure or the instantaneous power failure is monitored by the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 comparing the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 with the reference voltage Vref. As shown in FIG. 78, the fifth terminal, which is the plus terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 to which the + 12V monitoring voltage V2 is applied, has one end and the other end of the resistor MR24 electrically connected to the + 12V power line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR25 which is grounded to the ground (GND), the other ends of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and the other end of the capacitor MC25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Are electrically connected. The + 12V monitoring voltage V2 applied to the 5th terminal, which is the positive terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21, is + 12V divided by the resistance ratio of the resistors MR24 and MR25, and smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor MC25. . The values of the resistors MR24 and MR25 become a preset power failure detection voltage V2pf (set to 10.47V in this embodiment) when the voltage of + 12V starts a power failure or a momentary power failure and the voltage starts to drop from + 12V. Then, the monitor voltage V2 of + 12V is set to have the same value as the reference voltage Vref.

  The 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 has an open collector output and is electrically connected to the 1st terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC 21A described above, so that one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. Of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 by being electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR23 which is electrically connected to the other end and electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC24 which is grounded to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the PR terminal which is a terminal. The capacitor MC24 plays the role of a low-pass filter, as described above.

  When the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes higher than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is + 5V by the pull-up resistor MR23. The signal that has been pulled to the side and whose logic has become HI is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  On the other hand, when the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf, the monitoring voltage V2 of + 12V becomes lower than the reference voltage Vref, and the voltage applied to the 7th terminal which is the output terminal of the MIC21B of the comparator MIC21 is the ground (GND). The signal that is pulled to the side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

[9-5-4. Output of power failure warning signal]
The D-type flip-flop MIC22 stores the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, according to the change in the edge of the clock signal input to the 1CK terminal, which is the clock input terminal. (Logic) is output from the output terminal 1Q terminal, and a value obtained by inverting the stored value (logic) is output from the output terminal negative logic 1Q terminal. Also, the D-type flip-flop MIC22 releases the latched state when the signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, and outputs the logic of the signal input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. The inverted signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal (at this time, the same logic as that of the signal which is obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q, that is, the signal which is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. A signal having a logic is output from the negative logic 1Q terminal. On the other hand, when a signal having a logic HI is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal, the latched state is set. Further, when the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is set to the latch state by inputting the signal whose logic is HI to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal, the logic is LOW to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. When this signal is input, a state in which a signal whose logic is HI is output from the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal is maintained (at this time, a signal obtained by inverting the logic of the signal output from 1Q is negative logic). Maintain the status output from the 1Q terminal).

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, since the 1D terminal which is the D input terminal and the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal are respectively grounded to the ground (GND), they are connected to the 1CK terminal which is the clock input terminal. The circuit is configured so that there is no change in the edge of the input clock signal and the value (logic) of the signal input to the 1D terminal, which is the D input terminal, is not stored and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal. ing. As described above, the D type flip-flop MIC22 has a signal from the terminal 1 which is the output terminal of the MIC21A of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the power failure or the instantaneous power failure of + 24V and the power failure of + 12V to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal. Alternatively, the signal from the terminal 7 which is the output terminal of the MIC 21B of the comparator MIC21 that monitors the instantaneous blackout is input, and based on these signals, the signal is output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal. The Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC22 whose one end is grounded (GND) and is applied to the Vcc terminal which is a power supply terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The + 5V is smoothed by removing ripples by the capacitor MC22, the GND terminal which is the ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the negative logic 1Q terminal which inverts the logic of the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal is electrically connected to the outside. Is not connected.

  In the D-type flip-flop MIC22, in the present embodiment, the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. This power failure clear signal is started to be output and stopped after a lapse of a predetermined time in a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, performed by the main control MPU 1310a. Since the CLR terminal is a negative logic input, the logic of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a becomes LOW and is input to the CLR terminal through the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 is designed to release the latch state when a power failure clear signal is input to the CLR terminal. At this time, the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal, is inverted to the output terminal. Output from the 1Q terminal.

  On the other hand, when the output of the power failure clear signal from the main control MPU 1310a is stopped, the logic becomes HI and is input to the CLR terminal via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 sets a latched state when the power failure clear signal is not input to the CLR terminal, and latches the input state in which the logic is LOW at the PR terminal.

  The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The signal output from the 1Q terminal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is electrically connected to the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, and resets the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22. The functionless main control output circuit 1310cb outputs it as a payout power failure notice signal to the payout control board 951 and outputs it to the peripheral control board 1510 as a peripheral power failure warning signal.

  As shown in FIG. 78, the main control input circuit 1310b that electrically connects the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the MIC22, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR26 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 via the resistor MR27. It is connected. The base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor MR27 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR28 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The main control is performed via the ICMIC 23 (the non-inverting buffer ICMIC 23 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (MIC 23A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 1310a.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR27 and MR28 and the transistor MTR20 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR20 turns off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR20 is turned on. The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has a logic LOW signal and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor MR29 and the logic becomes HI via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23, and the power failure notice signal is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 has its logic level of HI and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR20. This turns on the transistor MTR20. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and the power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23 is the input terminal of the input port PA of the main control MPU1310a. Input to PA1.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function, which outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the payout control board 951 as the payout power failure notice signal, is open. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, and the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the transistor MTR21 of the preceding stage is connected via the resistor MR30. It is electrically connected to the base terminal. The base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR30, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR31 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the previous-stage transistor MTR21 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR32 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage through the resistor MR33. The base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the resistor MR33, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR34 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the rear stage is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC26 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and wiring. It is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is electrically connected to the payout control board 951 via a wiring (harness), the payout control input of the payout control section 952 shown in FIG. In the circuit 952b, one end is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. Connected to each other.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR30 and MR31 and the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and the circuit composed of the resistors MR33 and MR34 and the transistor MTR22 in the following stage is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and is a D type flip-flop. It is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is an output terminal of the MIC 22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor in the previous stage is pulled down. The MTR21 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is increased to + 5V by the resistor MR32. As a result, the transistor MTR22 in the latter stage is turned on, and the switch circuit in the latter stage is also turned on. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR21 is turned on, The switch circuit in the preceding stage is also turned on, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage, which is the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and The transistor MTR22 is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is a terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic set to LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage. Transistor MTR21 turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the preceding stage is pulled up to +5 V by the resistor MR32 and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the following stage, so that the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness), and the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is paid out. It is input to the control board 951.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic HI and is applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR21 at the preceding stage. By the input, the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR21 in the previous stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) and applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage, and the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness). The withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 78, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function that outputs the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 to the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure notice signal is opened. The circuit is configured as a collector output type, the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is electrically connected to the resistor MR26 of the main control input circuit 1310b described above, and the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 via the resistor MR35. Is electrically connected to. The base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor MR35, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR36 having one end grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness), the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72, one end thereof is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) electrically connected to the + 12V power source line, and electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Connected.

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR35 and MR36 and the transistor MTR23 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  When the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor MTR23 is turned off. , The switch circuit is also turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 5V and the transistor MTR23 is turned on, The switch circuit is also turned on.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes HI is the preset of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Since the signal is output to the PR terminal, which is the terminal, the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, has its logic level LOW and is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. Turn off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor in the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), so that the logic becomes HI. The peripheral power failure notice signal that has become is input to the peripheral control board 1510.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, the signal whose logic becomes LOW is D. Since it is inputted to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the type flip-flop MIC22, the signal outputted from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 becomes HI and its logic is inputted to the base terminal of the transistor MTR23. This turns on the transistor MTR23. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the peripheral control board 1510 via the wiring (harness), and the peripheral power failure notice signal whose logic becomes LOW is the peripheral control board. 1510 is input.

  In this way, the main control input circuit 1310b that transmits the signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22, to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure notice signal, and the 1Q terminal that is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. The main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function for outputting the signal output from the peripheral control board 1510 as the peripheral power failure warning signal has one transistor each, and the power failure warning signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripherals. While the logic of the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the control board 1510 is the same, the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 is output to the output control board 951. Main function without reset function that outputs as power failure notice signal The output circuit 1310cb has two transistors, a front stage and a rear stage, and the logic of the payout power failure notice signal is the logic of the power failure notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a and the peripheral power failure notice signal input to the peripheral control board 1510. It is a logic that is the reverse of the logic of (1) and is different from the logic of the power failure warning signal and the logic of the peripheral power failure warning signal.

  In addition, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR29 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and the main control MPU1310a via the non-inverting buffer ICMIC23. Of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function, the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 at the latter stage of the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function is connected via the wiring (harness). In the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 in 951, one end is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, and the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function is provided. The collector terminal of the transistor MTR23 of Through the harness), the payout control input circuit of the peripheral control unit 1511 in the peripheral control board 1510, which is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to one end of which is connected + 12V power supply line and electrically. This means that between the collector terminal of the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a, the transistor MTR20 of the main control input circuit 1310b and the main control MPU 1310a are connected to each other. Since it is mounted on the main control board 1310, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board are used to notify the power failure by the logic (ON / OFF signal) of the power failure warning signal using + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a. In order to suppress the influence of noise that enters the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the boards, the main control MPU 1310a, and the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Control of payout control MPU 952a and peripheral control MPU 1511a Is the reference voltage + doing power failure notice by the logic of the power failure warning signal with certain + 12V at a higher voltage (ON / OFF signals) than 5V.

[9-6. Various input / output signals to main control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals to / from the main control MPU 1310a will be described with reference to FIG. The RXA terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the main control MPU 1310a, receives the serial data from the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 as the payer serial data reception signal via the main control input circuit 1310b. . On the other hand, the TXA terminal and the TXB terminal, which are the serial data output terminals of the serial output port of the main control MPU 1310a, use the serial data transmitted from the TXA terminal to the payout control board 951 as the main pay serial data transmission signal without the reset function. The main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function transmits the main payment serial data transmission signal to the payout control board 951 and the TXB terminal transmits the serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. A main serial output signal 1310cb having no reset function is transmitted as a serial serial data transmission signal to the peripheral control board 1510 from the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function.

  In addition to the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above being input to each input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, a payout indicating that normal reception of the main payment serial data reception signal described above has been completed. The payer ACK signal from the control board 951 is input via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signals from various switches such as the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69 are sent via the main control input circuit 1310b. They are input respectively.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a, for example, the main payment ACK signal that notifies the completion of the normal reception of the above-described payment main serial data reception signal is output to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function. Then, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function outputs a main pay ACK signal to the payout control board 951, or a drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function for the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to the starting opening solenoid 2107 through the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d, and various displays such as the first special symbol display 1403 shown in FIG. 69. Drive signal to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. To output a drive signal from the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to each display, or to output various information (game information) about a game to the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function to output a main signal with a reset function. The control output circuit 1310ca outputs various kinds of information regarding the game (game information) to the payout control board 951.

[9-7. Interface circuit for communication between main control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a communication interface circuit between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIG. 79. To the main control board 1310, + 12V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is supplied via the payout control board 951, and the + 5V creation circuit 1310g creates + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a from this + 12V. ing. The main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise that enters a wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. In order to suppress the noise, the reliability is improved by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than the control reference voltage of + 5V of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Specifically, the main control board 1310 causes the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit, and the communication interface circuit mainly includes a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Has been done. On the other hand, in the peripheral control board 1510, a diode AD10, an electrolytic capacitor AC10 (capacitance: 47 μF in this embodiment), a photocoupler AIC10 (infrared LED and photo IC are built in as a communication interface circuit. It is composed mainly of).

+ 12V supplied from the power supply board 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 of the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951, and the negative terminal of the diode MD50 is grounded to the ground (GND). Is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 (capacitance: 220 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment). The cathode terminal of the diode MD50 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 and also electrically connected to the anode terminal (terminal 1) of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a wiring (harness). It is connected to the.
As a result, when the power from the power supply board 931 is no longer supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 951 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is reduced. + 12V can be continuously applied from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (electrostatic capacity: 470 μF in this embodiment) shown in FIG. 77 when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs. Since the electric charge is applied as + 5V, the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a serially manages at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. The unit 1310aec can transfer the data to the transmission shift register 41eaa and complete the transmission from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as the main serial data.

  The main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the wiring (harness) that electrically connects the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, as described above. In order to suppress the influence of intruding noise, the reliability is enhanced by transmitting using + 12V which is a voltage higher than + 5V which is the control reference voltage of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a power failure or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC50 is applied as +12 V from the main control board 1310 to the anode terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the main loop serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to the transmission shift register 41eaa by the serial management unit 1310aec. When transmitted from the shift register 1310eaa as main-circulation serial data, a main-circulation serial data transmission signal whose logic is HI can be transmitted from the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 by + 12V.

  In the present embodiment, the storage capacity of the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a has 32 bytes, and one packet is composed of 3 bytes of data. Therefore, a maximum of 10 packets of data is stored in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb. Further, in the present embodiment, the transfer bit rate of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a is set to 19200 bps.

  The cathode terminal (3rd terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR50 of the main control board 1310 via the resistor AR10 and its wiring (harness). The resistance AR10 of the peripheral control board 1510 is a limiting resistance for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10.

  The TXB terminal for outputting the main-circulation serial data transmission signal from the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 via. The base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is electrically connected to the resistor MR51, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor MR52 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor MTR50 is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The circuit composed of the resistors MR51 and MR52 and the transistor MTR50 is a switch circuit, and when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is on the ground (GND) side. The transistor MTR50 is turned off and the transistor MTR50 is turned off, and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, no forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, and the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off. On the other hand, when the logic of the main-cycle serial data transmission signal is LOW, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50, the transistor MTR50 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. .. As a result, a forward current flows through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler AIC10 of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the photocoupler AIC10 is turned on.

  + 5V supplied from the power supply substrate 931 is applied to the anode terminal of the diode AD10 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the cathode terminal of the diode AD10 and the negative terminal are ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10 which is grounded. The cathode terminal of the diode AD10 is electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10, and is also electrically connected to the Vcc terminal (6th terminal) which is the power supply terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. The emitter terminal (4th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal (5th terminal) of the photocoupler AIC10 is a pull-up resistor electrically connected to the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor AC10. It is pulled up to the + 5V side by AR11 and is electrically connected to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. When the photocoupler AIC10 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 changes, and the signal is used as the main-circulation serial data transmission signal for the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU1511a Input to the input terminal of.

  Accordingly, as described above, when +5 V supplied from the power supply board 931 is not supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 due to, for example, a power failure or an instantaneous blackout, The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor AC10 can be continuously applied as +5 V to the Vcc terminal of the photocoupler AIC10. When + 5V is applied from the electrolytic capacitor AC10 when an electric power or an instantaneous blackout occurs, the main-circulation serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is transmitted to the main control MPU1310a. The data set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the built-in main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae can be transmitted completely, and the main circumference serial data transmission signal in the middle of transmission, that is, the main circumference serial data is cut off. The peripheral control board 1510 can surely receive the data without any loss.

  When the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510 is HI, the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the transistor Since the photocoupler AIC10 is turned off when the MTR50 is turned off, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor AR11 and the logic becomes HI. The serial data transmission signal is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, while the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is LOW Is applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 because the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor MTR50 is pulled up to + 5V by the resistor MR50 and the transistor MTR50 is turned on to turn on the photocoupler AIC10. The main circuit serial data transmission signal whose logic is set to LOW by lowering the generated voltage to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of the main control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a. As described above, the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler AIC10 is the same as the logic of the main circumference serial data transmission signal transmitted from the TXB terminal of the main control MPU 1310a to the peripheral control board 1510. Is the logic of.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line to which the control reference voltage + 5V of the main control MPU 1310a is applied and the + 12V power supply line to which the communication voltage + 12V applied via the diode MD50 are applied. The measures are taken when the control reference voltage and the communication voltage drop due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. That is, with respect to the main circumference serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a, the + 5V power supply line and the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 using the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h as the first auxiliary power supply, Are electrically connected in parallel, so that even if a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs and the control reference voltage applied from the + 5V power supply line drops, the electrolytic capacitor of the main control filter circuit 1310h that is the first auxiliary power supply. By applying the control reference voltage from the positive terminal of MC2, the state in which the control reference voltage is applied can be maintained, and is composed of a resistor MR50, resistors MR51 and MR52, and a transistor MTR50. Control function without a reset function to function as a communication interface circuit For the output circuit 1310cb, + 12V applied to the + 12V power supply line is applied to the anode terminal of the diode MD50 as a communication voltage, and the cathode terminal of the diode MD50 and the plus of the electrolytic capacitor MC50 which is the second auxiliary power supply. Even if a power failure or a momentary blackout occurs and the communication voltage applied from the + 12V power supply line via the diode MD50 drops due to the electrical parallel connection between the terminal and the terminal, it is the second auxiliary power supply. By applying the communication voltage from the positive terminal of the electrolytic capacitor MC50, the state in which the communication voltage is applied can be maintained. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent fragmentation of a command being transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, and to prevent omission, so that the peripheral control board 1510 reliably receives the command being transmitted. can do. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the missed command immediately after the occurrence of a power failure or at the time of a momentary power failure.

  Further, a plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb of the main-circulation serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a are used as main-circulation serial data, and are composed of resistors MR50, MR51, MR52, and a transistor MTR50. 470 μF is set as the electrostatic capacity of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control filter circuit 1310h so that the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the main control output circuit 1310cb without the reset function that functions as a communication interface circuit. 220 μF is set as the capacitance of the electrolytic capacitor MC50. As a result, even if a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs during transmission from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, a reset that causes all the commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb to function as interface circuits as main-cycle serial data. Since the transmission to the peripheral control board 1510 can be completed via the functionless main control output circuit 1310cb, the peripheral control board 1510 does not cut off the plurality of commands set in the transmission buffer register 1310aeb, and also omits them. It can be received without fail.

[10. Discharge control board circuit]
Next, a circuit and the like of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 85. 80 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit of the payout control unit, FIG. 81 is a circuit diagram showing a payout control input circuit, FIG. 82 is a circuit diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 81, and FIG. 83 is a payout motor drive. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a circuit, FIG. 84 is a circuit diagram showing a CR unit input / output circuit, and FIG. 85 is an input / output diagram showing various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board. Is. First, the payout control filter circuit will be described, and then the circuit of the payout control unit, various input / output signals to / from the main control board, and various output signals to the external terminal board will be described.

[10-1. Discharge control filter circuit]
As shown in FIG. 80, the payout control filter circuit 951a mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The pay-out control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite. The first terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is applied with + 5V from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 and is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0 whose one end is grounded (GND). Therefore, + 5V from the power supply board 931 is smoothed by the capacitor PC0 by first removing the ripple (AC component superimposed on the voltage). The 2nd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the 3rd terminal of the payout control 3 terminal filter PIC0 outputs + 5V with the noise component removed.

  The third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0 is connected to the other end of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF) in this embodiment) whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). By being electrically connected to each other, ripples are further removed and smoothed from +5 V output from the third terminal of the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The smoothed + 5V is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1, the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and the like, which will be described later. . In addition, in the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs and the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is subject to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The voltage is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the generation.

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is further smoothed by removing the ripple by the capacitor PC3. ing. The VSS terminal which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a is electrically connected to the capacitor PC3 and also to the anode terminal of the diode PD0. A cathode terminal of the diode PD0 is electrically connected to a VBB terminal which is a power supply terminal of a RAM (dispensing control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 952a, and one end of which is connected to a ground (GND) to a capacitor PC4. Is electrically connected to the other end of. The VBB terminal of the payout control built-in RAM is electrically connected to the cathode terminal of the diode PD0 and the other end of the capacitor PC4, and is also connected to the plus side of the capacitor BC1 of the power supply substrate 931 shown in FIG. It is electrically connected to the terminal. In other words, + 5V, which has the noise component removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a, is applied to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and also through the diode PD0, the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM and the capacitor BC1. It is designed to be applied to the positive terminal of and. As a result, as described above, when + 5V generated by the power supply generation circuit 935d of the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 75 is no longer supplied to the payout control board 951, the charge charged in the capacitor BC1 is paid out by VBB. Since the current is prevented from flowing to the VDD terminal of the payout control MPU 952a by the diode PD0 and the payout control MPU 952a does not operate, the payout control MPU 952a does not operate at the VBB terminal of the payout control internal RAM. The memory contents are held by applying the payout VBB. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the backup power supply circuit that supplies the backup power to the payout control built-in RAM is configured by the diode PD0 and the capacitor BC1.

[10-2. Circuit of payout controller]
In addition to the payout control MPU 952a, the payout control input circuit 952b, the payout control output circuit 952c, the payout motor drive circuit 952d, and the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, the payout control unit 952 is reset as a peripheral circuit, as shown in FIG. A payout control system reset PIC1 that outputs a signal and a payout control crystal oscillator PX0 (8 megahertz (MHz) in this embodiment) that outputs a clock signal are mainly configured. Here, the payout control system reset will be described first, and then the payout control crystal oscillator, the payout control input circuit, the payout motor drive circuit, the CR unit input / output circuit, and various input / output signals to the payout control MPU will be described.

[10-2-1. Discharge control system reset]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is applied to the power supply terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1. The payout control system reset PIC1 resets the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function, and includes a delay circuit. One end of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the other end of a capacitor PC5 whose one end is grounded (GND), and the delay time of the delay circuit is set by the capacitance of the capacitor PC5. You can do it. Specifically, the payout control system reset PIC1 outputs a system reset signal from the output terminal after a delay time has elapsed when + 5V input to the power supply terminal reaches a threshold value (for example, 4.25V).

  The output terminal of the payout control system reset PIC1 is electrically connected to the SRT0 terminal which is the reset terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. The output terminal is an open collector output type, one end of which is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR1 which is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line, and one end of which is grounded to a capacitor (GND) and grounded. It is electrically connected to the other end of the PC 6. The capacitor PC6 plays a role as a low pass filter. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is larger than the threshold value, the output terminal is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR1 and the logic becomes HI. This logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU952a and the payout control output with the reset function. When the voltage input to the power supply terminal is smaller than the threshold value while being input to the reset terminal of the circuit 952ca, the logic becomes LOW, and this logic is the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function. It is input to each reset terminal. Since the SRT0 terminal of the payout control MPU 952a and the reset terminal of the payout control output circuit 952ca with the reset function are negative logic inputs, when the voltage input to the power supply terminal becomes lower than the threshold value, the payout control MPU 952a and the reset function. The payout control output circuit 952ca is reset. The power supply terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC7 whose one end is grounded (GND), and + 5V input to the power supply terminal is smoothed by removing ripples. The ground terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and the NC terminal is not electrically connected to the outside.

[10-2-2. Discharge control crystal oscillator]
As shown in FIG. 80, + 5V in which the noise component is removed and smoothed by the payout control filter circuit 951a is input to the VCC terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0. The VCC terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC8 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and + 5V input to the VCC terminal is further smoothed by removing ripples. The smoothed + 5V is also applied to the OE terminal which is the output enable (Output Enable) terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, in addition to the VCC terminal. The payout control crystal oscillator PX0 outputs a clock signal of 8 MHz from an OUT terminal which is an output terminal when +5 V is applied to its OE terminal.

  The OUT terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0 is electrically connected to the MCLK terminal which is the clock terminal of the payout control MPU 952a, and a clock signal of 8 MHz is input to the payout control MPU 952a. The GND terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control crystal oscillator PX0, is grounded to the grant (GND).

[10-2-3. Dispensing control input circuit]
The payout control input circuit 952b receives the payout power failure notice signal from the door frame opening switch 618, the main body frame opening switch 619 shown in FIG. 70, and the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. The circuit, the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 70, a circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input via the power supply substrate 931, a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch 954 is input, and the like. .. First, the circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input is explained, then the circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input, the circuit to which the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input, A circuit to which a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor and a circuit to which an operation signal from the operation switch is input will be described. It should be noted that various detection switches such as the full tank detection sensor 279 and the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, and the rotation detection sensor 840 shown in FIG. 70 have various output terminals because they have open collector output types. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from the switch is input is almost the same, here, the circuit to which the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor is input will be described.

[10-2-3 (a). Circuit to which the detection signal from the door frame opening switch is input]
The door frame opening switch 618 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 3 is closed by the body frame 4. The second terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 has a pull-up resistor PR20 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. The base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the resistor PR21, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR22 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR20 and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC20 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR20 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR23 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 20 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 20 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 20A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR20 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a as a door opening signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24. The base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the resistor PR24 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR25 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR21 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR21 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  Further, the first terminal of the door frame opening switch 618 is pulled up to + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 via the resistor PR21, and is also + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR20. Is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 via the resistor PR24, and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 via the resistor PR26 by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. ing. The base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the resistor PR26, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR27 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR22 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a + 12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR22 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR20 and the capacitor PC20 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 or when the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, The door frame opening switch 618 is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing a change in voltage from the door frame opening switch 618 due to a flapping phenomenon in which ON / OFF is repeated for a short time.

  A circuit formed of the resistors PR21 and PR22 and the transistor PTR20, a circuit formed of the resistors PR24 and PR25 and the transistor PTR21, and a circuit formed of the resistors PR26 and PR27 and the transistor PTR22 are door frame opening switches. A switch circuit that is turned on / off according to a detection signal from 618.

When the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR20 is turned on. It turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR23 and the door frame opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. It Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 21 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off.
As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, and thus the transistor The PTR 22 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR20. Then, the transistor PTR20 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the door frame opening signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR20 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR21 is pulled up to + 5V, so that the transistor PTR21 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, the door frame opening switch 618 is OFF, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR22 is increased to the + 5V side, so that the transistor PTR22 is turned ON. However, the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the main frame door open signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is released from the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned on, so that the door frame open signal whose logic becomes HI is the input terminal of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The outer end frame door opening information output signal, which is input to PA0 and whose logic is HI, is input to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door opening signal whose logic is HI is input to the main control board 1310. When the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4, the door frame open switch 618 is turned off, and the door frame open signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. An outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic is LOW is input to the external terminal board 784, and a main frame door opening signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

[10-2-3 (b). Circuit to which the detection signal from the main frame opening switch is input]
The body frame opening switch 619 uses a normally closed type (normally closed (NC)). When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 as shown in FIG. The switch is turned off (disconnected) in a state in which 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. The second terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is grounded to the ground (GND), while the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 has a pull-up resistor PR28 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power source line. It is electrically connected to the end and is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. The base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the resistor PR29 and also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR30 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). Further, the first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR28, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC21 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). . The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR23 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR21 described above, and is also connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is electrically connected to the external terminal board 784 via a wiring (harness), one end of the external terminal board 784 is electrically connected to the + 12V power source line, which is not shown. It is electrically connected to the other end of the up resistor. When the transistor PTR23 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 changes, and the signal is input to the external terminal board 784 as an outer end frame door opening information output signal.

  The first terminal of the body frame opening switch 619 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 via the resistor PR29. And is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 via the resistor PR31. The base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the resistor PR31 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR32 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR24 is grounded to the ground (GND), the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR22 described above, and is shown in FIG. 69 via a wiring (harness). It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 has a + 12V power source. It is electrically connected to the other end of a pull-up resistor (not shown) that is electrically connected to the line. When the transistor PTR24 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 changes, and the signal is input to the main control board 1310 as a main frame door opening signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR28 and the capacitor PC21 is a switch signal generating circuit, and when the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2 or when the main body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2. It is configured as a circuit also having a function of absorbing a variation in voltage from the body frame opening switch 619 due to a flapping phenomenon in which contacts constituting the body frame opening switch 619 repeat ON / OFF for a short time.

  A circuit composed of the resistors PR29 and PR30 and the transistor PTR23 and a circuit composed of the resistors PR31 and PR32 and the transistor PTR24 are switch circuits which are turned on / off by a detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619.

  When the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is ON, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor PTR23 is opened. It turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes HI. Is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side, so that the transistor The PTR 24 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. A door open signal is input to the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR23 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. Accordingly, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR23 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the external terminal board 784 through the wiring (harness), and the outer end frame door opening information output signal whose logic becomes LOW is output. It is input to the external terminal board 784. Further, when the body frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, the body frame opening switch 619 is off, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR24 can be pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR28. Then, the transistor PTR24 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR24 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the main frame door open signal whose logic becomes LOW is the main control board. It is input to 1310.

  As described above, when the main body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the main frame opening switch 619 is turned on to input the outer end frame door open information output signal whose logic becomes HI to the external terminal board 784. The main frame door opening signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the main control board 1310, while the main frame opening switch 619 is turned off when the main frame 4 is closed by the outer frame 2, Is output to the external terminal board 784, and the main frame door open signal whose logic is LOW is input to the main control board 1310.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, one or both of the state where the door frame 3 is closed by the main body frame 4 and the state where the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this case, since the main frame door open signal is input to the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Although it is not possible to determine whether the door frame 3 is opened from the body frame 4 or the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2 based on the above, the door frame 3 and / or It is possible for the player to determine that the main frame 4 is open, which does not occur during the normal game, and the outer end frame door open information output signal is sent to the external terminal board 784. This outer end is supposed to be input The door opening information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer through the external terminal board 784, and the hall computer is in a state where the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 based on the outer end frame door opening information output signal, Or, although it is not possible to determine whether the main body frame 4 is open from the outer frame 2, it is possible that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 is open, which is a state that does not occur during the normal game by the player. You can determine what is happening.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619 are normally closed switches, so that the door frame opening switch 618 is short-circuited and the switch is turned ON ( Even if the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 even when the main body frame opening switch 619 is short-circuited and the switch is turned on (conductive), the main body frame is opened. 4 is released from the outer frame 2. In this way, by adopting the normally closed switches for the door frame opening switch 618 and the main body frame opening switch 619, the main frame door opening signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even at the time of a short circuit, and the outer end The frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

  If the door frame opening switch 618 and the body frame opening switch 619 are changed from a normally closed switch to a normally open type (normally open (NO)) switch (door frame opening switch 618 ′ and body frame opening switch 619 ′). The door frame opening switch 618 ′ is turned on (conducts) when the door frame 3 is closed from the main body frame 4, and is turned off (disconnected) when the door frame 3 is opened to the main body frame 4. . The body frame opening switch 619 'is turned on (conducts) when the body frame 4 is closed from the outer frame 2, and is turned off (disconnected) when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2. Then, even if the door frame opening switch 618 ′ is disconnected for some reason and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the door frame 3 remains open from the main body frame 4, and the main body is broken for some reason. Even when the frame opening switch 619 ′ is disconnected and the switch is turned off (disconnected), the main body frame 4 is opened from the outer frame 2. In this way, the main frame door open signal can be output to the main control board 1310 even when the door frame opening switch 618 'and the main body frame opening switch 619' are normally open switches or even when the wire is disconnected. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal can be transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784.

[10-2-3 (c). Circuit to which a power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit is input]
The transmission line for transmitting the payout power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR40 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line and also has resistance. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 via PR41. The base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the resistor PR41, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR42 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR40 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR43 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also has a non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR40 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a payout power failure notice signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR41 and PR42 and the transistor PTR40 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e provided in the main control board 1310 and a power failure notice signal.

  As described above, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of two types of voltages of + 12V and + 24V from the power supply board 931. When the power failure or the momentary power failure is detected, the reset function is not provided. A payout power failure notice signal is output to the payout control board 951 as a power failure notice via the main control output circuit 1310cb. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e monitors signs of power failure or momentary power failure of + 12V and + 24V, and as described above, the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf, and the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When both conditions of being large are satisfied, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the wiring (harness) and the logic becomes LOW. The payout power failure notice signal is input to the payout control board 951 while the + 24V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the + 12V voltage is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf. When the condition is satisfied, the output of the transistor MTR22 in the subsequent stage is Payout power failure warning signal which logic becomes HI by the voltage applied to the data terminal is pulled + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40 described above via wiring (harness) is input to the payout control board 951.

  When both the condition that the voltage of + 24V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is higher than the power failure detection voltage V2pf are satisfied, that is, there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of + 12V and + 24V. At this time, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the withdrawal control board 951, so that the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the transistor PTR40 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR43. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when either one of the condition that the voltage of + 24V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V1pf and the condition that the voltage of + 12V is lower than the power failure detection voltage V2pf is satisfied, that is, the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V When there is a sign of power failure or momentary power failure, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the withdrawal control board 951, and therefore is applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR40 by the withdrawal power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage applied to the transistor PTR40 is turned on by pulling up the voltage to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor PR40, and the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the payout power failure notice signal in which the logic of the collector terminal of the transistor PTR40 is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Thus, when there is a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of the voltage of + 12V and / or + 24V, the withdrawal power failure notice signal whose logic is HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the withdrawal control MPU 952a, When there is no sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of +12 V and +24 V, the payout power failure notice signal whose logic is LOW is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, when there is a sign of a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of + 12V and / or + 24V, a power failure notice signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when there is no sign of power failure or momentary power failure of the voltage of + 12V and + 24V, the power failure notice signal is input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. The logic of the power outage notice signal input to the payout control MPU 952a and the logic of the power outage notice signal input to the main control MPU 1310a according to the power outage notice are the same logic.

[10-2-3 (d). Circuit to which detection signal from full tank detection sensor is input]
The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 provided in the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. 1 is sent through the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal plate 315 shown in FIG. 1 and the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. Has been entered in. The output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and one end of the payout control board 951 is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. Is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR44a, and is also electrically connected to the first terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor. The three-terminal filter PIC50 for a full-tank detection sensor is a T-type filter circuit, and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded by ferrite.

  The second terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is grounded to the ground (GND), and the third terminal of the three-terminal filter PIC50 for the full tank detection sensor is connected to the full tank detection sensor 3 through the resistor PR44b. It is electrically connected to the first terminal of the terminal filter PIC50 and is also electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 via the resistor PR45. As a result, the detection signal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 after the noise component is removed in the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. The base terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the resistor PR45, is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR46 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and is connected to the ground (GND) at one end. It is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC40 which is electrically connected. The capacitor PC40 plays a role as a low-pass filter. The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR41 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR47 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. The payout control is performed via the ICPIC 40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC 40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC 40B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the MPU 952a. When the transistor PTR41 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a as a full signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR45 and PR46 and the transistor PTR41 is a switch circuit which is turned on / off by a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279.

  As described above, the full tank detection sensor 279 is for detecting whether or not the game ball in which the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full. In the present embodiment, when the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored is not full, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931. In the payout control board 951, the signal pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and the logic becomes HI is input to the payout control board 951 while the accommodation space is full of game balls. , The signal applied to the output terminal of the full-state detection sensor 279 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power supply board 931 and becomes logic LOW. Is input to the payout control board 951.

  When the storage space is not full of game balls stored, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is in the payout control board 951 via the handle relay terminal board 315 and the power board 931. The signal that is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor 44a and has the logic of HI is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 is turned on and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the full signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the storage space is full of gaming balls, the voltage applied to the output terminal of the full tank detection sensor 279 is passed through the handle relay terminal plate 315 and the power supply board 931 and the payout control board. In 951, the signal that is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR41 described above, so that the transistor PTR41 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR41 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor PR47 and the full signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279 is input to the switch circuit including the resistors PR45, PR46, and the transistor PTR41 via the full terminal detection sensor three-terminal filter PIC50. Although the circuit configuration is adopted, the detection signals from the various detection switches such as the out-of-ball detection sensor 827 and the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. The circuit configuration is such that it is directly input to each switch circuit without intervention. Since the full tank detection sensor 279 is provided in the foul cover unit 270 attached to the door frame 3, compared with the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the delivery detection sensor 842, and the like provided in the dispensing device 830 attached to the main body frame 4. , The path for transmitting the detection signal becomes extremely long, and it is extremely susceptible to noise.

  The full tank detection sensor 279 detects whether or not the accommodation space in the second ball passage of the foul cover unit 270 is full of game balls stored, and the payout control MPU 952a is a full tank detection sensor. When it is determined that the accommodation space is full with the stored game balls based on the detection signal from 279, the drive control of the payout motor 834 is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game ball by the payout rotating body. It is designed to control. In other words, if noise enters the transmission path (transmission line) that transmits the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 279, the payout control MPU 952a is not a full tank of the game ball in which the accommodation space is stored, but the payout motor 834 operates. In some cases, the drive control is forcibly stopped to stop the payout of the game balls by the payout rotating body, and the payout motor 834 is driven even though the storage space is full of the game balls. When the game ball is filled up to the upstream side of the above-mentioned prize ball passage by controlling and rotating the payout rotating body to continue the payout of the game ball, the payout rotating body itself cannot rotate and the payout motor 834. Is abnormally applied to the pay-out motor 834, and the pay-out motor 834 is overloaded and abnormally heats up to cause a failure, or the rotary shaft of the pay-out motor 834 is transmitted to the rotary motion of the pay-out rotating body. Sometimes referred to 構等 is or failure. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 279 is first configured in the three-terminal filter PIC50 for full-tank detection sensor so that the noise component is removed. Adopted.

[10-2-3 (e). Circuit to which operation signal from operation switch is input]
Output terminals 1 and 2 of the operation switch 954 are grounded to the ground (GND), and output terminals 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 are connected to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48. It is pulled up and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage through the resistor PR49. The base terminal of the transistor PTR42 at the preceding stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR49, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR50 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The fourth terminal, which is the output terminal of the operation switch 954, is electrically connected to the pull-up resistor PR48, and also electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC41 whose one end is grounded (GND). ing. The emitter terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the preceding-stage transistor PTR42 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR51 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, it is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage through the resistor PR52. The base terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the latter stage is electrically connected to the resistor PR52, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR53 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the latter-stage transistor PTR43 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR54 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC40 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and shapes and outputs the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC40C) without inverting it). It is electrically connected to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a via. The logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is changed by turning ON / OFF the transistors PTR42 and PTR43 in the previous stage, and the signal is changed as the RWMCLR signal to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. Entered in.

  The output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal, are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR42 of the preceding stage via the resistor PR49. It is pulled up to the +5 V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 via the resistor PR55. The base terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the resistor PR55, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR56 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR44 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via a wiring (harness), one end of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 77 is + 12V. It is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor MR2 electrically connected to the power supply line. When the transistor PTR44 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 changes, and the signal is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a as a RAM clear signal.

  The circuit composed of the pull-up resistor PR48 and the capacitor PC41 is a switch signal generation circuit, and when the operation switch 954 is pressed, the contact that constitutes the operation switch 954 repeatedly turns on and off for a short time. It is configured as a circuit that also has a function of absorbing fluctuations in the voltage from the operation switch 954.

  A circuit including the resistors PR49 and PR50 and the transistor PTR42 is a switch circuit in the preceding stage, and a circuit including the resistors PR52 and PR53 and the transistor PTR43 is a switch circuit in the subsequent stage, and the resistors PR55 and PR56 and the transistor PTR44. Is a switch circuit, which is turned on / off by an operation signal from the operation switch 954.

  As described above, the operation switch 954 is provided in the RAM (payout control built-in RAM) built into the payout control MPU 952a of the payout control board 951 and the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is operated to clear the built-in RAM (main control built-in RAM) or to clear the error when an error is reported after the power is turned on. The function to clear the RAM within a predetermined period from the time and the error release after the power is turned on (after the period for performing the function as RAM clear has passed, that is, after the predetermined period has passed since the power was turned on) It has functions and. The operation signal from the operation switch 954 becomes a RAM clear signal in the function of performing the RAM clear within a predetermined period after the power is turned on, while it is after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on). In the function for canceling the error in), it becomes an error canceling signal.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminals of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48, and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor of the preceding stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned on, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned on, which is applied to the collector terminal of the front-stage transistor PTR43 which is the voltage applied to the base of the rear-stage transistor PTR43. By lowering the voltage to the ground (GND) side, the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is turned off, and the switch circuit in the subsequent stage is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is pulled up to the + 5V side by the resistor PR54 and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear to erase the information stored in the payout control internal RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is not given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is HI, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is not an instruction.

  When the operation switch 954 is not operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the terminals 3 and 4 are pulled up to the + 5V side by the pull-up resistor PR48 and the operation signal whose logic becomes HI is the transistor PTR44. Is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44 and the transistor PTR44 is turned on, and the switch circuit is also turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness) and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes LOW is sent to the main control board 1310. Is entered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic LOW shown in FIG. 77 as described above when the RAM clear signal whose logic is LOW is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled up to the +5 V side by the resistor MR5 and the RAM clear signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines that it does not instruct to perform the RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the operation signal whose logic becomes LOW by pulling down the output terminal Nos. 3 and 4 of the operation switch 954 to the ground (GND) side is the transistor of the previous stage. It is input to the base terminal of the PTR42, the front-stage transistor PTR42 is turned off, and the front-stage switch circuit is also turned off. The voltage that rises to the + 5V side by the resistor PR51 turns on the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage and turns on the switch circuit in the subsequent stage. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR43 in the subsequent stage is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the RWMCLR signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control MPU 952a performs a RAM clear for erasing the information stored in the payout control RAM when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. It is determined that the instruction is given, and after the power is turned on (after a predetermined period has elapsed since the power was turned on), when the logic of the RWMCLR signal input to the input terminal PA3 is LOW, error cancellation is performed. Judge that it is an instruction.

  Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated, the output terminal of the operation switch 954, that is, the third terminal and the fourth terminal are pulled down to the ground (GND) side by the pull-up resistor PR48, so that the logic becomes LOW. The signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor PTR44, the transistor PTR44 turns off, and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR44 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor MR2 of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310 via the wiring (harness), and the logic becomes HI. The clear signal is input to the main control board 1310. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the logic HI shown in FIG. 77, as described above, when the RAM clear signal having the logic HI is input within a predetermined period after the power is turned on. When the RAM clear signal is input to the base terminal of the transistor MTR0, the transistor MTR0 turns on and the switch circuit also turns on. As a result, the RAM clear signal in which the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor MTR0 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side and the logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a. When the logic of the RAM clear signal input to the input terminal PA0 is LOW, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the instruction is to perform the RAM clear to erase the information stored in the main control built-in RAM.

[10-2-4. Discharge motor drive circuit]
Next, a payout motor drive circuit 952d for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. 5 will be described. As shown in FIG. 83, the payout motor drive circuit 952d mainly includes a voltage switching circuit 952da and a drive ICPIC 60. The power source input terminals 1 and 2 of the voltage switching circuit 952da are electrically connected to the + 12V power source line and the + 5V power source line, respectively, and + 12V and + 5V are applied, respectively, and the ground terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is connected to the ground (GND). It is grounded. A voltage switching signal is input to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. This voltage switching signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the power supply switching input terminal of the voltage switch circuit 952da. It is supposed to be done. The power output terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da is electrically connected to the cathode terminal 3 and the terminal 10 of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60, and is electrically connected to the power terminal of the payout motor 834. No. 3 which is the cathode terminal of the drive IC PIC60 via the Zener diode PZD60 with + 12V or + 5V as the motor drive voltage based on the voltage switching signal input to the voltage switching input terminal of the voltage switching circuit 952da. It supplies to the terminal and the 10th terminal, respectively, and supplies to the payout motor 834.

  The drive ICPIC 60 includes four Darlington power transistors. In this embodiment, the 6th terminal and the 7th terminal, which are the emitter terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, are grounded to the ground (GND), respectively, and are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60. The payout motor drive signal is input to the certain terminals 1, 5, 8, and 12 through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively. The 2nd terminal, 4th terminal, 9th terminal and 11th terminal which are collector terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 are the 1st terminal, 5th terminal, 8th terminal and 12th terminal which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60 respectively. Correspondingly, when the payout motor drive signal is input to the 1st terminal, the 5th terminal, the 8th terminal, and the 12th terminal, which are the base terminals of the drive ICPIC 60, through the resistors PR60 to PR63, respectively, an excitation signal is generated. A drive pulse is output to each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) corresponding to the payout motor 834. This payout motor drive signal is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function via the resistors PR60 to PR63 to the drive ICPIC 60. The signals are output to the first terminal, the fifth terminal, the eighth terminal, and the twelfth terminal, which are base terminals, respectively. These drive pulses are performed by switching the excitation currents flowing in the respective phases (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) of the payout motor 834, and rotate the payout motor 834. When the drive pulse (excitation signal) of each phase (/ B phase, B phase, A phase, / A phase) is cut off by this switching, a back electromotive force is generated. When this counter electromotive force exceeds the withstand voltage of the drive ICPIC 60, the drive ICPIC 60 is damaged. Therefore, as a protection, the Zener diode PZD0 described above is electrically connected to the cathode IC of the drive ICPIC 60 in front of the 3rd terminal and the 10th terminal. Adopted a circuit configuration that does.

[10-2-5. CR unit input / output circuit]
Next, the CR unit input / output circuit 952e for inputting / outputting various signals to / from the CR unit 6 shown in FIG. 71 will be described. As described above, the payout control board 951 receives the ball rental request signal BRDY and the one-time payout operation start request signal BRQ from the CR unit 6 via the game ball etc. lending device connection terminal plate 869. , And a predetermined voltage VL (+ 12V) and ground LG created from AC24V supplied from the power supply board 931 shown in FIG. 71 are supplied, while the payout control board 951 is connected to a lending device such as a game ball. Through the terminal board 869, an EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has started or ended, and a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out a rental ball is possible or impossible. And output. As shown in FIG. 84, the input / output circuit for inputting / outputting these various signals mainly includes photocouplers PIC70 to PIC74 (infrared LEDs and phototransistors are built in).

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 via the resistor PR70. The cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6. The resistor PR60 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing through the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC70. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on, while the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70. At times, the photo coupler PIC70 is turned off. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 via the resistor PR71 and also connected to the transistor via the resistor PR72. It is electrically connected to the base terminal of the PTR 71. The collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR73 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line.

  The base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the resistor PR71 and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR74 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR70 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR75 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line and also the non-inverting buffer. 80 through the ICPIC 80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 includes eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one of them (PIC80A) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a shown in FIG. When the transistor PTR70 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 changes, and the signal is input as a CR connection signal 1 to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the resistor PR72, and is also electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR76 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND). The emitter terminal of the transistor PTR71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness). When the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is electrically connected to the power supply board 931 via a wiring (harness), one end of the power supply board 931 is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line, which is a pull-up resistor (not shown). Is electrically connected to the other end of. When the transistor PTR71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 changes, and the signal is input to the power supply substrate 931 as a CR connection signal.

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR71 and PR74 and the transistor PTR70 is a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR70 is turned on by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes LOW is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR70 is lowered to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR70 turns off and the switch circuit also turns off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR70 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PTR75, and the CR connection signal 1 whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. It

  The circuit composed of the resistors PR72 and PR76 and the transistor PTR71 is also a switch circuit that is turned on / off by turning on / off the photocoupler PIC70.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is not applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned off, and the transistor PTR71 is turned on by being pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR73, and the switch circuit is also turned on. It will be turned on. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side in the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes LOW is input to the power supply board 931. It

  On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70, the photocoupler PIC70 is turned on and the voltage applied to the base terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side. As a result, the transistor PTR71 is turned off and the switch circuit is also turned off. As a result, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the transistor PTR71 is pulled up to + 12V by the pull-up resistor of the power supply board 931 via the wiring (harness), and the CR connection signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the power supply board 931. To be done.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 via the resistor PR77. BRDY from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71. The resistor PR77 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC71. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR78 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80B) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 changes, and the signal is input as a BRDY signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned on. The BRDY signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC71 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 and the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC71 is turned off. The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR78, and the BRDY signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. In this way, the logic of the BRDY signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 is the same as the logic of BRDY from the CR unit 6.

  The predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied not only to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC70 and the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC71 but also to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 via the resistor PR79. The BRQ from the CR unit 6 is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72. The resistor PR79 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC72. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on while the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the coupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. There is. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is grounded to the ground (GND), and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is electrically connected to the other end of the pull-up resistor PR80 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line. At the same time, the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 (the non-inverting buffer ICPIC80 is provided with eight non-inverting buffer circuits, and the logic of the signal waveform input to one (PIC80C) is shaped and output without being inverted). It is electrically connected to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the. When the photocoupler PIC72 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 changes, and the signal is input as a BRQ signal to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  When the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is LOW, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned on. The BRQ signal whose logic is LOW when the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the coupler PIC72 is pulled down to the ground (GND) side is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. On the other hand, when the predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 and the logic of BRQ from the CR unit 6 is HI, the photocoupler PIC72 is turned off. , The voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC72 is pulled up to + 5V by the pull-up resistor PR80, and the BRQ signal whose logic becomes HI is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a. As described above, the logic of the BRQ signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC 72 is the same as the logic of the BRQ from the CR unit 6.

  The EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function, and the payout control output circuit without the reset function. 952cb is input to the cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR81. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR82 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR82 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC73. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 through the resistor PR82, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC73 is turned off when the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is inside the CR unit 6 via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR83. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on / off, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 changes, and the signal is input as EXS to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the EXS output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned on, so the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the EXS whose logic becomes LOW is the CR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 via the resistor PR82, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the EXS signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC73 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR83 and the logic becomes HI. EXS is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of EXS output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC73 is the same as the logic of the EXS signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

  The PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a is possible or impossible is a cathode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR84. Has been entered in. The anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is electrically connected to the other end of the resistor PR85 whose one end is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line. The resistor PR85 is a limiting resistor for limiting the current flowing to the built-in infrared LED of the photocoupler PIC74. When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the signal logic is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, while + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 through the resistor PR85, and the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a. The photocoupler PIC74 is turned off when the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of No. 2 through the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function is HI. The emitter terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is grounded to the ground LG from the CR unit 6, and the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is inside the CR unit 6 through the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 by the pull-up resistor PR86. At a predetermined voltage VL and electrically connected to the built-in control device. When the photocoupler PIC74 is turned ON / OFF, the logic of the signal output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 changes, and the signal is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6 as PRDY.

  When + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the PRDY output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the signal is LOW, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned on, so that the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is lowered to the ground (GND) side and the logic of LOW becomes PR unit. 6 to the built-in control device. On the other hand, when + 12V is applied to the anode terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 via the resistor PR85, the output is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. When the logic of the PRDY signal is HI, the photocoupler PIC74 is turned off. Therefore, the voltage applied to the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is pulled up to the predetermined voltage VL by the pull-up resistor PR86 and the logic becomes HI. PRDY is input to the built-in control device of the CR unit 6. As described above, the logic of PRDY output from the collector terminal of the photocoupler PIC74 is the same as the logic of the PRDY signal output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. It has the same logic.

[10-2-6. Various input / output signals to payout control MPU]
Next, various input / output signals input / output from the input / output terminals of various input / output ports of the payout control MPU 952a will be described.

  The RXD terminal, which is the serial data input terminal of the serial input port of the payout control MPU 952a, receives the serial data from the main control board 1310 as a main pay serial data reception signal via the payout control input circuit 952b, as shown in FIG. To be done. On the other hand, from the TXD terminal which is the serial data output terminal of the serial output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the serial data to be transmitted to the main control board 1310 is sent to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function as a payer serial data transmission signal. The payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function transmits a payer serial data transmission signal to the main control board 1310.

  To each input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned RWMCLR signal, payout blackout notice signal, door open signal, full signal, various signals from the CR unit 6 (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, CR connection) Signal 1 etc.), for example, a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 for notifying the completion of the normal reception of the above-mentioned payment main serial data reception signal is sent via the payout control input circuit 952b. For example, the detection signals from the out-of-ball detection sensor 827, the payout detection sensor 842, the rotation detection sensor 840, etc. shown in FIG. 70 are input via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  On the other hand, from each output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 952a, the above-mentioned EXS signal and PRDY signal are output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function to output the EXS signal from the payout control output circuit 952cb without the reset function. The PRDY signal is output to the CR unit input / output circuit 952e, or the above-mentioned voltage switching signal is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to output the voltage switching signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the voltage switching circuit 952da. Or output a payout motor drive signal to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function and output a payout motor drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function to the payout motor 834 via the payout motor drive circuit 952d. In addition to , A payer ACK signal indicating that normal reception of the main pay serial data reception signal has been completed is output to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, and the payout ACK signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is mainly controlled. It outputs to the board | substrate 1310, or outputs the drive signal of the error LED indicator 860b shown in FIG. 70 to the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function, and outputs a drive signal from the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function. Output to.

[10-3. Various input / output signals to / from the main control board and various output signals to the external terminal board]
Next, various input / output signals between the payout control board 951 and the main control board 1310 and various output signals from the payout control board 951 to the external terminal board 784 will be described with reference to FIG. 85.

[10-3-1. Various input / output signals with main control board]
The payout control board 951 exchanges various input / output signals with the main control board 1310. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (a), the payout control board 951 has the above-mentioned payer serial data transmission signal, payer ACK signal, operation signal (RAM clear signal), main frame door opening signal, etc. Is output to the main control board 1310. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the main control input circuit 1310b of the main control board 1310.

  On the other hand, the payout control board 951 has, in addition to the main pay serial data reception signal, the main pay ACK signal, and the operation signal (RAM clear signal) described above, a main prize ball number information output signal, a 15 round jackpot information output signal, And big hit information output signal such as 2 round big hit information output signal, information output signal during probability fluctuation, special symbol display information output signal, ordinary symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, starting mouth winning information output signal, etc. A game information signal, a payout power failure notice signal, and the like are input from the main control board 1310. These input signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the payout control input circuit 952b of the payout control unit 952 of the payout control board 951.

[10-3-2. Various output signals to external terminal board]
The payout control board 951 outputs various signals to the external terminal board 784. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), in addition to the outer end frame door opening information output signal described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 reaches 10 balls. The award ball number information output signal output for each, the main award ball number information output signal from the main control board 1310 through the payout control board 951, the big hit information of the 15 round big hit information output signal and the 2 round big hit information output signal Output signal, game information signals such as probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and start mouth winning information output signal are output to the external terminal board 784. To do. These output signals are pulled up to the + 12V side by the pull-up resistor of the external terminal board 784. That is, the external terminal board 784 outputs two signals, that is, an outer end frame door opening information output signal from the payout control board 951 side and an award ball number information output signal, and the main award ball number from the main control board 1310 side. Information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, time saving medium information output signal, and starting mouth winning information Eight signals, which are output signals, are output (passed) through the payout control board 951.

  A signal output from the external terminal board 784 is transmitted to a hall computer installed in a not-shown game hall (hall), and the hall computer monitors the game and the like of the player. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal or the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output to the hall computer as one jackpot information output signal, the hall computer determines the number of jackpots in which the number of rounds is two (2 round jackpot). The number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1 is the sum of the number of jackpots of the pachinko machine 1) and the number of jackpots in which the round reaches 15 times (the number of jackpots of 15 rounds jackpot). For this reason, since the hall computer cannot grasp the number of big hits in the second round and the number of big hits in the 15th land from the total number of big hits, the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is large. It is impossible to know whether it is a two-round jackpot or a 15-round jackpot. Further, a data counter (not shown) is arranged above the pachinko machine 1, and some players choose whether to play a game or not by referring to the number of occurrences of the jackpot gaming state displayed on the data counter. Some do.

  However, the number of times of occurrence of the jackpot game state displayed on the data counter may be biased to the number of occurrences of the two-round jackpot in practice, so even if the player starts the game, only the two-round jackpot occurs. In some cases, a 15-round jackpot does not occur easily. As described above, the number of times of occurrence of the big hit game state displayed on the data counter can give the player a sense of expectation, but may cause the player to be more motivated than necessary.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 15th round jackpot information output signal and the 2nd round jackpot information output signal are separately output to the hall computer as the jackpot information output signal, so that the hall computer generates the number of occurrences of the 2nd round jackpot. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of times of 15 rounds of big hits. Therefore, the hall computer can grasp whether the number of big hits actually generated in the pachinko machine 1 is the two-round big hit or the 15-round big hit, and the data counter has the 15-round big hit. The number of big hits and the number of big hits in the second round can be displayed separately or only the number of big hits in the 15th round can be displayed as the number of big hit game states, which may arouse the player's aspirations more than necessary. Absent.

  In the present embodiment, the 2-round big hit information output signal is in a state of being output to the hall computer during the period until the 2-round big hit occurs and ends, and the 15-round big hit information output signal is also the 15-round big hit. It is in the state of being output to the hall computer during the period from the occurrence to the end. In addition to the method of outputting the 2-round jackpot information output signal and the 15-round jackpot information output signal to the hall computer as in the present embodiment, for example, when the 2-round jackpot is generated, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is output for a predetermined period. When the 15 round big hit information is output to the hall computer, the 15 round big hit information output signal is output to the hall computer only for a predetermined period. Such a 2 round big hit information output signal and the 15 round big hit information A method of outputting the output signal to the hall computer for the same predetermined period can also be mentioned.

[11. Arrangement of output terminals on external terminal board]
Next, the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board 784 for outputting various signals to the hall computer installed in the game hall (hall) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. The external terminal board 784 is attached to the rear surface of the prize ball base attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 600, and the rear side thereof is covered with the external terminal board cover 786. FIG. 86 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the output terminals of the external terminal board.

  As described above, the external terminal board 784 includes the outer end frame door opening information output signal, the award ball number information output signal, the main award ball number information output signal, the 15 round jackpot information output signal and the 2 round jackpot information output signal. When the big hit information output signal, the probability variation information output signal, the special symbol display information output signal, the normal symbol display information output signal, the time saving medium information output signal, and the starting mouth winning information output signal are input from the payout control board 951. It is output to the outside of the pachinko machine 1.

  These various signals will be briefly described. The outer edge frame door opening information output signal does not occur during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is open. This is a signal that tells that a state has occurred, and the prize ball number information output signal is output each time the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. The main prize ball number information output signal is a signal to that effect, and various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the large winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. It is a signal that tells you that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game balls that entered in 10 reaches 10 balls. The 15 round jackpot information output signal indicates that 15 round jackpots have occurred. In the state of The two-round big hit information output signal is a signal indicating that a two-round big hit has occurred, and the probability-changing information output signal indicates that there is a probability change. It is a signal that there is a special symbol display information output signal, the variable display of the special symbol is finished on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 10 ( It is a signal indicating that it is in a stopped state, and the normal symbol display information output signal is a state in which the variable display of the normal symbol is ended (stopped) on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 8 is a signal indicating that there is a time saving, the information output signal during time saving is a signal indicating that a time saving state has occurred, and the starting opening winning information output signal is the first starting opening 2 shown in FIG. 02 or game ball to the second start hole 2004 is a signal for transmitting this fact each time ball entrance.

  As shown in FIG. 86, the output terminals PT1 to PT10 are horizontally arranged in a line on the external terminal board 784. The output terminal PT1 is colored white and outputs a prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the prize ball number information output signal is a signal that conveys that fact whenever the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10. In the embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT1 for 0.105 seconds. When the prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 to generate 10 prize balls as a prize ball each time the prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls of the balls have been paid out as prize balls, and it is also possible to count the number of balls of the paid game balls to grasp the total number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT2 is colored green and outputs an outer end frame door opening information output signal. As described above, the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is not generated during the normal game by the player that the door frame 3 and / or the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1 is opened. In this embodiment, the signal is transmitted, and is output while the door frame 3 and / or the body frame 4 is open from the output terminal PT2. When the outer edge frame door opening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, while the outer edge frame door opening information output signal is being input, the door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 and It can be understood that the body frame 4 is open.

  The output terminal PT3 is provided in gray to output a special symbol display information output signal. As described above, the special symbol display information output signal ends (stops) the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, it is a signal that indicates the state, and in the present embodiment, the variation display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 is ended (stop). Sometimes it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the special symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the special symbol display information output signal is input, the first special symbol of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the special symbol has ended (stopped) on the display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device 1405, and counting the number of times, the first special of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp the total number of times the special symbols are variably displayed on the symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405.

  The output terminal PT4 is colored yellow and outputs a starting opening winning information output signal. As described above, the start-port winning information output signal is a signal that notifies each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. 8, and in the present embodiment. Each time a game ball enters the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the output terminal PT4, it is output for 0.128 seconds. When the start-port winning information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer inputs the start-port winning information output signal to the first start port 2002 or the second opening of the pachinko machine 1 each time. It is possible to grasp that a game ball has entered the starting opening 2004, and count the number of times the starting opening winning information output signal is input to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004 of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp the total number of game balls entered.

  The output terminal PT5 is provided in black and outputs a 15 round jackpot information output signal. As described above, the 15-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the 15-round jackpot has occurred, and in the present embodiment, while the 15-round jackpot is generated from the output terminal PT5, It is supposed to be output. When the 15-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 15-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 15-round jackpot information output signal is input. In addition to being able to grasp the state, it is possible to count the number of times the 15-round jackpot information output signal has been input to grasp the total number of 15-round jackpots that have occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT6 is provided in pink and outputs a 2-round big hit information output signal. As described above, the 2-round jackpot information output signal is a signal indicating that the 2-round jackpot is being generated. In the present embodiment, while the 2-round jackpot is being generated from the output terminal PT6, It is supposed to be output. When the 2-round jackpot information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer generates a 2-round jackpot on the pachinko machine 1 while the 2-round jackpot information output signal is input. It is possible to know that the state is in addition to counting the number of times the two-round big hit information output signal is input, and to know the total number of two-round big hits in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT7 is a terminal which is colored blue and outputs a normal symbol display information output signal. The normal symbol display information output signal is, as described above, a signal indicating that the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, 0.128 seconds are output from the output terminal PT7 at the end (stop) of the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400. When the normal symbol display information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer, when the normal symbol display information output signal is input, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to grasp that the variable display of the ordinary symbol is ended (stopped) in 1402, and the number of times is counted to display the ordinary symbol in the ordinary symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 of the pachinko machine 1 in a variable display. You can grasp the number of times.

  The output terminal PT8 is provided in red and outputs the time saving medium information output signal. As described above, the time saving / time saving information output signal is a signal that conveys that the time saving state has occurred, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT8 while the time saving state is occurring. ing. When the time saving / shortening information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer recognizes that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state when the time saving / shortening information output signal is input. At the same time, it is possible to grasp the total number of times that the pachinko machine 1 is in the time saving state by counting the number of times the time saving information output signal is input.

  The output terminal PT9 is provided in orange and outputs the information output signal during probability variation. As described above, the probability variation information output signal is a signal that informs that the probability variation is occurring, and in the present embodiment, it is output from the output terminal PT9 while the probability variation is occurring. It has become so. When the probability variation information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, when the probability variation information output signal is input, the hall computer is in a state where the probability change occurs in the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to grasp that there is, and to count the number of times the information output signal during probability change is input to grasp the total number of times that probability change has occurred in the pachinko machine 1.

  The output terminal PT10 is light blue and outputs a main prize ball number information output signal. As described above, the main prize ball number information output signal is input to various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 as shown in FIG. This is a signal to notify that the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball based on the game ball that has been balled reaches 10 balls. In this embodiment, the signal is output from the output terminal PT10 for 0.128 seconds. It has become so. When the main prize ball number information output signal from the external terminal board 784 is input to the hall computer, the hall computer causes the pachinko machine 1 to receive 10 balls as a prize ball each time the main prize ball number information output signal is input. It is possible to grasp that the game balls are to be paid out as prize balls, and also to count the number of game balls to be paid out and to grasp the total number of game balls to be paid out by the pachinko machine 1. can do. Note that, for example, game balls that are to be paid out as prize balls based on the game balls that have entered the various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005. When the number of spheres of No. reaches 20 or more and the main prize sphere number information output signal is output plural times, the main prize sphere number information output signal is 0.256 (= 0.128 seconds × 2 times) seconds, As if it were one continuous signal, it is output at intervals of 0.128 seconds.

  Among the output terminals PT1 to PT10 of the external terminal board 784, the output terminals PT1 and PT2 output various signals output on the payout control board 951 side, whereas the output terminals PT3 to PT10 are the main control board. It is arranged so that various signals output on the 1310 side are output via (passing through) the payout control board 951. The output terminals PT1 to PT10 are respectively colored, and by electrically connecting wirings having connectors colored in the same colors to the output terminals PT1 to PT10 respectively, other wirings are erroneously electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the physical connection. Then, various signals output on the payout control board 951 side are transmitted to the hall computer so that various signals output on the payout control board 951 side and various signals output on the main control board 1310 side are not mixed. Output terminals PT1 and PT2 for arranging in a row on the left side of the external terminal board 784, and output terminals PT3 to PT10 for transmitting various signals output on the main control board 1310 side to the hall computer of the external terminal board 784. By arranging them in a line from the left side of the center toward the right side, in this respect also, wiring for transmitting various signals output on the payout control board 951 side to the hall computer and various output on the main control board 1310 side. The wiring for transmitting signals to the hall computer is And it is capable to prevent the connection.

  In the present embodiment, the award ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side and the main award ball number information output signal output on the main control board 1310 side are respectively holes from the external terminal board 784. It is configured to communicate to a computer. This is, for example, the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 in a state where the game balls from the pachinko island equipment side are not supplied to the prize ball tank 720 shown in FIG. 1 due to some trouble in the pachinko island equipment. When a 15-round big hit happens to the pachinko machine 1 at the time when the remaining amount is running low, the number of game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 for paying out the game balls as prize balls is insufficient, so the payout is performed. (In addition, if, for example, a ball clogging or a ball scatter occurs in the payout device 830, the game ball cannot be paid out unless this can be eliminated). Then, the prize ball number information output signal output on the payout control board 951 side, as described above, the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls by the payout motor 834 shown in FIG. 5 reaches 10 balls. Since it is a signal that conveys that fact, the payout control board 951 can output a prize ball number information output signal and transmit it to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 when the game balls cannot be paid out. become unable. When the game balls are not paid out, the player calls a clerk in the hall. The clerk of the hall or the like, for example, checks the hose-shaped supply nozzle or the like for supplying game balls from the pachinko island facility to the prize ball tank 720 and specifies the position of the ball clogging (in addition, for example, in the payout device 830. Then, the position of the ball clogging or the position of the ball clogging is specified) and the problem is solved, whereby the game ball is returned to the payout state.

  However, even in the situation where the clerk in the hall is working, the game by the main control board 1310 is in progress, so after the 15 rounds of big hits, the game balls are paid out by the clerk in the hall. When returning to the state where the payout control board 951 pays out the unpaid gaming balls one after another, the payout control board 951 is the time when the 15 round big hit ends and the 15 round big hit does not occur. Whenever the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 834 as a prize ball reaches 10, the prize ball number information output signal for notifying that is output and transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784. It will be. Then, despite the fact that the 15th round jackpot has not occurred, an extremely large number of game balls will be paid out, so the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 The problem arises that the hall computer cannot accurately grasp the relationship between and.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether or not the payout motor 834 is drive-controlled by the payout control board 951 and the payout balls are actually paid out, that is, it is different from the prize ball number information output signal output from the payout control board 951. As a signal of, the main control board 1310 is a game ball that has entered various winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the general winning openings 2001 and 2011, and the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. Whenever the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball reaches 10, the main prize ball number information output signal is output as a signal to that effect and the payout control board 951 and the external terminal board 784 are output. We adopted a mechanism that communicates to the hall computer via. As a result, even if the above-mentioned trouble (a trouble such as a ball clogging in the supply nozzle or the like, a ball clogging in the dispensing device 830, a ball clogging, etc.) occurs, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout in this gaming state. The relationship between the number of game balls to be put out and the number of game balls can be accurately transmitted to the hall computer. Therefore, the hall computer can accurately grasp the relationship between the gaming state of the pachinko machine 1 and the number of gaming balls to be paid out in the gaming state.

[12. Production display drive circuit]
Next, the circuit of the effect display drive substrate 4450 that draws the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 will be described with reference to FIG. 87. As described above, the effect display drive board 4450 is arranged near the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is housed in the dish unit 320. It is mainly configured by a liquid crystal module circuit 450V that draws a display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. FIG. 87 is a circuit diagram showing a liquid crystal module circuit for drawing a display area of the upper plate side liquid crystal display device.

[12-1. LCD module circuit]
As shown in FIG. 87, the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive substrate 4450 is mainly configured by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is a differential serial signal (serial data) of "V-by-One (registered trademark)" by THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side production of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. Are transmitted as a plus signal and a minus signal, they are input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, respectively, and the common mode choke coil SDL0 produces a plus signal. The noise can be separated from the negative signal. The noise-separated plus signal and minus signal are input to the RXIN + terminal and RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively. A resistor SDR0 is electrically connected between the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal. The resistor SDR0 is a terminating resistor (terminator), and prevents the plus signal and the minus signal from being reflected at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively, and prevents disturbance of the serial signal.

  The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 has three video signals of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. The horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the three synchronizing signals of the clock signal are restored (that is, the parallel signal before being serialized is restored). As described above, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal are 8-bit red video signals, green video signals, and blue video signals output from the channel CH2 of the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, respectively. Since the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d each have 6 bits, that is, a total of 18 bits, they are higher 6 bits of each video signal.

  The liquid crystal module circuit 450V is, in addition to the signal from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d of the peripheral control board 1510, as described above, the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. Two signals in which certain LOCKN signal output request data is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e of the peripheral control board 1510 are also input. As described above, the forced switching circuit 1512f of the peripheral control board 1510 transmits the two signals when the two signals that are differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. On the other hand, when the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input, the signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are transmitted. The circuit is configured to be connected as described above. As a result, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input to the differential circuit 1512e, the circuits are connected so as to transmit the two signals, so that the two signals are transmitted. , While being transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, the difference is transmitted. When two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input in the activating circuit 1512e, the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. The signal output from the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal. 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to the liquid crystal module circuit 450V of the effect display driving substrate 4450 which is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The forced switching circuit 1512f is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the door frame, when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are not input. Serial signal (serial data) by the differential method "V-by-One (registered trademark)" of THine Electronics Co., Ltd. from the side effect transmitter IC 1512d is used as a plus signal and a minus signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board. 868, and through the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, is input to the common mode choke coil SDL0 and is input to the RXIN + and RXIN− terminals of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, respectively, while the differential circuit 1512e. At When two signals that are differentiated into a negative signal and a negative signal are input from the peripheral control board 1510 through the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, these two signals are common. It is input to the mode choke coil SDL0, and then input to the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that it is a LOCKN signal output request when two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input. A LOCKN signal is output from a LOCKN terminal described later to the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is, as described above, the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. During the period displayed on the display device 1600 or during the demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 in the customer waiting state, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and effect display In order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, the door frame side effect display device 460 of the door frame side effect display device 460 is displayed. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request. The LOCKN signal output request data in this embodiment is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e, but is a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, that is, the above-mentioned Zine Electronics stock. The structure is completely different from that of the company's "V-by-One (registered trademark)" differential serial signal (serial data). Therefore, when the LOCKN signal output request data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, it is determined that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is not a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d, which is abnormal. As data, a LOCKN signal will be output from the LOCKN terminal described later. In other words, in the present embodiment, the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal, which will be described later, by using the function of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that outputs the LOCKN signal when it is determined that the received data is abnormal data. To forcefully output the LOCKN signal output request data having a structure different in data format from the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. By outputting, it is possible to confirm whether or not a device called the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 is operating normally. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  The VDD terminal, VDDO terminal, LVDSVDD terminal, PLLVDD terminal, and PDWN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are respectively supplied with + 3.3V created by the upper plate side liquid crystal module power supply circuit 4450x shown in FIG. The GND terminal, the GNDO terminal, the LVDS GND application paper, the PLLGND terminal, the EDGE terminal, the OE terminal, the MODE0, and the MODE1 terminals of the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 are grounded.

  The VDD terminal is a power supply terminal for the digital circuit, and the capacitor SDC0 is electrically connected between the GND terminal and the GND terminal which is the ground for the digital circuit, and the +3.3 V power supply supplied to the VDD terminal. Removing high frequency noise from the line.

  The VDDO terminal is a power supply terminal for TTL (Transistor-Transistor Logic) output, and the capacitor SDC1 is electrically connected between the GNDO terminal serving as the ground for the TTL output and the VDDO terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The LVDSVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) input, and a capacitor SDC2 is electrically connected between the LVDSDS terminal and the LVDSGND terminal which is the ground for the LVDS input, and is supplied to the LVDSVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PLLVDD terminal is a power supply terminal for a PLL (Phase Locked Loop) circuit, and a capacitor SDC3 is electrically connected between the terminal and a PLLGND terminal which is the ground for the PLL circuit, and is supplied to the PLLVDD terminal. High frequency noise is removed from the + 3.3V power line.

  The PDWN terminal informs that the logic becomes HI when + 3.3V is supplied (applied) and the normal operation is performed, while the supply of +3.3 is stopped and the logic becomes LOW to power down. It is a terminal to transmit. The PDWN terminal is supplied with + 3.3V through the resistor SDR1 and is electrically connected to the other end of the varistor SDZ0 whose one end is grounded. The varistor SDZ0 suppresses noise and overvoltage of the + 3.3V electric line supplied via the resistor SDR1.

  The EDGE terminal transmits various signals output from various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, and D0 terminal to D17 terminal) based on the clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal, which will be described later, on the rising edge. This is a terminal for designating either (when the logic transitions from LOW to HI) or when it is a falling edge (when the logic transitions from HI to LOW). As described above, the falling edge is specified by grounding the EDGE terminal to the ground. Incidentally, if the EDGE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, the rising edge can be designated.

  The OE terminal indicates whether or not to permit output of various output terminals (DE terminal, SYNC0 terminal to SYNC2 terminal, D0 terminal to D17 terminal, and CLKOUT terminal) described later, and in the present embodiment, As described above, by grounding the OE terminal to the ground, the output is always possible. By the way, if the OE terminal is connected to + 3.3V, it is in a state where it cannot output.

  The MODE0 terminal and the MODE1 terminal are terminals for selecting an operation mode, and the operation mode can be selected by grounding both terminals. The operation mode includes a normal mode and a shake hand mode. In the normal mode, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal are based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. In the normal operation mode in which the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronization signals (3-bit synchronization signal) including a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. is there. In the shake hand mode, the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is performed. In this mode, a LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirmation (recovery). The shake hand mode is automatically switched.

  For example, three video signals (18-bit video signal) of a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, based on serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively, For some reason, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 restores to a parallel signal composed of three synchronizing signals (3-bit synchronizing signal) of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal. When it is difficult to draw on the door frame side effect display device 460 with such data, the normal mode is automatically switched to the shake hand mode and the LOCKN signal is output from the LOCKN terminal. This LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is a damping resistance, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510 is input. It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d in order to notify the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d that a predetermined condition is satisfied based on the input LOCKN signal. Is output. When this connection confirmation signal is input to the INIT terminal, the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is connected between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for recovering the door frame side effect provided on the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Transmit to receiver ICSDIC0. By receiving such a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver can be easily restored. The predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. It should be noted that the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral doors. You may electrically connect directly via the relay terminal board 882.

  As described above, the LOCKN terminal is connected between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is a terminal that outputs a request to transmit a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the terminals. The LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the resistor SDR2 that is the damping resistance of the effect display drive board 4450, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral It is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the control board 1510.

  The SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal output three synchronizing signals of a horizontal synchronizing signal, a vertical synchronizing signal, and a clock signal restored based on the serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN− terminal, respectively. It is a terminal. In the present embodiment, since the restored three synchronizing signals of the horizontal synchronizing signal, the vertical synchronizing signal, and the clock signal are not used, the SYNC0 terminal to the SYNC2 terminal are unconnected terminals.

  The DE terminal is a terminal that outputs a clock signal output from the CLKOUT terminal and a DE signal that informs that the data output from the data output terminals D0 to D17 are valid or invalid, which will be described later. The DE signal output from the DE terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistance SDR3 which is a damping resistance.

  The CLKOUT terminal is a terminal for outputting a clock signal DCLK generated by a PLL circuit incorporated in the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The clock signal DCLK output from the CLKOUT terminal is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the resistor SDR4 which is a damping resistor.

  The D0 terminal to the D17 terminal have three video signals (18: red video signal, green video signal, and blue video signal restored on the basis of serial signals (serial data) input at the RXIN + terminal and the RXIN- terminal, respectively. It is a data output terminal for outputting a bit video signal). Blue video signals B0 to B5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D0 to D5, and each signal line of the blue video signals B0 to B5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA0. Green video signals G0 to G5 (6 bits) are output in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK from 6-bit data output terminals D6 to D11, and each signal line of the green video signals G0 to G5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA1. The red video signals R0 to R5 (6 bits) are output from the 6-bit data output terminals D12 to D17 in synchronization with the clock signal DCLK, and each signal line of the red video signals R0 to R5 is a damping resistor. It is input to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the ladder resistance SDRA2.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, the effect display drive board 4450, and the door frame side effect display device 460 are electrically connected to the ground, and are the same ground. Has become.

[13. Commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. 88 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 89 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 89 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, the prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and subsequently, various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[13-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning opening sensors 4020 and 4020, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When signals are input, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board based on these detection signals. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 to drive the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to store the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as storage pans. When a device for paying out game balls as a ball rental) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is called a "CR machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (a), the main control board The prize ball command transmitted from the 1310 to the payout control board 951 includes commands 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number). In the command 10H, one prize ball is designated, and the command 11H. , Two prize balls are designated, ..., 15 prize balls are designated in the command 1EH. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 as rental balls as storage balls) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as "general machine"), as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. The command 20H to the command 2EH are prepared for the prize ball command to be transmitted to the player. The command 20H designates one prize ball, the command 21H designates two prize balls, ... 15 balls are specified. The payout control board 951 controls the payout motor 834 to pay out the game balls by the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a common command for the CR machine and the general machine, and the command 30H specifies the self-check. By transmitting the command 30H and checking whether or not the ACK signal is input, the transmission side transmits the command 30H when the ACK signal to be output as a confirmation of receipt of the command is not input from the reception side for a predetermined period after transmitting the command. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine according to the present embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[13-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), And a mode showing a variation of the effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, various commands include special figure 1 synchronization effect related, special figure 2 synchronization effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronization effect related, ordinary electric figure effect related, notification display, status It is divided into display and other.

[13-2-1. Special figure 1 synchronization production related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the first special symbol display 1403, it is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronization effect start, special symbol 1 specification, special figure 1 synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “A * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern designated by the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is for designating off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 entrainment effect end command is an instruction to end the special figure 1 entrainment effect, and the fluctuation state designation command is an instruction to specify the probability and the time saving state. The probabilities and short-time states include a low-probability short-time state that indicates a low-probability state and a short-time state, a high-probability short-time state that indicates a high-probability state and a short-time state, and a low-probability state. It is composed of a low probability non-time saving state that indicates a state that is not a time saving state and a high probability non time saving state that indicates a high probability state that is not a time saving state (as a normal gaming state, Low probability non-time saving state is set). Here, the high-probability state is a state in which the probability of a big hit is set higher than the low-probability state (normal game state), and the short-time state is, for example, the normal symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. Compared to the non-time saving state (normal game state), the time for displaying the symbols in a variable manner is shortened and stopped and displayed in a light emission pattern corresponding to the ordinary lottery result. In addition to increasing the number of times of stop display as compared with the non-time saving state, the period during which the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 is opened and closed is made longer than that in the non-time saving state (normal game state), and is shown in FIG. A state in which a lottery opportunity for special symbols can be obtained without reducing the number of balls held by increasing the acceptance rate (entering rate) of the game balls to the second starting opening 2004 shown (in other words, non-time saving state) In addition, by increasing the number of decisions whether to open and close the pair of movable pieces, and lengthening the period of opening and closing the pair of movable pieces when opening and closing the pair of movable pieces, the second start This is a state in which the acceptance rate (entering rate) of game balls into the mouth 2004 is increased).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 1 tuning effect start command is sent at the start of special symbol 1 fluctuation, the special symbol 1 designation command is sent immediately after the start of special figure 1 tuning effect, and the special figure 1 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is confirmed), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

[13-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronization performance related]
The special figure 2 tuning effect-related is based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69, and its division is, as shown in FIG. 89, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the second special symbol display device 1405, it is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. To these various commands, “B * H” is assigned as the status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as the mode is assigned (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 entrainment effect start command is for instructing the start of special figure entrainment effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the special symbol 2 specifying command is for specifying the deviating, a specific jackpot, or a non-specific jackpot. The special figure 2 entrainment effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 entrainment effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special figure 2 tuning effect start command is sent at the time of starting the special symbol 2 variation, the special symbol 2 designation command is sent immediately after the start of the special figure 2 tuning effect, and the special figure 2 tuning The production end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 89, in the category of big hit related, big hit opening, big winning opening 1 open N times display, big winning opening 1 closed display, big winning opening 1 count display, big hit ending, big hit symbol display, small hit opening , Small hit open display, small hit count display, and small hit ending command. To these various commands, “C * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The big hit opening command is an instruction to start the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is a big winning opening 1 opening start of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 shown in FIG. 8). Is to open or start the Nth round of the special winning opening 2005, and the special winning opening 1 closing display command starts during the closing of the big winning opening 1 (large opening of the starting opening unit 2100). It indicates that the winning opening 2005 is closed or starts to be closed between rounds, and the special winning opening 1 count display command counts the number of 0 to 10 game balls (shown in FIG. 69). The number of gaming balls that entered the special winning opening 2005 detected by the count sensor 4005 is transmitted. Is intended to instruct the loading start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the small winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is open or The small hit count display command is for a small hit medium to big prize opening winning effect (when a game ball entering the big winning opening 2005 during the small hit is detected by the count sensor 4005). In the small hitting ending command, a small hitting ending start is instructed.

  As a transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 opening of the 1st to 16th rounds (starting opening unit 2100 When the special winning opening 2005 is opened in the Nth round), the special winning opening 1 closing display command is sent when the special winning opening 1 is closed (the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is closed), The special winning opening 1 count display command is used when the special winning opening 1 is opened and when the count to the special winning opening 1 is changed (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened and the special winning opening 2005 is entered) Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. , Big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is transmitted when the small hit is opened (when the special winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 is opened during the small hit). The small hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hit medium to large winning opening (when the game ball that entered the big winning opening 2005 is detected by the count sensor 4005 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is , It is sent at the start of the small hit ending. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 89, the category of power-on is composed of a command at the time of power-on and a command at the time of power-on main control return destination. A status of "D * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the RAM clear effect start and the game state. The power-on state command is for the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, and information at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored) .) In the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state. , And information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine is, for example, when creating so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type, which game copyright it belongs to, what kind of game specification (for example, probability fluctuation occurs) And, in addition to the game specification that the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in the state where the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like. In other words, the model code information of the pachinko machine is the series code for specifying which type is the max type, the middle type, and the sweet digital type, which indicates the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code, and game specifications (for example, if probability changes occur, in addition to the game specifications that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, probability changes with a limited number of changes in special symbols) It mainly consists of a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.) in which

  The power-on main control return destination command instructs the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. The power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. ing.

  As the transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command, when the main control board power is turned on (when power is restored, power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure) Also included). Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, and when recovering from a power failure or momentary power failure, a main control side power-on process, which will be described later, is executed and the peripheral control board command of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process is executed. In the transmission processing, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command are transmitted.

[13-2-5. Normal figure synchronization production related]
The general figure synchronization effect-related is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69, and its classification is, as shown in FIG. 89, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 69. Concerning the device 1402, it is composed of commands named general figure synchronization effect start, general figure designation, general figure synchronization effect end, and fluctuation state specification. To these various commands, “E * H” is assigned as the status, and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) is assigned as the mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure synchronization effect start command is for instructing to start the universal figure synchronization effect in the effect pattern specified by the mode, and the universal symbol specification command is for specifying a falling edge, a specific jackpot, and a non-specific jackpot. The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the normal figure synchronization effect, and the variation state designation command is for instructing the probability and the time saving state. As described above, the probability and the time saving state include a low probability time saving state indicating a low probability state and a time saving state, and a high probability time saving indicating a high probability state being a time saving state. State, a low-probability non-time saving state that indicates a low-probability state that is not a short-time state, and a high-probability non-time-saving state that indicates a high-probability state that is not a short-time state (usually As a gaming state, a low probability non-time saving state is set).

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the start of the normal symbol 1 variation, the universal symbol specification command is transmitted immediately after the start of the universal figure synchronization effect, and the universal figure synchronization effect end command is , Ordinary symbol variation time has elapsed (when the regular symbol is confirmed), the state change command at the time of variation is transmitted immediately after the universal symbol winning information is designated. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-6. Normal electric power director related]
The normal electric role effect-related is related to the pair of movable pieces shown in FIG. 8 which is opened and closed by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107 shown in FIG. 69. It is composed of a command called hit opening, den opening display, and genbu per ending. A status of “F * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The universal figure opening command is for instructing the opening of the universal figure, and the universal battery open display command is for starting the universal battery open (a pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction by driving the starting opening solenoid 2107). The state or the time of expansion) is instructed, and the ending command per universal figure is an instruction to start ending per universal figure.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the universal figure opening command is transmitted when the universal figure opening starts, and the universal battery open display command is transmitted when the universal battery is opened (a pair of movable pieces are driven by the starter solenoid 2107 to move to the left or right). The ending command per universal figure is transmitted at the start of ending per universal figure. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the classification of the notification display is made up of commands named winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. A status of "6 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The prize winning abnormality display command is issued when the player hits the special winning opening other than during the big hit (condition device is operating) (even though it is not a big hit, the game ball enters the big winning opening 2005 of the starting opening unit 2100 and the game ball Is detected by the count sensor 4005), the start of the prize abnormality notification is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is an electrical command in a path extending between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951, for example. When there is a connection abnormality, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection / short-circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the count sensor. When a disconnection or short circuit of electrical connection with 4005 etc. occurs, it is an instruction to start the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display. De is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 69.

  Further, the door opening command is issued by the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the door frame 3 is in the opened state, the door frame is instructed to notify the door opening. The door frame closing command causes the door frame 3 to close the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618. In the case of the opened state, the end of the door opening notification is instructed. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is issued to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal (opening signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input through the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. The main frame opening command is issued when the main frame 4 is in the open state, and the main frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the main frame opening switch 619. When it is in the closed state, the end of the body frame opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the prize abnormality display command is transmitted when the prize is won in the special winning opening except during the big hit (condition device is operating), and the connection abnormality display command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is sent when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 when the command is sent to the first start port sensor 4002, the second start port sensor 4004, the count sensor 4005, etc. Any one of them is sent when a wire break or short circuit occurs, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is sent when an abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. Further, the door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in the opened state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), The frame closing command is transmitted when the door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame opening command is transmitted when the body frame opening is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the body frame closing is detected (when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 90, the status display sections are composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to error cancellation command) and frame status 2 command. There is. A status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands each having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and a detailed description thereof will be given later. .. When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame status 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame status 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 90, “7 * H” is set. The status is set and the received command is set as the mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds the additional information “7 * H” to these received commands. Is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame 1 command is sent when the power is restored, when the frame is changed, and when the error is cleared, the error clear navigation command is sent when the error is cleared, and the frame 2 command is created when the power is restored. , And when the frame status changes. The shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 90, the test-related section is made up of various commands named test. This test command is assigned a status of "8 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number. , Which is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control section 1511, the liquid crystal display control section 1512, the lamp drive board 4170, the motor drive board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 72). Various boards such as the drive amplifier board 194 are inspected.

  As the transmission timing of the test command, the RAM is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on and is transmitted at times other than RAM clear. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at the time of recovery from a power failure or momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side power-on processing described later is performed. The test command is transmitted by the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 executed in the main control side timer interrupt process.

[13-2-10. Other]
In the other categories, as shown in FIG. 90, starting mouth winning, variation shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect, and It is composed of a command named special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect. A status of "9 * H" and a mode of "** H"("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are assigned to these various commands ("*" is a specific hexadecimal number). It means that it is predetermined by the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start mouth winning command is for instructing the start of the start winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002. , The start of the effect when the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the fluctuation shortening operation end designating command is It is for instructing the state transition from the shortened operating state to the fluctuation shortening non-operating state, the high probability end designation command is for instructing the state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state, and the special symbol 1 storage command 0 to 4 special symbols 1 reserved (the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 and the special symbols change in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400) The number of balls not yet used for display (the number of reserves) is transmitted, and the special symbol 2 storage command is 0-4 special symbols 2 pending (the game ball in the second starting opening 2004 shown in FIG. 8). The number of balls that have not yet been used for the variable display of the special symbol (the number of holdings) is transmitted by entering the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 Reservation 0 to 4 (the number of balls not yet used for variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 of the function display unit 1400 after the game ball has passed through the gate portion 2003 shown in FIG. 8 (reserved number)) The special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command prefetches before the special symbol 1 hold is used for variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. The first special symbol display 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold is for instructing a pre-reading effect start to notify the advance notice of the display result, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is the special symbol 2 hold function display unit 1400. Before being used for the variable display of the special symbol on the second special symbol display device 1405, the pre-reading instruction is instructed to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display device 1405 based on the special symbol 2 hold. To do.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the starting mouth winning command is a starting mouth winning command (when a game ball enters the first starting mouth 2002 based on a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, When a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the starting port sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change-shortening operation end designating command is sent to notify that, and the high-probability end designating command , "High probability N times" is transmitted at the end of the suspension period after the fluctuation is confirmed (after the elapse of the suspension period), and the special symbol 1 memory command is the special symbol 1 operation protection. At the time of changing the number of balls (a state in which a game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 and there is a number of holdings not yet used for the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol indicator 1403 of the function display unit 1400, When the game ball enters the first starting port 2002 and the number of holdings increases, or when the number of holdings decreases from the number of holdings by using the variable display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403) The special symbol 2 memory command is sent to the special symbol 2 when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls changes (the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 and the special symbol is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400. In the state where there is a pending number that has not been used yet in the variable display, when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 and the pending number increases, or from the reserved number, the special symbol display device 1405 special Design It is sent when the number of holdings used for variable display is reduced), and the normal symbol memory command is a normal symbol 1 operation holding ball number change (game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the normal of the function display unit 1400). In the state where there is a pending number that is not yet used in the variable display of the normal symbol on the symbol display device 1402, when the gaming ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the pending number increases, or from the pending number, the regular symbol display device It is transmitted to 1402 when it is used for the variable display of the normal symbol and the number of holdings decreases), and the special symbol 1 memory prefetching effect command is when the number of special symbol 1 operation holding balls increases (the first starting port 2002 is a game ball). Is transmitted when the ball enters and the number of holdings increases, the special symbol 2 memory prefetching effect command, when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls increases (the number of game balls entering the second starting opening 2004 and the number of holdings) But (When increased) will be sent. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the starting opening winning command is, when the starting opening winning (when the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002 based on the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002, or the second starting opening). When a game ball enters the second starting opening 2004 based on a detection signal from the sensor 4004), the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly transmit by voice to notify that fact. How the peripheral control board 1510 shown in 72 uses the start opening winning command may vary depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has a specification that the pachinko machine 1 is used not only to notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 but also to monitor the presence or absence of fraudulent activity. On the other hand, in some other pachinko machines, the peripheral control board 1510 merely receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by voice from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

[13-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 91, the classification of various commands from the payout control board 951 is made up of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2; frame state 1, error release navigation, and The priority order is set in the order of the frame state 2.

  The frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command) has a ball out, a full tank, a stock of 50 or more, a connection error and a CR not connected. Bit 0 (B0, "B") is provided when the ball is out. Represents a bit), the value 1 is set in the full tank, the value 1 is set in the bit 1 (B1), the value 1 is set in the bit 2 (B2) in 50 or more stocks, and the connection error occurs. The value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when CR is not connected. A value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7 in bits 5 (B5) to 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command.

  The error clear navigation command (corresponding to the error clear command) has a ball ball, a payout detection sensor error, and a retry error. In the ball ball, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2). On error, bit 3 (B3) is set to the value 1, and on retry error, bit 4 (B4) is set to the value 1. Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not the malfunction of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 70 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that the payout of game balls that are not consistent due to the retry operation has been repeatedly performed. The bit (B0), the bit (B1), and the bit 5 (B5) to the bit 7 (B7) of the error canceling navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, and a value 1 for B6. The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared as a ball-out state, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during the ball-out state. In bit 1 (B1) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, B1 has a value of 0, B2 has a value of 0, B3 has a value of 0, B4 has a value of 0, B5 has a value of 1, B6 has a value of 1, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame state 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame state is changed, and at the time of error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted at the time of error cancellation navigation and the frame status 2 command. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame status changes. Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process of step S558 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control unit power-on process described later.

[14. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 94. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control side power-on processing, FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main control side power-on processing, and FIG. 94 is an example of the main control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and subsequently, the operation of the initial value updating type counter, the main control side power-on process, and the main control side timer interrupt process will be described.

[14-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether or not a reach (out of reach) is generated when the big hit game state is not generated The random number for reach determination to be used for the determination, and the variation used for determining the variation display pattern of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 and the second special symbol display device 1405 shown in FIG. 69. Random number for the display pattern, a big hit symbol for use in determining the big hit symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 when generating the big hit game state, and this big hit Random number for initial value determination for the big hit symbol for use in determining the initial value of the random number for the symbol, first special symbol display 1 when generating the small hit game state 03 and second special symbol display 1405 small hit design random numbers to be used to determine the small hit symbol, initial value for the small hit symbol used to determine the initial value of this small hit symbol random number Random numbers for decision etc. are prepared. In addition to these random numbers, it is used to determine the normal symbol per determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close the movable piece shown in FIG. 8, and the initial value of this normal symbol per determination random number. For the normal symbol per determination for initial value determination random number, and the normal symbol variation display pattern random number for use in determining the variation display pattern of the ordinary symbol that is variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 1402 shown in FIG. It is prepared.

  Among various random numbers used for such game control, the big hit determination random number is updated by hardware, whereas other various random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. As described above, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range. Based on (the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77), other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed, and all the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the extraction is completed, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. To do. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main-control-internal hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main-control MPU 1310a makes a big hit with the value extracted by the main-control internal hard-random number circuit 1310an at the time of obtaining a value from the main-control internal hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by one and the count is incremented. This counter counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting toward the maximum value, and subsequently counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hitting determination. When the counter has finished counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called “initial value updating type counter”. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the symbol hit determination. ..

  In the present embodiment, when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated when the power is turned on, or in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later, of the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. A checksum value (sum value) obtained by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum is stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control internal RAM is cleared, such as when the checksum value (sum value) does not match, the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol is normally the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. Takes out the ID code from the built-in non-volatile RAM, and usually from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for judging per symbol normally based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation process of deriving the same fixed value, a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, as for the random number for determining the initial value for determining the normal symbol, the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated. In this way, the value set in the random number for determining the initial value for normal symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer who manufactured the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used when the ID code is stored in the ID code, and by executing the initial value derivation process when clearing the entire area of the RAM with main control The second security measure for deriving the same fixed value based on the above and the two-step security measure for prevent the analysis.

  Here, an advantage of using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination will be described from the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles it. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value are obtained illegally, the ID code is unique for identifying an individual. Since they are provided with reference numerals, they are completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'included in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hitting judgment random number and the normal symbol hitting judgment value match is completely different from that of the game board 5 obtained. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece shown in FIG. It is not possible to generate a game state in which a game ball can be received in the starting opening 2004.

[14-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU 1310a is configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default.
This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of the storage element (register) being used, or the return address of this routine when the subroutine is terminated and the routine returns to this routine. It also indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Then, the main control program described above performs main power supply side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. 92 and 93 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. When this main control side power-on process is started, the main control program sets RAM access permission under the control of the main control MPU 1310a (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be updated.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control program performs initial value setting and start setting of the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S12). Here, in order to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT 1310af that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as “ WDT control register ”) to set a timer setting value to activate the main control built-in WDT 1310af and reset the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af starts, and the watchdog timer clear register ( Hereinafter, if the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register"), the main control built-in WDT 1310af forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT 1310af is activated and clocking is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af until the time set by the timer setting value is reached and restarting the time measurement again. Can be monitored.

  Following step S12, the main control program performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e shown in FIG. 78 is started. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e includes a comparator MIC21 which is a voltage comparison circuit and a D type flip-flop MIC22. The comparator MIC21, which is a voltage comparison circuit, outputs the comparison result by comparing the voltage of + 24V and the reference voltage or by comparing the voltage of + 12V and the reference voltage. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or momentary power failure occurs, its logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, while when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22.

  In the electric power clear processing, first, the output of the power failure clear signal to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is started to start the output of the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. This power failure clear signal is input from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC via the main control output circuit 1310ca with the reset function by setting its logic to LOW. To be done. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can release the latched state of the D-type flip-flop MIC22, and until the latched state is set, the logic input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop MIC22 can be applied. The signal can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Subsequently, in the electric power clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether or not the power failure advance notice signal is input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or an instantaneous power failure (a phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs a power failure notification signal as a power failure notification. Similarly, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from the time when the power is turned on to the predetermined voltage, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e inputs the power failure warning signal. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the wait time (wait timer). Has been done. Whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is determined based on the signal output from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22 described above as the power failure notice signal.

  If the power failure warning signal is not input even after waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and becomes stable after the power is turned on, the main control program sends the power failure clear signal to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop MIC22. Stop output. Here, the power failure clear signal is a clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, which is a clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC, via the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function, by setting the logic of the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a to HI. Entered in. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can set the D type flip-flop MIC22 in the latched state. The D-type flip-flop MIC22 outputs a power failure advance notice signal from the output terminal 1Q terminal when the state in which the logic is LOW is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal is latched.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control program sets a state in which a RAM clear process for initializing the main control internal RAM (game storage unit) can be executed for a predetermined time after the power is turned on (when the game side power is turned on). Operation control means). Specifically, the main control program first determines whether or not the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 70 is operated (step S16). In this determination, the main control program inputs an error cancellation navigation command (first error cancellation command) to the main control MPU 1310a based on an operation signal (detection signal) associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951. It is done depending on whether or not it has been done. Based on the logical value of the operation signal, the main control program determines that it does not instruct to clear the RAM when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is HI, and the operation switch 954 is operated. On the other hand, when the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to clear the RAM and it is determined that the operation switch 954 is operated.

  In step S16, the main control program sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to the value 1 when the operation switch 954 is operated (step S18). On the other hand, the main control program sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when the operation switch 954 is not operated in step S16 (step S20). That is, the main control program can execute a RAM clear process for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit)) for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. State (game control side power-on operation control means). The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above indicates whether or not to erase the game information related to the game such as the probability variation and the unpaid prize balls stored in the main control built-in RAM (game storage unit) of the main control MPU 1310a. It is a flag that indicates and is set to a value of 1 when erasing the game information and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S18 and step S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control program performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time standby process, the system for performing the drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 is activated (boot. Waiting). In this embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as the standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control program determines whether or not a power failure advance notice signal is input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When the power outage notice signal is input in the determination in step S24, the main control program returns to the determination in step S24 again and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power outage notice signal is continuously input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. A detailed description will be given later of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed after the wait time waiting process in step S22.

  When it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal is not input, the main control program determines whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the game information is erased and a value of 0 when the game information is not erased. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 in step S26, that is, when the game information is not erased, a checksum is calculated (step S28). This checksum regards the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculates the total thereof.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control program determines that the calculated checksum value (sum value) is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power cutoff process (power cutoff) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When they match, the main control program determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores and holds game backup information such as game information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in main power supply side power-off processing to be described later. It is a flag indicating whether or not it has been done, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally completed, and a value of 0 when the main control side power-off process is not normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , Will be described later in detail.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S32, that is, when the main control-side power-off processing is normally completed, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as the power recovery time ( Step S34). This setting reads the power recovery time information from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and sets this power recovery time information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "power recovery" refers to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is turned off, a state in which power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure, and fraudulent means (for example, a fraudulent person has The main control board 1310 is irradiated with a high frequency from the hidden high frequency output device), and the main control MPU 1310a itself is reset.

  Following step S34, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 0 (step S36). As a result, the game information, the value of the checksum (sum value), etc. are changed by performing the various processes thereafter, so that the main control side power-off process, which will be described later, is normally terminated and the backup flag BK- If the value 1 is not set in FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM will be cleared, as will be described later.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S26, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S30. , Or when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S32, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the main control program executes the entire main control RAM. The area is cleared (step S38). That is, the main control program executes the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the input of the detection signal accompanying the operation of the operation switch 954 described above (payout control side power-on operation control means). Specifically, the main control program is executed by writing the value 0 to the main control built-in RAM. Alternatively, the main control program may read and set a predetermined value from the ROM with built-in main control as an initial value. Further, the main control MPU 1310a, the logical value of the operation signal from the operation switch 954 is for instructing the RAM clear, when deleting the game information, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power off process When not normally completed, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is taken out, and the fixed numerical value range of the counter for updating the normal symbol per determination judgment random number based on the taken out ID code. Always perform the initial value derivation process that derives the same fixed value from, and set this fixed value to the random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol per determination, which is used to determine the initial value of the above random number for the ordinary symbol. To do.

  Following step S38, the main control program sets the work area of the main control internal RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the ROM with built-in main control and setting this initial information in the work area of the RAM with built-in main control.

  Following step S36 or step S40, the main control program performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting sets an interrupt cycle when the main control side timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control program performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports built into the main control MPU 1310a (for example, serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels) for the payout control board 951 and serial input / output ports (reception channels and transmission channels for the peripheral control board 1510). Corresponding to the above), the transmission serial port prescaler is set with the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set with the initialization of the transmission circuit and the transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control program performs the test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a gaming machine testing organization, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control program sets the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69 (step S48). Here, a hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a for updating the big hit determination random number used for determining whether to generate the big hit game state among the various random numbers related to the game by hardware. In addition to performing settings such as latching and obtaining a random number, the activation of the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is activated by these settings, it is predetermined at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a (clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator MX0 shown in FIG. 77). Extract other values in the numerical range one after another without duplication, and once all values in the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, again extract one value in the predetermined numerical range, Based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted at high speed one after another without duplication. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when obtaining a random number (random number value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an, and the main control when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the built-in hard random number circuit 1310an is acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the acquired random number value as a big hit determination random number.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control program sets the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, in order to notify that power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, FIG. The power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in (4) are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the game information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored. is there. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted. These commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given later of the fact that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control program performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, when a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on, that is, when the main processing on the main control side is started, the main control program sends an error release navigation command associated with the operation of the operation switch 954 (operation switch). Execution of the game control side RAM clear processing triggered by the reception will be restricted (normal time operation control means). As described above, the main control program uses the concept of time sharing to detect the detection signal input in accordance with the operation of the operation switch 954, as described above, for the error release navigation command for a predetermined time after the power is turned on. RAM clear processing is executed upon input (game control side power-on operation control means), and after the predetermined time has elapsed, execution of RAM clear processing is restricted even if the error clear navigation command is input ( The game control side normal operation control means) is handled as a release switch for releasing the error notification associated with the error that has occurred. That is, the operation switch 954 (error canceling unit), which was originally supposed to be used for canceling the error that has occurred in the payout operation, is used as the game storing unit instead of the power-on for a predetermined time. Of the main control built-in RAM (and a payout control built-in RAM as a payout storage unit described later) is caused to function as an operation unit for executing a RAM clearing process for starting initialization, or after a predetermined time has elapsed, the game is played. It can be made to function as an operation unit for canceling an error that has occurred in the payout operation of the ball.

  Next, the main control program determines whether or not the power failure notice signal is input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, or when the power is interrupted or momentarily stopped, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure notification voltage, the power failure notification signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as the power failure notification. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  When no power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program performs a non-winning random number updating process (step S56). In the non-win / win random number updating process, the reach determination random number, the variable display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determining random number, the small hit symbol initial value determining random number, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-winning random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the winning / judging determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. In addition, the random number per normal symbol, the random number for determining the initial value per normal symbol, the random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number updating process.

  Following step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control program determines whether or not there is an input of the power outage notice signal. Then, step S54 to step S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S54, the main control program sets the interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is not performed, writing to the main control internal RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S58, the main control program starts outputting the power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same processing as the processing that started the output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clearing processing in step S14 is performed. As a result, the main control program can release the latched state of the D type flip-flop MIC22 under the control of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control program is the starting port solenoid 2107, the attacker solenoid 2108, the first special symbol display device 1403, the second special symbol display device 1405, and the first special reserved number display device 1404 shown in FIG. , The second special reserved number display 1406, the normal symbol display 1402, the normal symbol storage display 1188, the status display 1401, the round display 1407 and the like, the drive signal output to stop (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control program calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum regards the game information of the work area of the main control internal RAM as a numerical value, and excludes the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, and calculates the total.

  Following step S64, the main control program sets the backup flag BK-FLG to the value 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

  Following step S66, the main control program sets the RAM access prohibition (step S68). By setting this RAM access prohibition, it becomes impossible to access the main control built-in RAM (game storage section), so that the content of the main control built-in RAM (game storage section) can be prevented from being updated.

  Following step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this endless loop, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. After that, the main control program performs this main control side power-on process again under the control of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. The process of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power-off process".

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, and the main control side power-on process is performed by subsequent power restoration.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S32, whether or not the main control side power-off process is normally ended. Are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information is stored by fraud.

  Here, description will be made on the point that the presence / absence of the power failure advance notice signal in step S24 is determined following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, regarding the problem in the case where the presence or absence of the power failure advance notice signal is not determined in step S24, that is, when the wait time standby process in step S22 is followed by the determination of the value of the RAM clear flag in step S26 and the subsequent processes are performed Described below are the problems.

  As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 when the power from the pachinko island facility is cut off due to a power failure or a momentary power failure. The electric charge is applied as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of power failure or momentary power failure. In other words, even when the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a momentary power failure or a power failure, the electric charge charged to the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V allows the power from the pachinko island equipment to be supplied. The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, while performing main control-side main processing or main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and pachinko island equipment When the power is shut off, the main control side power shutoff process can be reliably completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process of step S22 upon power recovery, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display by the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 of the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 72 are displayed. Immediately before the waiting time (boot timer: 2.5 seconds is set in the present embodiment) until the system for performing the drawing control of the device 460 is activated (booted) is started, and the waiting time is reached. Then, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 as +5 V is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, step S42 In step S52, the interrupt initial setting is performed, and then the interrupt enable setting is performed in step S52. Even if the main control side timer interrupt processing described above is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control side power-off processing in the main control side power-on processing. .. For this reason, the value when the checksum is calculated based on the contents of the RAM with built-in main control is not stored, and the power-on process on the main control side is started again when power is restored.

  Then, at the time of power recovery this time, the main control side power-on process is started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without the occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure, and then in step S28, the main control built-in RAM If the checksum value based on the contents of is compared with the value stored in the RAM with built-in main control immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs in step S30, the checksum values should match. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, when the power is restored, the operation switch 954 is operated by the clerk in the hall or the like, and the information stored in the RAM with the main control is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no intention of the RAM clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that it will be done.

  In view of this, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24 again, the determination of step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure advance notice signal continues to be input. As a result, the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af started in step S12, the time count by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared, and the time measurement is restarted. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af. Although the value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S18 or step S20 before performing the wait time waiting process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the main value as described above. Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10, the content of the main control internal RAM (game information) is not changed at all.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step When the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22 (when determined by the determination of step S24), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted, so that the game can proceed. It is possible to prevent the game information from being updated, and there is no change in the checksum calculation result. It has become so that it does not. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when restarted, determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 matches the calculated and stored checksum value of step S64. Therefore, the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or a power failure stored and retained in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not the power outage notice signal is input is provided as step 24, and when the power outage notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not shut off after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 is in progress of the game. Even if the power supply to 1 is cut off, a backup process for storing game information according to the progress of this game by supplying power to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a by the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. A master control constituted by the processing of steps S58 to S68 Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the processing at the time of side power-off, when the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a is restarted, the checksum calculation result of step S28 is calculated. And the calculation result of the checksum in the backup processing (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) are determined to match with each other. There is no need to initialize the game information immediately before a power outage. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by being restored to the game information immediately before the occurrence of a momentary power failure or a power failure.

  Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal is input, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control internal WDT 1310af so that the contents of the main control internal RAM are reset. While the main control-side power-off processing can be restarted without updating at all, while immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure advance notice signal has not been input, As described above, it is possible to surely complete the main control side power-off process within the "instantaneous power failure or power outage securing period" of about 7 ms by hardware. That is, in the present embodiment, when the main control MPU 1310a is powered off when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the main control side power-on process is performed at the time of power recovery. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal as +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of the power failure or the instantaneous blackout. Therefore, if the main control side power-off process cannot be completed within the “instantaneous power interruption or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the wait time waiting process of step S22 is performed. Immediately after that, in step 24, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If the power failure warning signal is input, step S24 is performed. Returning to the judgment again, as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the judgment in step S24 is repeated to clear the timer in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT 1310af activated in step S12. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by setting the set value and clearing the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af so that the time measurement cannot be started again. . Since the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT 1310af by such software, a step after step S24 (specifically, interrupt initialization is performed in step S42, and then in step S52). It is possible to prevent the contents (game information) of the main control internal RAM from being updated by blocking the progress to the control flow of setting the interrupt permission and starting the main control side timer interrupt process described later). Adopted the mechanism. When the power from the pachinko island equipment is cut off due to a power outage or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control internal RAM (game information) are not changed at all by software and the main control side power supply. The contents of the main control built-in RAM (by including the part covered by the hardware so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information) are not changed at all by surely completing the disconnection process) It is possible to reliably prevent the game information) from being changed.

  Next, the point that the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is set in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34, it is indicated that the power is turned on (power recovery). For transmission, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. As described above, the power-on main control return destination command is mainly composed of information for instructing the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and information for instructing the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. There is. Here, first, when the power-on main control return destination command does not include the information indicating the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 and the information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. The problem in step S50, that is, the problem when the reservation of the command to be transmitted when the power-on main control return destination command is turned on at step S50 is not set will be described.

  For example, while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, the big hit game display screen) in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 shown in FIG. 8, the main control board 1310 is displayed. 8 activates the attacker solenoid 2108 to open the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 by the opening / closing member 2107, and a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 makes steps. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in S34, the attacker is restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. Starting the driving of the solenoid 2108 and shifting from the state where the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107 to the state where it is opened. That.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the shortened state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is generating a big hit game state as a game state, if a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 causes the main control board 1310 to be restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed and returned in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state, It is impossible to display at all which round of the jackpot gaming state. That is, for example, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, is detected by the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69, and a special winning opening 1 count display command which conveys the number of balls of the game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is displayed. Even if the main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is a ball of a game ball that has entered the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if the number can be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, what round) of the big hit game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2108 and opens the special winning opening 2005 by the opening / closing member 2107, for example, when finishing four rounds of the big hit game state (fourth round). From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control of the special winning opening 1 closing display command for instructing the transition from the open state to the closed state (that is, starting closing between the special winning opening 2005 rounds of the starting opening unit 2100). When transmitting to the board 1510 and the main control board 1310 starts the big hit game state of the fifth round (fifth round), the attacker solenoid 2108 is started to drive and the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the opening / closing member 2107. The effect of shifting from the state to the open state (that is, 5 of the special winning opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) of the eye of the round from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen for starting the fifth round in the big hit game state from the screen corresponding to the above-described probability and time saving state and displays it in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Becomes

  Further, for example, a screen informing that the game state becomes a game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, the fact that the movable piece is expanded) The main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2107 while the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to display the screen (which is transmitted to the player) to the pair shown in FIG. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the movable piece of FIG. 10 is expanded in the left-right direction and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 causes the main control built-in RAM in step S34 to save the work area. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting, the driving state of the starting opening solenoid 2107 is started by being restored to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure. And thus the transition to a state of being expanded from a state in which the movable piece of the pair climbed standing substantially perpendicularly to the lateral direction.

  However, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and returns when power is restored. Then, when power is restored thereafter, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state and the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs. Then, when power is restored after that, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of the power recovery. Even if it can be displayed and returned to the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, a game state in which a game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004 is brought to a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen indicating that the game board side effect display device 1600 displays at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and at the time of power restoration, the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure. It may be forgotten that it is a possible game state, and in such a case, it is returned to the game state in which the game ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 as the game state at the time of power recovery. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. Therefore, there is also a problem that the player does not know what kind of game he or she plays.

  As described above, in the above-mentioned two examples, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure cannot be promptly returned after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power restoration, power restoration is also performed when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). In order to send the power-on main control return destination command to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  Thereby, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above example, in the 4 rounds of the big hit game state, When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then power is restored, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is released from the state closed by the opening / closing member 2107 as the destination of the main control board 1310. Since the peripheral control board 1510 can be notified to the effect that it will shift to the state in which it is in the state, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies the screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the big hit game state (that is, the screen indicating how many rounds it is). ) Cannot be displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, but it is a big hit game state and A screen that tells that the causal solenoid 2108 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member 2107 (for example, "Big hit. The big winning opening is open. Please display a message that tells the player that a ball should be entered. ") Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. After that, it is possible to instruct a game of inserting a game ball into the special winning opening 2005, and, for example, in the above-described example, the game state becomes that the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004. In a game state that is advantageous to the player, when a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the starting opening solenoid 2107 is returned to the main control board 1310 as a return destination. A screen that tells you that the drive has started and the pair of movable pieces have been expanded to the left and right (for example, "The movable piece is expanded. Insert the game ball into the lower start opening. Please play a message to the player ”message is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510 and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is restored. At, it is possible to instruct a game of inserting a game ball into the second starting opening 2004. This allows the main control board 1310 to finely instruct the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs thereafter. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of a pachinko machine mistakenly thinks that the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a lumped state, a so-called frozen state, and fails when a power failure occurs or a power failure occurs after that. Can be prevented.

  Next, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the checksum of step S28 is checked. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 is configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off processing, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control internal RAM is calculated in step S28, In the comparison judgment, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM must be cleared in step S38. As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is made in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89 are created. By storing the transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, only two commands, that is, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are transmitted information as the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It will be in the state stored in. In these commands, a power-on state command is first transmitted and then a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted in the main control timer interrupt process described later. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 sends a power-on state command as the first command. It will be transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, as described above, the power-on state command is shown in FIG. 70 at the time of power-on (including power-on, power recovery when power failure or momentary power failure occurs and power is restored). Information indicating that when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 shown in the figure is operated to perform the RAM clear, and when the power is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs (Including when power is restored), in any of the above-mentioned low-probability time-saving state, high-probability time-saving state, low-probability non-time-saving state, and high-probability non-time-saving state (probability and time-saving state) It is composed of information for instructing whether to perform and a information for indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine will be described.

  As described above, the model code of the pachinko machine refers to the copyright of which work when the so-called Max type, Middle type, and Sweet Digi type are respectively created as the pachinko machine 1 (to be precise, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, if probability variation occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (eg, It is possible to specify whether the game specification (so-called ST machine) or the like) in which the probability variation occurs after being played 30 times or 70 times).

In the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works may be mixed.
Then, the worker on the production line is the main copyright holder for which of the copyrights of the plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works of movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, comic E, and comic F). It is unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyright of the work of the movie D). Although the main control board 1310 is flowing to the manufacturing line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 may be used to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called Manga F). There are also beliefs and misconceptions that it is flowing to the production line. Therefore, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line is It is not possible to confirm which product copyright the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and which product type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) It is also impossible to confirm whether the game specification is a type or not, and what kind of game specification (a game specification or ST machine in which if a probability change occurs, that state continues until the next big hit game state occurs). As a result, in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control boards for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed. 1310 is mixed and sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach the main control board 1310, which does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work, to the game board 5. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the model code of the pachinko machine is used when the main control board 1310 is turned on (in addition to the case where the power is turned on, also when the power is restored and power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure). In order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating that to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. Is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, these commands are transmitted in the main control side timer interrupt process described later.

  As a result, the operator of the manufacturing line of the maker who manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step, which is the inspection step of the production line, so that the inspection device is controlled by the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, configuring the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, described above, Max type indicating the model type, middle type, And, a series code for specifying which type of sweet digital type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state will continue until it occurs, probability fluctuations will occur with a limited number of fluctuations of special symbols Based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (ST machine etc.) of slipping, and by visually observing the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, the main control board 1310 can control the copyright of which work. It is possible to determine which is the model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to discriminate whether or not it is a game specification or ST machine in which when a probability variation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs. As a result, in the manufacturing line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, even if the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. By visually observing the inspection monitor, the operator can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification. Can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered due to the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[14-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt processing is started, in the main control board 1310, the main control program switches the register bank under the control of the main control MPU 1310a as shown in FIG. 94 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main processing in the power-on processing on the main control side described above, while the first register bank is used in the main control timer interrupt processing which is the main routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing which is the present routine, the first register bank to the second Switch the register bank to the register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, is started, it is not necessary to save each register to the stack.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control program performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display 1403 and the second special symbol display 1405 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process described later, the ordinary condition described later. In addition to the time when the normal symbol display 1402 is turned on according to the symbol and the normal symbol variation display pattern determined by the normal electric accessory control process, various commands sent by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) are issued to the payout control board 951. When the payer ACK signal for notifying that the message has been normally received is input, time management such as the ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt period is set to 4 ms, so the fluctuation time is decremented by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed. Then, the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is accurately measured when the subtraction result becomes the value 0.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. The ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms each time this timer subtraction process is performed, and the ACK signal input determination time is accurately measured because the subtraction result becomes the value 0. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control program performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Specifically, this main control program is, for example, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 shown in FIG. 69 for detecting the game balls entered in the general winning openings 2001, 201 shown in FIG. The detection signal from the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. 69 that detects the game ball that entered the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 and the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 are detected. The detection signal from the first starting port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 69, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 69 which detects the game ball entering the second starting port 2004 shown in FIG. , A detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 69 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 shown in FIG. 8 and a magnetic detection sensor that detects fraudulent activity using the magnet shown in FIG. The payout ACK signal from the payout control board 951 for notifying that the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. 69 has normally received the detection signal from the H.024 or the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later is read. , Is stored in the input information storage area as input information. Further, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004. When each of the signals is read, the corresponding starting opening winning command shown in FIG. 90 and corresponding thereto is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the corresponding starting mouth winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and there is a detection signal from the second starting mouth sensor 4004. Then, the starting mouth winning command corresponding thereto is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020 that detect the game balls that entered the general winning openings 2001 and 201, the count sensor 4005 that detects the game balls that entered the large winning opening 2005. From the first starting opening sensor 4002 that detects the game ball that entered the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening sensor 4004 that detects the game ball that entered the second starting opening 2004 The detection signal from the gate sensor 2003 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate unit 2003 are first read as the first time when this switch input process is started, and are read for a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs). ) After the passage of time, it is read again as the second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not some of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, it is treated as having no game ball.

  As described above, in the switch input process, the main control program outputs the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting opening sensor 4002, the second starting opening sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003. Due to the influence of chattering, noise, etc., by performing a total of two times of reading by two readings for comparing the first to third times and two readings for comparing the second to fourth times. Since it is possible to avoid erroneous detection, the detection signals from the general winning a prize mouth sensors 4020, 4020, the count sensor 4005, the first starting mouth sensor 4002, the second starting mouth sensor 4004, and the gate sensor 4003 are detected. The reliability can be increased.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control program performs a winning random number update process (step S106). In this winning random number update process, the above-described random numbers for big hit symbols and random numbers for small hit symbols are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, which is updated by the non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 93, Also, the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol is updated. The random numbers for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random numbers for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are respectively updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), so that each time the winning random number updating process is performed, each counter counts up. In addition, the above-mentioned normal symbol hitting determination random number, the normal symbol hitting determination initial value determining random number are also updated by this winning random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for determining the normal symbol is an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the minimum value is set. The range from the maximum value to the maximum value is incremented by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is counted up from the minimum value. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol per hit determination random number, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining the initial value for the normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing the initial value lottery process for randomly selecting a value from the fixed numerical range of the counter that updates the random number for the symbol hit determination. ..

  In this embodiment, Random number for initial value determination for big hit symbols, And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol, The non-winning random number updating process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number updating process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process which is this routine, Each time the interrupt timer is generated, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven, and the main control side main processing is repeatedly executed within the remaining time until the next interrupt timer is generated. If the number of executions is random, Random number for initial value determination for big hit symbols, And, the mechanism for updating the random number for determining the initial value for the small hitting symbol may be updated only in the non-winning random number updating process of step S56.

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control program performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control processing, the input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 88 for paying out the game ball is created based on this input information, and is also paid out as the prize ball. When the planned number of game balls has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to inform that fact, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area as the output information. The self-check command shown in FIG. 88 for confirming the connection state between the control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 951 as main pay serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls planned to be paid out as a prize ball. Since it has reached 10 balls, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to notify that fact, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 951. Alternatively, when the payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 951 has normally received this prize ball command is not input within a predetermined time, the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951 is confirmed. For example, a self-check command is created and transmitted to the payout control board 951. If the number of game balls to be paid out as a prize ball exceeds 10 as in the case of creating a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball, the number of balls that has exceeded the next time In the prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the added number of game balls is added. When is reached, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set in order to notify that effect and is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

Following step S108, the main control program performs a frame command reception process (step S110). In the payout control board 951, the payout control program has various 1-byte (8-bit) commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 91 (for example, frame status 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame status 2 command). To send. On the other hand, as will be described later, the payout control program outputs an error occurrence command when an error occurs in the payout operation, or outputs an error release navigation command based on a detection signal of the operation switch 954.
In the frame command reception process described above, when the main control program normally receives these various commands as payer serial data, the information to the effect is sent to the payout control board 951 and output information is stored in the output RAM of the main control built-in RAM. Store in the area. Further, the main control program formats the command normally received as the payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into the status display of FIG. 90 (frame status 1 command, error clear). The navigation command and the frame state 2 command)) are stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information. The frame state 1 command here corresponds to the first error occurrence command, and the error cancellation navigation command corresponds to the first error cancellation command.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control program performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent activity detection processing, an abnormal state regarding the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the input information storage area described above and the detection signal from the count sensor 4005 is input when the jackpot is not in the gaming state (when the game ball enters the special winning opening 2005), etc. The abnormal winning state display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 90 is created, and is stored in the above-mentioned transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Following step S112, the main control program performs a special symbol and special electric auditors product control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an shown in FIG. 69, and the random number extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an when the latch signal is input. The (random number value) is obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as the big hit determination random number. Whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the big hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance match. Whether or not to determine (whether to generate a jackpot gaming state (referred to as "special lottery")), or take out the value of the counter for updating the jackpot symbol random number is stored in advance in the main control ROM It is determined whether or not the probability variation hit determination value matches (determination as to whether or not probability variation occurs). Here, the “probability change” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (probability change time) set higher than in a normal time (low probability). In the present embodiment, as the range of the above-mentioned big hit judgment value (big hit judgment range), the values 32668 to 32767 are set in the low probability and are read from the normal time judgment table, whereas the value 31768 is set in the high probability. A value 32767 is set and is read from the probability variation time determination table. In this way, in the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing of step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in When determining whether or not the jackpot determination value stored in the ROM in advance matches, a jackpot determination random number (that is, a random number value obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control built-in main control MPU 1310a). It is performed depending on whether or not is included in the jackpot determination range.

  When these determination results are based on the first starting port sensor 4002, various commands related to special figure 1 tuning effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, while the lottery result is based on the second starting port sensor 4004. In some cases, various commands related to special figure 2 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined variable display pattern of the special symbol. Set the output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 so as to light the device 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405, stored in the output information storage area described above as output information To do. Further, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the big hit game state is reached, various commands classified as the big hit related ones shown in FIG. 89 (big hit opening command, big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 A closing display command, a special winning opening 1 count display command, a big hit ending command, and a big hit symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or the opening / closing member 2107 shown in FIG. 8 is opened / closed. When the output of the drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area, or when the special winning opening 2005 is changed from the closed state to the opened state twice (round), Turn on the 2 round display lamp 1407a of the round display 1407 shown in FIG. Output of the lighting signal to the round display lamp 1407a is stored in the output information storage area as output information, or when the number of rounds is 15, the 15 round display lamp 1407b of the round display unit 1407 shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp 1407b is set to be turned on and is stored in the output information storage area as output information, and the status indicator 1401 is turned on to turn on or off the occurrence of probability variation in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control program performs normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on this input information. In the gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned random number for normal symbol judgment is extracted and the gate information is stored in the gate information storage area of the main control RAM. Remember.

  The gate information storage area is provided with 0th to 3rd partitions (4 partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like this. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th section to the 2nd section of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is set to the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is set to the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is set to the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of information storage is shifted to the second section of gate information storage, and the third section of gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage, The gate information of the two sections is respectively shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first to third sections of the gate information storage, the above-described gate information is used so that the normal symbol storage display 1188 is turned on with the total number of the stored gate information as the reserved balls. The output of the lighting signal of the normal pattern storage display 1188 is set based on the above, and is stored in the above-mentioned output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the value of the random number for normal symbol determination is extracted from this read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not the normal symbol hit determination value matches (called "ordinary lottery"). Whether or not to open / close the movable piece is determined based on the result of this determination (the result of the ordinary lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed by this determination, the pair of movable pieces are opened in the left-right direction, and the game ball can be received in the second starting opening 2004, which is advantageous for the player. It becomes a game state. The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified into those related to the universal symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. 89 are created and used as transmission information. While storing in the transmission information storage area described above, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 1402 is set so as to light the normal symbol display 1402 according to the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information is described above. Stored in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination that is taken out coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, various commands related to the normal electric power combination effect shown in FIG. 89. Is generated and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the output of the drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. , When the value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination taken out does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation based on the random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern described above. The display pattern is determined, various commands classified as related to the universal figure entraining effect shown in FIG. 89 are created, and the transmission information described above is used as the transmission information. While storing in the memory area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device 1402 is set to light the normal symbol display device 1402 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage region described above is output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control program performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control program sends a main payout ACK signal to the payout control board 951 when the various commands from the payout control board 951 are normally received from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2108 that opens / closes the opening / closing member 2107 of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in a game state, or outputs a drive signal to the starting opening solenoid 2107 that opens / closes the movable piece. In addition to outputting, the main prize ball number information output signal, 15 round big hit information output signal, 2 round big hit information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, Various information related to games such as time saving information output information, starting mouth winning information output signal (game And outputs a broadcast) signal to the payout control board 951.

  Following step S118, the main control program performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program reads the transmission information from the above-mentioned transmission information storage area and transmits this transmission information to the peripheral control board 1510 as main-circulation serial data. In this transmission information, various commands created in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine shown in FIG. 89 and classified into special figure 1 tuning effect-related and special figure 2 tuning effect-related Various commands classified as commands and big hits (for example, big winning based on a detection signal from a count sensor 4005 (see FIG. 69) when a game ball entering a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 8) is detected) 90, which is a special winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to the mouth count command), various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as ordinary figure synchronization effect-related, various commands classified as ordinary electric role effect related, and FIG. The various commands classified in the notification display (door opening command, door frame closing command, body frame opening command, body frame closing command, etc.) and status display Various commands (frame state 1 command, error reset navigation command and the frame state 2 command), various commands and various commands are classified into other are divided into test-related are stored that. One packet of the main serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main serial data is a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value obtained by calculating the sum of the modes as numerical values, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, the main control program transmits various commands as main circumference serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 77 is applied as +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs. Therefore, the main peripheral serial transmission port 1310ae built in the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. 79 transmits at least the command set by the main control CPU core 1310aa to the transmission buffer register 1310aeb by the serial management unit 1310aec. The data can be transferred to the register 41eaa and can be completely transmitted from the transmission shift register 1310eaa as main-cycle serial data. At the time of power recovery in which power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure, in order to inform the power recovery in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main power-on side power-on process shown in FIG. In addition, since the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command classified into power on shown in FIG. 89 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM. , A main-cycle serial data, which constitutes a power-on state command, is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitutes a power-on main control return destination command, status, The information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of mode and sum value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, the game information is read from the game backup information and the game information is responded to. There are also cases where various commands are stored. In such a case, after completion of transmission of various commands according to game information, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command are subsequently transmitted.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the frame state 1 command (first error occurrence command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control unit Frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command) to () (error command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the frame state 1 command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

  On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives an error release navigation command (first error release command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal reception port, the peripheral control board 1510 An error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command) is transmitted to (error command transmission means). In this case, the main control program transfers the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the error release navigation command in the form shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame opening command (first main body frame opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 A body frame opening command (second body frame opening command) is transmitted to the (production control unit) (body frame command sending means, second body frame sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame opening command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 ( The main body frame closing command (second main body frame closing command) is transmitted to the effect control unit (main body frame command sending means, second main body frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the body frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

  In the peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door opening command (first door opening command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door opening command (second door frame opening command) is transmitted to the (unit) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door frame closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90. On the other hand, in this peripheral control board command transmission process, when the main control program receives the door closing command (first door closing command) from the payout control board 951 through the RXA terminal receiving port, the peripheral control board 1510 (production control) A door closing command (second door closing command) to the (part) (door frame command sending means, second door frame command sending means). In this case, the main control program transfers the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 91 received from the payout control substrate 951 to the peripheral control substrate 1510 as the door closing command in the form shown in FIG. 90.

  Following step S120, the main control program clears the main control built-in WDT 1310af shown in FIG. 69 (step S122), and ends this routine. The main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared in step S22 by setting a timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT 1310af is cleared. Then, the main control built-in WDT 1310af restarts the timing, so that the main control built-in WDT 1310af does not forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 backs up the above-mentioned backup for storing the game information based on the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off during the progress of the game. The process can be completed by executing the process, and at the time of power recovery, the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off as the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 based on the game information for which the backup process is executed. 89, the peripheral control board 1510 outputs the power-on main control return destination command of FIG. It is possible to output to. In other words, the main control board 1310 is mainly used in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the main-control-side power-on process of FIG. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in control RAM, the power-on status command and power-on main command classified into power-on in FIG. 89 are transmitted in order to notify that the power is turned on (power recovery). A control return destination command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command as main circumference serial data. , The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. Constituting the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 sets the game board side effect display device 1600 as the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery. Can be displayed in the display area. As a result, when a player is playing a momentary power failure or power outage and then recovers power, the game state immediately before the power outage or power failure should be immediately restored after power recovery. As well as being able to display the destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the system can be informed, so-called freeze. It is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player is in a broken state and has failed. Therefore, by returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure after the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the player has failed.

  Further, in the main control board inspecting step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, as shown in FIG. In step S38 in the power-on process on the main control side, all areas of the main control internal RAM must be cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same process, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified into the power-on shown in FIG. 89. And a power-on main control return destination command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control internal RAM, so that two commands, a power-on state command and a power-on main control return destination command, are stored. Only the transmission information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM with built-in main control, and in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, the power-on state command is configured as the main circumference serial data. Inspection of main control board inspection process in order of status, mode, and sum value Send the location, followed by forming the main control return destination command at power-transmitting status, mode, and the inspection apparatus of the main control board inspection process in the order of thumb value. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, that is, the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, which is included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for identifying which of the above-described max type, middle type, and sweet digital type indicating the model type, a copyright code for identifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (For example, if a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (ST Based on the game specification code to specify the machine) etc.), detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor of the main control board inspection process. It has become.

[16-1. Various control processing of peripheral control unit]
[16-1-1. Peripheral controller power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 performs peripheral controller power-on processing, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the effect control program performs the initial setting process under the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a (step S1000). In this initial setting process, the production control program performs a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a itself, a hot start / cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after reset, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs a process of initializing itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 1511a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is initialized in an extremely short time. be able to. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a enters a state in which the interrupt permission is set, and is output from the main control board 1310, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, which is shown in FIGS. 89 and 90. , It becomes a state in which various commands such as commands relating to control of game effects and commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  In the hot start / cold start determination processing, for the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information (1fr) that is the content backed up in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) in the backup first area 1511cb. ) And the production backup information (1 ms) which is the content backed up in Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 (1 ms) are compared, and Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) in the backup second area 1511cc. The production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in, is compared, and the production backup information (1fr), which is the content backed up in Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) ms), and when the compared contents match, the contents stored in Bank1 (1fr) with respect to Bank0 (1fr), which is the storage area normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Production backup information (1fr) and production backup information (1ms), which is the content stored in Bank1 (1ms) for Bank0 (1ms), are copied back to perform a hot start, while comparing When the contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), the value 0 is forcibly written to Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1ms), which are storage areas normally used in the peripheral control RAM 1511c. And cold start.

  Also, in the hot start / cold start determination processing, also for the peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. 73, the effect backup information which is the content backed up in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db. (SRAM) is compared, and the production backup information (SRAM) in the backup second area 1511dc, which is the content backed up in Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM), is compared. When the compared contents match each other, the effect backup information (SRAM) which is the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) with respect to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage region which is normally used in peripheral control SRAM 1511d shown in FIG. ) Is copied back to perform a hot start, and when the compared contents do not match (that is, when they do not match), a value is set to Bank0 (SRAM) which is a storage area normally used in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Forcibly write 0 to start cold. Following such a hot start or cold start, the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup non-managed target work area 1511cf of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. After performing the initialization setting process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 to reset the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it.

  Following step S1000, the effect control program performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, the calendar information for specifying the year / month / day and the time information for specifying the hour / minute / second are acquired from the RTC internal RAM 4165aa of the RTC 41654a of the RTC control unit 4165 shown in FIG. In the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in, the current calendar information is set in the calendar information storage section and the current time information is set in the time information storage section. Further, in the current time information acquisition process, a brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is also performed. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the brightness setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, and the brightness of the LED included in the acquired brightness setting information is set as the game board. The brightness of the backlight of the side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on. As described above, the brightness setting information is the brightness adjustment information for adjusting the range of the brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, in 100% to 70% increments by 5%, and the current setting. The brightness of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that has been set, is included.

  In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, specifically, the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165 is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is set. When turning on, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted and turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information, and the brightness stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165. When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 80%, the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information. Adjust the brightness and turn it on. In the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, the same correction as the above-described brightness correction program for correcting the brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. It's not done at all. This is because the correction program similar to the brightness correction program is incorporated in the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device, so that the brightness of the LED is corrected toward 100% every time the brightness setting process of the liquid crystal display device is executed. This is to prevent being done.

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after the current time information acquisition processing is performed so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Following step S1002, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1006). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, which will be described later, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, and the peripheral control unit steady process. When not executed, the value is set to 0 respectively. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a peripheral control, which will be described later, triggered by the input of the V blank signal from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which indicates that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the section V blank signal interrupt processing. In this step S1006, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. There is.

  Following step S1006, the effect control program determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1008). When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (value 0), the process returns to step S1008 and it is repeatedly determined whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. The peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e after determining whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, and resets the peripheral control MPU 1511a. I try not to get it covered.

  When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed, first, the steady processing in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 (step S1009). The steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed, and to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady process is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1009, the effect control program performs a 1 ms interrupt timer starting process (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, the 1 ms interrupt timer for executing the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer process is activated Also, the value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

  Following step S1010, the effect control program performs a lamp data output process (step S1012). In this lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission to the lamp drive board 4170 shown in FIG. Here, the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp drive board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the lamp driving board is started, the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the gaming board 5 is created by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 specifies the transmission of the lamp drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is stored. The first 1 byte of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored at the head address is transferred to the lamp drive board serial I / O port via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of and write. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and 1 byte of the transmission shift register is synchronized with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. The data of 1 is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board is used. This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. Transmission of serial I / O port for lamp drive board By transferring to the buffer register and writing, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. One byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board.

  In the lamp data output process, the effect control program performs the DMA serial continuous transmission process to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 shown in FIG. Also in this case, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is used to perform serial transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED is started, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 is created in 1511cab by a lamp data creation process described later. Has been set.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area The first 1 byte of the door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the head address of 1511cab is serialized for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer and write to the I / O port transmit buffer register. As a result, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register and synchronizes with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK. Transmission of 1-byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using the bus, the remaining door side light emission data STL-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad. , And frame decoration via the peripheral bus 1511ai By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the dynamic amplifier board LED, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is started to be transmitted bit by bit in synchronization with the door side light emission clock signal STL-CLK, and continuous transmission is performed by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate LED serial I / O port. There is.

  Following step S1012, the effect control program performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, based on the detection signals from various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400, the operation button 410 is operated. Based on the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in which various information obtained is set, the presence or absence of operation of the operation button 410 is monitored, and the operation state of the operation button 410 is game effect. Whether or not to reflect in.

  Following step S1014, the effect control program performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, one screen (one frame) of drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a by the display data creation process described later is transferred from the channels CH1 and CH2 shown in FIG. 74 by the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. As a result, various screens are drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the drawing capability of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is used for the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect. The output to the display device 460 is canceled. This makes it possible to prevent a delay in processing time, but so-called frame drop occurs, but by the lamp data output processing of step S1012, the various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. Various effects from a plurality of LEDs and a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the door frame 3 and a lower speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and an upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. 2 by sound data output processing described later. It is a mechanism that can prioritize the synchronization with the production of music and sound effects that match.

  Following step S1016, the effect control program performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, the effect control program outputs to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data of sound data such as music and sound effects set in the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in the sound data creation processing described later, In addition to music and sound effects, sound data of a notification sound and a notification sound are output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as serialized audio data. When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source, the right audio data is sent to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method in which the right signal is a plus signal and a minus signal. At the same time as the transmission, the left audio data is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 as serial data of a differential method using a plus signal and a minus signal. As a result, the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 perform stereo reproduction of music, sound effects, and the like in accordance with various effects, as well as informative sounds and notification sounds.

  Following step S1018, the effect control program performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, the effect control program updates various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the screen data from the first screen data to the VDP 1512a with the built-in sound source. Update the pointer to indicate whether to output.

  In addition, in the scheduler update process, among the emission data arranged in time series, which constitutes the emission mode generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, the emission data of the various LEDs from the emission data at the beginning to the emission data of various LEDs. The pointer is updated in order to indicate whether the mode is set.

  Further, in the scheduler update process, the sound data such as music and sound effects, and the sound data such as the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series and constitute the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, are instructed. Of the sound command data, the pointer is updated in order to instruct which sound command data is output from the head sound command data to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  In addition, in the scheduler update processing, from the top drive data among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, The pointer is updated to instruct which drive data is to be output. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, is described below. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor / solenoid drive processing that is repeatedly executed each time this 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive source such as the motor or solenoid is driven according to the drive data designated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time the own processing is executed. In other words, the drive data designated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing. Even if the other drive data is instructed from the drive data that is supposed to be performed, it is forcibly updated to instruct the drive data that should be originally instructed in the scheduler update process.

  Following step S1020, the effect control program performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, the effect control program is information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 via the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and various types transmitted from the main control board 1310. Various commands received from the command are analyzed by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process (command receiving unit) described later (command analyzing unit). The effect control program is based on the information transmitted from the effect display drive board 4450 through the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound. Generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in 1511cae. To do. In addition, the production control program, the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process, for example, the start mouth winning command for instructing the start of the start mouth winning effect, the number of holding normal symbols Ordinary symbol storage command for identifying (0 to 4), symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of symbol synchronization effect, symbol storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and special winning opening 2005 The special winning opening 1 count display command (big winning opening count command) output each time the game ball is accepted, or the frame status 1 command (second error occurrence command It is analyzed whether or not it is a full tank error occurrence command) (command analysis means), and it is recognized which game state is currently in. In addition, the command received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is the main frame opening command, the main frame closing command, the door opening command, or the door frame closing after a predetermined time has passed since the power was turned on. Analyze whether it is a command. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and are stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The effect control program analyzes various commands stored in the received command storage area 1511cac. Various commands are classified into special command 1 tuning effect related commands, special command 2 tuning effect related commands, jackpot related commands, and power-on shown in FIG. 89. Various commands, various commands related to general figure synchronization effect, various commands related to ordinary electric role effect, various commands classified to notification display shown in FIG. 90, door frame opening command described above , Status display such as door frame close command, main frame open command, main frame close command, error release navigation command (corresponding to second error release command) and frame status 1 command (corresponding to second error occurrence command) There are various classified commands, various commands related to tests, and other classified commands.

  Following step S1022, the effect control program performs a warning process (step S1024). In the warning process, when the command analyzed by the reception command analysis process of step S1022 as described above includes various commands classified into the notification display shown in FIG. The peripheral control unit 1511 stores the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like, which are set in the abnormality display mode for executing the abnormality notification. It is extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and set to 1511cae in the schedule data storage area of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order from the highest priority registered in advance, and the abnormality is automatically resolved and the other abnormalities are automatically notified. It is supposed to do. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one abnormal condition has occurred after another abnormal condition has occurred and before that abnormal condition is resolved. You can

  Furthermore, in this warning process, after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, the command analyzed by the effect control program in the above-described received command analysis process (step S1022) is divided into the status displays shown in FIG. 90. In the case of various commands such as an error cancellation navigation command (second error cancellation command), by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in a mode different from the normal effect mode associated with the effect operation, for example, on the game board side. A performance display device 1600 (production device), a door frame side production display device 460 (production device), a lamp (production device) is used to visually warn the outside, or a speaker is used to auditorily warn the outside ( Error notification means). In this way, when a malicious player tries to input an error release navigation command to the main control board 1310 by operating the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 despite the game state. Since the pachinko machine 1 is configured to issue a warning to the outside, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310 that may affect the progress of the game.

  Next, following step S1024 described above, the effect control program performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update processing, the effect control program stores in the calendar information storage unit which is acquired in the current time information acquisition processing in step S1002 and set in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. The calendar information and the time information stored in the time information storage unit are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update processing, the hour, minute, second, which is the time information stored in the time information storage unit, is updated, and the year, month, which is the calendar information stored in the calendar information storage unit, based on the updated time information. The day is updated.

  Following step S1026, the effect control program performs lamp data creation processing (step S1028). In this lamp data creation process, the pointer is instructed by the pointer in the emission control program, in which the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020 and the time-sequential light emission data forming the schedule data for light emission mode generation is arranged. Based on the light emission data, the game board side light emission data SL- for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of various decorative boards provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. The DAT is created by extracting it from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is set in the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. And various decorations provided on the door frame 3 Door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs of the board is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is created by extracting from the frame control drive driver circuit board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG.

  Following step S1028, the effect control program performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the effect control program updates the pointer in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the screen generation schedule data, the screen data indicated by the pointer. Is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and is output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts the character data from the liquid crystal and the sound control ROM 1512b based on the input screen data to create the sprite data to produce the game board side effect display device. 1600 and the drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Following step S1030, the effect control program performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the effect control program in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the pointer points out of the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data. The sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a extracts sound data such as music and sound effects stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b and controls the built-in sound source to generate a sound command. The sound data such as music and sound effect is incorporated according to the track number defined in the data, and the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady process is performed), the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak shown in FIG. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotating position of the knob portion of 1510a is converted into a value of 1024 steps from value 0 to value 1023. In the present embodiment, the value of 1024 levels is divided into seven and managed as board volumes 0 to 6, and the board volume 0 is set to mute and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum volume. The volume is set to increase toward the volume 6. The sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 is controlled so that the sound volume is set to the board volumes 0 to 6, and audio data is transmitted as audio data in which the sound data is serialized by the sound data output process of step S1018 described above. By outputting to the IC 1512c, music and sound effects can be played from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound have a mechanism that flows without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion at all. The VDP 1512a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program is different from the board volume divided into the above-mentioned seven stages, and it is possible to smoothly change from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a store clerk or the like in the hall rotates the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a to set the volume low, the effect sound such as music or effect sound flowing from the lower speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is small. However, when a problem occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is conducting an illegal act, the notification sound set to a high volume (the maximum volume in the present embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the clerk or the like in the hall from becoming less likely to notice a malfunction or a player's cheating by the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume that is set by the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob, the volume of the advertising sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music or the sound effect, while the advertising sound is not disturbed. It is advantageous for the player to make the screen unfolded by the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to be more powerful in addition to increasing the volume of sound that is played and to add to music and sound effects. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  Following step S1032, the effect control program performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup process, the effect control program stores the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 in the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc. The contents are stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively, and backed up.

  Specifically, in the backup process, the peripheral control RAM 1511c is backed up every one frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73, that is, every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed. Which is included in Bank0 (1fr), the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, the reception command storage area 1511cac, the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and The effect information (1fr) stored in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is used as effect backup information (1fr) as Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1f) in the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1fr) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1FR) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) are designated to copy to the backup first area 1511cb to Bank1 (1fr), and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of Bank0 (1fr). The stored contents are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the first address of Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa makes the peripheral control D. The content stored in Bank0 (1fr) is specified as the request factor of the A controller 1511ac, and the copy of the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1fr) is designated. From the content stored at the top address of Bank0 (1fr), Bank0 The contents stored up to the end address of (1fr) are all copied sequentially by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) from the start address of Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1fr). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1fr) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1fr) to Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Shi Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1fr) are continuously consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are sequentially copied from the first address of.

  Further, in the backup processing, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d is a backup target for each frame (1 frame) in the backup target work area 1511da shown in FIG. 73, that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac operates at high speed in the Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, using the effect information (SRAM) stored in Bank0 (SRAM) as effect backup information (SRAM). Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank1 (SRAM) in the backup first area 1511db, and change the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the end address of Bank0 (SRAM). The stored contents are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank 1 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa is copied. Contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (SRAM) by designating copy of contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to the backup first area 1511db to Bank2 (SRAM) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac To the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are sequentially copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the top address of Bank2 (SRAM) of the backup first area 1511db.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM) to Bank3 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and the Bank0 (SRAM). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) continuously for each predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (SRAM) of the second area 1511dc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa to the bank 4 (SRAM) of the backup second area 1511dc as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. P2 is specified and the contents stored in the start address of Bank0 (SRAM) to the contents stored in the end address of Bank0 (SRAM) are continuously backed up by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in the second area 1511dc. All are sequentially copied from the top address of Bank 4 (SRAM).

  Following step S1034, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1036). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the effect control program sets the value 0 to the in-steady-processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit stationary processing (step S1038), returns to step S1006 again, and returns to the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is set to a value 0 for initialization, and the determination in step S1008 is repeated until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. That is, in step S1008, the process waits until the value 1 is set in the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, and when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is value 1, steps S1009 to step S1009 to step S1009. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1006 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1008 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processes of steps S1009 to S1038 are performed. The processing of steps S1009 to S1038 is referred to as "peripheral control unit steady processing".

  This peripheral control unit steady process starts with the production control program first setting the value 1 to the steady process in-process flag SP-FLG on the assumption that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed in step S1009, and 1 ms in step S1010. .., and then step S1036. Finally, in step S1038, a value 0 is set in the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing. Set to complete. The peripheral control unit steady process is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 in step S1008. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is executed in response to the V blank signal VDP 1512a inputting the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing described later. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 seconds per second, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[16-1-2. Peripheral controller V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, as shown in FIG. 72, the V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 can be received is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. The peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed with the above will be described. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 (step). S1045). As described above, the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process of steps S1009 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  When the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, this routine is ended as it is. On the other hand, when the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S1045, that is, when the peripheral controller steady processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050). This routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady process, and has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady process is executed and the peripheral control. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady process is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, in step S1045, it is determined whether or not the steady processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. Sometimes, in step S1050, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1. However, this is because the V blank signal is input and V blank is input while the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed. When the signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to the value 1, the peripheral control unit steady process currently being executed is assumed to be performed as the peripheral control unit steady process in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the peripheral control unit steady processing is started from the beginning by forcibly canceling it on the way, the peripheral control unit power supply of FIG. 95 is turned on for the purpose of preventing this. The peripheral control unit V blank signal, which is this routine, indicates that the peripheral control unit steady process is being executed by setting the value 1 in the steady process in-progress flag SP-FLG in step S1009 in the processing (peripheral control unit steady process). The peripheral controller steady processing is completed by notifying the interrupt processing and setting the value 0 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG in step S1038 in the peripheral controller power-on processing (peripheral controller steady processing) of FIG. By transmitting the fact to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine, the steady processing in progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 in the determination of step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is this routine. It is determined whether or not there is, that is, whether or not the peripheral controller steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure in the case where the peripheral control unit steady processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, resulting in so-called processing failure.

  As a result, in the peripheral control unit steady process this time, if the process cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the process is dropped, it is determined next time in the determination of step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The system waits until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing of which the processing has been omitted is about 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is normally executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller power-on process (peripheral controller steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but when there is the peripheral control unit steady process of this time, which has been dropped, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is not performed 64 times. Instead, it is only executed 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is dropped, the consistency between the production progress state by the peripheral control unit steady process and the production progress state by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is consistent. It doesn't collapse. Therefore, even when the peripheral control unit steady process is missed, the progress state of the effect can be reliably matched.

[16-1-3. Peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process that is repeatedly executed every time the 1ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. 95 will be described. .. When the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral controller 1511 shown in FIG. 72 determines whether the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 seconds per second, so V The interval at which the blank signal is input is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady process is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the next peripheral control unit steady process is performed. The peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 32 times before the execution of. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, ..., And the 32 1 ms timer interrupts sequentially. Will occur.

  When the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is generated and the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, this routine is ended as it is. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has a higher priority than the peripheral control unit V in this embodiment. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal. In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the V blank signal is generated, the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, and then the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is newly started by the first generation of the 1 ms timer interrupt. ing.

  On the other hand, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33 times in step S1100, the value 1 is added to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process of FIG. This means that the number of times the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed is increased by one.

  Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are arranged in time series. Among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid, according to the drive data designated by the pointer, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid of the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 and the motor drive board 4180 shown in FIG. 72. Is driven, the pointer is updated to the next drive data defined in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and solenoid drive processing is executed.

  Specifically, in the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 is performed. Here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform continuous transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. When continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is set. To output a drive signal to the dial drive motor 414 of the performance operation unit 400 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series. Door side motor drive data STM-DAT is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c and created, and the frame decoration drive of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 is performed. Ann Set in the transmission data storage area 1511caf substrate side motor. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores the transmission data for the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor. The first 1 byte of the door-side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the head address of the area 1511caf is transferred to the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor via the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai. Transfer to the transmit buffer register of the serial I / O port for writing. As a result, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and the transmission shift register is synchronized with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK. 1 byte of data is started to be transmitted bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac triggers each time a transmission interrupt request of the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O). The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa is triggered when the 1-byte data written in the transmission buffer register of the port is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of the 1-byte data.). Is not using a bus, the remaining door side motor drive data STM-DAT stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is byte by byte, the external bus 1511h, and the peripheral control bus controller. 1511ad, and via the peripheral bus 1511ai, By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register of the serial I / O port for the decoration drive amplifier board motor, the serial I / O port for the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register. To transmit the 1-byte data of the transmission shift register bit by bit in synchronization with the door side motor drive clock signal STM-CLK, and continuously transmit by the frame decoration drive amplifier substrate motor serial I / O port. Is going.

  In the motor and solenoid drive processing, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board 4180 is performed. Also here, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 is used to perform serial transmission for the motor drive board serial I / O port. When the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is started, first, the electric drive source schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached is configured. A motor for moving various movable bodies provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 based on the drive data designated by the pointer among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in series. And the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to the solenoid and the solenoid are extracted from the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and created. Peripheral control RAM 151 shown at 73 Set to the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag of c. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies the transmission of the motor drive board serial I / O port as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac, and stores it in the head address of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. The first 1 byte of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is transmitted through the external bus 1511h, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port. Transfer to a register and write. As a result, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to set 1 of the transmission shift register. Transmission of byte data is started bit by bit.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac uses this as a trigger whenever a transmission interrupt request of the motor drive board serial I / O port is generated (in the present embodiment, the transmission buffer register of the motor drive board serial I / O port is stored). This is triggered when the written 1-byte data is transferred to the transmission shift register and the transmission buffer register is emptied of 1-byte data.), And the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa uses the bus. If not, the remaining game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is byte by byte via the external bus 1511h, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral bus 1511ai. , Motor drive board serial I / O port By transferring and writing to the transmission buffer register, the motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register, and with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. 1 byte of data in the transmission shift register is synchronously started bit by bit, and continuous transmission is performed by the motor drive board serial I / O port.

  Following step S1104, movable body information acquisition processing is performed (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, history information of detection signals from various detection switches (for example, original position history information) is determined by determining whether or not detection signals from various detection switches provided on the game board 5 are input. , Movable position history information, etc.) is created and set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached shown in FIG. From the history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches set in the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah, it is possible to acquire the original positions and movable positions of the various movable bodies provided on the game board 5.

  Following step S1106, effect operation unit information acquisition processing is performed (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the various detection switches provided in the effect operation unit 400 are input, so that history information of the detection signals from the various detection switches (for example, the operation (Operation history information of the button 410, etc.) is created and set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai of the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached, which are shown in FIG. Whether or not the operation button 410 is operated can be acquired from history information of detection signals from various detection switches set in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai.

  Following step S1108, drawing state information acquisition processing is performed (step S1110). In this drawing state information acquisition processing, history information of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created, and the history information shown in FIG. It is set in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak of the peripheral MRAM 1511c externally attached to the control MPU 1511a. As described above, the LOCKN signal is that the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 is abnormal data. When it is determined, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. , A signal for outputting a request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. The door frame side effect display device is obtained by acquiring the frequency and the occurrence state of the failure between the connection between the peripheral control board 1510 and the effect display drive board 4450 from the history information of the LOCKN signal set in the drawing status information acquisition storage area 1511cak. The drawing state of 460 can be acquired.

  After step S1110, a backup process is performed (step S1112), and this routine ends. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, respectively. At the same time, the contents stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d attached externally are copied and backed up in the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc, respectively.

  Specifically, in the backup processing, the peripheral control RAM 1511c executes the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, every time the 1ms interrupt timer in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 occurs. Each time the backup is performed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, and the movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah included in the backup target Bank0 (1 ms) are included. , And the effect information (1 ms) stored in the effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511cai as effect backup information (1 ms), Bank1 (1 ms) and Bank2 of the backup first area 1511cb. Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to 1 ms) is copied at high speed, and backup Bank3 second area 1511cc (1ms) and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank4 (1 ms) is copied at high speed.

  The high-speed copy of the contents stored in Bank 0 (1 ms) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 becomes a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. Specify the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank1 (1ms) in the backup first area 1511cb, and change the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1ms) to the end address of Bank0 (1ms). The stored contents are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in order from the start address of Bank 1 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa sets the peripheral control D. The contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) are requested to be requested by the A controller 1511ac, and the copy of the backup first area 1511cb to Bank2 (1 ms) is designated, and the contents stored in the first address of Bank0 (1 ms) are changed to Bank0. Up to the contents stored in the end address of (1 ms) are sequentially copied by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of Bank2 (1 ms) of the backup first area 1511cb.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa specifies the copy of the contents stored in Bank0 (1 ms) as the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc, and Bank0 (1 ms). ) To the content stored in the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) continuously by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte), the start address of Bank3 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. From the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa requesting the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac to copy the contents stored in Bank0 (1ms) to Bank4 (1ms) of the backup second area 1511cc. Shi Bank4 (1 ms) of the backup second area 1511cc from the content stored at the start address of Bank0 (1 ms) to the content stored at the end address of Bank0 (1 ms) consecutively by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) All are sequentially copied from the first address of.

  As described above, in the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects of step S1104 to step S1108 described above as the progress of effects are executed within the period of 1 ms. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 95, various processes related to the effect of step S1012 to step S1032 described above as the progress of the effect are executed within a period of about 33.3 ms. is doing. In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is started. Since this routine is ended as it is, even if the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal occurrence, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt will occur. After the start of the 1ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control is newly generated by the 1ms timer interrupt process. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. That is, the consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady process and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process, which is the timer interrupt control, is maintained. Therefore, the progress state of the effect can be surely matched.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies slightly depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are different. Even in the manufacturing lot of the mounted peripheral control board 1510, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may change to some extent. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed. In order to execute the section V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, It is possible to absorb a time lag caused by a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[16-1-4. Peripheral control block command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 triggers the main control serial data to be built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. 1 byte (8 bits) of information is fetched into the reception buffer by the board serial I / O port, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated triggered by this, and peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is assigned as the 1st byte, the mode is assigned as the 2nd byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the 3rd byte The calculated sum value is assigned.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 determines whether the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out (step S1200). The 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310.

  If the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, if the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is within the period that can be received, The 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port for the main control board built in the control MPU 1511a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment, step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter indicating the number of times the data is fetched from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is fetched from the reception buffer, the value 1 is set, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is set. The value is 2 when taken out from the receive buffer, and the value 3 is taken out when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, is taken out from the receive buffer. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data, are sequentially output from the reception buffer. It is determined whether it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter SRXC does not have the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the third byte of the main circumference serial data When the sum value is not sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine is ended. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, a period in which the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter SRXC has the value 3 in step S1206, that is, the status which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data, and the status of 3 of the main circumference serial data. When the sum value at the byte is sequentially fetched from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in the reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). In this calculation, the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, which has already been fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202, is regarded as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from a pachinko island facility, and when the game balls are rubbed against each other and charged, electrostatic discharge causes noise, so the pachinko machine 1 is affected by noise. It is in a rasp environment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1511 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received main circumference serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main circumference serial data as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and whether the calculated sum value matches the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main circumference serial data in the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. It is determined whether or not. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 is affected by noise and is changed to different main circumference serial data. be able to.

  In step S1214, when the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 and the sum value calculated in step S1212 match, the received main circumference serial data is received. 73 shows the status allocated as the first byte and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data, the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac of the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached. (Step S1216), and this routine ends. This reception command storage area 1511cac is used as a ring buffer, and the status allocated as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main circumference serial data are the reception command storage area. It is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer of 1511cac. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. It stores data sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and returns to the beginning when the end of the buffer is reached. Remember. The peripheral control MPU 1511a allocates the status assigned as the first byte of the main circumference serial data and the second byte of the main circumference serial data received when the peripheral control MPU1511a stores the status in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer in step S1216. The stored sum is stored in association with the stored mode, and the sum value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1200, that is, the period over which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the main-circulation serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 is exceeded. If, or, in step S1214, the sum value which is the third byte of the main circumference serial data already fetched from the reception buffer in step S1202 does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, this routine is directly executed. finish.

[16-1-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal to be executed when the power outage notification signal (peripheral power outage notification signal) from the power outage monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 75 is input from the main control board 1310. The interrupt processing will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 first activates the 2 microsecond timer (step S1320), and the power failure advance notice signal (peripheral power failure advance notice). Signal) is input (step S1302). If the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) is not input in this determination, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1302, it is determined whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1320 has passed 2 microseconds. If 2 macroseconds have not elapsed in step S1304, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power outage notice signal is input. When the power outage notice signal is not input, this routine is ended as it is, while the power outage notice is issued. When the signal is input, it is again determined in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notification signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started.

  In step S1304, when the peripheral control unit power failure advance notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is started and the power failure advance notice signal is continuously input for 2 microseconds, power saving processing is performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are turned off, the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5 are turned off, and various LEDs are turned off sequentially. By suppressing the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1, the stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time when the peripheral control MPU 1511a can operate even when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

  Following step S1306, command reception standby processing is performed (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can receive the commands being transmitted at least for a period of 17 milliseconds. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the above-mentioned peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the received command storage area 1511cac (peripheral control unit reception ring buffer) externally attached to the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. ) Stores the received command.

  Following step S1308, command backup processing is performed (step S1310). In the backup processing of this command, the contents stored in the reception command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the backup target work area 1511ca shown in FIG. 73 are changed to Bank1 (1fr) and The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank2 (1fr) at high speed, and the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies to Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc at high speed.

  A high-speed copy of the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac will be briefly described. The peripheral control MPU core 1511aa of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. As a request factor of the control DMA controller 1511ac, the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) is designated to be copied to the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb. Then, the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) are changed to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). The contents up to this point are copied in succession by a predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank1 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb, and the peripheral control MPU core is copied. 1511aa transfers the contents stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the received command storage area included in Bank2 (1fr) of the backup first area 1511cb to the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. From the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the content stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) with copy specified , A predetermined number of bytes (e.g., 1 byte) all copies sequentially from the start address of the received command storage area included in the Bank2 (1FR) of the backup successively by the first area 1511Cb.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa includes the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) in the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. Specifying a copy to the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) from the content stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) The contents up to this point are continuously copied by a predetermined byte (for example, 1 byte) in sequence from the start address of the reception command storage area included in Bank3 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc, and peripheral control is performed. The PU core 1511aa stores the content stored in the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac into the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc. To the contents stored in the start address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr) to the contents stored in the end address of the received command storage area 1511cac included in Bank0 (1fr). , A predetermined number of bytes (for example, 1 byte) are continuously copied in order from the start address of the received command storage area included in Bank4 (1fr) of the backup second area 1511cc.

  Subsequent to step S1310, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input (step S1312). If the power failure notice signal is input in this determination, WDT clear processing is performed (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af shown in FIG. 73 and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e shown in FIG. 72 so that the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. .

  On the other hand, when the power failure warning signal is not input in step S1312, or following step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 again to determine whether the power failure warning signal is input. That is, it is infinitely determined whether or not the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is input. By continuously determining in this way, when the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is not input in step S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sends a clear signal to the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e. However, while the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, when the power failure notice signal is input in step S1312, the WDT clear process is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is restarted.

  As described above, when the power failure warning signal (peripheral power failure warning signal) continues to be input in the endless loop in the determination in step S1312, the peripheral control is performed immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. The MPU 1511a is designed not to be reset. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the power outage notification signal is not continuously input and released in the infinite loop, the WDT clear process is not executed, and thus the peripheral control internal WDT 1511af and the peripheral control external WDT 1511e are not connected. The output of the clear signal is interrupted. As a result, even if the peripheral control unit power outage notification signal interrupt process, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like and the noise is generated for a period of more than 2 microseconds and the determination at step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal (peripheral power failure notice signal) is canceled without being continued in the endless loop in the determination of S1312, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset because the WDT clear processing of step S1314 is not executed. Therefore, such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[16-1-6. LOCKN signal history creation processing]
Next, a LOCKN signal history creation process executed as one process of the drawing state information acquisition process of step S1110 in the peripheral controller 1 ms timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 97 will be described. In this LOCKN signal history creation processing, a history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. 87 is created. As described above, the LOCKN signal is the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the data is abnormal, it is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450. This signal is output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal history creation processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72 is connected to the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1500). This LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST stores 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bit B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, "B" represents a bit). The history of the LOCKN signal that has a capacity and is output from the LOCKN terminal of the receiver frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak as LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST. Remembered

  Following step S1500, it is determined whether or not there is a LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive substrate 4450 (step S1502). In this determination, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d is abnormal data. , A request for transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. While there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 receives the drawing data from the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d which is not abnormal data. Data), A predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not requested. To determine.

  When there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1504). In this shift processing of the LOCKN signal detection history information, when there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1500 is set to the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ←. B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← least significant bit B0, and so on, shifting one bit at a time from the least significant bit B0 to the most significant bit B7.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1504, the value 1 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1506), and this routine ends.

  On the other hand, when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in step S1502, shift processing of LOCKN signal detection history information is performed (step S1508). In this LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing, the same processing as the LOCKN signal detection history information shift processing in step S1504 is performed, and when there is no LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, the LOCKN read out in step S1500. The signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is converted into the least significant bit B0 by the most significant bit B7 ← B6, B6 ← B5, B5 ← B4, B4 ← B3, B3 ← B2, B2 ← B1, B1 ← the least significant bit B0. From the most significant bit B7 is shifted one bit at a time.

  When the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted in step S1508, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST (step S1510), and this routine ends.

  Thus, every time this LOCKN signal history creation processing is executed, the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is shifted by one bit from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7, and then to the least significant bit B0. Since the value 1 or the value 0 is set, the history of the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be created.

[16-1-7. Connection failure judgment processing]
Next, a connection failure determination process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection failure determination process, the door frame side provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the history of the LOCKN signal output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the connection failure determination processing is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, of the peripheral control MPU 1511a shown in FIG. 73 and the external peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. The LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST is read from the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak (step S1520). In the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST, as described above, the history of LOCKN signals output from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 is stored. As described above, this LOCKN signal is abnormal data in the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. Is a signal that is output to convey that fact. Specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. Is a signal output for requesting transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  Following step S1520, it is determined whether there is a LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 (step S1522). This determination determines whether or not the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 matches the connection confirmation determination value. This connection confirmation determination value is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b shown in FIG. 72, and is “000011111B (“ B ”represents a bit.”) ”In the present embodiment, and the upper 4 bits B7 to B4. Has a value of 0, and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 have a value of 1. In the determination of step S1522, it is determined whether or not the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST and the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value match.

  In step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 do not match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510 is prepared. It is determined that there is no problem in the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, this routine is finished as it is.

  On the other hand, in step S1522, when the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the LOCKN signal detection history information LOCKN-HIST read in step S1520 match the lower 4 bits B3 to B0 of the connection confirmation determination value, the peripheral control board 1510. The door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d provided in the above and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are in a state of being defective in the connection, that is, in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. Then, the communication check counter CC-CNT is incremented by 1 (increment, step S1524). Each time this routine is executed, the communication check counter CC-CNT counts up the number of times it is determined in step S1522 that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. (Count the cumulative number). The communication check counter CC-CNT is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and the power is restored. It is adapted to be restored to the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

  Following step S1524, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (step S1526). In this determination, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative number. While it is determined that the upper limit value CC-LMT has not been reached, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a problem occurs in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is determined that the cumulative number of times determined to be the current state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT.

  When the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is smaller than the cumulative count upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, the cumulative count determined to be in a state in which the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective is the cumulative count. When the upper limit value CC-LMT is not reached, the value 0 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1528), and this routine is ended. On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not smaller (larger) than the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT in step S1526, that is, it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value 1 is set to the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG (step S1530), and this routine is ended. The communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is a connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. Is a flag that indicates whether or not there is a problem with the transmitter. Value is 1 when there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the running state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, each value is set to 0. The communication error flag CC-FLG is set to 0 and reset when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, whereas it is not reset due to a momentary power failure or a power failure and is restored. The value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is restored to the value at the moment or immediately before a power failure.

[16-1-8. Connection recovery processing]
Next, the connection recovery process executed as one process of the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral controller steady process of the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 will be described. In this connection recovery processing, which is executed subsequent to the connection failure determination processing shown in FIG. 101, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450. When a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is output to confirm (recover) the connection between and, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is abnormal. Notify that.

  When the connection recovery process is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 shown in FIG. 72, in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020, it is determined whether or not the screen generation schedule data is being activated among the various schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73 (step S1540). In this determination, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct which number of screen data from the first screen data to output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a among the time-sequentially arranged screen data forming the screen generation schedule data. First, it is determined whether or not the pointer is updated. In other words, in the scheduler update process, while the pointer is being updated, since the effect is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data is being activated, while the screen generation schedule data is being activated. When the effect is completed according to the data and all the pointers are updated, it is determined that the screen generation schedule data has not been activated. In this determination, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period in which the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a customer waiting state. It is possible to determine whether or not it is during the period based on the screen generation schedule data, and display the start screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on on the game board side effect display device 1600. During the period during which the pachinko machine 1 is in the waiting state or the game board side effect display device 1600 is demonstrating, the process proceeds to step S1542, which will be described later. During the period displayed on the effect display device 1600 or in the customer waiting state, the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed. That when it is not a period that is doing a demonstration in the (mere, is when in the standby state of the customer wait), which is as it is to terminate this routine.

  When the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data in step S1540, that is, when the screen generation schedule data is being activated, this routine is ended as it is, while in step S1540 the screen generation schedule data is followed. When the effect has been completed and the pointers have all been updated, that is, when the screen generation schedule data has not been activated, it is determined whether the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 (step). S1542). As described above, this communication check counter CC-CNT is for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510 in the determination of step S1522 in the connection failure determination process shown in FIG. 101 every time it is executed. Counts up the number of times it is determined that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It does (counts the cumulative number of times). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the number of times of determining that there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has occurred once.

  If the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0 in step S1542, that is, if it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state, the number of times is not 1 On the other hand, when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0 in step S1542 while ending the routine, that is, the number of times it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is even once. If so, it is determined whether or not the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 (step S1544). As described above, the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG indicates that the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state reaches the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, This is a flag that indicates whether or not the connection between the receiver and the receiver is definitely defective. When the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the value is 1, and between the transmitter and the receiver. When the accumulated number of times determined to be in a state in which the connection has a problem has not reached the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the value is set to 0.

  When the value of the communication abnormality flag CC-FLG is 0 in step S1544, that is, the cumulative number of times that it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a defective state is the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT. If it has not reached, the SYNC pattern output processing is performed (step S1546), and this routine is ended. In this SYNC pattern output process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, thereby producing the door frame side effect included in the peripheral control board 1510. The transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450. This predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) is stored in advance in the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and is output to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The connection between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is restored.

  On the other hand, if the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S1544, that is, if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the communication error display process is executed. (Step S1548), and this routine is completed. In this communication error display processing, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8 is provided in order to notify that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective. The process of drawing is performed. For example, a message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Further, in the communication error display processing, a demonstration is performed by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. During the period of operation, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 are connected to each other, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. In order to confirm whether or not a malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a transmits LOCKN signal output request data as an operation confirmation request, and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 causes LOCKN. As a response signal to the transmission of the signal output request data, A LOCKN signal is output from the OCKN terminal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and when this LOCKN signal is not input, a problem occurs in the door frame side effect display device 460 because there is a problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. It is judged that it is doing, and a notification image (for example, “There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk.”) Is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to that effect. In addition to the processing, the notification sound (for example, "the upper plate side liquid crystal display device has a problem") is repeatedly processed from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, a process of turning on all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be performed.

  Next, the timing at which the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a connection confirmation signal to the INIT terminal of the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 74 will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  First, a brief description will be given of the decorative symbols that are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 included in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 8. The peripheral control of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The variable display of the decorative design is executed by the unit steady process, etc., and the main control side of the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 93 by the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 69. The first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 shown in FIG. 8 by the main processing or the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 94, or the second shown in FIG. When the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the starting opening 2004 is a "big hit", the number of times (round number) of opening / closing operations of the special winning opening 2005 shown in FIG. 8 is one round. A total of 15 rounds up to 15 rounds, and in each round, a game ball enters the special winning opening 2005 within a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), and the number of balls is a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). Then, the round is designed to be exhausted, and a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of game balls are paid out each time one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005.

  From the main control board 1310, the first special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002 or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004 is obtained. Based on the command, the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 controls the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, so that the left side of the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 has a left side decorative pattern, and the center has a central decorative pattern. Then, the variable display of the right decorative pattern is started on the right side, and after the predetermined time has elapsed, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is stopped, and the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. The player can recognize the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66. Also in the first special symbol or the second special symbol displayed by pattern display 1405 so that the user can confirm the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result. When the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are displayed in a variable manner, the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are in a translucent mode so that the background image can be visually recognized, and the left side decorative pattern is displayed. From the upper left side to the lower left side of the area, the central decorative pattern is from the upper center of the display area to the central lower side, and the right decorative pattern is from the upper right side to the lower right side of the display area. When the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are displayed in a stopped manner while being variably displayed in an imaginary manner, the left displayed decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern are stopped and displayed. The left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are made opaque so that the background image at the position becomes difficult to be visually recognized. In this way, with the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is displayed in a variable start and stop display in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. 66, In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the left side decorative pattern, the center decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern, which are variably displayed and stopped, are synchronized.

  The peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 has a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game balls into the first starting opening 2002, or a second drawing selected by receiving the game balls into the second starting opening 2004. When a command from the main control board 1310 that conveys the special lottery result is received, by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 based on the received command, as shown in FIG. 103, the game board side shown in FIG. When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (timing K0), the peripheral control unit power-on process steady peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the process, the schedule data storage area 151 of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. 73. Of the screen data arranged in chronological order that configures the screen generation schedule data set in cae, a pointer is used to instruct which screen data from the first screen data is to be output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Since it is being updated, that is, in the scheduler update process, when the pointer is being updated, the production is proceeding according to the screen generation schedule data, so the screen generation schedule data is starting and the screen generation schedule data is being activated. While the data is being activated, that is, before the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. 95 is performed. In the warning process of step S1024 in the peripheral control unit steady process of FIG. Be executed recovery process, it is determined in step S1540 in this connection restoration process, and it so as to end the routine forcibly.

  Thereby, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, until the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right side decorative design is started and stopped, the communication check counter CC-CNT is displayed. Even when the value is not 0, that is, between the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, with the transmitter). Even if the number of times when it is determined that there is a problem in the connection with the receiver) is once, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and the transmitter and the receiver are not processed. It does not perform the process of recovering the connection between the Without performing the communication error display processing in step S1548, for example, the message "A trouble has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is invalidated and the door frame side effect display device is displayed. 460 displays an image based on the drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d.

  When the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (timing K1), the peripheral controller power supply shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In the scheduler update process of step S1020 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the time process, the effect is completed according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c shown in FIG. Since all the updates have been completed, that is, during the scheduler update process, while the screen generation schedule data is not activated and the screen generation schedule data is not activated, the peripheral controller power-on shown in FIG. 95 is turned on. In step S1024 in the peripheral control unit regular processing of the time processing, When it is determined in step S1540 in the connection restoration process shown in FIG. 102 that is executed as one process, the process proceeds to step S1542 in the same process, and when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is 0, that is, the transmitter When the number of times when it is determined that the connection with the receiver is in a state of failure is not once, the routine is terminated as it is, while the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, the transmitter. If the number of times that it is determined that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is in a defective state is one, the process proceeds to step S1544 in the same process, and the value of the communication error flag CC-FLG is 0. When there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the cumulative number of times determined to be equal to has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the process proceeds to step S1546 in the same process, the above-mentioned SYNC pattern output process is performed, and the routine ends while the communication error flag CC- When the value of FLG is not 0 (value 1), that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective, the process proceeds to step S1548 in the same process, and the communication error display described above is displayed. The process is performed, and the routine ends. In other words, while the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver are displayed. When the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a problem. When the cumulative number of times determined to be present does not reach the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC pattern output process is performed without fail during the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. That is, the process of restoring the connection between the transmitter and receiver is performed, while the transmission When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the receiver and the receiver is in a defective state has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective). In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, for example, "There is a problem with the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call a clerk." LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 which informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data. Have been enabled.

  In the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started and stopped, and the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is again displayed. In the interval period until the start, since the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, as described above, The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is enabled, and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect There is a problem with the connection between the receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and receiver. If the number of accumulated times is one even and the accumulated number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has a failure does not reach the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, the SYNC By performing the pattern output process without fail, the process for recovering the connection between the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, is performed. When the cumulative number of times when it is determined that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in a state of failure has reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT (that is, when the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is definitely defective) By performing the communication error display process without fail, for example, the game board side effect display device 1600 The display region "problem with the upper tray side liquid crystal display device has occurred. Please call your clerk." Displays a message that to have so as to perform the process of informing.

  When the variable display of the left decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right decorative pattern is started again (timing K2), as described above, since the screen generation schedule data is being activated, the left decorative pattern and the central decorative pattern are activated. , And until the right decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (timing K3), even when the value of the communication check counter CC-CNT is not 0, that is, for the door frame side effect provided in the peripheral control board 1510. The number of times that it is determined that there is a problem between the transmitter IC 1512d and the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided on the effect display drive board 4450 (that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver) is 1 times. Even if it is the number of times, the SYNC pattern output process of step S1546 in the connection restoration process is performed. , The process of recovering the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is not performed, the communication error display process of step S1548 in the connection recovery process is not performed, and, for example, the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Since the message "There was a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the upper plate side. Please call the clerk." Is not displayed, the drawing data received from the transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side production is abnormal data. The LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that tells that there is something is invalidated, and the door frame side effect display device 460 causes the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to receive the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Display an image based on.

  In this way, the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, and the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative are again displayed. During the interval period until the variable display of the symbols is started, the LOCKN signal from the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that informs that the drawing data received from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is abnormal data is activated. On the other hand, until the variable display of the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design is started and stopped in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the door frame side effect transmitter Door frame side effect receiver ICSD that informs that the drawing data received from IC1512d is abnormal data LOCKN signal from the C0 is adapted to be disabled. This is because the combination result of the left decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design that are stopped and displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is the information that is of most interest to the player, and is profitable to the player. Since the player can determine whether or not a jackpot gaming state in which is given occurs, the left side decorative design, the central decorative design, and the right decorative design are variably displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Then, until the left side decorative pattern, the central decorative pattern, and the right side decorative pattern are stopped and displayed, the image of the effect drawn in the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460 is disturbed by the influence of noise or the like and is correct. Even if the drawing cannot be performed, the process is interrupted midway and the process of recovering the correct drawing is not performed, but left in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Decorative symbol, central decorative pattern, and by stopping displaying the right decorative design, and the most interesting of information of the player to complete the drawing.

  In this respect, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 is displaying a startup screen on the game board side effect display device 1600 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or in a customer waiting state. In the period during which the game board side effect display device 1600 is performing the demonstration, the LOCKN signal output request data is significantly different from the case where it is transmitted to the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510. This LOCKN signal output request data is a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 while the startup screen when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is being displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 or in a customer waiting state. During the period during which the peripheral control MPU 1511a is transmitted, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450. It is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the connections, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver.

  When the LOCKN signal output request data, which is the serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a, is differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the differential signal is generated as described above. Two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the digitizing circuit 1512e are input to the forced switching circuit 1512f provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since the forced switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals when the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal in the differential circuit 1512e are input, One signal is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. When the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 of the liquid crystal module circuit 4450V provided in the effect display drive board 4450 determines that the received two signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal output request data is originally, As described above, since the signal format output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is different from that of the data format, it is determined that the data is abnormal, and the LOCKN signal is output to the periphery of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510. It is output to the control MPU 1511a. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has not failed when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data, and causes the effect display drive board 4450 to perform the operation. While it can be determined that no problem has occurred, when the LOCKN signal is not input, there is a problem with the effect display drive board 4450 that there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver. And display a notification image (for example, "There is a problem with the liquid crystal display device on the plate side. Please call the store clerk.") By controlling the VDP1512a with a built-in sound source. A notification sound that is output to the 1600 and conveys that effect (for example, "top plate side" Problems with crystal display device has occurred. "), And notification sound from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3 by outputting the audio data transmission IC1512c to control the sound source built VDP1512a flows. Thereby, it is possible to perform the notification by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound repeatedly played from the speaker or the like provided in the door frame 3. At this time, all the LEDs for light emission decoration included in the door frame 3 and various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards included in the game board 5 may be turned on.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 transmits the LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data, the compulsory switching circuit 1512f can receive the LOCKN signal output request data at the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0. The circuit connection is made so that the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the LOCKN signal output request data outputs the LOCKN signal from the LOCKN terminal of the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the peripheral control MPU1511a as a response signal. Therefore, when the LOCKN signal is input, it can be determined that there is no malfunction in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, and it can be determined that no malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. Signal is input When not it can be determined that a malfunction in the door frame side effect display device 460 as a malfunction has occurred in the connection between the transmitter and receiver occurs. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can execute the communication error display processing of step S1548 in the connection recovery processing of FIG. 102 as the notification processing when it is determined that the malfunction has occurred in the door frame side effect display device 460. It has become. In other words, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a finds a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can notify the clerk of the hall or the like by executing the notification process. Before the player plays the game, the clerk or the like in the hall can very easily check whether or not the door frame side effect display device 460 has a problem, and the check does not take much time. ing. Therefore, the trouble of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be found without any trouble.

  Further, as described above, the LOCKN signal is abnormal drawing data received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 included in the effect display drive board 4450 from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510. If it is determined that it is a signal output to convey that fact, specifically, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver included in the effect display drive board 4450. Since it is a signal output to request transmission of a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for confirming (restoring) the connection between ICSDIC0, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, it is for the door frame side effect The receiver IC SDIC0 is a transmitter IC 1512d for door frame side effect. When the image transmitted from the device cannot be received normally, a notification that the communication error occurs during the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d and the received drawing data becomes abnormal data. For transmission, the LOCKN signal can be output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511. As a result, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which the LOCKN signal is input transmits a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to start the connection confirmation signal. By outputting to the frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, it is possible to eliminate the communication trouble between the image communication. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a can detect a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication at an early stage, and can work on the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d to eliminate the defect. It is like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 that receives the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d and outputs it to the door frame side effect display device 460 displays the image transmitted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. When it cannot be received normally, the production control microprocessor sends a LOCKN signal, which is a communication failure occurrence signal, which notifies that there is a communication failure between the image communication between the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since it is possible to output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of a certain peripheral control unit 1511, the peripheral control MPU 1511a to which a LOCKN signal is input controls the VDP 1512a with a built-in sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 to cause a communication failure. Telling that you are doing The message "A problem has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device. Please call the clerk." Is generated, and this generated image is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 to inform it. You can do it. In other words, the peripheral control MPU 1511a early discovers a defect of the door frame side effect display device 460 due to a communication defect during image communication, and notifies the player seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1 to that effect, and Since the player can inform the clerk of the hall, etc., or can directly notify the clerk of the hall who happened to pass in front of the pachinko machine 1, the clerk of the hall, etc. will have the trouble. It is possible to start work for solving the problem at an early stage. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play a game by early finding and eliminating a defect in the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Furthermore, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 has a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510 and a door frame included in the effect display drive board 4450 in the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2. The connection between the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver, even if the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in a defective state even once, and the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is defective. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in a state of not reaching the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for enabling the LOCKN signal to eliminate a communication failure between image communication From the transmitter IC 1512d for the door frame side effect A connection confirmation signal notifying transmission start to the frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 can be repeatedly output to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT. Is becoming Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. Since the connection confirmation signal can be repeatedly output only during the period in which the game is started and stopped and the progress of the game is not executed, the communication failure can be solved.

  Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, during the period (interval period) of timing K1 to timing K2, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d included in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side included in the effect display drive board 4450. Even if the connection between the production receiver ICSDIC0 and the transmitter, that is, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver has been in trouble at least once, the connection between the transmitter and the receiver is in trouble. When the cumulative number of times determined to be in the state has not reached the cumulative number upper limit value CC-LMT, a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) for activating the LOCKN signal and eliminating a communication failure between image communication is set. Door from the door frame side production transmitter IC1512d While continuing to repeatedly output a connection confirmation signal to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 to the door frame side effect transmitter IC1512d until the accumulated number reaches the accumulated number upper limit value CC-LMT, When the main control MPU1310a of the control board 1310 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to start the progress of the game again, the connection confirmation When the signal output is stopped and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d stops the connection confirmation signal output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the connection confirmation signal is not input, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d outputs a predetermined data pattern (SYNC pattern) to the door frame. Liquid crystal display control by stopping transmission to the side effect receiver ICSDIC0 The image the sound source built VDP1512a to the generation of 1512 has been to be able to output to the door frame side for effect receiver ICSDIC0. Thereby, the peripheral control MPU1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 changes the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. By continuing to output the connection confirmation signal, which is a defect resolution signal, only during the period when the game is started and stopped and the game progress is not being executed, it is possible to move toward the direction where the communication defect is resolved. Therefore, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 starts and stops the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display 1405 in the first special symbol display device 1403 or the second special symbol display device to start the variation. The main control board 1 when the connection confirmation signal is continuously output only during the period when the game is not being executed. Even if the main control MPU 1310a of 10 starts changing the first special symbol or the second special symbol game in the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 to start the progress of the game again, the door frame Distortion of the effect (image disturbance) that progresses on the display screen of the side effect display device 460, every time the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts executing the progress of the game again and ends (the period of timing K1 to timing K2). Each time (interval period)), the direction can be resolved.

  According to the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 includes the main control board 1310 of FIG. 69 and the payout control board 951 of FIG. 70. The main control board 1310 has a first start opening 2002 and a second start which are start areas in which the game balls, which are shot by the hitting ball launching device 650 toward the game area 5a defined on the game board 5, are provided in the game area 5a. The main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 69, which is a game control microprocessor that controls the progress of the game based on having entered the mouth 2004, is mounted. The payout control board 951 is a payout control microprocessor for controlling the payout of game balls by the payout device 830 based on the payout command from the main control board 1310 shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b). 70 payout control MPU 952a is mounted.

  The main control MPU 1310a, which is a game control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control built-in RAM can store information about a game even after the power is cut off.

  The payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, includes at least a RAM (RAM with built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 952a. The payout control built-in RAM can store information about payout even after the power is cut off.

  The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment further includes an operation switch 954 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the information about the game stored in the main control internal RAM is erased. 77 to output the RAM clear signal of the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor, and when the payout control unit is operated within the period during which the power-on process is performed, the payout control built-in RAM is operated. A RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is a payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the stored payout related information, and the main control side power supply of FIG. The period (or power source) in which the determination process of step S16 in the power-on process is performed When operated after a lapse of the payout control unit power-on process (from the time of insertion), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancellation signal for canceling an error that has occurred with respect to the dispensing device 830. It is also provided with an error canceling function of outputting to the payout control MPU 952a which is a payout control microprocessor without outputting to the main control MPU 1310a.

  In this way, when the operation switch 954 is operated within the period in which the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 92 is performed after the power is turned on, the game stored in the main control internal RAM is stored. 77 is output to the main control MPU1310a which is the game control microprocessor for erasing the information about the information regarding the erase, and when the payout control unit is operated within the period when the payout control unit power-on process is performed, The RAM clear function of outputting the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 to the payout control MPU 952a, which is the payout control microprocessor, as a RAM clear signal for erasing the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and FIG. In the period when the determination process of step S16 in the main control side power-on process is performed (Or a period during which the payout control unit power-on process is performed after the power is turned on), the RWMCLR signal of FIG. 82 is used as an error cancellation signal for canceling an error that has occurred in the dispensing device 830. The RAM clear function is operated by one operation switch 954 because it has a function of releasing the error to the payout control MPU 952a which is the payout control microprocessor without outputting it to the main control MPU 1310a which is the game control microprocessor. It is possible to provide the pachinko machine 1 with two different functions, that is, the error canceling function and the error canceling function. Therefore, the RAM clear function and the error clearing function can be provided while contributing to cost reduction.

[Sensor signal input section of panel relay board 4161]
The sensor signal input unit of the panel relay board 4161 is various detection sensors arranged on the game board, for example, a general winning opening sensor 4020, a first starting opening sensor 4002, a second starting opening sensor 4004, a count sensor 4005, a vibration detection sensor. , A circuit to which a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 or the like is input. Since the circuit configuration to which the detection signal from each detection sensor is input is the same, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is taken as an example of the detection sensor here, and the circuit to which the detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is input will be described. To do.

  In a game machine, a magnet (for example, a permanent magnet or an electromagnet) is brought close to a game ball that has been driven into the game area, and the flow state of the game ball is manipulated as desired to obtain an unreasonable profit. There is no end to illegal gaming activities.

  A magnetic detection sensor 4024 capable of detecting magnetism is provided in correspondence with a predetermined position in the game area in order to detect such an illegal game action and suppress the illegal action by a light emitting means or an alarm by voice. There is.

  Hereinafter, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the control relating to the game progress and the effect will be summarized.

  As described above, the main control board 1310 executes various processes for controlling the entire pachinko machine 1, and outputs various control signals (control commands) according to the process results. Further, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the control signal (control command) output by the main control board 1310, the display mode of the effect display device 1600 (display images such as designs, various background images, characters, characters, etc.), The display mode and operation mode of various members (production operation unit 400, movable member, etc.) that contribute to the production are controlled.

  In particular, the main control board 1310 performs a special symbol process process each time an interrupt process is performed. In this special control process, first, the first and second starting mouth winning process is performed. In the first and second starting opening winning process, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the starting opening, and when it is determined that the winning is achieved, the holding number of the corresponding special symbol side is increased by 1 or the like. Done.

  When the processing flag is 0 when the first / second starting mouth winning process is completed, the variation start process is executed. In this variation start process, on condition that the number of holdings is 1 or more, the big hit judgment in the hold state is digested and executed, and after the result of this big hit judgment (win or win, its type, etc.) is stored. , Update the processing flag to “1”.

  On the other hand, when the processing flag is 1 when the first / second starting mouth winning process is finished, the variation pattern setting process is executed. In this variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern of the special symbol (identification symbol) displayed on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device based on the result of the stored big hit determination and the current game state (( After determining and setting the variation time from the start of variable display of the special symbol to the stop display) and the stop symbol (big hit symbol, lost symbol, etc.), the processing flag is updated to "2".

  On the other hand, when the processing flag is 2 when the first / second starting mouth winning process is finished, the changing process is executed. In this changing process, the change time determined and set in the change pattern setting process is monitored by the timer, and the change display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device or the second special symbol display device is based on the time-out. To stop. After that, when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is a big hit, the process selection flag is updated to "3", and when the result of the big hit determination stored in the variation start process is not a big hit (miss). The processing selection flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

  On the other hand, when the processing flag is 3 when the first / second starting mouth winning process is finished, the big hit game process is executed. In this big hit game processing, the condition device, which is one of the conditions for executing the big hit game, is operated, and the mode of the big hit game (for example, the number of rounds) determined based on the type of the big hit is set, Based on this, the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing member 2106 is controlled. In addition, when the big hit game ends, the processing of stopping the operation of the condition device is performed, and when the type of the big hit is a special type, it is controlled to an advantageous state such as a time saving state or a probability changing state. After updating the game state flag as shown, the processing flag is updated to "0". That is, in this case, in the next interrupt process, the process starts again from the fluctuation start process.

  A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are stored as the fluctuation patterns. The variation pattern determines the time from the start to the end of the symbol variation of the special symbol, and by transmitting the information to the peripheral control board 1510, the effect that appears in the effect display device 1600. The type of pattern can be determined. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of variation patterns can be classified into a jackpot variation variation pattern, an outly reach variation variation pattern, and an outlying variation variation pattern. The big hit variation is a variation that is performed when the result of the big hit determination is a big hit, and in the effect display device 1600, the variation display of the decorative symbol finally develops so that the big hit symbol is finally stopped and displayed through the reach effect. The effect is performed. The outlying reach variation is a variation which is performed when the result of the big hit determination is lost and the reach determination is made by the reach determination based on the reach random number, and in the effect display device 1600, the reach effect is used for the decoration. Finally, the effect of expanding the variable display of the symbols is displayed so that the symbols are fixedly stopped and displayed. The out-of-range variation is a variation performed when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss and the reach determination based on the reach random number does not determine that the reach is performed, and the effect display device 1600 does not perform the reach effect. Finally, the effect that the variable display of the decorative symbol is finally removed and the fixed symbol is fixedly displayed is executed. Further, the variation pattern is defined so that it can be specified which variation pattern is on the first special symbol side or the second special symbol side.

  That is, the peripheral control board 1510 acquires game information such as the result of the big hit determination from the main control board 1310 and refers to it to allow such a variation pattern of the decorative pattern to appear. Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, a variation pattern of a decorative symbol appears in the effect display device 1600 based on the acquired game information, and effect display (background or hold image) relating to the degree of expectation is changed or effected. Controls such as changing the mode (display and movement) of the operation unit 400 and operating movable members such as the back-bottom rear movable effect unit 3100 are executed.

  Next, the game control of the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment will be described in detail. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (FIG. 94: step S114).

  Now, in the main control program, if the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing (FIG. 94: step S114) is entered, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first sets the above-mentioned first as shown in FIG. The first jackpot determination random number is acquired from the random number counter under the condition that the detection signal from the one start opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the first start opening 2002) (YES in step S5231). A first starting opening passage process such as storing this in the first special symbol reservation storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S5322). Further, on condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 4004 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (YES in step S5233), the second special random number of the second special symbol ( The second big hit determination random number) is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second starting opening passage processing is executed (step S5234).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit game state is controlled (step S5235), and if the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit game state is controlled. The big hit control process (step S5240a) is executed.

In the jackpot control process according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the first special symbol is a mode that suggests either "8R probability variation big hit A" and "8R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 After opening for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the special winning opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern (round game) is repeated 8 times. Control to the 8R jackpot gaming state,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "16R probability variation big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). After that, or the 16R big hit game state is repeated 16 times the opening and closing pattern (round game) which is closed when the count sensor 4005 detects that 9 game balls have been won in the big winning opening 2005,
-When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "8R probability variation big hit B", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds). ) Or 8R big hit game state which repeats the opening and closing pattern (round game) which is closed 8 times when 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2005 when the count sensor 4005 detects the count sensor 4005,
When the result of the determination process regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "2R normal big hit", the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds) After that, the opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed is repeated twice, and the 2R big hit game state is controlled.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, right-handing is more advantageous to the player than left-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is executed, and is better than right-handing in the situation where the time-saving control is not executed. As described above, left-handedness is advantageous for the player. In this respect, in the left-handed state, even if the big hit is won as a result of the lottery for the first special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball to the first starting opening 2002, the big hit game of long open for a maximum of 8 rounds. Only a state (approximately 1000 game balls can be acquired) occurs.

  On the other hand, in the right-handed state, when the jackpot is won in the lottery for the second special symbol according to the acceptance of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004, there is a probability of approximately 50% (allocation rate of winning species). The expected value of prize balls that can be won when a big hit is won, for example, a 16-round long open big hit game state (approximately 2000 game balls can be won) is executed. Therefore, when the right-handed state is controlled to be transferred, a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be obtained than when the left-handed state is controlled.

  In the big hit control process, when the opening control of the special winning opening 2005 is started, first, a process of starting the operation of the condition device, a process of resetting a variation counter, which will be described later, and the like are performed.

  Further, in the jackpot control process, after performing such a big winning opening 2005 opening control, as shown in FIG. 110, a high probability according to the jackpot winning type that triggered the jackpot game. The flag and the time saving flag are set.

  The high-probability flag is a flag that indicates a high-probability state, and is used in a big-hit determination process shown in FIG. 109, which will be described later. Probably strange big hit, 8R is set when finishing the big hit game state based on the probability big hit B), when the big hit next, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later or the second special symbol stop process not shown Is reset by.

  The time saving flag is a flag indicating that the time saving control is being executed (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state), and as shown in FIG. 110, the time saving control after the jackpot gaming state has ended (high probability time saving state). It is set when the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (8R certainty variation jackpot A, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot B) is finished, and when it becomes the next jackpot, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown). Or, when the special probability (first special symbol, second special symbol) is digested 100 times without winning the big hit after the occurrence of the low probability time saving state, the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 114 described later. Alternatively, it is reset by the second special symbol stop process (not shown).

  The variation counter is a counter that indicates the number of variations of the special symbol after the variation counter is reset, and is used in a first variation pattern setting process (second variation pattern setting process) shown in FIG. 112 described later. That is, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is updated (for example, counted up) when a change is made, and at least a specific type of jackpot (16R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot B) It is reset when the jackpot gaming state based on is started.

  If the big hit execution flag is not set (NO in step S5235), then as the processing of step S5236, whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is controlled is set. Determine whether. As a result, if the small hit execution flag is set, the small hit control process (step S5240b) for controlling the small hit game state is executed. In the small hit control process, the special winning opening 2005 is opened for a specific opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds).

  Here, unlike the case of the big hit control process (step S5240a), in the small hit control process (step S5240b), after such a big winning opening 2005 opening control is performed, a high probability flag, a time saving flag, a time saving Each set process such as the number counter is not performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110 (a), the small hit is not won in the big hit determination.

  Also, if the small hitting running flag is not set (NO in step S5236), the value of the second special holding number counter indicating the number of second big hit determination random numbers stored in the second special symbol holding storage area On condition that it is "0" (step S5237), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped is executed (step S5238).

  On the other hand, if the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of the second big hit determination random number stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area is not "0" (step S5237), the second special symbol The second special symbol process process including the lottery process according to the display mode when the variable display is stopped is executed (step S5239). As a result, as long as the game is performed so as not to lose the lottery for the second special symbol that is being held (unless the value of the second special pending number counter is "0"), the first special symbol Regardless of the lottery hold status, only the lottery for the second jackpot determination random number will be continuously performed without interruption (priority execution).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the time saving state (high-probability time saving state), the player only needs to keep hitting the game ball on the right side of the center accessory 2500 (right hitting). It becomes possible to continuously perform only the lottery (determination process) for the two-big hit determination random numbers without interruption.

  In addition, the special figure game (symbol fluctuation) using the second special figure (second special symbol) is limited to the one that is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (first special symbol). Instead, for example, the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004 and the starting winning occurs. In this case, a table that stores data that can specify the order in which the start winning is generated is provided, and the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It only has to be decided.

  FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passage process (step S5322).

  Now, in the process of step S5231, if it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 4002 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002, as shown in FIG. 105. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5241, first, each random number on the first special symbol side (random number for big hit determination, random number for reach decision, random number for big hit symbol, random number for variable display pattern) ) From the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the reserved number of the first special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not the value is "4" which is the (upper limit value) (step S5242). In the processing of this step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is not the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol (determination process for the first special symbol) is newly held. In order to obtain the state, the following steps S5243 to S5245 are performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5243, the first special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as a process of step S5244, each random number acquired in step S5241 is a first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the first special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  Then, the first special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the first special diagram side is executed, and the process ends (step S5245). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the first special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the first special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the first special symbol. In this first special figure pre-reading process, the information required for determining whether or not the pre-reading effect is executed on the peripheral control board 1510 side and the like (information regarding the win for the pre-reading determination, the symbol type for the pre-reading determination) Information, information regarding a variation pattern number for prefetch determination, etc.) is generated and stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the first special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S5242, when it is determined that the number of holding of the first special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5243 to S5245, the variable display of the first special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second starting opening passage process (step S5234).

  Now, in the process of step S5233, if it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 4004 is in the ON state and the game ball enters the second starting opening 2004, as shown in FIG. In the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5251, first, each random number on the second special symbol side (second big hit determination random number, second reach determination random number, second big hit symbol for The random number, the second variation display pattern random number) is acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special holding number counter from the main control internal RAM, and the holding number of the second special symbol is the maximum value based on this counter value. It is determined whether or not it is “4” (step S5252). In the processing of this step S5252, when it is determined that the number of the second special symbols to be held is not the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbols (lottery for the second special symbols) is newly held. In order to obtain the state, the following steps S5253 to S5255 will be performed.

  That is, first, as the process of step S5253, the second special suspension number counter is incremented (added by 1). Then, as the processing of step S5254, each random number acquired in step S5251 is a second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value of the second special reserved number counter in the storage area of the main control internal RAM. To store.

  Then, the second special figure prefetching process for executing the prefetching effect on the second special diagram side is executed, and the process ends (step S5255). As will be described later, the look-ahead effect on the second special symbol side is an effect that suggests the determination result (or its degree of expectation) of the second special symbol in advance before starting the variable display of the second special symbol. In this second special figure pre-reading process, the peripheral control board 1510 side generates information (winning information, symbol type, variation pattern number, etc.) necessary for determining whether or not to execute pre-reading effect, effect contents, and the like, It is stored in the corresponding storage area as transmission information for the peripheral control board 1510. At this time, instead of the determination result itself of the second special symbol, the command may include information regarding the stop symbol of the special symbol as the information suggesting the type of the big hit game. For example, information of the stage before the final determination, such as the SP reach group in the variation pattern, the normal reach group, the latent hit group, and the small hit group in the symbol types, may be transmitted as the prefetch command.

  On the other hand, in the process of step S5252, when it is determined that the number of holding the second special symbol is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly held. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S5253 to S5255, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly put on hold.

  A command to instruct the reserved number of the first special symbol in the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) when the reserved number of the first special symbol changes based on that the game ball enters the first starting opening 2002. (First reservation number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Moreover, when the number of second special symbols to be reserved changes based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second starting opening 2004, the peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120) indicates the number of second special symbols to be reserved. Command (second holding number designation command 0 to 4) is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510.

  FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process process (step S5238). The first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process are the same. Since it is a program module of, and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, only the first special symbol process process executed in step S5238 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process will be described here. In the first special symbol process process, one of the following five process processes will be selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag.

  1. The big hit determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the main control built-in RAM is read, and the lottery process or the like for the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read big hit determination random number. First special symbol normal processing is performed (step S5280)

  2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) is performed based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol )

  3. The variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 1403 based on the random number for the variable display pattern and the special effect display device (game board side effect display device) 1600 are executed corresponding to the special symbol. First variation pattern setting processing (step S5282) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode of the effect display

  4. First special symbol variation processing to wait until the variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S5283)

  5. As the mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol determined based on the result of the determination process for the display mode at the time of variation control stop of the first special symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display 1403. First special symbol stop processing for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S5284)

  The initial value of the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S5280) should be performed.

  FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S5280).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal processing should be performed, as shown in FIG. 108, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5301. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display of the first special symbol in the suspended state, then as the process of step S5302, it is stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. The first memory among the random numbers related to the display mode of the first special symbol (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variation display pattern random number) The random number stored in the area is read from the RAM with built-in main control. Then, as the processing of steps S5303 and S304, while counting down the first special reserved number counter, the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control internal RAM. First-in first-out (first-in first-out) random numbers related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped (for example, the first jackpot determination random number, the first reach determination random number, the first jackpot symbol random number, the first variable display pattern random number). The shift operation is performed in the First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol holding storage area a to first special symbol holding storage area d), of the starting winning prize to the first starting opening 2002. The random numbers extracted according to the occurrence are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display of the first special symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). .. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), depending on the occurrence of a start winning prize for the second starting opening 2004. The random numbers thus extracted are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, when a random number is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, the various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4). Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the variable display of the second special symbol is held is stored so that it can be specified, and the variable display is released in order from the earliest hold (the earliest hold). ..

  Then, after that, as a process of step S5305, a big hit judging process which is a judging process for the winning of the big hit is performed based on the read first big hit judging random number. Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281) (step S5306), this process ends.

  FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S5305).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a high probability state (high probability time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5311), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. Select the big hit determination table (step S5312), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S5311), select the big hit determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 110 (A) (step S5313), select The big hit determination table and the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S5314).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (A), the big hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and when the gaming state has a low probability for each type of special random number (first big hit determination random number, second big hit determination random number). Big hit judgment table at the time of low probability used in the case of (low probability non-time saving state, low probability time saving state) and high used when the game state is high probability (high probability non time saving state, high probability time saving state) And a big hit determination table at the time of probability. And, in the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability which is referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, the 204 kinds of the first big hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 65332 The first big-hit determination random numbers (65536 kinds) are associated with each other so that the first big-hit determination random numbers of the types match the deviation determination value indicating the loss (the big-hit probability at low probability; "1/321"). On the other hand, in order to compare with the big hit determination random number (second big hit determination random number) of the second special symbol in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process In the low-probability big-hit determination table referred to, 204 kinds of second big-hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big-hit judgment value indicating that the big hit is won, and 65332 kinds of second big-hit judgment random numbers are the above-mentioned defects. The second jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the deviation determination value indicating that (the jackpot probability when the probability is low; about “1/321”).

  Further, in the high probability big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number, 2040 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers coincide with the big hit judgment value, and 63496 kinds of first big hit judgment random numbers. The first jackpot determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the random numbers coincide with the deviation determination value (the jackpot probability at the time of high probability; about "1/32"). On the other hand, in the jackpot determination table at the time of high probability referred to for comparison with the second jackpot determination random number in the second special symbol process process executed in step S5239 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, , 2040 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot is won, and 63496 types of second jackpot determination random numbers match the deviation determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. The second big hit determination random numbers are associated with each other (big hit probability at high probability; about "1/32"). In addition, the big hit judgment value set in the big hit judgment table referred to for comparison with the first big hit judgment random number and the big hit judgment table referred for comparison with the second big hit judgment random number (the big hit judgment value The number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is the same), or the number of jackpot judgment values may be different (the jackpot probability is different). In this case, at least one of the big hit judgment table at the time of low probability and the big hit judgment table at the time of high probability may be made to have a different big hit judgment value (both may be different). ..

  The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected big hit determination table and the big hit determination random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined that the big hit (step S5315) ), A big hit flag indicating that the variation is a big hit is set (step S5316), and the big hit determination process ends.

  If it is determined in step S5315 that the big hit is lost, the read big hit judgment random number matches the small hit judgment value indicating that the small hit has been won, based on the selected big hit judgment table. It is determined whether or not (step S5317). However, as described above, in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process (second special symbol process process) of this example, the big hit determination random number that matches the small hit determination value is not read (small hit probability; (0/65536), in this step S5317, it is determined that the small hit has not been won (judgment determination).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5317 that there is a loss, the reach determination table is compared with the reach determination random number read in step S5302 (step S5319).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is in the high probability non-time saving state. In the case of, the reach determination table at the time of the high probability time saving state and the reach determination table at the time of the low probability state used when the game state is the low probability state (low probability non-time saving state) are provided.

  Here, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, one type of reach determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating that reach, and 71 types of reach determination random numbers indicate that the reach determination value does not reach. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match with. However, in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state, in order to maximize the progress speed of the game in the time saving state, all of the 72 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that they do not reach. By doing so, the reach determination value indicating the reach may not be matched.

  In addition, in the reach determination table in the low probability state, five types of reach determination random numbers including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random number set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state are reached. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the reach determination values shown and the reach determination values indicating that the 67 types of reach determination random numbers do not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, in the low probability state, the reach determination value indicating that reach is made higher than in the high probability short time state, and is obtained with a predetermined probability.

  Further, in the reach determination table in the high probability non-time saving state, five types of reach determinations including the same reach determination random number as the reach determination random numbers set in the reach determination table in the high probability time saving state and the low probability state are performed. The reach determination random numbers are associated with each other so that the use determination random number matches the reach determination value indicating that the reach random number is reached, and the 67 types of reach determination random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach does not reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the reach determination value indicating that the reach is performed is the same as that in the low-probability non-time saving state in the high-probability non-time saving state.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the random number for reach determination read in step S5302 (step S5319), and when it determines that there is reach loss (YES in step S5120). Then, the reach flag indicating that the fluctuation is reached is set and the processing is ended (step S5121).

  FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S5281).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 111, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the jackpot determination process (step S5305) is determined. The determination of the lottery process result is performed by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S5331).

  If the big hit flag is set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a selects the symbol determination table shown in FIG. 110 (B), and the first big hit symbol random number read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing the selected symbol determination table with the symbol determination table, the big hit symbol as the mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped is determined (step S5332).

  As shown in FIG. 110 (B), in the symbol determination table on the side of the first special symbol, a random number for the first jackpot symbol (here, a total of 200) for the determination result (8R probability variation jackpot A, 8R normal jackpot) Random numbers for the first big hit pattern) are stored in a form associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 110 (C), in the symbol determination table on the side of the second special symbol, the second jackpot symbol random number (for the 16R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit B, 2R normal big hit) to the determination result ( Here, a total of 200 second jackpot symbols (random numbers) are stored in association with each other.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained jackpot symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the type of big hit determined based on the first big hit symbol random number and the type of big hit determined based on the second big hit symbol random number are set to be different. .. More specifically, the probability of jackpot change that triggers the transition to the high probability state and the normal jackpot that does not trigger the transition to the high probability state (allocation) are the same, but for the first jackpot pattern The expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number for the second big hit symbol is larger than the expected value of the game ball that can be obtained by the big hit determined based on the random number ing.

The following is a brief summary of the specific game and effect contents for each type of jackpot.
1. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state where the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Controls to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big-hit gaming state occurs, and performs a battle effect (battle victory effect) in which a specific character wins during the execution period of the 8R big-hit gaming state. Is a relatively advantageous state, which is controlled in the effect mode shown on the effect display device 1600.

  2. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the special symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until it is exhausted 100 times), and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state A performance display device in which a specific character loses a battle (battle defeat) and is in a relatively disadvantageous state in the low probability time saving state. 8R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode as shown in 600

  3. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 16 times, the game ball is controlled into a 16R jackpot game state in which the game ball can (easily) enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 16R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 16R big hit game state, the production (success production) whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (will be 16 rounds) ) Is carried out, and a relatively advantageous state is achieved after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the high-probability time saving state was controlled. 16R sometimes is controlled to effect mode shown in the effect display device 1600 probability variation jackpot

  4. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By opening and closing pattern (round game) to be closed when it is detected at 8 times, the game ball is controlled to the 8R jackpot game state in which the game ball can enter (easy) the jackpot 2103, and after this 8R jackpot game state Is controlled to a high-probability time-saving state until the next big hit game state occurs, and during the execution period of the 8R big hit game state, the production (failure production) whether the number of rounds exceeds 8 rounds (16 rounds) ) Is performed, and after a certain period of time has passed since the high-probability time saving state was controlled, it is in a relatively advantageous state. 8R probability variation big hit B but which is controlled in the effect mode as shown in the effect display device 1600

  5. After the big hit symbol combination appears on the effect display device 1600, the special winning opening 2103 is opened for a short time (for example, 0.6 seconds), or 9 game balls are won in the special winning opening 2103. By repeating the opening and closing pattern (round game) that is closed when it is detected by 2 times, the game ball is controlled to the 2R jackpot game state in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the jackpot 2103, and after this 2R jackpot game state, special Controls to a low probability time saving state until the variable display of the symbol is exhausted 100 times (or a big hit is won within the period until 100 times exhausted), and a specific character during the execution period of the 2R big hit game state. Is performed, the production display device 1600 is in a relatively unfavorable state in the low probability time saving state. 2R usually big hit controlled in the effect mode indicated Oite

  In the left-handed state, the game ball does not pass through the gate portion 2003, and the movable piece (not shown) that opens the second starting port 2004 is not driven. Therefore, in the left-handed state, the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 does not occur, only the winning of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 2002 occurs, and there is a reserved ball of the second special symbol. Except the case, only the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 1403 is executed, and a big hit (8R probability variation big hit A, 8R normal big hit) related to the first special symbol will be generated. Similarly, in the right-handed state, no game ball is won in the first starting opening 2002. Therefore, in the right-handed state, only the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 will occur, except for the case where there is a reserved ball of the first special symbol, the second special symbol in the second special symbol indicator 1186. Only the variable display is executed, and a big hit (16R sure change big hit, 8R sure change big hit B, 2R normal big hit) related to the second special symbol is generated.

  In addition, in the big hit related to the first special symbol, the open / close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at most, but only about 1000 game balls are paid out. In the big hit related to the second special symbol, it is possible to pay out approximately 2000 game balls by repeating the opening / closing pattern that opens the big winning hole 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) at the maximum 16 times.

  In addition, in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 8R probability variation big hit A is determined, it is determined as 8R probability variation big hit A symbol as a big hit symbol, and when 8R normal jackpot is determined, it is 8R normal jackpot symbol as a big hit symbol decide. Also, although not shown, if the 16R probability variation big hit is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, the 16R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit symbol, and if the 8R probability variation jackpot B is determined, the 8R probability variation jackpot is determined as the big hit symbol. When the B symbol is decided and the 2R normal big hit is decided, the 2R normal big hit symbol is decided as the big hit symbol.

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S5331, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the small hit flag is set in step S5333. As a result, if the small hit flag is set in the process corresponding to the step S5333 in the second special symbol process process (step S5239), the small hit symbol as a mode when the variation of the second special symbol is stopped ( After determining the unique symbol stop mode (step S5334), the process proceeds to step S5337.

  Furthermore, if the small hit flag is not set in step S5333, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310 determines to be a lost symbol as a mode when the special symbol is stopped changing (step S5336), and then shifts to step S5337. To do.

  Then, after the determination process for the stop symbol is performed in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, as the process of step S5337, the lottery result (type of big hit, small hit, out of reach, out of contact) The determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that the instruction (which may indicate the mode of the stop symbol of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Then, after that, as the process of step S5338, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282), this process ends.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and variation pattern command (the left, middle, and right decorative patterns are variably displayed and left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → Stop display in the order of the middle decorative design (note that the left, middle, and right decorative designs may be displayed in sync with the same design in a variable manner and stopped at the same time). For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines a combination in which three left, middle, and right decorative patterns are arranged when the type other than the 2R normal big hit is won as the big hit. On the other hand, when the 2R normal jackpot is obtained, it is determined to a specific symbol combination (a combination in which at least one of the left, middle, and right decorative symbols is not the same as other symbols). In addition, when the reach out is specified, the out comes with the reach (the left and right decorative designs are a combination of the same designs of "0" to "9" and the middle decoration is a combination of different designs; reach reach) In the case of determining), and when the outlier is specified, it is determined to be an outfall pattern without a reach (a combination in which at least the left and right ornamental patterns among the left, middle, and right ornamental symbols are different). The stop symbol thus determined is displayed on the effect display device 1600 when the change time specified by the change pattern command has elapsed (at the end of the game effect).

  In any case, when the hit is obtained as a result of the game being advanced, the peripheral control MPU 1511a causes the effect display (special display mode) of the hit to appear before the big hit game is started, and the big hit game. After the start, the effect display during the big hit game is made to appear.

  FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S5282).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag as shown in FIG. 112. If it is done (step S5341), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of big hit according to the kind of big hit determined at step S5332 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S5342), and the small hit flag. If is set (step S5343), a variation pattern table at the time of small hit (not shown) is selected (step S5344), and if the reach flag is set (step S5345), the variation pattern table at reach ( (Not shown) is selected (step S5346), and the big hit flag and the small hit flag are selected. If none of the grayed and reach flag is not set, that is, when the normal off (off is not executed reach demonstration) selects the off time of the fluctuation pattern table (not shown) (step S5347).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the random number for the variation display pattern read in step S5302 of the first special symbol normal processing (step S5348), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 is set and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S5349). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets, in the fluctuation timer, the fluctuation time set corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined to determine the fluctuation pattern (step S5350). Then, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S5283) (step S5355), this process ends. Thereby, the variation display control of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 1403 only for the variation time thus determined, and the production control is performed on the production display device 1600 in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  The variation pattern table of this example, the big hit determination random numbers (first big hit determination random numbers, second big hit determination random numbers) and big hit symbol random numbers (first big hit symbol random numbers, second big hit symbol random numbers) A plurality of types are provided for each determination result based on the above. Further, in the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table, a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is described above. The random numbers for the first variable display pattern are stored in association with each other. Then, the main control MPU1310a, in the variation pattern table of the plurality of types according to the determination result based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the first special symbol normal processing in step S5302 read By comparing the random number for the variable display pattern and the variable time information associated with the read random number for the variable display pattern is acquired from this table, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) The fluctuation pattern of. Thereby, the determination process for the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) will be performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  However, as described above, since the small hit is not won in this example, the variation pattern table at the time of the small hit is not used. In this example, the small hit is not won, but the small hit may be won.

  Further, in the variation pattern table at the time of the reach of this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of the reach production to be executed by comparing the determination value indicating which reach production is to be executed with the random number for the variation display pattern. Has been done. For example, in the non-time saving state, 164 types of random numbers for variable display patterns out of 241 types of random numbers for variable display patterns are set as the determination value (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 The random numbers for the variable display patterns of the 18 types are set as the judgment values (164 to 222) indicating that one of the super reach effects with the low jackpot expectations is executed, and the 18 random numbers for the variable display patterns have the high jackpot expectations. It is set as a determination value (223 to 240) indicating that one of the super reach effects is executed.

  It should be noted that the super-reach effect (SP effect) has a higher jackpot expectation than the normal reach effect, and for a player who desires the occurrence of a big-hit gaming state, a player who responds to the big-hit gaming state when the super-reach effect is executed. Expectations of are increasing. That is, such a super reach effect has the highest selection rate in the variation pattern table at the time of a big hit, so that even if a loss is finally displayed, the player's expectation level for the big hit game state. Will be able to increase. However, in actuality, in order to sufficiently raise the expectation of the player for the big hit game state, during the period when the super reach production is being executed, a high-anticipation notice production that is a lottery different from the fluctuation pattern appears. It is required to do (composite).

  In addition, in the variation pattern table at the time of the deviation, which is provided in correspondence with the first jackpot determination random number and the first jackpot symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the first special symbol, the non-time saving state and the time saving state The variable time of 12 seconds is set in common with both. On the other hand, in the variation pattern table at the time of deviation, which is provided corresponding to the second jackpot determination random number and the second symbol random number and is used when determining the variation time of the second special symbol, 0.1 seconds as a time saving state. The fluctuation time of 12 seconds can be set, and the fluctuation time of 12 seconds is set as the non-time saving state. In this way, the variation time of the first special symbol is the same in the time saving state and the non-time saving state, and during the variation of the first special symbol in the time saving state, the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 2004 is achieved. At the same time, the player secures the time for the player to win the game ball at the second starting opening 2004.

  In addition, if 0.1 seconds is selected from the variation time at the time of losing the second special symbol, each game ball that is driven into the game area 5a at an interval of 0.6 seconds in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state) It is possible to suppress the situation where the product is discharged without being used in the lottery process.

  That is, the game ball that has been hit to the right is supplied to a region immediately above the gate unit 2003. Then, when the game ball is accepted from this area to the gate unit 2003 when in a time saving state (such as a high probability time saving state), a winning as a normal symbol is obtained (for example, the winning probability is 100%), The movable piece involved in opening and closing the second starting port 2004 is maintained in the open state for a long period (5.5 seconds in this example). As a result, in a situation in which the second starting opening 2004 can be successively received one after another (a time saving state in which almost all of the game balls that have been driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 can be received in the second starting opening 2004). Even if there is such a game ball each time the acceptance of those game balls, the control that the lottery on the second special symbol side can be exhausted one after another with a high jackpot probability of about "1/32" (probability in a high probability state) It will be possible.

  In this example, when the player is operating the handle 302, the game balls are shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds, so in the time saving state (high probability time saving state, etc.), the second Game balls are often accepted at the start opening 2004 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. In this respect, in the present example, as described above, the variation pattern table when the second special symbol is out based on the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 2004 is extremely variable as a variation time of the time saving state (such as the high probability time saving state). It can be set to a short time of 0.1 seconds. In other words, in this case, when the loss is obtained, the symbol fluctuation will be finished only in the time (0.1 seconds) that is less than the game ball firing interval (0.6 seconds), so 0.6 seconds Even in a situation where the game balls launched at intervals are successively received in the second starting port 2004, it is possible to prevent the game balls from being discharged without being used in the lottery process. ..

  FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S5283).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 113, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5371. As the processing of 1, the fluctuation timer in which the fluctuation time is set according to the fluctuation pattern determined in the lottery processing (step S5282) for the fluctuation pattern is decremented by 1. As a result, when it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the variation time selected by the lottery has elapsed (step S5372), the process proceeds to step S5373. That is, in the process of step S5373, at the time when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S5284), this process ends.

  In addition, even if the fluctuation timer is subtracted by 1 (step S5371), if the fluctuation time timer is not 0, until the fluctuation time timer becomes 0 (until it is time to definitely stop the symbol), Each time the timer interrupt process is performed, the processes of steps S5371 and S5372 are performed.

  FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop processing (step S5284).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 114, the main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, first, step S5381. As the process of, while performing the display control for displaying the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display 1403, the first special symbol on the effect display device 1600. The stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative design according to the stop design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S5382).

  When the jackpot flag is set (YES in step S5386), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a jackpot start command indicating that the jackpot gaming state is started (step S5387), The waiting time until the start of the big hit game state (the time of displaying the start of the big hit game state and the like) is set in the interval timer (step S5388). Then, the jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot gaming state is being executed is set, and the high probability flag is reset if the high probability flag is set, and if the time saving flag is set. The time saving flag is reset (step S5389), the fluctuation counter is further reset, and when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value (step) (S5394), and this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5235, and the big hit game is performed in the big hit control process (step S5240a). The state will be executed.

  The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S5387, a big hit start command (8R sure change big hit A command, 8R normal big hit command, 16R sure change) Big hit command, 8R probability variation big hit B command, 2R normal big hit command) are set. Thereby, the effect display device 1600, each lamp / LED, each speaker, and the like perform a big hit game state effect (battle effect or additional challenge effect) according to the type of big hit instructed by the big hit start command.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S5386 that the big hit flag is not set (NO in step S5386), first, it is determined whether or not the low probability time saving state is set (step S5390). Then, when in the low probability time saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state has reached a predetermined upper limit value (here, 100 times) ( Step S5391). That is, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol that has been digested after being controlled to the low probability time saving state reaches a predetermined upper limit value (100 times), it is assumed that the condition for ending the low probability time saving state is satisfied, and the time saving is achieved. The function is stopped to shift to the normal game state (low probability non-time saving game state) (step S5392).

  After the processing relating to the time saving function is performed in this way, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S5393). As a result, when it is determined that the small hit flag is set (YES in step S5393), a small hit start command indicating starting the small hit game state is set (step S5394), and the small hit game is set. The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying that the small hitting game state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S5395). Then, the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit game state is being executed is set (step S5396), and the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process, which is the initial value of the first special symbol process flag. When it is updated to (step S5394), this processing ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the small hit execution flag is set in the process of step S5236, and the small hit control process (step S5240b) is performed. The small hit game state comes to be executed. By the way, unlike the case where the big hit is won, the game state is not changed when the small hit game state is executed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag has been set (NO in step S5393), the first special symbol process is performed without performing the big hit or the small hit as a loss. When the flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S5394), this process ends. That is, in this case, when the next interrupt control is performed, it is determined that the big hit execution flag and the small hit execution flag are not set (steps S5235, S236), and a new game is made according to the state of suspension. The process related to the progress of (lottery and symbol control) will be performed (steps S5237 to S5239).

  FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned ordinary symbol and ordinary electric auditors product control processing (step S116).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the process of step S5402, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate portion passing process such as acquiring an ordinary random number of an ordinary symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the ordinary symbol reservation storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read, and a normal symbol normal process in which a lottery process or the like is performed for the display mode when the above-mentioned normal symbol fluctuation control is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S5403).
2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation time determination process (step S5404) in which lottery processing or the like is performed for the variation mode (variation time) of the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display device 1402 based on the ordinary symbol variation random number.
3. Normal symbol fluctuation processing to wait until the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 1402 is stopped (step S5405)
4. The variation display of the normal symbol is displayed so that the mode of the variation control stop of the normal symbol determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display aspect of the variation control of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 1402. Normal symbol stop process to stop (step S5406)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "universal pattern hit", the movable piece is opened and the game ball is received in the second starting opening 2004. Normal electric accessory release process for executing a process for controlling (step S5407)

  The initial value of the normal symbol process flag is operated so as to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S5403) should be performed.

  FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S5402).

  Now, in the process of step S5401, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in the ON state and the game ball has passed through the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. As the processing of step S5411, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains the counter value of the above normal hold number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of normally held symbols is "4", which is the maximum value.

  In the processing of this step S5411, when it is determined that the number of holding of the above-mentioned normal symbol is not its maximum value, in order to newly put the variable display control of the above-mentioned symbol into the state of newly holding, the following steps S5412-S5414 Processing will be performed. That is, first, as the processing of step S5412, the ordinary hold number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S5413, the ordinary random number and the universal figure fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, as a process of step S5414, each random number thus obtained is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, in the process of step S5411, when it is determined that the number of the normal symbols to be held is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly held. That is, by not performing the processes of steps S5412 to S5414, the variable display control of the normal symbol is not newly put on hold.

  FIG. 117 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal processing (step S5403).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 117, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, first, as the process of step S5421, Based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the suspended state, then, as the process of step S5422, normally stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The random number stored in the first storage area of the random numbers related to the display mode of the symbol (for example, ordinary random number, universal figure variation random number) is read from the RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S5423 and S5424, when the normal hold number counter is counted down, and the variable display of the normal symbol stored in each storage area of the normal hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is stopped. The shift operation is performed in the first-in first-out (first-in first-out) mode for the random numbers (ordinary random numbers, universal figure fluctuation random numbers) relating to the display mode in FIG.

  Specifically, the normal symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially arranged from the first (first) area. Remember. When a game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the random numbers extracted to the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area are stored. The random number stored in the first storage area is read out when the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, and the Nth storage area (N = 2 to 4) is read out. The various random numbers stored in are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). ..

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (high probability time saving state) (step S5426), selects a universal figure hit determination table (not shown) for time saving ( (Step S5426), if the current game state is a non-time saving state (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state) (step S5425), select a non-time saving universal figure determination table (not shown) ( (Step S5427), the selected per-universal-drawing determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process are compared (step S5428).

  In addition, the universal figure hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a, and the universal figure hit determination table used when the gaming state is time saving (high probability time saving state) and the gaming state is non-time saving. And a non-time saving time universal figure hit determination table used in the case of time (low probability non-time saving state, high probability non-time saving state). Then, in the time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers coincide with the general-use figure determination value indicating that the general-purpose random number has been won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so that they do not match the deviation determination value indicating the deviation. In this way, in the time saving, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the game ball is always won per the universal figure, the movable piece is in the open state, and the game ball to the second starting port 2004 is opened. It controls the acceptance. Not all of the 255 types, but a larger number of ordinary random numbers than in the non-time saving state may be matched with the per-universal-drawing determination value indicating that the per-universal-university drawing is won.

  Further, in the non-time saving general-purpose figure judgment table referred to in order to compare with the ordinary random number, all 255 kinds of ordinary random numbers may coincide with the general-university figure determination value indicating that the ordinary random number is won. However, the ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the general-university-deviation determination value indicating that the general-university figure is out of sync. As described above, in the non-time saving, even if the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, the movable piece 2106 is opened and the second starting opening is not won because the game is not won. It does not control the acceptance of the game ball in 2004. However, as described above, the normal symbol may be won even in the non-time saving state. In this case, the winning probability is lower than that in the time saving state (for example, 50%), and the lottery result of the normal symbol is a winning. When the movable piece of the second starting port 2004 is opened for a shorter time than the time saving state, for example, 2 seconds to allow the game ball to be received in the second starting port 2004, the second starting port 2004 is advanced again. The game ball may not be accepted into the second starting port 2004.

  The main control MPU1310a of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, when it is determined to be an ordinary figure hit (step S5429). ), After setting the universal symbol hit flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol (step S 5430), the regular symbol hit as a mode (variable symbol stop symbol) when the variation control of the regular symbol is stopped The symbol is determined (step S5431), on the other hand, as a result of the comparison between the selected ordinary figure hit determination table and the ordinary random number read out in step S5422 of the ordinary symbol normal process, if it is determined that the symbol is out, the variation of the ordinary symbol An out-of-general symbol as a mode at the time of control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined (step S5432). Then, after that, when the above-mentioned normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation time determination process (step S5404) (step S5433), this process ends.

  Then, while the control by the main control MPU 1310a is performed, the peripheral control MPU 1511a acquires the above-mentioned various commands transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a to perform the peripheral control unit steady process (reception command analysis process ( In step S1022)), the game situation is grasped each time, and an effect corresponding to the game situation can be executed.

  More specifically, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred, and when in this situation, performs control related to the hold display and the prefetch effect according to the start winning. Then, after this, by updating the process flag based on the grasped game situation, the following variation pattern designation command reception waiting process, production symbol variation start process, production symbol variation process, production symbol variation stop process, big hit display process , One of the big hit game processing and the big hit end effect processing is executed.

  Variation pattern designation command reception waiting process: Until a variation pattern command relating to the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect (demonstration, etc.) when the symbol is not in the variation state and control regarding the big hit is not performed While performing the control, when the variation pattern command regarding the variation pattern is received from the main control MPU 1310a, the process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect design variation start processing.

  Production symbol variation start processing: While determining various production contents (production pattern, notice production, etc.) in the symbol variation period based on the variation pattern command, etc., the variation of the decorative design is started based on the determined production contents. To control. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect symbol. Of the variation patterns (production patterns), many of the "variation patterns (production patterns) that are stopped with a jackpot pattern" are prepared in a pair with the "variation patterns (production pattern) that are stopped with a lost design." By functioning as the same variation pattern (effect pattern), it becomes possible to provide an effect as to whether a big hit symbol or a lost symbol appears. Therefore, in the following description, when describing a variation pattern (effect pattern), when it is described as a “predetermined variation pattern”, a “specific variation pattern”, or the like, unless otherwise noted, “a big hit symbol is stopped. It means both "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern)" and "predetermined fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern) stopped by a lost design", and as a result of the progress of the production contents in the same manner. It will come to the turning point where either the big hit symbol or the lost symbol appears.

Production symbol variation process: various production contents determined in the production symbol variation start process, such as control to start at each timing during the symbol variation period, and when the variation time ends the value of the process flag production symbol Update to a value corresponding to fluctuation stop processing.
Production design fluctuation stop process: Based on the reception of the command (design determination command) to stop all designs, the variation of the decorative design is stopped and the display result (stop design) is derived and displayed. Then, when stopping the decorative design with the big hit design, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process, and when stopping the decorative design with the lost design, the value of the process flag is changed pattern waiting command reception processing Update to the value corresponding to.

  Big hit display processing: control the effect (such as a display effect for notifying the effect display device 1600 of the occurrence of a big hit) during the period from when the decorative symbol stops at the big hit symbol to when the big hit game starts. Then, after this, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit game process.

  Big hit game processing: Performs various effects during the big hit game state. When the big hit game state ends, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit end effect process.

  Big hit end production process: In the production display device 1600, the production in the period from the end of the big hit game state to the fluctuation allowable state (display production for notifying the player that the big hit game state has ended) is controlled. .. Then, the value of the process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable pattern designation command reception waiting process.

FIG. 118 is a diagram showing a determination table T1 of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) that is referred to in the effect symbol fluctuation start process in the normal game state.
As shown in FIG. 118, in the determination table T1, effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with each of the fluctuation numbers 1 to 22 indicated by the fluctuation pattern command. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, the effect pattern (variation effect) associated with the variation pattern command is determined based on the determination table T1, and the determined effect pattern is determined. It is controlled so that the variation of the decorative pattern is started based on (variation effect).

  The effect pattern (fluctuation effect) does not necessarily have to correspond to the fluctuation number indicated by the fluctuation pattern command on a one-to-one basis. For example, a plurality of effect patterns (fluctuation effects) are associated with one fluctuation number indicated by a fluctuation pattern command, and one of these effect patterns (fluctuation effects) is determined based on effect lottery or game situation. You may do so. As will be described later, also in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns are associated with some of the variation numbers 1 to 22.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after determining the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) in this way, the notice lottery (decision process of the notice effect) is performed based on the result of the big hit determination, the symbol type, and the variation pattern. By performing control (production symbol changing process) to cause the notice production won in the notice lottery to appear at a predetermined timing while the above-described production pattern (variation production) is performed, a plurality of production contents can be obtained. It is made possible to suggest the degree of expectation that a big hit pattern will appear depending on their appearance mode.

  In the past, in such a composite effect, a plurality of appearances may be executed while one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) is being executed even though the same specific notice effect (for example, timer effect) is being executed, It is expected that this will help maintain the entertainment of the game. However, since the notice effect can be combined only when the expectation that the big hit symbol appears is high, the frequency of execution of a plurality of timer effects naturally decreases while one effect pattern (variable effect) is being executed. However, it was difficult to sufficiently improve the enjoyment of games.

  As will be described later, the "timer effect" refers to a predetermined effect that appears during the execution of the effect pattern (fluctuation effect), and the count display toward the timing at which the predetermined effect is performed is the first predetermined numerical value. (For example, "60 seconds") to a second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 seconds") is performed as a count effect display, or is performed as a standby display before starting count display (preparing, etc.) Is. That is, in this case, when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value is started as the timer effect, it is guaranteed that some effect is always generated when the count value reaches the second predetermined numerical value. Become. Alternatively, an effect (for example, a conversation notice or a cut-in A) that causes one of a performance mode (a performance mode with low expectations) and a performance mode (a performance mode with high expectations) that is relatively disadvantageous to the player to appear. , B, etc.) is the target of the timer effect, it is guaranteed that an advantageous effect result will always occur when the second predetermined value is reached. However, in the timer effect (especially the notice side timer effect executed as a result of the notice lottery), at least at the time when the count display is started, it is kept secret about which effect is the effect target. It is desirable to do so. In addition, the "production target of the timer effect" is an effect that appears when the count display (for example, countdown) from the first predetermined numerical value becomes the second predetermined numerical value (for example, "0 second") as the timer effect. That is, in the timer effect, the count display is performed toward the timing at which the effect target is generated.

  In the "timer effect" according to this embodiment, the elapsed time from the start of counting is displayed to the second decimal place, and the number of seconds and the like are displayed accurately. However, it does not necessarily have to be executed as such a timer effect, and if it is executed as a count effect in which a count display such as a count-up or a count-down is performed, the time elapsed from the start of counting ( It does not have to accurately indicate the number of seconds).

  Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, in addition to the timer effect (notification side timer effect) as effect contents that appear only when the advance notice lottery is won, the effect pattern (based on the determination table T1) ( It is possible to execute a timer effect (fluctuation side timer effect) that is incorporated in advance as effect contents of (variation effect). That is, in this case, if only the notice side timer effect is executed, the count effect display is executed as "the effect content of the notice effect that functions so that the jackpot expectation level is increased for the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command". Instead, it is also executed as "the effect content of the effect pattern itself determined based on the variation pattern command", so that the expectation from the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command. The count effect display (timer effect) can be made to appear without wastefully accumulating (increasing the degree of expectation by satisfying the condition of “winning in advance notice lottery”). For example, when the big hit expectation rate when a specific effect pattern determined based on the variation pattern command appears is “20%”, if the notice timer effect is further executed, the big hit expectation degree is increased by the function of the compound effect. Then, for example, it becomes “40%” and the appearance frequency must be lowered by that amount, while a big hit is expected when the variable side timer effect is executed as the effect content of the specific effect pattern itself. It is possible to execute the timer effect with the degree set to “20%” (it can appear only by selecting a specific variation pattern), and the appearance frequency can be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, the jackpot expectation degree when a production pattern (fluctuation production) appears in the determination table T1 differs depending on the variation number (further, the production pattern), and basically, as the variation number increases, the jackpot expectation. It has a tendency to become more frequent. For example, in the effect patterns corresponding to the change numbers 5 (6), 9 (10), and 17 (18), the change-side timer effect in which "conversation notice" is the effect target is executed as the effect content. The appearance ratio is variation number 5 (6)> variation number 9 (10)> variation number 17 (18), while the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance is variation number 5 (6) <variation number 9 ( 10) <variation number 17 (18). Also, for convenience of explanation, only the determination table referred to in the normal gaming state will be described in detail here, but in the determination table referred to in the low probability time saving state or the high probability time saving state, the effect content of the effect pattern itself As, the effect pattern (count fluctuation pattern) in which the variable timer effect can be executed is included, and it is possible to appear with a different probability from that in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the determination table T1, the variation numbers 3 to 6 are the same in that the same normal reach production is performed, but the variation numbers 5 and 6 can execute the variation side timer production for which the conversation notice is produced. This is different from the fluctuation numbers 3 and 4. Also, the variation numbers 7 to 14 are the same in that the same character reach effect is performed, but the variation numbers 9 and 10 are the variation side timer effects for which the conversation notice is the effect target, and the variation numbers 11 and 10. In 12, the variable side timer effect for the cut-in A is executed, and for the change numbers 13 and 14, the conversation notice and the cut-in A are executed and the variable side timer effect for the effect is executed. They are different in that they can be done. Further, the variable numbers 15 to 22 are the same in that the same SP reach effect is performed, but the variable numbers 17 and 18 are the variable side timer effects for which the conversation announcement is the effect target, and the variable numbers 19 and 18. In No. 20, the variable side timer effect for the effect target of cut-in B is executed, and for the change numbers 21 and 22, the conversation notice and the cut-in B are executed and the variable side timer effect for those effect objects is executed. They are different in that they can be done. In addition, the jackpot expectation is higher when the variable timer effect for which the cut-in A or B is performed is executed than when the variable timer effect for which the notice of conversation is performed is executed. Is set so that the jackpot expectation degree tends to be higher when the variable side timer effect for both the conversation announcement and the cut-ins A and B is executed.

  Note that the "conversation notice" is a production that can appear at a relatively early stage after the production pattern (variable production of a decorative pattern) is executed, and that a relatively low expectation is added. On the other hand, the cut-ins A and B are capable of appearing at a relatively late stage after the effect pattern (variable effect of the decorative pattern) is executed, and have a relatively high expectation. This is a production that often occurs (or a production in which a relatively high expectation is always added). Therefore, the "conversation notice" is set so that the appearance ratio (execution probability) is higher than that of the other effects (cut-ins A and B, and character products A actions and B described later) with higher expectations. It is supposed to be done. Further, the "cut-in" that appears as the content of the fluctuating effect is executed in the character reach so as to correspond to the cut-in A that appears as the content of the effect of the notice effect, whereas in the SP reach, the notice is given. It is executed so as to correspond to the cut-in B instead of the cut-in A that appears as the effect contents of the effect.

  Moreover, in the determination table T1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 118, the effect contents (effect pattern) for a plurality of fluctuation patterns (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ) Is assigned as the variable side timer effect. Then, if the variation pattern is "predetermined type such as shortened variation or low-expectation normal reach effect (for example, variation numbers 1 to 6)", the count effect display as the notice timer effect is displayed. While the production pattern is not won (the premium degree is raised) and the expectation level UP when the notice timer production appears, the variation pattern is “variation pattern for executing the variation timer production ( Variation number 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22, etc.) ”, the variation pattern has a predetermined type (for example, variation) as compared with the case where it is not such a variation pattern. The numbers corresponding to the numbers 1 to 6) are low.

  It should be noted that here, as the count fluctuation pattern for which the fluctuation side timer effect is executed, 14 fluctuation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) are prepared, but two of them (0 Since only the variation patterns (variation numbers 5 and 6) of the individual number (which may be set individually) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6 and the like), the corresponding ratio is “2/14”. On the other hand, eight variation patterns (variation numbers 1 to 4, 7, 8, 15, 16) are prepared as the variation patterns in which the variation timer effect is not executed, and four of them are variation patterns (variation). Since the numbers 1 to 4) correspond to the predetermined types (variation numbers 1 to 6, etc.), the corresponding ratio is "4/8".

  With such a configuration, when the effect contents of the variation pattern are those capable of performing the count effect display (variation-side timer effect) (count variation pattern), the advance notice is given as compared with the variation pattern in which the variation-side timer effect is not performed. As the effect contents of the effect, the rate at which it is determined that the count effect display (announcement timer effect) cannot be executed becomes low. Therefore, it is possible to promote the appearance of a plurality of count displays in one effect pattern (fluctuation effect) without unnecessarily increasing the expectation and decreasing the appearance frequency.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). ), The ratio of appearance of the notice timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern the count variation pattern is. For example, as shown in FIG. 118, when the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the notice timer effect does not appear at all, and the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 9 to 14 are executed. When the production pattern corresponding to the variation numbers 17 to 22 is executed, the advance notice timer effect can appear with a high lottery probability. ing.

  Even when the effect patterns corresponding to the fluctuation numbers 5 and 6 are executed, the advance notice timer effect may appear with a low probability. In addition, even when any of the effect patterns corresponding to the variation numbers 15 to 22 in which the above-mentioned notice timer effect is allowed to appear with a high lottery probability is executed, in reality, it is a big hit compared to the case of losing. In the production pattern that is won, the advance notice timer effect can appear with a higher lottery probability, and the variation number 22 can appear with a higher lottery probability than the variation number 16. ing.

  In such a configuration, depending on whether the variation pattern is the first count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 10) or the second count variation pattern (e.g., variation number 22), the count effect display is an advance notice effect. The ratio of execution as the content of the effect (preliminary timer effect) becomes different. Therefore, among the count variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) in which the appearance ratio of a plurality of count displays is high in one production pattern (variation production), its type Depending on the situation, it is possible to further increase the rate of appearance of a plurality of count displays, so that it is expected to maintain a suitable gaming interest.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even if the effect patterns (eg, character reach, SP reach) in which the effect contents of the same reach type appear, the variable timer effect is included as effect contents. In the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 17 to 22) that is performed, the notice timer is set within the execution period of the effect pattern as compared to the effect pattern (for example, variation numbers 15 and 16) in which the variable-side timer effect is not included as the effect content. The appearance ratio (the ratio at which the announcement timer effect is determined to be executed in the announcement lottery) is set to be high. That is, in this case, two timer productions (variable timer production, notice timer production) appear in one production pattern only by requiring a big hit expectation degree that one announcement timer production is won in the preliminary drawing. As a result, it is possible to realize the double timer production opportunity without wasteful addition of the big hit expectation.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment, the effect pattern (fluctuation effect) determined in the effect symbol fluctuation start process is the count fluctuation pattern (fluctuation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22). Even in this case, the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) whose target is "conversation notice" and the variable side timer effect (variation side count effect display) which is targeted for "cut-in" In the above, the mode of count display (the form and color of count numbers, etc.) is made different. That is, in this case, even if an effect pattern (for example, change numbers 9 and 11) having the same reach effect as the effect content is executed, the mode of the count display of the variable side timer effect (the variable side count effect display) is confirmed. By doing so, it is possible to recognize the easiness of appearance of the notice timer effect in combination with "the rate of appearance of the notice timer effect differs depending on which count variation pattern". You can expect it.

  Regarding the aspect of the count display that appears in the notice side timer effect (notice side count effect display), the variable side timer effect (change side) regardless of whether the effect target is the same (conversation notice, cut-in). It may be different (or different from at least one) from the count display mode (conversation notice, cut-in) that appears in the count effect display), or may be the same as (or at least one of) the same mode. .

  However, it is relatively expected that the count display executed as the notice timer effect (preliminary count effect display) is executed in a common manner regardless of the type of the effect that is the effect target. This is useful for making the player recognize that the advance notice timer effect, which is set to a high degree, is appearing and to improve the expectation. In this sense, it is more preferable that the notice timer effect is different from any of the count display modes (conversation notice, cut-in) that appear in the variable timer effect (variable count effect display). As for the common aspect as the notice timer effect (preliminary count effect display), a plurality of aspects having different expectations (for example, blue count, red count, etc.) are prepared, and one of them is executed. You may do it.

  Further, in order to more appropriately recognize that the notice side timer effect is being executed, a count display when the notice side timer effect is executed and a count display when the changing side timer effect is executed are provided. It is desirable that the counting speed (for example, the speed at which the numbers change during counting up or counting down) be made different. With such a configuration, even after the timer effect is started, the count speed of the timer effect is watched even during the period in which the count display is in progress, and the relative side with the relatively low-expecting fluctuation side timer effect. It becomes possible to give an interest in which of the high-anticipation notice timer effects is being executed, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game during the timer exhaustion period.

  Further, at this time, in the variable timer effect, the count display is performed at a speed (or the same speed) relatively close to the count speed of the notification timer effect according to the effect target (conversation notice, cut-in) ( If the count-in is performed by the cut-in) and the mode in which the count is displayed at a speed not relatively close to the count speed of the notice-side timer effect (conversation notice), whether the notice-side timer effect is being executed or not is displayed. It becomes possible to add interest by changing the difficulty of judgment. In the variable timer effect (or the notice timer effect), the count is displayed by repeating appearance and deletion of the count number, whereas in the notice timer effect (or the variable timer effect), the count number is continuously displayed. The count may be displayed by displaying.

  With such a configuration, when a situation occurs in which the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect occur at the same time, it is easy to grasp whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed. It is hoped that the game will be able to be played and the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count display is performed for the variation patterns (variation numbers 5, 6, 9-14, 17-22, etc.) corresponding to the variation timer effect. A plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings (total number of counts or time required for all counts to be consumed) are set as selectable effect patterns. When the variation pattern corresponding to the variation timer effect is acquired, the count display of the variation timer effect and the advance notice timer are performed by deciding one of the plurality of effect patterns based on a random number for the effect and the like. If the ease of simultaneous execution with the production count display (for example, the larger the total count is, the easier it is to overlap) makes it easier to judge whether or not the notice timer production is being executed. I'm trying to add fun

  In this embodiment, a plurality of effect patterns (timer effect effect target and reach effect) with different start timings or end timings of count display (total number of counts or time required for all counts to be consumed) for one variation pattern. Although the contents of the effect are the same, a plurality of effect patterns with different start timing or end timing of the count display (total number of counts, or time required for all the counts to be consumed) (however, they are subject to the effect of the timer effect) It is also possible to prepare a plurality of different variation patterns for each effect pattern and the type of reach effect executed as the effect content of the variation pattern, and to make a one-to-one correspondence.

  Further, even if the count display number (total number of counts) when appearing in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect may be different, or even if the same specific count display number can be selected, the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice If the selection rate of the specific count display number is made different from that of the side timer effect, it becomes possible to make it more difficult to determine whether or not the notice side timer effect is being executed, and to add interest. ..

  Also, while the notice timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable timer effect is executed in the count up display, and it is possible to definitely determine whether the notice timer effect is being executed. It is expected that it will be possible to significantly improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, while the notice side timer effect is executed in the countdown display, the variable side timer effect intended for the specific effect (for example, conversation notice) is executed in the count up display, and an effect different from the specific effect (for example, If the variable timer effect for (Cut-in) is executed with a countdown display, it is interesting to make it difficult to judge whether the notice timer effect is being executed or not depending on the effect target. Can be granted.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, there are cases where the same effect is used as the effect target for the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect, and there is a case where a different effect is effected. To control. Then, when the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is targeted for the same effect in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, compared to the case where different effect is applied in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect. Even if the setting is made so that the jackpot expectation degree becomes low and that the same effect (for example, conversation notice) is set as the effect target in both the variable side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, each count display The end timing is different.

  That is, in this case, even if the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is set as the effect target for the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, one of the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect is the predetermined numerical value first. Since the other count display will continue while it reaches the end, it is as if a different effect is targeted at this point (the timer effect is executed in a relatively high expectation mode). It looks as if Then, after this, the other count display that has been continued reaches the predetermined numerical value in a manner that makes it clear that the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is directed to the effect, and is ended first. Even when it is revealed by the timer effect on the end side that the conversation announcement with a relatively low degree of expectation is targeted for rendering, a different rendering that can appear afterwards is targeted for rendering ( It is expected that the sense of expectation that the timer effect is executed in a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation is maintained and the enjoyment of the game is improved.

  Further, when the same effect (for example, a conversation notice) is targeted for the same effect in the fluctuating side timer effect and the notice side timer effect, the timing at which the fluctuating side timer effect reaches a predetermined value and the notice side timer effect are specified. It is desirable to display separate count end correspondence displays (for example, “count successful!”, “Chance UP!”, Etc.) at timings when the numerical value is reached.

  More specifically, the variable timer effect and the notice timer effect for which "conversation notice", which is executed as an effect on the varying side or the notice side, is produced are made to appear in one effect pattern. In this case, the count display of the fluctuating side timer effect and the count display of the notice side timer effect respectively proceed simultaneously, but in the fluctuating side timer effect, as the effect on the fluctuating side in relation to the "conversation notice". While the count display proceeds according to the fluctuation-side specific effect that occurs (such as "Successful counting!" Or the effect that matches the appearance of the conversation notice), the notice timer effect is related to the "conversation notice". A count display is made in accordance with the notice side specific effect that occurs as the notice side effect (such as "Chance UP!" Or a timer end display that appears at the start timing of the conversation notice (or a predetermined few seconds before the effect starts)). By advancing, separate count end correspondence displays will appear at different timings.

  By the way, the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are required to be executed without fail when they are targeted for the effect of the changing timer effect (when the count change pattern is determined). In particular, since the conversation notice and the cut-in are effects that can be executed in a plurality of modes with different expectations, when the count display reaches a predetermined numerical value when it is an effect target of the variable timer effect, Therefore, it is required to make them appear in a manner with high expectations. Therefore, the effect to be the effect target of the fluctuating side timer effect is incorporated in advance as the effect content of the effect pattern (fluctuating effect), and the fluctuating side timer effect and the effect target thereof are only executed by executing the effect pattern. It is desirable that the effects (modes with a relatively high degree of expectation) that can be produced can respectively appear. However, instead of this, when the variable timer effect is executed, it is also possible to perform control so that the effect targeted for the effect (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) is always selected in the notice lottery. .

  If the conversation notice and the cut-in effects are not included in the effect of the variable timer effect, it will be determined whether or not to appear as the effect contents of the notice side in the notice lottery described later. A determination is made as to which form (a mode with a relatively high expectation or a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation) as the side effect content, and the appearance control is performed based on the result of the determination. ..

Hereinafter, the effect pattern determination processing using FIG. 118 will be summarized.
That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the variation pattern command, the symbol type command, or the like is acquired from the main control MPU 1310a, first, the current game is based on the variation number indicated by the variation pattern command or the symbol type indicated by the symbol type command. The determination table corresponding to the state is referred to. For example, if the effect pattern is determined based on the symbol type, it is possible to give a bias (expectancy) to the probability variation expectation when a particular effect pattern appears or the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state. become.

  Then, next, a plurality of effect patterns (such as a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display that appear in the variable timer effect) that can be selected are prepared as effect patterns associated with the change numbers. In the case of winning, one of a plurality of effect patterns having different start timings or end timings of the count display is selected based on whether or not the big hit determination is successful. At this time, when the big hit determination is won, the production pattern is set so that the ratio of the start timing or the end timing of the count display being delayed becomes high, and thereby the start timing or the end timing of the count display is set. The slower it is, the more likely it is that a jackpot pattern will appear.

  Further, as will be described later, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the count variation pattern (variation numbers 5, 6, 9 to 14, 17 to 22) is acquired when a special effect condition is satisfied. Even in the case, the effect pattern set so that the variable timer effect does not appear is selected from the plurality of effect patterns.

  Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, after the effect pattern (effect from the change start of the decorative symbol to the change stop of the decorative symbol) appearing during the symbol change is thus selected, what kind of notice effect is to be given within the execution period of the effect pattern. In this manner, it is decided whether to additionally execute (composite) (preliminary lottery).

[12. Sound control by automatic channel method]
By the way, in the already-described sound data creation processing (step S1032 in FIG. 95), a description of automatic channel sound control, which is a part thereof, will be described later. Therefore, the automatic channel sound control according to this embodiment will be described next. First, the background will be briefly described.

  In a general pachinko machine, various sounds are output from a speaker in each scene in accordance with the progress of the game, so as to realize an effect that attracts the player's interest. For example, even if the reach is expected to improve the expectations of the player, some reach outputs various sounds depending on its type, and some does not. In such a general pachinko machine, each channel is pre-assigned to each sound to be output in each scene including each such reach, and each such sound is associated with each corresponding predetermined preset. It is reproduced using a channel (see Japanese Patent No. 5627044). However, in a general pachinko machine, even if there is a vacant channel, the sound to be played may not be assigned to the vacant channel due to the channel assignment, and the sound to be played is played. However, there was a problem that it was difficult to achieve various sound productions.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 causes the pair of upper speakers 573 (the sound (Output means) and each sound to be output from the pair of lower speakers 921 (sound output means) are dynamically allocated and managed, while the number of combinations of sounds to be output is the same for each channel. When the maximum number of channels (16 channels are exemplified in this embodiment) is exceeded, each channel is dynamically assigned to the combination of sounds to be output within the range of the maximum number of channels according to a predetermined priority order. (Channel control means). Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a simultaneously reproduces the combination of sounds to be output via each channel dynamically assigned within the maximum number of channels according to the predetermined priority order (sound output control means). . The details will be described below.

[12-1. Sound control by fixed channel method]
119 (A) and FIG. 119 (B) respectively show an example of sound control by the fixed channel method as a comparison target with respect to this embodiment. FIG. 119A shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel system, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used, as in the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment described later. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 119 (B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the fixed channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is pre-assigned to each reproduction channel to be used. Here, regarding the basic sound reproduction rule, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, and one channel when outputting in monaural.

  The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure shall not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. As a channel assignment method, the playback channel and the sound are exclusively assigned as a pair so that the sound is not overwritten. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound started to be reproduced is overwritten by another sound during the reproduction and the sound is muted. As a channel allocation method, the channels are allocated to the same channel so that the reproduction timing is not exceeded as much as possible.

  In sound control by the fixed channel method, when a new sound is output to the same channel being output, the sound being output is muted and a new sound is output. With regard to sounds that are disturbed when overwritten, independent channels are assigned, or sounds whose playback timings do not overlap are assigned to the same channel.

  FIG. 120 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the fixed channel method. In this sound definition table, the definition of playback channel number, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting is managed for each sound category and sound name. There is. Since the reproduction channel number has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when set to "0x80", for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds from upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and if "0x80" is set, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers is a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 121 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the reproduced channel. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 122 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, FIG. 122 (B) shows an example of a channel reproduction time chart, and FIG. 122 (C) shows that each sound cannot be reproduced. An example of the problem is shown. 122A to 122C, the horizontal axis is a common time axis.

  In FIG. 122 (A), as a game state along the time axis that is the horizontal axis, in the order of "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit" It can be mentioned that the game is controlled to be "medium".

  In the "first half of change" shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 1 of FIG. 122 (C), during the reproduction time of "first half notice A" as a new sound, the start mouth winning (shown as "hold" 119), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "first half notice A", as shown in FIG. The reproduced sound of "" is overwritten with the reserved winning sound, and the output of the "first half notice A" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

  In the “second half of variation” shown in FIG. 122 (A), for example, as shown in Problem 2 of FIG. 122 (C), a start sound winning (shown as “hold 119), the "holding winning sound" is pre-assigned to the same playback channels 14 and 15 as the "full screen notice", as shown in FIG. 119 (B). The reproduction sound of "" is overwritten by the pending winning sound, and the output of the "full screen notice" sound is stopped (in the case of sound control by a fixed channel).

[12-2. Sound control by automatic channel method]
Next, an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment will be described. 123 (A) and 123 (B) respectively show an example of sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 123 (A) shows an example of a sound reproduction channel. In the sound control by the fixed channel described above, the channel division as an attribute of the reproduction channel is an automatic channel (corresponding to “AUTOch” in the figure). Is different. Here, the channel division being an automatic channel means that each reproduction channel for each sound is not fixed but variable, and is controlled so as to be automatically allocated according to a rule described later (above-mentioned). Equivalent to "Sound control by automatic channel method".

  In the sound control by the automatic channel system according to the present embodiment, for example, all 16 channels of the reproduction channel 00 to the reproduction channel 15 are used as in the sound control by the fixed channel system described above. The "reproduction channel" shown in the figure is a reproduction channel omitted.

  On the other hand, FIG. 123 (B) shows an example of allocation of reproduction channels to each sound. In the sound control by the automatic channel method, as shown in the figure, each sound is individually assigned a priority order. Here, touching on the basic sound reproduction rules, as described above, one sound requires two channels when outputting in stereo, while one sound requires one channel when outputting in monaural. Become.

  The "notification sound 1" to "button pressing sound" shown in the figure must not be muted in the middle of the reproduction start sound until the reproduction end. On the other hand, in the illustrated "normal BGM" to "holding winning sound", there is no problem even if the sound started to be reproduced is overwritten by another sound during the reproduction and the sound is muted.

  In the sound control by the automatic channel system, each reproduction channel is defined as an AUTO group channel (hereinafter abbreviated as “AUTO group”). While multiple AUTO groups can be defined, multiple playback channels can be defined within an AUTO group. Each AUTO group is used to reproduce a sound for the AUTO group. When assigning a sound to an AUTO group, an identifier and a priority order (priority) for designating a specific AUTO group can be designated in each AUTO group. When a new sound is reproduced, if the sound is defined in the AUTO group, and if an empty channel (unused channel) exists in the specified AUTO group, it is immediately reproduced.

  If there is no free channel in the above case, the effect control program searches all channels currently being reproduced in the AUTO group based on the priority order of the sound to be newly reproduced. If there is a channel whose priority is lower than or the same as the sound itself being reproduced, the effect control program ends the use of the AUTO channel and reproduces a new sound. On the other hand, the effect control program does not reproduce the new sound if there is no empty channel in the AUTO group that has a lower priority or is not the same as the sound itself being reproduced.

  FIG. 124 shows an example of a sound definition table for realizing sound control by the automatic channel system. In the sound definition table in this automatic channel system, for each sound category and sound name, a reproduction channel number such as sound control by the fixed channel already described, left / right pan initial value, upper / lower pan initial value, volume initial value, Instead of sound number, playback type setting, and output type setting, an identifier for specifying an AUTO group and priority (also called "playback priority"), left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound It manages definitions of numbers, seek points, playback type settings and output type settings.

  First, the identifier for designating each specific AUTO group indicates in which AUTO group among a plurality of AUTO groups each sound is reproduced. The priority order is an index indicating which sound should be preferentially reproduced when the sounds are simultaneously reproduced. This priority order indicates that the higher the numerical value, the more preferentially the sound should be reproduced, while the smaller the numerical value, the lower the priority should be reproduced. In the present embodiment, as the order of the types of sounds to be preferentially reproduced, for example, the notification sounds whose priority is “25” (“notification sound 1”, “notification sound 2”, and “notification sound 3”). , A sound effect having a priority of “20” (“big hit confirmation sound” and “button pressing sound”), a BGM having a priority of “15” (such as “normal BGM”), and a priority of “10”. Sound effects (such as "full-screen notice sound effect"), sound effects with priority "05" ("first half notice sound effect" to "second half notice sound effect"), pending winning sound with priority "01" I am trying. As a result, when there is no empty channel, for example, when trying to reproduce the notification sound, it is not necessary to reproduce using the predetermined reproduction channel, and the sound of lower priority (for example, the reserved winning sound) ), The notification sound is preferentially reproduced using the channel that is reproducing.

  As described above, the left and right pan initial value represents the sound image localization initial position of the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. The left and right pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and if "0x80" is set, the upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L are output. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  Further, as already described, the upper and lower pan initial values are set to the upper and lower sides of, for example, the pair of upper speakers 573 (the upper left speaker 573L and the upper right speaker 573R) and the pair of lower speakers 921 (the lower left speaker 921L and the lower right speaker 921R). Represents the initial position of the sound image localization of the sound from the speaker. By dynamically changing the left and right pan setting values during sound reproduction, there is a difference in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and the sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . The upper and lower pan initial values are managed as pan information. For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and if "0x80" is set, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers is a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  Similarly, the volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set, for example, in the setting range of "0x00" to "0xFF". In addition, "1" at the 3rd byte (0x1FF for 0xFF ) Is set, it is not affected by the volume change due to operating one or more volume adjusting devices equipped in the gaming machine, and it is always played at the volume set by the initial value. It represents. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above.

  The seek point represents the reproduction start position number within the same phrase in the sound data corresponding to each sound. In the present embodiment, as the seek point, for example, “0” is set for each of “upper right speaker confirmation sound” to “first half notice A sound effect”, while “second half notice A sound effect” and “second half notice B effect” are set. "1" is set for each "Sound". With such seek points, it is possible to register the number of sounds exceeding the maximum number of sounds that can be registered within the sound source.

  The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 125 shows the relationship between the game state, the reproduced sound and the priority order. The time axis which is the horizontal axis shows the game state, and as the game state, for example, "first half of fluctuation", "second half of fluctuation", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and "big hit medium" Can be mentioned. On the other hand, the vertical axis represents the (reproduction) priority order, and represents that the (reproduction) priority order increases from bottom to top.

  FIG. 126 (A) shows an example of an effect time chart, and FIG. 126 (B) shows an example of an AUTO channel reproduction time chart. In these FIGS. 126A and 126B, the horizontal axis is a common time axis. In FIG. 126 (A), as a game state along the time axis which is the horizontal axis in order, "first half of change", "second half of change", "left symbol stop", "right symbol stop", "middle symbol stop" and " It can be mentioned that the game is controlled so as to be "big hit".

  In the "first half of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of "normal BGM reproduction" is reproduced throughout the reproduction channels 00-01 ( Equivalent to range A). Here, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because there is a starting mouth winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure), the reproduction channels 12 to 13 exist as empty channels at the start timing. Since this hold prize sound can be reproduced using the reproduction channels 12 to 13, any of the sounds being reproduced is not overwritten by the hold prize sound (corresponding to "hold sound reproduction" in the drawing), and other Output of all types of sounds continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), as shown in FIG. 126 (B), as a part thereof, for example, the sound of “reach BGM reproduction” is reproduced from reproduction channels 00 to 01 all the time ( Equivalent to range B). Here, for example, when the player tries to reproduce the reserved winning sound as a new sound because of the start winning (corresponding to the "reserved winning" shown in the figure), the reproduction channels 02 to 03 exist as empty channels at the start timing. , The sound being reproduced is not overwritten by the reserved winning sound (corresponding to “reproduction of reserved sound” in the figure), and the output of all other types of sound continues.

  In the “second half of fluctuation” shown in FIG. 126 (A), a notification sound (corresponding to “notification 2 occurrence” shown in the figure) is generated after that, so that a new notification sound with the highest priority level of “25” ( When an attempt is made to reproduce the “notification 2” shown in the figure), as a result of searching for an empty channel, it is found that there is no empty channel at the start timing as shown in FIG. 126 (B). Therefore, the sound having the lowest priority among the sounds being reproduced at the start timing is searched, and the reproduction channels 04 to 05 are found as the channels reproducing the reserved winning sound having the lowest priority of "01". In these reproduction channels 04 to 05, the pending winning sound is reproduced as described above. Since the priority is higher than the priority (01) of the reserved winning sound, the pending winning sound being reproduced in these reproduction channels 04 to 05 is overwritten with the notification sound.

  FIG. 127 shows an example of the work information for automatic channel control stored in the work area for AUTO group channel control provided in the peripheral control RAM. This work information for automatic channel control is, as work names, set reservation flags, requested sound numbers, playing sound numbers, automatic allocation groups, priority at automatic allocation, elapsed time from registration, volume control for each channel. It includes a work for work and a work for pan control, and has respective information corresponding to these.

  If the setting reservation flag is a value other than “0”, it indicates that the setting reservation is made. The requested sound number represents a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound to be reproduced if "-1" is stopped and other than "-1". The playing sound number indicates a sound data index number as an identifier for identifying a sound being played, if "-1" is stopped and is other than "-1".

  In the automatic allocation group, the channel is fixedly allocated when it is "0", while the channel is automatically allocated when it is "1" ("Sound control by automatic channel method" described later). Equivalent to). Here, for the automatic allocation group, for example, "1" indicates the AUTO group 1, and "2" indicates the AUTO group 2. On the other hand, the priority at the time of automatic allocation represents the priority in the case of performing sound control by the automatic channel system described later.

  The elapsed time from registration represents the elapsed time from the time of registration, with "0" at the time of registration of the desired reproduced sound. It should be noted that the elapsed time from the registration is the number of the sounds currently being reproduced when a new sound is reproduced in a situation where a plurality of sounds having the same priority during the automatic allocation are being reproduced. Used to determine which sounds should be overwritten and erased. For example, a sound that has been reproduced for a longer time is determined, and this sound is overwritten with the new sound and erased.

  The volume control work stores the volume value (volume value) of the sound to be reproduced. The pan control work stores pan information including the above-described left and right pan and upper and lower pan setting values.

  FIG. 128 shows a specific channel (hereinafter, referred to as channel X) out of a limited number of channels prepared as sound control by the fixed channel method for various notification sounds (payout notification sound and abnormality notification sound) excluding the effect sound. 2 shows an example of the sound definition table in the case of realizing the processing of outputting only in (). In this sound definition table, the definition of priority of playback, left / right pan initial value, top / bottom pan initial value, volume initial value, sound number, seek point, playback type setting and output type setting is managed for each sound name. is doing. Here, for convenience of description, only the definitions of the notification sounds 1 to 7 are shown, and the definitions of other notification sounds and effect sounds are omitted. Note that, regarding the effect sound, in addition to the definition by the fixed channel system illustrated in FIG. 120, the definition by the automatic channel system illustrated in FIG. 124 is performed for each channel other than the channel X to which the notification sound is assigned. It is also possible to use it.

  The priority order is a parameter used for determining which of the notification sounds is to be assigned to the channel X and output when the plurality of notification sounds satisfy the output conditions. The high notification sound is assigned to the channel X and is output regardless of the allocation state of the notification sound having a low priority value to the channel X. As will be described later, if the priorities are the same, the notification sound previously assigned to the channel X is prioritized, and the notification sound assigned to the channel X is output after the output of the notification sound ends. Will be done.

  The left and right pan initial values represent the sound image localization initial positions of the left and right speakers that are a combination of the upper left speaker 573L and the lower left speaker 921L, and the upper right speaker 573R and the lower right speaker 921R. By dynamically changing the set values of the left and right pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume output individually from the left and right speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0x00", it indicates that only the left speaker (upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker 921L) outputs, and when set to "0x80", for example, upper left speaker 573L and lower left speaker. The volume difference output individually from the left and right speakers, which is a combination of the 921L, the upper right speaker 573R, and the lower right speaker 921R, becomes 0, and the sound image is localized in the center of the left and right speakers. For example, when set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the right speaker (upper right speaker 573R and lower right speaker 921R) outputs.

  The upper and lower pan initial values are, for example, sound image localization of sounds from upper and lower speakers such as a pair of upper speakers 573 (upper left speaker 573L and upper right speaker 573R) and a pair of lower speakers 921 (lower left speaker 921L and lower right speaker 921R). It represents the initial position. By dynamically changing the setting value of the upper and lower pans during sound reproduction, a difference occurs in the volume individually output from the upper and lower speakers, and a sound image can be localized in an arbitrary space between the upper and lower speakers. . For example, if "0x00" is set, it indicates that the sound is output from only the pair of upper speakers 573, and if "0x80" is set, the volume difference output individually from the upper and lower speakers is a combination of these. Becomes 0, and the sound image is localized at the center of the upper and lower speakers. For example, if it is set to "0xFF", it indicates that only the pair of lower speakers 921 outputs.

  The volume initial value represents the volume setting at the start of reproduction, and can be set in the setting range of “0x00” to “0xFF”, for example. The sound number is an identifier for distinguishing each sound described above. The reproduction type setting is loop reproduction (corresponding to "LOOP" in the figure) that repeatedly reproduces the target sound, or 1SHOT reproduction (corresponding to "1SHOT" in the figure) that reproduces the target sound once. Is displayed. The output type setting indicates whether the target sound is reproduced in monaural or stereo.

  FIG. 129 is a table showing, for each notification sound illustrated in FIG. 128, a notification content, a notification mode, a notification time, and a condition (cancellation condition) at which the notification ends, for each type of the notification sound. In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a finite notification time is set for any of the notification sounds. However, in order to effectively utilize the single channel X, this is set as much as possible for the unused channels. This is a measure for keeping the state in a state and refraining from outputting the notification sound thereafter.

  As shown in FIG. 129, the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in a state where magnetism is detected by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 (state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act using a magnet is performed). It is to notify that there is. Then, as the notification mode, a loop process for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, “Magnet detected”). ) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. The notification time is 60 seconds (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for 6 times) from the time when the magnetic detection sensor 4024 detects the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected". On the other hand, with respect to the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the lighting by various lamps, the execution is continued until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied. Has become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality), a state in which vibration is detected by the vibration sensor 2405 (it is highly possible that a fraudulent act due to a pounding act is performed). State 2) a notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to notify that it is in, and a count sensor 4005 (first big winning hole sensor or second big game) even though it is not in the big hit game state (large winning hole open state) Notification sound that informs that it is in a state where it is detected by the winning hole sensor (a state in which there is a high possibility that an illegal act of forcibly opening the closed large winning hole and winning a game ball is being performed) 3 (major prize winning) is regarded as belonging to the first notification group when there is a high possibility that some dishonest act has been performed, and regarding the notification sound belonging to the first notification group, These notification manner and broadcast time, both the release conditions are as setting to that common.

  For example, in the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “a boom vibration is detected” and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, , "Vibration was detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are respectively performed, and detection by the vibration sensor 2405 is performed as notification time. While the loop processing of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when there is, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and various lamps With respect to lighting by, the execution is continued until the power-on again, which is the cancellation condition, is satisfied. In addition, in the notification sound 3 (large prize winning abnormality), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "A big prize abnormality is detected" is displayed, and in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Display (for example, "A big prize abnormality has been detected") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are performed, respectively, and as the notification time, While the loop process of repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 60 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for six times) from the time when the detection by the count sensor 4005 is performed, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The display and the lighting by the various lamps will be continuously executed until the release condition “power-on” is satisfied.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) with the notification sounds 1 to 3 belonging to the first notification group. It does not have to be a mode). Further, regarding the notification sound to be the target of the loop processing, the notification sound 1 such as “Boo Boo” that plays a role of notifying that it belongs to the first notification group (state in which fraudulent activity is likely to have been performed) The combination of the alarm sound used in any one of 3 to 3 and the message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying the individual identification of the content of the notification is sequentially adopted. The alarm sound consists of a monotonous sound in order to give a warning meaning in a tense situation, and the message sound is composed of various sounds to make it clear from other information sounds. It is desirable to be done.

  That is, in the case of notifying what belongs to the first notification group (state in which there is a high possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed), rather than specifying which notification type it is, the hall side response to the fraudulent act It is important to speed up the initial movement of. In this respect, according to the above-described configuration, only the notification sound of “boo-boo” and the lighting mode unique to the first notification group by the various lamps (light emitting devices) are output, and the ones belonging to the first notification group (the misconduct is Since it is possible to recognize that it is a state in which it is highly likely that it has been performed), it is expected that the initial action of the hall side response to a fraudulent act will be speeded up. Furthermore, a message sound for informing which of the notification types is to be output following the notification sound of "Boo Boo" or the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 is performed. Therefore, it is expected that the measures for the hall side after the initial movement will be performed smoothly.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 4 (door open) is a state in which the door frame open switch 618 detects that the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4 (possibly a fraudulent act by opening the door. However, there is a possibility that the door may have been opened due to the abnormality handling measures by the hall side). Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "door is ping pong ping pong" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "door is open )) And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively. In addition, as the notification time, the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as “the door is open ping-pong ping-pong” is 30 seconds from the time when the door frame opening switch 618 detects (equivalent to repeating the notification sound for three times. ), The display within the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and lighting by various lamps are the release conditions “door closing detection (the door frame opening switch 618 causes the main body frame 4 to On the other hand, the execution is continued until "the detection that the door frame 3 is closed" is satisfied.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 4 (door open), the state in which the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the main body frame opening switch 619 ( Although there is a possibility that fraudulent acts due to opening the main frame, there is a possibility that the main frame is open due to abnormal measures taken by the hall side). , It is regarded as belonging to the second notification group when there is a possibility that some kind of misconduct has been performed and it cannot be denied, and the notification sounds belonging to the second notification group are notified of those notification sounds. The mode, notification time, and cancellation condition are all set to be common.

  For example, in the notification sound 5 (open frame), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 ( For example, "the frame is open") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are executed, respectively, and the main frame opening switch is set as a notification time. While the loop processing for repeatedly outputting the notification sound is completed within 30 seconds (corresponding to the repetition of the notification sound for three times) from the time when the detection by 619 is detected, the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, Regarding the lighting by various lamps, there is a release condition "frame closing detection (the body frame 4 is closed to the outer frame 2 by the body frame opening switch 619). Until the detection of it) "I am satisfied so that the execution is continued.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, different display modes are adopted for the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group, Regarding the lighting by the various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the frame 3 and the game board 5, the same lighting mode (all the various lamps are necessarily turned on) by the notification sounds 4 and 5 belonging to the second notification group. It does not have to be a mode). However, the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the second notification group is different from the lighting mode by the lamp (light emitting device) when belonging to the first notification group. Further, regarding the notification sound that is the target of the loop processing, a message sound (unique sound) that plays a role of notifying individual identification as to what the notification content is, and one that belongs to the second notification group (misconduct (Potential ping-pong), which plays a role of informing that there is an intermediate possibility that a warning has been made) There is.

  That is, when notifying members belonging to the second notification group (a state in which there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed), it is possible to prevent a person who is playing a proper game from feeling aversion. It is important to be able to take measures to deal with abnormalities on the hall side to some extent promptly. In this regard, according to the above configuration, as the notification sound, first, as in the case of belonging to the third notification group described later, a message sound for notifying which of the notification types is output. Therefore, it is expected that a person who is playing a proper game will not easily feel disgust. On the other hand, an alarm sound such as "ping-pong ping-pong" follows the message sound, though it is an alarm sound different from that of the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make it difficult for a person who is playing a proper game to feel aversion. Output in the case of belonging to the third notification group, though it is a lighting mode different from the case of belonging to the first notification group in order to make the person who is playing the appropriate game feel less dislike By notifying by turning on various lamps that are not performed, it is expected that the countermeasures for the abnormality on the hall side will be speeded up to some extent.

  On the other hand, the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) causes the game ball to move the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center role object 2500 in the game area 5a, despite being in the non-time saving state. It is in a state in which the passage is detected by the gate sensor 4003 (a state in which the game is being played in a manner that is disadvantageous to the player, and the game should be corrected in an appropriate manner (left-handed)). It is to inform that. Then, as the notification mode, loop processing for repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as "Please return to left-handed" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Please return to left-handed" ]) And are executed respectively. In addition, as the notification time, both of the loop processing of repeatedly outputting the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 are in the non-time saving state. It is completed in 20 seconds (corresponding to repetition of two notification sounds) from the time of detection by the gate sensor 4003.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in addition to the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), the lower tank 322 is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 as being full of gaming balls (lower bowl). A notification sound 7 (ball cutting guide) indicating that the game ball in 322 is in a ball cutting state is provided, and game guidance is provided to properly advance the game although the possibility of misconduct is low. It is regarded that the notification sound belongs to the third notification group when the power is in the proper state, and for the notification sounds that belong to the third notification group, the notification mode, notification time, and release condition are all set to be common. I am trying.

  For example, in the notification sound 7 (ball drop guide), as a notification mode, a loop process of repeatedly outputting a notification sound such as “Please pull out the ball of the lower plate” and a display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 Display (for example, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate") is executed respectively, and as a notification time, loop processing that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Please remove the ball of the lower plate", and the game board All of the display in the display area of the side effect display device 1600 is completed within 20 seconds (corresponding to the repeating of the two notification sounds) from the time when the full-tank detection sensor 279 detects. .

  However, regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-drop guide), the sensors 2401 and 201, when they are finished in 20 seconds from when they are detected by the gate sensor 4003 or the full tank detection sensor 279. When 279 is still in the detected state, the notification process (the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-slot guide)) is executed again from the beginning.

  In the third notification group according to this embodiment, only the message sounds are output as the notification sounds 6 and 7, but more strictly, for example, after the message sounds for 5 seconds have been output, there is no sound for 5 seconds. The data is assigned to the channel X and a sound corresponding to the data is output (silent output), and a loop process is repeated to repeat the notification sound for 10 seconds with the message sound and the silent data set. It has become. Then, since the notification sounds 6 and 7 are configured to output the silent data for the same amount of time, they function as a unique notification mode different from the first notification group and the second notification group, Even on the side of the hall, it is possible to properly recognize that the notification belongs to the third notification group only by confirming the silent data portion instead of the message sound portion which is difficult to hear in a noisy hall. It is desirable that the silent data is prepared in advance as one sound data (sound data for 10 seconds) including the message sound, and the loop processing is performed while the data is allocated to the channel X.

  By the way, a silent part may exist in the notification sound used between the first notification group and the second notification group (between the alarm sound and the message sound, etc.), but these are very short to have a "between". It is obvious that it is fundamentally different from the above-described relatively long time silent part (third broadcast group) having a group identification function.

  According to such a configuration, the alarm sounds such as “boo-boo” and “ping-pong” are not output, and only the message sound is repeatedly output with a predetermined silence period, so that the player is notified. It is possible to give a notification regarding the game guidance without making the user feel aversion.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group have the same priority, but the notification sounds belonging to the same notification group have different priorities. You may do it. Further, as the reproduction type setting, the loop reproduction for repeatedly reproducing the target sound is adopted, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and the 1SHOT reproduction for reproducing the target sound once may be adopted. . In addition, “Boo Boo”, which is commonly used for the notification sound belonging to the first notification group, and “Ping-Pong Ping-Pong”, which is commonly used for the notification sound belonging to the second notification group, are connected to the message sound. It may be possible to separately prepare each of the notification sounds as the sound data of the above, or prepare it as the sound data different from the message sound, and create the sound data in which the message sound and the warning sound are combined at the time of output. You may make it allocate to a channel later.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows a process when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (a), assuming that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tα1 when no alarm sound is output, the main The control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the magnetic detection has been performed. Then, information indicating that magnetic detection has been made is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that magnetism has been detected is externally output based on the state of the updated notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (magnetic detection) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the information of the magnetic detection is obtained. If it is grasped that the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification mode (In this case, the loop of "Boo Boo magnetism detected" loop) is started, and a timer (60 seconds) is set to measure the alarm time of alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality).

  When the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is assigned to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is extracted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the peripheral control is performed. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the RAM 1511c. Then, by assigning the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) to the channel X, the notification sound such as “boo-boo magnetism is detected” is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). become.

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts screen generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and light emission mode generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp described above are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Through such a process, a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" is repeatedly executed for 60 seconds from timing tα1, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "Magnet is detected") is performed. ”) And lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the first notification group), respectively.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (a), 60 seconds have not passed from the timing tα1 and the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tα2 (step S112 ( It is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects vibration in the process of FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the vibration is detected, as in the case of the timing tα1 when the magnetic detection is performed. Next, information indicating that vibration has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), the information indicating that the vibration is detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (vibration detection) is provided to the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tα2 (or immediately after) when the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is in the output state (reproduction state). As a result, even if it is ascertained that the vibration detection information is included, the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process in step S1024 (FIG. 95). I don't do that. That is, since the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not newly assigned to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the vibration detection at the timing tα2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the timer (60 seconds for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) that has not been set yet (60 seconds). ) Is set, and when the timer (60 seconds) has not timed out when the output state (reproduction state) of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) ends, the sound corresponding to the vibration detection is generated. Set the schedule data for generation, assign the alarm sound 2 (vibration abnormality) to the channel X for the remaining time, and the alarm sound in the notification mode (here, the loop of "Boo Boo vibration was detected") It is supposed to perform playback.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tα2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data according to the vibration detection and the vibration detection. By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display and lamps can be displayed. As for lighting, these are executed.

  In the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the vibration abnormality appears separately at a position different from the position where the display according to the magnetic abnormality is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is turned on, although the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set, the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is already set and its priority is the same. The lighting mode of the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection that has already been set is reflected in each of the various lamps, and the lighting mode of the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is changed to various types. It is not reflected by the lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection may not be set at the timing tα2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the vibration detection have the same data content, either of them is used. Even if it is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After that, at timing tα3, which is 60 seconds after the timing tα1, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is repeated based on the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) having timed up. The loop processing to be executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to play back the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism was detected” is set to 10 seconds, the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set to the time. At the timing tα3 when the loop is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times.

  Further, at this time, since the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) has not timed up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the vibration detection, and the rest. By assigning the notification sound 2 (abnormal vibration) to the channel X only for the time (the time (α) from the timing tα2 to the timing tα3 subtracted from 60 seconds), the notification mode (here, “boob vibration Was detected ”loop).

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set at the timing tα2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set and is set at the timing tα3. Therefore, at the timing tα3, it is possible to play back the notification sound of “booboo vibration detected” from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) times out, “booboo vibration is detected. It is possible to urge the loop processing to be ended and not to be played back at a halfway timing (for example, a timing such as “boob shaking”) of the notification sound such as “Yes”.

  According to such a configuration, when the output condition (abnormality detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced (Fig. 130 (a)), the 6th alarm sound (here "boo-boo") and the 6th message sound (here "magnetism detected") have finished playing, and the 7th alarm sound (here) Then, it becomes possible to realize smooth notification sound switching as if "Boo Boo") was played. As a result, "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" and "Boo Boo vibration were detected" are connected at a strange place, making it impossible to recognize fraudulent notifications in a tense situation (for example, If the notification sound 1 ends with "Boo Boo Magneto" and the notification sound 2 starts with "Motion detected", a meaningless notification such as "Boo Boo Magneto detected" Content, which may confuse the site) can be suitably suppressed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tα3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the vibration detection is shortened, and the notification sound 2 is timed up and ended at the warning sound of “Boo Boo”, and the message sound is generated. Even if it is not reproduced, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality detection is occurring at the same time because the loop processing is terminated at a halfway timing and is not reproduced (only for magnetic abnormality). If it is a notification, the notification sound will be ended at a good time). As a result, when the notification sound is interrupted at a halfway timing, it is urged to check the display in the liquid crystal, and "the magnetic field is detected" and "the vibration is detected" are displayed on the liquid crystal display. By being displayed, it becomes possible to properly recognize that the magnetic detection and the vibration detection are performed.

  FIG. 130 (b) shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

  Here, the process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced is shown in FIG. ) With reference to the above) (processing when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced) ) Is almost the same.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 130 (b), at the timing tβ1 at which no alarm sound is being output, the frame opening detection by the main frame opening switch 619 is performed in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). If so, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the frame open detection has been performed. Next, information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the frame opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (frame open detection) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tβ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95), and as a result, the frame open detection is detected. When it is determined that the information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 5 (frame opening) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned (set) to channel X and the notification is given. In addition to starting the notification sound reproduction in the mode (here, the frame is "ping-pong ping-pong" loop), set a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 5 (frame open). .

  When assigning the notification sound 5 (frame open) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the frame open detection is extracted from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 5 (open frame) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "open frame ping pong ping pong" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

  At this time, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the screen generation schedule data according to the frame open detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame open detection are transmitted from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By extracting and setting in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the above-mentioned display in the liquid crystal and lighting of the lamp are also executed. The display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the frame closing detection, which is a condition for canceling the frame opening detection, is performed.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as "a frame is open ping pong ping pong" is repeatedly executed from timing tβ1 for 30 seconds, and a display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (for example, "a frame is Open ") and lighting by various lamps arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 (lighting mode of the second notification group), respectively.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130B, 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tβ1 and the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tβ2, and the step S110 is performed. Alternatively, it is assumed that the door open switch 618 detects the door open in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a first updates the state of the notification flag so as to indicate that the door opening detection is performed, as in the case of the timing tβ1 when the frame opening detection is performed. Next, information indicating that the door opening has been detected is set as a command for the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, in the process of step S118 (FIG. 94), information indicating that the door opening has been detected is externally output based on the updated state of the notification flag and is managed in the hall computer. In the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (door opening detection) is provided for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the command is analyzed by the received command analysis processing of step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after) when the notification sound 5 (frame opening) is in the output state (playback state). As a result, even if it is ascertained that the information about the door opening detection is included, the alarm sound 4 (door opening) shown in FIG. 129 is issued to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95). Do not assign. In other words, since the notification sound 5 (frame opening) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 4 (door opening) is not newly allocated to the channel X. As a result, the reproduction of the notification sound 5 (opening of the frame) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the door open detection at the timing tβ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 4 (door open) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door open) that has not been set yet. ) Is set, and when the timer (30 seconds) has not timed out at the time when the output state (playback state) of the alarm sound 5 (frame opening) ends, the door open detection is responded to. Set the sound generation schedule data, assign the alarm sound 4 (door open) to channel X for the remaining time, and in the notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) Notification sound reproduction is executed.

  Further, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tβ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection is not set, but the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, and By extracting the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection from various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, These are executed for the display and the lighting of the lamp.

  Incidentally, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the opening of the door appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the opening of the frame is displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. There is. When the lamp is turned on, only the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set, but the emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection is already set and the priority order is the same. Therefore, the lighting mode of the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the frame opening detection which is already in the set state is reflected by each lamp light emission, and the light emission mode generation schedule data lighting according to the door opening detection is turned on. The mode is not reflected in each lamp emission. Similarly to the sound generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection may not be set at the timing tβ2 (or immediately after).

  However, as described above, in this embodiment, since the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the frame opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection have the same data content, Regardless of which is reflected, the lamp lighting does not change.

  After that, at timing tβ3, which is 30 seconds after the timing tβ1, the notification sound such as “Ping Ping Ping Pong is open” is set based on the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame opening) being up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, here, since the time required to play the notification sound such as "open frame ping pong ping pong" once is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 5 (frame open) is set. At the timing tβ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is finished at a good timing when the notification sound such as “the frame is open ping pong ping pong” has been reproduced three times.

  At this time, since the timer (30 seconds) of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection, and By assigning the notification sound 4 (door open) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (β) from the timing tβ2 to the timing tβ3 subtracted from 30 seconds), the notification mode (here, “door The ping-pong ping-pong's loop) will play the notification sound.

  That is, at the timing tβ2, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is set, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door open detection is not set, but is set at the timing tβ3. Therefore, at the timing tβ3, the notification sound of “door is open ping pong ping pong” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up, “door is opened. It is possible to prompt the end of the loop processing at the halfway timing (for example, the timing when “the door is open”) of the notification sound such as “M.

  According to such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 130 (b)) When the third message sound (here, “the frame is open”) and the third alarm sound (here, “ping pong ping pong”) have finished playing, the fourth message sound ( Here, it becomes possible to realize a smooth notification sound switching as if "the door is open") was played. As a result, "Ping Pong Ping Pong Open" and "Ping Pong Ping Pong Open" are connected at a strange place, and you may not be able to recognize the content of the notification in a tight situation. It becomes possible to suitably suppress the occurrence.

  Further, according to the above configuration, at the timing tβ3, the remaining time of the timer corresponding to the door open detection is shortened, and even if the notification sound 4 is interrupted halfway, the message sound is reproduced first. Therefore, it becomes possible to surely grasp that the door is open.

  FIG. 130C shows a process when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. An example thereof is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ1 at which no alarm sound is output, the game is played in spite of the non-time saving state in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If it is detected by the gate sensor 4003 that the game ball has passed the gate portion 2003 provided in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the area 5a (right hit detection in the non-time saving state), the main The control MPU 1310a sets, as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, information indicating that right-handed hit detection has been performed in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the process of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (right-hand hit detection in the time saving state) is used for the process related to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Like Regarding the processing of the third notification group, the notification flag is not updated in the main control MPU 1310a, and the information is not output to the hall computer externally.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as a result of analyzing the command by the received command analysis processing in step S1022 (FIG. 95) at the timing tγ1 (or immediately after) at which no notification sound is output, the result is in the non-time saving state. If it is grasped that the information of the right-hand hit detection is included, the alarm sound 6 (left-hand guide) shown in FIG. 129 is assigned to the channel X in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95) ( A timer for starting the notification sound reproduction in that notification mode (here, "Please return to left-handing" loop) and measuring the notification time of notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) ( 20 seconds).

  Regarding the right hit detection in the non-time saving state, in this embodiment, the information indicating that is output from the main control MPU 1310a as a command, but instead of this, the main control MPU 1310a plays the gate unit 2003 as a game. Only the information indicating that the passage of the ball is detected by the gate sensor 4003 is output as a command, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a side determines whether or not the detection by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in an untimely state. May be performed, and the process regarding the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) may be performed based on the detection by the gate sensor 4003 in the non-time saving state.

  When assigning the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) to the channel X, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is copied as various control data in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c. It is extracted from the area and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Then, by allocating the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) to the channel X, the notification sound such as "Please return to left-handing" is reproduced in a predetermined processing mode (loop). Like

  At this time, the peripheral control MPU 1511a extracts the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state from the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control RAM 1511c to extract the schedule data of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. By setting in the storage area 1511cae, the above-mentioned liquid crystal display is also executed. The execution of the display in the liquid crystal becomes the notification end (a timer (20 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is a time-up) which is a condition for canceling the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance). Will continue to be executed. Regarding the processing of the third notification group, which is less likely to be fraudulent, it is important to avoid obstruction of the progress of the production, and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state is set. It will not be done.

  Through such processing, a notification sound such as “Please return to the left” is repeatedly executed from timing tγ1 for 20 seconds, and the display on the game board side effect display device 1600 is displayed until the notification sound ends. The display in the area (for example, "Please return to the left-hand side") is executed.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 130 (c), at the timing tγ2 at which the notification sound such as “please return to left-handing” is in the loop reproduction state, 20 seconds have not elapsed from the timing tγ1 or step S110 or It is assumed that the lower plate full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279 in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the main control MPU 1310a sets information indicating that the lower plate full tank has been detected as a command to the peripheral control board 1510, as in the case of the timing tγ1 when the right hit detection is made in the non-time saving state. As a result, in the processing of step S120 (FIG. 94), a command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the information (lower plate full tank detection) is used for the processing relating to the notification in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Become.

  On the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after) at which the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is in the output state (reproduction state), the command is executed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 (FIG. 95). As a result of the analysis, even if it is understood that the lower plate full tank detection information is included, in the warning process of step S1024 (FIG. 95), the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) shown in FIG. It is not assigned to X. That is, since the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) having the same priority is already assigned to the channel X, the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) should not be newly assigned to the channel X. By doing so, the reproduction of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) on the side already in the allocation state is preferentially executed and continued.

  Further, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not set the sound generation schedule data itself according to the detection of the lower tray full at the timing tγ2. Therefore, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) is not processed in a state where it is not assigned to the channel X.

  However, on the other hand, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, at the timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), the timer (20 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) that has not been set yet (20). Second) is set, and when the timer (20 seconds) is not up at the time when the output state (playback state) of the alarm sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is finished, the lower plate is full. Set the sound generation schedule data according to the detection, assign the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) to channel X for the remaining time, and the notification mode (here, "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate Loop) of the notification sound reproduction.

  Also, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at timing tγ2 (or immediately after that), the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the lower plate full tank detection is not set, but for the screen generation according to the lower plate full tank detection. By extracting the schedule data from the various control data copy areas of the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c and setting it in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, this is executed for the liquid crystal display described above. There is.

  In addition, in the liquid crystal display, a display corresponding to the ball removal guide appears at a position different from the position where the display corresponding to the left-handed guide is performed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Is becoming

  After that, at a timing tγ3, which is 20 seconds after the timing tγ1, a notification sound "Please return to the left" is issued based on that the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has timed up. The loop processing to be repeatedly executed is ended. In addition, since the time required to reproduce once the notification sound such as "Please return to the left" is set to 10 seconds, the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set. At the timing tγ3 when the time is up, the loop processing is ended at a timing when the notification sound such as “Please return to the left-hand side” has been reproduced twice, and at a good timing.

  Further, at this time, since the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is not up, the peripheral control MPU 1511a sets the sound generation schedule data according to the detection of the lower pan full. Then, by assigning the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guidance) to the channel X for the remaining time (the time (γ) from the timing tγ2 to the timing tγ3 subtracted from 20 seconds), the notification mode (here Then, the information sound reproduction in the "please pull out the lower plate" loop) will be executed.

  That is, the timer for the notification sound 7 (bulb removal guide) is set at the timing tγ2, while the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the detection of the lower tray full is not set and set at the timing tγ3. Therefore, at the timing tγ3, the notification sound of “please remove the ball of the lower plate” can be reproduced from the head, and when the timer of the notification sound 7 (ball removal guidance) is up. , At the timing of halfway of the notification sound such as "Please pull out the lower bowl" (for example, at the timing such as "Please pull out the lower bowl"), the loop processing is finished and it will not be played back. You can be encouraged.

  With such a configuration, even when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced (FIG. 130 (c)) When the second message sound (here, "Please return to the left") has finished playing, the third message sound (here, "Please remove the ball from the lower plate") It becomes possible to realize a smooth notification sound switching as if it was reproduced. As a result, "Please return to the left" and "Please pull out the ball of the lower plate" are connected at a strange place, and it is possible to suitably prevent the situation where the content of the notification cannot be recognized. Will be able to.

  Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after outputting the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is outputted (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, when the output condition (state detection) of another notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced, 5 seconds of silent data is inserted. Since a message sound of another notification sound is reproduced in, it is preferable to generate a situation in which two different message sounds are connected due to the absence of the alarm sound and the notification content cannot be recognized. You will be able to avoid it.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the first notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), if there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the process of step S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing t-1 at which no alarm sound is output, Regarding the processing (magnetic abnormality processing) according to the magnetic detection, the same processing as that described with reference to FIG. 130A is performed. Therefore, at the timing t-1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism was detected" is started, and the timing at which the timer (60 seconds) of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) has timed up. At t-3, the loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), 60 seconds after the timing t-1 has not elapsed, and a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism has been detected" is in the state of loop reproduction at the timing t-2. It is assumed that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is detected in step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection (see FIG. 128). ), Even if the door opening detection occurs, the process of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is continuously performed.

  Normally, with respect to the processing on the lower priority side, as in the case where the processing with the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to (c) overlaps, the notification sound of the lower priority side is transmitted. A process is performed in which only the timer is set and the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  However, unlike the case where the door is opened only when the magnetic anomaly occurs and the door is opened immediately, there is a high possibility that some kind of fraudulent activity is being performed, and it is no longer possible to say `` It can be said that it is difficult to say that the notification belongs to the "second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud." Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (a), at the timing t-2, neither the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection nor the sound generation schedule data is set. , Only sets the flag according to the door open detection. Then, at the timing t-3, based on the flag being set, the timer of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection and the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection are respectively provided. At the same time as setting, the notification sound 4 (door open) is assigned to the channel X and the notification sound reproduction in that notification mode (here, the "door is open ping pong ping pong" loop) is started. .. The display in the liquid crystal display and the lighting of the lamp in response to the door opening detection are started at the timing t-2.

  According to such a configuration, even if the door sound is detected by the door frame opening switch 618 in the state of loop playback, the alarm sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism is detected" is detected. From the timing t-3 when the loop playback of the notification sound such as “” is ended, the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection is played all over for 30 seconds, and “the door is open Ping Pong” The loop processing is ended at a good timing when the notification sound has been reproduced three times. As described above, since the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reproduced in a more careful notification mode different from the processing based on the normal priority order, the notifications belonging to the second notification group are generated. Although it is the content (here, the door is open, the ping-pong ping-pong loop), it will be expected to raise awareness of the fact that there is a high possibility of fraud.

  Also, after the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism detected”, the notification content starts from the message sound (the door is open), so that the first notification group in the most tense situation can be reached. It becomes possible to recognize at an early stage that the notification of belonging has been completed. On the other hand, the alarm sound of "ping pong ping pong" is reproduced after the message sound, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the notification is not a notification belonging to the third notification group.

  FIG. 131 (b) shows an example of processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the third notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), it is assumed that door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is detected in the processing of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94) at the timing tδ1 when no alarm sound is output. Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 130B is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tδ1, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “The door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the timing tδ3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, the loop processing is ended at a good timing. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tδ1 and the notification sound such as “The door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tδ2. It is assumed that the gate sensor 4003 detects a right hit in a non-time saving state in the processing of S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) corresponding to the door opening detection has a higher priority than the processing of the notification sound 6 (left hitting guidance) according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. Therefore (see FIG. 128), even if the right-hand hit detection occurs in the non-time saving state, the process of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is continuously performed.

  That is, as described above, regarding the processing on the lower priority side, the notification sound on the lower priority side is the same as when the processing of the same priority described with reference to FIGS. 130 (a) to (c) overlaps. Is set so that the sound generation schedule data itself is not set.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), at the timing tδ2, the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is set, while the sound is generated according to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state. Schedule data is not set. Then, at the timing tδ3, when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) has not timed up, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state is set, and the remaining time is set. The notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) is allocated to the channel X for only minutes, and the notification sound reproduction is executed in the notification mode (here, "return to left-handing" loop).

  With this configuration, the alarm sound such as "The door is open Ping Pong" has been played three times, and the alarm sound such as "Please return to the left" is not included at a good timing. Since it is reproduced, it becomes possible to easily recognize that the possibility of fraud has decreased while continuing the notification state. Further, in the third notification group according to this embodiment, as described above, after outputting the message sound, the silence data for 5 seconds is assigned to the channel X and the sound corresponding thereto is outputted (silence output). It is like this. Therefore, even with such silence data, it is possible to easily recognize that the notification sound of the type that has been reproduced up to that point has ended, and that the notification sound belonging to the third notification group has been reproduced. Like

  FIG. 131C illustrates an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is satisfied while one notification sound belonging to the second notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε1 at which no alarm sound is output, it is assumed that the door frame opening switch 618 detects the door opening in the process of step S110 or S112 (FIG. 94). Regarding the processing according to the door opening detection (door opening processing), the same processing as the “processing according to frame opening detection (frame opening processing)” described with reference to FIG. 130B is performed. Be seen. Therefore, at the timing tε1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping-pong” is started, and the timing tε3 when the timer (30 seconds) of the notification sound 4 (door open) is up. Then, when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times, the loop processing is ended at a good timing. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is detected.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), 30 seconds have not passed from the timing tε1 and the notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” is in the loop reproduction state at the timing tε2, at step S112. It is assumed that there is magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 in the processing of FIG. 94. In this respect, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024. (Refer to FIG. 128), the processing of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic sensor 4024 is prioritized, and the processing of the alarm sound 4 (door open) is performed in both sound and lamp lighting. The output content will not be reflected as the operation of each actuator. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal, each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the liquid crystal display on the side with a low priority is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 4 (door open), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of each actuator regardless of whether the sound or the lamp is turned on, it has been set until the timing tε2. A process of canceling the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection from the set state may be performed.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing tε2, not only the screen generation schedule data according to the door opening detection but also the sound generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Is maintained in the set state, and the priority is higher than the respective data. The sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection, the screen generation schedule data, and the light emission mode generation schedule data are set respectively. Put in a state. Then, the assignment of the channel X and various lamp operations is performed based on the contents based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection and the light emission mode generation schedule data, and the sound generation schedule data according to the magnetic detection and the light emission mode generation. By switching to the content based on the use schedule data, the processing of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) according to the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is output in any of sound, liquid crystal display, and lamp lighting. The contents are reflected as the operation of each actuator.

  With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tε2, the operation on the side with the lower priority in the execution state (the door opening processing) is not performed, and It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (door opening process and magnetic abnormality process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), at the timing tδ2, the loop process for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Boo magnetism is detected” is started, and the timer of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is started. The loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” has been reproduced 6 times in time with (60 seconds). Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the power is turned on again, which is a condition for canceling the magnetic abnormality.

  According to such a configuration, immediately after the magnetic detection that is highly likely to be fraudulent is performed, the process of the alarm sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is performed in any of the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. Also, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. In addition, first, as an alarm sound, an alarm sound such as "Boo Boo" is reproduced, so that the alarm that belongs to the first alarm group is performed, and it is promptly transmitted to the hall side that the tense situation has been switched. Will be expected.

  FIG. 131D illustrates an example of the processing when the output condition (state detection) of the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is satisfied while the one notification sound belonging to the third notification group is being reproduced. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ1 at which no alarm sound is output, the right hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 is performed in the process of step S112 or S116 (FIG. 94). If so, the processing corresponding to the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state (left-hand hit guide processing) is the same as that described with reference to FIG. 130 (c). Therefore, at the timing tζ1, the loop processing for repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “Please return to left-handed” is started, and the timing tζ3 when the timer (20 seconds) of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) is timed up. Then, the loop processing is ended at a timing when the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-hand side" has been reproduced twice, and at a good timing. Further, the execution of the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp will be continuously executed until the timer of the notification sound, which is a condition for canceling the left-handed guide, is raised.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing t [zeta] 2 at which the notification sound such as "Please return to the left-hand side" is in the loop reproduction state after 20 seconds has not passed from the timing t [zeta] 1, step S110 or It is assumed that the door open switch 618 detects the door open in the process of S112 (FIG. 94). In this regard, the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) in response to the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state has a lower priority than the processing of the notification sound 4 (door-opened) in response to the door opening detection. Therefore (see FIG. 128), the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is prioritized, and the output content of the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-hand guiding) is reflected as the operation of the actuator. Will not be done. Regarding the display in the liquid crystal, each notification is displayed at a different position in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. Therefore, priority is given during execution of notification having a low priority. Even if a notification with a high priority is generated, the liquid crystal display on the side with a low priority is maintained.

  Here, regarding the processing of the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide), as a method of preventing the output content from being reflected as the operation of the actuator, at the timing tζ2, the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state that has been set until then is detected. It is also possible to perform processing for canceling the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the above from the set state.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, at the timing t ζ2, not only the screen generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state but also the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state. As for the above, they are kept in the set state, and the priority is higher than this, not only the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection, but also the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode according to the door opening detection. Set the generation schedule data to the set state. Then, the assignment to the channel X is switched from the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the right hit detection in the non-time saving state to the content based on the sound generation schedule data according to the door opening detection. Then, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) according to the door opening detection is reflected in the operation of each actuator regardless of the sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lighting of the lamp.

  With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2, no operation is performed on the process (left-handing guide process) on the lower priority side in the execution state, It is possible to change the notification content based on the priority order between two different processes (left-handing guide process and door opening process).

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 131 (d), at the timing tζ2, the loop process of repeatedly executing the notification sound such as “door is open ping pong ping pong” is started, and the notification sound 4 (door open) is generated. When the timer (30 seconds) is up, the loop processing will be ended at a good timing when the notification sound such as "The door is open ping pong ping pong" has been played three times. Further, the display in the liquid crystal and the lighting of the lamp are continuously executed until the door closing detection, which is a condition for releasing the door opening, is performed.

  According to such a configuration, as soon as the door opening detection with a medium possibility of the fraudulent activity is detected, the processing of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is performed by the sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp lighting. In either case, the output content is reflected as the operation of each actuator. Moreover, as the notification sound, first, since the message sound (the door is open) is played back, while preventing the person who is playing the appropriate game from feeling disliked, The alarm sound from "ping-pong" is used to notify the members belonging to the second notification group, and it is expected that the hall side will be informed as soon as possible that the situation has changed to a situation in which there is a possibility of fraud. ..

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal alarm sound is output. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps of the effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of notification sounds shown in FIG. 128 are to be output, various processes can be performed by performing the processes described above according to the priority order. Although only a single channel (channel X) is used for the notification sound, it is possible to properly notify the content of the abnormality, the game guidance, etc. (channel-saving control structure). However, as described above, even if the notification sound belongs to the second notification group having a medium possibility of fraud, the possibility of fraud may become higher than medium depending on other detection situations. It is difficult to say that the current state of the gaming machine is properly notified only by the control based on the priority order.

  The notification sound is output not only when an abnormality is detected that is likely to have been fraudulent, but also when an abnormality is detected that is unlikely to be fraudulent. is there. That is, in the case of anomaly detection with a high possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed, it is required to output a notification sound as long as the detection state continues, but with anomaly detection with a low possibility that a fraudulent activity has been performed. If so, there is a possibility that such a detection state is maintained due to the convenience of the hall side (corresponding to recovery of various errors, etc.), so even if the detection state is continued, the alarm sound is not always output. It is important to be able to execute a more flexible notification process according to the situation of the pachinko machine 1 such as not being required to continue.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in each situation illustrated in FIGS. 132 to 137, in addition to the control based on the above-described priority order, a special condition is also added to improve the state of the gaming machine. It is supposed that the notification is realized in such a manner that it can be appropriately expressed. Hereinafter, the special notification processing will be described separately for each situation with reference to FIGS. 132 to 137.

  In the example shown in FIG. 132, the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 occurs at the timing tα11 when no notification sound is output. Then, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the door opening detection are also transmitted. It is set. Then, at this time, a timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection is set to 30 until the timing tα12 arrives. It will be played for a second.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal in response to the door opening detection, the display is maintained until the timing tα16 when the door frame opening switch 618 stops detecting the door opening.

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα13 when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the channel X is in the idle state, the priority of the notification is relatively high. Magnetic detection occurs by the sensor 4024. Therefore, regarding the lamp light emission in response to the door opening detection started from the timing tα11, the light emission mode generation schedule data is maintained in the set state until the timing tα16 comes, but regarding allocation to various lamp operations, At timing tα13, the mode is switched to the mode of lamp light emission according to the magnetic detection.

  That is, at the timing tα13, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is set, the notification sound is assigned to the channel X, and the screen generation schedule data and the light emission mode generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection are also set. They are set. Then, at this time, the timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is set, so that the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is set for 60 seconds until the timing tα14 arrives. Will be played over.

  On the other hand, regarding the display in the liquid crystal and the light emission of the lamp according to the magnetic detection, the display and the light emission are maintained respectively unless the power is turned off.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 132, when the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed and the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continuing, the magnetic detection sensor. Magnetic detection by 4024 occurs. In such a situation, a person who intends to perform some illegal operation opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, and then waits until the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door open detection ends, and then spills out. When it is attempted to secretly place a magnet for illegal purposes inside the door frame 3 in a cold state, it is assumed that the magnet may momentarily enter the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, which is extremely malicious. Therefore, it is feared that merely performing the alarm sound processing according to the magnetic detection is not sufficient as a countermeasure. On the other hand, since the state of magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is already off, even if some measure is taken, magnetic detection cannot be used as a trigger.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the timing tα14 when the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, it is utilized that the door opening detection by the door frame opening switch 618 is still continued, Based on this, the "sound generation schedule data according to the door open detection" in the state where the notification sound reproduction has already notified for the notification time (30 seconds) is set again, and the notification sound is transmitted to the channel X. It is supposed to perform special processing to re-assign to. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  With such a configuration, the alarm sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the closed state is reproduced in a manner connected to the “information sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection”, which causes a large discomfort in the hall. It is expected that it will be brought to the attention of everyone. Also, as a person who commits fraud, "although the magnetic notification ends, the notification sound reproduction is all finished, and it is possible to finally make it difficult to notice the fraudulent activity," already By playing a notification sound according to the detection of the door that should have ended, an unexpected notification situation will occur, so it is expected that further fraud will be recognized as too risky. Like

  As will be described later, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notification process belonging to the first notification group is being performed and the period in which the notification process belonging to the second notification group is being performed, the other channels are selected. It is supposed that the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound that is being assigned and during the variation of the design and the volume of the game sound other than that (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. The specific value may be zero volume. During the period in which the notification process belonging to the third notification group is being performed, the volume of the effect sound and the game sound other than that, which are assigned to the other channels, during the symbol change are not suppressed.

  Here, the period during which the notification process is performed (the period during which the volume is to be suppressed) means whether any of the sensors used in the first notification group or the second notification group is in a specific detection state (abnormality). State), or whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group or the second notification group is being reproduced (whether the notification sound is being reproduced). Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 132, in the period of the timings tα11 to tα13 and the period of the timings tα14 to tα16, the symbol variation is based on the period during which the notification process is performed by the first notification group. A process of suppressing the volume of the inside effect sound and other game sounds (a process of decreasing the sound volume to a specific value) is performed, and during the period of timings tα13 to tα14, the notification by the first notification group and the second notification group is performed. Based on the period during which the process is being performed, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound that is changing the symbol and the game sound other than that (process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed.

  In this embodiment, both the notification process by the first notification group and the notification process by the second notification group are performed during the period when only the notification process is performed by the first notification group (timing tα11 to tα13, tα14 to tα16). During the period during which it is decided to reduce the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the game sound other than that to the same value, both the notification process by the first notification group and the second notification group are performed. During the period, a process of lowering the value to a value lower than that during the period in which only the notification process by the first notification group is performed may be performed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize that there are a plurality of notification states by merely confirming the effect sound other than the notification sound, and it is expected that the initial action on the hall side can be made faster.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the process of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the pattern change and the other game sounds is ended. However, if the notification sound according to the door opening detection that was already in the finished state is reproduced in a manner that is connected to the "information sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection", it is possible that an extremely malicious act was performed. In view of this, even at the timing tα16 when the door opening detection is ended, the volume of the effect sound during the symbol change and the game sound other than that may not be suppressed, and this may be continued.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 132, as is apparent from the processing according to the door opening detection, during the period when the notification sound according to the door opening detection is reproduced, the liquid crystal display according to the door opening detection is displayed. Although the start time is the same during the period in which the lamp is emitted and the period in which the lamp emits light according to the detection of the door opening, the end times thereof are all different. As described above, since the alarm sound, the liquid crystal display, and the lamp light emission are operated so as to have different roles, only a single channel (channel X) is used for various alarm sounds. In spite of this, it becomes possible to properly notify the content of the abnormality, the game guide and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 133, after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, at the timing tα23, the right hit detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003 occurs. The case is assumed. However, in this example, unlike the case shown in FIG. 132, since it is unlikely that an extremely malicious act is being performed, the notification sound reproduction according to the right-hand hit detection in the non-time saving state is ended. At the timing tα24, the notification sound according to the door opening detection, which has already been completed, is not reproduced again. Further, during the period from the timing tα22 to the timing tα23, the mode of suppressing the volume of the effect sound during the change of the symbol and the volume of the game sound other than that is not changed. By the way, even after the notification sound (timing tα21 to tα22) corresponding to the door opening detection ends, even if the frame opening detection occurs instead of the right-handed detection in the non-time saving state by the gate sensor 4003, it is extremely bad. Since it is unlikely that such an action is being performed, the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection that has already been completed will not be reproduced again when the notification sound corresponding to this is completed.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 134, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα33 after the notification sound (timing tα31 to tα32) according to the door opening detection ends, and the point shown in FIG. Same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 134, it is assumed that the door frame 3 is closed and the door open detection is ended at the timing tα34 which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced. There is.

  In the example shown in FIG. 134, at the timing tα35 at which the reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been in the finished state is “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. It is never played back in a connected fashion. That is, also in the example shown in FIG. 134, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 132, after a person who intends to perform some unauthorized work opens the door frame 3 and puts it in the open state, door open detection is performed. When the attempt is made to secretly place the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold, the magnet is momentarily within the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 after waiting for the corresponding notification sound reproduction to end. It is possible that you are in a situation where you have entered. However, after the timing tα34, considering that the door frame 3 is closed and the magnetism is not detected in the non-illegitimate state, the magnetic detection is performed even in the non-illegitimate state. It is considered that the information sound is sufficiently played as the notification sound processing only by continuously reproducing the notification sound until the timing tα35 arrives, and the channel X is vacant in case the further notification sound processing becomes necessary. It can be said that it is more beneficial to keep it in a state. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 134, although only a single channel (channel X) is used for various notification sounds, it is possible to properly notify the content of the abnormality, the game guidance, and the like.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 135, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα43 after the notification sound (timing tα41 to tα42) according to the door opening detection ends, and therefore, the point shown in FIG. 132 is shown. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44 within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  That is, in the example shown in FIG. 135, after the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection is completed, it is attempted to secretly arrange the magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold. Although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is within the detection range without being overwhelmed by such a situation. It is assumed that the magnet is being placed again, and there is a possibility that more malicious misconduct is being performed. Therefore, in this example, when the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs again at the timing tα44, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the magnetic detection is kept in the set state while the notification sound 1 The timer (60 seconds) for measuring the notification time of (magnetic abnormality) is reset.

  According to such a configuration, a notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is provided for a longer time from when the first magnetic detection is performed to when 60 seconds elapses from the timing tα44 when the second magnetic detection is performed. Will be able to be continuously played. Further, in this case, the notification sound such as “Boo Boo magnetism has been detected” is continuously reproduced without interruption over the period from the timing tα43 to the timing tα45. At the end, a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" does not end the loop processing at a good timing, for example, the loop processing ends at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected". It will be expected that it will cause a big discomfort in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα44 when 60 seconds have elapsed from the timing tα44 at which the second magnetic detection is performed as a base point, the notification sound reproduction is already informed for the notification time (30 seconds), that is, “door open”. "Sound generation schedule data according to detection" is set again, and a special process for reassigning the notification sound to the channel X is performed. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  With such a configuration, the notification sound according to the door opening detection that has already been completed is played in a form connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, and also in the midway such as “boo boo magnetic detection”. It is reproduced in a form connected with the "reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection" in which the loop processing is completed at odd timing. Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the end state becomes high, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the magnetic detection is reproduced in the middle, and it appears in the hall. It is expected that it will cause more discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 136, the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at the timing tα53 after the notification sound (timing tα51 to tα52) according to the door opening detection ends, and therefore, the point shown in FIG. 132 is shown. It is the same as the example. However, in the example shown in FIG. 136, it is assumed that the vibration sensor 2405 detects the vibration at the timing tα54, which is within the period in which the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 136, when an attempt is made to secretly place a magnet for an unauthorized purpose inside the door frame 3 in a state where the hot air is cold after waiting for the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the door opening detection to end. Although the magnet momentarily enters the detection range of the magnetic detection sensor 4024, and the alarm sound of the magnetic abnormality is reproduced in response to this, the pachinko machine 1 is in a state of being greatly shaken without being overwhelmed by such a situation. It is assumed that more malicious fraudulent acts are being performed. Therefore, in this example, after the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended at the timing tα55, the notification sound according to the vibration detection is reproduced in a manner connected to the “reproduction of the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”, and then, At the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the ended state is reproduced in a form further connected to the “information sound reproduction according to the vibration detection”. ing.

  Moreover, at the timing tα54 when the vibration detection by the vibration sensor 2405 occurs, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is not set, and the timer (60 for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 2 (vibration abnormality) is set. Second) is set, and at the timing tα55 at which the notification sound reproduction corresponding to the magnetic detection is ended, the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the vibration detection is set and the notification sound is assigned to the channel X. ..

  According to such a configuration, the notification sound such as "Boo Boo vibration was detected" is not terminated at the time when the loop is good, and the loop process is stopped at a halfway timing such as "Boo Boo vibration is detected". Since the processing will be completed, it is expected that a large amount of discomfort will be generated in the hall and attract everyone's attention.

  Furthermore, at the timing tα56 at which the notification sound reproduction in response to the vibration detection is ended, the notification sound reproduction is already informed for the notification time (30 seconds). Special processing is performed by resetting "schedule data" and reassigning the alarm sound to channel X. Also in this case, the timer (30 seconds) for measuring the notification time of the notification sound 4 (door opening) is set, so that the notification sound according to the door opening detection is provided for 30 seconds until the timing tα15 arrives. Is played.

  In such a configuration, the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection that has already been in the closed state is further connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the vibration detection” connected to the “playing the notification sound according to the magnetic detection”. Not only is it played back in, but it is also played back in a form that is linked to "playing a notification sound in response to vibration detection", whose loop processing has been completed at a semi-finished timing, such as "booboo vibration detection". Therefore, the priority state of the notification sound according to the door opening detection which has already been in the end state becomes higher, and the notification mode appears as if the notification sound of the vibration detection was reproduced by stopping in the middle of the hall. It is expected that it will cause more discomfort and attract everyone's attention.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 137, the case where the magnetic detection by the magnetic detection sensor 4024 occurs at timing tα63 after the notification sound (timing tα61 to tα62) corresponding to the frame opening detection ends, not the door opening detection. I'm assuming.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 137, it can be said that the situation where the magnetic detection further occurs immediately after the frame opening detection is a situation in which there is a high possibility that some fraudulent act is performed. However, on the other hand, if a magnet is used for the purpose of cheating, the door frame 3 should be in the open state, and even if the main body frame 4 is in the open state, arranging the magnet would be useful. Therefore, it can be said that there is a possibility that the hall side may erroneously cause the magnetic detection sensor 4024 to erroneously detect when the magnet is used for eliminating the ball clogging in the ball tank, the dispensing passage, or the like.

  Therefore, also in the example shown in FIG. 137, at the timing tα64 at which the notification sound reproduction according to the magnetic detection is ended, the notification sound according to the frame opening detection that is already in the end state is “the notification sound according to the magnetic detection. By playing in a manner that is connected to "play" (timing tα64 to tα65), it is expected that a great feeling of strangeness will be generated in the hall and everyone's attention will be gathered. However, after that, at the timing tα66 at which the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended, not only each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection but also the magnetic detection is performed. Special processing for terminating each notification process (notification sound, liquid crystal display, lamp) is also performed.

  According to such a configuration, while appropriately performing the function against fraudulent activity, the notification processing corresponding to the frame opening detection and the magnetic detection is performed only by closing the main body frame 4 when there is a false detection on the hole side ( It is expected that it will be possible to quickly respond to false detections on the side of the hall and maintain the atmosphere in the hall in a suitable manner, since all of the notification sound, the display in the liquid crystal, and the lamp) can be ended. Become.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 137, even when the body frame 4 is closed and the frame opening detection is ended while the notification sound corresponding to the magnetic detection is being reproduced, the frame opening detection is also performed. At the end timing, not only each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to the frame opening detection, but also each notification process (notification sound, LCD display, lamp) corresponding to the magnetic detection You may make it perform the special process which ends.

  By the way, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment is equipped with the player-side volume adjusting function.

  For example, the peripheral control MPU 1511a monitors whether or not the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 has been operated in the process of step S1108, and when it is determined that the effect selection left button 331 has been operated. When it is determined that the setting value (player setting value) set by the player regarding the speaker volume is decreased and it is determined that the production selection right button 332 has been operated, the setting value set by the player regarding the speaker volume (player setting value). ) Is performed. In addition, when the player set value is lowered and the lowered volume is actually output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pi!”) Is output at the lowered volume value. On the other hand, when the player set value is increased and the actually increased volume is output from the speaker, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, “pipi!”) Is output at the increased volume value. , It is made possible to grasp how much the volume has changed after the volume adjustment is completed. As for the volume adjustment completion sound, the same sound may be output when the volume value is decreased and when it is increased. By the way, the volume adjustment completion sound has a relatively high priority level referred to above when there are no available channels (for example, “20”, which is the same as the button pressing sound), and the output volume of the effect sound ( The change in the audible sound volume) can be transmitted more reliably.

  In the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, such volume adjustment processing is performed before the game is started because the symbol variation according to the big hit determination has not yet been performed (a demo display or the like is displayed. Not only (period that can be done), but also during the period when the game is started and the symbol variation according to the jackpot determination is being executed, the acceptance by the player is allowed, and a more important effect has appeared. At times, it is possible to maintain amusement of the game by making it possible to change the volume value flexibly.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, in the situation in which various effect sound channels are assigned in accordance with the progress of the display effect during the execution period of the symbol variation, the pachinko machine 1 concerned. When it is detected that 1 is in a specific state such as a magnetic abnormality or door opening, a process of assigning a specific notification sound corresponding to the detected content among a plurality of types of notification sounds to a channel and outputting the same is performed. Further, at this time, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself, and it is possible to execute the effect progress notification process for decreasing the output volume to a specific value. That is, in this case, even if a specific notification sound of a plurality of types of notification sounds is assigned to a channel and is output, the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect itself is not canceled. Therefore, as long as the channel assignment of the specific notification sound or the abnormal state ends, the output can be restored again by appropriately returning the output volume of the effect sound according to the progress of the effect display.

  However, in the above-described production progress notification process, since the channel allocation of various effect sounds according to the progress of the display effect is not stopped itself, the normal notification is performed as long as the specific notification sound is allocated to the channel ( This means that more channels will be used than in the unannounced state), and there will be no free channels to which sound data has not been assigned before the end of the channel assignment (announced state) of a specific informative sound. Risk tends to increase. Then, if there is a case where there is no empty channel to which sound data is not assigned before the end of the channel allocation (state of notification) of a specific notification sound, then one of the sound data Since one channel assignment is forced to be discarded, even if the channel assignment (announcement state) of a specific notification sound is finished after that, it is possible to reproduce the sound data that cannot be allocated to the channel and is discarded. It is not possible to do so, and there is a concern that the interest in gaming will decline.

  Regarding the concern about empty channels related to such effect sounds, if the fixed channel system is adopted for the notification sound channel assignment, no direct adverse effect will occur, but the fixed channel system will be adopted for the notification sound channel assignment. Whether or not to adopt the automatic channel method should be decided from the viewpoint of design of games and effects, so regardless of which channel method is adopted, as the above-mentioned performance progress notification processing It is important to prepare a processing structure capable of adopting a common processing program in order to secure cost reduction and reliability improvement in the development of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, in the example described below, either the fixed channel system or the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, it is lowered to a specific value. The output volume of the produced sound is not made variable and is maintained. That is, in this case, it is not necessary to generate the above-mentioned sound volume adjustment completion sound (“pi!” Or “pipi!”) Even if there is an operation by the player while the production progress lower notification process is being executed. However, it is expected that the channel will be given a margin to reduce the risk of empty channels disappearing.

  However, even though the pachinko machine 1 is capable of flexibly changing the setting of the volume value when a more important effect appears, the setting of the output volume is performed while the effect progress notification process is being executed. If the change cannot be made, when the production progress lower notification process is executed due to the false detection or the notification due to the side of the hall (such as opening the door), the volume appropriate value according to the content of the production progress is appropriately set. It is unavoidable that amusement of game is deteriorated because the setting cannot be changed. Also, as a result of the progress of the production during the period during which the production progress lower notification process is being performed, if a large deviation occurs between the proper volume value and the actual set value according to the production content, the output volume (acceptable) After the setting change of (listening sound volume) is allowed, it is necessary to accept the operation multiple times in order to change the volume to an appropriate value, but this will occupy the channel with the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. Therefore, even though the production progress lowering notification process is finally completed, there is a concern that a lack of free channels will make it impossible to properly output the production sound, which may lower the enjoyment of the game.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while the production progress lower notification process is executed, the value decreases to a specific value. While the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) that is being generated is not changed and is maintained, the setting value by the player regarding the volume (player setting value) itself is allowed to be changed. When the production progress notification process (the process of decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed to reflect all the operations up to that point.

  According to such a configuration, if the player accepts the change of the set value (player set value) in accordance with the production progress while the production progress lower notification process is executed, a new operation is performed. Without performing the above process, it is possible to collectively change the output volume (audible volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected when the production progress lowering notification process is completed. In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level until the game is played. In addition, immediately after the production progress notification process ends, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in multiple stages, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage of empty channels. Will be preferably avoided.

  According to the above configuration, when performing the collective change of the output volume to the player set value when the production progress lowering notification process is finished, the game during the period when the production progress lowering notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of times the player's set value is changed or the number of operations by the player, the volume adjustment completion sound will be played once at the volume after the batch change. You may make it output by the sound of a special aspect different from (for example, "Bee!").

  Furthermore, in order to more suitably eliminate the shortage of empty channels when the production progress lowering notification process is completed, depending on the number of times the player set value is changed and the player during the period when the production progress lowering notification process is executed. Regardless of the number of operations and the like, it is desirable not to play the volume adjustment completion sound itself when collectively changing the output volume (audible sound volume) with the end of the production progress notification process. .. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process due to the notification due to an erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening of the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy.

  In the above-described example, when the notification sound according to the door opening detection ends with the door opened state is maintained, when the magnetic abnormality occurs and the notification sound corresponding to this ends, the door opening detection is performed. The notification sound is output again (see FIG. 132). However, if a magnetic anomaly occurs when the alarm sound corresponding to the door open detection is in the output state and the alarm sound corresponding to this ends, the door open detection is not performed even if the door open state is maintained. It is desirable not to output the corresponding notification sound (or to output only the time remaining as the output time of the interrupted “information sound according to door opening detection”).

  When the door is opened, the lamp emits light according to the door open detection, and this lamp emission is continued even after the alarm sound according to the door open detection ends when the door is open. Is desirable. Furthermore, it is desirable that the door frame 3 be continued for a predetermined time even after the door frame 3 is closed and the door open state ends.

  Even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound corresponding to the door open detection is ended while the door open state is maintained, the specific error occurs. It is desirable that the notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection be output again based on the occurrence of. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that some abnormality has occurred by re-outputting the notification sound according to the door opening detection.

  Alternatively, even if an abnormality is detected, there is a specific error that does not output a notification sound, and if the specific error occurs in a situation where the notification sound according to the door opening detection is ended while maintaining the door open state, The notification sound corresponding to the door opening detection based on the occurrence of the specific error may not be output again, and the state where the re-notification is possible may be maintained.

  It is possible to change the volume setting value and the brightness setting value even in the situation where such an abnormal alarm sound is output. However, even if the volume setting value is changed, the changed volume setting value Is not reflected as the volume. However, when the brightness setting value is changed, it is desirable that some of the effect lamps of the effect lamps reflect the changed brightness.

  Hereinafter, an example of the process from the execution of the production progress notification process to the batch change of the output volume (audible volume) will be described.

  FIG. 138 is a diagram for explaining the content of the production progress notification process for each of the notification states of the pachinko machine 1.

  First, with reference to FIG. 138, the contents of the production progress lower notification process will be described before the process from the execution of the production progress lowering process to the batch change of the output volume (audible sound volume) is described. Will be briefly described. Here, for convenience of description, only the notification sounds 1 to 7 illustrated in FIG. 128 are shown, and the description of the other notification sounds is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 138, in this explanatory example, first, two types of suppression modes (a first volume suppression mode and a second volume suppression mode) are prepared as the volume suppression modes of the effect sound, For example, in the first volume suppression mode, when the player changes the set value (the player set value) regarding the sound volume, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the range of “20” to “50” can be changed. Among the possible settings, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "10". On the other hand, in the second volume suppression mode, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "0". Therefore, the degree of suppression of the second volume suppression mode is larger than that of the first volume suppression mode. In particular, in this example of the description, the process related to the output itself is performed but the effect sound is silenced. It is illustrated as what makes it.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, one of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group having a high possibility of fraud is detected. When any of the notification processes is executed, a process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound sound volume) is performed in the second sound volume suppression mode on the higher suppression degree side. Moreover, when the notification process relating to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, even when abnormality detection is turned off, Until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the abnormality is detected, the output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is increased in the second sound volume suppression mode on the higher suppression side. ) Is not terminated but the process is continued.

  In this example, when the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 1 to 3 (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big winning abnormality) belonging to the first notification group is executed, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) The period during which the processing for suppressing the sound volume) is continued is the same as the period from when the notification sound (magnetic abnormality, vibration abnormality, big prize abnormality) is played according to the abnormality detection until it ends. Is set to.

  On the other hand, if the notification process related to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group with medium possibility of fraud among the notification sounds 1 to 7, the degree of suppression is determined. In the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the lower side, the processing of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is performed. However, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 4 and 5 (door open, frame open) belonging to the second notification group is executed, if the abnormality detection is turned off immediately after the abnormality detection occurs, the time Then, the process of suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) in the first sound volume suppression mode, which is the side on which the suppression degree is low, is ended.

  On the other hand, among the notification sounds 1 to 7, when the notification processing relating to any of the notification sounds 6 and 7 (left-handed guide, ball-out guide) belonging to the third notification group related to the game guide is executed, Is emphasized, and no processing for suppressing the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is executed.

  In this example, the suppression mode is set to be different depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. Is not necessarily different, and the output volume of the effect sound is controlled in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. You may make it perform the process which suppresses (the volume of an audible sound). However, with respect to the termination condition of the processing to be suppressed, the case where the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed is stricter than the case where the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. It is important to be able to do so.

  FIG. 139 shows the contents of the process relating to the sound volume adjustment when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, while the abnormality detection has not occurred and the process relating to the notification sound is not executed. It is a figure explaining.

  In this example of the explanation, the player setting value is made variable by "1" in the range of "1" to "5" by the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332. The smaller the value is, the smaller the volume of the effect sound is set. In addition, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is set by the player in a state where the above-described suppression mode (first volume suppression mode, second volume suppression mode) is not set for the effect sound. It is set as a numerical value 20 times the value. Therefore, in this description example, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is variable in the range of "20" to "100" by the operation of the player.

  Now, as shown in FIG. 139 (A), the player setting value for the volume of the effect sound is "3" out of "1" to "5", and no notification flag is set. It is assumed that the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is set to "60", which is 20 times the output volume. If the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state and the jackpot determination is not performed and the player is waiting for the start winning, the effect selection left button 331 is pressed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600. The displayed image 331a and the display image 332a showing the effect selection right button 332 are displayed, and the volume adjustment guide display OAH indicating that the volume can be adjusted through these operations is performed. Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the first volume value display OH1 that enables recognition of which of the current player set values is “1” to “5” is also executed. It The volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1 may be constantly displayed, or during a specific period such as a super reach effect which is a reach effect executed with the background image changed. When it is present, it may be hidden so that at least one of the first volume value display OH1 and a second volume value display OH2 described later appears when the player operates. Further, regarding the volume adjustment guide display OAH and the first volume value display OH1, it is not always necessary to display both of them, and one of them may be omitted and only the other may be displayed.

  In such a situation as shown in FIG. 139 (A), when the operation with the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is performed, the player setting value is incremented by "1" each time the operation is performed. The output sound volume of the effect sound (the sound volume of the audible sound) is changed by "20" by this. Also, each time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  Further, at this time, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600, the second which shows which of the current set values is “1” to “5”, which is the range of the player set values, is shown by a gauge display. The volume value display OH2 (see FIG. 139C) is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, which will be described later.

  In addition, when the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", neither the player setting value nor the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is lowered, and the game is played. The user setting value remains "1" (the output sound volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) remains "20"). Therefore, even if the production selection left button 331 is operated when the player setting value is "1", the volume adjustment completion sound is not assigned to the channel itself, or even if it is assigned to the channel, the volume is set to "1". It is desirable that the output is not audible by setting it to "0". This also applies when the effect selection right button 332 is operated when the player setting value is "5".

  On the other hand, when the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is performed, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), the decorative pattern SZ changes in a predetermined effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination and the type of the change pattern. Is displayed. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In this respect, in the volume adjusting process according to the present embodiment, not only the period shown in FIG. 139 (A) (the period during which the demo display can be performed), but also the variation of the symbols depending on the jackpot determination when the game is started. The player is allowed to accept even during the period of execution, and for example, when a more important effect such as the reach effect shown in FIG. 139 (C) appears, the volume value is flexible. As described above, the configuration allows setting changes.

  That is, FIG. 139 (C) shows a state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 139 (B). In the first operation, the player setting value is changed from “3” to “4”, and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is 20 times that of “60” → While the setting is changed to "80", the volume adjustment completion sound is assigned to a predetermined channel and reproduced at the changed volume "80", and at the second operation, the player setting is performed. The value is changed from "4" to "5", and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is 20 times as high as "80" to "100". Volume adjustment completed at "100" which is the volume after the change There and reproduced is assigned to a predetermined channel.

  Further, in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the present embodiment, when the player set value is changed by such an operation, the player set value is in the range of “1” to “5”. Then, the second volume value display OH2 indicating which of the current set values is displayed by the gauge display is executed instead of the volume adjustment guide display OAH. This is to clarify which of the current setting values is "1" to "5", which is the range of the player setting values, even in a tense situation in which a more important effect appears. The purpose is to prevent an operation error such as repeated operation of the effect selection right button 332 even if the player setting value is the maximum value "5". In the gauge display, the numerical value range of "1" to "5" is constantly displayed in blocks, and the number of filled blocks among these blocks is increased / decreased according to the change of the player setting value. The current player set value is displayed by displaying the above.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), the second volume value display OH2 is displayed from the time when the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 139 (C). After a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), it is hidden and the volume adjustment guide display OAH is executed again. Therefore, even if the operation is performed in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (the operation to the production selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value “5”), the production selection left button 331. Alternatively, as long as the operation on the production selection right button 332 is repeated, the display of the second volume value display OH2 is maintained. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, an operation in a mode in which the player setting value does not change (operation on the effect selection right button 332 when the player setting value is the maximum value "5") When the operation is performed, the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output each time the operation is performed, but the timer value for measuring the time until the second volume value display OH2 is hidden is reset. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately encourage the user not to make an operation error such as repeatedly performing the operation for the effect selection right button 332 even though the player setting value is the maximum value "5". become.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 140, while the door opening detection occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation and the process related to the notification sound is executed, the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332 is operated. It is a figure explaining the content about the processing regarding the sound volume adjustment accompanying it.

  The situation shown in FIG. 140 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (A). When the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 140 (B), the result or variation of the big hit determination is similar to the situation described with reference to FIG. 139 (B). The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the type of the pattern. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), door opening detection that belongs to the second notification group occurs during the symbol variation execution period, and processing related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed. More specifically, a loop process (30 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as “the door is open ping pong ping pong” and the display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, “ The door is being opened ") and lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 is performed.

  Further, as described above, when the door opening detection belonging to the second notification group is generated and the process related to the notification sound 4 (door opening) is executed during the variation period of the symbols, the first volume suppressing mode is performed. The production progress lower notification processing for suppressing the output volume of the production sound (the volume of the audible sound) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 140 (B), the player setting value is maintained at “3”, which is the same as in the situation of FIG. 140 (A). The output volume of the sound (audible volume) is set to a predetermined first specific value (here, "10") lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The production contents will be developed based on the volume value.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated while such production progress lower notification processing is executed, the first specification The output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound that has been lowered to the value (here, "10") is not changed but is maintained at the same time, while the set value by the player regarding the sound volume (player set value) When the change notification of itself is accepted, when the above-mentioned production progress notification process (process of lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point. As described above, the changes are collectively made.

  That is, FIG. 140 (C) shows a state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 140 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the production selection right button 332, the output volume of the production sound (audible volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined first specific value (here, “10”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lower notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents are advanced with the volume of the first specific value maintained.

  At this time, of the operations by the player, in the first operation, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is the first specific value. Since the value (here, "10") is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the first specific value (here, “10”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player set value itself changes from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is also changed and displayed in the first volume value display OH1 from "3" to "4".

  Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. The display OH2 shows that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "4" to "5".

  Then, after that, the door frame 3 is closed while the volume adjustment guide display OAH is returned to the state of being executed again, and the process relating to the notification sound 4 (door open) and the production progress lower notification process (output volume up to a specific value). 140D, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 140 (D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player setting value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should be “80” or the second operation, which is originally the first specific value (“10” in this case) corresponding to the first operation. Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to the above, the first specific value (here, “10”) is collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  In this way, by allowing the player to accept the change of the set value (player set value) even during the period in which the production progress lower notification process is executed, the production progress lower notification process ends. It is expected to prevent the deterioration of the entertainment level until the game is played. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of steps immediately after the production progress notification process ends, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage or lack of space in empty channels. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this example, when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“10” → “100”) along with the completion of the production progress notification process, the output volume changes. Despite that, I try not to assign the channel for the volume adjustment completion sound. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process due to the notification due to an erroneous detection or the convenience of the hall side (such as opening of the door) is finally completed, the proper production is performed due to the lack of empty channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the user cannot enjoy.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the magnetic abnormality and the door opening are illustrated as the specific states. The end conditions may be different for the production progress lower notification process in the above state.

  For example, first, regarding the production progress lower notification process in the state where the door is opened, when the door is closed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the door was opened (the door was continuously opened. It will be terminated). However, in any case, when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”), the channel of the volume adjustment completion sound is generated despite the change in the output volume. It is desirable not to do the allocation itself.

  On the other hand, the production progress lowering notification process in the state where the magnetic abnormality occurs does not end only when the state of the magnetic abnormality ends, but is continuously executed until the RAM clear or the power cutoff occurs. Is desirable. In this case, the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (for example, “10” → “100”) when the RAM is cleared or the power is cut off. In this case, Even if there is a change in the output volume, it is desirable not to perform the channel allocation itself of the volume adjustment completion sound.

  In addition, in the production progress lowering notification process in the state where the door is opened, the display indicating that is made when the player setting value is changed, whereas in the production progress lowering notification process in the state in which the magnetic abnormality is generated. Alternatively, when the player setting value is changed, the display indicating that effect may not be performed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the end conditions are different between the production progress lowering notification process when the door is opened and the production progress lower notification process when the magnetic abnormality is generated. become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the volume can be adjusted also by rotating the knob of the volume adjusting volume 1510a. However, since it is assumed that the volume adjustment by the knob portion is mainly performed by the hall side, it is not possible to output the volume adjustment completion sound (channel allocation) triggered by the volume adjustment by the knob portion. Is more desirable in order to allow a free channel.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although illustration is omitted, various kinds of effects provided in the pachinko machine 1 in addition to the buttons for volume adjustment (the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332). Lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 and provided for performance, etc. are applicable, and gaming lamps such as special figure LEDs controlled by the main control board 1310 are excluded from the brightness setting target. ) Is provided with a button for adjusting brightness (a button for increasing brightness, a button for decreasing brightness, etc.), and when it is determined that the button for adjusting brightness has been operated, it is determined by the player regarding the brightness applied to various production lamps. It is possible to execute a process of changing the set value (player set value). Also, when the player setting value related to the brightness is lowered or raised, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound (for example, the same as the volume adjustment confirmation sound) is output at the volume value according to the setting value concerning the volume at that time. I have to. Further, the brightness of such a production lamp can be set and changed by an operation by the player in both a state in which the symbol does not change and a state in which the symbol changes.

  For the brightness adjustment completion sound, it is desirable to assign channels under the same conditions as the above-mentioned volume adjustment completion sound. In this case, even if the setting value related to the brightness is changed, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound There will be situations in which sound channel allocation itself is not performed, and situations in which the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is suppressed and output. According to such a configuration, it is possible to grasp the current situation (whether the above-mentioned production progress notification process is being performed) when the setting value related to the brightness is changed, not to the volume. Will be possible. The brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be a sound different from the volume adjustment completion sound.

  Regarding the player setting value regarding the volume, when a predetermined condition (for example, when a predetermined time has passed after being controlled by the demo screen) is set, a specific value (for example, “3”) is set without an operation by the player. It may be changed. However, when the setting is changed to a specific value (for example, "3") without any operation by the player, a display indicating which of the current setting values is displayed (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value). It is a third party that the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1 is decreasing so that neither the value display OH2) nor the output related to the volume adjustment completion sound (channel allocation) is performed. More desirable to make it difficult to recognize.

  Also, if a new volume adjustment is performed when the volume adjustment completion sound corresponding to the volume adjustment being performed is in the output state, the volume adjustment sound in the output state will be output even if there is a free channel. Assigning a new volume adjustment completion tone to the same channel as this in the way of abrupt termination, and outputting (overwriting and outputting) a new volume adjustment completion tone is more effective in giving a margin to the number of empty channels. desirable.

  In addition, when the volume is increased even when the player setting value is at the maximum value, or when the volume is decreased even when the player setting value is at the minimum value. When the operation of is further performed, even if there are free channels, it is possible to allow a sufficient number of free channels by not assigning the volume adjustment completion sound to the channels and outputting it. More desirable above. At this time, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output, but the display indicating the current setting value (first volume value display OH1 or second volume value display OH2) is displayed. Good.

  Although the volume adjustment by rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a is allowed, the volume adjustment performed by the player's operation may allow a period during which it is not allowed.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 141, when the state detection generated in FIG. 140 is not the door opening but the magnetic abnormality, the process related to the notification sound is executed, and the production selection left button 331 or the production selection is performed. It is a figure explaining the content about the processing regarding the sound volume adjustment accompanying operation of the right button 332.

  The situation shown in FIG. 141 (A) is a situation before the symbol variation is started, and is the same as the situation described with reference to FIG. 140 (A). When the start winning occurs and the big hit determination is made in such a situation, as shown in FIG. 141 (B), as in the situation described with reference to FIG. The decorative pattern SZ is variably displayed in a predetermined effect pattern based on the pattern type. Further, while the decorative symbol SZ is variably displayed, the predetermined effect is progressed, and the effect sound according to the progress of the predetermined effect is output.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation, and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed. Specifically, a loop process (60 seconds) that repeatedly outputs a notification sound such as "Boo Boo magnetism detected" and display in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 (here, "magnetic detection") And lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, respectively.

  Further, as described above, when the magnetic detection belonging to the first notification group occurs and the processing related to the notification sound 1 (magnetic abnormality) is executed during the variation period of the symbols, the effect is produced in the second volume suppression mode. The production progress lowering notification processing for suppressing the sound output volume (audible sound volume) is performed. Therefore, in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (B), although the player setting value is maintained at “3” as in the situation in FIG. 141 (A), the effect is produced. The sound output volume (audible volume) is set to a predetermined second specific value (here, "0") lower than the original numerical value (20 times the player set value). The effect contents will be developed under the volume value (here, mute).

  In this regard, also when the production progress lower notification processing according to such a magnetic abnormality is executed, when the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button 332 is operated, the second specific value (here, “0 The output volume of the effect sound (audible volume (mute here)) that has been reduced to () is maintained without changing it, while the set value (player set value) by the player regarding the volume is itself. Change acceptance is allowed, and when the above-mentioned production progress lowering process (process for lowering the output volume to a specific value) is completed, the output volume (audible volume) in which all the operations up to that point are reflected As described above, the batch change is performed.

  That is, FIG. 141 (C) shows a state after the player has operated the production selection right button 332 twice with the reach production performed in the state shown in FIG. 141 (B). Even though the player setting value is changed from “3” to “5” by the operation of the effect selection right button 332, the output volume of the effect sound (audible sound volume) is the original value (game). It can be seen that the predetermined second specific value (here, “0 (silence)”) lower than the user set value (20 times) is maintained. Therefore, even if the player operates the production selection right button 332 twice, the volume of the production sound remains until the production progress lowering notification processing (processing for decreasing the output volume to a specific value) is completed. Is not changed, and the effect contents are advanced with the volume of the second specific value maintained.

  At this time, in the first operation among the operations by the player, the player set value is changed from “3” to “4”, but the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is the second specific value. Since the value (here, "0") is maintained as it is, the volume adjustment completion sound is not output audibly, and the player setting value is changed from "4" to "5" even in the second operation. However, since the output volume of the effect sound (volume of the audible sound) is maintained at the second specific value (here, “0”), the volume adjustment completion sound is not audibly output.

  However, in the first operation, the player set value itself changes from “3” to “4”, and the player operation for volume adjustment is accepted, so the game board side effect display In the display area of the device 1600, a second volume value display OH2 indicating by gauge display that the current setting value is "4" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player setting value, This is executed in place of the volume adjustment guide display OAH, and the numerical value is also changed and displayed in the first volume value display OH1 from "3" to "4".

  Also, in the second operation, the player set value itself has changed from “4” to “5”, and the player operation for adjusting the volume is accepted. The display OH2 shows that the current set value has changed from "4" to "5" in the range of "1" to "5" of the player set value, and the first volume value is displayed. Also in the display OH1, the numerical value is changed and displayed from "4" to "5".

  Incidentally, in this explanation example, the magnetic detection itself is already in the non-detection state in the situation shown in FIG. 141 (C). However, unlike the case of door detection, the output sound volume (audible sound volume) of the effect sound in the second sound volume suppression mode until a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) elapses after the magnetic detection. The production progress lower notification processing for suppressing the above is continuously executed.

  Then, after that, a predetermined time (here, 60 seconds) has elapsed after the magnetic detection while the volume adjustment guide display OAH has returned to the state of being executed again, and the production progress lower notification process (specification of output volume) is performed. 141D, the output volume (audible volume) reflects all the operations up to that point, as shown in FIG. 141 (D). Change all at once. That is, in this case, the player set value is gradually changed from "3" to "4" according to the first operation and "5" according to the second operation during the execution progress notification process. Since the output volume has changed, the output volume (audible volume) should normally be “80” or the second operation from the second specific value (“0” in this case) corresponding to the first operation. Although it should be changed stepwise to “100” according to, the second specific value (here, “0”) is collectively changed to “100” in which all the operations up to that point are reflected.

  Note that, when the notification process according to the magnetic abnormality is executed, unlike the case where the notification process according to the door opening is executed, even in the situation shown in FIG. 141D, the game board side effect display device is displayed. The display in the display area of 1600 (here, “magnetic detection”) and the lighting by various lamps (light emitting devices) arranged on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are still executed. There is. That is, in the notification process according to the magnetic anomaly, when the notification sound is ended, the notification sound by the display in the liquid crystal and the notification by the lamp are continued, the effect sound is removed from the suppression target, and the effect sound is changed according to the player set value. In contrast to the output sound volume, in the notification processing according to the opening of the door, even if the notification sound ends, the effect sound remains a suppression target while the notification by the LCD display and the notification by the lamp are continued. It is supposed to be.

  In this way, even when a magnetic abnormality occurs, it is possible to allow the player to accept a change in the set value (player set value) even during the period during which the production progress lowering notification process is being executed. It is expected that the decrease in the entertainment level of the game until the end of the production progress lowering notification process is suppressed. In addition, the volume value (audible sound volume) is changed in a plurality of steps immediately after the production progress notification process ends, and the volume adjustment completion sound at each time causes a shortage or lack of space in empty channels. The occurrence of such a situation can be preferably avoided.

  Moreover, in this description example, even when the output volume (audible volume) is collectively changed (“0” → “100”) with the end of the production progress lowering notification process associated with the magnetic abnormality, the output is performed. The channel allocation of the volume adjustment completion sound is not performed even if the volume changes. According to such a configuration, in particular, even though the production progress lowering notification process caused by the notification due to the false detection is finally completed, it is not possible to enjoy the proper production due to the lack of free channels. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of.

  As for the notification sound according to the door opening such as “Ping Pong Ping Pong is open” and the notification sound according to the magnetic abnormality such as “Boo Boo magnetism is detected”, as shown in Fig. 128, the volume initial Since "1" (0x1FF) is set in the 3rd byte of the value, it is always reproduced at the volume set by the initial value regardless of the player set value.

  Further, when the notification sound 6 (left-handed guidance) or the notification sound 7 (ball-out guidance) is executed, the production progress notification processing is not executed. Therefore, during execution of those notifications, the player setting Both the value and the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) can be appropriately changed. However, as for these notification sounds 6 and 7, since "1" (0x1FF) is set to the third byte of the volume initial value as shown in FIG. 128, regardless of the player setting value, It will always be played at the volume set by the initial value.

  Of the notification sounds 1 to 7, for the notification sound 6 (left-handed guide) and the notification sound 7 (ball-out guide) belonging to the third notification group, “1” is not set at the 3rd byte of the volume initial value, It may be included in the target of volume adjustment by the player.

  Further, regarding each processing described in FIG. 140 and FIG. 141, the state is detected not only during the execution period of the symbol variation, but also in the state before the symbol variation is started, or in the form of the start and end timing of the symbol variation. Even when the notification processing according to is executed, the notification processing may be executed in the same manner.

  Further, in each of the processes described in FIGS. 140 and 141, after the production progress lowering notification process is completed, as in the case before the production progress lowering notification process is started, the production selection left button 331 or the production selection right button. When the player setting value is changed by the operation of 332, the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) is changed accordingly. Then, every time the output volume of the effect sound (audible volume) changes, the volume adjustment completion sound (for example, "pi!") Is reproduced at the changed volume.

  In addition, although the process described in FIG. 140 and the process described in FIG. 141 are made to have different effect sound suppression modes during the period during which the production progress lowering notification process is being performed, the suppression mode is not always required. The output volume of the effect sound (audible sound) may be changed in one suppression mode depending on whether the notification sound belonging to the first notification group is executed or the notification sound belonging to the second notification group is executed. As described above, the processing for suppressing the (volume of sound) may be performed.

  Further, in the production progress notification process, the output volume of various game sounds (audible volume) is suppressed, but among these game sounds, the game ball is in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Some game sounds, such as sounds (winning sounds) that are played in response to winning a prize, may be played back with the volume set to the initial value without being affected by the volume suppression. That is, in this case, it becomes possible for the hall side to easily understand whether or not the game is being continued despite the abnormal state of the pachinko machine 1. In this sense, a part of the sound (prize sound) reproduced in response to the game ball winning the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004 when the production progress lower notification process is being executed It is desirable to reproduce the game sound as a special sound that cannot be output when the production progress lowering notification process is not executed.

  As described above, in FIGS. 128 to 141, the channel-saving type control structure that enables appropriate notification of abnormality contents and the like with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds is adopted, so that there is no available channel. (Situation in which the number of empty channels is 0) It was proposed that the device should be technically devised in terms of how difficult it is to appear. However, even when such a control structure is adopted, there is a situation where there is no vacancy in the channel to which the effect sound effect (effect sound) is allocated (the number of vacant channels is 0), and the effect design is performed. There is still concern about the appearance of the above-mentioned unintended sound output mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, with respect to the channel assignment of the effect sound, various technical factors are set at a stage before the situation where the channels are not vacant (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0) occurs. I try to devise. Hereinafter, various technical devices provided for output of the effect sound will be sequentially described. When adopting these technical ideas as the pachinko machine 1, it is not always necessary to adopt the above-mentioned channel-saving type control structure capable of appropriately notifying an abnormal content or the like with only a single channel regarding various notification sounds. You don't have to. Further, in each of the examples described below, both the fixed channel system and the automatic channel system may be adopted for both the notification sound and the effect sound. Further, when the automatic channel system is adopted, the control based on the above-mentioned priority does not necessarily have to be adopted, and a process of discarding a new sound may be performed when all channels are in use. Good. The examples described below can be implemented in an appropriate combination.

[Suppressed operation sound output processing]
As described above, in a gaming machine in which the number of channels is finite, even if a special result is obtained by the determination by the determination means according to the prize, the channel to which the sound data is assigned has no free space. In (the situation where the number of vacant channels is 0), the special sound corresponding to the special result being obtained cannot be assigned to the channel, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated due to the inability to output the special sound.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, from the start to the end of the symbol variation. During the period, the game board side effect display device 1600 performs a process of advancing the display effect according to a specific effect pattern, and also assigns a sound of “BGM reproduction” according to the specific effect pattern to a predetermined channel and reproduces the sound. Perform processing to Then, when the display effect on the game board side effect display device 1600 progresses to a predetermined timing within the symbol variation period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is left assigned to the predetermined channel and is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state ( When the volume of "BGM playback" is reduced to a specific value and is output), and an operation on a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like) is detected in this state, a big hit symbol (corresponding to the symbol variation) The special effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation that a special display mode) appears in the effect pattern is to be output in a non-suppressed mode (suppressed operation sound output process). The degree of expectation suggested by the special effect may be 100%.

  That is, in this case, when outputting the special effect sound in response to the operation detection, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is still assigned to the predetermined channel, but is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. Therefore, it becomes possible to provide an atmosphere in which the channel usage situation is likely to be marginal. Therefore, it is necessary to provide the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "the channel may be full and the special effect sound may not be output". As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game.

  By the way, when a sound (sound of "BGM reproduction") corresponding to a specific effect pattern is left assigned to a channel and is to be output in a suppressed manner or in silence, it is generally assigned to the channel. It is assumed that the process of suppressing the volume of the sound (the sound of “BGM playback”) (the process of reducing the volume to a specific value) is performed. In fact, if such a volume suppressing process is performed prior to giving an operation opportunity to the player (generating a valid period for effect reception), a sound ("" It is possible to give an operation opportunity to the player (generate an effective period for effect reception) after the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state.

  However, as is well known, when the operation opportunity is given to the player, the effective period of the effect reception is generated for a predetermined time, but the operation (effect reception) is performed at any timing within this effective period. It is indefinite (depending on the player) and cannot be predicted in advance. Therefore, even if it is possible to terminate the volume suppression process and return the volume to the initial value when the operation (reception of performance) is performed within the effective period, it is possible to return the volume in this way. It is impossible to store the sound of "BGM reproduction" in advance so as to start the reproduction of the sound matched to this at an indefinite timing.

  In addition to performing the process of returning the volume when the player operates, the sound data of "BGM reproduction" is switched to the sound data of "BGM reproduction exclusively for reproduction of special effect sound" and this is changed. It may be possible to perform a process of reproducing. However, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in accordance with the content of various effects until the specific effect pattern is stopped by the symbol and the timing of the symbol stop, and so on, within the effective period. When the operation (effect reception) is uncertain (depending on the player) at which timing the operation (effect reception) is performed, if the operation (effect reception) is used as a trigger, the sound of "BGM play" is newly reproduced. However, there is a concern that a so-called sound shift may occur between the various effects after that and the timing of stopping the symbols, and the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific effect pattern is executed, first, a plurality of sound data stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to the specific effect pattern ( For example, the sound data during normal fluctuation, the sound data during the first half of super reach production, the sound data during the second half of super reach production, etc. Performs a process of sequentially assigning to channels. Then, of the plurality of sound data stored as the sound of "BGM reproduction" corresponding to such a specific effect pattern, specific sound data (one sound material) is defined by the sound generation schedule data. When assigned to a predetermined channel in chronological order, it is assigned to the predetermined channel from a timing before the effective period of the effect reception within the specific effect pattern starts to be reproduced, and the effective period ends. The reproduction is performed while maintaining the allocation state to the predetermined channel for a long period until the timing after the operation.

  In this respect, in a partial section (special period) when the above-mentioned specific sound data (one sound material) is viewed in time series, a suppression mode or a process of outputting sound in silence compared to other sections. When the specific sound data is assigned to a predetermined channel in a time series specified by the sound generation schedule data, a partial section (special (Period)), there is a time-series relationship in which the effective period of performance reception occurs. In addition to this, even if an operation is performed by the player at any timing within the effective period of the effect reception that occurs within the special period (partial section), the special period (partial section) is changed to the special period. The sound of "BGM reproduction" is generated as a special effect sound corresponding to the effect reception over two sections in the specific sound data with a period after the (partial section) ends (another section). Playback is performed in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the assigned predetermined channel.

  According to such a configuration, a plurality of sound data (for example, sound data at the time of normal fluctuation, sound data at the first half of super reach effect, super sound, and the like stored as the sound of “BGM reproduction” corresponding to a specific effect pattern, Sound data in the latter half of the reach effect) is sequentially allocated to the predetermined channels in a time series specified by the corresponding sound generation schedule data, and volume adjustment from the initial value is not performed. In addition, it becomes possible to create a "state of suppression or a state of being output silently (special period)". In addition, when the player's operation is received in the "suppressed mode or the state of being silently output (special period)" created in this way, the special process is performed in a non-suppressed mode by the process with high immediacy. While the effect sound is started to be reproduced, the "BGM reproduction" sound which is in the reproduction state on the predetermined channel is irrelevant to the effect reception, "the state of being output in the suppression mode or the silence (special period). Is maintained for a predetermined time. Then, after that, a part of the specific sound data (one sound material) (a suppression mode or a silent sound output) is ended by causing the special effect sound to be mixed in with it. Since the data content of the other section (non-suppressed sound output) is reproduced, it becomes possible to secretly return the sound of "BGM reproduction" to the output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to provide a production sound that does not cause a feeling of strangeness. In other words, in this case, when the operation by the player is received in the suppression mode or in the state where the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output silently, the special effect sound is not suppressed by the process with high immediacy triggered by this. While the reproduction is started in, it is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a sound shift between the various effects and the timing of the symbol stop after that.

  FIG. 142 is a time chart showing an example of the allocation state of each channel when such a controlled operation sound output process is performed. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 142, a specific example in which such a controlled operation sound output process is executed will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 142 (a), during the period in which the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination is being executed, at the timing ts11, the production progress is specified on the game board side production display device 1600. The sound of "BGM reproduction" according to the effect pattern of is allocated to the reproduction channels 02 and 03 and already reproduced (stereo reproduction in this case). The sound of this "BGM reproduction" is, for example, one sound data (one sound data over the entire period of the symbol change from the start to the end of the symbol change when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is executed. (Sound material) may be played based on the sound generation schedule data, or the entire period of the symbol fluctuation is divided into a plurality of periods, and each different sound data prepared for each period is May be sequentially reproduced based on the sound generation schedule data corresponding to. In the example shown in FIG. 142, one sound data (one sound material) as the sound of “BGM reproduction” over the entire period in the figure including the timing ts11 (a part of the symbol variation period). Are assigned to channels 02 and 03 and are in a reproduction state.

  In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 142 (a) and 142 (b), one piece of sound data (sound of "BGM reproduction") assigned to channels 02 and 03 and in a reproduction state is special. At the timing ts12, which is before the timing ts13 when the operation valid period (the valid period of the effect reception) for which the operation opportunity that triggers the production of the production sound is given is generated, the silent data content is set. It is designed to be played in some sections. As a result, without adjusting the volume of the "BGM playback" sound from the initial value, it can be output in a silent state while being assigned to the predetermined channel.

  With such a configuration, at the timing ts13, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a part of the section set as the silent data content, and there is likely to be a margin in the usage status of the channel. While the atmosphere is provided, it becomes possible to generate an operation effective period (effective period of effect reception) in which an operation opportunity is given to the player. This provides the player with an operation opportunity to output the special effect sound while eliminating the anxiety that "there may be no channels available and the special effect sound may not be output." As a result, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game.

  Moreover, the operation valid period according to this description example is the timing ts16 at which a part of the section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of "BGM reproduction" is ended even if the player does not perform any operation. At a timing ts15, which is before the arrival of, the period is ended so that the player does not receive the effect. Therefore, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is in a reproduction state within a partial section set as silent data content. While the atmosphere in which the usage situation of the bookmark channel is likely to be afforded is provided, it becomes possible to generate the special effect sound according to the operation by the player. The operation valid period ends when the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player and also when an operation is accepted by the player. When the timing ts15 arrives without any operation by the player, the special effect sound may be generated as at the time when the player operates.

  Then, in this explanation example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is received at the timing ts14, and based on the reception of the effect, the channel 02 to which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is assigned. , 03, which are different from channels 03 and 03, special effect sounds are assigned and reproduced.

  In this regard, in this description example, the maximum time from the start to the end of the operation valid period (the time from the timing ts13 to the timing ts15) is set to “SY”, and the operation valid period is ended at this maximum time. When the time from the beginning to the end of the partial section in which the silent data content is set as the sound of “BGM playback” (time from timing ts15 to timing ts16) is “BF”, it is within the operation valid period. Even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing, the special effect sound is assigned to the channels 08 and 09 and reproduced for a certain period of "SY + α (> BF)".

  With such a configuration, even if the operation by the player is accepted at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing ts16 always comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state. It becomes possible to output the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a non-suppressed manner in the form of being mixed with the special effect sound. That is, in this case, the time from when the reproduction of the special effect sound is started to when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is output as a non-suppressed mode is variable in accordance with the timing at which the operation by the player is accepted. , A buffer period for returning the output period of the special effect sound in a non-suppressed manner to the sound of "BGM reproduction" (the sound of "BGM reproduction" is returned in an unsuppressed manner by being mixed in with the special effect sound. By making it function as a period during which it is hard to notice), when the operation by the player is accepted, the sound of "BGM playback" is not restored as a non-suppressed mode, but the sense of incongruity is caused by returning after a predetermined time. You will be able to make it difficult to remember.

  Then, after the sound "BGM reproduction" is restored as the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound, when the timing ts17 arrives, the sound "BGM reproduction" is reproduced in the non-suppression mode. In the state, the reproduction of the special effect sound will be ended.

  In the example described above, the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is started" and the "timing at which the reproduction of the special effect sound is ended" are performed by the player as shown in FIG. 142 (b). It will be variable within the range indicated by the dotted line arrow depending on the received timing, but the timing ts16 comes when the special effect sound is in the reproduction state, regardless of which timing they correspond to. , It is obvious that the normal section in which the data content (non-suppression mode) of the BGM reproduction effect sound is set as the "BGM reproduction" sound is started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, “a feeling of strangeness caused by returning the sound of“ BGM reproduction ”when the operation by the player is accepted as a non-suppressed mode without returning the sound after a predetermined time” is further remembered. In order to make it difficult, it is desirable to set the volume initial value of the special effect sound larger than the initial value of BGM reproduction in the normal section. With such a configuration, while attention is paid to the special effect sound having a large volume initial value, the BGM reproduction sound can be secretly transitioned to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, when the player's operation is received as a performance, a special effect sound is generated based on the reception of the effect, but a specific effect according to the variation pattern or the result of the jackpot determination. The special effect sound may be generated based on the reception of the effect only when the condition is satisfied. Even when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the operation valid period is generated at the timing ts14, and when the operation by the player is accepted within the operation valid period, the effect is accepted. Based on this, a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is reproduced. Even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the sound of the BGM reproduction is secretly switched to the reproduction state in the normal section while the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) is in the reproduction state. It is desirable that the point to be changed to the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 142.

  However, instead of this, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the reproduction time is set shorter than when the special effect sound is set to the reproduction state, and the predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound is generated. The sound of the BGM reproduction may be returned to the reproduction state in the normal section when the reproduction of the sound) is finished. In this case, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the operation valid period, the timing at which the BGM reproduction sound is returned to the reproduction state in the normal section is the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.). Will be set to arrive after the end. According to such a configuration, a silent period (depending on the operation timing) between the end of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) and the return of the BGM reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section. (A period in which the length is variable) can be generated as a buffer period. In addition, if it is set so that a revival effect in which the degree of expectation (which may be 100%) is high can be generated in this silent period, it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained.

  Alternatively, when reproducing a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.), the sound of BGM reproduction is not returned to the reproduction state in the normal section, and the symbol variation is stopped in a lost manner. Good. In this case, at timing ts12, the allocation of the BGM reproduction sound to the channels 02 and 03 may be terminated, and this may be set as an empty channel.

  Further, in the case of generating a special effect sound, it is also possible to perform a movable effect in which a predetermined movable body is operated based on the effect reception so as to reduce the degree of attention to the sound of BGM reproduction. This is desirable for secretly shifting the reproduction sound to the reproduction state in the normal section.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output silently in a part of the section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a mode in which the sound of “BGM reproduction” is suppressed in other sections is suppressed. What is output by. Here, the suppressed mode may be, for example, a mode in which the volume is relatively lowered, or a mode in which the vibration frequency of the cone of the speaker per unit time is reduced.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 142, the sound data of “BGM reproduction” assigned to a predetermined channel is set to a suppression mode or a time-series period in which no sound is generated. It is possible to create a state in which the sound is suppressed or output silently (a special period) simply by reproducing the sound without adjusting the volume. However, it is not always necessary to set a suppression mode or a time-series period in which the sound data of "BGM reproduction" assigned to a predetermined channel is suppressed. For example, at the timing ts12, the sound of "BGM reproduction" Volume adjustment may be performed to reduce the volume to a specific value (may be muted). That is, in this case, even if the player's operation is accepted at timing ts14, the process of increasing the sound volume of the "BGM playback" sound from the specific value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) is performed by the effect acceptance. Try not to. Then, when the specific effect condition is satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is increased from the specific value while the special effect sound is being reproduced when the predetermined timing ts16 arrives. Processing (processing for returning to the volume initial value) will be performed. On the other hand, when the specific effect condition is not satisfied, the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" is specified among the predetermined effect sounds (failed effect sound, etc.) being reproduced, as in the above-described another example. The process of increasing the value (the process of returning to the volume initial value) may be performed, or the volume of the sound of "BGM reproduction" may be set to a specific value when the reproduction of a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound, etc.) is completed. May be performed (process to return to the volume initial value), or the design variation may be ended without raising a predetermined effect sound (failure effect sound or the like) from a specific value. Good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 142, a restriction process is performed to make it difficult to generate new sound allocation to an empty channel at least over a period from a predetermined timing before timing ts12 arrives to timing ts16. Is desirable. It should be noted that, as such a limiting process, for example, there is nothing to do with the result of whether or not the jackpot pattern appears due to the pattern change being executed, such as a block winning sound, a holding winning sound, a general electric effect sound, and an adjusting sound. It is desirable that a specific game sound is set as a restriction target, and that the specific game sound set as the restriction target is not newly assigned to a channel so that the reproduction is not performed.

  In addition, when it is determined that a specific effect pattern is to be executed as a symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, a specific effect sound (BGM) is generated on a channel different from channels 02 and 03 before the timing ts12 arrives. It is desirable to reproduce not sound but sound effects such as sound effects and dialogue so that it does not overlap with the above sound), and timing ts12 arrives while the specific performance sound is being reproduced, and BGM reproduction is performed. It is desirable that the sound of is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. That is, in this case, since the sound of BGM reproduction is mixed in with the specific effect sound, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state. Regarding the specific effect sound, the reproduction state of the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) should be ended before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14). Is desirable for alleviating the anxiety that the special effect sound is not output.

  Here, the specific effect sound reproduced on a channel different from the channels 02 and 03 does not always have to be started at a timing before the timing ts12 arrives, and after the timing ts12. However, the reproduction may be started before the timing ts13. Even with such a configuration, if the specific effect sound is output in the non-suppressing mode (normal mode) when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppressing mode or the silent mode, “ Since the sound of the BGM reproduction that is “suppressed or silent” can be made to appear as if it was returned to the normal reproduction state, the sound of the BGM reproduced is suppressed or silence It is possible to make it difficult to notice that it has become.

  In addition, “for a specific effect sound, the reproduction state is ended before the timing ts14 (timing ts14 or before the timing ts14) when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output”. , "The output of the specific effect sound is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is received in the operation effective period, or is automatically ended at the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation effective period)". It means that. That is, if the player's operation is not accepted until the specific timing within the timing ts13 to t15 (operation valid period) arrives, the specific effect sound is automatically ended.

  Further, when it is determined that the specific effect pattern is executed as the symbol variation according to the result of the big hit determination, the sound of the BGM reproduction is output from the timing ts14 when the special effect sound (or the predetermined effect sound) is output. It is desirable to output the effect sound on a plurality of channels before the timing ts16 at which the suppression mode or the state of silence is ended. That is, in this case, since a plurality of effect sounds including the special effect sound are output, it becomes possible to easily mix the BGM reproduction sound with the effect sounds, and the BGM reproduction sound is normally set. It becomes possible to secretly shift to the reproduction state in the mode.

  For the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, the effect reception is always generated (automatic reception) within the effective period even if there is no operation, and the post-operation effect (special effect sound reproduction) is executed. You may do it.

  Further, when the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142 occurs, the production reception is permitted while the sound of “BGM reproduction” is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. You may make it output "the acceptance | permission acceptance sound" which suggests that (or it will be in the state which acceptance of production | production is permitted) in a non-suppression mode. The "acceptable sound" is configured as a part of the "specific sound data" for outputting the "specific sound effect", and the "specific sound data" is assigned to the channel. It may be output. That is, in this case, "specific sound data" is assigned to a channel before the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, and a specific effect sound corresponding to this is output in a non-suppressed manner. At the same time, when the timing ts13 arrives, the “acceptable sound” is output as the sound corresponding to the “specific sound data” assigned to the channel. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" is output from before the timing ts13 to after that so as to extend over the timing ts13. It should be noted that the specific effect sound can be output as a precursor effect sound corresponding to, for example, a predictive effect that is performed before the operation effective period occurs (an effect that suggests that the effective period will soon occur). In this case, in one sound data assigned to the channel so as to extend before and after the timing ts13, the "prediction effect sound reproduction section" and the "acceptance acceptable sound reproduction section" are provided. The "acceptable sound" may be a non-output state during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), or may be a non-output state at timing ts15. Although it is good, it is desirable that when the production reception is made in the output state, this is used as a trigger to bring the production into the non-output state.

  That is, the phrase “acceptable sound is output” here means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly allocated to the channel at timing ts13, and that it is already allocated to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "reception acceptable sound reproduction section" in the sound data that has become the same at the timing ts13. Further, here, "set to the non-output state" also cancels the assignment state of the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, but maintains the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction section" in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  Further, in the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, even if the effect reception is performed at any timing within the effective period, the elapsed time from when the effect reception is performed. Until the preset time value is reached, the special effect sound is played back in a non-suppressed mode on a channel different from the predetermined channel to which the "BGM playback" sound is assigned.

  In this respect, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the special effect display corresponding to the effect reception is made to appear as a display image on the effect display device 1600. However, regarding the special effect display according to the effect reception, "execution state (visible state) is continued until the elapsed time from when the effect reception is performed reaches the predetermined time value" Rather, it is desirable to perform "no matter when the performance reception is performed at any timing within the effective period, it is hidden when the predetermined timing within the performance pattern comes". As the “predetermined timing in the effect pattern”, for example, a predetermined timing (for example, timing ts16) within a period after timing ts15 and before timing ts17 can be adopted. However, even when the effect reception is made immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, it is a timing that comes before the timing when the output state of the special effect sound ends. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, regarding the processing relating to the special effect sound, the output state must be continued until the timing when the sound of "BGM reproduction" comes back after the timing ts16 when the sound is restored in a non-suppressed manner. However, the special effect display can be ended before the special effect sound, so that the effects after the post-operation effect can be advanced at a good tempo. become. In order to obtain such an effect, the specific timing at which the special effect display is hidden is set as the timing ts16 at which the sound of "BGM reproduction" is returned or the timing that comes before the timing ts16. Can be said to be important.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), "the elapsed time from the effect reception timing is predetermined based on the effect reception. The process for the special effect sound that keeps the output state until it reaches the specified time value and the process for the special effect display that continues to be displayed until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. Will be started respectively.

  For example, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "process related to special effect display" in the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively long period, Of the post-operation effects, the “processing related to the special effect sound” ends at the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed since the effect reception. On the other hand, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing within the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the "special effect display process" in the post-operation effect is executed for a relatively short time. However, in the post-operation effect, the “processing related to the special effect sound” is executed from the time when the effect reception is made to the timing when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  That is, in this case, with the operation valid period (timings ts13 to ts15) shown in FIG. 142, a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination, and the effect content as the specific effect pattern is the specific timing. When the production is received within the special operation reception production (effective period), "the output state is kept until the elapsed time from the reception of the production reaches a predetermined time value. The processing relating to the special effect sound to be continued "and the" processing related to the special effect display in which the display is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes "will be executed.

  According to such an operation effective period (timings ts13 to ts15), if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, it is possible to maintain the execution state of the “process related to special effect display” in the post-operation effect for a long time. As a price to be met, the end timing of the "process relating to the special effect sound" in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if you do not operate for a while after the effective period occurs and you operate it at a later time, regarding the end timing of the "process related to special effect sound" in the post-operation effect, this is a relatively late stage. However, there is a demerit that the execution state of the "processing related to special effect display" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

That is, in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), there is no operation timing that is the most desirable for producing a lively action.
・ In exchange for accelerating the timing of ending the "process related to special effect sound", do you enjoy it by lengthening the execution state of "process related to special effect display" (operation at an early stage within the effective period? Or)
・ In exchange for shortening the execution state of "processing for special effect display", do you extend the time until "processing for special effect sound" ends and enjoy this (at a later stage within the effective period? Do you want to operate), or
・ Slightly sacrifice the time during which the "process related to special effect display" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "process related to special effect sound" is finished, so that an overall balance is achieved. Whether (operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the effective period)
It becomes possible to give strategic operation directivity such as to the effective period itself, thereby providing an operation reception effect that does not get tired and allows the user to select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. Will be able to.

  Here, in the above-described example, as the post-operation effect when the effect reception is performed in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the “process related to special effect sound” and the “process related to special effect display” are performed. However, the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be further executed, or the "process for operating the predetermined effect movable body" may be performed instead of the "process for the special effect display". May be executed. However, as for the “processing for moving the predetermined effect movable body”, as in the case of the above-mentioned “processing for special effect display”, even when the effect reception is performed at any timing within the effective period. , The operation state is terminated when a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives. " Here, in the case of an effect of moving a predetermined effect movable body to a specific position, "to end the operation state" means to move the predetermined effect movable body in the operation state at the specific position to the original position. It means to start the process to operate to return.

  In the above-described example, when the effect reception is performed in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives “Processing for special effect display (or , A process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and" a process for a special effect sound "that is continued until an elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. And However, even when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is unsuccessful or when the predetermined effect determination is unsuccessful). If the production is received within the operation reception production, the "processing related to special production display (or processing for operating a predetermined production movable body)" is not performed and the predetermined production condition is satisfied. It is possible to perform the "processing related to the special effect sound" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short as compared with the case where is satisfied (Fig. 142) as a different effect sound. More desirable.

  However, even though the operation is performed during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), this may not be detected well (detection error), and the production reception may not be performed. As a result, the production reception is not performed and is effective. If the period is over, it is interesting for the player to see how the "special effect display processing (or processing for moving a predetermined effect movable body)" is not performed after the operation. There is concern that it will decline. Therefore, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) in the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15), and the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern is reached. (Or a process for operating a predetermined effect movable body) "and" a process for a special effect sound "that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value is executed. It is desirable to be done. As a method of automatically generating an operation reception (automatic reception) or an effect mode related thereto, it is possible to use any one of the above-mentioned or each example described later, or an appropriate combination.

  As described above, during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of “BGM playback” is suppressed, the effect reception is performed when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state in the non-suppressed mode. Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the effect acceptance, and the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is canceled at this point. In this respect, even when the normal valid period that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed occurs, the acceptable reception sound is output in a non-suppressed mode in accordance with the occurrence thereof. However, it is desirable that the acceptance permissible sound be continued without canceling the output state even if the effect reception is made in the output state. In addition, the acceptance sound that is output when the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) is generated is a performance sound that can be maintained in the reproduction state for a longer time than the acceptance sound that is output when the normal validity period is generated. It is desirable to keep the amusement of interest even when the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed.

  Further, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, the N acceptable reception sounds that indicate that the effective period will occur (or that the effective period has occurred) will be displayed. There are types (modes), and any one of them must be output (output in a non-suppressed mode). On the other hand, in the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode, it is suggested that the effective period occurs (or that the effective period occurs). Only M types (modes) less than N are prepared as acceptance-permitted sounds, and “when output is performed in any of those types (output in non-suppressed mode)” and “output by any of those types” If the sound data itself including the acceptance sound is not assigned to the channel and the valid period is generated, it is desirable to set. In addition, it is desirable to suggest that "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears is different" depending on the type of acceptance acceptable sound.

  Alternatively, either the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or the silent state, and the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non- suppressed mode. Also, in the above, although a plurality of types (modes) are prepared as the acceptance acceptable sound, the ratio of the acceptance acceptable sound having a high expectation for a big hit occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state. It is desirable that it is relatively high during the effective period during which the sound is reproduced, and relatively low during the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode. .. Also in this case, in the valid period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state, the acceptance permission sound that indicates that the valid period occurs (or that the valid period occurs) is received. While the output is always output (output in the non-suppressed mode), in the effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode, the effective period occurs ( Or "when the acceptable sound that indicates that the valid period has occurred" is output "in a non-suppressed manner" and "when the sound data including the acceptable sound itself is not assigned to a channel and is not output" It is desirable to have it.

  According to these configurations, when the BGM reproduction sound is output normally in the non-suppressing mode, the degree of expectation suggested by the acceptance-allowed sound is too detailed (M kinds less than N kinds). You may not be able to recognize it, or you may not be able to expect much (relatively low). However, in this case, since the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode, the BGM reproduction sound may overlook the acceptable reception sound. Even if it is leaked, it is possible to make people aware of the possibility that the acceptable reception sound itself was not output. On the other hand, when the BGM reproduction sound is output in the suppressed mode or the silent mode, the acceptance permission sound is output in a situation where the sound output in the non-suppressed mode can be emphasized. Since the output is always performed in the non-suppressed mode, it is possible to look forward to the degree of expectation suggested by this. When either (or both) of these modes is adopted, among the types of acceptable reception sounds that can be output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state” is generated, , At least one of the types of acceptance / rejection sounds that can be output when the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode” (for example, Of these, the category with the lowest expected jackpot) may be included. However, the acceptable sound that can be output when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode" is "the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or silence. The valid acceptance sound that can be output at the time of occurrence of the “effective period that occurs in the state of” is also included (for example, the type with the highest expected jackpot among the acceptable sound). Is desirable. In addition, the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects according to effect acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressing mode as usual” is “BGM reproduction. It is preferable that the number of effect types is greater than the number of effect types that can appear as post-operation effects in response to effect reception in the “effective period that occurs when the sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state”. Among the effect types that can appear as post-operation effects corresponding to effect acceptance in the “effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output in the non-suppressing mode as usual”, “the sound of BGM reproduction is At least one of the effect types that can appear as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception in the “suppression mode or the effective period that occurs when in the silent state” may be included.

  Further, in the normal game state in which neither the time saving function nor the probability variation function operates, the effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppressed state or the silent state, and the sound of BGM reproduction is in the non-suppressed state. When preparing multiple types (modes) with different jackpot expectations as acceptable acceptance sounds in any of the valid periods that occur when output is performed normally, the output is performed in any of those valid periods. When this is done, it may be possible to output a special acceptance permissible sound "the proportion of which is stopped at the jackpot pattern becomes 100%". Note that a plurality of types (modes) may be prepared as the special reception allowable sound.

  That is, in this case, when the "special acceptance permissible sound" is output (non-suppression mode) when the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or the silent state" occurs, the effect is produced within the effective period. Even as the post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the reception is made, when it appears, it will be executed in a special mode that "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%". When the production reception is made in a state where the special reception allowance sound is being output, the output of the special reception allowance sound is interrupted, and when it is output, "the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%" special. It is desirable to output the effect sound.

  However, when the "special acceptance permissible sound is output (non-suppressed mode) when the" effective period that occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is output normally in the non-suppressed mode ", the effective period As a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect is received in the case, when it appears, it is executed in the special mode that "the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%", and in the special mode It is desirable that there are cases where it is not done. It should be noted that the special reception allowance sound that is output when the "effective period that occurs when the BGM playback sound is in the suppressed mode or the silent state" and the "BGM playback sound that is output in the non-suppressed mode as usual. The special acceptance-permitted sound output during the “effective period that occurs when the state is in the state of being in the state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being in a state of being different from each other.” In addition, there are a plurality of types of special reception permission sounds that are output when the "effective period that occurs when the sound of BGM reproduction is output normally in the non-suppressing mode", and there are a plurality of types. , The same type as the special reception allowance sound that is output when the “effective period that occurs when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or the silent state” may be the same or different. . When the production acceptance is made in a state where the acceptance acceptable sound (including the special acceptance acceptance sound) is output, the output of the acceptance acceptance sound is interrupted, and the effect sound corresponding to the post-operation presentation (the post-operation presentation is special When it is performed in a mode, it is desirable to output a special effect sound "when the output is 100% of the proportion stopped at the big hit symbol".

  According to such a configuration, when the BGM reproduction sound is in the suppression mode or in the silent state (when it is difficult to make a mistake in listening), when the special reception allowance sound is output, it is within the valid period. Even as a post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect reception is performed, when it appears, it will always be executed in a mode that "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100%". On the other hand, in the state where the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when it is easy to hear a mistake due to the competition with the BGM reproduction sound), it is determined that the special reception permission sound is output. Also, as the post-operation effect that is performed based on the fact that the effect is received within the effective period, the effect is not necessarily performed in the mode of "the proportion of being stopped by the big hit symbol is 100%". From here, it becomes possible to have a suspicion (a suspicion of a mistake in listening) whether or not the reception allowance sound was output as a "special reception allowance sound", so that the tension can be appropriately maintained. Become. As a result, while the sound of BGM reproduction is being output in the non-suppressed manner as usual, "how to not overlook the acceptable reception sound" becomes important, and the sense of tension until the acceptable reception sound is output. With respect to the above, this can be favorably maintained. In order to increase such a feeling of tension, in the operation reception performance, "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation performance is not executed in a mode in which" the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100% "appears" "The special reception allowance sound is output and the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the ratio of stopping at the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears" is compared with the case of the operation accepting effect. It is desirable that the effect (pre-allowance operation-related display or pre-allowance operation-related sound) be executed in a relatively short time so that the effective period is suddenly generated.

  In addition, in a state where the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressed mode (when it is easy to make an erroneous hearing due to the competition with the BGM reproduction sound), “the special reception allowable sound is output and the operation is performed. The post-effect is not executed in the mode of "the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears", the operation reception effect (effective period), and "the special reception allowable sound is output and the post-operation effect is" When it appears, the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%. With the "operation acceptance effect (effective period)", the special acceptance allowance sound is output as acceptance acceptance sounds of different types. Alternatively, the reception permission sound of the same type may be output. Further, in a state in which the BGM reproduction sound is normally output in the non-suppressing mode (when the reception acceptance sound is liable to be mistaken due to competition with the BGM reproduction sound), “special reception acceptance sound is output. The operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which the post-operation effect is performed in the manner that “the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol becomes 100% when it appears” is not necessarily generated. In addition, in the operation reception performance (effective period), the reception is permitted when the special reception permission sound is output and the post-operation production is not executed in the mode of “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100%” Regardless of which type is output as a sound, the post-operation effect is not executed in a mode in which “the ratio of being stopped by the jackpot pattern becomes 100% when it appears”, and the mode is prepared in the first place. It may not be.

  In addition, during the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) and the normal effective period that occur while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, an image display simulating the operation means used as the operation target and effective A gauge display indicating how much time is left is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this respect, at least during the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) that occurs while the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed, when the effect is received, the gauge display remains (is displayed) and the "effect" is displayed. "Processing related to special effect display (or operation of moving a predetermined effect movable body)" in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the pattern arrives, and "elapsed time from the time the effect is received" It is desirable to start each of the "processing for special effect sound that is continued until the time reaches a predetermined time value". According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the reception timing of the performance reception is made after the performance reception based on the remaining gauge amount as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether the process related to the special effect display (or the process of operating the predetermined effect movable body) will be finished soon. In addition, as a method of starting the post-operation performance while leaving the gauge display (bar display) in this way, use any of the above or each of the examples described below, or an appropriate combination, and further use the contents described in the note. Is possible.

  In the above-described example, regarding the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as the "specific type effect pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the suppression mode or the silence, the sound of "BGM reproduction" is suppressed. Alternatively, it is desirable to set the number of effect patterns to be smaller than the number of effect patterns prepared (stored) as “other effect patterns” that are not output silently in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the effect occurs. ..

  In addition, when a plurality of effect patterns are prepared as the "effect pattern" for outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in a suppressed manner or in silence, the effect pattern suppresses the sound of "BGM reproduced" for the first set time. Alternatively, a production pattern that is output silently and a production pattern that outputs the sound of "BGM reproduction" over a second set time that is longer than the first set time in a suppression mode or in a silent manner are included, and in these production patterns, a jackpot pattern is generated. It is desirable to have different expectations. With such a configuration, when the state of outputting the sound of "BGM reproduction" in the suppression mode or the silence is output, it is possible to suggest the jackpot expectation degree by how long the state is continued. ..

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is changed by operating the volume adjusting button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, when the volume setting value is changed in a state where the symbol variation is not executed (a demo state or the like), the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value. (Process for reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the process of changing the set value (volume set value) by the player regarding the volume even when the symbol variation is being executed. However, it is desirable that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output even when the volume setting value is changed in the state where the symbol variation is executed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 capable of selecting the "production pattern in which the sound of BGM reproduction is suppressed or output silently", the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not always output during the pattern change regardless of the production pattern. In this case, the player who sees that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output becomes aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed, so that it is expected that the gaming interest will be maintained appropriately. become. In this case, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output, but in the effect display device 1600, a display indicating that the volume setting value has been changed is displayed, so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. It is desirable for the person to recognize (be aware of the possibility that the "volume suppression effect" is being executed). “No volume adjustment confirmation sound is output” means that the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is assigned to a channel, but the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself is output at a volume of 0, or the volume adjustment confirmation sound itself may not be assigned to a channel. .

  The special effect sound that is output based on the reception of the effect when the sound of the BGM reproduction is in the suppression mode or in the silent state is over the operation effective period (timing ts13 to ts15) for at least twice the time. It is desirable to configure it to maintain the output state. According to such a configuration, even when the effect reception is performed immediately after the operation valid period (timing ts13 to ts15) occurs, the output time (special effect sound) after the timing ts15 elapses, It becomes possible to make it longer than the output time (special effect sound) until the timing ts15.

[Game machine equipped with multiple effect operation units]
By the way, in the above, the game machine provided with the dish operation unit 400 capable of being pressed by the player and presenting the effect image to the player has been described. A game machine capable of further increasing the player's willingness to operate will be described with reference to 143 to 165. The peripheral control board 1510 performs the effect control of the effect operation unit described below.

  FIG. 143 is a front view of a gaming machine provided with a sword effect operation unit 5000. FIG. 144 is a right side view of the gaming machine provided with the sword effect operation unit 5000. Here, the sword effect operation unit 5000 arranged in the door frame 3 of the above-mentioned gaming machine 1 will be described. The same components as those described above will be designated by the same reference numerals and description thereof will be appropriately omitted.

  The sword effect operation unit 5000 is provided on the front surface of the door frame 3 on the right side in front view. The sword production operation unit 5000 accommodates a sword part 5011 having a sword part 5011, a handle part 5012, and a collar part 5013 sandwiched between the sword part 5011 and the handle part 5012, and the sword part 5011 of the sword part 5010. A sword decoration body 5001 including a sheath 5020 capable of forming a sword is formed.

  The sword decoration body 5001 is provided on the door frame 3 such that the sheath portion 5020 is movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Further, the sword part 5010 is provided so as to be movable in the sword extracting direction and the sword storing direction. The sword part 5010 is normally in a sword state in which the sword part 5011 is housed in the sheath part 5020, and in the sword removal effect, the sword part 5011 is in a sword removal state in which the player can visually recognize it. Then, the sword portion 5010 in the sword removal state can function as an operation unit that receives a sword storage operation by the player and returns to the sword storage state.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 145, the execution opportunity of the sword production that involves moving the sword production operation unit 5000 (sword decoration 5001) will be described. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example of a selection table of effect patterns in an effect mode capable of executing a cutting effect, and (A) an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of a cutting preparation preparation effect according to the type of variation pattern. 9B shows an example of a selection table for selecting the presence / absence of the removed sword book effect.

  The production patterns described here include a pattern in which the cutting blade preparation is performed after execution of the cutting blade preparation transition production, a pattern in which the cutting blade preparation production is performed without performing the cutting blade preparation transition production in advance, and a cutting blade preparation transition production in advance. Despite the fact that there is a pattern in which the sword cutting effect is not performed, a pattern in which the sword preparation transition effect is not performed and the sword cutting effect is not performed, and the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword cutting effect is Two patterns are provided, one with an aura member and one without an aura member.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (A), whether or not to execute the extraction preparation transition effect is randomly selected in accordance with the type of the variation pattern determined by the main control board 1310 and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Here, a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are classified into a big hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a big hit, a small hit fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, and a deviation fluctuation fluctuation pattern at the time of a deviation, and fluctuations that are advantageous results for the player. The higher the pattern, the higher the probability that the extraction preparation transition effect will be executed. Specifically, the extraction preparation transition effect is executed with a probability of 50% in the case of a variation pattern for big hit variation, with a probability of 30% in a variation pattern for small hit variation, and in a variation pattern for out-of-range variation. It is executed with a probability of 20%. In addition, the variation pattern at the time of out-of-range variation may be changed depending on whether or not reach production is performed so that the probability that the extraction preparation transition production is performed is higher when the reach production is performed than when it is not performed. ..

  Next, as shown in FIG. 145 (B), the presence / absence of execution of the main sword removal effect is randomly selected according to the type of the variation pattern and the presence / absence of the extraction preparation transition effect. Even if the types of variation patterns are the same, when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is set to be higher than when the cutting-out preparation transition effect is not executed. Further, it is set such that the probability that the sword cutting main effect is executed becomes higher as the variation pattern has a more advantageous result for the player. Here, even if the advantage of the variation pattern is low, it is set so that the probability of executing the main cutting blade preparation is higher when the main cutting blade preparation effect is executed. Specifically, in the case where the cutting-out preparation transition effect is executed with the variation pattern for out-of-range variation, the probability that the cutting-out main effect is executed is higher than in the case where the extraction preparation transition effect is not executed in the small hitting variation pattern. In the case of the variation pattern for big hit variation, the extraction of the sword is always executed regardless of the presence or absence of the extraction preparation transition production.

  Further, when the cutting blade main production is executed, the cutting blade preparation transition production is executed in advance, and the more the variation pattern has the advantageous result for the player, the higher the probability that the cutting blade main production with the aura member is executed. Is set. It should be noted that here, in the case of the variation pattern for variation of small hits, the sword cutting effect with an aura member is not selected.

(State transition and movement of the aura member due to the sword removal operation of the sword decoration)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 146 to 149, the sword removal operation of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword removal effect (excision preparation transition effect and sword removal main effect) will be described. Further, when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself capable of accepting the sword operation by the player, and the sword portion 5010 is deformed by its constituent member (aura member 5030) (FIG. 146, 147), and an aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword portion 5011), and the sword portion 5010 is combined with the member on the door frame 3 side (aura member 5035). The operation of the aura members 5030 and 5035 will be described for the case where it becomes an integral ornament (FIGS. 148 and 149).

  FIG. 146 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5030 is provided on the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) itself. The sword removal state and (C) the second sword removal state are shown. FIG. 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5030. Note that FIG. 147 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5030.

  As shown in FIG. 146 (A), the sword decoration 5001 in the normal state is in a sword storage state in which the blade portion 5011 is housed in the sheath portion 5020. As shown in FIG. 146 (B), the sword decoration 5001 after the sword operation in the sword removal preparation transition production is visible only to the player by pulling out only the portion of the Habaki 5011a fitted to the sword blade 5011 from the sheath 5020. It becomes the first sword removal state. In the sword decoration body 5001 after the sword removal operation in the sword removal main production, as shown in FIG. 146 (C), the sword blade portion 5011 is further removed from the sheath portion 5020, and most of the second sword is visible to the player. It becomes a state. Here, the sword decoration 5001 in the second unsheathed state can function as an operation unit capable of accepting a sword operation by the player.

  The aura member 5030 provided on the blade portion 5011 is configured to be independently operable in addition to the sword removing operation of the blade portion 5011. In the case where the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5030 is a sheath when the blade portion 5011 changes from the sword storage state (FIG. 146 (A)) to the first sword removal state (FIG. 146 (B)). Inside the portion 5020, the movable range is moved as much as possible (maximum movement) from the closed state (FIG. 147 (A)) to the opened state (FIG. 147 (B)) to deform the blade portion 5011. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the aura member 5030 even in the changing process of the blade portion 5011 deformed by the aura member 5030 from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state (FIG. 146 (C)). As will be described later, since the aura member 5030 is provided so as to be positioned below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 even when the aura member 5030 is maximally moved, the player cannot visually recognize the aura member 5030 in the first sword cutting state.

  The aura member 5030 in the normal state (closed state) is contained in the blade portion 5011 as shown in FIG. 147 (A). The aura member 5030 is provided below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 and meshes with the right aura member 5031, the left aura member 5032, the rack 5031a provided on the right aura member 5031, and the rack 5032a provided on the left aura member 5032. And a pinion 5033. When the pinion 5033 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front by the driving means (not shown), the aura member 5030 converts the rotational force into a linear movement in the right direction of the rack 5031a and a left direction of the rack 5032a, and FIG. As shown in (B), the right aura member 5031 and the left aura member 5032 each stop at a position (open state) protruding outward from the outer shape of the blade portion 5011.

  Further, below the Habakaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011, an LED substrate 5011c having a plurality of LEDs is included in the blade shaft 5011b. By emitting light from these LEDs, the blade portion 50011 (aura member 5030) can be illuminated and decorated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5030, when the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) changes from the sword storage state to the first sword extraction state, it changes from the closed state to the open state. Although an example in which the sword decoration 5001 changes from the first sword cutting state to the second sword cutting state after the above is deformed, the present invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5030 may start the operation (deformation) after the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as the operation means (including not only the maximum operation but also the operation stopped halfway) ).

  FIG. 148 is a state transition diagram for explaining the sword removing operation of the sword decoration body 5001 when the aura member 5035 is provided on the sheath portion 5020. The second sword cutting state is shown. FIG. 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view for explaining the operation of the aura member 5035. Note that FIG. 149 is a vertical cross-sectional view in a state in which the blade portion 5011 is extracted from the sheath portion 5020 in order to make it easier to understand the operation of the aura member 5035. Here, the same configurations as those in FIGS. 147 and 148 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals, and description thereof will be appropriately omitted.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 (A) to (C), the aura member 5035 provided on the sheath portion 5020 of the door frame 3 that houses the sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011) is the above-mentioned sword portion 5010 (sword blade portion 5011). The aura member 5030 provided on itself is movable in the horizontal direction, whereas it is movable in the vertical direction. Further, the aura member 5035 is provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011. When the sword decoration 5001 is in the form with an aura member, the aura member 5035 maintains the relative positional relationship between the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 in the sword storage state, and changes the state of the blade portion 5011 (the sword storage state. Operates according to (⇔ first sword removal state ⇔ second sword removal state). This allows the sword portion 5010 (blade portion 5011) to be united with the member (aura member 5035) on the frame side to be viewed as an integral decorative body.

  The aura member 5035 in the normal state (completely housed state) is housed in the sheath 5020 as shown in FIG. 149 (A). The aura member 5035 is provided such that the upper end thereof is below the Habaki 5011a of the blade portion 5011 in the completely accommodated state, and the hollow cylindrical enclosure aura member 5036 provided so as to surround the outer periphery of the blade portion 5011 and the surrounding aura member 5036. Has a right rack 5036a and a left rack 5036b, and a right pinion 5037a and a left pinion 5037b that mesh with the right rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b, respectively. In the enclosure aura member 5036, the right pinion 5037a is rotated counterclockwise in a front view and the left pinion 5037b is rotated clockwise in a front view by driving means (not shown), and both pinions are meshed with each other, so that the rotational force is right in the rack. The rack 5036a and the left rack 5036b are converted into an upward linear motion, and as shown in FIG. 149 (B), the surrounding aura member 5036 is brought together with the blade portion 5011 and stopped at a position where the second extracted blade state is formed. At this time, the aura member 5035 is in a completely appearing state in which the surrounding aura member 5036 is movable (maximum operation) up to the upper limit of the movable range.

  Although not shown, the blade portion 5011 includes an LED substrate having a plurality of LEDs, so that the blade portion 5011 and the aura member 5035 can be illuminated and decorated.

  Here, regarding the operation timing of the aura member 5035, the blade portion while maintaining the relative positional relationship according to the state change of the sword decoration body 5001 (sword portion 5010) (storing state ⇔ first sword cutting state ⇔ second sword cutting state). Although an example of combining with 5011 is shown, the invention is not limited to this. The aura member 5035 may start the operation (coalescence) after the sword decoration body 5001 is in the second extracted sword state. The final mode based on the effect pattern set until the sword decoration 5001 in the second extracted sword state functions as an operating means (not limited to the full appearance state in which the maximum operation is performed, but an intermediate appearance in which the operation is stopped halfway) (Including the form with the aura member in the state). Further, the aura member 5035 may be combined with the blade portion 5011 so as not to be visually recognized by the player from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state.

(Another effect pattern 1 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 150 to 152, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword decoration 5001 will be described. 150 to 152 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the princess reach effect. Here, the following points are mainly different from the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001. First, the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state functions as an operation means, and detects the sword removal operation by the player. Secondly, the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and the sword decoration 5001 in the second sword cutting state is the same as that of the effect display device 1600. It can operate up to the center of the front.

  When the changing pattern forms the reach state, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the three decorative patterns becomes the reach state (FIG. 150 (A1)), and the start image of the princess reach is displayed (FIG. 150 (A2)). Here, above the display area of the effect display device 1600, a specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) that can be moved in the vertical direction is provided. In a normal state, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap with the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view, and a part of the blind is stationary above the display area in a state (initial state) visible to the player. There is. Further, at this time, the sword decoration 5001 is in a sword storage state.

  In the princess reach production, an image in which the princess is heading behind the blind is displayed (FIG. 150 (A3)), and then an operation production suggestion image that suggests operation production is displayed (FIG. 150 (B1)). Then, the operation effect of the sword decoration body 5001 is started, and the operation valid period for accepting the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 starts, and the player is urged to perform the sword operation of the sword decoration body 5001 in the display area of the effect display device 1600. An operation promotion image and a gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed (FIG. 151 (B2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific decoration member SDY can be moved in small increments in the vertical direction from the time when the operation effect suggestion image is displayed until the time when the operation promotion image and the gauge indicating the effective operation period are displayed. Good. Then, when the player's sword removal operation is detected, an effect is produced according to a preset development pattern or end pattern.

  The sword removal operation performed by the player refers to an operation in which the player holds the handle portion 5012 of the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state and lifts the sword portion 5010 upward to extract the blade portion 5011 from the sheath portion 5020. When the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state, the sword removal operation by the player is detected, and a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection. The detection notification operation may be an operation such that the sword section 5010 (or the handle section 5012) moves up and down, vibration, or the like, and an operation different from the sword removal operation of the player can be felt through the handle section 5012 grasped by the player. Good. The detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time after the operation is detected, and the operation can be visually recognized even if the player releases the handle 5012. Therefore, the player can visually confirm the operation detection, so that unnecessary contact with the sword decoration 5001 (re-grasping for confirmation of detection, etc.) can be reduced to prevent the movable body from being broken or damaged. You can

  The aura member 5030 (5035) does not appear in the sword removal operation performed by the player here, but the aura member 5030 (5035) appears visibly from the player when the player performs the sword removal operation, depending on the degree of expectation. You may do it.

  In the case where the end pattern is performed, when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the specific decoration member SDY does not overlap the display area of the effect display device 1600 and remains stationary above the display area (initial state). (State) is maintained, and a screen showing the end of the operation effect by the sword decoration 5001 is displayed (FIG. 151 (C1)). Then, the decorative design is stopped and displayed in the detachment mode “767” (FIG. 151 (C2)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 is returned to the sword storage state at the timing when the stop result of FIG. 151 (C2) is notified, but not limited to this, it is returned to the sword storage state at the timing when the detection notification operation ends. You may do it.

  on the other hand, If the evolution pattern is done, When a player's sword removal operation is detected, The specific decorative member SDY is The center of the front surface that overlaps the display area of the effect display device 1600 is dropped (movable to a state in which only the reserved display area below the display area is visible (all-drop state) (FIG. 151 (D1))). Then The shadow of the princess is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. At this time, The sword decoration 5001 is The second sword cutting state is maintained (Fig. 151 (D2)). In addition, At this time, a plurality of patterns of the shadow of the princess displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 may be provided, For example, Shadow color and shadow size, By changing the comment displayed after that, the expectation degree of the lottery result by Hime Reach (hit expectation degree, The game profit at the time of winning may be suggested.

  Then, after the sword decoration 5001 is in the second sword removal state by the sword removal operation by the player, that is, when a predetermined period has elapsed after the shadow of the princess was projected on the display area of the effect display device 1600, the second sword removal state was set. The sword decoration 5001 moves to the center in the front left-right direction of the display area of the effect display device 1600 by moving the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 (FIG. 151 (D3)). Then, when the sword decoration 5001 reaches the center position on the front surface of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the specific decoration member SDY returns from the completely dropped state to the initial state, and the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the visibility is good is displayed. An image of a surprised princess is displayed after the screen is removed (Fig. 152 (D4)). After that, the sword decoration 5001 returns to the position where the original sword removing operation was performed again, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, when the result of the variable display this time is a hit, the sword decoration is notified together with the smiling princess. An image is displayed ((E1) and (E2) in FIG. 152), and an image for notifying the dislocation is displayed together with the sad princess when the dislocation occurs ((F1) (F2) in FIG. 152).

  It should be noted that when the player's removal of the sword is detected, the detection notification operation is performed as described above. When the player is unable to move because he is grasping the game, an announcement or display such as "Please release the sword" is displayed. The production itself proceeds even if the player does not stop gripping the sword decoration 5001. However, the sword decoration 5001 is operated by the player at the time when the sword decoration 5001 can move horizontally (FIG. 151 (D3)). If it is held at the position where it was performed, it will cause a delay in the movable effect in the left-right direction. However, regardless of whether or not the left-right movable effect of the sword decoration 5001 has been executed, the effect executed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the drop movable effect of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) progress. Since it is configured to do so, the game progress will not be stagnant. It should be noted that the sword decoration 5001 may be configured so as to immediately perform a movable effect in the left-right direction when the player releases the holding of the sword decoration 5001 or not perform a movable effect. You may.

  As described above, in the princess reach production, the player removes the sword decoration 5001 (moves in the vertical direction) to drop and move the specific decorative member SDY that suggests the operation production (operation effective) of the sword decoration 5001. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 itself operated outside the display area of the effect display device 1600 is moved forward by the sheath 5020 provided on the door frame 3 in the forward direction (to the operation position). It can be moved to the left). That is, based on the sword removal operation performed by the player, the sword decoration 5001 itself can be moved to an operation position different from the operation position where the sword removal operation is performed, which increases the operation value of the player and the motivation of the player to operate. Can be suppressed. In addition, one operation means is configured to be operable in a stepwise different manner (vertical direction during operation, left and right direction after operation) by an operation by the player, so that an effect using a plurality of movable aspects is provided. The operating value of the operating means can be increased as compared with the conventional operating means having only one movable mode. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  In addition, the left and right movable effects of the sword decoration body 5001 are effected for the purpose of performing an effect integrally with the effect image performed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory). Although the operation position outside the display area of the device 1600 is displaced to the operation position in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after performing the sword removal operation with the sword decoration 5001 positioned in front of the display area of the effect display device 1600, the sword decoration 5001 can be moved to be positioned outside the display area of the effect display device 1600. In addition, the left-right movable effect of displacing to the left (the left end of the frame) may be performed. In addition, since the player's operation of the sword decoration 5001 of this example is a vertical operation (a sword extraction operation of pulling up the sword portion 5011 from below), the sword decoration 5001 performed after the operation based on the operation. In the movable effect, it is desirable that the sword decoration 5001 operates in a direction (horizontal direction or the like as in this example) different from the operation direction (here, the vertical direction) when the player operates.

  Further, when a player's removal of a sword is detected, a detection notification operation is performed to notify the player of the detection via the operation unit (sword unit 5010) operated by the player, so that the player can accurately determine the operation end timing. Can be judged. In addition, the detection notification operation is performed for a certain period of time so that the player can visually check it, and thus it is possible to suppress unnecessary contact such as touching the operation unit again for confirmation of detection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from continuing the operation, delaying the subsequent moving effect of the sword decoration 5001 and damaging the movable body due to unnecessary contact. Furthermore, when the movable effect cannot be executed due to the contact with the sword decoration 5001 even after the detection notification operation, a warning such as an announcement is given to the player to release the hand, and the operation is required during the operation valid period. Even after the detection of the detection notification operation, the operation means is prohibited from touching, so that the operation value of the operation means can be enhanced.

(Another effect pattern 2 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 153 to 155, another reach effect using the above-mentioned sword ornament 5001 will be described. 153 to 155 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600, reach transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001 in the reach effect including the operation effects of the operation buttons 410 used for multiple purposes. is there. Here, as an operation effect of the operation button 410, a pattern ((A) (B) → N in the figure) in which an expectation suggesting effect that indicates a degree of expectation that a variation in execution is a big hit is performed, and operation of the operation button 410 A pattern ((A) (B) → M in the drawing) in which the suggestion and development of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 is performed as the effect will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 153 (A)), the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is first. When started, an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 is performed (FIG. 153 (B)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated and the operation effective period are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance.

  First, in the pattern in which the expectation suggestion effect is performed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect image is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. After that (FIG. 153 (N1)), an image suggesting the jackpot expectation degree is displayed (FIG. 154 (N2)). After that, the result of the current variation display (big hit, out) is reported (FIG. 154 (N3) or (N4)). Note that the look-ahead effect may be performed instead of the expectation suggestion effect for the variable display being executed, and for example, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 instead of the image showing the expectation degree (FIG. 154 (N2)). You may make a character which changes the pending display displayed appear.

  Further, in a pattern in which the operation effect of the sword ornament 5001 is suggested and developed by the pressing operation of the operation button 410, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, it is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. 153 (M1) in which an effect image indicating that an operation effect requesting a sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed is displayed. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the start image of the operation effect of the sword decoration 5001 (here, the message of the title "Sword chance" and the operation explanation "Welcome you to pay the sword") is displayed. At the same time, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword state to the second sword state. The sword decoration 5001 at this time is in a form with an aura member in which the blade portion 5011 is deformed by the maximum operation of the aura member 5030 (FIG. 155 (M2)). Subsequently, when a predetermined period elapses in the second sword removal state and the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 begins, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state to produce the effect. In the display area of the display device 1600, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to put a sword on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that shows the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 155 (M3)). When the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, an effect based on the result of the variable display this time is performed.

  When the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's operation of putting a sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state ( FIG. 155 (M4)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message”) is displayed (FIG. 155 (M5)). On the other hand, if the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, when the player's operation of putting the sword is detected, the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is only stopped in small increments in the initial state. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image (stop mode "767" of the decorative pattern) for notifying the deviation is displayed (FIG. 155 (M6)).

  In this way, by pressing the operation button 410, various effects such as suggesting the degree of expectation and developing the operation effect of other operation means (sword ornament 5001) are possible, and the player can operate the operation button 410. It is not possible to specify the subsequent development at the time of operating. Therefore, the player's interest in the operation of the operation button 410 can be increased, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the willingness to operate and a decrease in the entertainment level of the game, which are concerned because the effect after the operation is monotonous.

  Further, in a series of reach effects, different operation modes (pressing operation and sword operation) between the first operation (pressing operation button 410) and the second operation (storing operation of sword ornament 5001) are the first operation. The player is requested based on the operation (pressing operation button 410). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's interest in participating in the operation, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game which may be caused by a monotonous operation that does not look good.

  In this example, the operation button 410 is an effective operation means as the first operation opportunity, and the second operation opportunity (the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001) is given based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410. However, it is not limited to this. The sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 may be an effective operation as the first operation opportunity. In this case, the operating means that is effective for the second operation opportunity is for the sword decoration 5001 rather than the operation button 410, which has a relatively lower degree of expectation than the first sword decoration 5001. Is desirable.

(Another effect pattern 3 using the sword ornament 5001)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 156 to 160, another reach effect using the above-described sword decoration body 5001 will be described. 156 to 160 are diagrams for explaining screen transitions of the effect display device 1600 in the reach effect, state transitions of the operation buttons 410, and operation transitions of the sword ornament 5001. Here, a pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) → O in the drawing) that becomes a big hit when the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is moved based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410. Even if the specific decorative member SDY (shadow material) is not moved based on the pressing operation of, and is displayed in the disengagement mode, the symbol display of the disengagement mode causes a change again to give the player another operation opportunity. The pattern ((A) (B1) (B2) in the figure → (P1) to (P4) → Q when the operation opportunity of the sword ornament 5001 is given / R when the operation opportunity of the operation button 410 is given) Will be described.

  In the reach effect here, when the variable display of the three decorative symbols is in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 156 (A)), first, the start image of the operation effect of the operation button 410 (here, , "A message that the movable body cannot be moved with a single blow of the button" is displayed (FIG. 156 (B)), and then the operation valid period for accepting the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started, and the pressing operation of the operation button 410 is started. A prompting operation production is performed (FIG. 156 (C)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the effective period of operation are displayed, and the operation button 410 to be operated is illuminated and decorated. At this time, the sword decoration 5001 maintains the sword state. Then, when a pressing operation on the operation button 410 by the player is detected, an effect is produced according to an effect pattern set in advance. The operation of pressing the operation button 410 is not limited to one shot (one time), and may be repeated (several times). Further, in order for the player to easily grasp the object (movable body) that moves by the operation, the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is vertically moved in small increments in the initial state during the effective operation period of the operation button 410. You may do it. When the sword decoration 5001 is to be operated later, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state at this point.

  In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves and becomes a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is completely dropped from the initial state. It is dropped and moved so as to become (Fig. 157 (O1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial state again, an image for notifying the big hit (a decorative pattern The stop mode “777” and the message “wonderful” are displayed (FIG. 157 (O2)). At this time, the operation button 410 may be vibrated.

  In a pattern in which the specific decoration member SDY (serving part) does not move, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (serving part) is stopped only in small steps and can be dropped. Not done. Then, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is displayed in a swing manner in the center of the screen (FIG. 158 (P1). Then, according to the effect pattern to be set, the decorative pattern remains unchanged. The decorative pattern is expanded and displayed in the pattern (FIG. 158 (P2)) stopped and displayed in the detached state (“767”), or the revival pattern in which the reach state is restored again.

  In the revival pattern, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, from the swing display of the decorative pattern in the outlying manner of FIG. 158 (P1), the revival start image indicating that the variable display is not yet finished (Samurai image) is inserted (FIG. 158 (P3)), the decorative pattern is again in the reach state and is reduced and displayed in the upper right of the screen, and at the center of the screen, either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated. The operation valid suggestion image (the face with the eyes of the samurai of the teammate closed) is displayed (FIG. 158 (P4)). Then, with the lapse of time, the displayed samurai's eyes are enlarged and displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the initial state (FIG. 158 (P5)). This increases the player's expectation that an effect using the specific decorative member SDY (blind accessory) will be performed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 may be light-emitted and decorated in a high-speed blinking mode, or the sword decoration body 5001 may be moved up and down by changing it from the sword storage state to the first sword removal state. The operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 functions as an effective operation means according to the effect pattern to be set, and the specific decoration member SDY based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. The production of (sills) is performed. The pattern in which the operation button 410 is operated is set to have a lower expectation than the pattern in which the sword ornament 5001 is operated.

  When the operation button 410 is used as the operation means, an image (operation button confirmation image) in which sweat is spread on the forehead of the samurai of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed, and the operation button is displayed. 410 is illuminated and decorated (FIG. 159 (R1)). Then, while the specific decoration member SDY (sliding material) continues to move in small steps, and the operation button 410 is illuminated and decorated, the operation valid period of the operation button 410 is started, and the operation of pressing the operation button 410 is prompted. A promotion effect is performed (FIG. 159 (R2)). In the display area of the effect display device 1600, an image of the operation means (operation button 410) to be operated, the number of operations, and the operation valid period are displayed. Here, the operation button 410 is not illuminated and decorated when it is operated a necessary number of times.

  Then, when the result of the variable display is a big hit, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and movable from the initial state to the all-drop state. (FIG. 159 (R3)). At this time, the decorative pattern displayed on the upper right of the screen of the display area of the effect display device 1600 is stopped and displayed on the lower right of the screen so that the player can visually recognize it. Note that, similarly to the above (FIG. 155 (M4)), it may be difficult for the player to grasp the mode of the decorative symbol at this point. Next, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the screen is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 in which the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is returned from the completely dropped state to the initial state again and the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is released. An image notifying the big hit (a message of a decorative pattern stop mode "777", "superb") is displayed in the center (Fig. 159 (R4)).

  On the other hand, in the case where the result of the variable display is out of alignment, when the pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected, the small movement of the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is stopped, and the effect display device 1600. In the display area, a decorative pattern in a shift mode (“767”) is stopped and displayed in the center of the screen (FIG. 159 (R5)).

  When the sword decoration 5001 is used as the operating means, an image in which the samurai who closed the eyes of the operation effective suggestion image displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 opens his eyes and the eye light becomes sharp (sword decoration (Confirmed image) is displayed, and the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state with the aura member (FIG. 160 (Q1)). At this time, the sword decoration 5001 may be light-emitted. The player can understand from the image in the display area that the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation instead of the operation button 410. At this point, the sword ornament 5001 has an aura member or not. Can be grasped by actually looking at the sword decoration 5001. Next, when the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is moved in small increments, a predetermined period elapses in the second sword cutting state, and when the operation valid period of the sword decoration 5001 starts, the display of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. In the area, an operation promotion image that prompts the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 for sword storage and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed (FIG. 160 (Q2)).

  Then, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in the above-mentioned FIG. 159 (R3) and (R4) is followed (FIG. 160 (FIG. 160 ( Q3) and (Q4)). On the other hand, in the case where the variable display result is out of alignment, when the player's sword operation is detected, the same effect transition as in FIG. 159 (R5) described above is followed (FIG. 160 (Q5)).

  In this way, since the degree of expectation is suggested according to the state of fall of the specific decorative member SDY (shadow material) executed based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the degree of expectation that is more powerful than the degree of expectation indicated by the image. Suggestions can be provided, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed. Further, even when the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is not dropped and movable based on the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the player is given the opportunity to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 again. To be done. Since the degree of expectation can also be suggested by the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game which may be caused by a monotonous operation effect which does not look good.

  It should be noted that, although FIG. 150 to FIG. 160 described above exemplify three production patterns of reach production using the sword ornament 5001, various production modes may be combined. As a result, it is possible to provide a wide variety of effects and further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

(Form of sword decoration)
The form of the sword decoration 5001 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. The sword decoration body 5001 described above is provided in two types, an aura member-attached form and an aura member-less form, but here, the sword part 5010 is further deformed by operating the handle 5012. There are two types.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram for describing the form of the sword decoration 5001 used for the pseudo-reproduction. The sword ornament 5001 here is provided so that the shape can be changed in two stages by the deformation of the handle 5012, and is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 from the left and right sides of the sheath 5020 to the player. It is characterized by having an aura member 5040 that appears so as to be visible. The aura member 5040 is provided inside the sheath 5020 of the door frame 3 similarly to the aura member 5035 described above, but its operation mode is movable in the left-right direction like the aura member 5030 described above. FIGS. 161 (A) to 161 (D) are diagrams showing the types (step changes) of the form of the sword decoration 5001 in the sword storage state, and show step 0 form to stage 3 form in order. The sword decoration 5001 is in any of the stages 0 to 3 depending on the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 161 (A), the stage 0 form is a form in a normal state similar to the above-described FIG. 146 (A) and FIG. 148 (A), and an operation in which any constituent member is not required to operate at an initial stage. The morphology is shown. As shown in FIG. 161 (B), the stage 1 form shows a form in which the aura member 5040 appears outside the side surface of the sheath portion 5012 by the operation of the aura member 5040 from the stage 0 form. As shown in FIG. 161 (C), the stage 2 form is a form in which the handle 5012 is spread and moved so as to be divided into two parts from the center to the left and right, and the first decorative part 5012a appears from the inside. Show. As shown in FIG. 161 (D), in the stage 3 form, the second decorative portion 5012b is moved upward from the inside of the handle 5012 in the stage 2 form to form an integral decoration with the first decorative portion 5012a. The morphology is shown. The stage 1 form to the stage 3 form here allow the sword decoration body 5001 to change its form without bringing it into the second sword extraction state. Further, since the sword portion 5010 that can accept an operation by the player as the operation portion of the operation means and the inactive sheath portion 5020 work together to form an integral ornament, a more powerful operation means is provided. You can

(Pre-operation suggestive effect using the specific decorative member SDY)
Next, with reference to FIG. 162 to FIG. 165, the pre-operation suggestion effect executed before the operation effective period in which the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 becomes operation effective in the reach effect will be described. In the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to suggest whether the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operationally effective among a plurality of operation means according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory). . Specifically, as the suggestion pattern by the pre-operation suggestion effect using the specific decorative member SDY (sphenoid), the operation valid period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sphenoid) is positioned at the initial position. There is a first suggestion pattern and a second suggestion pattern for generating an operation effective period in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved from the initial position to the suggestion position, and the sword ornament 5001 (from the operation button 410). If the hit expectation degree is high and the operation is effective, the second suggestion pattern is executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern. Specifically, the pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) that causes the operation effective period even in the operation effective period with the specific decoration member SDY (shadow harness) positioned at the initial position. When the operation is performed, the sword decoration 5001 becomes operable with a probability of 30%, and the operation button 410 becomes effective with a probability of 70%. On the other hand, when the pre-instruction suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is moved to the suggestion position is performed. , The sword decoration 5001 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 70% (including step-up pattern), and the operation button 410 becomes valid for operation with a probability of 30%. Below, the example of the effect transition according to the operation of the specific decoration member SDY (sill-effect product) in the first suggestive pattern and the second suggestive pattern of the pre-operation suggestive effect will be described.

(First suggestion pattern)
162 and 163, either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 during the reach effect by the lottery by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the change effect (reach effect) of the change pattern selected by the main control board 1310. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production | presentation in which the pre-operation suggestion production of a 1st suggestion pattern is performed, when it determines with operation being effective. In this reach effect, when the three decorative symbols are in the reach state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162 (A)), the operation button which is determined in advance to be operation valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The pre-operation suggestion effect of the first suggestion pattern is executed before the operation effective period for the operation means of either 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is generated. As a concrete effect content of the first suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. It is displayed (FIG. 162 (B)), and at this time, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Further, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation effective is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is maintained at the initial position. Let In this example, when the operation button 5001 is enabled, the first suggestive pattern is set to be executed as a pre-operation suggestive effect at a higher rate than the second suggestive pattern (described later). In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is in the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated at a higher ratio than the sword ornament 5001. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the operation button 410 becomes effective, as shown in FIG. 162 (C), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. Let At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the operation button 410 is decorated with light so that the player can easily recognize the operation target. Further, even when the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the first suggestion pattern at a lower rate than the operation button 410. At that time, as shown in FIG. 162 (D), the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) maintains the initial position. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 is changed from the sword storage state to the second sword removal state (the form with the aura member), and the player can perform the sword storage operation.

  When an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) that is operationally effective is detected in FIG. 162 (C) or (D) described above, if the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, The specific decoration member SDY (blend material) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the fully dropped state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)).

(Second suggestion pattern)
FIG. 164 shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern when it is determined that either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is enabled for operation during the reach effect similarly to the above-described first suggestion pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a transition of the reach production performed. In addition, in FIG. 165, although the second suggestion pattern is performed as the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation button 410 is temporarily enabled without the operation of the sword decoration 5001 being enabled, and then the sword decoration is performed. It is a figure which shows the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern in which the operation of the body 5001 becomes effective.

  As shown in FIG. 164 (AA1), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 which has been previously determined to be operation valid by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. The operation is executed before the operation valid period for the operation means is generated. As a concrete effect content of the second suggestion pattern, an operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) that suggests that the operation means is operation enabled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 before the operation effective period is generated. Is displayed. The operation effect suggestion image displayed at this time is the same as the image displayed in the first suggestion pattern, but in the second suggestion pattern, the operation effect suggestion image is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (blend product) is displayed. From the initial position, when viewed from the front, it operates in a small drop state (indication position) overlapping the upper portion of the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) moves vertically between the initial position and the suggestion position. It can be moved in small directions. At this time, there is no change in the operation button 410 and the sword decoration.

  Then, the operation effective period for the operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) which is determined in advance to be operation-effective while the specific decorative member SDY (sillary material) is moved to the suggestion position. generate. In this example, when the sword ornament 5001 is operated effectively, the second suggestion pattern is set to be executed at a higher rate than the first suggestion pattern as the pre-operation suggestion effect. In other words, when the operation effective period occurs in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (blind material) is in the suggestion position, the sword decoration 5001 is set to be effective in operation at a higher ratio than the operation button 410. It can be suggested to the player.

  When the sword ornament 5001 is valid for operation, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA3), the operation valid period for the sword ornament 5001 in the state where the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is operating at the suggested position. Generate. At the same time, in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to perform a sword operation on the sword decoration 5001 and a gauge that indicates the operation valid period are displayed. At this time, the state of the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the sword state to the second sword state (form with aura), and the sword operation can be performed by the player. Even when the operation button 410 is enabled, the pre-operation suggestion effect may be executed in the second suggestion pattern, although at a low rate. At that time, as shown in FIG. 164 (AA2), the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state where the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is operating at the suggestion position, and along with that, the effect display device 1600. In the display area, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that indicates the effective operation period are displayed. In the second suggestion pattern, when the player's operation is detected in the operation promoting effect, the specific decorative member SDY (sillary accessory) is moved from the operating state to the initial state to the initial state. In addition, the specific decorative member SDY (serving material) may be moved to the fully dropped state or the initial state from the state in which the specific decorative member SDY is operating without being returned to the initial state.

  Then, when an operation to the operation means (operation button 410 or sword decoration 5001) which is operationally effective is detected in the above-mentioned FIG. 164 (AA2) or (AA3), the above-mentioned FIG. 162 (C) or (D) is displayed. Similarly, when the result of the variable display this time is a big hit, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is dropped and moved from the initial state to the full fall state (FIG. 163 (CC1)). Next, when the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) is returned to the initial state again, a big hit is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600 where the overlap with the specific decoration member SDY (shelter material) has been canceled. An image (decoration pattern stop mode “777”, “superb message” message) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC2)). On the other hand, when the result of the variable display this time is out of alignment, the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) remains in the initial state and is not movable, and the outflow is notified to the display area of the effect display device 1600. The image (decorative pattern stop mode “767”) is displayed (FIG. 163 (CC3)). The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition after the operation promotion effect in the first suggestion pattern.

  Note that the operation pattern of the specific decorative member SDY (blind material) in the second suggestion pattern is not limited to the pattern that is operated at the suggestion position, and a plurality of operation patterns may be provided. For example, when a plurality of types of motion patterns are provided so that the ratio at which the sword ornament 5001 becomes effective is different, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the motion, so that the specific decoration member SDY (blend product) is selected. It is possible to enhance the interest of the pre-operation suggestion effect and the operation promotion effect that are used.

(Step-up pattern)
In the case where the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) is moved to the suggestion position is performed and the sword ornament 5001 becomes operation effective, In addition to the basic pattern of following the above-mentioned effect transition of FIG. 164 (AA1) → (AA3) until the sword decoration 5001 becomes valid, the operation button 410 becomes temporarily valid and then the sword decoration 5001 A step-up pattern is provided to enable operation.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 (BB1) to (BB4), the pre-operation suggestion effect of the step-up pattern is the operation effective period for the sword ornament 5001 which is previously determined to be operation effective by the lottery of the peripheral control board 1510. Is generated, that is, before the operation promoting effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) described above is performed.

  In the step-up pattern, first, the same operation effect suggestion image (aura rotation) as in FIG. 164 (AA1) is displayed, and the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is moved in small steps (FIG. 165 (BB1)). ). Next, the operation effective period for the operation button 410 is generated in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (braid accessory) is moved to the suggestion position. Along with that, the operation button 410 is decorated with light emission, and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, an operation promotion effect is displayed in which an operation promotion image that prompts the player to press the operation button 410 and a gauge that shows the operation valid period are displayed. (FIG. 165 (BB2)). Here, even if a pressing operation of the operation button 410 by the player is detected during the operation valid period of the operation button 410, the result notification as shown in FIG. A suggestion image (most blackout image) is displayed (FIG. 165 (BB3)). The switching suggestion image is displayed when the player presses the operation button 410 or when the operation valid period of the operation button 410 ends. After that, the sword decoration 5001 changes from the sword-putting state to the second sword-cutting state (form with aura), and in the display area of the effect display device 1600, operation means that become operable is displayed from the operation button 410 to the sword decoration 5001. A switching notification image (messages of “extraction chance” and “hazardous to have the sword paid”) is displayed to notify that the display will be switched to (FIG. 165 (BB4)). During this time, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) is in the state of being moved to the suggested position. Then, when the operation effective period of the sword decoration 5001 is generated, the operation promotion effect of the sword decoration 5001 shown in FIG. 164 (AA3) is performed. The effect transition after the operation promotion effect is the same as the effect transition (FIG. 163) after the operation promotion effect in the above-mentioned second suggestive pattern.

  Note that, in the case of FIG. 165 (BB2) described above, only the image display of the button operation 410 may be performed without enabling the button operation 410 (no operation promotion effect). It suffices if the sword ornament 5001 can be operated after the player's interest is once directed to the button operation 410. Further, the step-up pattern may be selectable not only when it becomes the second suggestive pattern but also when it becomes the first suggestive pattern.

  As described above, in the pre-operation suggestion effect of this example, before the operation effective period of the operation means in which one of the plurality of operation means is set to be operation-effective is generated, the specific decorative member SDY (spare material). ) Is changeable, and the operation means that the operation is effective is suggested by the position. Specifically, in the first suggestive pattern (FIG. 162 (B)) in which the operation effective period is generated in the state where the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is located at the initial position, the operation button 410 is operated effectively. The second suggestion pattern (the sword ornament 5001 in FIG. 164 (AA1)) has a high degree of expectation that the operation effective period is generated in a state where the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) is located at the suggestion position. Therefore, there is a high degree of expectation that the operation will be effective.Therefore, the player pays attention to the state of the specific decorative member SDY (silver accessory) in order to grasp which operation means is effective, and therefore the pre-operation suggestion The interest of the production can be enhanced.

  Further, in the second suggestion pattern, the specific decoration member SDY (blind material) is moved in small increments in the vertical direction in the pre-operation suggestion effect. Then, since the motion effect (falling effect) of the specific decorative member SDY (lens accessory) is also used for the result notification (FIG. 163) after the operation of the operation means, the drop effect is sequentially made from the small up / down movement of the pre-operation suggestion effect. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of amusement of the game. In the above description, the state of the specific decorative member SDY (blind object), that is, the degree of expectation that the operation means that is operationally effective by the movable body is operationally effective, is not limited to this. You may display and suggest an expectation degree. Further, when the operation means to be operated is determined, not only the operation button 410 is turned on or the sword decoration body 5001 is changed to the second extraction state, but the operation means to be operated is moved by vibration or the like. You may.

  In the second suggestion pattern, after the operation button 410 is once activated (or when it appears that the operation is activated) in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (shadow harness) is located at the suggestion position. (2) A step-up pattern is provided so that the sword ornament 5001 can be operated effectively. As a result, the player is interested in both operating means. In addition, even if the operation button 410 becomes effective immediately after the pre-operation suggestion effect, it is possible to expect that the sword decoration body 5001 may become effective after that. Therefore, the motivation for operation and the amusement of the game are reduced. Can be suppressed.

  In the first suggestion pattern of the pre-operation suggestion effect, the operation effect suggestion image before the operation effective period in which any one of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) is operation enabled is displayed. At the timing (FIG. 162 (B)), similarly to the second suggestion pattern (FIG. 164 (AA1)), the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600 in a front view from the initial position. It is also possible to operate in a small drop state (indication position) that overlaps with the upper part, and to make small vertical movements between the initial position and the suggestion position. It should be noted that when the operation valid period is generated thereafter, the specific decoration member SDY (lens accessory) is returned to the initial position (stationary). As a result, the operation of the specific decorative member SDY (sliding material) in the first suggestion pattern is partly the same as the operation in the second suggestion pattern at the same timing, so that the player is suggested to produce an operation according to the first suggestion pattern. Even when the image is displayed, it is possible to make the user think that the pre-operation suggestion effect of the second suggestion pattern is being executed. For this reason, it is possible to expect the player to operate the sword decoration 5001 effectively even when the pre-operation suggestion effect based on the first suggestion pattern is being executed. Then, the player strongly desires that the operation effective period occurs in a state in which the specific decorative member SDY (shadow product) operated at the display timing of the operation effect suggestion image is strongly desired to occur, so the pre-operation suggestion The interest of the production can be improved.

[Specific operation related performance]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, when a specific result is obtained by the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination, the specific effect is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Perform production with patterns. In the production period in which the specific production pattern is executed, a specific production reception period (effective period) in which a specific production execution condition is satisfied can be generated by an operation by the player, and the operation is performed within the specific production reception period. Then, based on the establishment of the specific effect execution condition, it is possible to execute a specific operation effect (eg, an effect in which the degree of expectation related to privilege granting is suggested). The degree of expectation related to the privilege grant, which is suggested as a result of the specific operation effect, may be 100% or 0%.

  In addition, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation is performed as an operation means provided for such an operation effect (an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of privilege grant when operated). In addition to the button 410, it is possible to further include operation means (sword decoration 5001 and the like) other than this. In this regard, in the specific effect pattern, when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 based on the result of the effect determination (when the specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the operation button 410 is operated), There is a case where an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) (when a specific effect execution condition is satisfied when the other operation means is operated). Then, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (such as the sword ornament 5001), even if the operation opportunity is not performed, only the pre-operation effect that the operation opportunity is given is generated. It is made possible for the player to recognize that the degree of expectation (a big hit expectation degree) for awarding is higher than that when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. The degree of expectation related to the privilege grant suggested when the operation opportunity is granted to another operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) may be 100% or 0%.

  With such a configuration, when an operation opportunity is given to another operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like), an operation corresponding to the operation to the other operation means (sword decoration body 5001 or the like) is performed. It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the production is in the previous stage where the production is not yet performed and the operation is about to be performed. That is, in this case, a desired effect result (eg, an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation for privilege granting is high) does not appear in the operation effect corresponding to the operation on another operation means (sword ornament 5001 or the like). Even if it is not possible or if the operation means cannot be operated within the specific effect reception period (effective period), it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through such operation-related effects. Become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, an operation opportunity is given to any one of a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001 and the like) having such a rendering property. In such a case, a common operation-related effect can be executed when the operation opportunities are given.

For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, at least as an effect mode for generating an effective period (effect reception period) in which an operation on the operation button 410 is activated (allows effect reception),
When the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is activated (enabling the production to be accepted), the operation on the operation button 410 is activated after the production of the "specific operation-related production" is started (the production can be received). ) A first effect mode in which an effective period (effect reception period) is generated, and an operation on the operation button 410 is enabled (allowing effect reception) without the effect of starting "specific operation-related effect". A plurality of effect modes such as a second effect mode for generating an effective period (effect acceptance period) are prepared. By executing any of these effect modes, the operation on the operation button 410 is activated (effect). An effective period (reception acceptance period) during which the application can be accepted is generated.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where there is a period during which the operation of the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received. Regardless of whether the period during which the operation means other than the specific operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) is ready to receive the effect occurs, common (specific ), The operation-related effect can be executed, so that it becomes possible to have an interest as to which of the specific operation means and another operation means can accept the effect. By causing the operation to be performed while the game is being performed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in such a common (specific) operation-related effect, when a predetermined time elapses after the effect is started, the operation-related effect corresponds to any one of a plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001). The effect reception period will be generated. At least at the time when the effect is started, which operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) corresponds to the effect reception period is generated. It is desirable to keep it confidential. Regarding each operation-related effect exemplified below, an operation opportunity is given to any of a plurality of operation means (for example, operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) before the effect reception period occurs. May be displayed (displaying the effect result display), and a plurality of operations may be performed within the period after the effect reception period occurs, including at the same time as the effect reception period occurs. It may be configured to indicate to which means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) the operation opportunity is given (the effect result display appears), and the operation-related effect is executed up to any timing. Whether to do it can be changed appropriately.

  Hereinafter, some performance modes that can be adopted when performing such a common (specific) operation-related performance will be sequentially described. In each of the following description examples and other examples thereof, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are used as a plurality of operation means that are targets of a common (specific) operation-related effect. The types of operating means are not limited to these, and three or more operating means may be prepared as a plurality of operating means targeted for a common (specific) operation-related effect. Further, in the following performance examples and other examples thereof, mainly, the content of the performance in the case where any performance reception period occurs after the common (specific) operation-related performance is executed is shown. ) In the case where one of the effect reception periods occurs without the operation-related effect being executed, the effect content may be omitted. However, as the content of the effect when a common (specific) operation-related effect is not executed and one of the effect reception periods occurs, "the operation for the operation button 410 is performed without the specific operation-related effect being executed. A general effect such as "a prompting operation instruction image appears, or an operation instruction image prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 appears." Furthermore, in each of the following performance examples and other examples thereof, a common (specific) operation-related performance is performed when the reach state is not formed, but the reach state is formed and the reach performance is performed. It is also possible to generate a common (specific) operation-related effect as an image different from the effect image displayed as the reach effect during the period when is executed, or it is common during the execution period of the jackpot game. The (specific) operation-related effect may be generated.

  In addition, each of the effects described below can be executed in combination with the effects of other examples described later in an appropriate combination, and can also be executed in an appropriate combination with each of the effects described above. It is possible. The respective effects described below can be combined by substituting a part of them with the effects of other examples described later, and when the first effect pattern is executed, the effects described below are performed. Then, when the second effect pattern is executed, it is possible to perform the effect of each of the other examples described later. The same can be said for the effects of each of the other examples described later.

[First production mode]
166 and 167 show that at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect during the period in which the specific operation-related effect is executed after the specific operation-related effect is started. It is the figure which shows the production example (the 1st production aspect) which is done.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Showing the production situation.

  FIG. 166 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 166 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. A display for moving each inside is displayed. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

  FIG. 166 (c) shows that both the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 have been developed due to the progress of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 166 (b). An instruction display (in this case, a character display such as "operate" and a performance reception) that prompts the user to operate any of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) in a state where the display is stopped in each area. A bar display indicating the remaining time of the available period) is displayed to show the production status.

  According to such an effect mode, although the operation on at least one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can be accepted as an effect, those operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). It becomes possible to make it unclear which one of them is allowed to receive the performance. This is because the same effect mode (FIG. 166 (c)) is obtained in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. Because it is displayed, it is none other than that. That is, in this effect example (first effect mode), a plurality of operation means are operated before the operation on at least one of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) can be accepted. Common (specific) operation relations as shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and (c) over a period until after the operation of at least one of the (operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001) is ready to receive an effect. I am trying to execute the performance.

  Therefore, not only this effect example but also each effect example described below and other examples thereof, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect is limited to the content shown in FIGS. 166 (b) and (c). Absent. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, at least one of the effect reception period for the operation button 410 and the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 is thereafter (here, the execution period of the specific operation-related effect). It only has to occur in the middle). With such a configuration, it is unclear which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 can receive the effect, and at least one of those operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001). It is possible to suggest that the operation for one is acceptable for performance. For example, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are displayed. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and cause a different effect image to appear as a specific operation-related effect.

  However, in order to more securely conceal which one of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 can receive the effect, in order to more securely keep the effect reception period for the operation button 410, and for the sword decoration 5001. It is more desirable to set the time required from the execution of the specific operation-related effect (start of effect) to the occurrence of the effect acceptance period to be the same as when the acceptance period occurs.

  In addition, although it is unclear which one of the operating means should be operated as the operation instruction displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, a display prompting an operation for any one of the operating means (“ Etc.), and always operate a specific operation means of the plurality of operation means, regardless of how the plurality of operation means can accept the effect. The display may be such that it prompts the user. In short, as the operation instruction, the same effect mode is made to appear in both the situation in which the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect and the situation in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect. By doing so, it becomes possible to give an operation opportunity while keeping it secret which of the plurality of operation means is allowed to receive the effect.

  In the example of the effect (first effect mode) shown in FIG. 166 (c), whether the operation of the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is allowed to accept the effect is hidden. , Whether the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can accept the performance or the operation on the sword decoration 5001 cannot perform the performance (in any of the first to third situations described later) However, only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is in a light emitting state to prompt the operation of the operation button 410. However, instead of this, both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 may be in a non-light emitting state, or a light emitting means may be provided on the side of the sword decoration 5001 to connect the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both may be made to emit light.

  Here, in this effect example (first effect mode), the effect situation in which the image shown in FIG. 166 (c) appears is that only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated. It is in the first situation in which the production can be received, or in the second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can be received, or the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001. Both are set to be in one of the third situations in which the production can be received. When a second situation (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) occurs among these plural situations, the first situation (an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410). (Situation) is expected to be higher than when the privilege is granted. Therefore, the ratio of occurrence of the second situation (the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001) within the pattern variation according to the result of the jackpot determination is the first situation (the operation opportunity for the operation button 410). It is desirable that the rate is set lower than the rate at which the situation) is generated.

  Then, in this effect example (first effect mode), the operation button 410 is operated when in any of the first condition (operation button 410) and the third condition (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001). Is performed (whether the “FF” in the figure is advanced), or in any of the second situation (sword decoration 5001) and the third situation (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001). When an operation is performed on the sword ornament 5001 (when "GG" in the figure is progressed), an effect reception is made and an operation effect corresponding to the operation (FIGS. 167 (d) and 167 (f)). Is to be done.

  In the effect during operation, the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front of the display area in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and (f), and a predetermined display effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600. ("Chance !!") is executed. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and “intense heat !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes and displaying any of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly to this, for example, an effect mode in which the operation of displacing to the front of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to the effect reception. Alternatively, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Moreover, in the operation-time effect according to this effect example (first effect mode), effect reception is performed by an operation by the player in any of the situations shown in FIGS. 167 (d) and (f). Then, it is possible to execute the control to bring the operating means into the operating state (a state different from the non-operating state before the operation) based on the operation.

  More specifically, first, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (d), although the operation button 410 is operated by the player, the operation is performed in response to the effect acceptance. The control for reciprocating the sword ornament 5001 on the side not performed between the first position and the second position can be executed. According to such a configuration, although the effect reception is generated as a result of the player's operation on the operation button 410 and the operation-time effect on the operation button 410 side is executed, Even if the sword decoration 5001 on the higher expectation side is operated without operating the button 410, the effect reception may have occurred and the operation effect on the sword decoration 5001 side may have been executed. It becomes possible to appeal the possibility such as "to the player.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), as a result of the player performing the sword removal operation on the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration body 5001 is placed at the sword position according to the effect reception. It is possible to execute control to maintain the sword in the sword removal position (sword removal state) instead of returning to the (sword storage state). As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the swords-position (the sword-storing state) to the swords-slicing position (the swords-slicing state) based on the operation by the player, and is maintained in such a swords-slicing state. Occasionally, an on-effect production will be performed. Therefore, even if the same effect (the specific decorative member SDY, a predetermined display effect, etc.) is executed in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, the sword decoration body at that time is executed. By confirming the operation state of 5001, it becomes possible to give a feeling that the operation effect caused by the operation on the side of the sword decoration 5001 is being performed.

  Then, after the operation effect (FIGS. 167 (d) and (f)) is performed in this way, as shown in FIG. 167 (e), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since there is a possibility that the effect using the sword decoration body 5001 is executed during the reach effect execution period, either the operation time effect on the operation button 410 side or the operation time effect on the sword ornament body 5001 side is executed. Even when it is executed, when the predetermined time has passed (before the reach effect is started), the sword decoration body 5001 is in the non-operation state (the sword position (the sword state)). Control to return to will be performed. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described action and effect, for the sword decoration 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY toward the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

  According to the example of an effect (first effect mode) shown in FIGS. 166 and 167, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration) among a plurality of operation means (operation button 410 and sword decoration 5001). 5001) whether the production can be received or not, the common (specific) operation-related production is started, and the common (specific) that the production is started is started. While the operation-related effect is being executed, a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) can accept the effect, or the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) cannot accept the effect. Since the operation button 410 is allowed to receive the effect, the specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) and another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) are respectively operated. It is possible to impart operation opportunities while if there is a possibility with the secret.

  In this performance example (first performance mode), in particular, a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) can accept a performance, or the specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration body 5001) is a performance. Regardless of whether or not the operation button 410 can receive the effect without being able to receive the operation button, when the operation opportunity is given while such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, the operation button 410 and Due to the fact that only the operation button 410 of the sword decoration body 5001 emits light, even if the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect, the sword decoration body 5001 can accept the effect. You will be able to mislead as if you were not there. That is, in this case, when the effect is received, it is possible to prompt the operation of the operation button 410 on the lower side rather than the sword ornament 5001 which is the side on which the rate of relatively high expected effect is performed. It becomes possible to expect that the operation means should be operated when a common (specific) operation-related effect is performed.

  It should be noted that when such a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, when the operation means on the side that is not ready for effect reception (the side on which the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated, No reaction will occur. However, it is possible to enjoy the demerit that the effect reception period is consumed by the amount of such an erroneous operation and the remaining time is reduced.

  However, when the operation means on the side that is not ready to receive the effect (the side where the effect reception period has not occurred) is operated while the common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed, Although the effect reception required for execution of the effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is not established, the operation itself is detected, and the operation on the side that can accept the effect based on the detection is performed. You may make it perform the control which ends the production | generation reception period with respect to a means at that time. According to such a configuration, there is a risk that an operation opportunity is lost. Therefore, it is possible to encourage careful operation by carefully considering which of the plurality of operation means is capable of receiving the performance. become able to.

  Further, in the above-mentioned example of the effect (first effect mode), the same effect (specific decorative member SDY, predetermined display effect, etc.) is obtained in the operation effect on the operation button 410 side and the operation effect on the sword ornament 5001 side. Although it is configured to be executed, these operational effects may have different effect contents. For example, in the operation effect on the sword decoration body 5001 side, in addition to the effect mode performed by the operation effect on the operation button 410 side, another effect mode (for example, a light emitting unit different from the effect display device 1600 emits light or the like). , An original effect sound is generated), it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is accepted as an effect.

  Further, when preparing another effect mode that can be executed only when the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001) is operated, it is involved in the occurrence of the other effect mode. When the effect reception period is set for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001), the effect reception period relating to the generation of the different effect mode is not set. A performance acceptance period for the second operation means (for example, if the first operation means is the operation button 410, it is the sword decoration body 5001, and if the first operation means is the sword decoration body 5001, the operation button 410). Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, when the first operation means is operated in the situation shown in FIG. 166 (c), the operation effect may be performed. That is, in this case, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an operation for the first operation means is performed while an effect reception period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is set, While another effect mode is executed as the operation-time effect, when a common (specific) operation-related effect is being performed and an effect acceptance period relating to the occurrence of the other effect mode is not set (( 2) (when the effect reception period for the second operation means is set), when another operation mode is not executed as an operation time effect, when the operation button 410 is operated. The same operation effect will be performed. In short, when the effect reception period related to the occurrence of another effect mode is not set for the first operation means, the effect reception period related to the occurrence of the operation effect on the second operation means side is set to the second operation time. Settings are made for both the operating means and the first operating means. In addition, when another effect mode is made to appear as the operation time effect, the second operation mode is not made to appear in addition to the effect mode performed in the operation time effect on the second operation means side. The operation time effect may be performed as effect contents different from the operation time effect on the means side.

  In the example of the above-described effect (first effect mode), the situation in which the instruction display prompting the operation appears while the common (specific) operation-related effect is performed is the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. A first situation in which only the operation on the operation button 410 can receive the performance, a second situation in which only the operation on the sword decoration 5001 can receive the performance, and an operation on the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. Both of the operations with respect to are set to correspond to any of the third situations in which the production can be received. In addition, in this case, in the first situation and the second situation, the same operation effect is made to appear when the effect reception is made, whereas in the third situation, when the operation is different from both the first situation and the second situation. It is desirable that the effect or another effect mode (different from the effect during operation in the first situation and the second situation) appears. However, in the above-mentioned production example, the third situation is not necessarily required.

  Further, although the operation button 410 according to the above-described effect example is not provided as the operation means to which the driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, the operation button 410 is provided as the operable operation means. In the above-described effect example (first effect mode), in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (f), no operation is performed by the player as in the effect situation shown in FIG. 167 (d). The control for operating the operation button 410 on the other side may be made executable. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately. However, regarding the control for operating the operation means on the side not operated by the player, it is at an earlier stage than when the specific decorative member SDY provided on the game board 5 side returns to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to end the operation state so that the gaze by the player is naturally returned to the game board 5 side.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (shadow cast). In addition, examples of the “movement” of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. It is possible to perform, and this is not limited to the example of the effect, and is the same in other example of the effect.

[Second production mode]
FIG. 168 to FIG. 171 are executed as an effect showing the progress of the effect until the specific operation-related effect appears either the first effect result or the second effect result. When the first effect result appears, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means is suggested, and when the second effect result appears as the result of the effect, the plurality of operation means is generated. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect (second effect mode) in which it is suggested that an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment in a state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

  FIG. 168 (b) shows an effect state in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 168 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600. The images are simultaneously displayed in the figure, and a state in which the lightning bolt image IZ is acting on the images BTG and SYG is depicted. In this way, a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operation means are simultaneously displayed in the display area, so that the operation button 410 and the sword are displayed. It is suggested that an operation on any of those operating means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001) will soon be able to receive the effect, while it remains unclear which of the ornaments 5001 is allowed to receive the effect. You will be able to.

  In FIG. 168 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 168 (b) progresses, and a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 and a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 are displayed as effects. The effect of pressing each other in the display area of the device 1600 to push the other party out of the display area is performed.

  That is, the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) according to this effect example (second effect mode) is "the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are pressed against each other to generate those images. Which of BTG and SYG is left in the display area? "Is performed as an effect, and when the effect result (first effect result) in which the button image BTG is left appears, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed. When a period occurs and a production result (second production result) in which the sword decoration image SYG is left appears, a production reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 is generated. Therefore, in this effect example (second effect mode), the effect shown in FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is one of "the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 and the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001". Even if occurs, it corresponds to "a specific operation-related effect that can appear prior to the occurrence of those periods".

  Note that the left side of FIG. 168 (c) depicts a situation in which the button image BTG remains dominant in the display area, and the right side of the figure shows the sword decoration image SYG. It depicts a situation in which it remains dominant within the territory. In a specific operation-related effect, such a situation of inferiority / predominance changes from moment to moment.

  169 (d) shows that the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG is left in the display area as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c). Is performed (first effect result). When the effect contents are advanced, the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 does not occur, but only the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity is about to be given while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect is executed. As a result, the effect that the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed in the display area and the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 169 (d)). By executing the above, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted for reception (the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is generated).

  In addition, at this time, in addition to the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410, an instruction display (a character display such as “press” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed to prompt an operation, so that a plurality of images can be displayed. It becomes possible to recognize that the operation of the operation button 410 of the operation means is ready to receive the effect (that is, during the effect reception period for the operation button 410). In particular, in this effect example, even if only the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is set to the light emitting state, the operation of the operation button 410 is prompted.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 168 (b), (c), etc.) or without the specific operation-related effect. The production progress (for example, production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to increase the degree of expectation of granting the privilege.

  Also, regarding the length of the effect reception period, when the effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed through the specific operation-related effect, the specific operation-related effect is performed. Proportion in which the length of the effect reception period generated for the operation button 410 is shorter than that in the case where the effect (FIG. 169 (d)) in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 is performed without passing through Is desirable to be high. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to a later-described dramatic extension when a specific operation-related effect is passed.

  In FIG. 169 (e), as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 169 (d) being performed on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is responded to. This is a depiction of how the performance during operation is performed.

  The on-operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e) is the same as that in FIG. 167 (d). That is, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and a predetermined display effect (“chance !!”) is executed on the effect display device 1600. It has become. At this time, even though the player operates the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is set to the first position and the second position according to the reception of the effect. It is also the same that the control for reciprocating between the position and the position (control for making the operating state) is executable. Note that, as the predetermined display effects, for example, “chance !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively low expectation, and “intense heat !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high expectation. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation for granting a privilege by preparing a plurality of effect modes and displaying any of these effect modes in accordance with effect acceptance. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly, similarly to this, for example, an effect mode in which an operation of displacing to the front side of the display area is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is caused to appear in response to effect reception. Therefore, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  Then, after such an operation effect (FIG. 169 (e)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 169 (f), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. However, since the effect using the sword decoration 5001 may be executed during the reach effect execution period, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effect was executed (the reach effect is started. Control is performed to return the sword decoration body 5001 to the non-operated state (the sword storage state)). However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described action and effect, for the sword decoration 5001, at least half or more of the period from the movement of the specific decoration member SDY toward the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation state (reciprocating operation, or maintaining in a sword cutting state) for the period of. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 170 (g), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the button image BTG is completely pushed out of the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the display area. An effect that depicts the remaining state is being performed (second effect result). When progressing to this effect content, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 does not occur, but only the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs.

  That is, a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) that suggests that an operation opportunity is about to be given while concealing which of the plurality of operation means can accept the effect is executed. As a result, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is not displayed in the display area, and the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area (FIG. 170 (g)). Is performed, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 of the plurality of operation means can be accepted for the effect (the effect acceptance period for the sword accessory 5001 will occur). ..

  Further, at this time, in addition to the sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as "extract sword" or bar display indicating remaining time of performance reception period) is displayed. Then, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operation means is ready to receive the effect (during the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001). In particular, in this production example, only the operation unit including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 including the sword decoration body 5001 (the sword decoration body 5001 itself may be in the light emission state) is in the light emission state. By doing so, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prompted.

  Note that the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is not limited to the case where the effect is advanced through a specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b), (c), etc.), or without the specific operation-related effect. The production progress (for example, the production progress from the production state shown in FIG. 168 (a)) may be performed. However, even if the same effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed, if the effect is performed through a specific operation-related effect, or if the effect is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is set to be higher than that. In addition, when the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed after the specific operation-related effect, the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed without the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to make the expectation degree of the privilege grant higher than that of the case, and to lower the expectation degree of the privilege grant as compared with the case where the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) is performed through a specific operation-related effect. desirable.

  FIG. 170 (h) shows that, as a result of the operation shown in FIG. 170 (g) being performed on the sword decoration 5001 among the plurality of operating means, the effect reception is performed and the operation is accepted. It is a depiction of a state in which a performance during operation is being performed.

  The operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h) is basically the same as the operation effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), and the specific decoration member SDY is displaced to the front side of the display area, and the effect display device is provided. At 1600, a predetermined display effect is executed. In addition, here, the production mode such as “intense heat !!”, which is suggested to have a relatively high degree of expectation, is displayed according to the production acceptance, but it is suggested that the degree of expectation is relatively low. In some cases, "chance !!" will be displayed. As for the operation of the specific decoration member SDY, similarly, similar to this, for example, an effect mode in which an operation of displacing the display area to the front side is not performed is provided, and one of these effect modes is made to appear in accordance with effect reception. By doing so, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be suggested. The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  However, in the operation effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the effect mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself is changed to one of the plurality of modes described above based on the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 ( It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in FIG. 161 to any one of the stage 1 form to the stage 3 form. Depending on which of these forms appears, the degree of expectation of granting a bonus such as a big hit can be increased. Height has come to be suggested.

  Moreover, as shown in FIG. 170 (i), even if the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) is ended and the specific decoration member SDY is returned to the initial position (non-driving position), The sword decoration 5001 is not returned to the sword state, but is kept in the sword state. That is, in this effect example, although illustration is omitted, the sword decoration body 5001 is kept in the extracted state, and then the sword decoration body 5001 is put into the sword state (after the reach effect is produced). An operation opportunity for operation is further provided, and at that time, an operation-time effect corresponding to the operation to the sword storage state can be further executed.

  According to such a configuration, an operation opportunity is given to one operation means (sword decoration body 5001) in two steps, and the first step operation (operation to the sword extraction state) and the second step operation. Since the effect at the time of operation is performed in accordance with each operation of (operating to put the sword), not only when the operation means (sword decoration 5001) is being operated, but also at the first stage. It is expected that amusement with the operation will be favorably maintained even in the non-operation period from the time when the operation (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed until the second step operation (operation to the sword cutting state) is performed. Become so. It is desirable that the operation of the first step and the operation of the second step are operation modes different from each other (here, operations in directions opposite to each other). Further, it is desirable that the operation effect corresponding to the operation of the first stage and the operation effect corresponding to the operation of the second stage have different effect contents.

  Further, when the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is not necessarily maintained in the extracted state, and is not maintained in the extracted state. If this happens, it is desirable not to give a second-stage operation opportunity. Whether the sword decoration 5001 is maintained at a position (extracting sword) where the operation opportunity of the second step (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) can be given in the operation time effect corresponding to the operation of the first step It may be executed as an effect that indicates the degree of expectation. That is, when the sword decoration body 5001 is returned to the sword cutting state without being maintained in the sword cutting state, it is practically impossible to give the operation opportunity of the second stage (operation opportunity from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state). It will be obvious that The degree of expectation may be “100%” or “0%”.

  When the sword decoration 5001 is not maintained in the extracted state as a result of performing the operation effect (FIG. 170 (h)) corresponding to the operation of the first stage, when a predetermined time has passed (reach effect The control is performed to return the sword decoration 5001 to the non-driving state (the sword storage state) before the start of (1). However, in this case, the sword decoration 5001 has its operating state (reciprocating) for at least half the period from the movement of the specific decorative member SDY toward the display area side to the return to the initial position (non-driving position). It is desirable to continue the operation or the maintenance of the sword removal state. Further, with respect to the sword decoration body 5001, it is necessary to end the operation state of the specific decoration member SDY at an earlier stage before returning to the initial position (non-driving position) so that the driving force is not applied. More desirable in relation to the amount (movable load).

  On the other hand, in FIG. 171 (j), as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area as in the case shown in FIG. 169 (d). Then, an effect is drawn in which the button image BTG is depicted in the display area. That is, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the predetermined time has elapsed after the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c) was performed, the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) or the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g) was used. Either the effect shown in Fig. 171 or the effect shown in Fig. 171 (j) appears. It should be noted that which effect content will appear is determined in advance in the effect pattern determination processing according to the result of the big hit determination.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the effect that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIG. 168 (b), (c)). (Here, the lightning bolt image IZ) continues, and it is suggested that such a lightning bolt image IZ may cause some change in the button image BTG.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), an instruction display (a character display such as “press” and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation is not displayed, and FIG. 169 (d) ) Is different from the case of the production shown in. As a result, although the sword decoration image SYG is completely pushed out of the display area and the button image BTG remains in the display area, the effect reception period for the button image BTG has not yet occurred. It becomes possible to recognize that there is something.

  FIG. 171 (k) shows that, as a result of the progress of the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j), the lightning bolt image IZ acts on the button image BTG, the button image BTG is wrapped in haze MY, and even the outline drawing is lost. The production is being broken.

  That is, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), all effect elements (button image BTG) that suggest that the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect are removed. Therefore, although there is a situation in which it is once suggested by the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) that the operation on the operation button 410 can accept the effect, such an effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) appears. As a result, it is possible to have a suspicion that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 will occur.

  In the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) as well, the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that has been performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the mode of the lightning bolt image IZ is changing (disappearing), and the remaining time until it is definitively shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period is occurring is reduced. Suggesting that

  In FIG. 171 (i), as a result of the development shown in FIG. 171 (k), the outer shape of the haze MY approaches the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) rather than the operation button 410 (button image BTG). A production that depicts the state of being brought is being performed.

  According to such a configuration, although the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed yet, it is possible that the appearance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 instead of the operation button 410 may occur due to the outer shape of the haze MY. You will be able to.

  Also, in the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i), the effect display (here, the lightning bolt image IZ) that was performed in the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is continued. . However, here, the aspect of the lightning bolt image IZ is further changed (immediately before disappearing) as compared with FIG. 171 (k), and until it is definitely shown to which of the plurality of operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. Suggests that the remaining time of is less than expected.

  Then, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (i) further progresses and the haze MY is hidden, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and FIG. The effect shown in (g) is performed.

  With such a configuration, as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the button image BTG is displayed. Even if it is done (FIG. 169 (d), FIG. 171 (j)), there is still a possibility that a performance reception period for the sword decoration body 5001 will occur, so it is possible to maintain the entertainment of the game. Will be able to.

  Particularly, in this example of production (second production mode), the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed and the button image BTG is displayed on the production display device 1600 (FIG. 169 (d), FIG. 171 (j)). , The production for the sword decoration 5001 by confirming whether or not the production display by the lightning image IZ that has appeared in the specific operation-related production (FIGS. 168 (b) and (c)) is still continued. It is possible to know whether there is a possibility that a reception period will occur, and this also makes it possible to maintain the entertainment of the game.

  In addition, in this effect example (second effect mode), when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) appears, the button image BTG is hidden by the haze MY (FIG. 171 (k)), and When the production is advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the production shown in FIG. 170 (g) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 and also displays the button image BTG. It can be said that it is an effect that suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). It is also possible to set such that an effect pattern approaching the outline of) can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, thereafter, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) is performed. When such an effect pattern can be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (j) and (k) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, and in the effect state shown in FIG. 170 (h) in the effect example (second effect mode), FIG. 169 (e) Similar to the effect situation shown in, the control for operating the operation button 410 on the side not operated by the player may be made executable. In such control, it is important to at least operate the operation means on the side not operated by the player. At this time, the operation means on the side operated by the player is also operated. Whether or not it should be designed appropriately.

  Further, when the operation button 410 is provided as an operable operation means, the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword decoration 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used. It goes without saying that the drive source provided corresponding to these operating means is provided as a drive source different from the drive source for the specific decorative member SDY (shadow cast). In addition, examples of the “movement” of the operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) generated by such a drive source include “movement”, “rotation”, “swing”, and “vibration”. It is possible to perform, and this is not limited to the example of the effect, and is the same in other example of the effect.

[Third production mode]
172 to 175 are basically the same as the second effect mode with respect to the specific operation-related effect, but are diagrams showing an effect example (third effect mode) different from the second effect mode. Is.

  FIG. 172 (a) shows that in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

  172 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 172 (a). However, as shown in FIG. 172 (b), in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example (third effect mode), first, a predetermined movable member different from the effect display device 1600 is operated. By this, it is suggested that either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 will soon be ready for production reception.

  In particular, in this production example (third production mode), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are adopted as the predetermined movable members, and the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are respectively operated. Thus, it is easy for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 to be ready for production, even when the production display related to the operation is not yet performed on the production display device 1600 side. I try to make it recognizable. Note that here, control is performed to operate the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 from the initial position toward the operation position, but compared to the case of operating each to the operation position when giving an operation opportunity. And operate each at a slow speed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operating means in which time remains before the production acceptance period occurs, or the production acceptance period does not occur in the first place until the symbol variation ends Regardless, these operation means (the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001) are operated. Therefore, from the situation where there is still time left before the production reception period occurs, or when the production reception period does not occur until the end of the symbol fluctuation, the entertainment of those operations will be changed. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Then, in this effect example (third effect mode), not the effect display on the effect display device 1600, but the specific operation-related effect by the operation buttons 410 and the sword ornament 5001 (FIG. 172 (b)). After the start, basically the same effect development as in the second effect mode is performed.

  For example, of the effects shown in FIG. 172 (c), first, in the effect display on the effect display device 1600, except that the button image BTG is displayed as one corresponding to the “movable operation button 410”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 168 (b).

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (b), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are in a state of operating from the initial position (position when not driven), respectively. It has become. The effect shown in FIG. 172 (c) suggests that either of the operation buttons 410 or the sword ornament 5001 can accept the effect even with such a movable effect.

  In addition, in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are at positions different from the initial position (position when not driven) after the specific operation-related effect is started. In addition, the operation position (the state in which the driving force is applied) is set at a position different from the operation position when the operation opportunity is applied.

  That is, when such an operation-related effect is performed, the operation-related effect is postponed as compared with the case where the operation opportunity is immediately given without the operation-related effect, but the operation of the movable type is performed. When the operation means is adopted, even if such operation-related effect is finally completed, it is necessary to move the operation means on the side that can accept the effect to at least the operation position. Therefore, an operation-related effect is further delayed by the amount of time required for such an operation, and there is a concern that such a delay may lower the enjoyment of the game.

  Therefore, in this effect example (third effect mode), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are set to both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position during a period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. The position is set as an operating state (a state in which a driving force is applied) at a different position (for example, an intermediate position). As a result, when the specific operation-related effect is ended and the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the side where the effect reception period occurs is moved to the operation position in a shorter time, or the effect reception period does not occur. It is possible to operate the operating means on the raised side to the initial position in a shorter time, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the extension of the operation-related effect. In addition, until the production reception period occurs, the operating means on the side to be operated is placed in the operating state at a position different from the operation position, so that the production reception period is in the operating state. It becomes possible to easily recognize that this has not yet occurred.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (c) progresses and the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed, the effect display on the effect display device 1600 indicates that the button image BTG is “movable operation button. The content of the effect is as described with reference to FIG. However, also in the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 168 (c), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are respectively set to the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is arranged so as to be in an operating state (state in which a driving force is applied) at a position different from any of the above.

  In the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (b) and 172 (c), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 are in the initial position (non-driving position). While being displayed in a simulated manner, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are positioned in an operating state at a position different from the initial position (non-driving position). In this way, the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG in the effect display device 1600 and the modes of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 are intentionally made different from each other, so that they can be matched in the near future. It is possible to suggest that the effect to be achieved (whether the mode of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG changes or whether the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 operate) occurs.

  Further, when the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), in the effect display on the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG is “at the operation position”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 169 (d), except that they are displayed as those corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d), the operation button 410 is in the operated position, and the sword ornament 5001 is in the initial position. Both the (non-driving position) and the operating position are in different positions. That is, in this case, since the operation button 410 is moved toward the operation position from a position closer to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), the extension of the operation-related effect is appropriately suppressed. Become so.

  As the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), "display effect in which the button image BTG is displayed (it is desirable to be displayed in a state where it has moved to the operation position) and the sword decoration image SYG is not displayed" is first After performing the display effect, the operation button 410 is operated to the operation position, and an instruction display (character display such as "press" or effect A bar display indicating the remaining time of the reception period) may be displayed. With such a configuration, the button image BTG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, whereas the operation button at the time of the display is displayed. 410 is a mode different from the “mode in which the operation position is moved to”. In this way, by causing the button image BTG that appears as a result of execution of the specific operation-related effect to be displayed as a mode that is different from the mode of the operation button 410 at that time, the gap between those modes will soon be filled. (Here, the operation button 410 moves to the operation position) can be suggested in advance.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 169 (e). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 173 (f), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 169 (e), the operation button 410 is in a state of being returned from the operation position to the initial position (non-driving position). In addition, the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of operating at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 173 (f)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 173 (g), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. This is also as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 is the operation of the sword ornament 5001. The instruction as described with reference to FIG. 170 (g), except that the instruction content regarding “indentation” is “pressed” and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”. It is the content.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (g), the operation button 410 is at a position different from both the initial position (position when not driven) and the operation position. It is in an operating state, and the sword ornament 5001 is in an operating position. That is, in this case, since the sword ornament 5001 has moved from the position closer to the operation position to the operation position than the initial position (position when not driven), the extension of the operation-related effect is preferably suppressed. Will be done.

  Note that, even as the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), "a display effect in which the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed (it is desirable that the sword decoration image SYG is moved to the operation position)". First, after performing the display effect, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the operation position, and an instruction display (characters such as “pushing in”) that prompts an operation by generating an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is performed. A display or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect is displayed in the “movement mode to the operation position”, while the sword at the time of the display is displayed. The decoration image SYG will be in a mode different from the “mode in which the decoration image SYG has moved to the operation position”. In this way, by displaying the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the execution of the specific operation-related effect as a mode that is intentionally different from the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time, there is a difference between those modes. It will soon be possible to suggest in advance that the sword decoration 5001 will move to the operating position.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 170 (h). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 174 (i), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 170 (h), the operation button 410 operates at a position different from both the initial position (non-driving position) and the operation position. The sword decoration 5001 is returned to the initial position (non-driving position) from the operating position.

  After such an operation effect (FIG. 174 (i)) is performed, as shown in FIG. 174 (j), the reach state is formed and the reach effect can be performed. Is as described with reference to FIG. 169 (f).

  On the other hand, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 172 (d), the effect display on the effect display device 1600 shows that the button image BTG is in the “operation position”. The effect contents are as described with reference to FIG. 171 (j), except that they are displayed as those corresponding to the movable operation button 410 at a certain time.

  However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (j) and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are respectively at the initial positions ( It is in a state of operating at a position different from both the non-driving position) and the operating position. Even in such an operating state, it is suggested that the effect reception period for the operation button 410 has not yet occurred, and that there is still a possibility that the effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 will occur. Will be able to.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) is performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (k). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions.

  Then, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) comes to be performed as a result of the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), the effect display device 1600 has been described with reference to FIG. 171 (l). The street contents will appear. However, in the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l), unlike the effect shown in FIG. 171 (k), the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 respectively have an initial position (position when not driven) and an operation position. Both are operating in different positions. In the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m), it is more preferable that the outer shape of the haze MY should be closer to the sword decoration 5001 in the operating position, not the sword decoration 5001 in the initial position.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 175 (m) is further advanced, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the effect shown in FIG. 174 (h) is always generated. In this sense, the effect shown in FIG. 175 (k) does not display the sword decoration image SYG on the effect display device 1600 but also displays the button image BTG. It can be said that it is an effect that suggests that an effect reception period for the body 5001 will occur.

  However, instead of this, when the effect shown in FIG. 175 (l) progresses, the outer shape of the haze MY does not necessarily come close to the sword decoration body 5001 (sword decoration image SYG), and the operation button 410 (button image BTG). ) May be set so that an effect pattern approaching the outer shape can also appear, and when the effect pattern appears, after that, the button image BTG is displayed again and the effect shown in FIG. 173 (e) is performed. When such an effect pattern is allowed to be performed, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (k) and (l) also conceal which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect. It will be executed as a specific operation-related effect.

  Further, in the above-described example, when the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated to receive the effect during the effective period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect is executed, the effect reception is performed. Accordingly, the sword decoration 5001 on the side where the operation is not performed is reciprocated between the first position and the second position (FIG. 167 (d), FIG. 169 (e), etc.). However, it is only necessary to put the sword ornament 5001 on the non-operated side into an operating state. Examples of the operating state include a mode in which the sword decorative body 5001 moves to another place and stays, and a mode in which it vibrates. It is possible to adopt. In addition, in the effective period that occurs after a specific operation-related effect is executed, even when the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001 of the sword decoration bodies 5001 are operated to receive the effect, the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to put the operation button 410 on the side on which the operation is not performed into the operating state (vibration or the like).

  In addition, for such an effect that brings the "operation section on the side not being operated" into the operating state, the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is "the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears," 0 ", It appears when executed in a "high aspect of" 100 "), and the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation is of" expectation degree (the proportion of the big hit symbol, including "0" and "100"). It may not appear when executed in a “low mode”.

  Further, when the post-operation performance is performed by the operation on one of the two operation units (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001), the “operation unit on the other side where no operation is performed” is also in the operating state. Alternatively, when the post-operation effect is performed by the operation on the other, the “one-side operation unit in which no operation is performed” may not be activated.

  In the example of the effect (third effect mode), the drive source that applies the drive force to the operation button 410 and the drive source that applies the drive force to the sword ornament 5001 are different drive sources. The same drive source may be used.

  In each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof, in the case where the "button image BTG (first display mode) imitating the operation button 410" appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, it is basically The operation opportunity is given only to the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001, and when the operation on the operation button 410 is received, the operation effect on the button side is performed. Become. Further, when the "sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) imitating the sword decoration 5001" appears as the result of the specific operation-related effect, basically, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are displayed. When the operation opportunity is given only to the sword decoration body 5001 among the body 5001 and the operation for the sword decoration body 5001 is received as an effect, the operation time effect on the sword actor side is performed. In this respect, in the button-side operation effect, there is a success effect (the specific decoration member SDY is operated) and a failure effect (the specific decoration member SDY is not operated) based on the result of the effect lottery according to the big hit determination. In contrast to the appearance of either one, even in the production on the side of the sword role, the production on success (operating the specific decoration member SDY) and production on failure based on the result of the production lottery according to the big hit determination. Either (the specific decorative member SDY is not operated) is made to appear, and their effect contents are the same. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means on the side different from the side desired by the player among the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001.

  In addition, in the button-side operation effect and the sword-effect-side operation effect, not only the effect regarding whether or not the specific decorative member SDY is operated, but also the display effect performed by the effect display device 1600 is the same effect. You may make it a content.

  Further, in each of the effect examples described above with respect to the specific operation-related effect, it is assumed that an effect is given to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side according to the result is to be performed. Opportunity was given to the operation. However, no matter which effect result appears, for example, when a specific operation means is pressed against each other, a specific operation-related effect may be performed with an effect content that gives an operation opportunity to the specific operation means. There may be.

  For example, in any mode for one operation means (for example, an operation in a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-storing state is in a sword cutting state, a mode in which the sword decoration body 5001 in a sword-storing state is in a sword-storing state) It is also possible to perform an effect as to whether or not an operation opportunity is given by (operation of) and to give the operation opportunity to the operation means in a mode on the side according to the result. In this case, the sword decoration 5001 is operated in a state different from both the sword storage state and the sword removal state while the specific operation-related effect is performed, and the operation is performed in any mode in the specific operation-related effect. It is desirable to operate the sword decoration body 5001 in the sword storage state or the sword removal state when the effect result is displayed.

  Also, when the symbol variation in the suspended state is exhausted, a specific operation-related effect is performed within the execution period of the symbol variation, when the symbol variation is in the suspended state (digested before this. The effect suggested from within the symbol variation execution period) may be performed. According to such a configuration, although the operation opportunity is given to only one of the plurality of operation means, the operation means provided with the operation opportunity and the operation means provided with the operation opportunity are not provided. It becomes possible to maintain the game interest related to the operation for a longer period for both. As such an effect, when the symbol variation in which a specific operation-related effect is performed is in a pending state (within the execution period of the symbol variation consumed before this), the operation in the specific operation-related effect is performed. It is desirable to operate each of the provided operation means.

  In the above-described second and third effect modes, and their modified examples, a plurality of images (button images BTG, button images BTG, corresponding to a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, sword decoration 5001) are provided as specific operation-related effects. The sword decoration image SYG) is displayed, but these images do not necessarily have to be displayed. In short, when the specific operation-related effect is executed, either the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 or the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 may occur thereafter. With such a configuration, while suggesting that the performance acceptance period will occur for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001, those operations are performed until the performance acceptance period occurs. It becomes possible to conceal which of the means the performance acceptance period occurs for. Therefore, it is not always necessary to simultaneously display a plurality of types of operation-related images (here, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG) corresponding to different types of operating means, and the button image BTG and the sword decoration are not necessarily displayed at the same time. It is also possible to cause none of the images SYG to appear and cause an effect image different from any of them to appear as the specific operation-related effect.

  However, even when the presentation mode in which the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are not simultaneously displayed while the specific operation-related effect is being executed, when the specific operation-related effect is finished, the button image is finished. Either the BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) is displayed to indicate which of these operating means the performance acceptance period occurs. It will be. In this case, the button image BTG (image corresponding to the operation button 410) or the sword decoration image SYG (image corresponding to the sword decoration 5001) displayed in this manner is displayed during the execution period of the specific operation-related effect. It is possible to determine which of the plurality of operation means the effect acceptance period occurs for the specific operation-related effect by executing the specified operation (for example, the lightning bolt image IZ) related to the effect. It can be said that it is important to make it function as a suggestive production. For example, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning toward one of two rocks, and when lightning falls on one of the rocks, a button image BTG appears from the rock, and the other When the lightning strikes the rock on the side, the sword decoration image SYG is made to appear from within the rock, so that it is possible to progress to the effect shown in FIG. 169 (d) or FIG. 170 (g). .. Alternatively, a specific operation-related effect is executed as an effect of dropping lightning on one rock, and when lightning is dropped on the rock, one of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears from the rock. It is also possible to make the production progress to the production shown in FIG. 169 (d) or FIG. 170 (g). In short, it is desirable to make the production progress as the production content such that the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related production.

  In addition, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and in other examples thereof, there are specific cases where the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs and when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs. It is more desirable to set the same time required from the execution of the operation-related effects (start of effects) to the occurrence of these effect reception periods. In addition, it is desirable to set such that the effect reception period is generated for the same time, regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In addition, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as specific operation-related effects, and an effect reception period in which a specific effect (operation effect) can be generated depending on which of these effect modes the effect is performed. The ratio set for the specific operation means of the plurality of operation means may be different. The ratio may be 100% or 0%.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes and the other examples thereof, the operation is not performed based on the operation on the operation means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect. When operating the operating means on the side (FIG. 169 (e), etc.), control is performed to return the operating means on the non-operated side to the initial position after a lapse of a predetermined time based on the time when the operation is performed. You can However, from when the operation means is not operated until the operation means on the non-operated side is operated, depending on which timing in the production reception period is operated until the operation is ended. It is desirable to have different time lengths.

  That is, when the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect is operated, the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related effect should be operated as the remaining time of the effect reception period is short. It can be said that there is a high possibility that the player has a conflict as to whether or not the operating means on the side not shown in the specific operation-related effect should be operated. Therefore, depending on which timing of the performance acceptance period the operation is performed (depending on the possibility of conflict), the operation means on the side not operated is operated and then the operation is ended. Until the time (possible that the performance reception was performed and the performance during operation was executed even if the operating means on the side indicated by the specific operation-related performance was operated) If the time length of appealing to the player) is made different, it becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game favorably.

  In addition, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, if none of the plurality of operation means provided for the effect is operated, the plurality of operation means provided for the effect when the effect acceptance period ends. May be all operated.

  In addition, from the time when the specific operation-related effect is started until the effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.) is displayed, the side with high expectation as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. You may make it perform the predetermined effect which suggests the ratio of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) displayed. The movable body effect may be performed as the predetermined effect, but in this case, the specific movable object that operates based on the effect reception within the effect reception period after the specific operation-related effect is performed (here, , A specific decorative member SDY) is operated so that the specific movable body can be operated more reliably based on the production reception within the production reception period after the specific operation-related production is performed. It is desirable to enable it.

  In addition, from the start of a specific operation-related effect to the display of an effect result (button image BTG, sword decoration image SYG, etc.), it corresponds to any one of the images that can appear in those effect results. An operation opportunity may be given to a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410). According to such a configuration, for example, a specific operation as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is used to generate an effect reception period regarding a specific effect (an effect such as operating the specific decoration member SDY) While the related effect is being performed, the effect acceptance period is generated only for one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operating means. As a result, it is possible to generate a special effect mode as if the effect was shown and the effect was finished even though it was in the middle of the specific operation-related effect. It becomes possible to maintain the interest of the game while playing. In addition, when an operation on one side (for example, the operation button 410) of those operation means is received while a specific operation-related effect is being performed, a predetermined effect is performed based on the effect reception. Therefore, it is desirable to suggest the proportion of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) on the side of high expectation displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  Here, as the above-mentioned specific operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the execution of the specific operation-related effect, among the plurality of operation means (for example, the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001), the degree of expectation is relatively high. It is desirable to use the operation means on the lower side (for example, the operation button 410) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game when the player recognizes that it was in the middle of a specific operation-related effect. .

  Further, in the middle of performing the above-mentioned specific operation-related effect for a plurality of operation means, if the effect reception period is generated only for the operation button 410 of those operation means, within the effect reception period When the operation button 410 is operated in, a special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, a plurality of operation means (for example, Regardless of whether the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001) appears as the effect result, the degree of expectation for granting the privilege may be the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to lose the performance as the specific operation-related effect from the start of the effect of the specific operation-related effect until the effect result is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when an operation opportunity is given to the operation means having a relatively low expectation. However, when the special operation effect is executed, the special operation effect is not executed, and the privilege is given more than when the operation opportunity is given to the operation means with the higher expectation among the plurality of operation means. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

  In addition, in each of the above-mentioned effect reception periods, when a player operates, the effect is usually generated based on the operation, but the effect reception period elapses even if such an operation is not performed. It may be possible to set an automatic button effect state, which will be described later, in which control is performed to start the same effect as when the operation was performed earlier. According to such an automatic button effect state, since the effect at the time of operation is generated even if the operation is not performed each time the effect acceptance period occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to forgetting the operation. Become. Then, when the specific operation-related effect is performed while the automatic button effect state is set as described above, in the case where the effect acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the effect. Even if there is, the same operating effect as when the operating means is operated is executed without operating the operating means on the corresponding side within those effect acceptance periods.

  However, even when it is set to the automatic button effect state described later, the effect acceptance period is only for the operation button 410 of those operation means in the middle of the specific operation-related effect being performed. If the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period, it is desirable that the special operation effect is not executed (the automatic button function does not function). After that, even if a performance acceptance period for any of the plurality of operation means occurs as a result of the specific operation-related performance being performed, the corresponding operation means is operated within the performance acceptance period. It is desirable that the same effect at the time of operation as when the operation means is operated is executed (the automatic button function works) without doing so. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the player is in the middle of performing a specific operation-related effect depending on whether or not the automatic button function works. It is expected to suppress the decrease of

  It should be noted that the setting change related to ON / OFF of the automatic button effect state can be performed not only during the period in which the symbol variation is not performed by operating the operation button 410, but also during the period in which the symbol variation is performed. It is desirable that For example, if the operation button 410 is operated when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 does not occur when the automatic button effect state is in the off state, the automatic button effect state can be set and changed from the off state to the on state. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs when the effect state is on and the operation button 410 is operated within the effect acceptance period, the on-operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed and the automatic button effect state is changed. It is possible to change the setting from the on state to the off state. However, since it is considered that there may be a case where the player wants to generate an on-operation effect while the automatic button effect state is kept on, for example, the automatic button effect state is set to the on state. During the performance acceptance period for the operation button 410 at this time, when the operation button 410 as well as the operation means different from the operation button 410 is enabled and the operation is performed on the different operation means, Unlike the case where the operation button 410 is operated, it is desirable that the effect being executed be changed while the automatic button effect state is maintained in the ON state. At this time, it is more desirable to generate the same operation effect as when the operation button 410 is operated.

  The operation mode may be different when the automatic button effect state is changed from the off state to the on state and when it is changed from the on state to the off state.

  Further, in the above-described second and third effect modes, and other examples thereof, as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect, the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is imitated. Although the sword decoration images SYG are displayed while the operation opportunities corresponding to them are given, the present invention is not limited to this. That is, two different display modes (first display mode and second display mode) are prepared, and when the first display mode of these display modes is displayed, an operation opportunity (effect reception) is displayed on the operation button 410. If the operation opportunity (effect reception period) is given to the sword ornament 5001 when the second display mode is displayed, the first display mode and the second display mode Any display content may be adopted as.

  For example, in the above-described second and third effect modes, instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 169 (d) and 173 (e), the effect image CG shown in FIG. 176 (a) (first Display mode), and instead of the effect images shown in FIGS. 170 (g) and 174 (h), the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b) is displayed. Good. According to such a configuration, while the specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect portion and the other background image (the portion that was displayed before the specific operation-related effect was started) Both of them are suddenly replaced with an effect image CG (first display mode) or an effect image TG (second display mode) as an effect result of the specific operation-related effect (substantially the entire effect in the display area is 169 (d), 170 (g), 173 (e), and 174 (h), the partial display mode (button image BTG, sword) is replaced. Unlike the case where the decoration image SYG) appears, the effect display related to the addition of the operation opportunity is displayed using almost the entire display area (until the other effect images such as the background part that may be expected to be hidden are not displayed). By being done So it is expected to improve the game playability for work.

  It should be noted that in the effect image CG (first display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (a), the first image holding the shield (the button image BTG representing the operation button 410) that incorporates the operation button 410 into the design. A character is displayed, and in the effect image TG (second display mode) shown in FIG. 176 (b), the sword (sword decoration image SYG) that holds the sword decoration 5001 is held. The second character is displayed so as to implicitly indicate which operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) should be operated. As described above, as the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode), it is not necessary to prepare the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 itself as an effect image. It is desirable to display as an effect image that incorporates at least part of the shape and design of these operating means.

  Further, regarding the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG (second display mode) using the entire display area in this way, the effect image CG (first display mode) and the effect image TG. You may make it also perform the effect which suggests a different expectation degree according to which of the (second display modes) is displayed. For example, when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears, it is suggested that the degree of expectation for granting the privilege is higher than when the effect image CG (first display mode) appears. In addition, a plurality of effect modes (color differences, etc.) are prepared as effect images CG (first display mode) and effect images TG (second display mode), depending on which of these effect modes is displayed. It may be possible to suggest the degree of expectation. In this case, even if the effect image CG (first display mode) appears, when it is displayed in a specific display mode, the expectation level is higher than when the effect image TG (second display mode) appears. You can

  Further, with respect to the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and displayed as the effect result (it is desirable that the effect situation is relatively high in expectations), When the operation-related effects are displayed without being executed (for example, after a precursor effect described later, which is not a specific operation-related effect is executed) (the effect status is preferably relatively low in expectation), There may be. In this case, for example, when a specific operation-related effect is executed and the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed as the effect result, only the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means is effected. While the reception period is generated, the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing the below-described predictive effect that is not the specific operation-related effect). When displayed, in addition to the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG, another effect reception period not corresponding to the button image BTG (for example, the sword decoration body 5001) May be generated. According to such a configuration, even when the button image BTG appears in the effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, the specific operation-related effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to add an interesting effect to the operation, which is different from the case where the button image BTG appears in the production situation with a relatively high degree of expectation, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Another operating means may be an operating means different from the sword decoration 5001.

  In the case where the button image BTG appears in a relatively low-expectation production state in which no specific operation-related production is executed, an operation is performed on another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG within the production reception period. Is received, the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, and when the special operation effect is executed, “a specific operation-related effect is executed and relatively. It is desirable to suggest that the production situation has a higher expectation than in the production situation in which the sword decoration image SYG appears in the production situation with a high expectation. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  Here, when the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the degree of expectation is relatively low, the operation means (operation button) corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period. 410) is operated, the effect reception period for another operation means which is occurring at the same time is also ended so that the special operation effect is not executed, and the operation means (operation button 410) is operated. It is desirable that the performance at the time of operation is executed.

  On the other hand, in the case where the button image BTG appears in an effect situation where the specific operation-related effect is not executed and the expectation is relatively low, what is the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG within the effect acceptance period? When another operation means is operated, the effect reception period for the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is also ended so that the special operation effect is executed when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. desirable. In this case, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, the special operation effect is not executed, and instead, the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is not operated, and the operation is performed. Despite the operation of the operation means other than the operation means, the operation effect when the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is operated may be executed.

  When a specific operation-related effect is executed when the automatic button effect state is set, the side corresponding to either the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG as a result of the effect. Even if the effect reception period occurs for the operation means, the same operation effect as when the operation means is operated is executed within the effect reception period without operating the corresponding operation means. It is desirable to do so (the automatic button function works). However, when the button image BTG appears without executing a specific operation-related effect when the above-described automatic button effect state is set, an operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the button image BTG is displayed. Even when the effect reception period is generated for both the operation means and the operation means other than the operation means, the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG can be operated even if no operation is performed. It is desirable that only the same operation effect as when it is operated is executed, and the special operation effect that can appear only when another operation means that does not correspond to the button image BTG is operated is not executed.

  However, within the effect reception period, before the specific timing at which the operation effect (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) appears by the automatic button function, another operation When the operation means is operated and the predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the special operation effect is performed in response to the effect reception, and it is determined that the specific timing has arrived. Also, it is desirable that the effect at the time of operation (effect when the operation means corresponding to the button image BTG is operated) does not appear. In this case, the above-mentioned automatic button function does not substantially function during the production reception period, but the automatic button production state is continued in the ON state even after the production reception period ends. Is desirable.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG may be reversed, and then each effect described above (operation effect, automatic button function, etc.) may be applied. That is, in this case, in the case where the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect). If the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed without executing the specific operation-related effect (for example, after executing a precursor effect described below that is not the specific operation-related effect), In addition to the operation means (sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG, an effect reception period is generated for another operation means (for example, the operation button 410) not corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Becomes

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in other examples thereof, as a result of the effect in which the specific operation-related effect is performed, “a button image BTG (first display mode) in which the operation button 410 is used”, or If any of the “sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) showing the sword decoration 5001” is displayed, and if the effect reception is made by the operating means on the displayed side, the relative To the first operation effect (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY operates) that is the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is high, and the effect content that suggests that the expectation degree is relatively low. It is possible to cause any of the second operation effects (for example, an effect mode in which the specific decoration member SDY does not operate) that has been set to appear. That is, in this case, when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed, the expectation is relatively high at a higher rate than when the button image BTG (first display mode) is displayed. The first operation effect, which is the effect content that suggests, is executed. However, when the first operation-time effect is executed based on the effect reception within the effect reception period that occurs after the specific operation-related effect, the first operation-time effect is the button image BTG (first Display mode) is displayed based on the reception of the effect on the operation button 410 when the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed. It is desirable to suggest the same degree of expectation when executed based on. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, a case where a production image (button image BTG (first display mode)) on the side with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed as the production result of the specific operation-related production is displayed. However, as long as the first operation effect is executed based on the acceptance of the effect, the effect image on the side with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the effect of the specific operation-related effect (sword decoration) Compared with the case where the image SYG (second display mode)) is displayed, no demerit is produced in terms of the effect result, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the above-described timer effect (FIG. 118), "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" can be set as the effect target (one of the plurality of effect modes that are timer targets). That is, in the timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means" is the production target, when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, "0"), the operation opportunity is soon given to the operation means. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the effect during operation. In this case, in the "operation opportunity for the operation means" prepared as a candidate for the effect object of the timer effect, when the operation for the operation means is performed, it is possible to obtain an effect result that is advantageous to the player according to the result of the predetermined effect lottery. Make sure that any of the unfavorable performance results can appear. However, when the "operation opportunity for the operating means" is given as the effect target of the timer effect, the ratio of the effect result that is advantageous to the player is higher than when the timer effect is not applied. Is more desirable. The percentage may be 100%.

  In this regard, when an effect pattern in which a timer effect is executed, in which "giving an operation opportunity to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001)" is executed, the "operation opportunity for the operation means" to be the effect object is displayed. A specific operation-related effect using "grant" may be further performed. That is, in this case, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), the sword decoration image SYG appears and an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001. Before the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears will be executed.

  With such a configuration, the timer effect and the specific operation-related effect are executed for the same effect, respectively, so that an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001). It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when played.

  However, in this case, two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) may be simultaneously developed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) until immediately before that. , It is difficult to understand which production should be watched, and the attention is distracted, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may decrease.

  Therefore, when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001), as described below with reference to FIG. 177. , Until the count value of the specific timer effect is executed and the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count is “0”), the “specific operation-related effect” is in an unexecuted state, and the count value is It is desirable that the "specific operation-related effect" is started after the value reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0").

  FIG. 177 is a diagram for explaining an example of effects when a specific timer effect and a specific operation-related effect are respectively executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001). The following timer effect corresponds to the above-mentioned notice timer effect, and is executed as a result of performing various processes according to it.

  177 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment when the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

  177 (b) is an effect that the timer effect has been started (countdown display here) with a specific numerical value (here, "3") during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 177 (a). It shows the situation. In the effect situation shown in FIG. 177 (b), the "specific operation-related effect" is not yet executed, and it is unclear which effect the timer effect is intended for. There is.

  That is, in the timer effect according to this effect example, first of all, the count value is set to a predetermined value (while it remains unclear which effect of a plurality of timer target effect candidates prepared is being executed. Here, the count "0" is reached and is displayed. Then, after "0 (predetermined value)" is displayed as the count value, the "specific operation-related effect" is started as shown in FIG. 177 (d). At the time when the "specific operation-related effect" is started, the count value is not even "0" and is hidden.

  According to such a timer effect, after the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the button image BTG (first display mode) and the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) are displayed. A specific operation-related effect regarding which is displayed is executed. That is, in this case, although two different effects (timer effect, specific operation-related effect) are executed for one effect target (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001), those effects are time-consuming. Since it is possible to avoid overlapping in series, it is possible to enjoy different effects.

  However, if the count display of the timer effect reaches the predetermined value (here, the count “0”) when the specific operation-related effect is not executed, the timer effect targets which effect. It is not possible to recognize whether the game was played as a game, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), between the time when the count display reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”) and the specific operation-related effect is started, An effect that suggests the type of effect (giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001) that is the target of the timer effect is performed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the effect display device 1600 first displays “nata”. Therefore, it is suggested that this is a timer effect for which "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by" sword "") to the sword ornament 5001 "is an effect target.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the effect image (sword decoration image SYG (second display mode)) corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed ("Sword sword" It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because the "specific operation-related effect" is started in the effect situation in which the player has recognized that "the operation opportunity by" is given). become. In addition, when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the count display (count “0”) is displayed when the “sword” is displayed on the effect display device 1600. May be continuously displayed.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count “0”), the sword decoration 5001 performs a predetermined operation (here, It is configured to perform a reciprocating motion in the up-and-down direction, and this also means that "giving an operation opportunity (operation opportunity by a" sword "") to the sword decoration 5001 is a target object of the timer effect. I try to suggest.

  The predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is not only displayed when the timer effect is "giving an operation opportunity to the sword decoration 5001" as an effect target, but also when another effect is an effect target. It may be performed when is zero. That is, in this case, the predetermined operation by the sword ornament 5001 does not function as an effect that suggests the type of effect that the timer effect is an effect target, but as an effect that suggests that the count display has become 0. Becomes In this sense, the predetermined operation performed by the sword decoration 5001 is after the count display becomes 0, before the effect that is the effect target is started, and the timer effect is the effect object. It is set to be executed at the same time as the timing at which the effect that suggests the effect type that is present is started or before this, and during the execution state, the effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target is also being executed. It can be said that it is important to be done.

FIG. 177 (d) shows an effect situation in which the effect of "specific operation-related effect" is started.
In this effect situation, as described above, not only is the count value already hidden, but also the effect suggesting the effect type targeted by the timer effect is also hidden. In addition, the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 is also completed. However, it is important to execute the effect that suggests the effect type that the timer effect is the effect target and the predetermined operation by the sword decoration 5001 before the specific operation-related effect is started, and The execution state of the operation-related effect may be continued after the effect is started.

  Then, after the "specific operation-related effect" is started in this way, the effect is advanced in the order of FIG. 177 (e) to (h), but regarding the effect contents, FIG. 168 (c) ), FIG. 170 (g) to (i), or FIG. 172 (d), and FIG. 174 (h) to (j), the contents are almost the same as those described with reference to FIG.

  Note that as the timer effect performed in association with the specific operation-related effect, one of the timer effect shown in FIG. 177 and a timer effect different from the timer effect is based on the result of the predetermined effect lottery. It may be made executable. That is, in another timer effect, the point that the specific operation-related effect is started after the timer effect is started is the same as the timer effect shown in FIG. 177, but the specific operation-related effect is effected. The count value does not reach the predetermined value (here, “0”) at the start timing (strictly, slightly before this), so that the specific operation-related effect continues even after the effect is started. It has become. Then, in this case, regardless of whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the privilege granting ( The expectation for big hits is becoming the same. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  According to such another timer effect, the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, but at the time when the effect situation in which the effect is simultaneously advanced appears, the specific operation-related effect of the specific operation-related effect is increased. Whether the button image BTG (first display mode) or the sword decoration image SYG (second display mode) is shown as the effect result, the effect values thereof are the same (the degree of expectation for privilege grant (big hit) is the same). Same). That is, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself can be substantially lost, even if the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected, any effect It is possible to avoid the situation in which it is not possible to understand whether or not to pay attention to and distracting attention. However, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game, when the effect pattern in which the specific operation-related effect and the timer effect are simultaneously effected appears, the privilege is granted more than when the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177 appears. It is desirable to increase such expectations.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 177 (c), when the count display of the timer effect reaches a predetermined value (here, the count "0"), first, a display indicating the type of effect target on the effect display device 1600 ( However, the display suggesting such an effect target may be performed even when another effect mode is selected as the timer effect. However, among a plurality of effects that can be targeted for a timer, when a specific effect is targeted for a timer, it is not necessary to perform a display that suggests which effect the timer effect is targeted for.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and the other examples thereof, before the operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001, the operation opportunity is given to any of those operation means. It was decided to perform a specific operation-related effect as to whether or not it is given. However, prior to the operation opportunity being given to the operation button 410 (prior to the effect reception period occurring), the first precursor effect that does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Does not appear, or does not appear when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 prior to the operation opportunity being given to the sword ornament 5001 (prior to the production acceptance period being generated). You may make it possible for an effect pattern to appear, such as performing a second omen effect. When performing these aura effects (first aura effect, second aura effect), the time required for the effect (aura effect) is set to be shorter than the time required for a specific operation-related effect, and It is desirable to lower the degree of expectation of the privilege grant when the effect appears in order to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Here, as the indication effect, for example, before the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) showing the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given (for example, the button image BTG) appears, for example, fog is displayed. A specific image is displayed to express the state of being crowded in. Next, while the specific image is being displayed, the button image BTG is displayed at a position that is difficult to be visually recognized by overlapping with the specific image (a position on the layer, which is a rear side of the specific image). After that, the button image BTG is gradually changed by gradually changing the specific image to non-display (increasing the transmittance, decreasing the area in which the specific image is displayed, etc.). It is possible to perform it as an effect to be exposed to the outside. It should be noted that an example of a specific depiction mode relating to such a sign presentation will be described later.

  Then, at this time, if the button image BTG is displayed in any of a plurality of display modes (for example, a blue button image BTG, a red button image BTG, etc.) with different expectations regarding bonus grant (big hit), It is possible to have an interest as to which display mode the button image BTG appears as the precursor effect in which the button image BTG is gradually exposed.

  It should be noted that the first omen effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and no operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration body 5001, and an operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword decoration is shown. A second aura effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001, and the specific operation-related effect that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 It is important that and are executed as different effect contents. Moreover, it is desirable that not only the contents of the effect but also the time required for the effect be different.

  Such a precursor effect means the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" in the sense that "when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means, it is performed as an effect related to the giving of the operation opportunity". It can be said that it is a higher-level concept including. As for the aura effect including the “specific operation-related effect”, as described below with reference to FIG. 178, a plurality of effect modes are prepared, and the aura effect is performed in any of these effect modes. By suggesting how long the effect reception period that occurs corresponding to the aforesaid effect is, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the aforesaid effect is performed. It is more desirable for the purpose.

  FIG. 178 is a time chart for explaining an example of effect contents for each type of effect when a plurality of types (indication effect A, B1, B2, C) are prepared as the aura effect.

  First, in the example (symptom effect A) shown in FIG. 178 (a), when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, the indication effect A is started. This precursor effect A is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" that indicates which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity. When A is executed, an effect acceptance period (effective period) T1 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect A) shown in FIG. 178 (a), when the predictive effect A is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T1 will be generated.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T1, an instruction display (a character display such as “press”) or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed to prompt the specific operation means on the side indicated as the result of the precursor effect A to perform an operation. ) Is displayed. Then, when the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T1, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIG. 167 (d), (f) or , FIG. 169 (e), FIG. 170 (h), FIG. 173 (f), FIG. 174 (i), and the like) are executed, and a process of ending the period T1 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  On the other hand, in the example (precursor effect B1) shown in FIG. 178 (b), not when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started, but when the second predetermined time has elapsed, The indication effect B1 is to be started. This precursor effect B1 is not "a specific operation-related effect", but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) is given (a specific operation). It is not executed when an operation opportunity is given to the means), and when the precursor effect B1 is executed, an effect reception period (effective period) T2 for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410). Is to occur.

  In the effect reception period (effective period) T2, an instruction display (a character display such as "press" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) that prompts the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B1 to operate is displayed. To be done. Then, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T2, a predetermined operation time effect different from the above-described operation time effect is executed based on the effect reception. At the same time, processing for ending the period T2 at that time is performed.

  In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1 is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and 178 (b), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Effective period) T1 is generated as a period having a different time length (here, a shorter time length). This suggests how long the effect reception period generated corresponding to the aforesaid effect has, depending on which mode (aura effect A, aura effect B1) is used. As a result, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the interest of the game when the portent production is performed.

  On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect B2) shown in FIG. 178 (c), when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the symbol variation was started, the indication effect B2 is started. Like the precursor effect B1, the precursor effect B2 is not a “specific operation-related effect” but is executed prior to the operation opportunity when a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is given an operation opportunity. (Not executed when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means). However, when the indication effect B2 is executed, the effect reception period (specific operation means (for example, operation button 410)) having a time length different from the effect reception period (effective period) T2 corresponding to the indication effect B1. Performance reception period) T3 is generated.

  Even in the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") for prompting an operation to the specific operation means corresponding to the precursor effect B2 or a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed. Display) is displayed. Further, when the effect reception is performed by an operation on a specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T3, an operation time effect different from the case where the precursor effects A and B1 are executed based on the effect reception. Is executed, and processing for ending the period T3 at that time is performed.

  In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T3 corresponding to the indication effect B2 is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (c), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It occurs as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, the same time as when the specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is executed, even though the predictive effect B2 with a relatively low degree of expectation related to the privilege grant (big hit) is executed. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (effective period) T3 having a length will occur, an effect situation as if a specific operation-related effect was performed is created, and the indication effect B2 is It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when it is played. In this case, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for award is different when the production reception period (effective period) T2 occurs and when the production reception period (effective period) T3 occurs.

  In addition, regarding the indication effects B1 and B2, the same effect form appears from the start of the effect until a timing in the middle of the effect, and a different effect mode appears after the timing elapses. The operation means may be provided with a performance property regarding which of the performance reception period (effective period) T2 and the performance reception period (effective period) T3. However, it is not always necessary to have such performance, and even when the precursor effects B1 and B2 are started, the performance is started when a different time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. Alternatively, the indication effects B1 and B2 may have different time lengths.

  On the other hand, in the example (symptom effect C) shown in FIG. 178 (d), the indication effect C is started when the third predetermined time has elapsed since the symbol variation was started. This precursor effect C is executed as the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect" that indicates which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. When C is executed, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 is generated for the specific operation means on the side indicated as the effect result. That is, in the example (precursor effect C) shown in FIG. 178 (d), when the predictor effect C is performed, the same time length is set regardless of which operation means is given an operation opportunity. The owned reception period (effective period) T4 will be generated.

  Even during the production reception period (effective period) T4, an instruction display (a character display such as "press") that prompts an operation to the specific operation means on the side shown as the result of the precursor production C, or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production reception period ) Is displayed. When the effect reception is performed by the operation on the specific operation means within the effect reception period (effective period) T4, based on the effect reception, the above-described operation time effect (for example, FIGS. 167 (d) and (f) or , 169 (e), 170 (h), 173 (f), 174 (i), and the like) are executed, and a process of ending the period T4 at that time is performed. It is supposed to be done.

  In this respect, in this effect example, the effect reception period (effective period) T4 corresponding to the indication effect C is, as shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (d), the effect reception period corresponding to the indication effect A. (Valid period) It is designed to occur as a period having the same time length as T1. That is, in this case, even if the length of time required for the indication effect C itself is shorter than that of the indication effect A, if the indication effect is executed as the above-described “specific operation-related effect”. Since it is suggested that an effect reception period (effective period) T4 having the same time length as in the case of aura effect A will be suggested, the amusement interest when the aura effect C is performed is preferably maintained. You will be able to.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 178, the effect acceptance period is obtained by associating the types of the indication effects A, B1, B2, and C with the length of the effect acceptance period (effective period) in a one-to-one relationship. The length of (effective period) is suggested. However, the effect reception period (effective period) is set so that the ratio of occurrence of a specific effect reception period having a predetermined time length (for example, the effect reception period T2) is different for each type of precursor effect. ) May be suggested.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is displayed. When the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, an effect image (for example, button image BTG) imitating the specific operation means is displayed. At this time, the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) is displayed so as to show the same state as the state of the specific operation means at that time. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 173 (e), the operation button 410 is in the state of being operated at the operation position, but the button image BTG is also displayed as being in the state of being operated at the operation position accordingly. In the example shown in (h), the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being operated at the operating position (extracting state), but the sword decoration image SYG is also displayed as a state of operating at the operating position (extracting state). Has been done.

  However, the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given after the specific operation-related effect is performed is displayed as the effect image (for example, the button image BTG) which is reproduced as it looks. If this happens, even if a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed, the range of the effect will be significantly narrowed when displaying the result of the effect, and the enjoyment of the game will decline. I'm worried.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect is performed, as described below with reference to FIGS. 179 and 180, an effect image (for example, a button image) imitating a specific operation means (for example, an operation button 410) is performed. Regarding BTG), it is desirable that the state of the specific operating means at that time is not necessarily expressed as it is, but is displayed as a state different from that of the specific operating means at that time.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram showing effect examples of effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed and effect contents when a predictive effect is performed as a specific operation-related effect.

  First, FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (c) show the effect contents when a precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the effect state, as shown in FIG. 179 (a), the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 only correspond to the sword ornament 5001 side, not the "specific operation-related effect". If the precursor effect is executed, it becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword ornament 5001. In the indication effect (the same applies to the indication effect in another example), if a predetermined display corresponding to the operation means on the side where the operation opportunity is soon given is given, an effect image of the operation means is displayed. Need not always be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the sword decoration body 5001 will soon be given an operation opportunity even when the sword decoration image SYG displayed during the production acceptance period is not yet displayed. Will be said.

  Note that in the precursor effect shown in FIG. 179 (a), the sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with relatively low expectations and the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with relatively high expectations. And are displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the effect contents regarding which of them is finally left in the display area are displayed. Therefore, in this presentation situation, although it can be recognized that an operation opportunity will soon be given to the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG has a low expectation or the sword decoration image SYGa has a low expectation. It is kept secret which of the high sword decoration images SYGb is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (b) shows an effect result in which the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura is finally left. As a result, the sword decoration body 5001 is in a relatively high expectation situation. It will be suggested that a performance reception period will occur. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (b), the final effect indicating that there is no change from the sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura to another effect image (sword decoration image SYGa or the like) is displayed. ..

  FIG. 179 (c) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display for prompting the sword decoration 5001 to operate (“push in”). Or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword state to the sword removal state, and the sword decoration image SYGb is also extracted from the sword state from this state. I am trying to change the state. When the production reception is made within the production reception period, the predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration 5001 is in the sword storage state. Maintained. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the indication effect corresponding to only one of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is performed, when the effect reception period occurs, the operation means on the operation target side (here, the operation means). , The effect image (here, the sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the sword decoration body 5001) is displayed in the same state (extracting sword state) as the operation means on the operation target side (here, the sword decoration body 5001). Become so. In particular, in the effect reception period according to this effect example, the effect image (here, sword decoration image SYGb) imitating the operation means on the operation target side, and the operation means on the operation target side (here, sword decoration body 5001) Are both stopped at a predetermined position.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (g) show the effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as the precursor effect. For example, now, in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Suppose you are in a situation. Then, in the production state, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), when the precursor production as the "specific operation-related production" is started, which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is started? It becomes possible to recognize that an operation opportunity will soon be given to something.

  FIG. 179 (e) shows an effect situation in which the precursor effect as the “specific operation related effect” progresses and the effect result appears. In this presentation situation, the button image BTG is not displayed and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 as a result of the "specific operation-related effect". Has been done. In the display shown in FIG. 179 (e), the final effect indicating that the sword decoration image SYG is not changed to another effect image (button image BTG or the like) is displayed.

  FIG. 179 (f) shows an example of an effect when the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, and when the effect reception period occurs, an instruction display (“push in” is pressed to the sword decoration 5001 for an operation. Or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the production acceptance period) is displayed. Further, when the production acceptance period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs, the sword decoration 5001 changes its state from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state, and the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the sword cutting state.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is maintained as the display content when the sword decoration 5001 is in the extraction state during the performance reception period (sword decoration image SYG). While the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously displaced upward in the period until the effect reception period ends, the sword ornament body 5001 is in a different state. I am trying to do it.

  In the production reception period, regardless of the position of the sword decoration 5001, the production reception will be performed when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state. A predetermined operation effect is performed based on the reception, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword storage state. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

  With such a configuration, when the effect reception period occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one side of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG continues to be used for the effect. On the other hand, the other side does not operate and can play a role of accurately transmitting the current situation. In the examples of FIGS. 179 (f) and 179 (g), the sword decoration image SYG is stopped and the sword decoration body 5001 is continuously operated during the effect reception period, but the invention is not limited to this. The decoration image SYG may be continuously operated and the sword decoration 5001 may be stopped.

  As described above, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, both the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed during the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (c)) that occurs without performing the specific operation-related effect. In contrast to the stop state, in the effect reception period (FIG. 179 (f)) that occurs after a specific operation-related effect, one of the sword decoration 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG is stopped. On the other side, this is kept in a dynamic state so that it can be used for performance. Therefore, when a performance acceptance period occurs after a specific operation-related performance, the range of the performance can be widened, and amusement of the game can be favorably maintained.

  In particular, even if the operation button 410 itself is not the operation means to which the driving force is applied by the control of the peripheral control MPU 1511a, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs through the specific operation-related effect, the operation button 410 is operated. While the button 410 itself is in a stopped state, if the button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 is made to be a dynamic state and the description is continued, a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is expected to greatly improve the width of the effect when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs.

  It should be noted that either a sword decoration image SYGa wearing a blue aura with a relatively low expectation or a sword decoration image SYGb wearing a red aura with a relatively high expectation is displayed as a sword decoration image SYG. The method may be adopted not only when a predictive effect that is not a specific operation-related effect is performed, but also when a specific operation-related effect as a predictive effect is performed. That is, in this case, in the specific operation-related effect, either one of the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 and the sword embellishment image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 appears in addition to either When the effect image (for example, button image BTG) appears, which of the display mode with a relatively high degree of expectation and the display mode with a relatively low degree of expectation is displayed for the effect image (button image BTG) It will be possible to further provide the directivity of. This method may be appropriately adopted not only in the effect example of FIG. 179, but also in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof.

  Then, in the case of giving such two performances to a specific operation-related effect, first, as a result of the specific operation-related effect, which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG is to be displayed. It is in a state where it can be seen or recognized, and it is unknown whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the appearing side is highly expected (for example, the effect image imitating the operation means is outlined and only the outline is displayed. Recognizable display state, etc.) will appear as the production progresses. Then, after this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the effect image on the side that appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the whiteout of the effect image imitating the operation means). It is desirable that the states be released so that the colors can be confirmed) appear in sequence by further production progress. In addition, when the button image BTG is displayed through such production progress, under a predetermined condition, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode has a high expectation (for example, operating means In such a state that the button image BTG is further hidden after the white state of the effect image produced is canceled) and that the sword decoration image SYG appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. Yes, and it is unclear whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined and only the outline can be recognized). Therefore, a production pattern for further producing production may be generated. After this, a state in which it is possible to recognize whether or not the display mode of the sword decoration image SYG that appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect has a high degree of expectation (for example, the sword decoration image SYG is outlined). To make it possible to check the color). In this case, when the display mode when the button image BTG is displayed is the display mode on the side with high expectations (for example, red), the display mode on the side with low expectations (for example, blue) is more than that when it is. Also, it is desirable to increase the rate at which such further production progress occurs.

  FIGS. 180 (a) to 180 (e) are diagrams showing another example of the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (d) to 179 (g) as effect contents when a specific operation-related effect is performed as a precursor effect. That is, in FIG. 180 (a), the indication effect as the "specific operation-related effect" is started, but in the indication effect, a shield (button image BTG) which is a model of the operation button 410 is held. A second character (effect image corresponding to the sword decoration body 5001) holding a first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) and a sword (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the sword decoration body 5001. And are facing each other, which suggests which operation button 410 or sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity depending on which of these characters is left in the display area. I am trying.

  FIG. 180 (b) shows an effect situation in which the effect result of the precursor effect as the “specific operation-related effect” appears. In this effect situation, the first character (effect image corresponding to the operation button 410) is not displayed and the second character (sword decoration is used) in order to suggest that an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. An effect image corresponding to the body 5001 is displayed. The display image shown in FIG. 180 (b) is substantially the same as the display image TG shown in FIG. 176 (b) (the instruction display prompting the sword ornament 5001 to be operated is hidden), and While the operation-related effect is being performed, both the effect portion (face-to-face character) and the other background image (the portion displayed before the specific operation-related effect is displayed) are The effect image (the display image shown in FIG. 180 (b)) as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect is suddenly replaced (substantially the entire effect in the display area is replaced).

  180 (c) to (e) show an example of an effect when the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 occurs, and when the effect acceptance period occurs, first, as shown in FIG. 180 (c). An instruction display (a character display such as "pushing in" or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed on the screen.

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the sword decoration body 5001 starts to move from the sword storage state to the sword extraction state when the production reception period occurs. As shown in FIG. 180 (d), the sword decoration 5001 completes the operation (movement) from the sword-putting state to the sword-cutting state only after a relatively short time has elapsed since the performance acceptance period was started. It is supposed to do. After that, as shown in FIG. 180 (e), the sword decoration 5001 is maintained in the extracted sword state until at least the effect reception period is completed, unless the player operates the sword decoration body 5001. The operation (operation from the sword cutting state to the sword cutting state) will be awaited.

  On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, as shown in FIGS. 180 (c) to (e), a movement (swing in the rotation direction) that is completely different from such movement (movement in the linear direction) of the sword decoration body 5001. The sword decoration image SYG continues to be displayed after the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the extracted state by the second character swinging down the sword decoration image SYG. It's designed to work. The sword decoration image SYG according to this effect example is a loop of a series of displays from the start (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) of the swing-down operation within the effect acceptance period. The process is repeated.

  However, even if this loop processing is performed, the bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period is not affected and the display change progresses by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time. Further, the sword decoration 5001 is also in the sword removal state while a series of displays from the start (FIG. 180 (c)) to the end (FIG. 180 (e)) of the swing-down operation are being performed. However, even if the loop processing is performed, it will not be affected by the loop processing and will be maintained in the unsheathed state. In addition, when the operation target accessory 141 is operated in the sword storage state within the production reception period, the production reception is performed, and a predetermined operation production is performed based on the production reception, and The loop processing is ended, the sword decoration image SYG is hidden, and the sword decoration body 5001 is maintained in the sword storage state. In addition, a process of ending the production reception period at that time is performed.

  According to such a configuration, when the precursor effect as the specific operation-related effect is performed, both the sword decoration body 5001 and the sword decoration image SYG will operate within the effect reception period. The motion modes (motion that accurately transmits the current situation (motion until moving to the operation position), loop motion used for performance) are different from each other, and the motion of the sword ornament 5001 ends. After that, the sword decoration image SYG continues its operation without ending. Thereby, when the effect reception period (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) that occurs after the specific operation-related effect occurs, the effect content of the specific operation-related effect continues until after the effect reception period occurs ( It becomes possible to broaden the range of the effect, such as allowing the background to be continued) to be executed, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the effect example shown in FIG. 180, the effect content (display in which characters face each other) that appeared when the precursor effect (FIG. 180 (a)) as the specific operation-related effect is being performed. The effect (FIGS. 180 (c) to (e)) when the effect reception period occurs is changed by changing both the background image and the background image. In particular, during the production acceptance period according to this production example, the special image (sword decoration image SYG) and the character (sword decoration image SYG) that are different from the operation means are specified while the dedicated background (full moon) is displayed. Since the display is performed during the reception period by dynamically displaying both the image and the image), it is possible to improve the production performance during the production reception period. In this sense, also in the indication effect, performing the effect using at least one of the effect image (sword decoration image SYG) imitating the operation means and the character is different from the indication effect and the effect in the effect reception period. It can be said that it is more desirable to have a dramatic connection between them so as to further improve the performance. Further, the dedicated background (full moon) may have a plurality of display modes with different expectations regarding privilege grant, and may be displayed in any of these display modes.

  In addition, in the signage effect as a specific operation-related effect and in the effect during the effect acceptance period, a plurality of effect modes are prepared as those effects, and the effect acceptance is performed depending on which of these effect modes appears. It may be possible to give a suggestion as to whether or not a mode having a high degree of expectation appears as an operation time effect when the effect reception is made during the period. The degree of expectation for privilege grant may be suggested using the background image that appears when the aura effect is performed.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 180, when the aura effect as a specific operation-related effect is being performed, the effect reception is performed by changing both the effect content and the background image that have appeared in the aura effect. It was decided to execute the effect within the period, but the above-mentioned precursor effect that is not a specific operation-related effect (for a specific operation means of a plurality of operation means (or in a specific operation mode of a plurality of operation modes ) When a special signage effect when an operation opportunity is given) is being performed, when the effect reception period occurs by changing both the effect contents and the background image that have appeared in the signage effect. You may make it perform an effect. In short, "it is possible to generate an operation-related effect (symptom effect) related to the operation on the operation means, and as the operation-related effect (symptom effect), the operation reception by the player is performed for the first effect. It is possible that at least a first operation-related effect and a second operation-related effect in which an effect reception for a second effect different from the first effect is made by an operation by the player, and is displayed in the first operation-related effect. The first operation promotion image that is displayed is displayed while the background image that has been displayed since the first operation promotion image is not being displayed yet is displayed. The second operation promotion image displayed in the effect is displayed in accordance with changing the background image to another background image when the second operation promotion image is not displayed yet. " As long as it was Tsu. Here, the first operation promoting image and the second operation promoting image do not have to be the same image, and for example, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG, the gauge display, or "press!" It is possible to appropriately employ such as displaying a comment. Further, the "first effect" and the "second effect" may be different post-operation effects, and, for example, as the "first operation-related effect in which the effect reception regarding the first effect is made", the effect reception It is possible to exemplify an effect as to which mode will appear as a conversation notice when the action is performed, and as the "second operation-related effect in which effect acceptance regarding the second effect is performed", effect acceptance is performed. It is possible to exemplify it as an effect as to whether or not the specific decoration member SDY operates when the above. At this time, regardless of which mode appears as a conversation notice, there is a relation that the ratio (including 100%) of the jackpot pattern is higher when the specific decoration member SDY is operated. It is desirable to do. Also, for the "second operation-related effect for which effect reception regarding the second effect is made", refer to FIG. 142, FIG. 212 to FIG. 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, FIG. 223, FIG. 250, FIG. It may be executed as one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described later. On the other hand, regarding the “first operation-related effect for which the effect reception regarding the first effect is performed”, the operation acceptance effect (without BGM suppression) described later with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, FIG. 224, FIG. May be performed as one of the above (operation reception effect). Moreover, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each other example of these operation reception productions mentioned later. In addition, the background image “continuous display” does not necessarily have to be a still image, and may be displayed as a moving image showing a river flowing or a duel between characters, It also includes what is displayed in such a manner that the range in which such a still image or a moving image is displayed is slid (displayed in such a manner that the coordinates move). That is, it can be said that the background image is “continuously displayed” if the displayed depiction content is displayed in a time series or a connection on the coordinates. On the other hand, “changing the background image into another background image” does not necessarily mean that the image is displayed by another image data or another layer. For example, the background image itself is time-series or coordinates. It includes those that are suddenly changed or replaced (switched) to "images having different forms (dedicated background images corresponding to the effect reception period)" that are not physically connected. In addition, a thing that is changed to a “black image” or replaced (switched) is also included. That is, it can be said that “a background image is changed to another background image” if there is no connection in terms of depiction content in terms of time series and coordinates before and after the change. In this way, in order to make it easier to recognize that the background image has changed, an effect image (blackout, whiteout, or the like) that hides the background image that has been displayed until then is displayed in the effect display device 1600. It is more preferable that the second operation promotion image is displayed together with a new background image after the display over a region (more preferably substantially the entire region) of at least half of the display region. The first operation-related effect and the second operation-related effect may be sequentially displayed within one variation pattern. As described above, the timing for changing the background image to another background image may be before the performance reception period occurs, or the performance reception period is generated including the timing when the performance reception period is generated. The timing may be set after the timing (for example, FIG. 180 (b) may be omitted and the production may progress from FIG. 180 (a) to FIG. 180 (c)).

  In addition, in the example of production shown in FIG. 180, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started after the production reception period has occurred, but the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 is started before the production reception period occurs. Alternatively, the operation of the sword decoration body 5001 started before the production reception period occurs is completed before the production reception period occurs (a role of accurately transmitting the current situation). The carried operation may be completed before the production acceptance period occurs and the stopped state may be maintained thereafter.

  Further, even when an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001), a background image is changed and a background image is changed when the production acceptance period occurs. The display may not be performed in some cases. In this case, when the display for changing the background image is performed when the effect reception period occurs, the degree of expectation for privilege granting is higher than that when the display for changing the background image is not performed when the effect reception period occurs. Is desirable.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect modes and other examples thereof, after a specific operation-related effect is performed, an operation on a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side suggested as a result of the effect is performed. When the effect reception is performed, the specific decoration member SDY (movable body provided on the game board 5 side) is operated as an operation effect based on the effect reception. At this time, for example, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 167 (d), FIG. 169 (e), and FIG. 170 (h), the sword ornament 5001 (or the operation button) is used as the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. 410) is also operated so as to improve the performance of the operation effect when a specific operation-related effect is passed. In this way, in order to improve the performance of the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed, the operation-time effect when the specific operation-related effect is passed depends on the result of the effect. Then, both the movable body provided on the game board 5 side and the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side (the game machine main body side) are activated, or a production situation at the time of success appears, or a movable body provided on the game board 5 side appears. While the production situation at the time of failure in which both the body and the movable body provided on the side of the door frame 3 do not operate is made to appear, the production at the time of operation (for example, a specific operation-related production performed without passing through a specific operation-related production). In the operation-time effect after the sign effect that is not the operation-related effect is performed), depending on the result of the effect, either the movable body provided on the game board 5 side or the movable body provided on the door frame 3 side. Only the operation of the successful production situation appears, game board 5 It is desirable that both the movable member provided in the movable body and the door frame 3 side provided to so appear produce situations of failure that does not operate.

  Further, in the above-described effect modes and the specific operation-related effects according to their different examples, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the result of the effect, the button image BTG is displayed as the result of the effect. The expectation of granting the privilege is higher than that. In this regard, when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 181 (a), the button is displayed in a mode in which a princess character is added (specific mode of effect). The image BTG may be displayed in some cases, and when the button image BTG is displayed in this mode, the degree of expectation of privilege granting is higher than when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect. By increasing the value, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the button image BTG is displayed as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect.

  In addition, the mode in which the princess character is displayed (specific effect mode) may be applied to the sword decoration image SYG as shown in FIG. 181 (b). In this case, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific presentation mode, it is desirable that the degree of expectation for privilege granting is higher than that in the normal mode.

  In addition, as an effect pattern that may appear as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect, the first effect pattern (FIG. 181 (a)) and a second effect pattern in which the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a specific effect mode (mode in which a princess character is displayed) as a result of performing a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 181 (b). )) And may be prepared respectively. Then, in this case, it is set that the degree of expectation for granting is the same when the first effect pattern appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect and when the second effect pattern appears. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide an interest as to which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, as well as the button image BTG and the sword. It is possible to provide a completely different fun such as whether or not a specific effect mode (mode in which the princess character is displayed) appears, regardless of which of the decorative images SYG appears. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, when such a specific effect mode (mode in which the princess character is displayed) can appear as a result of performing the specific operation-related effect, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, As shown in FIG. 181 (c), when the effect result of the specific operation-related effect (whether the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG appears) is not yet appearing in the particular effect mode. From (for example, when a particular operation-related effect is in the middle of the effect), this may be displayed in advance. According to such a configuration, although a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG appears, a specific effect mode (the princess character is displayed By the appearance of the mode), the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG have the same effect value (the same degree of expectation). In other words, in this case, since the performance of the specific operation-related effect itself is lost, such as "a sign effect by a princess character" despite the situation in which the specific operation-related effect is being performed. It is possible to provide a dramatic effect with a completely different purpose.

  In addition, in the sword decoration 5001 according to each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, the sword portion (handle 5012, blade 5011) of the sword decoration 5001 can be operated in the vertical direction. In addition to the first operation mode (first operation mode), as shown in FIG. 151, the second operation in which the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) of the sword ornament 5001 can be operated laterally. It is provided so as to have both modes (second operation modes). Therefore, in each of the above-described effect modes, and in another example thereof, which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 provided as one operation unit. The above-mentioned specific operation-related effect may be performed as the effect. The sword portion (handle portion 5012, blade portion 5011) and the sheath portion (sheath portion 5020) are all operably (operably) supported by one main body support portion (not shown) provided in the door frame 3, and Even if one side of the sword part (handle 5012, blade part 5011) and the sheath part (sheath part 5020) is in an operated (operated) state, the other side has a structure that can be operated (operated). Has been formed.

  However, when a specific operation-related effect is performed in such a mode, the operation mode is different regardless of which effect result appears, and it is not possible to perform an operation on the sword ornament 5001. Since there is no change, there is a concern that an operation error may occur on the player side. In particular, regardless of whether the operation opportunity is given to the first operation mode or the second operation mode, for example, the effect image (and its If the instruction display for prompting the operation) is displayed, the player may be more and more likely to make an operation error between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Become. In other words, in this case, while the remaining time of the performance acceptance period is gradually decreasing, let the player first perform an operation to correct the operation error, and then further perform the operation in the originally correct manner. It is difficult to say that, even if a specific operation-related effect with a relatively high degree of expectations is performed, if the effect reception period ends before the effect reception is made. , There is a concern that the interest in playing games may deteriorate.

  Further, the sword decoration 5001 has a mode of “moving in the vertical direction” by the sword part and a mode of “moving in the lateral direction” by the sheath part. In the operation unit that can provide the mode, if the wrong side is operated when the operation opportunity is given, it takes time to perform the proper side operation, and the performance acceptance period ends. Therefore, it can be said that the risk of losing the operation opportunity is increased.

  Therefore, when performing the specific operation-related effect as an effect as to which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 provided as one operation unit, As will be described below with reference to FIGS. 182 and 183, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, and the state of the operation error is corrected. Even if the originally correct operation is not performed, it is desirable that the effect reception is properly performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed.

  182 and 183 show an example of effects in the case where an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side in the effect pattern in which a specific operation-related effect is performed. It is a figure.

  FIG. 182 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the jackpot judgment in a state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

  182 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific operation-related effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 182 (a).

  Here, in the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b), the first effect in which the first operation mode for operating the sword portion of the sword decoration body 5001 from the sword removal state to the sword storage state is used. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the image OX and the second effect image TX that illustrates the second operation mode in which the sheath portion of the sword ornament 5001 is operated to move in the lateral direction are displayed. It is displayed at the same time to suggest that an operation opportunity by any of those operation modes will soon be ready for production reception. In this regard, in the first effect image OX, although the image part of the sword decoration 5001 that shows the sword part is displayed larger than the second effect image TX, the first effect image OX and the first effect image OX are not displayed. In each of the second effect image TX, the sword part is displayed as an image, and an operation error may occur between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

  In FIG. 182 (c), the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 182 (b) has progressed, and a first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode and a second operation image corresponding to the second operation mode. The effect image TX of is pressed against each other in the display area of the effect display device 1600, and an effect of pushing out the other party from the display area is performed. When the effect result (first effect result) in which the first effect image OX is left appears, an effect acceptance period for the first operation mode occurs, and the effect result in which the second effect image TX is left (second effect). When the result) appears, a performance acceptance period for the second operation mode is generated.

  Note that in the specific operation-related effect according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182 (c), when the first effect image OX is left in a dominant state, a display such as "push-in" is visible. When the situation is dominant in which the second effect image TX is left, the display such as “slide” can be visually confirmed. The details of the operation contents are made easier to recognize according to the situation of the production. However, these displays may not be necessarily displayed because there is a concern that it may be erroneously recognized as urging the operation at the timing when the effect reception period has not yet occurred.

  182 (d), as a result of performing the effect shown in FIG. 182 (c), the second effect image TX is completely pushed out of the display area, and the first effect image OX is in the display area. An effect that depicts the state left behind is being performed (first effect result). When progressing to this effect content, even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed, the specific operation effect (movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY, etc.) does not occur, and the operation in the first operation mode is performed. When the operation is performed, the effect reception is made, and a specific operation effect (such as a movable effect by the specific decoration member SDY) corresponding to the effect reception is generated.

  That is, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 182 (d), the effect acceptance period relating to the specific operation effect is generated only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode. In the effect reception period, in addition to the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode, an instruction display for prompting an operation (character display such as “pushing in” or the remaining time of the effect reception period is shown. Bar display) will be displayed. Further, at this time, the sword decoration body 5001 moves from the sword storage state to the sword removal state so that the operation according to the first operation mode can be performed.

  In FIG. 183 (e), even though the first effect image OX corresponding to the first operation mode is displayed, the operation (erroneous operation) in the second operation mode is not the first operation mode. The production situation when it is performed by the player is shown.

  That is, in this example performance, even when the effect reception period relating to the specific operation time effect occurs only for the first operation mode side of the first operation mode and the second operation mode, The operation detection of the second operation mode itself is enabled. Then, when the operation in the second operation mode is detected in the effect reception period, it is determined that there is an operation error by the player, and the specific notification that cannot appear when the operation in the first operation mode is received. (Here, "it is good as it is").

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), the content of such a specific notification is changed (here, “calmly push in”) so that the player can regain his composure. It is like this. According to such a configuration, even if the content to be notified is complicated, it is possible to sequentially notify in short words. Therefore, even if the player side is in a panic state, this can be suitably performed. It will be expected to be suppressed. As a result, even if the sword ornament 5001 in the second operation mode is operated as it is in the first operation mode, the player is informed that the operation is properly received. You will be able to recognize.

  FIG. 183 (g) shows that an appropriate operation (first operation mode) is performed in the production state (production reception period when in an erroneous operation state) of FIGS. 183 (e) and 183 (f). As a result, the appearance reception is performed and the above-described operation-time effect corresponding to the operation is performed. However, at this time, when the player's hand is separated from the sword decoration 5001 (when the operation is finished), the sword decoration 5001 is changed from the second operation mode to the non-operation state (normal state). ) Will be returned to.

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode on the player side, the state of the operation error is not corrected, and the originally correct operation is left unchanged. Even if the operation is performed from the state (operation error state), since the production reception is properly performed, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game when the operation error occurs.

  In the above example of performance, when the player makes an erroneous operation, it is notified that the operation should be performed without correcting the operation error. However, the content (the operation is performed without correcting the operation error as it is It is not always necessary to perform detailed notification for the purpose of (should). That is, as described above, since there is a possibility that the player is panicking in a situation where an erroneous operation is performed, notifying complicated contents may be counterproductive. Therefore, when there is an operation error by the player in the effect reception period, as a specific notification that cannot appear when an operation in an appropriate mode is received, not a message display but an effect or sound only notification. It is desirable to give a simple notification such as. In this case, there is a possibility that the player does not recognize that an operation error has been made, but a special situation is confirmed in which a specific notification is given based on the operation being made and no effect is produced during operation. Therefore, it can be said that it is possible to sufficiently expect to switch the operation to the operation on the proper side.

  On the other hand, depending on the player (especially, an aged player or the like), a situation may occur in which an operation may be mistakenly performed before a performance reception period occurs in a specific operation-related performance. For example, when an operation instruction for the second operation unit (for example, a sheath portion) is not issued, the first operation is performed while the operation for the second operation unit (such as lateral movement of the sheath portion) is performed. It is assumed that a performance reception period related to a specific operation performance may occur only for the operation unit (for example, the sword part) side, and in this case also, how should the player side operate? There is a concern that I may not be able to recognize it.

  Therefore, when a specific operation-related effect regarding which of the first operation unit (sword region) and the second operation unit (sheath region) the operation opportunity is given is being performed, Despite being in a situation (for example, the situation shown in FIGS. 182 (b) and (c) in FIG. 182) in which the operation instruction (bar display of the remaining time) is not given to the second operation unit side, the second operation unit It is desirable to be able to perform a specific notification that cannot appear even when an operation is performed on the player even when the operation in the proper mode is received. The specific notification may be “a message display that the operation unit on the proper side to which an operation opportunity is to be given will be operated soon while the operation state is maintained” may be displayed. Instead, it may be a simple notification such as an effect or notification only by sound. In any case, even if an operation is performed, it is possible to perform the operation on the proper side afterwards by confirming a special situation in which the specific notification is made based on the operation and the effect at the time of the operation is not performed. It can be said that it is possible to fully expect that it will be a reason to go.

  In this case, for example, the first operation unit (for example, the sword decoration 5001 is moved to the left) while the operation for the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is being performed. , The sword part) side, even when the performance reception period related to the specific operation performance occurs, the state in which the second operation part (for example, the sheath part) is operated (sword decoration) When the first operation unit (for example, the sword part) side is operated while maintaining the state where 5001 is moved to the left), the effect reception is performed and the above-described operation effect corresponding to the operation is performed. Becomes

  According to such a configuration, an operation error occurs between the first operation mode and the second operation mode before the effect reception period occurs, and the effect reception occurs while the operation error is maintained. Even if the operation error state is not corrected within the period and the original correct operation is performed as it is, the production reception will be properly performed, so an operation error will occur before the production reception period occurs. When the occurrence of the game occurs, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

  However, in the period in which a specific operation-related effect is performed for which of the first operation unit and the second operation unit the operation opportunity is given, the effect result is shown and the effect reception period If the above-mentioned specific notification is given in the period immediately before the occurrence of, the information will be mixed with the content (instruction display, etc.) that will be notified during the performance reception period, further confusing the player. There is a concern that it will happen. Therefore, in the specific operation-related effect that is finally displayed, the effect result suggesting that the operation opportunity is given to the first operation unit, and in the period until the effect result is displayed. The first notification is executed when the operation in the second operation mode is performed despite the situation where the operation instruction regarding the second operation unit (for example, the sheath portion) is not displayed. There is a period and a second period in which the above-mentioned specific notification is not executed even if the operation in the second operation mode is performed in the situation, and after the first period and the second period are sequentially passed, It is desirable to generate a performance acceptance period for one operation unit.

  In the example of the effect, the degree of expectation for granting a privilege may be suggested when the specific notification is performed. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, in the above-described production modes and the sword decoration body 5001 according to the other examples thereof, the production mode of the sword decoration body 5001 itself changes to one of the plurality of modes described above (for example, FIG. 161). It is possible to change from the stage 0 form shown in 1) to any of stage 1 form to stage 3 form). In this regard, after the specific operation-related effect is performed, the sword decoration 5001 is changed to any one of the plurality of modes described above, and in the changed state, the effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 is generated. It may be allowed to. Alternatively, the sword decoration 5001 may be changed to any of the plurality of modes described above when the effect reception period occurs after the specific operation-related effect is performed.

  In this case, in the effect display device 1600 during the effect acceptance period, an instruction display (a character display such as “pushing in” or a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect acceptance period) for prompting an operation on the sword ornament 5001 or a sword ornament 5001 is displayed. The sword decoration image SYG is displayed, but the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration 5001 at that time (step 0 form to step 3 form shown in FIG. 161). It will be.

  However, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if it is always displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, it is possible to have some fun in confirming the sword decoration image SYG. However, the performance is poor during the performance reception period. Therefore, when the sword decoration image SYG is displayed on the effect display device 1600, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG may be displayed in a different mode from the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to secure the performance during the performance reception period.

  At this time, it is preferable that the aspect represented by the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation than the aspect of the sword decoration 5001 in order to further enhance the performance during the performance acceptance period. It is desirable in order to secure it appropriately. For example, when the sword decoration 5001 is in the stage 1 form and the predetermined effect conditions are satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the stage 2 form or the stage 3 form instead of the stage 1 form. To be displayed. With such a configuration, even if the sword decoration body 5001 is in the stage 1 form, it is possible to understand that the sword decoration image SYG has a higher degree of expectation by checking the form. As a result, the entertainment of the game during the production acceptance period can be favorably maintained.

  In order to obtain such an effect, it is sufficient that the number of effect modes on the sword decoration image SYG side is larger than the number of effect modes on the sword decoration body 5001 side. The number of presentation modes on the side of the sword decoration 5001 may be one. In addition, when a plurality of effect modes are prepared as the sword ornament 5001, the effect modes do not necessarily change.

  However, if the aspect of the sword decoration 5001 and the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG are simply made different in this way, some players may feel uncomfortable because a false display is made. There is concern that this may reduce the fun of playing games. Therefore, more preferably, the aspect of the sword decoration image SYG is a special aspect different from any of the aspects prepared as the aspect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, stage 0 form to stage 3 form shown in FIG. 161). Is prepared, and when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in a special mode instead of the mode of the sword decoration body 5001 at that time. It is desirable to make the aspect of the decoration image SYG different from each other. The special mode may be a mode in which the sword decoration image SYG is further deformed and united to change its outer shape, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates in a mode that does not appear, or the sword decoration body 5001 operates. It may emit light in a manner that does not appear.

  According to such a configuration, since the representation expression that is difficult due to the structure of the sword decoration 5001 is realized by the sword decoration image SYG, it is possible to suppress the concern that the display is false and the user feels uncomfortable. In addition to being able to do so, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by providing the playability beyond the imagination of the player when looking at the structure of the sword decoration 5001.

  Even in the case where the sword decoration image SYG has a special aspect as described above, the sword decoration image SYG is provided as each aspect of the sword ornament 5001 (here, shown in FIG. 161). It is desirable to be able to perform the display in the stage 0 form to stage 3 form). That is, in this case, basically, while the sword decoration image SYG is displayed in the same manner as the sword decoration body 5001, the sword decoration image SYG is displayed only when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied. It will be displayed in a special manner. It should be noted that it is desirable to suggest that the sword decoration image SYG is displayed with a higher degree of expectation for granting a privilege than when it is displayed in a special mode. The degree of expectation may be 100%.

  In addition, the method of displaying the sword decoration image SYG in a special mode may be applied to another effect as well as the case where a specific operation-related effect is performed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect modes and their different examples, for example, in the case where the design variation is performed in the first effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, with respect to the operation button 410 within the symbol variation, The first omen effect that appears when the operation opportunity is given and the operation opportunity is not given to the sword decoration 5001 can be executed. Further, when the design variation is performed in the second effect pattern based on the result of the jackpot determination, the operation opportunity is not given to the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the design variation. The second omen effect that appears when an opportunity is given is executable. Further, when the design variation is performed in the third effect pattern based on the result of the big hit determination, the third aura that appears when an operation opportunity is given to either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001. It is possible to execute effects (specific operation related effects).

In this respect, these aura effects are executed as effect contents different from each other.
-Before the effect image simulating the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given appears in the display area, a specific image is displayed so as to cover at least the area portion in which the effect image appears,
After that, at the position where it is difficult to visually recognize by the specific image, an effect image showing the operation means on the side to which the operation opportunity is given is displayed,
-After that, it is common in that the specific image gradually changes from the display area to the non-display (increasing the transmittance of the specific image itself, decreasing the area where the specific image is displayed, etc.) You may make it change. For example, in the first omen effect, a display effect by a "cloud effect" is performed as a specific image (a display effect that makes it easier to visually recognize the effect image with the operating means), and in the second omen effect, a "flame" is used as the specific image. Display effect by "effect (display effect that makes it easier to visually confirm the effect image that depends on the operation means, and in the third precursor effect, display effect by" water effect "as the specific image (effect image that changes the operation means It is possible to make the precursor effects different from each other by making the types of the specific images different, for example, by making the display effects gradually visible. When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the first amenity effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, When the display effect by the "flame effect" is performed, it is possible to recognize that the second aura effect is performed before the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001, and by the "water effect". When the display effect is performed, it is possible to recognize that the third predictive effect (specific operation-related effect) regarding which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given is performed. Will be done.

  Then, in the case of performing the indication effect (at least one of the first indication effect, the second indication effect, and the third indication effect) with such an effect content, an effect image that uses the operation means by the specific image is displayed. It is desirable to generate an effect acceptance period for the operation means during a period when it is difficult to visually recognize the effect. When such a configuration is applied to any of the first aura effect and the second aura effect, the effect image imitating the operation means has a high expectation display mode (for example, red) and a low expectation. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage when it is not sure which of the display mode (for example, blue) is displayed, the effect during the effect acceptance period It becomes possible to improve the sex. Further, even when such a configuration is applied to the third aura effect (specific operation-related effect), it is confident as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 the operation opportunity is given. Since the operation opportunity is given to the operation means from a stage where the player cannot hold the performance, it is possible to improve the performance during the performance reception period.

  FIG. 185 is a diagram showing an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with such effect contents, and FIG. 186 is an example of an effect when the first omen effect is performed with the same content. It is a time chart shown. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 185 and 186, an example of an effect when the first amenity effect is performed will be described. However, with respect to this effect example, the second amenity effect and the third amenity effect are not the first amenity effect. It is also possible to apply it to a precursor effect.

  FIG. 185 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is performed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit judgment in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Showing the production situation.

  185 (b) shows an effect situation in which the first indication effect is started during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 185 (a).

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (b), the display effect by the "cloud effect" is performed in a large range within the display area of the effect display device 1600. The display effect by such a "cloud effect" is gradually changed from the display area to the non-display after the effect is started at the timing t1 shown in FIG. 186 (the transmittance of the specific image itself is increased. Or, the area in which the specific image is displayed is reduced).

  Then, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 186, the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 is changed at the timing t2 when the display effect by the “cloud effect” is gradually changing to non-display. Along with the occurrence, a button image BTG that imitates the operation button 410 and an instruction display (a bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 are respectively displayed ( FIG. 185 (c)).

  In this effect example, the button image BTG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes, and when the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode (for example, red), the second display mode (for example, , Blue) when the button image BTG is displayed, the proportion at which the effect during operation is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is higher. In this regard, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is not possible to be sure whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, when the operation button 410 is operated, the effect reception is performed and the operation-time effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. That is, in this case, in the display area of the effect display device 1600 as well, since the effect at the time of operation is executed in such a manner that the effect content is switched from such a precursor effect, the button image BTG is the same as the first display mode. It is possible to progress the production without being sure of which of the two display modes is displayed.

  Further, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c), it is not certain whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode by the "cloud effect". However, the instruction display prompting the user to operate the operation button 410 continues to change the length of the bar display so as to suggest that the remaining time of the effect reception period is gradually decreasing.

  On the other hand, at a timing t3 when a predetermined time has elapsed after the effect situation shown in FIG. 185 (c) occurred, the "cloud effect" is generated while the effect acceptance period generated at the timing t2 continues. Is completely hidden (FIG. 185 (d)). In such a situation, it is possible to easily recognize whether the button image BTG is displayed in the first display mode or the second display mode, and the operation button 410 can be operated. become able to. That is, in this case, the operation-time effect is executed while the effect contents are switched from the effect shown in FIG. 185 (d).

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period (timing t2 to t4), the period (timing t2 to t3) after the button image BTG is displayed until the “cloud effect” is completely hidden. In (), it is possible to provide a rendering effect by making the button image BTG relatively difficult to visually recognize.

  It should be noted that, in order to enhance the performance during the production acceptance period (timing t2 to t4) during the entire period, the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4). It is desirable to perform the effect display which is not performed during the period of the above timings t2 to t3. In this example of performance, when the "cloud effect" is completely hidden (timing t3 to t4), a message such as "press" is displayed. However, for example, at timing t2 to t3. If the button image BTG displayed in the stopped mode in the period is dynamically displayed in the period from timing t3 to t4, the performance in the period (timing t3 to t4) can be more appropriately enhanced. Will be able to.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 185, the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 to be operated and the button image BTG imitating the operation button 410 are displayed at the same time (when the effect reception period occurs). The button image BTG showing the operation button 410 may be displayed before the performance acceptance period occurs. That is, in this case, after the effect display by the "cloud effect" is performed, the effect situation in which the button image BTG is difficult to be visible first appears, and after a predetermined time after that situation, the effect situation is difficult to be visually recognized. Until then, the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs, and the instruction display prompting the operation of the operation button 410 appears.

  At this time, when the button image BTG is in a production situation in which it is difficult to visually recognize the button image BTG before the production reception period occurs, the display pattern of the button image BTG changes to a mode with a higher degree of expectation (third sign). In the case of an effect, an effect pattern that changes from the button image BTG to the sword decoration image SYG) may appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the fun in which the value of watching the button image BTG becomes higher as the button image BTG is more difficult to visually recognize. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 185, the button image BTG is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “cloud effect”, but the instruction display prompting the operation button 410 is affected by the “cloud effect”. We decided to display it so that the visibility would be maintained. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy with peace of mind that the visibility of the button image BTG is changing while grasping the remaining time of the effect reception period.

  However, the instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 may be affected by the “cloud effect” so that it is difficult to visually recognize until the timing t3. That is, in this case, it is possible to give the player a conflict as to whether to operate the operation button 410 without being sure of the display mode, while the remaining time of the effect reception period cannot be grasped well. It will be possible to provide an unprecedented novel performance.

  Further, also in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 185, the above-mentioned or later-described “acceptance acceptable sound” may be output. In this case, the "acceptable sound" is output even when the operation button 410 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the "cloud effect".

  Further, when such an “acceptable sound” is output in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the proportion of the jackpot pattern, including “0” and “100”), the button image BTG It becomes possible to properly recognize the degree of expectation before the whole thing appears, and it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  When the performance reception (operation) is performed while the "acceptable sound" is being output, it is desirable that the "acceptable sound" in the output state is not output at that time. In addition, as for the "acceptable sound", each of the above-described or later-described configurations may be appropriately adopted.

  The “cloud effect” may be transparent, and in this case, the button image will be slightly visible behind it, but the visibility is still maintained even with such a configuration. .

  The "cloud effect" itself may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectation levels (the proportion of the big hit symbols, including "0" and "100"). In this case, the function of making the operation button 410 difficult to visually recognize, but when the high degree of expectation is suggested, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Before the "cloud effect" is displayed and completely hidden, a specific production sound (BGM) is output in a suppression mode or in a silent state, or a production method described later is set to a non-output state. It may be adopted. In this way, the specific effect sound (BGM) that is in the suppressed state or in the output state in the silent state or in the non-output state is output in the non-suppressed state at the time when the operation is performed by the player. It will never be returned.

  In addition, in the case of applying such a rendering property in any of the first omen effect, the second omen effect, and the third omen effect, the effect image evoking the operation means is clear after the omen effects are started. Even if the length of time until they are visible to each other (the time until the specific image is hidden) is different from each other, the effect image is clear after the effect image showing the operation means is displayed. It is desirable to set the same time until they are visually recognized (time until the specific image is hidden). Further, when applying such a rendering property to any one of the first indication effect, the second indication effect, and the third indication effect, an effect that uses the operation means after the indication effect is started. Regarding the length of time until the image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden), prepare a plurality of these so as to provide a plurality of performances with different expectations. However, the time from the display of the effect image imitating the operation means to the time when the effect image is clearly visible (the time until the specific image is hidden) is the same. It is desirable to set the time.

  In addition, as a method of making it difficult to visually recognize the effect image created by using the operation means, it is not always necessary to use another image (specific image). For example, by changing the setting of the transmittance of the effect image imitating the operation means itself, the effect image imitating the operation means appears in a display mode (timing t2) that is relatively difficult to see, and then the relative The display mode (timing t3) that is easily visually recognized may be gradually changed. However, the timing in which the effect image simulating the operation means appears in the display mode in which it is relatively difficult to visually recognize may be a timing before the timing t2. In this case, the appearance in such a display mode itself. May be performed as a predictive effect, or while a display different from this is performed as a predictive effect, the effect image evoking the operation means is made to appear in a display mode that is relatively difficult to visually recognize. Good.

  Further, when a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination is executed, the specific operation-related effects described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 186 will be described later in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). ) May be executed only when (1) occurs. That is, at the time when a specific operation-related effect is started, it is kept secret which of the plurality of operating means can accept the effect, and as a result of the effect being advanced, a plurality of Since a performance acceptance period corresponding to only one of the operating means will occur, if it may be delayed in determining which of the plurality of operating means should be operated, rather than being operated by the player. The production reception period may end before all the remaining time is consumed. In this respect, if the specific operation-related effect can be executed only when a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) described later occurs, the effect after the specific operation-related effect is performed In the reception period, even if an image corresponding to any operation means appears as the effect result of the specific operation-related effect, the player operates the operation means on the operation target side and the automatic effect function. Since the effect reception is performed by any of the above, and the post-operation effect is always executed, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest when the specific operation-related effect is performed.

[Automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) can be executed, and the automatic button effect state is controlled. When the effect reception period for the operation button 410 (more accurately, a predetermined effect pattern in which the effect reception period for the operation button 410 is set) occurs based on the result of the jackpot determination, during the effect reception period Even if the operation by the player is not received as an effect, it is possible to execute a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as the operation when the operation by the player is received as an effect within the effect reception period. There is. According to such an automatic button effect state, the effect after operation is generated even if the operation is not performed every time the effect acceptance period occurs, so that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by forgetting to operate is suppressed. You will be able to. Regarding the automatic effect function, when the function is activated, the same effect reception as that when the operation is actually performed may be generated so that the process corresponding to the effect reception may be performed. The same process may be performed without receiving the effect reception.

  In the embodiments relating to the "automatic effect function" described below, the above-mentioned techniques, effects, and settings related to the operation may be used in an appropriate combination, or may be used after being replaced.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, the automatic button is operated by operating the operation means a plurality of times during the period when the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. It is set so that the production state can be set. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is displayed so that the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When the "setting of automatic button effect state" displayed therein is selected, the setting to the automatic button effect state is performed. It should be noted that only the operation button 410 may be operated a plurality of times, or the operation on the operation button 410 and an operation on a different operation means may be performed a plurality of times.

  On the other hand, during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 can be set to the automatic button effect state only by operating once, and by the simplification of such operation, The automatic button production state can be set while keeping a close watch on the production progress while the symbols are changing. However, there are some players who want to actively operate the operation button 410 regardless of whether or not the effective period has occurred. From such a person, the operation button 410 is operated. If there is a case where the automatic button performance state is set just by operating it, the interest in the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in order to set the automatic button effect state during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation state of the operation button 410 is set to a predetermined time ( In this case, it is required to operate this once in a mode in which it is maintained for 2 seconds (a so-called “long press mode”). Accordingly, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, even if the operation button 410 is positively operated regardless of whether or not the valid period is generated, the automatic button performance state is set. And it becomes possible to make it difficult to be accidentally set. In addition, it is desirable that the automatic button performance state is not set even if the operation is performed in a long press mode at least during the performance acceptance period of the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. ..

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, even if the automatic button effect state is set, even if the method is canceled, the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed. Different operation modes are required during the displayed period and during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state.

  That is, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by operating the operation means a plurality of times. More specifically, after the menu screen is displayed by the first operation on the operation button 410, the menu screen is displayed by the second operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). The “various settings” screen is displayed so that the “various settings” screen is displayed, and the “various settings” screen is displayed by the third operation on the operation button 410 (or an operation means different from the operation button 410). When "cancel the automatic button effect state" displayed inside is selected, the setting of the automatic button effect state is canceled.

  On the other hand, during the period when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting of the automatic button effect state can be canceled by only operating the operation button 410 once, and by the simplification of such operation, The automatic button performance state setting can be canceled while keeping a close watch on the performance progress while the symbols are changing. However, unlike the case where the operation button 410 is set to the automatic button effect state, the operation button 410 is moved to the operation state without maintaining the operation state of the operation button 410 for a predetermined time (even in the long-press operation mode). The setting of the automatic button presentation state is released only by detecting that the action has been performed (by operating in a single-shot operation mode). That is, it can be said that some operation is performed on the operation button 410, which means that there is a desire to perform the operation on the operation button 410. Therefore, when the operation is performed, the automatic button effect is produced. By canceling the setting of the state and returning to the normal effect state at an early stage, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be favorably maintained.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment includes a plurality of operating means including the operation button 410. In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is different from the operation button 410 based on the result of the big hit determination when in the automatic button effect state set by the operation on the operation button 410. A performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a specific operation means (for example, a sword decoration 5001) (more accurately, a predetermined performance pattern in which a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001 or the like is set). Occurs, and even if the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is not received during the performance reception period, the player's operation (operation on the sword decoration 5001) is still performed within the performance reception period. It is possible to execute a process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change as when the performance is received. According to such a configuration, a period during which the operation of the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received, or another operation means (for example, When the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186)) regarding whether a period during which the operation on the sword ornament 5001) can accept the effect occurs, the effect result is executed. Since it is not necessary to worry about forgetting to operate the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 regardless of whether the operation reception is possible, it is possible to enjoy such a specific operation-related effect with peace of mind. ..

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
When a first side effect acceptance period in which a first operation means (for example, operation button 410) among a plurality of operation means is set as an operation target while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs When the first operation means is not operated within the first-side effect reception period, it is possible to execute an automatic process for producing the same change as when the first operation means is operated. Yes (first automatic production means),
The second side effect reception period in which the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) among the plurality of operation means is set as the operation target when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When it occurs, when no operation is performed on the second operation means within the second side effect reception period, an automatic process that causes the same change as when the operation on the second operation means is performed on the effect is executed. Possible (second automatic production means)
Even if either the first side effect reception period or the second side effect reception period occurs, when the same specific time elapses after the period occurs, The automatic processing by the one automatic performance means or the automatic processing by the second automatic performance means can be executed.

  According to such a configuration, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first side effect acceptance period in which the first operation means is set as the operation target, and the second operation means are the operation object. Even if any of the second side effect reception period set as is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, the automatic effect function can function when the same specific time has elapsed from the occurrence of those periods. Therefore, you will be able to enjoy the performance with peace of mind.

  However, when a first side effect reception period in which the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is set as an operation target occurs, when a specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period occurred. When the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed, and when the time different from the specific time elapses after the first side effect reception period occurs, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed. As in some cases, production progress may be performed within the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, it is assumed that the automatic process by the first automatic effect means is executed when the specific time has elapsed since the first side effect acceptance period has occurred, but at a different timing from this. Since the effect reception is made and the effect after the operation is automatically generated, it becomes possible to function as a surprise effect.

  When controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), an operation opportunity is given to the operation means within the symbol variation period than when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It is also possible to increase the ratio of the effect reception period that is performed. That is, in this case, it can be assumed that the frequency with which the performance reception period occurs increases, and the frequency with which the user forgets to operate within the performance reception period also increases. Since the post-operation performance is executed due to the functioning of the function, it is possible to generate the performance reception period with a higher frequency while suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to frequent forgetting operations. By the way, when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is desirable to increase the ratio of occurrence of both the effect acceptance period for the first operation means and the effect acceptance period for the second operation means. However, it is more desirable that the degree of increase in the occurrence rate be different between the effect reception period for the first operation means and the effect reception period for the second operation means.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment,
If the performance reception condition is satisfied within the performance reception period, post-operation performance can be executed (post-operation performance execution means),
A process for satisfying the effect reception condition based on the player's operation being performed within the effect reception period (player operation reception means),
When an operation is not performed by the player within the production reception period, it is possible to execute a process for satisfying the production reception condition without receiving an operation by the player at a specific timing within the production reception period (automatic production reception unit )
However, the specific timing within the performance reception period is set so that it does not arrive until at least half of the time set as the performance reception period elapses after the performance reception period starts. I am going to do it. As a result, it becomes possible to give a sufficient margin for the player to operate by himself until the automatic effect function works, and the option to cause the effect acceptance by the operation by the player will also be left. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the amusement of entertainment.

  In this case, the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred. When performing the production progress within the symbol variation so that the automatic processing by the first automatic production means may be executed when a time different from Any of the "time different from" will be set as a time value longer than at least half of the time set as the first side effect reception period.

  Here, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs during the execution period of the symbol variation when being controlled to the automatic button effect state, and the operation for the operation button 410 is effected during the effect reception period, The processing for generating the post-operation effect according to the effect reception is executed. However, at this time, in addition to the process of generating the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the process of canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state may be performed together.

  Also, similarly, during the period in which the symbol variation is controlled when the automatic button production state is being controlled, a production reception period for an operation means (such as the sword decoration 5001) different from the operation button 410 occurs, and the production reception Even when an operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the period, a process for generating a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception and a process for canceling the setting of the automatic button effect state should be executed. Is desirable. Also in this case, as for the "post-operation effect according to effect reception", an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during a period in which the automatic button effect state is not controlled, and the sword decoration is performed within the effect reception period. It will be executed as the same effect as the post-operation effect that is executed when the operation on the body 5001 is received.

  That is, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the effect state (normal effect mode) in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (specific effect) The desire to end the condition) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending a specific performance state and the operation for receiving the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced. In this respect, in the above configuration, when the production reception period relating to the specific production occurs while the automatic button production state (specific production state) is being controlled, the operation button to which the operation opportunity is given within the production reception period. The process of terminating the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) and the process of causing an effect by performing only one operation on 410 or the sword ornament 5001 (by operating in a single operation mode). (Processing to execute post-operation performance) is performed respectively, so there is a desire to end the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) and progress the performance depending on the player's own operation. Even if it occurs within the period, it becomes possible to smoothly switch the effect state.

  However, regarding the setting change related to the automatic button production state (the setting change to the automatic button production state or the cancellation of the setting of the automatic button production state) during the period when the demo screen is displayed (the state where the symbol variation is not executed) The setting of the sword ornament 5001 can be changed without the need for an operation. That is, the sword ornament 5001 is less frequently given an operation opportunity than the operation button 410 during the period of execution of the pattern change, and when the operation opportunity is provided by that much, a big hit expectation is expected than the operation button 410. The degree is raised. Therefore, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is prevented from being permitted only for the purpose of changing the setting related to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state), whereby an operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. It can be said that it is more desirable to increase the premium feeling when playing and maintain the entertainment appeal. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the demo screen in which the symbol variation is not executed is displayed, the operation means other than the sword ornament 5001 (operation buttons) among the plurality of operation means. 410 or another operation means other than this) can be operated a plurality of times to set or cancel the automatic button effect state.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even during the execution period of the symbol variation when the state is not controlled to the automatic button effect state, the operation to the automatic button effect state is performed without the need to operate the sword ornament 5001. The settings can be changed. That is, as described above, the operation button 410 is controlled to the automatic button effect state by operating once in the "long press mode", but only the setting change to the automatic button effect state is performed. For the purpose of, the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not allowed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the setting related to the automatic button effect state may be changed by the operation on the sword decoration 5001, the design when the automatic button effect state is controlled It is limited to the case where an effect reception period for the sword decoration 5001 occurs during the variation execution period, an operation for the sword decoration 5001 is received during the effect reception period, and a post-operation effect corresponding thereto appears. . With such a configuration, the setting can be changed to the automatic button effect state by the operation on the sword decoration 5001 without impairing the premium feeling when the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001. Like

  In addition, as a plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the automatic button production state is set, “automatic operation-based production is generated even if no operation is performed within the production reception period. In addition to the operation means (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001) that can be the target of the "production effect", special operation means that is not the target of the "automatic effect function that generates an on-operation effect without any operation during the effect acceptance period" May be further included. That is, in this case, when the symbol variation is in the execution state, an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity for the special operation means is given occurs, and when the operation for the special operation means is received during the effect reception period, The expectation for a big hit will be suggested by the post-operation production according to the production reception. However, even if the operation is controlled to the automatic button effect state, if the operation for the special operation means is not accepted during the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is accepted appears. There is no. However, in this case, the same post-operation effect as when the effect is received does not appear, but may be made to appear if the effect is different from when the effect is accepted.

  Further, regarding the setting to the automatic button effect state using the operation button 410 (operation in the form of long press), the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 occurs during the period in which the symbol variation is in the execution state. Not only the time, but also an effect reception period for an operation means other than the operation button 410 (an effect reception time period when the sword ornament 5001 is operated is expected to be expected, and when a special operation means is operated, the expectation degree is suggested. It is desirable not to allow this even when the performance reception period etc.) occurs. That is, if the automatic button presentation state is generated by operating the operation button 410 (operation in a long-press mode) during the production reception period for the operation means different from the operation button 410. In the middle of the production reception period, the "automatic production function for producing an on-operation production even if the operation is not performed within the production reception period" is activated, so that the original production reception (operation means different from the operation button 410 is operated. If the player who is not knowledgeable about the automatic button effect state has generated the effect acceptance period for the operation button 410, or the operation button 410. It may be confusing whether there is a performance acceptance period for operating means different from that, and this may reduce the enjoyment of the game. This is because that is just in case.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is capable of executing the precursor effect prior to the occurrence of the effect reception period, but is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). A precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when not performed, and a precursor effect that appears before the occurrence of the effect reception period when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) The display mode may be different from the above. That is, in this case, it is possible to previously recognize whether or not the automatic effect function is in a possible effect state within the specific effect reception period, and it is possible to enjoy the effect with peace of mind.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a specific image indicating the remaining time (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed during the effect reception period. However, when the effect reception period occurs, the specific image is displayed so that the specific image is displayed at least until the specific image (for example, “bar display” indicating the remaining time) is displayed. An effect image different from the specific image (for example, an image in which lightning strikes the specific area) may be displayed outside the area (a sign effect). That is, in this case, when the production acceptance period occurs, by checking the movement of the production image that is different from the specific image, the "specific image that suggests the remaining time" in the hidden state is gazed at the point where it will appear. Since it becomes possible to prompt the player, it is possible to preferably prevent the situation where the specific effect reception period ends because the operation by the player is not in time, and further, Even if the player's operation is not in time, since the post-operation effect is executed by the function of the automatic effect function, it is expected that the interest of the game will be appropriately maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the state setting and the setting cancellation related to the automatic button effect state by the operation of the player, but the result of the big hit determination is also included in each of the following description examples. The state may be set to the automatic button effect state or the setting cancellation of the automatic button effect state may be performed according to the progress of the game or the effect based on it. As an example in which state setting and setting cancellation can be performed in accordance with the progress of the game and the production, for example, "While being controlled to the normal game state, it is controlled as the automatic button production state, but the jackpot game state Or a control mode such as "the automatic button production state is canceled when the state is shifted to a high probability time saving state" or "the automatic button production state is generated within the execution period of the symbol variation, and the symbol variation in the execution state ends. Prior to being performed, a control mode such as "generating an effect pattern for releasing the setting when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence" or "generating an automatic button effect state over a period in which a plurality of symbol variations are executed" It is possible to adopt such a control mode as described above and the like. Further, the pachinko machine 1 which is always controlled in the automatic button effect state may be used. In this case, the setting of the automatic button effect state is not canceled, and the setting or cancellation of the "automatic button effect state" is not performed. Such processing will disappear.

  Further, the timing at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works may be when the remaining time of the effect reception period is exhausted or at a predetermined timing thereafter, or the remaining time of the effect reception period is left. It may be an intermediate timing (specific timing). When the remaining time of the production reception period is exhausted or when the above-mentioned automatic production function works at a predetermined timing after that, the post-operation production is performed as if the production reception was made after the production reception period ended. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a timing (specific timing) during which the remaining time of the effect reception period is left, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions as in the case where an actual operation is performed. At the point of time (specific timing), the effect reception period ends and the post-operation effect is executed.

  However, in order to ensure a sense of security that the post-operation performance will occur even if the automatic button performance state is not controlled, the time until the performance reception period ends (performance reception It is important to activate the above-mentioned automatic effect function at a specific timing within a period) to start a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. That is, in this case, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the arrival of the specific timing within the effect reception period, the player himself / herself operates after the arrival of the specific timing to generate the post-operation effect. It is also possible to make the user feel uneasy when controlled to the automatic button performance state (for example, “it is wrong to say that the automatic button performance state is controlled even though the automatic button performance state is not controlled. Recognize that you may not be able to check the post-operation performance ”,“ You may not be able to check the post-operation performance because the automatic performance function does not work due to some trouble, ”etc. You will be able to.

  Then, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment has a characteristic technique related to such an automatic button effect state. Hereinafter, the characteristic techniques related to the automatic button effect state will be sequentially described, but these characteristic techniques may be applied to each of the above-described effect examples, and the following characteristic techniques may be applied. You may make it use it combining suitably.

  In describing each of the following characteristic techniques, as a premise, in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), when not normally controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). When an effect reception period that can occur is also generated, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period. However, instead of this, a specific display effect (display effect that can be selected based on the result of the jackpot determination) that can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is prepared, When a specific effective period related to this occurs while the specific display effect is being performed, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated even if an operation is not performed within the specific effective period. You can According to such a configuration, the performance when being controlled to a specific performance state (automatic button performance state) is improved (improvement of performance by allowing the generation of a specific display performance). In some cases, even if a specific effect state (automatic button effect state) occurs, the automatic effect function may not function in another effect reception period that is set when a specific display effect is not performed. On the other hand, during the specific effective period when a specific display effect is being performed, the automatic effect function works to save the time and effort of operation, so that it is possible to experience a VIP feeling. Therefore, it is expected that the interest of the game will be enhanced appropriately. In addition, it is not necessary to prevent the automatic production function from functioning in all of the different production reception periods set when a specific display production is not performed, and the automatic production is performed at least in some production reception periods. If the function cannot be operated, the above-described operation effect when the specific effective period occurs when the specific display effect is performed (when the effect reception period in which the automatic effect function always works) occurs It is possible to expect Further, even when such a specific effective period occurs, if there is no operation by the player before the specific timing within the specific effective period arrives, the automatic effect function described above is caused to function at the specific timing. It is desirable to start the post-operation performance corresponding to this.

Moreover, after preparing at least a first specific display effect, a second specific display effect, and a third specific display effect as specific display effects that can be executed based on the result of the jackpot determination,
When the first specific effective period occurs while the first specific display effect is being executed, the above-described automatic effect is generated at a timing when a first predetermined time has elapsed since the first specific effective period occurred. While the function works and ends the first specific effective period and generates a post-operation effect corresponding to this,
-If the second specific effective period occurs while the second specific display effect is being executed, a second predetermined time period longer than the first predetermined time period after the second specific effective period occurs. When the above has passed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions to end the second specific effective period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto,
When the third specific effective period occurs while the third specific display effect is being executed, the third specific effective period is controlled despite being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). If there is no operation before the end of, each process such that the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed may not appear may be performed in a specific effect state. According to such a configuration, even if the effect reception period (specific effective period) occurs while being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to perform the first time from when the effect acceptance period occurs. The above-mentioned automatic effect function works when a predetermined time of, or the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function unless a second predetermined time longer than the first predetermined time elapses, Even if the production reception period ends, the automatic production function described above may not function in the first place. Therefore, even when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), it is possible to confirm which type of specific display effect was being performed when the effect acceptance period (specific effective period) occurred. For example, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function despite the elapse of the first predetermined time, the above-mentioned operation is performed when the second predetermined time elapses. It is possible to make the production progress with a sense of tension such as whether the automatic production function of (1) works or whether the above-mentioned automatic production function does not work in the first place. It should be noted that the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period are all when the operating means (for example, the operation button 410) to be operated is in an operating state (so-called. When a single-shot operation is performed), an effect is received and a post-operation effect is generated.

  Note that the first specific display effect, the second specific display effect, and the third specific display effect can be executed only when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be. In this way, when the display mode is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a display mode that cannot appear when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state) is displayed. In this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the entertainment of the game when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). In addition, the first specific display effect (first specific effective period) and the second specific display effect (second specific effective period) are prepared, and regarding the third specific display effect (third specific effective period) Does not necessarily have to be prepared. Further, the post-operation effects that are generated when the effects are received in the first specific effective period, the second specific effective period, and the third specific effective period may have different effect contents.

  Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-mentioned automatic effect function, at which timing in the effect acceptance period the automatic effect function is activated (which is the effect acceptance period when the effect is accepted). Automatic display function worked for the bar display (image change (area change here) with the passage of time) that shows the remaining time of the performance acceptable period so that it can be recognized) The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which it is not hidden at this point but is displayed. According to such a configuration, for example, by confirming the remaining time indicated by the "bar display" that is continuously displayed when the automatic effect function is activated, the effect reception period is the first specific effective period ( A relatively early stage after the performance reception period occurs, the period during which the automatic performance function operates when the first predetermined time elapses, and the second specific effective period (relative to the performance reception period. It is possible to recognize which is the later stage, which is the period during which the automatic effect function works when the second predetermined time elapses.

  In this sense, when the first specific effective period (the period during which the automatic effect function operates when the first predetermined time has elapsed after the effect reception period has occurred) and the second specific effective period ( The jackpot expectation level is different when the performance time period when the automatic performance function operates when the second predetermined time elapses after the performance acceptance period occurs (for example, the second specific effective period is more advantageous). It is desirable to do so. Further, in this case, the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect may not necessarily be executed. However, when the first specific display effect and the second specific display effect are executed, a big hit is expected depending on when the first specific display effect appears and when the second specific display effect appears. The functions are performed so that the degrees are different (for example, the second specific display effect is more advantageous). Further, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the "bar display" may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic effect function. As in the case where the above function, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state where the "bar display" is not hidden and is displayed. The post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed as, for example, light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament. Good.

  In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (eg, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated after-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is made to function to generate an after-operation effect, first, an operation target suggestion image (for example, an operation to be an operation target) that suggests an operation means to be an operation target in the effect reception period. Image display, etc.) is displayed, and even if the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated, the post-operation effect is generated without displaying the operation target suggestion image without displaying it. Is desirable. In this case, the display mode (for example, the color, the transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which of the two is even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred. On the other hand, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. When the automatic effect function described above functions, such as when the automatic effect function functions within the first specific effective period described above, or when the automatic effect function operates within the second specific effective period described above. The post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed instead of being hidden.

  Further, at this time, if the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different jackpot expectations, both the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of the post-operation effect Will be able to be confirmed at the same time, it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Further, the post-operation effect may not be executed as a display change in the effect display device 1600, and may be executed, for example, as a light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5 or an operation by a movable ornament. It may be.

  For example, even with a pachinko machine 1 that does not have the above-described automatic effect function, a jackpot expectation degree (for example, appears only when a jackpot is obtained) as an operation target suggestion image (a shot image of the operating means). If multiple modes with different ratios in which the post-operation effect is executed in different modes) are prepared and the operation is accepted by the player's operation, the operation target at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed based on the operation acceptance. If the suggestion image (such as a practicing image of the operation means) is left displayed in any of the plurality of modes with different expectations, the mode of the operation target suggestion image and the mode of post-operation performance will be obtained. It becomes possible to check both of them at the same time, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, when the effective period (effect reception period) in which the image is displayed is generated, the type of the effective period (effect reception period) (conditions of the effective period and post-operation effects that occur when the operation is accepted) When the display is performed in which the display area is reduced according to the passage of time (the first valid period generated by the establishment of the first condition), the display area is reduced according to the passage of time. It is desirable that there is a case where the display is not performed (the second effective period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied). In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time remains until operation is permitted during the valid period in which the display area is reduced and the display area is reduced over time. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension inside. Note that "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time" means that, for example, normally (the first effective period), the display area is reduced with the passage of time. Where the image is displayed, it can be realized by not displaying the gauge image itself in the second effective period, or by adopting a method of displaying the gauge image but not reducing the display area thereof with time. is there.

  In this respect, when an operation is accepted in the second effective period (when the display area is reduced with the lapse of time), a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) corresponding to the operation acceptance is made. It is preferable that the image is not hidden but is displayed at the time when execution of at least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect is started. This makes it possible to understand that the operation has been accepted while the image is being displayed (before the expiration of the effective period), and the anxiety that "it may not be in time for the operation" Will be able to be removed.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, at least at the time point when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) corresponding to the operation reception is started. It is desirable that the display state of the mock image be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the operation was accepted so that the other image does not make it difficult to visually recognize the mock image. Therefore, if the mood image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (the display change, the lamp light emission, and the like caused by the post-operation effect) in response to the operation reception. It is desirable that the dynamic display be continued even when () is started. On the other hand, if a change (at least one of a change caused by post-operation effects such as a display change or lamp light emission) in response to an operation reception occurs by the operation by the player within the first effective period, the change The mock image may be hidden when (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred, or like the case of the second effective period described above, the mull image is not hidden and is displayed. In the state, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) may be generated according to the operation acceptance.

  However, in this way, even in the effective period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time", the image of the operating means to be operated is displayed and the image is displayed. It is desirable to display an image as a moving image that is developed at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation acceptance is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example includes the first operating means (for example, the operation button 410) and the second operating means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) as the operating means, and the first operating means. There is a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which operation reception is permitted is generated and a case where an effective period (production reception period) in which operation reception is permitted for the second operation means are generated. Among them, the first operating image showing the first operating means is displayed during the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted, and the second operating means is activated during the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted. The second image that has been taken is displayed. In addition, in the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the first operation means is permitted and the valid period in which the operation acceptance for the second operation means is permitted, the jackpot expectation degree (post-operation effect) suggested when the operation acceptance is made. As a result, the ratio of executing the mode that appears only at the time of a big hit is different. It should be noted that, in addition to the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the first operating means is permitted (production acceptance period), the valid period during which the operation acceptance for the second operating means is permitted (production acceptance period), an effective period different from these is set. It may also be one that can occur. In this regard, when an operation is accepted during an effective period (eg, an effective period during which operation acceptance for the second operation means is allowed) on the side of high jackpot expectation, a change (display change or display change) corresponding to the operation acceptance is made. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp light emission, is preferably not displayed and not displayed at the time when execution is started.

  As a result, in addition to the case where the operation is accepted in the situation shown in FIG. 183 (f) described above, for example, the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001). Nevertheless, the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is erroneously operated, and the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is left in the operating state (the operation is performed. Even if the second operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is operated and the operation is accepted as it is, the player side is made to recognize that the performance has been properly accepted. Will be able to.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described operational effects, at least when a change (at least one of a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is started, the operation is performed. It is desirable that the display state of the mock image be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception, and that the gauge image should not be made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. Therefore, if the mood image is dynamically displayed during the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed, at least one of the changes (the display change, the lamp light emission, and the like caused by the post-operation effect) in response to the operation reception. It is desirable that the dynamic display be continued even when () is started. Further, in order to make the player recognize that the performance has been properly received, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation reception by the operation of the player is made within the first effective period. Even if the change occurs (display change, lamp emission, etc.), the change image (first change image) is not hidden in the state where the change (display change, display change, etc.) is displayed. , Lamp emission, etc.) is desirable.

  According to such a configuration, "based on the determination means for performing the determination, the production means for performing the production based on the result of the determination by the determination means, and the predetermined result obtained by the determination by the determination means And a specific operation receiving portion (operation button 410 that can be displaced between the normal position and the pressed position) provided so as to be displaceable between the first position and the second position. ), A first detection unit capable of detecting a specific operation (pressing operation) by the player based on the displacement of the specific operation reception unit to the second position, and a special operation reception unit different from the specific operation reception unit. (For example, a sword decoration 5001) is provided with a second detection unit capable of detecting a special action by the player (for example, a sword operation), and the (after-operation effect that occurs when effect reception is made Different types) , A plurality of performance reception periods including a first performance reception period and a second performance reception period are prepared, and in the first performance reception period, a specific mock image of the specific operation receiving portion is displayed, and 1 The detection is performed by the detection by the detection unit. In the second production reception period, a special image that shows the special operation receiving unit is displayed, and the production is received by the detection by the second detection unit. The special operation image of the special operation receiving portion is displayed during the second effect reception period, but the specific operation receiving portion is set to the first operation by the player's specific operation. When the player is displaced from the 1st position to the 2nd position, even if the special operation is performed by the player while maintaining the specific operation receiving portion at the 2nd position, it is still detected by the 2nd detecting portion. Reception is performed, and thus with the arrangement such "effect after the operation on the basis of the accepted output 該演 can be performed.

  Then, in such a configuration, “even if the special operation is performed by the player while the specific operation receiving portion is maintained at the second position, the production is accepted by the detection by the second detecting portion. At the time when the post-operation performance is started to be executed based on the performance reception, by not hiding the special motion image that has affected the special operation receiving unit and keeping it displayed, it is not the side operated by mistake, This allows the player to recognize that the post-operation effect is being executed as an appropriate operation on the side.

  In addition, when the special miraculous image is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different jackpot expectations, the post-operation effect is started to be executed in the displayed mode as it is. If the performance reception is made without performing such an erroneous operation, it may be possible to leave the mood image displayed instead of hiding it at the time when the post-operation performance is started to be executed. The mock image may be hidden at the time when the effect is started to be executed.

  By the way, the frequency of occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit is lower than that of the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit. In many cases, this is considered to be one of the causes of the operation error. Therefore, at the time of the occurrence of the second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the special operation receiving unit, it is suggested that the effect reception is allowed or the effect reception is allowed. It is desirable that the acceptance permission sound is output. As a result, the player can recognize that the second effect reception period has occurred, and it is expected that an operation error is unlikely to occur. The "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) is always generated while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound that is in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed, or before the set time when the production reception is allowed is started. It is suggested that the output is started and the reception of the effect is allowed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne".

  However, even when the first performance reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the specific operation receiving unit occurs, it is suggested that the performance reception is allowed or the performance reception is allowed. A reception acceptable sound may be output. However, in this case, it is preferable that the acceptance sound is made different in its mode (timbre, etc.) between the case where the first effect reception period occurs and the case where the second effect reception period occurs. Alternatively, in the first production reception period, even if the production reception is performed while the reception acceptable sound is being output, the reception acceptable sound in the output state is continued without being terminated, but the second production reception period In the above, it is desirable that when the performance acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is ended in the middle thereof. You may make it employ | adopt both of those structures. According to such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand which of the first effect reception period and the second effect reception period occurs, the operation for the specific operation receiving portion, and the special operation reception period. It becomes possible to properly understand which of the operations for the department has been accepted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after displaying a gauge image (small gauge image) having a relatively small display area, a display for reducing the display area of the gauge image (small gauge image) with time elapses. (For example, when a display is finally set to “0”, a small gauge effective period (performance reception period) that indicates the remaining time for which operation reception is allowed is generated, and Displaying a relatively large gauge image (large gauge image) and then decreasing the display area of the gauge image (large gauge image) with time (for example, finally setting the display area to "0"). There is a case in which a large gauge effective period (effect reception period) that suggests the remaining time for which the operation reception is permitted is performed by performing the display. Then, in the small gauge effective period in which the small gauge image is displayed and in the large gauge effective period in which the large gauge image is displayed, the jackpot expectation degree suggested only when the operation reception is made (only as a post-operation effect during the jackpot). The rate at which non-appearing aspects are executed) is made different (for example, a large gauge effective period has a higher jackpot expectation). In addition to the small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period, an effective period different from these may be further generated. The small gauge effective period and the large gauge effective period may give an operation opportunity to the same operation target, or may give an operation opportunity to different operation targets.

  In this respect, when an operation is accepted during the large gauge effective period, a change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) corresponding to the operation acceptance is started at the time of execution start. It is desirable that the large gauge image is not hidden but is displayed. In addition, even when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the large gauge image becomes smaller with the passage of time. It is desirable that the display is not ended and this is continued. As a result, there was a sense of security that it seemed that a lot of the remaining time was left due to the large gauge image being displayed, but after the operation was accepted, whether or not the operation was properly accepted It becomes possible to make the user feel a sense of anxiety, and it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension.

  In this case, the display mode of the gauge image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) in response to the operation reception occurs (for example, the color or the The transmittance and the like) do not necessarily have to be the same, and the gauge image may be difficult to be visually recognized by another image. However, in order to preferably obtain the above-described operational effects, at least when a change (at least one of a change caused by the post-operation effect such as a display change and a lamp light emission) according to the operation reception is started, the operation is performed. It is desirable that the display state of the gauge image be maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception, and that the gauge image should not be made difficult to be visually recognized by other images. On the other hand, when a change (at least one of a change caused by a post-operation effect such as a display change or a lamp emission) caused by an operation by the player occurs during the small gauge effective period, the change The gauge image (small gauge image) may be hidden when (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) has occurred, or the gauge image (large gauge image) as in the case of the large gauge effective period described above. ) May be displayed instead of being hidden, and a change (display change, lamp emission, etc.) may be generated in response to the operation acceptance.

  Further, when the large gauge effective period occurs, it is desirable to output a reception permission sound that indicates that the production reception is permitted or that the production reception is permitted. . As a result, the player can recognize that the large-gauge effective period has occurred, and the sense of security until the operation is accepted can be further emphasized. The "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) is always generated while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned), or It is a sound that is in a state where an allowable state (valid period) has already occurred. In other words, it suggests that the output is started within the set time when the production reception is allowed and the production reception is allowed, or before the set time when the production reception is allowed is started. It is suggested that the output is started and the reception of the effect is allowed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne".

  However, even when the small gauge effective period occurs, a reception permission sound may be output that indicates that the performance reception is permitted or the performance reception is permitted. However, in this case, it is desirable that the acceptance allowable sound be made different in its mode (timbre, etc.) depending on whether a small gauge effective period occurs or a large gauge effective period occurs. Or, in the small gauge effective period, even if the performance acceptance is made while the acceptance allowable sound is being output, the acceptance allowable sound in the output state is continued without being terminated, but in the large gauge effective period. When the performance acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound in the output state be ended in the middle thereof. You may make it employ | adopt both of those structures. With such a configuration, it becomes easier to understand whether the small gauge effective period or the large gauge effective period occurs, the operation acceptance during the small gauge effective period, and the large gauge effective period. It becomes possible to properly understand which of the operation reception during the period is performed.

  The large-gauge image and the small-gauge image may not only be different in size, but may also be images having different morphologies (images that are not similar to each other).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above (or later), during the period in which the operation reception is permitted, the movement image is dynamically drawn so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced. It is supposed to be displayed. In this respect, at the time when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the mood image is not hidden and is kept displayed. In this case, the dynamic image display may be continued without being terminated.

  Further, the pad image and the gauge image may be displayed as an integrated pad image described later in which they are integrated.

  In each of the above-mentioned effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, "operation reception" means not only detection by a mechanical operation means such as a button but also detection of contact with a specific operation receiving portion by a touch sensor. The operation may be accepted, or the operation may be accepted by detecting the movement of the player in the specific area in a non-contact manner.

  Further, when an effect that causes an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is referred to as an “operation system effect”, the operation system effect is related to this. There may be a case where it is executed in parallel with another specific effect (for example, a movable body effect, a count effect, etc.) that does not have any. However, in this case, when the "operational performance" is executed but the "other specific performance unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operational performance" and the "unrelated to this" It is desirable that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is higher than that in the case where the "specific effect" is performed in parallel. That is, when the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect that is not related to this" are in parallel, it is assumed that the effect reception is not performed in "the operation system effect" and the post-operation effect is not executed. Also, since "another specific effect that is not related to this" is in the execution state, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the gaming enjoyment, while "operating system effect" is executed, but "another special effect that is not related to this" In the production situation where "specific production" is not executed, if the production reception is not performed in "Operation system production" and the post-operation production is not executed, no production will be executed. Therefore, it is inevitable that the interest in games will decline. Therefore, when the "operation system effect" is executed but the "other specific effect unrelated to this" is not executed, the "operation system effect" and "another specific effect unrelated to this" are performed. By making the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic effect function to be higher than that in the effect situation in which "effects" are performed in parallel, it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game when the operation-related effects occur. become. The ratio may be 100%. By the way, a precursor effect that is performed before the performance acceptance period occurs and a performance in which the operation means to be operated operates are executed as an "operation system effect" or a related effect. It can be said that it is a thing. Further, if it is assumed that the "other specific effect" is generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect), it is suggested in advance that the rate at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works increases. You will be able to. In this case, it is desirable to be executed as an effect that is ended after the end of the effect reception period (preferably after-operation effect). On the other hand, if "another specific effect" is to be executed as an effect that occurs after the start of the effect reception period (preferably, the indication effect) and is ended before the end of the effect reception period, for example, It becomes possible only to recognize immediately before whether the above-mentioned automatic effect function is in a high functioning state, and it is possible to provide an effect with a sense of tension. In this regard, as "another specific effect", when it is to be generated before the start of the effect reception period (preferably, a precursor effect), the "another specific effect" is repeated a plurality of times within one symbol variation. If it is done, it will be executed even when the production reception period does not occur, so if the ratio of the automatic production function that works when "another specific production" is executed is high, With this, it becomes possible to give a sense of tension as to whether a performance reception period will occur.

  Further, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss depending on the result of the big hit determination is sequentially digested and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, Until the 1000th loss variation), an effect reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) can be generated with a predetermined probability based on the result of the big hit determination. In addition, even if the effect reception period occurs, when there is no operation by the player, there are cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is activated and cases where the above-mentioned automatic effect function is not activated. On the other hand, when the player is in a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit determination is sequentially exhausted and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously performed 999 times). When the 1000th loss variation) is reached, in the symbol variation (rendering pattern) that has reached the specific value, the operation opportunity for the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) regardless of the result of the jackpot determination. Is always generated, and even if there is no operation by the player within the effect reception period, there is an operation by the player within the effect reception period by operating the above-mentioned automatic effect function. You may make it perform the process which generate | occur | produces the same after-effect as the time. According to such a configuration, when the number of continuous executions of the loss variation reaches a specific value, "the operation should be performed for the player every time the performance acceptance period occurs while the loss variation is continuously executed. Even though I urged him to do so, I could not achieve any results. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, the pachinko machine 1 itself must function automatically. Since it is realized as an effect to be played, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game. At this time, during the performance acceptance period that occurs when the variation in loss is sequentially digested and the number of times of execution reaches a specific value (for example, the 1000th variation in loss), the variation in loss is sequentially digested and executed. A special display image (for example, a display image that is different from a display image (for example, "operation margin" or the like) that appears during the performance acceptance period until the number of times reaches a specific value (for example, a variation of up to 999 times)) "If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf" etc.) Moreover, even after the symbol variation (effect pattern) that has reached the specific value is digested, each time the symbol variation is digested until a specific condition (for example, occurrence of a big hit game state) is satisfied, the symbol variation. Within the (production pattern), regardless of the result of the big hit determination, the production reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation means (any of the plurality of operation means) is always generated, and a special display image (for example, " If it is troublesome, I will operate on your behalf "etc.), and even if there is no operation by the player within the production reception period, the automatic production function described above will function to respond to the production reception. It is desirable to execute a process that always causes post-operation performance.

  In the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the variation in loss according to the result of the jackpot determination is sequentially digested, and the number of executions thereof is a specific value (for example, the variation in loss is continuously executed 999 times, It is also possible to display the number of remaining variations until the 1000th variation in loss).

  In addition, until the number of executions reaches a specific value by sequentially eliminating the variation in loss according to the result of the big hit judgment when in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), the first operation during the symbol change. Both the production reception period for the means and the production reception period for the second operation means are allowed to occur, but in the variation of the symbols when the variation in the loss is sequentially digested and the number of executions reaches a specific value. Alternatively, the production may be advanced such that only one of the production reception period for the first operation means and the production reception period for the second operation means always occurs, and the other side cannot occur. According to such a configuration, since the operation opportunity is always given to the same operation means, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the production acceptance period and the expectation of itself. I will get it. However, this performance example "provides some results despite prompting the player to operate every time the performance acceptance period occurs in the course of continuous variation of loss. It was not. ”As if I felt the responsibility so far, even if there is no operation by the player, considering that the pachinko machine 1 itself is realized as an effect that always causes the automatic effect function to operate, it is a transition. In order not to have any further expectations, a performance acceptance period is generated for the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) on the side where the degree of expectation at the time of occurrence is relatively low, and the second operation means (for example, It is desirable not to generate a performance acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001).

  Further, in the first effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (for example, the operation button 410) of the plurality of operation means, it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It can occur both when it is not operated and when it is controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), but the second operation means (for example, the sword ornament 5001) of the plurality of operation means. The second effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given cannot occur when not controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and is controlled to the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It may be allowed to occur while being performed. With such a configuration, it becomes possible to enhance the performance when being controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), and when the effect is in the specific effect state (automatic button effect state). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the performance acceptance period is generated based on the result of the big hit determination,
・ Displaying a model image of the operating means (an operation target suggesting image that suggests the operating means to be operated) (a model image displaying means),
When an operation is performed by the player while the mood image is displayed after the production acceptance period has occurred, post-operation production can be executed based on the operation (player operation acceptance means),
-After the production reception period occurs, if the specific timing arrives without any operation being performed by the player while the mood image is being displayed, post-operation production can be executed without being operated by the player ( Automatic performance reception means)
However, regarding the mood image, it is displayed in one of a plurality of modes in which the ratio (expectation level) in which the post-operation effect is executed in “a mode advantageous to the player” when the effect reception is made is different. It is desirable to be able to be done. With such a configuration, the degree of expectation can be recognized regardless of whether the after-operation performance is generated by the player operation reception means or the after-operation performance is generated by the automatic performance reception means. It is possible to generate a post-operation performance while being said that.

  In addition, when the after-operation effect is generated by the function of the above-described automatic effect function, after the operation without any involvement of the player with respect to the operation means (eg, the operation button 410) that is the operation target. Since the effect is automatically generated, the player may not be able to grasp which operation means the automatically generated after-operation effect corresponds to. Therefore, in the case of generating the post-operation effect by causing the above-described automatic effect function to function, first, while displaying the mood image (the operation target suggestion image that suggests the operation means to be the operation target) during the effect reception period, Even when the above-mentioned automatic effect function is functioning, it is desirable that the post-operation effect is generated in a state in which the mood image is not displayed but is displayed. In this case, the display mode (for example, the color, the transmittance, etc.) of the operation target suggestion image does not necessarily have to be the same before and after the post-operation performance, and the operation means that is the operation target. It suffices to be able to recognize which of the two is even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred. On the other hand, when the after-operation effect is generated by the operation by the player within the effect reception period, the operation target suggestion image may be hidden in the state in which the after-operation effect is generated, or the above-described automatic operation is performed. Similar to the case where the effect function works, the post-operation effect may be generated in a state in which the operation target suggestion image is not displayed but is displayed. The post-operation effect may be executed using at least an area of the effect display device 1600 that is different from the area in which the mock image is displayed. May be executed as an operation by.

  At this time, when the mood image is displayed in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations, even in the state where the post-operation performance has occurred, the expected degree (the mood image) suggested during the performance acceptance period. It becomes possible to confirm the display mode).

  In this way, the image to be continuously displayed is hidden after the post-operation effect occurs. However, the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic performance means is executed when the specific time has elapsed after the first side effect reception period has occurred, and the specific time after the first side effect reception period has occurred The time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the non-display of the mood image should be different from the case where the automatic processing by the first automatic effect means is executed when a different time has elapsed. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, or whether the post-operation performance has been generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed. Even if it does not exist, it is possible to recognize at what time the post-operation effect has occurred by checking the time from the execution of the post-operation effect to the hiding of the mock image. ..

  In addition, when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when the specific time has elapsed, and when the post-operation performance is generated by the automatic processing when the time different from the specific time has elapsed, the big hit is determined by the big hit determination. The degree of expectation that is obtained may be different.

  In addition, when a production reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to the player occurs while being controlled to a specific production state (automatic button production state), two displays are displayed during the production reception period. One of the modes (for example, a low-expectation display mode with a relatively low jackpot expectation and a high-expectation display mode with a relatively high jackpot expectation) is allowed to appear, and a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image). ) Appears, even if the operation is not performed within the performance reception period, the performance reception is always performed (the automatic performance function is always functioning) and the post-operation performance according to the performance reception is executed, but the low expectation display When a mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, when no operation is performed within the effect reception period, effect reception (automatic effect function) is performed and post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed. And production Biasing may be made to effect development so that there is a case where (automatic directing feature function) after Sarezu operation effect is not executed. That is, if the user forgets to operate the display when a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) appears, it is unavoidable that the entertainment of the game is deteriorated due to the inability to confirm the post-operation performance, but the low expectation. When a display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, it is assumed that even if a user forgets to operate the game, it is assumed that the interest in the game will not be deteriorated so much, so a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) has appeared. When the user forgets to operate the device, he / she always operates the automatic effect function within the effect reception period to avoid a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to forgetting the operation. If you forget to operate it when (image) appears, play so that you do not forget to operate it by not necessarily operating the automatic production function within the production reception period And to have a sense of tension is possible to enhance the player's sense of participation it will be expected against. In addition, when not controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state), a low-expectation display mode (for example, a blue operation image) appears, but a high-expectation display mode (for example, a red operation image) is displayed. You may not be allowed to appear. Also, any one of three or more display modes may be allowed to appear during the production acceptance period.

  Then, in each of the characteristic techniques described below, these other examples of the automatic button effect state may be appropriately applied and implemented.

[Expectation suggestion by automatic production function]
As described above, in the automatic button effect state, even if the player does not perform an operation within the effect acceptance period (when applying the above-mentioned another example, the first specified effective period or the second specified effective period), A process (automatic performance function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, in the automatic button production state, when the operation by the player is not received during the production reception period, the same change as when the production is received. It is also possible to create an effect pattern in which the process (automatic effect function) that causes the effect is not executed. And at this time, in the automatic button production state, when the automatic production function does not work when the operation by the player is not received within the production reception period, when the automatic production function has worked, the symbol variation concerned In, it is possible to execute a process in which the production is advanced within the symbol variation so that the degree of expectation (ratio) in which the big hit symbol appears is low. At this time, the degree of expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol appears may be 0%.

  With such a configuration, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, the automatic effect function is provided when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By confirming whether or not it works, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol will appear due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed by performing production reception (operation on the operation button 410) within the production reception period. In the risk of possible production demerits, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation on the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation means (the operation button 410, the sword ornament 5001 and the like) can be accepted as an effect. The above-described effects (specific operation-related effects (FIG. 166 to FIG. 186) regarding whether a period occurs or a period during which an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) is allowed to receive an effect occurs. See))) is executable. In this respect, in the automatic button production state, during the production reception period that occurs corresponding to such a specific operation-related production, compared to the production reception period that occurs without executing the specific operation-related production, those productions When there is no operation (reception of production) within the reception period, it is possible to execute a process in which the production within the symbol variation is advanced so that the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic production function functions increases. At this time, the rate at which the automatic effect function works may be 100%.

  According to such a configuration, the fact that the specific operation-related effect is executed before the effect reception period occurs also functions as an effect that suggests that the above-mentioned automatic effect function has a high functioning rate. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately improve the gaming interest when a specific operation-related effect is executed.

  Although this is also described above, in the specific operation-related effect, the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001 more than when it is shown that the operation button 410 is given the operation opportunity as the effect result. It is set so that the expectation that a big hit symbol will appear is higher due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state when it is shown that it is given. However, in the automatic button production state, regarding the proportion of the above-mentioned automatic production function that operates when there is no operation (production reception) within the production reception period that occurs corresponding to a specific operation-related production, the operation button 410 is used. It is more desirable to set the ratio to be the same when it is shown that an operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001.

  According to such a configuration, there is a case where an effect situation with a relatively low degree of expectation (indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410) appears as an effect result of a specific operation-related effect. Also, since the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works does not change due to this (the effect result of the specific operation-related effect), this can be expected regarding the above-mentioned automatic effect function. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects and expectations suggested by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by the effect of each other are put in parallel, so that the enjoyment of the game can be enhanced.

  Hereinafter, a specific example of an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested by such an automatic effect function will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189.

  FIG. 187 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3, and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance situation that is being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

  187 (b) shows an effect situation in which a specific effect acceptance period for the operation button 410 has occurred during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 187 (a). As shown in the figure, during a specific effect reception period, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press And a bar display indicating the remaining time of the specific effect reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the specific effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. Etc.) and a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With a relatively low expectation or “intense heat!” With a relatively high expectation). Either will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance is not generated), the ratio is 60%. Therefore, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 40%.

  That is, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60%, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the operation for the operation button 410 is not accepted within the specific effect acceptance period. As a result, the post-operation effect, which should have occurred if the effect reception is performed, will not be executed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

  On the other hand, when the above-described automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40%, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), although the operation button 410 is not operated within the specific effect reception period. The post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is received within the specific effect reception period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) and the like are operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" And "Intense heat!", Etc.) is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within a specific performance reception period. In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the mode displayed in the display area. After that, as shown in FIG. 187 (e), the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time elapses from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, a specific performance reception period is generated as a "performance reception period during which the above-mentioned automatic performance function operates" or "the above-mentioned automatic performance function". Is generated as a "non-functioning production reception period", it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment when executing the symbol variation, and as a result, 60% in a specific production reception period. The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a ratio of 40%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a ratio of 40%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of a big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding time of selection, “the above-mentioned automatic effect function works "Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 60% and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 40% in the specific effect reception period.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, when the specific performance reception period is generated as the "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic performance function operates", " Of which period so that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate when the symbol fluctuation is stopped than when it is generated as "the stage reception period in which the automatic production function does not work". Is determined (selected) based on the result of the above jackpot determination.

  With such a configuration, the automatic production function is activated when the production reception period occurs in which it is determined that a mode having a high degree of expectation as the post-operation production (such as "heat!") Will appear when the production is received. In contrast to the relatively high proportion, the automatic production is performed when a production reception period occurs in which it is determined that a mode with low expectation (such as "chance!") Will appear as post-operation production when production is received. The rate at which the function works becomes relatively low. Therefore, when the effect reception period for the operation button 410 occurs in the automatic button effect state, whether the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect acceptance period. By performing the confirmation, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation as to whether or not the big hit symbol appears due to the symbol fluctuation in the execution state. That is, in this case, in the automatic button production state, it is impossible to confirm the post-operation production itself, which should have been confirmed by performing production reception (operation on the operation button 410) within the production reception period. In the risk of possible production demerits, a novel production performance in which the player exercises a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  However, as shown in FIG. 187 (d), even if the automatic effect function works when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, it is expected as an after-operation effect. Since the mode with a low frequency (such as "chance!") Can also appear, even if it is suggested that the automatic performance function has a relatively high expectation level, Such a suggestion that the expectation level continues to be raised (a suggestion by the function of the automatic production function, a suggestion by the mode of the post-operation production) makes it possible to realize an unobtrusive performance, and to maintain the amusement of the game appropriately. You will be expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), even if the automatic effect function does not function when the operation button 410 is intentionally not operated within the effect reception period, even the effect reception is performed. Since there is a possibility that a mode with a high degree of expectation has appeared in the post-operation production that should have appeared, it is expected that the entertainment of the game is maintained appropriately. However, when the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (c) (the situation where the automatic effect function does not work and the effect after operation does not appear) appears, the effect situation (automatic effect function shown in FIG. 187 (d) Functioned, but it is desirable to have a lower expectation than when a situation where a mode with a low expectation appeared as a post-operation effect).

  FIGS. 188 and 189 show effects that the automatic effect function suggests when the effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) occurs in the automatic button effect state. A specific example is shown.

  FIG. 188 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. Shows the performance situation that is being performed. Also in this example, as shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, , "Auto button setting") appears continuously.

  188 (b) is a specific operation-related effect illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171 (a specific operation-related example illustrated separately from this) during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 188 (a). (May be a staging) indicates the staging situation in which staging is started. That is, as described above, in the specific operation-related effects illustrated in FIGS. 168 to 171, the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. , The common display effect is performed. While the common display effect is performed, it is kept secret which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is given an operation opportunity. . However, when a predetermined time elapses after the start of the specific operation-related effect, an effect state indicating that the operation button 410 should be operated appears as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation, or As a result of the second effect having a relatively high degree of expectation, an effect state indicating that the sword decoration 5001 should be operated appears, and thus the operation button 410 having a relatively low degree of expectation and the relatively high degree of expectation. Which of the high sword decorations 5001 is given an operation opportunity is shown.

  188 (c) shows that the operation button 410 is in a state of being operated as a first effect result having a relatively low expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b) being performed. Is displayed, and the production acceptance period for the operation button 410 is generated. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the operation button 410 (here, “press”, etc.) is displayed. A character display and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410.

  Here, if the operation on the operation button 410 is received as an effect during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c), a specific decorative member SDY (such as a curtain) is used as a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. In addition to performing the rendering operation, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations in the display area (for example, “chance!” With relatively low expectations or “exciting heat” with relatively high expectations). Will be displayed. At this time, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the specific effect reception period is ended when the effect reception is performed without consuming the remaining time.

  On the other hand, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-mentioned ratio is 20%. The automatic effect function does not work, and the automatic effect function described above works at a rate of 80%.

  That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. A situation may occur in which operations cannot be performed. Therefore, in the automatic button effect state, when an effect acceptance period corresponding to such a specific operation-related effect occurs (see FIG. 188 (c)), an effect that occurs without executing the specific operation-related effect. Compared to the reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)), the production within the symbol variation so that the ratio of the above-mentioned automatic production function to function when there is no operation (production reception) within those production reception periods is increased. Is being executed. According to such a configuration, the operation button 410 and the sword decoration are suppressed while suppressing the anxiety that "a proper operation cannot be performed within the production reception period and the production corresponding to the operation may not appear". It becomes possible to provide the fun of which one of the bodies 5001 is activated through the specific operation-related effect. In order to obtain such an effect, it is not always necessary to provide a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation depending on whether or not the automatic effect function has worked.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect) is executed. Until the end, as shown in the figure, the display (in this case, "auto button high accuracy middle") indicating that there is a production situation in which the ratio of the automatic production function is high continues. Is becoming apparent.

  In addition, when the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 188 (d), it is assumed that the operation on the operation button 410 is not accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred, will not be executed as long as the effect reception is performed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function does not function. 187 (b), in the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. It is desirable to have higher expectations than if not.

  Further, when the above-described automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 188 (e), even if the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect is accepted within the acceptance period is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) and the like are operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. Any of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" And "Intense heat!", Etc.) is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within a specific performance reception period. In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the mode displayed in the display area. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 188 (f), the production is advanced in such a manner that a reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period.

  On the other hand, FIG. 189 (g) shows a state in which the sword ornament 5001 should be operated as the second effect result with a relatively high degree of expectation as a result of the specific operation-related effect shown in FIG. 188 (b). In the drawing, a production situation indicating that there is appears, and a production reception period for the sword decoration 5001 has occurred. In this effect situation, as shown in the figure, a sword decoration image SYG corresponding to the sword decoration 5001 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting an operation on the sword decoration 5001 (here, " A character display such as "Deliver the sword" and a bar display showing the remaining time of the specific performance reception period) will appear. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the operating state, and this also prompts the operation of the operating button 410 and moves the operating state of the sword ornament 5001 from the operating state to the original position. Will be allowed to operate.

  Here, if the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the operation for the operation button 410 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). The same post-operation effect as when it was performed will be executed. However, when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (g), the operation on the operation button 410 is received within the effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c). Of multiple modes with different expectations (for example, “Chance!” With relatively low expectations, “Gekijou” with relatively high expectations, etc.) The appearance ratio in the display area is high. This percentage may be 100%. Further, when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received during the effect reception period, the automatic button effect state is canceled and returned to the normal effect state, and the remaining time is consumed during the specific effect reception period. The fact that the production is ended when there is no production reception is the same as in the production reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (effect reception does not occur. In the case), although the production situation is higher in expectation than when the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c) occurs, the production reception is generated in the production situation shown in FIG. 188 (c). As in the case where it is not performed, the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20%, and the above-mentioned automatic effect function functions at a rate of 80%.

  With such a configuration, as a result of the specific operation-related effect being performed, the effect state indicating that the operation button 410 is in a state in which the operation button 410 should be operated as the first effect result having a relatively low expectation (FIG. 188). Even if ((c)) appears, the ratio at which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works is not changed by this (effect result of a specific operation-related effect). It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the expectation that the function will work. In this way, two different effects (specific operation-related effects, suggestion of expectation by the automatic effect function) that are not influenced by each other's effect result are put in parallel, and a disadvantageous effect result appears in one effect. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing games. However, in this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 188 (c), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function functions. In this case, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is not performed within the effect acceptance period (when the effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is performed. Expectations will be lower than if they worked.

  If the above-described automatic effect function does not work at a rate of 20%, as shown in FIG. 189 (h), it is assumed that the operation on the sword ornament 5001 has not been accepted during the effect acceptance period. The post-operation effect, which should have occurred, is not executed as long as the effect reception is performed. Then, after this, the production is advanced in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the specific production reception period. However, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 189 (g), when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is not performed within the effect reception period (when the effect reception does not occur), the automatic effect function described above functions. Even if there is not, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 187 (b), when the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect acceptance period (when effect acceptance does not occur), the above-described automatic effect function is provided. Expectations should be higher than if they did not work.

  Further, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%, as shown in FIG. 189 (i), although the sword ornament 5001 is not operated within the effect acceptance period, After the operation, the post-operation effect having the same content as that when the operation is performed and the effect is received is executed. That is, as described above, in the post-operation effect that is generated by the effect reception within the specific effect reception period, the specific decorative member SDY (a shade accessory) and the like are operated, and the degree of expectation is different in the display area. When one of a plurality of modes (for example, "Chance!" Or "Intense heat!") Is displayed, but after-operation performance occurs in response to being operated within the performance reception period In either case, the mode displayed in the display area is the same as the case where the post-operation effect is generated due to the function of the automatic effect function. Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 189 (j), the production progresses in such a manner that the reach state is formed after a predetermined time elapses from the production reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related production.

  It should be noted that the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is generated as the “effect reception period in which the above-described automatic effect function operates” or “the above-mentioned. As for the effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) in which a specific operation-related effect occurs without being executed, whether or not it is generated as the "effect reception period in which the automatic effect function does not function" At the time of execution, it is decided (selected) based on the result of the big hit judgment, and as a result, the above-mentioned automatic effect function is operated at a rate of 20% in the effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. Instead, the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of 80%. For example, when a big hit is won as a result of a big hit judgment, the selection table for the time of winning is referred to, and based on the distribution ratio in the selection table for the corresponding time of selection, “the above-mentioned automatic effect function works "Period" or "effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not work" is generated, and when the result of the big hit judgment is a big hit, the selection table for the big hit is referred to, and the selection table for the big hit is used. Based on the distribution ratio in the selection table, "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function works" or "the effect reception period in which the above-mentioned automatic effect function does not operate" is generated. As a result, the above-described automatic effect function does not function at a rate of 20% during the effect acceptance period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and 80%. The above-mentioned automatic effect function works at a rate of.

  Similarly, the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect is also generated as the “effect reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function works”. In that case, the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing when the symbol fluctuation is stopped becomes higher than that in the case where the above-mentioned automatic production function does not function as the production reception period. Then, which of these periods should be generated is determined (selected) based on the result of the above-mentioned jackpot determination.

  It should be noted that the post-operation effect occurs in the case of the effect reception period (see FIGS. 188 (c) and 189 (g)) corresponding to the specific operation-related effect, and without the specific operation-related effect being executed. It may be executed as an effect different from that during the effect acceptance period (see FIG. 187 (b)). However, it is desirable that any of a plurality of modes having different expectations can appear in the post-operation effect even when the effects are executed as different effects. The degree of expectation may be 0% or 100%.

  Further, the sword decoration 5001 used in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be the sword decoration 5001 of the type shown in FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 188 and 189, an explanation is given as an example in which the “effect using the automatic effect function” is applied to the specific operation-related effects shown in FIGS. 168 to 171. The “effect using function” may be applied to any specific operation-related effect in FIGS. 166 to 186.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 188 and 189, when a specific operation-related effect is executed in a state where the automatic button effect state is not controlled, an effect reception period corresponding to the specific operation-related effect. In addition to preventing the setting operation to the automatic button performance state from being accepted, the state "the setting operation to the automatic button performance state is not accepted" is set before the performance reception period occurs. It is desirable to generate at least from the time of the effect situation (the effect situation in which the specific operation-related effect has started) shown in FIG. 188 (b) so that this is continued until the effect acceptance period. According to such a configuration, even if the setting operation to the automatic button effect state is attempted after confirming that the specific operation-related effect has started, this will not be accepted. It will be possible to provide "production using the automatic production function" only for those who continuously play while maintaining the game, and continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state. You will be able to provide dramatic value for what you do.

  Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g). )), A first display mode (for example, a blue button image BTG or a blue sword decoration image SYG) and a second display mode (for example, a green button image BTG or a green sword decoration). (Image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the second display mode appears, the "performance reception period during which the above-described automatic effect function works" occurs compared to when the first display mode appears. It is desirable to have a higher ratio in.

  Also, an effect reception period (see FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs when a specific operation-related effect is not executed, or an effect reception period corresponding to a specific operation-related effect (FIG. 188 (c), FIG. 189 (g). )), A third display mode (for example, a red button image BTG or a red sword decoration image SYG) is allowed to appear, and when the third display mode appears, "the above-mentioned automatic effect It may be configured such that the "performance reception period in which the function works" is always occurring.

  According to these configurations, in the automatic button production state, it is not possible to confirm the post-operation production itself which should have been confirmed if "reception of production (operation on the operation button 410) is performed within the production reception period. "There is a risk that a production demerit such as" may occur, and to provide a material for determining whether to make a production selection such as "Dare not to operate the operation button 410 within the production reception period". It will be possible to expect that it will be possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

  In addition, regardless of whether or not the "effect using the automatic effect function" is applied, the effect reception period corresponding to each "specific operation-related effect" illustrated in FIGS. 166 to 186, 188, and 189. With regard to the above, it is desirable to generate the operation as a period having a longer time than the effect reception period (eg, FIG. 187 (b)) that occurs without the specific operation-related effect being executed. That is, in the specific operation-related effect (specific display effect), the player is confused as to which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is activated, and as a result, it is appropriate during the effect reception period. Although it may happen that operations cannot be performed, it is possible to prevent such situations from occurring by allowing a long time for the performance reception period corresponding to "specific operation-related performance". Will be expected.

  In particular, in the examples of FIGS. 188 and 189, it is considered that the ratio of the automatic effect function is set to be relatively high in the effect reception period corresponding to “specific operation-related effect”. For example, whether or not the automatic performance function works by setting the performance reception period to have a longer time than the performance reception period that occurs when the "specific operation-related performance" is not executed. It can be said that it is desirable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game by sustaining the directivity of about. In this case, with regard to the timing at which the automatic effect function works, in the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed, it will come when the first time has elapsed after the period has occurred. On the other hand, in the effect reception period corresponding to the “specific operation related effect”, the automatic effect function is to be set to arrive when the second time longer than the first time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period. Is important in sustaining the playability of whether or not it works.

  In addition, the time from the start to the end of the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" occurring and the effect reception period that corresponds to the "specific operation-related effect" Even when differently set, the bar display showing the remaining time of the effect reception period is displayed in the same manner (bar display of the same length), and the gauge remaining amount is reduced. It is desirable to only make the speeds different. That is, in this case, even if the effect reception period corresponding to the "specific operation-related effect" occurs, the period is continued for the same time as the effect reception period that occurs without the "specific operation-related effect" being executed. It is possible to make it seem like it is, and combined with the "twistedness" by continuing for a period longer than expected, it is possible to maintain the directivity of whether the automatic production function works or not. Will be able to.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189, the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) when controlled to a specific effect state (automatic button effect state). Occurs and the specific operation means (operation button 410) is not operated within the first effect reception period, the process by the first automatic effect means (automatic effect function for the operation button 410) is not always performed. Although not necessarily executed, in the effect reception period that occurs when a predetermined time elapses after the specific display effect (specific operation-related effect) is executed, the specific display effect occurs without being executed. The specific operation means (operation button 410) within the first effect reception period rather than the first effect reception period (effect reception period for the specific operation means (operation button 410)) So that the ratio is performed is high (auto-effect function for the operation button 410) first automatic presentation means according to the process when the operation is not performed against.

  In this respect, in such an automatic button effect state, the proportions ("60% -40%", "20% -80%") of the automatic effect function that function depending on the type of effect acceptance period are different as described above. When the automatic button effect state to be set is the “first automatic button effect state”, the proportion of the automatic effect function that functions depending on the type of effect acceptance period is another distribution rate (“50% -50%”, “10%”). % -90% ") is set differently, and when the production reception period occurs, the automatic production function is set to always function regardless of the type as the period. It is also possible to further prepare a third automatic button effect state to be performed so that it can be set to any of these effect states, including a normal effect state in which the automatic effect function does not function. In addition, the normal production state in which the automatic production function does not work is not prepared, and the game is always in the automatic button production state (first automatic button production state, second automatic button production state, third automatic button production state). Alternatively, the effect may be executed.

  The above-mentioned "type of effect reception period" may mean that the type of post-operation effect that occurs when an operation is accepted is different. For example, in the first automatic button effect state, in the "first effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of conversation notice" and "second effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of cut-in", When an operation is not accepted for the operation means within the effect acceptance period of, the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is not generated (although automatic acceptance is not made), but "after the operation of moving the movable body A. In the "third effect reception period during which the effect is generated", the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated when the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period (the automatic acceptance is performed). It will be. On the other hand, in the "second automatic button performance state (second performance state)" in which automatic reception is more likely to occur than in the "first automatic button performance state (first performance state)", "conversation notice" In the "first effect reception period for generating post-operation effect", the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is not generated when the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period (automatic acceptance However, in the "second effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of cut-in" and the "third effect reception period for generating post-operation effect of moving the movable body A", those effect receptions are performed. When the operation is not accepted within the period, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated (automatic acceptance is performed). However, any one of a plurality of production reception periods including the first production reception period (type of conversation notice), the second production reception period (type of cut-in), and the third production reception period (type of movable body A) occurs. Even if it is done, when the operation for the operation means is not accepted, there is no case where the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated, and the "normal effect state" is not prepared and should be set to this. Will not be allowed.

  That is, in this case, "the operation means operable by the player, the determination means for making a determination based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and the game based on the result obtained by the determination made by the determination means" As a performance acceptance period in which a privilege granting means for granting a privilege to a person and a performance state control means capable of controlling any one of a plurality of performance states are provided, and an operation opportunity is given to the operation means, A plurality of effect reception periods having different types of post-operation effects that occur when an operation is received are prepared, and when any one of the plurality of effect reception periods occurs in the plurality of effect states, Depending on the type of the performance reception period that has occurred, a case where the same post-operation performance as when the operation is received when the operation for the operation means is not received within the performance reception period; The first production state that has both the case where the same post-operation production is not generated and the case where any one of the plurality of production reception periods occurs, the type of the generated production reception period Accordingly, when the operation after the operation is not accepted within the effect acceptance period, the same post-operation effect as when the acceptance is made is generated, and the same after-operation effect when the acceptance is made. Although there is both a case where it does not occur, the easiness of occurrence of the same post-operation effect includes at least a second effect state different from the first effect state, and any of the plurality of effect reception periods. Even if occurs, when the operation for the operation means is not accepted, there is no case where the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted is generated. Ikoto and thus provided as a game machine, "characterized by.

  Also, the distribution ratio may be set to either 0% or 100% depending on the type of the performance acceptance period and the type of the performance state.

  Also, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 187 to 189 may be modified as follows. That is, when the automatic effect function operates in the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first (The timing within the effect reception period), the above-described automatic effect function operates to end the first effect reception period and generate a post-operation effect corresponding thereto. However, when the automatic effect function does not function within the first effect reception period shown in FIG. 187 (b), the timing when the first predetermined time elapses after the first effect reception period occurs (first The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing within the one effect reception period), and then the first effect reception period is ended without executing the post-operation effect (even after that, the post-operation effect is not executed). ). On the other hand, when the automatic effect function works in the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect reception period or The automatic performance function described above operates at the timing when the second predetermined time, which is longer than the first predetermined time, has elapsed since the third performance reception period occurred, and the second performance reception period or the third performance reception period. The production reception period is ended and the post-operation production is generated in accordance therewith. However, when the automatic effect function does not function within the second effect reception period shown in FIG. 188 (c) or the third effect reception period shown in FIG. 189 (g), the second effect reception period or The above-mentioned automatic effect function does not function at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed after the third effect reception period occurs, and thereafter, the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period without the post-operation effect being executed. The production reception period of is ended (after that, the post-operation production is not executed).

  According to such a configuration, in the first effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is low, the automatic effect function can operate at a relatively early stage. Even if it does not function, the player will have a sufficient time to receive the effect by his / her own operation until the end of the first effect reception period. You will be able to play games with all your heart. On the other hand, in the second effect reception period or the third effect reception period on the side where the ratio of the automatic effect function is high, the automatic effect function can function only at a relatively late stage, and the automatic effect function is Since there is not much time left for the player to operate when it does not function, it is possible to provide a game with a sense of tension although the ratio of the automatic production function is high. Will be able to.

  Regarding the above-described modified example, in the first effect reception period, when the above-mentioned automatic effect function works at the timing when the first predetermined time has elapsed (timing within the first effect reception period) and when it does not function. However, in the second effect reception period and the third effect reception period, the above-described automatic effect function always functions at the timing when the second predetermined time has elapsed (the timing within the second effect reception period). You may do it. Even with such a configuration, if the automatic production function could only work at a relatively late stage and the automatic production function did not work (due to some trouble), the time required for the player to operate Since it is considered that the player delusions that there is not much room left, the same effect can be expected.

  In addition to the effect examples described above with reference to FIGS. 187 to 189, in other effect examples as well, control to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state) is not necessarily performed by an operation by the player. Alternatively, for example, it may be controlled based on the result of the big hit determination, or may be always controlled as the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). Further, the automatic button effect state setting itself is not performed, and the automatic effect function may always be provided as a gaming machine that can function at a predetermined ratio.

[Unified operation control in the automatic button performance state]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, after being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the desire to return to the normal effect mode in which the effect can be advanced depending on the player's own operation (desirable to end the automatic button effect state) Aspirations) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when an effect reception period related to a specific effect occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the effect reception is performed. After the operation according to the process of terminating the automatic button effect state and the operation acceptance by only performing the operation once on the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which the operation opportunity is given within the period. The effect (processing that can cause a change in effect) is performed respectively (operation unified control in the automatic button effect state). As a result, even if the player desires to finish the automatic button production state and progress the production depending on the player's own operation within the production reception period, the production mode is switched while avoiding the loss of the operation opportunity. Will be able to be done smoothly.

  As described above, when setting to the automatic button effect state when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the setting operation is allowed only for the operation button 410 of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001. ..

  On the other hand, although this is also described above, when the automatic button effect state is canceled when the symbol variation is in the execution state, the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are operated in a state where the effect acceptance period has not occurred. The operation for canceling the setting is allowed only for the button 410. On the other hand, in the state where the effect reception period has occurred, if the operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001 or the like) to which the operation opportunity is given is operated during the effect reception period. , A process for ending the automatic button effect state and a post-operation effect (a process for causing a change in effect) in accordance with effect acceptance are performed (operation unification control). Therefore, even if the operation button 410 is operated in a state where the effect acceptance period for the sword ornament 5001 is occurring, the operation is not accepted and the process of ending the automatic button effect state is not executed.

  However, some players play games with a selfish game technique, such as "while maintaining the automatic button performance state (without switching the performance mode), perform the operation by themselves to progress the performance". It can be envisioned that some may wish to. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, the door frame 3 is further provided with a special operation means (automatic mode continuation button) different from both the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001. When the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect reception period related to the specific effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), the automatic button effect is generated. Although a process for ending the state (specific performance state) and a process for causing a change in performance are respectively performed (operation unified control in the automatic button performance state), control to the automatic button performance state (specific performance state) When the operation for the special operation means is performed within the performance reception period for the specific performance while being performed, Dynamic button effect state (specific effect state) may process causes a change in the effect depending on the manipulation process is not performed to terminate it is to be performed.

  According to such a configuration, when it is desired to end the automatic button effect state and actively perform the operation game thereafter, the operation button 410 (or the sword ornament 5001) is operated within the effect acceptance period. However, if you want to rarely perform an operation while maintaining the automatic button production state (without switching the production mode), operate the special operation means within the production reception period. The game desired by the player can be realized only by properly using the operating means.

  The operation unification control in the automatic button effect state will be described below with reference to FIGS. 190 to 192.

  FIG. 190 (a) shows that in the automatic button effect state, the number of holdings is 1 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 in a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It shows that a performance acceptance period for accepting a pressing operation of the operation button 410 has occurred while the reach state is formed in the performance situation being performed. As shown in the drawing, during the period in which the automatic button effect state is controlled, a display indicating that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 (here, "auto button effect"). Setting in progress)) appears continuously.

  Also, as shown in the figure, during this performance reception period, the button image BTG corresponding to the operation button 410 is displayed in the display area, and an instruction display for prompting the operation of the operation button 410 (here, the bottom A direction arrow display and a bar display indicating the remaining time of the performance reception period) are displayed. At this time, the operation button 410 to which the operation opportunity is given is in the light emitting state, and this also prompts the operation on the operation button 410. However, in reality, not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also the operation on the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 that does not change at all is allowed.

  190 (b) to 190 (d), although the operation button 410 is not operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the above-described automatic effect function causes the effect reception period. It shows that the post-operation effect having the same content as when the operation is performed and the effect reception is made is being executed. It should be noted that the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended when the above-mentioned automatic effect function operates, and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 and the special operation means (indicated as “PUSH” in the figure). Any operation opportunity for the pressed button) 1410 will be lost.

  That is, in the post-operation production according to this production example, staged production progress appears, and any production result of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 190 (c) and 190 (d)) having different expectations is displayed. Even if the final appearance is determined at the start of the symbol variation (determined based on the result of the big hit determination), first, as shown in FIG. 190 (b), a specific effect image (here, an explosion) Smoke image) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), the specific production image shown in FIG. 190 (b) (here, an explosion). (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi” 's fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image caused by the explosion) shown in FIG. 190 (b) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 190 (d). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi” 's fortune) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed.

  Then, the flow of the effects shown in FIGS. 190 (a) to 190 (d) will appear as a basic effect development when the effect acceptance period occurs in the automatic button effect state, and thus the automatic effect function described above. Even after the post-operation effect (FIG. 190 (b) to FIG. 190 (d)) is executed by the operation, the automatic button effect state will be maintained without being terminated unless the player performs an operation. .

  However, as described above, after being controlled to the automatic button production state (specific production state), the desire to return to the normal production mode in which the production can be advanced depending on the operation of the player himself (the automatic button production state The desire to end) may arise. Such a desire often occurs when a performance reception period in which an operation opportunity is given to a player occurs, but a limited time from the start of the performance reception period to the end thereof. It is difficult to perform both the operation for ending the automatic button performance state and the operation for accepting the operation, and as a result, the operation opportunity may be lost. If so, the interest in playing games could be reduced.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), it is detected that the operation is performed. Based on the detection of the fact that the operation button 410 is located at the operation position, the process of ending the automatic button effect state and the after-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance are performed (automatically). Unified operation control in button production state). It should be noted that the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended when the effect on the operation button 410 is accepted, so that the above-described automatic effect function is disabled and the special operation means ( In the figure, the operation opportunity for button 1410 described as "PUSH" is also lost.

  Even when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 191 (e), the operation is performed within the effect reception period and effect reception is performed. As a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact, first, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 191 (f), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e). (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi” 's fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image caused by the explosion) shown in FIG. 191 (e) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 191 (g). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi” 's fortune) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed.

  However, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), a process of ending the automatic button effect state based on the operation is also performed. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 191 (e) to 191 (g), after the operation of the operation button 410 is received, the fact that the automatic button effect state is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 is displayed. The display (here, "during automatic button setting") is not displayed. Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the process of ending the automatic button effect state is executed. A suggested display (here, "auto button release") appears (see FIG. 191 (e)).

  In addition, as described above, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), not only the operation button 410 in the light emitting state, but also a special operation means that does not change at all (described as "PUSH" in the drawing). Button 1410 is also permitted to be operated. Then, this special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 "operates only when desired while maintaining the automatic button effect state (without causing effect mode switching). As mentioned above, it is prepared in order to enable a selfish game technique such as "advance the production."

  Therefore, even when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), as shown in FIG. 192 (h). First, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image caused by an explosion) is displayed as a post-operation effect corresponding to the fact that an operation is performed within the effect reception period and the effect reception is performed. After that, when the production progresses to a production result with a relatively low degree of expectation, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), the specific production image (here, explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h) is generated. (Smoke image by) is gradually disappearing, a production image (here, “Kichi” 's fortune) that suggests that the production result is relatively low in expectations is displayed. When the production progresses to a high production result, the specific production image (here, the smoke image caused by the explosion) shown in FIG. 192 (h) gradually disappears as shown in FIG. 192 (j). In the process, an effect image (here, “Nakichi” 's fortune) indicating that the effect result has a relatively high expectation is displayed. It should be noted that when the operation for the special operation means (the button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is received, the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a) is ended, and the above-described automatic effect is generated. The function is disabled and the operation opportunity for the operation button 410 is lost.

  However, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the automatic button effect state is based on the operation. There is no simultaneous processing for terminating. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 192 (h) to 192 (j), even after the operation of the operation button 410 is received, it is controlled in the display area of the effect display device 1600 to be in the automatic button effect state. The display (here, "auto button is being set") will be continuously displayed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 is generated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a). Special operations that cannot appear when an operation is performed, when the above-described automatic effect function works (FIG. 190 (b)), or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191 (e)). I am trying to make the production appear. Although such a special effect may be an effect using a movable body or a lamp, in the effect example shown in FIG. 192 (j), the above-described automatic effect function is performed in the effect display device 1600. In addition to the effect image (post-operation effect) that appears in the case (FIG. 190 (b)) or when the operation button 410 is operated (FIG. 191 (e)), a glittering effect display is additionally displayed. I am trying to do it. Instead of the glittering effect display, an effect using a movable body or a lamp may be additionally implemented.

  According to such a configuration, the change content of the effect caused when the operation button 410 is operated within the effect reception period regarding the fortune-telling effect while being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state). When the automatic button production state (specific production state) is controlled, the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is operated within the production reception period for the fortune-telling production. In this case, the content of the change in the effect that is caused will be different from each other. In this case, when the above-described special effect (here, a glittering effect display) appears, "the operation means is operated and a post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance is displayed, but the automatic button effect state is It is possible to recognize while in a state where the setting is not canceled and is continued "while enjoying the post-operation performance. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 192 (i), even when the effect image (here, "Kichi" fortune) indicating that the effect result is relatively low in expectation is displayed, The production (here, the glittering effect display) can be displayed.

  Further, such a special effect (here, a glittering and shining effect display) is made to appear in addition to the above-described post-operation effect at a predetermined ratio based on the result of the big hit determination, and the special effect is displayed. When the effect is additionally displayed, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbol to appear due to the symbol variation is higher than that when the special effect does not appear. However, in this case, it becomes useful for the player to operate the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 instead of the operation button 410, and the operation button 410 There is a concern that the operation will not be performed. Therefore, when the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the drawing) 1410 is operated within the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the special effect (here, glittering) When the effect display) does not appear, any effect result appears by operating the operation button 410 within the effect acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a) or by operating the above-described automatic effect function. It is desirable to make the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing lower than the above case due to the symbol fluctuation.

  According to such a configuration, by the operation on the "special operation means (button described as" PUSH "in the drawing) 1410", "the operation means is operated and the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect acceptance appears. In order to create a state in which the automatic button production state is not canceled and this is continued ", a production demerit such as" It can be suggested that the proportion of the big hit symbol that appears in the pattern variation is extremely low "occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the player will be able to maintain a favorable interest in the game by exercising such a dramatic selection.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), although the same effect mode as in the example shown in FIG. 191 (f) appears, the above-mentioned effect of the demerit has occurred. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing due to the symbol variation is lower than that in the examples shown in FIGS. 190 (c) and 191 (f). However, in the example shown in FIG. 192 (i), while making it possible to recognize that the degree of expectation is low, the effect mode is shown in FIG. 190 (c) and FIG. 191 (f). By making the same as each other, it is possible that a third party who has not operated the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is in a production situation in which the production selection has failed. Is difficult to grasp, and it is expected that this will prevent a decline in the interest in playing games.

  Note that in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, no matter which production selection is performed within the production reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), FIG. 190 (b) or FIG. e), as shown in FIG. 192 (h) and the like, a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) is displayed, but with respect to the specific effect image, as a post-operation effect, it is relatively performed. It may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes in which the appearance mode with a high degree of expectation (here, “Nakichi” 's fortune) appears, or the appearance rate of the special effect is different.

  In addition, regardless of which staging selection is made within the staging acceptance period generated in FIG. 190 (a), the staging mode is omitted without displaying a particular staging image, and a staging mode having different expectations. Either of the “Kichi” or “Nakichi” fortune here may be directly displayed as the post-operation effect. However, in order to make it difficult for a third party to understand that there is a rendering situation (FIG. 192 (i)) in which the rendering selection has failed, a rendering aspect with different expectations ( Here, it is desirable to first display a specific effect image (here, a smoke image due to an explosion) when causing either "Kichi" or "Nakichi" fortune to appear as a post-operation effect.

  In addition, it is possible to perform an effect in which the degree of expectation is suggested even within the effect reception period that has occurred in FIG. You may.

  Further, the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the figure) 1410 is not necessarily prepared as a dedicated operation means for continuing the state when in the automatic button effect state. Alternatively, another operation means already prepared may be used.

  In addition, during the effect reception period generated in FIG. 190 (a), is there a period during which the operation on the operation button 410 of the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) can be received? Alternatively, the above-described effect (specific operation-related effect (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186)) regarding whether a period during which an operation for another operation means (for example, the sword decoration 5001) can be accepted for effect occurs is executed. It may be generated as a result.

  Further, during the effect reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, the first effect in which the operation opportunity for the special operation means (the button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 is also given. Even if the reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) and the second effect reception period in which no operation opportunity is given to the special operation means (button described as “PUSH” in the drawing) 1410 are included. Good. In this case, when the first effect reception period (see FIG. 190 (a)) occurs, the specific operation-related effect described above (see FIGS. 166 to 186) than when the second effect reception period occurs. It is desirable to increase the rate of occurrence of (see) until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. According to such a configuration, the ratio of the above-described specific operation-related effect (see FIGS. 166 to 186) appears depending on whether the first effect reception period or the second effect reception period is occurring. It will function as a suggested production.

[Stable side automatic performance processing]
As described above, in the automatic button production state (specific production state), the operation by the player within the production reception period (the first specific effective period or the second specific effective period when the above-mentioned another example is applied) Even if is not performed, a process (automatic effect function) that causes the same change as when the operation is performed may be executable. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means is capable of receiving effects and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated". The production reception period can be generated. Therefore, such a special effect reception period occurs when in the state of being controlled to the automatic button effect state (specific effect state), and for any operation means within the special effect acceptance period. If there is no operation, which of the plurality of operating means the automatic performance function is to be activated (which of the plurality of operating means causes the same change to the performance as when the performance is received) Is a problem.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect such as "a plurality of operating means are capable of accepting effects, and different effects are executed depending on which operating means is operated" When the production reception period of occurs, not "whether there is a possibility that a result with higher expectations may appear", but "whether there is a possibility that a result with lower expectations may appear" Based on the above, the process of activating the automatic performance function for the operating means different from the "operating means on the side that can generate the performance with the possibility of producing a performance result with lower expectations" (stable stable automatic performance) Process) is executable.

  According to such a configuration, the production mode having the lowest expectation among the plurality of production modes that can occur when the production reception is performed for any of the plurality of operation means within the special production reception period, Since it will not be possible to appear when the automatic effect function works, there is a situation such as "When the operation is forgotten, the automatic effect function causes the appearance mode with the lowest expectation to appear". It can be avoided appropriately.

  Hereinafter, the stable side automatic effect process in such an automatic button effect state will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 to 195.

  First, a description will be given of an example of an effect when a special effect reception period occurs in the normal effect state without being controlled to the automatic button effect state. In FIG. 193 (a), in the normal effect state, the number of holdings is 3 and the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 with a specific effect pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. It is possible to allow the player to select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 under the reach state in the performance situation that is being performed. The production state in which the production display suggesting that the special production reception period is started is shown. It should be noted that in this effect situation, although neither the effect acceptance for the operation button 410 nor the effect acceptance for the sword ornament 5001 has been activated yet, the operation button 410 and the sword have been activated since that time. The operation button 410 is in a light emitting state and the sword decoration 5001 is in a state of being moved to the sword extraction position in order to prompt a determination as to which of the decorations 5001 should be operated. Further, on the effect display device 1600, the button image BTG and the sword decoration image SYG are displayed, respectively.

  FIG. 193 (b) shows the special effect reception period suggested by the effect display shown in FIG. 193 (a) (either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is performed by the player). The production situation in which a production reception period that can be selected by the side) has occurred is shown. In this effect situation, at least a part (here, the button image BTG, the sword decoration image SYG) of the effect display on the effect display device 1600 that has appeared from the time of the effect state shown in FIG. While the state of 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is maintained, the instruction display prompting the user to operate either the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (here, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG is displayed. Correspondingly displayed downward arrows, a bar display indicating the remaining time of the special effect reception period, and the like) are displayed.

  Here, in the effect situation shown in FIG. 193 (b), a character image such as “stable” is displayed corresponding to the button image BTG, and a character image such as “disturbance” is displayed corresponding to the sword decoration image SYG. Has been done. However, instead of this, the button image BTG or the sword decoration image SYG may not be displayed, and a dedicated mark may be displayed when both of the two operating means are ready to receive the effect. In addition, the dedicated mark may not be displayed when both of the two operating means are ready to receive the effect. For example, even though both the operation on the operation button 410 and the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, “the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed without displaying the image of the operation button 410. It is also possible to display "a mocked image of the sword" or "display a mocked image of the operation button 410 and not display a mocked image of the sword decoration 5001".

  That is, in this effect example, when the effect reception for the operation button 410 is performed within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b), first, as the button-side post-operation effect, the effect reception for the operation button 410 is first accepted. After it is displayed (FIG. 193 (c)), it is suggested that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation is "50 destroyed". And an effect (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e)) that causes one of "100 kills" to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the button-side operation effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a rate of “40%”, and at the rate of “60%” in FIG. 193 (e). In the post-button-side operation effect when a big hit is lost, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d) appears at a ratio of “60%” and the ratio of “40%”. It is possible to make the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) appear.

  On the other hand, when the production reception for the sword decoration 5001 is performed within the special production reception period, as the post-sword operation production, it is first displayed that the production reception for the sword decoration 5001 has been performed ( FIG. 194 (f)), the production results suggest that the smaller the number destroyed, the lower the degree of expectation, and the larger the number destroyed, the higher the degree of expectation is "1 body destroyed", "100 body destroyed", and " The effect (FIGS. 194 (g) to 194 (i)) of causing any of "777 bodies destroyed" to appear based on the result of the big hit determination is executed. For example, in the post-sword side effect when the jackpot is won, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears at a rate of “10%”, and at the rate of “50%” in FIG. 194 (h). The effect mode shown appears, and the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (i) appears at a rate of "40%". In the effect after the sword side operation when the jackpot is lost, the rate of "40%". In FIG. 194 (g), the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (g) appears, at a rate of “50%”, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) appears, and at a rate of “0%”, the effect shown in FIG. 194 (i). It is possible for aspects to appear.

  In the example productions shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, regardless of whether the post-operation production on the button side or the post-operation production on the sword side appears as a result, the production mode in which the number of defeated is small Has a lower expectation than the production mode in which the number of defeats is large. In the case where the number of defeats is the same effect mode (for example, the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e), the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h), the effect mode shown in FIG. 195 (e) described later) , Expectations may be different, but it is desirable that they be the same.

  In such a configuration, a special performance acceptance period is generated that allows performance reception for both the operation button 410 (first operation means) and the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means), and the special performance reception period is generated. Since it is possible to generate different operation effects (button-side operation effect, sword-side operation effect) depending on the type of operation means on the side operated within the effect reception period, one operation means is operated. It is possible to improve the monotonous performance of playing, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In particular, the same degree of expectation is not displayed by operating either the operation button 410 (first operation means) or the sword decoration 5001 (second operation means), but rather the sword decoration 5001 (first operation means). Only when the operation means (2) is operated, a particular effect mode (here, shown in FIG. 194 (g)) that suggests that the big hit symbol is difficult to appear due to the symbol variation (symbol variation in the execution state). Since the production mode of "defeating one body" can be made to appear, it is desired to see the production on the sword decoration body 5001 (second operation means) side (post-sword production after production) at such a risk. You will be expected to maintain a sense of entertainment by giving conflict and stimulus about such things.

  In this case, the button-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation among the effect modes that appear when either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is operated during the special effect acceptance period. In this sense, the appearance risk of "(the effect mode of" defeating one body "shown in FIG. 194 (g)") is eliminated, and the function is performed as a relatively stable post-operation effect. In addition, the sword-side post-operation effect is "a specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here Then, in the sense that there is an appearance risk of "the effect mode of" defeating one body "shown in FIG. 194 (g)", it will function as a post-operation effect that relatively includes disturbance.

  Furthermore, in this effect example, from the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 193 (a) to the appearance of the effect situation shown in FIG. 193 (b) (here, within the special effect acceptance period), The effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (a-b) can be made to appear based on the result of the jackpot determination. When the effect mode appears, it is more likely than not when the effect mode does not appear. When the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is performed, the appearance ratio of the "specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of" defeat one body "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" is low. It is possible to make progress in the form. This percentage may be 0%.

  According to such a configuration, the risk that "a specific effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation (here, the effect mode of" defeat one body "shown in FIG. 194 (g))" may appear is taken. Since it becomes possible to use the effect result indicating whether or not the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (a-b) appears as a material for determining whether to operate the sword ornament 5001 instead of the operation button 410. In this case, it is expected that the interest of the game when the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs can be suitably improved.

  In the normal production state, when the special production reception period shown in FIG. 193 (b) occurs, but no production reception is made within the special production reception period, the above-described automatic production is performed. The function does not function, and the production is advanced without executing either the button-side post-operation production or the sword-side post-production production.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 195 (a) to 195 (e) show an example of an effect when such a special effect reception period occurs while being controlled to the automatic button effect state.

  As shown in FIG. 195 (a), FIG. 195 (a-b), and FIG. 195 (b), even when the automatic button effect state is controlled, the automatic button effect state is controlled. Except that the display (here, "auto button setting is in progress") indicating the effect is continuously appearing on the effect display device 1600, an effect display indicating that the special effect reception period is started appears. From the time until the special effect reception period ends to the same effect as in the case of the above-described normal effect state (FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 193 (a-b), and FIG. 193 (b)). To be advanced.

  However, as described above, when neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 195 (b), "a result of lower expectation (here, The automatic production function is enabled for the operation button 410 different from the sword decoration body 5001 on the side that can generate the production in which the production mode of "defeat one body" shown in 194 (g) may appear. It is possible to execute processing (stable side automatic effect processing).

  That is, in this case, even though neither the operation button 410 nor the sword ornament 5001 has been operated within the special effect reception period shown in FIG. 195 (b), the automatic effect function for the operation button 410 is activated. By doing so, the same change as in the case where the operation on the operation button 410 is received in the special effect reception period is caused in the effect. Therefore, as the button-side post-operation effect, after the fact that the effect reception for the operation button 410 has been received is displayed (FIG. 195 (c)), the smaller the number of defeats, the lower the degree of expectation and the greater the number of defeats. As an effect result that suggests that the degree of expectation is higher, either "50 kills" or "100 kills" appears based on the result of the jackpot determination (FIGS. 195 (d) and 195 (e)). ) Will be executed.

  According to such a configuration, the lowest expectation among the plurality of effect modes that can occur when the operation reception is performed for either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 within the special effect reception period. The effect mode (here, the effect mode of "destroy one body" shown in FIG. 194 (g)) cannot appear when the automatic effect function works. It is possible to preferably avoid the occurrence of a situation such as "the effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation appears by the automatic effect function."

  Here, due to the convenience of the automatic effect function, it is feared that the player will not operate either the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 in order to maintain the automatic button effect state. However, as described above, during the special effect reception period, the effect mode shown in FIG. 195 (a-b) can appear based on the result of the jackpot determination, and when the effect mode appears. , While the appearance ratio of the “specific effect mode with the lowest expectation (here, the effect mode of“ defeat one body ”shown in FIG. 194 (g))” is low, the effect after the sword side operation is performed. Since the opportunity to enjoy the game will be provided, it is expected that the sword ornament 5001 can be suitably operated.

  In the example productions shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, a special period in which a period in which an operation for the operation button 410 is received and a period in which an operation for the sword ornament 5001 is received are simultaneously generated and simultaneously ended. Although the control is performed as the effect reception period, these periods may not necessarily be generated simultaneously. For example, if the period in which the operation on the operation button 410 is received and the period in which the operation on the sword ornament 5001 is received overlap in part of these periods, these periods are separated. You may make it generate | occur | produce at a timing.

  In addition, when a specific effect pattern is selected from a plurality of effect patterns based on the result of the jackpot determination, "a plurality of operation means are capable of accepting effects, and different operation methods are operated depending on which operation means is operated. The above special effect reception period such as "is executed" may be generated. That is, in this case, at a relatively early stage from when the symbol variation starts with a specific effect pattern, "Which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect acceptance period, and a special effect acceptance period occurs? You should be able to ponder on a production strategy that assumes that a special production reception period will occur, such as "Is it necessary to perform the setting operation to the automatic button production state before doing it?" . For example, it is possible to confirm "how much advance notice effect was performed in what kind of effect mode (expectation level)" before the special effect acceptance period occurs, so these confirmations can be made. It becomes possible to use the result as a judgment material for "which of the plurality of operating means should be operated within the special effect reception period", and a game until the special effect reception period occurs. As for interest, this can be maintained appropriately.

  However, even when a specific effect pattern is selected, when the operation button 410 is operated or the sword ornament 5001 is operated within the special effect reception period, the automatic effect function is further used. Which effect mode is to appear when is activated is determined by lottery (judgment) based on the result of the jackpot judgment at the start of symbol variation or when the effect reception occurs (or when the automatic effect function is functioning). It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, even in a production situation in which a special production reception period has not yet occurred, “the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001. When the effect display is in which the effect display (FIG. 193 (a), FIG. 195 (a)) that suggests that the special effect reception period is started, the setting to the automatic button effect state is allowed. It is desirable to control this as a prohibited period so that it will not occur. With such a configuration, it is suggested that "a special effect reception period in which the player can select either the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the sword operation of the sword decoration 5001 is started. Even if you try to set the automatic button production state after confirming that "production display" has started, this will not be accepted, so you can continue playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state. It becomes possible to provide "stable side automatic production processing when in the automatic button production state" only for those who are active, and production for continuously playing games while maintaining the automatic button production state Will be able to provide specific value.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the “lowest expectation specific effect mode (FIG. 194 (g))” that may appear when the sword-side operation effect is performed is operated on the button side. Although it was decided to execute it as a unique production mode that is different from any of the production modes that can appear when the post-production is performed, regarding the "specific production mode with the lowest expectation", the button-side operation post-production is It may be executed as the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when performed (for example, (“50 bodies destroyed” shown in FIG. 193 (d)). In other words, in this case, the effect after the sword-side operation is performed. Even if the "particular effect mode with the lowest degree of expectation" appears as a result of, the objective appearance is that the same mode as the effect mode that can appear when the effect after the button-side operation is performed appears. Operation button It becomes possible to make it difficult for a third party who does not know which one of 410 and the sword ornament 5001 is operated to recognize that the production situation is in a state where the degree of expectation is significantly low. Therefore, in this case, in the effect display device 1600, only one effect situation such as "a specific effect mode is displayed based on effect acceptance" appears. However, depending on whether the performance situation is caused by the operation on the operation button 410 or the operation on the sword ornament 5001, the symbol variation (the symbol variation in the execution state). ), The expectation that the big hit pattern will appear will be different, so it will be even more interesting as an effect using multiple operating means. It becomes possible to.

  However, this is a case in which the "lowest expectation specific effect mode" in the sword-side post-operation effect is executed as the same effect mode that can appear even when the button-side operation effect is performed. However, with regard to the “special effect mode with the highest expectation” in the post-sword side operation effect, a unique effect mode that differs from any of the effect modes that can appear when the button-side operation effect is performed (for example, (It is desirable to execute it as “777 body destruction” shown in FIG. 194 (i). ”According to such a configuration, in the post-sword side operation effect,“ a specific effect mode having the lowest expectation ”. When appears, it is difficult to recognize that there is a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably low for a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 has been operated. However, even if a third party who does not know which of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 is operated when the “highest expectation special effect mode” appears in the sword side post-operation effect. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily recognize that there is a production situation in which the degree of expectation is remarkably high. It becomes possible to enjoy the effect (effect after the sword side operation) on the side of the sword ornament 5001 (second operation means). Anything that can be recognized may be used, and for example, it may be possible to ensure uniqueness with another effect mode by performing a movable body operation or lamp light emission.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the effect after the sword-side operation (FIG. 194 (f) to FIG. 194 (i)) being performed, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 194 ( i)) can appear, and when the production mode of “destroying 777 bodies” (FIG. 194 (i)) appears, any other production mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e)). , FIG. 194 (g), FIG. 194 (h)), the proportion of the big hit symbols that appear in the symbol fluctuation (symbol fluctuation in the execution state) becomes higher than that when it appears. This percentage may be 100%. However, it is not always necessary that the effect mode of "defeating 777 bodies" (FIG. 194 (i)) appears, and in this case, the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 is different from the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (d). The appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 194 (h) is made higher than the appearance ratio of the effect mode shown in FIG. 193 (e) by the amount of lowering the degree of expectation of the effect mode shown in (g). Becomes

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, the button-side post-operation effect (FIGS. 193 (c) to 193 (e)) and the sword-side operation effect (FIGS. 194 (f) to 194 (i)). ), The common effect mode (here, the effect mode of "defeating 100 bodies") can appear, but the common effect mode does not appear. Good. Further, in the button-side post-operation effect, only the display change appears, whereas in the sword-side post-operation effect, not only the display change but also the movable body operation, the lamp light emission, and the like may be executed. In addition, the button-side post-operation effect and the sword-side post-operation effect may not be shared as effect contents regarding the number of defeats, and the effect contents themselves may be executed as mutually different effects.

  In addition, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, when the production reception occurs, including when the production is received by the automatic production function functioning, first of all, the operation button 410 or the sword ornament 5001 is displayed. The display (FIG. 193 (c), FIG. 194 (f), FIG. 195 (c)) that suggests whether or not the production has been accepted is made to appear, but the degree of expectation is suggested without making the display appear. You may make it perform the production which makes the production result which appears.

  In addition, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, as a result of the effect after the sword-side operation (FIG. 194 (f) to FIG. 194 (i)) being performed, the effect mode of “777 body destruction” (FIG. 194 ( i)) appears, the above-mentioned specific operation relations than when any other presentation mode (FIG. 193 (d), FIG. 193 (e), FIG. 194 (g), FIG. 194 (h)) appears. Proportion (see FIG. 166 to FIG. 186) that appears until the symbol fluctuation is stopped, and further, when the specific operation-related effect appears, the operation means on the side with higher expectation (sword ornament) It is desirable to increase the ratio of the operation opportunity given to 5001). According to such a configuration, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 193 to 195, it is possible to favorably perform the operation on the sword decoration body 5001 on the side with a higher effect risk.

[Restoring process for movement abnormality with less influence on movement production]
As described above, in this pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a), when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state (more accurately, and when the specific state does not occur), it corresponds to a symbol variation When the restoration operation timing (for example, the start timing or the stop timing of the symbol variation) comes, the process for causing the specific movable decoration body to perform the predetermined restoration operation can be executed. However, regardless of the state of the performance, if such a restoration process is executed, it is a humorous game, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate.

For example, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "start time of symbol variation" is set as "restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation". Then, as shown in FIG. 196, assuming that a timing tm1 at which a new symbol variation starts in a situation where a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state has arrived, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, at least, performs each process described below. Will be executed.
-Based on having acquired the command sent from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts, the effect pattern according to the symbol variation is set, and the set effect pattern is subjected to the symbol variation. Among these, based on the fact that the process to advance the production / the change in the design is started and the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side is obtained (based on the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the change in the design), Processing to perform a predetermined restoration operation on the movable ornament of

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, it is assumed that a "specific production pattern capable of operating a specific movable decorative body at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" is set as the production pattern. Therefore, when the timing tm1 arrives, the production progress according to the "specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body. There will be situations where the processes to be performed are parallel to each other.

  In general, in the pachinko machine 1 in which such a specific effect pattern can be executed, an effect pattern (relative to the degree of expectation of a relatively high degree of expectation) that has a pairwise relationship with the specific effect pattern. A low performance pattern) is prepared. Then, in the production pattern having a paired relationship (the production pattern having a relatively low degree of expectation), even though the specific movable decorative body is not operated at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, toward the specific timing tm2. The same form of effect as in the case of "a specific effect pattern (an effect pattern with a relatively high degree of expectation) in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation" is performed. It In this way, by providing two effect patterns that are in a pairwise relationship in terms of effect (effect pattern that causes a specific movable decorative body to operate and effect pattern that does not cause the specific movable decorative element to operate), at the specific timing tm2. (For example, a predetermined time until the specific timing tm2 arrives), a predetermined effect having a directing effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not the moving movable object operates). Is made executable, and the enjoyment of the game is favorably maintained due to such performance.

  However, after the symbol variation is started, even when the specific timing tm2 arrives, there may be a case where the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body is still in the execution state, Despite the arrival of tm2, it becomes clear that the particular movable ornament is in a situation in which it cannot perform a staging operation. That is, in this case, even if the above-mentioned predetermined effect is performed at the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, the function as the predetermined effect having the effect of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates may be lost. , There is a concern that the interest in games will decline.

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 196, the production progress related to “a specific production pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2” among the production patterns, and a predetermined movement for the specific movable decorative body. When the situation in which the process for performing the restoration operation (the restoration process based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation) is performed in parallel, regardless of the situation of the restoration, the “specific timing is reached before the specific timing tm2 comes. The process of causing the movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation "is completed. It should be noted that various methods can be adopted as the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament”, but in the following description, “whether the abnormal state is resolved, It is assumed that "a process of repeatedly performing a restoring operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed until the predetermined upper limit number is reached".

  More specifically, with regard to the “processing for causing the predetermined movable decorative body to perform a predetermined restoration operation”, restoration from the abnormal state is completed depending on the degree to which the specific movable decorative body is abnormal. It takes different time to be done. For example, if the abnormal state is resolved and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable decorative body, “a predetermined restoration for the specific movable decorative body is performed”. The timing tx at which the "processing for performing the operation" is completed comes at a relatively early time, but the number of times this is repeated until the restoration operation for the specific movable ornament fails and is restored (restored). As the number of times increases, the timing tx at which the "processing for causing the predetermined movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation" is completed is postponed such that the timing tx shifts to a later time. Then, at the latest, if the restoration operation for the specific movable ornament fails and the restoration operation has not been performed yet, but the timing tx is exceeded when the restoration operation is performed once again, the specific movable ornament is deleted. By ending the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation while keeping the body in the abnormal state, the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is finished before the specific timing tm arrives regardless of the restoration situation. Like

  In addition, when it takes x time to perform a restoring operation for a specific movable ornament once, a pattern of one time is established so that a relationship of “x time × n times <time of timing tm1 to tm2” is established. The upper limit number n of times for repeating a predetermined restoration operation within a fluctuation is set, and the process for performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended even if the upper limit number n has not been restored (restored). By doing so, it is possible to end the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation before the specific timing tm2 arrives regardless of the restoration situation.

  According to such a configuration, the production progress according to the specific production pattern that allows the specific movable decorative body to operate at the specific timing tm2 within the pattern variation, and the predetermined restoration operation for the specific movable decorative body are performed in parallel. When a situation occurs, the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation is ended before the specific timing tm2 arrives, regardless of the restoration situation. That is, in this case, not only when the specific movable decorative body is restored before the specific timing tm2 arrives, but also when the specific movable decorative body is not restored, the specific movable decorative body is restored at the specific timing tm2. Since the movable decorative body comes to be in a stopped state, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance of whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates when the specific timing tm2 arrives. become. For example, even if the specific movable ornament is stopped at a position different from the original position, some behavior may be triggered by the arrival of the specific timing tm2, or the movable ornament does not operate. Even if the lamp included in the movable decorative body may emit light (when the lamp included in the movable decorative body emits light when the effect operation by the movable decorative body is performed), it is possible to give a hope. .

  However, in reality, when the specific movable decorative body is performing a restoring operation while the above-mentioned predetermined effect is being performed, it has a directivity whether or not the specific movable decorative body operates. The function as the predetermined presentation may be lost. Therefore, the timing tx at which the "processing of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation" is completed may be finished before the predetermined effect is started regardless of the state of the restoration. It can be said that it is more desirable to maintain the interest in the game.

  As the predetermined effect, for example, a specific movable decorative body operates “when a specific display result (for example, a display result that an attack hits) appears in the super reach effect, and when the specific display result does not appear, the operation is performed. It is possible to exemplify "a display effect that appears in advance in a manner that fuels whether or not a specific display result appears" when the specific movable decorative body is " When a player operates according to an effect received by the player's operation (or receives an effect but does not operate), "an effect that causes a specific display that prompts an operation by the player to appear" Can be illustrated.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 196, at the timing tx at which the “processing of causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation” is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state. It is supposed that the normal state has been reached. Thus, even when the fluctuation starts (or "restoration operation time" at the time of the last symbol stop, etc.), even if it is an abnormal state, the specific timing tm2 within the symbol fluctuation comes under the restoration to the normal state. Then, it becomes possible to perform a specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, at the timing tx when the "processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoration operation" is completed, the specific movable decorative body cannot be restored (restored) from the abnormal state and remains in the abnormal state. When the specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation arrives, the stopped state is maintained until at least the specific timing tm2 (more accurately, the timing tx), the symbol variation is ended and the next restoration operation timing comes. Becomes That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative object that operates. When the particular effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the particular movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the particular timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  However, in recent years, pachinko machines have come to be provided with a movable decorative body that performs a multi-step movement with a more complicated structure, and such a movable decorative body has a longer time until the restoration processing is completed. It often takes time. However, on the other hand, in the case of a specific effect pattern that allows a specific movable decorative body to be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation, or an effect pattern that has a paired relationship with this, when those effect patterns are started. Even if the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, within a time period shorter than the time period required from the start of the pattern variation until the specific timing tm2 arrives (more preferably, the time period until the predetermined effect is performed). As described above, it is required to end the process of performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. That is, in this case, each time the specific movable decorative body is brought into an abnormal state, it can be restored only in an emergency measure and in a simple manner, which accelerates deterioration as the specific movable decorative body. It could be

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) is prepared, and from the main control MPU1310a side when the symbol variation starts. When the special effect pattern is selected on the basis of the command sent out, while the special effect pattern is being effected (while the symbol variation corresponding to the special effect pattern is being performed), a specific movement is possible. The decorative body is controlled so as not to be operated and a predetermined effect (for example, an effect display indicating whether or not to operate) does not appear. Then, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), as a result of the arrival of the timing tm11 at which the symbol variation starts in the situation where the specific movable decorative body is in the abnormal state, the production progress related to the special production pattern When a situation occurs in which the process of performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable decorative body is performed in parallel, at least while the special effect pattern is being performed (the period until the symbol is stopped) Tries to continue the restoration process without ending it.

  More specifically, in the restoration process started from the timing tm11, the abnormal state is eliminated and the original position is restored (restored) only by performing the first restoration operation on the specific movable ornament. Even in such a case, the restoration process is not ended at least while the special effect pattern is being performed, and the restoration process is performed on the specific movable ornament over the entire period.

  According to such a configuration, when a specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, a restoration process in a more full-scale aspect (for example, a normal diagnosis after restoration is performed) is performed with the aim of performing the special effect pattern. Since it becomes possible to perform additional implementation, etc., this special production pattern will function as a production pattern for restoration / diagnosis, and will be carefully restored by the player as well. You will be able to enjoy the subsequent productions with peace of mind by watching the situation. In this sense, it is desirable to prepare the special effect pattern so that it can be selected only when the big hit judgment fails. In addition, it is desirable that the display contents on the effect display device 1600 should have a unique display mode such as “effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis. Please wait for a while”.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) and (d), the timing tm11 arrives when the specific movable ornament is in the abnormal state. When the special effect pattern is performed as described above, the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is not ended and is continued even after the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended. According to such a configuration, a constraint such as "although there is an abnormality in a specific movable decorative body, the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which a pattern variation is performed" is eliminated. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform the restoration process in a more authentic manner.

  However, at the timing tm12 when the special effect pattern is ended, if the hold exhaustion is not interrupted and an effect pattern corresponding to a new symbol variation is performed, the next restoration operation time (here, next time The design fluctuation start time) will come. At this time, if the restoration process started at the timing tm11 is still continuing, it is determined that the specific movable decorative body is still in an abnormal state (such as not located at the original position). Will be done. Then, if there is a case where a restoration process for a specific movable decorative body is newly started based on the determination, it can be substantially completed within the time when one symbol variation is performed. Since only restoration processing can be performed, the content of the processing is naturally limited, and the failure as a specific movable ornament may be accelerated due to inability to sufficiently deal with the abnormality. ..

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment is in a state of performing restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body, as shown in FIGS. 197A (b) and (d). When the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) arrives, the restoration processing in the running state is not ended and this is continued in the form of crossing the next restoration operation time. . According to such a configuration, even if there is a suspension during the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body, "when there is an abnormality in the specific movable decorative body," Since the restoration process must be executed for each unit in which the symbol variation is performed ", it is possible to perform the restoration process in a more serious manner.

  However, as shown in FIGS. 197A (c) and (d), as a result of a new symbol variation being started when the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is being performed, the new symbol variation As a result, there may be a case where "a specific effect pattern in which a specific movable decorative body can be operated at a specific timing tm2 within the symbol variation" appears. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 197A (a) to 197A (c), it is started from the timing tm11 irrespective of the situation of the game or the effect (and the status of the restoration, etc.) after the special effect pattern is finished. Regarding the timing tx at which the "processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament" is completed, the time required until the specific timing tm2 within the next symbol variation arrives (more preferably, It is desirable to end the process within a time shorter than the time until the predetermined effect is performed. Even with such a configuration, in addition to the time of timings tm11 to tm12 (the time required to digest the special effect pattern), a specific movement is performed over a relatively long time until the time of timings tm12 to tx ends. It is possible to continue the restoration process for the decorative body.

  In addition, when a situation in which the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed after the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is finished, Restoration processing is not ended within a new special production pattern (production pattern for restoration / diagnosis), and the symbol variation (production pattern) is repeated three or more times (after one restoration processing is started, One restoration process may be continued in such a manner that the restoration process extends over two or more restoration operation times.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197A, at the timing tx at which the "processing for causing the specific movable decorative body to perform the predetermined restoring operation" is completed, the specific movable decorative body is restored (restored) from the abnormal state and is normal. The situation is assumed. In this way, by continuing one restoration process across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), it is a serious abnormal state that could not be restored in the past. However, this can be restored, and the specific movable decorative body can be operated at the specific timing tm2.

  On the other hand, despite the fact that the one restoration process is continued across the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time), the specific movable ornament is abnormal at the timing tx. When the state cannot be restored (restored), the symbol fluctuation is ended from the timing tx and the stopped state is maintained until the next restoration operation time comes further. That is, in this case, although it is not possible to perform the effect operation of the specific movable decorative body at the specific timing tm2, it is possible to favorably maintain the effect of the specific movable decorative object that operates. When the particular effect pattern is based on the big hit variation, the big hit pattern is stopped even if the particular movable decorative body does not perform the effect at the particular timing tm2, thereby providing a surprise effect. Will be able to.

  In addition, in a situation where the specific movable decorative body is in an abnormal state and the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is not executed, each time the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) arrives, the specific movement If the restoration process for the movable ornament is repeatedly started, if the specific movable ornament has a failure that cannot be restored, the specific movable ornament cannot be restored. It is feared that amusement of the game will be deteriorated by repeating the restoration process for the body. Therefore, even though the restoration operation time has reached the predetermined upper limit number after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state (the number of executions of the restoration process (specific movable decorative body) reaches the predetermined upper limit number). Even though the abnormal state is not restored, it is desirable not to newly start the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body even if a new restoration operation time comes thereafter.

  However, on the other hand, after a specific movable decorative body is put into an abnormal state, only a special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed (started) by the predetermined upper limit number. , When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the special effect pattern (restoration / diagnosis effect pattern) is executed, a predetermined upper limit number of special effect patterns and their One restoration process may be continued over the next presentation pattern. That is, in this case, after the specific movable decorative body is brought into the abnormal state, it is not restored from the abnormal state even though the restoration operation time has reached the predetermined upper limit number. Even when the "+1" th restoration operation time comes, the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body is continued without being terminated. As described above, regarding the aspect in which one restoration process is continued across the restoration operation time, the predetermined upper limit number is set no matter how many times the restoration operation time comes while the one restoration process is continued. It is desirable that the count of the above is treated as one restoration process so that it is not terminated so that the restoration process in a more serious manner is not hindered.

  By the way, regarding such restoration processing (restoration processing performed based on the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), a board-side movable decorative body provided on the game board 5 side (for example, a back front decoration unit 3100, a back) In addition to the middle movable production unit 3200, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain), etc., the frame-side movable decorative body provided on the door frame 3 side is basically executed in the same manner as described above. It However, of the frame-side movable decorations provided on the door frame 3 side, regarding the frame-side movable decorations that are also used as the operating means (for example, the operation buttons 410 operably provided and the sword decoration 5001) In some cases, it may be restored (restored) in a mode different from that of the above-described specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body).

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as described above, during the period in which the design variation is performed, the movable operation in which the operation opportunity giving effect for giving the operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed is executed. A system effect pattern (for example, the effect pattern shown in FIG. 177) is prepared. Also, as described above, in such an operation opportunity giving effect, "processing for moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force (see FIG. 177 (f))", "Processing for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))" and further "display for prompting an operation (character display such as" pushing in "or bar display indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period) Processing (see FIG. 177 (f)) ”is performed. As a result, when the sword decoration 5001 in the state of being moved to the operation position is operated (here, it is pushed in) and the effect is received, the "specific decoration member SDY (shadow effect object) is received based on the effect reception. ) And the like (refer to FIG. 177 (g)) for performing a production operation of the board-side movable decorative body "and" processing for changing display contents (refer to FIG. 177 (g)) ". Become. It should be noted that the board-side movable decorative body that is produced by this processing may be the specific movable decorative body described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A.

  However, the "movement of the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position by a predetermined driving force" in the operation opportunity giving effect is not executed when the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state and is normal. While the sword decoration 5001 is in a normal state, it is executable when the sword decoration 5001 is in the normal state It can be executed both at a certain time and in an abnormal state. Therefore, in the movable operation system effect pattern, even if the sword ornament 5001 is in an abnormal state, if the player who saw the "display for prompting the operation" operates the sword ornament 5001 and receives the effect, The "process for effecting the board-side movable decorative object such as the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) and the" process for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600 "are performed. Not only that, in the movable operation system production pattern, even if the sword decoration 5001 is in an abnormal state, the sword decoration 5001 receives an external force by the operation by the player and the operation portion moves, which causes the abnormal state. It is possible that the problem will be resolved by itself.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a frame-side movable decorative body (for example, an operation button 410 that is operably provided, a sword decorative body 5001 and the like) that is also used as operating means is provided. In the case of an abnormal state, a returning process for applying a driving force for returning the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) to the original position (in the mode described with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197A) Restoration processing), at each timing of "the above-mentioned restoration operation time (here, the start time of the symbol variation)" and "after the production is received by the operation by the player within the production pattern of the movable operation system". It is feasible.

  According to such a configuration, when the board-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the board-side movable decoration is aimed at the timing of the start or stop of the symbol fluctuation (more strictly, after the start or the stop). While the process to restore the decorative body is performed, when the frame-side movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, not only the timing such as the start and stop of the symbol fluctuation, but also a unique timing (during the fluctuation period) Of the above, the frame-side movable decorative body (operation) is aimed at an external force (operation by the player) applied to the frame-side movable decorative body (operation means) to eliminate the abnormal state. Since the processing for restoring (returning) the means) is performed, it is expected that the original position of the frame-side movable decorative body (operating means) in the abnormal state can be quickly returned. .

  FIG. 198 is a time chart showing an example of the processing until the sword decoration 5001 is returned to its original position when the sword decoration 5001 is used as such a frame-side movable decoration (operating means). is there.

  As shown in FIG. 198, a production pattern of a movable operation system (a production pattern in which an operation opportunity giving effect that gives an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001 is executed during a period in which the design variation is performed) is executed. Therefore, it is assumed that the “processing of moving the sword decoration 5001 from the original position to the operation position” is executed at the timing tm21. Then, when the sword decoration 5001 is located at the operation position, "process for generating a performance reception period for the sword decoration 5001", "display prompting operation (character display such as" pushing in ", or performance reception period) When the player operates the sword decoration 5001 and receives the effect (timing tm22) while the bar display indicating the remaining time of (1) is being executed (timing tm22), “a specific decoration member SDY (slave part etc.) The "processing for effecting the board-side movable decorative body" and the "processing for causing a change in the display content on the effect display device 1600" are performed. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the specific movable decorative body described in FIGS. 196 and 197A is operated as the board-side movable decorative body based on the reception of the production.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality occurs in the sword decoration body 5001 at the timing tm22 when the production is received in this way, and the sword decoration body 5001 does not return to its original position. It is assumed that another abnormality has occurred in the body (movable decorative body on the board side) and it cannot be returned to its original position. At this time, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the sword ornament 5001 and that a specific movable ornament has an abnormality, but an abnormality has occurred in the specific movable ornament. For the determination of the effect, neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is executed, and the determination of the abnormality of the sword decoration 5001 is accompanied by the specific notification sound and the display. It is desirable to perform at least one of the notifications. This is what the sword ornament 5001 is "placed within a reach (door frame 3) of the player", and if it is notified that this is in an abnormal state, restoration work from the abnormal state can be performed. While it is expected to be performed by the player's hand, the specific movable ornament is "the one placed on the place (game board 5) out of reach of the player", and this is in an abnormal state. This is because, when the notification is made, nothing can be assisted as the player, and merely emphasizing that the movable effect is not executed can promote the deterioration of the entertainment of the game. However, it is desirable that such notification be ended when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  Further speaking, in the example shown in FIG. 198, an abnormality is found in the specific movable decorative body in the process of performing the “processing for performing the specific movable decorative body” based on the reception of the effect at the timing tm22. Although it occurs, the "processing for changing the display content on the effect display device 1600" is executed as usual to recognize that an abnormality has occurred in a specific movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it difficult. After this, the sword decoration 5001 and the specific movable decoration are both brought into the abnormal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm23. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, when the timing tm23 comes, the symbol fluctuation that is already in the pending state is to be immediately exhausted (for example, after 0.6 seconds) (start), and the new symbol. It is assumed that the specific effect pattern described in FIG. 196 is executed as the effect pattern according to the variation. In other words, in the specific effect pattern, the specific movable decorative body is operated at the timing tm2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the pattern change, but the restoration operation timing (here, when the pattern change starts ), The timing "tx" at which the "processing for performing the predetermined restoration operation on the specific movable ornament" is completed is within a time shorter than the timing tm2 (more preferably, regardless of the restoration situation). As described above, the process is ended before the predetermined effect is started).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, based on the fact that the restoration operation time (here, at the start of the pattern change) has arrived for the sword decoration 5001 as well, "a specific movable decoration It is possible to execute a process of giving a driving force (applying a driving force) so as to return it to the original position in a manner that at least a part of the action is performed in parallel with the process of performing a predetermined restoring action on the body. Moreover, the timing at which the "processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" is completed is also within a time period shorter than the timing tm2 regardless of the restoration state (more preferably, the predetermined rendering effect). Until it starts).

  With such a configuration, when the abnormal state of the specific movable decorative body is eliminated and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm2, the restoring operation by the sword decorative body 5001 is performed. Since it is not continued, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of play when the restoration operation and the movable effect are performed in parallel.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 198, the timing at which the restoration process for the specific movable ornament is started and ended and the timing at which the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 is started and finished are the same. However, only one of the timings may be the same or both of the timings may be different.

  As for the “processing for performing a predetermined restoration operation on a specific movable ornament,” as described with reference to FIG. 197A, when a special effect pattern (effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis) appears. Not only is it possible to continue after the special effect pattern is finished, but also the pattern fluctuations that are in a hold state after the special effect pattern is finished are immediately (for example, 0.6 seconds) digested (started). In such a situation, when the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) is crossed, the processing (one restoration processing) is not ended but can be executed in the form of continuing. It is desirable that the “processing for causing the decorative body 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation” can be executed in the same manner (the manner described with reference to FIG. 197A). That is, in this case, the "processing for causing the sword ornament 5001 to perform a predetermined restoration operation" also crosses the next restoration operation time (here, the next symbol variation start time) when a special effect pattern appears. Although it will be executed in the form, between the start of the next symbol variation and the time required until the timing tm2 arrives, it is to be terminated regardless of the status of restoration. Become.

  Also, with respect to the sword ornament 5001 as well, after this is brought into an abnormal state, only the special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) is continuously executed for the predetermined upper limit number, and then the special effect pattern ( When a situation occurs in which an effect pattern (for example, a specific effect pattern) different from the effect pattern for restoration / diagnosis appears, the special effect pattern for the predetermined upper limit number and the next effect pattern are straddled. One restoration process may be continued for the sword ornament 5001.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the restoration process for the specific movable ornament and the restoration process for the sword ornament 5001 are completed at the timing tx, but the restoration fails in both cases. Therefore, at timing tm2, the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is not performed, and the specific effect pattern is advanced while the sword decorative body 5001 and the specific movable decorative body are both in the abnormal state. Then, at the timing tm24, the symbol fluctuation is stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) to a specific movable decorative body within a period from timing tx to tm2 in a specific effect pattern. Even if it is returned to the original position (normalized) by, the effect operation by the specific movable decorative body is not performed at the timing tm2. That is, it can be said that an external force (not applying a driving force by a motor or the like) is applied to a specific movable decorative body within the period of timings tx to tm2, which itself is an abnormal situation. Even in the situation of low reliability, even if a specific movable decoration is used, it is highly likely that it will fail. It can be said that it is desirable for doing.

  In addition, when the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and the abnormal state occurs again, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed. In other words, if there is a case where the restoration process for the sword decoration 5001 fails and an alarm is given again each time an abnormal state occurs again, it gives the misunderstanding that it is the responsibility of the player that the abnormal state is not resolved. Therefore, the above notification (at least one of specific notification sound and display notification) should be given only when the first abnormality occurs from the normal state to the abnormal state so as to encourage the repair work by the player. Is desirable.

  In the example shown in FIG. 198, the sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are changed by the restoration process triggered by any restoration operation timing (here, the pattern variation start timing) that comes after the timing tm24. It is assumed that only a specific movable ornament is recovered from the abnormal state. Then, while only the sword decoration 5001 is in the abnormal state, the movable operation system effect pattern is being performed again, and as shown in FIG. 198, the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at timing tm25 If the production is accepted by the player's operation, it is possible to expect the possibility that the abnormality occurring in the sword decoration 5001 has been eliminated by such an operation.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the player receives an effect of the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state at the timing tm25 by the operation of the player, the sword decoration 5001 is then original. Driving force can be applied to return to the position (remain in the original position). At this time, considering that the movable effect is performed by the specific movable ornament on the basis of the reception of the effect, the period during which the process for applying the driving force to return the sword ornament 5001 to the original position is performed (once The period when the return operation is successful) is generated after the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is started, and the movable effect by the specific movable decorative body is ended (the specific movable decorative body is moved to the original position). It is desirable to end it before it is returned) in order to make it difficult to recognize that such a return process is being executed. However, in view of the rare chance that the sword decoration 5001 that could not be restored by such an external force (operation by the player) is increasing, the sword decoration 5001 is in the original position. When the process of applying the driving force to restore the sword decoration (returning operation to the sword decoration 5001) fails, the sword decoration 5001 is used as the original until the period after the movable effect by the specific movable decoration is finished. By allowing the player to easily recognize the abnormal situation by continuously executing the process of applying the driving force so as to return to the position (re-execute the returning operation for the sword decoration 5001), It is desirable to encourage them to help. However, even when this restoration process fails, it is desirable that neither the specific notification sound nor the display notification accompanying this is performed.

  Then, in the example shown in FIG. 198, it is assumed that the return processing (return to the original position) for the sword decoration 5001 using such an external force (operation by the player) has succeeded. The sword ornament 5001 and the specific movable ornament are both kept in the normal state, and the effect pattern of the movable operation system is advanced, and the symbol variation is stopped at the timing tm26.

  As described above, according to the example shown in FIG. 198, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001) that is also used as the operation unit is set for the board-side movable decorative body (specific movable decorative body). In addition to the restoration operation timing (at the start of symbol fluctuation), the restoration operation timing (timing after the reception of the effect) using external force (operation by the player) is set. That is, the frame-side movable decorative body (sword decorative body 5001), which is also used as the operating means, is likely to be in an abnormal state because it may be directly contacted by the player, but even if it is in an abnormal state, Since the opportunity for position return is given a lot and various modes (modes for recovering only by applying the driving force, modes for recovering using at least an external force) are used as the recovering method, the abnormal state is resolved. The possibility that the game will be played will be increased and the decline in the interest in the game will be suppressed.

  It should be noted that the process of applying a driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 has been received by the player's operation for effecting the effect, the symbol variation start The driving force may be applied to the sword decoration 5001 with a different content (different operation mode) from the restoration processing performed when the time (for example, the timing tm23) arrives. That is, since the sword decoration 5001 is restored by using an external force (operation by the player), the process is different from the process when the external force is not used. It is desirable to increase the probability. In addition, the processing is executed in a simple manner such that the return processing is terminated within the symbol variation regardless of the status of the return, and when the return fails, a full-scale operation is performed at the next restore operation time. It is desirable that the restoration processing be performed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 198, the restoration operation time (here, the symbol variation start time) has reached a predetermined upper limit number, and the restoration processing for the sword ornament 5001 has been executed for that number of times. Despite this, it is not restored from the abnormal state, and even if a new restoration operation time (here, the pattern variation start time) arrives, the sword decoration 5001 cannot be newly started to be restored. Even when the sword decoration 5001 in an abnormal state is received by the player's operation at the timing tm25 after the operation-system effect pattern is started, the sword decoration 5001 is displayed after the effect is received. It is desirable to perform a process of applying a driving force so as to return to the original position (stay at the original position). That is, as described above, the returning process after the reception of the effect is performed when the sword decoration 5001 that has not been able to be returned by the external force (operation by the player) has a high possibility of returning. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to execute the processing without giving up even in the above-described situation where the return without external force is given up. Therefore, "a process for generating an effect reception period for the sword ornament 5001 (see FIG. 177 (f))", "display for prompting an operation (character display such as" pushing in "), and a bar indicating the remaining time of the effect reception period. It is important that the processing (display) (see FIG. 177 (f)) ”is also performed normally even in the above-described situation in which the return without external force is given up.

  In addition, when the first operation opportunity is given so that the sword ornament 5001 is pushed into the operating position (moves to a specific detection position), and when it is in the original position (to the specific detection position). When the operation means is provided such that the second operation opportunity may be given such that it is operated), even if the production reception occurs in the second operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. The driving force for returning to the original position is not given, and the driving force for returning to the original position is given only when the production reception occurs in the first operation opportunity for the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state. It is desirable to do so. That is, even if the effect is received when the second operation opportunity is given, the amount of movement of the operation part is relatively small, and therefore the possibility that the abnormal state is eliminated is naturally expected to be low.

  In addition, the process of applying the driving force for returning the sword decoration 5001 in the abnormal state to the original position after the sword decoration 5001 is received by the player's operation is not necessarily the production reception. It does not need to be executed on the condition that it has been performed, and may be executed after the production reception period ends, for example.

  It should be noted that the restoration operation timing may be a predetermined timing that comes at least on condition that the symbol variation is executed, and may be used as at least one of the symbol variation start timing and the symbol variation stop timing. . When the symbol variation stop timing is used as the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration process is started based on the command sent from the main control MPU 1310a side when the symbol variation is stopped, and this start The restoration processing is ended until the timing tm2 in the particular production pattern that has been held down is reached, or is executed so as to extend until after the end of the special production pattern that has been held down, etc. Will be performed.

  Further, the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) may differ depending on the state of the game. For example, when a special effect state in which the operation frequency of the movable decorative body becomes high occurs, an abnormal state is likely to occur due to the increase in the operation frequency. Therefore, in the special effect state, the normal effect state It is desirable to be able to play the game so that the appearance frequency of the special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) becomes higher than that in the case of.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the frame-side movable decorative body (for example, the sword decorative body 5001) or a specific movable decorative body that is also used as the operating unit is in an abnormal state. When the above special effect pattern (reproduction / diagnosis effect pattern) is performed, the abnormal state is continued for a period until the effect pattern corresponding to the next symbol variation is started, as shown in FIG. 197A. It is possible to continuously execute one restoration process for the movable decorative body in. However, in this case, even if a new restoration operation time (for example, a pattern variation start time) arrives while one restoration processing is continuously executed, the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is newly performed. It does not start, but continues the restoration process that is already in the running state without ending it. Therefore, it is possible to move the restoration object that is different from the movable decorative body that is the target of the restoration process. It becomes a problem at which timing to start the restoration process for the other movable decorative body when the decorative body newly becomes in an abnormal state.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 197A, the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body started at the timing tm11 has a new restoration operation timing (next (The start time of the symbol fluctuation) is continued without being completed even when straddling. In this regard, a new abnormality occurs in a movable decorative body different from the specific movable decorative body between the timing tm11 and the arrival of a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). In this case, at least one of the following methods 1 to 3 or “both method 1 and method 2” or “both method 1 and method 3” is adopted to perform restoration processing for the other movable decorative body. It is desirable to do.

  Method 1: At least, if there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body is provided as a board-side movable decorative body, while another movable decorative body is provided as a frame-side movable decorative body" When a new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol variation) arrives while one restoration process is continuously executed for the movable decorative body, the new restoration operation timing (the start timing of the next symbol variation) ) Has arrived, a restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) is newly started.

  According to such a method 1, the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (frame side movable decorative body) for which the restoration process is not yet in the execution state, and the other movable decorative body is triggered by the timing (new restoration operation time). The restoration process for the body (frame-side movable decoration body) can be newly started. That is, in this case, a situation occurs in which the restoration process for a specific movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) and the restoration process for another movable decorative body (frame-side movable decorative body) are simultaneously executed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable decorations, and early restoration of the movable decorations is expected.

  Method 2: If at least "the specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are both provided as the board-side movable decorative body", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body continues Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) arrives during execution, at that time, the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body) is not started, and a specific After waiting for the completion of the one restoration process for the movable decorative body, another movable decorative body (board side movable decoration) based on the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). The restoration process for the body should be newly started.

  According to such a method 2, the new restoration operation timing (start timing of the next symbol variation) is treated as invalid for the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body that is already in the execution state, It is treated as effective for another movable decorative body (board-side movable decorative body) for which the restoration processing is not yet in the execution state. In this regard, when starting the restoration processing for another movable decorative body (board side movable decorative body), it is arranged to wait until one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. There is no concern that interference will occur between the movable ornaments, and early restoration of the movable ornaments is expected.

  Method 3: At least when there is a relationship such that "a specific movable decorative body and another movable decorative body are provided as the board-side movable decorative body", one restoration process for the specific movable decorative body is continued. Even if a new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change) comes during execution, another movable decorative body is triggered by the arrival of the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next pattern change). It does not execute the restoration process for the other movable decorative body, and waits for the completion of the restoration process for the specific movable decorative body before the restoration operation timing that comes after that. The restoration process for the decoration body is newly started.

  According to such a method 3, the new restoration operation time (the start time of the next symbol variation) is the restoration processing for the specific movable decorative body which is already in the execution state, and another movable decorative body which is not in the execution state yet. It will be treated as invalid for any of the restoration processing for the above, and even if a new abnormality occurs in another movable decorative body unless one restoration processing for a specific movable decorative body is completed. No processing for the abnormal state will be executed. That is, in this case, even if one of the movable decorative bodies is in an abnormal state while one of the movable decorative bodies is in the execution state, the movable decorative bodies can be carefully restored one by one. As a result, it becomes possible to sufficiently deal with the abnormality, and thus it is expected that the progress speed of deterioration of the movable decorative body is suppressed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 197B and FIG. 197C, for a mode (a method 1 to a method 3 and the like) when a new restoration operation timing (start timing, end timing of symbol variation, etc.) arrives during execution of the restoration operation. While detailed.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for convenience of description, a first movable decorative body (the above-mentioned "specific movable decorative body"), a second movable decorative body, a second movable decorative body, and At least the third movable decoration body, the fourth movable decoration body, and the fifth movable decoration body are provided. When only one of the movable decorations is not in the normal state, the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are the “first movable decoration”, the “second movable decoration”, and the “third movable decoration”. In any of the "movable ornament," "fourth movable ornament," and "fifth movable ornament," the movable ornament that is not in the normal state is a restoration operation time (design) corresponding to the design variation. The restoration operation (restoration processing) is started when the fluctuation start timing, the end timing, or the like) arrives.

  However, when there is a plurality of movable decorations that are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation arrives, all of the movable decorations that are not in the normal state are collectively restored at the time of the restoration operation. If the (restoration process) is started, there is a concern that it will not be possible to concentrate on the effect corresponding to the change in the symbol, which will be a nuisance.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this description example, when there are a plurality of movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation comes, a part of the movable decorative bodies which are not in the normal state Only when the restoration operation time has come, the restoration operation can be started, thereby avoiding that all the movable ornaments that are not in the normal state start the restoration operation all at once. The restoration operation is realized according to the situation.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 197B, the timing tm32 when the symbol variation (first time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts (restoration corresponding to the symbol variation). When the operation time has arrived), an abnormality occurs in all of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body. Suppose that The "abnormality" here means that the detecting means detects the "abnormality", but the "abnormality" does not necessarily have to be detected. May simply mean that the “abnormality” is present (undetected state).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this description example, based on the arrival of the restoration operation timing (timing tm32), the restoration processing for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state is executed. However, here, the restoration operations of the first movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, and the fourth movable decorative body are started in parallel, but the third movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body are started. The movable ornament of No. 1 does not start the restoration operation and stands by in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring operation in a mode according to the situation is realized.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, for the third movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, the next restoration operation timing (timing tm35) is waited for. Instead, the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation at the same time. become.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm32, the next restoration operation time (timing tm35) arrives. Also, the restoration operation is not started, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm36 at which the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is completed. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel in a combination that impedes concentration on the effect.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the second movable decorative body is ended before the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is ended. The "third movable ornament" and "fifth movable ornament" do not start the restoration operation when the restoration process for the ornament is completed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is ended after the timing tm34 at which the restoration process for the first movable ornament is ended. The third movable decorative body does not start the restoring operation and stays in the standby state until the restoration processing for the body is completed, and when the restoration processing for the fourth movable decorative body is completed, the “fifth The "movable ornament of" does not start the restoration operation.

  That is, the third movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 comes unless the specific movable decoration body (here, the first movable decoration body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament). The restoration processing (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoration processing (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body 1 to be completed.

  In addition, the fifth movable ornament starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm32 arrives unless the first movable ornament and the third movable ornament are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm32 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of the (restoration operation).

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) from among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the variation in the pattern can be dealt with. It becomes possible to perform the restoration process while appropriately maintaining the environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, although the "fifth movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state earlier than the "third movable decorative body", the "first movable decorative body" When the restoration processing for "is completed, first, the restoration processing for the" third movable ornament "is started. In this way, by not performing the restoration processing in the order of the abnormal state, it becomes possible to preferentially restore the movable decorative body with high production importance to the normal state, which is suitable for amusement of the game. You will be expected to maintain.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol It is assumed that the variation (third time) starts timing tm35 (restoring operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation). Such a restoring operation time originally functions to newly start the restoring operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation time is not used, and the restoration process (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to extend over the restoration operation time (timing tm35). ing. As a result, it becomes possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm35. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to perform the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time) The probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state prior to the timing when "starts" increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197B, the third movable decorative body is the timing tm32 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at a timing tm31 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm32 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed (timing tm34).

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm32 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoring process (restoring operation). Even when the normal state is maintained until the "timing tm33" which is the timing of No. 1 and an abnormality occurs at the timing tm33, as in the example shown in FIG. It is preferable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34 at which the step (3) ends. In other words, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state where the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm33, but the other movable decorative body (first It is possible to start the restoration process (restoration operation) by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm32 arrived before timing tm33) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. As a result, the normal state can be quickly restored. The details of the “restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32” will be described later.

  At this time, when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body is prolonged and exceeds the timing tm35, it is desirable that the restoration process be continuously executed so as to cross the timing tm35. Further, at the timing tm35, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not started, and at the timing when the restoration process for the first movable decorative body executed so as to cross the timing tm35 is finished. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament.

  In this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the time when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) arrives, it becomes abnormal at the time when the timing tm32 (restoring operation time) comes. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been performed before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration of high production importance. You will be able to return to normal from the body preferentially. The "fifth movable decorative body" is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that was in the normal state at the timing tm32 (restoring operation time). Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm32 is started. "Restoring processing using the restoration operation time at timing tm32 (restoration operation)" means the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament in the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm32. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and a mode in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decoration body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decoration body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is The restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the movable decoration body 5 ”is started. If the “third movable ornament” is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable ornament” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is not performed, and “fifth movable ornament” is not performed. It is determined whether or not the "movable ornament of" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the “third movable ornament” is in the normal state at the timing tm34, the restoration process for the “fifth movable ornament” is started based on the arrival of the timing tm34. Becomes

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the “restoration process for the first movable decorative body” started at the start timing (restoration operation timing) of the symbol variation (first time) is “symbol variation (1 (Time) ends (stops losing) and the next time the symbol variation (second time) starts tm42 ”(the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has arrived) and it is not finished and is still in the middle of execution In the above situation and when the timing tm42 arrives, the "second movable decorative body", the "third movable decorative body", the "fourth movable decorative body", and the "fifth movable decorative body". Is assumed to be in an abnormal state.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, first, the restoration process for the "first movable decoration body" is not performed again from the beginning based on the arrival of the timing tm42, but the timing tm42 ( It is designed to be continuously executed across the restoration operation time). This makes it possible to return to the normal state earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm42. For example, when the symbol variation (second time) is to perform the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the first movable decorative body within the symbol variation (second time) The probability that the first movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state prior to the timing of starting "is increased. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 according to this example executes the restoration process for the movable decorative body in the abnormal state based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm42). However, here, with respect to the fourth movable ornament, the restoration operation is started in parallel with the first movable ornament that is in the midst of execution, but the second movable ornament and the third movable ornament are started. For the movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body, the restoring operation is not started, and the movable decorative body and the fifth movable decorative body wait in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent all of the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state from starting the restoring operation all at once, and the restoring operation in a mode according to the situation is realized.

  In particular, as for the second movable decorative body, as shown in FIG. 197B, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and not executing restoration processing (restoration operation)”, Based on the arrival of the restoration operation time (timing tm32), the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in parallel with the first movable decorative body. Nevertheless, as shown in FIG. 197C, when the first movable decorative body is in a state such as “not in a normal state and performing a restoration process (restoration operation)”, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 ) Has arrived, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is not started at the time when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) has arrived.

  That is, the situation in which the first movable decoration body is performing the restoration process (restoration operation) across the restoration operation time (timing tm42) means that the first movable decoration body returns to the normal state (return to the original position). It can be said that the player side is in a state of trouble, and the player side is in the situation of being distracted by the "first movable decoration body" in such a state. Then, in such a situation, if many movable ornaments newly start the restoration process (restoration operation), the player cannot concentrate on the effect according to the fluctuation of the symbol, which is a humorous result. Is concerned.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fourth movable decorative body among the movable decorative bodies (see FIG. 197B) that can perform the restoration process (restoring operation) in parallel with the first movable decorative body. In regard to the above, even in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration processing is started in parallel with the first movable ornament in the situation of being executed. On the other hand, regarding the second movable ornament, in the situation shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process is not started in parallel with the first movable ornament that is in the middle of execution, and the first movable ornament does not start. The ornament body is kept in a standby state until the restoration processing is completed. Then, after the restoration operation timing (timing tm45 in FIG. 197C) is newly arrived in the state where the restoration processing for the first movable decorative body has been completed, it is determined based on the arrival of the timing tm45. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable ornament 2 is started. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large number of movable decorative bodies from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state. Will be resolved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the third movable decorative body which remains in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is similar to the example shown in FIG. 197B. Instead of waiting for the arrival of (timing tm45), the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends. As a result, it is possible to restore all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state to the normal state at a comparatively early stage, while avoiding that all the movable decorative bodies that are not in the normal state start the restoring operation at the same time. become.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the fifth movable decorative body which is left in the abnormal state without starting the restoration operation at the timing tm42, the next restoration operation timing is similar to the example shown in FIG. 197B. The restoration operation is not started even when the (timing tm45) arrives, and the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the timing tm46 when the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body ends. I am trying. As a result, it is possible to preferably prevent the plurality of movable decorative bodies from performing the restoring operation in parallel with each other in a manner that hinders concentration on the effect.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the restoration process for the fourth movable ornament is ended before the timing tm44 when the restoration process for the first movable ornament is ended. The "second movable ornament," "third movable ornament," and "fifth movable ornament" do not start the restoration operation when the restoration process for the ornament is completed.

  That is, the third movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 comes unless the specific movable decoration body (here, the first movable decoration body) is in an abnormal state. If the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament) is in an abnormal state, the restoration process (restore operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and the specific movable ornament (here, the first movable ornament). The restoration processing (restoring operation) is started after waiting for the restoration processing (restoring operation) of the first movable decorative body 1 to be completed.

  Further, the fifth movable decoration body starts the restoration process (restoration operation) when the timing tm42 arrives unless the first movable decoration body and the third movable decoration body are in an abnormal state. If the movable decorative body or the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state, the restoration processing (restoring operation) is not started when the timing tm42 arrives, and each restoration processing of the first movable decorative body and the third movable decorative body The restoration process (restoration operation) is started after the completion of the (restoration operation).

  In this way, the restoration process is not performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) from among the plurality of movable decorations, so that the variation in the pattern can be dealt with. It becomes possible to perform the restoration process while appropriately maintaining the environment in which the user can concentrate on the effect.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197C, in the situation where the third movable decorative body is performing the restoration process (restoring operation), the symbol variation (second time) ends (stops losing) and the next symbol It is assumed that the change (third time) starts timing tm45 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol change). Such a restoring operation time originally functions to newly start the restoring operation for the third movable decorative body that has not yet returned to the normal state. However, here, for the third movable decorative body, such a function as the restoration operation timing is not used, and the restoration processing (restoration operation) is continuously executed so as to extend over the restoration operation timing (timing tm45). ing. As a result, the normal state can be restored earlier than when the restoration process (restoration operation) is redone based on the arrival of the timing tm45. For example, when the symbol variation (third time) is to perform the movable effect using the third movable decorative body, "the movable effect using the third movable decorative body within the symbol variation (third time) The probability that the third movable decorative body can be returned to the normal state prior to the timing when "starts" increases. That is, in this example, even if the movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the start of the pattern variation, even if the movable decorative body using the movable decorative body is started, the movable decorative body is restored to the normal state. By doing so, it is possible to perform a production operation as a movable production using a movable decorative body within the symbol variation.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, the third movable decorative body is the timing tm42 (when the symbol variation (first time) ends (loss stop) and the next symbol variation (second time) starts. It is assumed that an abnormality occurs at the timing tm41 before the arrival of the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation). Then, as a result of the arrival of the timing tm42 (restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation) in the abnormal state, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started in a manner delayed (timing tm44).

  However, for the third movable decorative body, it is after the timing tm42 (restoring operation time corresponding to the symbol variation), and within the period in which the first movable decorative body is performing the restoring process (restoring operation). Even when the normal state is maintained until the "timing tm43" which is the timing of No. 1 and the abnormality occurs at the timing tm43, similar to the example shown in FIG. It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 at which (3) is finished. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state in which the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm43, but the other movable decorative body (first The restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. As a result, the normal state can be quickly restored. The details of the “restoration process using the restoration operation time at timing tm42 (restoration operation)” are as described in “Restoration process using the restoration operation time at timing tm32 (restoration operation)”.

  Further, in this case, although the fifth movable decorative body is in the abnormal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) arrives, it becomes in the abnormal state at the time when the timing tm42 (restoring operation time) comes. Since it becomes possible to start the restoration process (restoring operation) for the "third movable decorative body" that has not been performed before the "fifth movable decorative body", the movable decoration of high production importance. You will be able to return to normal from the body preferentially. The “fifth movable decorative body” is based on the completion of the restoration process (restoring operation) for the “third movable decorative body” that was in the normal state at the timing tm42 (restoring operation time). Thus, the restoration process (restoration operation) using the restoration operation time at the timing tm42 is started. "Restoring processing using the restoration operation timing at timing tm42 (restoring operation)" means restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable ornament in the program executed based on the arrival of timing tm42. And a restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament and a restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable ornament, and a mode in which each of these restoration processes is sequentially executed. It means that it has become. For example, when the restoration process for the “first movable decoration body” is completed, it is determined whether the “third movable decoration body” is in an abnormal state, and when it is determined that the abnormal state is The restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is started. When the restoration process for the “third movable decorative body” is completed, it is determined whether the “fifth movable decorative body” is in an abnormal state. The restoration process for the movable decoration body 5 ”is started. If the “third movable ornament” is not in the abnormal state when the restoration process for the “first movable ornament” is completed, the restoration process for the “third movable ornament” is not performed, and “fifth movable ornament” is not performed. It is determined whether or not the "movable ornament of" is in an abnormal state. As a result, when it is determined that the abnormal state is reached, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started. That is, in this case, when the "third movable decorative body" is in the normal state at the timing tm44, the restoration process for the "fifth movable decorative body" is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44. Becomes

  According to such an example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) arrives, the movable decorative body (first position) that is not in the normal state (not in the original position although not in the movable state) is displayed. Of the movable decorative body, the second movable decorative body, the third movable decorative body, the fourth movable decorative body, and the fifth movable decorative body), the restoration operation timing (symbol variation ( For the movable decoration body (first movable decoration body) that is performing the restoration operation triggered by the (start timing of the first time)), the restoration operation time is ignored and the restoration operation time is ignored and is continuously executed. However, with respect to the movable decorative body (fourth movable decorative body) that is not performing the restoration operation, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored and the restoration operation can be started with this as a trigger. That is, in this case, a plurality of movable ornaments in an abnormal state may or may not ignore the function as the restoration operation time depending on the situation in which they are placed. As a result, the restoration processing suitable for the situation can be realized.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIG. 197C, the "first movable ornament" performs the restoration operation triggered by the arrival of the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (first time)) corresponding to the symbol variation. When the restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) corresponding to the pattern variation arrives again during the execution, the first movable decorative body performing the restoration operation again arrives. The restoration operation timing (the start timing of the symbol variation (second time)) is used as a trigger, and the restoration operation can be continuously executed without performing the restoration operation again. In other words, in this case, it takes time to restore normality, and as a result, even if the restoration operation time comes again while the restoration operation is being performed, it will be ignored, so it is in the state of being executed. It is possible to continue the restoration operation without interruption, and thus it is possible to prompt the early restoration of the movable decorative body in the abnormal state.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, while the restoration process (restoration operation) is being performed on the first movable ornament over a plurality of fluctuations, another movable ornament (third movable ornament) is displayed. When an abnormality occurs, the third movable decorative body does not start the returning operation at the time of the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) corresponding to the change in the symbol, and is compared with the first movable decorative body in the midway of execution. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). That is, in this case, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is not redone when the restoration operation time comes (timing tm42), and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornamental body is performed. It is not started at the time (timing tm42), and immediately after the continuation of the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" is completed, the restoration process for the third movable decorative body ( Since the restoration operation is started, the restoration process should not be performed in parallel for the movable decorations of a specific combination (for example, a combination that hinders the concentration of the effect) among the plurality of movable decorations. At the same time, it becomes possible to restore the plurality of movable ornaments to normal relatively quickly.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the third movable decorative body is in an abnormal state at the timing tm43, the restoration operation time has not yet come after the abnormal state of the third movable decorative body. The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the arrival of the timing tm44 (the end timing of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” executed over the restoration operation time). ing. That is, in this case, the third movable decorative body is in a state in which the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation has not yet arrived after the abnormal state at the timing tm43, but the other movable decorative body (first The restoration processing (restoration operation) can be started by using the restoration operation timing (timing tm42 that arrives before timing tm43) that triggered the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body. As a result, the normal state can be quickly restored.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as a result of continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation) so as to straddle the restoration operation time, the movable ornament is restored to the normal state. When the performance execution timing comes, the movable decoration can be executed using the movable decorative body that has just returned to the normal state. With such a configuration, by continuously executing the restoration process (restoration operation), it becomes possible to restore the movable decorative body to the normal state early by the timing when the movable effect is started.

  In addition, even if the restoration operation time corresponding to the design variation arrives multiple times during the execution of the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable ornament, all of them are ignored and the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the movable ornament is performed. It is desirable to continue.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are in a relationship in which restoration processing (restoration operation) is performed in parallel as shown in FIG. 197B. is there. However, as shown in FIG. 197C, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm42) arrives while only the first movable ornament is performing the restoration operation, the second movable ornament is moved at the timing tm42. The restoration process (restoration operation) for the ornament was not started, and each restoration operation was not performed in parallel. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large number of movable decorative bodies from newly starting restoration processing (restoring operation) when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state.

  Then, when a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives after the restoration operation of the first movable decorative body ends and the normal restoration is performed, the restoration processing (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is performed at the timing tm45. I'm trying to get it started. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the situation where the first movable decorative body takes time to restore the normal state and the restoration process (restoring operation) for the second movable decorative body is not immediately started. Since the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started after waiting for the arrival of a new restoration operation time (timing tm45), it is possible to concentrate on the effect. The environment can be adjusted appropriately.

  At this time, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body ends due to a failure, a new restoration operation time ( When the timing tm45) arrives, the restoration process (restoration operation) for the second movable decorative body is started based on the arrival of the timing tm45. That is, in this case, since it is not possible to provide the movable effect using the first movable decorative body, it is possible to restore the normal operation by using only the second movable decorative body and perform the movable effect using the second movable decorative body. It is desirable to make it feasible.

  In the example shown in FIG. 197 (C), after the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed and the normal restoration is performed, until a new restoration operation timing (timing tm45) arrives. When the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again, when the new restoration operation time (timing tm45) arrives, the first movable decorative body and the second movable decorative body are restored to their respective states. It is desirable to start processing (restoration operation) in parallel.

  In the above example, even if the restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body is ended due to failure (does not return to the original position), It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation). Further, even when the restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament is terminated (does not return to the original position), the restoration process (restoration for the third movable ornament) is completed. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the (operation).

  In the above example, when the third movable decorative body is not in the abnormal state at the time (timing tm34, tm44) when the restoration process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body is completed, the first movable decorative body is not detected. It is desirable to start the restoration process (restoration operation) for the fifth movable decorative body based on the completion of the restoration process (restoration operation) for the body. Further, when the third movable decorative body newly enters an abnormal state within the execution period of the “restoration process (restoring operation) for the fifth movable decorative body” thus started, the third movable decorative body is changed to the abnormal state. When the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not completed, the restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body is not performed, and when a new restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives. It is desirable that the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed on the third movable ornament. However, when the restoration process (restoration action) for the fifth movable decorative body has not yet been completed and is in the execution state at the time when the new restoration action time corresponding to the symbol variation arrives, the restoration action time comes. When the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is not started at the time of performing the restoration operation time after the "restoring processing (restoring operation) for the fifth movable ornamental body" is completed It is desirable to start "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament".

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments which are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. However, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored for the fourth movable decorative body for which restoration processing (restoration operation) is not performed, but restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. In this regard, even in the case of the fourth movable decorative body that has started the restoration process (restoration operation) without ignoring the restoration operation time (timing tm42), a new movement is performed during the restoration process (restoration operation). When the restoration operation timing (timing tm43) arrives, it is desirable to ignore the new restoration operation timing (timing tm43) and continue the restoration operation so as to extend over the restoration operation timing.

  When there is a movable decorative body that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation) and a movable decorative body that is in the state of executing the restoration process (restoring operation), the effect display related to the pattern change is displayed. Even if a specific abnormal state that is not visible (such as a state in which the entire screen is displayed as an abnormal state due to a magnetic abnormality) occurs, while the above notification is being performed in response to the occurrence of the specific abnormal state, Restoration processing (restoration operation) that is already in the running state is continued without being stopped, and restoration processing (restoration operation) is also performed for the movable decorative body that is in the waiting state for restoration processing when the restoration operation time comes. It is desirable to newly start (restoring operation).

  When there are movable ornaments that are in the state of executing restoration processing (restoration operation) or movable ornaments that are in the state of waiting for execution of restoration processing (restoration operation), use those movable ornaments within the pattern fluctuation. When the execution timing of the movable effect has come, the driving force for performing the effect may be applied to the movable ornaments, although the driving force for the restoration process (restoring operation) may be applied. It is desirable to prevent it (do not perform the production operation) in order to realize an early return to a normal state. However, although the driving force for performing the production is not applied to the movable decorations, the light emission mode provided for each of the movable decorations is such that the light emission mode corresponding to the movable presentation appears. It is desirable to have the parts emit light as usual. That is, in this case, the movable effect itself is not executed, but a part of the effect that constitutes the movable effect (light emission effect) is properly executed. , "0" and "100" are included), different light emission modes also appear in the "movable decorative body which is not in a normal state", and it is possible to maintain a preferable gaming interest.

  In addition, for the movable decorative body that is in a state where the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure, the restoration process (restoration operation) is not performed even when the restoration operation time comes again, so at least the power is continued. As long as it is, it can be said that the movable decorative body is not operated in the movable effect. However, even with the movable decorative body in such a state, when the timing for executing the movable effect using the movable decorative object arrives, the movable effect itself is not executed, and the movable effect is configured. It is desirable that a part of the effect (light emission effect) to be performed is appropriately executed. That is, in this case, the movable decorative body in a state in which the light emission mode different depending on the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears, including "0" and "100") is the state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) has ended in failure. Will also appear, and it will be possible to maintain a favorable interest in gaming.

  In addition, the movable ornament in the state of executing the restoration process (restore operation), the movable ornament in the waiting state of the restoration process (restoration operation), and the state in which the restoration process (restoration operation) ends in failure. With respect to the movable decorative body in (1), the light emitting unit may be able to emit light as usual even when another effect is executed.

  The restoration operation timing may include not only those that come in response to the symbol variation but also those that come under conditions other than that. Then, in the case of starting the restoration process (restoration operation) at a specific time that comes under a condition different from the symbol variation, while performing a specific notification (movable body abnormality notification) corresponding to the restoration process (restoration operation), When performing the restoration operation at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation, the restoration processing (restoration operation) should be started (executed) in the non-notification state without performing the specific notification (moving body abnormality notification). Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments which are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. However, the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) is not ignored for the fourth movable decorative body for which restoration processing (restoration operation) is not performed, but restoration operation is triggered by this. I'm trying to get started. In this way, even when the first movable decorative body is in a situation where it takes time to restore the normal state, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the design variation arrives, the restoration processing (restoration operation) is not ignored. About the "fourth movable ornament" that will be started, it is used for important performances such as when the winning result is derived by pattern change, or when the big hit game is started or executed. Is desirable.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, regarding the third movable decorative body, the case where the “restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body” succeeds in normal restoration (reference position detection) and fails (reference position) The restoration process (restoration operation) is started based on the end of the “restoration process (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” regardless of whether it is terminated (completed) or not. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, based on the fact that the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” ends in a failure to return to normal and the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament” ends. When the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" that has been performed is completed with a successful return to normal, the third movable decorative body is abnormal again within the pattern change that has successfully returned to normal. When the state comes, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation comes, "restoration processing for the first movable decorative body (restoration operation)" is not performed and "restoration processing for the third movable decorative body ( It is desirable to perform "restoration operation)".

  However, at this time, at the time when the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation arrives, the "fifth movable operation" started based on the completion of the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body". When the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the ornament" is in the execution state, the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" and the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" "Restoring process for the first movable decorative body" triggered by "restoring operation timing corresponding to symbol variation" that comes after the "restoring process for the fifth movable decorative body (restoring operation)" is completed. It is desirable to perform the "restoration process (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" without performing the "restoration operation".

  After the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is successfully completed, the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed while the restoration process is being performed. Even when an abnormality occurs again in the first movable decorative body, the "restoration processing (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" is executed so as to span the restoration operation time corresponding to the next symbol variation. In this case, it is desirable that the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body” not be started at the time of the restoration operation. That is, in this case, at the time of the restoration operation that comes after the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" succeeds or fails in normal restoration, "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" Will be started.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 197C, when the restoration operation time (timing tm42) corresponding to the symbol variation (second time) arrives, of the movable ornaments which are not in the normal state, the symbol variation before this (1 For the first movable decorative body that is performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) triggered by the restoration operation timing corresponding to the (th), the restoration operation timing (timing tm42) without performing the restoration processing (restoration operation) again. Is ignored and this is executed continuously. Regarding the third movable decorative body, the restoration operation time (timing tm42) is ignored, and the completion of the "restoration processing (restoring operation) for the first movable decorative body" is completed. Based on this, the restoration process (restoration operation) is started. In this respect, when the first movable decorative body becomes abnormal again while the "restoring process (restoring operation) for the third movable decorative body" started in this way is being executed, the "third movable decorative body" When the "restoration process for the body (restoration operation)" is finished, the "restoration process for the first movable decorative body (restoration action)" is not started based on the end, but the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation is It is desirable to start the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable decorative body" based on the arrival of a new item.

  However, at this time, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation newly arrives, the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body" is not completed and the situation in the middle of execution (crossing the restoration operation time It is desirable to ignore the restoration operation time and wait for the completion of the “restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable decorative body” when the situation is such that the restoration operation is performed. Then, the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the first movable ornament" is started at the restoration operation time corresponding to the symbol variation that has arrived after the "restoration processing (restoration operation) for the third movable ornament" is completed. It is desirable to let it do.

  That is, in this case, the "first movable decorative body" and the "third movable decorative body" are restored so that when the "first movable decorative body" is in an abnormal state, the "first movable decorative body" is restored in advance. Despite the relationship that the processing is performed, when the restoration operation time corresponding to the pattern variation comes when the third movable decoration body is not in the normal state, the first movable decoration body, the restoration operation When the restoration operation is started based on the arrival of the time (when the third movable decoration body is not performing the restoration process) and when the restoration operation is not started (the third movable decoration body is When the restoration process is being executed), the restoration process can be realized according to the situation.

  The pachinko machine 1 may be provided with a setting changing unit capable of changing the winning probability of the hit determination and the selection probability of the effect pattern. However, regardless of the setting of these probabilities, it is desirable that the restoration operation timing corresponding to the symbol variation is used at the same time (for example, at the time when the symbol variation starts).

  The first movable decoration, the second movable decoration, the third movable decoration, the fourth movable decoration, and the fifth movable decoration are movable decorations provided at positions where the player can contact them. The body may be included. In this case, it is considered that the movable decorative body provided at a position where the player can contact is most likely to be in an abnormal state. Then, it is desirable to be provided as a "fourth movable ornament" that starts the restoration process (restoration operation).

  The light guide plate that exposes the light guide pattern is provided in front of the movable decorative body, and the effect of displaying the light guide pattern is not limited during the restoration process (restoring operation) for the movable decorative body. Making it executable is desirable in order to make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the restoration process (restoration operation) for the movable decorative body.

  The "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" shown in FIGS. 197B and 197C should be prepared as those having a performance relationship in which they are in an operating state in a specific movable effect. It is desirable to do. For example, the "first movable decorative body" and the "second movable decorative body" may be given decorations that are related to each other, or they may be operated at the same time as a movable production based on a pattern variation (production pattern). Be prepared to form the decoration of (such as completion of characters and character strings). The third movable decorative body is prepared as a movable movable body that is not used for forming a specific movable effect or one decoration. According to such a configuration, when the restoration process (restoration operation) is performed, it is possible to prevent one decoration from being formed in the same manner (movement at the same time) as the movable effect based on the symbol variation (effect pattern). As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  Regarding the "first movable decoration body", "second movable decoration body", "third movable decoration body", "fourth movable decoration body", and "fifth movable decoration body", the game board 5 may be provided separately from those provided on the door frame 3 side.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the above example, the “first movable decorative body”, the “second movable decorative body”, the “third movable decorative body”, the “fourth movable decorative body”, and the “second movable decorative body”. It is assumed that the "5th movable decoration body" is provided, but regarding the "2nd movable decoration body", "3rd movable decoration body", "4th movable decoration body", and "5th movable decoration body" Does not necessarily have to include all of the movable ornaments, but may include “one” of the movable ornaments, or appropriate “two” or “three” of the movable ornaments. Even with such a configuration, it has the technical features described with reference to FIGS. 197B and 197C (how the restoration process is performed in relation to the “first movable decoration body”). Becomes

[Penalty for operating the operation unit capable of producing light emission]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is changed by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). Processing is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, the state in which the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

  By the way, in recent years, in the field of gaming machines, the number of operating units to be operated by a player tends to increase, but these operating units may be handled roughly, and as a result, one of the operating units is operated. If any trouble occurs, the operability and the playability will be significantly deteriorated, so a decline in the enjoyment of the game is unavoidable.

Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above, in addition to the operation button 410,
A sword decoration body in which the sword part 5010 (sword part 5011, handle part 5012, collar part 5013) is movable (variable) between the sword position and the sword position by a predetermined operation (sword operation, sword operation). 5001 (see FIGS. 146 and 161)
The operation of pulling the sword part 5010 (the sword part 5011, the handle part 5012, the collar part 5013) from the sheath part 5020 (extracting sword) and the If "operation" is repeated, it may cause a failure.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the effect light emitting parts (not shown) are respectively arranged for the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013, and the blade portion 5010 (the blade portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, the collar portion 5013) are provided with a special detection portion (not shown) capable of detecting whether or not the sheath portion 5020 is in a specific position (original position) where the sword is stored. Then, at least during the period in which the demo screen is displayed (a non-gaming state in which the game effect according to the big hit determination and the symbol variation are not executed), the sword portion 5010 is identified as a result of the detection by the special detection portion. When it is determined that the vehicle is not in the position (original position), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to generate a performance restriction period as a penalty.

  According to such a configuration, at least when in the non-gaming state in which the symbol variation is not performed, the sword portion 5010 and the effect light emitting portion (the sword portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013) are subjected to a predetermined operation. As a result of the displacement, the production restriction period can occur when it is detected that the operation unit is not located at the specific position, and thus it is possible to preferably prevent the operating unit from being roughly handled.

In this respect, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, the above-mentioned "change of set value (volume set value) for output sound of effect sound" and "set value (luminance set value) for light emission luminance" described above. The above-mentioned production restriction period is generated while any of the "changes" is left in a state in which it can be accepted by an operation by the player. However, as will be described later, during this production restriction period,
With regard to the effect sound, even if the setting value (volume setting value) related to the output volume is changed, the effect sound is not output at the volume corresponding to the volume setting value, and the volume adjustment is performed. While the confirmation sound will not be output,
Regarding the effect lamp, when the set value (luminance set value) related to the light emission brightness is changed, the effect light emitting unit included in the sword section 5010 that is the detection target among the plurality of effect lamps included in the pachinko machine 1 concerned. Although the sword portion 5011, the handle portion 5012, and the collar portion 5013 do not emit light with the brightness according to the brightness setting value, they are provided in a portion different from the sword portion 5010 that is the detection target. With regard to the effect lamp (for example, various effect LEDs mounted on the decorative board of the game board 5), effect light emission with the brightness corresponding to the set value is set to be executable, and the like. It can be done.

  According to such a configuration, when the performance restriction period occurs, both the setting value change related to the volume and the setting value change related to the luminance can be accepted, but the setting related to the volume is related. The degree of limitation becomes different between the processing and the processing related to the brightness setting.

  That is, with regard to the effect sound, the volume setting value is secretly variable internally, but the effect sound is not output in a manner in which the changed volume setting value is reflected, and even the volume adjustment confirmation sound is generated. It also tries to give the player a sense of tension (maybe they have done something they shouldn't do) by not even outputting.

  On the other hand, with respect to the brightness, even if the brightness setting value is changed for the effect light emitting parts (the blade part 5011, the handle part 5012, and the brim part 5013) included in the “sword part 5010” operated by the player. Although the effect lighting is not emitted in a manner that reflects the changed brightness setting value, the effect lamp provided in a part different from the "sword part 5010" operated by the player is changed. By making it possible to perform effect light emission in a manner in which the brightness setting value is reflected (for example, light emission that matches the timing at which a particular notice effect is performed), it is possible to handle the "sword part 5010" roughly. It is possible to appropriately appeal that the pachinko machine 1 as a whole intends to continue the game or the performance, while warning that it is possible to recognize that the performance restriction is imposed. It made. In this sense, for the effect lamps on the game board 5 on which the game balls flow down or win the prize, the effect light emission should be executed in the normal manner in which the changed brightness setting value is reflected. Is desirable. With this, it is possible to give a warning against mishandling the operation unit while preferably avoiding such things as "disappearing the player's willingness to start the game and urging the player to end the game". become.

  Moreover, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the release condition for each limitation is made different between the limitation on the processing related to the volume setting and the limitation on the processing related to the brightness setting. . In particular, for the "processing related to volume setting" on the side that initially imposes relatively strict restrictions, it is strongly encouraged to continue playing by making a significant improvement to a normal state relatively early. On the other hand, although the “processing related to brightness setting” on the side that initially imposes a relatively soft limit shows an improving trend, it slows down the overall improvement speed, It is expected that the restrictions will be left to remain, so that the tension is moderately maintained for a long period of time and the rough handling is prevented from being repeated.

[Help image to promote understanding of production]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute advance notice effect determination as to whether or not to selectively cause expected effect (s). Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect pattern determination or advance notice effect determination is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the result of the determination, thereby changing the decorative pattern according to the result of the big hit determination. The effect will be executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background effect) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement thereof are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  However, when such an expected effect is realized as a background depiction (background notice), basically, there is a degree of directivity such as "how much to set the ratio at which an image with a high degree of expectation appears". It can only be done. Therefore, a fundamental problem such as "it is difficult to have an expectation for a big hit unless an image with high expectations (expected performance) appears" has not been solved yet.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, first, when it is determined that the special effect is to be performed as a result of the notice effect determination (when the predetermined effect condition is satisfied), at least the background depiction is performed. It is possible to execute the process of displaying the background image used in the special mode different from the original image data, and when the special mode is displayed, the degree of expectation ( It is possible to suggest that the jackpot pattern appears at a high rate.

Here, as the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, for example,
Processing for displaying the original image data as rotation processing data rotated by a predetermined angle (rotation around any of x, y, and z axes (or an appropriate combination) in the display area),
It is possible to exemplify a process of displaying the original image data as mosaic processing data in which a predetermined degree of “blurring” is inserted, and the like.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when predetermined rendering conditions are satisfied, the original image data is slightly processed (rotation processing, mosaic processing, etc.) A special effect of displaying this (displaying in a special mode) is intentionally performed. With such a configuration, even if a special effect in which the original image data is slightly processed is performed, it becomes difficult for the player to definitely detect and recognize the fact. However, in exchange for this, even if the special effect is not being performed, it is possible to memorize the feeling and illusion that "maybe it is in the state where the special effect is being performed". Therefore, even if a state in which an image with high expectation (special effect) does not appear continues to be expected, it is expected that the expectation for a big hit can be appropriately maintained.

  However, if there is no clue for the player to recognize the implementation status related to such "processing for displaying in a special mode", it is difficult to recognize even the possibility of a situation with high expectations. In the end, doing special production may lose its meaning.

  In this regard, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment displays a help image as to whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed according to the operation by the player. It is possible to execute the processing that causes it. According to such a configuration, the help image can be displayed according to the operation by the player, so that it is not possible to recognize whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is expected to suppress the decrease of the above-mentioned value and to maintain the desired feeling appropriately.

  However, the "help image" according to this description example does not explicitly indicate whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, and is intended to include recognition difficulty. ing. It is because I intentionally have such recognition difficulty, even if it does not seem that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, I can not be convinced of it, so I hope. Will be left behind and will be able to maintain expectations.

  FIG. 199 shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the state transitions between the non-gaming state in which the game is not executed (in the demo screen and the like) and the game execution state in which the game is being executed. ..

  FIG. 199 (a) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when in a non-gaming state in which a game is not executed (during demo screen etc.). As shown in FIG. 199 (a), in the effect display device 1600 in the non-gaming state, a character image PG (here, a character image PG that is useful for checking "is the special effect being executed?" A guide image AG is displayed, which suggests that a character playing a penguin) can be made to appear by operating a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like). In this example of explanation, the explanation image and the character image PG are displayed as the guide image AG.

  In the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a), when the start winning is generated and the game (variation of the special symbol according to the big hit determination) is started, first in FIG. 199 (b) in the effect display device 1600. The guide image AG is hidden as shown in FIG. At the same time, the variation effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notice) and the movable body operation (character effect effect). In this way, by automatically hiding the guide image AG when the game is started, it is possible to avoid adversely affecting the playability in the game execution state, The presence of the character image PG (here, a character that imitates a penguin) can be favorably appealed.

  199 (c) shows a display example on the effect display device 1600 when the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is finished (stopped display).

  When the hold information remains in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), the guide image is hidden by the fact that the hold information is consumed to newly start the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ. The effect situation shown in FIG. 199 (b) will appear again in the state of being maintained. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 199 (c), when the hold information does not remain, the state is shifted again to the non-gaming state (during the demo screen, etc.). That is, in this case, the guide image AG is based on the fact that the game is not newly started for a predetermined time after the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 199 (b) is ended (stopped display). The displayed situation (the situation shown in FIG. 199 (a)) will appear again. In the effect display device 1600 when the guide image AG is displayed, the decorative symbol SZ may be stopped and displayed, or the decorative symbol SZ itself may be hidden.

  Then, in the "processing for displaying in a special mode" according to this effect example, the variation effect by the decorative pattern SZ is executed in the "specific effect pattern" (when a predetermined judgment result is obtained in the effect judgment). However, it can be executed during the period in which the specific effect image appears (predetermined timing in the specific effect pattern).

  FIG. 200 shows a state where the variation effect by the decorative symbol SZ is executed in the “specific effect pattern”, and the expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image is performed. The example of a display in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 when it is in the state which has been shown is shown.

  That is, in this effect example, when at least the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed, on condition that a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, It becomes possible to perform a process (a process of displaying in a special mode) of slightly rotating each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) and then displaying them. There is. When the princess character (specific effect image) for which the "process for displaying in a special mode" is executed is displayed, the princess character (specific effect image) for which the process for displaying in a special mode is not executed is displayed. The jackpot pattern appears more frequently than when it is displayed.

  More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the "display in a special mode" is not executed, and the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are the original image data. It is still displayed. On the other hand, in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (b), the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) are rotated three times to the left and then displayed. In the situation shown in FIG. 200 (c), the process (the process of displaying in a special mode) is being executed, and the original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) is 6 degrees to the left. The process for displaying these after performing the rotation processing (process for displaying in a special mode) is being executed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c), each original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and its background image (princess character) even when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is performed. It is designed so that only a small amount of rotation processing is applied to the. In particular, in FIG. 200, it is possible to compare and see between FIGS. 200 (a) to 200 (c). However, in the actual presentation, FIG. )-(C) is displayed, and it is not possible to compare between them. Therefore, even if FIGS. 200 (b) and 200 (c) appear, it is difficult to be sure that the display is in the special mode, but it is difficult to be sure that the special mode is displayed. It is expected that the player will be aware of a certain possibility (the possibility of high expectation), and even if FIG. 200 (a) appears, it is not displayed in a special mode. Is difficult to be convinced, and it is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a feeling of expectation) such as “may be in a state of being displayed in a special mode”.

  The original image data of the decorative pattern SZ and the background image (princess character) is subjected to rotation processing by 3 degrees (or 6 degrees) to the left and then displayed (processing in a special mode). ) May be performed as a process in which the rotation processing is separately performed on each original image data and then displayed, or each original image data is combined and converted into one image, and It may be executed as a process of performing rotation processing on the image and displaying the image.

  In addition, regarding FIGS. 200 (b) and (c), when the image shown in FIG. 200 (c) is displayed, the jackpot pattern appears more than when the image shown in FIG. 200 (b) is displayed. The relationship may be increased so that Alternatively, when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed, after displaying FIG. 200 (a) once, it is displayed as a moving image whose inclination changes momentarily in the order of FIG. 200 (b), (c). It may be allowed to. Alternatively, it is not always necessary to prepare both of FIGS. 200 (b) and (c), and only one of FIGS. 200 (b) and (c) may be displayed.

  However, as described above, if there is no clue for the player to judge the implementation status regarding such "processing in a special mode", performing such special production loses its meaning. It can happen. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, the operation button 410 is at least in a state in which the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is greatly displayed as a background image” is performed. It is possible to execute a process of displaying a help image as to whether or not the "process of displaying in a special mode" is being executed by an operation on a predetermined operation means such as.

  In FIG. 201, the help image is displayed based on the operation accepted by the player in the state where the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is being performed. The example of a display in the effect display device 1600 at this time is shown.

  That is, in this example of the effect, at least when the "expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image" is being performed (see FIG. 200), the player's operation (operation button) 410 or the like), a character image PG (here, a character with a penguin) is useful as a help image for checking "whether the special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed". It is supposed to be displayed.

  More specifically, when the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (a), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (a) appears, and FIG. When the player performs an operation (such as the operation button 410) in the situation shown in b), the situation shown in FIG. 201 (b) appears, and in the situation shown in FIG. 200 (c) When the player performs an operation (operation button 410 or the like) on, the situation shown in FIG. 201 (c) appears.

  However, as is clear from FIGS. 201 (a) to 201 (c), when the character image PG (help image) is displayed, it is possible to make use of whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. , It is not possible to clearly indicate whether or not the “display in a special mode” is being executed. Because it dare to have such recognition difficulty, if it seems that the "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed, it becomes possible to strongly recognize the possibility, Even if it seems that the "processing to display in a special mode" does not seem to be being executed, it is not possible to be convinced that hope for the feasibility of the processing can be left and the expectation can be maintained. It will be possible.

  Here, whether the character image PG (help image) according to this effect example is in a state where the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed, as shown in FIGS. 201 (a) to (c). Regardless of the state of execution or the mode of execution, it can be displayed only at one predetermined position and in one mode in which the ruler is held in the horizontal direction so as to be held over it. In this way, by causing an image (here, a ruler) that is not affected by the “display in the special mode” and that extends in the horizontal direction to appear by the operation of the player, the image is displayed. (Here, the ruler) can be made to function as a reference image (help image) of whether or not the "special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed".

  In particular, in this production example, the position that overlaps with the image (princess character) that is the target of the "display in the special mode" is not affected by the "process in the special mode" and is horizontal. A reference image (here, a ruler) that is displayed so as to extend in is displayed. Therefore, by confirming the degree of overlap with the image (princess character) for which special processing is to be executed, it is possible to further assist in determining whether the special processing is being executed. become.

  That is, in such an example of the effect, the special effect to which the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is performed is a slightly tilted effect. When the tilted effect is performed, the tilt effect is Expectations are higher than if not done. Therefore, the player operates a predetermined operation means (operation button 410 or the like) in order to determine whether or not the leaning effect is being performed, but even if the operation is performed, " It is intentionally made to have a recognition difficulty in which it is not definitely notified whether or not the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player will be aware of the possibility of high expectations when the tilting effect appears to be being executed, and even if the tilting effect does not appear to be being executed, It is expected to leave a hope (maintaining a feeling of expectation) such as "may be in a state where a leaning effect is being executed".

  Further speaking, a reference image (here, a ruler) as to whether or not the "special effect (here, tilt effect) is being executed" is targeted for "processing for displaying in a special mode". One effect is to display at least a part of the image (decorative pattern SZ, background image) in the form of overlapping, and a standard image (here, a ruler) This is a single effect (expectation level) It is possible to provide an enjoyment that the function is exhibited for the first time by comparing it with the effect image (here, the princess character) that is not displayed as the effect.

  Further, according to such a configuration, it is possible for the player to make a production without displaying the reference image (here, the ruler) depending on the selection by the player (depending on the operation). If you do not feel confident that the production (in this case, the tilt production) is being executed ", you can enjoy various ways to play, such as not intentionally performing the operation by the player. Become.

  In addition, in this production example, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is executed as "processing for performing rotation processing on the original image data and then displaying", but is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, instead of the original image data, the image data created based on the original image data may be subjected to rotation processing and then displayed. Further, the image data may not be subjected to rotation processing but may be subjected to other processing or conversion. In short, it is possible to execute a special process for converting and displaying an image having a mode different from the normal mode, and when the special process can be executed, the player performs an operation to target the special process. As long as it is possible to display a rough guide image, the above-described effects can be achieved.

  By the way, in the above-described production example, the "processing for displaying in a special mode" can be executed when "expected production in which the princess character (specific production image) is displayed large as a background image" is being performed. However, depending on the result of the effect determination, the decorative symbol SZ may be allowed to be executed a plurality of times within the period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. At this time, when the number of times that the “process for displaying in a special mode” is executed is large, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbols appear is higher than when the number of times is small.

  In addition, not only when the character image PG (particularly, the ruler here) is in a state in which the “expected effect in which the princess character (specific effect image) is displayed as a large background image” is performed, the decorative pattern SZ It may be made possible to be displayed by the operation of the player for the entire period from the start of fluctuation to the stop of fluctuation. Further, even when the decorative symbol SZ is in a stopped state, it may be made displayable by an operation by the player.

  That is, in this case, no matter what background image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, if the player operates, a process of causing the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) to appear is executed. Becomes However, considering that the character image PG (particularly here, the ruler) is the “comparison reference image (reference image) with respect to the background image”, the display position preferable for displaying the character image PG is the background image for each time. Obviously, it depends on the type. On the other hand, if the display position or display form of the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) is changed according to the type of the background image each time, the character image PG will be compared with the comparison reference. The essential function as an image (reference image) may be lost, and there is a concern that amusement with the game may be deteriorated due to suspicion of lack of reliability. That is, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is required to be displayed as an absolute image that is invariant regardless of the effect situation.

  Therefore, it is desirable that the display position of the character image PG can be changed among a plurality of predetermined display positions according to the operation (operation button 410 or the like) by the player. .. However, it is important that the display form is the same regardless of the display position.

  FIG. 202 shows a display example when the character image PG is displayed so as to change the display position by an operation by the player.

  FIG. 202 (a) shows an effect situation in which a specific background image is displayed in the reach state. Now, in this production situation, the player carries out an operation to display the comparison reference image (reference image) with a suspicion that "the processing for displaying in a special mode may have been executed". If so, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at any of a plurality of display positions (see FIGS. 202B to 202D) that are predetermined according to the mode of the operation. The process of causing is performed.

  For example, when the operation button 410 is operated only once within a predetermined short time, the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is located at the left position (FIG. 202 (b)) in the display area. Is displayed. On the other hand, when the operation button 410 is operated twice within a predetermined short time, the character image as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the center position (FIG. 202 (c)) in the display area. When the process of displaying the PG is performed and the operation button 410 is operated three times within a predetermined short time, the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed at the right position (FIG. 202 (d)) in the display area. The process of displaying the character image PG as) is performed.

  As is clear from FIGS. 202 (b) to (d), the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) is assumed to have the same form itself regardless of the display position. , Because the positional relationship between the background image (or the decorative pattern) and the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) that can be the target of the “display in the special mode” is different, “display in the special mode” The easiness of determining whether or not the "processing" is being executed is naturally different.

  For example, when the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is displayed at the position (center position in the display area) shown in FIG. 202 (c), the character image PG (in particular, a ruler here) is the comparison target. When the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) is displayed at the position (right side position in the display area) shown in FIG. 202D, Since the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) overlaps with the background image to be compared, it is displayed so as to cover almost the entire background image (till), so that the “display in a special mode” is performed. It can be said that it is relatively difficult to determine whether or not the "processing" is being executed.

  According to such a configuration, the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is played at a "display position suitable for comparison" which differs depending on the type of the background image at each time. Since it can be displayed by an operation by a person, it is possible to preferably provide the material for determining whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed.

  It should be noted that in this effect example, the display position of the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is made variable according to the number of operations of the operation button 410 within a predetermined time. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the display position may be made variable according to the length of the long press time on the operation button 410, or a plurality of operation means different from the operation button 410 may be provided, and any of these operation means may be operated. The character image PG may be displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operating means. When the character image PG is displayed by an operation on an operation means different from the operation button 410, the character image PG is displayed even in the situation (operation period) when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410. Will be possible.

  Further, since the character image PG (particularly, a ruler here) as the comparison reference image (reference image) cannot function as an effect (expectation level) by itself, it is necessary for comparison and judgment with the background image. After a sufficient time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, the expected effect (background image) becomes a worthless image that makes it difficult to visually recognize it. Therefore, it is desirable that when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after being displayed by an operation by the player, it is automatically hidden without requiring any operation.

  However, depending on the relationship between the position where the character image PG (particularly here, a ruler) as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed and the type of the background image, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is executed. In some cases, it may not be enough for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) to perform the comparison / judgment as to whether or not it is in the state. Therefore, in the above-described effect example, while the character image PG as the comparison reference image (reference image) is displayed (within 3 seconds), the predetermined operation means operated to cause the character image PG to appear is re-operated. If so, the time during which the character image PG is continuously displayed is extended. For example, each time the predetermined operation means is re-operated, if it is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) with reference to the operation timing, it is intermittent until the player is satisfied. By performing various operations, the display state of the character image PG can be maintained, and it becomes possible to carefully compare and judge.

  However, if such an endless continuous display as the comparison reference image (character image PG) is simply allowed, it may be extremely easy to determine whether the special processing is being executed. .. That is, the player may always obtain a conclusive conclusion that "the special processing is being executed" or "the special processing is not being executed". It does not explicitly indicate whether or not the processing to be displayed in step 2 is being executed, but the above-mentioned purpose of "making it difficult to recognize" is discarded.

  Therefore, when the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is displayed (within 3 seconds), in exchange for extending the time during which the character image PG (ruler) is continuously displayed, The size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is reduced by shortening the length (longitudinal direction) of the ruler included in the character image PG by a predetermined unit (for example, 1 cm). Therefore, it is desirable to add difficulty to the comparison with the background image. That is, in this case, every time the predetermined operation means is operated again while the character image PG is being displayed, the time until the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden is extended in exchange for this. Since the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter), the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) It is possible to appropriately maintain the difficulty of recognizing whether or not the processing for displaying in the special mode is being executed, while making it possible to extend.

  However, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed too small (the length of the ruler is displayed too short), this cannot be used for comparison with the background image, which reduces the enjoyment of the game. It can be connected. Therefore, with respect to the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole, a minimum size (here, the length of the shortest ruler) is set in advance, and the minimum level is set. When the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not extended even when the predetermined operation means is operated again in the state. It is desirable not to further reduce the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole.

  Further, it is desirable that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole is carried over even after the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden. .. That is, in this case, each time the predetermined operation means is operated to cause the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear (or to extend the display time), the display area of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole. Is getting smaller (here, the ruler is getting shorter), and finally it doesn't even appear, so when you really want to know if "processing to display in a special mode" is being executed. It will be possible to encourage them to operate only, and other than that, they will be expected to concentrate on the original performance contents.

  It should be noted that the size (display area) of the comparison reference image (character image PG) as a whole may be carried over after the variation effect is finished and the next variation effect is started. With such a configuration, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be provided as an extremely valuable opportunity for presentation, and basically, the "special aspect" can be obtained only by looking at the background image and the decorative pattern SZ. It is possible to provide the drama (see FIG. 200) for predicting whether or not the “display process” is executed.

  Incidentally, the comparison reference image (character image PG) shown in FIGS. 201 and 202 is in a state when it is first displayed by an operation on a predetermined operation means after the power is turned on (or the RAM is cleared). After that, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the display area of the comparison reference image as a whole gradually becomes smaller (here, the ruler becomes shorter), and finally it does not even appear. .. However, when a specific detection is made or when a specific condition is satisfied, the comparison reference image (when appearing in a plurality of positions, only the comparison reference image corresponding to any one of those positions) It is also possible to prepare a process for displaying with a large display area as a whole (here, the ruler is long). With such a configuration, it is possible to recover the remaining number of times that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation on the predetermined operation means.

  Further, as described above, when preparing a plurality of operation means set such that the display positions of the comparison reference image (character image PG) are different from each other, the operation is performed depending on which of the operation means is operated. The character image PG is displayed at a predetermined display position corresponding to the operated operation means. In this case, the number of remaining times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) that allows the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear can be set separately for each operating means (display position), and the specific operating means can be set. When the operation is performed on, it is desirable that only the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the position corresponding to the specific operation means is displayed small (the ruler is displayed short).

  For example, in the case of the effect example described with reference to FIG. 202, when the first operation means is operated in the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (a), the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b) appears. Becomes In the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (b), if the first operation means is re-operated, the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended, but this is changed. As described above, the display is made smaller (the ruler is shorter). However, even after that, even when the second operation means is operated, the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (c) only appears, and the comparison reference accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as the image (character image PG) is not taken over by the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the central position by the operation on the second operation means. Similarly, when the third operation means is operated, the effect situation shown in FIG. 202 (d) only appears, and the comparison reference image (character image PG) accompanying the re-operation of the first operation means. The reduced display as is not carried over to the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed at the right side position by the operation on the third operation means.

  In this regard, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed at the specific position (for example, the central position shown in FIG. 202 (c)) (within 3 seconds), it corresponds to the specific position (central position). If another operation means (for example, the first operation means) is operated, the comparison reference image (character image PG) already displayed at the specific position (center position) is kept displayed. Then, it is desirable to newly display the comparison reference image (character image PG) at another position (left side position) corresponding to the other operation means (first operation means).

  That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears at a position that is difficult to compare with the background image due to the operation on the predetermined operation means, it is different from the predetermined operation means. By operating this operation means, the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be newly displayed at another display position. As a result, it is possible to add an interesting aspect of searching for which position the comparison reference image (character image PG) should be displayed in order to enhance the ease of comparison.

  Moreover, in the above configuration, even when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed at another display position, the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is already in the display state is not triggered by this. Instead of displaying it, the display state is maintained. With such a configuration, a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed at the same time, and the amount of comparison material with the background image is increased accordingly (two rulers are lined up here). This makes it possible to make the horizontal length substantially longer). Therefore, although a background image that is difficult to compare appears, it is in a state where the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed. It becomes possible to give an opportunity to greatly improve the ease of comparison at the timing when it is absolutely necessary to know whether there is any. However, this consumes two "remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) at which the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made" set for each of the plurality of operating means at the same time. Since it can be generated in exchange for this, it can be said that the cost of greatly improving the ease of comparison is great.

  In addition, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player. In order to increase the time for which (PG) is simultaneously displayed, it is required to operate the second operation means as soon as possible after operating the first operation means. That is, in this case, it is determined whether only the comparison reference image (character image PG) appearing by the operation on the first operation means is in the “state in which the special processing is executed”, or the price is increased. Even if the second operation means is further operated, it is necessary to make a quick judgment as to whether or not the ease of comparison should be significantly improved, and the delay of the judgment causes a disadvantage on the player side. Since it will be enlarged, it becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension.

  Further, according to such a configuration, even when a plurality of comparison reference images (character images PG) are simultaneously displayed, the timing at which the comparison reference images (character image PG) are hidden is different. However, the size (length of the ruler) as each comparison reference image (character image PG) also differs from each other depending on the operation situation. Furthermore, depending on the operation status (remaining number of times) of each operation means, "the comparison reference image (character image PG) is not displayed even if the specific operation means is operated, but the comparison reference image is operated when another operation means is operated. Since an effect situation such as "(character image PG) is displayed" can also appear, which operation means should be operated when the comparison reference image (character image PG) appears. Even in the judgment, it is possible to add a judgment element other than the type of the background image to be compared to provide even more fun.

  As described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the time when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by an operation by the player, but the predetermined time elapses. Prior to that, when the symbol variation (decorative symbol SZ) is lost and is in a stopped state, it is desirable that the symbol variation be hidden. That is, as shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, and by comparison with the background image or the like. It will be difficult to concentrate on the performance contents. As a result, if there is a case where the player is unaware that the player has stopped due to a loss, the purpose of the character image PG for the purpose of production is lost. In this case, it is desirable to hide the character image PG when this happens.

  However, the character image PG may not be hidden when the jackpot is stopped due to a big hit, and may be continued in the displayed state until a predetermined time elapses. That is, when the big hit is stopped, the big hit game will be started even if the player does not notice this. Therefore, when the predetermined time elapses and the character image PG is hidden, it is a surprise. It is expected to function as a production.

  Moreover, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed, it is desirable that a specific sound related to the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be output. It becomes possible to easily recognize that the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed even if the user is gazing, but in the case of outputting such a specific sound, It is more desirable to adopt such a method in order to maintain the enjoyment of the game.

  That is, although the remaining number of times (the number of operations until reaching the minimum unit) that allows the comparison reference image (character image PG) to appear can be set separately for each operating means (display position), the remaining If the comparison reference image (character image PG) is frequently displayed during the period until the number of times is consumed, it is difficult to visually recognize the effect contents in the display area, and the effect is concentrated on the original effect. Becomes difficult. Therefore, when the character image PG is displayed, a specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) can be output as a sound, while this specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) is “displayed in a special mode”. The sound output can be allowed only when is not executed. As described above, regarding the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode”, the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is not used as the confirmation suggestion on the affirmative side, but the specific sound (for example, the confirmation suggestion on the negative side is used). , The sound of a penguin) is used, so that a player who dislikes such a specific sound concentrates on the original effect and is likely to execute the “processing to display in a special mode”. It is expected that the comparison reference image (character image PG) will appear only at certain times.

  However, for the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin), the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed by the operation of the player when the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is not being executed. Even in the case of, it is desirable that the sound output is not always allowed. That is, in this case, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is newly displayed (or the size of the comparison reference image that is already in the display state is changed (the length of the ruler is short) is changed) by the operation of the player. At this time, when a specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) is output as a sound, it is definitely recognized that the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is not executed, but the specific sound ( For example, when the sound of a penguin) is not output, it may be in a state in which the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed or a state in which "processing for displaying in a special mode" is not being executed. As a result, it is possible to maintain the interest when a specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) is not output.

  It should be noted that the specific sound (for example, a bark of a penguin) may be output under the above-described predetermined condition even when any of the plurality of operation means having different display positions is operated. However, if a specific sound can be output under the above-mentioned predetermined conditions only when a specific operation means is operated among the plurality of operation means, among the possibility that the specific sound is output, In a case where the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether the “display in the special mode” is being executed or the specific sound is not output, the “special mode” is selected. It is possible for the player to select whether or not to display the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is useful for determining whether or not the “display process” is performed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is displayed in a special mode by displaying it in a small size (shorter ruler) in exchange for extending the display time. The difficulty in recognizing whether the processing is being executed is preferably maintained. In this regard, when the specific sound (for example, the sound of a penguin) is output when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively small, the specific sound (when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is relatively large ( For example, if the volume is set lower than that when the sound of a penguin is output, the difficulty of recognition when the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) in the display state is extended is increased to some extent. You will be expected to maintain.

  Further, the size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) and its display position are set so that the comparison reference images (character images PG) do not overlap each other when they are simultaneously displayed at a plurality of display positions (see FIG. 202). It is desirable to set and respectively. It is possible to increase the number of comparison materials with the background image as much as the comparison reference images (character images PG) are displayed without overlapping.

  Further, the comparison reference image (character image PG) may be displayed as an image having transparency. With such a configuration, even if most of the background image and the comparison reference image (character image PG) overlap, a comparison is made between the background image that is visible through the comparison reference image (character image PG). It becomes possible to perform it suitably.

  In addition, in the above-described example of performance, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed in a small size (shorter ruler) each time a predetermined operation means is operated, but the display is not necessarily limited to this. Any mode may be used as long as it is difficult to recognize whether or not the process for displaying the mode is being executed. For example, each time a predetermined operation means is operated, the shape and size of the comparison reference image (character image PG) itself remains the same, but the portion where the transparency is relatively increased is gradually enlarged. You can That is, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is “displayed with a specific transparency”, the portion of the comparison reference image (character image PG) displayed with a specific transparency is small (specified by the ruler). It is important to display the portion that is displayed with transparency with a shorter length. It is possible to hide the portion that is no longer displayed with specific transparency, or to display it with higher transparency than specific transparency. You may make it difficult to visually recognize by displaying.

  Further, as described above, the “processing for displaying in a special mode” means, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b) and then to FIG. 200 (c). It may be a dynamic drawing process for changing the display state. When the “display in the special mode” is realized as such a dynamic depiction process, when the “process in the special mode” is ended, for example, from the display state shown in FIG. After the display state shown in 200 (b), the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a) is restored.

  In this regard, as described above, the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the display, but as a dynamic drawing process. It is desirable to perform the "processing for displaying in a special mode" in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, if the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player while the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is being executed, While the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (within 3 seconds), “from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b), Since the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in 200 (a)" always appears, it is possible to facilitate the comparison / determination as to whether or not the processing for displaying in the special mode is being performed. become able to.

  However, the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process may be performed in a time longer than a predetermined time (3 seconds). That is, in this case, it is assumed that the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be made to appear by the operation of the player when the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic drawing process is being executed. Also, while the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (within 3 seconds), “from the display state shown in FIG. 200 (c) to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (b). After that, the movement such as "returning to the display state shown in FIG. 200 (a)" does not always appear, so it is difficult to compare / determine whether or not the processing for displaying in a special mode is being performed. It will be possible to make it. In addition, the strategic characteristic is added because the display time of the comparison reference image (character image PG) can be extended.

  Further, the “display in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction process is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) and in a predetermined time (3 seconds) depending on the result of the effect determination. May be performed in a long time. Further, "processing for displaying in a special mode" as dynamic depiction processing that is performed in a time shorter than a predetermined time (3 seconds) within a period from the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern SZ until the fluctuation thereof is stopped, The “processing for displaying in a special mode” as the dynamic depiction processing that is performed for a time longer than the predetermined time (3 seconds) may be performed at predetermined different timings.

  Further, although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is hidden after a predetermined time (3 seconds) from the display, when the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed. For a specific sound that can be output (for example, the sound of a penguin), the sound output should be interrupted in a time significantly shorter than the predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds, which is less than half the time). Is desirable. That is, in this case, even if the comparison reference image (character image PG) is displayed immediately before the “display in the special mode” is executed, the specific sound is displayed even after the “process in the special mode” is executed. Since, for example, the output of (for example, the sound of a penguin) is maintained, it is possible to suppress the output of a specific sound (for example, while the "processing for displaying in a special mode" is being executed). , The sound of a penguin) makes it difficult to generate a production situation as if it had been denied.

  In this case, the display state of the comparison reference image (character image PG) is maintained (3 seconds) in a state of extending from before the execution of the “processing for displaying in a special mode” to after the execution thereof. Become. Therefore, in the case where the "processing for displaying in a special mode" as the dynamic depiction processing is executed, while the comparison reference image (character image PG) is being displayed, for example, the display shown in FIG. The state changes from the state shown in FIG. 200 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 200 (c).

  Although the comparison reference image (character image PG) is composed of the character with the penguin and the ruler, only the character with the penguin or the ruler may be displayed. The point is that the comparison reference image (character image PG) that is not the target of the “display in the special mode” can be made visible by the operation of the player. However, by displaying a guide image (ruler) indicating a unit of length in the horizontal direction, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the “processing for displaying in a special mode” is being executed. It is possible.

  The guide image AG in the demo screen shown in FIG. 199 does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

[Prevention of mischief against multiple operating means]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute advance notice effect determination as to whether or not to selectively cause expected effect (s). Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the background effect (background notice) and the expected effect (announcement effect) related to the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement thereof are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, the state in which the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

  Further, as described with reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, many operation means (operation button 410, sword section 5010, effect selection left button 331) are operated by the player. , A production selection right button 332, a brightness adjustment button (not shown), and the like. Then, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, an operation opportunity is given to the player while the variable effect based on the decorative design is being performed. I try to maintain.

  However, if such a large number of operating means are provided, the presence of these operating means becomes more prominent, and thus the player is likely to be subject to mischief. As a result of rough handling, if any one of these operating means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and performance will be significantly deteriorated, and the enjoyment of the game will be unavoidable.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment is in a non-gaming state (a state in which the above-mentioned operation effect cannot occur) in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is not executed. Instead, when a situation in which it is highly likely that mischief has occurred due to operation detection by multiple operating means, a production restriction period (function restriction period) is generated, which prevents the operating means from being mishandled. I can do it.

More specifically, in a state in which the game is not started (non-gaming state), among the plurality of operation means provided in the pachinko machine 1, some predetermined operation means which should not need to be operated ( Here, when an operation on the operation button 410 or the sword part 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in the state where the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, changes in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp will not be accepted and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. The period is controlled to be generated for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden and operation acceptance regarding the volume is permitted. The adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance regarding the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the normal state as the non-gaming state is returned.

  In the production restriction period (function restriction period) according to the present embodiment, “a change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the production sound is not accepted even if the volume adjustment button is operated, and the current volume is changed. Setting value is not displayed ", and even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. However, only one of the volume adjustment process and the brightness adjustment process may be limited.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, a plurality of operation modes (operation patterns) that trigger the generation of such an effect restriction period (function restriction period) are prepared. As a result, it is expected that the generation condition of the production restriction period will be complicated and that a feeling of tension such as "Is the hall mischievous behavior actually monitored?"

  FIG. 203 is a time chart for explaining an example of the processing when the production restriction period is generated based on the satisfaction of a predetermined production restriction condition in the non-gaming state (such as in the demo screen). is there.

  Now, the game is controlled to a state where it is not started (non-game state), and the standby display is being performed on the effect display device 1600 (the situation where the decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state or a demo screen). Is displayed, etc.). As described above, in such a situation, when the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332) is operated, the volume setting value is changed, and some effect sound is output during the operation. If it is in the state, the process of adjusting the volume (the process of reflecting the volume setting value as the volume) is executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume. Similarly, when the brightness adjustment button is operated, the brightness setting value is changed, and if the predetermined effect lamp is in the light emitting state at the time of the operation, the process of adjusting the brightness (the brightness setting value is used as the light amount) The process of reflecting) will be executed. At this time, a brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output.

  As described above, in the non-gaming state, when the player starts the game, the operation for the volume adjusting button and the brightness adjusting button is performed so that the volume and the brightness can be set to suit his or her preference. Reception is allowed. Then, when the operation is accepted, it is expected that the player is prompted to start the game by changing the volume setting value and the brightness setting value according to the operation acceptance.

  However, as described above, in the non-gaming state, some mischievous operations may be performed on a plurality of operating means including such volume adjusting buttons and brightness adjusting buttons. As a result, if an abnormality or a failure occurs in any one of those operating means, the operability and the playability are significantly deteriorated, and the enjoyment of the game is inevitable.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, some operation patterns (detection patterns) that are recognized as mischief detection are prepared, and in any of these operation patterns in the non-gaming state. Based on the fact that an operation has been detected, it is possible to execute processing for causing a performance restriction period (function restriction period) in which a penalty is imposed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes).

In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to the present embodiment, when any of the following operation patterns (detection patterns) is detected in the non-gaming state, it is determined that the condition concerning the performance restriction is satisfied. I am trying.
a. The operation detection on the operation button 410 is newly generated until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts to be timed by the operation detection on the sword portion 5010 and the first timer time is completely measured, In addition, the detection of the operation on the sword portion 5010 is started before the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) starts to be timed when the operation of the newly generated operation button 410 is detected. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set
b. A third timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started to be triggered by the operation detection on the operation button 410, and an operation detection on the sword section 5010 is newly generated until the third timer time is counted. In addition, the detection of the operation of the operation button 410 is started until the fourth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is started by the detection of the operation of the newly generated sword part 5010 and the time of the fourth timer is finished. Operation pattern (detection pattern) for which detection conditions such as reoccurrence are set

  It should be noted that these operation patterns a and b are merely examples, and a performance restriction period (function restriction period) may be generated when a detection condition relating to another operation pattern is satisfied, or detection is performed. It is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of target operation patterns, and only one of them may be used. The first to fourth timer times may be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or a different timer may be used to measure the time.

  Here, the "long press of the operation button 410" and the "continuous hitting operation of the operation button 410 (many times of operation)" are not required in the state where the game is not started (non-gaming state). Can be said. However, since these modes are modes in which operation instructions can be given in the operation effect in the game execution state, even in the non-gaming state, the player has some purpose in starting the game (for example, wishing and dry practice). It is assumed that these operations can be performed in, and it is relatively well confirmed that such a situation actually occurs. Therefore, regarding the "operation combination for a plurality of operation means (for example, operation in the order of" sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010 ")" to be detected for mischief purposes, the game execution state is set. It can be said that it is important for avoiding erroneous detection that the operation effect is set as something that is not instructed to be operated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and the operating rate of the pachinko machine 1 from significantly decreasing.

  Particularly, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, before and after the operation on the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410), the operation on another operation means (for example, the sword portion 5010) different from the operation is performed. As a condition, the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is satisfied and the performance restriction period (function restriction period) is generated only when the operations on the plurality of operation means are disturbed within a relatively short time. I have to. Therefore, it is possible for the player, etc., who has only touched the game once because of its uncommonness, not the intention of the prank, to be excluded from the penalty, and the production restriction period occurs relatively frequently and the pachinko machine 1 It is possible to more appropriately avoid that the operating rate is significantly reduced.

  In this way, the stricter detection conditions are to prevent the production restriction period from occurring relatively frequently and to greatly reduce the operation rate of the pachinko machine 1, and to prevent the pachinko machine from cluttering due to mischief. This is because it is expected that various combinations will be operated when the operation is performed, and therefore even if the detection conditions are made strict, there is a high possibility that the detection conditions will eventually be satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 203, first, at the timing tq1 in the non-gaming state, the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and determines whether or not the second-stage detection condition is satisfied before the first timer time is completely consumed. The state (first stage state) is determined.

  That is, as described above, the "operation pattern (detection pattern) a" imposes three conditions (sword part 5010 → operation button 410 → sword part 5010) as conditions for generating the effect restriction period. Each time one is satisfied, the stairs for generating the production restriction period are raised one step at a time.

  At timing tq1, the first staircase out of the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated is raised. The state of the first stage can be continued until the first timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the second stage (here, the operation on the operation button 410) is not satisfied. When the first timer time has been exhausted, the state is returned to the original state (one step down the stairs and the 0th stage) in which none of the above three conditions is satisfied.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected at the timing tq2 when the first timer time is not exhausted (the state of the first stage), and the operation pattern Among the three conditions (detection pattern) a, the “second stage detection condition” is satisfied. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) based on the detection, and detects the third stage detection condition (here The condition (second stage state) for determining whether or not the detection condition (1) is satisfied is established.

  That is, at the timing tq2, the second staircase among the three staircases until the production restriction period is generated goes up. The state of the second stage can be continued until the second timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is exhausted, and the detection condition of the third stage (here, the operation on the sword portion 5010) is not satisfied. When the second timer time is completely exhausted, the state is returned to the original state (state of 0th stage after descending two stairs) where none of the above three conditions is satisfied.

  In the example shown in FIG. 203, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again at the timing tq3 when the second timer time is not exhausted (second stage state), and the operation pattern (detection) is detected. The “third stage detection condition (final detection condition)” of the three conditions of the pattern a is satisfied. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the detection, the effect display device 1600 displays (reproduces) a specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state in which the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed. Let it start. At the same time, even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed, and the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output. Moreover, even if the brightness adjustment button is operated, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness in the effect lamp is not accepted, the current brightness setting value is not displayed, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. , Generate performance restrictions. Then, the performance restriction period (function restriction period) in which such a penalty is imposed is continued for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) from the timing tq3.

  According to such a configuration, when a plurality of operations are operated in a disordered manner, the production restriction period is generated, so that the operation due to mischief can be suppressed.

  In addition, in order to generate the production restriction period, it is necessary to clear the conditions one by one and raise the state level (up the stairs), but if a time-out occurs in the middle of the road, I am trying to eliminate all state levels and return to the original state. As a result, it is also preferable that the performance limit period is unintentionally generated when a new player tries to start the game even when the game is ended with the state level raised. Can be avoided.

  In the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs) in this way, "volume adjustment button" and "luminance" which are the operation means to be restricted when the production restriction period occurs. A case in which the “adjustment button” is operated can also be assumed. However, these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated so that the player can set the volume and brightness to his or her preference when starting the game. It is acceptable. Therefore, no matter how much these operation means (volume adjustment button, brightness adjustment button) are operated in the process of increasing the state level (up the stairs), this state is used as a trigger. It is desirable not to cause a change in the level or affect the first timer time or the second timer time.

  That is, in this case, no matter how much the volume adjustment button and the brightness adjustment button are operated by mischief, it is not possible to generate the production restriction period triggered by this. However, at least the already raised state level does not drop due to these operations, and once the performance restriction period occurs, the target of performance restriction is "volume adjustment button" or "brightness adjustment button". Therefore, the operations for these are all invalidated, so it is also possible to suppress the mischief for the “volume adjustment button” and the “brightness adjustment button” that are not detected as the operations by the mischief. You will be expected to do it.

  In addition, as an operation pattern (detection pattern) used when detecting mischief, it is sandwiched between “twice operations (timing tq1, tq3 in FIG. 203) for another operation means (for example, sword part 5010)”. Regarding the "operation for the specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410) (timing tq2 in FIG. 203)" in the form, the condition is that the operation is not performed once but for a plurality of predetermined times. Is more desirable.

  That is, in this case, for example, in the case of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a”, an operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected, and the operation is performed within the fifth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the button 410 is detected, the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection, and the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) corresponding to the detection. When the operation on the sword portion 5010 is detected again, the detection condition related to the “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” is satisfied, and the performance restriction period is generated. The fifth to seventh timer times may be the same time or may be different times. Further, the same timer may be used to measure the time, or a different timer may be used to measure the time.

  When the operation on the operation button 410 is not detected again within the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) and the operation on the sword section 5010 is detected again, the sixth timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset. It is more desirable that the detection condition related to the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied and the production restriction period is not generated. Further, within the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds), not the operation on the sword portion 5010 but the operation on the operation button 410 is detected again (a specific number of times (here, twice) that is more than the number of detection times (here, two times)). Then, the seventh timer time (for example, 3 seconds) is reset even after the third detection), and the production restriction period is not generated because the detection condition for the operation pattern (detection pattern) is not satisfied. Is more desirable.

  With such a configuration, when the sword portion 5010 is operated twice, the operation pattern (detection pattern) is obtained when the operation button 410 is operated n times (here, twice) in succession. The detection condition is satisfied, and the production restriction period comes to occur. That is, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) or the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword part 5010, the effect limitation period is reached. Since it will not occur, it is expected that the generation condition of the production restriction period will be complicated and a tension such as "Is the prank action actually being monitored by the hall side"? Become.

  In addition, in order to make such complication, when the operation button 410 is operated only m times (<n times) and the operation on the sword portion 5010 is performed again within the timer time, the operation button 410 is pressed. When operated within each timer time for a number of times (> n times), it is desirable to be controlled to a state different from the original state (may be different between m times and 1 times). .. Therefore, even if the operation is performed according to the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern) a” in the state where these different states are controlled, the effect restriction period does not occur.

  Furthermore, when the operation button 410 is operated l times (> n times) between the two operations on the sword part 5010, the production restriction period is not generated, but when the operation button 410 is operated k times (> l times). If the production restriction period can be generated (similarly to the case of being operated n times), the condition for generating the production restriction period is made more complicated, and “the mischievous action is not actually monitored by the hall side. It is expected that the tension such as “ka” will be given more appropriately. In this case as well, it is needless to say that each time the operation button 410 is operated, a timer time is generated and the next operation detection is required within the timer time. Even with such a configuration, a plurality of "predetermined operation modes (operation patterns (detection patterns))" that trigger the generation of the production restriction period are prepared.

  However, such a mischievous act is very different from a fraudulent act such as a magnet goto, and taking too strict measures may lead to a disadvantage on the hall side. Therefore, with regard to the specific moving image that appears during the production restriction period, rather than displaying a strong warning content, the content is explained to the extent that a proper handling method related to the game and the production is explained, so as to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level. Is desirable.

  As described above, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden, and "operation acceptance regarding volume is allowed. Then, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is also output, and the operation acceptance relating to the brightness is permitted, and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output. ”The non-gaming state is returned to the normal state.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 204, the player starts the game at a timing tq4 before a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the effect restriction period (function restriction period) occurs. It is possible to assume a case where the game is shifted to the game execution state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed by generating the start winning. In such a case, since the above-described intended purpose of quitting the mischievous act and starting the game has been achieved, in a state where the predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) has not yet passed. The production restriction period (function restriction period) of something is ended.

  However, if the game is started without waiting for the lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes), there is a possibility of insufficient reflection, so at least the fluctuation of the decorative pattern that triggered the end of the production restriction period. Until the display is finished, each volume adjustment and brightness adjustment is accepted, but "Even if the volume is adjusted, the current volume setting value is displayed but the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output and Even if the brightness is adjusted, the current brightness setting value is displayed, but the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output. "

  As shown in FIG. 204, when the game execution state is entered in this way, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is invalidated regardless of whether or not it is controlled during the partial restriction period. Become so. Therefore, even if the sword portion 5010 or the operation button 410 is operated, the first timer time and the second timer time are not timed with these operations as a trigger, and a performance restriction period is not generated. Absent.

  According to such a configuration, when the game execution state is entered without waiting for the original duration as the production restriction period, a part of the content of the restriction during the production restriction period is left and the game is played. Since the state is changed to the execution state, it becomes possible to encourage reflection on the mischievous behavior without hindering the progress of the game production.

  In addition, regarding the partial restriction period, not only until the variable display of the decorative pattern that has triggered the production restriction period is ended, the decorative symbol is stopped in the state where the number of holdings is 0. Until at least (until the non-gaming state), it may be continued at least.

  Further, at a timing when the game execution state ends and shifts to the non-gaming state (for example, timing tq5 shown in FIG. 204), a predetermined safe time is set and until the predetermined safe time elapses. It is desirable that the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is made invalid even in the non-gaming state. In other words, in a situation where the game execution state has just ended, the player's excitement is not cooled down, and it is assumed that operations on a plurality of operating means will be overpowered. This is because if a penalty is imposed, the game may be immediately stopped. Therefore, it is desirable that the safe time is always set when the game execution state ends and the game state shifts to the non-game state.

  Also, when the game is transitioned to the non-gaming state while being controlled as the partial restriction period described above, there is a possibility that reflection on the mischievous behavior may still be insufficient, so the partial restriction until the safe time elapses. The period may be continued. At this time, the detection of the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” is permitted again after the safe time has elapsed.

  Further, the safe time is set as a time value longer than the shortest time value among a plurality of time values that can be selected as the symbol change time from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the stop thereof. It is desirable to do. According to such a configuration, even when the variable display of the decorative pattern is immediately ended, at least until the safe time is ended, the detection for the above-mentioned “operation pattern (detection pattern)” can be performed. It will be possible to continue the invalidation state and the partial restriction period.

  Further, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the form of ending the production restriction period (function restriction period), the symbol variable time longer than the safe time is always selected, and only the selected symbol variable time It is desirable that variable display of the decorative pattern is performed. With such a configuration, the above-described partial restriction period can be continued for a relatively long time.

  Further, in the above-described example, even if the detection near the generation of the effect restriction period is made within the detection period (the portion in FIG. 203 where fine dots are applied) for the operation pattern (detection pattern). The behavior of does not appear. However, instead of this, a specific sound is output every time the timer time is set in the above-described operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs in which the penalty is generated is climbed), thereby urging the operation to be stopped due to mischief. You may do it. The specific sound may be output as a different sound depending on the type of the operation means that is the detection target. Similarly to this, each time the timer time is set in the above-mentioned operation pattern (detection pattern) (every time the stairs of the penalty occurrence is climbed), the display content on the effect display device 1600 is changed. Good.

  Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

[Prevention of noise due to adjustment confirmation sound when opening a store]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute advance notice effect determination as to whether or not to selectively cause expected effect (s). Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the background effect (background notice) and the expected effect (announcement effect) related to the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement thereof are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, the state in which the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

  By the way, since only new customers try to start a game for a while after the opening of the hall, volume adjustment and brightness adjustment can be frequently performed in order to start a game with a set value that suits their taste. However, in this case, if the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is output every time the volume adjustment or the brightness adjustment is performed, the adjustment confirmation sound will be heard in the hall, and the atmosphere will be ruined. It's a thrill.

  Therefore, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment does not allow the player to perform an operation for volume adjustment or an operation acceptance for brightness adjustment until a predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on. However, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, it is acceptable to accept the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value while the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is set to each “predetermined specific value”. I am going to

  According to such a configuration, when the predetermined condition is satisfied after the power is turned on, the set value (volume set value) and the brightness set value for the output volume of the effect sound are changed to the respective “predetermined specific values”. It will be set automatically. That is, in this case, by automatically adopting the “specific value” as the set value of the volume that many players tend to prefer, a lot of games can be played in a time period just after the opening of the hall. It becomes possible to expect that it will be difficult for a person to adjust the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to his or her preference. The establishment of the predetermined condition may be that a certain period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that a predetermined command is received from the main control MPU 1310a, or that the peripheral control MPU 1511a has It may be that the specific process ends.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the volume setting value and the volume setting value are determined based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition or the arrival of a predetermined timing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Accepts changes in brightness setting values, but does not output volume adjustment confirmation sound or brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if changes in these setting values are accepted. First, generate it. After such a special period (opening period), when a change in those set values is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which a volume adjustment confirmation sound and a brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. There is. As a result, for a while after the opening of the hall (until the time required to complete various adjustments by new customers elapses), the state in which various adjustment confirmation completion sounds are not output is maintained. Then, it becomes possible to give an opportunity to perform the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment for starting the game with the set value which suits one's taste.

  FIG. 205 is a time chart showing an example of the processing during the special period (opening-only period).

  Now, as shown in FIG. 205, assuming that the power is turned on at timing tr0, the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment plays the volume by the player until a predetermined condition is satisfied. Control is performed in a state in which the operation related to the adjustment and the operation related to the brightness adjustment are not permitted. In such a situation, detection (main control side) related to a game such as a start winning is not permitted, and the game cannot be started. In the effect display device 1600, a dedicated display (preparation screen) during power recovery appears or no display output is performed, and standby screens (stop display of symbols, demo screens, etc.) have not yet been displayed. Do not show.

  After that, when a timing tr1 when a predetermined condition (for example, a predetermined command is transmitted from the main control MPU 1310a) is satisfied, detection related to a game such as a start winning is allowed, and a game start waiting state ( It will be controlled as a state waiting for the start winning). Even in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it is possible to recognize that the symbol variation waiting state is in effect.

  Also, at this time, if the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are set to the respective “predetermined specific values”, “accepting the change of the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is permitted. Even if the change of the set value is accepted, a special period (opening period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output is generated. Such an opening-only period can be continued until a timing tr2 when a predetermined time (for example, one hour) has passed from the occurrence of the period, and when the period ends at the timing tr2, the volume is increased. When a change in the set value or the brightness set value is accepted, a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output is generated. In the production display device 1600, even after the timing tr2 arrives, the state in which the stopped symbol is displayed (the state of waiting for the change of the symbol) is maintained, and the decorative symbol in the stopped state and the back thereof. Various background images displayed on the side (static display or dynamic display) (images whose priority in the layer is lower than the decorative pattern) are displayed when the opening-only period shifts to the normal business period There is no change.

  According to such a configuration, even after the state (standby screen) in which the stop symbol is displayed and the game start waiting state is reached, until the timing tr2 arrives (until the opening-only period ends). Since the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period (between), it is possible to preferably prevent the adjustment sound from reverberating immediately after opening the store. On the other hand, when the timing tr2 arrives (when the time required for various adjustments by a new customer has elapsed), the adjustment confirmation sound can be automatically output so that the adjustment confirmation sound can be output. When various adjustments by new customers have settled down, finer adjustments can be allowed while checking the adjustment sound according to the volume setting value. Moreover, while maintaining the state that the stop symbol is displayed (standby screen), the system automatically shifts to the normal business period when the adjustment confirmation sound can be output, so the predetermined time has elapsed from the time of opening the store. Until then, it becomes possible for the player side to be less likely to notice that the control sound is controlled during the opening-only period during which the adjustment sound is not output.

  After the predetermined condition is satisfied and the game start waiting state is reached (after timing tr1), when a change in the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is accepted, the effect display device 1600 responds to the changed setting value. Parameter display (volume side parameter display, brightness side parameter display) is performed. Therefore, by confirming such parameter display, it is possible to adjust the set value according to one's preference.

  However, even if the adjustment confirmation sound is not output during the period immediately after the opening of the store (the opening-only period), the changes in the volume setting value and the brightness setting value are reflected as the volume and the light amount. As a result, the atmosphere in the hall may end up being dyed in a single color, and there is a concern that the atmosphere will be spoiled and spoiled. Therefore, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the volume setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed volume setting value is reflected as the effect sound. It is desirable not to. In addition, regarding the brightness as well, as long as the game start waiting state is maintained, even if a change in the brightness setting value is accepted before the timing tr2 arrives, the changed brightness setting value is the light amount. It is desirable not to be reflected. In such a configuration, during the period immediately after opening the store (the period for opening the store), each player adjusts the set value according to his / her preference while checking the parameter display on the effect display device 1600. That is, in this case, while giving an opportunity to adjust to the set value according to one's preference, the surroundings of the pachinko machine 1 are not affected by sound or light, so that the atmosphere in the hall is improved. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Note that only the luminance of the volume and the luminance may be maintained in a state where the changed luminance setting value is not reflected as the light amount even after the timing tr2 arrives. That is, it is necessary to avoid reflecting the adjustment to the side where the power consumption becomes large by the operation by mischief before the game is started, and for the brightness where the power consumption is large compared to the volume while the game is not started. It is desirable that the adjustment is not reflected. Further, unlike the volume adjusting sound, it is not possible to confirm the degree of adjustment of the brightness adjusting sound, so that it may not be necessarily output.

  However, even when the timing tr2 has not arrived yet (the time as the store opening period has not been exhausted), the symbol variation (variation display by the decorative symbol) starts based on the start winning. After that, the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment by the player have been completed, and it is assumed that the adjustment frequency will be greatly reduced. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, when the start winning is detected after the timing tr1 and before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is early ended based on the detection. Then, it is possible to execute the process of shifting to the normal business period.

  However, during the variable display period of the decorative design caused by the start winning that ended the opening-only period early, the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted, and the adjustment confirmation sound accompanying the change is output. In such a case, it is assumed that most of the players will end the opening-only period early and then perform the volume adjustment and the brightness adjustment, which may end up falling.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, after the timing tr1, when the start winning is detected before the timing tr2 arrives, the opening-only period is ended early to complete the normal business period. Although it is shifted to, the output of various adjustment confirmation sounds is not allowed until at least the variation state of the decorative pattern caused by this is terminated (variation suppression process).

  FIG. 206 is a time chart showing an example of the processing when the game is started during the opening-only period (special period).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 206, it is assumed that the start winning is detected at the timing tr3 at which the time as the special period has not yet been exhausted. Then, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the processing for the opening-only period is ended, the process is shifted to the normal business period, and the fluctuation suppressing process is started in the normal business period. This variation suppression processing is such that, while the variation display related to the decorative pattern is being performed, "the change of the volume setting value and the brightness setting value is accepted, and the change of these setting values is performed in the output sound in the output state. It is possible to execute a process that reflects the volume of the sound and the light amount of the effect lamp in the light emitting state, but the process of not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value or the brightness setting value is changed. The difference with the "processing for the opening-only period" is whether or not there is a variable display related to the decorative design, and the change in the set value is reflected as the volume and light intensity. The content of suppression for various adjustment confirmation sounds remains the same.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU1511a) according to this embodiment, such a fluctuation suppressing process is changed to a non-gaming state (a state in which the number of holdings is 0 and a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed). And unless it is migrated, we will continue to run it.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 206, only the shortest time that can be selected as the symbol variation time is controlled to the game execution state (the symbol variation with a short variation time is executed only once), and the non-gaming state at the timing tr4. If it is immediately returned to (the state in which the number of holdings is 0 and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed) (for example, one hour has not elapsed since the early-opening exclusive period has occurred) Even in the state immediately after opening the store, the special period (period for opening the store) does not occur again.

  That is, in this case, in the non-gaming state after the timing tr4, as a period (normal business period) during which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the luminance adjustment confirmation sound can be output when the change of the volume setting value or the luminance setting value is accepted. Will be controlled. During the normal business period when the fluctuation suppression process is not executed, the changed volume setting value is reflected as at least the volume adjustment confirmation sound, and the changed brightness setting value is also the light intensity of the production lamp that is in the light emitting state. Is reflected as. Further, in the effect display device 1600, the stop symbol (standby screen) is displayed, and it becomes possible to recognize that the symbol variation waiting state is in effect.

  A player who creates a situation such as "the special opening period (special period) is ended early and then the game execution state is also immediately ended" is not convinced by the adjustment contents made while the adjustment sound is not output, and once started Since it is assumed that the person has a desire to make finer adjustments even after interrupting the game, even if it is in the state immediately after the store has opened for less than one hour after power-on It is desirable to allow the output of the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound without generating () again.

  In the above-described example, the time (timing tr1 to tr2) during which the opening-only period (special period) is continued may be a fixed time after the opening-only period (special period) occurs. It may be the time until the specific processing in the peripheral control MPU 1511a is completed.

  Further, the timing for setting the volume setting value and the brightness setting value to the respective “predetermined specific values” may be the timing tr1 or may be a predetermined timing prior to the timing tr1. ..

  Further, in the above-described example, the configuration relating to the opening-only period (special period) that occurs after the timing tr1 has a technical feature, and the processing in the period before the timing tr1 has the above-mentioned contents. You may make it implement | achieve as a different process.

  Further, in the above-described example, at the timing tr2, the decorative pattern and the background image in the effect display device 1600 are not changed, but the display change is such that an image different from the decorative pattern and the background image is additionally displayed. If so, it may be performed.

  Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

  Further, in the above-described example, only the set value of either the volume or the brightness may be changeable.

[Control for volume confirmation confirmation sound according to production importance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the effect pattern determination of which of the plurality of effect patterns is to be executed is executed based on the result of the big hit determination. It is possible. When one effect pattern is selected as a result of the effect pattern determination, any one of a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected effect pattern type is selected. It is possible to execute advance notice effect determination as to whether or not to selectively cause expected effect (s). Depending on the result of the notice effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected effect pattern may be sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice effect determination) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content according to the result of the effect determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the background effect (background notice) and the expected effect (announcement effect) related to the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that definitely shows whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and the background depiction and the movement thereof are movable. Expected performance related to body movements and the like will be provided as a performance with "a function that suggests the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit has been obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the setting value (volume setting value) by the player regarding the volume is set by operating the volume adjustment button (the effect selection left button 331 or the effect selection right button 332). The changing process is executable (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the volume setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a adjusts the volume applied to the effect sound based on the changed volume setting value (processing that reflects the volume setting value as the volume). Will be executed. Further, at this time, a volume adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the adjusted volume.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, although not shown, the pachinko machine 1 is separate from the volume adjustment buttons (production selection left button 331 and production selection right button 332). It is provided with a brightness adjustment button for various effect lamps (lamps controlled by the peripheral control MPU 1511a) provided, and regarding the brightness applied to each effect lamp when it is determined that the brightness adjustment button has been operated. A process for changing the set value (luminance set value) by the player can be executed (peripheral control MPU 1511a). Then, normally, when the brightness setting value is changed in this way, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes a process of adjusting the light emission brightness based on the changed brightness setting value (a process of reflecting the brightness setting value as a light amount). It will be. Further, at this time, the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output at the “volume according to the volume setting value” at the time when the player setting value (luminance setting value) regarding the brightness is lowered or increased.

  In addition, regarding the acceptance of changes related to such setting values (volume setting value, brightness setting value) and the adjustment processing according to the changed setting values, the state in which the symbol is not changed and the symbol is changed In any of the states in which the player is operating, the operations can be executed by the player.

  Although this is also described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first hit determination is performed according to the fact that the game ball is received in the first start opening 2002, and the second start opening 2004. In any case, if the second hit determination is made according to the acceptance of the game ball, the symbol variation (first symbol variation, second symbol variation) is performed according to the hit determination. After playing, advantageous benefits (big hit game) can be given to the player. However, the expected value for those benefits is set so that the second hit determination (second symbol change) is higher than the first hit determination (first symbol change).

  In the above example, the open / close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated eight times at the big hit associated with the first special symbol, and only about 1000 game balls are paid out. On the other hand, in the big hit related to the second special symbol, the open / close pattern of opening the special winning opening 2103 for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) is repeated 16 times at the maximum, and approximately 2000 game balls can be paid out. ing.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acceptance of the change of the volume setting value is "a game start waiting state in which neither the first symbol variation nor the second symbol variation is executed", " The first symbol variation is executed and the second symbol variation is not executed on the first side execution state ", and" the first symbol variation is not executed and the second symbol variation is executed. In the second side execution state ", and the numerical range in which the change of the volume setting value is permitted is the same in any of these states.

  According to such a configuration, no matter which state (game start waiting state, first side execution state, second side execution state) the sound can be adjusted without being restricted by the setting range or the like. As a result, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game through sound adjustment according to each state.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the set value (volume set value) concerning the output sound volume of the effect sound is changed when in the "game start waiting state" and the "first side execution state" described above. When this is done, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output, but in the above-mentioned "second side execution state", control is such that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even if the volume setting value is changed.

  That is, in the "game start waiting state", no effect sound is output because the game is not being executed, and if the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output when the volume setting value is changed, change It is not possible to confirm the loudness after that as an audible sound. Therefore, when in the "game start waiting state", it is desirable to output the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the setting value (volume setting value) of the output volume of the effect sound is changed.

  Further, in the "first side execution state", although the effect sound corresponding to the first hit determination is being output, the situation is that the probability of obtaining a big hit is relatively low. It is often controlled to a state (low-probability non-time saving game state), and there is not much expectation in production. In recent years, it has been confirmed that a player plays a game while gazing at a mobile device such as a smartphone when in a game state with such low expectations. Therefore, when the volume setting value is changed in the “first-side execution state”, the volume adjustment confirmation sound is sent to surely notify the player of the change and the volume of the changed volume. Is desirable to be output.

  On the other hand, in the "second side execution state", the effect sound corresponding to the second hit determination is being output, and the probability that a big hit is obtained is relatively high. ) Is often controlled by. In such a situation, the expectation for the performance is high, and the volume adjustment for enjoying the performance tends to be performed.Therefore, when the volume adjustment confirmation sound is output when the volume setting value is changed, 2 It may be difficult to hear the effect sound and BGM according to the hit determination, which may lower the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the “second side execution state”, control is performed so that the volume adjustment confirmation sound is not output even when the volume setting value is changed, and thereby the effect sound or BGM according to the second hit determination is cleared. It is desirable to maintain an amusement of entertainment by giving an opportunity to adjust the volume in a listening environment.

  However, in the "second side execution state", the degree of expectation for the performance is increasing, and even after the second symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, this may change again and the possibility of being changed to the big hit manner is a player. It can be said that securing a time (reverberation) for making the player aware of is important for maintaining the interest of the game. In this regard, if the normal processing in the "game start waiting state" is performed immediately after the transition to the "game start waiting state", the processing related to the "second side execution state" is performed. The player side can easily detect that the game has been completed in the lost mode and is in the "waiting for game start" state, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate.

  Therefore, when the process related to the "second side execution state" is completed and the process is shifted to the "game start waiting state", a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the transition to the "game start waiting state" Control so as not to perform the normal process (the process of allowing the change of the volume setting value and outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) when in the "game start waiting state" It is desirable to do. For example, for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after shifting from the "second side execution state" to the "game start waiting state", "the volume setting value is allowed to be changed, but the volume setting value is changed. Also, it is desirable to perform "processing for not outputting the volume adjustment confirmation sound" and "processing for not allowing change of the volume setting value itself". However, the possibility that the "second side execution state" is still continued for a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) after the "second side execution state" is transitioned to the "game start waiting state" is more positive. To make the user aware of it, as in the case of the "second side execution state", "permit the change of the volume setting value, but do not output the volume adjustment confirmation sound even if the volume setting value is changed" It is more desirable to do so.

  On the other hand, in the "first side execution state", the degree of expectation for the effect is not increased, and basically, the first symbol variation is stopped and displayed in a lost manner. Therefore, when the process related to the "first side execution state" is completed and the process is shifted to the "game start waiting state", the "first side execution state" is different from the above "second side execution state". Continue to perform the above-mentioned normal processing (processing that allows the volume setting value to be changed and outputs a volume adjustment confirmation sound when the volume setting value is changed) that is also performed when the "state" Is desirable.

  By the way, in a situation where the "first-side execution state" is controlled, a mischievous operation is performed in which operations for a plurality of operating means are disturbed within a relatively short time due to a stress that is difficult to win a jackpot. Is concerned. In other words, as a result of rough handling, if any one of these operating means becomes abnormal or malfunctions, the operability and the playability will be significantly deteriorated, and a further decline in the amusement of the game cannot be avoided.

  Therefore, there is a possibility that operation detection occurs with multiple operating means and mischief occurs not only when it is controlled to the "game start waiting state" but also when it is controlled to the "first side execution state". When the situation becomes high, the production restriction period (function restriction period) in the above-described example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means (see FIGS. 203 and 204)” may be generated.

That is, in this case, some predetermined operations among the plurality of operation means included in the pachinko machine 1 in either of the "game start waiting state (non-gaming state)" and the "first side execution state" When the operation on the means (here, the operation button 410, the sword part 5010) is detected within a predetermined continuous operation detection time, the detection is used as a trigger.
In the effect display device 1600, in the state where the specific moving image (warning moving image) that cannot appear in the state where the game effect corresponding to the big hit determination is being executed (reproduced),
-Even if there is an operation on the volume adjustment button, the change of the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted, the current volume setting value is not displayed,
-Even if there is an operation on the brightness adjustment button, changes in the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp will not be accepted and the current brightness setting value will not be displayed. The control is performed to generate the period for a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes). The specific moving image on the effect display device 1600 is displayed even if the image related to the “first side execution state” has appeared before that. It should be noted that when a predetermined time (for example, 5 minutes) elapses from the time when the performance restriction period (function restriction period) occurs, the specific moving image is hidden and operation acceptance regarding the volume is permitted. A normal state as a "game start waiting state" or a "first side execution state" in which adjustment confirmation sound is also output, operation acceptance related to brightness is permitted and brightness adjustment confirmation sound is also output Will be returned to.

  It should be noted that as for the detailed contents and other examples regarding such an effect restriction period (function restriction period), it is possible to appropriately adopt each content in the explanation example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means”. However, in this case, even if the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "first side execution state" during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the effect restriction period (function restriction period) is not ended early, Under the same conditions as when in the "game start waiting state", various processing relating to the production restriction period is continued as it is. As a result, it is expected that the mischievous operation is controlled when the anticipation degree is controlled to the “first side execution state”.

  On the other hand, when the "game start waiting state" is shifted to the "second side execution state" during the production restriction period (function restriction period), the "production restriction period ( Processing related to early termination of (function restriction period) "and its modifications are appropriately adopted and executed. As a result, the atmosphere when the “second side execution state” with high expectation finally comes to be executed is maintained, and it is expected that amusement of the game is maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the above-described example, regarding the method when the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound is not output, in addition to not assigning the volume adjustment confirmation sound or the brightness adjustment confirmation sound to the channel, A confirmation sound or a brightness adjustment confirmation sound is assigned to a channel, but it can be realized by setting the volume value to “0”.

  Note that the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output as the same sound, and it cannot be confirmed which "confirmation sound" was output, but some "confirmation sound" is output. Should be recognizable. That is, if various sounds are adopted as confirmation sounds, a situation may occur in which the possibility that the sound is an expected effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation may occur, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will decline. This is because

  Further, in the above-described example, only the set value of either the volume or the brightness may be changeable.

[Period that operation acceptance is allowed (effective period) itself performance]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effect) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern. Etc.), it is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which expected effect (a plurality of possible effects) should be selectively made to appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, it is possible that all of a plurality of expected effects (notice effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the type of the selected variation pattern are sequentially executed, In some cases, none of the plurality of expected effects (notice effect, etc.) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display the effect content according to the effect determination result, resulting in a big hit determination result. The variation effect based on the corresponding decorative design is executed together with the expected effect (preliminary effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect related to (1) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the first variation pattern is selected regardless of the result of the notice effect determination. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance effect (“inherent acceptance effect” described later) in which effect acceptance is allowed when the based symbol effect progresses to a specific timing. Even when the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, when the special result is obtained by the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern, the second variation pattern is selected. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance effect (“additional acceptance effect” described later) in which effect acceptance is permitted when the symbol effect based on the variation pattern of 2 has progressed to a predetermined timing. However, in the second variation pattern, if a special result is not obtained in the notice effect determination, the operation acceptance effect (effective if the effect acceptance is allowed even if the symbol effect based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing) Period) does not occur. It is possible to prepare a plurality of first variation patterns for generating the “internal reception effect” and a plurality of second variation patterns for generating the “additional reception effect”. Alternatively, the first variation pattern may be prepared such that the “internal reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” can be sequentially generated.

  However, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is a predetermined change (effect) for the effect member as an effect target, as long as an operation is detected within the effective period. At least one of the display change on the display device 1600, the effect sound change on the speaker, the light emission change on the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is only executed, so that the operation acceptance effect (effective) is executed. (Period) This is poor in performance itself, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the performance after operation is executed may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
When an operation by a player is detected, a first operation effecting means capable of executing an after-operation effect in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern comes,
When a player's operation is detected, a second operation effecting means capable of executing post-operation effection in such a manner that the elapsed time from the detection timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. I will prepare for it.

  According to such a configuration, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) itself depending on whether the operation acceptance effect is performed by the first operation effector and the operation acceptance effect is performed by the second operation effector. Since different performances will be provided, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game until the post-operation performance is executed.

  That is, as the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the post-operation effect is executed until a predetermined timing regardless of whether the operation is performed earlier or later in the effective period. Therefore, it can be said that it is advantageous to perform the operation immediately after the effective period occurs, in order to maintain the execution state as the post-operation effect for a long time and enjoy the effect.

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect by the second operation effect means, even if the operation is performed at any timing within the effective period, the time elapsed from the operation timing is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value. Post-operation performance is executed. Therefore, it is recommended that the operation is not performed for a while after the effective period occurs and is operated later, so that the overall effect time from the start of the effective period to the end of the post-operation effect is maintained long. It can be said that it is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

  In this case, the effect generation conditions for the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means and the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means are different. For example, in the operation reception effect by the first operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the second variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the notice effect determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. It is possible to realize as a special result, which occurs when the design effect (effect pattern) based on the second variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing. Alternatively, the operation acceptance effect by the first operation effect means occurs when the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern progresses to a specific timing. In the operation acceptance effect by the second operation effect means, the first variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, and the symbol effect based on the first variation pattern is different from the specific timing. You may make it implement | achieve as what occurs when it progresses to timing.

  FIG. 207 is a first example of executing post-operation performance in such a manner that it is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives, regardless of the length of time required from the occurrence of the effective period to its detection. It is a time chart which shows an example about operation reception production.

  Now, assuming that the first effect condition required for the occurrence of the “first operation acceptance effect in which effect acceptance is allowed” is satisfied, the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to the timing tr1. The first operation acceptance effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr1. The first operation reception effect (effective period) is terminated without executing the post-operation effect when the timing tr3 when a predetermined set time has passed without effect reception. During the execution period of the first operation reception production in which the production reception is allowed, an image showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display showing how much effective time is left are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion production is performed.

  When the first operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception acceptable sound indicating that the effect acceptance is permitted (or the effect acceptance is permitted) is output. . However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not keep the output state of the acceptance permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and in the middle stage where the predetermined set time has not yet passed. At a certain timing tr2, it is set in a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

  It should be noted that the phrase “acceptable sound is output” here means that the “sound data including the acceptable sound” is newly assigned to the channel at the timing tr1 and is already assigned to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data that has become the same as the timing tr1. Alternatively, the “acceptance acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr1 to after that so as to extend over the timing tr1. In addition, here, “to put the sound data into the non-output state” means not only canceling the assignment state of the “sound data including acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel but also keeping the assignment state of the sound data to the channel. However, the concept includes that the "reception allowable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and the subsequent sound (including silent data) is reproduced.

  Then, as described above, in such a first operation reception effect, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is made. However, the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the first effect member) started in this way is based on the variation pattern even when the effect is received at any timing within the effective period. It is configured to end when a predetermined timing tr4 in the symbol effect (effect pattern) arrives. The "operation-induced process using the first effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process of causing the first decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the reception of the effect reception.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 207, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr1a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member) is: It is executed for a relatively long time from the timing tr1a to the timing tr4. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 207, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr2a within the effective period (timings tr1 to tr3), post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the first effect member). Is executed only for a relatively short time from the timing tr2a to the timing tr4.

  According to such a first operation reception effect, it is necessary to perform the operation immediately after the effective period occurs, that is, the execution state as the post-operation effect (the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first effect member). It is possible to provide the performance that is maintained for a long time, which is advantageous for enjoying the performance.

  As will be described later, in the first operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (the operation-induced process using the first effect member) is executed based on the effect reception. Even in the case of being performed, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr2.

  FIG. 208 is a time chart showing an example of the second operation reception effect for executing the after-operation effect in such a manner that the elapsed time from the timing of detection reaches a predetermined time value.

  Now, assuming that the second effect condition required for the generation of the "second operation acceptance effect in which effect acceptance is permitted" is satisfied, the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to the timing tr11. The second operation reception effect (effective period) is generated based on the progress to the timing tr11. Similarly to the case of the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect (effective period) does not execute the post-operation effect when the timing tr13 when a predetermined set time elapses without effect reception. It is supposed to end. A time value different from the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect may be set. Even during the execution period of the second operation reception production where the production reception is allowed, an image showing the operation means to be operated and a gauge display showing how much effective time is left are displayed to prompt the player to perform the operation. Operation promotion production is performed.

  Even when the second operation reception production (effective period) is started, a reception acceptance sound indicating that the production reception is allowed (or the production reception is allowed) is output. It However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment does not continue the output state for the acceptance permissible sound for the predetermined set time, and the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. At a timing tr12, the output is in a non-output state so that it cannot be heard.

  Note that the "acceptable sound is output" here is that the "sound data including the acceptable sound" is newly allocated to the channel at the timing tr11, and is already allocated to the channel. This is a concept including that the “reproduction period of the acceptance-permitted sound” in the sound data that arrives arrives at the timing tr11. Alternatively, the "acceptance acceptable sound" may be output from before the timing tr11 to after that so as to extend over the timing tr11. In addition, in "set to the non-output state" here, in addition to canceling the assignment state of the "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and a transition is made to a period in which sounds after that (including silent data) are reproduced.

  Then, as described above, in such a second operation reception effect, the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" as the post-operation effect is performed based on the fact that the operation by the player is detected and the effect reception is performed. For the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) started in this way, the effect reception is performed regardless of which timing within the effective period the effect reception is performed. The elapsed time from the time when it is performed is continued until it reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the predetermined set time as the valid period). The "operation-induced process using the second effect member" can be executed, for example, as a process for causing the second decorative movable body to perform an effect operation based on the fact that the effect reception is made.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 208, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr11a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), the post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member) is: It is executed from the timing tr11a to the timing tr14 when a predetermined time value has passed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 208, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr12a within the effective period (timings tr11 to tr13), post-operation effect (operation-induced processing using the second effect member). Is executed from the timing tr12a to a timing tr15 (a timing that comes after the timing tr14) when a predetermined time value has elapsed.

  According to such a second operation reception effect, it is possible to perform the operation at a later time without performing the operation for a while after the effective period occurs, from when the effective period is started until after the post-operation effect is ended. Therefore, it is possible to provide an effect that is advantageous in maintaining the effect time as a whole and enjoying the effect.

  As will be described later, also in the second operation reception effect, the effect reception is performed when the acceptable reception sound is in the output state, and the post-operation effect (operation-induced process using the second effect member) is performed based on the effect reception. Even when it is executed, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is not canceled, and the output state is maintained until a predetermined timing tr12.

  As described with reference to FIG. 207 and FIG. 208, the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) themselves are provided with different effects so that the operation reception effects (effective period) are different from each other. Since it is generated based on the establishment of the condition, it is expected that the amusement interest of the game from the occurrence of the operation reception effect (effective period) to the post-operation effect is appropriately maintained.

  However, the following problems remain if only the configuration related to the first and second operation reception effects (effective period) is adopted. In other words, in these operation reception effects (effective period), it is advantageous to operate at an early time within the effective period in order to enjoy the effect, or to operate at a late time in the effective period in order to enjoy the effect. Since the preferable operation timing for enjoying the performance is decided, such as when there is such a situation, there is still a lack of performance in the effective period, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will deteriorate. Therefore, it is more desirable to execute the operation acceptance effect as a special operation acceptance effect having the aspect described below.

FIG. 209 is a time chart showing an example of the special operation reception effect.
Now, assuming that the special effect condition required for the generation of the special operation reception effect is satisfied, and the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern progresses to the timing tr21, the special effect is generated based on the progress to the timing tr21. Generate an operation reception effect (effective period). As will be described later, this special operation reception effect (effective period) is different from the case of the first and second operation reception effects, and the timing tr23 arrives after a predetermined set time elapses without effect reception. There is no such thing, and even if there is no operation, the effect reception is always generated within the effective period, and the after-operation effect described below is executed. As will be described later, the predetermined set time in the special operation reception effect is set to be longer than the predetermined set time in the first operation reception effect and the predetermined set time in the second operation reception effect.

  Also, when the special operation reception effect (effective period) is started, a reception acceptance sound indicating that the effect acceptance is allowed (or the effect acceptance is allowed) is output. To be done. However, as will be described later, the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to this embodiment generates the acceptance permission sound (FIG. 209) corresponding to the acceptance permission sound (FIGS. 207, 208) corresponding to the first and second operation acceptance effects. The output state is continued for a longer time. It should be noted that, in this example of explanation, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 209 is also rendered inaudible by being put into a non-output state at a timing tr22 which is an intermediate stage in which the predetermined set time has not yet elapsed. However, the acceptance permission sound shown in FIG. 209 may be such that the output state can be continued until the timing tr23 arrives.

  Note that the "acceptable sound is output" here is not only newly allocated "sound data including the acceptable sound" at timing tr21 to the channel but also already allocated to the channel. This is a concept that includes the arrival of the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data that is being played, at the timing tr21. Alternatively, the “acceptance acceptable sound” may be output from before the timing tr21 to after that so as to extend over the timing tr21. In addition, in "set to the non-output state" here, in addition to canceling the assignment state of the "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound" to the channel, the assignment state of the sound data to the channel is maintained. The concept is that the "reception acceptable sound reproduction period" in the sound data is ended and a transition is made to a period in which sounds after that (including silent data) are reproduced.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect, when the operation by the player is detected within the effective period and the effect reception is performed, based on the fact that the effect reception is performed, the "first movable operation" shown in FIG. The operation-based process using the decorative body (first effect member) and the "operation-based process using the second movable decorative body (second effect member)" shown in FIG. 208 are started in parallel with each other. It is supposed to do. Therefore, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is started, but the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" started in this way is performed at any timing within its effective period. Even when the effect reception is made, the process is ended when a predetermined timing tr24 in the pattern effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern arrives, and “operation using the second effect member” is performed. The "caused process" is started, but the "operation-caused process using the second effect member" started in this way is accepted even if the effect is received at any timing within the effective period. The elapsed time from the time when is reached until it reaches a predetermined time value (for example, a set time longer than the above predetermined set time as an effective period) To become.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 209, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively early timing tr21a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" of the post-operation effects. Is executed over a relatively long period from the timing tr21a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effects has a predetermined time value from the timing tr21a. It ends at the timing tr25 when it has passed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 209, if the effect reception is performed at a relatively late timing tr22a within the effective period (timings tr21 to tr23), of the post-operation effects, “the operation result using the first effect member is caused. The "process" is executed for a relatively short time from the timing tr22a to the timing tr24, but the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect is predetermined from the timing tr22a. It is executed until the timing tr26 (the timing that comes after the timing tr25) when the predetermined time value has elapsed.

  As described above, the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment occurs when a specific effect pattern is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination and the effect content as the specific effect pattern progresses to a specific timing. When the effect reception is performed within the special operation reception effect (effective period), "a first effect member that continues the execution state until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives is used. The "operation-induced process" and the "operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value".

  According to such a special operation reception effect, if the operation is performed immediately after the effective period occurs, the execution state of the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” in the after-operation effect can be maintained for a long time. As a price, the end timing of the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” in the post-operation effect comes at a relatively early stage. On the other hand, if the operation is not performed for a while after the effective period occurs and the operation is performed later, the end timing of the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in the post-operation effect is set to this. Although it is possible to arrive at a relatively late stage, there is a disadvantage that the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" in the post-operation effect cannot be maintained for a long time.

In other words, in the special operation reception performance, there is no operation timing that is most desirable for exciting the performance.
・ In exchange for shortening the time until the “operation-induced process using the second effect member” is finished, the execution state of the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” is lengthened and enjoyed. Whether (operate at an early stage within the effective period), or
・ In exchange for shortening the execution state of the "operation-induced process using the first effect member", do you extend the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" ends and enjoy this? (Do you operate at a late stage within the effective period), or
-The time for which the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is maintained as an execution state and the time until the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" is completed are sacrificed little by little, and the whole As a balance (whether to operate at a timing that is neither early nor late within the effective period)
Special operation reception performance can now be provided with a special operation reception performance such as the above, which provides an operation reception performance that is easy to get tired of and can select the operation timing according to the mood of the player. You will be able to.

  In addition, as will be described later, in the special operation reception performance, when the performance reception is performed when the reception acceptable sound is in the output state, the post-operation performance (operation-based process using the first performance member, based on the performance reception). The operation-induced process using the second effect member) is executed, and the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is released at this point.

  Here, in the above-described example, when the effect reception is performed in the special operation reception effect (FIG. 209), “a first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. The "operation-induced process used" and the "operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" . However, even when the special operation reception effect occurs, when the predetermined effect conditions are not satisfied (for example, when the jackpot determination is unsuccessful or when the predetermined effect determination is unsuccessful). In this case, the "operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed even if the effect reception is performed within the special operation reception effect, and a comparison is made with a case where a predetermined effect condition is satisfied (FIG. 209). It is more desirable that the "operation-induced process using the second effect member" in which the "predetermined time value" is set to be relatively short is performed in different effect modes.

  According to such a configuration, even when the special operation reception effect is generated, when the predetermined effect condition is not satisfied, "the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. "Operation-induced process using the first effect member" and "Operation-induced process using the second effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" Of the operation reception performances (first and second operation reception performances) in which only one of them is executed, the content is reduced to the same content. Therefore, by providing such a performance risk, tension when the special operation reception performance occurs It is possible to maintain a good feeling. In this sense, in the special operation reception effect, "operation-induced processing using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes" and "from the time when the effect is accepted When the post-operation effect is performed in parallel with the "operation-induced process using the second effect member, which is continued until the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time value", the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation It is desirable that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate than when the post-operation effect appears in the reception effect.

  However, this may not be detected well even if it is operated in the special operation reception performance (detection error), and the performance reception may not be performed. As a result, the effective period ends without the performance reception being performed. If there is such a thing, the player who saw that "the operation-induced process using the first effect member" is not performed after the operation is mistakenly recognized as the operation reception effect in which only one is executed. As a result, there is concern that the interest in playing games will decline. Therefore, regarding the special operation reception effect, as described above, even if there is no operation by the player within the effective period, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) within the effective period, and “the predetermined in the effect pattern is determined. The operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until the specified timing comes "and" the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value. It is desirable to execute each of the "2. As a method of automatically generating an operation reception (automatic reception) and a performance mode related thereto, it is possible to use any one of the above-mentioned examples or each of the examples described later, or an appropriate combination, and further, the contents described in the description. .

  In the above-described example, when the first operation reception effect, the second operation reception effect, and the special operation reception effect are generated, the acceptance allowable sound indicating that the effect acceptance has been permitted is output. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 207 to 209, the acceptance permission sound output when the special operation acceptance effect is generated is the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance. It is to be used as an effect sound whose reproduction state can be continued for a time longer than the acceptance allowable sound output when the effect is generated.

  According to such a configuration, when the reception of the performance is allowed (when the image display showing the operation means to be operated or the gauge display of the remaining effective time is displayed) By confirming how long the acceptable reception sound to be output from is continued, the operation reception effect is displayed as follows: "The execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes. "Operation-induced process using effect member" and "operation-induced process using second effect member that continues until the time elapsed from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value" It becomes possible to recognize whether or not the special operation reception performance. However, this can be done in exchange for reducing the remaining time in which the “operation-induced process using the first effect member” can be maintained in the execution state (delaying the timing at which the effect reception is made). Therefore, when it is recognized whether or not the operation reception effect is the "special operation reception effect", there is a demerit that the production strategy that the player can select is narrowed.

  However, even when it is recognized whether or not it is the special operation reception performance, it is important that the performance strategy is left to some extent. Therefore, regarding the output time (timing tr1 to tr2, tr11 to tr12) of the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect are generated, a predetermined value as the "special operation acceptance effect (effective period)" is set. It is desirable to execute it as a non-output state when a specific time that is less than a half of the set time (timing tr21 to tr23) of (4). According to such a configuration, the acceptance permission sound is set to the non-output state when a specific time less than half of the “predetermined set time (timing tr21 to tr23) as the special operation acceptance effect (effective period)” has elapsed. However, if the output state is maintained, it becomes possible to recognize that the special operation reception effect is being executed. Therefore, a predetermined set time (special period as the special operation reception effect (effective period) ( It becomes possible to provide a dramatic strategy in a state where more than half of the timings tr21 to tr23) ”is left.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect are generated is accepted in the output state. Even if it is, the output state is maintained, but for the acceptance permission sound output when the special operation reception effect is generated, if the effect reception is made in the output state, the output state is forcibly terminated. I have to. That is, in this case, when the production reception is made in a situation where it is not recognized whether or not it is a special operation reception production (a situation in which the specific time has not elapsed after the reception acceptable sound is output), the operation reception production Was a "special operation reception performance" and whether a mode with higher expectations appeared as a post-operation performance, but one of them (the operation reception performance is "special operation reception performance" It can be easily recognized by checking whether or not the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is ended when the effect reception is triggered. For example, even if the user recognizes that the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not finished and the first operation acceptance effect or the second operation acceptance effect is generated as a result, he / she switches his / her feelings to “more expected as post-operation effect”. It is expected to concentrate on "has the appearance of a high-frequency aspect appeared?" In this case, "when a mode with a higher degree of expectation appears as a post-operation effect, the effect design is performed so that the ratio at which the special operation acceptance effect is newly generated is high until the symbol is stopped. Is desirable.

  Further, as described above, in the first operation acceptance effect, the second operation acceptance effect, and the special operation acceptance effect, the image display showing the operation means used as the operation target in each operation acceptance effect and the effective time Each of the remaining gauge displays is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an operation is performed. In this respect, at least in the special operation reception effect, when the effect is accepted, the gauge display is left (displayed) and “the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes”. "Operation-induced processing using a production member" and "operation-based processing using a second production member that continues until the elapsed time from the time the production is received reaches a predetermined time value". Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize which timing within the effective period the reception timing of the performance reception is made after the performance reception based on the remaining gauge amount as a display. As a result, it becomes possible to predict whether the execution state of the operation-induced process using the first effect member will end soon. As a method for starting the post-operation effect while leaving the gauge display (bar display) as described above, it is possible to use any one of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below, or an appropriate combination.

  In the special operation reception performance, if the special operation reception performance is generated, it is possible to operate immediately after the special operation reception performance is generated by executing the operation-related display (precursor performance) that suggests the occurrence of the performance reception. It is desirable to tighten it. According to such a configuration, it is expected that the player suitably enjoys the dramatic strategicity over the entire period of the special operation reception effect (effective period). On the other hand, in the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect as well, it is desirable to execute the operation-related display (predictive effect) that suggests the occurrence of the effect acceptance before it is allowed. As for the operation-related display, setting this to be executed as "a short-time predictive effect that is inferior to the timing suggestion function" makes it possible to obtain a transitional expectation as compared with the case where a special operation acceptance effect with high expectation occurs. It is desirable to avoid having it.

  Here, as an operation-related display (a short-time precursor effect lacking a timing suggestion function) performed on the effect display device 1600 before the effective period of the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect occurs, For example, it is possible to realize "image display that simulates the operation means" as an image displayed in a fade-in state (white image or the like) when it appears in a fade-in mode.

  FIG. 210 is a time chart showing an example of the processing relating to the operation-related display when the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect are performed, and the processing related to the channel allocation of the sound data including the acceptance allowable sound. is there.

  That is, ergonomically, when the effective period occurs, it is only necessary to display the suggestive image (operation related display) from several frames (for example, 0.2 seconds) before the effective period occurs. It is known that the operation can be performed so that the production reception can be performed at a deadly timing. However, even if it is a few frames, if the "image display imitating the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode even though the effective period has not occurred, the "operation means" There is a possibility that the production reception may not be performed despite the operation in the state in which the "displayed image display" is displayed.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 210, the timing trA arrives several frames before the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect occurs. Although the operation-related display is started based on the above, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal mode in a situation where the effective period has not occurred.

  More specifically, at the timing trA, “allowable” that can be realized as a fade-in image in a state where “image display imitating operation means” is displayed in a fade-in mode, a predetermined effect image, or the like. "Pre-operation related display" is started. When the above-mentioned timing tr1 (or timing tr11) comes while the "pre-permission operation-related display" is being displayed in this manner, the "image of the operating means" is changed from the state in which the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed. The "display" is shifted to a state in which it is displayed in the normal mode.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the acceptance permission sound indicating that the performance acceptance is permitted is output. As for the acceptance permissible sound, as shown in FIG. 210, the output is not started at the timing trA but is started at the timing tr1 (or the timing tr11).

  In other words, in order to be able to operate so that performance reception can be performed at the timing immediately after the effective period occurs, the acceptable reception sound is also output from several frames before the effective period occurs. It seems that it is desirable to let them do it. However, if the acceptance-permitted sound is output a few frames before the valid period occurs, the output timing may deviate from the appearance timing of "image display imitating operation means". As a result, there may be a feeling of strangeness as if a sound shift has occurred, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced. On the other hand, in the period of timings trA to tr1 (timings trA to tr11), it is possible to output a pre-permission operation-related sound different from the reception permissible sound. However, if the pre-permissible operation-related sound is output in such a short period, the pre-permissible operation-related sound may not be an independent effect sound but may be heard in an integrated manner with the acceptance permissible sound. In the end, it is feared that a sense of incongruity may occur as if a sound shift had occurred.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, prior to the occurrence of the effective period of the first operation reception effect and the second operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowance operation-related display) is displayed for several frames. While the operation is started from the front, the operation-related sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) is not intentionally executed, and only the acceptance / acceptance sound is output when the valid period occurs. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 210, the acceptance acceptable sound is output by allocating the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” to the channel based on the arrival of the timing tr1.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment allowable state for the channels of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” is terminated so that the acceptance acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" itself may be allowed to continue to be assigned to the channel even after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You can That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance-allowed sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the effect reception is performed between the timings tr1 and tr2 (timings tr11 to tr12), the state in which the effect reception is permitted is ended and “an image display that makes use of the operating means is displayed. Is hidden. On the other hand, with respect to the “sound data including the acceptance-permitted sound”, the allocation state to the channel is maintained, and the acceptance-permitted sound is not forcibly terminated midway as described above.

  FIG. 211 is a time chart showing an example of the processing relating to the operation-related display when the special operation reception effect is performed and the processing relating to the channel assignment of the sound data including the reception acceptable sound.

  As shown in FIG. 211, also in the special operation reception effect, the operation-related display (pre-allowance operation-related display) is performed when the timing trB before the timing tr21 at which the effective period occurs arrives. However, the “period of timings trB to tr21” has a length that is more than twice (more preferably 10 times) the “period of timings trA to tr1” shown in FIG. 210. In the pre-allowance operation related display that is displayed in, "expectation about whether the post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a mode with high expectation" or "expectation that a big hit symbol appears" is As suggested, it is possible to selectively appear any one of the plurality of effect modes. Note that, in a situation where the effective period has not occurred, the "image display imitating the operating means" is not displayed in the normal manner, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 210.

  For example, the "pre-allowance operation-related display" started at timing trB has a different content from the "pre-allowance operation-related display" shown in FIG. A plurality of effect images are repeatedly moved and displayed toward the position displayed at timing tr21) and hidden at the position, and the like, which has a slight story-like predictive effect (described with reference to FIGS. 166 to 184. Either aspect of the “specific operation-related effect” described above may be applied). At this time, any one of the plurality of modes can be displayed as the effect image, and the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the modes is displayed. When the timing tr21 comes while the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed in this manner, the "pre-permission operation-related display" is displayed in a normal mode from the "image display showing the operating means". It will be moved to the displayed state.

  In this respect, even in the special operation reception performance, as described above, when the effective period occurs, the reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception has been permitted is output. As for the sound, as shown in FIG. 211, it is configured to be output from timing tr21 as an effect sound reproduced in a part of the sound data assigned to the channel at timing trB.

  That is, as described above, in the special operation reception performance, it is larger than "the minimum time ergonomically required to enable the operation immediately after the effective period occurs" before the effective period occurs. For a long time (timing trB to tr21), the "pre-allowance operation display" with high performance is performed. Therefore, in order to further enhance the performance in such a performance period (timing trB to tr21), a performance sound (pre-permission operation related sound) commensurate with the "pre-permission operation related display" displayed within the same period is output. It is desirable to let it do. Further, since the effect period (timing trB to tr21) has a sufficient length for performing the effect, even if the effect sound (pre-accept operation related sound) is output within the period, acceptance is permitted. The inconvenience of being heard as a sound integrated with the sound cannot occur.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the timing trB arrives, the pre-permission operation-related display is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the pre-permission operation-related sound is output, and these output states are output at the timing tr21. I am trying to continue until. When the timing tr21 arrives, the state in which the "pre-allowance operation related display" is displayed is changed to the state in which the "image display showing the operation means" is displayed in the normal mode, and the "pre-allowance operation related display" is displayed. The state in which "sound" is output is changed to the state in which "acceptable sound" is output.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 211, one sound data including the reproduction section of the “pre-permission operation-related sound” and the reproduction section of the “acceptance-acceptable sound” is set to the channel based on the arrival of the timing trB. By allocating to the above, the above-mentioned effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 is realized.

  According to such a configuration, in the special operation reception effect, the reception acceptable sound output when the effective period occurs is part of the sound data assigned to the channel in the form of the precursor effect to the special operation reception effect. It is to be output as a performance sound that is reproduced during the period. That is, in this case, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (for example, when the indication effect is generated), and the first half part is an effect corresponding to the indication effect (pre-allowance operation related display). The sound (pre-acceptance operation related sound) can be used to indicate the timing at which the special operation reception performance occurs, and after the effective period has occurred, the channel allocation is performed based on the performance reception. Since it can be appropriately released, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect was executed even after the effect reception. In addition, as an output method for “one sound data” including a reproduction section of “pre-permission operation-related sound” and a reproduction section of “acceptance allowable sound”, first, the degree of expectation (when the symbol variation is stopped After preparing a plurality of sound data with different jackpot patterns), one of the sound data (one sound data) is used as the result of the jackpot judgment (or performance judgment (preliminary judgment, etc.)). It is desirable to realize the above-described effect sound output in the period from timing trB to tr22 by selectively allocating to the channels based on the above. In this case, the same effect sound is output to the plurality of sound data in the reproduction section of the "pre-allowance operation-related sound (predictive effect)", but different in the reproduction section of the "acceptable sound (operation acceptance effect)". It is more desirable to include the first sound data and the second sound data configured to output the effect sound.

  That is, in the special operation acceptance effect, when the effect acceptance is performed between the timings tr21 and tr22, the state in which the effect acceptance is allowed is ended and the "image display imitating the operating means" is hidden. In addition to this, the assignment state for channels is also terminated for "sound data containing acceptance acceptable sound", and the output related to acceptance acceptance sound is forcibly terminated midway. As described above. Therefore, by confirming whether the acceptance sound is forcibly set to the non-output state when the production reception is made, it is possible to know that the special operation reception production was executed even after the production reception was made. Will be able to recognize.

  Even with one sound data (timing trB to tr22), a section (first half portion) of the effect sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) corresponding to the precursor effect (pre-allowance operation-related display) is in the reproduction state. In the situation (timing trB to tr21), even if an operation is performed by the player, this is not forcibly terminated. Only when the section (second half) of the effect sound (acceptable sound) corresponding to the effective period is in the reproduction state (timing tr21 to tr22), the assignment state to the channel is canceled based on the operation by the player. Becomes

  The one piece of sound data (sound data including the pre-permission operation-related sound and the reception permissible sound) is allocated before the timing trB, and is already in the allocation state at the timing trB. Good. Further, as described above, the channel allocation state may be continued after the timing tr22, for example, the channel allocation state may be continued until the timing tr23 arrives. That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance-allowed sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr22.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 210, when the timing tr2 arrives, the assignment allowable state for the channels of the “sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound” is terminated so that the acceptance acceptable sound is set to the non-output state. There is. However, the "sound data including the acceptance acceptable sound" itself may be allowed to continue to be assigned to the channel even after the timing tr2. For example, the assignment state to the channel may be continued until the timing tr3 arrives. You can That is, in this case, the sound data itself remains assigned to the channel, but the "reproduction period of the acceptance-allowed sound" in the sound data ends at the timing tr2.

  In the configurations shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, “a plurality of acceptable reception sounds with different lengths in which the output state is maintained” are prepared as acceptable reception sounds associated with the occurrence of the operation reception production, and the production reception is performed. At this time, different acceptance allowable sounds are generated for the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) having different post-operation effects. Therefore, if it is confirmed how long the output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is continued, there is a demerit that the above-mentioned staging strategy is narrowed, but the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or It becomes possible to recognize which one of the two operation reception effects) is occurring.

  Moreover, the plurality of acceptable reception sounds have a first acceptable reception sound (special operation reception production) that is terminated when the player's operation is received, and the output state continues. The second acceptable reception sound (first and second operation acceptance effect) is included. Therefore, when the operation is performed such that the reception acceptance sound is output while the reception acceptance sound is in the output state, the special operation reception is performed by confirming whether the output state of the reception acceptance sound is ended when the production reception is performed. It becomes possible to immediately recognize which of the effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) has occurred.

  However, the acceptable reception sound is originally supposed to be in the non-output state when the effective period ends, and the output state may be maintained when the post-operation performance is started. If there is, it may hinder the production. In this respect, in the above-described example, the reception effect sound whose output state is ended when the effect reception is made is the first acceptance permission sound (the reception acceptance sound on the side where the time set value for maintaining the output state is relatively long ( Special operation reception production).

  That is, in this case, when the performance reception is performed in the output state of the “second reception permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively short”, the output state is maintained. However, it can be said that the second acceptance permissible sound will soon be in a non-output state because the time set value for maintaining the output state is short in the first place, and it is unlikely to interfere with the production. On the other hand, when the performance reception is made in the output state of the "first acceptance permission sound on the side where the time setting value for which the output state is maintained is relatively long", the original time setting for maintaining the output state is set. Even if the value remains, the output state is terminated, so that it does not interfere with the production.

  Moreover, by confirming how long the output state of the acceptance allowable sound is continued, it is possible to recognize which of the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) is occurring. Even if there is a player who wants to try, if the output state of the acceptable reception sound is maintained at the stage when the time set value for the second acceptable reception sound has passed, not the second reception acceptable sound but the first reception acceptable sound. It is possible to predict that is in the situation where is output. In this respect, without confirming that the output state of the first acceptable sound is ended, by confirming how the first acceptable sound is set to the non-output state when the effect reception is generated, It becomes possible to confirm at an early stage whether the prediction that the special operation reception performance is occurring is correct.

  In addition, in the configuration shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, when the valid period of the operation reception effect occurs, the pre-permission operation-related display indicating that the valid period is about to occur is displayed. The operation-related display includes a first pre-allowance operation-related display having a short display time (see FIG. 210) and a second pre-allowance operation-related display having a long display time (see FIG. 211). In this regard, when the first pre-permission operation-related display having a short display time is performed, the "sound data including the acceptance permissible sound" is not assigned to the channel and " By assigning "sound data including acceptance-permitted sound" to channels, the acceptance-permitted sound is output. That is, in this case, the effect sound corresponding to the first pre-allowance operation-related display is not output, but it is possible to prompt the operation from the time when the effective period occurs, without causing a sense of discomfort as if a sound shift has occurred. become able to.

  On the other hand, when the second pre-allowance operation-related display having a long display time is performed, "sound data including acceptance acceptable sound" is displayed for the channel from the time when the second pre-allowance operation-related display is performed. In the allocation state, the acceptance-permitted sound is output by setting the reproduction section of the acceptance-allowed sound to arrive at the timing when the valid period occurs. According to such a configuration, only one sound data is assigned to the channel before the special operation reception effect is generated (when the indication effect is generated), and the first half is the indication effect (pre-allowance operation related display). It is possible not only to be able to suggest the timing of the special operation reception effect by playing the effect sound (pre-allowance operation-related sound) according to, but also after the effective period occurs, based on the effect reception. Since the channel assignment can be released appropriately, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the special operation reception effect was executed even after the effect reception.

  That is, in the pre-allowance operation related display shown in FIG. 211, the corresponding pre-allowance operation related sound is output and the acceptance / permission sound is further output when the valid period occurs. In the display, the corresponding pre-permission operation related sound is not output, and the acceptance permissible sound is output when the valid period occurs.

  Note that in the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, the movable ornament, and the like can be used as the “effect member”. Further, it is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body as the “first effect member”, and the “second effect member” is as follows. It is possible to employ any one of the effect display device 1600, the speaker, the effect lamp, and the movable decorative body that is different from the “first effect member”.

  Further, in the above-described example, the special operation acceptance effect and the first operation acceptance effect (or the second operation acceptance effect) do not necessarily have to be the same operation means, and may be different. When the operation means to be operated are different, the image displayed in each effective period is different.

  In the first operation reception effect, "the operation-induced process using the first effect member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes" is executed as the post-operation effect, "Operation-induced processing in which the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives" and "the execution state continues until the predetermined timing in the effect pattern comes The operation-induced processing using the second effect member "may be executed as the post-operation effect. Furthermore, although the operation-induced processing using the effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, in the post-operation effect corresponding to the first operation acceptance effect, any operation is performed. The cause processing is also executed as the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the effect pattern arrives.

  In the second operation reception performance, performing "operation-based processing using the second performance member that continues until the elapsed time from the timing of reception of performance reaches a predetermined time value" as post-operation performance. However, “operation-induced processing using the first effect member that continues until the elapsed time from the time the effect is received reaches a predetermined time value” and “the predetermined timing within the effect pattern has arrived. The operation-induced process using the second effect member, in which the execution state is continued until then, may be respectively executed as post-operation effects. Furthermore, although the operation-induced processing using the effect members different from the first effect member and the second effect member may be further executed, in the post-operation effect according to the second operation acceptance effect, any operation is performed. The cause process is also executed as being continued until the elapsed time from the reception of the effect reaches a predetermined time value.

  In the special operation reception performance, "operation-induced processing using the first performance member in which the execution state is continued until a predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives" and "elapsed time from the timing at which performance reception is performed in advance" "Operation-induced processing that uses a second effect member that continues until a predetermined time value is reached" is executed as post-operation effect, but an effect member different from the first effect member and the second effect member is used. You may make it further perform the used operation origin process. In the special operation reception performance, the operation-induced process executed as the execution state is continued until the predetermined timing in the performance pattern arrives, and the time elapsed from the timing when the performance is received is the predetermined time. Any operation-induced processing that is executed as being continued until the value is reached may be mixed.

  In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, the valid period of the special operation reception effect is set as a time value longer than the valid period of the first operation reception effect (or the second operation reception effect). I am trying to do it. By setting such a long time, it is possible to enjoy the effective period having the above-mentioned dramatic strategy.

  In the first pre-allowance operation-related display having a short display time (see FIG. 210), “expectation degree as to whether post-operation production performed when the production reception is performed is performed in a high expectation mode” or “big hit”. Although there is no suggestion of the "expectation degree at which a symbol appears", in the second pre-allowance operation-related display (see FIG. 211) having a long display time, "the post-operation effect that is performed when the effect reception is made is the expectation level". It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether it will be performed in a high manner" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol will appear".

  In the “effective period of special operation reception effect” set as a relatively long time value, by causing one of a plurality of display modes with different expectations to appear, “after the operation performed when the effect reception is performed” It is desirable to be able to suggest "the degree of expectation as to whether or not the production is performed in a manner with a high degree of expectation" or "the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears".

  In addition, in the special operation reception performance, even if the performance reception is performed at any timing within the effective period, "the performance by the first performance member that occurs due to the performance reception" is "due to the performance reception. In order for the player to recognize that the effect content is the same as the post-operation effect, it is necessary to have a relationship in which the execution state is terminated earlier than the "effect by the second effect member that occurs." desirable.

  In the above-described example illustrated in FIGS. 207 to 211, the pachinko machine 1 can generate the first operation acceptance effect, the second operation acceptance effect, and the special operation acceptance effect based on the establishment of different effect conditions. However, the first operation reception effect is not installed and does not occur, and the second operation reception effect and the special operation reception effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the second operation acceptance effect may be non-installed and may not occur, and the first operation acceptance effect and the special operation acceptance effect may be generated based on the establishment of different effect conditions. Alternatively, the first operation acceptance effect and the second operation acceptance effect are not installed and do not occur, and the special operation acceptance effect may be generated based on the establishment of a predetermined effect condition. ..

  In the special operation reception effect shown in the above-described explanation example shown in FIGS. 207 to 211, specific effect sound data (for example, BGM effect sound data) assigned to the channel is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state. In particular, it may be one that causes a state in which reception of performance is permitted.

[More detailed performance of acceptance sound]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content corresponding to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect related to (1) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the permissible acceptance sound output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different mode depending on the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed with a high expectation. I try to suggest the rate of being hit and the rate at which jackpot patterns are stopped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, Even if there is a special result in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (effective period) in which performance reception is allowed. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the operation acceptance performance (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing. .. In addition, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) to be generated at the predetermined timing during SP reach is other than the “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). The post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change in the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Reception performance (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as an operation reception effect,
During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressing mode. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and / or the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is changed. The corresponding "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, or in a non-output state (whether the reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment). Has been finished), it is possible to generate at least a high expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity.

  In such a configuration, when the operation opportunity is given, when the output in the non-suppressing mode of "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is maintained (low-expected non-suppressing reception effect) and "BGM reproduction" (A specific type of effect sound) "is output in a suppressed manner or silent, or is in a non-output state (suppressed operation acceptance effect), and an aspect related to the operation acceptance effect (low expected unsuppressed acceptance) Depending on the performance, the high expectation suppression reception performance), the ratio of winning the jackpot (expectation level) will differ, so when the operation opportunity is given, the performance (when the operation opportunity is given is It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by the effect of "whether BGM reproduction (specific type of effect sound)" is suppressed).

  However, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, since "BGM playback (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppression mode or silently when an operation opportunity is given, compared to the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated, a specific sound that is not output when the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated is set as a reception permission sound. It is possible to output as. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the performance when the high-expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the acceptance permission sound output when the high-expectation suppression reception effect is generated is higher than the acceptance permission sound output when the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is generated. It is used as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long period of time, and this also suitably suppresses the deterioration of the performance when the high-expectation suppression reception performance occurs.

  On the other hand, in the high-expectation suppression reception effect, when the operation opportunity is given, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silence, or is set to the non-output state, so that the operation is performed. When the post-production occurs, the production sound corresponding to the post-production can be emphasized, which is useful in improving the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, with respect to the acceptance allowable sound output when the high-expectation suppression acceptance effect is generated, the effect acceptance is performed when the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state. Then, the output state is terminated based on the reception of the effect. As a result, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance sound.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation reception effect is displayed as follows: "When the operation is not detected within the set time when the reception of the effect is permitted, the post-operation effect does not occur and the set time ends The automatic reception mode in which the post-operation performance can be generated even when the operation is not detected within the set time for which the performance reception is allowed " It can also be generated by.

  That is, when the operation reception effect is generated by the automatic reception mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is detected is executed even if the operation is not detected within the set time period in which the effect reception is allowed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and, as a result, the post-operation effect cannot be confirmed. However, as will be described later, more strictly, the output time required for the effect sound in the post-operation effect is the same as when the operation is detected, but the output time required for the liquid crystal display in the after-operation effect is detected by the operation. It is supposed to be shorter than when it was done.

  In the automatic reception mode (operation reception performance) according to this embodiment, as will be described later, if no operation is detected, performance reception is automatically generated at a specific timing within the set time (the automatic button function is enabled). Then, the post-operation effect is executed based on the automatically generated effect reception. That is, in this case, since the performance reception is always generated before the specific timing within the set time arrives at the latest, the performance reception may be performed within the time after the specific timing within the set time. As a result, the length of the effective period in which the production reception is allowed is substantially shortened. As a result, unlike the case where the post-operation performance is started after the set time is over, the automatic button function is activated by not speeding up the production time, but conversely increasing the production tempo. Can be realized.

  Also, if the automatic button function is enabled within the set time in this way, the operation opportunity will be substantially lost even though the set time has not expired. As a player, fearing this, it is expected that he / she will actively perform the operation at an earlier stage within the set time, or that he / she will be able to play the game with a feeling of tension regarding the production.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect, regarding the “gauge display of how much remaining effective time” is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the automatic button function is displayed up to a specific timing. It is desirable to display it not as an indication of the remaining time but as an indication of the remaining time until the end of the set time. When such a display method is adopted, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, the performance reception is always performed before the remaining time of the gauge display becomes "0".

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, not only the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but also the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode, at the time of occurrence thereof, It is possible to output a reception permission sound indicating that the performance reception is permitted or the performance reception is permitted. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the situation in which performance reception is automatically generated due to forgetting the operation, and the performance reception cannot be generated by the user's own operation.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated, the specification is not output when the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Since the sound can be output as the acceptable reception sound, by confirming the type of the acceptable reception sound, the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode is generated instead of the non-automatic reception mode. You will be able to recognize that you are.

  On the other hand, in the post-operation production, since there is a production risk that is usually executed in a mode with low expectations, it is not always preferable to operate the post-operation production so as to improve the enjoyment of the game. There is also an aspect that it is not limited. Therefore, in the non-automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, if the acceptance permission sound is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the performance acceptance is permitted, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is output. By terminating relatively early, the "acceptable sound" is not output, so that "a time when it is possible to consider whether or not to generate the effect reception" is created.

  However, even in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, if the acceptance allowable sound is terminated early, there is a concern that it may be misunderstood that "the production reception is not allowed due to the function of the automatic button". Occurs. Therefore, in the automatic reception mode according to the present embodiment, the output state of the reception acceptable sound is maintained for a relatively long time, whereby the automatic button is not yet functioning and production reception is permitted. This suggests that the player is in the state, and eventually the player can prompt the operation with a sense of security that "the automatic button is not yet functioning".

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in the suppression mode or silence, or is set to the non-output state. Suppression reception effect (here, high-expectation suppression reception effect here) to which an operation opportunity is given, and an operation opportunity is given while "BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)" is output in a non-suppression mode. While the non-suppression reception effect (here, the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect) can be generated in the automatic reception mode or the non-automatic reception mode, the performance reception is permitted or the performance reception is accepted. There is a technical feature in that the acceptance-permitting sound that suggests that the state becomes acceptable is generated in such a manner as to further enhance their original performance.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, if the “acceptable sound” is explained again, the “acceptable sound” means that the performance acceptance is permitted. It indicates that output is started within the set time and production reception is allowed, or output is started and production reception is allowed before the set time when production reception is allowed. It is intended to indicate that the state is changed, and is output as an effect sound such as "Pikyne". However, in the case where the output state is set before the set time in which the acceptance of the production is permitted occurs, the output state of the “acceptable sound” is maintained across the timing when the set time occurs ( It is required to be in the output state even within the set time (within the period during which performance reception is allowed), and it is more than the time from when the "acceptable sound" is output to when the set time occurs. It is desirable to set the time from the occurrence of the set time to the end of the output state of the “acceptable sound” to be longer. In this sense, the "acceptable sound" is output only when a set time (valid period) occurs, and is in an output state within the set time (valid period). On the other hand, it can be said that it is an output sound within a set time that can be shifted to a non-output state (inaudible state) according to an operation by the player or as the output time elapses.

  The "acceptable sound" may be assigned to a channel and output as effect sound data alone (see FIG. 210), or another effect sound (for example, set time (effective period). ) Is performed before the occurrence of), and the effect sound that is output in accordance with the above-mentioned "specific operation-related effect", etc.) is assigned to the channel and output as one effect sound data. (See FIG. 211), and a method for realizing it may be appropriately adopted.

  FIG. 212 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the low-expectation non-suppression acceptance effect is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probable variation / non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (pending digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, "predetermined variation in the low expected variation pattern that does not even form the reach state" If "pattern" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (effect depiction according to a predetermined variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the predetermined variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice effect is produced within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (announcement effect) according to the result of the determination is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "predetermined variation pattern". It should be noted that, including each of the effect examples described below, effect pattern determination (sub-control side) is performed based on the result of the variation pattern determination (main control side), and advance notice determination (sub-control) is performed based on the result of the effect pattern determination. In the case of performing the control side), regarding the processing relating to the notice production, the “variation pattern determination” may be replaced with the “production pattern determination” and the “variation pattern” may be replaced with the “production pattern”.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the peripheral control MPU 1511a changes the decorative symbol as shown in FIG. 212 (b). When a timing tr32, which is a predetermined time after the start, arrives, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is generated. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect concerning the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern),
-While the "BGM reproduction sound" according to the variation pattern (production pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode, a "non-suppression reception production (Fig. 212 (a) and (b)) ”, and when no operation is detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which the production reception is permitted, the post-operation production does not occur and the operation is performed. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 212 (j))" when the set time ends
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

  According to such a configuration, during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), the "sound of BGM reproduction" is in the suppression mode, so that the operation acceptance effect is generated. Since the set time (effective period) during which performance reception is allowed without suddenly suggesting performance is suddenly set (non-suppressed reception performance), the player will be surprised. It will be in the shape of a droop, and delay will easily occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr32 to tr33), the set time is ended without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity to generate post-operation effects, it is possible to create a sense of tension during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern). You will be able to maintain.

  However, although it is executed as such "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without the effect after the operation, contrary to the intention of the player. If such frequent occurrences occur, it is feared that the interest in the game will decline. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 212 (b), (c), and (g), a set time (timing tr32 to tr33) in which performance reception is allowed is generated. When the timing tr31 slightly before arrives, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr32. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the production reception is allowed at a timing tr31, which is slightly before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs, and "after the operation, contrary to the player's intention. It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently issue that the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) is ended without producing an effect. However, as described above, the “acceptable acceptance sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr32 to tr33) occurs. You may make it generate | occur | produce by.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Picine!" And "press!" The second allowable sound to be output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 212 (d) and 212 (h), in the operation reception effect (effective period) generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), The second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output, and the game is also performed by the output restriction on such "acceptable permissible sound". A delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when a person tries to operate.

  By the way, as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time (effective period) or execution as a non-automatic reception mode during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected change pattern (predetermined change pattern), It is thought that a player may try to keep hitting the opportunity of post-operation production by repeatedly hitting the operation means (here, the operation button 410) even when the production reception is not permitted. Be done. However, in this case, since the production reception is allowed and the post-operation production is started immediately, the started production is “what is performed according to the production reception (post-production production)”. However, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it is the one that is automatically generated as a simple notice effect that is not related to the effect reception, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 212 (particularly, FIG. 212 (c)), in the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect, the “acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound)” is generated after the set time (effective period) occurs. When the effect reception is performed at the timing tr32a in the output state, the set time (effective period) itself is ended, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output as one permissible sound ends (the same timing as when there is no operation (FIG. 212 (g)). It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "what is being performed (production after operation)" or "it is automatically generated as a simple announcement production that is not related to production reception". Kill as to become.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 212, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in one effect member) and an after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect reception is made. However, regardless of which timing the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) in a state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 212, when the timing tr32 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, in the effect display device 1600, the operation means that is the operation target in the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect is operated. A grated image is displayed, and a gauge is displayed to indicate the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. As the display method of the scale image and the gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and those display images (the scale image and the gauge display) are generated when the reception of the effect occurs. Based on this, they are hidden (they are hidden at the same timing).

  However, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is provided with a "special effect mode (automatic button effect state)" for activating the automatic button function for all operation reception effects for which operation instructions are given. Alternatively, it may be possible to set and cancel the setting to the “special effect mode” by the operation of the player. That is, in this case, even if the operation reception effect is generated during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), in the state of being set to the “special effect mode” , "Non-suppressed reception performance" and will be executed in the above-mentioned "automatic reception mode", and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception performance" only when not in the "special performance mode" Will occur as. However, in this specification (especially, "more detailed performance of reception acceptable sound" and the description related thereto), "special performance mode" is not set unless otherwise specified. At this time, the example is described as an example of the case where the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  213 and 214 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the high expectation suppression acceptance effect is executed in the automatic acceptance mode.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (uncertain change / non-time saving), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, "SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) high expectation to develop. If a "specific fluctuation pattern" is selected from among the "variation patterns", the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative design (effect depiction according to a specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation effect, effect determination The effect (preliminary effect) corresponding to the result of (3) is additionally executed to the effect (effect pattern) related to the selected "specific variation pattern".

  However, as described above, in the case of the effect (effect pattern) related to the “specific change pattern”, as shown in FIG. 213 (b), whichever result is obtained as the effect judgment (advance judgment). In addition, when the timing tr42 (timing within the SP reach state) when a specific time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol is started, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is generated.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation reception effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr42 in the specific fluctuation pattern,
・ “Suppression reception production” (FIG. 213 (a)) that sets a set time during which the production reception is allowed while the “sound of BGM reproduction” according to the variation pattern (production pattern) is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state. , (B)), and even when the operation for the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is allowed, When the timing tr42A within the set time arrives, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is started based on the effect reception being performed. Aspect (see FIG. 213 (j)) ”
It is generated as a "suppression / automatic reception performance" executed by. As a method of outputting the “sound of BGM reproduction” in a suppressed manner or in silence, a method of presetting a silent section (suppression section) in the data of the “sound of BGM reproduction” itself, or A method of changing the volume value for the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned to a suppression value (for example, “0”), a combination thereof, or the like can be adopted. As will be described later, this "suppression / automatic reception effect" is also called "second suppression operation reception effect", and the suppression mode here is also called "strong suppression mode".

  According to such a configuration, the "sound of BGM reproduction" is suppressed during the execution period of the effect (effect pattern) related to the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach state in the effect (effect pattern) related to the specific fluctuation pattern). Since the set time (effective period) during which the performance reception is allowed is set with the performance such that the generation of the operation reception performance is suggested by the output in the form or the silence (suppression reception (Production), from the player's side, it becomes easy to perform the operation immediately after the operation acceptance production occurs. In addition to this, even if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43), the post-operation effect is automatically generated at the latest when the timing tr42A within the set time arrives. As a result (automatic reception mode), it is possible to enjoy the operation with a sense of security that will not miss the post-operation effect that occurs in the operation accepting effect at the time of high expectation.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, also in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the case of the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" described above, FIG. 213 (b), (c), (g) As shown in, when the timing tr41, which is slightly before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) for which the production reception is allowed, is generated, the "acceptable sound" is started to be output, and the timing tr42 is crossed. The output state is maintained at. As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, a state in which the production acceptance is allowed to occur at the timing tr41 will soon occur. It is expected that it will be possible to recognize that it is possible to make it easier to frequently say that "the player accepts the performance by activating the automatic button function instead of his own operation against the intention of the player". Become so. However, as described above, the "acceptable acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) is generated, and is generated at the generation timing tr42 of the set time, for example. You may do it.

  However, regarding the timing tr40 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is shifted from the state of being output in the non-suppression mode to the state of being output in the suppression mode or silence (or the non-output state), the above-described operation is performed. In order to suitably obtain the effect (suppression reception effect), as shown in FIGS. 213 (a) to 213 (c), a relationship such as "length of timing tr40 to tr41> length of timing tr41 to tr42". Therefore, it can be said that it is important to set so that it arrives well before the “output start timing tr41 of the above-described acceptance-permitted sound that precedes the set time”.

  Further, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (c), (d), (g), and (h), the above-mentioned "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" is performed. Unlike the case of "," not only the first allowable sound that is output as a sound effect such as "Pikine!" But also the second allowable sound that is output as a message sound such as "Press!" With regard to the above, the output is also started at the timing tr41, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr42.

  According to such a configuration, in the effect display device 1600, which operation means among the plurality of operation means (the operation buttons 410, the sword decoration 5001 and the like) included in the pachinko machine 1 should be operated. Since there is a possibility that it can be recognized even when the simulated image of the operation means to be operated is not displayed (timings tr41 to tr42), immediately after the operation reception effect occurs. It becomes easy to operate. That is, as will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as “press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Please put the sword!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are started to be output at the same time, but the timings at which the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output are different from each other. Alternatively, the output states may be sequentially set. In this case, only one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound may be started to be output from a state where the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and (h), the “first allowable sound” is adopted as the effect sound that is output for a relatively short time, and the “second allowable sound” is used. Is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long period of time, but the length relationship of these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, regarding the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound”, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) and 213 (h), the output state shall be maintained for a time period different from each other, and the outputs thereof shall be maintained. It is desirable that the time when the state is ended (the time when the state is made inaudible) arrive at different timings before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. According to such a configuration, depending on which of the following conditions the "acceptable sound" is, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. It becomes possible to expect that it will be difficult to frequently say that "the player receives an effect by activating the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the player's intention."
・ A first situation in which both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" maintain the output state ・ The output state of one of the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" is maintained However, the other ends the output state (is inaudible) Second situation ・ Both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" have ended the output state Third situation (which is inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. 212 and “suppression / automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikyne!") Is output as the "first allowable sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as the effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the sound effect ( Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect”, when the “BGM reproduction sound” is suppressed, It becomes possible to make it easier to recognize that the effect reception is allowed (first allowable sound) while maintaining the performance appropriately (second allowable sound).

  It should be noted that timings tr41 to tr42 (or timings tr31 to tr32) in the case where the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is output prior to the set time (effective period) or the image display of the mock image. The time may be a minimum time (for example, 1 frame) in a control (processing) unit, or may be a time of 2 frames or more. That is, if it is possible to output the set time (effective period) and the display of the mock image as little as possible, the player is in a state in which the acceptance of the effect is permitted and the operation means that is the operation target. There is a possibility that it will be possible to recognize which is earlier by the amount of time that precedes it.Therefore, within the period until the set time ends, or when the automatic button function is activated. It is expected to prevent forgetting to do the operation within the period until it arrives.

  By the way, as described above, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode, the operation opportunity may be lost by activating the automatic button function (timing tr42A) even within the set time (effective period). Is. Therefore, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 (c) and (d), unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (c), at least one of the permissible acceptance sound (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) is generated. When an effect reception is made while the output effect is received, the output state is ended based on the reception of the effect. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound, second allowable sound) is interrupted at that time, and as a result, the production acceptance is allowed ( Since it becomes possible to recognize that the (effective period) has ended, "a state where reception of the production has not occurred yet and the automatic button function can be activated (a state where operation opportunities can be lost)" It becomes possible to avoid the misunderstanding that there is. In addition, in the set time (effective period), when the operation is performed and the performance reception is performed before the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated, the performance is performed at the time when the performance reception is performed. Needless to say, even if the timing tr42A arrives, the automatic button function is not activated because the state in which the acceptance is permitted is terminated.

  Further, also in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 213, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr42a in the figure), as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception, the effect display device 1600 ( At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member and an after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated. More specifically, for the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), no matter which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed, at a specific timing that comes after the timing tr43. In contrast to the non-display (not visible), the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is to maintain the output state for a predetermined time from the time when the effect reception is made. ing.

  However, as shown in FIG. 213, the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) is the "BGM reproduction sound" regardless of the effect reception at any timing within the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set so that the output state is maintained when the timing tr44 at which “” is returned from the suppressed state (silent state) to the output in the non-suppressed state arrives. On the other hand, with regard to the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, the output state is ended at the timing tr44 at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned to the output in the non-suppressing mode. ing. That is, in this case, at the timing tr44, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" is returned to the output in the non-suppressing mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effect is produced. It is expected that the game will be greatly changed and the enjoyment of games will be improved. The “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressing mode. Further, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state may be ended at a specific timing after the timing tr44 instead of at the timing tr44.

  Further, also in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) is set arrives, the operation display device 1600 operates the operation means that is the operation target in the high expectation suppression reception effect. A grated image is displayed, and a gauge is displayed to indicate the remaining time until the set time has elapsed. In this regard, in the operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode, in view of the message sound (for example, “press!”) As the second permissible sound being output, the non-automatic reception mode is also set in the performance display device 1600. The message display (for example, “press!”) That does not appear in the operation reception effect executed in (2) is displayed. It should be noted that, as the display method of the image, the gauge display, and the message display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) can be adopted, and these display images (the image, the gauge display, and the message display) can be used. Will be hidden (both are hidden at the same timing) at the stage where the set time has not yet elapsed based on the occurrence of the production reception. The message display does not necessarily have to be exactly the same as the content of the message sound, but may be any one that prompts an operation.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to 213 (i), before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period). While the output state of the message sound is terminated (inaudible state), the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. After the automatic button function is validated, at least the timing tr43 at which the set time ends is not hidden (not visible). The display state may be maintained thereafter. In addition, since the set time (effective period) is ended at the time when the effect reception is made, it is actually ended at the latest at the timing tr42A for activating the automatic button. Therefore, strictly speaking, the "timing tr43 at which the set time is ended" means a timing at which the set time is ended if it is supposed to continue, and the time set at the timing tr42 is set. This is the timing that comes when the time tr42 has passed.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made by the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the performance reception is performed by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target for the operation target prompted by the message display. The player can be informed that the situation is not right. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, both of the operation reception effect not executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 212) and the operation reception effect executed in the automatic button mode (FIG. 213) Within the set time (effective period), the remaining time display (gauge display) that suggests the remaining time until the state in which the production reception is allowed is completed can be performed. Then, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 212) that is not executed in the automatic button mode, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically displayed based on the time until the end of the set time. That is, in this case, the gauge amount becomes smaller as the time until the set time elapses is shorter, and when the time becomes "0", the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed so as to become "0".

  On the other hand, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, when the specific timing tr42A within the set time arrives without detecting the operation, the automatic button function is activated and the effect reception is automatically performed. As described above, after the specific timing tr42A arrives, even if the set time has not yet finished, the effect reception will not be permitted. Therefore, if the "remaining time display (gauge display) that indicates the remaining time until the state in which the production reception is allowed is completed" is performed within the set time of the operation reception production (FIG. 213) as described above, It is conceivable to dynamically display the remaining time display (gauge display) based on the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, in the operation acceptance effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode, the effect acceptance is allowed after the specific timing tr42A arrives. Despite disappearing, the remaining time display (gauge display) is dynamically changed based on the time until the set time elapses, not the time until the specific timing tr42A arrives. I am trying to display it. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed such that the gauge amount becomes “0”. However, here, the production reception is not permitted before the set time becomes “0”, so the production reception is not permitted with the gauge amount left. It will be transferred to the state.

  According to such a configuration, when the performance is accepted due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge display) is intentionally left, so that the player's intention Contrary to this, it is possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing operational opportunity", and this will allow the operation to be performed at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount for the next set time (effective period). Will be able to encourage you to do.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (FIG. 213) executed in the automatic button mode according to this embodiment, when the effect reception occurs due to the operation detection, the remaining time is displayed before the set time has passed ( Gauge display) can be hidden (not visible). On the other hand, when the effect reception occurs due to the activation of the automatic button function (specific timing tr42A), the remaining time display (gauge display) is not hidden in a state where the set time has not ended, and at least the setting is performed. Until the end of the time, the "indicated dynamic display mode in which the remaining time (gauge amount) gradually decreases" is maintained.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made due to the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) continues to be dynamically displayed at least until the set time has elapsed. Therefore, it is possible to indicate to the player that the production is not accepted by the operation detection for the operation target that is prompted to be operated by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, "when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target" and "the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target" based on the result of the notice effect determination. There is a case. That is, in this case, it may be confused as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) in which the production acceptance is allowed occurs, so the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr32 in FIG. 212, there is no “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. As the set time, it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. At this time, the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated is set after the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed after the set time (valid period) has occurred, contrary to the player's intention. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tr42 in FIG. 213, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means is operated, it is preferable that the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. That is, the player may be confused if a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means appears. Since it is difficult to further request an operation for the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, a performance reception is made when the operating means on the operating side is operated. It is desirable to do.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 213, it is possible to appropriately adopt the items described in the above-mentioned “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 142)” or other examples thereof. That is, in this case, the timings tr40, tr42, tr42a, tr43, tr44 in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 correspond to the timings ts12, ts13, ts14, ts15, ts16 in the effect example shown in FIG. 142, respectively. Become.

  However, as described above, in the suppression operation reception performance, the performance sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state when the operation opportunity is given, and thus the performance becomes poor as compared with the non-suppression operation reception performance. Is concerned. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the acceptance permission sound output when the suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is more than the acceptance permission sound output when the non-suppression operation acceptance effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a long time.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are used as the first permissible sound. It is prepared and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the "first mode" as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIGS. 212 (c), (g) and 213 (c), (g), and is the "time to be maintained as the output state". "Is set as the shortest aspect of the above-mentioned plurality of aspects. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of the big hit symbols appearing differently when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

  It should be noted that “which of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound” and “which of a plurality of operating means is used as an operation target” are obtained as separate determination results in the advance notice production determination. Alternatively, the determination result may be obtained in the advance notice effect determination as one determination result. However, in at least the above-mentioned first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first allowance is obtained regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. Further, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. You may do it.

  FIG. 214 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second mode is used as the first acceptable sound when the high expectation suppression reception effect is executed in the automatic reception mode.

  As shown in FIG. 214, this production example is basically the same as the case of the above-described production example described with reference to FIG. 213, including its generation conditions and production contents (further, description of other examples thereof). Is the same. However, in this effect example, as a result of the notice effect determination being performed, at the timing tr41, the first allowable sound is output not in the first mode but in the second mode longer than the first mode. The difference is that the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained for a longer time than the second allowable sound.

  With such a configuration, the acceptable output sound that is output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output for a longer time than the acceptable reception sound (first aspect) that is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. Since it is possible to output as a sound to be maintained, the performance is preferably maintained even in a situation where "BGM reproduction (specific type of sound effect)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence when an operation opportunity is given. You will be able to.

  Further, in order to improve the performance in the suppression operation reception effect, a sound that is not output as the reception allowable sound in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is used as the first allowable sound output in the second mode. It is desirable to do.

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 213 and 214, there are “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target” and “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target” based on the result of the preliminary announcement effect determination. However, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target in all cases. Therefore, also in this effect example, the second allowable sound is output in the same manner as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 213 (for example, “press!”). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 214 (c) and 214 (g), the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. Also, by making the output state of the first permissible sound end (inaudible state) before the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated, the automatic button function is also achieved in this example of performance. It is possible to estimate how much time is left until the activation timing tr42A arrives from the output status of the acceptance-permitted sound.

  In particular, in this effect example, the output state of the first allowable sound is maintained even after the output state of the “second allowable sound” that is also output in the effect example shown in FIG. 213 is ended. By confirming that, it is possible to estimate in more detail how much time is left until the timing tr42A for activating the automatic button function arrives, as compared with the case of the effect example of FIG. 213. become. In addition, since only the first allowable sound of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output in a longer different mode (second mode), the player side first uses the commonly used sound. 2 Estimate the "remaining time until the timing tr42A arrives" with reference to the timing when the output state of the permissible sound is ended, and perform the normal estimation in this way. Since it becomes possible to make a more detailed guess by using it, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Note that in the production example shown in FIG. 214, other matters are the same as in the case of the production example shown in FIG. 213. The point that the state is terminated halfway is the same as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 213.

  In addition, when the high expectation suppression reception effect (FIG. 213, FIG. 214) occurs in the state where the above-mentioned “special effect mode” is set, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated is set within the set time. It is desirable to set the timing earlier than the timing tr42A. However, in this case, since the automatic button function is enabled by the player's intention, even if the performance reception is made by enabling the automatic button function, the message display It is desirable that the output state is not maintained until the timing tr43, and is hidden before the timing tr43 (the timing at which the effect is received or the timing delayed by the above-mentioned time). Further, at this time, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated does not come in the output state when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode, but the first allowable sound is output in the second mode. It is desirable to function so as to end in the middle of the first permissible sound output in the second mode when it is output in the output state.

  Further, there are a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the first mode and a case where the first permissible sound (sound effect as the reception permissible sound) is output in the second mode. Not only the times in which the output state is maintained differ from each other, but also different effect sounds may be used. For example, when the first permissible sound (the sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output in the first mode, the effect sound such as "Picine" is output, and the first permissible sound (the sound effect as the acceptance permissible sound) is output as the second sound. When outputting in a form, it is possible to output a production sound such as "gaogaoh".

  In the above-mentioned explanation example, the low expected fluctuation pattern is defined as a “variation pattern in which even a reach state is not formed”, but it is defined as a “variation pattern in which a design is stopped without being in the SP reach state” and the low expectation pattern is defined. The effect example shown in FIG. 212 may be performed when a predetermined variation pattern is selected from the variation patterns.

  Further, it is desirable that the "suppression / automatic reception effect" illustrated in the above-described example cannot appear in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the low expected fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state, The "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" illustrated in the explanation example can also appear in (a corresponding effect pattern) high expected fluctuation pattern including the "specific fluctuation pattern" in the normal gaming state. . That is, even if the high expected fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the effect pattern), basically corresponds to the low expected fluctuation pattern (in the period before the production progress to the SP reach state such as the non-reach state). Since the effect that appears also in the effect pattern) is executed, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” illustrated in FIG. 212 can also appear during the period. Even with such a configuration, when "suppression / automatic reception performance" appears (high-expected fluctuation pattern), "non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance" appears (low-expected fluctuation pattern or high-expected fluctuation pattern). It can be said that the ratio (expectation) of the big hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that of the pattern).

  In addition, in the low expected fluctuation pattern (the effect pattern corresponding to it) that occurs in the normal gaming state, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence when an operation opportunity is given. It is desirable that the low expectation non-suppression reception effect is not executed in the automatic reception mode. Note that this is the case where the "special effect mode" is not set or the "special effect mode" is not installed as the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, regarding the length of time from the "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated" to the "timing tr43 at which the set time ends after the acceptance of the effect reception is permitted," the minimum time in the control (processing) unit ( For example, it may be one frame) or a time of two frames or more. For example, the message display is visible at "timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated", and such a visible state is at least "timing tr43 at which the preset time ends after the acceptance of the performance is allowed". If it continues until it arrives, it will be possible to suggest the original length as the set time (effective period), and it may be possible to recognize that the player has not performed any operation. You will be able to do it. In any of the operation reception performances executed in the automatic reception mode, a message sound (second allowable sound) or a message display is displayed for the "timing at which the automatic button function is activated" within the set time in any operation reception performances. It is desirable that the relation is output (see FIGS. 213 (h) and (i) and FIGS. 214 (h) and (i)).

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in FIG. 213 (i) and FIG. 214 (i), “the time for which the message display is left after the effect reception is performed (in the example in the figure, timings tr42A to tr43). "For the amount of time)" appears even when the performance reception occurs at other timings (FIG. 212 (e), FIG. 213 (e), etc.) due to the commonization of programs, but The program may be used so that it occurs only when the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 212 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr32a, and in the example shown in FIG. 213 (e), the operation-related display is hidden at the timing tr42a. Become.

  In the above-described example (FIGS. 212 to 214), after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and after-operation effect sound output (effect) by the speaker (second effect member). Sound) is started at the same time, but the post-operation effect may be performed such that the start timings of those effects are shifted. For example, in a situation where the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) is started at the timing tr42, the after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is performed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). The display of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed at the timing when the operation-related display shown in FIGS. 212 to 214 is hidden (or when the fade-out processing is started) which is not yet displayed. If it is started, the display effect can be smoothly switched.

  As described in the above-mentioned “suppressed operation sound output process (FIG. 142)”, even in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a sign is given in a period before the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is allowed. An effect (for example, the “specific operation-related effect” described above) may be performed. Then, in this case, it is desirable to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectation that a big hit symbol appears, and perform the predictive effect in any of these modes as the predictive effect. Further, in this case, a plurality of modes are prepared also as the precursor effect sound output during the period in which the predictive effect is performed, and which of the plurality of modes is output as the predictive effect sound depends on the execution mode of the predictive effect. It is desirable to make a selection. On the other hand, regarding the first permissible sound, in the first mode and the second mode among the display of the image of the operation target, the gauge display indicating the remaining time, and the message display of “press!” It is output in any of a plurality of modes including modes.

  In the example productions shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the operation reception production shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 is generated, a specific sound (second sound) that is not output when the operation reception production shown in FIG. Since the first permissible sound and the second permissible sound according to the aspect can be output as the reception permissible sound, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is generated. Will be able to. Further, by confirming the type of the acceptance sound, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance effect is being generated in the automatic acceptance mode instead of the non-automatic acceptance mode.

  Further, regarding the acceptable sound of the non-suppressing operation acceptance effect (FIG. 212), there are a first acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a sound effect and a second acceptable sound that outputs the acceptable sound as a message sound. Of these, the second permissible sound is not prepared and only the first permissible sound is output. On the other hand, regarding the permissible reception sounds of the suppression operation reception performance (FIGS. 213 and 214), the first permissible sound and the Both of the two permissible sounds are output. As a result, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when the suppression operation reception performance is being performed.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, the same production sound is output as the first permissible sound in the non-suppressing operation reception production (Fig. 212) and the suppression operation reception production (Figs. 213 and 214) (Figs. 212 and 213). ) And a case where a different effect sound is output as the first allowable sound (FIGS. 212 and 214).

  That is, if the acceptance permission sound different from the normal time is output, it becomes difficult to recognize that the effect acceptance is permitted, and the operation opportunity may be lost. Therefore, the second allowable sound (message sound) is output as a sound that is not normally output, while the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output as a sound that is also output normally. Is desirable. While the acceptance permissible sound is output in such a manner, the first permissible sound (sound effect) is also output with a predetermined probability as the effect sound (second aspect) that is not normally output. If the proportion (expectation) of the big hit symbols is set to be higher than that when output in the first mode, "BGM reproduction (specification It is possible to favorably maintain the performance when the "type of sound effect" "is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state. In order to obtain such an action effect, when the suppression operation reception effect is generated (a specific variation pattern is generated), the first mode is output as the first acceptance permissible sound in the effect determination such as the notice effect determination. It is desirable that the rate of determining to the effect is higher than the rate of determining to output the second mode.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, not only the operation acceptance effect executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode (FIG. 212) but also the operation acceptance effect executed in the automatic acceptance mode (FIGS. 213 and 214). , When the event occurs, a reception acceptance sound that indicates that the reception of the performance is permitted or that the reception of the performance is permitted can be output. It is possible to preferably suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the operation opportunity is lost as a result.

  In addition, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is set when the timing tr41 arrives, and the specific timing tr42A arrives within this set time (effective period). It is assumed that the effect reception is automatically generated when the specific timing tr42A arrives without receiving the effect reception according to the operation detection. According to such a configuration, it is possible to start the post-operation performance within a preset period (set time) regardless of whether or not an operation has been performed. It will be possible to make it an automatic button without changing the flow of the production after that and without causing a dramatic extension.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, a “message sound prompting the user to operate (second allowable sound)” may be output as the acceptance allowable sound, and the message sound (second allowable sound) must be operated. The output is not output in the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode" which is not received, but is output only in the "operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode" which is received without any operation. There is.

  That is, in the operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode, a message sound (second permissible sound) that directly expresses that the operation should be performed is output, and many types of reception permissible sounds (first permissible sound, Although it is conceivable that the second allowable sound should be output, in the post-operation effect, since there is a risk that the effect is usually executed in a mode with low expectations, the post-operation effect should be performed. The operation is not always good for improving the enjoyment of the game. In this respect, the "operation acceptance effect executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode" is an effect that allows selection such as "not intentionally generate post-operation effect", and therefore such effect should be operated. Do not directly express the message as a message (second allowable sound), do not output the message sound (second allowable sound), and do not have the right to select whether to generate post-operation performance It is desirable to output the message sound (second allowable sound) or output more types of allowable reception sound only in the "operation reception effect executed in the form". In addition, in the "operation reception performance executed in the non-automatic reception mode", if the set time ends without the performance reception being performed, the post-operation performance and the related performance are not performed, so the expected The production will proceed without the degree being suggested. In the non-moving reception performance, no message sound is output in any operation reception performance, but in the “operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode”, the message sound is not output. An operation reception effect may be included.

  In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of modes (“press!” And “put sword!”) As message sounds (second allowable sounds), and the effects shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. In the example, depending on whether the target to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 or the sword decoration 5001 (based on the result of the notice effect determination), any one of these plural modes is selectively selected. I am trying to output. In this case, when the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the operation button 410 and a message sound (“press!”) Corresponding to this is output, the object to which the operation opportunity is given is the sword ornament 5001. Compared to when a message sound ("Noto na!") According to is output, it suggests that "a big hit pattern appears when the symbol variation is stopped" in the post-operation production according to the production reception. The proportion (expectation level) of the appearance mode is set to be low. The ratio (expectation level) in which the effect mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 212, the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, and when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the operation target Is not the sword ornament 5001, and the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, and the operation reception effect executed in the non-automatic reception mode is generated. Moreover, at least in the normal game state, it is suggested that "a big hit symbol will appear when the symbol variation is stopped" in the post-operation production that is executed when the production reception is made in the operation reception production where no message sound is output. The ratio (expectation level) in which the effect mode to appear appears in the post-operation effect that is executed when the effect reception is performed in the operation reception effect in which a message sound is output. It is set to be lower than the rate (expectation level) at which the staging mode that suggests "" appears. The ratio (expectation level) in which the above-mentioned presentation mode appears may be 0% or 100%.

  With such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated, first, "is a message sound (second allowable sound) output?" Becomes a branch point for knowing the level of expectation, and the message sound ( When the second permissible sound is output, it is possible to further know the level of expectation by the mode. Further, even when the operation button 410 is used as the operation target, it is possible to enjoy the post-operation performance under relatively high expectations when the message sound (second allowable sound) is output. become. Therefore, when the message sound (second permissible sound) is output, it is desirable to prevent the post-operation effect from being overlooked by executing the post-operation effect in the automatic reception mode. On the other hand, when the message sound (second allowable sound) is not output, the expectation degree becomes relatively low, and the “sword decoration body 5001” that is used only when the expectation degree is high becomes the operation target. Disappears. That is, in this case, it is desirable to give the player the right to select whether to generate the post-operation effect by executing the post-operation effect in the non-automatic reception mode.

  Further, in the operation reception effect executed in FIGS. 213 and 214, when the set time (effective period) is generated, the message sound is output and the message display is displayed. In this regard, as shown in FIGS. 213 (g) to (i) and FIGS. 214 (g) to (i), for the message sound, the timing at which the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period). While the output state is terminated (inaudible state) before tr42A, the message display is maintained at the timing tr42A when the automatic button function is activated. Furthermore, after the automatic button function is activated, the display is not hidden (invisible) at least until the timing tr43 at which the set time ends. That is, in this case, when the effect reception is performed by the player's operation within the set time, the message display may be hidden at a stage before the set time has elapsed in accordance with the effect reception, but within the set time. When the automatic button function is activated, the message display (“press!” Or “put sword!”) Will continue to be displayed at least until the set time ends.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is made by the activation of the automatic button function, the output state of the message sound (second allowable sound) may be terminated halfway (inaudible state). Since the message display will not be hidden in the middle of the set time, the performance reception is performed by detecting the message sound (second allowable sound) or the operation target for the operation target prompted by the message display. The player can be informed that the situation is not right. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  Further, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect reception is performed by the activation of the automatic button function at the timing tr42A, the remaining time display (gauge display) is displayed. Since the amount of gauge in will be left behind, it will be possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing operation opportunity" against the intention of the player, and this will lead to the risk of During the set time (effective period), it becomes possible to prompt the user to perform the operation at an early stage regardless of the gauge remaining amount.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214) in which the automatic button function is activated, when the effect reception is performed by the activation of the automatic button function, the remaining time display (gauge display) is at least set. The dynamic display is continued until the end of time. Therefore, it becomes possible to indicate to the player that the effect reception is not made by the operation detection for the operation target which is prompted to be operated by the message sound or the message display. That is, in this case, even if the operation means on the side that is not prompted by the message sound or the message display is mistakenly operated, it is possible to suggest that the effect reception caused by the operation has not occurred. become able to.

  In addition, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 and the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, the same effect sound (first allowable sound of the first aspect) is output as the acceptance allowable sound. Even when the operation reception effect of (1) occurs, it is possible to appropriately notify the player that the operation opportunity is given. Moreover, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 213, since the second allowable sound that is not output in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 is also output, which of these operation reception effects has occurred? It will be possible to recognize. Furthermore, in the operation reception effect executed in the automatic reception mode in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the specific variation pattern, the ratio executed in the mode shown in FIG. 213 is relatively high, and FIG. The ratio executed in the mode shown is relatively low, and the ratio stopped in the jackpot pattern is relatively high when executed in the mode shown in FIG. That is, in this case, the first permissible sound is not the “first mode” but the “second mode” that is not used in the operation reception performance shown in FIG. 212, while avoiding overlooking the post-operation performance. Since it will be output in, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the effect sound in which the output state of the acceptance permissible sound (first allowable sound) is maintained for a long time (compared with the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212). Since it is used as FIG. 214), it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance when "BGM reproduction (specific type of performance sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence. become able to.

  In the example productions (suppressing operation reception productions) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is not necessarily used as the production sound (second mode) whose output state is maintained for a long time. , The same acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound of the first aspect) as when the non-suppressing operation reception effect (FIG. 212) is generated can also be generated. Then, when the first permissible sound is output as the effect sound (the second mode) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the effect sound in which the output state is maintained for a short time (first In the aspect), a new performance is added by increasing the proportion of the symbols stopped with the big hit symbol compared to when the first allowable sound is output (FIG. 213). As a result, the performance of "BGM reproduction (specific type of sound effect)" is output in a suppressed mode or in a silent state while allowing the user to recognize that the effect reception is permitted. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (second aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a long time (FIG. 214), the first allowable sound is output. When the production is accepted during the period in which the sound is being output, it is kept in the non-output (non-audible) state even in the middle stage of the output (see FIG. 214 (c)). . On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output as the effect sound (first aspect) in which the output state is maintained for a short time (FIGS. 212 and 213), the first allowable sound is “suppressing operation acceptance effect. ”Or“ operation reception performance executed in the automatic reception mode ”(FIG. 213), if the performance reception is performed during the output, it is not output (inaudible) at that time. (See FIGS. 212 (c) and 213 (c)). That is, in this case, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, even if the effect reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state, the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. The Rukoto. Note that the first allowable sound is in the output state during the period of timings tr41 to tr42, but within the period, even if an operation is detected, no effect reception is made, so that the first allowable sound is not output. It goes without saying that the output state is not interrupted.

  That is, as described above, in the non-suppressing operation reception effect, unlike the suppression operation reception effect, the operation reception effect occurs without being suppressed in "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)", so the post-operation effect is missed. The possibility is relatively high, and when the operation reception mode is executed in the non-automatic reception mode, unlike the case where the operation reception mode is executed in the automatic reception mode, the post-operation performance may not be generated. Therefore, when these operation reception effects are generated, it is assumed that some players repeatedly hit the balls before the set time occurs. However, in this case, if an operation is detected by repeated hits, it may be difficult to understand whether the effect is a post-operation effect or a notice effect unrelated to the operation. It is desirable to eliminate such a concern by maintaining the output state until the end of the reproduction data of (FIG. 212). On the other hand, in the suppression operation reception effect and the non-automatic reception effect, there is no need to perform continuous hits. Therefore, in order to suppress the game caused by such continuous hits, the first allowable sound produces the first allowable sound and the second mode. It is desirable to make it difficult to recognize in which of the above cases the output was made (output is stopped at an intermediate stage).

  Even when the player accepts the performance within the set time, the message display will be within the set time only when the operation detection is slow, such as immediately before the automatic button function is activated. May be continuously displayed until the timing at which is ended, or the dynamic display may be continued until the timing at which the remaining time display (gauge display) is ended within the set time (described above). Common programs, etc.)

  Further, as described above, in the post-operation performance, since there is a performance risk that is usually executed in a mode with low expectations, it is preferable to operate the post-operation performance in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. It's not always good. In this respect, in the effect example (non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. 212, if the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output for a sufficient time to indicate that the acceptance of the effect is allowed, it is relatively early. By using the mode (first mode) that is ended in step 1, the "time for determining whether or not to generate the effect reception" is created while the reception permission sound is not output. On the other hand, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), since there is no need to create such a time, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the same manner (first manner). In some cases, the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) may be output in a mode longer than this (second mode), and it is suggested that the expectations are different depending on the modes. . In addition, by maintaining the output state of the acceptance sound for a comparatively long time, it becomes possible to indicate that the automatic button function is not yet activated, which gives a sense of security. In particular, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an operation.

  Further, in the automatic reception effect (FIGS. 213 and 214), the automatic button function is enabled even when the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in the long mode (second mode) (FIG. 214). The acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is made inaudible before the timing tr42A is reached, and the two acceptance permissible sounds (first permissible sound and second permissible sound) are respectively set at different timings. I'm trying to finish.

  As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the timing tr42 at which the automatic button function is activated does not arrive until the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound, second acceptable sound) becomes inaudible. In the inaudible state, it becomes possible to suggest that the automatic button function will soon be enabled unless it is operated quickly. At this time, in the mode (second mode) on at least the long side and the second permissible sound in which the output state is maintained longer than the first permissible sound in the first mode, the volume and pitch of the sound are changed with time. It is desirable to change at least one of the above in order to make it easy to recognize how much time has progressed.

  Further, in the operation reception performance shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, when the operation opportunity is given, “BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state, whereby a post-operation production is generated. When this is done, it is decided to devise a directing sound so that the corresponding directing sound can be heard. In this respect, regarding the acceptance allowable sound output when such a suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, when the effect acceptance is performed while the acceptance allowable sound is in the output state, it is based on the fact that the effect acceptance is performed. Since the output state is terminated, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance acceptable sound.

  In the above example of performance, when "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception performance" occurs, even if performance reception is made when the acceptance sound is in the output state, this is not interrupted and the output state is maintained. And However, instead of this, “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception performance” has a relatively high degree of expectation, for example, when it occurs in the SP reach state within (the performance pattern corresponding to) the high expected fluctuation pattern. Only when there is a situation, in order to encourage concentration on the performance, when the acceptance acceptable sound (even if the same production sound (first aspect) as the first acceptable sound is output) is in the output state This may be interrupted when the reception is made.

  Note that, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the case where the “suppression / automatic reception production” occurs has been described, but “non-suppression / automatic reception production”, “suppression / non-automatic reception production”, etc. also occur. If possible, the production progress may be performed in the same manner even when the “non-suppression / automatic reception production” or the “suppression / non-automatic reception production” occurs.

  Further, when the high expectation suppression reception effect is generated, it is possible to output the third mode in which the output time is maintained as a first permissible sound for a longer time than in the first mode (FIG. 213) and the second mode (FIG. 214). When the third mode is output, it is desirable that the jackpot pattern appears at a higher rate when the symbol variation is stopped than when the first mode or the second mode is output. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, and it is possible to recognize the expectation and set the time (effective time) during which the performance reception is allowed. It becomes possible to more appropriately maintain the interest of the game within the period.

  At this time, in the third aspect, it is desirable to maintain the output state until the timing tr42A at which the automatic button function is activated. That is, in this case, when paying attention to how long the output time of the first permissible sound continues, it is necessary to confirm that the output state is not the first mode or the second mode but the third mode. The longer the time required, the higher the risk that the automatic button function will be activated. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension within the set time (effective period) in which performance reception is allowed. Like Other matters when the third mode is output are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214, such as the point that the production reception is interrupted when the third mode is in the output state. is there.

  The automatic button function may be activated whenever the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) the specific variation pattern arrives, or when the big hit is obtained, the specific variation may occur. It is activated when the timing tr42A in (the effect pattern corresponding to) arrives, but when the big hit is not obtained, when the timing tr42A in the specific variation pattern (effect pattern corresponding to) comes. It may not be activated.

  A plurality of types of effects are prepared as non-automatic reception effects in which the automatic button is not activated within the set time (effective period), and some of these effects allow the acceptance sound (first time) when the set time (effective period) occurs. The permissible sound and the second permissible sound may not be output. That is, in this case, when the set time (effective period) during which the acceptance of the performance is permitted occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is “0” and the acceptance allowable sound is “1” (first allowable sound). ) And there are “2” acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound, second allowable sound), suggesting to what degree the pachinko machine 1 is “promoting operation”. You will be able to.

  As a method of hiding the message display and the remaining time display (gauge display), a method of starting fade-out when the timing of hiding has arrived may be adopted.

  In the example productions shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, in the period from timing tr40 to tr44, "BGM reproduction (specific type of production sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, but instead of this, It may be set to an output state (eg, a reproduction period in which audible sound of audio data is recorded is ended, or channel assignment is ended). That is, in this case, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" as new data is assigned to the channel and brought into the output state at the timing tr44.

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, as described above, a high-expected variation pattern (SP reach variation pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach production with background change) as a result of the variation pattern determination is performed. When a specific variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), when the performance of the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, the performance reception is performed. Operation acceptance performance (effective period)
・ “Suppression reception production” (FIGS. 213 (a) and (b)) that sets the set time during which the production reception is allowed while the “BGM reproduction sound” corresponding to the variation pattern is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state. 214 (a) and (b)) ”, and the operation for the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr42 to tr43) in which the production reception is allowed. Even in the case, when the timing tr42A within the set time comes, the effect reception is automatically generated internally (the automatic button function is activated), and the post-operation effect is generated based on the reception of the effect. “Automatic reception mode (see FIG. 213 (j) and FIG. 214 (j))” is started.
It is generated as a "suppression / automatic reception performance" executed by.

  At this time, based on the result of the effect determination (preliminary effect determination), which of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode the sound effect (first allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output, , It is determined whether the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sounds is to be output by “press!” Or “put sword!”, And the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output in a mode according to the determination result. As described above, the permissible sound and the second permissible sound are respectively output (FIGS. 213 and 214). As described above, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound, the degree of expectation is higher than when the first mode is output, and the second permissible sound is "Deliver!" Is output, the expectation is higher than when "Press!" Is output. At this time, in order of high expectations, "second mode & sword!", "Second mode & push!", "First mode & sword!", "First mode & push!" It is desirable to maintain the entertainment of the game when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation means.

  Also, as described above, in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" according to the effect example, the first allowable sound is in the output state regardless of which of the plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound. When the production reception is made at this time, it is interrupted (see FIGS. 213 and 214). In addition, even when the second allowable sound is output by either “press!” Or “put it in!”, When the production reception is made when the second allowable sound is in the output state, Decided to interrupt.

  However, instead of this, if the production reception is performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state in a mode different from the first mode among the plurality of modes, the output state is changed based on the reception of the performance. Although it is ended, when the effect reception is made while the first allowable sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state may be maintained without being ended. That is, in this case, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output state of the first allowable sound is interrupted midway, and even if the expectation cannot be recognized, the first aspect with the lowest expectation among the plurality of aspects Since it can be recognized that this is not the case, it is expected that the decline in the interest in gaming will be suppressed. Even if a mode with low expectations appears in the post-operation performance, if the output state of the first permissible sound with the lowest expectations among the plurality of modes is maintained, the performance after operations will be changed. By re-recognizing that the production state is hard to have expectations, it becomes easier to accept the result appearing as the post-operation production, and it is expected that the interest in the game will not be significantly reduced.

  Even when such a modification is adopted, when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect” occurs within the predetermined variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. When the first permissible sound of the “suppression / automatic reception effect” is output in the second mode within the specific variation pattern, it is as described with reference to FIG. 214. That is, of the above-described effect examples, the "effect mode shown in FIG. 213" when the first allowable sound is output in the first mode in the "suppression / automatic reception effect" that appears in a specific variation pattern is It will be performed instead of the "draft mode shown in 215".

  As shown in FIG. 215, basically, the “production mode shown in FIG. 215” is basically the same as the content described in the “production mode shown in FIG. 213” or another example. is there. However, in the “production mode shown in FIG. 215”, even if the production reception is performed at the timing tr42a in which the first permissible sound is in the output state in the first mode, the output state is interrupted by the production reception. The output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first permissible sound. On the other hand, even when the “suppression / automatic reception effect” occurs within a specific variation pattern, the first allowable sound is different from the first mode with the lowest expectation among the plurality of modes (for example, , (Second mode) (for example, FIG. 214 (c)), when the effect reception is performed at the timing tr42a, the output state is interrupted based on the effect reception.

  According to such a configuration, when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs within a specific variation pattern, the effect reception is performed at such an early timing that it is difficult to confirm which mode the first allowable sound is. Even if it is done, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation by checking whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is ended with this as a trigger. In particular, in this effect example (FIG. 213, FIG. 215, etc.), the first allowable sound is output from the timing tr41 before the occurrence of the set time (effective period) to the timing tr42 at which the set time is set. Since the first allowable sound is not interrupted regardless of the mode from the output state at the timing tr41 to the arrival of the timing tr42, the first allowable sound is set as the first allowable sound. It becomes possible to function as a time for "hearing" which mode is.

  In this respect, in the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first mode in which the output state is not interrupted is prepared so that the output state is maintained for a shorter time than any other mode in which the output state is interrupted. I am trying. Accordingly, even when the after-operation effect is started when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, the effect sound as the post-operation effect and the first permissible sound are It becomes possible to shorten the time in which the output states are overlapped with each other, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 215, the first allowable sound output in the first mode can also be output in the effect example shown in FIG. 212 (see FIG. 212 (c)). In this example, the effect reception is not interrupted, and the output state is maintained until the end of the reproduction data as the first allowable sound. Even if a situation that is not interrupted by the production reception appears, it can be provided as a production that does not feel uncomfortable.

  However, for the second permissible sound, when the effect reception is performed while the output sound is in the output state, it is based on the fact that the performance reception is performed regardless of which mode is output as the first permissible sound. The output state is interrupted (see FIGS. 214 (d) and 215 (d)). That is, in this case, the first acceptable sound has a function of suggesting the degree of expectation when the effect reception is made early, while the second acceptable sound has been accepted by the operation detection ( When the operation reception performance occurs, the automatic button function will play a function that suggests whether or not there is a situation where the operation opportunity may be lost). It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game.

  On the other hand, the acceptance permission sound output when the operation acceptance effect shown in FIG. 212 may be output in the first mode, or may be output in the special mode. However, it is desirable to maintain the output state without terminating the output state even if the production reception is made during the output in the special mode. In the case of outputting in the special mode, it is desirable that the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing at the time of stopping the symbols becomes higher than that in the case of outputting in the first mode. This percentage may be 100%. The output may be different from the first mode and the special mode.

  That is, in the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212, "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" maintains the output state in a non-suppressed manner, and there is a problem that the effect is poor. Since it is not present, it can be said that it is more desirable to be able to confirm the aspect as the first permissible sound even in the situation where the post-operation performance is started, and to recognize the degree of expectation.

  Note that in the "suppressing operation acceptance effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or in silence, or in a non-output state", the specific type of effect sound is suppressed or It goes without saying that other sounds can be output in a non-suppressing manner even in a non-audible state.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the above-described production example, “suppression that an operation opportunity is given in the case where the production sound of the specific type is output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state” In the "operation acceptance performance (FIGS. 213 to 215)", the acceptance permission sound output when the set time (effective period) is generated is one of "plural aspects in which the length of time maintained as an output state is different". It is possible to output in the non-suppression mode, and the expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) is different depending on the output mode. In this regard, the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is also generated in the "unsuppressed operation acceptance effect that gives an operation opportunity while the specific type effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction) is output in the uninhibited mode". In addition to the case of outputting in the non-suppression mode in the first mode (FIG. 212), an acceptable reception sound (first allowable sound) is generated in a mode different from the first mode (length is different, effect sound itself is different, etc.). ) May be output in a non-suppressing mode, and the expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) may be different depending on the output mode. According to such a configuration, both the acceptable reception sound output when the "non-suppressed operation reception effect" is generated and the acceptable reception sound output when the "suppressed operation reception effect" is generated are in the "output state". It is possible to output in any one of "a plurality of modes in which the length of time to be maintained is different", and further, the degree of expectation varies depending on the output mode. It is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the reception of the production is performed in both "and the suppression operation reception production".

  FIG. 216 is a time chart showing an example of an effect in which the first permissible sound is output in a specific mode when the “non-suppressing operation reception effect (here, non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect)” occurs.

  As shown in FIG. 216, also in this effect example, the portions not particularly noted are basically the same as the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 212. However, in the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31 to tr33) according to this effect example, when the occurrence occurs, an effect determination as to which of a plurality of modes the first allowable sound is to be output (for example, at the time of starting the symbol variation (Preliminary notice effect determination) is performed, and as a result of the effect determination, as shown in FIGS. 216 (c) and 216 (g), not the “first aspect” but the “specific aspect” It is assumed that the jackpot pattern is output in, and the proportion of the jackpot symbol that appears when the symbol variation is stopped is higher than in the case of outputting in the "first aspect". The specific mode is output for a longer time than the first mode.

  Here, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", the first permissible sound can be output by the first mode when the operation reception effect occurs. This is described above (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)). That is, in this case, in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", when the operation reception effects are generated, the same effect sound is output as the first allowable sound over the same time. The Rukoto.

  On the other hand, when the first allowable sound is output in a specific mode when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" is generated (FIG. 216), the first allowable sound is the first sound when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated. In the case of being output in the two modes (FIG. 214), different effect sounds are output as the first allowable sound for different times. In this effect example, when the first allowable sound is output in the second mode, the first allowable sound is output for a longer time than when the first allowable sound is output in the specific mode.

  However, on the other hand, in the case where the same effect sound is output as the first permissible sound over the same time period (the first mode (see FIG. 212 and FIG. 213 (or FIG. 215)), the degree of expectation (the proportion of the jackpot pattern) Indicates that the "first mode" is output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" is generated, or "suppressed / automatic reception effect (Fig. 213 (or Fig. 215)" ". When the "first aspect" appears when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" occurs, the effect reception is performed. The expectation (proportion) that suggests that the jackpot symbol will appear in the post-operation effect according to "the first mode" appeared when the "suppression / automatic reception effect (Fig. 213 (or Fig. 215))" occurred. In case of reception The big hit symbol appears in effect after corresponding operation is lower than the expected level suggested (percentage). The expectation (percentage) may be 0% and 100%.

  On the other hand, the degree of expectation (in the case where different effect sounds are output as the first permissible sound for different times (when the “second mode (FIG. 214)” or the “specific mode (FIG. 216)” appears) ( The proportion of the big hit pattern) is the same as the predetermined value regardless of whether the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" or the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is output. The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, even if the same effect sound as the first permissible sound is output for the same time, either the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" or the "suppression / automatic reception effect" occurs. Depending on the situation, the expectations will not always be the same. Further, even when the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurs, when the specific mode is output as the first permissible sound, "suppression / non-suppression" when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound. The same degree of expectation as "automatic reception performance" will be suggested.

  That is, in this case, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect" are set to have different expectations even if the first permissible sound is output in the same manner (first manner). In addition, since the first allowable sound may be output in different modes (second mode, specific mode), it is possible to make them appear to have no directing relationship with each other. . However, in reality, when the first permissible sound is output in the second mode or the specific mode, the expectation levels are set to be the same even though they are different production sounds and different output times. You will be able to have a secret relationship. For example, when the "BGM reproduction" is suppressed and the "BGM reproduction" is not suppressed when the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the production is allowed occurs, it is normal (the acceptance allowable sound is the first mode). Is output), different post-operation productions (different expectations) are started when the production reception is performed, so that the productions have no production relation. However, when the acceptable reception sound is output as the second mode or the specific mode, the operation when the effect reception is performed while making it appear as if different effects were performed depending on whether or not "BGM reproduction" was suppressed. As a post production, the same content (the same degree of expectation) can be made to appear, and it is expected to provide a surprise production by secretly having a production relationship.

  In this case, a plurality of modes are prepared as the first permissible sound in both the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect", but the "first mode" is commonly used. With regard to "," it is desirable that any operation reception effect be set as a mode in which the output time is the shortest out of a plurality of modes. Further, the "second mode" as the first permissible sound is set as a mode having the longest output time among a plurality of modes that can be output when the "suppression / automatic reception effect" is generated, and The "specific mode" as the first allowable sound is set as the mode having the longest output time among the plurality of modes that can be output when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is generated. It is desirable to have different output times (for example, “output time of specific mode <output time of second mode”) so as not to have a dramatic relationship with each other.

  Further, in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", regardless of whether the first allowable sound is output in the first mode or the specific mode, the output is not ended in the middle stage regardless of whether the effect reception is performed. It is desirable to be able to maintain the output state. That is, in this case, since the output of the first permissible sound can be left even after the post-operation performance is started, the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance” having relatively low expectations is executed. In this situation, even though the first permissible sound is output in the "specific mode" that pushes up to the same expected level as the "suppression / automatic reception performance", which has relatively high expectations, miss this. It becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that it will happen. On the other hand, whether or not the output state of the first permissible sound is interrupted when the production reception is performed by the “suppression / automatic reception production” is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 215.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, when the second mode is output as the first permissible sound in the “suppression / automatic reception production” (FIG. 214), and as the first permissible sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production”. The expectation levels are made the same as when the specific mode is output (FIG. 216). However, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect”, the output time is maintained as a first permissible sound for a time longer than that of the “first aspect (FIG. 213)” or the “second aspect (FIG. 214)”. When the "third aspect" of "is possible to be output," the "third aspect" is output as the first allowable sound in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", instead of the "third aspect". The expectation levels are set to be the same as when the “specific mode” is output as the first permissible sound in the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance”. The “third aspect” is as described above.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 216, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing at which the effect reception is made. However, regardless of which timing the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) in a state where the timing tr33 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the output state.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the length of the "time when the acceptance sound is output" is not the "time when the sound data of the acceptance sound is allocated to the channel", but the "time. It means the length of "time to output as audible sound".

  In addition, in the above-mentioned production example, in order to make the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception production" and the "suppression / automatic reception production" appear to have no production relationship with each other, the "second aspect" and the "third aspect" For "mode," it is possible to output only "suppression / automatic reception performance" among "suppression / automatic reception performance" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance", and for "specific mode", "suppression" -It is desirable that only "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception performance" can be output among "automatic reception performance" and "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception performance". In addition, when the "second mode" and the "third mode" are prepared as the output candidates in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", respectively, the "acceptance / automatic reception effect" has an acceptance sound (second Even if the mode, the third mode) is output, the level of expectation is not necessarily the same as when the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" reception allowable sound (specific mode) peculiar to this is output. It is possible to more suitably improve the performance as a reception acceptable sound that is output when the “suppression / automatic reception performance” occurs.

  Further, the non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (timings tr31 to tr33) does not have to occur as an effect related to the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern), and for example, a high level that develops into an SP reach state. As described above, it may be generated in the production period before the SP reach state is developed among the productions related to the expected variation pattern (for example, a specific variation pattern).

  By the way, in the above-mentioned production example, regarding the “suppression operation reception production” in which a specific type of production sound (for example, BGM reproduction production sound) can be suppressed, a “weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Suppressing operation acceptance effect) ”and a“ strong suppressing manner (second suppressing operation acceptance effect) ”in which the degree of suppression is relatively high or in a non-output state. Good. When a specific type of effect sound is output with a relatively high degree of suppression, the volume may be set to "0".

  According to such a configuration, when the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the effect of suppressing the effect sound of the specific type. Become.

  Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-described effects, the degree of expectation depends on which of the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” and the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)” have occurred. It is desirable to make the (big hit pattern appearing) different. In addition, here, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs, the expectation (rate) at which the big hit symbol is suggested to appear in the "post-operation effect according to effect acceptance" is " When the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, it is lower than the expectation (rate) at which it is suggested that a big hit symbol will appear in "post-operation effect according to effect reception". The degree of expectation (ratio) may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppressing operation reception effect)”, an effect corresponding to a high expected variation pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change, etc.), and even a reach state is not formed (or, While a reach state can be formed, it does not develop into SP reach) and can appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, while the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) ) ”Does not occur in the low expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expected change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the degree of expectation when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs is the expectation when the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" occurs It can be said that it is lower than the degree.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, it is possible to generate a "special production state" that can be transferred based on the satisfaction of a special production condition. In the "special production state", the player is Each time a performance reception is made during a set time (effective period) in which an operation promotion image (such as a scale image or gauge display) that prompts the user to operate is displayed, a specific type of performance sound (for example, BGM reproduction performance sound). ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception be executed (started). According to such a “special effect state”, a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed by a certain amount each time a set time (effective period) during which the effect reception is allowed occurs. It becomes possible to provide the drama about such an effect, and besides the expectation suggested by the post-operation drama, the expectation is also suggested by such a drama (how much it is suppressed). As a result, it is expected that the interest of the game will be further improved when the acceptance of the performance is permitted.

  Also, within the symbol variation, a production pattern (for example, a high expected variation) in which the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can be sequentially executed An effect corresponding to a specific variation pattern of the patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" on the side with relatively low expectations is generated, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation) on the side with relatively high expectations" is generated. Since the possibility that "reception reception effect)" will occur will be suppressed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Will be able to.

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)” occurs, regarding the “strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)”,
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination is performed. Regardless of which result is obtained as (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern occurs when the production progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Operation reception performance) ”
-Even when the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if it reaches the predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. Then, when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" occurs in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" is effected in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. As compared with the case in which "does not occur, when the effect reception is performed in the" strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect) ", the ratio of the post-operation effect executed in the mode with high expectation is higher. Is desirable.

  In such a configuration, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect)" is always generated in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, while the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" is generated. Is not always generated, and when the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, the post-operation effect with high expectation in "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" As a result, the rate of execution of "is increased". Therefore, it becomes possible to focus attention on whether or not the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode ( It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when "the first suppression operation reception effect)" occurs.

  217 to 219 show "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" and "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation acceptance effect) in the effect corresponding to the high expected fluctuation pattern (for example, a specific fluctuation pattern). ) ”Is sequentially generated. FIG. 217 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected relatively early after the set time (effective period) has occurred, and FIG. 218 shows comparison after the set time (effective period) has occurred. FIG. 219 shows an example of the effect when the operation is detected at a relatively late stage, and FIG. 219 shows an example of the effect when the operation is not detected within the set time (effective period).

  Now, as a result of the start condition being satisfied (holding exhaustion) and the change pattern determination being made, "specific change pattern" of "highly expected change pattern that develops into SP reach (reach effect with background change etc.)" If is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative design (effect depiction according to a specific variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the specific variation pattern, etc.) is started, and within the execution period of the variation effect, effect determination A production (preliminary production, etc.) according to the result of (preliminary notice determination, etc.) is additionally executed to the production (production pattern) of the selected "specific variation pattern" itself.

  However, in the "specific variation pattern", the effect content that appears after the timing tr40 (timing within the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative pattern has arrived Is the same as the case of the effect example described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 214. That is, first, when the timing tr40 arrives, no matter which result is obtained as the preliminary announcement effect determination, "a state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed manner or in a silent state" (Or, a non-output state.) Here, the state related to the suppression is referred to as “strong suppression mode”, and the timing tr42 (decorative pattern When a specific time has elapsed from the start of the variable effect, that is, the timing within the SP reach state), the operation acceptance is permitted regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination. Performance (effective period) is generated. Here, the operation reception effect that occurs while the "strong suppression mode" appears is referred to as "second suppression operation reception effect".

  On the other hand, in the "specific variation pattern", when the timing tr51 (the timing before the SP reach state is developed) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative pattern is started, the notice effect determination is performed. On the condition that a special result is obtained, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which effect acceptance is permitted is additionally generated with respect to the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern. However, as will be described later, the operation reception effect (effective period) generated at the timing tr51 is different from the case of the operation reception effect (non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect) shown in FIG. Although the degree of suppression is lower than that of "effect (strong suppression mode)", processing for suppressing the volume of "specific type effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction)" can be performed under predetermined conditions.

  According to such a configuration, even when the effect according to the “specific variation pattern” is being executed, when the special result is not obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), the state shown in FIG. The effect example shown in FIG. 214 appears, that is, the "weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)" does not occur in the effect corresponding to the variation pattern, and the "strong suppression mode (second suppression mode)" is not generated. Operation reception performance) ”will occur. On the other hand, when a special result is obtained as the effect determination (advance determination, etc.), as shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation) in the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is generated. First, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 is further generated.

  In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the effect contents after the timing tr40 arrives are as described with reference to FIG. 213, and therefore the description is omitted here. In this case, for the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first allowable sound may not be the first mode shown in FIG. 213 or FIGS. The related contents of the effect contents shown in FIG. 213, such as being output in the second mode shown in FIG. 214, and the contents described above regarding other examples and modified examples are shown in FIGS. 217 to 219. It goes without saying that the present invention is appropriately applied to the contents of the effect after the timing tr40 (strong suppression mode (second suppressing operation acceptance effect)) among the effect examples.

  Then, as described above, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the timing tr51 (developed into the SP reach state) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the decorative symbol fluctuation effect (effect according to a specific fluctuation pattern) is started. When the timing (before the timing) comes, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted is generated as a “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation reception effect)”.

In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the “weak suppression mode (first suppression operation acceptance effect)” generated at the timing tr51 in the fluctuation effect according to the specific fluctuation pattern,
While the "BGM reproduction sound" corresponding to the variation pattern is being output in a non-suppressing mode, a set time (effective period) during which performance reception is allowed is set, but within the set time (effective period) When the effect reception is performed, the "reception of BGM reproduction" is changed from the non-suppression mode to the weak suppression mode (mode in which the suppression degree is relatively low) when the effect reception is performed. (See (a) and (b)) ”, and when the operation for the operation means to be operated is not detected within the set time (timing tr51 to tr52) in which the production reception is allowed, No effect reception is performed, and as a result, each process triggered by the effect reception (a process of changing the “sound of BGM reproduction” from a non-suppression mode to a weak suppression mode, post-operation effects (liquid crystal display, effect) Sound) The setting time without the (time) has finished elapsed "non-automatic reception mode (FIG. 219 (a), (b), see (f))"
It is generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the “BGM reproduction sound” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value for the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned is set to the strong suppression mode (for example, the volume value (audible volume)). ) Is less than “0”), a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) having a lower suppression degree can be adopted.

  According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (first suppression operation reception performance)", unless a performance reception is made by an operation by the player, "a specific type of performance sound ( It is possible to make it appear that the “non-suppression reception effect” shown in FIGS. 212 and 216 is generated because the BGM reproduction sound) is not output to the state of being output in the suppression mode ”. Like That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player recognizes for the first time that it is not the "suppression reception effect" by changing to the "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode". Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by producing a surprise.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect, "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" can be generated depending on the result of effect determination (notice determination, etc.). The variation pattern is set to be selectable only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone), and in the special effect state, "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect ( 212, FIG. 216) ”can be selected depending on the result of the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) The variation pattern that can be generated can be selected. It is desirable to increase the ratio (expectation). According to such a configuration, when "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 212 and 216)" appears. As a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by combining the above-mentioned surprise effect elements.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, the "strong suppression mode (second suppression operation reception effect)" can occur in both "normal effect state" and "special effect state". In the "normal production state", the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production (Fig. 212, FIG. 216) ”and“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception effect (FIG. 213, FIG. 214) ”can occur in sequence, and in the“ special effect state ”, one variation pattern (win / fall) In the production corresponding to the one variation pattern paired with, “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (FIGS. 217 to 219)” and “suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception” Production (Fig. 213, Fig. 214) "occur in sequence. It is desirable that way.

  Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (effective period) has elapsed without performance reception being performed, "a specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction sound). ) Is output in the weak suppression mode ”and the subsequent production is advanced (FIG. 219). That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state" Since it is difficult to recognize in which situation it is, the subsequent production will be advanced, so it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even if the "operation reception effect (effective period)" is generated, the operation by the player can be more actively prompted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a case where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 217 to 219)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect ( 212) "occurs, the same effect sound (first mode) is output as the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) over the same period of time, which also leads to" conditional suppression (weak). Suppression mode) -Non-automatic reception effect (Figs. 217 to 219) "and" Non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212) "are made difficult to recognize.

Further, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, similarly to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs.
When the timing tr50, which is slightly before the set time has come, the "acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained across the timing tr51. point,
-The second permissible sound (for example, message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (for example, sound effect) is output.-Set time (effective period) is set. When the timing tr51 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operation means that is the operation target in the operation acceptance effect, and suggests the remaining time until the end of the set time. Each configuration such as the point where the gauge is displayed, etc. is also adopted, respectively, and this also enables "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (Figs. 217 to 219)" and "non-suppression." It is made difficult to recognize which of the "non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" has occurred. Therefore, as the method of displaying the image and gauge display, for example, the method shown in FIG. 159 (R2) is adopted as in the case where the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 212)” occurs. It is desirable that the same aspect as that of the production example shown in FIG. 212 be adopted also regarding the timing at which those display images (cursed image, gauge display) are hidden based on the occurrence of the production reception. desirable.

  Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)" according to this embodiment, this is also the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 212. When the performance reception is performed at timings tr51a and tr52a (FIG. 217 (c), FIG. 218 (c)) at which the “acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)” is in the output state after the occurrence of the period), the setting is performed. While the time (effective period) itself is ended, the "acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound)" is not terminated midway, but the timing at which it is output as the first acceptable sound (same as when there was no operation) The output state is maintained until the timing (FIG. 219 (c)).

  According to such a configuration, even after the reception of the performance is performed by the player's operation, the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception" is performed only by listening to the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound). It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the "effect (Figs. 217 to 219)" and the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 212)" is occurring. That is, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, the “state in which the specific type effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode” Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the transition has been made, it is expected that the feeling of tension will be appropriately maintained each time the production reception is made.

  Further, also in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)", if the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (in the figure, timings tr51a, 51b). ), As post-operation production according to production reception, post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) on production display device 1600 (first production member) and post-production production sound output (production sound) by speaker (second production member). And at least occur. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr52, regardless of which timing the set time (effective period) is received. On the other hand, as for the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound), the output state may be maintained for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is made. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) in a state where the timing tr52 has not ended. It is required to set so as to maintain the output state.

  In addition, regarding the acceptable acceptance sound and the operation-related display that appear in the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIGS. 217 to 219)”, another example or modification of the effect example shown in FIG. 212 is appropriately adopted. However, it is desirable to use the same method for each.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the “first suppression operation acceptance effect (conditional suppression / non-automatic acceptance effect)” that is generated at the timing tr51 in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, The process of outputting the "sound of BGM reproduction" in a weak suppression mode (a mode in which the suppression level is relatively low) is performed over a predetermined fixed time from the reception timing.

  According to such a configuration, when the effect reception is performed at a comparatively early timing tr51a after the set time (effective period) is generated (FIG. 217), the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode (the suppression degree is The timing tr53a for returning from the relatively low mode) to the non-suppressed mode also comes relatively early, and as a result, the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the "BGM reproduction sound". A relatively long interval (timings tr53a to tr40) is provided between the period and the period in which is strongly controlled. On the other hand, when the performance reception is performed at the relatively late timing tr51b after the set time (effective period) has occurred (FIG. 218), the timing at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is returned from the weak suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. tr53b also arrives relatively late, and as a result, a comparison is made between the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the weak suppression mode and the period in which the "BGM reproduction sound" is in the strong suppression mode. Only a relatively short interval (timing tr53b to tr40) is provided.

  That is, in this case, the later the timing at which the player's operation is performed in the first suppression operation acceptance effect (the closer to the timing tr52), the more the “sound of BGM reproduction” is set to the weak suppression mode, and then “ The time until the period in which the “BGM reproduction sound” is set to the strong suppression mode is started is shortened. Thereby, depending on whether the timing at which the player's operation is performed in the first suppression operation acceptance production is early or late, the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode comes relatively early and is continuous. It is possible to make it appear as if the suppression effect (weak suppression mode → strong suppression mode) is being executed, or the timing at which the strong suppression mode appears after the weak suppression mode ends is relatively late and the "strong suppression mode" is reached. It is possible to make people feel anxiety such as "may not appear", so that it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In this example of effect, the length of time (“predetermined time period”) in which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is output in the weak suppression mode is set to the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). Although it is set to the same as the execution time, it is not necessarily limited to this. However, the length of time during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode is set to be equal to or longer than the execution time of the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display, effect sound). This is desirable in order to highlight the post-operation performance when the performance reception is made. Furthermore, even if the performance reception is performed at the latest timing tr52 of the set time (effective period) of the "first suppression operation reception performance (conditional suppression / non-automatic reception performance)", the weak suppression mode is set. It is desirable to set the length of time during which the “BGM reproduction sound” is output in the weak suppression mode so that the timing to end comes before the timing tr40 to start the strong suppression mode. In this example of performance, the time of timings tr51a to 53a is the same as the time of timings tr51b to 53b.

As shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, within the effect corresponding to one variation pattern,
-First suppression operation acceptance effect (timing from tr50 to end of post-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode). ), And the second suppression operation acceptance effect (timing tr40 to end the after-operation effect) that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) with a relatively high suppression degree (strong suppression mode). Until period)
Can be generated sequentially. Then, as described above, the second suppression operation reception effect is a variation pattern in which "the effect mode (type of acceptable sound to be received, operation target, etc.) changes depending on the result of effect determination, but is not executed. On the other hand, the first suppression operation reception effect can be generated on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). ing.

  Also, as described above, the first suppression operation acceptance effect is determined by the effect determination (preliminary judgment, etc.) even in the effect corresponding to the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern) in which the second suppression operation acceptance effect is not generated. Since it is possible to appear when a special result is obtained, during symbol change, only one of the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect occurs, and the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the first suppression operation acceptance effect There may be cases where the two suppression operation reception effects sequentially occur.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect reception is performed in the first suppression operation reception effect during the period from "timing at which the weak suppression mode ends" to "timing at which the strong suppression mode starts". Since the variable period is set to be variable according to the timing when the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) is completed after the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is completed. It becomes possible to give a directing effect as to whether or not it occurs, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. When the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) occur sequentially, the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) does not occur. The degree of expectation (the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol) is higher than the case where only the first suppressing operation reception effect (weak suppressing mode) occurs. In addition, in the variation pattern for generating the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) is set before the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). When it occurs, a mode in which the second suppression operation reception effect has a higher degree of expectation than when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) does not occur (for example, the first allowable sound is output in the second mode). It will be executed in a higher rate.

  By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression thereof is high (second suppression operation reception effect in the strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression). As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first suppression operation reception effect of the mode). However, even if an attempt is made to infer whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode) when a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed. Actually, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, when the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode do not have a large difference in the volume value when the volume is suppressed, this is even more the case, and this makes the sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Can be favorably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  In this respect, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect are output when a set time (effective period) during which the effect acceptance is allowed occurs. The first allowable sound is output as the same effect sound over the same time (in the figure, is output in the "first aspect"). That is, in this case, even if the first permissible sound is confirmed, it is possible to leave it difficult to guess whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether the suppression mode is strong suppression mode or weak suppression mode). This makes it possible to maintain the tension for the production more appropriately and attract more players to the production.

  However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the game is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, it is feared that the interest of the game will be decreased. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect elements that are useful for estimating whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are set within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. The following items are prepared in a time-sequential manner.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, in the case where the above-described situation in which the first permissible sounds can be output as the same effect sound over the same time (in the figure, output in the “first aspect”) appears. Even if there is, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode based on the first allowable sound.

  That is, the first allowable sound that is output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated does not end the output midway even if the effect acceptance is made in the output state, and is output for a predetermined time. On the other hand, the first allowable sound output when the second suppression operation reception effect is generated, when the effect reception is performed in the output state, based on the effect reception, The output is terminated halfway (see FIGS. 217 and 218). In such a configuration, the same mode can be output as the first permissible sound in both the first suppressing operation reception effect and the second suppressing operation reception effect, and the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode is used. While increasing the sense of tension by rendering it difficult to guess, the first permissible sound itself also has a function that is useful for estimating whether it is a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. Since it is made possible, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game without being able to make the guess.

  Further, in addition to the first aspect, the first permissible sound that is output when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated is an aspect that cannot be output when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated (second aspect, third aspect, etc.). ) Output is also possible. That is, in this case, depending on the mode in which the first allowable sound is output, it is either the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode even if the effect reception is not performed when the first allowable sound is in the output state. It becomes possible to easily guess whether or not this is the case, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately. However, in order to maintain a feeling of tension with respect to the effect, the output in the mode (the second mode, the third mode, etc.) that cannot be output when the first suppression operation reception effect is generated is more than the output in the first mode. It is desirable to reduce the execution rate.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the second suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, the second allowable sound is output in addition to the first allowable sound. By confirming whether or not the permissible sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the effect reception is permitted, the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation. Since a difference is provided between the operation reception effect and the operation reception effect, it is possible to infer whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by checking the operation-related display. However, regarding the operation-related display, in addition to the fact that it appears later than the acceptance sound, there is only a partial difference between the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect. Therefore, a little difficulty is left in estimating whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, and the sense of tension for the performance is maintained.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound or the operation-related display is finished. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the post-operation effect according to the first suppression operation acceptance effect, both "effect by liquid crystal display" and "effect by effect sound" "are performed over a certain period of time from when the effect is accepted". On the other hand, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation acceptance effect, the “effect by effect sound” is “what is performed over a certain period of time after the effect is accepted”, but The “effect by” is “finished when a predetermined timing tr44 arrives”. That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the second suppression operation acceptance effect, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" depending on the timing at which the effect acceptance is made. Becomes variable, and a large deviation will occur. Therefore, by confirming such deviation, it becomes possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. ..

  However, even if the effect elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that can't be guessed, the interest in the game can be diminished in the end.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is performed based on the effect reception being performed within the set time (effective period). Is set to a weak suppression mode. On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the BGM reproduction effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. During this time, a set time (effective period) is generated so that performance reception can be performed. According to such a configuration, a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed by the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) and the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode). Since the timings to be changed become different, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode also by confirming the timing.

  Moreover, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, unlike the case of the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period). In this case, the effect reception is not automatically generated and the set time ends (see FIG. 219). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression processing (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by the reception of a specific type of effect sound (for example, effect sound of BGM reproduction) is also performed. Since it will not be avoided, it is possible to recognize that the effect was not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode, although there was a price that the effect after operation could not be confirmed.

  Further, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode) according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the strong suppression mode is ended is the same as the end timing of the post-operation effect. Or, it is set as a timing before that. Therefore, in the first suppression operation acceptance effect (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended may be set after the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing when the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception production according to the above-described production example, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is performed, in the production display device 1600 (first production member). The length of the period during which the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged (see FIGS. 217 and 218). ). On the other hand, in the second suppression operation reception effect, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) depends on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed. And the length of the period in which the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) performed by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed (see FIGS. 217 and 218).

  According to such a configuration, the performance is brought about in "when the performance reception (operation) is performed", and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the first allowance is made so that it is difficult to distinguish which of the first suppression operation reception effect and the second suppression operation reception effect in which the execution mode of the post-operation effect is different is occurring. Sounds are output as the same effect sound over the same time, and effect elements that help distinguish them are arranged in a time series. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed while maintaining a sense of tension about the production.

  Further, in the above-described configuration, the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect, which are different in the execution mode of the post-operation effect, can be intentionally mixed in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern. Therefore, each time the operation reception effect is generated, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension about "when to perform the operation reception (operation)". In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect, in addition to the aspect in which the first suppression operation acceptance effect and the second suppression operation acceptance effect are mixed in the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern, the effect corresponding to the one variation pattern It is desirable that a mode in which only the second suppression operation acceptance effect (or the first suppression operation acceptance effect) appears multiple times is executable.

  In addition, if the purpose is to obtain only the action effect based on the performance of "when to perform the performance reception (operation)", a specific type of performance in the first suppression operation reception performance and the second suppression operation reception performance. The sound (the effect sound of BGM reproduction) may not be suppressed, and the output in the non-suppressed mode may be maintained.

  Further, regardless of at which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is made, the post-operation display production (liquid crystal display) on the production display device 1600 (first production member) and the speaker (second production member). ), The operation reception performance in which the length of the period during which the post-operation performance sound output (performance sound) is performed in parallel is unchanged, provided that a special result is obtained in performance determination (notice determination, etc.). It is desirable that it should not occur as a symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern.

  That is, in this case, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to infer that the special result has been obtained in the notice effect determination (the expectation is relatively high). Therefore, regardless of the result of the notice effect determination, the variation pattern always occurs, which is different from the effect itself (symbol effect), and when it is recognized that it is additionally performed, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game. Like It should be noted that depending on at which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the speaker (second effect member) are used. Regarding the second suppression operation acceptance production in which the length of the period in which the post-operation production sound output (production sound) is performed in parallel changes, even if it occurs only as the production of the fluctuation pattern itself (design production) There may be both a case where it occurs as an effect (symbol effect) of the variation pattern itself and a case where it occurs on the condition that a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.).

  Note that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a suppression degree lower than the strong suppression mode may appear even when the operation opportunity is not provided (when the first suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). You can That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. Then, in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern, the more the weak suppression mode appears, including the first suppression operation acceptance effect, the higher the degree of suppression becomes until the symbol fluctuation is stopped ( If the second suppression operation acceptance effect is further increased), it is possible to further improve the effectivity through the suppression situation for the “effect sound of BGM reproduction”. In addition, when the production reception is made within the set time (effective period) that occurs while the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is not in the suppression mode, "whether the number of times the weak suppression mode appears increases (Fig. It is possible to add more fun to the performance of "the mode shown in 212 or the mode shown in FIG. 217)".

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the second suppression operation acceptance effect does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the performance of whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation acceptance effect is generated, the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated based on the effect acceptance within the set time (effective period). The suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is adopted. However, instead of this, even when the first suppressing operation reception effect is generated, as in the case where the second suppressing operation reception effect is generated, “BGM reproduction effect sound” is generated before the set time occurs. May be set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode), and the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed may be generated in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode). In this case, even if the same variation pattern is selected, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" will be output when the predetermined timing arrives, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.). Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is set or the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not set, it is possible to broaden the range of performance. In the first suppression operation acceptance effect, the timing at which the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-suppression mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation effect is ended, or after that. It is desirable to make it come.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and 217 to 219, in the second suppression operation reception effect (strong suppression mode), the “BGM reproduction effect sound” is strongly suppressed (suppression mode or The process of outputting silently or not outputting) was ended at the same timing as the end timing of the post-operation production or before the end timing, but the end timing of the post-operation production came. It may be ended later. In this case, at least as long as the special symbol (decorative symbol) is changing (unless the symbol variation is stopped), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may not be returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode. Good.

  As described above, the acceptable reception sound does not have to occur slightly before the set time (effective period), and may be output based on the occurrence of the set time (effective period).

  In the operation reception effect (second suppression operation reception effect) in the strong suppression mode shown in FIGS. 213 to 215 and FIGS. 217 to 219, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). ) Is ended at a predetermined timing tr44 in the effect according to the variation pattern, while the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) is accepted. It is supposed to be terminated when a certain time has passed from the time. However, instead of this, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are changed. It may be configured to end each at a predetermined timing in the effect corresponding to the pattern, or after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and speaker (second effect member). Both the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by (1) may be ended when a certain time has elapsed since the effect reception.

  It should be noted that the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) to be suppressed is the timing at which the effect changes at the start of the symbol variation or within the effect corresponding to the variation pattern (for example, SP reach effect is started. The output is triggered by the arrival of (such as timing). On the other hand, the post-operation effect is started at an indefinite timing (a desired operation) within the set time.

  The specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 213 and 214 and the specific variation pattern described in the production examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219 may be different variation patterns or the same. It may be a variation pattern. Further, the special effect state may be an effect state when the big hit probability involved in the big hit determination is relatively high, instead of the look-ahead effect zone.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to put the "specific type effect sound" in an inaudible state (silence (audible volume is 0) or not output (end channel allocation)) Good.

  In each of the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and that the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "first suppression operation acceptance effect", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "second suppression operation acceptance effect", refer to FIGS. 213 and 214. However, as described above, “when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)” and “when selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode) based on the result of the notice production determination ) ”. Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is the strong suppression mode, not the weak suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect reception has been made by "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation performance has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
First operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to the specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” is assumed to be a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” is given an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is “a thing that can give an operation opportunity to a player in a state where it is moved to a specific position”. However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may be provided with the “first operation mode” and the “second operation mode”, respectively, and the operation opportunity may be given by any of these modes.

And, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
-While outputting a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) in a non-suppressing mode, a non-suppressing operation reception effect that is performed from generation of a set time (effective period) to execution of post-operation effect, and -A suppression operation acceptance effect is provided in which a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is in a non-output state. Further, as the suppression operation acceptance effect,
A first suppression operation acceptance effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively low suppression degree (weak suppression mode) (for example, the above-mentioned "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect"). )), And a second type of suppression operation reception effect that suppresses a specific type of effect sound (for example, a BGM reproduction effect sound) with a relatively high degree of suppression (strong suppression mode) (for example, the above-described “inhibition / automatic reception”). Production ”)
Is prepared.

However, here, as the second suppression operation reception effect,
-While the particular type of effect sound is suppressed in the strong suppression mode (whether in the suppression mode or silently output or in the non-output state), the first operation mode with respect to the operation means (Here, the operation button 410 is used to suppress the non-moving acceptance reception effect to which the operation opportunity is given, and Or in a non-output state), a controlled movement reception effect is provided in which an operation opportunity is given to the operation means in the second operation mode (here, the sword decoration 5001 is removed). By preparing, it is possible to further improve the performance when an operation opportunity is given.

  FIG. 220 shows an example of an effect (inhibited movement reception effect) that appears in “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as an operation target (second operation mode)” in the second suppression operation acceptance effect (suppression / automatic acceptance effect). It is a time chart shown. In the second suppression operation acceptance effect (suppression / automatic acceptance effect), regarding the effect example (suppressed non-moving acceptance effect) that appears in “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, This is as described with reference to FIGS. 213 and 217 (the period from the timing tr40 to the end of the post-operation effect).

  As shown in FIG. 220, in the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect), also when “the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode)”, the second suppression operation reception In the production (suppression / automatic reception production), basically the same as “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target (first operation mode)”, unless otherwise noted (FIG. 213, FIG. 214, (FIGS. 217 to 219), the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

  However, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a process of moving the operation receiving portion to the specific position by the driving force when the set time (effective period) occurs Although it is required to be performed, there is a problem in which timing the process is performed.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least in a specific game state (normal game state or probability variation short game state), as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), first, The process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the timing tr40 at which the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode arrives. Therefore, for example, when a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, even if the set time for which the effect reception is allowed occurs, the operation opportunity in the second operation mode Is not given, and the operation opportunity in the first operation mode is only given. That is, in this case, unless the particular type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode, even if the operation opportunity is given, this is not the second operation mode. It becomes possible to prevent the user from performing an operation in an operation mode on the wrong side.

  On the other hand, when the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is set to the strong suppression mode (timing tr40), the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode under the strong suppression mode. There is a possibility of both being performed and a case where an operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode. However, the player "whether the operation opportunity is given in which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode" is triggered by the fact that the specific type of effect sound (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. Since it becomes possible to concentrate on ", it becomes possible to suppress the occurrence of operational error between them.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by concealing which of the first operation mode and the second operation mode is given until just before the operation opportunity is given, from the timing tr40. Tension and amusement of the game until the production is accepted after the reception of the production is started are appropriately maintained. More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (h), when the timing tr42 at which the set time (effective period) occurs, the operation receiving unit starts moving to a specific position. I am going to let you. Here, in the case where the operation opportunity is given in the second operation mode, the degree of expectation (the proportion of the jackpot pattern that appears when the pattern change is stopped) is higher than when the operation opportunity is given in the first operation mode. The notice production determination is made so that

  However, in this case, during the short time after the set time (effective period) has occurred (until the movement to the specific position by the operation receiving unit is completed), the performance reception itself is allowed. Nevertheless, since it is difficult to properly operate the operation receiving portion, the length as the set time (effective period) is substantially reduced, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 220 (c) and 220 (d), regarding the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position, the acceptance allowable sound is generated. The first mode having the shortest output time of the (first permissible sound) is set as a time shorter than the time until the output ends. As a result, even if any mode (the first mode, the above-described second mode, the third mode, etc.) is output as the reception permissible sound (first permissible sound), the performance reception is performed in the middle of the output state. Can be performed (the output can be ended halfway), and even if the second operation mode appears, it is difficult for the inconvenience to be produced.

  Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, regarding the time required to move the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position by the driving force, the operation receiving portion is not operated and the operation receiving portion is moved to the specific position by the driving force. From the original position to the original position, the moving speed is made to be shorter than the time required to move the original position to the original position (see FIG. 220 (h)). According to such a movement mode, it becomes possible to appeal that the user is trying to reduce the time that is substantially cut off as the set time (effective period), and the game resulting from the reduction of the time It is expected to suppress the dissatisfaction of people.

  Further, in order to suppress such dissatisfaction more preferably, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, the non-suppression shown in FIG. 212 is set as the set time (effective period). The operation reception effect of the mode (from the timing tr31 to the post-operation effect) or the operation reception effect of the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217 (from the timing tr50 to the post-operation effect) is set to “operation reception”. It is desirable to set a time value having a length greater than or equal to the sum of "the time required to move the set from the original position to the specific position". According to such a configuration, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode, a longer time value that is surplus to compensate for the substantially reduced time is set. Since the set time (effective period) that the user has is generated, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game. In this case, in order to standardize the programs, a set time having a similar length can be set even when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. desirable.

  However, as described above, the production of the set time (effective period) is substantially cut off without the effect reception being substantially made at the time of the timings tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated. In view of this, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is generated, as the set time (effective period), the operation reception effect in the non-suppression mode shown in FIG. 212 (from timing tr31 to post-operation effect). ) Or the set time (effective period) of the operation reception effect (from the timing tr50 to the effect after the operation) in the weak suppression mode shown in FIG. 217 is “required when moving the operation receiving portion from the original position to the specific position”. "Time" and "time of timings tr42A to tr43 after the automatic button function is activated" are added, and a time value having a length greater than or equal to each is set. Rukoto can be said to be more desirable. Also in this case, in order to standardize the programs, the set time having the same length should be set when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode. Is desirable.

  Further, as described above, when the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is being executed in the second operation mode and there is no operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, 220 (a), (h) to (l), the effect reception is automatically generated at the timing tr42A, and the post-operation display effect in the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) based on the effect reception. At least the (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are executed as the post-operation effect. However, in this case, as is clear from a comparison between FIGS. 220 (g) and 220 (l), the execution time of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) becomes short. Therefore, there is concern that the interest in playing games may decline.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 220 (h), the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the second operation mode. If there is no operation on the operation receiving part within the set time, "the speed at which the operation receiving part is moved from the specific position to the original position by the driving force" is set to "move from the original position to the specific position". It is slower than the "time speed", so that the moving state is maintained for a relatively long time. According to such a configuration, the operation receiving unit moves the movable effect (after-operation effect) in exchange for shortening the execution time of the after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). It becomes possible to expect to function as a part of the game), so that the interest in the game can be favorably maintained.

  In addition, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 220 (h), the "moving effect from the specific position to the original position" by the operation receiving unit is after the operation corresponding to the automatic reception of the effect reception (automatic button function). Although it is started when a predetermined timing during the execution of the effect arrives, it may be started at the timing tr42A at which the effect reception is automatically generated as in the post-operation effect.

  However, no matter how slow the "movement from the specific position to the original position" is performed, it is not possible to earn sufficient time for the movable production, and there is a concern that it is difficult to maintain the entertainment appeal. Therefore, in the effect example shown in FIG. 220 (h), after the operation receiving portion is moved from the specific position to the original position (or in the vicinity thereof), a vibration effect for vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. Therefore, the period from the start of movement from the specific position to the original position (or its vicinity) to the end of the vibration of the operation receiving part depends on the "operation receiving part not operated by the player". It is designed to function as a movable production period. As a result, it becomes possible to suitably realize the movable effect using the "operation receiving portion that has not been operated by the player", and as a result of automatic effect reception, the effect display device 1600 (first effect member). Therefore, it is expected that the performance of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) when the execution time becomes short can be appropriately maintained. In this case, it is more preferable that the operation receiving portion is used as a movable effect if the operation receiving portion is caused to emit light while the operation receiving portion is being moved from the specific position to the original position. It is possible to appeal to.

  Here, regarding the movable effect period (moving time from the specific position to the original position, the vibration time) by the “operation receiving unit not operated by the player”, when the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached. It is desirable that the processing be ended before the timing tr44. As a result, the specific type of effect sound is returned from the strong suppression mode to the non-suppression mode, and it is possible to smoothly promote the progress (switching of effects) in the effect content corresponding to this.

  In addition, the difference between the case where the second suppression operation reception effect (suppression / automatic reception effect) is executed in the first operation mode is that a message sound such as "Send your sword!" Is given as the second allowable sound (message sound). In some cases, a message display such as "pushing in" and an image of the "sword decoration image SYG" may be displayed as the output or the operation-related display, so that an operation error can be less likely to occur. become.

  Further, as described above, in the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode), the operation opportunity is not given in such a second operation mode, but the "specific type effect sound" is set as the weak suppression mode. If the operation opportunity is given originally, an operation error may be promoted when the recognition of which of the weak suppression mode and the strong suppression mode appears is incorrect. In this respect, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 217 to 219, when the first suppression operation reception effect (weak suppression mode) occurs, an operation opportunity is given under the condition that the “specific type effect sound” is in the weak suppression mode. Since the weak suppression mode is made to appear based on the reception of the performance without granting the effect, there is a wasteful feeling of tension and expectation that “an operation opportunity in the second operation mode may be granted”. You will be able to provide a performance without having it.

  Note that, in the above-described effect example (second operation mode), even when the operation receiving unit is operated within the set time, as in the case where the operation receiving unit is not operated within the set time, FIG. As shown in c), when the predetermined timing (the same timing) within the period in which the post-operation effect is executed arrives, the vibration effect for vibrating the operation receiving portion is performed. According to such a configuration, regardless of at what timing the post-operation effect occurs, when the predetermined timing before the timing tr44 at which the strong suppression mode ends is reached, the vibration effect is performed. From this, it becomes possible to suggest that the strong suppression mode will soon be terminated and new production progress will appear.

  However, when there is an operation on the operation receiving unit within the set time, the vibration effect is started early based on the fact that the effect reception is performed by the operation, so that the post-operation effect during the period is being performed. You may try to further improve the interest of the game. That is, in this case, when the operation receiving portion is operated within the set time, the vibration effect is performed for a longer time than when the operation receiving portion is not operated within the set time.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the process of moving the operation receiving unit to the specific position is not performed unless the effect sound of the specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode. However, instead of this, when the effect reception is permitted when the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is in the strong suppression mode, the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction effect sound) is not suppressed. When the effect reception is allowed when the effect sound of a specific type (effect sound of BGM reproduction) is in the weak suppression mode, the ratio of operation opportunities in the second operation mode (0 Or may be 100).

  In the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 146 to 220), in the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function can be activated, the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated is set as the set time (effective period). It is desirable to set a time value that is longer than the sum of "the time from the activation of the automatic button function until the end of the set time" for the set time (effective period). . According to such a configuration, a set time (effective period) having a longer time value, which is more than the amount of time substantially deleted as the period in which the acceptance of the performance is allowed, is left over. Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the amusement of entertainment.

By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as an operation reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state,
・ The operation reception performance (inherent reception performance) executed as the performance (design performance) of the fluctuation pattern itself based on the result of the fluctuation pattern determination, and that the special result is obtained in the performance determination (notice determination, etc.) The operation reception performance (additional reception performance) executed as an additional performance to the performance of the fluctuation pattern itself (effect pattern)
Is to be prepared at least.

  That is, the "internal reception effect" is a variation pattern determination based on the result of the jackpot determination (determination of which variation pattern to execute the symbol effect) when a special result is obtained (a special variation pattern is selected. Then, it is decided to be executed within the effect according to the determined variation pattern. On the other hand, the “additional reception effect” means that even if the “predetermined result capable of generating the additional reception effect” is obtained in the variation pattern determination (even if the predetermined variation pattern is selected). It is not necessarily executed unless a result indicating that the "additional reception effect" is generated is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) according to the selected variation pattern. Therefore, after the effect corresponding to the variation pattern is once started, the effect determination is performed rather than the occurrence of the “internal reception effect” that is associated with the variation pattern (effect pattern) and its occurrence is confirmed. It can be said that the occurrence of the "additional reception effect", which is allowed to occur depending on the result of the (preliminary judgment, etc.), is more beneficial to the player and is more important for enhancing the interest of the game. Even if the same effect content (effect pattern) appears as an effect corresponding to the variation pattern, if the "additional reception effect" occurs in the effect, the "additional reception effect" is generated in the effect. The proportion (expectation) of the big hit symbol when the symbol fluctuation is stopped is higher than that when “” does not occur.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state, a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is suppressed or Whether the production reception is allowed while the sound is being output silently or in the non-output state, and whether a specific type of effect sound (effect sound of "BGM reproduction") is being output in a non-suppressed manner There is a case where production reception is allowed. On the other hand, in the additional reception effect that can occur when in the normal game state, the effect reception is not allowed in the suppression mode or silent output, or in the non-output state, While the specific type of effect sound is being output in a non-suppressed manner, effect acceptance is allowed. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, when the effect reception is allowed, by paying attention to whether the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state, the additional effect can be obtained. It becomes possible to recognize the possibility that the reception effect will occur, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the internal reception effect that can occur when in the normal gaming state is operated even if the operation is not detected within the set time for which the reception of the effect is permitted. In the case where it is executed in the automatic reception mode in which post-production can be generated, and when the operation is not detected within the set time when the production reception is allowed, the post-operation post-production does not occur and the set time ends There is a case where it is executed in a reception mode. On the other hand, the additional reception effect that may occur in the normal gaming state is not executed in the automatic reception mode but is executed in the non-automatic reception mode. That is, in this case, in the normal game state, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the additional reception effect is generated by paying attention to whether effect reception is automatically performed (automatic button function) within the set time. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained until the production is accepted.

  FIG. 221 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 1 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 221, when the variation pattern 1 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 1 or the like) performed at the start of the symbol change, the advance notice effect At least a determination as to whether or not to execute A is performed. As a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, the notice effect A is set for the symbol effect (effect pattern) when the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 arrives. When it is not determined that the notice effect A is executed, the notice effect A does not appear even if the timing tr61 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 comes. The symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 1 is only executed.

  Here, when it is determined that the advance notice effect A is executed as a result of the effect determination, when the timing tr61 arrives, not only the display effect but also the effect sound and the lamp effect change pattern 1 the effect (the design) itself. Production) is additionally executed. Note that "additionally executed" can be realized, for example, by displaying the notice effect A on a layer having a higher priority than the layer in which the display effect of the variation pattern 1 itself appears. is there. At this time, the notice effect A may be displayed in such a manner that it covers all of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1 and makes it invisible, or covers only a part of the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 1. The notice effect A may be displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the lamp effect, the “lamp effect according to the occurrence of the notice effect A” is output with priority over the “ramp effect based on the variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. Further, in the case of the effect sound, by assigning the “effect sound according to the notice effect A” to a channel different from the “effect sound based on the variation pattern 1”, the effect sound is based on the “variation pattern 1 (effect pattern)”. The "effect sound according to the notice effect A" is additionally output to the "effect sound".

  FIG. 222 is a time chart showing effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 2 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 222, when the variation pattern 2 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, first, in the effect determination (preliminary determination according to the variation pattern 2 or the like) performed at the start of the symbol variation, “addition At least a determination is made as to whether or not to execute "target reception performance". Here, the variation pattern 2 according to this effect example is the same as the “predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212”. Therefore, as a result of this effect determination, when it is determined that the "additional reception effect" is to be executed, the "additional reception effect" is a symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 (the predetermined variation pattern shown in FIG. 212). When the internal timing tr31 arrives, it will be additionally executed for the symbol effect (effect pattern) (from the timing tr31 until the post-operation effect is completed), and the "additional acceptance effect" is executed. When the determination is not made, the "additional reception effect" does not appear even when the timing tr31 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 2 arrives, and the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern 2 is executed. Become.

  Here, regarding the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the variation pattern 2 (predetermined variation pattern) maintains the output state in the non-suppressed mode. In the meantime, the first allowable sound is output at the timing tr31, the set time (valid period) is generated at the timing tr32, and at the timing tr33, the set time ends without the automatic button function being enabled. Since these are as described above with reference to FIG. 212 and the like, description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222 is not particularly described as “effect contents when the low expected non-suppression reception effect is executed in the non-automatic reception mode” shown in FIG. 212. The parts are basically the same, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples can be appropriately adopted.

However, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) according to this effect example, as shown in FIG. 222, an example in which the post-operation effect corresponding to the effect reception is executed in the mode of the another example described above in FIG. 212. It has been described as. Therefore, in the operation reception effect (additional reception effect) shown in FIG. 222, when the effect reception is performed within the set time (effective period) (timing tr32a in the figure), it is based on the fact that the effect reception is performed. Then, "after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) in effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" and "after-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by speaker (second effect member)" are used as after-operation effects. At least it is generated, but regarding the post-operation effect,
The "post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member)" is ended at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tr33, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received. ,
"The post-operation effect sound output (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member)" is executed in such a manner that it is ended when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing of effect reception. It will be.

  FIG. 223 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the variation pattern 3 is selected in the variation pattern determination.

  As shown in FIG. 223, when the variation pattern 3 is selected as the result of the variation pattern determination, any result is obtained by the effect determination (such as the advance notice determination according to the variation pattern 3) performed at the start of the symbol variation. Regardless of whether it has been performed, at timing tr40 in the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3, the above-described “strong suppression mode” is performed for the effect sound of “BGM reproduction”, and the “strong suppression mode” is performed. At the timing tr41 that appears while appears, "inherent reception effect" is generated as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern 3 (until the post-operation effect is ended from the timing tr41).

  Here, the variation pattern 3 according to this effect example is the same as the "specific variation pattern shown in FIGS. 213 to 215, or 217 to 220, and the like." Therefore, regarding the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) shown in FIG. 223, the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” based on the variation pattern 3 (specific variation pattern) is strongly suppressed (for example, silent (volume 0)). Output state or a non-audible state such as a non-output state), when the timing tr41 arrives, the first allowable sound is output, and the set time (effective period) is generated at the timing tr42. When the "timing tr42A" prior to the timing tr43 at which the lapse of time arrives without effect reception, the above-mentioned automatic button function is activated, but regarding these, as for "Fig. 213 to Fig. 215 or Fig. 217 to 220 ”and the like, and the description thereof will be omitted. That is, the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) shown in FIG. 223 is the same as the effect content of the “suppression / automatic acceptance effect” shown in FIG. 213, and the related effects described above, other examples, and modified examples ( 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, etc.) can be appropriately adopted.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least in the normal game state, during the period in which the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the strongly suppressed mode, "internal reception" is performed as the symbol effect based on the variation pattern. Although "production" may occur, "additional reception production" that is additionally executed to the symbol production based on the variation pattern does not occur, whereas "BGM reproduction" During the period in which the effect sound of "is in the non-suppression mode, there may be a case where" inherent reception effect ", which is a symbol effect based on the variation pattern, occurs, and additionally to the symbol effect based on the variation pattern. The "additional reception effect" to be executed may be generated in some cases.

  That is, in this case, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" based on the variation pattern is in the strong suppression mode, the possibility that the operation reception effect is the "additional reception effect" is eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to generate the set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed in the environment in which the operation reception production is concentrated in which mode the production is performed. .. On the other hand, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is being output in the non-suppressed mode, it can be recognized that the additional reception effect may be generated. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained.

  In addition, in order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, in addition to the case where the "additional reception effect" and the "inherent reception effect" appear in different fluctuation patterns 2 and 3, one fluctuation pattern (for example, It is desirable that the "additional reception performance" and the "inherent reception performance" can sequentially appear even in the performance corresponding to the specific variation pattern (variation pattern 3). It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" be generated at a timing before the "intrinsic reception effect".

  More preferably, the "additional reception effect" and "inherent reception effect" are included in the effect corresponding to one variation pattern (specific variation pattern) while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the non-suppressing mode. “,” And “BGM reproduction” are set to the strong suppression mode, and “inherent reception effect” can be further made to appear. According to such a configuration, it is possible to understand which of the “additional reception effect” and the “inherent reception effect” is occurring depending on the situation of the suppression mode (strong suppression mode). , A case where it is difficult to understand which of the “additional reception performance” and the “inherent reception performance” is occurring (non-suppression mode), and a suppression mode for the production sound of “BGM reproduction” Through this, you will be able to improve your interest in playing games.

  Furthermore, when the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode in the symbol effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the intrinsic effect is generated. It is desirable that the "additional reception effect" does not occur within the period from the end of the reception effect to the stop of the symbol variation. According to such a configuration, when the operation reception effect is generated while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect may be the “additional reception effect”. Not only will it be eliminated, but even the possibility that "additional reception effect" will appear before the symbol fluctuation is stopped will be eliminated, so "additional reception effect" will occur. On the other hand, which mode (acceptable reception sound, type of operation means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.) in which the generated "internal reception effect" is executed without giving any sense of expectation You will be able to focus.

  In addition, when the "additional reception effect" occurs, "inherent reception effect (both non-suppressing mode and strong suppression mode)" that occurs after the "additional reception effect" does not occur. As described above, it is desirable to increase the rate of execution in a mode with a high degree of expectation (acceptable sound, type of operating means, mode of post-operation effect, etc.).

  Also, as described above, when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is set to the strong suppression mode, the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is always generated during the period in which the strong suppression mode is set. You may. In this case, in the plurality of variation patterns that are the selection candidates in the variation pattern determination, “a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. The "variation pattern that does not occur" is not included, and the "variation pattern that causes the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode" is included when the strong suppression mode is set. . Alternatively, even if the effect sound of "BGM playback" is set to the strong suppression mode, the period of the strong suppression mode may be ended without the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) being generated. You can In this case, in the plurality of variation patterns that are the selection candidates in the variation pattern determination, “a strong suppression mode is set, but an operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) is performed during the period of the strong suppression mode. A variation pattern that does not occur "and a" variation pattern that causes the operation reception effect (inherent reception effect) during the period of the strong suppression mode when the strong suppression mode is set "are included. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the operation reception effect (intrinsic reception effect) occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “strong suppression mode”, the “strong” effect is generated. Even if the player does not notice that the "suppression mode" is set, it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is eliminated based on the following effect elements.

  That is, when the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", first, even when the first allowable sound is the "additional reception effect". Even when the effect sound that can be output is output over the same time period (in the figure, it is output in the "first aspect"), based on the first allowable sound, the "additional reception effect", not the "additional reception effect" It is possible to recognize that "internal reception performance" has occurred. More specifically, the first permissible sound (see FIG. 222) that is output when the "additional reception effect" is generated is terminated in the middle of the output even if the effect reception is made in the output state. Instead of outputting it, the output sound is output for a predetermined time, whereas the output sound of "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode", it is output when the "internal reception effect" is generated. When the effect reception is performed in the output state, the first allowable sound (see FIG. 223) causes the output to be terminated midway based on the effect reception.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the "internal reception effect" is generated in the "strong suppression mode" of the effect sound of "BGM reproduction", in addition to the first allowable sound, Since the second permissible sound is also output, by checking whether or not the second permissible sound is output, the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is eliminated. It is also possible to recognize that However, as described above, the second allowable sound does not necessarily have to be prepared.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 222 and 223, the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the production reception is allowed is also performed. , "BGM playback" is in the "strong suppression mode" when "internal reception performance" is occurring (with message display), and "additional reception performance" is occurring. The case (no message is displayed) is made different, and it is possible to recognize that the possibility that the "additional reception effect" has occurred is eliminated.

  Further, in the "internal reception effect" that occurs when the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", the above-described automatic button function can be activated, In the "additional reception effect", the automatic button function described above is not activated, and this also eliminates the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is occurring. It is possible to recognize.

  In this way, when the "inherent reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode", various effects other than the effect elements related to the "suppression mode" are produced. Since the aspect different from that when the "additional reception effect" is generated appears in the element, the possibility that the "additional reception effect" is generated is relatively excluded. It is possible to easily recognize it, and it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the “inherent reception effect”.

  On the other hand, in the case where the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM playback" is in the "non-suppression mode", there is a common point between "additional reception effect" and various effect elements. The additional reception performance is generated by making it difficult to recognize whether the "internal reception performance" or the "additional reception performance" is occurring. We are trying to provide directivity that makes us aware of the possibility that there is.

  FIG. 224 is a time chart showing the effect contents that appear when the “inherent acceptance effect” as a symbol effect based on the variation pattern occurs while the effect sound of “BGM reproduction” is in the “non-suppressing mode”. Is. Note that the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 224 corresponds to the fluctuation pattern when a fluctuation pattern different from the “variation pattern capable of generating the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 222 and 223” is selected. It may also occur as a symbol effect. However, here, it is assumed that when the same variation pattern (specific variation pattern) as the operation reception production shown in FIGS. 222 and 223 is selected, it occurs as a pattern production according to the specific variation pattern. .

  As shown in FIG. 224, the “inherent reception effect” that occurs in the “non-suppressing mode” also occurs in the “strong suppressing mode” that is “internal reception effect” that occurs in the “strong suppressing mode”. In the same way as with "target reception performance", whichever result is obtained in performance determination (preliminary determination), it always occurs when a predetermined timing (here, timing tr71) in the symbol performance arrives. It has become a thing.

  However, the first permissible sound (first mode) output when the "internal reception effect" shown in FIG. 224 is generated is the first permissible sound output when the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222 is generated. Similar to the sound (first aspect), even if the production reception is made in the output state, the output is not ended midway and is output for a predetermined time (timing tr72a). . Therefore, when the first permissible sound is output in the first mode, it is difficult to distinguish which of the “internal reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” is generated based on this. .

  Further, in the "internal reception effect" shown in FIG. 224, the second permissible sound is not output together with the output of the first permissible sound (first aspect), and this point also shows in FIG. 222. It is the same as the "additional reception performance".

  Further, in the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the operation means to be operated is also displayed as an operation-related display (display prompting operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which effect reception is allowed. Only the slurped image and the gauge display indicating the remaining time are displayed, and the message display is not displayed. In this respect also, similar to the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222. Has become.

  Further, in the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, the target to which the operation opportunity is given is limited to the “operation button 410”, and the “sword ornament 5001” is not the operation target. This is also the case with this point, which is similar to the "additional reception effect" shown in FIG. 222.

  Further, in the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, when the operation detection is not performed within the set time (effective period), the above-mentioned automatic button function is not activated and the after-operation effect is generated. The timing tr73 is reached when the set time (effective period) ends without being generated, and this point is also the same as the “additional reception effect” shown in FIG. 222.

  In this way, when the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "strong suppression mode". However, unlike the case where "internal reception performance" occurs, various performance elements are common to the time when "additional reception performance" occurs, and "additional reception performance" can occur. You will be able to make you aware of sex.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, "inherent reception performance (internal reception performance in which the automatic button function is not activated)" is selected while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode". Is generated, the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) may be output, and the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself may not be output, and the set time may occur. .. On the other hand, when the "additional reception effect" is generated while the "BGM reproduction" effect sound is in the "non-suppression mode", the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) itself is not output. The set acceptance time is not generated, and the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound) is always output.

  According to such a configuration, when the production reception is permitted while the production sound of the "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", when the reception acceptable sound is output, "internal reception production". It is difficult to recognize which of the "additional reception performance" and the "additional reception performance" is occurring, but when the acceptance allowable sound is not output, the "internal reception performance" is not the "additional reception performance". You will be able to recognize that it is occurring. It should be noted that when the "internal reception effect" is generated while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode", whether or not the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output is determined. It is desirable that the determination is made according to the type of the variation pattern, not the effect determination. The "internal reception effect" in the non-suppressing mode in which the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output, and the "internal reception effect" in the non-suppressing mode in which the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output As for, the same symbol effect (for example, a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern) may be sequentially executed.

  Further, according to the above configuration, when the operation reception effect in which the automatic button function is not activated appears, the “internal reception effect” and the “additional reception effect” are generated when the reception allowable sound (first allowable sound) is output. While it is difficult to recognize which of the two is occurring, it is possible to recognize that the operation reception effect is the "internal reception effect" when the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) is not output. Like

  In the "additional reception effect", it has been described above that the first allowable sound can be output in a mode different from the first mode based on the result of the effect determination (advance notification determination). It may be configured such that it cannot be output when the "internal reception effect" occurs while the effect sound of "BGM reproduction" is in the "non-suppression mode" (for example, "specification shown in FIG. 216"). Aspect ”). However, in the different mode, it is desirable that the first permissible sound has a lower generation ratio than that output in the first mode.

  Regarding the “inherent reception effect” shown in FIG. 224, as for a portion without particular notice, another example or modified example relating to the operation reception effect shown in FIG. 212 may be appropriately used.

  Note that, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated that the effect determination is performed while the symbol effect is being performed, but the effect determination is actually performed. Is performed at the start of the symbol variation.

  In the example productions shown in FIG. 212 to FIG. 224, regarding the aspect of the post-operation production according to the production reception, the case where the big hit is obtained in the big hit determination and the case where the big hit is lost in the big hit determination And may be different. For example, when a big hit is obtained in the big hit determination, the example shown in FIGS. The post-operation effect may be performed in a manner different from the effect example shown in 224.

  As described above, the performance control in the peripheral control board 1510 has been conventionally realized by executing a program for individually controlling various performance devices, a program for linking a plurality of performance devices, and the like in combination. These programs are described by a program code representing the operation content and control procedure of the effect device for each content of the notice in addition to the command associated with the variation pattern, and are created by a programmer having a high technology. In the liquid crystal drawing, each effect drawing data is called in a frame in which an effect is executed, and a plurality of effect drawings (background, design, notice, hold, etc.) are combined.

  However, in recent game machines, in order to improve the performance of the hardware and the interest of the game machine, it is required to execute a wide variety of effects, and it is necessary to realize complicated effect control. As a result, each programmer is required to have a high level of skill and the number of man-hours for development is increased, making it difficult to secure the necessary personnel (programmers) in terms of quality and quantity. Further, since the total amount of program codes of the effect control program is increased, the number of man-hours required for checking the operation of the gaming machine and testing for the purpose of quality improvement is also increased.

  Therefore, although this is also described above, in the peripheral control board 1510 of the present embodiment, in order to shorten the development period and improve the quality, the effect executed in cooperation with the liquid crystal drawing (image display) is not realized by the program code. Instead, the program data for gaming machines is output by a tool that creates a liquid crystal drawing effect, and various effects are executed based on the output program data, which shortens the development period and improves quality. I am trying to do it.

  More specifically, the peripheral control board 1510 prepares scenario data configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each of which represents the content of the effect. Each of the blocks is provided with a flag (usability information) indicating whether the effect based on the block can be executed. This flag (usability information) is, for example, stored as rewritable information on the RAM.

  In the scenario data, for example, blocks as many as the number of effects prepared as candidates that can be executed based on the result of the effect determination are combined in time series. That is, when the start condition for starting the symbol variation is satisfied, first, an effect determination of which type of effect is to be generated among those effects is performed, and when the result is obtained, Based on the obtained results, the flag (usability information) is set to the ON state for the block corresponding to the effect type for which the determination result of execution is obtained, and the determination result of execution is obtained. The flag (usability information) of the block corresponding to the production type that has not been set is maintained in the OFF state. As a result, after the symbol variation (variation pattern) is started, the scenario data is processed (analyzed) in time series (every unit time (1 frame)) to correspond to the block set to the ON state. Only the type of performance is selectively executed.

  Here, as the scenario data, different data may be prepared for each type of variation pattern, or may be prepared without depending on the variation pattern. When different types of variation patterns are prepared as different data, only the blocks corresponding to the production types that may occur separately for each variation pattern are configured as scenario data that are combined in time series. Of these blocks, only the flag (usability information) of the block determined to be executed is operated in the ON state. On the other hand, when it is prepared as data commonly prepared for each variation pattern, blocks (numbers corresponding to the blocks) corresponding to all effect types are configured as scenario data stored in a table structure or the like. Then, it may be realized by operating only the flag (usability information) of the block determined as the execution target among these blocks. Further, the scenario data prepared without depending on the variation pattern may be prepared corresponding to the type of processing read during the processing (analysis) of the block (see " "Scenario data regarding post-operation performance", etc.), in this case, scenario data corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern and scenario data not corresponding to the type of the fluctuation pattern are prepared respectively, and correspond to the type of the fluctuation pattern. Since the scenario data that is not used can be commonly used in a plurality of types of variation patterns, the processing load and the storage capacity can be appropriately suppressed.

  However, due to the configuration of the gaming machine, display or non-display of effects related to the lottery, replacement of effects and symbols, interactive effects with respect to external input by the player, etc. occur, so each block operated in the ON state is executed. It is impossible to realize all the performances alone.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control board 1510 according to the present embodiment, the process identification information (production SW) for calling a program that executes an effect at a predetermined timing or executes a predetermined control is in a block or in a block. It can be set (embedded) in the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with. Here, the process identification information (effect SW) is prepared for each type of program to be called, and each type is set to an on state or an off state. Alternatively, processing identification information (effect SW) that can always function as an on state may be prepared. As a result, when the process identification information is acquired (detected) at a predetermined timing while processing (analyzing) the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, depending on the type of the acquired process identification information. The process having the specified content is called, and the called process is executed. The process identification information may indicate the number of the program function to be called, or the number in the table in which the number of the program function to be called is stored. May be

  When the peripheral control board 1510 acquires (detects) the embedded process identification information while executing and analyzing the scenario data, the block, the liquid crystal effect scheduler data, and the like, the program function corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. Call (callback) dynamically. Depending on the type (processing content) of the program function called by the callback, it is possible to execute effects other than the liquid crystal effect (for example, sound output, lighting of lamps, operation of character objects, etc.) It is also possible to perform processing such as setting information necessary for subsequent effect control, such as setting or updating data in a predetermined area. Thus, by calling the program function according to the process identification information, it is possible to realize display or non-display of drawing by a plurality of blocks, replacement of effects and symbols, and interactive effects for external input by the player.

  The program function called by the callback is incorporated in the peripheral control unit 1530 in advance, and it is not necessary to newly create it for each model of the gaming machine. Therefore, even a designer or planner who does not have advanced program knowledge need only design various types of performance, and otherwise, set process identification information that calls a predefined program function. This makes it possible to easily realize this even with complicated performance specifications. Furthermore, by using the effect creation tool to create effect blocks (LCD effect scheduler data) for each element of the effect, the development period can be greatly shortened. In addition, the effect contents can be By performing the test using the flag (usability information) and the process identification information without performing the test, it is possible to realize simplification of the test process and a great reduction in the time required for the test.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a game control means (main control) that can determine a big hit and give a privilege based on a predetermined determination result (winning of a big hit) being obtained. Substrate 1310), effect control means (peripheral control section 1511) capable of executing processing related to various effects based on the variation pattern according to the determination, and image data in the display area based on the processing performed by the effect control means. The production control means reads out the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and blocks described above, or the liquid crystal production scheduler data) and outputs the time-series image information. An image information processing means capable of executing processing for displaying an image based on the above is provided.

  Further, in the time-series image information (such as the scenario data and blocks described above, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) according to this embodiment, at least a part thereof may include the process identification information. The information processing means can acquire the process identification information from the time-series image information and call the process corresponding to the type of the acquired process identification information. As a result, while the processing related to the image is performed every unit time (for example, one frame), the processing related to the effect element (lamp, sound, movable body, etc.) different from the image is performed based on the schedule for displaying the image. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the start timing from being shifted between the effect elements when different effect elements cooperate to realize one effect. Become.

  In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the process identification information is acquired for each unit time in the time-series image information read when the specific fluctuation pattern is executed as the fluctuation pattern. The section can be included. In such a configuration, when the time-series image information itself that is the data that specifies the “process for displaying an image” in time series includes the process identification information that is the data that specifies the reading of the process. However, since the time-series image information that is read when the specific variation pattern is executed as the variation pattern can include the section where the process identification information is acquired for each unit time, detailed timing Even when it is necessary to perform the effect processing in (1), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a deviation from the effect by the display image.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect reception is performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or silence, or in the non-output state. Allowable special operation reception performance can be executed. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect. The operation-permissible-operation display that is performed when the display is in the state of being displayed is based on time series image information different from each other (such as scenario data or blocks described above, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in the special operation reception effect according to the above configuration, since the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state, or in the non-output state, the operation effect Will be expected to focus on. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance may be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-allowance operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated and the allowable operation related display performed when the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect, Since the display is performed based on different time-series image information, it is possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is permitted, the special operation reception effect capable of generating the after-operation effect is executed. It is possible. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display performed when such a special operation reception effect occurs and the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect. The operation-permissible-operation display that is performed when the display is in the state of being displayed is based on time series image information different from each other (such as scenario data or blocks described above, or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, in such a special operation reception effect, the post-operation effect can be generated even if the operation is not detected within the period in which the effect reception is allowed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player does not perform an operation and, as a result, it becomes impossible to confirm the post-operation effect. Moreover, in the above configuration, regarding the pre-permission operation related display performed when the special operation reception effect is generated, and the permissible operation related display performed when the effect reception is allowed in the special operation reception effect, Since the display is performed based on mutually different time-series image information, it is possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress deterioration of the entertainment of the game.

  Further, as described above, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed is read from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the block, and the read information is subjected to the liquid crystal display control. It is possible to output to the unit 1512. In this regard, as will be described later, as blocks, the first type block that is read after a wait time (wait processing period) required until a predetermined timing arrives and the block that is read without a wait time (wait processing period) The second type block is to be prepared.

  More specifically, the type 1 block is a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect arrives. It can be configured to be read out later. Regarding the second type block, for example, the availability information corresponding to the second type block in the process called based on the process identification information acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data associated with the first type block. Can be configured to be read without waiting time (wait processing period) by being set to ON state.

  That is, in this case, the second type block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data common to a plurality of timings and a plurality of fluctuation patterns. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate production design and production change, as well as to expect reduction of processing load and memory capacity.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first time-series image information (first block or first liquid crystal effect) of the time-series image information (block or liquid crystal effect scheduler data). The second time series image information (the second block or the second liquid crystal effect scheduler data) can be read out while the processing based on the scheduler data) is being executed, and the second time series image information is read out. Then, the process based on the second time-series image information is set to the execution state in place of the process based on the first time-series image information that is in the process of being executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to save the trouble of terminating the process based on the first time-series image information halfway, and it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the “block” according to the present embodiment will be described again. The “block” means the effect display device 1600. When the image displayed in is composed of "a plurality of image elements (a plurality of layers)", it is prepared separately for those image elements (layers), and in order to display the image elements. The image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512) is used for processing for reading information (image number) corresponding to image data (moving image or still image) to be output.

  Here, the process for reading the information (image number) corresponding to the image data (the process in the peripheral control unit 1511) is executed in the “peripheral control unit steady process (FIG. 95)” that is activated for each frame. For each frame, it is determined whether there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed based on the “block”, and if there is such information, it is read and A drawing list is created based on the information read out for each frame and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). As a result, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) reads out image data based on the drawing list to create a display image, and then outputs the display image to the display area, thereby displaying in the effect display device 1600. The production will be realized.

  Here, the “block” itself may be configured as a data structure that specifies “information (image number) corresponding to image data” for each unit time. In this case, the above-mentioned “liquid crystal” is used. Since it has a function as "production scheduler data", it is not necessary to prepare "liquid crystal production scheduler data" separately from "block", and this can be omitted.

  However, the “block” according to this explanation example identifies the type of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data”, and is currently displayed based on the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” associated with the “block”. It is determined whether or not there is information (image number) corresponding to the image data to be made, and if there is such information, it is read and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). A plurality of “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” may be associated with one “block”, and in this case, these “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” will be executed in a predetermined order, Alternatively, either of the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is selectively executed.

  Further, in the “block” according to this description example, the “liquid crystal effect” in which the schedule for each frame regarding the information (image number) corresponding to the “image data in the image control unit (liquid crystal display control unit 1512)” is described. In addition to the "scheduler data", information about which is executed as "processing related to lamp emission", information about which is executed as "processing related to movable body operation", and which is specified as "processing related to sound output" It also contains information such as whether to execute. That is, in this case, if the “block” for realizing the specific notice effect is read, the “image processing in the effect display device 1600” related to the specific notice effect and the “block” based on the “block”. Since the “light emission processing”, the “moving body operation processing”, and the “sound output processing” are respectively read and executed, different effect elements (image, lamp, movable body, sound ), When one effect (specific notice effect) is realized in cooperation with each other, it is possible to prevent the start time from being shifted between the effect elements.

  As described above, the “block” constitutes one scenario data together with other blocks or by itself, and the “block” in which the availability information is turned on in the scenario data. Only one of them is selectively executed (analyzed), so that the effect is executed according to the result of the effect determination.

  However, with regard to scenario data and blocks, as long as they have a relationship such as “scenario data can be configured as a combination of a plurality of blocks each of which represents the content of the effect”, aside from “block” The detailed implementation method including the provision of “liquid crystal production scheduler data” is not limited.

  FIG. 225 conceptually shows an example of a processing procedure for realizing various display effects by using “scenario data” and “blocks” when a specific variation pattern is selected based on the result of the big hit determination. It is a time chart. Note that in FIG. 225, the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” is described as an “animation list”, but these are synonymous.

  As shown in FIG. 225, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this explanatory example, scenario data is prepared for each layer. For example, in the scenario data of “Layer 2”, a plurality of patterns showing the contents of the symbol effect are provided. Blocks (block A for symbols, block B for symbols, block C for symbols, block D for symbols) are configured to be combined in time series. However, this embodiment also includes scenario data such as scenario data of layer 1 and layer 5, which is prepared only as one block indicating the content of the effect.

  Further, as will be described later, the scenario data according to this description example also includes “the one configured to selectively execute any one of a plurality of associated blocks”. , In this case, by operating only the unavailability information corresponding to the selected block among the plurality of blocks to the ON state and leaving the unavailable information corresponding to the other blocks in the OFF state, Any one of them can be selectively executed. Alternatively, the block according to this example also includes "one configured to selectively execute any one of the associated liquid crystal effect scheduler data", In this case, only the unusable information corresponding to the selected liquid crystal effect scheduler data among the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data is turned on, and the unusable information corresponding to other liquid crystal effect scheduler data remains in the off state. Thus, any one of the plurality of liquid crystal effect scheduler data may be selectively executable.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition related to the symbol fluctuation (suspended consumption) is satisfied, the peripheral control unit 1511 first acquires information regarding the results of various determinations from the main control board 1310. The information obtained in this way also includes information on the variation pattern, and the peripheral control unit 1511 reads scenario data corresponding to the information (variation pattern) and associates it with the scenario data as a candidate for execution. An effect determination is made as to which block (effect) is executed from among the plurality of blocks (a block corresponding to the notice effect). Then, of the plurality of blocks (effects) associated with the scenario data, for the block (effect) for which the effect determination to execute is made, the availability information is operated (set) to the ON state and executed. For the block (effect) for which the effect determination to perform is not made, the availability information is left in the off state.

  Regarding the availability information associated with each block (effect), when the scenario data is read out, it is operated (set) in an off state when the pattern effect (variable effect by the decorative symbol) is started. ing. Then, based on the scenario data read out in this way, the above-described processing of which block the availability information is operated (set) to the ON state is performed.

  Here, for the "block" for which the availability information is turned on (set) when starting the symbol effect, the symbol effect is started based on the scenario data and is immediately executed (analyzed), or the scenario It is executed (analyzed) following another block (reproduction) started based on the data, or executed at a timing after a wait time (wait processing period) set in advance for the scenario data and block ( Will be analyzed). However, the blocks (effects) include “things that may be executed at a plurality of timings in one fluctuation pattern”, “things that may be executed by a plurality of fluctuation patterns”, and the like. That is, when the design effect is started, if the mechanism is such that the usability information of all the blocks executed within the variation is operated (set) to the ON state, "even in the effect mode in which the same content appears , The scenario data (or block) in which different wait times (wait processing periods) are set are prepared only by different execution timings. " That is, in this case, despite the same effect contents, different data is prepared and the effect is executed based on the data, which may adversely affect the processing load and the memory capacity.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, when a specific variation pattern is selected, a specific block (specific effect) is always targeted for execution, but when the symbol effect is executed, the specific block (specific effect) is executed. It is possible to start the symbol effect in the OFF state without operating (setting) the availability information of) to the ON state. As such a specific block (specific effect), in FIG. 225, the “appearing EF block E”, the “operation waiting block E”, the “post-operation block E”, and the like are applicable. Will be described later. Of these, the "post-operation block E" is executed as an effect (an effect in which special effect contents dedicated to the big hit are prepared) that clearly indicates whether the big hit is won or lost.

  Further, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, even in a block (effect) for which a result indicating execution is obtained as a result of effect determination, this is executed even in another variation pattern or another timing. When there is a possibility that there is a possibility that the symbol production is performed, it is possible to start the symbol production in the OFF state without operating (setting) the availability information in the ON state when executing the symbol production. As such a block, the “operation waiting block A” and the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D” are applicable in FIG. 225, and these blocks will also be described later.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225, it is assumed that the start condition is satisfied at the timing ts1. Therefore, at the timing ts1, scenario data that is predetermined for each layer in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern is read. Next, an effect determination is made as to which of the block associated with the scenario data thus read and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is operated (set) to the ON state. That is, the operation (setting) for the availability information is performed based on the result of the effect determination. Then, the scenario data is executed (analyzed) for each layer under the operation (setting) with respect to the usability information in this way, whereby the effect is advanced in a mode according to the result of the effect determination.

  However, instead of this, before the scenario data, which is predetermined for each layer in a manner corresponding to the type of the variation pattern, is read, the performance determination according to the type of the variation pattern may be performed. Good. In other words, in this case, the result of the performance determination that is executed before reading the scenario data, using the block associated with the read scenario data and the availability information attached to the liquid crystal production scheduler data. It will be operated based on each.

  Here, regarding “layer 1” of the plurality of layers, regarding the “background image” displayed from the time when the symbol effect is not being executed (the symbol is stopped and displayed and the game is not executed) It corresponds to the scenario data block (block for normal background). Therefore, in the "layer 1", a new block is not read when the timing ts1 arrives, and the block that is already in the execution state (normal background block) is continuously executed ( Will be analyzed).

  More specifically, in the normal background block, which “image data” should be output at “at which timing” as the “image data for the background image” stored in the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. Is associated with “normal background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” that is information (time-series image information). That is, the peripheral control unit 1511 executes (analyzes) the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background" for each unit time (1 frame), and as a result, "image data for background image (moving image, or Each time the information corresponding to the “still image)” is acquired, the information is transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. At this time, one piece of information (drawing list) may be created together with the information obtained from other frames, and the drawing list may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512. As a result, the background display (normal background) according to the schedule defined by the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for normal background" is displayed on the effect display device 1600. Regarding the blocks and scenario data that are associated with this "liquid crystal production scheduler data for normal background", the timing when the power-on process ends, the corresponding production state (normal production state, high-precision production state, special production mode, etc.) It is preferable that the background image (background moving image) having the same content is set as the time-series image information that is displayed in a loop every predetermined time. In addition, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 does not create one piece of information (drawing list) together with the information obtained from other frames, but creates information corresponding to “image data for background image (moving image or still image)”. It may be transmitted to. In short, the information corresponding to the “image data for the background image (moving image or still image)” may be transmitted to the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 in any form.

  The normal background image displayed on "Layer 1" based on the normal background block is SP on "Layer 3" based on "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" described later. When the background image at the time of reach is displayed, the background image on “Layer 3” is preferentially displayed, so that it is hidden in the effect display device 1600. However, as the internal image processing, even if the background image at the time of SP reach is displayed on the “layer 3”, “the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the normal background” is displayed on the “layer 1”. It is assumed that the processing related to the normal background image based on is still being executed, and the processing is not executed depending on the processing status of the SP background image on "layer 3". Has become. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 225, in the period X after the scenario data corresponding to the background image at the SP reach ends, the normal background is displayed again, and thus the normal background is displayed. Originally, the "design block D" for displaying the stopped design is executed. As a result, when the big hit symbol appears, it is possible to easily recognize in which effect state the player has won, and it is possible to suitably promote understanding of the game.

  On the other hand, in "Layer 2", it corresponds to the block (block for symbols) of the scenario data regarding the "effect symbol (symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600)". In the specific variation pattern shown in FIG. 225, since SP reach production is also developed, in the scenario data of "Layer 2", "liquid crystal production scheduler data for pre-reach variation" is associated. "Design block A" is associated with "Liquid crystal production scheduler data for normal reach variation" and "Design block B" is associated with "SP reach variation liquid crystal production scheduler data". It is defined that the “block C” and the “block D for symbols” in which the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data for stop symbols” are associated are sequentially executed (analyzed).

  However, in recent years, during the period in which the SP reach background is displayed, the "effect symbol" is often displayed small in the effect display device 1600, and further, "after the SP reach background is displayed, the normal background is temporarily displayed. It may be returned, and then the SP reach background is displayed again ”. That is, in this case, it is feared that a deviation may occur when there is some abnormality only by executing (analyzing) the display schedule concerning the "design symbol" and the display schedule concerning the "SP reach background" for each layer. Therefore, the "symbol block C" associated with the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach variation" may be executed based on the display schedule of the "SP reach background". In this case, the process related to the background image functions to manage the schedule of the effect design.

  For example, in order to call "a process of turning on or off the availability information of the pattern block C" at a predetermined timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" described later. By attaching the process identification information, it is possible to execute the “design block C” and the “design block D” based on the display schedule related to the “SP reach background”. In this case, regarding the “block C for symbols” and the “block D for symbols”, the availability information will be kept in the OFF state when the symbol effect is started. ] Or "block B for symbols" is not included in the scenario data and is configured as another scenario data.

  Further, the "layer 3" corresponds to the block of the scenario data (the block for the SP reach background, the block for the SP ending background) regarding the "background image after the SP reach effect is started". In this respect, the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" should not be displayed at the time when the symbol effect is started, but should be started at an intermediate timing of the symbol effect. Therefore, in the scenario data of "Layer 3", a wait time (wait processing period) is set so that the "background image after the SP reach effect is started" block is not executed until the corresponding timing comes. There is. As a result, after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period) has elapsed from the start of the symbol effect, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” are sequentially executed (analyzed) and responded accordingly. Since the information can be read for each frame, the background image of the SP reach effect appears on the effect display device 1600.

  That is, in this case, as the blocks, the first type blocks (blocks corresponding to layers 3 and 4 shown in FIG. 225) after a wait time (wait processing period) until a predetermined timing arrives, A second type block (a block corresponding to layer 1, layer 2, layers 5 to 7 shown in FIG. 225, etc.) that is read out without a wait time (wait processing period) is included. The type 2 block does not depend on the set value for the wait time (wait processing period), and can be used as data that is shared at all performance timings, so that the processing load and the memory capacity can be reduced. In addition to being expected, it is possible to facilitate production design and production change.

  In this regard, in SP reach production, regardless of whether or not the big hit is won, the display contents of the same content are started, and at the stage in the middle of the production, the big hit production contents (for example, the production contents that the character wins) and In many cases, it is configured to suggest the determination result of the big hit by branching to one of the effect contents (for example, the effect contents that the character is defeated). At this time, even though the display effect of the same content is executed up to the middle stage of the SP reach effect regardless of whether or not the big hit is won, different blocks (a big hit block and a loss block are used). ) Or image data may adversely affect the processing load and the memory capacity.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, with regard to the scenario data regarding the SP reach effect, a block (SP reach background block) corresponding to image data that can be shared between the big hit time and the miss time, and the big hit time. It is divided into blocks (SP ending background blocks) corresponding to different image data depending on the time of loss, and these blocks are sequentially executed. As a result, the SP reach effect can be executed while suppressing the processing load and the memory capacity.

  By the way, in the scenario data regarding the SP reach effect, the “SP reach background block” is read after a predetermined wait time (wait processing period). Next, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is read. These processes are executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data", there is a section in which the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). The effect reception period (effective period) is generated not by the time management by a timer or the like but by the frame management of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data.

For example, in the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the "liquid crystal rendering scheduler data for SP reach background" is executed (analyzed) separately from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed. ), The processing identification information of "X1" is arranged in a line for each frame from the timing ts31. Every time the process identification information of "X1" is read, the following "process X1" is read and executed.
Process X1. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C”, based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section to which such process identification information (here, “X1”) is added for each unit time is “a production reception period during which a production reception can be performed by an operation ( In the "processing X1", the availability information of the "post-operation block C" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on in the "processing X1". Is operated (set). As a result, the "post-operation block C" is read out for each unit time for the corresponding time, and the "post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler" associated with the "post-operation block C" is read. The "data C" is to be executed (analyzed) every unit time, and the "processing relating to lamp emission" and the "processing relating to movable body operation" associated with the "post-operation block C". , "Processing regarding sound output" and the like are started, it is possible to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block C".

  Even in the next frame in which the respective processes associated with the "post-operation block C" are started, the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" corresponding to the "SP reach background block" is also executed. "Data" is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is made in the middle of the section (production reception period) in which the process identification information (here, "X1") is attached for each unit time, the "SP reach background The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data", and the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X1” also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block C” is in a state in which execution is started. When it is determined that the process has been started, the "process X1" is ended without performing any further process based on the operation detection information.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 225, four pieces of the same process identification information (here, “X1”) are arranged from the timing ts31, but the second process identification information (here, “X1”) is read. In the "process X1", the production is received, and thereby the "after-operation liquid crystal production scheduler data C" associated with the "after-operation block C" in the "layer 6" is executed (analyzed). The case is assumed. In this case, although it is no longer necessary to read the third and fourth process identification information (“X1” here) filled in the figure, “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler The "data" is automatically read during execution of each unit time. However, every time it is read out in this way, a process such as "Since the post-operation effect has been executed, the process X1 is terminated" is executed in the "process X1" corresponding to the process identification information (here, "X1"). As a result, the process for effect determination is substantially invalidated (effect acceptance is not allowed).

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the “process X1” (it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), use of the “post-operation block C” associated with the “layer 6” The processing X1 is ended with the permission / prohibition information kept in the OFF state. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X1”) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler is performed for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X1") is read from "data", and the above-mentioned "process X1" corresponding to this is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the fourth processing identification information (here, “X1”) ends the above section, so the fourth processing identification information is read out and accordingly When the effect determination is not made in the process X1, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” is not executed and the effects thereafter are advanced.

  According to such a configuration, even after performing the post-operation effect (even after the effect determination is made in the process X1 read from the second process identification information (X1)), “SP reach background The same process identification information (X1) for reading the "process X1 capable of generating post-operation effect" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" is acquired. However, since it is possible to substantially function as the production reception period (effective period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

  Note that FIG. 225 merely shows the concept of such processing, and in reality, the processing identification information is not acquired only over four frames. If it is made to function as an effect reception period, it is usually set as a section in which the same process identification information is acquired over a period of about 90 frames. This is not limited to the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts31, and the same can be said for the effect reception period that occurs at another timing. Further, as described above, such process identification information may be attached to the block side instead of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data side, or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data and the block may be provided as one data. Good.

Moreover, in the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background" shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information (here, "1") related to the operation effect is also attached at the timing ts41. However, the process identification information of “1” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is performed as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read, but the following “process 1” is read and executed. Has become.
Process 1. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an "effect reception period (effective period) during which effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon, and for the player that the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" for performing the operation waiting effect (prompting image, gauge display, etc.) that prompts an operation.

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data D)" separately from "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts41) determined by "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data". become. That is, in this case, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is started to be executed at every timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal" is started. Since it is possible to easily start execution of the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" from the "liquid crystal production scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from the "production scheduler data", facilitating and commonizing production design Can be suitably achieved.

  When the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D" is read. .. These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "LCD appearance scheduler data for appearance EF & operation wait", first, in the case where production acceptance is not allowed, "production reception by operation is accepted." There is provided a section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a "performance reception period (effective period)" that will be performed soon will occur.

  However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal production scheduler data for operation waiting", an operation waiting production (prompt image or gauge described above that prompts the player to operate in the state where the production reception period has occurred from the middle thereof) A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to display) is acquired appears, and in the section, the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). Has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts41, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be displayed at present, "Y3" for each frame from the timing ts42. The process identification information of is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y3" is read, the following "process Y3" is read and executed.
Process Y3. A process of performing an effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block D” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, the operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section in which such process identification information (here, “Y3”) is added to each unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation. ) ”. Moreover, in the "process Y3", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation wait block D (appearance EF & operation wait liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" which is the basis for reading out the "process Y3". The availability information of the “post-operation block D” associated with the same “layer 6” is operated (set) to the ON state.

  That is, in this case, when the “post-operation block D” is read, various processes including the “post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D” associated with the “post-operation block D” are executed. As a result, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block D” is generated. Of course, the newly read "after operation block D (after operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" is the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting) In place of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data D) ”, the execution state is set to“ layer 6 ”.

  According to such a configuration, only by reading the "post-operation block D", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal" is no longer necessary to be read due to the effect determination. Because the production scheduler data D) ”and the process identification information of“ Y3 ”for reading the“ process Y3 ”can be substantially invalidated (the production reception is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform the determination and the processing for terminating these, and it is possible to favorably facilitate and commonize the effect design. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, reading is performed from the second process identification information (here, “Y3”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)”. The effect is received in the processed "process Y3", and thereby the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D" associated with the "after-operation block D" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “ray portion” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block D (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)” is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

  That is, the process identification information of "Y3" may be attached to the "liquid crystal production scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" side, as in the production reception period generated from the timing ts31. However, the "after appearance block D (after operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data D)" is associated with the same layer as "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D"). It can be said that it is possible to achieve such an excellent effect by adding it to the ")" side.

However, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts42, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, "appearance EF & liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation wait ( In addition to the process identification information of "Y3" included in "Appearance EF & operation waiting block D)",
-The process identification information of "Y2" included in the "LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)" is prepared.

  That is, as described above, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is the same as the "post-operation block D (post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" "layer 6". If the processing identification information of “Y3” is added to this, when “after operation block D (after operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data)” is executed. This is useful in that it will be automatically deleted (invalidated). However, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" is included in "1. LCD reach scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)". It is executed (analyzed) by operating the availability information on the basis of the process identification information of ". Therefore, when the frame processing to which the process identification information of "1" is attached may be skipped when the processing load is high, the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation This means that the waiting block D) ”itself is not executed, and eventually the performance acceptance period (effective period) based on the process identification information of“ Y3 ”may not occur.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect (the process of performing the effect determination regarding whether to generate the after-operation effect based on the operation detection information), The process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are prepared, and the process identification information of “Y2” is on the “LCD effect scheduler data for SP reach background (SP reach background block)” side. The process identification information of "Y3" is attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data (appearance EF & operation waiting block D)" side. As described above, as the process identification information for reading the process related to the operation effect, a predetermined wait time (wait process) until the availability information is set to the ON state at the start of the variation pattern and the timing to start the effect comes Wait time (wait process) by setting the availability information to be turned on in the process executed based on the first type block By providing both the second type block and the second type block that are read out without passing through the period), it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned risk that the effect reception period (effective period) does not occur. Will be able to.

  Here, in the “process Y3” executed based on the process identification information of the “Y3”, when the effect determination is made, the availability information of the above-mentioned “post-operation block D” is operated in the ON state. The post-operation display effect (post-operation effect) on the effect display device 1600 is executed. On the other hand, in “process Y2” executed based on the process identification information of “Y2”, when the effect determination is made, “process regarding lamp emission”, “process regarding movable body operation”, and “sound output”. Each process is started to be executed. Therefore, even when the process identification information of "Y3" is not read, it is possible to realize the post-operation effect by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output by the process identification information of "Y2". Has been done. The “process Y2” and the “process Y3” may be those that can generate different post-operation effects.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, three pieces of the same process identification information (here, “Y2”) are lined up from the timing ts42, but they are read from the second process identification information (here, “Y2”). It is assumed that the effect is received in the "process Y2" and the post-operation effect is executed by the lamp emission, the movable body operation, and the sound output. In this case, regarding the third process identification information (“Y2” here) filled in in the figure, it is no longer necessary to read this, but “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. Is executed every unit time and will be read out automatically. However, every time it is read out in this way, a process such as “Because the post-operation effect has been executed, the process Y2 is ended” is executed in the “process Y2” corresponding to the process identification information (here, “Y2”). As a result, the process for effect determination is substantially invalidated (effect acceptance is not allowed).

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as described above,
A "first special operation in which reception of effect based on operation detection information is permitted" that occurs when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or silence, or is in a non-output state Reception production (production reception period) ",
A second special operation reception production (production reception period) capable of generating post-operation production even if no operation is detected regardless of the production state (production mode)
As described above, the above can be executed (see, for example, FIG. 142 and FIGS. 212 to 224).

  In the first special operation reception effect, since the effect reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppression mode or in the silent state or in the non-output state, focus on the operation effect. Will be expected. However, in exchange for this, there is a concern that the performance may be poor due to the suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) performed when the first special operation reception effect is generated and the effect reception is allowed in the first special operation reception effect. With regard to the permissible operation related display (during the valid period) (the above-mentioned image and gauge display, etc.), they are displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) performed when the second special operation acceptance effect is generated and the effect acceptance is allowed in the second special operation acceptance effect. The allowable operation-related display (such as the above-mentioned image and gauge display) performed during the (valid period) is also displayed based on different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

More specifically, in the “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data” shown in FIG. 225, effect acceptance is permitted while effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode, Further, even when no operation is detected, it is possible to generate a special operation reception effect (first special operation reception effect or second special operation reception effect) that causes a post-operation effect, and at timing ts51, The process identification information “2” is read so as to start the process related to the special operation reception effect. However, the process identification information of “2” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is made as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read out, but the following “process 2” is read out and executed. .
Process 2. Availability of "appearance EF block E" for performing a precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a "effect reception period (effective period) in which effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon Process to operate (set) information in the ON state

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)", the pre-allowable operation related display (predictive effect) dedicated block (appearing EF block E) , And the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) corresponding to the block, the “appearance EF block E” is described as “SP reach background liquid crystal effect. The execution can be started from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts51) defined by the "scheduler data". That is, in this case, the "appearance EF block E" is started to be executed at every timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" is started. Since it is possible to easily start the execution of the "appearance EF block E" from the "liquid crystal effect scheduler data" in a variation pattern different from "data", it is possible to facilitate and standardize the effect design. Will be able to.

  Further, according to such a configuration, a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (expectation levels at which the jackpot pattern appears) are separately prepared for the pre-permissible operation-related display (predictive effect) and the permissible operation-related display, Since it is possible to appropriately combine which combination to execute them, it becomes possible to make a variety of variations as a production, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. Become. Further, even when adopted in other variation patterns, the pre-allowance operation related display (predictive effect) has a common mode, but the permissible operation related display is executed in a unique mode that is not shared. It will be possible.

  When the "appearing EF block E" is executed (analyzed), the "appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E" corresponding to the "appearing EF block E" is read and executed (analyzed). To be done. When this "liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF" is executed (analyzed), the effect (pre-permission operation related display) by a predetermined effect display is changed from "section for which effect acceptance is not permitted" to "effect acceptance." The image information (moving image or still image) to be executed over the "permitted section" is acquired.

  However, in order to execute the “process capable of effecting determination that the post-operation effect is generated based on the operation detection information” in the “appearing EF block E” and the “appearing EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E”. Since the process identification information of No. is not attached, the effect reception period is not generated based on the block or the scheduler data.

That is, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when the timing ts52 comes within the “SP reach background block (SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data)”, “3” is generated in order to generate an effect acceptance period. The process identification information is read out. The process identification information of "3" does not correspond to "the process in which the effect determination that the post-operation effect is to be generated can be made based on the operation detection information", but is the data to be associated with the "process 3" described below. ..
Processing 3. “Use availability information of the“ operation waiting block E ”for performing the operation waiting operation (the above-mentioned image and gauge display, etc.) that prompts the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. Process to operate (set) to ON state

  According to such a configuration, in addition to the “SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach background)” and the “block EF for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)”, Display during permissible operation (display of the above-mentioned image, gauge, etc.) This dedicated block (operation wait block E) and liquid crystal effect scheduler data (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation wait) corresponding to the block Although it is necessary to prepare, it is possible to start execution of the “operation waiting block E” from an appropriate timing (here, timing ts52) defined by “SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data”. become able to. That is, in this case, the "operation waiting block E" is started to be executed at every timing in the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler data" or at a plurality of timings, or the "SP reach background liquid crystal effect scheduler" is started. Since it is possible to easily start the execution of the “operation waiting block E” from the “liquid crystal production scheduler data” in a variation pattern different from “data”, it is possible to easily and commonly use the production design. Will be able to.

  Here, also in the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, the same process identification information (X1, Y3, etc.) is arranged for each frame as in the effect reception period in which the effect reception is permitted at the timings ts31 and ts42. It may be configured as a rendered section. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, this is realized by a method different from the effect reception period that occurs at the timings ts31 and ts42, and other effect reception periods may be configured by the method described below. You can

  That is, for the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts52, depending on the state operation (OFF state, ON state) of the operation state flag, a state in which the effect reception is not permitted (OFF state) and a state in which the effect reception is permitted (ON state). ) And to create a method. When this method is adopted, not the process called based on the process identification information, but the "peripheral control unit steady process" shown in FIG. 95 for each unit time (every frame) based on the operation detection information. It is desirable to make a judgment.

  For example, every time the "peripheral control unit steady process" is performed, the operation state flag is checked, and the operation detection information is provided on the condition that the operation state flag is in the on state (condition that it is in the performance acceptance period). Based on the above, it is possible to make an effect determination that an after-operation effect is generated. When the effect determination is made, the usability information of the block (here, “after operation block E”) corresponding to the type of post-operation effect corresponding to the operation state flag that is turned on is operated to the on state ( Setting).

  That is, in this case, as for the operation state flag, only the type of post-operation effect will be prepared, and after determining which type the operation state flag that is in the on state is, the post-operation effect corresponding to that is determined. The availability information of the corresponding block is operated (set) in the ON state. The process of turning off the operation state flag may be executed in the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the block corresponding to the post-operation effect to the on state, or the availability information is turned on. You may make it perform in the process called based on the process identification information attached to the block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) operated by the state.

  The processing procedure in the case of adopting such a method will be described again from the point where the processing identification information of “3” is read at timing ts52 and the above “processing 3” is executed. The block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting) "is read and executed (analyzed).

The process of setting the operation state flag to the ON state may be performed in the “process 3”, but in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler) is performed. In the first frame (processing timing) when "data E)" is executed (analyzed), the process identification information of "Z1" associated with "process Z1" below is read out.
Process Z1. Of the operation state flags, a process of turning on the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E”

  As a result, the operation state flag corresponding to the “post-operation block E” is operated (set) to the ON state at the timing ts52, and the determination based on the operation detection information in the above-mentioned “peripheral control unit steady process”. By performing the process, the period in which the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state can be made to function as the “production acceptance period”. Further, while the operation state flag is maintained in the ON state in this way, the permissible operation related display based on the execution (analysis) of the “operation waiting block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for operation waiting)” (described above). Image, gauge display, etc.) will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-allowance operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) associated with layer 7 and permission associated with layer 6 The middle-operation-related display (operation-waiting block E (operation-waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)) is executed such that its display periods partially overlap each other.

  Here, the pre-permission operation related display associated with the layer 7 is displayed on the front side of the during-permission operation related display associated with the layer 6, and is preferentially displayed. It has become so. Therefore, the acceptance of the performance is permitted even when at least a part of the permissible operation related display is made difficult to be visually recognized by the pre-permissible operation related display, and thereby, any expectation level as the pre-permissible operation related display is obtained. It is possible to provide a performance effect in which it is possible to receive a performance effect under the condition that it is difficult to visually recognize whether or not a mode having the appearance appears.

  In this respect, when an effect is received at timing ts53, which is an intermediate stage in which the effect reception period has not yet ended, the same layer as the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" The process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “after-operation block E” associated with No. 6 to the ON state is executed in the above-mentioned “peripheral control unit steady process”. As a result, each process (lamp, movable body, sound, etc.) including the “after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “after-operation block E” is executed. . At this time, in layer 6, the “after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E” associated with the “after-operation block E” is associated with the “operation-waiting block E” under the “operation-waiting block E”. Since it is executed in place of the "LCD production scheduler data E for use", it is not necessary to perform a special process for terminating the "operation waiting block E" midway. Further, at this time, the process identification information of "Z3", which will be described later, included in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" can be automatically deleted (invalidated). Become.

Regarding the process of turning off the operation state flag, when performing the process of operating (setting) the availability information of the “after-operation block E” in the “peripheral control unit steady process” described above. However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the first frame (when the “after-operation block E (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E))” is executed (analyzed) ( At the processing timing), the process identification information of “Z2” is read out and the following “process Z2” corresponding thereto is executed to execute the process based on the “post-operation block E” under the effect reception period. I am trying to do it.
Process Z2. Processing for turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” among the operation state flags

  However, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the pre-allowance operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) remains in the screen (displayed state). As described above, there may be cases where performance reception is made. Therefore, in the "process Z2", it is determined whether or not the block EF for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF) is in the execution state, and when it is in the execution state, a process for terminating it halfway is also performed. Is desirable. However, after the “appearance EF block E (appearance EF liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is continued without being terminated halfway, the image display based on the “post-operation block E” is changed to “appearance EF “Preferred execution (display on the front side of the image display (layer) based on the appearance EF block E)” is performed in a range (for example, the entire screen) including at least all the “range where the image display based on the block E is performed”. Thus, the image display based on the appearance EF block E may be hidden.

  Further, in the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)”, when the processing at the timing ts54 is executed (analyzed), “processing Z3” is performed so as to end the effect acceptance period. The process identification information of "Z3" attached is read out. Here, when the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” is executed (analyzed) at the timing ts54, the “after operation block E (after operation) corresponding to the same layer 6 is executed. It means that the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)" is not overwritten by "the liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for use", that is, the timing ts54 comes. It means that the production reception has not been made until now. However, the performance reception period generated from the timing ts52 is the same as that of the “after-operation block E” that is the same as when the performance reception is performed, even when the performance reception is not performed from the timing ts52 to the timing ts54. It functions as the above-mentioned "second special operation reception effect" for operating (setting) the availability information to the ON state (the above-mentioned "automatic button function").

Therefore, in the "operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)", the following processing is executed in "processing Z3" executed based on the processing identification information of "Z3" read at the timing ts54. It is supposed to be.
Process Z3. Among the operation state flags, a process of turning off the operation state flag of the type associated with the “post-operation block E” is performed, and the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on. Processing to operate (set) is performed

  According to such a configuration, in the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, even if the effect reception is not received within that period, the same block as when the effect reception is made is read out, and the block is read. Since the post-operation effect associated with is executed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game when the player forgets to perform the operation. In addition, the post-operation effect is not executed after the effect reception period (timings ts51 to ts52) is finished, but in the final frame (processing at timing ts52) of the process related to the effect reception period (timings ts51 to ts52). By performing "processing for reading the same block as when the reception was made", it is possible to realize smooth production progress without causing a difference between when there is an operation and when there is no operation. become able to.

  Further, according to such a configuration, a display image based on the “operation waiting block E (operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data E)” can be received by an operation by the player. In both the case where the performance reception is made by activating the automatic button function, the process of hiding the performance reception based on the reception of the performance (here, "operation Since the rear-use block E ”) is executed, the production can be advanced in the same manner even when the player forgets to operate it, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal. You will be expected.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225, during the effect reception period generated from the timing ts52, when the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressing mode at the time of occurrence, the above-described "first It also functions as a "special operation reception performance". Also in the "first special operation reception effect" shown in FIG. 225, when the effect is received, the effect sound of a specific type (BGM reproduction) is not returned to the non-suppression mode but continues to be output in the suppression mode. Then, within the period in which the post-operation effect is being executed, the effect sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is set to be returned to the output in the non-suppressing mode.

  It should be noted that the "specific type effect sound" means the sound of "BGM reproduction" (BGM reproduction for normal background or SP background), but here, in particular, it corresponds to the "SP reach background block". This corresponds to the sound (BGM reproduction sound for SP reach) output by executing the attached “processing related to sound output”. As for the suppression mode and method, the above-described modes and methods can be appropriately adopted.

  In the above configuration, when the operation reception effect (timing ts52 to ts54) is generated while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed (or even when the effect reception is not performed, the effect reception is performed). When an operation acceptance effect is generated in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation is performed is generated), a pre-allowance operation related display (block EF for appearance EF) and a permissible operation related display (operation waiting block) performed at the time of the occurrence. Regarding E), they are executed based on blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to realize a variety of display effects with respect to the display effect, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the operation reception effects (first special operation reception effect, second special operation reception effect) at such timings ts52 to ts54, images displayed by different blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) (pre-allowance operation-related display) , Allowable operation related display) are displayed so that there are overlapping periods in time. Therefore, it becomes possible to realize the playability (such as the above-described difficulty of visual recognition) entwined between the "pre-permissible operation related display" and the "permissible operation related display", and it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. become.

  On the other hand, an operation acceptance effect that is generated when the "specific type effect sound" is not in the suppressed state, such as an operation acceptance effect that is generated at timing ts41 (or a post-operation effect is generated when the effect reception is not performed). In the non-accepting operation reception effect), the pre-permission operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data). That is, such an operation acceptance effect is generated according to the result of the effect determination (notice determination), unlike the operation acceptance effect at timings ts52 to ts54 (the operation acceptance effect that suggests a big hit by the post-operation effect). Since it does not occur or does not occur, the pre-permission operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) to facilitate handling according to the determination result. It can be said that it is more beneficial to

  However, even when the pre-allowance operation related display and the during-permission operation related display are displayed in the same block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) as described above, although they are on one layer, they are related to the pre-allowance operation related display. The display and the permissible operation related display appear to overlap with each other at times (for example, there are times when both the pre-permissible operation related display and the permissible operation related display are displayed. It is desirable to carry out these effects (so that the parts are difficult to see).

  Regarding the block of the operation-permitted display (operation waiting block E), the process identification information read based on the block of the pre-permission operation-related display (block E for appearance EF (liquid crystal effect scheduler data E for appearance EF)) The availability information may be operated in the ON state in the processing according to.

  The operation reception effect, which is allowed to receive an effect at timings ts52 to ts54, may be executed as at least one of the first special operation reception effect described above and the second special operation reception effect described above, and for example, 142, FIG. 142, FIG. 212 to FIG. 215, FIG. 217 to FIG. 220, FIG. 223, etc., and is executed as one of the operation reception effects (operation reception effects under BGM suppression) described above. Good. In this case, regarding the other operation reception effects among the operation reception effects shown in FIG. 225, for example, the operation reception effects described above with reference to FIG. 216, FIG. 222, and FIG. It may be executed as any one of (production). Moreover, you may make it employ | adopt suitably also about each other example of these operation reception productions mentioned later.

  For example, different blocks are used in the operation reception effect (operation waiting block E) generated at the timing ts52 and the operation reception effect (appearance EF & operation waiting block D) generated at the timing ts42, but these operations are performed. In the reception performance, the same reception permissible sound may be output when the production reception is performed (first permissible sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224).

  In addition, in the operation acceptance effect (operation waiting block E) that occurs at timing ts52, if the effect acceptance is performed while the acceptance permission sound is being output, the output state is terminated halfway, but the operation acceptance effect that occurs at timing ts42 ( In the operation waiting block E), various configurations are appropriately set such that the output state is maintained even if the production acceptance is made during the output of the acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound shown in FIGS. 212 to 224). Can be adopted for.

  By the way, with regard to the scenario data relating to the SP reach effect, a block corresponding to image data that can be shared between a big hit and a loss (SP reach background block) and a block corresponding to different image data between a big hit and a loss As described above, the blocks are divided into (SP ending background block) and sequentially executed. In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, the timing ts55 at which the “SP reach background block” is changed to the “SP ending background block” is within the period in which the post-operation performance is executed. I will set it so that it will always arrive.

  That is, in the operation reception production where the production reception is allowed at the timing ts52, the production reception (including the above-mentioned automatic button function) is performed at any timing within the production reception period (timings ts52 to ts54). However, the predetermined time from the timing ts54 is set as a period in which the post-operation effect is always executed (time setting required to execute the post-operation effect). In the period in which the post-operation effect is always executed, a display based on the post-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data E corresponding to the “post-operation block E” (display effect after operation in the effect display device 1600 (after operation) Effect)) is executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and has priority display over the display based on the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP ending corresponding to the "block for SP ending background". (Displayed on the front side of the image display based on the SP reach background block and the SP ending background block). Further, in this case, the display time of the image executed based on the post-operation block E is set as a time longer than the display time of the image executed based on the operation waiting block E, and the long time is set. Minutes will function as a "period during which the post-operation performance is always executed".

  While the display effect (post-operation effect) corresponding to such "post-operation block E" is being executed, the "SP reach background block" is switched to the "SP ending background block". By doing so, the "display of blocks for SP reach background (blocks shared in the current win)" and "display of blocks for SP ending background (blocks used only in one of the current wins)" have a completely different atmosphere. Even if the effect design is performed as described above, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity from being felt, and thus it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

  Further, in the scenario data of “Layer 4” and “Layer 5”, a block that does not relate to any image and simply functions as time-series data for calling a process at a certain timing (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) It corresponds to. That is, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) itself does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and does not participate in any image display. Data structure ”(empty time-series image information) is used. Even if such a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) is executed (analyzed), no image is displayed in layers 4 and 5 associated with the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  There are two types of methods for such a data call block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call). First, in the scenario data corresponding to "Layer 4", the timing ts21 at which the process is called at the start of the symbol variation. The wait time (wait processing period) is set so that the data call block B (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for data call) is not executed until the time comes. When the timing ts21 arrives after such a wait time (wait processing period), the "data call block B" is executed (analyzed), and as a result, the "data call block B" corresponding to the "data call block B" is executed. The data presentation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B ”is executed (analyzed).

Here, the “data call block B” or the “data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B” corresponding to the “data call block B” is provided with “X2” process identification information for each unit time. Each time the processing identification information of the “X2” is read, the following “processing X2” is executed.
Process X2. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block B” based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In this "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)", the section in which the process identification information of "X2" is attached for each unit time is "effect acceptance that can be effected by operation. In the above-mentioned "Processing X2", the availability information of the "post-operation block B" associated with the "layer 6" is turned on when the effect determination is made. It is operated (set) to the state. As a result, the "after-operation block B" is executed (analyzed), and the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data B" associated with the "after-operation block B" is executed every unit time ( Of course, the “processing related to lamp emission”, the “processing related to movable body operation”, and the “processing related to sound output” associated with the “post-operation block B”, respectively. By starting the execution, the post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block C” can be generated.

  Even in the next frame in which the respective processes associated with the "post-operation block B" are started, the "data calling block B (data calling liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" is It is executed (analyzed). Therefore, when the production reception is made in the middle of the section (production reception period) in which the process identification information (here, "X2") is attached for each unit time, the "data call block B The process identification information (here, "X2") is read out from "(liquid crystal production scheduler data B for calling data)", and the above-mentioned "process X2" corresponding to the process identification information is executed. However, the “process X2” also includes a determination process as to whether or not each process associated with the “post-operation block B” is in a state of starting execution. When it is determined that the process has been started, the "process X2" is terminated without further processing based on the operation detection information, which will be described in "Process X1" above. As I did.

  On the other hand, when the effect determination is not made in the “process X2” (it is determined that the post-operation effect is not executed), the use of the “post-operation block B” associated with the “layer 6” is used. The processing X2 is ended with the permission / prohibition information kept in the off state. Then, until the section in which the same process identification information (here, “X2”) is acquired for each unit time (1 frame) is completed, the “data calling block B (data calling” is performed for each unit time (1 frame). The process identification information (here, "X2") is read from "for liquid crystal production scheduler data B)", and the above-mentioned "process X2" corresponding thereto is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 225, since the section ends at the sixth process identification information (here, “X2”), the sixth process identification information is read out and accordingly When the effect determination is not made in the process X2, the effect after the operation corresponding to the “block B for after operation” is not executed and the effect thereafter is advanced.

  According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is executed (even after the effect determination is made in the process X2 read from the third process identification information (X2)), the “data call block B The same process identification information (X2) for reading the "process X2 that can cause post-operation effect" from "(liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for calling data)" is acquired. However, since it is possible to substantially function as the production reception period (effective period) only by analyzing such information, it is possible to favorably facilitate and standardize the production design. Become.

  Here, the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) corresponding to “Layer 4” does not include information corresponding to the image data to be displayed, and “Process X2” read from the process identification information of “X2”. Does not read the "operation waiting block". Therefore, in the operation acceptance effect that occurs at the timing ts21, the effect acceptance is allowed in a state in which the mood image and the gauge display are not performed, and such operation acceptance effect is referred to as the "empty time series image information". Is realized by.

  With such a configuration, the "data call block B (liquid crystal effect scheduler data B for data call)" can be shared even when another variation pattern is selected. By preparing scenario data with different set values for the wait time (wait processing period), it is possible to make them appear at different timings.

On the other hand, in the scenario data corresponding to “Layer 5”, the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) is executed without waiting time (wait processing period). A substantial wait function works in the calling block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for calling data). That is, in the data call block A (liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call), no image information or process identification information is read until the timing ts11 arrives, and “4” is reached when the timing ts11 arrives. The process identification information is read out. However, the process identification information “4” does not read “the process in which the effect determination is made as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect” is read, but the following “process 4” is read and executed. Has become.
Process 4. A precursor effect (such as an appearance effect display) that suggests that an "effect reception period (effective period) during which effect reception can be performed by operation" will occur soon, and for the player that the effect reception period is occurring A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" for performing the operation waiting effect (prompting image and gauge display described above) that prompts the operation.

  According to such a configuration, it is necessary to prepare the data call block A (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data A for data call) separately from the “appearance EF & operation wait block A”, For the “waiting block A”, the process identification information of “4” is attached even from a block (liquid crystal production scheduler data) different from the “data calling block A (liquid crystal production scheduler data A for data calling)”. Since it is possible to call it properly just by doing so, it becomes possible to favorably facilitate and commonize the effect design.

  When the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is executed (analyzed), the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal production scheduler data A" corresponding to the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A" is read. . These processes will be executed (analyzed) every unit time, but in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal production scheduler data A for operation waiting", first, in the case where production reception is not allowed, A section is provided in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to a precursor effect (appearance effect display, etc.) that suggests that a "performance reception period (effective period) during which reception is possible" will occur soon is provided.

  However, in the "appearance EF & liquid crystal production scheduler data A for operation waiting", an operation waiting production (the above-mentioned image or the above-mentioned image A section in which image information (moving image or still image) corresponding to the gauge display, etc. is acquired appears, and in the section, the same process identification information is acquired every unit time (one frame). It has become.

That is, in the "appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" executed (analyzed) from the timing ts11, apart from the information corresponding to the image data to be currently displayed, "Y1 The process identification information of “” is attached in a line. Every time the process identification information of "Y1" is read, the following "process Y1" is read and executed.
Process Y1. A process of performing effect determination as to whether to generate a post-operation effect corresponding to the “post-operation block A”, based on operation detection information for a specific operation means (for example, operation button 410).

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a section to which such process identification information (here, “Y1”) is added for each unit time is “a production reception period (effective period during which production reception can be performed by operation. ) ”. Moreover, in the "process Y1", when the effect determination is made, the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)" which is the basis for reading out the "process Y1". The availability information of the “after-operation block A” associated with the same “layer 6” as described above is operated (set) to the ON state.

  That is, in this case, when the "after-operation block A" is read, various processes including the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "after-operation block A" are executed. As a result, a post-operation effect corresponding to the "post-operation block A" is generated. Of course, the newly read “after-operation block A (after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is the “appearing EF & operation waiting block A (appearing EF & operation waiting In place of "LCD production scheduler data A)", the execution state is set in "Layer 6".

  According to such a configuration, only by reading "the block A for operation", the "appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal" is no longer required to be read because of the effect determination. Since the production scheduler data A) ”and the process identification information of“ Y1 ”for reading the“ process Y1 ”can be substantially invalidated (production acceptance is not allowed). Therefore, it is not necessary to separately perform the determination and the processing for terminating these, and it is possible to favorably facilitate and commonize the effect design. Note that in the example shown in FIG. 225, reading is performed from the second process identification information (here, “Y1”) in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)”. The effect reception is performed in the processed "process Y1", whereby the "after-operation liquid crystal effect scheduler data A" associated with the "after-operation block A" in the same "layer 6" is executed (analysis). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “radiation part” in the “appearance EF & operation waiting block A (appearance EF & operation waiting liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” is erased by overwriting (substantially). It corresponds to the invalidated section).

  In the "layer 4", the effect section to which the process identification information is added for each frame is set on the "data call block B (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data B)" side. However, the effect section may be set in a block read from the "data call block" such as "layer 5". Also, in the "layer 4", as shown in the "layer 5", this is realized by operating a substantial wait function in the data call block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the data call). Good.

  Also, in "Layer 5", an effect section in which process identification information is added to each frame is set on the block side read from "Data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)". did. However, the effect section may be set in “data call block A (data call liquid crystal effect scheduler data A)” like “layer 4”. Also in the "layer 5", as shown in the "layer 4", this is realized by setting a wait for waiting the data call block (the liquid crystal effect scheduler data for the data call) itself. Good.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when the process identification information “1” or “4” is acquired, it is suggested that the “performance reception period (effective period) during which performance reception can be performed by operation” will occur soon. For performing the indication effect (such as appearance effect display) and the operation waiting effect (such as the above-mentioned image or gauge display) that prompts the player to perform an operation while the effect reception period is occurring. A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “appearance EF & operation waiting block” to the ON state is executed. However, it is not always necessary to perform the indication effect (appearance effect display, etc.), and there is an effect waiting period in which the effect reception period is occurring, and an operation waiting effect that prompts the player to perform an operation (the above-mentioned mood image and gauge). A process of operating (setting) the availability information attached to the “operation waiting block” for displaying (eg, display) may be executed. That is, in this case, as soon as the “operation waiting block” is read, the process identification information associated with the “process capable of effect determination” is acquired.

  Further, as described above, the effect reception period generated at the timings ts12, ts21, ts31, and ts42 may be realized by setting the operation state flag similarly to the effect reception period generated at the timing ts51.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the process identification information of “Y2” and the process identification information of “Y3” are set to be read at the same timing, but they are read at different timings. It may be set.

  Further, as described above, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the blocks are separately provided, but these may be configured as one data.

  Further, regarding the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) for which information corresponding to image data is acquired for each unit time (for each frame), all of the liquid crystal effect scheduler data (block) at the first processing timing (frame). The information corresponding to the moving image data over a period may be configured to be acquired. In this case, the information corresponding to the image data is acquired only at the first processing timing (frame), and after that, the information corresponding to the image data is analyzed although it is analyzed for each unit time (for each frame). It is not acquired, and the process corresponding to it is executed only when the process identification information is attached.

  For a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) for which the availability information is set to the ON state, the block may be executed (analyzed) within the processing timing when the availability information is set to the ON state, or the availability information is set to the ON state. The processing timing may be executed (analyzed) at a processing timing that is one time after the processing timing set to.

  Regarding "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block A (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Liquid Crystal Rendering Scheduler Data A)" and "Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Block D (Appearance EF & Operation Waiting Liquid Crystal Rendering Scheduler Data D)" Although different process identification information (Y1, Y3) is acquired, the same information may be acquired as "information corresponding to image data". Further, the length as a block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) and the length as an effective period may be set to be the same. That is, in this case, the same image and gauge display are displayed for the same time.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225, when a specific variation pattern is selected and a background display effect for a specific reach (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed, a big hit (predetermined determination result ) Is obtained and not obtained, the production section (SP reach background block) in which display data is shared, and the case where a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained and not obtained The display section is divided into an effect section (SP ending background block) in which different display data is used. In such a configuration, when performing the background display effect for the specific reach, instead of using different display data for the entire period when the predetermined determination result is obtained and when not, it Since the display data is shared up to the section (timing ts55) and the winning (judgment result) is shown only by using different display data in the remaining period, it is expected that the processing load and the memory capacity are reduced. Become.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the post-operation effect (in the "layer 6" different from the "layer 3" in which the background display effect for the specific reach is executed is crossed (included) with the timing ts55 ( The post-operation block E) is executed. In particular, the post-operation effect (layer 6) is designed to be executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, and is displayed with priority over the background display effect for specific reach (layer 3) (SP). By displaying the image in front of the image display based on the reach background block or the SP ending background block), it is possible to obtain a “big hit (predetermined determination result) in Layer 3”. "Switching from the production section where display data is shared when there is no display area to the production area where different display data is used depending on whether a big hit (predetermined determination result) is obtained or not" is not displayed. (Or make it hard to see). As a result, "a production section in which display data is shared between a case where a big hit (a predetermined judgment result) is obtained and a case where it is not obtained" and a "a big hit (a predetermined judgment result)" is obtained Even if there is a case where it is not possible to successfully design the productional connection with the production section in which different display data is used depending on whether it is not obtained or not, this can be hidden by the post-operation production (cheat). As a result, production design can be facilitated. In this sense, it is desirable that the process of moving the movable body forward of the display screen is also executed in the post-operation effect.

  In addition, regarding the post-operation effect (post-operation block E) that is executed so as to cross over (include) the timing ts55, even if the operation is not detected within the effect reception period, regardless of the effect mode. Since it is configured to be executed in a dynamic manner, "a performance section in which display data is shared when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "a big hit (predetermined result)" It is possible to reliably conceal the connection with the "effect section in which different display data is used depending on whether the determination result) is obtained or not.

  In order to obtain such an effect, the timing ts55 at which the effect section is switched is after the timing ts54 (including the timing ts54), and the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden. Period before the timing (when the end timing of the post-operation effect shifts depending on the operation timing, the post-operation effect (liquid crystal display) is displayed when the effect reception is performed at the earliest timing in the operation reception effect generated at timing ts52. It is required to be set within a period before the timing of non-display). With such a configuration, the display-related processing (SP reach background block, SP ending background block) is executed in the "layer 3", but a display section that does not appear as a liquid crystal display is provided. .

  However, "a performance section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (predetermined judgment result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration that hides the background display effect (layer 3) at the timing of switching to the "effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained", it should be executable when the big hit is won. However, it may not be executed when the jackpot is not won. For example, the post-operation effect (for loss) is executed even when the jackpot is not won, but the post-operation effect is not executed over the entire display area of the effect display device 1600, but a partial effect display, etc. By executing the above, it is possible to maintain the display state of the background display effect (layer 3).

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 225, the “post-operation block E” is read as one of the plurality of blocks according to the specific variation pattern, which is read based on the effect reception being performed within the period of timings ts52 to ts54. Will be prepared. For the "post-operation block E", performance reception is automatically performed even when an operation is not detected within the period of timings ts52 to ts54 (the same program as when the operation is detected is automatically generated). Since it is generated (by executing the program), it is possible to provide an interesting and attractive effect which has not been available in the past.

  In this respect, although illustration is omitted, the "post-operation block E" is made executable even when the first variation pattern or the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed. Good.

  For example, in the first variation pattern, the “SP reach background block” and the “SP ending background block” having the effect contents according to the first variation pattern are sequentially executed, and are shown in FIG. 225. Similar to the specific variation pattern, the process identification information of "2" and the process identification information of "3" are read based on the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)". That is, in the first variation pattern, although the effect contents of the SP reach background (“information about image data” acquired from the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) are different, the same pre-allowance operation related display (precursor effect) as the specific variation pattern. ) And the permissible operation related display (such as a moving image and a gauge display) are executed, and the same "after-operation effect" is also used as the after-operation effect when the operation acceptance effect is generated in this way. Block E "is executed.

  In addition, in the first variation pattern, even if no operation is detected in the operation reception performance, performance reception is automatically performed, and "SP reach background block" and "SP ending background block" It is the same as the specific variation pattern in that the post-operation effect is executed so as to straddle (include) the switching timing with "."

  In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing of the "effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained," similar to the specific fluctuation pattern in the first fluctuation pattern. Alternatively, it may be executed when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although different background effects (SP reach effects) are being executed for the specific change pattern and the first change pattern, different background effects are not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) always appears in the form of, and it becomes possible to recognize that the big hit is won. On the other hand, when the jackpot is not won, it is recognized that the jackpot is won at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents between the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit is won by hiding the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern and always causing one effect content to appear. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit is lost because the "background effect", which has different effect contents depending on the variation pattern, is displayed without being hidden. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to sustain your expectations.

  On the other hand, also in the second variation pattern, the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block" having the effect contents according to the second variation pattern are sequentially executed. However, the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" in the second variation pattern may have the process identification information of "1", but the process identification information of "2" or "3". It does not include the process identification information, and immediately before the transition to the “SP ending background block”, the operation reception production capable of generating the post-operation production straddling the transition timing does not occur. .

  In this regard, in the "SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data)" related to the second variation pattern, the process identification information "5" (not shown) is acquired at a predetermined timing while the effect acceptance is not permitted. Based on the acquisition of the process identification information of "5", "the process of operating the availability information of the post-operation block E to the ON state (process 5) is executed". It is like this.

  Then, the availability information of the “post-operation block E” is turned on in this way, so that the “variable pattern” and the “first variation pattern” described above are used for the second variation pattern as well as the “operation”. The same post-operation effect based on the "post-operation block E (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for post-operation)" may span (include) the switching timing between the "SP reach background block" and the "SP ending background block". Will be executed on another layer.

  In such a configuration, when the second variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern is executed, the place where the production design should be originally performed as the display related to the background production is that the period during which the production reception is permitted. Since the "after-operation block E" is intentionally executed as a block different from the block for the background image at a predetermined timing in the production section that has not occurred, the operation image is not displayed and the gauge is not displayed. Even though the production is not accepted and the production reception is not allowed, the post-operation production (block E for post-operation) suddenly appears when the production reception is performed with another variation pattern. , It is expected to improve the interest in playing games.

  According to such a configuration, also in the second variation pattern, “a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained” and “a big hit” Even if there is a case where it is not possible to design well the productional connection with "production section in which different display data is used when (predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" It becomes possible to hide (cheat) and to facilitate production design.

  In addition, "a production section in which display data is shared between when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained and when it is not obtained" and "when a big hit (a predetermined determination result) is obtained" Regarding the configuration in which the background display effect (layer 3) is not displayed at the switching timing with the "effect section in which different display data is used when not obtained," the second fluctuation pattern also includes the specific fluctuation pattern and the second fluctuation pattern. Similar to the one variation pattern, it may be executed when the big hit is won, and may not be executed when the big hit is not won. According to such a configuration, although the background effect (SP reach effect) different from the specific variation pattern and the first variation pattern is executed, the different background effect is not displayed when the jackpot is won. The same effect (effect after operation) always appears in the form of, and it becomes possible to recognize that the big hit is won. On the other hand, when the big hit is not won, it is recognized that the big hit is lost at the timing when the background effect (SP ending background block) having different contents from the specific fluctuation pattern and the first fluctuation pattern appears. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the big hit is won, it is possible to intuitively recognize that the big hit is won by hiding the "background effect" having different effect contents depending on the variation pattern and always causing one effect content to appear. On the other hand, when the big hit is lost, it is difficult to intuitively recognize that the big hit is lost because the "background effect", which has different effect contents depending on the variation pattern, is displayed without being hidden. You will be able to do it, and you will be able to sustain your expectations.

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, the operation reception effect is executed based on various process identification information attached to the SP reach background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for SP reach). The process identification information need not be attached to the SP reach background block (SP reach liquid crystal effect scheduler data), and may be, for example, a pattern block (design liquid crystal effect scheduler data). ), A block for calling (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for calling), or other blocks (liquid crystal effect scheduler data).

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and another example thereof, the process is performed in the process read based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”. The effect determination based on the operation detection information for the specific operation means (operation button 410) has been illustrated as the effect determination performed. However, the specific operation means is not limited to the operation button 410, and may be another operation means. Further, in all or part of the above-mentioned effect determination based on the process identification information such as “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”, a plurality of operation means (operation buttons 410, It is determined which one of the sword production operation units 5000 etc. is given the operation opportunity, and whether or not the operation means on the side provided with the operation opportunity has been operated (production determination). May be determined). According to such a configuration, it is determined which of a plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword effect operation unit 5000, etc.) the operation opportunity is given, and the operation means on the side corresponding to the determination is determined. In order to realize the operation reception effect in which the operation opportunity is given only to any operation means, the process identification information, the liquid crystal effect scheduler, the block, etc. are made common regardless of the operation opportunity to be given to any operation means. Will be able to. Alternatively, an operation opportunity may be given to both different operation means, and the post-operation performance based on the process identification information may be executed based on the reception of the performance by one of the previously operated operation means. ..

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, a plurality of pre-permission operation related displays in the appearing EF block E may be provided. For example, a normal appearance EF block E1 that does not involve movement (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.) of the operation button 410, and a special appearance EF block E2 that involves movement of the operation button 410 (vibration, protrusion, rotation, etc.). Can be provided and any one of them can be executed (analyzed) according to the variation pattern. In this case, the blocks can be saved by commonly using the blocks following the appearance EF block E1 and the appearance EF block E2 (both the operation waiting block E and the post-operation block E). Like

  In the example shown in FIG. 225 or another example thereof, based on the process identification information (“X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, “Y3”, etc.) attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data. By executing the process that is read out, the operation for a specific operation unit can be accepted. However, in addition to this, regarding a predetermined operation means different from the specific operation means, a process (for example, a peripheral control unit steady process) that is completely unrelated to the process identification information attached to the block or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data is performed. The operation may be accepted by and the change corresponding to the acceptance may be made to the effect being executed. According to such a configuration, even if an error occurs in the production progress due to the block, the liquid crystal production scheduler data, etc., the operation for the predetermined operation means can be properly accepted, so that the game is interesting. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  In addition, the block itself is prevented from appearing by a player operation different from the process of performing the effect determination based on the process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3”. Thus, all effect elements (display, sound, movable) related to the target block may be disabled. With such a configuration, it is possible to save layers.

  In addition, during the performance determination period, a part of the process identification information of “X1”, “X2”, “Y1”, “Y2”, and “Y3” is converted into other process identification information by the player operation. You may change the opportunity.

  The specific layer may be scheduled to be used before the target fluctuation starts, and may be used over a plurality of fluctuations.

  The block may be used not only during a change but also during a winning game or the like. In addition, it may be possible to provide a block that spans during a change to a win game, or a block that spans between a win game and a probability change, and the process identification information is also included in these blocks and the liquid crystal effect scheduler data corresponding to the block. It may be attached.

  Further, "Y3" may be attached to only the block (or the liquid crystal effect scheduler data) executed during the probability changing state, and the type of the process identification information read according to the game state may be changed.

  Further, during error notification (abnormality notification) or the like, it is desirable not to delete the block being executed and the process identification information although an error image is displayed or an error sound is output. As a result, the effect can be properly restored after the error is released.

  Further, among the inventions inherent in the example shown in FIG. 225 and other examples thereof, the effects described are obtained without necessarily using the technology such as the block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data) or the process identification information. Those that can be realized may be realized by other methods.

[Performance determination based on operation detection information before the expiration of the effective period]
In general, when a performance reception period (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted occurs, the above-mentioned "image" or "gauge display (bar display)" is displayed in accordance with the timing of the generation. In this regard, when playing for a long time or playing many times, it becomes possible to predict at which timing in the variation pattern the “image” or “gauge display” will be displayed. Then, some players may not be able to wait for the operation and may operate with the timing in anticipation that the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed. At this time, if there is a case where the operation is performed immediately before the "image" or "gauge display" is displayed (immediately before the performance reception period occurs), the "image" or "gauge display" will be displayed It is mistaken as if it was operated in the state (while the production reception period is occurring), and as a result, the redone operation is delayed within the production reception period (effective period), and the production is received. There was a case where the performance reception period (effective period) would end without any action.

  In this regard, in the special operation reception effect according to the present embodiment (for example, the effect reception period that occurs at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225), the effect reception period (effective period) from the predetermined timing in the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation. ) Occurs, even if the operation is not performed within the effect reception period, the effect determination is made by the automatic button function and the after-operation effect can be generated as described above. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the situation in which the post-operation performance cannot be confirmed even if the redone operation is delayed within the performance reception period (effective period) in the above-described situation. become able to.

  However, in this case, even if the post-operation effect can be confirmed, it is not possible to feel the realization that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation by the player, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate. Therefore, as will be described later, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, the effect determination to generate the after-operation effect is allowed only within the effect acceptance period (effective period), but the operation state is detected. Even if it is done within a period (immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, this is intentionally used as a target (determination material) for the production determination. According to such a configuration, even when the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (effective period) is expected to occur, the operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). After the operation, the post-operation performance will be executed. That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, and therefore, the interest of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  On the other hand, as will be described later, even if the operation state is detected within the period (immediately before) before the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the operation state exceeds the specific time. When the performance reception period (effective period) is generated while the above is maintained, it is not determined that the performance reception will be performed within the m-th frame. With such a configuration, the player can be imparted with fairness acceptance conditions, and it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

  Also, as will be described later, at least in a predetermined operation reception performance, when a performance reception period (effective period) occurs from a predetermined timing within the m-th frame after the start of fluctuation, at the time when the m-th frame is started. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, the "image of the operation means (or a gauge display indicating the remaining time)" is not displayed yet. That is, in this case, since a period during which the production reception is allowed internally occurs from the time when the mood image (or gauge display) is not yet displayed, the player runs ahead, As a result, even if the operation is performed immediately before the image (or gauge display) is displayed, the effect reception will be made, and it may happen that the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation. You will be able to suppress.

  Hereinafter, such technical features will be described. In describing the technical features, the "performance reception period (effective period)" according to the present embodiment will be described again. "(Effective period)" means "a period from the start of the process for generating the state in which the production acceptance is permitted to the end of the process". Here, the details of the “process for generating a state in which acceptance of production is permitted” differs depending on the method of realizing the “production acceptance period (effective period)”. For example, “operation state flag (see FIG. 225)” "Process for turning on", "Process for setting timer", "Process for calling effect acceptance determination based on process identification information (see FIG. 225)", and the like. That is, the "production acceptance period (effective period)" corresponds to "the production section (period) from the execution of the process for generating the state in which the production reception is allowed to the execution of a predetermined time", The "predetermined time" is "the time until the operation state flag is turned off" or "the time until the timer times out", and "the same process identification information is attached to each frame ends the effect section. It is equivalent to "time to be done". In such an "effect reception period (effective period)", determination processing as to whether effect reception is performed is performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, for each frame) based on detection of the operation state. However, in the “determination process as to whether or not effect reception is performed” according to the present embodiment, not only “detection of operation state” performed within the “effect reception period (effective period)” but also The feature is that "operation state detection" performed before the "production acceptance period (effective period)" occurs is also targeted. Such a “production acceptance period (effective period)” is generally created as a period of about 100 frames, for example.

  FIG. 226 to FIG. 231 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of processing performed before and after the production reception period (effective period) occurs. In each of the examples described below, the case where an image is displayed using the “block” or the “liquid crystal effect scheduler data” described with reference to FIG. 225 is shown, but the display method is not limited to this. As long as it is a general one in which image control is performed on a frame-by-frame basis, the method for realizing it does not matter. Further, the "process for generating a state in which performance acceptance is allowed" is also exemplified as the "process for turning on the operation state flag", but the process is not limited to this, and the "process for setting a timer" and the "process for setting a timer" Other methods such as "process for calling performance acceptance determination based on process identification information" may be used.

  FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing an example of a process when there is no operation detection before and after the effect reception period (effective period).

  Now, when a special operation acceptance effect (for example, an effect acceptance period that occurs at the timing ts42 shown in FIG. 225) occurs in a specific variation pattern, the “effect” is generated in the “m” -th frame after the symbol variation is started. It is assumed that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the on state as "processing for generating a state in which acceptance is permitted". Note that the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state at the halfway "timing t1 (m)" in the "m" th frame, because "the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state. Even if the "process" itself is executed based on the arrival of the "m" th frame, more strictly, in relation to the execution of other processes, the start timing of the "m" th frame Therefore, it is impossible to execute all of the various processes including the process in question, and it is possible that the various processes are executed in a predetermined order with a delay relative to the "frame start timing". Because it always happens.

  When the operation state flag is operated in the ON state in this way, a production section (production reception period) in which production reception is allowed occurs, and within the production reception period, based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals. A "determination process as to whether to generate a post-operation effect" is performed.

  The effect reception period according to this example is described as “special operation reception effect” shown in FIG. 225. Therefore, as described above, regarding the “determination process for generating post-operation effect”, regardless of whether the effect reception period has occurred (whether the operation state flag is in the ON state), “peripheral control unit steady state” In “processing”, it is executed as “effect determination based on operation detection information” for each unit time (for each frame). By continuing this after the performance reception period, the "determination process as to whether to generate post-operation performance" is performed based on the operation detection information at predetermined time intervals even during the performance reception period. (In the figure, they are executed at “timing t2 (m)”, “timing t2 (m + 1)”, “timing t2 (m + 2)”, and “timing t2 (m + 3)”, respectively). That is, in this case, the "determination process as to whether or not to generate the post-operation effect" is executed even in a frame before the "m" th frame, but the operation state flag is in the off state. In the situation, it is substantially invalidated as described above, so it is omitted in the figure.

  Further, in this example, as the order of various processes performed when a new frame arrives, “after the operation is performed” rather than the order in which the “process of setting (operating) the operation state flag to the ON state” is executed. The order in which the "determination process regarding whether to generate an effect is executed" is set later, and as a result, the effect is generated in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag is operated (set) to the ON state. Reception (determination of generating post-operation effect) can be performed. However, with regard to the order, it is not always necessary to first execute the “processing (setting) of the operation state flag to the ON state”, and conversely, regarding “whether to generate post-operation effect” The order in which the “determination process of” is executed may be set first. In this case, in the same frame (m-th frame) in which the operation state flag has been operated (set) to be in the ON state, the "determination process regarding whether or not to generate post-operation effect" itself is not performed, and therefore the effect is produced. Reception (determination of generating post-operation effect) will not be performed.

  Then, conventionally, at a timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, "a process for generating a state in which performance reception is permitted (here," a process for operating the operation state flag to be in an on state ") is executed. If it is performed, based on the operation detection information acquired within the period after the process is executed (here, “the period when the operation state flag is in the ON state”), “whether the post-operation effect should be generated is displayed. The “determination process” is executed. For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226, at the timing t2 (m), it is determined based on the operation detection information whether or not there is an operation within the period from the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m), and the operation is performed. When it is determined that the operation is performed, post-operation performance is executed, and when it is not determined that the operation is performed (or, although the operation state is detected, the length of time that is maintained as the operation state is incorrect). When it is determined that it is sufficient), the post-operation effect is not executed, and at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the next frame, it is operated whether or not there is an operation within the period of the timing t2 (m) to t2 (m + 1). The process of determining again based on the detection information is executed for each frame.

  However, in this case, if there is a person who can not wait for operation and operates aiming at the timing in anticipation that the production reception period will occur, the production reception period will not be received As mentioned above, there is a concern that the (validity period) will end. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the "performance determination to generate the post-operation performance" is allowed only within the performance reception period (effective period). Regarding the “detection of state” itself, even if it is made within the period (immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, this is used as the target (determination material) of the operation detection determination. I dare to use it.

  For example, in such an operation detection determination, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to chattering or the like, it is usually possible to use "the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more" as a determination condition. Done. In this respect, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment also uses the operation detection information before the timing t1 (m) arrives, and within the period of the timing t1 (m) to t2 (m). “Even if the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is not maintained in the operating state for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more before the timing t1 (m) If the operation means (for example, the operation button 410) is maintained in the operation state for the time of, it is determined that there is an operation, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the operation is performed immediately before the production reception period (effective period) is expected to occur, the operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). After the operation, the post-operation performance will be executed. That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, and therefore, the interest of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  Which one is used as a more specific configuration for such operation detection information is not particularly limited. In this respect, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not the operation state is maintained (continued) for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms) or more on a frame-by-frame basis. For a frame whose operation state is maintained (continued) for a time (for example, 3 ms) or more, a history as an “ON frame” is left, and a frame without a history as an “ON frame” is treated as an “OFF frame”. I have to. The history may be left at the end of a frame or at the start of the next frame, or may be left as an "ON frame" when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms). You can

  Then, as will be described later, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, three frames in which history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” are left When the operation detection information in the form of is aligned, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the post-operation effect can be executed.

  Note that the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment determines whether the frame is the “ON frame” or the “OFF frame” at the end of the frame, and records the history thereof. In the "determination process for generating post-operation effect" performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in, the "m" th frame including the timing t2 (m) is not used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame are used as determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". It is determined whether or not the history is left as a "frame". On the other hand, when the history as the “ON frame” is left when the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 3 ms), the “operation” is performed at the timing t2 (m) shown in FIG. 226. In the “determination process for generating post-production”, the “m” -th frame including the timing t2 (m) is also used as the determination material. That is, in this case, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are used as the determination materials, and these are the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame". As a result, it is determined whether or not the history is left.

  In this respect, the example shown in FIG. 226 shows a case where no operation is detected before and after the effect reception period (effective period). Therefore, at the determination timing (timing t2 (m), t2 (m + 1), t2 (m + 2), t2 (m + 3) in each frame) after the production acceptance period (effective period) has occurred, It is determined that the history as “OFF frame”, “OFF frame”, and “OFF frame” is left, and the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is not performed, and the after-operation effect is generated. Not executed

  By the way, regarding the image displayed on the effect display device 1600, a delay of two frames (or one frame) may occur after the processing related to the display by the peripheral control unit 1511 is started until it appears as an image. It has been known. This delay requires one frame for processing in the peripheral control unit 1511 (processing for determining which image is used as an image according to various determinations and processing for creating a drawing list in response to the determination). The processing in the image control unit (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) that has received the processing result (information about an image such as a drawing list) on the peripheral control unit 1511 side (a so-called double buffering preparation buffer (a non-display buffer) This also occurs because one frame is also required for the drawing process on the side).

  Therefore, conventionally, regarding the processing related to "production during the effective period (operation waiting block E)" by the peripheral control unit 1511, a frame two frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. It is configured to start at the (“m−2” th frame), so that the effect display device 1600 appears during the effective period from the “m” th frame.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “during effective period (operation waiting block)” is still displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the m-th frame is started. One of the features is that there is no state, and the period up to the "m-1" th frame immediately before the production reception period (effective period) occurs is "pre-effective period production (effect production etc. In addition to the "processing period for" appearance EF block E ")", the period from the "m" -th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is defined as "effect during the effective period (" The processing period for the operation waiting block E ")" is set. Note that, as shown in FIG. 225, regarding the “process period for pre-effective period effect (“ appearance EF block E ”for effect effect, etc.)”, the process is continued even after the “m” -th frame, It may be overlapped with the processing period for the production during the period (the “operation waiting block E” such as the image or gauge display).

  More specifically, in a predetermined period until the "m" th frame arrives (or in a period thereafter), a drawing list is created based on information corresponding to "pre-effective period effect (effect effect, etc.)". It is created and transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512). On the other hand, in the predetermined period after the "m" th frame arrives (the period during which the effect is produced during the effective period), the drawing is performed based on the information corresponding to the "during the effective period (such as image and gauge display)". A list is created and this list is transmitted to the image control means (liquid crystal display control unit 1512).

  With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 226, in the peripheral control unit 1511, “pre-effective period effect (appearance EF block E)” until the “m−1” th frame (or after that). The process relating to "production during the effective period (operation waiting block E)" is executed after the "m" th frame, but in the effect display device 1600, in the "m" th frame. "Pre-effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)" is still in the middle of execution, and "effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" finally starts in the "m + 2" th frame. Will be done. That is, in this case, from the time when the "effect during effective period (display based on operation waiting block E)" is not yet displayed ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame), the effect reception is internally performed. As a result, the player runs ahead, and as a result, he / she operates just before the "effective period effect (display based on operation waiting block E)" is displayed. Even in such a case, the effect reception is performed, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which the effect cannot be confirmed after the operation from occurring.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 226, a process relating to “effect pre-effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)” and a process related to “effective period effect (display based on appearance EF block E)” are performed. For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the peripheral control unit 1511 executes each frame. However, when these effects are displayed by moving image data, it is only necessary to create a drawing list in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the “information corresponding to the moving image” at the start frame of the processing. That is, in this case, in each subsequent frame, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) side automatically performs the process of reading and displaying the image data. The processing may not be performed every frame in the unit 1511.

  FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the operation is started in the “m + 1” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, there are three frames in which the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” remains. When the operation detection information in the form of line-up is obtained, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the after-operation effect can be executed.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 227, it is assumed that the operation is started at a timing before the timing t2 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” th frame (timing before the effect reception determination timing). Thus, the history of the “m + 1” th frame itself as an “ON frame” is also left at the end of the frame. However, at the timing t2 (m + 1) in the frame, all of the three frames (“m−2” th frame, “m−1” th frame, and “m” th frame) to be determined are Since it is an "OFF frame", no effect reception (determination that an operation has been performed) is made.

  Even at the timing t2 (m + 2) in the next frame "m + 2" th frame, the three frames ("m-1" th frame, "m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame) to be determined are Since the history of "OFF frame", "OFF frame", and "ON frame" is left, the effect reception (determination of operation) is not made.

  When the timing t2 (m + 3) in the next frame "m + 3" th frame is reached, the three frames ("m" th frame, "m + 1" th frame, "m + 2" th frame) to be judged are The history as “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” is left, respectively, so that the effect reception (determination of the operation) is made.

  According to such a configuration, since the “m + 1” th frame and the “m + 2” th frame are “ON frames”, the operation state is equal to or longer than the predetermined time over two frames within the effect reception period (effective period). It is possible to judge that the situation is maintained (for example, 3 ms). Further, since the “m” -th frame is the “OFF frame”, it is possible to determine that the operation is started within the production acceptance period (effective period). That is, in this case, it means that the operation is properly performed within the period in which the effect reception is allowed. Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. (In this case, timing t2 (m + 3)), the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect (here, “post-operation block E”) corresponding to this is executed (started). In this example, the process of turning off the operation state flag is executed at the time of reception of the effect, but the operation state flag may be turned off at the end of the frame. It suffices if the operation determination process is (substantially) not performed in the next frame by executing the process of turning off the operation state flag based on the reception of the effect.

  In this regard, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m + 3), the “after-operation effect (operation) It is supposed that the processing regarding the rear-use block E) ”is performed. Therefore, in the effect display device 1600, the post-operation effect (display corresponding to the post-operation block E) is displayed from the "m + 5" th frame (not shown) two frames after.

  FIG. 228 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the operation is started at the “m−2” -th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226.

  As described above, in the “determination process for generating post-operation effect” according to the present embodiment, there are three frames in which the history of “OFF frame”, “ON frame”, and “ON frame” remains. When the operation detection information in the form of line-up is obtained, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is performed so that the after-operation effect can be executed.

  Also, as described above, the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment allows the “production determination indicating that the post-operation production is to be generated” only within the production reception period (effective period). Regarding the “detection of state”, even if it is performed within a period (several frames immediately before) before the production reception period (effective period) occurs, this is the target of the operation detection determination (determination). I intentionally use it as a material.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation is started within the “m−2” -th frame that is two frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs. ing. Conventionally, the information obtained by the operation at such timing is not used in the determination regarding the effect reception. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the performance acceptance period (effective period) occurs at the timing t1 (m) in the "m" th frame, the timing t2 in the "m" th frame. In (m), the operation detection information acquired in the three frames ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame) before this is received in the performance reception. It will be used in such a determination. In this example, these frames ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, "m-1" th frame) are "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. As a result, the history is stored, and the production reception (determination of the operation) is performed.

  According to such a configuration, the "m-3" th frame is the "OFF frame", and the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame are the "ON frames". By doing so, it is possible to determine that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more (for example, 3 ms) over the two frames immediately before the production reception period (effective period) occurs. That is, in this case, it means that the operation is started in the "m-2" th frame that is two frames before the "m" th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, In the example shown in FIG. 228, the effect reception is performed within the effect reception period (effective period) (here, timing t2 (m)), and the post-operation effect corresponding thereto (here, “post-operation block E”). ) Will be executed (started). When such a configuration is adopted, as shown in FIG. 228, the effect reception period (effective period) itself is ended in an extremely short time without even one frame being continued, but the effect reception period (effective period) Even if the operation is started just before that in anticipation of the occurrence of the (period), the post-operation production is generated by regarding this as the operation performed within the production reception period (effective period). Will be able to. That is, in this case, the player side can feel that the post-operation effect has been generated due to the operation, and therefore, the interest of the game can be appropriately maintained.

  However, if the production reception in such a mode occurs frequently, the significance of the production reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to the present embodiment, at the timing t2 (m) in the "m" th frame, the effect reception based on the operation detection information acquired before the occurrence of the effect reception period (effective period). When the action is performed, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the mood image or the gauge display. In other words, in this case, it is possible to have a considerable amount of suspicion as to whether or not the "post-operation effect" is caused by being given an operation opportunity. It becomes possible to expect to suppress the start of the operation before the (period) occurs.

  It should be noted that there is no particular limitation on a method of realizing "the post-operation effect is executed without displaying a moving image or a gauge display". In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, the processing regarding the "during the effective period (operation waiting block E)" is performed from the "m" th frame without intentionally considering the delay of two frames. Then, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m), the process related to the "after-operation effect (post-operation block E)" is performed from the relevant frame ("m" th frame) for which the effect reception is performed. I am trying. As a result, as shown in FIG. 228, the process relating to the “after-operation effect (post-operation block E)” is executed without executing the process related to the “during effective period (operation waiting block E)”. As a result, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying the image and gauge display.

  Further, in the example illustrated in FIG. 228, it is assumed that the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is maintained in the form of crossing the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame. Therefore, it is decided to explain what kind of determination is made under the assumption and the effect according to the determination is executed. However, as shown in FIG. 229, the operation (operation state) started from the “m−2” th frame is not maintained across the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, and “m Even if it is ended within the "-1" th frame, if the "m-2" th frame and the "m-1" th frame each have a history as an "ON frame" (respectively, If the operation state is maintained for 3 ms or more), the same determination is made at the timing described with reference to FIG. 228, and the same effect is executed according to the determination.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 228, the operation by the player is not detected at all after the production reception period has occurred, and is performed only within the period before the production reception period occurs. However, the judgment conditions ("m-3" th frame, "m-2" th frame, and "m-1" th frame) for the effect reception at the timing t2 (m) are "OFF frames", respectively. , “ON frame” and “history as“ ON frame ”are left)” are satisfied even if the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m), the operation is accepted and the operation is performed. Post production will be executed.

  With respect to such a configuration, the same can be said when the operation is performed within the production reception period (effective period). For example, in the example illustrated in FIG. 227, the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), and the timing is before the timing t2 (m + 3) in the “m + 3” th frame, or “m + 2”. Even if the operation state is completed within the th frame, the determination conditions (“m” -th frame, “m + 1” -th frame, “m + 2” -th frame, respectively) regarding the effect reception at the timing t2 (m + 3) are “ As long as the "OFF frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame" are left in the history), the operation state is not maintained at the timing t2 (m + 3), as shown in FIG. The effect reception is performed as shown, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it does not matter whether or not the operation state is maintained at the timing at which the "determination regarding performance reception" is performed, and the timing at which the "determination regarding performance reception" is performed. When the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more within a period earlier than the above (in the present embodiment, the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more in each of two frames), the operation that is the operation target The effect reception is made on the assumption that the operation is properly performed on the means, and the post-operation effect is executed.

  Here, the operation detection information obtained before the performance reception period (effective period) occurs in the “production reception determination process” performed after the performance reception period (effective period) occurs. If it is simply used as a determination material, for example, even when the precursor effect (appearance effect) is not executed and there is no sign that the effect reception period (effective period) will occur, operation will be performed. By maintaining the state, there is a concern that someone will be allowed to receive the performance reception. That is, if the operation in this manner is permitted, the significance of the production reception period (effective period) itself may be impaired, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be reduced.

  Therefore, in the peripheral control unit 1511 according to this embodiment, as described above, not only the “ON frame” is set as a determination target, but whether the “OFF frame” and the “ON frame” are present is detected. In this way, the above-mentioned concerns are eliminated. In the present embodiment, ON / OFF is determined on a frame-by-frame basis, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, “the timing at which the operation is started is determined by detecting the rising or falling of the sensor signal, It is also possible to employ a method such as "the effect reception is performed on condition that the operation state is maintained for a predetermined time or more from the timing". Even in such a case, it is possible to judge how long before the production reception period (effective period) the timing when the sensor signal rises or falls occurs, or the time when the operation state is maintained. It is possible to solve the above-mentioned problem by determining how long it continues.

  FIG. 230 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the operation is started from the “m−3” th frame in the effect reception period (effective period) shown in FIG. 226.

  As shown in FIG. 230, in this example, the operation started in the “m-3” -th frame that is three frames before the “m” -th frame in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs is the effect. It is assumed that the process continues until the "m + 2" th frame within the acceptance period (valid period). In this example as well, when the performance acceptance period occurs, first, the “determination regarding performance acceptance” is performed at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” th frame, and in the determination, the performance acceptance period occurs. The operation detection information acquired previously (here, the operation detection information acquired in the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame) is used as the determination material. It is designed to be used.

  However, in this example, the "m-3" th frame, the "m-2" th frame, and the "m-1" th frame have history as "ON frame", "ON frame", and "ON frame", respectively. Since it is in the state of being performed, the effect reception (determination that there is an operation) is not performed as a result of the “determination regarding effect reception” at the timing t2 (m). Not only that, but also in the “decision regarding reception of performance” performed at the timing t2 (m + 1) or the like after the next frame, “ON frame”, “ON frame”, “ON Since only the history as "frame" is left, as long as the operation state from the "m-3" th frame is maintained, as a result of "judgement regarding performance reception" performed in each frame There is no reception (determination that there was an operation).

  That is, in this case, if the operation state maintained from the "m-3" th frame is temporarily terminated and a frame in which the history as the "OFF frame" is left is created and then the operation is not performed again, reception of the effect is performed. It is possible to prevent the (judgment of the operation) from being made. As a result, even if the indication effect (appearance effect) is not executed and the operation reception state (effective period) does not even indicate the situation, even if the operation state is maintained, It becomes possible to preferably avoid the production reception.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 227 to 230, when the effect reception is performed at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, the post-operation effect is displayed without displaying the mood image or the gauge display. It will be executed (see especially FIG. 228). However, in this case, since it is not possible to feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation, and there is concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate, this is the case when the performance reception is performed at any timing within the performance reception period. However, the production progress may be performed so that the image and the gauge display are always displayed. In this case, regarding the feature such as "at the time point when the m-th frame is started," the effect during the effective period (operation waiting block) "is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600", It is not necessary to leave this, but it is more desirable to leave it.

  The method for realizing such a configuration is not particularly limited, but, for example, the timing at which the “processing (setting) operation (setting) of the operation state flag is performed” in the frame ”and the“ performance acceptance determination ”are performed. This can be realized by setting the timing at which the "processing" is performed to be opposite to that in the case of the example shown in FIG. 226.

  FIG. 231 shows an effect reception period (effective when the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag in the frame) is performed after the "determination process for effect reception" within the frame. It is a flow chart which shows an example about (period).

  As shown in FIG. 231, assuming that the "m" th frame has arrived, first, at the timing t12 (m) in the frame, the process of operating (setting) the operation state flag to the ON state is performed. Done. As a result, an effect reception period (effective period) is generated, but in the "m" th frame, "decision process for effect reception" is performed after the effect reception period (effective period) is generated. There is no such thing.

  That is, although illustration is omitted, in the “m” -th frame, the timing at which the “determination process related to effect reception” is performed comes before the timing t12 (m). Then, at this time, the "determination process for effect reception" itself is not performed, or the "determination process for effect reception" has been performed but the effect acceptance period (effective period) has not occurred. As a result, it is determined that the production is not accepted.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production reception from being performed in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the production reception period (effective period) occurs. Therefore, in the frame (here, the “m” -th frame in this case) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the “effective period effect (operation waiting block E ) ”Is always performed, and the display image (production during the effective period) according to the processing can be displayed on the production display device 1600 in the“ m + 2 ”-th frame two frames after. become.

  That is, in this case, the production reception is performed after the production reception period has occurred, at the shortest, the "m-2" th frame, the "m-1" th frame, and the "m" th frame are "OFF frames". , “ON frame”, and “ON frame”, the timing t11 (m + 1) in the “m + 1” th frame has arrived. Then, at this time, the peripheral control unit 1511 performs a process related to "after-operation effect (post-operation block E)" based on the reception of the effect reception. At this time, the image control means (the liquid crystal display control unit 1512) prepares the double buffering preparation buffer ( The drawing process on the (non-display buffer) side has already been performed (see "In-image control means process" in FIG. 231).

  Therefore, according to the method shown in FIG. 231, even if the effect reception is performed in the shortest time after the effect reception period has occurred, in the effect display device 1600, the "m + 2" -th frame "effect during effective period". Is displayed, and the display related to "post-operation effect" is displayed in the "m + 3" th frame, so that it is possible to start the post-operation effect after displaying the image and gauge display. become.

  However, the method of starting the post-operation effect after displaying the mock image and the gauge display is not limited to the method shown in FIG. For example, as in the case shown in FIG. 226, even in the frame (here, the "m" th frame) where the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, the effect reception can be performed at the timing t2 (m). Even when the effect reception is made at the timing t2 (m), the processing relating to the "during effective period (operation waiting block E)" is performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 at the timing t2 (m). It may be performed.

  That is, in this case, one frame for the frame for which the effect reception has been performed is the frame for performing the process related to the “after-operation effect (block E for operation after)” in the peripheral control unit 1511 based on the reception of the effect. It will be delayed only. Therefore, even when the effect reception is made at the timing t2 (m) in the “m” -th frame, in the “m” -th frame, the “control during the effective period (waiting for operation) in the peripheral control unit 1511 is performed. The processing relating to "block E)" will be performed, and the processing relating to "after operation effect (block E for operation)" will be performed in the peripheral control unit 1511 in the next frame "m + 1" th frame. . Such "delay" is not limited to the frame (here, the "m" th frame) in which the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, but occurs in any frame when the effect reception is performed. . Even with such a method, even after the production reception period has occurred, even if the production reception is made in the shortest time, it is possible to start the post-operation production after displaying the mood image and the gauge display. Become.

  As described above, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231 and the other examples thereof, in the “determination process regarding reception of effect” performed at a predetermined timing in the m-th frame, rather than when the m-th frame is started. The “detection information from the operation detecting means” acquired in the previous “m−1” -th frame will also be used as the determination material for the effect reception. In particular, according to the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 231, and other examples thereof, “from the operation detecting means” acquired in the “m−1” th frame before the “mth” frame is started. Both the "detection information" and the "detection information from the operation detecting means" acquired within the "m-2" th frame are used as the determination material for the effect reception. That is, in this case, even if the operation is performed immediately before (at an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the effective period) in anticipation of the effect reception period (effective period) occurring, this effect is produced. Since the post-operation performance will be executed on the assumption that the operation is performed within the reception period (effective period), the player will also feel that the post-operation performance has occurred due to the operation. You will learn.

  Moreover, even if the operation state is not maintained at the time when the "determination process for effect reception" in the m-th frame is performed, the "operation detection means" acquired in the frame before the m-th frame The performance reception can be made based on the "detection information from". That is, in this case, even when the operation state is maintained only immediately before the production acceptance period (effective period) occurs (within an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the effective period occurs). Since the post-operation production will be executed by regarding this as an operation performed within the production reception period (effective period), the post-operation production is also performed on the player side due to the operation. You will feel the actual feeling.

  However, as described above, instead of operating (setting) the frame to the “ON frame” at the end of the frame, the frame is set to the “ON frame” when a predetermined time (3 ms) has elapsed in the frame. You may make it operate (set). In this case, the operation detection information (detection information from the operation detection unit) acquired from the start of the m-th frame until the production reception period (effective period) occurs is also used as the determination material for the production reception. Will be used. That is, in this case, the operation (for example, maintaining the operation state for 3 ms or more) is performed in each of the "m-1" th frame and the "m" th frame, and the operation is performed in the "m-2" th frame. When it is determined that it is not performed (for example, the operation state is less than 3 ms), the effect reception is performed. According to such a configuration, the time taken for the player's operation to be used as the determination material is shortened, so that it is possible to provide a post-operation effect with high immediate responsiveness.

  In addition, in the examples shown in FIGS. 226 to 230 and other examples thereof, at the time when the effect reception period (effective period) occurs, it is assumed that the mood image and the gauge display are not yet displayed in the display area. ing. Then, when the effect reception is performed in the m-th frame, the post-operation effect is executed without displaying (creating) the button image or the gauge display. That is, in this case, even in the case where the operation state is maintained only immediately before (at an extremely short time of about 33 ms to 66 ms before the occurrence of the effective period) in anticipation of the effect reception period (effective period) occurring. , While the post-operation performance is executed assuming that the operation has been performed within the performance reception period (effective period), “When the post-operation performance is generated in such a mode, A button image or gauge display is not displayed. ”It is possible to give a demerit-like demerit, and it is possible to prompt an appropriate operation within the effect reception period (effective period). For example, when the button image or the gauge display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is not possible to visually recognize which of those modes is displayed, and it is suggested by the mode. It is not possible to understand the degree of expectation, which is a demerit.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 226 to 231, or another example thereof, when the production reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a long time, the production is not received. It becomes possible to urge the user to operate in an appropriate mode during the performance reception period.

  However, on the other hand, when the performance reception period (effective period) occurs while the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than the specific time, not for a long time, the performance reception is performed. Even if the operation is performed immediately before the period (effective period) is expected to occur, it is considered that the operation was performed within the production reception period (effective period), and the post-operation production is performed. As a result, the player feels that the post-operation effect has occurred due to the operation.

  Moreover, in order for the production reception to be made, it is not enough that the operation state is maintained for a time shorter than the specific time, and it is also required that the operation state is maintained for a time longer than the predetermined time. Therefore, it is possible to preferably avoid this even for erroneous detection due to chattering or the like.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 231 and other examples thereof, in the processing in the "mth" frame in which the effect reception period is started, no matter what operation detection information is obtained, processing related to post-operation effect ( Of the display process in the effect display device 1600, the process regarding the lamp light emission, the process regarding the sound output, the process regarding the movable body operation), at least regarding the display process in the effect display device 1600, “the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed. , "Processing for reading in the peripheral control unit 1511" is not performed, and processing when the effect reception is not performed (processing for reading information corresponding to image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) I decided to do it. According to such a configuration, even if any operation information is obtained in the m-th frame in which the effect reception period starts, in the m-th frame, the process (effect) when the effect reception is not performed At least a part (display process in the effect display device 1600) of the display process in the display device 1600, the process regarding the lamp light emission, the process regarding the sound output, the process regarding the movable body operation) is always performed. That is, in this case, with respect to the display on the effect display device 1600, a process (a process of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511) in response to the reception of the effect is started with a delay. Before that, the process when the effect reception is not performed (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) is always executed. Therefore, it is possible to recognize that the "post-operation effect" is an effect that is started due to an operation by the player.

  Note that, as described above as another example of the example shown in FIG. 231, the effect determination is made based on the operation detection information even in the "mth" frame in which the effect reception period starts, and then the effect is determined. In the frame where the determination is made, the “processing of reading the information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect in the peripheral control unit 1511” is not executed, and the “information corresponding to the image data of the post-operation effect is displayed in the next frame. , "Reading process in the peripheral control unit 1511" may be executed. That is, in this case, at least the display process in the effect display device 1600 among the processes related to the post-operation effect (the display process in the effect display device 1600, the process related to the lamp light emission, the process related to the sound output, the process related to the movable body operation) is determined as the effect determination. In the frame in which the effect is performed, the process (the process of reading the information corresponding to the image data for operation waiting in the peripheral control unit 1511) when the effect reception is not performed is executed. However, at this time, of the processes related to post-operation effects (display process in effect display device 1600, processes related to lamp emission, processes related to sound output, processes related to movable body operation), for example, “process related to lamp emission” and “related to sound output”. Regarding “processing”, processing for reading “information regarding the light emission mode after operation” or “information regarding sound output after operation” may be performed in the frame in which the effect determination is made. That is, in this case, the lamp and the sound are started to be output in the post-operation mode based on the read information in the frame where the effect determination is made or in the next frame.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 225, in the case where the technique of displaying the effect image by the block is adopted, and when the effect reception by the operation is made, the “after-operation block” for executing the after-operation effect is displayed. In addition, "Disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)" for displaying the disappearing effect image until the operation promotion image such as gauge image and gauge display that was displayed until then is hidden It may be executed. According to such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinguishing EF)", for example, an image in which a mood image or a gauge display fades out upon reception of an effect (images gradually hidden) Can be displayed. In addition, such "disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for extinguishing EF)" may be executed when the effect reception period ends without effect after operation being performed. “Disappearing EF block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for disappearing EF)” is also attached to a background block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for background), an operation waiting block (liquid crystal effect scheduler data for operation waiting), and the like. It can be configured to be executed by operating the availability information in the process read based on the existing process identification information.

  226 to FIG. 231, the "process for generating a state in which acceptance of effect is permitted (process for operating (setting) operation state flag to ON state)" is a scheduler after the symbol variation is started. It may be executed based on (elapsed time) or the like, and does not necessarily have to be executed with a frame as a trigger.

  Further, the “image” and “gauge display” may be displayed as a pre-effective period effect (display based on the appearance EF block E). However, regarding the display mode when the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E) is performed, it may be displayed in a semi-transparent manner or may be displayed in a hazy manner by another effect display. For example, it is required to display the “image” or “gauge display” in a manner different from that when the “production during the effective period (display based on the operation waiting block E)” is performed. Further, at this time, in the effect before the effective period (display based on the appearance EF block E), one of the “curtain image” and the “gauge display” may be displayed, and the effect may be advanced without being displayed. .

[Further directionality regarding the display of simulated images]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, control is performed to cause the effect display device 1600 to display effect content corresponding to the result of the effect determination. The variable effect based on the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movement of the movable body (feature effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variable effect by the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function that indicates whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction, movable body movement, etc. The expected effect related to (1) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation (including 0% and 100%) that a big hit is obtained". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate an operation reception performance (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, as will be described later, the permissible acceptance sound output when the operation reception effect is generated has a different mode depending on the result of the effect determination, whereby the post-operation effect is executed with a high expectation. I try to suggest the rate of being hit and the rate at which jackpot patterns are stopped.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination being performed, Even if there is a special result in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, when the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (when the predetermined condition is satisfied), It is possible to generate an operation reception performance (effective period) in which performance reception is allowed. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the performance determination, the operation acceptance performance (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol performance based on the predetermined variation pattern is advanced to the predetermined timing. .. In addition, the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the operation acceptance effect (effective period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) to be generated at the predetermined timing during SP reach is other than the “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the operation acceptance effect (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

  By the way, the operation reception effect (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected as long as the operation is detected within the set time (effective period). The post-operation effect that causes a change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change in the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Reception performance (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may deteriorate.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the operation reception effect,
During the execution period of the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the low expected fluctuation pattern (predetermined fluctuation pattern), "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is in a non-suppressing mode. During the execution period of the low-expectation non-suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity in the output and / or the symbol effect (effect pattern) based on the high-expectation fluctuation pattern (specific fluctuation pattern), the fluctuation pattern (effect pattern) is changed. The corresponding "BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)" is output in a suppressed manner or in silence, or in a non-output state (whether the reproduction period in which the audible sound is recorded in the sound data has ended, or the channel assignment). Has been finished, etc.), and various measures have been taken, such as at least generating a high-expectation suppression reception effect that gives an operation opportunity. And that it is as described above (FIG 144～ view 195, FIG 207～ Figure 231).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the mock image displayed in the operation reception effect is further displayed as an integrated muffled image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. By doing so, when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated, the interest of the game is improved. Regarding such an integrated image, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that is generated with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high-expectations suppression reception effects. Also, regarding each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, FIG. 207 to FIG. 231), the display mode of the exemplified mood image may be replaced by any one of the integrated mood images described below. It is desirable to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Hereinafter, a case in which the mock image is displayed as an "integral mood image" will be described.
First of all, the "image" will be explained again. The operation means to which the operation opportunity is given in the operation reception performance is the "operation receiving portion" for receiving the operation by the player and the periphery of the operation receiving portion. A "periphery decorative portion" for decoration is provided. In this respect, the "image" means an image of the "operation receiving portion" of the operation means. The "operation receiving portion" is usually provided so as to be displaced by an operation by the player, and the "periphery decoration portion" is often provided as a non-movable member. For example, in the case of the operation means (effect operation unit 400) illustrated in FIGS. 39 and 40, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the button lens 411 (operation button 410), and the “periphery decoration portion” is the frame unit 415. Will be equivalent to. In the case of the operating means (sword decoration 5001) illustrated in FIGS. 146 and 161, the “operation receiving portion” corresponds to the sword portion 5010, and the “periphery decoration portion” corresponds to the sheath portion 5020. Become.

  FIG. 232 shows the “integrated image” displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the operation means provided with the “operation receiving portion” for receiving the “press operation” by the player, It is a figure which shows the example.

  In this explanation example, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that a push-type handle button 5014 is provided as an “operation receiving portion” on the upper surface of the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001. That is, the pattern button 5014 is pushed into the pattern portion 5012 when a "press operation" is performed by the player, and is detected by a predetermined sensor (detection means), and the detection information is an effect (execution trigger of post-operation effect, etc.). ). According to such a configuration, the sword decoration body 5001 as the operation unit includes a “handle button 5014” that can be operated (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012 and an operation (moved up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020. Two operation receiving portions including a possible “handle portion 5012” will be provided.

  In FIG. 232, the “integrated image” when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern button 5014 occurs when a predetermined variation pattern progresses to a predetermined timing will be described. I decided to. However, in the example described below including FIG. 232, the “integrated image” when giving an operation opportunity to the design button 5014 is operated not on the design button 5014 but on the operation button 410. It may be applied as an “integrated image” when an operation reception effect (effective period) to which an opportunity is given occurs. That is, in this case, regarding the “mock image of the operation button 410” illustrated in each of the above-described effect examples (FIG. 144 to FIG. 195, FIG. 207 to FIG. 231), each is described as an “integrated mage image” described below. It can be replaced, and in this case, the handle button 5014 is not provided and this is omitted as a member.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a specific operation reception in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) When the effect (effective period) is generated, in the effect display device 1600, the button image BMG that imitates the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. It is displayed as the integrated image IGa-IGd. In the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are not individually prepared as image data, but one image data (integrated Only the converted images IGa to IGd) are displayed. Further, when the integrated clip images IGa to IGd are displayed, operation prompting displays such as “press” and “down arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of description.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as the post-operation performances to be executed when an operation is received in a specific operation reception performance (effective period), “a relatively low expectation first performance mode” and “relative A plurality of effect modes including "a second effect mode with high expectation" are prepared, and one of these effect modes is executed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). .. In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (232),
232 (a) (integrated image IGb) shown in FIG. 232 (a) than when the aspect (integrated image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” is higher as the post-operation production,
232 (c) (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 232 (b) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period) than when the aspect (integrated image IGb) appears. When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” is higher as the post-operation production,
232 (d) (integrated image IGd) as compared to when the aspect (integrated image IGc) shown in FIG. 232 (c) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). Based on the result of the jackpot judgment (production judgment), the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with relatively high expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation performance when Any one of the chemical images IGa to IGd is displayed.

  It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as the integrated image images IGa to IGd. Even by preparing at least two modes, it is possible to suggest the expectation as post-operation performance within the effective period. Further, a mode different from the above four modes (integrated general-purpose images IGa to IGd) may be further prepared, and any one of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operating means (sword decoration 5001, sword decoration 5001,) having an operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (handle portion 5012, frame unit 415) provided on the periphery thereof. Production operation unit 400),
Integrated lumber image display means for displaying the lumber image of the operation receiving portion as integrated lumber images IGa to IGd integrated with the peripheral decoration image for decorating the perimeter of the lumber image,
And an operation acceptance executing unit that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) when a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed, The integrated model image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (the integrated model images IGa to IGd).

  Details of the “integrated general image” shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) will be described for each of those modes (integrated general image IGa to IGd).

  First, the "integrated mock image IGa" shown in FIG. 232 (a) is configured to have a normal button mock image BMGa and a normal margin decoration image SSGa that decorates the rim thereof. However, in the "integrated model image IGa", the normal button model image BMGa is displayed as "an image of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given". On the other hand, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is "the peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012, or the frame 5012 or the frame, which is actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given. The unit 415) is not used, and the periphery of the normal button image BMGa is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600.

  According to such a configuration, first, even when a plurality of operating means are provided, which of the operating means is given the operation opportunity, the operating means to be operated ( It is possible to easily recognize by visually recognizing the normal button image BMGa which is a part of the image. Moreover, the normal button image BMGa itself is not an actual peripheral decoration portion, but is a gorgeous and large-sized image (integrated image IGa integrated with a peripheral decoration image that is preferable in order to improve decorativeness and performance. ) Is displayed, the dramatic impact when the normal button image BMGa is displayed is increased, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved. In addition, there is no need to worry about the cost and installation space for making the existing peripheral decoration part gorgeous, and it is possible to realize a high degree of freedom without being restricted by the shape of the existing peripheral decoration part. become.

  In the “integrated image IGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is represented as a pedestal for installing a button (normal button image BMGa), and the upper surface thereof is It has been given a certain decoration to warn that it is a highly dangerous button. As described above, these "pedestal" and "predetermined decoration" have different shapes from the existing peripheral decoration portion and are expressed as different decorations.

  In this respect, in the "integrated image IGa" according to the present embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. As will be described later with reference to FIG. 233 and the like, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG can be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target region with time. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a display area having a predetermined maximum value when an operation is not accepted within the valid period. The display area is displayed so as to decrease as time passes. That is, in this case, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa not only has a function of suggesting the operation means as the operation target, but also suggests the remaining time until the state (valid period) in which the operation reception is allowed is ended. It also takes on the remaining time suggestion function.

  In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa shown in FIG. 232 (a), a partition image KG is provided which partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, a “white and black striped pattern”) is provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. A gauge image (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG having a predetermined transmittance is displayed in an overlapping manner with respect to the display target area having the predetermined decoration. With such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and is visible even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to favorably maintain the enjoyment of the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  In order to realize such a display mode in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image GG having a predetermined transmittance is superposed on the display target area having the predetermined decoration. In addition to the method of displaying by the above method, a method of changing the color of the display target area itself, which is provided with a predetermined decoration, between a portion with a gauge and a portion without a gauge may be adopted. In this case, the gauge image GG itself does not exist as image data alone, and the gauge image GG can be expressed only by the color change of the predetermined decoration in the display target area.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 232 (a), a predetermined decoration (here, "white and black striped pattern") provided in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the normal peripheral decoration. Since it is applied so as to extend over other regions in the image SSGa, it is possible to further enhance the integrated decorativeness of the display target region itself of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, it is expected that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the "integrated image IGa" is displayed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an "integrated image IGa" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a design button to be operated is generated. 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, "blue") as the normal button image BMGa in the "integrated image IGa". That is, as will be described later, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared for the button image BMG, and the normal button image BMGa is displayed as one of those modes. By adopting, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button model image BMG only by confirming the pattern button 5014 which is the operation target without visually recognizing the normal button model image BMGa.

  As for the “button image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))”, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated does not necessarily have to be accurately exaggerated. What is displayed may be displayed with a copying level (deformation or the like) such that it can be recognized which operation means.

  On the other hand, the "integrated image IGb" shown in FIG. 232 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated image IGa", and the button image BMG exercising the operation target. The peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGb", the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" described above, but the button composite image BMG is displayed in the "button composite image" described above. Instead of “BMGa”, it is displayed as a “special button image BMGb” having a different shape.

  More specifically, in the “integrated model image IGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b), the special button model image BMGb represents the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated. However, the image is displayed as an image having a different shape from the “button image BMGa (FIG. 232 (a))” obtained by using the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410). However, when such a display method is simply adopted, it may be difficult to recognize which of the plurality of operating means is the operation target when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed.

  However, as described above, in the “integrated model image IGa”, the “button model image BMGa” that modeled the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is displayed integrally with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Therefore, the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” itself also has a function of suggesting that the design button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target. In this respect, in the "integrated button image IGb", the "special button image BMGb" is displayed integrally with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa". Even if "BMGb" does not properly manipulate the operation target, it may be suggested that the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is the operation target in the "integrated image IGb" as a whole. become able to. In order to preferably obtain such an operation effect (a function of suggesting an operation target by the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa), the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” has an operation means different from that of the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410). It can be said that it is important not to be displayed when (the handle 5012 or the like) is the operation target.

  According to such a configuration, the button image BMG that imitates the operation receiving portion and the peripheral decoration image SSG that embellishes the periphery thereof are displayed as an integrated embossed image, so that the integral The button image BMG, which is only a part of the ablation image, can be displayed by a more flexible expression method that is not necessarily confined to the shape of the operation means to be operated, resulting in a more prominent effect. It is expected that the appeal of the game will be improved by the nature and decoration.

  Note that the "special button image BMGb" illustrated in FIG. 232 (b) is depicted as a button having a streamlined shape with a more stylish design than the "button image BMGa", and at the top thereof. The wording "DANGER" is applied. The appearance of a "special button image BMGb" that does not actually exist as a part of the pachinko machine 1 makes it possible for the player to easily feel a premium feeling, and the "button image BMGa" appears. You will be expected to instinctively feel that expectations are higher than when.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGb" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation target is also set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button image BMGb in the “integrated image IGb”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target.

  On the other hand, the "integrated image IGc" shown in FIG. 232 (c) is also basically the same as the "integrated image IGa" described above, and the button image BMG showing the operation target and its A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the "integrated image IGc", the button image BMG is displayed as the same as the "normal button image BMGa" described above, but the peripheral decoration image SSG is "normal peripheral decoration" described above. The image is displayed not as the "image SSGa" but as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape.

However, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is similar to the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" in the following points.
“The peripheral decoration portion (the pattern portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) actually provided on the periphery of the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to which the operation opportunity is given is not used, and the effect display is performed. The periphery of the button image BMG is decorated as a virtual decoration on the display effect of the device 1600.
An area for displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided.

  According to such an “integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))”, when the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” is used as a reference, any operation means is operated. It is possible to significantly change the shape of the "integrated button image IGc (Fig. 232 (c))" as a whole without changing the shape of the "button button image BMG" that indicates whether an opportunity is given. become able to. As a result, it is possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance by causing a change in shape without sacrificing the suggestion function of the operation target.

  Further, in the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232 (c))" according to this embodiment, at least a part of the image has the same decoration as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232 (a))". Is displayed as. Therefore, the same post-operation effect is targeted when the "integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))" appears. It becomes possible to suggest that it is the specified operation reception effect (effective period).

  Particularly, in the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb (FIG. 232 (c))” according to this embodiment, another member having special decoration is added to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. The entire image is enlarged and displayed as an enlarged image. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" is displayed as a developed version of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", and the expectation is higher than when the "button image BMGa" appears. You will be expected to instinctively feel the high price.

  Also, the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232 (c))" has a shape and decoration different from that of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232 (a))", but a gauge image (predetermined image). No change is made to the GG display target area itself.

  That is, when a part of such an integrated image IG is used as the display target area of the gauge image GG, whether the display target area and the gauge image are only "a part of decoration", or "remaining" It is difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a "portion having a function of suggesting time". In this regard, the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa (Fig. 232 (a))" and the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb (Fig. 232 (c))" have an important function of "indicating the remaining time". Since the shape of the display target area of the image (predetermined image) GG is not changed and the shape is changed in the other portions, the shape change can be performed without sacrificing the function of suggesting the remaining time. It is possible to achieve a high degree of freedom in decoration and production by causing the effect.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 232 (c), even when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGc" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the operation target is set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “blue”) as the normal button image BMGa in the “integrated image IGc”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the normal button image BMGa when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "green") from when the "integrated image IGc" is displayed. May be. In this case, the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits green light.

  On the other hand, the "integrated image IGd" shown in FIG. 232 (d) is also basically the same as the "integrated image IGa" described above, and the button image BMG showing the operation target and its A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge is configured as an integrated image. However, in the “integrated button image IGd”, the button button image BMG is not displayed as the “normal button button image BMGa” described above but as a “special button button image BMGb” having a different shape. Therefore, the peripheral decoration image SSG is also displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGb" having a different shape from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa".

  That is, in the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))”, the “special button image BMGb” used in the “integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” and the “integrated image IGc” are used. (FIG. 232 (c)) ”and the“ special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”are displayed as an integrated image. According to such a configuration, the function and effect achieved by the "special button image BMGb" described above regarding the "integrated image IGb (Fig. 232 (b))" and the "integrated image IGc (Fig. 232 ( c)) ”and the effects obtained by the“ special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”described above are obtained, and when the“ integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a)) ”is used as a reference, Since both of the button image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are changed, it is expected that instinctively sense that the degree of expectation is high.

  On the other hand, the button decoration image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are both changed in their modes, but the same decoration or shape appears in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG. Identification for the same post-operation effect when the "integrated image IGa (Fig. 232 (a))" appears and when the "integrated image IGd (Fig. 232 (d))" appears It becomes possible to suggest that it is the operation reception effect (effective period).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 232 (d), even when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGd" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, the operation target is set. The pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) is made to emit light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the special button image BMGb in the “integrated image IGd”. That is, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) to be operated is capable of emitting light in a mode according to the type of the button image BMG in the “integrated image IG”. Even without visually recognizing the image BMG, it is possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) as the button image BMG simply by checking the pattern button 5014 that is the operation target. However, the special button image BMGb when the "integrated image IGd" is displayed is displayed in a different color (for example, "rainbow color") from when the "integrated image IGb" is displayed. You may do it. In this case, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) also emits rainbow colors.

  As shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing and the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period). When the button image is generated, the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG are displayed as an integrated image IG, but one side of the button image BMG and the edge decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. When the other side is displayed, the other side can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. For example, when the button image BMG is displayed as the “normal button image BMGa”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as either the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” or the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( 232 (a), (c)). Further, when the button image BMG is displayed as the “special button image BMGb”, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed as one of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” ( 232 (b), (d)). Also, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”, the button image BMG can be displayed as either the “normal button image BMGa” or the “special button image BMGb” ( 232 (a), (b)). Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”, the button image BMG can be displayed as either the “normal button image BMGa” or the “special button image BMGb” ( 232 (a), (b)).

  With such a configuration, although the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, only one side thereof is displayed when the mode changes. Therefore, by looking at the one side where the mode has not changed, it is possible to easily recognize that the predetermined operation reception effect (effective period) is occurring, regardless of which mode the other side is displayed. Also, by looking at the other side where the mode is changing, it is possible to preferably recognize the degree of expectation. Note that the aspect may not be changed on one side of the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG, and the aspect may be changed only on the other side.

  In the integrated general image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. When the integrated image IG is displayed in the operation reception effect (effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target area with time. It is possible. That is, in this case, the "periphery decoration image SSG" has a remaining time suggesting function for suggesting the remaining time until the state in which the operation reception is permitted is ended, and which operation means is the operation target. By displaying the integrated button image IG integrated with the “button button image BMG” that has the function to suggest, it is possible to recognize the remaining time and the operation target while recognizing which of a plurality of modes has appeared. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated is maintained appropriately.

  In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the peripheral decoration image SSG, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. And a non-display area of (there are both a portion having a remaining time suggesting function and a portion having no remaining time suggesting function). That is, the marginal decoration image SSG is not intended only to suggest the remaining time of the operation reception effect (effective period), and the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed is the “button decoration image BMG decoration”. Since it is possible to positively adopt a display mode for the purpose of "improving the performance", it is possible to suggest the remaining time while also indicating the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs. It will be possible to significantly improve. In order to obtain such an effect, it is more preferable that the non-display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as a larger area than the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Can be said.

  232 (a) to (d) of FIG. 232, the button image BMG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes when the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed in one mode. However, as a matter of fact, when the “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion has one aspect, the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the operation receiving portion has a plurality of aspects (a plurality of emission colors). ) To change to either. Therefore, when the button image BMG changes, it is possible to confirm it only by confirming the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410) which is the copying target.

  In addition, in the integrated black image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), when the button black image BMG is displayed in one mode, the peripheral decoration image SSG can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. However, as a substance, the "pattern portion 5012", which is the peripheral decoration portion, does not change into any of the plurality of modes. That is, as described above, the peripheral edge decoration image SSG is a virtual decoration that does not actually exist as a component of the pachinko machine 1 and decorates the peripheral edge of the button image BMG. Therefore, it is not necessary for the peripheral decoration image SSG to match the mode of the "pattern portion 5012" that is the peripheral decoration portion, and it is possible to perform a variety of depictions preferable for enlivening the effect. The “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion may be provided so as not to change in a plurality of ways, such as being non-luminous.

  In addition, in the integrated black image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), there may be a case where both the button black image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG change (FIG. 232 (d)). However, as a substance, it is desirable that both the button image BMG and the peripheral decoration image SSG be changed when the “pattern portion 5012” which is the peripheral decoration portion is in one mode.

  Different modes appear in the "pattern portion 5012" that is the peripheral decoration portion depending on whether the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the peripheral decoration image SSG is the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb". You may do it. However, at least the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG changes between the case of the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa" and the case of the peripheral decoration image SSG of the "special peripheral decoration image SSGb", whereas the peripheral decoration portion It is desirable that the “pattern portion 5012”, which is the same as the pattern portion 5012, causes only a mode change (for example, a change in the light emission mode) without a shape change. It can be said that it is desirable to provide the peripheral decoration portion as a shape that cannot be changed in the first place in order to emphasize the virtual effect function of the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as the model image, in addition to the button model image BMG that modeled the pattern button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the pattern model image that modeled the pattern section 5012. TMGs are prepared, and the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is made different depending on which of these images is displayed. That is, in this case, since the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b for decorating the peripheral edge of the button image BMG cannot be displayed when a user image different from the button image BMG is displayed, the peripheral image is not displayed. The decoration image SSGa, b itself can be expected to have a "function of suggesting which operation means the operation target is".

  In addition, when the form as the peripheral decoration image SSG is different depending on the form of the image (button image BMG, pattern image TMG), the form (thickness) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG included in the peripheral decoration image. , Length) is also desirable. The operation reception effect in which the button image BMG is displayed and the operation reception effect in which the pattern image TMG is displayed are effects that occur at the same timing in the same variation pattern (select which one occurs depending on the effect determination). Be performed), or an effect that occurs at different fluctuation patterns or at different timings. The marginal decoration image SSG that appears when the button embossing image BMG does not emulate the marginal decoration portion, and the marginal decoration image SSG that appears when it is the pattern embossing image TMG emulates the periphery decoration portion. May be. However, it is desirable that the set time as the operation reception effect (effective period) may be the same even if the form (thickness, length) as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is different.

  In addition, in the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the other area in the peripheral decoration image SSG are those areas. A predetermined decoration (here, "striped pattern") is provided over the area, and the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed so as to overlap the predetermined decoration. That is, in this case, as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced, the display area of the exposed predetermined decoration is increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. become able to.

  In particular, in this embodiment, a gauge image having a predetermined transmittance (here, a “gray” gauge image) GG is displayed in a superimposed manner on a display target area having a predetermined decoration. ing. With such a configuration, the predetermined decoration is not hidden and is visible even in the portion where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It becomes possible to favorably maintain the enjoyment of the game over the entire period until it becomes empty.

  However, the predetermined decoration does not necessarily have to be displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Alternatively, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself may have (also serve as) a predetermined decoration, and in this case, the display area of the predetermined decoration decreases as the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases. As a result, the player who dislikes the decrease in the predetermined decoration is prompted to perform the operation early.

  In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion (handle button 5014 or operation button 410) to be operated. The peripheral decoration portion (the handle portion 5012 or the frame unit 415) provided in is not used, and the image represents an intangible object as a gaming machine component. Therefore, it is possible to realize a higher degree of freedom in decorativeness and performance without being restricted by the substance of the game machine parts.

  In addition, in the integrated black image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), at least the peripheral decorative image SSG among the button black image BMG and the peripheral decorative image SSG has a plurality of shapes. That is, in this case, it is possible to change the shape of only the peripheral decoration image SSG representing an insubstantial object without changing the shape of the button image BMG. It is possible to realize a display with a higher performance and decoration by making the shape of the integrated image IG different while appropriately indicating whether or not it is.

  Regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, the shape may not necessarily be changed and only the color may be changed when the button image BMG is in one aspect. However, the shape change is allowed because the peripheral decoration image SSG represents an intangible object and the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as an image integrated with the button image BMG. In this sense, it can be said that changing the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG has great technical value.

  In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the peripheral decoration image SSG is changed in the form of being enlarged. As will be described later, as a method of such a form change, either one of a method of increasing the number of objects represented as an image (such as the number of decorations) or a plurality of modes having different contour shapes (a rectangular parallelepiped, a sphere, etc.) It is possible to employ a method in which the displayed range or the range of the displayed target of the predetermined object represented as an image is expanded. Further, as will be described later, with respect to the morphological change of the peripheral decoration image SSG, as a precursor effect, an effect of gradually changing from a form with low expectation to a form with high expectation is executed, and then finally. The operation acceptance in the operation acceptance effect may be permitted while the changed form is maintained.

  In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the gauge image (included in the peripheral decoration image SSG regardless of the form of the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed). The display target area of the predetermined image GG is not changed (at least the shape is changed) and is displayed in the same form. Therefore, even if there is a change in the form of the marginal decoration image SSG, it is possible to preferably maintain the suggestive function of how much time is left, and thus the important function can be maintained. While holding, the expectation degree can be suggested by the change in shape of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in another area different from the display target area.

  The peripheral decoration image SSG does not necessarily represent an intangible object, depending on which one of the above-mentioned effects is intended to be achieved, and the peripheral decoration provided on the peripheral edge of the operation receiving portion is not necessarily represented. It may be displayed as an image of a copy.

  In addition, the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) can be dynamically displayed during the "effective period during which operation acceptance is permitted" such as a predetermined operation acceptance effect. By doing so, the player is prompted to perform an operation.

  However, in the integrated model image IG according to this embodiment, although the button model image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are displayed integrally, the button model image BMG and the marginal decoration image SSG are not displayed. Only one side is dynamically displayed and the other side is displayed so as not to move. According to such a configuration, the one side contributes to improve the performance when the button performance, which is an important performance, is generated by the dynamic expression, while the other side is displayed so as to stay in place. By doing so, when the entire integrated image IG is viewed as a whole, it is not moved and displayed, so that it is possible to appropriately secure the visibility.

  In the integrated image IG shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in the movable range. The peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed and is not displayed dynamically. Then, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided on the side that is not dynamically displayed (periphery decoration image SSG), and when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. Can display the display area in the display target area so as to decrease with the passage of time.

  In this way, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is included on the side (peripheral decoration image SSG that is the side that is not dynamically displayed) that has secured suitable visibility in the integrated image IG. By doing so, the performance when the operation reception performance, which is an important performance, occurs is improved by the dynamic display by the button image BMG, but how much remaining time is allowed for the performance reception. Can be easily recognized.

  In addition, in the integrated image IG, on the side that secures suitable visibility (the peripheral decoration image SSG that is the side that is not dynamically displayed), in addition to the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, An area in which (given image) GG is not displayed is also included. That is, in this case, when performing the effect that suggests the degree of expectation on the side where the suitable visibility is secured in the integrated image IG, the effect is performed in the area where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. This makes it possible to prevent the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from being adversely affected.

  Of the peripheral decoration image SSG, a region different from the display target region of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the shape of the peripheral decoration image SSG itself, and the button image BMG are provided with a plurality of modes having different expectations, Although any one of the modes is displayed based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself has different expectations. It is also possible to provide a plurality of modes and display any one of the modes based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  By the way, as shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d), in the case where the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery, Further, when the peripheral decoration image SSG includes the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG merely a decoration or a pattern in the peripheral decoration image SSG? However, it is feared that it will be difficult to understand whether or not it has a function of suggesting the remaining time. In addition, it is feared that it may be difficult to grasp to what position the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has decreased due to the mixture with the decorations and patterns applied to the peripheral edge decoration image SSG, which may lower the enjoyment of the game. ..

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, at least when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced (within the valid period), the gauge image ( An image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or an image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed can be displayed in the display target area where the predetermined image) GG can be displayed.

  More specifically, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is set to the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area at or near the end thereof. Then, in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases, a “specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display position of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is also displayed so as to be similarly displaced.

  With such a configuration, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displaced to a predetermined position. Then, since the valid period comes to an end, even if it is not possible to recognize whether the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is merely decoration or suggests the remaining time, the position of the "specific image" By checking, you will be able to recognize the remaining time. In this sense, when such a “specific image” is displayed, it can be said that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  FIG. 233 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

  As shown in FIG. 233, assuming that the timing A0 at which the valid period in which the operation reception is allowed (predetermined operation reception effect) is started in the predetermined variation pattern, the effect display device 1600 operates. , An integrated image IG and operation promoting images such as “press!” And “down arrow” are displayed.

  In this example, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated general image IG, but FIGS. 232 (b) to (d) are displayed based on the result of the effect determination. The display may be performed in any of the modes shown in FIG. Even when the integrated image IG is displayed in any of the modes, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the specific image different from the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes a change in the mode described below with the passage of time.

  As shown in FIG. 233 (a), first, in the integrated image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the entire area of the display target area. Will be done. By displaying the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in such a full state, it becomes possible to recognize that the effective period has just started.

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 233 (a), at the timing A0 which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The "specific image in which the aspect is partially changed" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. According to such a configuration, whether or not the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is displayed. Only by confirming, it becomes possible to easily understand whether or not the predetermined time has already passed after the acceptance of the operation acceptance (the situation in which the remaining crotch is reduced).

  However, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" starts from timing A0 (start timing of the effective period). The gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode such as "the display area increases by the amount corresponding to the elapsed time" until the predetermined time (the time required for the appearance of the entire specific image to finish appearing) elapses. Is displayed in the display target area.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 233 (b), the integrated scale image IG at the timing A1 at which a little time has passed from the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period) is displayed as “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. "Specific image TG" as "a specific image different from the above or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" appears up to the point where about half of the image is visible. Therefore, it can be seen that the display area is being increased with the passage of time.

  As shown in FIGS. 233 (c) and (d), the integrated image IG at the timings A2 and A3 when a large amount of time has passed, as shown in FIGS. The "specific image TG" as the "specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is in a state where the entire appearance has already finished, and the gauge image is not increased without increasing the display area. (Predetermined image) It can be seen that there is a situation in which the display target area of GG is displaced.

  That is, as described above, the “specific image TG” is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG in the display target area is reduced. (Image) Displayed at or near the end of GG, and displayed such that its display position is displaced (in the following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end of gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Has become.

  The “specific image TG” according to this embodiment is displayed as an image in which a star-shaped mark is provided in a white square space at a position connected to the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It has become a thing. However, the “specific image TG” does not have to be displayed as a separate image at a position connected to the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and for example, the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. The image may be displayed in such a manner that the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed, such as an image in which the image gradually becomes thinner over a predetermined length. Alternatively, it may be displayed as an effect image appearing at or near the end of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG.

  In any case, the "specific image TG" originally functions as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time is exhausted when the display area becomes the minimum value (here, "0"). Therefore, even at the time when the remaining time runs out (at the time when the valid period ends), at least a part (may be all) is not hidden and the display state is maintained.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 233 (e), in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period, the gauge The display area of the image (predetermined image) GG is "0", and the display area of the "specific image TG" is about half left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, in this state, the period during which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended and the integrated image IG is hidden.

  However, as described above, the “specific image TG” does not originally function as a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Therefore, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4 which is the end timing of the effective period, it is most desirable to display so that the display area of the “specific image TG” is all left, and such a configuration is You may do so.

  However, it is difficult to realize a display in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is exactly “0” at the end of the effective period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed (in a following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Since the display is made so as to be displaced, when viewed from the player side, how many images among the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG are displayed as the gauge image ( It becomes possible to make ambiguous whether it is a predetermined image) GG.

  In other words, the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and the display area of most (more than half or all) is left, but from the player side When viewed, the display area also appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that has the minimum display area (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than it actually is. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden because at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended. Even if the period does not end soon after, the display area of the "specific image TG" can be reduced so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period from occurring. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 233, at timing A0, which is the start timing of the effective period, “a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed. The "specified image" is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. However, at the timing A0 that is the start timing of the effective period, the "specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or the specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" The image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed in the display target area.

  According to such a configuration, "a specific image different from the gauge image (predetermined image) GG or a specific image in which the aspect of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" is a part of the gauge image GG. Since it will be possible to look positively as if it is, it will look as if a longer time than the appearance is set as the effective period, and when the effective period occurs It is expected to improve.

  FIG. 234 is a diagram showing another display example of the integrated image IG from the start to the end of the valid period in which the operation acceptance is permitted.

  Now, assuming that the timing A0 when the effective period (predetermined operation reception effect) in which the operation acceptance is permitted is started within the predetermined variation pattern, in the example shown in FIG. 234, in the effect display device 1600. , An integrated image IG and operation promoting images such as “press!” And “down arrow” are displayed.

  In this example as well, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) is displayed as the integrated general image IG, but FIGS. 232 (b) to (232)-(based on the result of the effect determination. It may be displayed in any of the modes shown in d). Even when the integrated image IG is displayed in any of the modes, the display of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG within the valid period, the specific image different from the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG, or The display of the "specific image in which the mode of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is partially changed" causes the changes in the modes shown in FIGS. 234 (a) to 234 (d) over time. ..

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIG. 234 (a), in the integrated image IG at the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the entire area of the display target area. The "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and the "specific image TG" are not displayed, respectively. At the timing A0 (start timing of the effective period), only a part of the “specific image TG” may be displayed, but the whole is displayed here. With such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made to appear as if it functions as a part of the “gauge image GG”, and therefore, it seems that a time longer than it looks is left. It is possible to

  The “specific image TG” according to this example is an image representing an “eraser” and does not fit within the area surrounded by the section image KG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) and other areas (of the peripheral decoration image SSG). , Such as a region in which the aspect can change according to the degree of expectation). With such a configuration, the “specific image TG” can be made more conspicuous than the “gauge image GG”, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which it is not possible to recognize how much time is left. Be expected.

  Further, in this example, when a time elapses from the timing A0 to the timings A2 and A3 and the “specific image TG” is displaced, as shown in FIGS. 234 (b) and (c), the “specific image TG” is changed. The part where "" has passed is changed to an "outlined area" as if it were erased by an eraser. With such a configuration, the display area of the "gauge image GG" represented in multiple colors (including similar colors and gloss expression) is reduced by an amount corresponding to the displacement amount of the "specific image TG". At this time, since the reduced area is represented by only one color, the contrast with the “specific image TG” as the boundary becomes more prominent, suggesting how much time is left. This makes it easier for the player to recognize that it is a depiction. The color that appears in the reduced area is preferably a color that is not used in the “gauge image GG”.

  Also in the example shown in FIG. 234, the “specific image TG” is one of the gauge images (predetermined image) GG that suggests that the remaining time is exhausted due to the display area becoming the minimum value (here, “0”). Since it does not originally function as a part, at least a part (may be the whole) is not hidden even when the remaining time is exhausted (at the end of the effective period) and the display state is maintained. Become.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 234 (d), in the integrated image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is “0”. And the entire display area of the “specific image TG” is left. Then, when no operation is accepted until this state is reached, in this state, the period during which the operation acceptance is permitted is ended and the integrated image IG is hidden.

  However, also in this example, in the integrated image IG at the timing A4, which is the end timing of the effective period, a part of the display area of the “specific image TG” is hidden and a part thereof remains. May be displayed as follows.

  Even in this example, the "specific image TG" is displayed so that its display position is displaced (in the following form) in accordance with the displacement of the end portion of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, When viewed from the player side, it is possible to obscure to what extent the image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. Like

  In other words, the "specific image TG" is not hidden when the valid period ends, and the display area of most (more than half or all) is left, but from the player side When viewed, the display area also appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG that has the minimum display area (not displayed here) when the effective period ends. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the gauge image (predetermined image) GG appear to be an image longer than it actually is, so that it is possible to make it appear that the effective period remains longer than it actually is. As a result, it becomes possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game while the operation reception effect is being performed.

  On the other hand, when the valid period of the operation reception effect ends, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is hidden because at least a part of the “specific image TG” is left and ended. Even if the period does not end soon after, the display area of the "specific image TG" can be reduced so that the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not displayed. It is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity due to a difference between the display timing and the end timing of the effective period from occurring. That is, in this case, the "specific image TG" can be expected to play a role as a buffer unit capable of absorbing such a temporal shift.

  In the example shown in FIG. 234, the images of the “gauge image GG” and the “specific image TG” are made different from those of the example shown in FIG. 233, but the same image may be used. On the contrary, in the example shown in FIG. 233, the same image as that in the example shown in FIG. 234 may be used. Also, the effective period in which the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, and the images of the "gauge image GG" and the "specific image TG" in the mode shown in FIG. 234. The valid period for which is displayed may occur under different conditions. In this case, in the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 233 appears and in the effective period in which the aspect shown in FIG. 234 appears, the integrated image IG itself or at least the shape of the display target area of the gauge image GG is mutually different. It is desirable to be different.

  As described above, the integrated image IG is dynamic during the effective period of the predetermined operation reception effect, as shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to (e) and 234 (a) to (d). It can be displayed, thereby prompting the player to perform an operation. However, as also described above, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so that the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given is displaced in the movable range, while the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed. Tries not to display this dynamically. Then, in the peripheral decoration image SSG on which such dynamic display is not performed, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided, and in the display target area, the specific image TG and the gauge image ( Since the predetermined image) GG is changed, it is possible to easily recognize how much time remains until the expiration of the effective period even in the integrated image IG that is dynamically displayed. Will be able to.

  The “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” may be displayed as one image data or may be displayed as separate image data.

  According to the configurations shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the “specific image TG” has the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” in the display target area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. It is displayed at or near the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" that is displaced when it is reduced, and its display position is displaced according to the displacement of the end of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". Will be displayed. Therefore, when viewed from the player's side, of the images displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, to what extent the image is the gauge image (predetermined image) GG Will be able to.

  Also, the "specific image TG" shown in FIG. 233 is not displayed when the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" has the maximum value, and the predetermined time has elapsed after the operation acceptance is permitted. Until the time elapses (until the entire specific image TG appears), the display area of the "specific image TG" is complemented by the decrease in the display area of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG". I am trying to increase. According to such a configuration, it is as if the remaining time suggested by the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is not reduced at the beginning of the predetermined period after the start of the effective period. Since it becomes possible to have such an image, it becomes possible to maintain a favorable interest in the game.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 233 or FIG. 234, the integrated mirage image IG is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (e)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). However, the display shapes of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” are the same regardless of which of these modes is displayed. Is desirable. Each of the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" and "specific image TG" (pattern, color, etc.) may be changed according to the degree of expectation, but a function for suggesting the remaining time is provided. In order to maintain the preferable state, it is desirable that even when one aspect of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” and the “specific image TG” is changed, the other aspect is not changed. For example, if the mark attached to the “specific image TG” illustrated in FIG. 233 is not a star shape but a double circle, it is suggested that the degree of expectation is high, and the “gauge image (predetermined As the image (GG) is gradually reduced, the degree of expectation (double circle) is gradually made visible, and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, at least a part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is non-existent even when the valid period ends without being operated by the player. The display state is maintained instead of being displayed. However, regarding the operation reception effect shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, when the timing A4 arrives without the operation by the player, the operation reception is internally performed and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output (for example, the operation are performed. It is desirable to make it function as the above-mentioned "automatic reception effect" in which only sound is output in response to reception. In this case, the timing A4 may be the timing at which the valid period ends or may be set as the timing before or after the timing. In any case, the timing A4 is after the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is hidden (the timing when the gauge image is hidden or a timing after that), and the timing of the "specific image TG" It is desirable to set the timing as the arrival timing with at least a part displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even when the player performs an operation immediately after the operation acceptance is not permitted, even immediately after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is performed, Since the "specific image TG" is displayed, it can be displayed as if the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output has been started in response to the operation being accepted by the player in time and the operation acceptance accompanying this being generated. become able to. The “specific image TG” may be displayed even at the time when the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started (for example, fade-out after the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output is started. Things that are gradually hidden).

  When the valid period in which such automatic reception is performed is the first valid period generated by the satisfaction of the first condition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the second condition different from the first condition. When the condition is satisfied, it is possible to generate the second valid period in which automatic reception is not performed. Also in the second effective period, the button image BMG is displayed as an integrated image IG that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery, and the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed in the peripheral decoration image SSG. ) The display target area of GG is included. However, within the second effective period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, but the "specific image TG" is displayed. Is not displayed. The integrated image IG displayed in the first effective period and the integrated image IG displayed in the second effective period are displayed as the same image except that the "specific image TG" is not displayed. Can be done.

  That is, in the second valid period generated by the satisfaction of the second condition, unlike the first valid period generated by the satisfaction of the first condition, when the set time elapses without any operation by the player, The second valid period ends when the automatic reception does not function and no post-operation display or post-operation sound output (or both) is generated. Therefore, if the display of the "specific image TG" is left at the time when the operation by the player is no longer accepted, the valid period ends even though the remaining time has not been exhausted. It may lead to misunderstanding as if the game was played, and eventually the interest in the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the second effective period, it is desirable that the “specific image TG” is not displayed for the entire period from the start to the end.

  In this case, it is desirable that the first valid period and the second valid period have different lengths of set time (time from the acceptance of the operation acceptance to the end thereof). Further, it is desirable that the display change (display after operation) and sound output (post-operation sound output) that occur when an operation is accepted have different contents.

  In addition to the first valid period that occurs when the first condition is satisfied, a third valid period for which automatic reception is performed may be generated (for example, when the third condition is satisfied). In addition to the second valid period that occurs when the second condition is satisfied, a fourth valid period in which automatic reception is not performed may be generated (for example, when the fourth condition is satisfied). In short, the valid period during which automatic reception is performed (valid period with different generation conditions) includes at least the first valid period in which the processing related to display and sound is performed in the above-described manner. It suffices that at least the second valid period in which the processing related to the display and the sound is performed in the above-described mode is included in the valid period (the valid period in which the respective generation conditions are different) where the above is not performed.

In addition, the "first effective period" here means
-It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period, only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set.
-It means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of the presence or absence of an operation within the effective period regardless of the effect state. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "plurality of performance states" as performance states. In addition, when the "second effective period" occurs when the "special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set, whichever may be adopted as to whether or not the automatic reception is activated. (For example, "automatic reception may not always be activated regardless of the effect state"), and is not related to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed as an image having a non-linear specific shape. More specifically, when the effective period of the operation reception effect occurs, the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is displayed, and one of the regions forming the integrated model image IG (peripheral decoration image SSG) is formed. In the non-linear region of the portion, display is performed in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced with the passage of time. According to such a configuration, since the depiction itself that reduces the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG with time comes to have decorativeness, the remaining time as the effective period is consumed. It is possible to maintain a good interest in playing games.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined transmittance by applying a specific pattern to the display target region of the GG. (Predetermined image) GG is displayed in a form of being superimposed on it, or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is provided with a specific pattern, so that the gauge image (predetermined image) is changed with time. It is possible to improve the decorativeness of the drawing itself, which reduces the display area of the GG. Moreover, in this embodiment, since the specific pattern is applied so as to extend outside the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, the gauge image (predetermined image) may be changed over time. It is possible to further improve the decorativeness of the rendering itself, which reduces the display area of the GG.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the non-linear specific shape display target area shown in FIGS. 233 and 234 is referred to as a “first display target area”. At this time, a second display target area having a shape (non-similar shape) different from the specific shape of the non-straight line and having a different distance from the start of the reduction of the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG to the end thereof. The operation reception effect (effective period) in which is displayed can be generated under different conditions. Then, the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed is terminated when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, and by the player. At least there is a case where the operation is terminated when the second set time elapses without any operation being performed, whereas the operation reception effect in which the second display target area is displayed (effective period) May end when the first set time elapses without any operation by the player, but when the second set time elapses without any operation by the player I'm trying not to end it.

  In this respect, the operation target to which an operation opportunity is given is the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed. By making the (operation receiving unit) different, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the set times are the same when the operation targets are different, and the operation targets are different. In addition to being present, it becomes possible to encourage people to enjoy the operation reception performance with a fresher feeling. In this case, the operation reception performance (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed are different from each other. The mock-up image will be displayed integrally with the peripheral decoration image. Also for the peripheral decoration image, an image in which different decorations are drawn in the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed However, in any case, the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in a part thereof. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG may be displayed as having display shapes different from each other.

  In addition, in obtaining the above-described action and effect, the case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area of the “non-linear specific shape” and the case where “the shape different from this (non-similar shape)” When the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in the display target area, even if the same time (first set time) is set, the display after operation and the sound output after operation are “big hit”. It is desirable that the proportions in which the "indicating mode" appears are different. The ratio may be "0%" or "100%".

  The operation reception effect (effective period) in which the first display target area is displayed and the operation reception effect (effective period) in which the second display target area is displayed have the same set time (first set time). It is sometimes desirable to give the opportunity to accept the operation regarding the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output. At different set times, it is desirable to give an opportunity to receive an operation regarding different post-operation display and post-operation sound output.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, the operation related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is displayed by being superimposed on the integrated image IG, so that the integrated image IG is combined with the integrated image IG. When I look at these, I try to express more strongly that I am in the situation to operate. However, here, the operation-related display such as “press!” Or “down arrow” is not displayed overlapping with the button image BMG (at any timing when it is dynamically displayed) indicating the target to be operated. In addition, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG indicating the remaining time and the specific image TG are not overlapped and displayed.

  In such a configuration, an operation such as "press!" Or "down arrow" is performed in a manner that avoids important information such as the button image BMG, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG, and the specific image TG in the integrated image IG. Since the related display is displayed so as to be superimposed on the integrated image IG, it is possible to strongly urge the player to perform an operation while appropriately transmitting important information. It goes without saying that this is nothing but the button image BMG being displayed as the integrated image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  By the way, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the post-operation display performed when the operation reception is performed within the valid period as the valid period during which the operation reception is permitted. And multiple (kind) effective periods with different contents of post-operation sound output are prepared. The generation conditions of the effective periods are different from each other, and when any one of the generation conditions is satisfied, a type of effective period corresponding to the generation condition is generated.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the "specific image TG" is displayed within the valid period of a plurality of types of valid periods (first valid period). And at least one (second effective period) in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed within the effective period. Hereinafter, in this example, the "first effective period" and the "second effective period" are the "first effective period" described above in which automatic reception is performed and the "second effective period" described above in which automatic reception is not performed. However, it may be applied as a different validity period other than these.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, when performing the predictive effect (specific display) indicating that the operation acceptance is permitted, the predictive effect (specific display) is accepted. May be executed before and after the generation timing of the valid period allowed. According to such a precursor effect (specific display), an effective period will be generated while the flashy effect is being performed, so that it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the effective period occurs. become able to.

  However, when the aura effect (specific display) is executed in such a mode, the aura effect (specific display) is preferentially displayed with respect to the integrated image IG, so that when the effective period starts, Even if the activated image IG is displayed (internal layer display), a portion overlapping with the precursor effect (specific display) does not appear on the screen (not visible). Alternatively, even if a predetermined transmittance is set for the precursor effect (specific display), the portion of the integrated image IG that overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display) is made difficult to be visually recognized. In any case, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG starts to reduce its display area under such a situation that visibility is difficult.

  That is, in this case, the indication effect (specific display) is hidden, or there is no portion that overlaps with the indication effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG (or the gauge image (predetermined image) GG display target) By the time the visibility of the entire area is improved, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced, so from the player's perspective, the effective period (set time). You may remember the impression that is actually shortened.

  On the other hand, the "specific image TG" described above can be expected to function as a "pseudo gauge" that appears to be a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when viewed from the player side. .. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, "a sign effect (specific display) is not executed or a sign effect (specific display) is executed, among a plurality of types of effective periods. In the "second effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is finished," from the occurrence of the second effective period to the end. The "specific image TG" is not displayed during the period. On the other hand, of a plurality (types) of valid periods, the gauge image is generated by the time when “the integrated effect image IG occurs during execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and the entire integrated image IG becomes visible (or easily visible). In the "first effective period in which the display area of the (predetermined image) GG is reduced", the "specific image TG" is displayed within the first effective period.

  With such a configuration, the gauge image (predetermined image) is displayed during the first effective period in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed in the display target area of the GG, the gauge image is displayed when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is visible. The display area of the GG can be made to appear as if it has not decreased so much, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or the second effective period during which the precursor effect (specific display) is not performed. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, the "specific image TG" is not displayed when the valid period occurs, and the valid period occurs, for example, in the display mode of FIG. 233. It may be noticed that this does not function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the appearance of the “specific image TG” gradually appears with the passage of time from. That is, in this case, it is feared that the interest in playing the game may be deteriorated when the remaining time is exaggeratedly expressed. Therefore, the "specific image TG" is displayed in such a second effective period. It is desirable not to do so in order to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in addition to the second effective period, in a plurality (type) of effective periods, "a precursor effect (specific display) is not executed, or a predictive effect (specific display) is executed, but the predictive effect (specific display) is executed. ) Is ended, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced in display area (effective period (fifth effective period)) ”may be prepared under different generation conditions. In addition, "the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG decreases when the whole integrated image IG occurs during execution of the precursor effect (specific display) and becomes visible (or easily visible). Valid period (sixth valid period) ”may be prepared under different generation conditions, and whether or not the above-mentioned“ specific image TG ”is displayed at this time may be appropriately set. Good. In short, at least the second valid period in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed and the first valid period in which the “specific image TG” is displayed are included in the plural (type) valid periods. If so, at least when those effective periods occur, the above-described action and effect are exerted in relation to the indication effect (specific display).

  In each of the following examples, the gauge image GG and the specific image TG are displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, but at least one of the gauge image GG and the specific image TG is replaced with the mode shown in FIG. 234. It may be executed.

  FIG. 235 is a diagram showing an example of the production progress when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period.

  235 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is a special effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination effect display device 1600. Shows the production situation being performed in.

  FIG. 235 (b) shows an effect situation in which the indication effect (specific display TH) is started on the effect display device 1600 during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 235 (a).

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (b), it can be seen that the integrated image IG has not yet appeared in at least the effect display device 1600. However, since the precursor effect (specific display TH) is started, the integrated effect image IG is internally displayed, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed, whereby the integration is performed. The entire image IG may not be visible (or it may be difficult to view due to a predetermined transmittance). That is, in this case, the operation acceptance is permitted (the effective period is started) from the time the precursor effect (specific display) is started.

  FIG. 235 (c) shows that, as a result of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b) progressing and the area in which the precursor effect (specific display TH) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A part that does not overlap with the precursor effect (specific display) appears, and the part is displayed in a state in which the visual recognition is good.

  That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 235 (b)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 235 (b) appears, and is also shown in FIG. 235 (c). When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation that occurs, appears at least in internal processing (display in layer processing) Has become. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 235 (c), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG cannot be viewed (or visually recognized because they overlap with the precursor effect (specific display TH) that is preferentially displayed. Although difficult), the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already been started (progress), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already been started (progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is arranged to overlap the precursor effect (specific display TH).

  According to such a configuration, the precursor effect (specific display TH) is performed over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period occurs is the precursor effect. Due to the (specific display TH), at least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to be visually recognized. That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the button image of the operation target, but the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery is not in the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. Instead, it is in a state in which it can be recognized that it is the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. Also, in the example shown in FIG. 235 (c), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, the type in which the “specific image TG” is displayed at the beginning of the effective period ( (See FIG. 234) or the type (see FIG. 233) in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the start of the effective period and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that, when adopted, it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game.

  In FIG. 235 (d), as a result of the further development of the precursor effect (specific display TH) shown in FIG. 235 (b), there is no portion overlapping with the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG). The situation (here, the precursor effect is hidden) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (d), at the time when the entire integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state where the visibility is good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. The area has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a display area larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It remains, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to expect a reduction in the enjoyment of the game due to the already reduced display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG when the precursor effect (specific display TH) ends.

  FIG. 235 (e) shows that when the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), the operation is not accepted and the valid period ends (or the valid period ends). An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 (just before) is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 235 (e), at least part (or all) of the “specific image TG” is displayed even at the time when the valid period ends. In this regard, in the first valid period, as described above, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if the player does not perform the operation within the period (FIG. 235). (See (f)).

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if the player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the effective period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the post-operation display is displayed. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed immediately before or after the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display or the operation is performed in response to the operation being accepted by the player in time and the operation reception accompanying the operation being generated. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (previous display) is performed in this manner, when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined) is displayed. The display area of (image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, since it is likely that the operation by the player will not be in time, there is a high possibility that the operation will be displayed after the operation while the "specific image TG" is displayed even if the operation is not performed by the player within the effective period. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation and the operation is particularly effective in suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 235, there are a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to any of the above.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 235, the precursor effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in different layers, and the precursor effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the form. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the form shown in FIG. 235 may be stored as one moving image data and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data. This method can also be applied to each example described below.

  In the example shown in FIG. 235, the aspect (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a) appears as the integrated general image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mock image IG may be caused to appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). .. When adopting such a method, it is more desirable to execute the aura effect in the mode shown in FIGS. 236 to 238 in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  FIG. 236 to FIG. 238 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect development when the first effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  236 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination, the effect display device. 1600 shows a performance situation being performed.

  236 (b) is an effect in which the first predictive effect (first specific display TH1) is started on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 236 (a) is being executed. It shows the situation.

  The first predictive effect (first specific display TH1) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the first timing, and suggests that operation-related effect is performed. Function as an effect.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, after the first precursor effect (first specific display TH1) is performed, based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination), The image shown in FIG. 237 (c) "or the" image shown in FIG. 238 (j) "is displayed, whereby the" normal button image BMGa "and" special image "are displayed as the button image BMG. The button image BMGb ”is most likely to appear.

  Here, when the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” is displayed, there is a high possibility that the “normal button image BMGa” is displayed as the button image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)” according to this example has a mode (semitransparent here) different from the normal state (mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) of the “integrated image IGa”. It is to be displayed as a represented image IGa '. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 237 (c)”, the “integrated image IGa” may be displayed in the same manner as shown in FIG. 232 (a). Alternatively, the “normal button image BMGa” may not be integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” and may be displayed as a single image. Even when the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in a normal mode (a mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) or in a normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (semitransparent in this case) different from the mode shown in FIG.

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c), the “normal button image BMGa” shown in FIG. 232 (a) itself or an approximation of the “normal button image BMGa” is approximated. At least the image BMGa ′ having the (grooved) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the "normal button image BMGa" is displayed as an "integrated image IGa (Fig. 232 (a))" integrated with the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGa", or the "special peripheral decoration image" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that the effective period displayed as “integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (a))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) shown in FIG. 237 (c) is displayed, the image IGa ′ (image BMGa ′) is not the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))”. , An effect suggesting (remembering) that the image may be displayed as the “integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (d), the "special marginal decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the" image IGa 'representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa' representing the normal button model image BMGa) ". The rendered image SSGb '"is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, “the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to“ the image IGa ′ representing the integrated general image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button general image BMGa) ” When the image SSGb ′ ”is added and integrated, a valid period in which the“ integrated image IGc (FIG. 232 (c)) ”appears appears. On the other hand, the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to the “image IGa ′ representing the integrated image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button image BMGa)”. If they are not integrated, the effective period in which the “integrated image IGa (FIG. 232 (a))” appears appears.

  237 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d) is performed. There is.

  The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is generated when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and suggests that the operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as a production. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “the image IGa ′ representing the integrated model image IGa (or the image BMGa ′ representing the normal button model image BMGa)” The “image SSGb ′ representing the special marginal decoration image SSGb” is started while gradually approaching, and at the time when the “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is started, “the image IGa ′ ( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the “image BMGa ′) representing the normal button image BMGa” and the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) progresses, whichever of “the image shown in FIG. 237 (f)” and “the image shown in FIG. 237 (h)” is based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situations and image contents shown in FIGS. 237 (f) and 237 (h) are basically the same as the above-mentioned “situations and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)”, and FIG. 237 (e) As a result of the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) progressing and the area in which the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a good visual recognition state.

  That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 237 (e)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 237 (e) appears, and FIG. 237 (f) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation shown in 237 (h) appears, at least it is displayed by internal processing (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time shown in FIG. 237 (f) and FIG. 237 (h), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is the second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to view) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in such a manner as to extend over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to be visually recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

  In this respect, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (f) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 237 (d) and (e) as a result of the effect shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and (e), "the image IGa '(or the normal button image BMGa expressing the integrated image IGa is expressed). It can be recognized that the image BMGa ′) ”has failed to be combined with the“ image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb ”. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (g), the integrated mood image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)). The whole picture of will appear. Since the production progress thereafter is as described above with reference to FIGS. 235 (d) to 235 (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 237 (h) appears, it is in a state in which it is possible to recognize that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated general image IG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. From the result of the effect shown in FIG. 237 (d), "the image IGa '(or the image BMGa' representing the normal button image BMGa) representing the integrated image IGa" is "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the connection with the image SSGb ′ representing “. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 237 (i), the integrated image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). The whole picture of will appear. The production progress thereafter is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGc (see FIG. 232 (c)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” is displayed, it is highly likely that the “special button image BMGb” is displayed as the button image BMG (here, “100%”). Will be suggested.

  The “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)” according to this example has a mode (semi-transparent here) different from that of the “integrated image IGb” in the normal state (mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)). It is to be displayed as a represented image IGb '. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, for the “image shown in FIG. 238 (j)”, the “integrated image IGb” may be displayed in the same manner as that shown in FIG. 232 (b). Alternatively, the “special button image BMGb” may not be integrated with the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa” but may be displayed as a single image. Even when the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as a single image, it may be displayed in a normal mode (a mode shown in FIG. 232 (b)) or in a normal mode (FIG. 232 (b)). The image may be displayed as an image expressed in a mode (semitransparent in this case) different from the mode shown in FIG.

  In any case, in the situation shown in FIG. 238 (j), the “special button image BMGb” shown in FIG. 232 (b) itself or the “special button image BMGb” is approximated. At least the image BMGb ′ having the (exposed) outer shape is displayed. As a result, the "special button image BMGb" is displayed as an "integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))" integrated with the "normal edge decoration image SSGa", or the "special edge decoration" is displayed. It becomes possible to suggest that the effective period displayed as “integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” integrated with “image SSGb” occurs.

  After the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) shown in FIG. 238 (j) is displayed, the image IGb ′ (image BMGb ′) is not the “integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))”. , An effect that suggests (remembers) that the image may be displayed as the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” is executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 237 (k), the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the“ image IGb ′ representing the integrated general image IGb (or the image BMGb ′ representing the special button image BMGb) ”. The rendered image SSGb '"is depicted as an effect that gradually approaches. As a result of such an effect, "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb is expressed with respect to the" image IGb '(or the image BMGb' representing the special button image BMGb) expressing the integrated image IGb "" When the images are integrated by adding the “image SSGb ′”, an effective period in which the “integrated image IGd (FIG. 232 (d))” appears appears. On the other hand, the “image SSGb ′ representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” is added to the “image IGb ′ representing the integrated image IGb ′ (or the image BMGb ′ representing the special button image BMGb)”. If they are not integrated, the effective period in which the “integrated image IGb (FIG. 232 (b))” appears appears.

  FIG. 238 (l) shows an effect situation in which the second indication effect (second specific display TH2) is started on the effect display device 1600 after the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k) is performed. There is. The third predictive effect (the third specific display) different from the second predictive effect (the second specific display TH2) may be executed.

  As described above, this second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) occurs when the first effect pattern (variation pattern) progresses to the second timing, and operation acceptance is permitted. It is executed as an effect that suggests that. The second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) according to this example is for “the image IGb ′ representing the integrated image IGb ′ (or the image BMGb ′ representing the special button image BMGb)”. The "image SSGb 'representing the special marginal decoration image SSGb" is started in the course of gradually approaching, and at the time of the start, "the image IGb' (representing the integrated image IGb '( Alternatively, it is unclear whether or not the “image BMGb ′) expressing the special button image BMGb” and the “image SSGb ′ expressing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb” are integrated.

  When the effect shown in FIG. 238 (l) progresses, whichever of “the image shown in FIG. 238 (m)” and “the image shown in FIG. 238 (o)” is based on the result of the big hit determination (effect determination). Is displayed.

  The situation and image contents shown in FIGS. 238 (m) and 238 (o) are basically the same as the above-mentioned “situation and image contents shown in FIG. 235 (c)”, and FIG. 238 (l) As a result of the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) shown in (1) progressing and the area in which the second predictive effect (second specific display TH2) is displayed being reduced, the integrated image IG is displayed. A portion that does not overlap with the indication effect (specific display) appears, and indicates the situation or image content in which the portion is displayed in a good visual recognition state.

  That is, the integrated image IG is the timing (including the timing shown in FIG. 238 (l)) that arrives after the situation shown in FIG. 238 (l) appears, and FIG. 238 (m) or FIG. When the "specific timing (timing at which the effective period starts)", which is the timing that comes before the situation shown in 238 (o) appears, at least internal processing displays (display on layer processing). ) Is to be executed. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 238 (m) or FIG. 238 (o), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is the second precursor effect (specific display TH2) that is preferentially displayed. Although it is not visible (or difficult to view) due to overlapping, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progressed), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started ( Progress). In this example, the entire specific image TG is made to overlap the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2).

  According to such a configuration, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is performed in such a manner as to extend over the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and after the effective period is generated. During the predetermined time, at least a part of the integrated image IG cannot be visually recognized or is made difficult to be visually recognized by the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2). That is, in this case, since the whole image of the integrated image IG is gradually exposed within the effective period, the degree of expectation suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) ) Or the target of operation (mode of the button image) can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

  In this respect, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (m) appears, the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated image IG is not the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb” but the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGa”. 238 (k) and (l) show that "the image IGb '(or the special button image BMGb representing the integrated model image IGb is represented. It can be recognized that the "image BMGb ')" has failed to be combined with the "image SSGb' representing the special peripheral decoration image SSGb". That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (n), the integrated image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). The whole picture of will appear. The production progress thereafter is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGb (see FIG. 232 (b)). Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  On the other hand, when the situation shown in FIG. 238 (o) appears, it is in a state in which it can be recognized that the peripheral decoration image SSG included in the integrated general image IG is the “special peripheral decoration image SSGb”. From the result of the effect shown in FIG. 238 (k), "the image IGb '(or the image BMGb' representing the special button image BMGb) representing the integrated image IGb" is "the special peripheral decoration image SSGb. It is possible to recognize that the connection with the image SSGb ′ representing “. That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) is hidden, as shown in FIG. 238 (p), the integrated image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)). The whole picture of will appear. The production progress thereafter is only that the integrated model image IGa (see FIG. 232 (a)) is replaced by the integrated model image IGd (see FIG. 232 (d)), and FIG. 235 (d)- Since it is as described above with reference to (f), it will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, when FIG. 237 (c) appears, the probability that the “special button image BMGb” appears as the button image BMG is set to “0%”, but as the button image BMG. The probability that the "special button image BMGb" appears may be slightly increased. That is, in this case, after the effect shown in FIG. 237 (e) is performed, in addition to FIG. 237 (f) → (g), (h) → (i), FIG. 238 (m) → (n), ( There is a possibility that the production progress is executed in the form of o) → (p).

  According to such a configuration, in which mode the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed at the time when FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) appear. Although recognizable, it is not possible to recognize in what mode the button image BMG is displayed. That is, in this case, the degree of expectation is suggested step by step in accordance with the situation related to the progress of the second predictive presentation (the second specific display TH2), and the interest in the game can be improved. .. In particular, when the button image BMG can indicate any one of a plurality of operation means having different operation targets depending on the display mode, the effective period has started and the operation-related expectation level is also indicated. In spite of the situation, the situation in which it is impossible to recognize which of the operation targets is generated occurs, so that it is possible to remarkably improve the degree of attention to the effect.

  However, even in the situation where FIGS. 237 (f) and (h) and FIGS. 238 (m) and (o) are displayed, the button is pressed in the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target of the player. It is desirable that the light is emitted in a mode according to the type displayed as the simulated image BMG (for example, light is emitted from the time when the effective period occurs). With such a configuration, a person who has a high motivation to operate and tends to directly see the operation means (operation receiving unit) can quickly recognize the “type displayed as the button image BMG”. Therefore, the player can be encouraged to operate.

  Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the first predictive presentation effect (first specific display TH1) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, the situation shown in FIG. 236 (a) may be changed to the situation shown in FIG. 237 (c) or 238 (j).

  In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 236 to 238, the second precursor effect (second specific display TH2) does not necessarily have to be executed. For example, even if the situation shown in FIG. 237 (d) or 238 (k) is changed to the situation shown in FIG. 237 (g), (i) or FIG. 238 (n), (p), Good. That is, in this case, the effect shown in FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k) functions as a precursor effect. The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may have already decreased at the time of transition, or the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG may not have decreased. When the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is already reduced at the time of the transition, if the gauge image is in the situation shown in FIG. 237 (d) or 238 (k). (Predetermined image) GG will start to decrease its display area.

  In addition, part of the effects of FIGS. 236 to 238 may be omitted depending on the mode prepared as the integrated image IG. For example, if the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and 232 (d) are not prepared as the integrated image IG, it is possible to omit all of the series of effects shown in FIG. 238. At this time, this may be omitted from FIG. 237 (c).

  Note that, in the effects of FIGS. 236 to 238, the image BMG ′ (or the button image BMG itself) expressing the button image BMG is provided before the operation acceptance is permitted (before the valid period occurs). (OK) is displayed (FIGS. 237 (d) and 238 (k)), but in the situation (before the valid period occurs), an image BMG '(or a button image BMG) representing the button image BMG is displayed. Is not dynamically displayed so as to depict how the operation receiving portion is displaced within the movable range. With such a configuration, even if the button image BMG and the image BMG ′ representing the button image BMG ′ are displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the effective period has not yet occurred. Since it is possible to suggest implicitly, the player can concentrate on the production without worrying about the remaining time of the effective period. Since the reception of the production is permitted when the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2) is being performed, it is difficult to visually recognize the second precursor effect (the second specific display TH2). Then, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed.

  239 to 243 are diagrams showing an example of the production progress when the second effective period of the first effective period and the second effective period described above occurs.

  That is, in FIGS. 235 to 238, an effective period (first effective period) in which the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden is generated. Regarding the case, the example related to the production progress has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 239 to 243, whether the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, or whether the precursor effect (specific display) is displayed. In the case where an effective period (second effective period) occurs without being interrupted, an example of the production progress will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, basically, when a valid period during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs, a predetermined predictive presentation (precursor display) is performed. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute the “display mode characterized by the movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG” within the effective period. In order to make the feature stand out when performing the effect, a predetermined precursor effect (predictive display) itself is not performed when the effective period occurs, or even if a predetermined predictive presentation (predictive display) is performed, a gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has not yet been reduced and has reached the maximum value at the time when the entire display target area is visually confirmed.

  Here, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238), the gauge image GG is displayed when no operation is performed within the effective period. When the area reaches a predetermined minimum value (“0” in this case), the valid period ends. “No operation is performed within the valid period, and post-operation display and post-operation sound output are performed. Despite that, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (“0” here) at the time when the valid period ends, and the display area has a predetermined display area. The first display mode "can be mentioned. According to such a configuration, even if it seems that a lot of time remains until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player Becomes aware of the possibility that the effective period will be abruptly ended, so that it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension during the effective period.

  In addition, as the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic", normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238), the gauge image GG reduces the display area every unit time within the effective period. However, it is possible to cite “a second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced despite being within the valid period”. According to such a configuration, even when it seems that there is only a short remaining time until the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the player keeps the gauge. It becomes possible to be aware of the possibility that the display area of the image GG will not be reduced, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment appeal.

  That is, in the example described below, a “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” using at least one of such “first display mode” and “second display mode”. The example of a display when executing is shown.

  First, FIG. 239 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is rendered in the second effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination. This shows the effect situation that is being performed on the display device 1600.

  239 (b), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 239 (a), an effective period during which operation acceptance for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 appears. The integrated situation image IG is displayed as a result. As shown in FIG. 239 (b), at the time when the integrated image IG is displayed, the display area of the gauge image GG has reached a predetermined maximum value and is not yet reduced. ..

  Further, when the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" is executed within the valid period, the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) is " It is set longer than the time (set time) set for the valid period (first valid period) in which the “display mode having characteristics of movement of gauge image GG” is not executed. This is nothing but the time for executing the display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic within the effective period, which is required. However, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to the present embodiment, the first valid period in which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characteristic” is not executed, and the “movement of the gauge image GG”. Although the set time until the effective period ends is different from the second effective period in which the "display mode having the feature" is executed, whether the integrated image IG itself is the same, The images are displayed in a form having a similar relationship (in this example, the integrated image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG) has the same display area). According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is not executed, and “the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” It is difficult to recognize that the set time differs between the second effective period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the amount of time in the situation in which the display area is not reduced is reduced. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

  Note that when the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (b) occurs, a precursor effect suggesting the occurrence may be performed. However, the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed at the time when the entire integrated image IG (at least the “display area of the gauge image GG included in the integrated image IG”) is displayed without overlapping the precursor effect. Is the maximum value, and it is required to be in a situation where it has not yet been reduced.

  That is, as described above, in this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is reduced in a state (within the valid period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the predetermined post-operation display and the predetermined post-operation sound output is permitted. When the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (c) appears after a predetermined time has elapsed from the effect situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the gauge image GG shows the previous state. The display area is maintained in a state where the display area corresponding to the elapsed time (predetermined time) is reduced, and the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d), such a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is set to be continued for a predetermined time after the period is generated. Has become. However, even in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”, the operation reception is maintained in an allowable state, and when the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given is operated, the effective period is concerned. Is terminated, the integrated image IG is hidden, and after-operation display and after-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 239 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, "a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" appears within the effective period, so that compared with the case where the display area of the gauge image GG is continuously reduced at a constant speed. Thus, it becomes possible to suggest that there is a margin in the remaining time until the expiration of the effective period.

  Further, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced, the operation reception itself is maintained in an allowable state, so that it is possible to give an image as if the effective period is extended. Therefore, it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game when the valid period is occurring.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 239 (c) and 239 (d), in the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced", the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is in a non-display state or is difficult to visually recognize. The state is set so as to prompt the user to pay attention to the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic".

  However, when a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, the player may be misunderstood that an image in the display screen suddenly becomes stationary, that is, a so-called “freeze effect” occurs. That is, since the "freeze effect" is generally known as a display mode in which no reaction is shown for a predetermined time period and the state cannot be released, a false recognition that operation acceptance is no longer permitted There is a concern that the player's motivation for operation may be lost and the interest in the game may be reduced. In particular, in this example, since the decorative pattern SZ is set in a non-display state or a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, this may also lead to erroneous recognition that operation acceptance is not permitted.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the integrated image IG itself is not in a stationary state but the integrated image IG itself when the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The gauge image GG included in the IG is kept stationary, while the button image BMG included in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (the displacement of the operation receiving portion in the movable range is depicted. Display) is continued.

  With such a configuration, while the dynamic display of the button image BMG is continued, a state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, so that the operation acceptance is not allowed ( It is possible to suppress the possibility that the freeze effect is erroneously recognized), and it is expected that the player's motivation for operation is appropriately maintained.

  Here, the dynamic display by the button image BMG is executed as a display in which a predetermined operation (an operation of reciprocating within the movable range of the operation receiving portion, etc.) is repeated. In this respect, during the effective period (the first effective period shown in FIG. 235 to FIG. 238, etc.) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced at the time when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, that setting is performed. While the predetermined operation by the button image BMG is executed as a display that is repeated n times until the time ends, the indication effect (specific display) is not executed or the indication effect (specific display) is executed but not displayed. In the effective period (the second effective period shown in FIG. 239 to FIG. 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time of being set, the “display area of the gauge image GG decreases in the set time”. It is desirable that the predetermined operation by the button image BMG can be executed as a display that is repeated m (> n) times even within the “non-executed period”.

  With such a configuration, when the state where the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced for a time longer than the first valid period shown in FIGS. 235 to 238. Since the state that is not performed continues, even if you are surprised at the occurrence of the state and it takes time to grasp the situation, you will have sufficient time to operate it. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately. Note that, as an effective period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect (specific display) is hidden, an effective period different from the first effective period shown in FIGS. If a period (one that generates another post-operation display or post-operation sound output) is prepared, than the longest one of each time (set time) set for those effective periods, Of the second valid periods shown in FIGS. 239 to 243, etc., it is desirable that the number of times the predetermined operation is performed by the button image BMG is larger in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. ..

  Then, as described above, at the time when such a second effective period occurs, the gauge image GG is in a state where its visibility is well secured, and the display area thereof has a predetermined maximum value. It is displayed (FIG. 239 (b)). However, at this time, as shown in FIG. 234, if the specific image TG is displayed in a good visible state in the display target region of the gauge image GG, the specific image TG is displayed. However, it may seem that the display area of the gauge image GG is decreasing, and there is a concern that the interest in the game will be reduced. Further, as illustrated in FIG. 233, if the specific image TG may appear in a visually good state as the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced from the maximum value, the specific image TG may be displayed. It becomes clear that it does not function as a part of the gauge image GG, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may be deteriorated by exaggerating the length of the remaining time as the effective period.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control unit 1511) according to this embodiment, the specific image TG itself is not displayed during the second effective period. Therefore, even if the display area of the gauge image GG is started to decrease from the situation shown in FIG. 239 (b), the specific image TG does not appear, and the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed in the state where the specific image TG is not displayed. Is reduced to a predetermined value, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs over a predetermined time (FIGS. 239 (c) and (d)).

  In this example, when the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG is designed to reduce its display area again. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible. Then, after that, when the display area of the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) increases. As a result, the second valid period ends, and the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)). Note that, here, when the display area of the gauge image GG is “0”, that is, when the gauge image GG is not displayed (FIG. 239 (e)), the time set for the second valid period (set time) increases. Then, the second effective period is ended, and at the same time, the operation-related images including the integrated image IG are hidden (FIG. 239 (f)).

  In this way, in the second valid period, when the set time elapses without receiving the operation acceptance (FIG. 239 (f)), the same operation as when the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The rear display and the post-operation sound output are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions), and this point is also different from the first effective period. However, instead, in the second valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and the operation acceptance is permitted in the display period in the stopped state. Since it is as described above, it can be said that the situation itself in which the operation until the gauge image GG reaches a predetermined value (minimum value) cannot be performed in itself is difficult to occur. ..

  In the example shown in FIG. 239, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, the gauge image GG is usually predetermined within the effective period (see FIGS. 233 to 238). The case where the "second display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced even though it is within the valid period" is applied to the case where the display area is reduced at a constant speed has been described. However, as described above, as the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, normally (see FIGS. 233 to 238), when the operation is not performed within the valid period, the gauge image GG is displayed. When the display area reaches a predetermined minimum value (here, “0”), the valid period ends. “The operation is not performed within the valid period and the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are performed. In spite of this, the display area of the gauge image GG does not reach the predetermined minimum value (here, “0”) and has a predetermined display area at the end of the valid period. The first display mode ”described above may be further applied. When adopting such a method, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by executing the method in any of the modes shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, or in the modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243. Is more desirable.

  240 and 241 are diagrams showing an example of the production progress when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situations shown in FIGS. 240 (a) to 240 (d) are the same as the contents described with reference to FIGS. 239 (a) to 239 (d) and other examples thereof. Therefore, also in this example, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs in the middle of the second effective period, and the period including the period is in the second effective period. When the operation is accepted in step 2, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)).

  However, in this example, even if the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" ends without the operation being accepted by the player, the gauge image GG is made to reduce the display area again. It is never displayed. In this example, the "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" is continued until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (predetermined value) as shown in FIGS. 240 (d) and 241 (e). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible.

  In this way, even during the second valid period according to this example, if the set time elapses without the operation being accepted (FIG. 241 (e)), the operation is accepted within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at that time are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions). However, instead, the second valid period according to this example also displays the gauge image GG in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and operates during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, acceptance is allowed.

  However, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until it reaches a predetermined value (“0” in this case), and the second effective period is set with the display area for the predetermined value remaining. Since the player is attempting to end the game, the player may not be able to operate it despite the intention of operating it, and the second valid period may end, which lowers the interest of the player. I have a concern. Therefore, in this example, after the second effective period ends without being operated by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop, or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. While not operating, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means given the operation opportunity within the second effective period, and the operation means is provided. When the operation is accepted, the second valid period can be generated again based on this. In this sense, when the second valid period ends without the player's operation, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period starts from the time when the second valid period ends. Can be said.

  With such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having passed without the player's operation, the player's operation shown in FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the after-operation display and the after-operation sound output shown in). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 241 (e), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 241 (f)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 240 (b) to 240 (d), 241 (e), and (g). Therefore, even when the operation is accepted within the second effective period regenerated in this way, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 241 (g)). ).

  When the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241 (e), the image shown in FIG. 241 (f) (the same as the image shown in FIG. 240 (b)) appears as the post-operation display. It will be. Such an image is not displayed after the operation performed based on the operation reception during the second effective period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIG. 241 (f)). It is different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation reception during the special effective period shown in FIG. 241 (e) is also the second effective period (FIGS. 240 (b) to (d) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the operation reception in 241 (f) and the like.

  FIG. 242 and FIG. 243 are diagrams showing a modification example of the effect development when the second effective period occurs in the first effective period and the second effective period described above.

  The situation shown in FIG. 242 (a) is the same as the contents described with reference to FIG. 239 (a) and FIG. 240 (a) and other examples thereof. However, in this example, when the second effective period occurs and the integrated display image IG is displayed on the effect display device 1600 while the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. A "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time when the integrated image IG is displayed for a predetermined time (FIGS. 242 (b) and 242 (c)). In this example, since the display area of the gauge image GG is at a predetermined maximum value when the integrated image IG is displayed, the gauge image GG has the maximum display area. It will be maintained as it is.

  It should be noted that the operation acceptance is allowed even when the specific image TG is not displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG or the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. The configuration and progress in the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” such as the execution of the rear sound output are the same as those described with reference to FIGS. 239 to 241 and the other examples. ..

  Also in this example, as in the examples shown in FIGS. 240 and 241, the “display area of the gauge image GG decreases until the time (set time) set for the second valid period elapses. It is designed to continue for "the period that is not done". Therefore, when the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced” ends, the display area of the gauge image GG is left as it is (maximum value), as shown in FIGS. 242 (c) and 243 (d). In this state, the operation related image including the integrated image IG is hidden. In this state, the decorative pattern SZ is displayed again or is in a state in which it is easily visible.

  As described above, also in the second valid period according to this example, if the set time elapses without receiving the operation acceptance (FIG. 243 (d)), the operation acceptance is performed within the second valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as at that time are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions). However, instead, the second valid period according to this example also displays the gauge image GG in the stopped state for a time longer than the set time for the first valid period, and operates during the display period in the stopped state. As described above, acceptance is allowed.

  However, also in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the display area reaches a predetermined value (here, “0”), and the second effective period remains with the display area for the maximum value remaining. As a result, the player side may not be able to operate despite the intention of operating it and the second valid period may end, which lowers the interest of the game. I have a concern. Therefore, also in this example, after the second effective period ends without being operated by the player, a specific condition (for example, a symbol stop or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is satisfied. While not being operated, the operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (the handle button 5014 or the operation button 410) as the operation means given the operation opportunity within the second effective period. When the operation is received, the second valid period can be generated again based on the received operation. In this sense, it can be said that when the second valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the second valid period occurs.

  With such a configuration, even when the second valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having passed without the player's operation, FIG. It is possible to generate an operation acceptance for outputting the after-operation display and the after-operation sound output shown in). More specifically, in the situation shown in FIG. 243 (d), when the player operates the handle button 5014 (or the operation button 410), the second operation is performed based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The effective period is started from the initial state (FIG. 243 (e)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 242 (b), (c), 243 (d), and (f). Therefore, even when the operation is accepted within the second effective period regenerated in this manner, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed (see FIG. 243 (f)). ).

  However, in this example, even when the second effective period is regenerated in this manner, a "period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" occurs from the time of the reoccurrence, so that FIG. 243 (e) In the situation shown in (1), the decorative pattern SZ is hidden or made difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, the “image shown in FIG. 243 (e)” that appears as a post-operation display when the operation is accepted during the special effective period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is the “image shown in FIG. 242 (b)”. Is the same as. Such an image is displayed after the operation (FIG. 243 (f) shown in FIG. 243 (f) when the operation is accepted in the second effective period (FIG. 242 (b), (c), FIG. 243 (d), etc.). )) Is different from the image display. Similarly, the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation in the special effective period shown in FIG. 243 (d) is also performed in the second effective period (FIGS. 242 (b), (c) and FIG. The output sound is different from the post-operation sound output (FIG. 243 (f)) which is executed based on the operation acceptance in 243 (d) and the like.

  As described above, in the example shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the entire period from the start to the end of the second effective period functions as the “period in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced”. Therefore, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced in any situation.

  Note that, in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 241 (e) or FIG. 243 (d), the integrated image IG may be displayed as in the second effective period. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output generated according to the operation are different from each other (second effective period, special effective period), the second effective period and the special effective period are specially recognized. It is preferable that at least one of the display position and the size of the integrated image IG differs from the effective period. That is, in this case, at the end of the second effective period, the integrated image IG of the mode corresponding to the second effective period is hidden, and the integrated image IG of the mode corresponding to the special effective period is newly added. Will be displayed in. When the integrated image IG is displayed during the special effective period, "a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced" may be generated within the effective period, or "a period during which the display area of the gauge image is not reduced". May not be generated.

  The "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized" shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is executable when the integrated image IGa is displayed among the integrated images IGa to IGd. It is preferable that the integrated image images IGb to IGd are not executed when the integrated image images IGb to IGd are displayed. That is, the integrated image IGa is displayed as the mode with the lowest degree of expectation, but when the integrated image IGa is displayed, the movement of the gauge image GG shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 is displayed. Since there is a possibility that "a display mode having a feature" will appear, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the examples shown in FIGS. 240 to 243, when the operation-related image (integrated image IG or the like) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, it depends on the player. Even if a situation occurs in which the operation-related image is hidden as a result of the elapse of a predetermined set period (second effective period) without any operation being performed, operation reception occurs and the display changes (or , Post-operation sound output). More specifically, even when the predetermined set period (second effective period) has ended, if the operation receiving portion (operation means) that has been operated by the integrated image IG until then is operated. It is possible to regenerate a predetermined set period (second effective period), and operation acceptance is allowed during the regenerated predetermined set period (second effective period) (Fig. 241 (e), (f) and FIGS. 243 (d), (e)). With such a configuration, even when the predetermined setting period (second effective period) has ended without understanding the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has characteristics” can be understood. Since the predetermined set period (second effective period) can be regenerated, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  On the other hand, during the predetermined setting period (first effective period) in which the operation-related image (the integrated image IG, etc.) is not displayed in the "display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG is characterized", the operation reception is not performed. Even after the predetermined setting period (first effective period) ends without being operated, even if the operation receiving unit (operating means) that has been prompted to be operated by the integrated image IG until then is operated, the predetermined setting period The (second effective period) is not regenerated (FIGS. 235 to 238).

  In addition, about the predetermined setting period (second effective period) in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG, etc.) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, the symbol variation is not always required. Does not have to occur during the execution period of. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether or not there is a symbol change, or during the period during which the big hit game is executed or the period before the big hit game is started, "the period when the symbol change is not executed. ] May occur at the same time.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, a longer time is set in the second valid period (FIGS. 239 to 243) than in the first valid period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, the integrated image IG itself is displayed in the same or similar relationship between the first effective period and the second effective period (in the above example, the integrated effective image IG itself is displayed). The chemical image IG itself is the same, and the gauge image GG (the display target area of the gauge image GG has the same display area). When the integrated image IG is displayed in a form having a similar relationship, the size ratio of the gauge image GG (display target area) to the button image is the same, so that the set time (set time) is set. Are expected to appear to be the same in length. According to such a configuration, at first glance, the first effective period in which the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” is not executed, and “the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic” It is difficult to recognize that the set time differs between the second effective period in which the "display mode" is executed, but when a situation in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears, the amount of time in the situation in which the display area is not reduced is reduced. By adding, it becomes possible to estimate that the set time is longer than it looks.

  When displaying the integrated image IG in a similar relationship between the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238) and the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243), the “gauge image” is displayed. In the second effective period in which the “display mode characterized by the movement of GG” appears, it is desirable to display the integrated image IG smaller than the first effective period.

  Further, according to the example shown in FIGS. 235 to 243, in the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238), if there is no operation reception, the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) has a specific value (here, “ 0 "), the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) is displayed with a value larger than the specific value in the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) if no operation is received. Will be terminated. That is, if the time set for the effective period (set time) is long, the sense of tension tends to decrease during the effective period, but the display area of the predetermined image (gauge) has a specific value (here, " By setting the possibility that the effective period may end even if it does not become "0"), it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, according to the above-described example, when the integrated effect image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced (first effective period) while the omen effect is being performed, the omen When the integrated effect image IG is displayed so that the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the indication effect is performed but the indication effect is performed (second effective) The image displayed in the display target area of the gauge image GG is different for each period. In this case, the modes of the gauge image GG itself may be different from each other. "The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at least while the precursor effect is performed," means that the gauge image is displayed over the entire effective period, as illustrated in FIGS. 242 and 243. This means that the display area of GG is not reduced.

  In this regard, according to the above-described example, during the first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238), the specific image TG is displayed, and the specific image TG is displayed in a state where the set time elapses without any operation being performed. Although it is displayed, in the second effective period (FIGS. 240 to 243), the specific image TG is not displayed, and the gauge image GG (display The target area) is displayed. According to such a configuration, in the first effective period, it is possible to make the effective period look longer as much as the specific image TG is displayed at the end of the effective period, and in the second effective period. By leaving the gauge image GG (display target area) at the end of the effective period, it is possible to maintain the sense of tension by making the end of the effective period appear earlier than expected by the player. In order to preferably obtain such an effect, in the second effective period, a large amount of the display area of the gauge image GG (display target area) is left (at least an area larger than half the maximum value) at the end of the effective period. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the gauge image GG is displayed in a mode in which the display area is reduced per unit time during the entire first effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238). However, the display area is not reduced in the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243). Therefore, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize the remaining time only by the size of the display area when the gauge image GG appears, and it is expected that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained.

  Further, according to the above-described example, the button image BMG is dynamically displayed so as to depict a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced during both the first effective period and the second effective period. However, while the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode (mode in which the display area is reduced) in the first effective period, the gauge image GG is displayed in the first mode in the second effective period. The display is performed in a different second mode (a mode in which the display area is not reduced). That is, although the button image BMG is displayed as one image (integrated image IG) integrated with the gauge image GG (peripheral decoration image SSG) in the example described above. , When the button image BMG in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, when the gauge image GG is in a reduced state and when the gauge image GG is not in a reduced state. I have to Therefore, even if the gauge image GG is not reduced, it is preferable that the operation reception is allowed by the dynamic display of the button image BMG as the integrated image IG. You will be able to suggest.

  Further, according to the above-described example, only when the normal button image BMGa and the special button image BMGb are displayed as the normal button image BMGa, the “characteristic of movement of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is It is possible to display the “display mode that the user has”. Further, when the normal button image BMGa is displayed, not only the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG display characteristic display mode" may be displayed, but also the "gauge image (predetermined image)" is displayed. There is a case where the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a mode (normal mode) that is not displayed when the special button image BMGb is displayed instead of the "display mode in which the movement of the GG has a characteristic". I did. Therefore, it is expected to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the normal button image BMGa having a lower expectation than the special button image BMGb is displayed.

  In particular, in the second effective period shown in FIGS. 242 and 243, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is not reduced at all, and the mode (color or the like) in which the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. However, only one mode is displayed. That is, in this case, although the remaining time indicating function and the expectation indicating function are lost due to the gauge image GG itself and no information can be obtained from the gauge image GG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The integrated image IG formed with is intentionally displayed, and the gauge image GG is statically displayed (in the area invariant mode) in the integrated image IG. With such a configuration, the gauge image GG displayed within the second effective period is not an image indicating the remaining time or the degree of expectation, but functions only as a decoration image in the integrated image IG. Therefore, the function of the gauge image GG can be greatly different from that of the gauge image GG displayed within the first effective period, and the variety of the representation as the gauge image GG improves the enjoyment of the game. Will be expected.

  The first valid period and the second valid period may have different generation conditions. For example, it may occur at different timings within one symbol variation period. Further, the first valid period means a period during which the operation acceptance regarding the first post-operation display and the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and the second valid period is the first valid period. It means a period during which the operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation display different from the post-operation display and the second post-operation sound output different from the first post-operation sound output is permitted, and within each period. The reactions (display change, sound output) that appear when the operation is accepted are different from each other.

Also, regarding the integrated image IG,
After the start of the indication effect (specific display TH), from the time when the indication effect in the display state and the “integrated image IG” overlap each other, the display area of the gauge image GG per unit time Reduced aspect (FIGS. 235-238), and
The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed, or when the precursor effect in the display state and the "integrated image IG" overlap at least even if the precursor effect is displayed. Aspect (FIGS. 239 to 243)
So that there is According to such a configuration, whether the display area is already reduced by the time the visibility of the gauge image GG is secured as a result of the indication effect, or whether the indication effect is performed or not. In some cases, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is visually recognizable, and the enjoyment is provided by using the visibility of the gauge image GG. Will be able to.

  In particular, when a mode (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at the time when the entire gauge image GG is visually recognizable regardless of whether or not the indication effect is performed is adopted. As long as the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced can appear even within the valid period, it is possible to further increase the gaze on the gauge image GG.

  The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced when the precursor effect is not displayed or when the precursor effect in the display state and the “integrated image IG” are at least overlapped with each other even if the precursor effect is started to be displayed. In the case of adopting the mode (FIGS. 239 to 243) that is not performed, in addition to the case where the display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced appears in the effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243), There may be a case where the display mode in which the display area is not reduced may not appear. However, in this case, when the generation condition of the second effective period (FIGS. 239 to 243) in which a display mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is the second condition, a display in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is displayed. The occurrence condition of the specific effective period in which the aspect does not appear is set as a specific condition different from the second condition.

  In the above-described example, during the period in which the button image BMG is displayed, there may be a case where the display for reducing the display area of the gauge image GG is performed according to the passage of time and a case where the display is not performed. did. When the display is not performed, the gauge image GG itself may not be displayed and may be hidden within the effective period. Nevertheless, with respect to the display target area of the gauge image GG, not only the first effective period in which the display area is reduced to be displayed as time elapses, but also the second display area is not reduced as time elapses. Since it is displayed even during the effective period, it is expected to suitably suggest that the production reception is allowed.

  In the above-described example, the display for reducing the display area with the passage of time is not performed by the gauge image GG, and the time (set time) set for the valid period (second valid period) elapses. When the validity period ends, the automatic reception function will not be activated. That is, if the automatic reception function is activated in some cases, the feeling of tension due to the fact that the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image GG may be completely lost. With regard to (), it is desirable that the automatic reception function is not activated (in any presentation mode). On the other hand, regarding the above-described first effective period, it is desirable to enable the automatic reception function (in any presentation mode).

  Further, when the display method in which the button image BMG and the gauge GG are separately displayed and only the gauge function (remaining time suggestion function) is pursued, the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced. In that case, even if it is the gauge image GG, a great sense of incongruity is felt that the remaining time suggesting function is not exerted. In this respect, in the above-mentioned configuration, the button image BMG is displayed as the image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG including the display target area of the gauge GG. That is, in this case, even when the gauge image GG is displayed, a pattern can be seen on the back side of the gauge image GG, or the gauge image GG itself can be provided with a plurality of colors. Since this itself becomes decorative in the integrated image IG, it seems that it is expected to suppress an uncomfortable feeling when the situation in which the remaining time suggesting function of the gauge image GG is not exhibited. become.

  By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 236 to FIG. 238, prior to the occurrence of the first effective period, as the “button image BMG”, a mode with low expectation (normal button image BMGa) and a mode with high expectation (Direction image SMG) with a low expectation (normal margin decoration image SSGa) and high expectations (special margin decoration image) SSGb) and the performance as to which is to appear in stages. However, such performance can also be made to appear by the method described below.

  FIG. 244 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of the integrated image IG stepwise.

  First, in FIG. 244 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is rendered in the first effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the jackpot determination. This shows the effect situation that is being performed on the display device 1600.

  244 (b), during execution of the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ shown in FIG. 244 (a), an effective period during which operation acceptance for the operation means (operation receiving unit) is permitted occurs, and the effect display device 1600 appears. The button situation image BMG is displayed.

  However, in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button image BMG is not displayed as an image integrated with the "periphery decoration image SGG", but remains displayed alone. ing. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (b), the button image BMG is displayed in either a mode with low expectations (normal button image BMGa) or a mode with high expectations (special button image BMGb). This is to provide an effect of whether or not to be performed. In the figure, a case where a mode with a high degree of expectation (special button image BMGb) appears is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  FIG. 244 (c) shows an effect situation in which the special button image BMGb shown in FIG. 244 (b) is displayed as an image IG integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the button image BMG (the normal button image BMGa, the special button image BMGb) shown in FIG. 244 (b) remains valid without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG (first valid period). ) Is prepared, it is effective after the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) is performed and the integrated image IG is obtained. Whether the period (first effective period) is generated or the effective period (first effective period) is generated without the production progress to the situation shown in FIG. You will be able to provide some fun about what you do. When the effective period (first effective period) occurs without becoming the integrated black image IG, the gauge image GG is displayed as an image different from the button black image BMG, and, for example, a bar shape (straight line shape). ), The display area of the gauge image GG is reduced. In this case, it is desirable not to display the specific image TG.

  In addition, when the effective period occurs after the button image BMG is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG, it is expected to be stopped with a big hit symbol than when the effective period occurs without being integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG. It is desirable to increase the degree (rate). 244 (c) when the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b) than in the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b). ) It is desirable to increase the ratio of progressing to the situation shown in () and integrating with the peripheral decoration image SSG. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (c), the button image BMG has a low-expectation peripheral decoration image (normal peripheral decoration image BMGa) and a high-expectation peripheral decoration image (special peripheral decoration). Image BMGb) is provided with the effect of being integrated, and in the figure, a case in which a mode with a high expectation (special peripheral decoration image BMGb) appears is illustrated. .. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination).

  Note that the peripheral edge decoration image BMG (normal peripheral edge decoration image BMGa, special peripheral edge decoration image BMGb) according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the above-described examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) for convenience of description. Although they are different, they are basically displayed as having the same function. The peripheral decoration image BMG according to this example has a box shape for storing the button image BMG, and a heart-shaped pattern (omitted in the drawing) is usually applied to the peripheral decoration image BMGa. On the other hand, in the special peripheral decoration image BMGb, a check pattern is applied. Then, among the areas provided with these patterns, the “area from the upper right to the lower left” is displayed as the display target area of the gauge image GG.

  The image shown in FIG. 244 (c) functions as an image (integrated image) IGd in which the special button image BMGb and the special peripheral decoration image BMGb are integrated, and as a meaning in terms of illustration, It is similar to 232 (d).

  FIG. 244 (d) shows an effect situation in which the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (c).

  However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the first additional decoration HS1 to the integrated general image IG (integrated general images IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244 (c). If the mode in which the occurrence occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production is progressed from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) is achieved without effecting the production of the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) and adding the first additional decoration HS1. You will be able to provide some fun as to what happens.

  When the effective period occurs after the first additional decoration HS1 is added to the integrated image IG, the effective period occurs without the first additional decoration HS1 being added to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (percentage) of being stopped by a big hit symbol is higher than in the case. If the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), or if the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. 244 (d) progresses as compared with the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24 and the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). It is desirable to increase the proportion of the first additional decoration HS1 added. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (d), the first additional decoration HS1 is provided with a performance as to whether it is added in a mode with low expectations or a mode with high expectations. You may do so.

  FIG. 244 (e) shows an effect situation in which the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (d).

  However, the production progress from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) may not necessarily be performed. For example, the effective period (first effective period) without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated general image IG (integrated general image IGa to IGd) shown in FIG. 244 (d). If the mode in which the occurrence occurs is prepared, it is effective after the production progress is performed from the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) to the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) and the first additional decoration HS1 is added. Whether the period (first effective period) occurs, or the effective period (first effective period) without the second additional decoration HS2 being added without effecting the production of the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) You will be able to provide some fun as to what happens.

  When the effective period occurs after the second additional decoration HS2 is added to the integrated image IG, the effective period occurs without adding the second additional decoration HS2 to the integrated image IG. It is desirable that the degree of expectation (percentage) of being stopped by a big hit symbol is higher than in the case. If the special button image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (b), or if the special peripheral decoration image BMGb is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c), FIG. 244 (e) rather than the case where the normal button image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 24 and the case where the normal peripheral decoration image BMGa is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). It is desirable to increase the proportion of the second additional decoration HS2 added. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (e), the second additional decoration HS2 is provided with a directivity as to whether the second additional decoration HS2 is added with a mode with low expectation or a mode with high expectation. You may do so.

  FIG. 244 (f) shows an effect situation in which the effective period (first effective period) has occurred while the integrated black image IGd shown in FIG. 244 (e) is being displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 244 (f), when the effective period (first effective period) occurs, operation instruction images such as “press” and “down arrow” are displayed. In addition to this, the above-described specific image TG is displayed in the display target region of the gauge image GG, and the operation acceptance is permitted even by checking the specific image TG. You will be able to recognize that. Note that the specific image TG according to this example has a different image type from that shown in each of the examples (FIGS. 232 to 244) described above for convenience of description, but is basically the same. It is displayed as having a function. The specific image TG according to this example is a depiction of a frog character, and the character is displaced in accordance with the “end portion of the gauge image GG” that is displaced when the display area of the gauge image GG decreases. Will be done.

  It should be noted that the specific image TG according to this example is displayed by the same method as the example shown in FIG. 233 (a method that is not displayed at the start of the effective period and is gradually displayed as time passes). Alternatively, the display may be performed by a method similar to the example shown in FIG. 234 (a method in which the whole is displayed when the effective period starts).

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 244 (f), the specific image TG is displayed in either a low-expectation mode (snail character) or a high-expectation mode (frog character) that is not shown. The performance is provided as to whether or not it is performed. In the drawing, the case where a mode with high expectation appears is illustrated. The specific image TG is displayed in a mode with a higher degree of expectation when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (c). The ratio is high, and the expectation is higher when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (e) than when the valid period occurs in the situation shown in FIG. 244 (d). It is desirable to increase the display ratio of the specific image TG. The ratio may include “100%” and “0%”.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a drama about how far the operation-related image can be advanced to a mode with high expectations before the effective period occurs. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game regarding the operation in the state where the effective period has not yet occurred. Further, while the operation-related images (button image BMG, peripheral decoration image SGG, additional decorations HS1, 2) are used to indicate the degree of expectation before the effective period occurs, after the effective period occurs, Since the different image (specific image TG) is used to further indicate the degree of expectation, it is possible to favorably improve the interest over a period from before the effective period occurs until after the effective period occurs. Become.

  Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 244, the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 244 (b) to FIG. 244 (c) and the production progress from FIG. 244 (c) to FIG. 244 (d). The operation-related images (button image, marginal decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) are set depending on the timing of whether or not to perform, and the timing of whether or not the production progresses from FIG. 244 (d) to FIG. 244 (e). It may be hidden once. That is, in this case, when the operation-related image (button image, marginal decoration image, additional decoration, etc.) is displayed again, it is possible to provide the fun of whether the production has progressed or whether the effective period has occurred. Will be able to.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 244, at the stage before the occurrence of the effective period, the button image, the peripheral decoration image, the additional decoration, and the like are displayed in the same manner as during the effective period, but a different mode from this. It may be displayed (blinking or semi-transparent).

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 244, it is preferable that the time required to suggest the degree of expectation stepwise by the operation-related image before the occurrence of the effective period is longer than the set time for the effective period. .

  By the way, the sword decoration 5001 according to the present embodiment includes a “handle 5012” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the sheath 5020 and a “handle” that can be moved (moved up and down) with respect to the handle 5012. As described above, the two operation receiving portions for the button 5014 "are provided. In this regard, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, when a valid condition (operation acceptance performance) in which a predetermined condition is satisfied and an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is generated, the valid period (operation In the reception effect), both the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern portion 5012 and the “button image BMG” that imitates the pattern button 5014 are to be displayed. During the effective period (operation reception performance) in which the operation opportunity is given to the design part 5012, the operation reception for the pattern button 5014 is not permitted, and the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the design button 5014 (operation reception performance) ), Operation acceptance for the handle portion 5012 is not allowed.

  In such a configuration, when an effective period (operation reception effect) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 occurs, whether operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted, or operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Can be difficult to recognize whether is allowed. That is, when the operation is accepted during the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the operation is performed after the operation is received, as compared with the time when the operation is accepted in the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5014. The appearance rate of the mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as display (or the mode that suggests that the big hit symbol is stopped as post-operation sound output) is high. The ratio may be 0% or 100%. Therefore, it is difficult to recognize whether the operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation acceptance for the handle button 5014 is permitted, and the operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted. When the player recognizes, the handle portion 5012 is operated in an uplifting feeling, and the interest of the game can be significantly improved.

  In order to obtain such an operation effect, it is required to make it difficult to recognize whether the operation reception for the handle 5012 is permitted or the operation reception for the handle button 5014 is permitted. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effective period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the handle portion 5012 (the light emitting portion of the handle portion) is caused to emit light. The handle button 5014 (the light emitting portion of the handle button 5014) to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light. That is, in this case, in the effective period (operation reception performance) in which both the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern part 5012 and the “button image BMG” that imitates the pattern button 5014 are displayed, the pattern part 5012 Even if the user or the pattern button 5014 is directly visually inspected, it is difficult to recognize which of the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014 the operation opportunity is given. In such a situation, the player recognizes that the operation acceptance for the handle 5012 is permitted, so that the player can operate the handle 5012 in a feeling of uplifting, and the player can enjoy the game. Can be significantly improved.

  That is, in the effective period (operation acceptance performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the design part 5012, the design part 5012 and the design button 5014 can be directly viewed or the performance display device 1600 can be seen a little. It is difficult to recognize whether the operation opportunity is given to 5012 or the operation opportunity is given to the handle button 5014. At least from a person who has played the pachinko machine 1 for the first time (beginner) or a person who is not familiar with complicated performance specifications (such as an elderly person), an operation opportunity is given to either the handle 5012 or the handle button 5014. It can be said that it is difficult to recognize.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the "effective period during which it is difficult to recognize which of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given" is generated, It is difficult to instantly recognize to which one of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within the effective period, but it can be recognized if it takes some time. Thus, the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed respectively.

  More specifically, in the pachinko machine 1, during the effective period (operation reception performance) in which an operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012, the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern portion 5012 and the pattern button 5014. Both the "button image BMG" that is used to display the "button image BMG" are displayed respectively. Of those images, the "pattern image TMG" on the side where the operation reception is permitted is displayed dynamically, but the operation reception is performed. The "button image BMG" on the side where is not allowed is not dynamically displayed. The “dynamic display” here is, for example, a display depicting a state in which the operation receiving portion is displaced within its movable range (in the case of the handle portion 5012, an operation (up and down movement) with respect to the sheath portion 5020). This corresponds to the drawn display, and if it is the pattern button 5014, it corresponds to the displayed display of the operation (up and down) of the pattern portion 5012).

  Even with such a configuration, it is difficult to instantly recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given within the effective period. However, when a predetermined time enough to be recognized as a dynamic display (moving image) has elapsed, the behavior during operation appears as a dynamic display in the pattern image TMG, but the behavior during operation in the button image BMG. It becomes possible to recognize which of the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 the operation opportunity is given, since it is noticed that is not displayed as a dynamic display. Then, when the player recognizes that the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) on the side with high expectation is allowed to accept the operation, he / she operates the handle portion 5012 while feeling uplifted. As a result, it becomes possible to remarkably improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the case where the “pattern image TMG” and the “button image BMG” are displayed during the effective period (operation reception effect) in which the operation opportunity is given to the pattern portion 5012. Also, by displaying these mood images as "integrated muffled images" that are integrated with the marginal decoration image SSG that decorates their margins, the enjoyment of the game when the operation reception effect (effective period) occurs I am trying to. The function and modified example of such an integrated image are basically as described above. For example, even if the integrated model image IG shown in FIGS. 232 to 244 is displayed so as to further display (include) the “pattern model image TMG” in addition to the “button model image BMG”. Good.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as a “composite image HMG” that is obtained by at least a part of the sword decoration 5001. In this way, the "composite image HMG" is displayed as an "integrated image IG" integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery.

  FIG. 245 is a diagram showing an example of the “integrated image IG” displayed when the operation reception effect (effective period) is generated for the handle 5012.

  As shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 is generated. In this case, in the effect display device 1600, the “pattern image TMG” that imitates the pattern portion 5012 is changed to the “composite image HMG” that is integrated with the “button image BMG”, and then the “composite image” is obtained. The "image HMG" is displayed as integrated general images IGe to IGh that are integrated with the rim decoration image SSG that decorates the rim. In the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the "pattern image TMG", the "button image BMG", and the "periphery decoration image SSG" are not individually prepared as image data, and they are not prepared. The image data is displayed as one integrated image data (integrated image images IGe to IGh). Moreover, when the integrated image images IGe to IGh are displayed, operation prompting displays such as “push” and “lower left arrow” are also displayed, but they are omitted here for convenience of description.

In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “relatively” as an after-operation effect that is executed when an operation is accepted in a specific operation acceptance effect (effective period) in which an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012. A plurality of effect modes including "a first effect mode with a low expectation degree" and a "second effect mode with a relatively high expectation degree" are prepared, and these effect modes are produced based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). One of the aspects is executed. In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d),
245 (b) (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (a) in the specific operation reception effect (effective period) than when the aspect (integrated image IGf) appears. When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect,
245 (c) (integrated image IGg) as compared to when the aspect (integrated image IGf) shown in FIG. 245 (b) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). When appears, the appearance ratio of the “second effect mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as a post-operation effect,
245 (d) (integrated image IGh) as compared to when the aspect (integrated image IGg) shown in FIG. 245 (c) appears in the specific operation reception effect (effective period). Based on the result of the big hit judgment (production judgment), the relationship that the appearance ratio of the “second production mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” becomes higher as the post-operation performance when Any one of the chemical images IGe to IGf is displayed.

  It is not necessary to prepare all of the four modes shown as the integrated image images IGe to IGh. Even by preparing at least two modes, it is possible to suggest the expectation as post-operation performance within the effective period. Further, a mode different from the above-described four modes (integrated general-purpose images IGe to IGh) may be further prepared, and any one of the prepared modes may be displayed.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment,
Operation means (sword decoration 5001) having an operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) that is displaced by an operation by the player, and a peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) provided on the periphery thereof.
Integration of displaying a mock image (pattern image TMG) of the operation receiving portion (pattern portion 5012) as integrated mood images IGe to IGh that are integrated with a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mock image. An image display means,
An operation acceptance executing unit that can cause a display change (post-operation effect) if a predetermined displacement occurs in the operation receiving portion (handle portion 5012) due to an operation performed by the player while the integrated image is displayed. The integrated general image can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes (the integrated general images IGe to IGh).

  The details of the "integrated general image" shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d) will be described for each of these modes (integrated general image IGe to IGh).

  First, the “integrated model image IGe” shown in FIG. 245 (a) has a pattern model image TMGe, a button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe), and a normal peripheral decorative image SSGe that decorates the peripheral edge thereof. Is configured. However, in the “integrated model image IGe”, the pattern model image TMGe and the button model image BMGe (composite model image HMGe) are “an image of the pattern part 5012 which is a target to which an operation opportunity is given” and “. While the "image of the pattern button 5014 which is not the object to which the operation opportunity is given" is displayed as an integrated image, the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe is "the object to which the operation opportunity is given". The peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 is not used.In the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe according to this example, a part of the peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020) is used. Most of the image SSGe of the image SSGe of the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) is used as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600. It has become a thing to decorate the edge.

  In the “integrated black image IGe” shown in FIG. 245 (a), the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa is expressed as a treasure box in which some treasures including the pattern image TMGe (composite image HMGe) are stored. As described above, these "treasure" and "treasure box" have different shapes and are expressed as different decorations from the existing peripheral decoration portion.

  In this respect, in the "integrated image IGe" according to the present embodiment, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided for such a normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. The gauge image (predetermined image) GG according to this example can also be displayed so as to reduce the display area in the display target region as time passes. More specifically, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has a predetermined minimum value (including “0”) from a display area having a predetermined maximum value when an operation is not accepted within the valid period. The display area is displayed so as to decrease as time passes.

  The normal peripheral decoration image SSGe shown in FIG. 245 (a) is provided with a partition image KG that partitions the display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG from other areas in the normal peripheral decoration image SSGe. . The area surrounded by the section image KG functions as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”. In this example, a necklace, which is one of the treasures, is displayed as the section image KG, and the "gauge image (predetermined image) GG" is displayed in the necklace. However, the section image KG does not necessarily have to be displayed, and a predetermined range within the normal peripheral decoration image SSGa may be set as the “display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (a), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGe" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, the handle part to be operated is generated. 5012 is made to emit light in the first mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGe in the “integrated image IGE” (eg, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a))). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the fifth mode (for example, the same color as the button image BMGe in the “integrated image IGe” (for example, “blue” in FIG. 245 (a)). ). Although the same color is used here, the first mode and the fifth mode may be different colors.

  On the other hand, the “integrated pattern image IGf” shown in FIG. 245 (b) is basically the same as the above-mentioned “integrated pattern image IGe”, and the pattern model image TMGf and the button pattern image BMGf ( The composite image HMGf) and the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge thereof are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGf", the pattern model image TMGf and the button model image BMGf (composite model image HMGf) do not change in shape. However, regarding the peripheral decoration image SSG, although the treasure box itself is displayed as the same as the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe", the amount and type of treasure as the content thereof is increasing. It is displayed as a decoration image SSGf ”. The amount and type of treasure are increasing, and the necklace, the sword, and the cup are also displayed in the case of the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and are common.

  Further, in the “integrated image IGf” shown in FIG. 245 (b), as the amount and type of treasure increase, the “necklace (section image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. The shape is changed, so that the display mode of the gauge image GG is different. With such a configuration, the shape of the gauge image GG as the display target area is different (not similar) depending on which of the plurality of modes with different expectations is displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left as it is reduced, and it is expected that the tension will be appropriately maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (b), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGf" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pattern to be operated is generated. The portion 5012 is caused to emit light in the second mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGf in the “integrated image IGf” (eg, “green” in FIG. 245 (b)) is emitted). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the sixth mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGf in the “integrated model image IGf” (in FIG. 245 (b), for example, “green”). ) To emit light). Although the same color is used here, the second mode and the sixth mode may have different colors.

  On the other hand, the "integrated mould image IGg" shown in FIG. 245 (c) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated mood image IGe", and the pattern mood image TMGg and the button mood image BMGg (composite mood). The image HMGg) and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGg", the pattern model image TMGg and the button model image BMGg (composite model image HMGg) do not change in shape. However, the peripheral decoration image SSG is displayed as the same treasure as the "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe" described above, but the treasure box (the shape) for storing them is different from the "second special peripheral decoration image". It is displayed as an image SSGg ".

However, the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” is also similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” and the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGf” in the following points.
“A peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020, etc.) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given is not used, and the virtual image is displayed on the effect display device 1600. As a decoration, the periphery of the patterned image TMGg (composite image HMGg) is decorated.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 245 (c), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGg" is displayed on the effect display device 1600 occurs, a pattern to be operated. The part 5012 is made to emit light in the third mode (in FIG. 245 (c), for example, it emits light in the same color (for example, “red”) as the pattern image TMGg in the “integrated image IGg”). The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the seventh mode (for example, the same color as the button model image BMGg in the “integrated model image IGg” (in FIG. 245 (c), for example, “red”). ) To emit light). Although the same color is used here, the third mode and the seventh mode may have different colors.

  On the other hand, the "integrated mould image IGh" shown in FIG. 245 (d) is basically the same as the above-mentioned "integrated mood image IGe", and the pattern mood image TMGh and the button mood image BMGh (composite mood image). The image HMGh) and the peripheral edge decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral edge are configured as an integrated image. In the "integrated model image IGh", the pattern model image TMGh and the button model image BMGh (composite model image HMGh) do not change in shape. However, with respect to the peripheral decoration image SSG, the amount and type of treasure are increased and the treasure box (the shape of the treasure box for storing them) is different from the above-mentioned "normal peripheral decoration image SSGe". It is displayed as a "special peripheral decoration image SSGh".

  Further, in the “integrated image IGh” according to this example, the shape of the “necklace (compartment image KG)” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG changes as the amount and type of treasure increase. Accordingly, the display mode of the gauge image GG is different.

However, the “third special peripheral decoration image SSGh” is also similar to the “normal peripheral decoration image SSGe” in the following points.
“A peripheral decoration portion (sheath portion 5020 and the like) actually provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 to which an operation opportunity is given is not used, and the virtual display effect on the effect display device 1600 is used. As a decoration, the periphery of the patterned image TMGh (composite image HMGh) is decorated.

  That is, in the “integrated image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))”, a part (treasure) of the “first special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated image IGf (FIG. 245 (b))” is used. ) And a part (treasure box) in the “second special peripheral decoration image SSGg” used in the “integrated image IGg (FIG. 245 (c))” are displayed as a combined image. There is.

  On the other hand, since the same decoration or shape appears in a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG, the case where the “integrated image IGe (FIG. 245 (a))” appears and the case where “integrated image IGe” appears It becomes possible to suggest that a specific operation reception effect (effective period) targeting the same post-operation effect is the case where the “image IGh (FIG. 245 (d))” appears.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 245 (d), when a specific operation reception effect (effective period) in which the "integrated image IGh" is displayed on the effect display device 1600, a pattern to be operated is generated. The part 5012 is made to emit light in the fourth mode (for example, the same color as the pattern image TMGh in the “integrated image IGh” (in FIG. 245 (d), for example, “rainbow color”) is emitted). .. The pattern button 5014 that is not the operation target also emits light in the eighth mode (for example, the same color as the button image BMGh in the “integrated image IGh” (FIG. 245 (d), for example, “rainbow color”). )). Although the same color is used here, the fourth mode and the eighth mode may have different colors.

  Note that in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d), the pattern model image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in the same shape in any of the modes. However, as the amount and type of treasure changes (FIGS. 245 (b) and (d)), or as the treasure box changes (FIGS. 245 (c) and (d)), the pattern image The shapes of the TMG and the button image BMG (composite image HMG) may be different.

  Further, in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), in each aspect, the pattern model image TMG and the button model image BMG (composite model image HMG) are displayed in different colors, but the same color. May be displayed in.

  In the case of displaying the button image BMG which imitates the pattern button 5014, in the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d), the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are displayed integrally with the button image BMG. I decided to do it. In this respect, also in the examples shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), the button model image BMG imitating the pattern button 5014 is displayed, but the peripheral decoration images SSGa, b are not displayed. . That is, since the peripheral decoration image is displayed as a virtual decoration on the display effect on the effect display device 1600, the case of the example shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) and FIG. 245 ( It is possible to display an image that is completely different from the case of the examples shown in a) to (d), which makes it possible to provide a variety of performances.

  232 (a) to (() of the configuration according to the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d), which has the same function as that of the example shown in FIG. 232 (a) to (d). It goes without saying that the same operational effects as the various operational effects described above with reference to d) are achieved. Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to 245 (d), it is possible to appropriately adopt the above-described modified examples and effect examples with respect to the examples shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d).

  Also, in the effective period in which the integrated muffled image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245, as in the effective period in which the integrated mutilated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. The “specified image TG” is displayed.

  However, in the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232, the type of the effective period (the type as the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, or the indication effect) The "specific image TG" may be displayed and the "specific image TG" may not be displayed depending on the type), whereas the integrated image image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245. In the effective period (a plurality of effective periods) in which the IG is displayed, the "specific image TG" is displayed regardless of the type of the effective period (the type of the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output, the type of the precursor effect, etc.). It is always displayed.

  That is, the "state in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced" shown in Figs. 239 to 243 is set in the valid period (a plurality of valid periods) in which the integrated black image IG is displayed in the mode shown in Fig. 245. It does not include the effective period generated as a performance. Therefore, it is desirable to display the "specific image TG" in order to clarify how much remaining time is left. When the "specific image TG" is displayed, this may not necessarily be displayed for the gauge image GG.

  The "specific image TG" when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245 may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233, or may be displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. You may do so.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 245, an operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012 in a state where the handle 5012 is moved from the original position to the specific position, whereby the handle 5012 is moved from the specific position to the original position. The operation (sword operation) is allowed. However, when the operation opportunity is given to the handle 5012, the handle 5012 does not necessarily have to be moved from the original position to the specific position. For example, an operation opportunity may be given to the handle portion 5012 in a state where the handle portion 5012 is in the original position, so that the movement operation (the sword removing operation) from the original position to the specific position may be permitted.

  FIG. 246 is a diagram showing an example of the effect (operation acceptance effect) when the integrated image IG is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 245.

  246 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) in the state where the number of holdings is 0 is a special effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit judgment effect display device 1600. In the effect situation that is being performed in, the effect display device 1600 shows the effect situation in which the display related to the precursor effect (specific display TH3) is started. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238. When the effect patterns are the same, the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and the effective period shown in FIG. 246 are generated at the first timing and the second timing in the effect pattern, respectively. Alternatively, only one of the effective periods (operation reception effects) may be generated at a predetermined timing in the effect pattern based on the effect determination result.

  The precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is also executed before and after the generation timing of the valid period in which the operation reception is permitted, and at this point, the operation reception for the handle 5012 ( Performance reception) is not allowed and the effective period has not occurred.

  In this respect, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) according to this example is performed by the display of the integrated image IG itself (dynamic display by the lid portion of the treasure box). At the time point shown in FIG. 236 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated model image IG is displayed as a “closed mode”, whereby the pattern model image TMGe (composite model image HMGe). Some treasures including "are not displayed as images (by the specific display TH3 which is the lid portion of the treasure box) and are in a state where they cannot be viewed (or a state where they are difficult to view).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 246 (a), the treasure box represented by the peripheral decoration image SSG of the integrated image IG has a relatively low expectation shown in FIGS. 245 (a) and 245 (b). And the relatively high expectation mode shown in FIGS. 245 (c) and 245 (d). The case where it is displayed in a low mode (FIGS. 245 (a) and (b)) is illustrated. Which of these modes is to be displayed is selected based on the result of the jackpot determination (effect determination). The description of the case where the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation is omitted, but in the same manner as "when the treasure box is displayed in a mode with a low degree of expectation", the subsequent production progress Will be performed.

  FIG. 246 (b) shows that as the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses (the area where the treasure box lid (specific display TH3) is opened and overlaps with “treasure” is displayed). In the "treasure", the part that does not overlap with the lid part (specific display TH3) of the treasure box gradually expands in the "treasure", and the part is displayed in a good visible state. Is shown.

  That is, when the precursor effect shown in FIG. 246 (a) progresses, the specific timing comes and an effective period for the pattern portion 5012 occurs. When the valid period occurs, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), the handle 5012 to be operated starts moving to the "specific position" by the driving force from the actuator (motor). Further, as described above, both the “pattern portion 5012” that is the operation target and the “pattern button 5014” that is not the operation target start light emission in a predetermined manner (blue, green, red, rainbow, etc.).

  However, at the time when such light emission is started, the precursor effect (specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (a) is in the middle of execution. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 246 (b), in the integrated image IG, the lid portion (specific indication TH3) of the treasure box is changed from "closed state (fully closed)" to "opened state". (Fully open) ”is being drawn. Therefore, at the time point shown in FIG. 246 (b), at least a part of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG and the specific image TG is “a precursor effect (specific display TH3) that is drawn (expressed) as if it were on the front side thereof. However, the reduction of the display area of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG” has already started (progress), and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (progress). ) Is in the situation. In this example, the entire specific image TG overlaps with the precursor effect (specific display TH), and is not displayed as an image.

  With such a configuration, the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) is performed in the form of the generation timing (specific timing) of the effective period, and the predetermined time after the effective period occurs. The indication effect (specific display TH3) causes at least part of the integrated image IG to be invisible or difficult to see. That is, in this case, the entire image of the integrated image IG (pattern image TMG and button image BMG (composite image HMG), peripheral decoration image SSG, specific image TG, etc.) is gradually exposed within the effective period. Therefore, the degree of expectation (the aspect of the peripheral decoration image) and the operation target (the aspect of the patterned image) suggested by the aspect of the integrated image IG are interesting. The effective period can be maintained for a predetermined time after the start of the effective period.

  That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 246 (b), “treasure”, which is the content of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are small (a mode with relatively low expectation shown in FIG. 245 (a)). There is at least a case where it is displayed, and a case where it is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are large (a mode in which the degree of expectation is relatively high as shown in FIG. 245 (b)). It is intended to provide directivity as to what is displayed. In this regard, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), it is in a state in which it can be recognized that “treasure”, which is the content of the treasure box, is displayed in a mode in which the amount and type are large (a mode with high expectation). ing. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 246 (b), since the “specific image TG” is in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize it, the type in which the “specific image TG” is displayed at the beginning of the effective period ( (See FIG. 234) or the type (see FIG. 233) in which the “specific image TG” is not displayed at the start of the effective period and gradually appears thereafter (see FIG. 233). There is. That is, in the case of the type shown in FIG. 234, it is easy to see that the “specific image TG” cannot function as the gauge image (predetermined image) GG. It can be said that, when adopted, it is particularly effective to execute the precursor effect in the above-described manner in order to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game. Note that the case where "treasure" is displayed in a mode with low expectations is omitted in the description, but this is performed in the same manner as "when" treasure "is displayed in a mode with high expectations" described below. Subsequent production progress will be performed.

  246 (c) overlaps with the integrated model image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) as a result of further development of the precursor effect (display related to the specific display TH3) shown in FIG. 246 (b). The situation where the part (the part where the specific display TH3 is depicted as being on the front side of the "treasure") has disappeared is shown. However, in this example, the specific display TH3 is not hidden, and the display is maintained while the integrated image IG is displayed, whereby the time before the effective period starts. It is possible to provide a single playability from the time to the end of the game, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  As shown in FIG. 246 (c), when the entire treasure of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in a state where the visibility is good, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG The display area of has already decreased, and the displacement of the “specific image TG” has already started (here, the entire “specific image TG” has already appeared). That is, in this case, since the “specific image TG” also appears to be a part of the “gauge image (predetermined image) GG”, a display area larger than the actual display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed. It remains, and it is possible to make it seem as if the display area has not decreased so much. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG has already decreased when the precursor effect (effect in which the lid portion which is the specific display TH is opened) is completed. You can expect that. The “specific image TG” according to this example is displayed as an image expressing “light” that is displaced at or near the end of the gauge image GG.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIG. 246 (c), the pattern image TMG in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed (a display depicting the pattern portion 5012 displaced in its movable range). However, as described above, the button image BMG is not dynamically displayed (display showing how the handle button 5014 is displaced within its movable range).

  In FIG. 246 (d), the operation is not accepted until the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG reaches the minimum value (here, “0”), and the valid period (set time) ends (or, An example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 immediately before the expiration of the effective period) is shown. At the time when the image shown in FIG. 246 (d) appears, it is assumed that the operation acceptance is barely permitted in terms of time, but when the screen appears, the operation acceptance has already been accepted. You may make it unacceptable. However, in this case, the handle portion 5012 and the handle button 5014 are in a state in which each light emission has already ended at that time. Further, in this case, images such as “push in!” And “lower left arrow” may be hidden. In any case, at least part (or all) of the "specific image TG" is displayed even at the end of the effective period.

  When the valid period ends, both the light emission of the handle 5012 and the light emission of the handle button 5014 are ended. In this respect, during the effective period in which the operation opportunity is given to the handle portion 5012, the same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when the operation is performed are performed even if the player does not perform the operation within the valid period. Is performed (see FIG. 246 (e)). This is the same as the automatic reception (FIG. 235 (e), (f), etc.) that functions within the first valid period described above.

  According to such a configuration (automatic reception performance), even if the player performs an operation immediately after the expiration of the effective period (operation acceptance is no longer permitted), the post-operation display is displayed. Since the “specific image TG” is displayed immediately before or after the sound output after the operation is performed, the post-operation display or the operation is performed in response to the operation being accepted by the player in time and the operation reception accompanying the operation being generated. It is possible to make it appear as if the rear sound output has started. In particular, when the precursor effect (previous display) is performed in this manner, when the entire image of the integrated image IG (or the display target area of the gauge image GG) is in good visibility, the gauge image (predetermined) is displayed. The display area of (image) GG has already decreased, and the displacement of “specific image TG” has already started. That is, in this case, it is likely that the operation by the player will not be in time, so even if the player does not perform any operation within the valid period, the "specific image TG" is displayed after the operation. It can be said that outputting the sound after the operation is effective in suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. Further, in this example, the pattern button 5014 on the side to which the operation opportunity is not given is made to emit light in accordance with the occurrence of the effective period, and the operation opportunity is given to either the pattern portion 5012 or the pattern button 5014. I try to make it difficult to recognize. That is, in this case, there is a high possibility that the operation will not be in time within the effective period, and thus it can be said that it is effective in suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the operation is not in time.

  Regarding the production progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246, there are a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 233 and a case where the “specific image TG” is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 234. It may be applied to any of the above.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, the indication effect (specific display TH) and the integrated image IG are displayed in different layers, and the indication effect (specific display TH) is preferentially displayed to appear in FIG. 235. It was decided to realize the production progress in the form. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the effect progress in the mode shown in FIG. 246 may be stored as one moving image data, and this may be realized by reproducing the moving image data.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, the mode (integrated general image IGa) shown in FIG. 245 (b) appears as the integrated general image IG. However, as described above, the integrated mock image IG may be made to appear in any of a plurality of modes (modes shown in FIGS. 245 (a) to (d)) based on the result of the big hit determination (production determination). .

  According to the example shown in FIG. 246, first, when a treasure box which is a part of the integrated image IG is displayed prior to the occurrence of the effective period, the treasure box is displayed as “a mode with high expectations”. A first effect is provided regarding which of "modes with low expectations" is displayed. Further, after the expiration of the effective period, the treasure box of the integrated image IG is gradually opened, and the "treasure" is either "a mode with high expectations" or "a mode with low expectations". The second effect of whether to be displayed in is provided. That is, in this case, the expectation level is suggested by the stepwise effects (first effectivity and second effectivity) that are performed over the occurrence of the effective period, so that the effective period occurs. It is expected that the interest of the game in the period from before to after the occurrence will be suitably improved.

  Further, since such a stepwise effect is realized by the depiction of the integrated black image IG itself (depiction of the lid portion of the treasure box), another image (specific display TH shown in FIG. 235). It is possible to prevent stress from being felt more than when the visibility of the integrated image IG is deprived by being obstructed by () and the like, and it is possible to suppress deterioration in the enjoyment of the game. However, also in the example shown in FIG. 246, the indication effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 237. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 237, the indication effect may be performed in the same manner as in FIG. 246.

  In FIG. 246, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the mock image simulating the operation target is integrated with the “periphery decoration image (first decoration image)” including the display target area of the gauge image. An example (first operation acceptance permissible period) relating to the production progress in the case of displaying as a simulated image has been described. On the other hand, in FIGS. 247 and 248, when the second effect condition is satisfied, the mock image simulating the operation target is displayed as “a peripheral decoration image (first decoration image) including the display target area of the gauge image”. An example (second operation acceptance permissible period) relating to the development of the effect will be described in the case of displaying as an "image not integrated with". In the example shown in FIG. 246 and the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the operation opportunity is not necessarily given to the same operation target, but since the operation opportunity is given to the same operation object. If so, it is desirable that the image of the operation target itself is displayed as the same image (including a similar shape).

  Here, as a mode in which the mock image simulating the operation target is displayed as “an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image”, for example, a mock image simulating the operation target is “marginal”. Displayed as "an image that is not integrated with the decoration image in the first place and is displayed as a single image", or as a "image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image" It is possible to adopt the mode described above. According to such a configuration, when the effective period occurs, when the gauge image showing the operation target is displayed as one image, when the gauge image is displayed in that image Since there is a case where the gauge image is not displayed in the image when the image is displayed as one image, it is possible to preferably maintain the sense of tension during the effective period.

  In the example described below, a display example is shown in which the image of the operation target is displayed as an “image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target region of the gauge image”.

  First, FIG. 247 (a), in the normal game state, the variable display of the decorative symbol SZ (special symbol) is displayed with a specific effect pattern (fluctuation pattern) according to the result of the big hit determination when the number of holdings is 0. The production | presentation situation currently performed by the apparatus 1600 WHEREIN: The production | presentation situation in which the display concerning the precursor production | production (specific display TH3) was started in the production | presentation display apparatus 1600 is shown. This effect pattern may be the same as or different from the effect patterns shown in FIGS. 235 to 238 and FIG. 246. When the effect patterns are the same, they may be generated respectively at the first timing and the second timing within one effect pattern, and any of the effective periods (operation acceptance effects) may be generated based on the result of the effect determination. Only one of them may be generated at a predetermined timing within the effect pattern.

  In this example, the situations shown in FIGS. 247 (a) and 247 (b) are basically the same as the situations shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), and a description of the same configurations will be omitted. However, a part of the "treasure (second decoration image)" that is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 247 (b) is partially visible in the situation shown in FIG. 246 (b). The content is different from the "Treasure (first decoration image)". That is, as described above, the “mock image of the operation target” according to this example is displayed as “an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target region of the gauge image”. Regarding the "periphery decoration image not including the display target area of the gauge image", the part displayed as the same image as the above-mentioned "periphery decoration image including the display target area of the gauge image" and the part displayed as a different image There is something.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 247 (c), FIG. 246 shows that the “treasure (second decoration image)” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example includes the “holy grail”. This is similar to the “treasure (first decorative image)” shown. However, in the “treasure” of the peripheral decoration image SSG according to this example, the “gold bar” and the “necklace (display target area of the gauge image GG)” shown in FIG. 246 are not displayed, and instead of this, The image that the gold coins are packed is displayed. The treasure box shown in FIG. 247 (c) is the same as the treasure box shown in FIG. 246 (c), and the point that the treasure box is displayed in any of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 245 is also the same.

  According to such a configuration, even if the specific display TH3 is in a situation (FIG. 247 (c)) in which there is no portion depicted as being on the front side of the “treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)”, The gauge image GG is no longer displayed in the "treasure (peripheral decoration image SSG)". That is, in this case, while the "treasure (periphery decoration image SSG)" is gradually being visually recognized by the specific display TH3, even if the gauge image GG cannot be found, it cannot be found. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the tension as to how much time is left.

  In particular, in the peripheral decoration image SSG (treasure) according to this example, although the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, the “necklace” that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. In this case, the same image (Holy Grail, etc.) as in the case (FIG. 245 (c)) is intentionally displayed as being included. That is, in this case, it is possible to make the "necklace", which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, appear to be displayed somewhere, so that the "necklace" that is the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. As I searched, when I realized that this was not displayed anywhere, it seems that a certain amount of time has already passed since the effective period occurred, so I felt a sense of tension during the effective period. It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (b) to 247 (d), the integrated image IG itself in which the pattern image TMG representing the operation target is integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG is added to the gauge image. The display target area is not provided and the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image IG. That is, in this case, the gauge image is not displayed, and it becomes difficult to recognize how much remaining time is left in the effective period, so that the feeling of tension during the effective period can be appropriately maintained. The display target area of the gauge image does not necessarily have to be displayed. For example, the gauge image is displayed as an image different from the integrated general image IG, and the display area is reduced over time. You may do it.

  FIG. 247 (d) shows an example of an image appearing on the effect display device 1600 when the set period for the valid period has passed and the valid period is about to be finished. As described above, the gauge image is not displayed in this example. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 247 (d), there is no suggestion that the effective period is about to end, and the player will not be able to see the image even if he / she sees the image. I can't recognize it.

  However, even during the effective period according to this example, in the pattern image TMG to be operated, a display depicting the pattern part 5012 reciprocating (reciprocating from the original position to the specific position) within its movable range is displayed. (Dynamic display) is being performed. In this regard, the valid period according to this example is designed to be terminated when the reciprocating motion is repeated N times (N may not be an integer) after the period has occurred, By keeping a close watch on the dynamic display by the pattern image TMG, it is possible to recognize how much (reciprocating motion) the remaining time as the effective period is left.

  Even in the effective period according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 247 (c) and 247 (d), in the button image BMG, a display (movement) depicting how the handle button 5014 reciprocates within its movable range is displayed. Display) is not performed. In this respect, when the operation receiving unit (here, the handle button 5014) corresponding to the mock image on the side where such dynamic display is not performed is operated during the valid period in which the display area of the gauge image is not displayed. Alternatively, the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output may be performed according to the operation acceptance.

  That is, in the valid period according to this example, the player does not operate the dynamic display because the gauge image is not displayed and it is difficult to recognize the remaining time, and the operation is performed in a hurry. Since it is assumed that there is a high possibility of operating the display, even when the operation receiving unit on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated, unlike the case shown in FIG. It is desirable to perform the rear sound output in order to suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game. Examples of the post-operation display and post-operation sound output in this case include a display and sound output such as "Push in the design portion, not the design button!". Therefore, even when the operation receiving section on the side not dynamically displayed is operated and the post-operation display or the post-operation sound output corresponding to the operation is performed, the valid period is ended or the set time is set. It is preferable that the pattern image TMG is not reset and is continuously displayed without stopping its dynamic display. When the handle 5012 is operated within the continuous effective period in this manner, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output corresponding thereto are performed (see FIG. 248 (h)). In this case, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that appear when the operation receiving section on the side that is not dynamically displayed is operated (for example, “not the pattern button but the pattern section”). Needless to say, it is a different content). However, “in the valid period, the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the button image BMG that is not dynamically displayed is not operated, and the pattern image TMG that is dynamically displayed is displayed. Post-operation display and post-operation sound output when the operation receiving unit (handle 5012) is operated (for example, "Congratulations!"), And "button image not dynamically displayed within the valid period" After the operation receiving unit (pattern button 5014) corresponding to the BMG is operated, the post-operation display when the operation receiving unit (pattern unit 5012) corresponding to the dynamically displayed pattern image TMG is further operated, It is preferable that the post-operation sound output (for example, "good time, congratulations!") Is executed as different contents in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  FIG. 248 (e) shows an example of an image that appears on the effect display device 1600 when an operation is not accepted within the time (set time) set for the effective period according to this example.

  That is, in the valid period according to this example, when the set time elapses without accepting the operation (FIGS. 247 (d) and (e)), the operation is accepted for the handle 5012 within the valid period. The same post-operation display and post-operation sound output as when they are made are not executed (the automatic reception effect functions).

  However, in this example, the gauge image GG is not displayed in the integrated image IG, and the gauge image GG is not displayed as another image. Therefore, as a player side, There is a possibility that the valid period may end without being operated even though the player intends to operate the game, which may reduce the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in this example, after the valid period ends without any operation by the player, while the specific condition (for example, symbol stop, or 10 seconds before the symbol stop is not reached) is not satisfied The operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (here, the handle portion 5012) as the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given within the valid period, and when the operation to the operation means is accepted, Based on the above, the valid period can be generated again. In this sense, it can be said that when the valid period ends without any operation by the player, a special valid period for regenerating the valid period starts from the time when the valid period ends.

  With such a configuration, even if the valid period ends as a result of the predetermined set time having passed without any operation being performed by the player, the operation shown by FIG. 248 (h) is performed by the player. It becomes possible to generate the operation reception for outputting the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output that are performed. More specifically, in the situation (special valid period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), when the player operates the handle 5012, the valid period starts based on the fact that the operation is accepted. It is started from the state (Fig. 248 (f), (g)). After that, the contents as described above will be repeated again with reference to FIGS. 247 (b) to 247 (d), FIGS. 248 (e) and (g). Therefore, even if the operation is accepted within the regenerated effective period, the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output based on the operation acceptance are executed in the above-described manner (see FIG. 248 (h)). reference).

  When the operation is accepted in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 248 (e), the images shown in FIGS. 248 (f) and (g) are displayed as the post-operation display (FIG. 247 (b), (g)). The same as the image shown in c) will appear sequentially. Such an image is an image display after the operation performed based on the operation reception during the valid period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIGS. 247 (f), (g), etc.). Are different. Similarly, the post-operation sound output executed based on the operation reception in the situation (special effective period) shown in FIG. 248 (e) is also effective period (FIGS. 247 (b) to (d) and FIG. 248 (f), (g), etc.), the output sound is different from the post-operation sound output that is executed based on the reception of the operation.

  Since the specific image TG is not displayed in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the precursor effect (dynamic display by the specific display TH3) is not necessarily performed in generating the effective period. Good. For example, when the predetermined condition for permitting the operation acceptance regarding the display after the predetermined operation (sound output after the predetermined operation) is satisfied (when the predetermined timing comes), the situation shown in FIG. 247 (c) appears. After that, the display may be advanced similarly to the above-mentioned example.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the pattern image TMG and the button image BMG are displayed as one image (composite image HMG). However, these image images are respectively displayed as separate images. It may be displayed. In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as one image including both of these image images (composite image HMG). The “composite image HMG” is displayed as an “integrated image IG” integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery. However, the “button image BMG” and the “pattern image TMG” are displayed as separate images, and at least one of the image images is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery. It may be displayed as an image. For example, if the "pattern image TMG" is displayed as an integrated image integrated with the peripheral decoration image and the "button image BMG" is displayed as a separate image, the "pattern image" is displayed. Even though both "TMG" and "button image BMG" are displayed at the same time, "pattern image TMG" can be made more prominent, and operation corresponding to "pattern image TMG" It is possible to implicitly suggest that the receiving portion (handle portion 5012) should be operated. At this time, the "pattern image TMG" in the integrated image IG is dynamically displayed, whereas the "button image BMG" displayed as a single image is not dynamically displayed. The configurations and other examples are similarly applicable.

  Also, in the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246, both the button image BMG and the pattern image TMG are displayed, but the image on the side to which the operation opportunity is given (here, the pattern). Only the image (TMG) may be displayed.

  In addition, it is desirable that the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 is set as a setting time longer than the effective period (operation reception performance) shown in FIG. 246. In this case, a mode (dynamic reciprocating speed, etc.) in which the model image (here, the pattern model image TMG) is dynamically displayed within the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIG. 246 and FIGS. 247 and 248 are shown. It is desirable that the mode (the reciprocating speed or the like) in which the mock image (here, the pattern mage image TMG) is dynamically displayed is the same as each other within the indicated effective period (operation reception performance). According to such a configuration, even if the gauge image GG is not displayed, it is possible to confirm the “state of dynamically displaying the mock image” with reference to the case where the gauge image GG is displayed, and thereby allow a margin. You will be prompted to operate.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 246 to 248, the peripheral decoration image SSG may be an image of “treasure”, and the treasure box may not necessarily be displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving unit corresponding to the moving image that is not dynamically displayed is referred to as the “first operation receiving unit”, in the examples shown in FIG. 247 and FIG. The operation receiving unit corresponding to the image may be the “first operation receiving unit”. However, in this case, in the example shown in FIG. 246, when the operation receiving section dynamically displayed is the “second operation receiving section”, in the examples shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the dynamic image not dynamically displayed It is desirable that the operation receiving unit corresponding to the above is a “third operation receiving unit” different from the “second operation receiving unit”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to respectively generate two types of operation reception effects in which the display relationship of the three operation targets (operation receiving portions) is slid. , It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 does not necessarily have to occur during the symbol variation execution period. For example, it may be a period that occurs using the RTC function regardless of whether or not there is a symbol change, or during the period during which the big hit game is executed or the period before the big hit game is started, "the period when the symbol change is not executed. ] May occur at the same time.

  Further, in the valid period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, the decorative pattern SZ that has been displayed until then is hidden as in the valid period in the example shown in FIGS. 240 to 243. Alternatively, it may be set in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize, so that it may be easier to notice that the gauge image is not displayed in a special effect state.

  As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 246 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may not be performed in all of the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIG. 246 may be performed in at least one valid period.

  As the valid period in which the image shown in FIG. 247 (c) is displayed, a plurality of valid periods with different occurrence conditions may be prepared. In this case, the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may not be performed in all the valid periods, and the display progress shown in FIGS. 247 and 248 may be performed in at least one valid period.

  In the effective period (operation reception effect) shown in FIGS. 247 and 248, unlike the case of the effective period shown in FIG. 246, a plurality of modes (colors and the like) cannot be displayed as the image, and one You may make it displayable only in a mode.

  The valid period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is not displayed can be generated only when the operation opportunity is given to one of the handle 5012 and the handle button 5014, and the operation opportunity is provided to the other. When granted, an effective period (operation reception effect) in which the gauge image is displayed may always occur.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the valid period (the valid period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the integrated image that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed, and the gauge image. The valid period (the valid period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248) in which the integrated image is displayed in which the GG display target area is not provided is considered to be generated as one of the valid periods of the plurality of types. There is. In this regard, during these valid periods (FIGS. 239 to 241, FIG. 247, and FIG. 248), when the operation by the player is not accepted, and when the operation is accepted by the player, in order to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension. In the effective period (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246) in which the effect after the same operation as described above is not performed (the automatic button function is not provided) and the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the lapse of time (FIGS. 235 to 238 and 246). In order to maintain the operation suitably, it is desirable that when the operation by the player is not accepted, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted (with an automatic button function) is performed.

  In this respect, the effective period (the effective period shown in FIGS. 239 to 241) in which the integrated image that does not reduce the display area of the gauge image GG is displayed, or the area in which the gauge image GG is not displayed is not provided in the first place. When an operation is accepted for the operation means to which an operation opportunity is given during the effective period in which the image is displayed (the effective period shown in FIGS. 247 and 248), a change (display) according to the operation acceptance is made. It is desirable that the integrated image is not hidden and is displayed at the time when execution of at least one of changes and changes caused by post-operation effects such as lamp light emission is started. It is also desirable that the dynamic display of the integrated image is continued. As a result, while the gauge image does not suggest the remaining time, it will be possible to create anxiety about whether the performance reception was properly done, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained more appropriately. Become so.

  In this case, the display mode (for example, the color or the like) of the change image before and after the change (at least one of the display change and the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the light emission of the lamp) according to the operation reception occurs. Transparency etc.) does not have to be the same, it may be in a state where it is difficult for the other image to visually recognize the mock image, and the operation acceptance can be made to determine which operation means was the operation target. It suffices to be recognizable even in a state in which a corresponding change (at least one of changes caused by post-operation effects such as display change and lamp light emission) has occurred. On the other hand, within the effective period (FIG. 235 to FIG. 238, FIG. 246) in which the gauge image GG is displayed to be reduced with the passage of time, a change (display change or display change according to the operation acceptance by the player's operation is performed. , At least one of the changes caused by the post-operation effect, such as lamp light emission, occurs in the state where the change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) occurs, both the integrated image (both image and gauge image). ) May be hidden, and as in the case described above, changes (display changes, lamp light emission, etc.) in response to operation acceptance may be performed in a state where the integrated image is displayed without being hidden. It may be generated.

  However, in this way, even in the effective period in which "the display area of the specific image is not reduced with the passage of time", the image of the operating means to be operated is displayed and the image is displayed. It is desirable to display an image as a moving image that is developed at a specific speed. According to such a configuration, although the remaining time is not suggested by the gauge image, it is difficult to grasp the remaining time that the operation acceptance is allowed depending on how much the moving image by the image has progressed. It is possible, and it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

[Integrated image, production before effective period, production of disappeared image]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the variation pattern determination as to which of the plurality of variation patterns is to be performed based on the result of the big hit determination. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (effect pattern determination, notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display according to the result of the effect determination is controlled to be displayed on the effect display device 1600. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background effect) and the movable body operation (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body. As a result, when the big hit pattern is stopped and displayed, the big hit game as a privilege is executed for the player. It will be possible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable body movements, etc. The expected effect according to (2) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate a reception acceptable state (effective period) in which production reception is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even when the special effect is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, it is possible to generate a reception permissible state (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the production determination, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. .. Also, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a particular timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is not limited to the above “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

  By the way, the acceptance allowable state (effective period) that can occur under these conditions or the like is predetermined for the effect member to be effected, as long as an operation is detected within the set time (effective period). Since the post-operation performance that causes the change (at least one of the display change in the effect display device 1600, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, and the effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed, the reception is performed. The permissible state (effective period) itself is poor in performance, and there is a concern that amusement of the game until the post-operation performance is executed may deteriorate.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as described above, first, when the acceptance allowable state (valid period) in which the operation opportunity is given occurs, the operation receiving unit to which the operation opportunity is given is set. By displaying the mocked mood image as an integrated mood image (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the mood image, it is possible to achieve amusement until the post-operation performance is executed. I try to control the decline. Regarding such an integrated image, an operation acceptance effect (effective period) that is generated when a symbol effect based on a specific variation pattern progresses to a specific timing during SP reach, and an operation that is generated with the predetermined variation pattern It is desirable to be displayed in any of the reception effects (effective period), and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception effects and the high-expectations suppression reception effects. Also, regarding each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, FIG. 207 to FIG. 231), the display mode of the exemplified mood image may be replaced by any one of the integrated mood images described below. It is desirable to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Note that the “integrated image” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, in the peripheral decoration image, A display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different degrees of expectation are prepared as the “integrated image”, and it is the same in that it is displayed in any of these modes.

  Also, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance-permitted state occurs, the acceptance-permitted sound indicating that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted is generated. The output is made so that it is difficult to forget the operation. Here, "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (valid period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). , Is a sound in a state where the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) has already occurred.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptable reception states including a first acceptable reception state and a second acceptable reception state are prepared as acceptable reception states (valid periods). There is. Here, the first acceptance permissible state is allowed to occur when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from among the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns), but the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) Based on the fact that the valid period that cannot occur in the predetermined fluctuation pattern (or in any of the low expected fluctuation patterns) (the first condition is satisfied in the performance judgment based on the result of the big hit judgment) It is a valid period that is generated). In addition, as the second acceptance permissible state, a specific fluctuation pattern is selected from the high expected fluctuation patterns (SP reach fluctuation patterns) and a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns). In any case (or in at least one of these fluctuation patterns), an effective period that can be generated (a second condition different from the first condition in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination) It is the effective period that is generated based on the establishment).

  The "integrated image" according to this embodiment can be displayed in both the first acceptance acceptable state and the second acceptance acceptable state. Here, since it is assumed that the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state both occur as acceptable reception states in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (operation button 410), The “integrated image” displayed in the first acceptance permitted state and the second acceptance permitted state is an image obtained by using the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, the special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image” has the first reception permission state and the second reception permission state. Of these, it is possible to display only in the first acceptance permitted state, and in the second acceptance permitted state, it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). ing. In the first acceptance permissible state, it is possible to determine which of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) includes a special mode) to display the “integrated image” based on the result of the jackpot determination. The "integrated image" is displayed in a manner according to the result of this determination. Even in the second acceptance permissible state, which of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (c) in FIG. 232) does not include the special mode based on the result of the jackpot determination is displayed. The determination may be performed, and the “integrated image” may be displayed in a mode according to the result of the determination.

  In such a configuration, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output in the first acceptance allowable state, and in the second acceptance allowable state, One type of acceptable reception sound (third acceptable reception sound) is output. Here, the first acceptable sound and the third acceptable sound are, for example, output as sound effects such as "Picine!", And may be output as the same sound or different from each other. It may be output as a sound. On the other hand, the second permissible sound is output as a message sound such as "press!" However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be output as a message sound, and if the sound is different from the first permissible sound and is output over a different output time, two types of acceptance It is possible for the player to preferably recognize that the sounds (the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) are being output.

  Here, in the first acceptance permissible state, it has been described above that the "integrated image" can be displayed by a mode different from the special mode (a mode with relatively low expectation). Even in such a case, two types of acceptable sounds (first acceptable sound and second acceptable sound) are output. In other words, in this case, when only one type of acceptance-permitted sound is output when the acceptance-permitted state occurs (displaying the integrated-effect image), the special aspect is not displayed as the "integrated-effect image" and the special aspect is displayed. Different modes are displayed, but when two types of acceptance allowable sounds are output, a special mode is displayed as the "integrated image", and a mode different from the special mode is displayed. There will be.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the "integrated image" is displayed in the special mode based on which mode the acceptance-permitted sound is output. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when a situation occurs.

  Further, when the "integrated image" is displayed in the first acceptance permitted state or the second acceptance permitted state, the preceding effect (precursor effect) is executed prior to this, and the integrated effect image is displayed. Is displayed (displayed in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize) in a state where at least a part of the “image related to the pre-production” overlaps with the pre-production being executed. Then, in the integrated image, a portion overlapping with the “image for pre-production” is gradually reduced, or the transmittance of the “image for pre-production” is gradually reduced. It becomes higher, and finally it is hidden, so that the mode (whole) is exposed (displayed in a state where it is easy to visually recognize) after the occurrence of the acceptance permitted state. Such pre-effects (predictive effects) are, for example, the effects shown in FIGS. 235 (b) and (c), and FIGS. 237 (c) to (f), and executed in the same manner as this. You may do so.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, the second permissible sound does not start output at the timing at which the first permissible sound is output, but starts output after being delayed. ing. However, at the time when the first permissible sound is output in advance, "the integrated image itself is not displayed, or even if it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize the mode" Of course, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started with a delay, at least a part of the integrated mood image is in a state in which the images related to the front effect (precursor effect) are displayed in a form of overlapping from the front side, This makes it difficult to see. It should be noted that the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) is designed to occur when the pre-production (precursor production) is started to be executed or during the execution period, and at least when the output of the second permissible sound is started. It has already occurred, or it occurs when the output starts.

  According to such a configuration, at least when the first allowable sound is being output and the second allowable sound is not being output, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and The first acceptable reception state in which the second acceptable sound is output occurs (or is occurring), or the second acceptable reception state in which only one type of acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) is output occurs ( Or it has occurred) is difficult to recognize. However, when a situation such as “a second allowable sound is started to be output after the first allowable sound is output”, two types of acceptance allowable sounds (first allowable sound and second allowable sound) are output. It is possible to recognize that the first acceptance permissible state has occurred, and that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode.

That is, in this case, in a state in which it is difficult to recognize in which mode the integrated image is displayed (or whether it is displayed),
When shifting from "a state in which only the first acceptable sound is output among the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound" to "a state in which at least the second acceptable sound is output" (first acceptance acceptable state) When,
When the "state in which only the first acceptable sound is output among the first acceptable sound and the second acceptable sound" is not transitioned to "state in which at least the second acceptable sound is output" (second acceptable reception state) With this, it becomes possible to suggest "the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode" by the mode of "transition related to the output of the acceptance permission sound". Therefore, while in the “state in which only the first allowable sound of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound is output”, before the image relating to the front effect (precursor effect) is hidden, It becomes possible to make the player interested in whether or not the output of the second permissible sound is started, which can improve the enjoyment of the game. As a result, if the second permissible sound is output while the image related to the preceding effect (precursor effect) is displayed, the integrated image having a special aspect is displayed (displayed). It becomes possible to have a sense of expectation, and it is possible to provide such a directivity that the integrated image is gradually exposed in such a sense of expectation.

  Note that, as described above, even when the output of the second permissible sound is started, at least a part of the integrated mood image is made difficult to be visually recognized by the “image related to the pre-production”. Therefore, although it is possible to recognize that the integrated image may be displayed in a special mode, at least it is not easy to recognize in which mode the integrated image is displayed. Needless to say. Further, the output state of the first allowable sound may be maintained at the time point when the output of the second allowable sound is started, or the output state of the first allowable sound may be finished. .

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, the integrated acceptable image is displayed without outputting any acceptance acceptable sound (first acceptable sound or second acceptable sound), and the operating means (here, the integrated acceptable image is displayed) is displayed. When the operation is accepted for the operation button 410), a display change or an output sound after the operation may be generated as in the case where the operation is accepted in the first acceptance permitted state or the second acceptance permitted state. Good. In this case, the contents of the display change and the output sound after the operation may be different depending on the type of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state, second acceptance acceptable state, third acceptance acceptable state).

  That is, by displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptance permission sound, it becomes possible to make it difficult to understand when the acceptance of the operation is permitted, and it is possible to relate to the operation. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Therefore, in adopting such a configuration, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is displayed in any of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, a “gauge stop period” in which the gauge image GG is not reduced occurs, or the area of the gauge image GG does not reach a predetermined value (0) and remains the integrated value. Since the image will be hidden, it is possible to maintain a suitable feeling of tension when the acceptance-permitted state is occurring, and it is more preferable to improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. You will be able to plan.

  Or, when displaying the integrated image without outputting any acceptable sound, the gauge image is not displayed in the integrated image, and the display target area is not provided. Good. Such a display method is as described above with reference to FIGS. 247 and 248, although the operation target is different. For example, “the display target area of the gauge image GG is not displayed, but the display of the gauge image GG is displayed. The same image as when the target area is displayed (peripheral decoration image) is intentionally displayed as being included, or the display target area of the gauge image is not displayed as an image different from the integrated image. The same applies to the technical idea such as "doing so." Even with such a configuration, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain a feeling of tension as to how much time is left, and it is possible to more appropriately improve the enjoyment of the game related to the operation. become able to.

  Also in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode, and the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction). ) Is output in the suppression mode, or there is a case where the operation acceptance is permitted while it is in the non-output state. "Outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) in a suppression mode" according to this example also includes the case of outputting a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) at a volume "0" (silence output). is there. The “non-output state” is meant to include, for example, a case where no channel is even assigned.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a reception-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressing mode, and a specific-type effect. A plurality of acceptance acceptable states in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state are prepared respectively. The “acceptance state” and the “third acceptance acceptance state” are acceptance allowances in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode or in a non-output state. It is included as one of the states, and in the above-mentioned “second acceptance permissible state”, operation acceptance is performed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressing mode. Of the acceptable acceptance status It has become what is included as one.

  According to such a configuration, when the sound of BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound) is suppressed or is set to a non-output state, it is possible to be aware of the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode. Since it is possible to do so, while avoiding a situation in which the performance is poor, the sound of BGM playback is suppressed, or while the output is in a non-output state, further concentration is given to enjoy the performance. You will be able to do it.

  It should be noted that the "acceptable acceptance state in which operation acceptance is permitted while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed manner or in a non-output state" is output in a non-suppressed manner. A specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) may be output in a suppression mode or may be in a non-output state before the acceptance-allowed state is generated, or a specific type of effect sound ( BGM reproduction) is output in a non-suppressing mode, and a reception acceptable state is generated, and while the reception acceptable state is occurring (or at the same time), a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed. May be output or may be in a non-output state. In short, it is sufficient that the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state.

  Even in the acceptance-permitted state according to this example, when the operation is not detected within the set time period in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the operation is performed in the automatic acceptance mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. There is a case where the operation is performed and a case where the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected.

Here, the acceptance acceptable state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed in the acceptance acceptable state is as described above,
-It does not mean that after-operation display or after-operation sound output is output regardless of whether or not there is an operation within the effective period, only when the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is set.
-This means that the post-operation display and the post-operation sound output are output regardless of the production state (state of the production setting) regardless of the presence or absence of the operation within the effective period. In the first place, it is not always necessary to prepare "special performance state (automatic reception mode)" or "plurality of performance states" as performance states. In addition, if the acceptance acceptable state in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed among the acceptance acceptable states occurs when the special effect state (automatic acceptance mode) is set, is automatic acceptance enabled? Either may be adopted as to whether or not (for example, "automatic reception is not always activated regardless of the performance state"), or "when the special performance state (automatic reception mode) is set. It may be said that “automatic reception is enabled” only)), and is not related to the configuration according to the technical features described here.

  More specifically, during the demo screen (the period during which the symbol fluctuation is not executed), if the settings relating to the game are possible, whichever of those settings is selected In the acceptance acceptable state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed, the automatic acceptance is always activated. Then, among these settings, when at least the specific setting condition is satisfied, the acceptance condition in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed and the acceptance condition in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed are different from each other. It has become possible to occur in the original. The settings relating to the game include not only the special effect state (automatic reception mode), but also settings such as volume, brightness, and effect appearance probability, and the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not always installed. It does not have to be a thing. When the setting related to the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is installed, the special effect state (automatic reception mode) is not set under the "specific setting condition".

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as will be described later, when at least the specific setting condition is satisfied, the acceptance permission state in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed and the "non-automatic acceptance mode" are executed. A plurality of acceptance acceptable states are prepared, but the above-mentioned "first acceptance acceptable state" is included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the "automatic acceptance mode" is executed. The above-mentioned "second acceptance acceptable state" and "third acceptance acceptable state" are included as one of the acceptance acceptable states in which the "non-automatic acceptance mode" is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the first acceptance allowance with the possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to perform the operation) In the state, the "automatic reception mode" is executed. Therefore, even if you forget to operate when the integrated mood image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is higher than other modes), after-operation performance (At least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change in the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) can be generated, and a decrease in amusement of the game can be suppressed. Will be able to. On the other hand, the second acceptance-permitted state and the third acceptable state in which there is no possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (there is a possibility that the enjoyment of the game will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate it) In the acceptance-permitted state, the "non-automatic acceptance mode" will be executed. Therefore, this is suitable for the sense of tension when acceptance of the operation is permitted while suppressing a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the operator forgets to perform the operation. Will be able to maintain.

  Also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the acceptance permission sound is output overlaps with the acceptance permission state, and when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the operation acceptance is performed. Then, based on the acceptance of the operation, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound can be terminated midway (can be made inaudible).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the timing at which the acceptance-permitted sound ends midway is the timing at which the operation by the player is detected (operation acceptance). It becomes possible to suppress anxiety about whether the operation is being accepted or whether the operation has not been accepted yet.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at least a part of the period in which the acceptance permission sound is output overlaps with the acceptance permission state, but when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. Even if the operation is accepted by the user, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound may not be terminated midway (can be made inaudible) based on the acceptance of the operation, and it may be maintained. I have to. Then, as will be described later, a plurality of acceptable reception states in which the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway and a plurality of acceptable reception states in which the acceptable reception sound is not terminated halfway are prepared. Is included as one of the acceptance-permitted states in which the acceptance-permitted sound is terminated halfway. The above-mentioned "second acceptance-permitted state" is the acceptance-permitted state in which the acceptance-permitted sound is not terminated halfway. It is included as one of the above.

  According to such a configuration, the first acceptance allowance with the possibility that the integrated image will be displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) (there is a possibility that the entertainment of the game will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate it) In the state, if the operation acceptance is made while the acceptance permission sound is being output, this will be terminated in the middle. Therefore, when the integrated mood image is displayed in a special mode with a high degree of expectation (a mode in which the ratio of being stopped by the big hit symbol is higher than that in other modes), the message "whether the operation is being received or the operation is still being received" is displayed. It is possible to concentrate on post-operation performance such as post-operation display and output sound after operation, change in light emission by lamp, effect operation by movable decorative body etc. As a result, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. On the other hand, in the second acceptance-permitted state in which there is no possibility that the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) Even if the operation acceptance is made while the permissible sound is being output, this is not ended in the middle, so while suppressing the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game, regarding the feeling of tension when operating it It becomes possible to maintain it suitably.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, When the integrated image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), the integrated image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)). I try to make it happen when

  More specifically, the first condition is satisfied in the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In addition to the above-mentioned first acceptance-allowed state that occurs when the fourth condition is met, at least the fourth acceptance-allowed state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied is included. When the mock image is displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)) and when the integrated mock image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) However, in the fourth acceptance permissible state, the integrated image is not displayed in a special mode (see FIG. 232 (d)), and a mode different from the special mode (FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)). It is designed to be displayed only by referring to (c). Then, in the first acceptance-permitted state, when the operation acceptance is performed while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation (inaudible On the other hand, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state, in the fourth acceptance-permitted state, when an operation acceptance is made while the acceptance-permitted sound is in the output state, the output state of the acceptance-permitted sound is interrupted based on the operation acceptance. I'm trying not to end it (to keep it inaudible).

  With such a configuration, a reception-permitted state occurs in which the operation reception is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, and the reception is performed. When the integrated image is displayed in the special state in the permissible state, the reception permissible sound is terminated midway based on the operation reception. On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or a non-output state, an acceptance acceptable state in which operation acceptance is permitted occurs and the acceptance acceptable state is integrated. When the katakam image is displayed in a mode different from the special mode, there are cases where the acceptable reception sound is terminated midway based on the operation acceptance, and cases where the acceptable reception sound is maintained without being terminated midway. Like

  That is, in this case, in the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, the integrated image is displayed as the special mode. Is displayed in a different mode (a mode in which it is unlikely that the interest in playing the game will be significantly reduced when the user forgets to operate), even if the operation is accepted, the acceptance acceptable sound may be terminated midway based on the operation acceptance. In some cases, the allowable sound may be maintained without being terminated halfway. Therefore, it is because the operation acceptance is not done when the acceptable sound is not terminated halfway. It is possible to make it difficult to distinguish whether or not the reason is that the fourth acceptance allowable state has occurred, but it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game and maintain a suitable sense of tension. It is possible So as to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, a wide area using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is used prior to this. The pre-mold production is started to be executed, and when the second acceptance permissible state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started. It is supposed to be done. Then, the mock image of the operation receiving portion (here, the integrated mood image) is displayed both during the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed and the period in which the first acceptance allowable state is occurring. However, in the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed and the period in which the first acceptance permitted state is occurring, they are displayed in different modes from each other.

  In particular, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image (image) displayed during the period when the wide area type pre-production is executed, and the period during which the first acceptance-permitted state occurs The integrated image (image) to be displayed is based on the image data different from each other, although the same operation receiving portion (operation button 410) is used. As a result, not only the color scheme but also the contour shape itself is displayed differently.

  According to such a configuration, when performing the wide area type pre-production, there is more freedom without being caught by the form (image data) of the integrated image (image) displayed in the first acceptance permitted state. Since it becomes possible to display the integrated mood image (mature image) with a highly independent expression, it is possible to greatly improve the performance when performing pre-production (wide area type pre-production) in a wider range. Like Obviously, such an effect cannot be achieved by image processing such as fade-in based on a single image data.

  Further, in the acceptance acceptable state in which the wide area type pre-production is executed, as compared with the acceptance acceptable state in which the narrow area type pre-production is executed, a production at the time of a big hit that appears only when a big hit is obtained as a post-operation production. The appearance ratio is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance acceptable states are prepared as acceptance acceptable states corresponding to the wide area type pre-production (the wide area type pre-production is executed). A first acceptance permitted state and a third acceptance permitted state are prepared as one, respectively. In addition, a plurality of acceptable reception states are prepared as the acceptable reception state corresponding to the narrow area pre-production (where the narrow area pre-production is executed), and the second acceptable reception state is one of the acceptable reception states. The state and the fourth acceptance permissible state are prepared respectively.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permissible state, an operation is performed while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state. As described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, the operation acceptance can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is in the non-suppression mode. As I did. That is, when a narrow area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, the operation reception is performed in a non-suppression mode without suppressing the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction). Since it can be done (the second acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production which is relatively excellent in performance is not performed. On the other hand, when a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or can be operated while it is in the non-output state, it is a wide area type relatively excellent in effect. Since the pre-production is to be performed (first acceptance permissible state), the game due to the operation reception not being made while the specific type of production sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the non-suppressing mode. The decline in interest can be suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least under the specific setting condition (one production state), in the first acceptance permissible state, the operation is not detected within the set time during which the operation acceptance is permitted. At this time, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second acceptance permissible state, the operation is detected within the set time during which the operation acceptance is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not performed, the operation is performed in a non-automatic reception mode that does not cause the same display change as when the operation is detected. That is, in the first acceptance permissible state in which the wide area type pre-production is performed, it is feared that the enjoyment of the game is deteriorated when the user forgets to operate it due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic reception mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate the game. On the other hand, in the second reception permission state in which the narrow area type pre-production is performed, it is suggested in a relatively unobtrusive manner that the operation reception is permitted, but in this case, the production is firmly performed. Only the person who is paying attention and notices that the operation acceptance will be allowed can entertain the post-operation performance such as the post-operation display and the post-operation output sound, so that the feeling of tension can be favored. You will be able to maintain.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppression mode, or in a reception-permitted state in which operation reception is permitted in the non-output state. Means that at least the first acceptance permission state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance permission state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied are included. As described above. In this respect, in the fourth acceptance permissible state, the operation acceptance can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the state, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or in the non-output state. I have to. Further, when the fourth acceptable reception state occurs, prior to this, the narrow area type pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. That is, when a narrow area type pre-production that is relatively inferior in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific-type production sound (BGM reproduction) is set to be low even if the suppression mode is set. (Fourth acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the wide area type pre-production, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the case (first acceptance permissible state), since the wide area type pre-production that is relatively excellent in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the player accepts an operation while the above-mentioned first acceptance permissible state is occurring and the mood image (integrated mood image) is being displayed, the operation is accepted. A corresponding post-operation effect (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change in the lamp, and an effect operation in the movable decorative body) is started to be executed, and a simulated image (integrated image). When the image is hidden, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect) using at least half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) is executed. However, when the player accepts an operation while the second acceptance-permitted state has occurred and the image (integrated image) is being displayed, after the operation corresponding to the operation acceptance Output (at least one of display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in speaker, light emission change in lamp, and effect operation by movable decorative body) is started to be executed, and a simulated image (integrated simulated image) is not displayed. A narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance effect) that uses less than half of a predetermined display area (for example, the effect display device 1600) when displaying is executed.

  Here, the disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect, narrow area disappearance effect) means that a part or the whole of the displayed image (integrated image) is made hard to see or made invisible. It refers to the "image different from the image" and the "display effect on the image" displayed. Such an extinction effect (disappearance effect) may be executed as an image displayed in a different layer before the layer in which the mimic image (integrated mimetic image) is displayed, for example. , The image (integrated image) and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the image (integrated image) is displayed in the moving image. The effect may be such that it becomes difficult to visually recognize it, or it is executed by changing the display mode of the image (integrated image) itself (display effect). May be However, as such an extinction effect, in order to suggest the degree of expectation or to improve the enjoyment of the game, when hiding the image (integrated image), what is this? It goes without saying that it is more desirable to display it as a separate image.

  Also, "when the mood image (integrated mood image) is hidden ... the disappearance effect is executed" means that "when the mood image (integrated mood image) is hidden, .. "Disappearance effect is executed", or "As the image (integrated image) disappears (the image (integrated image) itself has high transmittance. It may be "the disappearance effect is executed" or "the disappearance effect is executed after hiding the image (integrated image)". , Is meant to include any of these aspects. Also, in the process of hiding the image (integrated image), the fact that the transmittance of the image itself is increasing becomes "when the image (integrated image) is hidden. ... The disappearance effect is executed ".

  According to such a configuration, when the post-operation effect in response to the operation acceptance by the player is started to hide the mood image, the wide area disappearance effect is executed while the post-operation effect is being executed. Since there is a case where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed and a case where the narrow area type disappearance effect is executed, it is possible to enhance the performance until the disappearance of the mock image (integrated mood image).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when such an extinction effect (image at extinction) is executed, in the narrow area extinction effect (image at extinction of narrow area), the narrow area extinction effect (narrow image) The background image that was displayed before the area image disappeared image is displayed until the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappeared image) is hidden or after the operation. While (post-operation display or post-operation output sound) is being executed, this is displayed (maintained) without being changed. On the other hand, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed before the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed based on the operation acceptance by the player. The background image has a different background until the wide area disappearance effect (the wide area disappearance image) is hidden or after the post-operation effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is executed. It is supposed to change to an image.

  That is, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is executed, at least a part of the background image is deleted from the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance time) in addition to the full-scale image (integrated complete image). Since it becomes difficult to visually recognize by the image), the background image is changed (replaced) with a different background image aiming at the timing at which such a wide area disappearance effect (image at wide area disappearance) is executed. As a result, it is possible to realize a smooth production transition (transition to a new production phase) using the button production. For example, the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance time image) is an image displayed in a layer that is before the layer in which the image (integrated image) and the layer in which the background image is displayed are displayed. Alternatively, the mood image (integrated mood image), the background image, and the image (disappearance effect) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and one of the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed in the moving image. A part or the whole or a part or the whole of the background image may be expressed by the image (disappearance effect) to be difficult to be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, when the narrow range disappearance effect (the narrow range disappearance image) is executed, the narrow range disappearance effect (the narrow range disappearance image) is hidden or after the operation. Since the background image is not changed while the effect (display after operation or output sound after operation) is executed, effect transition (transition to new effect phase) is not realized. Therefore, the player is interested in whether the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) or the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance image) is displayed in addition to the post-operation effect. As a result, it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest related to the mock image from the time when the mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed until it is hidden.

  In addition, when the wide area disappearance effect (wide area disappearance image) is displayed, a big hit is obtained as a post-operation effect than when the narrow area disappearance effect (narrow area disappearance image) is displayed. The proportion of the appearance mode at the time of a big hit that appears only when the jackpot is high is high. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a plurality of acceptance permission states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the wide area disappearance effect (image when wide area disappearance is performed). As one of the acceptance acceptable states, a first acceptance acceptable state and a third acceptance acceptable state are prepared respectively. In addition, a plurality of acceptance permission states are prepared as acceptance acceptance states corresponding to the narrow area disappearance effect (image when the narrow area disappearance is performed), and these acceptance acceptance states are available. The second acceptable reception state and the fourth acceptable reception state are prepared as one of the above.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, in the first acceptance permissible state, a game in which a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state The player can accept the operation, and the second acceptance permissible state is such that the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is not suppressed. That is as described above. That is, when a narrow range extinction effect, which is relatively inferior in rendering performance, is performed, depending on the player, the particular type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is not in the suppression mode but in the non-suppression mode. Since the operation can be accepted (the second acceptance allowable state), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment caused by the fact that the wide area extinction effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, when the player can accept the operation while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, the effect is relatively expressed. Since the superior wide area type disappearance effect is performed (first acceptance allowable state), the operation acceptance by the player can be accepted while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode. It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment level of the game due to the lack of playing.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when at least under the specific setting condition (one production state), in the first acceptance permissible state, the operation is detected within the set time during which the operation acceptance by the player is permitted. When the operation is not detected, the operation is performed in an automatic reception mode that causes the same display change as when the operation is detected. In the second acceptance permissible state, within the set time during which the operation acceptance by the player is permitted. As described above, when the operation is not detected in step 1, the operation is executed in the non-automatic reception mode in which the same display change as that when the operation is detected is not generated. That is, in the first acceptance permissible state in which the wide area disappearance effect is performed, it is feared that the entertainment of the game is deteriorated when the player forgets to operate it due to its high performance, but it is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate the game. That is, in this case, even if the player does not accept the operation and the automatic acceptance functions, the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the same manner as when the operation is accepted by the player. On the other hand, in the second acceptance-permitted state in which the narrow-range disappearance effect is performed, since it is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, the set time elapses without the player's operation (second acceptance acceptance). When the state ends), the mood image is displayed without any post-operation effect (at least one of display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in speaker, light emission change by lamp, and effect operation by movable ornament). It will be hidden. In this respect, in the second acceptance permissible state, the narrow area disappearance effect is executed even when the mood image is hidden while the post-operation effect is not executed, which causes a forgetting operation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the effect after the operation is not executed. At this time, the narrow area disappearance effect may be executed in the same mode (the same image) as when the operation is received and the post-operation effect is executed. However, as will be described later, in the second acceptance permissible state according to this example, the narrow area type disappearance effect that appears when the operation acceptance is performed and the post-operation effect is executed, and the case where the operation acceptance is not performed and the post-operation effect is not executed The mode (image) different from that of the narrow area disappearance effect appearing in FIG.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, a reception that allows the player to accept an operation while a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in a suppressed mode or in a non-output state The allowable state includes at least the first acceptance allowable state that occurs when the first condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance allowable state that occurs when the fourth condition is satisfied. That is as described above. In the fourth acceptance permissible state, the operation can be accepted by the player while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the fourth suppression mode. In the acceptance-permitted state, a specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression level than the fourth suppression mode, or is operated by the player in the non-output state. It has also been described above that the reception can be made. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation is accepted by the player in the fourth acceptance allowing state, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed instead of the wide area disappearance effect. . That is, when the narrow range extinction effect, which is relatively inferior in rendering performance, is performed, a specific type of rendering sound (BGM reproduction) is suppressed prior to that, but the degree of suppression is reduced. As a result (the fourth acceptance permissible state), it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the wide area extinction effect, which is relatively excellent in performance, is not performed. On the other hand, the operation reception can be performed while the specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the first suppression mode having a higher suppression degree than the fourth suppression mode, or in the non-output state. In the case (first acceptance allowable state), since the wide area type extinction effect relatively excellent in performance is performed, the degree of suppression of the specific type of performance sound (BGM reproduction) is not low. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  FIG. 249 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied and the second acceptable reception state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 251 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the second acceptance permissible state occurs.

  Now, assuming that the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time saving), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. First, effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 251 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "second variation pattern" itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination or the like) corresponding to the second variation pattern (when the second condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set as shown in FIG. 249 (b). In the second acceptance permissible state (effective period), the operation acceptance regarding the second post-operation effect is permitted when the timing tB3 when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ Is generated (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, regarding the second acceptable reception state (valid period),
-"BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" according to the second variation pattern, for example, operation reception while the BGM reproduction sound during normal variation maintains the output state in the non-suppressing mode. The operation is not permitted within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the “non-suppression acceptance permitted state (see FIGS. 249 (a) and (b)) is permitted” and the operation acceptance is permitted. In this case, the "non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 249 (h))" in which the after-operation effect (second after-operation effect) corresponding to the second acceptance permitted state is not generated
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by.

  According to such a configuration, the set time (effective period) during which the operation reception is allowed without the directivity such as "the sound of the BGM reproduction" is suppressed to suggest the occurrence of the acceptance permitted state. ) Is suddenly set (non-suppression reception effect), the player may be surprised by the side, and a delay is likely to occur at the beginning of movement when trying to operate. Nevertheless, if the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tB3 to tB4), the set time is ended without the post-operation effect (non-automatic reception). Aspect), by making the user aware of the risk of missing the opportunity for the post-operation effect (here, the second post-operation effect) to be generated, it is possible to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

  However, such a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" is a post-operation effect (here, a second post-operation effect) that is performed only in a big hit than a "suppression / automatic reception effect" described later. Although the percentage (which may be 0% or 100%) is low, if the player often does not produce post-operation effects against the player's intention, the interest in the game may deteriorate. I'm worried. Therefore, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b), (e), and (i), a set time (timing tB3 to tB4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted is generated. When the timing tB2 comes shortly before, the output of the “acceptable acceptance sound (here, the first acceptable sound)” is started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)”), and the timing within the set time Even if the operation is accepted at tB3a, the output state is maintained in a state of straddling the operation. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance permissible state is set. It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the reception has been accepted and the operation after the operation (here, the second operation after the operation) does not occur. You will be expected. However, the "acceptable acceptance sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" does not necessarily have to occur before the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) occurs, and for example, the generation timing of the set time. You may make it generate | occur | produce according to the generation timing of tB3.

  As will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to this embodiment, as the "acceptable sound", the first allowable sound output as a sound effect such as "Picine!" And "press!" The second allowable sound to be output as a message sound such as is prepared. However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (f) and (j), in the second acceptance permissible state, the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and only the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. Is output, and the output limitation of the “acceptable sound” is likely to cause a delay in the start of movement when the player attempts to operate.

  By the way, in the second acceptance-permitted state, as a countermeasure against sudden setting of the set time or execution of the non-automatic acceptance mode, the operation means (here, the operation means) is operated even when the operation acceptance is not permitted. It is conceivable that by repeatedly hitting the button 410), a player may try to make sure not to miss the opportunity for post-operation effects. However, in this case, since the operation acceptance is permitted and the post-operation effect is started immediately, the started effect is “what is performed according to the operation acceptance (post-operation effect)”. However, it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is "a thing that is automatically generated as a mere notice effect that is unrelated to the operation reception", and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 249 (particularly, FIG. 249 (e)), in the second acceptance-permitted state, the “acceptance-acceptable sound (first acceptance sound)” is generated after the set time (effective period) has occurred. When the effect reception is made at the timing tB3a in the output state, the set time itself is ended, but the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and is set as the first allowable sound. The output state is maintained until the timing at which the output ends (the same timing tB3c (FIG. 249 (e), (i) as when there is no operation). It is possible to prevent a situation in which it becomes difficult to recognize whether it is a "thing that is being performed (post-operation effect)" or "an object that is automatically generated as an effect that is not related to operation reception". Yo To become.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 249, when the effect reception is performed within the set time of the second acceptance permissible state (timing tB3a in the figure), the effect display device is used as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. At least the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on 1600 (first effect member) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 249 (d)). See). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is not displayed at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tB4, regardless of the timing at which the effect is received within the set time (effective period). On the other hand, the output sound after operation (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the effect reception is made. However, even if the operation is accepted at any timing, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output when the timing tB4 has not elapsed. It is required to maintain the condition.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB2 before the timing tB3 at which the set time of the second acceptance permissible state is set arrives, the operation display unit 1600, which is the operation target. Along with the display of a simulated image, a gauge display indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is completed is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (c)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tB2 slightly before the timing tB3 at which the set time (timing tB3 to tB4) of the second acceptance permissible state is set. It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the reception has been accepted and the operation after the operation (here, the second operation after the operation) does not occur. You will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the sound image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one may be started earlier. You can Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tB3.

  Further, as described above, the mock image displayed when the second acceptable reception state occurs (the image mocking the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is the edge that decorates the edge of the mood image. The image is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. The “integrated image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image (predetermined A display target region (section image KG) of the image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, in the second acceptance permissible state, a special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image” is selected by lottery (selection). ) Is not included as an object, and only a mode different from the special mode (for example, a normal mode shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 251, the integrated lumber image IGa with the lowest expectation is displayed as the integrated lumber image IG.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (c) to (f), it is assumed that the timing tB3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated image is displayed. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, post-operation effects (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable ornament). As at least one of the effect operations, the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f)”).

  However, as shown in FIGS. 249 (c), (d), and 251 (f), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the integrated image IG is not displayed when the post-operation performance is started. The display state is maintained instead of being turned off. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tB3a), the integrated image IG (specific layer) is not changed due to that, and a little time ( Until the timing tB3b after the elapse of a predetermined time) arrives, the "display of the integrated image IG" in the same mode as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. The display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 251, a dialogue notice (may be a chance) by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output related to liquid crystal display).

  Then, when the timing tB3b arrives, an image KSE (disappearing effect) displayed by making part or the whole of the display image in a display state difficult or invisible is displayed (see FIG. 251). Equivalent to the situation shown in (g)). Such an image KSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image IG and the image (the disappearance effect). ) Is displayed as a single moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the moving image is represented by the image KSE (disappearing effect) and becomes difficult to be visually recognized. May be as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 249 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated image IG is not displayed even when such an image KSE (disappearing effect) is started to be displayed. Instead of being turned off, the display state is maintained. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tB3b), in the layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, the change caused by the integrated image IG does not occur. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, the disappearance effect is displayed in a layer on the front side of the disappearance effect, so that the scale image and the gauge image GG are difficult to be visually recognized, or are invisible.

  That is, in this case, the disappearance effect image KSE (also in the case of the wide area disappearance effect image HSE described later) is used for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image (integrated image IG) or making it invisible. Despite being in the situation of being displayed on a predetermined layer, the image (integrated image IG) itself displayed on a specific layer (back side (lower priority side than the predetermined layer)) itself The display in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted is maintained and no change occurs. Further, also for the gauge image GG, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. This makes it possible to visually recognize (at least a part of) the mode in which the operation acceptance is permitted, even in the process of making it difficult to visually recognize the general image (integrated general image IG) or making it invisible. This makes it possible to shorten the time to be maintained in the state shown in FIG. 251 (f).

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image IG is completed within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) during which the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed (see “FIG. 251 (i). The situation where the integrated image IG is not displayed on the layer after that, the disappearance effect (here, the narrow area disappearance that uses less than half of the predetermined display area) The effect image KSE will be displayed. The disappearing effect image KSE is made non-display when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tB3d) from the start of its display (timing tB3d) (see "Fig. 251 (Fig. 251 ( j)). In this regard, with regard to the timing tB3d when the non-display is performed, the display change (here, the liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 in the post-operation effects is irrespective of which timing the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image KSE and the integrated image IG are displayed on a layer on the front side of the image (conversation notice by the princess character) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600, It is displayed in a form that overlaps with this. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 251 (g) to 251 (i), while the disappearance effect image KSE is displayed, the image relating to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (the conversation notice by the princess character) is visually recognized. It's getting harder. The same applies to the wide area disappearance effect.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, the post-operation performance is started, and in addition, the integrated image IG is displayed in any mode when the operation reception is performed. 232 (a) to (d), the remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, and the like can be maintained in a state in which it can be grasped ("Fig. 251 (f) ”. Then, after this, the display of the disappearance effect image KSE in the form that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600” and the integrated image IG among the post-operation effects is started. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (g)”). As described above, as the disappearance effect, there are a narrow range extinction effect with low performance and a wide area extinction effect with low performance, and here, it is executed as a narrow range extinction effect. While the image KSE of the disappearance effect is being displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (i)”), and then the disappearance effect image When the image KSE is hidden, the "image related to display change on the effect display device 1600 (conversation notice by the princess character)" in the post-operation effect is finally visible in a clear state (" 251 (j) ”.

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated image IG was, and then what aspect appears as the disappearing effect, and then, Since it becomes possible to enjoy what form (here, a plurality of conversation notice forms with different expectations) appear as post-operation performance, when operation reception is made by such various performances. It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In order to preferably obtain such an action effect, the timing to start displaying the image (post-operation effect) related to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tB3a but the timing tB3b or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing to be within the period (timing tB3b to tB3d) being executed. However, also in this case, since the effect sound and the post-operation effect by the lamp are started to be executed at the timing tB3a, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself is still the timing tB3a.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 249 (g) to 249 (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptable reception state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the second acceptance permissible state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode, after the set time elapses without the player's operation, the post-operation performance is not performed. The model image (here, the integrated model image IGa) is hidden.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 249 (b) and (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permitted state) is finished, The model image on the specific layer (here, the integrated model image IGa) is not hidden, and the display state that has appeared when the acceptance state is maintained is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation acceptance is not permitted, at that time (timing tB4), the change caused by the change does not occur in the image (here, the integrated image IGa), and there Until the timing tB4a arrives after a short time (predetermined time) has elapsed, the "display of the image" is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted. There is. Further, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is slightly left even at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second reception permissible state) is finished, and the display area remains after the timing tB4. The display area is reduced to "0".

  With such a configuration, even if the valid period (second acceptance allowable state) is ended without any operation, the quality image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was. Moreover, since the display area of the gauge image is set to "0" after the expiration of the effective period, it is possible to urge the user to think "I was sorry" when the operation reception was not in time at the last minute. As a result, it is expected that the decline in the interest of the game will be suppressed.

  In this example, the valid period (second acceptance permitted state) ends without any operation accepted, compared to the time from the timing tB3a when the operation is accepted until the image is hidden (not visible). The time from the timing tB4 to the time when the simulated image is hidden (not visible) is shortened.

  Further, as described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, after the operation, the post-operation effect is not executed if the set time has elapsed without the operation by the player being detected. However, even in this case, as shown in FIG. 249 (g), the narrow range disappearance effect is executed when the general image (here, the integrated general image IGa) is hidden. While the narrow-area extinction effect is being executed, the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IGa) is hidden. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the narrow range disappearance effect when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g)) is the narrow range disappearance effect when the after-operation effect is executed. (FIG. 249 (c)) is performed in a different mode (image).

  According to such a configuration, even if it is not possible to understand whether or not the operation has been accepted (whether it is in time or not), it is possible to properly understand it by confirming the mode of the narrow range extinction effect. As a result, it is possible to avoid a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to grasp whether the post-operation performance is being performed. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, as for the mode of the narrow range disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed, when the post-operation effect is not executed (FIG. 249 (g) )) Should not appear. However, for example, the narrow area disappearance effect (FIG. 249 (c)) when the post-operation effect is executed is defined as "A (for example, change of the mood image itself)" and "B (for example, mood image. If the two modes of "another image display)" are executed together, the narrow area disappearance effect (Fig. 249 (g)) when the post-operation effect is not executed is executed by "A". May be. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to recognize that the operation has not been accepted when the "B" mode does not appear in the narrow range disappearance effect, and the post-operation performance is performed. It is possible to avoid a decline in the entertainment level of the game due to the lack of understanding of whether or not it is.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tB1 before the timing tB3 at which the second acceptance permitted state occurs, the narrow area type pre-production that uses less than half of the predetermined display area is executed. It is started (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 251 (b)"). Then, within the period in which the image KTH relating to such a narrow area type pre-effect is displayed, first, a display of a mock image of the operation receiving portion (here, the integrated mock image IGa) and the first allowance are displayed. The sound output and the sound output are started respectively (at timing tB2, which corresponds to the “state shown in FIG. 251 (c)”). At the time when the display of the general image (here, the integrated general image IGa) is started, a part or the whole of the general image (integrated general image IG) is visually recognized by the image KTH concerning the narrow area type pre-production. It's getting harder. That is, as the time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed is reduced, or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the “image (integrated image) The visual effect of gradually increasing the visibility of the image IG) is provided (FIGS. 251 (b) to (d)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, the narrow area type pre-production is being executed, and the second image is displayed while the image of the image (here, the integrated image of image IGa) is being displayed. The timing tB3 at which the acceptance permitted state occurs arrives and the operation acceptance is permitted (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 251 (d)”). That is, in this case, since the operation acceptance is allowed at a stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) is being improved, the mood image (integrated muffled image IG) can be accepted. Confirm the mode (expectation level) as the model image (integrated model image IG) whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation level). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic production such as whether the operation reception (post-operation production) is made to be hidden or not.

  Here, the image KTH used for such a narrow area type pre-effect is, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the general image (integrated general image IG) is displayed. It is also good to display the mood image (integrated mood image) and the image (narrow area pre-production) as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mood image (integrated mood image IG) in the moving image. It may be one that expresses a state in which is gradually increased.

  In the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600, but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, regarding the narrow area type pre-stage production, It can be said that, in order to increase the concentration of the effect, it is preferable to perform the effect display device 1600 as an image display without outputting the effect sound related thereto.

  Further, as the narrow area type pre-production, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes having different expectations and selectively display one of those modes based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. . However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode and the post-operation effect is not executed if the user forgets to operate, the narrow area type pre-effect is It is desirable to prepare only one aspect and display it according to only this aspect, in order to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player forgets to operate it.

  FIG. 250 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied and the first acceptance permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the first acceptance permitted state occurs.

  Now, in the normal gaming state (non-probability variation / non-time saving), the starting condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and it is assumed that the "first variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU1511a, First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 252 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “first variation pattern” itself. It will be.

Then, as described above, in the production related to the “first variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 250 (b), the decoration pattern is obtained regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination). When the timing tC4 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) when the first predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the SZ variation effect is reached, the operation acceptance for the first post-operation effect is allowed. A permissible state (valid period) is generated (corresponding to the “state shown in FIG. 252 (g)”). However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the first acceptable reception state (valid period),
-"Suppression acceptance permissible state" (Fig. 250 (a), (See (b)) ”and, even when no operation is detected for the operation means that is the operation target within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) in which the operation reception is allowed, When the timing tC4f within the set time arrives, the post-operation performance is started “automatic reception mode (see FIG. 250 (h))”
It is generated as a "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As will be described later, the suppression mode here is also referred to as “strong suppression mode”.

  According to such a configuration, since the operation reception is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound" is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state (suppression reception effect), the game is played. From the operator's side, it becomes easy to operate immediately after the set time (effective period) occurs. In addition to this, even when the operation is not detected within the set time (timing tC4 to tC5), the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is the timing tC4f within the set time at the latest. Since it is automatically generated when it arrives (automatic reception mode), you can enjoy operating with a sense of security that you will not miss the highly anticipated post-operation production .. That is, in such a “suppressed / automatic reception effect”, a ratio (0% or 100% that the post-operation effect is performed in a mode that appears only at the time of a big hit, as compared to the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect” described above. Is also high as described above.

  Moreover, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a according to the present embodiment, even in the "suppression / automatic reception effect", as in the case of the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect" described above, Figs. 250 (b), (e), (i). As shown in, when the timing tC3, which is slightly before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) at which the production reception is permitted, occurs, the "acceptance acceptable sound (here, the first acceptable sound)" is output. The output is started and the output state is maintained across the timing tC4 (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). As a result, even if the player does not recognize that the “sound of BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is output in the suppression mode or is in the non-output state, the operation is performed at the timing tC3. It becomes possible to recognize that a state in which acceptance will be accepted will occur soon, and "not against the player's intention, the effect acceptance is made by activating the automatic button function, not by the player's own operation" It is expected that it will be difficult to frequently output. However, as described above, the “acceptable acceptance sound” does not necessarily have to be generated before the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) is generated, and is generated at the generation timing tC4 of the set time, for example. You may do it.

  Note that, in order to obtain the above-described action effect (suppression reception effect) more preferably, the “sound of BGM reproduction” is changed from “state output in non-suppression mode” to “state output in non-suppression mode or non-state”. Regarding the timing tC2a for transition to the "output state", a different mode from that shown in the drawing is used. It can be said that it is desirable to set the time considerably before the above-mentioned output start timing tC4 of the acceptable reception sound that precedes the set time. For example, the timing tC2a may arrive before the wide-area pre-production is started.

  Further, in the "suppressed / automatic reception effect" according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 250 (f) and 250 (j), unlike the above-described "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", " As the “acceptance acceptable sound”, not only the first acceptable sound output as a sound effect such as “Picine!” But also the second acceptable sound that is a message sound such as “press!” Is output. Moreover, in this example, the second permissible sound is delayed by a predetermined time from the timing tC3 at which the output of the first permissible sound is started, and the operation acceptance is already permitted (valid period). The output is started at the timing tC4a which arrives at.

  That is, in this case, in the second acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated practicable image IG (practical image) cannot be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound has the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state (valid period) in which the integrated practicable image IG (practical image) can be displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode), the first permissible sound is the set time (valid period). The output is started without delay, and the second permissible sound is started with delay after the set time (effective period) is generated.

  With such a configuration, the first allowable sound (sound effect) is started to be output when the aspect of the integrated image IG (image) is difficult or invisible due to the pre-production. After that, when the first acceptance allowable state (effective period) is generated, it is possible to shift to a state in which both the first allowable sound (sound effect) and the second allowable sound (message sound) are output. Therefore, the possibility that the integrated image IG (image) is displayed in a specific high-expectation mode (special mode) is suggested by whether or not the second allowable sound (message sound) is further output. Will be able to. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is further output while the first permissible sound (sound effect) is in the output state, the integrated mood image having a specific high expectation mode (special mode) It is possible to have a sense of expectation that the IG (image) will be displayed, and in such a situation, the integrated image IG (image) is gradually exposed (clear) Sex will be provided. As will be described later, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (f), the “second wide area type pre-production” of the wide area type pre-production is being executed (the image of the pre-production). Is displayed), the second allowable sound is started to be output.

  As will be described later, in the “suppression / automatic reception effect” according to the present embodiment, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. When the operation button 410 is the operation target, a message sound such as “press!” Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound), and the sword ornament 5001 is the operation target. In this case, a message sound such as "Please put a knife!" Is output as the second allowable sound (message sound).

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j), the "second allowable sound" is adopted as the effect sound output for a relatively short time. However, although the "first allowable sound" is adopted as the effect sound that is output over a relatively long time, the length relationship between these allowable sounds may be reversed.

However, regarding the “first allowable sound” and the “second allowable sound”, the output states are maintained for different times as shown in FIGS. 250 (e), (f), (i), and (j). At the same time, the timings of ending the output states (the timings of making the output inaudible) arrive at different timings before the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated. Is desirable. According to such a configuration, it is estimated how much time is left until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated arrives, depending on which of the following situations the "acceptable sound" is in. It becomes possible to expect that it is difficult to frequently say that "the player receives the effect by the activation of the automatic button function instead of the player's own operation against the intention of the player".
・ A first situation in which only the "first allowable sound" maintains the output state among the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" ・ Both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" 2nd situation in which the output state is maintained ・ The "1st permissible sound" maintains the output state, but the "2nd permissible sound" has finished the output state (because it is inaudible The third situation ・ The fourth situation in which both the "first allowable sound" and the "second allowable sound" have finished outputting (being inaudible)

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, “non-suppression / non-automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. 249 and “suppression / automatic reception production” in the production example shown in FIG. The same effect sound (for example, "Pikyne!") Is output as the "first allowable sound". That is, in this case, the message sound (second allowable sound) of the acceptance allowable sound is output as the effect sound that is not output in the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect", but the sound effect ( Since the first allowable sound) can be output as an effect sound that is also output in the "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect", the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" is suppressed. It is possible to make it easier to recognize that the production reception is allowed while the production performance is appropriately maintained (the second allowable sound) when the current situation is present (the first allowable sound). Allowable sound). However, the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 and the "suppressed / automatic reception effect" in the effect example shown in FIG. You may make it output.

  The time length between arbitrary timings shown in each of the above-described drawings and each of the later-described drawings may be the minimum time (for example, one frame) in a control (processing) unit, or two frames. It may be the above time. For example, if the acceptable reception sound (first acceptable sound) can be output in advance of the set time (valid period) even a little, the player is in a state where the operation acceptance is permitted (or It will be possible to recognize that it has become earlier than the preceding time, so that it will be within the period until the set time ends and the timing when the automatic button function is activated It will be expected to suppress forgetting to do the operation inside.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, unlike the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 249, the operation is performed when the acceptance allowable sound (at least one of the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound) is in the output state. When the acceptance is made, the output state is terminated halfway based on the acceptance of the operation. That is, in this case, when an operation is performed by the player, the output of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound, second permissible sound) is interrupted at that time, whereby the operation acceptance is permitted ( It is possible to recognize that the validity period has expired. As a result, it is less likely that an erroneous recognition that the operation has been accepted is made even though the operation has not been accepted, and it is possible to prevent the situation where the automatic acceptance function is activated against the intention of the player. become able to. In addition, when the operation is performed and the operation is accepted before the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated within the set time (effective period), the operation is performed at the time when the operation is accepted. Needless to say, even if the timing tC4f arrives, the automatic button function is not activated because the state in which the acceptance is permitted is ended.

  Moreover, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 250 (e) and 250 (f), the first allowable sound starts to be output without delay of the occurrence of the set time (valid period), and the second allowable sound is set to the preset time (valid period). The output is started after the occurrence of (period). With such a configuration, the first allowable sound starts to be output regardless of how fast the operation by the player is accepted, but the second allowable sound depends on the timing at which the operation is accepted. (When the operation is received between the timings tC3 and tC4a), the state in which the operation reception is allowed is ended without starting the output, and the post-operation performance (here, the first post-operation performance) is ended. ) Will be executed. In addition, when the operation is performed between the timings tC3 and tC4, the operation is not accepted, and the first allowable sound is not ended with this as a trigger. If the operation is received before the timing tC4a arrives, the second allowable sound is not started to be output.

  According to such a configuration, after the second permissible sound is confirmed to be output (after confirming that the first reception permissible state is reached), the post-operation performance is started or the second permissible sound is started. 2 Whether to start the post-operation performance without confirming that the permissible sound is output (without recognizing whether it is in the first reception permissive state or the second reception permissive state) Since it becomes possible to entrust the player with the choice, the range of games will be expanded, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved.

  Moreover, in this example, as will be described later, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (f), at least an image (at least of the image) related to the pre-production (here, the wide area-type pre-production) within the period of timings tC3 to tC4a. Some of them are not hidden and are kept visible. That is, in this case, in a situation (timing tC3 to tC4a) in which the second permissible sound has not been output yet, the aspect (expected degree) of the integrated image (image) cannot be clearly visually recognized by the pre-production. Therefore, it becomes possible to make the above-mentioned playability, such as "leaving it to the player's selection", more interesting.

  Also, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 250 (d), when the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tC4b in the figure), the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance. As (here, first post-operation effect), post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and post-operation output sound (effect sound) from speaker (second effect member). Is generated at least (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)”). Here, unlike the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), While the non-display (invisible) is made at a specific timing (the same timing) that comes after tC5, the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is predetermined from the timing when the operation is accepted. The output state is maintained for a certain amount of time (certain time). Note that in the example shown in FIG. 252, a background notice by the princess character is displayed as the post-operation effect (output related to liquid crystal display).

  However, as shown in FIG. 250, even if the operation is accepted at any timing within the set time (effective period), the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is “BGM reproduction sound ( It is desirable to set such that the output state is maintained when the timing tC6 at which the "specific type of effect sound)" is output from the suppressed state (non-output state) in the non-suppressed state.

  On the other hand, regarding the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display), the output state is ended at the timing tC6 when the "BGM reproduction sound" is output in the non-suppressing mode. That is, in this case, at the timing tC6, both the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the non-suppressing mode and the content related to the display effect is switched, so that the effect is large. It is expected that the game will be changed to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, in place of this, the output state of the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) may be maintained at the timing tC6. Further, the “sound of BGM reproduction” may be gradually returned by a technique such as fade-in when returning to the output in the non-suppressing mode.

  Also in the effect example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC3 before the timing tC4 when the set time of the first acceptance allowable state is set, the operation which is the operation target in the effect display device 1600. A practicing image of the means is displayed, and a gauge indicating the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)"). As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the operation acceptance is permitted at a timing tC3, which is slightly before the timing tC4 at which the set time (timing tC4 to tC5) of the first acceptance-permitted state is set. It may be difficult to frequently announce that the operation is not completed in time for the player to notice that the acceptance has been permitted, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) ends without occurring. You will be expected. In this example, the timing at which the sound image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) starts to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one may be started earlier. You can Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tC4.

  In addition, as described above, the mock image displayed when the first acceptance permitted state occurs (the image mocking the operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given) is also the edge that decorates the edge of the mood image. The image is displayed as an integrated image IG integrated with the decorative image. The “integrated image IG” is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image GG ( A display target area (partitioned area KG) of the predetermined image) GG is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes. However, unlike the second acceptance permissible state, in the first acceptance permissible state, a special aspect having a high degree of expectation among a plurality of aspects prepared as the “integrated image IG” (for example, FIG. 232). As described above, the aspect (integrated image IGd) shown in (d) is included as a target of the lottery (selection) and can be displayed.

  By the way, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the remaining time is displayed based on the time until the timing tc4f at which the automatic button function is activated when there is no operation is reached ( It is conceivable to dynamically display the gauge image GG). In this respect, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 250) according to the present embodiment, the remaining time display (not the time until the timing tc4f arrives) is displayed based on the time until the timing tC5 when the set time ends. The gauge image GG) is dynamically displayed. That is, in this case, the gauge amount decreases as the time until the set time elapses decreases, and when the set time becomes “0”, the gauge amount is also dynamically displayed such that the gauge amount becomes “0”.

  With such a configuration, when the post-operation effect is started to be executed due to the activation of the automatic button function, the gauge amount in the remaining time display (gauge image GG) is intentionally left, It becomes possible to suggest that there is a risk of "losing the operational opportunity" against the player's intention, and this makes it possible to set the next set time (effective period) regardless of the gauge remaining amount. You will be able to encourage operations at an early stage.

  However, in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 250) executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the same post-operation effect as when the operation is accepted does not necessarily have to be started within the set time. May be started when or after.

  In addition, the integrated mage image IG (mature image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 250 is not necessarily the same as the integrated mood image IG (mould image) displayed in the example shown in FIG. 249. Good. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operating means (operation receiving portion) which is the operation target is deformed and depicted, whereas in the example shown in FIG. 250, the operating means (operation receiving portion) which is the operation target. May be depicted realistically.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 249, the operation button 410 is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target, and is displayed as the integrated image IG (image), which is obtained by using the operation button 410. In the example shown in FIG. 250, a handle portion 5012 (sword decoration body 5001) is used as the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target, and is displayed as an integrated image IG (image image) which is obtained by using the pattern portion 5012 (drawing image). 245 (a) to (d)). This “integrated image IGe to IGh” is as described with reference to FIGS. 245 to 248, or as another example or modification thereof. For example, the gauge image is included in the peripheral decoration image. A (predetermined image) GG display target region (section image KG) is provided. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) having different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image IG”, and the same applies to the case of selectively displaying any of these modes.

  As described above, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tC4 in FIG. 250, “when the operation button 410 is selected as the operation target” and “when the sword ornament 5001 is selected as the operation target” based on the result of the notice effect determination. There is That is, in this case, it may be confused as to which operation means is the operation target after the set time (effective period) in which the production acceptance is allowed occurs, so the set time is 5 seconds or the like. It is desirable to set a relatively long time. On the other hand, in the operation reception effect that occurs at the timing tB3 in FIG. 249, there is no “case of selecting the sword ornament 5001 as the operation target”, and the operation button 410 is always used as the operation target. As the set time, it is desirable to set a relatively short time such as 3 seconds. At this time, the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated should be set after the timing at which 3 seconds have passed after the set time (effective period) has occurred, contrary to the intention of the player. It is desirable to control the occurrence of situations where opportunities are lost.

  Further, in the operation reception effect that occurs at timing tC4 in FIG. 250, when the operation means on the side that is not the operation target is operated, the side that is the operation target while maintaining the erroneous operation state. Even when the operation means is operated, it is desirable that the effect reception is performed and the post-operation effect is executed. That is, the player may be confused if a situation in which the production is not accepted despite operating the operating means appears. Since it is difficult to further request an operation for the operating means on the side, even if an erroneous operating state is maintained, a performance reception is made when the operating means on the operating side is operated. It is desirable to do.

  Note that, as described above, in the suppression operation acceptance performance, since the specific type of effect sound is output or non-output in the suppression mode before the operation opportunity is given, compared with the non-suppression operation reception effect. There is a concern that the performance will be poor. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 (peripheral control MPU 1511a) according to the present embodiment, the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) output when the suppression operation reception effect is generated is output when the non-suppression operation reception effect is generated. It is possible to output as a sound whose output state is maintained for a time longer than the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes (for example, a plurality of modes including the first mode, the second mode, and the third mode) in which the output state is maintained for different times are used as the first permissible sound. It is prepared and any one of the plurality of modes is selectively output as the first permissible sound based on the result of the notice effect determination. Here, the “first mode” as the first permissible sound is the mode shown in FIG. 250 (e), and the “time to be maintained as the output state” is set as the shortest mode among the above plurality of modes. There is something. Further, it is desirable that the proportion (expectation level) of the big hit symbols appearing differently when the symbol variation is stopped depends on which of the plurality of modes the first allowable sound is output.

  It should be noted that “which of a plurality of modes is output as the first allowable sound” and “which of a plurality of operating means is used as an operation target” are obtained as separate determination results in the advance notice production determination. Alternatively, the determination result may be obtained in the advance notice effect determination as one determination result. However, in at least the above-mentioned first aspect among the plurality of aspects, the first allowance is obtained regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. It is desirable that the sound be selectable. In addition, the second mode and the third mode can be selected regardless of whether the "operation button 410" is the operation target or the "sword decoration 5001" is the operation target. However, it is desirable to prepare a mode in which output is possible only when the “sword decoration 5001” is the operation target. Even when the first allowable sound is output in any of these modes, the output state is maintained for a length equal to or longer than the time value required for the mode shown in FIG. 249.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 250 (c) to 250 (f), it is assumed that the timing tC4 arrives and the operation is accepted while the integrated image IG (in this case, the integrated image IGd) is displayed. is doing. When an operation is accepted under such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, post-operation effects (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable ornament). As at least one of the effect operations, the output related to the liquid crystal display and the output related to the effect sound are started.

  However, as described above, as shown in FIGS. 250 (c) and 250 (d), in this example as well, the integrated image IG on the specific layer is not hidden when the post-operation performance is started. , The display state from the time when it is in the acceptance acceptable state is maintained. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tC4b, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i)”), it is attributed to the integrated image IG. Until the timing tC4c when a little time (predetermined time) elapses without causing a change, the “integrated image IG is taken in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted. The “display” is continued, and the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tC4c arrives, an image HSE (disappearing effect) displayed by making a part or the whole of the integrated image IG in the display state difficult to visually recognize or making it invisible is made to appear (see “Fig. 252 (j) ”). Such an image HSE may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer (predetermined layer) that is in front of the specific layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed, or the integrated image and the image. An image (disappearing effect) is displayed as one moving image prepared in advance, and a part or the whole of the integrated image in the moving image is represented by the image (disappearing effect) so that it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image. It may be the one as described above.

  As shown in FIG. 250 (c), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this effect example, the integrated image IG is displayed on the specific layer, and the image HSE (displayed on the predetermined layer is displayed. The disappearing effect) is not hidden even when the display is started, and the display state is maintained as it was in the acceptance acceptable state. More specifically, even under the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tC4c), a change occurs in the specific layer in which the integrated image IG is displayed due to the integrated image IG. Instead, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on the predetermined layer in front of it, it is difficult to visually recognize the scale image and the gauge image GG, and the state is gradually made invisible.

  Then, the display output (display on the layer) regarding the integrated image IG is ended within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) during which the disappearance effect image HSE is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image HSE of the disappearance effect (here, the wide area disappearance effect using half or more of the predetermined display area) is displayed under the condition that the IG is not displayed on the specific layer. The disappearing effect image HSE is not displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed (timing tC4c) from the start of its display (timing tC4g). In this regard, with regard to the timing tC4g of this non-display, the display change (here, liquid crystal display) in the effect display device 1600 in the post-operation effects is generated irrespective of which timing the operation is accepted. It is desirable to set it to arrive within the period of execution. That is, as will be described later, the disappearance effect image HSE and the general image (integrated general image) are displayed on a predetermined layer in front of the image (post-operation effect) relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600. And is displayed in a form overlapping with this. Therefore, while the image HSE of the disappearance effect is displayed (FIGS. 252 (j) and (k)), it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image (post-operation effect) associated with the display change on the effect display device 1600. There is.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation reception is performed, first, after-operation performance is started, and in addition, the integrated image IG is displayed in any mode when the operation reception is performed. 232 (a) to (d) of FIG. 232, the remaining time suggested by the gauge image GG, and the like are maintained in a state in which it can be grasped. Then, after this, among the post-operation effects, the image HSE of the disappearing effect in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “image concerning the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)” and the integrated image IG. The display will start. As described above, as the disappearance effect, there are a narrow range extinction effect with low performance and a wide area extinction effect with low performance, and here, the disappearance effect is executed as the wide area extinction effect. While the image HSE of the disappearance effect is being displayed, the integrated image IG is hidden, and when the image HSE of the disappearance effect is hidden thereafter, among the post-operation effects. The "image related to the display change on the effect display device 1600 (background notice by the princess character)" is finally visible in a clear state (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)").

  That is, in this case, when the operation is accepted, first, it is possible to enjoy what the aspect of the integrated image IG was, and then what aspect appears as the disappearance effect, and then, Since it becomes possible to enjoy what kind of form will appear as post-operation performance, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the operation is accepted by such various performances.

  In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the timing to start displaying the image (post-operation effect) relating to the display change in the effect display device 1600 is not the timing tC4b but the timing tC4c or the disappearance effect. It can be said that it is more desirable to change the timing within the period (timing tC4c to tC4g) being executed. However, also in this case, since the effect sound and the post-operation effect by the lamp are started to be executed at the timing tC4b, the start timing of the post-operation effect itself is still the timing tC4b.

  On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 250 (g) to 250 (j), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the first acceptance permitted state has ended) without the operation by the player being detected. As described above, since the first acceptance permissible state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode, the post-operation performance is performed even when the set time has elapsed without the player's operation. Meanwhile, the mock image (in this case, the integrated mock image IG) is hidden.

  Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 250 (b) and 250 (g), in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled, the same operation as when the operation by the player is accepted. , The integrated image (here, integrated integrated image) is not hidden, and the display state is maintained. More specifically, even when the automatic button function is enabled, at that time (timing tC4f), the change caused by the image (here, the integrated image) does not occur, and there Until the timing tC4fa when a little time (predetermined time) has passed from the arrival, the “display of the image” is continued in the same manner as when the operation acceptance is permitted. There is. In addition, in this example, the display area of the gauge image GG is slightly left even at the time when the state in which the operation reception is permitted (the second acceptance permissible state) is finished, and the display area remains after the timing tC4f. The display area is reduced to "0".

  With such a configuration, even when the post-operation performance is started by activating the automatic button function, the mood image is displayed in any mode (any of a plurality of modes with different expectations). It will be possible to confirm whether it was.

  Further, in this example, the time from the timing tC4c when the operation is received until the mood image is hidden (not visible) and the mood image is hidden (not visible) from the timing tC4f when the automatic button function is activated. ) It is supposed to be the same as the time it takes.

  In addition, in this example, even when the automatic button function is enabled (timing tC4f), as shown in FIG. 250 (g), the mock image (here, the integrated mock image IG) is not displayed. When the wide area disappearance effect is executed, the general image (in this case, the integrated general image) is hidden while the wide area disappearance effect is being executed. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of the effect, an image related to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (c)) when the operation by the player is received, and an image when the automatic button function is activated. The image is executed in the same manner as the image applied to the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 250 (g)) (all images are “image HSE”). This is a different part from the case of the example shown in FIG. 249 (the narrow area disappearance effect when the simulated image is hidden in the non-automatic reception mode is different from that during operation).

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation reception is not in time for the last minute, the same mode as when the operation reception is in time appears, so that "after the operation reception is in time Has started to be executed ”, and it is expected that the deterioration of the entertainment level will be suppressed.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 250, when the timing tC1 before the timing tC3 when the first acceptance permitted state occurs, the wide area type pre-production using half or more of the predetermined display area is started to be executed. (Corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”). Then, within the period in which the wide area type pre-production is being executed, the display of the model image (here, the integrated model image IG) of the operation receiving portion and the output of the first permissible sound are started ( The timing is tC3, which corresponds to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (f)”. At the time when the display of the general image (here, the integrated general image IG) is started, a part or the whole of the general image (integrated general image IG) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the wide area type pre-production. ing. In other words, as time passes, the range in which the image related to the wide area type pre-production is displayed is reduced or the transmittance is increased, so that the "image (integrated image) ) Gradually increasing the visibility ”is provided (FIGS. 252 (f) to (h)). In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of performance, the wide area type pre-production is being executed, and the general image (here, the integrated general image IG) is being displayed. The timing tC4 at which the allowable state occurs arrives and the operation acceptance is permitted. That is, in this case, since the operation acceptance is allowed at a stage in which the visibility of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) is being improved, the mood image (integrated muffled image IG) can be accepted. Confirm the mode (expectation level) as the model image (integrated model image IG) whether to hide the operation reception (post-operation effect) without confirming the mode (expectation level). After that, it becomes possible to provide a strategic production such as whether the operation reception (post-operation production) is made to be hidden or not.

  Here, the image used for such a wide area pre-production may be, for example, an image displayed in another layer before the layer in which the general image (integrated general image IG) is displayed. , The image (integrated image) and the image (wide area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the image (integrated image) in the moving image is gradually increased. It may be one that expresses how it goes.

  Regarding the wide area type pre-production, considering that it suggests the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state with a relatively high degree of expectation, unlike the case of the second acceptance-permitted state, in the presentation display device 1600. It is desirable to output not only the image display but also the effect sound related thereto. Then, a part of the effect sound related to such wide area type pre-effect may be executed so as to function as the first allowable sound.

  Also, as a wide area type pre-production, it is possible to prepare a plurality of modes with different expectations and selectively display any of those modes based on the result of the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination. It is desirable to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 250 (c), the wide area type pre-production according to this example is started when the timing tC1 in the “first variation pattern” arrives, and the first acceptance allowable state occurs. It is executed across the timing tC4 and is ended within the set time of the first acceptance permitted state. However, between the start and the end of such wide area type pre-production, the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production are sequentially executed as the wide area type pre-production. It is like this. These two wide area type pre-effects may be displayed as one moving image data set or may be displayed as different moving image data sets.

  Here, the first wide area type pre-production is started when the timing tC1 arrives (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (b)”), and the second wide area type pre-production is timing. When tC2 arrives, the display is started in a manner that replaces the first wide area type pre-production (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)"), but any of these pre-productions is displayed. Even during the period, the "imitation image of the operating means to be operated" is displayed during the period in which the pre-effect is displayed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250 (c), when the timing tC1a within the period in which the first wide area type pre-production is executed arrives, the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed. This makes it possible to recognize to which of the plurality of operation means the operation opportunity is given, at a relatively early stage (corresponding to the “situation shown in FIG. 252 (c)”). In FIG. 252 (c), the image HTH1 according to the first wide area type pre-production is described as producing an “image in which the entire black image (here, the integrated black image) is outlined” is produced. It is just a white state, and it is at a stage where it can not be said that it is an image of the effect button that is the operation target. After this, "the image A1 in which the entire image of the moxibustion (here, the integrated mood image) is outlined" is "at least the outline of the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) by at least one of the decoration and the pattern. The image is displayed as a “shaped image A2” (corresponding to “the situation shown in FIG. 252 (d)”), which suggests that the operation target is the effect button. From this, it can be said that such an “image A2” is a full-scale image of the operation means that is the operation target. That is, such an image A2 is executed as an effect that looks as if the "image HTH1 by the first wide area type pre-effect" was produced. The “outline of the image (here, the integrated image)” means the outline of the operation receiving part (here, the outline of the operation receiving part and the outline of the peripheral decoration image).

  However, when the timing tC2 arrives, whether the “image A2 as a general image (integrated general image)” and the “image HTH1 related to the first wide area type pre-production” which have been displayed until then are not displayed. The "second wide area type pre-production" is started to be executed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (e)"). Then, when the timing tC3 within the period in which the second wide area type pre-production is being executed, the full-scale image (integrated full-scale image IG) is displayed again (in the “state shown in FIG. 252 (f)”). Correspondingly, the timing tC4 at which the first acceptance permitted state occurs in the displayed state is reached (corresponding to "the situation shown in FIG. 252 (g)"). That is, the second-time image (FIGS. 252 (f) to (k)) is continuously displayed from the time when the operation acceptance is permitted until at least the operation is not permitted. An operation is accepted while the image is displayed, and the post-operation effect (here, the first post-operation effect) is started to be executed.

  That is, in this case, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, the pre-effect is executed twice, and among the pre-effects, “the display is hidden before the operation acceptance is allowed”. "(1) image of the first time (Figs. 252 (c) and (d))" and "2nd image of the second time (Figs. 252 (f) to (k)" that continues to be displayed after the operation is accepted.) According to such a configuration, it is possible to have a higher degree of freedom without considering the mode (result of the effect determination or the like) to be displayed when the acceptance acceptable state occurs. Since it becomes possible to display a mood image (middle image (first time) that is hidden before operation acceptance is allowed) under the direction design, it is possible to broaden the range of effects. In this sense, "operation acceptance is allowed The image that has been hidden before (1st time) ”is displayed as a mode (a mode different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232) that cannot be displayed when the operation acceptance is within the permitted period. It is desirable to be done.

  Here, the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is being performed is similar to the above-mentioned mood image displayed while the narrow area type pre-production is being performed. Since the display state is continued even after the state in which the operation acceptance is permitted occurs, it is displayed as one of the plurality of modes shown in FIG. 232 (in the example shown in FIG. 250, , An integrated image IGd which is a special aspect). On the other hand, with respect to the mood image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is performed, at least one of the shape and the pattern (decoration) different from any of the modes shown in FIG. 232. It is desirable that the image is displayed as an image (here, image A2). For example, the shape is expressed by deforming the operation means (operation receiving portion) that is the operation target, such as making the contour part of the image of the rounded image round, or using many curved lines without using many straight lines. A method of displaying as an image or the like can be adopted. In the narrow area type pre-production described above, an image having at least one of a shape and a pattern (decoration) different from the acceptance permitted state does not appear.

  Further, when the operation means to be operated is a specific operation means, a plurality of second images shown in FIG. 232 are displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is being performed. Regardless of which mode is displayed, the mood image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is performed can be displayed by one mode (same mode). It is desirable to do so. That is, in this case, the first wide area type pre-production can be exclusively used to "show which type of operation means will be given an operation opportunity soon". According to the first wide area type pre-production as described above, the player can be made to recognize the operation target without deteriorating the interest of the game, and thus the operation target is made to be recognized by the player. Then, the second wide area type pre-production in which the degree of expectation is suggested is shifted to.

  In addition, in order to preferably obtain such an effect, the first wide area type pre-production has a higher expectation among the plurality of operation means (operation button 410, sword decoration 5001) (sword decoration). It can be said that it is more desirable to execute it only when an operation opportunity is given to the body 5001). That is, in this case, in either of the case where the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 occurs or the acceptance acceptable state in which the operation opportunity is given to the sword decoration 5001 occurs. However, prior to this, the wide area type pre-production can be executed, but regarding the first wide area type pre-production, there is an operation opportunity for the sword decoration body 5001 of the operation button 410 and the sword decoration body 5001. It will be executable only when granted. In this case, the first acceptance permitted state may be generated as the acceptance permitted state in which the operation opportunity can be given only to the sword ornament 5001. On the other hand, the second wide area type pre-production is executed both when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Made possible. At this time, the second wide area type pre-effect is executed in the same manner when the operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410 and when the operation opportunity is given to the sword ornament 5001. Or may be executed in a different manner.

  Further, when the mock image (second time) displayed while the second wide area type pre-production is performed is displayed as the integrated mock image IG, the display target area of the gauge image GG is included in the peripheral decoration image. However, even in such a case, for the mock image (first time) displayed while the first wide area type pre-production is performed, the display target area of the gauge image GG is displayed. You may make it display as an image which does not include. In this case, it goes without saying that the shape of the mock image (integrated mound image) is different. At this time, the mound image may be displayed as an integrated mood image that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that does not include the display target area of the gauge image GG, or an image that is not integrated with the peripheral decoration image in the first place. May be displayed as.

  According to the effect example described above, in the second acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 249, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is not displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound is output as the acceptance permission sound. However, the second allowable sound is not output. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 250, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) can be displayed in a special mode, and the first acceptance sound and the second acceptance sound are respectively accepted acceptance sounds. It is possible to output. However, in the first acceptance permissible state shown in FIG. 250, even when a mode (low expected mode used in FIG. 249) different from the special mode is displayed as the general image (integrated general image IG). It is needless to say that the acceptance allowable sound is processed as described with reference to FIG. 250, and the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound can be output as the acceptance allowable sound.

  At the start of the output of the second permissible sound (message sound), the image related to the wide area type pre-production remains, and the form of the mock image (integrated mood image IG) is difficult to visually recognize. In a state where it is difficult to visually recognize the form of the general image (integrated general image IG), the state in which only the first allowable sound (sound effect) is output is changed to the state in which the second allowable sound (message sound) is also output. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the possibility that the mock image (integrated mock image IG) is displayed in a special mode by the acceptance sound. That is, if the second permissible sound (message sound) is output, it is possible to have a sense of expectation that the general image (integrated general image IGd) having a special aspect is exposed. In the middle, the general image (integrated general image IG) is gradually exposed.

  The integrated image IG includes the display target area (compartment image KG) of the gauge image GG, but the integrated image IG is displayed in either a low expectation mode (IGa) or a high expectation mode (IGd). In this case, the display target area of the gauge image GG (the target portion where the gauge image GG is displayed and the portion that increases as the display area of the gauge image GG decreases) is displayed as the same image. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easy to recognize how much remaining time is left, regardless of the mode of the image.

  As described above with reference to FIG. 232, the low-expectation mode (IGa) and the high-expectation mode (IGd) differ not only in the mood image but also in the peripheral decoration image. Further, although the operation means (effect button or the like) to be operated by the player can emit light in the same manner as the general image, the peripheral decoration member does not emit light in the same manner as the peripheral decoration image SSG.

  According to the effect example described above, when in the predetermined game state, the acceptance allowable state at the time of suppression that allows operation acceptance while the specific effect sound is suppressed, and the specific effect sound are suppressed. Although there are a plurality of acceptable reception states during non-suppression in which operation reception is permitted while there is no operation, the integrated image IG is a special mode in the first acceptable reception state among the acceptable reception states during suppression. While it is possible to display, in the second acceptance-permitted state of the acceptance-permitted state during non-suppression, the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special aspect (IGd) and is different from the special aspect. Can be displayed in. In the second acceptance permissible state, the integrated image IG is not displayed selectively from a plurality of modes (IGa to IGc) different in expectation except the special mode (IGd), but in one mode (IGa). Only the display may be possible. According to such a configuration, when the specific effect sound is suppressed, it is possible to suppress the feeling that the performance is poor compared to when the specific effect sound is not suppressed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the third condition (third acceptance acceptable state) different from both the first condition (first acceptance acceptable state) and the second condition (second acceptance acceptable state) is satisfied. In this case, after displaying the integrated image, the gauge image GG included in the integrated image is one of the modes shown in FIGS. 239 to 243 (for example, the modes shown in FIGS. 242 and 243). ) Is adopted and displayed as described above. However, when such a third acceptance permissible state (a valid period in which the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease) is generated, as in the case of the first acceptance permissible state, prior to this, "the sound of BGM reproduction (specific type Effect sound) ”is changed from the non-suppressed state to the suppressed state (or the non-output state), and the post-operation display that does not appear in the other acceptable reception states including the first acceptable reception state and the second acceptable reception state ( It is desirable that the post-operation effect) and the post-operation output sound be executed. That is, when the “BGM playback sound” is set to the suppressed state (or the non-output state) when the acceptance acceptable state occurs, it is expected that a mode (special mode) with a high degree of expectation is displayed as the integrated image IG. However, when it is not displayed in the special mode, the performance is inferior to the case where the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output unsuppressed, which makes the game stand out. There is concern about a decline in interest. In this respect, in the third acceptance permissible state, a mode in which the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced is allowed to appear, and the post-operation display that appears only when this mode appears is executed. Even if the special aspect does not appear as the integrated image IG, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the game enjoyment.

  However, in any of the first acceptance permitted state and the third acceptance permitted state, the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" in the suppressed state (or non-output state) is triggered by the operation acceptance. It is desirable that the output is not restarted in the non-suppressing mode, and the display change and the output sound after the operation are performed while the suppression state (or the non-output state) is maintained.

  Even if the reception acceptable state occurs after the “sound of BGM reproduction (production sound of a specific type)” is set to the suppressed state (or non-output state), when the third acceptance permitted state occurs, Unlike the case of 1 acceptance permissible state, it is possible to prevent the integrated image IG from being displayed in a special mode, and to display it only in one mode (for example, the normal mode IGa). desirable. According to such a configuration, when the “sound of BGM reproduction (specific type effect sound)” is set to the suppressed state (or non-output state), either of the first acceptance permitted state and the third acceptance permitted state It becomes possible to add an interesting point as to what happens.

  Further, in the third acceptance permissible state, it is assumed that the display area of the gauge image GG is executed as an effective period in which the display area is not reduced, but instead of this, a mode in which the display target area of the gauge image GG is not included (FIG. 247, FIG. In the mode shown in 248), it may be executed as the effective period in which the mock image (which may be the integrated mood image or may not be the integrated mood image) is displayed. It can be said that even with such a configuration, the same operational effect can be achieved. Needless to say, in this case, the gauge image GG itself is not displayed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types with different occurrence conditions are prepared as the acceptance acceptable state, but when the acceptance acceptable state different from the first acceptance acceptable state occurs. However, when this is the acceptance type of the specific type, it is desirable that the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special mode (IGd). However, for the acceptance acceptable state in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in the special aspect (IGd), it is preferable to execute the acceptance acceptance state in the automatic acceptance aspect in order to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the user forgets to operate. Is desirable.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 250, the automatic button function is activated at a predetermined timing within the set time (effective period). The button function may be activated, and the execution of “the same post-operation effect as when the operation by the player is accepted within the valid period” may be started. In this case, the processing from the timing when the automatic button function is activated is the same as the “processing from timing tC4f” shown in FIGS. 250 (g) and 250 (h).

  Regarding the images applied to the disappearance effect shown in FIGS. 251 and 252, a predetermined transmittance is set for the images themselves so that the images behind the images can be visually recognized although it is difficult. Good.

  According to the effect examples shown in FIGS. 249 to 252, when the operation by the player is accepted or the automatic button function is activated and the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the image of the image (integrated Both the mode of the chemical image IG) and the mode of the gauge image GG are displayed in a good visible state without being made difficult to be visually recognized by the disappearance effect (FIG. 251 (f), See FIG. 252 (i)). As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the post-operation performance while recognizing in which mode the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is displayed and how much time is left. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 251, even if the operation reception is performed in the second acceptance permissible state and the after-operation effect (second after-operation effect) is executed, the background image is displayed before and after the after-operation effect is started. This is maintained without causing a switch. On the other hand, in the effect example shown in FIG. 252, when the operation acceptance is performed and the after-operation effect (first after-operation effect) is executed in the first acceptance allowable state, before and after the after-operation effect is started. The background image is switched (after operation, the space background).

  With such a configuration, it is possible to effectively use the automatic reception function, and it is possible to appropriately cause the background image to be switched even if the user forgets to perform the operation. Will be able to progress smoothly. On the other hand, in the acceptance acceptable state in which the automatic acceptance function is not enabled, the background image is not changed, so when the operation is forgotten, the background image is not switched or only the background image is displayed. It becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of inconvenient events such as sudden changes.

  In addition, in the second acceptance permissible state, after the operation acceptance (or the activation of the automatic button function) is performed, a large part of the display area becomes invisible because it overlaps with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect. However, as described above, by changing the background image itself, if there is even a small portion that does not overlap with the image HSE applied to the wide area disappearance effect, by checking the image in that portion, the state after the operation can be confirmed. Can be recognized, and the disadvantage caused by executing the wide area disappearance effect can be eliminated. In order to suitably obtain such an effect, when the operation reception (or the activation of the automatic button function) is performed in the second reception permissible state, after the operation in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively high. To make the background images when the post-operation production is executed different from each other when the production is executed and when the post-operation production is executed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively low. Is more desirable. The ratio of these may be 0% or 100%. In this case, the background image itself is changed when the post-operation effect is executed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively high, whereas the post-operation effect is changed in a mode in which the jackpot pattern appears relatively low. The background image may be maintained unchanged when is executed.

  In the above-described production example, when the operation sound is given, when the specific type of effect sound is output in the non-suppressing mode (second acceptance allowable state), and when the specific type of effect sound is output in the suppressing mode. There is a case where it is set to a non-output state (first acceptance permissible state), and the ratio (expectation level) of the post-operation effect that is executed in a mode that appears only at the time of winning the big hit is different depending on those types. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance when an operation opportunity is given. This ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  In the first acceptance permissible state, when a manipulation opportunity is given, a specific type of effect sound is output in a suppression mode or a non-output state, so that when an after-operation effect occurs, It is decided to make some creative ideas so that the corresponding production sound can be heard prominently. In this regard, in the above configuration, regarding the acceptance permission sound output when the first acceptance permission state occurs, when the performance acceptance is performed when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state, the performance acceptance is performed. Since the output state is terminated based on this, the effect sound according to the post-operation effect can be emphasized without being disturbed by the acceptance acceptable sound.

  There are a plurality of types of acceptance permission states in which the integrated image IG can be displayed in a special mode (IGd). In any of these acceptance permission states, operation acceptance is performed when the acceptance permission sound is in the output state. Then, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound be ended midway. On the other hand, a plurality of types are prepared as the acceptance acceptable state in which the integrated image IG cannot be displayed in the special mode (IGd). However, in the acceptance acceptable state, when the acceptance acceptable sound is in the output state. When the operation acceptance is performed, the acceptance permission sound is terminated halfway, and when the acceptance acceptance sound is in the output state, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated halfway when the operation acceptance is performed ( It is desirable to include both the second acceptance permission state and the like) (can occur under different conditions).

  As described above, the acceptance permission sound includes the sound effect and the message sound. In this respect, the message sound is always interrupted when the integrated reception image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa) when the production is received in the output state, whereas the sound effect is , If the integrated image is displayed in the normal mode (IGa), it is not interrupted when the production is interrupted in the output state (first acceptance allowable state) It is desirable to set the time (second acceptance acceptable state). It is desirable to prepare a plurality of types of acceptance-allowed states including the first acceptance-allowed state as the acceptance-allowed states in which the message sound is output.

  The wide area type pre-production shown in FIGS. 250 and 252 is realized by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-production. In this regard, in both the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production, a mock image (integrated mood image) showing the operation means (operation receiving portion) which is the operation target is displayed. However, the simulated image A2 displayed within the execution period of the first wide area type pre-production is the simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state). Is different from, and does not gradually change to the general image (integrated general image IG).

  That is, the image A2 (FIG. 252 (d)) displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is not displayed when the second wide area type pre-production is executed prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance allowable state. The display state (invisible state) is set. Then, after a predetermined time in which no image of the operation target is displayed (is maintained in a state where it cannot be visually recognized) (FIG. 252 (e)), the image of the second wide area type pre-production is displayed as the image of the execution period An image different from the mock image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is displayed (FIG. 252 (f)). And, this “second image within the execution period of the wide area type pre-production” is the actual image (integrated image IG) itself displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state). The image HSE related to the second wide area type pre-production is displayed in a manner crossing the occurrence of the acceptance acceptable state (first acceptance acceptable state), so that the image (integrated image IG) is displayed. Operation acceptance will be allowed. The general image (integrated general image IG) is also displayed at the time when the operation is accepted and the post-operation effect is started to be executed (FIG. 252 (i)). It is designed to be displayed for a period from before the acceptance acceptable state occurs until after it ends.

  Here, when the mock image A2 is displayed in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production), the operation means (operation receiving portion) which the mood image A2 is making is about to be displayed (other productions). Opportunity will always be given (without sandwiching). That is, in the example of the above-described effect, the accept image is allowed to be generated while maintaining the display state of the mage image A2. "A state in which no mock image that has been mangled is displayed." It is designed to be displayed as an integrated image IG).

  According to such a configuration, in order to suggest that a high-expectation acceptance-permitted state occurs, operation acceptance is permitted even when the mood image is displayed for a long time as a pre-production. It is expected that the operation will be prompted without delaying the timing. That is, if the mood image is displayed for a long time as the pre-production and the acceptance acceptable state is generated while the mood image is displayed, the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted suddenly comes. This may result in frequent operation delays even though the pre-production is being performed. In this respect, according to the above configuration, prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance-permitted state, a mood image having a depiction different from the mood image displayed within the set time of the acceptance-permitted state is preceded. Not only is it displayed, but after a time in which no mood image is displayed, a mood image displayed within the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is displayed. That is, it becomes possible for the player to recognize that the first acceptable reception state can occur only within a period after the mood image displayed within the set time for the acceptable reception state is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation delay from occurring while displaying the mock image as a pre-production for a long time.

  In order to preferably obtain such an effect, the “time required for the first wide area type pre-production” and the “time for which the mock image A2 is displayed” are set after the “second wide area type pre-production is performed. It is more preferable to set so that the "1 time until the acceptance acceptable state occurs" or "the time from the display of the full image (integrated image IG) to the occurrence of the first acceptance acceptable state" becomes shorter. The desirability is clear. The mimetic image A2 may be displayed from the start of the first wide area type pre-production.

  Further, in order to preferably obtain such an action and effect, regarding the mock image (integrated mood image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-production, “motion in the movable region” as the operation unit (operation receiving unit) "And" behavior when operated "are displayed dynamically (see FIG. 233, etc.), while the image A2 displayed in the first wide area type pre-production is as follows. It is more desirable to display without dynamic display. The dynamic image (integrated dynamic image IG) displayed in the second wide area type pre-effect continues its dynamic display state even after the first acceptance permitted state occurs. In addition, the image of the small area (integrated image IG) displayed in the pre-production is also in the form of expressing the "movement in the movable area" and the "behavior when operated" as the operation means (operation receiving portion). This is dynamically displayed, and the state of the dynamic display is continued even after the second acceptance permitted state occurs.

  The general image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (f) and the general image (integrated image IG) in the state shown in FIG. 252 (g) are images. Although they themselves are the same, the transmittance may be different.

  It is more desirable to display the image KTH according to the narrow area type pre-effect shown in FIG. 251 as an image of such a size that the entire image (integrated image IG) can be covered from the front side. . Then, the display area of the image KTH is reduced and / or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the image of the image KTH is displayed from the position where the image KTH was displayed (the integrated image IG). ) Is desirably displayed in such a manner that it gradually becomes exposed as time passes.

  Of the images HTH1 and HTH2 related to the wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 252, the image HTH1 is displayed behind the mock image A2 (does not adversely affect the visibility of the mock image A2). On the other hand, the image HTH2 is displayed in front of the mock image (integrated muffled image IG) (does not adversely affect the visibility of the mood image (integrated muffled image IG)). That is, after the image HTH2 is displayed as an image having a size capable of covering the entire mock image (integrated mock image IG) from the front side, as in the case of the image KTH related to the narrow area type front effect (FIG. 252 ( e)), the display area is reduced and / or the transmittance thereof is increased, and thereby, a simulated image (integrated simulated image IG) from the position where the image HTH2 was displayed. Is gradually exposed as time passes. On the other hand, the image HTH1 is displayed so as to make the depiction of the mock image A2 stand out. Therefore, there is a demerit of making it difficult to visually recognize the mock image when giving an operation opportunity (any operation It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not an operation opportunity is given to the means, and an operation delay occurs).

  The wide area type pre-production is performed by sequentially executing the first wide area type pre-production and the second wide area type pre-production, and regarding the production sound output in the wide area type pre-production, these are treated as one sound data (1 It is desirable that the sound is output by playing back one sound effect / song).

  Further, in the narrow area type pre-production shown in FIG. 251, the background image displayed from before is maintained without being changed in the narrow area type pre-production, but in the wide area type shown in FIG. In the pre-production, the background image displayed from before this is changed in the wide-area pre-production (here, it is changed at the start of the wide-area pre-production). In such a configuration, the background change can be executed as a part of the wide area type pre-production, and thus the front effect having a higher directivity than that of the narrow area type pre-production which is limited to the partial production change. It will be executed as a production. It should be noted that the background image (FIG. 251 (a)) that was displayed before the narrow area type pre-production was performed and the background image that was displayed before the wide area type pre-production was performed (FIG. 252 ( It may be a background image different from a)).

  In the second wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 252 (f), an integrated mood image integrated with the "periphery decoration image in which the partition image KG partitioning the display target area of the gauge image GG is decorated (depicted)" Although the mage image is displayed as the IG, in the first wide area type pre-production shown in FIG. 252 (d), the mage image in which such a partition image KG is not decorated (depicted) is displayed. As a result, in the first wide area type pre-production, it is possible to entertain the pre-production without causing the player to worry about at least the remaining time. The section image KG that is not decorated (depicted) may be any image that does not display the section image KG that is decorated (depicted) in the integrated model image IG, and at least a part of the integrated model image IG. In addition to the mode in which the decoration (gauge region) is not displayed, the mode itself may be different in shape from the integrated general image IG.

  As described above, “operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state, and the acceptance-permitted state is executed in the automatic reception mode” Are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.), and the “first acceptance permitted state” is prepared as one of these acceptance permitted states. However, in these acceptance-permitted states, “the first wide area type pre-production (FIG. 252 (c) to (e)) in which a mood image is displayed and hidden and the timing of occurrence of the acceptance-permitted state are straddled. In addition to the first acceptance allowable state in which the second wide area type pre-production (FIGS. 252 (e) to (g)) in which the mood image is displayed is performed, “the mood image is displayed and hidden. Specific reception acceptance in which the first wide area type pre-production is not performed, and the second wide area type pre-production (FIG. 252 (e) to (g)) in which a mock image is displayed over the occurrence timing of the acceptance permitted state It is desirable to include the state. That is, in this case, in the first acceptance-permitted state, the post-operation effect is executed at a higher rate than in the specific acceptance-permitted state in a mode that appears only during a big hit, so that the timing at which the operation acceptance is permitted is higher than that. It becomes possible to enhance the enjoyment of the game when the timing (the timing at which the first wide area type pre-stage effect appears) substantially comes. In this case, the second wide area type pre-production performed when the first acceptance permitted state occurs and the second wide area type pre-produced performed when the specific acceptance permitted state does not necessarily have to be the same content. It may be executed as different effect contents (images). Further, the operation means to which the operation opportunity is given may be different between the first acceptance permitted state and the second acceptance permitted state.

  As described above, the “acceptance state in which the operation acceptance is permitted while the specific type of effect sound (BGM reproduction) is output in the non-suppressed mode and is executed in the non-automatically accepted mode” is the occurrence condition (variation). A plurality of different patterns (for example, patterns) are prepared, and a “second acceptable reception state” is prepared as one of the acceptable reception states.

  The wide area type pre-production which is performed in the first acceptance permissive state is executed under the condition that "specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output. (BGM reproduction) "is executed for a longer time than the narrow area type pre-production (second acceptance permissible state) that is executed while being output without suppression, so this is maintained favorably for entertainment. You will be able to. In particular, by making only the first wide area type pre-production among the wide area type pre-productions be executed for a longer time than the narrow area type pre-production, it is suitable for amusement of interest even before the acceptance acceptable state occurs. You will be able to increase it. The timing at which the "specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)" is suppressed or not output may be reached while the first wide area type pre-production is being executed, or the first wide area type before. You may make it arrive before the production is started to be executed.

  According to the above-described production example, when the wide area type pre-production (FIG. 252) is performed when the first acceptance permitted state occurs, the production change including the background image is caused, whereas when the second acceptance permitted state occurs. When the narrow area type pre-production (FIG. 251) is performed, the background image is not changed and the production is changed while maintaining the background image. Furthermore, in the first acceptance permissible state that occurs while such a wide area type pre-production is being performed, the background image can be further changed by the post-operation production (automatic reception mode) regardless of whether the operation is performed or not. On the other hand, in the second acceptance permissible state that occurs while the narrow area type pre-production is being performed, the production is advanced while the background image is not changed by the post-operation production and is maintained. There is. According to such a configuration, in the first acceptance permitted state, the background image is changed twice before and after the occurrence in the first acceptance permitted state, so that the effect is different from that in the second acceptance permitted state. It will be possible to greatly enhance the sexuality, it will be possible to further focus on the operation-related production.

  In the wide area extinction effect according to the above-described production example, the background image is changed accordingly (FIG. 252 (j)). However, the timing at which the background image is changed may come after the timing at which the wide area disappearance effect is started. That is, in this case, in FIG. 252 (i), the post-operation effect (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed while the background image is not changed. Then, after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the wide area disappearance effect first makes the background image displayed in the acceptance-permitted state difficult or invisible (FIG. 252 (j)). The background image is not changed in the situation shown in (1), and then the background image is changed by displaying another background image (the situation shown in FIG. 252 (k), or The background image is changed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (l)). The other background image may be displayed in such a manner that it is gradually exposed while the wide area disappearance effect is being performed, or may be displayed after the wide area disappearance effect is finished. You may.

  In the example shown in FIG. 252, as the post-operation effect, first, the display change in the liquid crystal display (background notice by the princess character) is started to be executed, but instead of this, the light emission from the lamp or the output sound after the operation is performed. As the post-operation effect, execution may be started first, and the display change in the liquid crystal display may be started later (for example, at the timing when the background image is changed).

  As described above, a plurality of "acceptance acceptable states in which the wide area disappearance effect is executed in the automatic acceptance mode" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of them, "first acceptance acceptable state" is prepared. However, in these acceptance permissible states, in addition to the “first acceptance permissible state”, “post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) in the same mode as the first acceptance-allowed state can be executed, but the wide area disappearance effect It is desirable to include the “special acceptance permissible state” that is executed as different images (the display timings may be the same). That is, in this case, even if the same post-operation effect is performed, the extinction effect will be different, so that it is possible to improve the effect and it is expected that a decrease in the entertainment level of the game is suppressed. become. The special acceptance permitted state may be the specific acceptance permitted state described above. The specific acceptance permissible state and the special acceptance permissible state are executed in the same manner as the first acceptance permissible state regarding aspects such as the display timing of the image, the processing regarding the output of the acceptance acceptable sound, and the processing regarding the disappearance effect. .

  As described above, a plurality of "acceptance acceptable states in which non-automatic acceptance mode and narrow range disappearance effect are performed" are prepared with different occurrence conditions (variation patterns, etc.). As one of the above, a "second acceptance acceptable state" is prepared. However, these acceptance-permitted states include, in addition to the "second acceptance-permitted state", a post-operation effect (a third post-effect effect) of a type different from the second acceptance-allowed state (for example, conversation notice and movable body motion) ) Can be executed, but it is desirable that the narrow range disappearance effect includes a special reception permission state in which the same image is executed (the display timing may be the same). That is, in this case, since the disappearance effect itself is displayed as the same image even if a different post-operation effect is performed, it is easy to be in a situation where the operation is accepted regardless of the type of the post-operation effect. You will be able to recognize. The special acceptance-permitted state is executed in the same manner as the second acceptance-permitted state with regard to the display timing of the image, the processing regarding the output of the acceptance-permitted sound, the processing regarding the disappearance effect, and the like.

  In the narrow area disappearance effect, the image KSE applied to the narrow area disappearance effect is hidden even after the post-operation performance is started to be executed and the general image (integrated joint image IG) is hidden. Instead, the display state is maintained (see FIG. 251 (i)). In this regard, the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is longer than the time from when the operation is accepted (when the post-operation performance is started to be executed) until the mood image (integrated mood image IG) is hidden. It is desirable to set such that the time from when () is hidden to when the image KSE applied to the narrow range type disappearance effect is hidden is longer. According to such a configuration, even after the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the display state of the image (integrated image IG) is maintained and the mode can be confirmed, but the after-operation effect is The reason why it is not clearly revealed is that it is not due to the "image in which the display state is maintained" but to the directivity of "the image KSE applied to the narrow range disappearance effect". As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. In this case, it is needless to say that the narrow area disappearance effect is performed not by a fade-out which ends relatively early, but by a dynamic display using an image different from the mock image. With regard to the "dynamic display by another image" as such a narrow range type extinction effect, a plurality of types having different expectations are prepared and selectively generated according to the types of acceptance / reception states with different generation conditions. It is more desirable to do so.

  According to the wide area disappearance effect according to the above-described production example, it is possible to expect a function that suggests that the first acceptance permitted state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. On the other hand, in the second acceptance permissible state, since the operation is accepted only by the operation by the player and the post-operation effect is not executed, it is easy to recognize that the post-operation effect is executed without affecting the entire screen. However, it can be said that it is advantageous in that the post-operation effect can be immediately executed in a good visual recognition state by executing the narrow area disappearance effect in which the image related to the disappearance effect is small. According to such a configuration, in the case of a wide area type disappearance fact, it is required to change the background image to secure the visibility, but in the case of a narrow area type disappearance fact, this is not changed. It becomes possible to secure the visibility only by performing the effect after the operation while maintaining.

  As described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, a plurality of modes (first mode) in which the proportion (0% or 100% may be stopped) of the jackpot symbol is different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the jackpot determination , (Including the second aspect), the post-operation effect (second operation effect) is executed. In this regard, in the case where the first mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively high) appears and the second mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively low) appears as post-operation performance (second post-operation performance), In each case, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed in the same manner (image). On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state, a plurality of modes (third mode) in which the proportion (0% or 100%) at which the big hit symbol is stopped are different based on the result of the effect determination according to the result of the big hit determination , (Including the fourth aspect), the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect) is executed. In this regard, in the case where the third mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively high) appears and the fourth mode (mode in which the ratio is relatively low) appears as post-operation performance (first post-operation performance), The wide area disappearance effect is executed in different modes (images), or when the third mode (a relatively high proportion) appears, the wide area disappearance effect is executed, and the fourth mode (relatively). It is desirable to execute the narrow-range extinction effect when a mode in which the ratio is low appears. The narrow range disappearance effect at this time may be the same as or different from the narrow range disappearance effect performed corresponding to the second acceptance permissible state.

  With such a configuration, in the first acceptance-permitted state in which the wide-area disappearance effect may occur among the first acceptance-permitted state and the second acceptance-permitted state, the disappearance effect itself has a degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the reduced visibility of the post-operation effect due to the wide area disappearance effect. It should be noted that not only the first acceptance permissible state and the second acceptance permissible state but also the later-described fourth acceptance permissible state and fifth acceptance permissible state in both the variation pattern that is a big hit and the variation pattern that is a big hit. It is possible that the above-mentioned first variation pattern and second variation pattern, as well as the fourth variation pattern and the fifth variation pattern, which will be described later, are “variation patterns at the time of a big hit and variation patterns at the time of loss (at the time of losing)”. It goes without saying that they are prepared as a pair. "

  Further, the second acceptance permissible state may be allowed to occur not only in the second variation pattern but also in the first variation pattern. For example, the second acceptance-permitted state is generated at a relatively early timing within the first fluctuation pattern, and then the first acceptance-permitted state is generated at a relatively late timing.

  The timing at which the display output (display on the layer) of the image (integrated image IG) is ended within the period in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed (the timing from when the operation is received until when the image is hidden) With respect to, the first allowable reception state and the second allowable reception state may be different.

  When the operation is accepted in the “situation in which the image KTH according to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. 251 (d), the image KTH is not hidden by using this as a trigger. It is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the display of the image KTH is continued. That is, in this case, the image KTH is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 251 (f). After that, when the narrow range disappearance effect is started, the "image KSE related to the narrow range disappearance effect" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "image KSE related to the narrow range disappearance effect". It is desirable to develop the performance as described above.

  In addition, even when an operation is accepted in the “situation in which the image HTH2 according to the wide area type pre-production is displayed” shown in FIG. Instead, it is desirable that the post-operation effect be started while the display of the image HTH2 is continued. That is, in this case, the image HTH2 is displayed in the situation shown in FIG. 252 (i). After that, when the wide area disappearance effect is started to be executed, the "image HSE concerning the wide area disappearance effect" makes it difficult or impossible to visually recognize the "image HTH2 concerning the wide area pre-production". It is desirable to develop the production.

  In the example shown in FIG. 250, when the operation reception is allowed while the “specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)” is in the non-output state, the “specific type effect sound ( Regarding “BGM reproduction)”, it is not always necessary to re-output before the symbols are stopped. For example, at the timing tC6, either the “specific type effect sound (BGM reproduction)” that is already in the non-output state or the “effect sound related to the post-operation effect” that is output when the operation is accepted. Alternatively, a special effect sound different from the above may be newly output. The output of the special effect sound is not started upon receiving an operation, but is started based on the arrival of a predetermined timing within the variation pattern.

  The image related to the wide area type pre-production and the image related to the narrow area type pre-production are displayed until the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is ended (or the automatic acceptance button is operated). Good. Further, the output state of the first permissible sound may be maintained until the set time of the reception permissible state is ended (or the automatic reception button is operated).

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the mock image of the operation receiving portion is displayed in both the wide area type pre-production and the narrow area type pre-production, but in the wide area type pre-production (the first wide area type pre-production). The display is made in a mode (image data) different from the mode (image data) that appears in the period in which the operation reception is permitted (first acceptance permitted state). Thereby, in the wide area type pre-production (first wide area type pre-production), even if the mood image is displayed when the operation reception is not permitted yet, the operation reception is permitted. It becomes possible to appeal to the occurrence of the operation acceptance effect (acceptable acceptance state) while making it difficult to cause erroneous recognition, so that it is possible to perform a large-scale pre-effect that requires a relatively long time. become. In the second wide area type pre-production and narrow area type pre-production, the mood image (integrated mood image) is displayed as it is in the mode (image data) that appears during the period when the operation reception is permitted (acceptance permitted state). As the pre-production is being hidden (the display area is decreasing), this is gradually exposed. That is, in this case, the display image of the image displayed on the specific layer when the acceptance permitted state occurs continues to be displayed from before the acceptance acceptable state occurs to after the occurrence. This is the same in the fourth acceptance permitted state described later.

  Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 249 (FIG. 251) and the effect example shown in FIG. 250 (FIG. 252), in any of the effect examples, a change according to the operation acceptance (after-operation effect) Yes, at least one of display changes and changes caused by post-operation effects such as lamp light emission) is displayed instead of hiding the image (gauge image) (and dynamic display) (See FIG. 251 (f), FIG. 252 (i), etc.). After that, the disappearance effect (a narrow area disappearance effect or a wide area disappearance effect) is started to be executed (see FIG. 251 (g), FIG. 252 (j), etc.). However, in the wide area disappearance effect executed in a relatively large range, it becomes difficult to visually recognize most of the change (the post-operation effect) that has clearly appeared, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated. Therefore, when the narrow area disappearance effect is executed, a change (display change, a change in the lamp emission, etc. caused by the post-operation effect) is performed before the narrow area disappearance effect is executed. At least one) is started, and at this point, the image (gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed without being visually impaired by the narrow area disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area disappearance effect is executed, a change (display change, lamp light emission, etc.) according to the operation acceptance is performed before the wide area disappearance effect is executed. At least one of the resulting changes) may not be initiated. That is, in this case, a change image (gauge image) at the time point when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the light emission of the lamp, which is the post-operation effect, which is the post-operation effect) is started in this case. Is not hidden but is displayed, but it is difficult to be visually recognized by the wide area disappearance effect (FIG. 252 (j)).

  That is, when the narrow range disappearance effect is executed, at the time when the change (at least one of the change caused by the post-operation effect such as the display change and the lamp light emission) in response to the operation reception is started, the operation is started. The display state of the mock image (gauge image) is maintained in the same manner as it was displayed before the reception. In this case, at the time when the post-operation effect is started to be executed, the narrow image (gauge image) is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the narrow area disappearance effect. On the other hand, when the wide area disappearance effect is executed, after the operation of FIG. 250 (i), the operation of FIG. 250 (j) may appear, or after the operation of FIG. 250 (j) may appear at the time when the execution is started.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, with respect to the acceptance permissible state executed in the “suppression operation acceptance production” in which the effect sound of the specific type can be suppressed, the suppression degree is relatively high or the non-output state. In addition to the first acceptance-permitted state executed in the "strong suppression mode (first mode shown in FIG. 250)", the "weak suppression mode (second mode shown in FIG. 249) having a relatively low suppression degree. As described above, a plurality of types including at least the fourth acceptance permissible state executed in “)” are prepared. Note that in this case, the specific type of effect sound to be suppressed may be different effect sound or the like, and may be, for example, a sound effect of the same function such as a BGM reproduction effect sound. Good.

  According to such a configuration, when a set time (effective period) in which the operation reception is permitted occurs, it is possible to provide the production performance with respect to how much the particular type of production sound is suppressed. Become.

  Here, in order to preferably obtain the above-mentioned effects, the degree of expectation (big hit) depends on whether the “weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)” or the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” occurs. It is desirable that the proportions in which the patterns appear) be different. In addition, here, when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" occurs, the ratio (expected degree) in which the "post-operation effect according to the operation acceptance" is executed only in the jackpot , When the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" occurs, the "post-operation effect according to operation acceptance" becomes lower than the rate (expected degree) executed in a mode that appears only when the jackpot is won. ing. The ratio may be 0% or 100%.

  As for the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)", an effect corresponding to a high expected fluctuation pattern that develops into SP reach (a reach effect involving a background change, etc.) and even a reach state is not formed (or reach (A state can be formed, but it does not develop into SP reach.) While it is possible to appear in any of the effects according to the low expected fluctuation pattern, the “strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)” ", Does not occur in the low expected effect pattern, but may occur as an effect corresponding to the high expected change pattern. Even with such a configuration, the jackpot expectation when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" occurs is lower than when the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)" occurs. Can be said.

  Further, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, it is possible to generate a "special production state" that can be transitioned based on the satisfaction of a special production condition, and in the "special production state", the player Each time an operation is accepted during the set time (effective period) during which an operation prompting image (such as a scale image or gauge display) that prompts the user to perform an operation is displayed, a specific type of sound effect (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) ) Is suppressed, it is desirable that the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation acceptance is executed (started). According to such a "special effect state", how much a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed each time a set time (effective period) during which operation acceptance is permitted occurs. It becomes possible to provide directivity regarding whether (a plurality of aspects including a weak suppression aspect and a strong suppression aspect appears), and in addition to the degree of expectation suggested by the post-operation performance, Since the degree of expectation is also suggested by (how much it is suppressed), it is expected to further improve the enjoyment of the game when the production reception is permitted. In this case, the above-described second acceptance permissible state does not occur in the "special effect state" but can be caused in an effect state (normal effect state) different from this.

  Further, within the symbol fluctuation, a fluctuation pattern (for example, a high expected fluctuation pattern) in which the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" and the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" can be sequentially executed Of these, effects corresponding to specific fluctuation patterns) may be prepared. That is, in this case, even if the "weak suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state)" on the relatively low expectation side occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance acceptable state) on the relatively high expectation side occurs. ) ”Is likely to occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game when the player recognizes that the degree of suppression for a specific type of effect sound is small (weak suppression mode). Like

In addition, in order to more appropriately suppress the deterioration of the gaming enjoyment when the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, the "strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)" is:
-If a specific variation pattern is selected from the high expected variation patterns (SP reach variation patterns) that develop into SP reach (reach production with background change, etc.) as a result of the above variation pattern determination, production determination is performed. Regardless of which result is obtained as (preliminary judgment, etc.), it is assumed that the production of the specific variation pattern occurs when the production progresses to the specific timing during SP reach, whereas the "weak suppression mode (first suppression mode) Operation reception performance) ”
-Even when the above-mentioned specific variation pattern is selected, if a special result is not obtained in the performance determination (preliminary determination, etc.), the performance of the specific variation pattern does not occur even if it reaches the predetermined timing. When a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.), it is assumed that the effect of the specific variation pattern has progressed to a predetermined timing. When the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" occurs in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" is generated in the effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern. Compared to when it does not occur, the ratio in which the post-operation performance is executed in a mode with a high expectation when the effect reception is performed in the “strong suppression mode (first reception allowable state)” (mode that appears only during the big hit) It is desirable to increase the rate of execution in.

  With such a configuration, in the effect according to the specific variation pattern, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" always occurs, whereas the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance permissible state)" When it does not always occur, and when the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" occurs, the post-operation performance with high expectation is executed in the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)". Since the ratio becomes high, it becomes possible to focus attention on whether or not the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" occurs, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth reception allowable state)" ) ”Occurs, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  However, the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance allowable state)" does not necessarily have to occur in the same variation pattern as the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance allowable state)". The "(first acceptance allowable state)" may occur within the first variation pattern, and the "weak suppression mode (fourth acceptance acceptable state)" may occur within the fourth variation pattern.

  FIG. 253 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied and the fourth acceptance allowable state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 253 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance permissible state occurs.

  Now, for example, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (holding exhaustion) in the "special effect state" and the "fourth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a, First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern (when the fourth condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a is set as shown in FIG. 253 (b). In addition, when the timing tD3 when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, the operation acceptance for the fourth post-operation effect is allowed, and the fourth acceptance allowable state (effective period). Generate. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the fourth acceptable reception state (valid period),
Setting the set time (valid period) during which the operation acceptance is allowed while the “BGM playback sound” corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is output in the non-suppressed mode, but within the set time (valid period) When the operation is accepted by the user, the "bGM playback sound" is changed from the non-suppressed mode to the weakly suppressed mode (the mode in which the degree of suppression is relatively low) when triggered by the operation. 253 (a), (b)) ”, and, if no operation is detected within the set time (timing tD3 to tD4) in which the operation acceptance is permitted, the operation corresponding to the fourth acceptance permitted state. "Non-automatic reception mode (see FIG. 253 (h))" in which no post-production (post-operation post-production) is generated
It is generated as "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect" executed by. As a method of outputting the “BGM reproduction sound” in the weak suppression mode, the volume value (maximum “100”) for the channel to which the “BGM reproduction sound” is assigned is set to the strong suppression mode (for example, Alternatively, a method of changing the setting to a weak suppression value (for example, the volume value (audible volume) is “10”) whose suppression degree is lower than the volume value (audible volume) is “0” can be adopted.

  According to such "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (fourth acceptance permissible state)", unless the operation is accepted by the player's operation, "specific type effect sound (BGM Since the “playback sound) is not output to the state of being output in the suppression mode”, the “non-suppression reception effect (first reception allowable state)” illustrated in FIG. 249 is displayed as if it is occurring. Will be able to. That is, in this case, when the player operates, the player recognizes for the first time that it is not the "suppression reception effect" by changing to the "state in which a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the suppression mode". Since it becomes possible, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by producing a surprise.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an action effect, the fourth variation that allows “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 253)” to occur depending on the result of performance determination (notice determination, etc.) The pattern is set so that it can be selected only in a special effect state (for example, a look-ahead effect zone). When the pattern is in the special effect state, "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249) ”can be selected depending on the result of the production determination (preliminary determination, etc.). A variation pattern that can be selected can be selected. ) Is desired to be high. According to such a configuration, when the “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect” appears, the expectation is higher than when the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” appears. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by combining the above-mentioned surprise-like effect elements.

  Furthermore, in order to obtain the above-mentioned effects more favorably, the "strong suppression mode (first acceptance permissible state)" can occur in any of the "normal production state" and the "special production state". In the “normal production state”, the “non-suppressed / non-automatic reception production (FIG. 249) is performed within the production according to one variation pattern (one variation pattern that is paired in the current win). ) ”And“ suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception performance (FIG. 250) ”can occur sequentially, and in the“ special performance state ”, one variation pattern (a pair of winning and losing) is generated. Change condition), "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 253)" and "suppression (strong suppression mode) / automatic reception performance (Fig. 250)" are sequentially performed. It is desirable to be able to occur.

  Moreover, in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance", when the set time (effective period) has elapsed without receiving an operation reception, "a specific type of performance sound (sound of BGM reproduction) ) Is output in a weak suppression mode ”and the subsequent production is advanced. That is, in this case, which of the "non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect" and the "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception effect" occurred, and by extension, the "normal effect state" and the "special effect state" Since it is difficult to recognize in which situation it is, the subsequent production will be advanced, so it is said that the expectation is relatively low. Even if the "operation reception effect (effective period)" is generated, the operation by the player can be more actively prompted.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a case where "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)" occurs and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249)". When the above occurs, the same effect sound is output as the above-mentioned acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) over the same period of time, and this also leads to "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance. (Fig. 253) "or" non-suppressed / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 249) "is made difficult to recognize.

Further, in the “conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 253)”, similarly to the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” occurs.
a. Prior to the acceptance of the operation acceptance, the narrow area type pre-production is performed at the timing tD1,
b. When the timing tD2 slightly before the occurrence of the set time arrives, the "acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)" is started to be output, and the output state is maintained while crossing the timing tD2. point,
c. The second allowable sound (for example, a message sound) is not output, but the first allowable sound (for example, a sound effect) is output.
d. When the timing tD2 slightly before the set time occurs, on the effect display device 1600, a mock image (integrated mood image) showing the operation means that is the operation target in the operation reception effect is displayed. In addition, the gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the end of the set time is displayed,
e. Even if the operation acceptance is made during the output of the acceptance permission sound, the acceptance permission sound in the output state is not terminated halfway,
f. Point at which the display state is continued without hiding the image (integrated image) and the gauge image when the operation is accepted. G. A point where the narrow range disappearance effect is executed while the image of the joint (the integrated image of the joint) and the gauge image are displayed, and h. Even if the operation is not accepted, the narrow range disappearance effect is executed, but the narrow range disappearance effect is executed in a different mode (image) from when the operation is accepted, and so on. The configuration is also adopted respectively, and this also causes the occurrence of "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 253)" and "non-suppression / non-automatic reception performance (Fig. 249)". I try to make it difficult to recognize what I am doing. According to such a configuration, while the output state (non-suppression mode) of the acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound) is maintained, “a specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is output in the weak suppression mode. Since it becomes necessary to distinguish whether or not the state has been changed to the "retained state", it is expected that the feeling of tension will be appropriately maintained every time the production reception is made.

  Therefore, as in the case where the “non-suppression / non-automatic reception effect (FIG. 249)” occurs, for example, as shown in FIG. It is desirable to adopt the method shown, and it is also desirable to adopt the same aspect as the effect example shown in FIG. 249 with respect to the timing at which those images are hidden. However, the same aspect does not necessarily have to be adopted.

  Further, also in the "conditional suppression (weak suppression mode) / non-automatic reception effect (Fig. 253)", if the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period) (timing tD3a in the figure), the operation is accepted. At least an after-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member) and an after-operation output sound (effect sound) by the speaker (second effect member) are generated as the corresponding after-operation effect. It has become. In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker are maintained in the execution state for the same time, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) is hidden at a predetermined timing that comes after the timing tD4, regardless of which timing the set time (effective period) is received. On the other hand, the output sound after operation (effect sound) may be maintained in the output state for a predetermined time from the timing when the operation is accepted. However, regardless of the timing at which the effect reception is performed, both the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) are output when the timing tD4 has not elapsed. It is required to set to maintain the state.

  Other than the performance examples shown in FIG. 249 and FIG. 251, the acceptable reception sound, operation-related display, pre-production, extinction effect, and post-operation production that appear in “conditional suppression / non-automatic reception performance (FIG. 253)” are different from those shown in FIGS. It is possible to appropriately adopt the examples and modified examples, and it is desirable to use the same method for each.

  In this example of performance, regarding the length of time (the predetermined fixed time) during which the "sound of BGM reproduction" is output in the weak suppression mode, "conditional suppression / non-automatic reception performance (first Even if the operation is received at the latest timing tD4 in the set time (effective period) of “4 acceptance acceptable state)”, the timing of ending the weak suppression mode is the end timing of the effect sound related to the post-operation effect. It is set to arrive at the same time or later. However, the timing at which the weak suppression mode related to the “sound of BGM reproduction” is ended may be set to be always the same as the timing at which the effect sound of the post-operation effect is ended. In any of such configurations, the post-operation effect when the effect reception is made can be emphasized.

  By the way, when an operation reception effect that can suppress a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) occurs, the degree of suppression thereof is high (strong suppression mode or non-output first acceptance allowable state) or low ( As described above, the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the weak acceptance mode is the fourth acceptance allowable state). However, when a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is suppressed, it is estimated whether the degree of suppression is high or low (whether it is a strong suppression mode or a non-output mode, or a weak suppression mode). Even if an attempt is made, in reality, it is difficult to estimate whether the degree of suppression is high (strong suppression mode or non-output) or low (weak suppression mode) without a comparison target. In particular, when the strong suppression mode and the weak suppression mode do not have a large difference in the volume value when the volume is suppressed, this is even more the case, and this makes the sense of tension when the operation reception effect occurs. Can be favorably maintained and the player can be attracted to the effect.

  However, in reality, if it is not possible to infer whether the game is in the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode, it is feared that the interest of the game will be decreased. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the effect elements that are useful for estimating whether the operation mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode are set within the period from the start to the end of the operation reception effect. The following items are prepared in a time-sequential manner.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first permissible sound output when the fourth reception permissible state is generated is output midway even if the performance reception is made in the output state. While the output is not finished but is output for a predetermined time, the first allowable sound output when the first reception allowable state occurs is effected when it is in the output state. Then, based on the reception of the effect, the output is terminated halfway. In such a configuration, the first permissible sound itself has a function useful for estimating whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. It becomes possible to suppress the decline in interest.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the first acceptance allowable state is generated, the second acceptance sound is output in addition to the first acceptance sound. By confirming whether or not a sound is output, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. However, the second permissible sound does not necessarily have to be prepared, and only the first permissible sound may be output in both the first reception permissible state and the fourth reception permissible state output.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the operation-related display (display prompting the operation) that appears within the set time (effective period) in which the reception of the performance is permitted, the special mode is included in the first reception permitted state. In any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)), any of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) except the special mode is displayed in the fourth acceptance permissible state. Since it is displayed with, it is possible to infer whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode by confirming the operation-related display.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is not possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode at the time when the output of the acceptance permission sound or the operation-related display is finished. Also, by confirming the execution mode of the post-operation effect, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. That is, in the after-operation effect according to the fourth acceptance permissible state (fourth after-operation effect), both the “effect by liquid crystal display” and the “effect by effect sound” are “constant from the time when the effect is accepted. In the post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state (first post-operation effect), “effect by effect sound” is “a fixed time from when the effect is accepted”. However, the "effect by liquid crystal display" is "finished when a predetermined timing arrives". That is, in this case, in the post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state, the time from the end of the "effect by the liquid crystal display" to the end of the "effect by the effect sound" is depending on the timing at which the operation is accepted. Since it becomes variable and a large deviation occurs, by confirming such deviation, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, by confirming the execution mode of the pre-effect and the disappearance effect with respect to the acceptance permitted state, it is possible to infer whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode. You can also do it. That is, in the pre-production and disappearance effect corresponding to the fourth acceptance permissible state, an image related to the pre-effect and an image related to the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively small area, and the background image is not changed at that time. On the other hand, in the pre-production and disappearance effect according to the first acceptance permission state, the image related to the pre-effect and the disappearance effect are displayed in a relatively large area, and the background image is changed at that time. It is supposed to be accompanied. By confirming such a mode, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  However, even if the effect elements useful for guessing are prepared in such a manner that they are scattered in time series, some players do not notice them, and as a result, they are in a strong suppression mode or a weak suppression mode. If there is something that can't be guessed, the interest in the game can be diminished in the end.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode), the effect sound of BGM reproduction is generated based on the effect acceptance being performed within the set time (effective period). A weak suppression mode is set. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the BGM reproduction effect sound is set to the strong suppression mode from the time when the set time (effective period) has not yet occurred, and the strong suppression mode is set. In the mode, the set time (effective period) is generated so that the effect reception can be performed. According to such a configuration, the timing for suppressing a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) between the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) and the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode). Therefore, by confirming the timing, it is possible to estimate whether the mode is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Moreover, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode) according to this embodiment, unlike the case of the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output), the operation detection is performed within the set time (effective period). If not, the post-operation effect is not automatically generated (see FIG. 253 (h)). That is, in this case, if there is no operation detection within the set time (effective period), the suppression process (weak suppression mode) itself triggered by operation reception for a specific type of effect sound (for example, BGM reproduction effect sound) is also performed. Since it will not be avoided, it is possible to recognize that the effect was not the strong suppression mode but the weak suppression mode, although there was a price that the effect after operation could not be confirmed.

  Further, in the first acceptance permissible state (strong suppression mode or non-output) according to this embodiment, the timing at which the process of setting the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the strong suppression mode is ended is the end timing of the post-operation effect. The timing is set to be the same as or earlier than. Therefore, in the fourth acceptance permissible state (weak suppression mode), the timing at which the process of changing the "BGM reproduction effect sound" to the weak suppression mode is ended may be later than the end timing of the post-operation effect. For example, by confirming the timing when the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned to the non-suppression mode, it is possible to estimate whether it is the strong suppression mode or the weak suppression mode.

  Further, as described above, in the fourth acceptance permissible state according to the above-described example of performance, regardless of which timing within the set time (effective period) the production reception is performed, the operation on the production display device 1600 (first production member) is performed. The length of the period during which the rear display effect (liquid crystal display) and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are performed in parallel is unchanged. On the other hand, in the first acceptance permissible state, after the operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on the effect display device 1600 (first effect member), depending on which timing within the set time (effective period) the effect reception is performed. , The length of the period in which the post-operation output sound (effect sound) made by the speaker (second effect member) is performed in parallel is changed.

  According to such a configuration, the performance is brought about in "when the performance reception (operation) is performed", and it is possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game until the performance reception (operation) is performed. Become.

  Note that the weak suppression mode in which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is output at a lower suppression level than the strong suppression mode can appear even when an operation opportunity is not provided (when the fourth acceptance permissible state does not occur). You may. That is, in this case, after the "effect sound of BGM reproduction" is set to the weak suppression mode for a predetermined time, the weak suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. Then, in the effect according to one variation pattern, the more the weak suppression mode appears, including the fourth acceptance permissible state, the higher the degree of suppression is until the symbol fluctuation is stopped (second If the (1 acceptance acceptable state is further executed) is increased, the performance can be further improved through the suppression state for the "BGM reproduction effect sound".

  Further, the strong suppression mode for the "BGM reproduction effect sound" may also be able to appear even when the operation opportunity is not given (when the first acceptance allowable state does not occur). That is, in this case, after the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the strong suppression mode for a predetermined time, the strong suppression mode is returned to the non-suppression mode without an operation opportunity. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide the performance of whether or not an operation opportunity is given when the strong suppression mode appears.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 253, when the fourth acceptance permissible state occurs, the “bGM reproduction effect sound” is suppressed based on the fact that the operation is accepted within the set time (effective period). Suppression mode). However, instead of this, even when the fourth acceptance-allowed state occurs, as in the case where the first acceptance-allowed state occurs, the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is suppressed before the set time occurs. A mode (weak suppression mode) may be set, and a set time (effective period) during which the production reception is allowed in the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) may be generated. In this case, depending on whether or not a special result is obtained in the effect determination (advance determination, etc.), the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is set to the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) when the predetermined timing arrives. Since the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) is not provided, the range of performance can be expanded. In the fourth acceptance permissible state, the timing at which the "BGM reproduction effect sound" is returned from the suppression mode (weak suppression mode) to the non-reduction mode is the same as the timing at which the post-operation performance is ended or arrives after that. It is desirable to do so.

  In the weak suppression mode, the volume value (audible volume) of the "specific type effect sound" is set to a specific suppression value (a number greater than 0) lower than that in the non-suppression mode, and the sound is output in an audible state. That is, even if the strong suppression mode is to put the "specific type effect sound" in an inaudible state (silence (audible volume is 0) or not output (end channel allocation)) Good.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, it is assumed that the same operation means (operation button 410) is the operation target and the operation opportunity is given in the same operation mode. In this regard, in the "fourth acceptance acceptable state", the operation button 410 is only used as the operation target (first operation mode), but in the "first acceptance acceptable state", as described above, the result of the notice effect determination. Based on the above, there are "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". Therefore, when the sword decoration 5001 is selected as the operation target (second operation mode), it is possible to easily recognize that it is the strong suppression mode, not the weak suppression mode. It should be noted that the effect reception has been made by "when selecting the operation button 410 as the operation target (first operation mode)" and "when selecting the sword decoration 5001 as the operation target (second operation mode)". The corresponding post-operation performance has the same content.

That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the operation means to be operated is
First operation mode in which the operation receiving portion (the portion that the player touches when operating) is not moved when the set time (effective period) occurs, and The operation opportunity can be given in any of a plurality of modes including the second operation mode of moving to the specific position. Note that, here, the “first operation mode” is assumed to be a case where an operation opportunity is given to the operation button 410, and the “second operation mode” is given an operation opportunity to the sword ornament 5001. It is assumed that the sword decoration body 5001 is “a thing that can give an operation opportunity to a player in a state where it is moved to a specific position”. However, one operation means (one operation receiving portion) may be provided with the “first operation mode” and the “second operation mode”, respectively, and the operation opportunity may be given by any of these modes. Further, as described above, in the first acceptance permissible state, an operation opportunity may be given to the sword ornament 5001 without fail.

  According to the above-described production example, the acceptance allowable state (suppression) is set so that the post-operation production is executed while the “production sound of BGM reproduction” is being output in the suppression mode or in the non-output state. In the reception effect), the case in which the image (integrated image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)) means that the permissible reception state is the “first permissible reception state (strong suppression mode)”. That is, the case where the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)) is the special acceptance mode, the acceptance acceptable state is “first acceptance acceptable state”. (Strong suppression mode or non-output) ”or“ fourth acceptance allowable state (weak suppression mode) ”.

  That is, in this case, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), if the operation acceptance is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is being output, the operation is terminated halfway. (First acceptance acceptable state). On the other hand, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), if the operation acceptance is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output, the operation may be terminated halfway. There will be cases where the process is not terminated halfway (first acceptance acceptable state, fourth acceptance acceptable state). With such a configuration, it is possible to favorably maintain the entertainment of the game when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  Further, when the mock image (integrated mock image) is displayed in the special mode (FIG. 232 (d)), the acceptance acceptable state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode (first acceptance acceptable state). On the other hand, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the acceptance acceptable state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode and in the non-automatic acceptance mode. Will occur (first acceptance permitted state, fourth acceptance permitted state). With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably maintain the tension when the normal image (the integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)).

  In this respect, when the normal image (integrated general image) is displayed in the normal mode (FIG. 232 (a)), the display is performed when the first acceptable reception state occurs and when the fourth acceptable reception state occurs. You may make it differ in the magnitude | size which depends on. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to recognize whether the acceptance-permitted sound is ended midway, and whether it is performed in the automatic acceptance mode or the non-automatic acceptance mode.

  In addition, according to the above-described production example, by confirming whether the pre-production is performed by the “wide area type pre-production” or the “narrow area type pre-production”, the production sound of the specific type (BGM reproduction) is generated. It becomes possible to easily confirm whether the sound is a “weak suppression mode” or a “strong suppression mode or non-output” when the sound) is suppressed. Then, after that, by confirming whether or not this is terminated midway when an operation is performed while the acceptance acceptable sound is being output, whether it is the “weak suppression mode (not terminated)” or “strong suppression”. It is possible to reconfirm whether the display mode is the mode or the non-output (finished halfway) ”during the post-operation performance.

  Further, according to the above-described production example, when the strong suppression mode or the non-output is adopted, the wide-range front is performed while the specific type of the effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is in the strong suppression mode or the non-output. While the effect is executed, when the weak suppression mode is adopted, the narrow area pre-effect is executed while the specific type of effect sound (sound of BGM reproduction) is not in the weak suppression mode. become. That is, in this case, it is possible to preferably maintain the performance when the narrow area type pre-production is performed.

  By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the first acceptance-permitted state has a higher rate of execution of the mode that appears only during the big hit as the post-operation effect than the second acceptance-permitted state (the degree of expectation is higher). It is as described above. This ratio may be 0% or 100%. However, according to each of the above-described production examples, when the first acceptance permissible state (special acceptance permissible state) occurs and the second acceptance permissible state (predetermined acceptance acceptable) from the time before the operation acceptance is performed. Since different effect contents (acceptable acceptance sound, model image, previous effect, etc.) appear when the state) occurs, the second acceptance allowable state occurs due to such effect contents (or , What is happening) may be noticed by the player in advance, which may cause a decline in the interest of the game.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as one of the plurality of acceptable reception states, the fifth acceptable reception state (specification is generated based on the fifth condition being satisfied in the performance determination based on the result of the big hit determination). The acceptance acceptance state) is further prepared. Regarding the fifth acceptance acceptance state, the operation acceptance is performed while making it difficult to distinguish it from the second acceptance permission state until the operation acceptance is made. After that, by realizing the production progress reminiscent of the first acceptance permissible state, it is possible to make it less likely that the enjoyment of the game will be deteriorated at least until the operation acceptance is made. In order to suitably obtain such an operation effect, when the fifth acceptance permissive state occurs, the first acceptance permissible state is maintained after the symbol is stopped than when the second acceptance permissible state occurs. It is desirable to set it so that the rate of occurrence is high. Further, it is desirable to set the jackpot symbols to be stopped at different rates when the second acceptance permitted state and the fifth acceptance permitted state occur. The ratio of these may be 0% or 100%.

  While making it difficult to distinguish between the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state, after the operation acceptance is made in the fifth acceptable reception state, the production progress that reminds the first acceptable reception state is realized. As a method of doing so, for example, first, when the second acceptance-permitted state occurs and when the fifth acceptance-permitted state occurs, the same mode is output as the acceptance-permitted sound, but the first acceptance-permitted state occurs. In such a case, a mode in which the acceptance permission sound cannot be output in either the second acceptance permission state or the fifth acceptance permission state (for example, the type of the sound as the first acceptance sound is different, Further, the output mode) is output. Then, when the operation is accepted in the second acceptance permissible state, the post-operation effect (second post-operation effect) is executed while continuously outputting the sound in the output state at the time when the operation acceptance is made. On the other hand, in the first acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state, when the operation is received, the sound (all of which) in the output state at the time when the operation is received is output in the suppression mode. The state or the non-output state is set, and the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect or fifth post-operation effect) is executed in the state. In this respect, if the specific effect movable body is used as a target that causes a change in both the first post-operation effect and the fifth post-operation effect, it is possible to distinguish between the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state. While making it difficult, after the operation is accepted in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, it is possible to realize the production progress reminiscent of the first acceptance-permitted state. As a result, the possibility that the first acceptance acceptable state has occurred (the possibility that the acceptance acceptable sound was erroneously heard) becomes conscious, and it can be expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game is suppressed. .

  That is, in this case, in the first acceptance permissible state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the after-operation effect (first after-operation effect). Performing a movable effect in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (such as the effects shown in FIGS. 162 (C), (D), and 163 (CC1) to (CC3)). Is possible.

  On the other hand, even in the fifth acceptance permissible state, at least the effect using the specific effect movable body is executed as the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), but the effect is the first operation. It is desirable that the content of the effect is significantly different from that of the after effect. That is, the fifth acceptance-permitted state is, at least, even if the situation in which the form of the pre-production and the acceptance-permitted sound suggests the possibility of occurrence of the second acceptance-permitted state with low expectation, at least the operation acceptance It is prepared for the purpose of "maintaining amusement of entertainment until it is done", and gives a false recognition that the first acceptance acceptable state has occurred at the time when the post-operation performance is executed. If this happens, it is unavoidable that the interest in the game will deteriorate when the user misrecognizes it.

  Therefore, as such post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect), it is desirable to perform an effect having a more suppressed tendency than in the case of the first post-operation effect, for example, operation acceptance is performed. The specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the point of time is not operated (driving force is not generated) and its light emitting range is reduced or the light is not emitted. Can be performed as an effect that causes It should be noted that in the second post-operation effect, there is no effect change that tends to be suppressed, such as a decrease in the light emission range of the specific effect movable body or a non-light emission state. In this case, the specific movable decorative body has a predetermined light emitting portion.

  According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance) is evoked by causing a production change using the specific production movable body, whereby a second reception acceptable state (second While making it aware that it is not (post-operation performance), it is calmly determined that it is not in the first acceptance allowable state (first post-operation performance) as the suppressed content of the performance is gradually exposed. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

  In addition, in order to more appropriately execute the fifth post-operation effect as an effect having a suppressed tendency as compared with the case of the first post-operation effect, the first post-operation effect is regarded as an operation target. The operating means (the operation receiving portion such as the effect button) emits light (or causes the light emission to change) when the operation is accepted, and the driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operating means. ) Is caused to generate a predetermined movement (vibration, etc.), whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the operation means (operation receiving portion such as effect button) to be operated is operated. The reception is made to turn off the light (the mode may be gradually turned off), and a predetermined movement is performed without driving the driving means (motor or the like) provided corresponding to the operation means. ( It is desirable to ensure that does not cause the dynamic, etc.). In this way, while performing the post-operation effect (first post-operation effect, fifth post-operation effect) targeting the same movable decorative body in the first acceptance allowable state and the fifth acceptance allowable state, By providing a mode in which the contents of the effects of the effect after the first operation and the effect after the fifth operation are opposite to each other, the above-described action and effect can be suitably exhibited.

  FIG. 254 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied and the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs under the specific setting condition (effect setting). FIG. 254 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the fifth acceptance permissible state occurs. The fluctuation pattern will be described as the fifth fluctuation pattern, but may be the first fluctuation pattern as described above.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in the normal game state (non-probability variation / non-time saving), and the “fifth variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. First, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

Then, as described above, in the fifth variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 254 (b), the fifth operation is performed when the timing tE3 when the fifth predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ has arrived. The fifth acceptance permissible state (effective period) in which the operation acceptance regarding the post-production is permitted is generated. However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, regarding the fifth acceptable reception state (valid period),
-"Non-suppression acceptance permissible state" in which operation acceptance is permitted while the "BGM reproduction sound (specific type effect sound)" according to the fifth variation pattern maintains the output state in the non-suppression mode ( 254 (a) and (b)) ", and-when an operation for the operation means that is the operation target is not detected within the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) in which the operation reception is permitted. Even after that, when the timing tE3c within the set time arrives, the post-operation effect is started "an automatic reception mode (see FIG. 254 (i))".
It is generated as "non-suppression / automatic reception performance" executed by. The timing tE3c does not necessarily have to arrive within the set time, and may come at or after the end of the set time.

  With such a configuration, a situation appears as if the second acceptance-permitted state has occurred until the post-operation effect is started to be executed, whereas the post-operation effect is started to be executed by the automatic acceptance mode. When this is done, the production progress as if to recall the first acceptance permissible state is realized, so that it is possible to preferably maintain the gaming interest until the execution of the post-operation production is started. ..

  Also in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, as in the second acceptance-permitted state, as shown in FIGS. 254 (b), (e), and (j), the set time (timing tE3 to tE4) during which the operation acceptance is permitted. ) Occurs, the "acceptable sound (here, the first allowable sound)" is started when the timing tE2 arrives, and the output state is changed over the timing tE3 when the set time occurs. I try to keep it. The length of time from the start of the output of the first permissible sound until the acceptance of the operation is the same. Further, the sound itself output as the first permissible sound is the same, and the second permissible sound (message sound) is not output, which is the same as the second acceptance permissible state. As a result, with respect to the acceptance permission sound, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance permission state and the fifth acceptance permission state until the operation acceptance is performed, so that it is possible to favorably maintain the gaming interest. Be expected.

  However, as described above, in the second acceptance permissible state, the operation is performed at the timing tB3a (FIG. 249 (e)) in which the "acceptance permissible sound (first permissible sound)" is in the output state after the set time (valid period) has occurred. When the reception is made, the set time itself is ended, while the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not terminated halfway, and the timing when the output is finished as the first allowable sound (no operation is performed) The output state is maintained until the same timing tB3c (Fig. 249 (e)) as in the case of the above. When the operation acceptance is made at the timing tE3a (FIG. 254 (e)) in which the "acceptable sound)" is in the output state, the "acceptable sound (first allowable sound)" is not only terminated for the set time itself. Also In other words, with regard to the “acceptable acceptance sound (first acceptable sound)”, such behavior (immediate termination) appears when the operation acceptance is performed in the first acceptance acceptable state. Because of this (FIG. 250 (e)), despite the situation where the fifth acceptance-permitted state has occurred, the production progress as if to recall the first acceptance-permitted state is realized. It is expected that the interest in playing games will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 254, when the operation reception is performed within the set time of the fifth acceptance permissible state (timing tE3a in the figure), the effect display device is provided as the post-operation effect corresponding to the operation reception. A post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) on 1600 (first effect member) and a post-operation output sound (effect sound) from the speaker (second effect member) are generated (FIG. 254 (d)). reference). In the figure, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) maintains the execution state until timing tE5 regardless of the time when the operation is accepted, and the post-operation output sound (effect sound) is in the execution state for a predetermined time. Is maintained, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the post-operation display effect (liquid crystal display) does not necessarily have to be executed.

  Although illustration is omitted, in this example of the effect, the post-operation effect corresponding to the fifth acceptance permissible state (fifth post-operation effect) and the post-operation effect corresponding to the first acceptance permissible state (first In each of the "after-operation effects", at least the "effect using the specific effect movable body" is executed. As for the respective effect contents of the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the first acceptance allowable state and the "effect using the specific effect movable body" corresponding to the fifth acceptance allowable state, as described above. Is. For example, as the first post-operation effect, the movable effect in which the specific effect movable body is moved to the front side of the display area of the effect display device 1600 (FIG. 162 (C), (D), and FIG. 163 (CC1) to (CC3). ), Etc.) can be performed. In addition, as the fifth post-operation effect, an effect change is caused in which the specific effect movable body that was in the light emitting state at the time of receiving the operation is reduced in the light emitting range or is set in the non-light emitting state. It can be performed as a production.

  According to such a configuration, the first reception allowable state (first post-operation performance) is evoked by causing a production change using the specific production movable body, whereby a second reception acceptable state (second While making it aware that it is not (post-operation performance), it is calmly determined that it is not in the first acceptance allowable state (first post-operation performance) as the suppressed content of the performance is gradually exposed. As a result, it is expected that a decrease in the enjoyment of the game will be suppressed.

  Further, also in the effect example (fifth acceptance permissible state) shown in FIG. 254, as with the effect example (second acceptance acceptable state) shown in FIG. 249, rather than the timing tE3 when the set time of the acceptance acceptable state is set. When the previous timing tE2 arrives, the effect display device 1600 displays a mock image of the operating means that is the operation target, and displays a gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the end of the set time. Is done respectively. Also, the display mode of these mock images and gauge images is similar to that in the second acceptance-permitted state, and for example, is displayed as an integrated mock image IG. The same applies to the point that the special mode shown in FIG. 232 (d) is not displayed as the integrated image IG. As a result, with respect to the mock image and the gauge image, the same aspect will appear in the second acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state until the operation acceptance is made, so that the amusement interest of the game is preferably maintained. It is expected.

  In this example as well, the timing at which the mimic image is displayed is the same as the timing at which the acceptance allowable sound (first allowable sound) starts to be output, but the timing is not limited to this, and either one starts earlier. It may be done. Alternatively, only one of the mock image and the acceptance sound (for example, only the mood image) may be started before the timing tE3. However, even when such another example or the other example described above is adopted, the configuration until the operation reception is performed should be the same in the second acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state. Is desirable.

  Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (c) to (f), in the case where the timing tE3a arrives and the operation is accepted while such an integrated model image (model image, gauge image) is displayed. Is assumed. When the operation is accepted in such a situation, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the fifth post-operation effect (display change in effect display device 1600, effect sound change in the speaker, light emission change by the lamp, and movable decoration). At least one of the staging operations by the body) will be started. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, at the time when the staging after the fifth operation is started, the integrated model image (model image, gauge image) Is not hidden and remains visible. More specifically, even when the operation is accepted, at that time (timing tE3a), the integrated image (specific layer) is not changed due to it, and a little time (predetermined) Until the timing tE3b after the elapse of time) arrives, the “display of the integrated image (the image of the gauge, the image of the image)” in the same manner as when the operation reception is permitted is continued. Therefore, the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before.

  Then, when the timing tE3b arrives, an image (disappearing effect) displayed by making a part or the whole of the integrated image (display image, gauge image) in the display state invisible or invisible is displayed. Let it appear. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example of rendering, the integrated image (images of the gauge, gauge image) is not hidden even when such an image (disappearing effect) is displayed, and is displayed. Stay in the state. More specifically, even in the situation where the disappearance effect is displayed (timing tE3b), in the layer in which the integrated image (image image, gauge image) is displayed, the integrated image image (image image, gauge image) is displayed. The change in the (image) caused by it does not occur, and the display area of the gauge image is also reduced in the same manner as before. However, since the disappearance effect is displayed on the layer in front of it, the water image and the gauge image are difficult to see or are made invisible.

  That is, in this case, although it is in a situation where the disappearance effect image is displayed on a predetermined layer for the purpose of making it difficult to visually recognize the gauge image or gauge image (integrated image) or making it invisible. The scale image and gauge image (integrated scale image) displayed on the specific layer (behind the predetermined layer (side with lower priority)) itself is in the same mode as when the operation reception was allowed. The display at will be maintained and no change will occur. Further, also for the gauge image, the display in which the display area is continuously reduced is continued across the operation reception. As a result, the mode (at least a part of) when the operation reception is allowed is made even in the process of making the image and gauge image (integrated image) difficult to see or making them invisible. You will be able to see it.

  Further, the display output (display on the layer) of the integrated image (images, gauge images) is completed within the period (timing tE3b to tE3e) in which the image of the disappearance effect is displayed, and thereafter, the integrated image is displayed. The image of the disappearance effect will be displayed in a situation in which the image of the image (image of the image, gauge image) is not displayed on the layer either.

  Regarding the display image and the gauge image, since such a display method after the operation reception is made is common to the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, this may reduce the enjoyment of the game. There is no.

  Also, in the example shown in FIG. 254, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 249, when the timing tE1 before the timing tE3 at which the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs, less than half of the predetermined display area is reached. The narrow area type pre-production that uses only the area is started to be executed. Then, during a period in which an image related to such a narrow area type pre-production is displayed, first, a display of a mock image of the operation receiving portion (here, an integrated mock image) and a display of the first allowable sound are displayed. And output are started respectively (timing tE2). At the time when the display of the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) is started, a part or the whole of the mood image (integrated mood image) becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the image related to the narrow area type pre-rendering. There is. That is, as the time passes, the range in which the image related to the narrow area type pre-production is displayed is reduced, or the transmittance thereof is increased, so that the “image (integrated image) The visual quality of "images" is gradually increased. " In this respect, also in the fifth acceptance permissible state, while the narrow area pre-production is being executed and the mood image (here, the integrated mood image) is being displayed, the fifth acceptance acceptable state When the timing tE3 occurs, the operation acceptance is permitted, and the narrow area type pre-effect is performed across the timing tE3 when the fifth acceptance permitted state occurs.

  Here, the image used for such a narrow area type pre-effect may be, for example, an image displayed in a different layer before the layer in which the general image (integrated general image) is displayed. Then, the mood image (integrated mood image) and the image (narrow area type pre-production) are displayed as one prepared moving image, and the visibility of the mood image (integrated mould image IG) gradually increases in the moving image. It may also be a representation of how it is being enhanced. However, it is desirable to use the same image as the image of the narrow area type pre-production corresponding to the fifth reception permission state, as the image of the narrow area type pre-production corresponding to the second reception permission state.

  In the narrow area type pre-production, not only the image display on the production display device 1600, but also the production sound related thereto may be output. However, considering that the second acceptance permissible state is executed in a non-automatic acceptance mode and is intended to maintain a sense of tension related to the operation, regarding the narrow area type pre-stage production, It can be said that, in order to increase the concentration of the effect, it is preferable to perform the effect display device 1600 as an image display without outputting the effect sound related thereto.

  In this way, with regard to the narrow area type pre-production that occurs before the acceptance of the operation acceptance, the same aspect appears in the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state. It is expected to be maintained appropriately.

  According to such a configuration, until the operation is accepted, the effect is advanced in the same manner as the effect contents shown in FIGS. 251 (a) to 251 (e). Even if the player side has previously noticed that the first acceptance permissive state with high expectation has not occurred, it is interesting to know whether the second acceptance permissible state or the fifth acceptance permissible state occurs. As a result, it is expected that it will be possible to prevent a decline in the enjoyment of the game.

  However, as described above, after the operation by the player is detected in the fifth acceptance permissible state and the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is started to be executed, the first acceptance allowable state is not the second acceptance allowable state. The production will be promoted in such a manner as to evoke.

  That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 254, when an operation by the player is detected (operation reception) in the fifth acceptance permissible state, a sound that is in an output state in a non-suppressing mode at the time when the operation acceptance is made ( All) is set to the output state in the strong suppression mode or is set to the non-output state, and this is terminated halfway. In the example shown in FIG. 250 (first acceptance permissible state), when the operation is accepted, the “first permissible sound” and “second permissible sound” that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode are changed to the strongly suppressed mode. In the output state or in the non-output state, these are terminated abruptly. However, in the example shown in FIG. 254 (fifth acceptance permissible state), when the operation acceptance is performed, non-suppression is performed. The "BGM reproduction sound" and the "first permissible sound" that were in the output state in the mode are brought to the output state in the strong suppression mode or to the non-output state, and these are terminated abruptly. As a result, with respect to (all of) the sounds that were in the output state in the non-suppressed mode before the operation was accepted, the operation acceptance was triggered in both the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state. As described above, since the output state is set to the strong suppression mode or the non-output state is set, it is possible to recall the first acceptance permitted state at the timing tE3a shown in FIG. 254. It is expected that amusement of entertainment will be maintained appropriately.

  In this case, it may be either the output state in the strong suppression mode or the non-output state triggered by the operation reception, but the second reception permissible state and the fifth reception permissible state may be set. It is desirable to perform the same processing in. For example, in the second acceptance-permitted state, if the operation acceptance is used as a trigger to turn the sound that was in the output state into the non-output state until then, in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the operation acceptance is also triggered. The sound that had been in the output state in the non-suppressing mode until then is put in the non-output state.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIGS. 254 (g) to 254 (k), it is assumed that the set time has elapsed (the second acceptable reception state has ended) without the player's operation being detected. As described above, the fifth acceptance permissible state is executed in the automatic acceptance mode. Therefore, when the predetermined timing tE3c arrives without the player's operation, the operation acceptance is performed. The same processing will be executed.

  Therefore, at the timing tE3c, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is not only started to be executed, but also the sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppression mode (here, the sound of the BGM reproduction) is strongly suppressed. The output state is changed to the output state or the non-output state, and these are terminated halfway. Even in the first acceptance permissible state (FIG. 250), a predetermined sound (for example, the first permissible sound) is output in a non-suppressing mode until the timing tC4f at which the automatic button function is activated, and the timing tC4f is output. In the above, in the output state in the strong suppression mode or in the non-output state, this may be terminated halfway.

  Further, at the timing tE3d, the "wide area disappearance effect" is started to be executed as the above-mentioned disappearance effect while the fifth post-operation effect is already in the execution state. Regarding the "wide area disappearance effect", the image itself does not necessarily have to be the same as in the case of the first acceptance permitted state, but disappearance accompanied by a change from the background image displayed until the operation acceptance is made. It is desirable to be executed as an effect. That is, in this case, it goes without saying that the processing is executed using at least half of the display area. As a result, the same aspect (wide area extinction effect) is applied to the disappearance effect after the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed) in both the second acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state. After the operation is accepted (after the post-operation effect is executed, it becomes possible to recall the first acceptance allowable state, and it is possible to appropriately maintain the entertainment of the game. The aspect related to such disappearance effect is the same when the operation is accepted (timing tE3b) and when the automatic button function is activated (timing tE3c). The same applies to the case of the first acceptance permitted state.

  In the example shown in FIG. 254, the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) ends with respect to the timing when the “BGM reproduction sound” is output again in the non-suppressing mode in the fifth acceptance permissible state. Although it is set as the timing tE5 to be performed, the timing may be reached while the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) is being executed, or the post-operation effect (fifth post-operation effect) may be set. It may be the timing to arrive after the end.

  Also in the first acceptance-permitted state, as in the fifth acceptance-permitted state, the timing at which the “sound of BGM reproduction” is changed to the output state or the non-output state in the suppression mode is set when the operation reception is performed. Good.

  In the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state, a process of changing a sound that has been in the output state in the non-suppression mode until then to “output in the suppression mode” or “non-output state” and output sound after operation The output processing does not necessarily have to be started at the same timing, and it is sufficient that all of these processing are started based on the reception of an operation.

  Further, as described above, when the operation reception is performed in the fifth acceptance permissible state, the specific effect movable body that has been in the light emitting state until then is turned off for a predetermined time, as a trigger (the fifth operation. (Post-production), when an operation reception is made in the first reception-permitted state, a driving force is applied to the specific-production movable body so that a predetermined production operation appears in response to this (after the first operation). Production) is desirable. At this time, in the first post-operation effect, a driving force is generated with respect to the driving means corresponding to the operating means to be operated so that a predetermined movement (vibration etc.) appears in the operating means. On the other hand, it is desirable not to perform such processing in the fifth post-operation effect. Further, at this time, in the first post-operation effect, the light emission mode of the operation means that is the operation target is changed, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the light emission of the operation means that is the operation object is turned off. It is desirable to do so. It is desirable that these processes in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state be modes that can appear when the same result (for example, a big hit win) is obtained as a result of the jackpot determination.

  Further, when the movable effect by the specific effect movable body is performed in the first post-operation effect, it is desirable that light can be emitted in a mode that does not appear when the specific effect movable body is not operating.

  Further, in the first post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception is started and then continuously output, whereas in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation reception. Is output for a predetermined time, it is desirable that a state in which no effect sound is output in the non-suppressing mode (a state in which it is output in the strongly suppressing mode or a non-outputting state) appears. According to such a configuration, in the fifth post-operation effect, the effect sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is properly executed, but there is a tendency to be suppressed to this compared to the case of the first post-operation effect. As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, it is desirable that the acceptance acceptable sound output when the first acceptance acceptable state and the fifth acceptance acceptable state are different from each other when they occur. That is, as described above, the first acceptable sound (sound effect) and the second acceptable sound (message sound) are output in the first acceptance-permitted state, whereas the second acceptance sound is output in the fifth acceptance-permitted state. The permissible sound (message sound) is not output, and the first permissible sound (sound effect) is output. However, it is desirable that the first permissible sound (sound effect) itself is also output as a different sound.

  Further, as described above, in the first acceptance permissible state and the fifth acceptance permissible state (second acceptance permissible state), the same aspect (FIGS. 232 (a) to (c)) is shown as a general image (integrated general image). Mode) can be displayed. However, even if the same mode is displayed as the general image (integrated general image) in the first acceptable reception state and the fifth acceptable reception state (second acceptable reception state), the size required for the display It is desirable to display different numbers (similar shapes) so that the fifth acceptance-permitted state (second acceptance-permitted state) is displayed in a smaller manner than in the first acceptance-permitted state. However, the sizes are displayed in the same manner in the second acceptance permitted state and the fifth acceptance permitted state. Note that, in the first acceptance permissible state, a special mode can be displayed as a general image (integrated general image), but in the fifth acceptance permissible state (second acceptance allowable state), a general image (integrated general image) As described above, the special mode is not displayed as ")."

  Further, in the first post-operation effect according to the first acceptance permissible state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the effect sound (variation pattern) not triggered by the operation acceptance. It is desirable that the effect sound that is output at a predetermined timing within the above) be output in a non-suppressing manner (for example, BGM return). On the other hand, in the fifth post-operation effect according to the fifth acceptance permissible state, while the post-operation output sound corresponding to the operation acceptance is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner, the effect sound not triggered by the operation acceptance ( It is desirable that the effect sound that is output at a predetermined timing within the variation pattern is not started in a non-suppressing manner. That is, in this case, after the output sound after the operation corresponding to the operation reception is set to the non-output state, the effect sound not triggered by the operation reception (the effect sound output at the predetermined timing in the variation pattern) is not output. Since the output is started in the suppressed mode, by adopting such a suppressed mode as compared with the case of the first acceptance permissible state, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

  Further, as described above, the second acceptance-permitted state can be generated by both the variation pattern in which the first acceptance-permitted state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptance-permitted state does not occur. When the state occurs, there is a possibility that the first acceptance permissible state may occur within a period until the symbol fluctuation in the execution state is stopped. In addition, the fifth acceptable reception state is generated by allowing both the variation pattern in which the first acceptable reception state occurs and the variation pattern in which the first acceptable reception state does not occur, so that the fifth acceptable reception state occurs. In this case, the first acceptance-permitted state may occur within the period until the symbol variation in the execution state is stopped. However, in this case, when the fifth acceptance-allowed state occurs, the rate of occurrence of the first acceptance-allowed state is higher than when the second acceptance-allowed state occurs until the symbol fluctuation is stopped. It is desirable to set to. This ratio may include 0% or 100%. According to such a configuration, the fifth acceptance-permitted state has occurred even if the player has previously noticed that the first acceptance-permitted state has not occurred before the operation acceptance is made. Since it becomes possible to expect the possibility, it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the above-described effect example, as a result of the operation acceptance being performed when the mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), the operation is performed. If the acceptance-permitted sound is not ended midway based on the reception, not only the acceptance-permitted sound but also other sounds that have been in the output state in the non-suppressed mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are not suppressed. The output state will be maintained (see FIG. 249). On the other hand, as a result of the operation reception being performed when the general image (integrated general image) is displayed in a mode different from the special mode (the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)), based on the operation reception When the acceptance-permitted sound ends midway, not only the acceptance-permitted sound but also other sounds that have been in the output state in the non-suppressing mode (such as "BGM playback sound") are output or non-output in the strongly suppressing mode. (See FIG. 254).

  According to the above-described production example, in the situation where the big hit is obtained by the big hit determination, as a result of the operation reception being performed while the general image (integrated general image) is displayed, the operation is accepted based on the operation reception. When the permissible sound ends midway, based on the operation acceptance, "when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)" and "the light is in the light emitting state" There is a case where a process of reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or turning off the light is not performed and no effect operation is caused (FIG. 254). Therefore, it becomes possible to favorably maintain the entertainment of the game under the situation where the acceptance allowable sound is ended midway. Note that, in the case of "when the specific effect movable body is caused to emit light in a predetermined mode and a specific effect operation is generated (FIG. 250)", non-light emission is performed by "processing for reducing the light emitting area of the specific effect movable body or extinguishing it". It is desirable that the portion marked with is also made to emit light.

  In each effect example described above and each effect example described later, the integrated image may be displayed using a plurality of layers. Further, when displaying the mage image and the gauge image separately as separate images instead of the integrated image, they may be displayed on different layers.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below, the first allowable sound and the second allowable sound are output so as to be output so as to overlap each other, but after the first allowable sound is output, The second allowable sound may be started to be output.

  In addition, in the acceptance acceptable state according to each of the above-described examples and each of the later-described examples, the general image is displayed as the integrated general image IG including the gauge image GG, but is not necessarily displayed as the image including the gauge image GG. You don't have to.

  The acceptance allowable state according to each of the above-described examples and each of the later-described examples can occur in both the variation pattern at the time of a big hit and the variation pattern at the time of loss.

  In each of the acceptance acceptable states described above and the acceptance acceptable states described below, the disappearance effect is executed as an image different from the mock image when the post-operation effect is executed, but it is executed in the non-automatic acceptance mode. As a result, it is desirable to execute the disappearance effect by fading out the mock image itself only when the post-operation performance is not executed, in order to prevent recognition of the degree of expectation. In this case, the processing in which the mock image itself displayed on the specific layer is changed from the mode in which the reception is allowed is executed.

  In each of the above-described acceptance acceptable states and each of the acceptance acceptable states described later, even when the same acceptance acceptable state is set, when the jackpot is won, when the jackpot is lost (or lost), or after the operation is performed. The type of extinction effect may be changed according to the degree of expectation as such a mode.

  The wide area disappearance effect is set to more than half of the display screen, and the narrow area disappearance effect is set to less than half of the display screen. It does not have to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half. Similarly for the pre-production, the wide area type pre-production is set to be more than half of the display screen and the narrow area type pre-production is set to less than half of the display screen. ", It is not always necessary to satisfy the conditions of more than half or less than half.

  The post-operation effect may be performed only by any one of liquid crystal display, sound output, and light emission by a lamp provided on the game board 5. In short, any operation may be used as long as it causes some change in display, sound, light emission, or the like.

  Further, the "specific type effect sound" may be a BGM reproduction sound that is output during normal fluctuation, or may be a BGM reproduction sound that is output over a plurality of fluctuations.

  The fourth acceptance permissible state does not necessarily have to be executed in the non-automatic reception mode, but may be executed in the automatic reception mode.

  In addition, after-operation performance when the operation reception is performed in the first acceptance-permitted state (first operation post-production) and after-operation performance when the operation reception is performed in the fourth reception-permitted state (fourth operation post-production) In and, it is desirable to make the contents of production different from each other.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below, when the disappearance effect (predetermined layer) is displayed, the process of reducing the visibility of the integrated image IG (specific layer) itself (increasing the transmittance) You may also carry out together.

  In each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below, the image related to the disappearance effect (wide area disappearance effect, narrow area disappearance effect) may be displayed with a predetermined transmittance. Even if the image is displayed so as to overlap the entire image (integrated image), it is possible to confirm the mode of the image (integrated image).

  In each of the above-mentioned effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, "narrow area type pre-effect" means "background change (a background image that has been displayed until then cannot be visually recognized, and a new background image is displayed. "Pre-production without accompanying production effect". In this case, "wide area type pre-production" means "background change (production in which the background image that has been displayed until then cannot be visually recognized and the new background image is displayed). It means "pre-production with". The background image may be an image of a single black color or a single white color.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, the aspect shown in FIG. 232 (d) may be omitted as the aspect of the integrated image. In this case, the “special aspect” is an operation means (an aspect in which the shape of the image of the operation receiving portion is the same and the shape of the peripheral decoration image is different (an aspect shown in FIG. 232 (c)). Will be used.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, when a mock image (integrated mood image) is displayed, the mood image is used as an “operation in a movable region” or “operation” as an operation unit (operation receiving unit). As described above, this is dynamically displayed in the form of expressing "behavior when it is done". In this regard, it is desirable that such a dynamic display is continued on the specific layer until it is hidden after the operation is accepted.

  In each of the above-described effect examples and each of the below-described effect examples, the display method relating to the mock image is appropriately changed to the content described in FIGS. 232 to 248, the explanatory text corresponding to these figures, or another example. You may make it add or add. In addition, regarding the mood image, the gauge image, the acceptance sound, and the post-operation effect when the first acceptance allowable state occurs, FIGS. 212 to 248, “BGM” in the explanatory text corresponding to these drawings and another example. It may be appropriately changed or added to the explanations described in "the effective period that occurs while the reproduced sound is in the strong suppression mode" or the contents applied to another example. .. Also, regarding the mood image, the gauge image, the acceptance sound, and the post-operation effect when the second acceptance permitted state occurs, FIGS. 212 to 248, “BGM” in the explanatory text corresponding to these figures and another example. The description may be appropriately changed or added to the description applied to the explanatory text or another example described regarding "the valid period that occurs while the reproduced sound is in the non-suppressed mode". ..

[More detailed performance of the image disappearance effect]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation in which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big hit determination according to the start winning (holding exhaustion). Pattern judgment can be executed. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, thereby performing the jackpot determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movable body operation (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, and as a result, when the stop display is performed with the big hit pattern, the big hit game or the high bonus as a benefit to the player. Transition to the probability game state becomes feasible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable body movements, etc. The expected effect according to (2) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate a reception acceptable state (effective period) in which production reception is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even when the special effect is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, it is possible to generate a reception permissible state (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the production determination, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. .. Also, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a particular timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is not limited to the above “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

  By the way, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is that the production member to be produced is to be produced as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). A post-reception effect (post-operation effect) that causes a predetermined change (at least one of a display change in the effect display device 1600, an effect sound change in the speaker, a light emission change by the lamp, and an effect operation by the movable decorative body) is executed. Since the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) itself is poor, it is feared that amusement of the game related to the acceptance period is deteriorated.

  In addition, in each of the examples described above and each of the examples described below, the “operation by the player” to be detected is a direct operation by the player such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword ornament 5001”. The operation is not limited to (pressing operation or sword removing operation), and “a contact operation by the player with respect to a specific part” that is a detection target with the touch sensor and “a player in a specific space” that is a detection target with a non-contact sensor. Is also included in the meaning. In short, one or more reception means (operation means) to be received so as to be used for the performance of the player's action (pressing action, sword action, touch action, non-contact action, etc.) Good.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special performance is provided. It should be noted that, for each performance (each configuration) described below, it is not always necessary to provide all of those configurations, and for example, even if at least one performance (any configuration) is provided, a game It is possible to reduce the interest, or it may be provided with some constitutions which are considered necessary for obtaining further effects, or described as applicable to another constitution. You may make it employ | adopt the structure currently comprised. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and may have any configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, regarding the moving image display displayed using the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), it is based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted. It is possible to display even after the production is advanced (after the production change based on acceptance is started), and even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance by this, the image display is accepted. The player can recognize which mode (for example, FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) was displayed during the period.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the contents of the production that is performed when the game is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as a post-reception production) are performed. A plurality of reception periods (effective periods) of different types) are prepared, and it is possible to generate the reception periods (effective periods) of the types according to the result of the determination (production determination).

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, as will be described later, when an operation by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period, a specific post-reception effect image is displayed on the "effect display device 1600" based on the acceptance. In addition to being able to be displayed in, the specific mode can appear separately from the specific post-reception effect image, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mood image display. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode was displayed as the mock image display even after the acceptance was made, as well as the specific mode until the mock image display was hidden. By reducing the visibility by the above, it is expected to encourage the player to naturally move the gaze target from the "image display" to the "specific post-reception effect image". .

  However, since the original image display is originally displayed during the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, if the relevant image display is displayed even after the acceptance is made, it will be accepted. Further, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the specific post-reception effect image is already displayed, and there is a concern that amusement of the game may be deteriorated. In this respect, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the mock image display is hidden (invisible) while the specific mode appears, while the specific post-reception effect The image is displayed while the specific aspect appears. In other words, in this case, after the player has accepted the action, the display effect from the pre-reception display (middle image display) to the post-reception display (specific post-reception effect image) appears in the specific mode appearing. Since the transition will be realized, it is only necessary to confirm whether it is in the situation before the specific aspect appears, or in the situation where the specific aspect has finished appearing, from the pre-reception display (image display) This makes it possible to easily recognize whether or not the display-related transition to the post-acceptance display (specific post-acceptance effect image) has been completed.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, both the specific aspect and the specific post-reception effect image appear based on the acceptance being made, but the specific aspect is the specific reception. The specific post-reception effect image before the post-effect image is displayed appears in a situation where the post-reception effect image is not yet displayed. That is, in this case, in a situation where a specific post-reception effect image is not yet displayed, since the mock image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the above-described specific aspect, it is possible to visually recognize the mood image display, but at the same time After the reception, the effect image is in a state where it can appear soon, and it becomes possible to urge the player to prepare in advance so as to change the gaze point by the player from "the difficult-to-see image display". .

[Configuration 2]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the first reception period (effective period) of the plurality of reception periods (effective period), A mode in which the first post-reception effect image can be displayed on the basis of the acceptance being made, and in addition to the first post-reception effect image, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mood image display (first effect mode) Can appear. Further, when an operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods (effective period), a first image different from the first post-reception effect image based on the acceptance is made. The second post-reception effect image can be displayed, and in addition to the second post-reception effect image, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second performance) Aspect) can appear. The "specific aspect" may correspond to either the first effect aspect or the second effect aspect, or may not correspond to either of the first effect aspect and the second effect aspect.

  According to such a configuration, even if it is not confirmed which of the “first post-reception effect image” and the “second post-reception effect image” is displayed as the post-reception effect image, the mood image display is visually recognized. The type of the post-reception effect image (the first post-reception effect image, the second post-reception effect image) can be estimated only by confirming what the difficult aspect was. That is, the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) in which the mock image display is difficult to visually recognize means that at least a part of the predetermined area in the "display screen of the effect display device 1600" is displayed. Whether it is realized as an image displayed in an overlapping specific area (a predetermined transmittance will be set if it overlaps with all from the start of appearance), It goes without saying that it is realized as an effect (for example, a movable object effect) using a predetermined effect object in an overlapping position. Therefore, even if there is a player who does not change the gaze destination from the mood image display even after being accepted, the type of the mode (first effect mode, second effect mode) that appears at the gaze point (so as to overlap with the mood image display) ) Can be confirmed so that the type of post-reception effect (first post-reception effect image, second post-reception effect image) can be estimated without changing the gaze destination. Become

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the third reception period (effective period) of the plurality of reception periods (effective period), It is possible to display a third post-reception effect image that is different from both the first post-reception effect image and the second post-reception effect image based on that the acceptance has been made. Separately from the above, the first effect mode corresponding to the first acceptance period can be made to appear as an effect mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display.

  According to such a configuration, as a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to be visually recognized, it is unclear which of the first and third post-reception effect images will appear when the first effect mode appears. When the second effect mode appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mood image display, it is possible to estimate that the second post-reception effect image appears. That is, in this case, for example, when the first effect mode appears, it can be recognized that the possibility of outputting the second post-reception effect image has been denied, but the first and third post-reception effect images do not appear. It is unclear which one will appear, and it will be possible for the player to have an interest in which one will appear. It becomes possible to favorably promote the shift of the gaze destination to the place where the post-reception production is being performed, while maintaining the performance and tension of the above.

  Although the post-reception presentation image is described as an example of the post-reception presentation here, for example, “lamp light emission” or “movable body operation” is included in the first reception period and the second reception period as the post-reception production. If it is executed in a different mode (or if it is received within one reception period, but not when it is received within the other reception period), It is also possible to replace the “post-production image” with “lamp light emission” or “movable body operation”. In any case, in view of the action and effect such as "being able to infer the type of post-reception effect without changing the gaze destination", the post-reception effect is displayed as a mock image display. The position is deviated from the front view in a front view, and is implemented as a position that does not overlap (a position that cannot be confirmed unless the player changes the gazing point from the position where the simulated image display is displayed). Further, when a plurality of post-reception effects such as "post-reception effect image", "lamp light emission", and "movable body motion" are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, at least one of the post-reception effects is It can be said that the above-described effects can be achieved if the effect is equivalent to the “post-reception effect”.

  When a plurality of post-reception effects (a plurality of post-reception modes) such as “post-reception effect image”, “lamp light emission”, and “movable body operation” are performed in parallel based on the acceptance, the post-reception effects ( Regarding the point that at least one of the (post-reception mode) can be made to correspond to the “post-reception effect”, it is applicable to each of the effect examples described below, in addition to the above-described effect examples.

[Configuration 3]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), the post-reception effect (of As one mode), the special effect mode can be executed, and during the execution period of the special effect mode, there is a state in which the mood image display is relatively easily visible and a state in which the mood image display is relatively hard to be visually recognized. I have to.

  That is, in this case, even after the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect) is started based on the acceptance, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display. .. Further, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), by making the mood image display relatively difficult to be visually recognized, the "special image mode" to "special effect mode (post-reception effect)" It is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

  In the pachinko machine 1, the special effect mode (after-acceptance effect) does not affect the visibility of the mock image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in an easily visible state) before being accepted. The execution is started as follows. More specifically, the mock image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the special effect mode (post-acceptance effect) includes at least a part of the predetermined area. It is neither an image display that is used or displayed nor an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area in a front view. As a result, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), it is possible to make the mood image display relatively difficult to visually recognize. ) ”Is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the acceptance is made within a specific acceptance period, at least the special effect mode and the predetermined effect mode appear in parallel based on the acceptance. Has become. However, the predetermined effect mode is started to be executed after the special effect mode is started (after the special effect mode is started) so that the visibility of the mood image display is adversely affected (it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mood image display). It is supposed to be done. As a result, during the execution of the special effect mode (post-reception effect), it is possible to make the mood image display relatively difficult to visually recognize. ) ”Is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally.

  The process of causing the predetermined effect mode to appear is also started based on the acceptance. Therefore, the post-reception effect is assumed to be a plurality of post-reception effects including at least the special effect mode and the predetermined effect mode (a plurality of post-reception modes), and the predetermined effect mode is realized as one mode of the post-reception effect. You may do it. In any case, the predetermined effect mode described in this configuration example is an image display that is displayed by using at least a part of the predetermined area in which the black image display is displayed, or at least a part of the predetermined area. Is realized as an effect executed by using an effect body located at a position overlapping in front view.

[Configuration 4]
On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), while the mood image display is being displayed, By using a specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area that is the display target area of the mock image display, it is possible to display a "particular extinction effect display" as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display. The image display is made non-display while the specific disappearance effect display is being displayed after the display of the specific disappearance effect display is started.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the simulated image display even after the acceptance. Also, the visibility of the mock image display is reduced by the specific disappearance effect display until the mock image display is hidden, and the mull image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest that the remaining time until the mock image display is hidden is short, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the mock image display is hidden is suppressed. I will get it.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the specific disappearance effect display can be displayed even in a period after the mock image display is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. In the meantime, after the reception, the production is started to be executed. The post-reception effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area that is the display target area of the specific extinction effect display, or (at least one of the specific extinction effect display). Part) in front view.

  According to such a configuration, among the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effects executed at the position overlapping the specific extinction effect display in front view are watched from the position where the specific extinction effect display is displayed. It will be recognizable without changing the destination. That is, in this case, at the time when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze point in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-reception effect, It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game appropriately.

[Configuration 5]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, in the reception period (specific reception period), during the period from the reception of the operation by the player until the mood image display is hidden, It may appear, and when the specific mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the predictive effect display is executed in a specific predictive manner based on the result of the winning / judgment determination being a special result (for example, a big hit, a sudden change big hit, etc.). When the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific aspect is within a period from when the action is accepted until the mood image display is hidden. It is made possible to appear in.

  That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific precursory mode, it is possible to recognize that the specific mode appears until the general image display is hidden and the general image display is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it becomes possible to urge the player to gaze depending on in which mode the simulated image display appears before the player performs the action. The "specific aspect" according to the configuration 5 and the "specific aspect" according to the configuration 1 may be the same aspect or different aspects, and occur in correspondence with different acceptance periods. May be

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, the omen effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific omen mode based on the result of the winning / judgment determination being a special result (for example, a big hit, a probability big hit, etc.). When the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display (the acceptance period different from the specific acceptance period), the specific aspect is the state in which the image display is not displayed from the time of the acceptance. There are cases where it appears within the period until it is turned off and cases where it does not appear within the period.

  According to such a configuration, in the case where the aura effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific aura mode, the specific mode is applied from the time when it is accepted until the mood image display is in a non-display state. Since it will be unclear whether or not it will appear within the period of, from the time of acceptance, it will be possible to improve the performance until the image display is hidden. It becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

  The configuration 5 may be realized by replacing it with the following configuration, or may be provided as a configuration (acceptance period) different from the configuration 5. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, after the operation by the player is accepted during the reception period (a specific reception period or a reception period different from the specific reception period), the mood image display is in a non-display state. A specific aspect may appear within the period until the above-mentioned action, and when the specific aspect appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mock image display. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the omen effect display is the special omen mode (same as the specific omen mode, based on the result of the winning / judgment determination being a special result (for example, a big hit or a probability big hit). However, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the indication effect display, the specific mode is set such that the image display is hidden from the time of the acceptance. It will not be possible to appear within the period until the time. That is, in this case, when the indication effect display is executed in the special indication mode, the specific mode does not appear until the abnormal image display is hidden, and it is difficult to visually recognize the specific image in relation to the specific mode. You will be able to recognize that you will not be hurt.

  In this case, in the pachinko machine 1, the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the special warning mode based on the fact that the result of the winning / judgment determination is a special result (for example, big hit, probability variation big hit, etc.). When the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to the effect display (the acceptance period different from the above acceptance period), in the above-described specific aspect, the mood image display is hidden from the time of the acceptance. There will be cases where it will appear within the period up to, and cases where it will not appear within the period. Even with such a configuration, when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the special omen mode, the specific mode is set to the non-display state from the time when the specific mode is received. Since it will be unclear whether or not it will appear within the period up to, it will be possible to improve the performance from the time it is accepted until the mock image display is hidden. , It becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension.

  Regarding the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), the above-described or later-described configurations applicable to the above-described configuration 5 can be appropriately applied.

[Configuration 6]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that suggests that a reception period during which an operation by a player is a reception target will occur soon. Then, of the plurality of types of the indication effect display, a specific indication effect display can be executed in such a manner that the timing corresponding to the reception period occurs, and the particular indication effect display is displayed. Therefore, the operation by the player can be accepted.

  That is, in this case, since the operation by the player can be accepted while confirming which type (mode) is being displayed as the predictive effect display, the type (mode) of the predictive effect display can be accepted. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to forgetting to confirm.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation by the player is accepted while the specific indication effect display is displayed, a post-reception effect (for example, a special post-reception effect) corresponding to the acceptance is given. Although the execution is started, even when the post-acceptance effect is started to be executed, the specific precursor effect display is not hidden but is displayed.

  That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the indication effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the indication effect display.

[Configuration 7]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the reception period (for example, a specific reception period) occurs, the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted, or the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the acceptance-permitted sound that indicates that it will be in the state of being ready (soon), the player is prevented from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

  Acceptable sound indicates the timing of occurrence of the acceptance period even if it is realized as a sound that is audible before the occurrence of the corresponding acceptance period (suggestion that the acceptance period will occur soon). It is made audible in the form of straddling and can be made audible at least partway during the reception period. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 whose tone setting value can be set to “0”, under the condition that the volume setting value is set to “0”, the acceptance acceptable sound is output but is not audible. Will not be done.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance allowable sound is audible (output state) during the acceptance period (for example, the specific acceptance period), the above-mentioned “impression image display” is displayed. The "acceptable sound" is displayed in a state in which the "modes in which the visual image display is difficult to view (disappearance display, etc.)" have not yet appeared, before the appearance of "modes in which visibility becomes difficult (disappearance display, etc.)" The process for setting the inaudible state is started.

  In other words, in this case, even if the "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to see" has not yet appeared after being accepted, this is to the player regarding the fact that the acceptance period has already ended. Will be able to suggest appropriately. This makes it possible to display the mock image display in a visually recognizable manner, since it is less likely to cause inconvenience even if the timing at which the “mature image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” appears after being accepted. become

[Configuration 8]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period (a plurality of reception periods having different reception effects) are prepared as the reception period. Then, there is a mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mock image display from the time when the motion of the player is accepted while the mock image display is displayed until the mock image display is in the non-display state. It is supposed to appear. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation by the player is accepted while the mood image display is displayed during the first reception period, and when the motion image display is displayed during the second reception period. In any case where the operation by the player is accepted while being displayed, the "mode in which the image of the image is difficult to visually recognize" appears until the image of the image is hidden. ing.

  That is, in this case, whether the first reception period or the second reception period has ended, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mock image display after the reception is completed, and the reception period ends. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 8 may be the same types of reception periods as the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 2. However, the reception periods may be different types.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the first mode appears in the first reception period. Since the second mode appears in the second reception period, it is possible to give the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to be visually recognized" to the performance related to the type of the reception period.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, a third mode is further prepared as “a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and in the first reception period, whether or not the reception is made within the period. However, the first mode may appear, but in the second reception period, the second mode appears when it is received within the period, and the third mode appears when it is not received within the period.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, it is determined whether or not the operation by the player has been received within the reception period, based on the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” that has appeared. However, in the first acceptance period, it is not possible to judge whether or not the operation by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, based on the appearance “mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to see”. As a result, it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved through such performance.

  In each of the above-mentioned production examples or each of the following production examples, "a manner in which the mock image display is difficult to visually recognize" means that the disappearance effect display is made in a specific area including at least a part of a predetermined area in which the mock image display is displayed. In addition to the mode in which the effect image is displayed and the mode in which the effect is performed using the effect body located at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area in which the effect image display is displayed, the effect image display itself is visually recognized. The display may be changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to perform (for example, the display may be reduced, the display may be blurred, or the transmittance may be changed).

[Configuration 9]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, when the acceptance period (for example, the specific acceptance period) occurs, the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted, or the acceptance by the acceptance means is permitted. Since it is possible to execute the process of making the acceptance-permitted sound that suggests that (soon) becomes audible, the player is prevented from forgetting to perform the operation for acceptance.

  Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that suggests that a reception period in which an operation by a player is received will occur soon. Then, a specific predictive effect display among a plurality of types of predictive effect display can be executed in such a manner that the corresponding reception period occurs, and the specific predictive effect display is displayed. Therefore, the operation by the player can be accepted. That is, in this case, the player's operation can be accepted while making it possible to confirm which mode is displayed as the predictive effect display, so that the player can forget to check the mode of the predictive effect display. The decline in interest can be suppressed. In addition, the “specific omen effect display” according to the configuration 9 may be the same as the “specific omen effect display” according to the structure 6, or may be a different type (aspect) omen effect display. ..

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific precursor effect display is displayed even after the effect (post-accept effect) in accordance with the acceptance of the operation by the player is advanced. By doing so, even after the acceptance is made, the player side can confirm which mode has appeared as the indication effect display.

  However, since the aura indication display effect is originally displayed in a state where acceptance is not permitted (before the reception period occurs), the action by the player in the state where the amenity display effect is displayed is Even if it is performed, the player may feel uneasy as to whether the operation has been accepted. Nevertheless, if the precursor effect display is simply displayed even after the acceptance is made, it is feared that it may be difficult to recognize whether or not it is in the accepting state, which may reduce the entertainment appeal. It

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, when the operation by the player is accepted while the specific predictive effect display is displayed, the specific predictive effect even after the acceptance is made. Although the display is displayed, a mode in which the specific precursor effect display is hard to be visually recognized is displayed while the specific predictive effect display is being displayed. Then, after the appearance of the aspect, the specific precursor effect display is hidden while it is difficult to visually recognize the specific predictive effect display.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display, and to reduce the visibility until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

[Configuration 10]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, it is possible to execute a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur, the display screen (production display device 1600) ), A predetermined image display can be displayed, and the full-scale image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the motion by the player. There is. Then, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, a mode in which the image of the image is difficult to visually recognize is displayed while the image of the image is displayed. The "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize" is executed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that can be displayed even in the case of a symbol variation in which the acceptance period does not occur.

  That is, in this case, since the specific disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display that is not related to the reception period, it is directly related to the reception period. The game can be advanced without adversely affecting the performance.

  However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first image display (predetermined image display) is provided as an image display that is not related to the reception period (the reception period being generated) in terms of presentation. The second image display and the second image display can be displayed within the acceptance period, and the specific disappearance effect display does not affect the visibility of the first image display (predetermined image display), but the second image display ( It is supposed to be displayed so as to affect the visibility of (pending).

  According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, depending on its type, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears, the visibility is affected. Therefore, when the player performs an action, whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide the directivity about.

  However, in this case, regarding the first image display, it is assumed that it is displayed as an image (a plurality of modes) relating to the winning or failure (expectation degree) of the symbol variation, and regarding the second image display, regarding the symbol variation. It is to be displayed as a display that does not concern (win) the win (expectation) to avoid a decrease in the entertainment level when the visibility of the second image display is affected. Can be said to be desirable above.

  In addition, when the "specific disappearance effect display" displayed on the display screen (effect display device 1600) is used as the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize", the operation by the player is accepted during the acceptance period. When the image is displayed, the image is displayed using the specific area including at least a part of the predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600) which is the display target area of the image display. Will be displayed.

[Configuration 11]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, it is possible to execute a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. Also, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, the display screen (effect display device 1600) is displayed in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. A predetermined image display can be displayed inside, and the image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted. .. The “predetermined image display” in the configuration 11 may be the same as the “predetermined image display” in the configuration 10 or may be a different image display. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the mode in which the quality image display is difficult to visually recognize while the quality image display is being displayed is described. A plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode are prepared as the modes that can appear and the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize.

  That is, in this case, since one of a plurality of modes including the first mode and the second mode appears as the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the entertainment of the game when the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize Is expected to improve.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the “first aspect” as “a manner in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize” is executed, the “first aspect” is a predetermined visual image display and a predetermined image. However, when the "second mode" as "a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize" is executed, the "second mode" is the same as the normal image display. Among the image displays of (1) and (2), only the image display is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, since the directivity as to which of the “first mode” and the “second mode” appears as the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize” is produced, the game is played. It is expected that the interest will be improved.

  It should be noted that the normal image display and the predetermined image display are performed in a state where either the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the “first aspect” or the acceptance period of the type corresponding to the “second aspect” is occurring. It is desirable to be able to display even in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration 12]
As described above, in the pachinko machine 1,
It is possible to generate a first acceptance period in which acceptance by the acceptance means (for example, operation button 410) is permitted, and when the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. Based on the expectation (the proportion of large jackpots stopped), the first reception effect execution means capable of executing the first post-reception effect display, and the reception means (for example, the operation button 410) May be present, or may be a sword decoration body 5001 different from the operation button 410), and a second reception period in which reception by the sword decoration body 5001 is permitted can be generated, and an operation by the player can be performed within the second reception period. When received, the second reception performance capable of executing the second post-reception effect display in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations (the proportion of the big hit symbols being stopped) based on the acceptance. It has an execution means. The expectation level (the rate at which the big hit symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%. Further, the first post-reception effect display and the second post-reception effect display are executed as displays of different types as the notice effect. Further, the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configuration 12 are the same types of reception periods as the “first reception period” and the “second reception period” according to the configurations 2 and 8, respectively. Alternatively, the reception periods of different types may be used.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, either the case where the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the case where the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period. Also in the above, even after the acceptance is made, the mode in which the quality image display is difficult to visually recognize can be displayed while the quality image display is being displayed.

  That is, in this case, regardless of the type of the reception period, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the simulated image display even after the reception is made. Further, since the visibility of the mock image display is lowered before the mock image display is hidden, it can be suggested that the remaining time until the mock image display is hidden is short. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level when the image display is hidden.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, in the first reception period, the first mode is executed as the first post-reception effect display and the first post-reception effect display is performed. In any case where the second mode, which has a higher degree of expectation than the one mode, is executed, the same mode appears as the “mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display”. On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the second mode having a higher expectation than the first mode (or the first mode having a lower expectation than the second mode) is executed as the second post-reception effect display The specific mode appears as "a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize". However, when the first mode (or the second mode) is executed as the second post-reception effect display, "the visual image display is visually recognized". The specific mode does not appear as “the mode that becomes difficult”, or a mode different from the specific mode appears, or the “mode that the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” itself does not appear. As described above, the degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbols are stopped) may be 0% or 100%.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as the post-reception effect display only by confirming “a manner in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the expectation. In some cases, the degree cannot be guessed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by the directivity related to the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to see". ..

  As for the "specific aspect" that may occur during the second reception period, as the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see", the mode in which the image display is difficult to view corresponding to the first reception period If it is not possible to appear, it becomes possible to infer the type of the acceptance period based on the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to see”, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Will be able to. In obtaining such an effect, as the “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize”, the “mode” that may occur corresponding to the first reception period is the “image in the second reception period”. It is more desirable that the “display cannot be visually recognized”.

  However, as the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display”, the “mode” that can occur corresponding to the first reception period and the “mode” that can occur corresponding to the second reception period are the same modes. You may be allowed to appear.

[Configuration 13]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to display a reception-related effect display (a scale image display, a gauge image, etc.) at least during the reception period in association with the occurrence of the reception period. It is possible to output a reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptance sound or the like) at least during the reception period in association with the occurrence. Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception effect based on the acceptance is made (this is one aspect of the post-reception effect. It is also possible to output as, and when the operation by the player is accepted while the reception related effect display is displayed within the reception period, it is based on the fact that the operation is accepted. The reception related effect display is hidden. Similarly, when the operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related effect sound is set in the inaudible state based on the acceptance. I am trying to do it.

  In the above configuration, the post-reception performance sound related to the post-reception performance is output, the reception-related performance display is hidden, and the reception-related performance sound is not displayed based on the fact that the operation by the player is received during the reception period. Since it is set in the audible state, it becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in the received state.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception-related effect display is not finished at the time when a specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started. Although being displayed, the reception-related effect sound is finished at the time point when a specific post-acceptance effect sound corresponding to the acceptance is started to be rendered inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, regarding the reception-related effect display displayed during the reception period, it is displayed until after the specific post-reception effect is started to be executed, while within the reception period. The reception-related effect sound that is made audible (output) is not made audible when the output sound after reception is started to be executed. As a result, even after the execution of the specific post-reception production is started, the reception-related production sound is made inaudible while the mode of the reception-related production display that was displayed within the reception period can be confirmed. This makes it possible to suitably suggest that the reception period has already ended.

  In addition, the non-audible state may be a state in which the output process of the reception-related effect sound itself has been completed or the output process of the reception-related effect sound itself in each of the above-described examples and each of the examples described below. May be inaudible by adjusting the volume to “0” although it is being continued. In addition, in the above-mentioned examples and each of the examples described below, the post-reception reception specific to the specific post-reception production is a composite using a plurality of production bodies (display, light-emitting lamp, movable body, etc.). When it is executed as a special effect, it may correspond to the “effect using a specific effect body” of those effect bodies.

[Configuration 14]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of modes are prepared as the indication effect display, and a specific indication effect display can be displayed before the reception period occurs, and reception-related effect sounds can be displayed. Audible output of (acceptable sound, etc.) can be started. Then, the specific predictive effect display and the reception-related effect sound can be executed over the timing of the reception period, the specific predictive effect display is displayed, and the reception-related effect sound is in an audible state (output). The operation by the player can be accepted. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1, when the operation by the player is accepted while the specific predictive effect display is displayed within the acceptance period, the specific operation is accepted based on the acceptance. Hide the precursor effect display. Further, when the operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related effect sound is set to the inaudible state based on the acceptance. ing.

  In the above-mentioned configuration, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the reception period, the specific precursor effect display is hidden, and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible. Therefore, even when the operation by the player is accepted while the specific precursor effect display and the reception related effect sound that are in the execution state before the acceptance period occurs are accepted, It becomes possible to easily recognize that it is in the state of being struck. In addition, the “specific omen effect display” according to the configuration 14 may be the same as the “specific omen effect display” according to the configurations 6 and 9, or may be a different type (aspect) omen effect display. Good. Further, the “reception-related effect sound” according to the configuration 14 may be the same as or different from the “reception-related effect sound” according to the configuration 13.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the specific precursory effect display starts execution of a specific post-acceptance effect corresponding to being accepted within the corresponding acceptance period. It has not been completed at this point and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound is finished at the time when a specific post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, the specific precursor effect display displayed before the occurrence of the reception period is displayed until after the specific post-acceptance effect is started to be executed. The reception-related effect sound that is audible (output) before the period occurs is not made audible at the time when the output sound after reception starts to be executed. Thereby, even after the execution of the specific post-reception production is started, the reception-related production output before the occurrence of the reception period can be confirmed while confirming the mode as the indication production display that is displayed before the generation of the reception period. By making the sound inaudible, it is possible to preferably indicate that the reception period has already ended. The "specific post-reception effect" and the "specific post-reception output sound" according to the configuration 14 are the same as the "specific post-reception output sound" and the "specific post-reception output sound" according to the configuration 13, respectively. It may exist or it may be different.

[Configuration 15]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a plurality of reception periods having different "contents of performance (type of post-reception effect) to be advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted". Further, the mock image display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by a player is accepted within a specific acceptance period among a plurality of acceptance periods, a plurality of operations are performed based on the acceptance. Although any one of the effects is made to appear, the specific aspect can be made to appear even when any of the effects is made to appear.

  In the above configuration, the type of effect mode that appears based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted (“conversation notice” about which conversation appears and “movable body regarding whether or not the movable body operates”). There are multiple reception periods with different types of notice production (such as "action notice"). In this regard, when an operation by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, one of the plurality of effects appears based on the acceptance, but which of the effects appears. Even if it is done, the specific mode can appear. That is, in this case, no matter which of the multiple effects appears, the specific aspect will also appear accordingly. Therefore, they are “caused by the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period. You will be able to suggest that it is a common production.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when an operation by the player is received within a special reception period different from the specific reception period among the plurality of reception periods, special conditions (a big hit winning condition, a probability change Any of a plurality of aspects including a special aspect having a different appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) depending on whether or not a rush condition etc.) is satisfied, and the special aspect is When it appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image.

  According to such a configuration, a special aspect in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the mock image display is hidden, and the special image makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display. The player can enjoy the effect of proceeding from the mock image display to the post-reception effect (special mode) without changing the gazing point.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the “specific mode” appears based on the operation by the player being accepted within the specific acceptance period, the mood image display is It is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "specific mode". According to such a configuration, when the above-mentioned special mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is suggested makes it difficult to visually recognize the scale image display (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is not suggested There is a case where it is difficult to visually recognize the mock image display (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode (specific mode, special mode) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mural image display" is provided with the directivity. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  The “specific reception period” of the configuration 15 may be the same as the “specific reception period” of the configurations 1, 7, and 9 or may correspond to a different reception period.

[Configuration 16]
Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggesting display that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image or the like) with the passage of time during the reception period. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, Since the display area of the specific image can be reduced even while the performance is being advanced, it is difficult to recognize "whether the reception has been made" even after the reception has been made, and a sense of tension is felt. It will be expected to be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a remaining time suggestion display, a specific divided area is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600), and a specific image is displayed in the specific divided area. It is supposed that the rendering area (eg gauge image) is reduced. Then, after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image or the like) but also for the specific divided area. With such a configuration, since the specific partitioned area is displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, the display area of the specific image (gauge image or the like) is reduced. It becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the amount has decreased.

  Note that "the display area of a specific image (such as a gauge image) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted" means, for example, that the operation by the player is accepted. At the time when the production is advanced on the basis of the fact, what has a predetermined display area left as a gauge image is included in the meaning that the display area becomes 0 (non-display) at a later time. is there. However, in this case, it is required that the specific partition area is still displayed at the time when the display area of the gauge image is set to 0, and the display area of the gauge image of the specific partition area is set to 0. It will be hidden after the timing.

  For example, as the configuration 16, when the operation by the player is accepted, the remaining time suggestion display (specific image, specific partition area, etc.) is hidden based on the acceptance, but the remaining Prior to hiding the time suggestion display, regardless of how much the display area of the specific image was left at the time of acceptance, the display area within the specific division area has a specific value (predetermined value ) Is displayed, or only a specific partition area of the specific partition area and the specific image is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0). Is possible.

  In particular, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (at the time when the production of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started), the operation is performed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the specific image is reduced" is continued and is not ended. Then, after this, when the predetermined timing arrives, a specific image whose display area is set to a specific value is displayed in the specific partitioned area, or only a specific partitioned area of the specific partitioned area and the specific image is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  That is, in this case, since the display area of the specific image (such as a gauge image) is not significantly reduced at the timing when the production of the production corresponding to the acceptance is started, the drawing until then is continued, Even after the call is made, it becomes difficult to recognize "whether it is in the state of being accepted" and it is expected that the feeling of tension is maintained appropriately. In addition, since the drawing that significantly reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image, etc.) is performed at a timing later than the timing at which the production of the presentation according to the acceptance is started, the acceptance is effective ( It is possible to make it look as if it was on time at the last minute of the reception period), and it is expected to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration 17]
In addition, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 prepares a plurality of precursor effect displays as predictive effect displays that indicate that the reception period will occur. In this regard, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when a specific predictive effect display is performed from among a plurality of predictive effect displays, a reception period occurs for the mock image display related to the reception target. It will be displayed both within the warning period before that and during the reception period. Further, the mock image display displayed during the precursory period is different from the mock image display displayed during the reception period, and is hidden before the reception period occurs. Therefore, it is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved even in the period before the reception period occurs.

  Further, as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is accepted within the acceptance period, the pachinko machine display is hidden based on the acceptance, but the pachinko machine display is not displayed. By the time it is turned on, a "particular mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" can appear. However, as will be described later, regarding the “particular aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display”, it is not displayed when the image display displayed within the precursory period (specific indication display) is hidden. I'm trying not to appear in the meantime.

  According to such a configuration, in the omen period (specific omen effect display), the mood image display is not performed without the appearance of the “specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mood image display” that appears corresponding to the reception period. It will be displayed. Therefore, even if the image display is displayed within the omen period (specific omen effect display), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player does not know It becomes possible to make it difficult for the misunderstanding that the reception period has ended to occur.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of "modes that make it difficult to visually recognize a mock image display" that can appear in response to acceptance are prepared, including "a specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize a mung image display", In any of the aspects, it is desirable that the pseudo-image display that is displayed within the precursory period does not appear when it is hidden. However, if it is a mode different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as “a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize a mock image display” according to acceptance, it will be delayed until the mood image display is hidden within the warning period. You may make it appear "a mode which makes it difficult to visually recognize a simulated image display". That is, in this case, since it is recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appears within the precursor period. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without the player's knowledge.

  Note that the “specific omen effect display” according to the configuration 17 may be the same as the “specific omen effect display” according to the configurations 6, 9, and 14 and corresponds to a different omen effect display. May be.

[Configuration 18]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when the first effect condition is satisfied, the first accepting period can be generated as the accepting period during the execution period of the symbol variation, and when the second effect condition is satisfied. The second reception period can be generated as the reception period during the period of executing the symbol variation. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the first acceptance period can be continued after the symbol variation in which the first acceptance period has occurred is finished and the next symbol variation is started to be executed. However, the second acceptance period is not continued until after the symbol variation in which the second acceptance period has occurred is terminated, and is terminated before the symbol variation is terminated. It has become a thing. Furthermore, the simulated image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period, and when the operation by the player is received within the first reception period and the second reception period. In any case where the operation by the player is accepted within the period, an extinction effect mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mock image display based on the acceptance is made.

  That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm that which mode has appeared as the image display even after the acceptance is made, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period is in the finished state. In any case, the first reception period and the second reception period can be appropriately obtained.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the extinction effect mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the mood image display depends on whether it is received during the first reception period or during the second reception period. It is executed as a different mode. That is, in this case, based on the type of “disappearance effect mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”, it becomes possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period is ended within the pattern change being executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  The “first reception period and the second reception period” according to the configuration 18 may be the same as the “first reception period and the second reception period” according to the configurations 2, 8 and 12, or different reception periods. It may correspond to a period.

[Configuration 19]
Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of game states (first game state) in which the game conditions (e.g., the award of a prize ball when the game ball is hit in the game area) are different. And the second game state) can be generated, and the reception period can be generated in both the first game state and the second game state. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, based on the fact that the acceptance is made, the "image A mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode) "can be made to appear, and then the mock image display is hidden.

  That is, in this case, an operational effect such as "being able to confirm which mode has appeared as a mock image display even after the acceptance has been made and to indicate that the acceptance period has ended" is provided. , The first gaming state and the second gaming state can be obtained even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the first reception period of the plurality of reception periods is only in the first game state of the first game state and the second game state. The second reception period of the plurality of reception periods can be generated only in the second game state (big hit game) of the first game state and the second game state. In this respect, the full-scale image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the first reception period and the second reception period. However, in the first game state (when accepted during the first acceptance period), a specific "image display" that cannot appear in the second game state (when accepted during the second acceptance period) is visible. It becomes possible to appear "modes in which it becomes difficult to perform (disappearance mode)".

  According to such a configuration, without confirming the post-reception effect, it is only necessary to confirm which mode has appeared as the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance mode)", and the first game It becomes possible to grasp which of the state and the second game state is being controlled, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Even in the second game state (when received in the second reception period), it is difficult to visually recognize the mood image display, which is different from the specific mode in which the mood image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance effect mode). "Mode (extinction effect mode)" may appear.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a mock image (such as a mock image of the operation receiving portion) related to the reception target is generated. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image, it is possible to reduce the amusement of the game until the post-reception effect (post-operation effect) is executed. I try to suppress it. Such an integrated image display is generated as a result of the advance notice determination with the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to the specific timing during SP reach and the variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the operation reception performance (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high-expectation suppression reception performance. .. Also, regarding each of the above-described effect examples (FIGS. 144 to 195, FIG. 207 to FIG. 231), the display mode of the exemplified mock image may be replaced with any one of the integrated mood images described below. It is desirable to do so in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Note that the “integrated image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modified example thereof. Is provided with a display target area of a gauge image (predetermined image) GG. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image display”, and the display is performed in any of these modes.

  Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted. The reception acceptable sound is output so that it is difficult to forget to operate it. Here, "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). , Is a sound that is in a state where a reception acceptable state (reception period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect having nothing to do with the acceptable state (acceptance period) is being performed.

  In addition, each acceptance acceptable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type can be generated when the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but is low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that is generated based on the fact that a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expected variation pattern) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). Further, the second type of acceptance-permitted state is a valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice determination) that can be generated regardless of whether it is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Valid period).

  The "integrated image display" according to the present embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and second type acceptance acceptable states (acceptance period). Here, both the first type of acceptable reception state (reception period) and the second type of acceptable reception state (reception period) are receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that the occurrence occurs as the permissible state (reception period), the “integrated image display” displayed during those acceptance periods is an image of the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, the special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image display” is the acceptance permissible state (reception period) of the first type. In the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) of the second type, it is possible to be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). ing. In the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) of the first type, the “integrated image display” is displayed in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)) including the special aspect based on the result of the big hit determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the “integrated image” is displayed in any of a plurality of aspects (eg, FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)) that do not include the special aspect based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is also possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display, and display the “integrated image display” in a mode according to the result of this determination.

  Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above configurations 1 to 19 will be described with reference to the drawings.

  As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the type of notice production (expectation degree suggesting production) such as production contents (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice, etc. as post-reception productions) that are advanced when received. ) Are prepared for different reception periods (reception performances), and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception performances) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, performance determination, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a first reception period (reception production) to a seventh reception period (reception production) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception productions).

  Here, the "conversation notice" as a post-reception effect is an indication of the degree of expectation (such as the proportion of a big hit symbol) depending on which conversation content among a plurality of conversation contents appears. The "cut-in notice" of indicates the degree of expectation (such as the proportion of the jackpot pattern that appears) depending on which cut-in image appears among the plurality of cut-in images. The “preliminary notice” indicates the degree of expectation (such as the proportion of the big hit symbol) depending on whether or not the movable body operates.

  With reference to FIGS. 255 to 266, each feature will be described for each reception period (reception performance). Each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 254 may be prepared as a reception period different from the first reception period to the seventh reception period, or the first reception period to It may be realized as any of the seventh reception periods.

  FIG. 255 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the first condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the first acceptance period (first acceptance effect) occurs. 262 and 263 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the first reception period (first reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the "first variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect description according to the first variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 262 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variable effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “first variation pattern” itself. Become. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE () that suggests the jackpot expectation degree (the proportion of the jackpot pattern that appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variation effect). Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed during the change, not at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different timings. The second effect display FE itself may or may not indicate the proportion at which the big hit symbol appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variation effect.

  That is, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the first variation pattern (when the first condition is satisfied), the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. When the timing tF3 when the first predetermined time elapses after the variation effect of the symbol SZ is started, the first acceptance period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding first post-reception effect" is permitted is generated. (“Situation shown in FIG. 262 (d)”). As a result, when the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period, the first post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a first acceptance period, the acceptance period (effective period ) Is a sign that it is about to occur, display of a model image that indicates the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), gauge image display that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance that makes it difficult to see the display A related display (a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the scale image display) and a post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols appearing) in response to the acceptance are displayed. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to this embodiment is displayed as "integrated muffled image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, first, when the timing tF1 before the first reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (b), a display screen (effect display device) is displayed. At 1600), the "first aura effect display ZEH1" is started as the aura effect display. In the "first aura effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 255 (b), the timing at which the corresponding reception period (first reception period) occurs (acceptance regarding the first post-reception effect is permitted). The timing is set to be hidden when tF3 arrives, but it may be hidden before the timing tF3. In any case, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), during the first acceptance period according to this example, "first amenity effect display ZEH1" is displayed in a state where acceptance of an operation by the player is permitted. It has never happened.

  However, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (c), the timing tF2 prior to the occurrence of the first acceptance period is When it arrives, "Integrated image display IG (Absolute image display, Gauge image display)" is displayed while "The first indication effect display ZEH1" is displayed, and "Integrated image display" At least a part of the area in which the "display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first aura effect display ZEH1" is displayed. That is, in this case, during the period (timing tF2 to tF3) during which both the “integrated image display IG” and the “first aura effect display ZEH1” are displayed on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), At least a part of the "integrated image display IG" is made difficult to be visually recognized by the first indication effect display ZEH1. As a result, in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) prior to the occurrence of the first reception period, which subject (operation receiving unit) the movement by the player is allowed to have is strongly interested. This makes it possible to expect that it will be hard to forget to operate or make an operation error after the first reception period has occurred.

  In addition, in the period (timing tF2 to tF3) in which both the “integrated image display IG” and the “first amenity effect display ZEH1” are displayed, the visibility of the “integrated image display IG” is easy. It is more desirable to display the "first predictive effect display ZEH1" so that the tendency is gradually improved toward the occurrence of the reception period, in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. For example, it can be realized by gradually decreasing the display range (the range overlapping with the integrated image display IG) of the “first indication effect display ZEH1” or gradually increasing the transmittance thereof. is there.

  That is, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and 262 (c) and (d), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “integrated image display IG” is , Is displayed so as to cross the timing tF3 when the first reception period occurs. The “integrated image display IG” is hidden when the acceptance is made within the first acceptance period, or when the first acceptance period is ended without the acceptance. The first acceptance period according to this example is set to end when the timing tF4 arrives when the player does not accept the action (see FIG. 255 (b)).

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 255 and the effect from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” or “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” are produced. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tF3a within the first acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (a), the first acceptance period is ended and the first acceptance period is dealt with based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tF3a. The post-reception effect (first post-reception effect) is started to be executed.

  Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” has relatively low expectation as the post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the case where the first mode is executed, is the reception corresponding to the first reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as post-production.

  However, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), the time point at which the operation by the player is accepted (in the acceptance Accordingly, at the timing tF3a, which is the time point at which the effect after the first reception is started), neither the integrated image display IG is hidden, nor the integrated image display IG is made difficult to be visually recognized. I am trying.

  That is, The first post-reception production according to this embodiment is "Production display after first reception" using the production display device 1600 (first production device), Second rendering device (for example, Sub LCD, Movable body, “Specification after the first reception” using a production lamp, etc., Although it is realized as an effect at least combined with the first post-acceptance output sound using the third effect device (speaker), Of those directing devices, Integrated image display IG (image display, In the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which the gauge image display) is displayed, The time when the first post-reception production display as the first post-reception production is started, I am trying to delay it compared to other production devices, As a result, the visibility of the "integrated image display IG" is maintained even after the acceptance.

  According to such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 263 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the integrated mood image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 ( Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize which of a) to (d) was displayed, it is expected that it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. become.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to facilitate the recognition of which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the integrated image display IG is displayed in the easily visible state" after the acceptance is set to be long. However, even if the reception is made and the post-reception productions (the second production device and the third production device) are already being executed, the integrated image display IG is during the reception period. If the same mode (the mode shown in (e1) and (e2) of FIG. 263) continues to be displayed, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation is such that acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "it may be delayed to notice the post-reception production in the execution state".

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (f1) or (f2), the first acceptance period ends because the player's operation is accepted. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tF3a (when the timing tF3b arrives), the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (corresponding to the first acceptance period) is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". The display according to the first aspect of the first disappearance-related display SK1 is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 1 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the" first disappearance related display SK1-1 "is displayed is" integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ". It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized and It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will be automatically shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tF3b). As a result, even if the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of amusement caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the first post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized (timing tF3a to tF3b). Since the aspect of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed with good visibility, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the first reception period, a mode with low expectations (FIGS. 263 (e1) to (i1)) and a mode with high expectations (FIGS. 263 (e2) to (i2)) as post-reception productions corresponding thereto. Whichever is executed, since the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the first disappearance related display SK1, the post-reception effect (second effect device) , The third effect device), even in a situation where the execution is started, the expectation degree can be kept secret in the first effect device (effect display device 1600).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (g1) or (g2), the display related to the first disappearance related display SK1-1 (integrated image display) When the timing tf3c arrives during the period in which the IG becomes difficult to visually recognize), the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period. The execution of the "first post-reception production display UG1" as post-reception production in is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively low expectation), FIG. 263 ( As shown in g1), the first mode (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is displayed as the first post-reception production display UG1 corresponding to the first reception period, and “A2” in FIG. 262 (d) is displayed. (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2)) ”(in the case where the post-acceptance effect is relatively high in expectations), the first acceptance is performed as shown in FIG. 263 (g2). The second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed as the first post-reception effect display UG1 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are being displayed, respectively, the "first reception effect display UG1 (the first reception effect display UG1-1 or Execution of the first post-reception effect display UG1-2) ”is started. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is kept displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the first reception period, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (first post-reception effect display) without significantly delaying it compared to other effect devices, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal. In addition, since the first post-reception effect display starts while the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, it is suggested by the player that the first reception period has already ended. The gaze destination may be automatically moved from the “integrated image display IG” to the “first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1-2)”. It comes to be expected (after timing tF3c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1-2)” is started As shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (h1) or (h2), the “first post-reception effect display UG1 (first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or first post-reception effect display UG1) -2) "is displayed, first, of the" integrated image display IG "and the" first disappearance related display SK1-1 ", the" integrated image display IG "is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 263 (i1) or (i2), the "first disappearance related display SK-1" is displayed. Will be hidden, and under the condition that the visibility is good, the "first reception effect display UG1 (first reception effect display UG1-1 or first reception effect display UG1-2)" Will be displayed.

  In this respect, the "first post-reception effect display UG1" is based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, and has a plurality of different expectations (here, the first post-reception effect display UG1-1 or the first post-reception effect display UG1). The post-reception effect display UG1-2) is displayed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 255 (b), the "first reception effect display UG1" is displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden. Will be executed for a relatively long time.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the time is within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 255) with the occurrence of the first reception period, and Various displays are performed within a limited display screen (production display device 1600), and this suppresses a decrease in the enjoyment of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tF3c) of the first post-acceptance effect (first post-acceptance effect display) corresponding to the acceptance is greater than the acceptance timing tF3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the second effect device is prepared separately from the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and the operation by the player within the first acceptance period When it is accepted, as shown in FIGS. 255 (b) and (c), based on the fact that the acceptance has been made, the first after-reception effect using the second effect device (specification after first acceptance) The production) is started prior to the first post-reception production (first post-reception production display) using the first production device.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tF3a when the reception is made in the first reception period, which is limited to a part of the first post-reception production (first post-reception production display). The first post-reception production itself can be started without delay from the same timing tF3a.

  As such a second effect device, for example, it may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or an effect movable body capable of effect operation or Alternatively, it may be provided as a production lamp capable of producing production light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 263, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. 263 (e1) As shown in, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the first post-reception specific presentation UGT1 (first post-reception identification) corresponding to the first reception period. As a first post-reception specific production UGT1-1), which is a mode in which the expectation of the production UGT1 is low, prior to the first post-reception production (first post-reception production display UG1-1) using the first production device. It is supposed to start executing. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), FIG. 263 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "Kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the first post-reception specific rendering UGT1 (first reception) corresponding to the first reception period. As the first post-reception specific production UGT1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the post-specific production UGT1, precedes the first post-reception production (first post-reception production display UG1-1) using the first production device. Then the execution is started.

  Also, in the effect example shown in FIG. 262, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the first acceptance period. The indication effect (first indication specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 262 (b) to (d)). The first sign specific effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in that the timing tF3 at which the first acceptance period occurs is tF3. It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to cross the timing tF3.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and at the time of occurrence of the first reception period, at the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 (d), It is supposed that the acceptance acceptable sound is started to be output (corresponding to “the situation where ♪ is output in FIG. 262 (c)”). That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the first acceptance period is audibly output in such a manner that it extends over the timing tF3 (corresponding to the “condition shown in FIG. 262 (d)”) at which the first acceptance period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the first reception period, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), FIG. 263 (e1) to (g1), or FIG. 263 (e2) to (g2), the reception acceptable sound is audibly output. Even when the player accepts the operation, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, when the player accepts the operation while the acceptable sound is audibly output during the plurality of acceptance periods, the audible output state of the acceptable sound is based on the acceptance. Includes a reception period that will be terminated on the way. Therefore, when the acceptance acceptable sound is received while being audibly output within the first acceptance period, and a mode in which the acceptance acceptable sound is continuously output audibly appears, it is determined whether the acceptance acceptable sound is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize that, and it is expected that the tension is maintained appropriately.

  However, in the first reception period, even if the player accepts the operation while the acceptance sound is audibly output, the acceptance sound is terminated halfway (end of the audible output state). Although not performed, the audible output of the first post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to "♪♪" output in (e1) or (e2) in FIG. 263) is started based on the acceptance when the acceptance is made. It has become a thing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), the "acceptable sound" that is the sound that is audibly output within the first reception period and the audible result as a result of the reception within the first reception period. Since both the output sound and the “output sound after the first reception” can be output audibly, it is better to recognize whether it is within the reception period or the state where the reception period has ended. It becomes possible to make it more difficult to recognize.

  Such an output sound after the first reception is similar to that in the “first reception effect display UG1”, as shown in FIG. 255 (d), “integrated image display IG” and “first disappearance related display SK”. Even after "-1" is hidden, it will be executed for a comparatively long time ("♪♪ is output in" Fig. 263 (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) "." Situation)). Regarding the first post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A1 (FIG. 263 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectation as post-reception production) 262) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A2 (FIG. 263 (e2) to (i2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 255, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 262 (d) to “A3 (FIG. 263 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the first reception period. It is assumed that the motion by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the first reception period occurs, the timing tF4 comes without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tF4 (at the time point when the first acceptance period ends and acceptance of the motion by the player is no longer permitted), the timing tF3a (first effect device). As shown in FIG. 263 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player accepts the operation within the acceptance period of, the integrated image display IG is displayed. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even when the first acceptance period ends because the player does not accept the operation in time, the integrated model within the first acceptance period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  After that, even when the player's operation is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 263 (f3), the first disappearance related display SK1 is set as “a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”. -2 (the second aspect of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the" first disappearance related display SK1-2 "is displayed is" integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ". It overlaps with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed after the first reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to indicate that the first acceptance period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the first acceptance period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. From this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, regarding the above-mentioned “first disappearance related display SK1-2” that appears when the operation by the player is not accepted within the first acceptance period, the first acceptance It is executed as a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" that appears when the operation by the player is accepted within the period. As a result, when the "first disappearance-related display SK1-2" appears, it is possible to indicate that the motion by the player has not been accepted, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game. ..

  After this, as shown in FIG. 263 (g3), first of all the “integrated image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-2”, the “integrated image display IG” is turned off. To display. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 263 (h3).

  FIG. 256 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the second condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the second acceptance period (second acceptance effect) occurs. 264 and 265 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the second reception period (second reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 264 (a). )), During the execution period of the variable effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “second variation pattern” itself. Become. Note that in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, the first effect display TE is displayed, but the second effect display FE is not displayed.

  However, in the production related to the "second variation pattern", as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the variation of the decorative symbol SZ is obtained regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination). When the timing tG3 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) when the second predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the effect arrives, the “acceptance regarding the second post-operation effect” is allowed in the second reception period. (Valid period) is generated (“the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)”). As a result, when the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the second post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance.

  In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to the present embodiment, even when such a second acceptance period occurs, the above-described first acceptance period occurs (FIG. 255). Similar to the above, in relation to this, a precursor effect display that indicates that the acceptance period (effective period) will soon occur, a simulated image display that indicates the acceptance target (operation receiving part, etc.), and the remaining time of the acceptance period Gauge image display, disappearance related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the scale image display (a mode in which the scale image display becomes difficult to see), and post-reception performance that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) depending on the acceptance Each display is made. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%". Note that, as described above, the mock image display is displayed as an “integrated muffled image display IG” that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this, and is separately provided. It may be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, also in this example, when the timing tG1 before the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 264 (b), the above-mentioned precursor effect is produced. As a display, the execution of the "second predictive effect display ZEH2" is started. As for the “integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)”, as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 255, the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) is set. When the timing tG2, which is earlier than the occurrence, arrives, it is displayed in the display of the "second predictive effect display ZEH2" (FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 264 (c). See)). As shown in FIG. 264 (c), at least a part of the area in which the "integrated image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "second indication effect display ZEH2" is displayed. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 262 (c), it is difficult to visually recognize the “integrated image display IG” by the “second aura effect display ZEH2” (a precursor effect display corresponding to the first reception period). Is the same as.

  Further, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to extend over the timing tG3 (the situation shown in FIG. 264 (d)) at which the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period) occurs. Point, and when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the second acceptance period), or when the second acceptance period ends without the acceptance being made, it is hidden. The point that the setting is performed is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 255 (first reception period). It should be noted that the second acceptance period according to this example is designed to be terminated when the timing tG4 arrives when the player has not accepted the operation.

  However, in the example (second reception period) shown in FIG. 256 (b), the “second aura effect display ZEH2” is related to the example (first reception period) shown in FIG. 255 (b). Not only is the aspect (image display) different from the case of the “first amenity effect display ZEH1”, but also a timing (second after-accept effect) when a corresponding acceptance period (here, a second acceptance period) occurs. The timing is not hidden when tG3 arrives, and is displayed in the form of straddling the timing tG3.

  That is, in this case, in the second reception period, not only the “integrated muffled image display IG (mature image display, gauge image display)” but also the “integrated mutilated image display IG” that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “second precursor” While the effect display ZEH2 ”is being displayed, the player can accept the operation. According to such a configuration, even after the second reception period has occurred, at least a part of the “integrated image display IG” is hard to be visually recognized by the “second predictive effect display ZEH2”. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension during the period.

  Here, the "second amenity display ZEH2" may be displayed until the timing tG4 at which the reception period corresponding to this (here, the second reception period) ends, or the reception period. The display may be hidden at a predetermined timing within (here, the second reception period). Further, as shown in FIGS. 264 and 265, regarding the indication effect display (the second indication effect display ZEH2), in the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), the “integrated model” is displayed. In order for the area that overlaps with the “image display IG (scale image display, gauge image display)” to be gradually reduced, it is necessary to display the display range in a gradually reduced manner. This is desirable in that the visibility of the "image display IG" is gradually improved during the reception period. Further, the area in which the second aura effect display is displayed and at least a part of the area in which the "integrated image display" is displayed do not necessarily overlap with each other during the entire period in which the second aura effect display is displayed. For example, after the predetermined timing within the reception period has arrived in the entire period, the second precursor effect display is displayed in a region that does not overlap with the region in which the “integrated image display IG” is displayed. You may do it.

  Further, the second precursor effect display ZEH2 according to this example is received when the reception is performed within the corresponding reception period (here, the second reception period), or the reception period (here, the second reception period). It is adapted to be hidden when the operation by the player is not accepted until a predetermined timing within the period).

  In this regard, the example shown in FIG. 256 and the effect from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” or “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” are produced. In the progressing example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 256 (a), the second acceptance period is ended and the second acceptance period is dealt with based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a. The post-reception production (second post-reception production) is started to be executed.

  Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” has a relatively low expectation as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” corresponding to the case where the first mode is executed is the reception corresponding to the second reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as post-production. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  Then, also in the example shown in FIG. 256, at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the time when the second post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated mood image display IG". Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 256, not only the integrated image display IG but also the second predictive effect display ZEH2 is the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the time when the second post-reception effect is started). ), The timing tG3a is not hidden or made difficult to be visually recognized.

  That is, the second post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a "second post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a second effect device (for example, a sub-liquid crystal or movable Body, effect lamp, etc.) and a second post-acceptance output sound using a third effect device (speaker). However, among those effect devices, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in which the integrated image image display IG (image image display, gauge image display) is displayed, the second after-reception effect is used. 2 The time when the performance display after reception is started is delayed compared to other performance devices, and even after the reception is made by this, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second indication performance display" ZEH2 ” It has become a thing to maintain the 認性.

  According to such a configuration, as in the case of the first reception period described above, as shown in FIG. 265 (e1) or (e2), even after the acceptance is made, the unit is integrated within the completed reception period. Which of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the chemical reaction image display IG was displayed, and which mode (predictive effect display ZEH1 and second predictive effect display) the predictive effect display was made. Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize whether or not it was displayed on the display ZEH2 or the like), it is expected that it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

  Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition of how the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH were displayed during the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition, It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH are displayed in the easily visible state" to be long. However, although the reception has been made and the post-reception productions (the second production device and the third production device) are already being executed, the integrated image display IG and the precursor production display ZEH are being received. If it continues to be displayed in the same manner as when there was, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, "post-reception production in execution state" It will be delayed to notice "."

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 265 (f1) or (f2), the predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tG3a at which the second acceptance period ends due to the acceptance of the operation by the player. Then (when the timing tG3b arrives), the display related to the "second disappearance related display SK2" different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". I have to.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. "Is displayed, and" integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) "is displayed in at least part of the area in which the" second disappearance related display SK2 "is displayed. It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized and It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will be automatically shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tG3b). As a result, even if the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of amusement caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period. Further, even after the second post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is started, until the second disappearance related display SK2 is displayed (timing tG3a to tG3b), The mode of the second aura effect display ZEH2 can be confirmed with good visual recognition, and the integrated image display IG is not easily visually recognizable only by the second aura effect display ZEH2. Therefore, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately. In addition, when the second sign effect display ZEH2 is not displayed and is accepted within the second reception period, the second sign effect display ZEH2 is displayed until the second disappearance related display SK2 is displayed. It goes without saying that the mode of the integrated image display IG can be confirmed without being visibly improved.

  Further, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, the “second disappearance related display SK2” is displayed while the “predictive effect display (here, the second predictive effect display ZEH2)” is displayed. At least a part of the area where the "second disappearance related display SK2" is displayed overlaps the area where the "second omen effect display ZEH2" is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to visually recognize the second precursor effect display ZEH2, which suggests that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed. As a result, it is expected that the player's point of gaze will be automatically shifted from the second predictive effect display ZEH2 to the post-reception effect (after timing tG3b). Thereby, it becomes possible to continue to display the second precursor effect display ZEH2 for a relatively long time in a situation where the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) has already been executed. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which form the precursor effect display is displayed during the reception period. Further, even after the post-reception effect (the second effect device and the third effect device) is started, until the indication effect display is difficult to be visually recognized (timing tG3a to tG3b), the indication effect display is kept. Since it is possible to check the mode (here, the second predictive effect display ZEH2) while maintaining good visual recognition, it is expected that amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

  Further, in the second reception period, a case in which a low degree of expectation (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect corresponding to this and a case in which a high degree of expectation appears (FIG. 265 (e2) to). When (i2)) appears, different modes (second disappearance related display SK2-1, SK2-2) appear as the second disappearance related display SK2. That is, in this case, as shown in (f1) and (f2) of FIG. 265, the “second post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. Even if it is, the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the first mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1) and the second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-). By confirming which of the two is appearing, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "second post-reception effect display" is executed in a mode with high expectation.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 256 (b) and FIG. 265 (g1) or (g2), the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2 (the integrated image display IG is When the timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the (difficulty of visually recognizing) appears, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted in the second acceptance period. The "second reception post-effect display UG2" as the post-effect is started to be executed. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively low expectation), FIG. 265 ( As shown in g1), the first mode (second post-reception production display UG2-1) is displayed as the second post-reception production display UG2 corresponding to the second reception period, and “B2” in FIG. 264 (d) is displayed. (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2)) ”(in the case where the post-acceptance effect is relatively high in expectations), the second acceptance is performed as shown in FIG. 265 (g2). The second mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed as the second post-reception effect display UG2 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated image display IG”, the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” and the “second disappearance related display SK2 (the second disappearance related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance related display SK2-2)” are displayed. The "second reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2-2)" is started to be executed among those displayed. As a result, even when the integrated image display IG and the second aura effect display ZEH2 are displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the second reception period, the first effect device It becomes possible to start the after-reception effect (second after-reception effect display UG2) on the (effect display device 1600) without significantly delaying it compared to other effect devices, and suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal. Will be able to. Further, since the second post-reception effect display UG2 is started while the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are difficult to be visually recognized, the second reception period has already ended. While suggesting that the player's gaze destination is from the “integrated image display IG” or the “second predictive effect display ZEH2” to the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second It is expected that the display will be automatically shifted to the post-reception presentation display UG2-2) ”(after the timing tG3c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2-2)” is started in this way. As shown in FIG. 256 (b) or FIG. 265 (h1) or (h2), the “second reception effect display UG2 (second reception effect display UG2-1 or second reception effect display UG2) is displayed. -2) "is displayed, first, of" Integrated image display IG "," Second indication effect display ZEH2 ", and" Second disappearance related display SK2 "," Integrated image display " "IG" and "2nd precursor effect display ZEH2" are hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" and the "second predictive effect display ZEH2" are hidden in this way, respectively, as shown in FIG. 255 (b) and FIG. 265 (i1) or (i2). , "The second disappearance-related display SK2 (the second disappearance-related display SK2-1 or the second disappearance-related display SK2-2)" is hidden, and the "second 2 The post-reception effect display UG2 (second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or second post-reception effect display UG2-2) is displayed.

  In this respect, the "second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2-1 or the second post-reception effect display UG2" is based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. It is displayed by any of the post-reception effect display UG2-2). Therefore, the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is compared even after the "integrated image display IG", the "second omen effect display ZEH2", and the "second disappearance related display SK2" are hidden. It will be executed over a long period of time.

  By the way, in the production example (FIGS. 262 and 263) corresponding to the above-described first reception period, even if the “first post-reception production display UG1” is executed by the reception within the first reception period, Before and after the "first reception effect display UG1" is started, the background image is not switched and is maintained. On the other hand, in the production example (FIGS. 264 and 265) corresponding to the second reception period, when the “second post-reception production display UG2” is executed after the reception is performed within the second reception period, The background image is switched before and after the "second post-reception effect display UG2" is started.

  With such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 265 (e) and 265 (f) in which the background image is not switched (timing tG3a to tG3b shown in FIG. 256), the effect display device 1600 (the first display) is displayed. Even if there is a production change in (1 production device), it becomes possible to suggest that the "second post-reception production display UG2" is not yet started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 265, as the post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a low-expectation mode appears and when a high-expectation mode appears. The background image may be switched to different background images when a low aspect appears and when a high expectation appears. The background image may be switched when a mode with high expectations appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with low expectations appears.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the second reception period occurs, the time is limited within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 256). In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tG3c) of the second post-acceptance effect (second post-acceptance effect display) corresponding to the acceptance is greater than the acceptance timing tG3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, also in this example, when the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 256 (b) and 256 (c), it is based on the acceptance. , Starting execution of the second post-reception production (second post-reception specific production) using the second production device prior to the second post-reception production (second post-reception production display) using the first production device I am trying to let you.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tG3a when the reception is performed in the second reception period, which is limited to a part of the second post-reception effect (second post-reception effect display). The second post-reception production itself can be started without delay from the same timing tG3a.

  As described above, such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, or is capable of effect operation. It may be provided as a production movable body or a production lamp capable of producing production light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. 265 (e1) in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). As shown in, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) displays a "woman's kimono" in a mode in which the second post-reception specific effect UGT2 (second effect) corresponding to the second acceptance period is displayed. As the second post-reception specific production UGT2-1), which is a mode in which the post-reception specific production UGT2 has a low degree of expectation, the second post-reception production (second post-reception production display UG2-1) using the first production device is performed. It is designed to start execution in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), FIG. 265 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which the "male kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the second post-reception specific rendering UGT2 (corresponding to the second reception period). A second post-reception production (second post-reception production display UG2-2) that uses the first production device as the second post-reception specific production UGT2-2) that is a mode in which the second post-reception specific production UGT2 is highly expected. ) Is started prior to execution.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 264, in addition to the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the second acceptance period. The indication effect (second indication specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 264 (b) to (d)). Unlike the second precursor effect display ZEH2 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the second predictive specific effect in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) differs from the second predictive effect display ZEH2 in that the timing tG3 at which the second acceptance period occurs. It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to cross the timing tG3.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the second reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 256 (d). At tG2, the acceptance permission sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 264 (c) and 264 (d)) is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the second acceptance period is audibly output in a manner that it crosses the timing tG3 (corresponding to the “condition shown in FIG. 264 (d)”) at which the second acceptance period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the second reception period, a long-term permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are included as the permissible reception sounds. Are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 256 (d), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at the timing tG3 when the second reception period occurs or after that.

  Then, in the second reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the long-time permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound is audibly output, based on the acceptance being performed, The long-time permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are terminated halfway (end of the audible output state).

  Further, in the second reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the acceptable acceptance sound (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway. Not only that, when the acceptance is made, based on this, a second post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound (Fig. 265 (e1) or (e2) is output. It is supposed to start audible output). That is, in this case, in the second acceptance period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the acceptance period and the acceptance are made. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the second reception) that is performed accordingly.

  Similar to the “second post-reception effect display UG2”, such a second post-reception output sound, as shown in FIG. 256 (d), is an “integrated image display IG” or a “second disappearance related display SK2”. It will be executed for a relatively long time even after "is hidden" ("♪♪ is output in (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) in FIG. 265." Equivalent to). Further, regarding the second post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))” (relatively low expectation as post-reception production) 264) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (in the case where the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In the second reception period, the long-term allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds, but these two allowable sounds may not necessarily be output. As in the reception period, only one acceptance permission sound may be output.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 256, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 264 (d) to “B3 (FIG. 265 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the second reception period. It is assumed that the motion by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the second reception period occurs, the timing tG4 comes without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tG4 (at the time point when the second acceptance period ends and the operation is not accepted by the player), the timing tG3a (second effect device) is reached. 265 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player accepts the action within the acceptance period of the integrated effect image display IG. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized. In this example of effect, since the second aura effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG4, the second amenity effect display ZEH2 is not displayed after the timing tG4.

  According to such a configuration, even if the second acceptance period ends because the player does not accept the operation in time, after the completion of the second acceptance period, the integrated mood within the second acceptance period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  Then, after this, even when the player's operation is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 265 (f3), the second disappearance related display SK2 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". -1 or the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (in the figure, the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "second disappearance related display SK2-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 1 or the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the" second disappearance-related display SK2 "is displayed is the" integrated image display IG (image display " , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed after the second reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to indicate that the second reception period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the second reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. From this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is displayed as the second disappearance related display SK2. In the case, if the player's operation is accepted within the second acceptance period, the production is progressing from FIG. 264 (d) to “B1 (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1))”. (When the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, the case where "the second disappearance-related display SK2-2" is displayed as the second disappearance-related display SK2 when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period means the second acceptance period. If the operation by the player is accepted in the case, if the production has progressed from FIG. 264 (d) to “B2 (FIG. 265 (e2) to (i2))” (relatively of the degree of expectation) This is equivalent to a case where a high post-reception performance is being executed).

  That is, in this case, even if the operation by the player is not accepted in the second acceptance period, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the second acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode (second extinction related display SK2-1, second extinction related display SK2-2) that appears as "second extinction related display SK2", the second post-reception effect is in a mode with low expectations. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game is being executed or is being executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 265 (g3), first, of the “integrated mood image display IG” and the “second disappearance related display SK2”, the “integrated mood image display IG” is hidden. To do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "second disappearance related display SK2" is hidden as shown in FIG. 265 (h3).

  FIG. 257 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the third condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the third acceptance period (third acceptance effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the "third variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the third variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect depiction according to the third variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the third variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “third variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the production related to the “third variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination), the third predetermined time has elapsed since the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ was started. When the timing tH3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, the "acceptance regarding the third post-production effect" is permitted. The third reception period (effective period) is generated. As a result, when the operation by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period, the third post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the third reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice production determination.

  In this regard, in the third reception period (third reception effect) according to the present embodiment, the content executed as the third post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted (in the first effect device). 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) is exactly the “third post-reception effect display”, the “third acceptance specific effect” in the second effect device, and the “third post-output sound” in the third effect device. First post-reception effect described with reference to "(first post-reception effect display" in the first effect device, "first post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, "first reception in the third effect device" After output sound ") is different, but the other configurations are basically the same.

  For example, the timing tH1 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the “first amenity effect display ZEH1” is started to be executed as the aforesaid effect display. Note that, in the case of the "first predictive effect display ZEH1" according to the example shown in FIG. 257 (b), the timing when the corresponding reception period (third reception period) occurs (third reception after reception is received) It is set to be hidden when tH3 (allowable timing) arrives. However, the fact that it may be hidden before the timing tH3 is also the same as in the case of the first reception period described above. In any case, even in the first reception period according to this example, the "first predictive effect display ZEH1" is not displayed in a state where the player is allowed to receive the operation.

  The timing tH2 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (c), the "integrated mood image display IG (mature image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "first omen effect display ZEH1" is displayed. Will be displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the “integrated image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area in which the “first omen effect display ZEH1” is displayed. It should be noted that FIG. 255 and FIG. 255 show the configuration related to the “integrated image display IG” and the “first predictive effect display ZEH1” displayed in association with the third reception period, and other examples related thereto. As described above with reference to FIGS. 262 and 263, it will be omitted here.

  Further, the timing tH3 shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 262 (d), the above-mentioned third reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Will occur. Regarding that the "integrated image display IG" is hidden when the reception is made within the third reception period, or when the third reception period is ended without the reception. It is the same. It should be noted that the third acceptance period according to this example is designed to be terminated when the timing tH4 arrives when the player has not accepted the action.

  Further, the timing tH3a shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3a arrives, the third acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, and the post-reception effect corresponding to the third acceptance period (after the third acceptance) Execution will be started. As the third post-reception effect, at least a case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation and a case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation are executed are prepared, Although the contents of the effect (contents as effect display after acceptance, specific effect after acceptance, content as output sound after acceptance) are different from the first effect after acceptance, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the plurality of modes is executed. The points and the like are the same as in the case of the first post-reception effect. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%". Further, at the timing tH3a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the time when the third post-reception effect is started in response to the acceptance), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated operation is not performed. The point that the chemical image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized is the same as in the case of the first post-reception effect.

  Further, the timing tH3b shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tH3b arrives, the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first reception period and the third reception period are commonly used as the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”). The display relating to the first disappearance related display SK1) is started. Note that the configuration relating to the “first disappearance related display SK1” displayed in association with the third reception period and other examples related thereto are as described above with reference to FIGS. 255 and 263. Therefore, I will omit it here.

  According to such a configuration of the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in the “period from the time the first sign effect display ZEH1 is displayed to the time the first disappearance related display SK1 is displayed”, It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception period of (3) and the third reception period of time has occurred (whether they have occurred), whereby the second effect device and the third effect device. To promote interest in the game, and to enhance the interest in the game by giving a strong interest in which form (first post-reception production display, third post-reproduction production display) appears as post-reception production display. Will be able to.

  In the third reception period, the first disappearance-related display SK1 is displayed regardless of whether a low-expectation mode or a high-expectation mode is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the third reception period. Since the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) is made to appear, even in a situation where the post-reception effects (second effect device, third effect device) are started to be executed, the first effect device In (effect display device 1600), the degree of expectation can be kept secret. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and different disappearance-related displays may appear depending on the degree of expectation. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  Further, the timing tH3c shown in FIG. 257 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tH3c arrives, the "third post-reception production display" as post-reception production in the third production device (production display device 1600) corresponding to the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the third reception period. (The type of the notice effect is different from the effect display after the first reception) ”is started. As the "third post-reception effect display", a plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-reception effects. As described above, a different aspect appears as the “third reception effect display”.

  That is, in this case, the "third post-reception effect display" is started to be executed while the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" are displayed. This makes it possible to create a terrible situation in which it is possible to recognize whether the first reception period or the third reception period has occurred, and whether it cannot be recognized. It is expected that the "transition image display IG" will automatically shift to the "post-reception effect display" (after the timing tH3c).

  In this example as well, when the display related to the "third post-reception effect display" is started in this manner, regardless of the mode, the "third post-reception effect display" is being displayed. Of the “integrated image display IG” and the “first disappearance related display SK1-1”, the “integrated image display IG” is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-1" is hidden. The display related to the “third reception effect display” will be performed.

  In this respect, it is described above that the “third post-reception effect display” is also displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 257 (b), the "third reception effect display" is also displayed after the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK-1" are hidden. , Will be executed over a relatively long time.

  Thus, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the third reception period occurs, it is within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 257) and limited. Various displays are performed on the display screen (effect display device 1600). However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tH3c) of the third post-reception effect (third post-reception effect display) corresponding to the acceptance is greater than the acceptance timing tH3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, even when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the third acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c), it is determined based on the fact that the action has been accepted. The second post-reception effect using the second effect device (third-reception specific effect) is started prior to the third post-reception effect (third-reception effect display) using the first effect device. I have to. The content of the third post-reception specific effect is different from that of the first post-reception specific effect, but basically the same as the first post-reception specific effect.

  For example, as the third post-reception specific effect, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and a low-expectation mode and a high-expectation mode are executed as the third post-reception effects. In some cases, in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), a different aspect appears as the specific effect after the third reception. Further, as also shown in FIGS. 257 (b) and 257 (c), the third post-reception specific effect using the second effect device is displayed on the third post-reception effect display using the first effect device. The fact that the execution is started in advance is the same as in the case of the first post-acceptance specific effect described above.

  In addition, when the third reception period occurs, as in the case of the first reception period, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) provides a precursor effect (the first reception period and the third reception period are commonly handled. It is desirable that the first sign specific effect) is performed. Further, in this case, the sign specific effect (first sign specific effect) on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first sign effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and is different from the third sign effect. It is executed even when the timing tH3 at which the acceptance period occurs arrives, and it is more preferable to be executed in such a manner as to cross the timing tH3.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and even when the third reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 257 (d). At tH2, the acceptance permission sound is started to be output. That is, the acceptance-permitted sound corresponding to the third acceptance period is audibly output so as to cross the timing tH3 when the third acceptance period occurs, and the acceptance-permitted sound is audibly output. Among them, the movement by the player can be accepted. It is desirable that this acceptance permission sound is the same sound as the acceptance permission sound that is output when the first acceptance period occurs.

  However, in the third reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is changed based on the acceptance being performed. I'm trying to finish.

  Further, in the third reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, not only is the acceptance acceptable sound terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made Based on the above, the audible output of the third post-acceptance output sound different from the first post-acceptance output sound, the second post-acceptance output sound, and the like is started. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the acceptance are made. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (the output sound after the third reception) that is performed accordingly.

  Like the “third post-reception effect display”, such a third post-reception output sound, as shown in FIG. 257 (d), is an “integrated image display IG” or a “first disappearance related display SK1-”. Even after "1" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Also, as the output sound after the third reception, a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared, and a mode with a low expectation and a mode with a high expectation are executed as the third post-reception production. It is desirable to output different output sounds (modes) depending on the case.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tH3c arrives, only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600). By confirming the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tH3a earlier than that time has arrived. Thereby, it becomes possible to urge the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 257, even when the operation by the player is not accepted within the third acceptance period, basically, the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period. It is the same as when it was not done.

  That is, in this case, after the third reception period has occurred, the timing tH4 comes without the operation by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tH4 (at the time when the third acceptance period ends and the operation is not accepted by the player), the timing tH3a (third effect). In the same manner as the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the operation is accepted by the player within the acceptance period of, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated The chemical image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  After that, even if the player's operation is not accepted, the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 (first acceptance period and third The second aspect of the first disappearance-related display SK1 that is commonly associated with the reception period is started to be displayed.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "first disappearance related display SK1-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 2 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the" first disappearance related display SK1-2 "is displayed is" integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ". It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, when the operation by the player is not accepted, it becomes impossible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period, so the player is strongly urged to perform the operation. Will be able to. In the third reception period, as in the case of the first reception period, when the operation by the player is not received, different modes may appear as the “first disappearance related display SK1” depending on the degree of expectation. Alternatively, a mode (first disappearance related display SK1-2) different from the mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) that appears when the acceptance is made appears.

  After that, of the "integrated image display IG" and the "first disappearance related display SK1-2", first, the "integrated image display IG" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "first disappearance related display SK-2" is hidden.

  FIG. 258 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fourth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fourth acceptance period (fourth acceptance effect) occurs. 266 and 267 are diagrams showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern in which the fourth acceptance period (fourth acceptance effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the "fourth variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fourth variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the fourth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fourth variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (a)). During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fourth variation pattern” itself. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266 (a), for convenience of explanation, the first effect display TE () that suggests the jackpot expectation degree (the proportion of the jackpot pattern that appears when the decorative symbol SZ is stopped in the variation effect). Here, it is assumed that the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE depicted as a frog character are displayed at the start of the symbol variation. These displays may be displayed during the change, not at the start of the change, or may be displayed at different timings.

  However, in the production related to the “fourth variation pattern”, as shown in FIG. 258, the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ is started regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination). When the timing tI3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) when the fourth predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the “fourth operation The fourth reception period (effective period) in which "acceptance regarding post-production" is permitted is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 266 (d)). Thus, when the operation by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the fourth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fourth reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to the present embodiment, the content executed as the fourth post-reception effect based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted (in the first effect device). 255 (or FIG. 262, FIG. 263) is displayed as “the display after the fourth reception”, “the specific performance after the fourth reception” in the second production device, and “the output sound after the fourth reception” in the third production device). First post-reception effect described with reference to "(first post-reception effect display" in the first effect device, "first post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, "first reception in the third effect device" After output sound ") is different. Further, in the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) according to the present embodiment, the fourth disappearance different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is defined as “a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”. The related display SK4 is also different from the case of the first reception period described above, but the other configurations are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, the effects performed in connection with the occurrence of the fourth reception period (fourth reception effect) will be described, but the description of the same operations as in the first reception period (first reception effect) will be described here. I will omit it. That is, with respect to matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect is performed with the content as described in the first acceptance period (first acceptance effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  For example, the timing tI1 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 266 (b), on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the first indication effect display ZEH1 is displayed as the indication effect display. Is started.

  The timing tI2 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (c), “Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “first indication effect display ZEH1” is displayed. Will be displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the “integrated image display IG” is displayed overlaps with the area in which the “first omen effect display ZEH1” is displayed.

  The timing tI3 shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3 arrives, as shown in FIG. 266 (d), the above-mentioned fourth reception period is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Will occur.

  The timing tI3a shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. That is, the example shown in FIG. 258 or the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” or “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))”. In the example, it is assumed that the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a within the fourth acceptance period. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 258 (a), the fourth acceptance period is ended and the fourth acceptance period is dealt with based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tI3a. The post-reception production (4th post-reception production) is started to be executed.

  Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” has a relatively low expectation as the post-reception production corresponding to the fourth reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” corresponding to the case where the first mode is executed is a reception corresponding to the fourth reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as post-production. However, as the post-reception effect corresponding to the fourth reception period, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of aspects having different expectations, and when it is accepted, a specific aspect (for example, C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (I1))) may appear. In this case, even if the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized” corresponding to the fourth reception period, a plurality of modes are not prepared according to the degree of expectation, and the same mode is always obtained when a reception is made. The mode will be made to appear.

  Note that, also in the fourth reception period, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), similarly, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the fourth operation depending on the acceptance). At the timing tI3a, which is the time point when the presentation after the reception is started), not only does the integrated mock image display IG not be hidden, but also the integrated mood image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized. ..

  The timing tI3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tI3b arrives, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the acceptance is made in the fourth acceptance period, the display relating to the fourth disappearance related display SK4 different from the first disappearance related display SK1 is started (timing tI3b).

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is displayed is displayed as "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". It overlaps with the area.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized and It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's point of gaze is automatically transferred from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tI3b). As a result, even if the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of amusement caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the fourth reception period, a case with a low expectation level (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1)) appears as a post-reception effect corresponding thereto and a mode with a high expectation level (FIG. 267 (e2) to). When (i2)) appears, different modes (fourth disappearance related displays SK4-1 and SK4-2) appear as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) and (f2), there is a situation where the “fourth post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. Even if it is, the fourth disappearance related display SK4 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has the first mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) and the second mode (fourth disappearance related display SK4-). By confirming which of 2) and 2) appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the “fourth post-reception effect display” will be executed in a mode with high expectation.

  The timing tI3c shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tI3c arrives, the operation performed by the player within the fourth reception period while the display (the mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4 appears. The "4th post-reception effect display UG4" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of is started to be started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production), FIG. 267 ( As shown in g1), the first mode (fourth post-reception production display UG4-1) is displayed as the fourth post-reception production display UG4 corresponding to the fourth reception period, and “C2” in FIG. 266 (d) is displayed. (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)) ”(in the case where the post-acceptance effect is relatively high in expectations), the fourth acceptance is performed as shown in FIG. 267 (g2). The second mode (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2) is displayed as the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 corresponding to the period.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4 (fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance related display SK4-2)” are respectively displayed, and the “first 4 post-reception production display UG4 (fourth post-reception production display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception production display UG4-2) will be started to be executed. As a result, even if the integrated image display IG is kept displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the fourth reception period, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). It becomes possible to start the post-reception effect (fourth post-reception effect display UG4) without significantly delaying it compared to other effect devices, and it is possible to suppress a decline in the entertainment appeal. Also, since the fourth post-reception effect display UG4 is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, the player is suggested, indicating that the fourth reception period has already ended. The point of gaze by is automatically moved from the "integrated image display IG" to the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or fourth post-reception effect display UG4-2)". Is expected (after timing tI3c).

  Then, also in the production related to the fourth reception period, the display related to "the fourth reception production display UG4 (fourth reception production display UG4-1 or fourth post-production production display UG4-2)" is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (h1) or (h2), the “fourth post-reception effect display UG4 (fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or after fourth reception is displayed. Among the "effect display UG4-2)" being displayed, first, the "integrated image display IG" of the "integrated image display IG" and the "second disappearance related display SK2" is hidden. .. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 258 (b) and FIG. 267 (i1) or (i2), the "fourth disappearance related display SK4 (second 4 disappearance-related display SK4-1 or fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) "is hidden, and the" 4th reception effect display UG4 (4th reception) " The post-production display UG4-1 or the fourth reception post-production display UG4-2) ”is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, it is difficult to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period until the timing tI3b arrives only by looking at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device and By checking the third effect device, it becomes possible to recognize which type has occurred as the reception period when the timing tI3a earlier than that time has arrived. Thereby, it becomes possible to urge the player who tends to concentrate only on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) to enjoy the effect with more effect devices.

  Further, even a player who only looks at the first effect device (effect display device 1600), when the timing tI3b arrives, the fourth disappearance related display SK4 different from the above-described first disappearance related display SK1 is "integrated. The chemical image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize ”. Therefore, by confirming such an aspect, it is possible to recognize at an earlier stage which type has occurred as the reception period before the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is performed. become able to.

  In this regard, the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception effect display UG4-1 or the fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted. It is displayed by any of the post-reception effect display UG4-2). Therefore, the "fourth post-reception effect display UG4" is executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" are hidden. ..

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, even when the fourth reception period occurs, the time is limited within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 258). In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), and this suppresses a decrease in amusement of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tI3c) of the fourth post-reception effect (the fourth post-reception effect display) corresponding to the acceptance is set to be greater than the received timing tI3a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, even when the operation by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 258 (b) and 258 (c), the second effect is produced based on the acceptance. The fourth post-reception effect using the device (fourth post-reception specific effect) is started prior to the fourth post-reception effect using the first effect device (fourth post-reception effect display). There is.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tI3a when the reception is performed in the fourth reception period, which is limited to a part of the fourth post-reception production (display after the fourth reception production). The effect after the fourth reception can be started without delay from the same timing tI3a.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. 267 (e1) in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). As shown in, the mode in which "one sword" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the fourth post-reception specific rendering UGT4 (fourth rendering) corresponding to the fourth reception period. As a fourth post-reception specific production UGT4-1), which is a low-expectation aspect of the post-reception specific production UGT4, in the fourth post-reception production (the fourth post-reception production display UG4-1) using the first production device. It is designed to start execution in advance. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), FIG. 267 ( As shown in e2), the mode in which "two swords" are displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the fourth post-reception specific rendering UGT4 (corresponding to the fourth reception period. As a fourth post-reception specific production UGT4-2, which is a mode with high expectation of the fourth post-reception specific production UGT4, a fourth post-reception production (fourth post-reception production display UG4-2) using the first production device is performed. ) Is started prior to execution.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 266, in addition to the first precursor effect display ZEH1 in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also corresponds to the fourth acceptance period. The precursor effect (the fourth specific effect) to be performed is executed (FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)). The fourth precursor specific effect on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is different from the first predictive effect display ZEH1 on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) in that the timing tI3 at which the first acceptance period occurs is tI3. It is executed even when it arrives, and is executed so as to cross the timing tI3.

  In this embodiment, the omen effect corresponding to the fourth reception period is executed as an effect (fourth omen specific effect) different from the first omen specific effect shown in FIG. 262. You may make it perform as an effect same as the 1st omen specific effect shown. In this case, it becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first reception period and the fourth reception period occurs even when the second rendering device is confirmed.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the fourth reception period occurs, the timing shown in FIG. 258 (d). At tI2, the acceptance permissible sound (corresponding to “♪” output in FIGS. 266 (b) to (d)) is started to be output. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the fourth reception period is audibly output in such a manner as to extend over the timing tI3 (corresponding to the “condition shown in FIG. 266 (d)”) at which the fourth reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output.

  In this regard, in the fourth reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway (audible) based on the acceptance being made. The output state is terminated midway).

  Further, in the fourth reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the acceptance sound is audibly output, not only the acceptance sound is terminated halfway, but also when the acceptance is made, Audible output of a fourth post-acceptance output sound (corresponding to “♪♪” output in FIG. 267 (e1) or (e2), etc.) different from the first post-acceptance output sound based on Has become. That is, in this case, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed in the first effect device, in the fourth acceptance period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the acceptance period and the acceptance are made. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (output sound after the fourth reception) that is performed accordingly.

  Like the “fourth post-reception effect display UG4”, such a fourth post-reception output sound, as shown in FIG. 258 (d), is an “integrated image display IG” or a “fourth disappearance related display SK4”. It will be executed for a comparatively long time even after "is hidden" ("♪♪ is output in (e1) to (i1) or (e2) to (e1) in FIG. 267". Equivalent to). Further, regarding the fourth post-acceptance output sound, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))” (with relatively low expectation as post-acceptance production) 266) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  Regarding the acceptance acceptable sound output corresponding to the fourth acceptance period, in order to make it difficult to recognize which of the first acceptance period and the fourth acceptance period occurs, It is desirable that the sound is the same as the acceptance permission sound that is output correspondingly. However, it does not necessarily have to be the same.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 258, an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 266 (d) to “C3 (FIG. 267 (e3) to (h3))” is a game within the fourth reception period. It is assumed that the motion by the person is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the fourth reception period occurs, the timing tI4 comes without the operation of the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tI4 (the time point when the fourth acceptance period ends and the player is no longer allowed to accept the action), the timing tI3a (the fourth effect device) is set. 267 (e3), as in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) when the player accepts the operation within the acceptance period of the integrated effect image display IG. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  With such a configuration, even when the fourth acceptance period ends because the player does not receive the operation in time, the integrated model within the fourth acceptance period after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment appeal.

  Then, after this, even when the player's operation is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 267 (f3), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is set as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". -1 or the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2 (in the figure, the display related to the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4-" is displayed while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. 1 or the second disappearance-related display SK4-2 "is displayed, and at least a part of the area in which the" fourth disappearance-related display SK4 "is displayed is the" integrated mood image display IG (mother image display , Gauge image display) ”is overlapped with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed after the fourth reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated image display IG is not displayed. By making it difficult to visually recognize, it becomes possible to indicate that the fourth acceptance period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the fourth reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. From this, it is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the “fourth disappearance related display SK4-1” is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. In the case, if the movement by the player is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, the production is progressing from FIG. 266 (d) to “C1 (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1))”. (When the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, the case where "the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2" is displayed as the fourth disappearance related display SK4 when the operation by the player is not accepted within the fourth acceptance period means the fourth reception period. If the operation by the player is accepted in the case where the production is progressing from FIG. 266 (d) to “C2 (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2))” (relatively of the degree of expectation) This is equivalent to a case where a high post-reception performance is being executed).

  That is, in this case, in the fourth acceptance period, even if the operation by the player is not accepted, it is related to the fact that the integrated image display IG is hidden after the fourth acceptance period ends. Only by confirming the mode (the fourth disappearance related display SK4-1 and the fourth disappearance related display SK4-2) as the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" that appears as "4th disappearance related display SK4", the fourth post-reception effect is in a mode with low expectation. Since it becomes possible to recognize whether the game is being executed or is being executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 267 (g3), first, of the “integrated image display IG” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4”, the “integrated image display IG” is hidden. To do. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this manner, the "fourth disappearance related display SK4" is hidden as shown in FIG. 267 (h3).

  In the fourth reception period, as in the first reception period, a mode with low expectations (FIG. 267 (e1) to (i1)) and a mode with high expectations (FIG. 267 (e2) to (i2)), the same specific aspect may appear as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. However, in this case, even when the operation by the player is not accepted in the fourth acceptance period, unlike the case of the first acceptance period described above, the same specific aspect appears as the fourth disappearance related display SK4. Become.

  By the way, as described above, in the first reception period and the fourth reception period, in any of the reception periods, the first effect display TE ( Here, the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE (frog character) can be displayed respectively.

  In this regard, when the first acceptance period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 262 (b) and 262 (c), the first effect display TE is displayed in the situation where the “first amenity effect display ZEH1” is displayed. The second effect display FE and the second effect display FE are not made difficult to be visually recognized by the "first amenity effect display ZEH1". In addition, after the first acceptance period ends, as shown in FIGS. 263 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (when accepted) No.) and the first disappearance related display SK1-2 (when not accepted), the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are the first disappearance related display. The SK1 (the first disappearance related display SK1-1 or the first disappearance related display SK1-2) does not make it difficult to be visually recognized.

  On the other hand, even when the fourth reception period occurs, as shown in FIGS. 266 (b) and 266 (c), the first effect display is displayed in the situation where the “first amenity effect display ZEH1” is displayed. The TE and the second effect display FE are set so as not to be difficult to be visually recognized by the “first amenity effect display ZEH1”. Further, after the fourth acceptance period ends, as shown in FIGS. 267 (f1) to (f3), (g1), and (g2), the fourth disappearance related display SK4 (the fourth disappearance related display SK4 -1 or the fourth disappearance-related display SK4-2) appears, but the first effect display TE is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance-related display SK4. However, the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4.

  With such a configuration, even if the type of the disappearance related display SK corresponds to which type of the reception period is not stored, the second effect is displayed when the disappearance related display SK is displayed. Only by confirming whether or not the display FE is difficult to be visually recognized, it is possible to infer which type has occurred as the reception period. Further, with respect to the first effect display TE, regardless of whether or not the disappearance related display SK makes the second effect display FE difficult to visually recognize, the first effect display TE is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the disappearance related display SK. Therefore, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment appeal.

  On the other hand, when the second reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, “the second indication effect display ZEH2” is displayed and then the “second reception effect display UG2” is displayed. Within the period up to, although the first effect display TE can be displayed among the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE, the second effect display FE is not displayed. ..

  That is, in this case, the type as the reception period is inferred (at least the first reception period) only by confirming whether or not the “precursor display” or the “reception period” has occurred while the second production display FE is being displayed. It is possible to assume that it is neither the acceptance period nor the fourth acceptance period), so the second effect display FE itself does not suggest the degree of expectation for the changing symbol effect. Even in this case, it is possible to provide an interesting effect using the second effect display FE.

  Even when the second reception period occurs, it is difficult to visually recognize the first effect display TE by the precursor effect display or the disappearance-related display, as in the case of the first reception period or the fourth reception period. It is designed so that it will not be damaged.

  FIG. 259 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the fifth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the fifth acceptance period (fifth acceptance effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the "fifth variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the fifth variation pattern is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the fifth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the fifth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “fifth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the production related to the “fifth variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination), the fifth predetermined time from the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ. When the timing tJ3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, the "acceptance regarding the fifth post-operation performance" is permitted. The fifth reception period (effective period) is generated. As a result, when the operation by the player is accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the fifth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the fifth reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this respect, in the fifth reception period (fifth reception performance) according to the present embodiment, the content executed as the fifth post-reception performance based on the fact that the operation by the player is received (in the first performance device). After each reception corresponding to the other reception period, "the display after the 5th reception", "the specific performance after the 5th reception" in the second production device, and "the output sound after the 5th reception" in the 3rd production device) It is different from the effect ("post-reception effect display" in the first effect device, "post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, "post-reception output sound" in the third effect device). Further, the “fifth aura effect display” corresponding to the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) is also different from the respective aura effect displays corresponding to the other reception periods. However, the method of displaying the “fifth reception effect display” and the “fifth amenity display” themselves (start time and end time of display, and other image display before being hidden) Regarding the display effect performed in relation to the first reception period, the display effect performed in relation to the second reception period, and the like (FIG. 255, FIG. 256, 262 to 265), and other configurations are basically the same.

  Below, an effect performed in association with the occurrence of the fifth reception period (fifth reception effect) will be described. However, with respect to the same configuration as in the case of the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but further I will omit the explanation here. That is, with respect to matters that are not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the content as described in the first reception period (first reception performance) or the second reception period (second reception performance), and another example or modification The same applies to the examples.

  For example, the timing tJ1 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG1 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), the “fifth aura effect display” is started to be executed as the aforesaid effect display.

  In this regard, the “fifth aura effect display” is of a type displayed across the timing tJ3 when the fifth reception period occurs, as shown in FIG. 259 (b). That is, the "fifth aura effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "second amenity effect display ZEH2" displayed corresponding to the second reception period, in terms of effect contents (display image), but "display start time and "Ending time, how it relates to other image display until it is hidden", etc. will be described with reference to FIG. 256, FIG. 264 and FIG. 265 about “the second predictive effect display ZEH2”. The display is performed in the same manner as described above. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  Further, the timing tJ2 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG2 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "fifth predictive effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display" is displayed. At least a part of the area in which the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "fifth indication effect display" is displayed.

  Further, the timing tJ3 shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3 shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ3 arrives, the fifth acceptance period occurs while the “fifth aura effect display” and the “integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)” are displayed. It will be.

  Further, the timing tJ3a shown in FIG. 259 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3a shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tI3a, the fifth acceptance period is ended and the post-reception effect (fifth post-reception effect) corresponding to the fifth acceptance period is started to be executed. It will be. In addition, the fifth post-reception effect is similar to the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263), the second post-reception effect (FIG. 265), etc. There is a case where the second mode having a high expectation is executed.

  Further, the timing tJ3b shown in FIG. 258 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 and the timing tG3b shown in FIG. 256. Therefore, when the timing tJ3b arrives, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears.

  In this respect, when the acceptance is made during the fifth acceptance period, the above-mentioned "first disappearance related display SK1" commonly corresponding to the first acceptance period is given as "a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". The display related to is started. 255 and FIG. 263 regarding “first disappearance related display SK1”, “starting time and ending time of display, and how it relates to other image display before being hidden” and the like. As described with reference to. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  However, with respect to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized" corresponding to the fifth reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, as the fifth post-reception effect, "relatively high expectation A different mode may appear depending on whether the "first mode with a low level" is executed and the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed.

  For example, when the “second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, “first disappearance related display SK1” is selected as the “mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize”. (Here, the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (FIG. 263), which is the first mode, is displayed. On the other hand, as the fifth post-reception presentation, “first with relatively low expectation” is displayed. When the "mode" is executed, if a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" appears as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the first reception When the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed in correspondence with the period, make the possibility that the "second mode with a relatively high degree of expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. Kill as to become.

  In this case, when the “second mode with relatively high expectations” is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, the “second mode with relatively high expectations” is executed as the first post-reception effect. It is desirable to set it so that the degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols) is higher than when. The percentage may be 100%.

  In addition, when the "first mode with relatively low expectations" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect, "first disappearance related display SK1-" is displayed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". When a mode different from "1" is displayed, the "first disappearance related display SK1-2 which is the second mode as the first disappearance related display SK1" may appear as the different mode. That is, in this case, when the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears, whether the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears as a result of being accepted in the fifth acceptance period, or within the first acceptance period. It is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the first disappearance-related display SK1-2 appears as a result of being late for acceptance, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, when the "first disappearance related display SK1-1" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, the "second mode with relatively high expectation" is executed as the fifth post-reception effect. In order to make the possibility more conscious, or when the "first disappearance related display SK1-2" is displayed corresponding to the first reception period, "relatively expected as the fifth post-reception effect" In order to make the possibility of executing the “second aspect having a low frequency” more appropriately noticed, the precursor effect display corresponding to the fifth reception period is not the “fifth predictor effect display”, It is desirable that the same “first predictive effect display ZEH1” as in the first reception period is executed.

  In addition, in the case of acceptance in the fifth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period and the second acceptance period, as shown in FIG. The fifth post-reception effect (the fifth post-reception specific effect) using the effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is changed to the fifth post-reception effect (the fifth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. Start execution in advance. The same applies to the point that the fifth post-acceptance specific effect is executed so that different modes appear according to the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the predictive effect (fifth predictive specific effect) corresponding to the fifth reception period. In addition, the aura specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first aura specific effect shown in FIG. 262, not the fifth aura specific effect. Good.

  Further, even when the fifth reception period occurs, the reception permission sound is started to be output at the timing tJ2. As shown in FIG. 259 (d), this acceptance-permitted sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. In the example shown in FIG. 259 (d), like the acceptance-permitted sound that is audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs, the "acceptable sound for a long time" and the "acceptable sound for a short time" are audibly output, respectively. 256, 264, and FIG. 264 regarding “start timing and end timing of audible output, how other productions are related until the end of audible output”, and the like. The audible output is performed by the method as described for the “acceptable sound” with reference to H.265. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  However, with regard to the acceptable acceptance sound output when the fifth acceptance period occurs, only one acceptance permission sound is output, like the acceptance acceptable sound that is output when the third acceptance period or the fourth acceptance period occurs. May be output, and when it is accepted, it may be output as being terminated halfway.

  In any case, in the fifth reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance allowance sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated halfway but also accepted. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the fifth post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound that is output corresponding to another acceptance period is started. That is, in this case, in the fifth reception period, as in the case of the second reception period, an effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and an effect performed in response to the acceptance (fifth reception period). There is no competition (duplication) with the subsequent output sound).

  It should be noted that the fifth post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound, the second post-acceptance output sound, and the like when the post-acceptance effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectation. It is audibly output as an output sound different from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 259, if the operation by the player is not accepted within the fifth acceptance period, the operation by the player is accepted after the fifth acceptance period occurs. Without this, the timing tJ4 comes.

  In this regard, also in the fifth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tJ4 (at the time point when the acceptance of the operation by the player is no longer permitted after the end of the fifth reception period). In the above, in addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Then, after that, even when the player's operation is not accepted, the display related to the fifth disappearance related display SK5 is started as a "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized".

  Regarding the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized” when the acceptance is not made in the fifth acceptance period, it is tentatively accepted in the fifth acceptance period as in the second acceptance period. If so, the mode that has appeared (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) will appear. However, as in the first reception period, a mode that cannot appear when received in the fifth reception period may appear.

  FIG. 260 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the sixth condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the sixth acceptance period (sixth acceptance effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the "sixth variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first makes an effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the sixth variation pattern. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the sixth variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the sixth variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) corresponding to the effect determination result is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “sixth variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the production related to the “sixth variation pattern”, the sixth predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ, regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination). When the timing tK3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, the "acceptance regarding the sixth post-operation effect" is permitted. The sixth reception period (effective period) is generated. Thus, when the operation by the player is accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the sixth post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the sixth reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice production determination.

  In this regard, in the sixth reception period (sixth reception performance) according to the present embodiment, the content executed as the sixth post-reception performance based on the fact that the operation by the player is received (in the first performance device). After each reception corresponding to the other reception period, "the display after the 6th reception", "the specific performance after the 6th reception" in the second production device, and "the output sound after the 6th reception" in the 3rd production device) It is different from the effect ("post-reception effect display" in the first effect device, "post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, "post-reception output sound" in the third effect device). Further, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the sixth acceptance period (sixth reception effect), the mood image display (here Then, the integrated image display) is hidden. However, the method of displaying the “6th post-reception effect display” and the “result image display” themselves (starting time and ending time of display, and how to display other images before being hidden) (Whether related, etc.) is the same as that described in the display effect (FIG. 255, FIG. 262, FIG. 263) performed in relation to the first reception period, and regarding other configurations, It is basically the same as any one of the above-mentioned methods.

  Hereinafter, the effect performed in association with the occurrence of the sixth reception period (sixth reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the same configuration as in the case of the first reception period (first reception effect), it may be mentioned that it is the same, but a further description is omitted here. That is, with respect to matters that are not particularly mentioned, the effect is performed with the content as described in the first acceptance period (first acceptance effect), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  For example, the timing tK1 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tK1 arrives, on the display screen (effect display device 1600), execution of the “first amenity effect display” is started as the aforesaid effect display.

  Further, the timing tK2 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK2 arrives, the “integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)” is displayed while the “first indication display” is displayed, and the “integrated image display” is displayed. At least a part of the area in which the "black image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "first indication effect display" is displayed.

  Further, the timing tK3 shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tK3 arrives, the sixth reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

  Further, the timing tK3a shown in FIG. 260 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received at the timing tK3a, the sixth reception period is ended and the post-reception production (sixth post-reception production) corresponding to the sixth reception period is started to be executed. It will be. In the sixth post-reception effect as well as in the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263) and the like, there are a case where the first mode with a relatively low expectation is executed and a second mode with a relatively high expectation. It may be executed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 260, there is no process corresponding to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. 255 in the process related to the effect related to the sixth reception period, that is, “integrated image display IG (image image Until the display and the gauge image display) are hidden, a mode in which this is difficult to visually recognize does not appear. This is the same (whether the timing tF3b does not exist) regardless of whether the "mode with low expectations" or the "mode with high expectations" appears as the sixth post-reception effect. The same applies (the timing tF3b does not exist) when the sixth acceptance period ends without the player's operation being accepted in the sixth acceptance period.

  According to such a configuration, during the other reception period, when the reception period ends, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is visually recognized before being hidden. Despite the appearance of making it difficult to perform, in the sixth reception period, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is hidden even if the reception period ends. Since the mode (display disappearance related display SK) that makes it difficult to visually recognize it until then, is it in the state where the sixth reception period has ended (the situation in which the operation by the player is canceled) Can be made difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

  In addition, also in the case of acceptance in the sixth acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 260, based on the acceptance, the second effect device (here, The sixth post-reception effect using the sub liquid crystal 1610 (sixth post-reception specific effect) is started prior to the sixth post-reception effect (sixth post-reception effect display) using the first effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the sixth post-reception specific effect is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. In addition, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the indication effect (sixth indication specific effect) corresponding to the sixth reception period. In addition, the aura identification effect using the second effect device (here, the sub-liquid crystal 1610) is executed as the same effect as the first aura identification effect shown in FIG. 262, instead of the sixth amenity effect. Good.

  Even when the sixth acceptance period occurs, the acceptance permission sound is started to be output at the timing tK2. As shown in FIG. 260 (d), this acceptable sound is of a type that is terminated midway when the acceptance is made. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. 266 for the “start timing and end timing of the audible output, how they relate to other effects until the audible output is finished” and the like related to such a reception permission sound. 267, the audible output is performed by the method as described for the "acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  However, regarding the acceptance-permitted sound that is output when the sixth acceptance period occurs, two acceptance-permitted sounds are respectively output and accepted in the same manner as the acceptance-permitted sound that is output when the second acceptance period occurs. When it is performed, it may be output as being terminated on the way.

  In any case, in the sixth acceptance period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, the acceptance acceptance sound is not only terminated midway but also accepted. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the sixth post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound that is output corresponding to another acceptance period is started. That is, in this case, in the sixth reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, an effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and an effect performed in response to the acceptance (the sixth reception period). There is no competition (duplication) with the subsequent output sound).

  The sixth post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound, the fourth post-acceptance output sound, and the like when the post-acceptance effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 260, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the sixth acceptance period, the operation by the player is accepted after the sixth acceptance period occurs. Without this, the timing tK4 is reached.

  In this regard, also in the sixth reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tK4 (at the time when the sixth acceptance period ends and the operation of the player is no longer accepted). In the above, in addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized. However, as described above, in the sixth reception period, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized" does not appear after the timing tK4 comes without the operation by the player being received. ..

  FIG. 261 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the seventh condition is satisfied as a result of the determination and the seventh acceptance period (seventh acceptance effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (suspended), and the "seventh variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the seventh variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect depiction according to the seventh variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the seventh variation pattern, etc.) is started, and a notice is given within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) according to the result of the effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “seventh variation pattern” itself.

  However, in the production related to the “seventh variation pattern”, regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (preliminary determination), the seventh predetermined time has elapsed since the variation production of the decorative symbol SZ was started. When the timing tL3 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or may be the timing within the SP reach state) has arrived, the "acceptance regarding the seventh post-operation performance" is permitted. The seventh reception period (effective period) is generated. Thereby, when the operation by the player is accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the seventh post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the seventh reception period (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice effect determination.

  In this regard, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception performance) according to the present embodiment, the content executed as the seventh post-reception performance based on the fact that the operation by the player is received (in the first performance device). After each reception corresponding to another reception period, the "display after the 7th reception", the "specific performance after the 7th reception" in the second production device, and the "output sound after the 7th reception" in the 3rd production device) It is different from the effect ("post-reception effect display" in the first effect device, "post-reception specific effect" in the second effect device, "post-reception output sound" in the third effect device). Further, the “seventh indication effect display” corresponding to the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) is also different from each of the indication effect displays corresponding to the other reception periods. Further, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) according to this embodiment, even if “a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”, each disappearance related display corresponding to another reception period is displayed. The different "seventh extinction related display" appears. However, the "display after the 7th reception", the "display 7th indication", and the "display related to the 7th disappearance" (display start time and end time, and display until they are hidden) How it interacts with other image displays in the meantime, etc.) is the same as that described in any of the above-mentioned display effects performed in relation to each reception period, and other configurations Are basically the same.

  Hereinafter, the effect performed in association with the occurrence of the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect) will be described. However, regarding the configuration that is the same as that in the other reception period (other reception performance), the same description is mentioned, but a further description is omitted here. Further, with respect to matters that are not particularly mentioned, the production is performed with the content as described in the first reception period (first reception production), and the same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  For example, the timing tL1 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF1 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL1 arrives, the indication effect display is started to be executed on the display screen (effect display device 1600).

  However, as described above, in the seventh reception period (seventh reception effect), as the precursor effect display corresponding to this, the “seventh indication effect display” that does not correspond to other reception periods is displayed. There is. As shown in FIG. 261 (b), the “seventh indication display” is of a type that is not displayed when the seventh reception period occurs and is hidden before this. .. That is, the "seventh indication effect display" is different from the above-mentioned "first indication effect display ZEH1" displayed corresponding to the first reception period in terms of effect contents (display image), but "start time of display and “End time, how it relates to other image display until it is hidden”, etc. are the same as those described for the “first aura effect display ZEH1” with reference to FIGS. 256 and 262. It is supposed to be displayed by the method. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  The timing tL2 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF2 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL2 arrives, the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed while the "seventh indication effect display" is displayed, and the "integrated image display IG" is displayed. At least a part of the area in which the "image display IG" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "seventh indication effect display" is displayed.

  The timing tL3 shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3 shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3 arrives, the seventh reception period occurs while the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

  Further, the timing tL3a shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3a shown in FIG. Therefore, when the operation by the player is received at the timing tL3a, the seventh reception period is ended and the post-reception production (seventh reception production) corresponding to the seventh reception period is started to be executed. It will be. In the seventh post-reception effect as well as in the first post-reception effect (FIG. 263) and the like, there are a case where the first aspect having a relatively low expectation is executed and a second aspect having a relatively high expectation. It may be executed.

  The timing tL3b shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3b shown in FIG. Therefore, when the timing tL3b arrives, the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" appears. However, as described above, when the acceptance is made during the seventh acceptance period, "the seventh disappearance-related display" that does not correspond to the other acceptance period is provided as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". The display related to is started (timing tL3b).

  Here, the "seventh extinction related display" is different from the above-mentioned "first extinction related display SK1" displayed corresponding to the first acceptance period in terms of effect contents (display image), but "display start time". And the end time and how it relates to other image display before being hidden "and the like, referring to FIG. 255, FIG. 256, FIG. 263, FIG. 265, etc. The display is performed by the method as described for "Display SK1". The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples. In addition, in both the case where the seventh post-reception production is executed as a mode with a relatively low degree of expectation and the case where it is executed as a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation The "display" is similar to the case of the first reception period in that it is displayed in the same manner.

  However, with respect to the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (seventh disappearance related display)" corresponding to the seventh reception period, unlike the case of the first reception period, the post-seventh reception effect For example, different modes may appear when the “first mode with relatively low expectations” is executed and when the “second mode with relatively high expectations” is executed.

  The timing tL3c shown in FIG. 261 corresponds to the timing tF3c shown in FIG. 255. Therefore, when the timing tL3c arrives, while the display relating to the “seventh disappearance related display” (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized) appears, the player is in the seventh reception period. The "7th post-reception effect display" as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance of the operation is started to be started.

  In addition, also in the case of acceptance in the seventh acceptance period, as in the case of the first acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 261, the second rendering device (here, The seventh post-reception effect using the sub liquid crystal 1610 (seventh reception specific effect) is started prior to the seventh post-reception effect (seventh reception effect display) using the first effect device. .. The same applies to the point that the seventh post-reception specific effect is executed so that different modes appear depending on the degree of expectation. Further, before the reception period occurs, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) may also execute the indication effect (seventh indication specific effect) corresponding to the seventh reception period. In addition, regarding the sign specific effect using the second effect device (here, the sub liquid crystal 1610), not the seventh sign specific effect, but the same effect as the first sign specific effect shown in FIG. 262 is executed. Good.

  Further, even when the seventh reception period occurs, the acceptance permission sound is started to be output at the timing tL2. As shown in FIG. 261 (d), this acceptance-permitted sound is of a type that ends midway when acceptance is made. 258, FIG. 266 and FIG. 266 for the “start timing and end timing of the audible output, how they relate to other effects until the audible output is finished” and the like related to such a reception permission sound. 267, the audible output is performed by the method as described for the "acceptable sound" corresponding to the fourth acceptance period. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  However, with regard to the acceptance permission sound output when the seventh acceptance period occurs, two acceptance permission sounds are respectively output and accepted in the same manner as the acceptance permission sound output when the second acceptance period occurs. When it is performed, it may be output as being terminated on the way.

  In any case, in the seventh reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output, not only the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway, but also the acceptance is performed. Sometimes, based on this, the audible output of the seventh post-acceptance output sound that is different from the post-acceptance output sound that is output corresponding to another acceptance period is started. That is, in this case, in the seventh reception period, as in the case of the fourth reception period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the effect performed in response to the acceptance (the seventh reception). There is no competition (duplication) with the subsequent output sound).

  Note that the seventh post-acceptance output sound is similar to the first post-acceptance output sound, the fourth post-acceptance output sound, and the like when the post-acceptance effect is executed in the first mode with relatively low expectations. It is audibly output as an output sound different from that in the case of being executed in the second mode having a high expectation.

  On the other hand, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 261, if the operation by the player is not accepted within the seventh acceptance period, the operation by the player is accepted after the seventh acceptance period occurs. Without this, the timing tL4 comes.

  In this regard, also in the seventh reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tL4 (at the time when the seventh acceptance period ends and the operation of the player is no longer accepted) In the above, in addition to not hiding the integrated image display IG, the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Then, after that, even when the player's operation is not accepted, the display related to the seventh disappearance related display is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized".

  Regarding the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized" when the acceptance is not made in the seventh acceptance period, it is accepted in the seventh acceptance period as in the first acceptance period. Occasionally, an aspect that cannot appear appears. However, as in the second reception period, a mode that has appeared if it was accepted during the seventh reception period (a mode that differs depending on the degree of expectation) may appear.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which the first reception period to the seventh reception period are prepared, the following advantageous effects can be obtained.

  That is, first, regardless of which of the first reception period to the seventh reception period occurs, regarding the mock image display displayed using the predetermined area in the display screen (production display device 1600), After the production is advanced based on the acceptance of the action by the player (after the production change based on the acceptance is started), the display is made possible. As a result, even after the production is advanced based on the acceptance, it is determined which mode (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d) in FIG. 232 (a) to (d)) the game image is displayed during the acceptance period. The person can be grasped.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the content of the production that is advanced when the game is received (conversation notice, cut-in notice, movable body notice as post-acceptance production, etc.) Multiple types of acceptance periods (first acceptance period to seventh acceptance period) with different types) are prepared, and the acceptance period (effective period) of the type can be generated according to the result of the determination (production determination). It is supposed to be.

  In this respect, in the first to seventh reception periods, when the operation by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (first post-reception effect display to the seventh reception effect) is performed based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The post-reception effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display is displayed based on the acceptance being made. Not only that, but also "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance related display)" is made to appear. That is, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the image display after the acceptance is made, and it is also possible to confirm that “the image display is not performed before the image display is hidden. By reducing the visibility of the image display by making it difficult to see (display related to disappearance), the player's gaze target is naturally moved from the "real image display" to the "post-reception effect display". Will be expected to be.

  However, since the actual image display is originally displayed during the reception period when the acceptance is not yet made, if the relevant image display is displayed even after the acceptance is made, it will be accepted. It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the post-reception effect display is already displayed, and there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game will be reduced. In this respect, when the acceptance is made in any one of the first to fifth acceptance periods and the seventh acceptance period, the mood image display is “a mode in which the mood image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display ) ”Is displayed (invisible), while the post-reception effect display is displayed while the“ mode in which the image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance related display) ”is displayed. I am trying to do it. That is, in this case, after the player has accepted the operation, the "previous reception display (reduction image display)" is displayed after the reception while the "mode in which the general image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears. The transition to the display effect (post-reception effect display) will be realized.

  It should be noted that the “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” and the “post-reception effect display” are common in that they are displayed based on acceptance. However, the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” means, for example, as shown in FIG. 263 (f1), FIG. 265 (f1), FIG. 267 (f1), etc. When the display is displayed, it appears so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the scale image display. On the other hand, the “post-reception effect display” means, for example, a situation where the image display is displayed as shown in FIG. 263 (g1), FIG. 265 (g1), FIG. 267 (g1), or the like. Even if it is displayed at a certain time, it will appear so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. Further, in each of the above-described examples, the display of the “post-reception effect display” is started when the quality image display is being displayed. The display does not necessarily have to be started in the displayed state, and the display may be started after the image display is hidden.

  As for the method of “appearing so as to make it difficult to visually recognize the image”, regarding at least a part of the area where the image is displayed, In addition to the method of realizing by preferentially displaying an image display different from the image display (displayed in the front layer), a part of the image display is missing due to an image display different from the image display ( It is possible to adopt a method realized by displaying an image (moving image) that is made to be visible (invisible). Further, it is also possible to adopt a method of changing a numerical value (such as transmittance) relating to the display characteristics of the mock image display itself, instead of an image display different from the mock image display. On the other hand, as a method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the mood image display" with respect to the "display after reception", "display after reception" is displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed. Although it is displayed, in addition to the technique realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" (displayed on the rear layer) in a manner that the image display is prioritized display, at least while the image display is being displayed. It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in an area excluding the area in which the black image display is displayed.

  In addition, as a mode (display related to disappearance) in which it is difficult to visually recognize the mock image display, a method of displaying an image display different from the mock image display in at least a part of the area where the mock image display is displayed, Both the method of changing the numerical value (such as the transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the image display itself may be adopted.

  Further, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is a situation in which the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, before the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. It appears below. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "post-reception effect display" is not yet displayed, the mood image display is made difficult to be visually recognized by the above-mentioned "mode in which the mood image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)". Therefore, while making the mood image display visible, there is a state in which the "post-reception effect display" may soon appear, and it is necessary to change the gaze point by the player from the "difficult to visually recognize mood image display". You will be able to urge you to prepare in advance.

  In addition, when accepted in the first to fifth acceptance periods, the seventh acceptance period, or the like, the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is "post-effect display. Can be displayed even after "" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, in the period after the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is hidden, and the Since it becomes possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display", it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by such a change in the performance during the display period.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, FIG. 263 (g1), (h1), FIG. 265 (g1), (h1), FIG. As shown in 267 (g1) and (h1), as for the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (display related to disappearance)”, not only the area in which the visual image display is displayed but also the visual image display Is also displayed in the area where is not displayed. In the area, at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but the "post-reception effect display" is set by "a mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)". At least a part of the "display" is displayed (for example, displayed on the rear layer) so that it is difficult to visually recognize it.

  According to such a configuration, the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears not only in the visual image display but also in the "post-reception effect display". As it is expected, it is expected to improve both the directivity until the mock image display is hidden and the directivity when the display of the "post-reception effect display" is started. Become.

  Further, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the first to seventh reception periods, the "post-reception production display" before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the acceptance is made. In a situation in which "" is not displayed, apart from the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)", the post-reception specific effect (the second effect device is used) in which the visual image display is not difficult to visually recognize It is possible for the "post-reception performance" to appear in a mode according to the degree of expectation. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-reception productions prior to this without interfering with the production performance of the first production device.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is The "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance related display)" appears before the appearance of the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to view (disappearance related display) " I am trying. In addition, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is ended. There is.

  According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance by the second performance device having a more simplified performance. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for various types of players.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples related to the first to seventh acceptance periods, the precursor effect display is assumed to be executed over the timing at which the mood image display is displayed. Further, in some of the above-described effect examples, as shown in FIG. 264 and FIG. 265, etc., it is also possible to accept in the state where the indication effect display is displayed, and when the acceptance is made, The “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” makes it difficult to visually recognize both the image image display and the indication effect display (such as the priority display described above).

  On the other hand, on the other hand, at least at the time when the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)” appears, neither the image display nor the sign effect display overlaps with the whole. , At least part of it is so that visibility is not hindered. That is, the mode in which the visual image display is difficult to be visually recognized (disappearance related display) is performed by gradually deteriorating the visibility of the visual image display and the precursor effect display (increasing the overlapping area). There is.

  Further, also in each of the above-described effect examples related to the first to seventh reception periods, the dynamic image display is performed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. Becomes In this case, the dynamic image display continues without being terminated, even after the "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears after being accepted. It is desirable to do so.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the first to fifth reception periods and the seventh reception period, the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is only the visual image display. In addition, we decided to make it difficult to see the gauge image that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time.

  In addition, in the above-mentioned example of performance, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, after the first acceptance based on the acceptance being made. The effect display UG1 can be displayed, and in addition to the first post-acceptance effect display UG1, a mode (first disappearance related display SK1) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mood image display can appear. In addition, when an operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, a second different from the first post-reception effect display UG1 based on the acceptance being made. As a mode in which the post-reception effect display UG2 can be displayed, and in addition to the second post-reception effect display UG2, a mode different from the case of the first reception period (second The disappearance related display SK2) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, the quality image display can be performed without confirming which of the "first post-reception production display UG1" and the "second post-reception production display UG2" is displayed as the post-reception production display. The type of the post-reception effect display can be estimated only by confirming what kind of mode (first disappearance related display SK1 and second disappearance related display SK2) makes it difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the third acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, it is determined that the acceptance has been made. It is possible to display a third post-reception production display that is different from both the "first post-reception production display UG1" and the "second post-reception production display UG2" based on the third post-reception production display. Separately, the above-described mode (first disappearance-related display SK1) corresponding to the above-described first reception period can be made to appear as an effect mode for making it difficult to visually recognize the black image display.

  According to such a configuration, when the first disappearance related display SK1 appears, it is unclear which of the first and the third post-reception effect display appears, as a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display. However, when the second disappearance related display SK2 appears, it is possible to estimate that the second post-acceptance effect display appears as a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the "disappearance related display" is displayed (priority display) in a region including at least a part of the region in which the mock image display is displayed, "a manner in which the mock image display is difficult to visually recognize". I decided to realize it as. However, it is also possible to realize the effect using an effect device (a movable body or the like) located on the front side of the display screen by executing the effect at a position overlapping at least a part of the mock image display in a front view.

  Even if the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1) appears as the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the black image display”, if the types of the acceptance period are different, the symbol variation causes the jackpot pattern. It is desirable to have different rates (expectations) of being stopped.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when the first indication effect display is the same (first indication effect display), but the "first disappearance related display SK1" appears as "a manner in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize" (first And a third reception period), and a mode different from the "first disappearance related display SK1" appears (fourth reception period) or the mode does not appear (sixth reception period). ) And so on.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the indication effects display (the first indication effect display, the fourth indication effect display) are different, but the same aspect (the first disappearance related display SK1) as the "aspect image display is difficult to visually recognize". ) Appears (first reception period, fifth reception period).

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to guess the type of the reception period until it is known which type is being executed as the post-reception production, and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Will be able to.

  In addition, in the above-described example of performance, it is possible to execute post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device, and execute post-reception production (post-reception specific production) using the second production device. During the period, in the first effect device, there is a state in which the mood image display is relatively easy to visually recognize and a state in which the mood image display is relatively hard to be visually recognized.

  In other words, in this case, it is determined which mode has appeared as the mood image display even after the execution of the post-reception effect (post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance. It is possible to confirm. Further, during the execution period of the post-reception production (post-receipt specific production) using the second production device, the state of the mood image display is made relatively difficult to visually recognize, so that the “first production device” is changed. It is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally to the "second effect device".

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the post-reception production using the second production device (post-reception specific production) is the visibility of the mood image display that is continuously displayed (displayed in a visually recognizable state) before it is received. It is supposed to be executed so that it will not affect. More specifically, the mock image display is displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the post-reception effect (specific reception effect after reception) using the second effect device is: It is neither an image display that is displayed by utilizing at least a part of the predetermined area nor an effect that is executed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the predetermined area in a front view.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the post-reception production display is supposed to be started after the appearance timing of the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize", but the mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize The display may be started at the appearance timing of "."

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the mock image display" is realized as an image display that is displayed by using at least a part of the "area in which the mock image display is displayed". I decided. However, in this case, regarding the image display, it is desirable to display such that the area displayed in the “region where the image display is displayed” tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

  Further, as described above, the simulated image display can be displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations. Then, according to the above-described production examples, since the display mode including the display position and the size and the dynamic depiction is maintained and continued even after the acceptance is made, the acceptance is made after the acceptance. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the simulated image display was displayed during the reception period.

  However, in this case, when the period is shortly after the acceptance, the post-reception effect has to be performed under such conditions (the display related to the simulated image display is maintained). That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be executed. However, when time passes, and "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance related display)" appears, the post-reception presentation is performed under the condition that "the visibility of the image display may be deteriorated". It becomes possible to perform "post-reception effect display in the first effect device" under such conditions. By performing the two post-operation effects having different properties (specific effect after acceptance in the second effect device, effect display after acceptance in the first effect device) in stages, a mode of displaying a mock image even after acceptance While making it easy to confirm, the role of post-operation performance can be suitably exerted.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the second amenity effect display is displayed as the amenity effect display, when the reception is made within the corresponding acceptance period, "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display" The second disappearance related display SK1 (FIG. 265) appears. Further, when the seventh precursor effect display is displayed as the predictive effect display, the seventh disappearance related display appears as "a mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized" when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period. It is like this. On the other hand, when the “first omen effect display” different from the “second omen effect display” or the “seventh omen effect display” is displayed as the omen effect display, within the reception period corresponding to this. If the first disappearance-related display appears (first acceptance period, third acceptance period) and the fourth disappearance-related display appears as "a manner in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" when the acceptance is made ( There is a fourth acceptance period).

  That is, in this case, when the second precursor effect display or the seventh predictive effect display is displayed as the predictive effect display, at that time, it is recognized which mode appears as the "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize". Will be able to.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described effect examples, the “first amenity effect display” different from the specific mode (here, the “second amenity effect display” or the “seventh amenity effect display”) is used as the amenity effect display. When "is displayed", there is a case where "the mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" itself does not appear (sixth reception period) even if the reception is made within the corresponding reception period. There is.

  According to such a configuration, the indication effect display is different from the specific aspect (here, the “second indication effect display” or the “seventh indication effect display”) (here, the first indication effect display). If executed, whether or not the above-mentioned "mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize" itself appears within the period from the time when the image is received until the image display is hidden. From now on, it will be possible to improve the performance from the time it is received until the mock image display is hidden, and it is possible to maintain a good sense of tension. become able to.

  In addition, each of the above-described effect examples may be realized by modifying the following configuration, or the following configuration (reception period) may be further provided as another reception period (another precursor effect display). Good. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, during the period from the reception of the operation by the player during the reception period to the state in which the image display is hidden, "the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize. Aspects ”can appear. In this respect, in this modified example, when a specific aspect (for example, the second aura effect display, the seventh aura effect display, or another aura effect display not described above) is displayed as the aura effect display, Even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the above-mentioned “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” itself is prevented from appearing. That is, in this case, when the precursor effect display is executed in a specific mode, the "mode in which the quality image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" does not appear until the quality image display is hidden. It becomes possible to recognize that the image display is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  In this case, also in this modified example, when the indication effect display is executed by the “first indication effect display” and is accepted within the corresponding acceptance period, the acceptance is performed within the corresponding acceptance period. When the "mode in which the image display is difficult to see" appears (first reception period, third reception period, fourth reception period), the mode in which the image display is difficult to view There are cases where this does not appear itself (sixth reception period). Even with such a configuration, the indication effect display is different from the specific aspect (for example, the second indication effect display, the seventh indication effect display, or another indication effect display not described above) (here , 1st omen effect display), it becomes unclear whether or not the above-mentioned “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize” appears, so that after the acceptance, The performance is improved until the image display is in the non-display state, and the tension can be appropriately maintained.

  With regard to the configurations according to these modified examples (replacement examples), it is possible to appropriately apply each configuration applicable to the above-described configuration before the modification.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the specific mode (here, “second amenity effect display”) is displayed as the aura effect display, the operation by the player during the reception period corresponding to this is performed. Even when the acceptance is not accepted, the "mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same mode as when the acceptance was provisionally made.

  On the other hand, if the aspect (here, “first amenity effect display”) different from the specific aspect (here, “second amenity effect display”) is displayed as the amenity effect display, this corresponds to this. When different modes appear as "modes in which the visual image display is difficult to be visually recognized" depending on whether the player's operation is accepted or not during the acceptance period (first acceptance period, etc.), Even if the operation by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period corresponding to this, the "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is made to appear in the same mode as when the acceptance was tentatively made. In some cases (such as the fourth reception period).

  With such a configuration, by using the effect (precursor effect display) that is executed before the reception period occurs, the performance after the reception period ends or the performance when the reception period is not accepted And so on.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a specific mode (here, the second disappearance related display, the fourth disappearance related display, etc.) appears as the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”. In the possible reception period, the audible output state of the acceptable reception sound is terminated halfway, but as a "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to see", a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first disappearance related display) In the reception period in which can appear, there are cases where the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated halfway and there are cases where the audible output state of the acceptance acceptable sound is not terminated halfway. According to such a configuration, by confirming the output status of the acceptance-permitted sound when the sound is received, it may be possible to easily guess what kind of mode will appear as "the mode in which the visual image display is difficult to see". Since it becomes difficult to guess the situation, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the acceptance permission sound that can be used for such a judgment material is ended at the timing (timing within the acceptance period) before the timing when the acceptance period is ended. Since the audible output is made as a sound, whether the acceptance permissible sound is accepted in the audible output state, or the acceptance permissible sound is accepted after the audible output state ends. You will be able to choose whether or not to play.

  In each of the above-described effect examples, in the reception period in which the aura effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second aura effect display), a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 232 (a) to (4 modes shown in (d)) are enabled to be displayed, and during the reception period in which the aura effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (for example, the first aura effect display), the mood image is displayed. It is desirable to have a mode that cannot be displayed as a display (for example, the three modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) to (d) are not displayed, and only FIG. 232 (a) is displayed). ..

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a plurality of types are prepared as a precursor display effect that suggests that the reception period during which the operation by the player is targeted for reception will soon occur during the specific type reception period. Then, of the plurality of types of the indication effect display, the specific indication effect display (the second indication effect display, the fifth indication effect display) can be executed in such a manner that the timing corresponding to the reception period occurs. The operation by the player can be accepted while the specific indication effect display is being displayed.

  That is, in this case, since the operation by the player can be accepted while confirming which type (mode) is being displayed as the predictive effect display, the type (mode) of the predictive effect display can be accepted. This makes it possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to forgetting to confirm.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, when an operation by the player is accepted while the specific predictive effect display is being displayed, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. Even when the effect is started to be executed, the specific indication effect display is not hidden but is displayed.

  That is, in this case, the operation by the player is accepted while it is possible to confirm which type (mode) is displayed as the indication effect display, and further, the post-acceptance effect corresponding to the acceptance is started to be executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game caused by forgetting to confirm the type (mode) of the indication effect display.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, among the post-reception productions, regarding the post-reception productions using the second production device (post-reception specific productions), specific precursor production display (second precursor production display, fifth production display). It is supposed to be executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility of the indication effect display).

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, among the post-reception productions, the post-reception production (post-reception production display) using the first production device is itself a specific precursor production display (second precursor production). The display and the fifth indication effect display) are executed so as not to adversely affect the visibility (specific indication effect display is given priority over post-acceptance effect display (front side display on layer), etc.) ).

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, during the reception period in which the indication effect display is executed in a specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display, the fifth indication effect display), while the indication effect display is being displayed. However, regarding the indication effect display, when the operation by the player is not accepted, it can be hidden before the timing when the corresponding acceptance period ends. ing. That is, in this case, it is possible to play by selecting whether to start the after-reception effect with the indication effect display being displayed or to start the after-reception effect while the indication effect display is hidden. become.

  However, regarding the specific predictive presentation display, the execution state does not necessarily have to be ended within the reception period, and the execution state is not ended within the reception period and continues to be displayed until the reception period ends. It may be one. In this case, regarding the specific predictive effect display, it is displayed (priority display) using at least a part of the area where the image display is displayed until the midway timing of the corresponding reception period. In the period after the timing, it is desirable to display not only the area in which the mock image display is displayed but only the area different from the area.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, when the reception period occurs, the reception permission sound that indicates that the reception is permitted or the reception is permitted (soon) is made audible. The process can be executed. This prevents the player from forgetting to perform a receiving operation.

  Further, among the above-described effect examples, in the examples shown in FIGS. 256 to 259 and FIG. 261, the operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable acceptance sound is audible (output state) during the acceptance period. In such a case, the "mode where the image of the image is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" appears before the appearance of the mode where the mode of the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display). In the non-audible state, the process for starting the acceptance permission sound in an inaudible state is started.

  In other words, in this case, even if the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)” has not yet appeared after the acceptance, the fact that the acceptance period has already ended Can be suitably suggested to the player. As a result, even after delaying the timing of the appearance of the "visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" after the acceptance, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience from occurring, so that the visual image display is displayed in a good visual mode. Will be able to

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, even if the operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance sound is made audible, the acceptance sound is not terminated halfway and the acceptance sound is audible. It is supposed that a reception period (first reception period or the like) for displaying the extinguishing effect display is further prepared while the above is continued. Therefore, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the user is in the received condition or the condition in which the reception is not yet performed, and it is possible to maintain the tension appropriately.

  In this respect, a reception period (FIG. 256, FIG. 258, FIG. 261) in which the acceptable reception sound is made inaudible when the operation by the player is accepted while the acceptable reception sound is made audible. Even if an operation by the player is accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is made audible, the acceptance period (FIG. 255) in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not made inaudible is generated in response to these. Since the type of "image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is different, it is possible to infer the subsequent production progress by checking the output status of the acceptance acceptable sound. Become.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, a plurality of types are prepared as the acceptance-permitted sound. In this respect, it is desirable that the same sound is output as the acceptable reception sound in the first reception period, the third reception period, the fourth reception period, and the sixth reception period. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the reception periods is occurring.

  On the other hand, the reception permission sound that is made audible corresponding to the first reception period is the reception acceptable sound that is made audible corresponding to the second reception period, the fifth reception period, and the seventh reception period. It is audibly output as a sound different from the allowable sound. With such a configuration, when the acceptance-permitted sound is started to be output, it is possible to narrow down candidates for which type is occurring as the acceptance period to some extent by checking the sound. Also, when the acceptance acceptable sound is received while it is audible, it is possible to further narrow down the candidates by confirming whether the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated midway. It will be possible to provide interesting performance using.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, when the precursor effect display is executed in the specific mode (here, the second predictive effect display, the fifth predictive effect display, and the seventh predictive effect display), the acceptable reception sound corresponding to this is performed. When the reception is accepted while being output, the reception allowable sound is terminated halfway, but when the indication effect display is executed in a mode different from the specific mode (here, the first sign effect display), When the acceptance acceptable sound corresponding to is output while the acceptance acceptable sound is output (the third acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the sixth acceptance period) and the middle There is a case where it is not finished (first acceptance period). With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, there is a reception period in which two sounds (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the acceptance allowable sound, and a reception period in which only one sound is output as the acceptance allowable sound. .. During the reception period in which two sounds (the long-term allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound) are output as the acceptance-allowed sound, the acceptance-allowed sound is terminated midway when the acceptance-allowed sound is accepted while it is audible. As described above, during the reception period in which only one sound is output, there are a case where the reception acceptable sound is audible and a case where the reception is accepted and a case where it is not completed. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to provide interesting performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

  Regarding the reception period in which two sounds having different sound data (long-time allowable sound and short-time allowable sound) are output as the reception-permitted sound, if the reception-permitted sound is output and the reception is performed, two reception-permitted sounds are output. Only one of the acceptance acceptable sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) may be terminated halfway, and the other may be continued without being terminated halfway.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, the same mode is made to appear as the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" depending on whether the acceptance is made or not during the acceptance period. The acceptance period (the second acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the fifth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc.), and when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period and when the acceptance is not made Since there is a reception period (first reception period, third reception period, etc.) in which a different mode appears as a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to view (disappearance related display), It becomes possible to improve the performance when not done.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, when the acceptance is made in a specific acceptance period (the first acceptance period, the third acceptance period, etc.), the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" is displayed. , It is realized as an extinction related display different from the mood image display, but when the acceptance is not made, the "mode in which the mood image display becomes difficult to see" is changed to the mood image display itself. It is desirable to realize it by changing (rate). According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize whether the situation has been accepted or not when the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” appears. become able to.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1, as described above, it is possible to execute a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and a symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in both the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period occurs and the symbol variation (variation pattern) in which the acceptance period does not occur, the display screen (production display device 1600) ), The first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") and the second effect display FE which are not related to the reception period in terms of effect can be displayed. Is becoming Then, as shown in FIG. 263, when the operation by the player is accepted within the first acceptance period or the third acceptance period, the “middle image display A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance related display SK1) "appears, but the" mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the red image display (first disappearance related display SK1) "also in a symbol variation in which a reception period does not occur. It does not affect the visibility of the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE that can be displayed (either the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE is prioritized display, or the first effect display TE). And the disappearance related display is not displayed at the position where the second effect display FE is displayed).

  That is, in this case, the disappearance effect display is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of the predetermined image display (the first effect display TE or the second effect display FE) that has nothing to do with the acceptance period. Therefore, it becomes possible to proceed with the game without adversely affecting the performance that is not directly related to the reception period.

  However, in the case where the player's operation is accepted within the fourth acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 267, “the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize while the image display is being displayed ( 4th disappearance related display SK4) "appears, but in regard to the" mode (4th disappearance related display SK4) "in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display, the visibility of the first effect display TE is not affected. It is assumed that (it is not difficult to see), but it is displayed so as to affect (make it difficult to see) the visibility of the second effect display FE.

  According to such a configuration, although the image display is not directly related to the reception period, depending on its type, when the "mode in which the image display becomes difficult to see" appears, the visibility is affected. Therefore, when the player performs an action, whether or not the image display that is not directly related to the reception period should be confirmed. It will be possible to provide the directivity about.

  However, in this case, regarding the first effect display TE, it is assumed that it is displayed as (indicative) images (a plurality of modes) related to the winning or failure of the symbol variation (degree of expectation), and regarding the second effect display FE, the symbol concerned. Displaying as a display (not suggesting) irrespective of whether or not the fluctuations occur (expectation level) reduces the enjoyment of the game when the visibility of the second effect display FE is affected. Can be said to be desirable in avoiding.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the second reception period can be generated while the first effect display TE is being displayed, but it is not possible while the second effect display FE is being displayed. It does not occur, and only occurs when the second effect display FE is not displayed. That is, the second effect display FE is enabled to be displayed and hidden thereafter only at a relatively early stage after the symbol variation is started, and the effect or decoration in the early stage of the variation is displayed. It is used to increase. In this respect, by making the second acceptance period possible only when it is in a relatively late stage from the start of the symbol fluctuation, this has no directing relation to each other, but this It becomes possible to create such relationships.

  As shown in FIG. 267, even if the second effect display FE is made difficult to be visually recognized by the fourth disappearance related display SK4, it is then displayed again in an easily visible state. .. That is, in this case, it is hidden when a predetermined timing comes thereafter. When the second effect display FE is hidden, unlike the case of displaying a mock-up image, a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize does not appear.

  The first effect display TE is for displaying a predetermined effect result (expectation level) at a predetermined timing within the symbol variation, but when the disappearance related display is displayed during the execution period of the first effect display TE, The disappearance-related display is hidden before the predetermined timing arrives.

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area in which the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area in which the second effect display FE is displayed, and in the area, the second effect display FE is displayed. The display priority is higher than that of the display. However, at this time, a predetermined transmittance is set in the fourth disappearance-related display SK4, and the second effect display FE is visible through the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 although it is difficult to see. You can

  As shown in FIG. 267, the area in which the fourth disappearance related display SK4 is displayed includes at least a part of the area in which the first effect display TE is displayed, and in the area, the first effect display TE is displayed. The display priority is lower than that of the display. At this time, it is desirable that the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 on the back side is not visible through the first effect display TE.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 263, the first disappearance related display SK1 is displayed so as not to affect the visibility of both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE. It has become one.

  In the case of the first extinguishing effect display SK1 that does not affect the visibility of the second effect display FE, the acceptance allowable sound continues without being interrupted, and the fourth extinguishing effect display that affects the visibility of the second effect display FE. In the case of SK4, the acceptance permission sound can be terminated halfway. As a result, it becomes possible to enhance the performance using the acceptance-permitted sound.

  Both the first effect display TE and the second effect display FE are dynamically displayed, and even if any disappearing effect display is displayed, both of these dynamic display are continued. It is desirable to do.

  In addition, in each of the above-described effect examples, it is possible to appear “a manner in which the image of the image is difficult to see (display related to disappearance)” while the image of the image is being displayed, and the image of the image is difficult to see. A plurality of modes are to be prepared as "modes (display related to disappearance)".

  That is, in this case, any one of a plurality of modes will appear as the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)”. Therefore, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize. Will be expected.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, in the case where a “mode (4th disappearance related display SK4) in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” corresponding to the fourth reception period appears (FIG. 267), the fourth The disappearance-related display SK4 makes it difficult to visually recognize both the mock image display and the second effect display FE, but a mode in which the "mout image display becomes difficult to visually recognize" corresponding to the first reception period (first disappearance-related display SK1. ) ”Appears (FIG. 263), the first disappearance-related display SK1 is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize only the mock image display of the mock image display and the second effect display FE. There is.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to produce a drama about which of the “first disappearance related display SK1” and the “fourth disappearance related display SK4” appears as the “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize”. Therefore, it is expected that the interest in playing games will be improved.

  In this case, the "red image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the first reception period and the "red image display" and "predetermined image display" displayed in the fourth reception period , It is desirable that they are displayed in the same manner.

  The image display is hidden while the disappearance related display appears, but the second effect display FE is not hidden while the disappearance related display appears, and the disappearance related display ends. After that, it is desirable to hide the display at a predetermined timing (before the symbol variation stops).

  The fourth disappearance related display SK4 may not be an image, but may be an effect by the effect body performed in front of the mock image display and the second effect display FE. However, it is desirable that the first disappearance related display SK1 be realized as an image display.

  In each of the above-described production examples, the second reception period can be generated even when the second production display FE is in the non-display state, and the second image is displayed as a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second production display FE. A special mode (second disappearance related display SK2) that appears only during the reception period is prepared. In such a second reception period, as shown in FIG. 265, when a special mode appears (the second disappearance related display SK2) as the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2)”. SK2-2) and when it does not appear (second extinction related display SK2-1), when the special mode appears, the degree of expectation (big hit) is higher than when the fourth extinction related display SK4 is displayed. It is desirable to increase the ratio of being stopped by the pattern). The percentage may be 100%. Further, in this case, in the second reception period, it is desirable to be able to execute the special form of the indication effect (the second indication effect display ZEH2) that cannot be executed when the second effect display FE is in the display state.

  In each of the above-described production examples, in the first reception period, the first mode (first post-reception production display UG1-1) is executed as the first post-reception production display UG1 (FIG. 263 (e1)). ~ (I1)) and a second mode (first post-reception effect display UG1-2) having a higher degree of expectation than the first mode as the first post-reception effect display UG1 (Fig. 263 (e2)-). In either case of (i2)), the same mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1) appears as the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”.

  On the other hand, in the second reception period, the second mode (second post-reception effect display) having a higher expectation than the first mode (second post-reception effect display UG2-1) as the second post-reception effect display UG2. When UG2-2) is executed, a specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2) appears as "a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize", but the first mode is the second post-reception effect display UG. When the (post-second reception effect display UG2-1) is executed, a specific mode does not appear as "a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize", and a mode different from the specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-). 2) is made to appear.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of the reception period, it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation as the post-reception effect display only by confirming “a manner in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the expectation. In some cases, the degree cannot be guessed, and it is expected that the enjoyment of the game will be improved by the directivity related to the "mode in which the visual image display is difficult to see". ..

  It should be noted that, as a "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display", a "specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or second disappearance related display SK2-2)" that may occur in correspondence with the second reception period. No. can not appear as a “mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize a mock image display” corresponding to the first reception period. According to such a configuration, the type of the reception period can be estimated based on the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  However, as the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display”, the same mode may appear in the first reception period and the second reception period.

  As shown in FIG. 263, in the first reception period, when the acceptance is not made, as a “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize”, a mode that cannot appear when the acceptance is made (first disappearance related display) SK-2) was made to appear. However, if the acceptance is not made in the first acceptance period, the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize” itself may not be allowed to appear.

  In the second reception period, any one of a plurality of modes having different expectation levels (the proportion at which the big hit symbols are stopped) is selectively audibly output as the reception acceptable sound, and in the first reception period, As the acceptance-permitted sound, it is desirable that only one mode is audibly output. Further, in this case, all of the acceptance permission sounds (plural aspects) that can be audibly output corresponding to the second acceptance period are different from the acceptance permission sound that is audibly output corresponding to the first acceptance period. It is desirable to prepare.

  In each of the above-described production examples, it is assumed that the first reception period to the seventh reception period are generated in different variation patterns, but the same variation is generated in the first reception period to the seventh reception period. It is also possible to include reception periods that have a relationship that can occur sequentially within the pattern. That is, in this case, at least some of the reception periods from the first reception period to the seventh reception period can be generated with a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

  For example, regarding the reception period (the second reception period, the fourth reception period, etc.) in which the “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, Occurs in the same symbol fluctuation after a reception period (1st reception period, 3rd reception period, etc.) in which "the mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" does not change according to the degree of expectation occurs It is desirable to make it possible.

  In addition, regarding the reception period (the second reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) that may be accepted while the precursor effect display is being displayed, the acceptance may be made while the precursor effect display is being displayed. After a non-reception period (a first reception period, a third reception period, a fourth reception period, etc.) occurs, it is desirable to be able to occur within the same symbol fluctuation.

  During the reception period, when the “mode of making the image of the image difficult to see (disappearance related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, the mode of making the mode of the image of the image difficult to view (disappearance related display) depends on the degree of expectation. It is possible to selectively output a plurality of acceptable reception sounds including a specific acceptable reception sound that cannot be audibly output during a reception period that does not change. When a specific acceptable reception sound is output audibly, "the image display is difficult to visually recognize. It is desirable that a mode with a high degree of expectation appears as "a mode (display related to disappearance)".

  Further, in the reception period (the second reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) in which the “mode in which the image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” changes according to the degree of expectation, Although the indication effect display can be executed, the special notice effect can be executed at a stage before the indication effect display is executed. When the special notice effect is executed, It is desirable that the “mode in which the image display becomes difficult to be visually recognized (disappearance related display)” is always executed in a mode with high expectations when the order is received during the reception period.

  During the reception period, when the "mode of making the image of the image difficult to see (disappearance related display)" changes depending on the degree of expectation, a big hit is obtained as the "mode of making the image of the image difficult to view (disappearance related display)". A mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 or the like) that can appear only when the user is present may be prepared. Moreover, you may make it prepare the aspect (for example, 2nd extinction related display SK2-1 etc.) which cannot appear when the big hit is obtained.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples, it is possible to display a reception-related production display (such as a scale image display or a gauge image) at least during the reception period in association with the generation of the reception period, and Therefore, at least during the reception period, reception-related effect sounds (acceptance acceptance sound, etc.) can be output. Further, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, it is possible to output the after-acceptance output sound related to the after-acceptance effect based on the acceptance, and during the acceptance period, the above-mentioned acceptance-related effect display. When an operation by the player is accepted while the (image image display, gauge image, etc.) is displayed, the reception-related effect display (image image display, gauge image, etc.) based on the acceptance being made. ) Is hidden. Similarly, when the operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (acceptable reception sound, etc.) is in the audible state during the reception period, the reception-related effect is based on the fact that the operation is accepted. Sounds (acceptable sounds, etc.) are sometimes made inaudible.

  In such a configuration, the post-reception output sound related to the post-reception production is audibly output based on the fact that the operation by the player has been received within the reception period, and the reception-related production display (scale image display or gauge image). , Etc. are hidden and the reception-related effect sound is made inaudible (acceptable sound, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the reception state is accepted.

  In this respect, in each of the above-described production examples, the reception-related production display (such as a scale image display and a gauge image) is finished at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the acceptance is started. However, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance acceptance sound, etc.) may be inaudible because it is finished when the acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started. I try to be there.

  According to such a configuration, the reception-related effect display (the scale image display, the gauge image, etc.) displayed during the reception period can be displayed even after the execution of the post-reception production. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable sound, etc.) that is audible (output) during the reception period should not be in an audible state when the output sound after reception starts to be executed. Becomes As a result, even after the post-reception production is started to be executed, it is possible to confirm the form of the reception-related production display (such as a scale image display or a gauge image) that has been displayed within the reception period, but also the reception-related production sound. It becomes possible to suitably suggest that the reception period has already ended by making the (acceptable reception sound, etc.) inaudible.

  As described above, the reception-related effect display (the scale image display, the gauge image, etc.) is executed as an effect display that suggests the proportion (expectation level) that the big hit is obtained. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-allowed sound) also has a different sound according to the degree of expectation (a mode as the reception-related effect display) suggested by the reception-related effect display (such as a scale image display or a gauge image). It is desirable to output.

  However, in each of the above-described effect examples, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-acceptable sound) in the first acceptance period is not ended even at the time when the output sound after acceptance is started. As a result, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and it is possible to maintain a suitable sense of tension.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, in the first reception period, only one aspect can be displayed as the reception-related production display (such as a scale image display and a gauge image), and a big hit is obtained. It is not executed as an effect display that indicates the proportion (expectation level) of being present. Further, in the first reception period, only one aspect of the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-acceptable sound) appears, so that when an aspect different from the aspect appears in another acceptance period. It becomes possible to appropriately improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples, a plurality of modes including the specific mode are prepared as the precursor effect display, and the precursor of the specific mode is generated before the specific reception period (for example, the second reception period) occurs. An effect display (for example, a second precursor effect display: FIG. 256) can be displayed, and the audible output of the reception-related effect sound (acceptable acceptance sound or the like) can be started. Then, the predictive effect display (for example, the second predictive effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound (acceptable acceptance sound) of the specific mode are made executable in a manner that spans the timing when the reception period occurs. The indication effect display (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed, and the operation by the player can be accepted while the reception related effect sound (acceptable acceptance sound) is in the audible state (output). ing. In this respect, if the player's operation is accepted while the specific form of the indication effect display (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is displayed within the acceptance period, it is based on the fact that the acceptance is made. Then, the indication effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. Further, when the operation by the player is accepted while the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-acceptable sound) is in an audible state within the acceptance period, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-acceptable) is received based on the acceptance. Sound) is made inaudible.

  In the above configuration, based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted within the acceptance period, the indication effect display of the specific mode (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is hidden. Since the reception related effect sound (acceptable reception sound) is set to the inaudible state, the precursor effect display in a specific mode that is in the execution state before the reception period occurs (for example, the second predictive effect display: FIG. 256) and the reception-related effect sound, respectively, are executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the operation is accepted even when the operation by the player is accepted.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 256 and the like, the indication effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) is a post-reception effect corresponding to the fact that the indication is received within the corresponding acceptance period. Is not finished when the execution is started and is displayed. On the other hand, the reception-related effect sound (acceptance-acceptable sound) is finished at the time when the post-acceptance output sound corresponding to the acceptance is started and is made inaudible.

  According to such a configuration, regarding the indication effect display of the specific aspect (for example, the second indication effect display: FIG. 256) that is displayed before the reception period is generated, this is performed after the execution of the after-acceptance effect is started. While the above-mentioned reception related effect sound (acceptable sound) that is audible (output) before the reception period occurs, it is audible at the time when the output sound after reception starts to be executed. Will be eliminated. Thereby, even after the execution of the specific post-reception production is started, the reception-related production output before the occurrence of the reception period can be confirmed while confirming the mode as the indication production display that is displayed before the generation of the reception period. By making the sound (acceptable sound) inaudible, it is possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance period has already ended.

  Regarding the omen effect display (second omen effect display ZEH2) of the specific mode, it is displayed as a different display image according to the degree of expectation, and is executed as an effect display that suggests the proportion (anticipation degree) that the big hit is obtained. It is desirable to be done. In this case, the reception-related effect sound (acceptable acceptance sound) should also be output as a different sound according to the degree of expectation (the aspect as the indication effect display of the particular aspect) suggested by the indication effect display of the particular aspect. Is desirable.

  However, in each effect example described above, during the reception period in which the first aura effect display is executed, the first aura effect display can be executed in only one mode, and a jackpot is obtained. It is designed so that it is not executed as an effect display that suggests "degree".

  During the reception period (the second reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) in which a plurality of acceptable reception sounds (long-term acceptable sound, short-term acceptable sound) are output at the same time, the acceptance acceptable sound is output and after reception. Although the output sounds do not overlap, in the reception period in which only one acceptance sound is output, when the reception acceptance sound and the post-reception effect sound overlap (first acceptance period), the reception acceptance sound is output. And the output sounds after reception do not overlap (third reception period, fourth reception period, etc.).

  The long-term allowable sound is, for example, a sound output as a sound effect (corresponding to the second allowable sound shown in FIG. 213 and the like), and the short-term allowable sound is output as a message sound, for example. It is a sound (corresponding to the first allowable sound shown in FIG. 213 and the like). A case where only one acceptance sound is output means, for example, a case where a message sound is not output but only a sound effect is output (corresponding to a case where only the first permission sound is output in FIG. 212 and the like). That is. Note that the short-term allowable sound may be the “sound output as the sound effect”, and the long-term allowable sound may be the “sound output as the message sound”.

  When one of the two acceptable sounds is output as a "message sound", the message image corresponding to the message sound ("Press") is output while the message sound (for example, "Press" sound) is audibly output. It is desirable to display a reception-related effect display such as "." In this case, the output period of the message sound does not overlap with the period during which the post-reception effect (such as the post-reception output sound) is executed, but the message image (reception-related effect display) corresponding to the message sound is displayed. The period will overlap with the period in which the post-reception production is executed.

  In each of the above-described effect examples, the mage image display is displayed as an integrated mage image display including the gauge image in the peripheral decoration image. The integrated virtual image display is as described above with reference to FIG. 232 and the like, and another configuration thereof can be appropriately adopted. That is, in the past, since the black image display was displayed separately from the gauge image, it was difficult to make both of them difficult to visually recognize by the indication effect display or the disappearance related display. The gauge image may change in accordance with the mode of displaying the mock image that indicates the degree of expectation, and if it can be visually recognized, the meaning of making it difficult to visually recognize the mood image display is lost. In this respect, since it is displayed as an integrated image display, it becomes easy to make it difficult to visually recognize both the image display and the gauge image.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples, regarding the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)”, it is assumed that the post-reception production display appears to be difficult to visually recognize. The display may be made so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize (for example, the post-reception effect display is preferentially displayed). In addition, in the plurality of reception periods, the reception period in which the post-reception effect display is difficult to visually recognize due to "a mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)", and "the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize It is also possible to include a reception period in which the post-reception effect display is not made difficult to be visually recognized by the "mode (disappearance related display)".

  Further, it is not always necessary to prepare all of the first to seventh reception periods, and only a part of the reception periods may be prepared in an appropriate combination.

  Even in the first acceptance period, when the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output and is accepted, it may be terminated midway.

  The "first aura effect display" and the "seventh aura effect display" do not necessarily have to be "types that are not displayed at the time when the reception period occurs and are hidden before this". For example, it may be displayed as “a type that is displayed in such a manner that it extends over the timing when the reception period occurs”. That is, in this case, the “first amenity effect display” and the “seventh amenity effect display” are the above-mentioned “second amenity effect display ZEH2” displayed corresponding to the second reception period and the effect content (display image). Although it is different, refer to FIG. 256, FIG. 264, and FIG. 265 for “Display start time and display end time, how it relates to other image display before being hidden”, and the like. The display is performed by the method as described for the “second amenity effect display ZEH2”. The same can be applied to other examples and modified examples.

  It is needless to say that the term “at least a part” is intended to include “all” in the description above and in the later description.

  Next, modified examples of the above-described effect examples will be described. That is, FIG. 268 is a modification example relating to “the effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 264, and FIG. 269 shows the “when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. Is a modified example of "production". In addition, in this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in “Example of performance regarding second reception period (FIG. 256, FIG. 264, FIG. 265)”, and regarding “second reception period” The same can be applied to another example applicable to the "effect example".

  As shown in FIG. 268, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a specific decorative member SDY (blend product) as a fourth effect device. For the sake of convenience of explanation, in each of the above-described effect examples, the specific decorative member SDY (shadow-effect object) has been omitted, but in each of the above-described effect examples, the pachinko machine 1 also includes the specific decorative member SDY (shadow effect). Thing). That is, in each of the above-described effect examples, the specific decorative member SDY (slave accessory) does not operate in association with the occurrence of the reception period.

  Now, assuming that the "second variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the modification to the second acceptance period, first, the effect determination (preliminary determination corresponding to the second variation pattern is performed. Etc.). Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 268 (a)). )).

  The subsequent steps are the same as in the case of FIGS. 264 (b) to 264 (d) described above. That is, first, as shown in FIG. 268 (b), the "second predictive effect display ZEH2" is executed (timing tG1). Then, as shown in FIG. 268 (c), the "integrated image display IG" is displayed (timing tG2). Then, while the "second predictive effect display ZEH2" and the "integrated image display IG" are displayed in this way, as shown in FIG. 268 (d), the second reception period occurs. (Timing tG3).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted, but in this modified example as well, the "second reception device" using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is used. The "rear specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Further, the production using the third rendering device (speaker) (acceptable acceptance sound, output sound after the second acceptance, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIG. 264, FIG. 265). ing.

  Further, in this modification, even when the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), based on the acceptance, When the second reception period ends, the post-reception production (second post-reception production) corresponding to the second reception period starts to be executed.

  Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))” is a relative post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period according to the modification. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))” corresponds to the modified example. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect corresponding to the second reception period. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  Then, also in the example shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, similarly to the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the second post-reception effect is started depending on the acceptance). At the timing tG3a, which is the time point (at which the integrated image is displayed), the "integrated image display IG" is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized. Not only the integrated image display IG but also the second aura effect display ZEH2 is hidden at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the second acceptance is started). It is the same as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265) in that it is not difficult to visually recognize.

  Further, when the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)), thereafter Also, it is similar to the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). That is, first, at the timing tG3b, the display related to the "second disappearance related display SK2-1" is started as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". Next, when timing tG3c arrives, "second post-reception effect display" as post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation by the player being accepted within the second acceptance period. "UG2-1" is started to be executed.

  Then, after this, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), as shown in FIG. 269 (h1), while the “second post-reception effect display UG2-1” is displayed, First, of the “integrated image display IG”, the “second indication effect display ZEH2”, and the “second disappearance related display SK2-1”, the “integrated image display IG” and the “second indication effect display ZEH2”. Are hidden. After the “integrated image display IG” and the “second predictive effect display ZEH2” are hidden, as shown in FIG. 269 (i1), the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is not displayed. This means that the display is performed, so that the display related to the “post-second reception effect display UG2-1” is performed under the condition that the visibility is good.

  However, when the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2)), the timing tG3b. In "as a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized", the specific decoration member SDY (braid accessory) is started to operate instead of displaying the disappearance related display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600). Let That is, as shown in FIG. 269 (f2), by locating (moving) the specific decoration member SDY (shadow product) so as to overlap with at least a part of the integrated acupuncture image display IG in a front view, The integrated image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, and this functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized".

  With such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the situation shown in FIG. 269 (f2) has a higher expectation than the situation shown in FIG. 269 (f1). , It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. In addition, since the operation itself by the specific decorative member SDY (shadow curtain) indicates the degree of expectation, it becomes possible to serve as post-reception performance as well. The chemical image display IG can be made difficult to visually recognize. In this sense, the fourth rendering device (specific decoration member SDY) is used as a rendering element that suggests the degree of expectation even in a rendering different from the post-reception rendering (such as a notice rendering that suggests the degree of expectation). Is desirable.

  Then, in this way, "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is viewed as a front view from at least a part of the integrated image display IG as "a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". When the timing tG3c arrives in the overlapping execution, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation by the player being accepted within the second acceptance period. The “post-second reception effect display UG2-2” is started to be executed.

  In other words, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "second indication effect display ZEH2" are displayed, and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is "integrated effect." While being executed at a position overlapping at least a part of the "image display IG" in a front view, the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is started to be executed. According to such a configuration, it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated visual image display IG and the second predictive effect display ZEH2 by the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)". Since the post-reception effect display UG2-2 is started, it is suggested that the player's gazing point is the “integrated image display IG” or the “second sign” while suggesting that the second reception period has already ended. It is expected that the production display ZEH2 "will be automatically shifted to the" post-second reception production display UG2-2) "(after the timing tG3c).

  Then, also in the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception performance corresponding to the second reception period according to this modification (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)), “ When the display related to the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is started, as shown in FIG. 269 (h2), while the "second post-reception effect display UG2-2" is being displayed, First, it is difficult to visually recognize the "integrated image display IG", the "second indication effect display ZEH2", and the "integrated image display IG" (here, the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY) is used. Among the “used effects)”, the “integrated image display IG” and the “second predictive effect display ZEH2” are hidden and the process ends. After the “integrated image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (i2), the “integrated image display IG is visually recognized. The "fourth effect device (effect using the specific decorative member SDY)" as the "difficult mode" is ended. That is, the specific decoration member SDY is moved to the original position so that the “production using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)” does not overlap the integrated image display IG in front view. As a result, the display related to the “second post-reception effect display UG2-2)” is displayed under the condition that the visibility is good.

  In addition, as a "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG", a case where "an effect using a fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)" is performed (a mode with a relatively high degree of expectation (Fig. 269 ( In e2) to (i2), the case of performing "effect using the first effect device (disappearance related display)" as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" (with a relatively high degree of expectation) It is desirable to extend the time from the appearance of the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" to the end thereof rather than the low mode (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)). In this case, when the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)" is executed as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the "fourth effect device (specified Performance using decorative member SDY)) ” With this, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game, and even after that, "the production using the fourth rendering device (the specific decorative member SDY)" was completed, it was difficult to visually recognize until then. By revealing the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 ”, it is expected to further improve the entertainment appeal. On the other hand, in the first reception period and the third reception period, there are a case where a mode with low expectation is executed as the post-reception effect and a case where a mode with high expectation is executed as the post-reception effect. The "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (first disappearance related display SK-1 or the like)" is executed for the same time.

  On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D3 (FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3))”, the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to the modification. This is based on the assumption that there was not.

  As shown in FIG. 269 (e3) to (h3), in this modification, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the case of the above-described example (FIG. 265 ( e3) to (h3)). For example, when the operation by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 269 (f3), as a “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”, the player within the second acceptance period. If the operation by is accepted, the mode that has appeared appears.

  Therefore, as shown in (e3) to (h3) of FIG. 269, the “second disappearance related display SK2-1” is displayed when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period. In the case, if the player's operation is accepted within the second acceptance period, the effect is progressing from FIG. 268 (d) to “D1 (FIG. 269 (e1) to (i1))”. (When the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, as a “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized” when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, the “fourth effect device (specific In the case where the "effect using the decoration member SDY)" is executed, if the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period, the operation from FIG. 268 (d) to "D2 (FIG. 269 (e2)" is performed. To (i2)) ”(when the post-reception production with a relatively high degree of expectation is being performed).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 269 (g3), after that, a mode in which the “integrated image display IG” and the “integrated image display IG are difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2-1 or fourth) First, the "integrated image display IG" is made non-display of the "production device (production using the specific decoration member SDY)." Then, after the "integrated muffled image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 269 (h3), a mode in which the "integrated mutilated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2 -1 or the fourth effect device (effect using the specific decoration member SDY) ".

  As described above, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize” is performed as “display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)”. There are cases (FIGS. 269 (e1) to (i1)) and cases where the “drafting using the fourth rendering device (specific decoration member SDY)” is performed (FIGS. 269 (e2) to (i2)). In this regard, in the example described above, the timing at which the "display in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is started and the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" are executed. Although it is decided that the start timing is the same (timing tG3b), as for "the effect using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)", "the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" The display may be started at a timing (for example, timing tG3a) before the timing tG3b at which the "display in" is started.

  According to such a configuration, depending on the type of “a manner in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized” and the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) suggested as a post-reception effect, “integrated” is displayed. Since the time until the appearance of the "hardened image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" becomes different, it becomes possible to add interest and improve the enjoyment of the game. In particular, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)" also functions as an effect after effect, similar to the "specific effect after accepting effect using the second effect device". Therefore, by executing this at an early timing, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  However, even in the case where the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" is being executed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", As shown in (f2), it is desirable that at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display) is visible.

  Further, in the example productions shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, when the production progresses from FIG. 268 (d) to “D2 (FIG. 269 (e2) to (i2))” (relatively with the expected degree When the high post-reception effect is being executed), "display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" is not performed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize", It is decided to perform the "production using the fourth production device (specific decoration member SDY)". However, in this case, as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific Both of "and the effect using the decorative member SDY)" may be performed.

  According to such a configuration, after the operation is accepted, the “display on the first effect device (effect display device 1600) (display related to disappearance)” and the “fourth effect device (specific decoration member SDY)” are displayed. It becomes possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated mood image display IG by both "the effect used", and it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is in the accepted state.

  In this way, as the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decoration)" In the case of performing both "the effect using the member SDY)", the disappearance related display is displayed (priority display or the like) so that at least a part of the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized, and the "fourth display" is displayed. The "effect using the effect device (specific decoration member SDY)" is executed so as to make it difficult to visually recognize at least part of the integrated image display IG and at least part of the disappearance related display.

  In this case as well, the "effect using the fourth effect device (specific decorative member SDY)" that functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" is started to be executed at timing tG3a, The "display (disappearance related display) on the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" that functions as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize" may be started to be executed at timing tG3b. ..

  In addition, "display (disappearance related display) in the first effect device (effect display device 1600)" and "fourth effect device (specific decorative member)" are "modes in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize". In the case of performing both of the "effect using SDY)" and the disappearance related display, the effect progresses from Fig. 268 (d) to "D1 (Fig. 269 (e1) to (i1))" (relative It is displayed as an image display different from the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized (disappearance related display SK2-1)" that appears in the case where the post-reception production with low expectation is executed). It is desirable to do.

  Further, the fourth effect device is not necessarily provided as an operable movable body (specific decorative member SDY), and the point is that at least a part of the integrated image display IG (image display). That can execute a predetermined effect at a position overlapping with the front view (for example, a flying object capable of executing an effect by flying on the front side in front of the effect display device 1600 or a front side of the effect display device 1600 in front view). (Provided as a light guide plate). Further, for the effect using the fourth effect device, in addition to the case of being executed based on the acceptance in the acceptance period, when different effect conditions are satisfied (such as a predetermined timing coming in the specific symbol variation). It is also desirable to be executed.

  The effect example regarding the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the production progress as shown in FIGS. 268 and 269 is performed.

  In addition, the production example regarding the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized” described with reference to FIGS. 268 and 269 is applied to any one of the first reception period to the seventh reception period. Instead of this, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of the reception periods.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects examples, after the reception effect display while the integrated quality image display IG (both the integrated quality image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the acceptance period) is displayed. However, the post-reception effect display is displayed in a form that is difficult to be visually recognized by the integrated image display IG (both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the acceptance period). It was made to start (FIG. 263, FIG. 265, FIG. 267).

  However, instead of this, while the integrated image display IG (depending on the type of reception period, both the integrated image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH) are displayed, the post-reception effect display is started to be executed. However, a mode (priority display, etc.) in which the post-reception effect display is not easily visually recognized by the integrated mood image display IG (both the integrated mood image display IG and the precursor effect display ZEH depending on the type of the acceptance period) ), The display may be started.

  Hereinafter, a case where such a configuration is applied to the example of the effect regarding the second reception period will be described. The configuration not particularly mentioned is the same as the case of the above-described examples (FIG. 256, FIG. 264, FIG. 265), and can be appropriately applied to other examples.

  Regarding the contents of the effect until the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period according to this modification, the above-mentioned effect contents (FIG. 264 (a) to (d), FIG. 265 (e)). ) Is the same. For example, in this example as well, as shown in FIG. 270 (e2), at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted, the “integrated mood image display IG” and the “second precursor effect display ZEH2” are displayed. Is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are not easily visually recognized.

  Also in this modified example, there are cases where the post-reception effects with relatively low expectations are executed and cases where the post-reception effects with relatively high expectations are executed. When the post-reception effect is low, the effect is the same as the effect content (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1)) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, in the case where the “post-reception production with a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period, the above-described production contents (FIG. 265 ( Instead of (f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in (f2) to (i2) of FIG. 270 appear.

  First, at timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 270 (f2), in the situation where the "second post-reception effect display" using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. In addition, the second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). Next, when the timing tG3c arrives within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance-related display SK2 (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to see) appears, the operation by the player within the second reception period is performed. The “second post-reception effect display UG2” as the post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) corresponding to the acceptance is started in the second mode (second post-reception effect effect display UG2-2). To be done. It goes without saying that the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which a privilege is given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

  However, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example is, as shown in FIG. 270 (g2), an integrated image display IG, a second precursor effect display ZEH2, a second disappearance related display SK2, and the like. Is not difficult to see. More specifically, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example overlaps with the regions in which the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance related display SK2 are displayed. It is displayed in a form and is displayed (priority display) in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize these integrated image display IG, second predictive effect display ZEH2, and second disappearance related display SK2.

  According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to cause the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 itself to function as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized", thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to plan. Even in the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this example, the first effect display TE (corresponding to the above-mentioned "timer effect") is not prioritized and the first effect is displayed. The portion overlapping the display TE is made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Then, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 270 (h2), first, the integrated image display IG and the second indication effect display ZEH2 are hidden. Then, as shown in FIG. 270 (i2), the second disappearance related display SK2 is hidden.

  Also in the modification shown in FIG. 270, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the second acceptance period, it is the same as the case of the above-described example (FIG. 265 (e3) to (h3)). .. That is, if the operation by the player is not accepted, it is revealed that the operation by the player is accepted within the second acceptance period as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". The aspect that appears will appear.

  In the example shown in FIG. 270, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 and the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 are displayed as the “mode in which the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized”. However, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 may not be displayed, and only the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 may be displayed.

  The effect example regarding the “post-acceptance effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 can be applied to an acceptance period different from the second acceptance period. For example, even when applied to the fifth reception period, the production progress as shown in FIG. 270 is performed.

  Further, the effect example regarding the “post-reception effect display” described with reference to FIG. 270 does not apply to any of the first to seventh acceptance periods, but is different from any of the acceptance periods. It may be prepared as the eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect).

  In the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period (specific acceptance period), a mock image display (here, an integrated mood image display) is displayed. IG) is displayed, by using a specific area including at least a part of the display target area of the general image display, as a mode of making it difficult to visually recognize the general image display, “specific extinction effect display (for example, The second disappearance related display SK2-2) "can be displayed, and after the display of the specific disappearance effect display (the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is started, the specific disappearance effect display is displayed. (For example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2) is hidden while being displayed.

  In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the simulated image display even after the acceptance. Also, the visibility of the mock image display is reduced by the specific disappearance effect display until the mock image display is hidden, and the mull image display is hidden while the visibility is reduced. As a result, it becomes possible to suggest that the remaining time until the mock image display is hidden is short, and a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the mock image display is hidden is suppressed. I will get it.

  In addition, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the “specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2)” is a simulated image display (here, integrated. It can be displayed even in the period after the black image display IG) is hidden, and at least the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is displayed, The post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decoration member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) is started to be executed. Then, the post-reception effect is displayed using at least a part of the specific area which is the display target area of the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) ( 270) or a production body (such as the example shown in FIG. 269 or another example thereof) at a position overlapping with (at least a part of) the specific disappearance production display in front view. It is realized as a thing.

  According to such a configuration, of the post-reception effects, the specific post-reception effects executed at the position overlapping the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) in front view are specified. The disappearance effect display can be recognized without shifting the gaze destination. That is, in this case, at the time when the specific disappearance effect display is displayed, it becomes possible to recognize that it is not necessary to change the gaze point in order to grasp the mode of the specific post-reception effect, It becomes possible to maintain the amusement interest of the game appropriately.

  When a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decoration member SDY, a second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above modification appears, the rate at which the privilege is awarded to the player is increased. It may be 100%.

  The specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above modification is executed before the mood image display is hidden. Since it is started and makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the mood image display is in a state of being accepted. .. However, regarding the specific post-reception effect (for example, the effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above-described modification, after the mood image display is hidden. The execution may be started.

  Apart from the reception period during which a specific post-reception effect (for example, an effect using the specific decorative member SDY, the second post-reception effect display UG2-2, etc.) according to the above modification can be generated, the specific post-reception effect After preparing a reception period in which a post-reception effect different from that can be generated, a specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) is a case where the different post-reception effect is executed. May also be displayed. The reception period in which different post-reception productions can be generated may be any of the first reception period and the third reception period to the seventh reception period. However, it is desirable not to display the specific disappearance effect display (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2) during the acceptance period (first acceptance period) in which the acceptance acceptable sound is not ended midway. Disappearance effect display may be displayed)

  Note that, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 268 to 270) or other examples thereof, when the reception period occurs, the reception of the post-reception performance corresponding to the reception period is permitted, or A process for making the acceptance-permitted sound audible, which indicates that the acceptance is in an acceptable state (soon), is executed, whereby the player forgets to perform the operation for acceptance. Is trying to suppress.

  Further, as described above, in this pachinko machine 1, a plurality of types of aura effect display are prepared, but in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, a specific aura effect display (second When the player's operation is accepted while the aura effect display ZEH2) is being displayed, a specific aura effect display (second aura effect display ZEH2) is displayed even after the acceptance is made. A mode in which the specific precursor effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is difficult to visually recognize while the predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is being displayed. Then, after the appearance of the aspect, the specific precursor effect display is hidden while the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is difficult to be visually recognized.

  That is, in this case, even after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the precursor effect display, and to reduce the visibility until the precursor effect display is hidden. By doing so, it becomes possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance has already been made.

  In the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the aspect in which the specific precursor effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) becomes difficult to visually recognize is the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display). ZEH2) is a different image display (for example, the second disappearance-related display SK2-2 or post-reception effect display UG2-2), or is more forward than a specific amenity effect display (second amenity effect display ZEH2). It is supposed to be a production in the production body performed in.

  Further, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the specific predictive effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2)” is the specific predictive effect display (second Not only the indication effect display ZEH2), but also a specific indication effect display and a scale image display are executed so as to straddle them in a front view, and it is difficult to visually recognize both of them. The aspect may be performed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire effect display device 1600, but in that case, a specific predictive effect display or mock image display can be visually recognized through a predetermined transmittance. It is desirable to do so.

  Further, regarding the “mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the specific predictive effect display (the second predictive effect display ZEH2)”, it is realized by a change (such as a change in transmittance) related to the display characteristics of the specific predictive effect display itself. May be

  In the above-described modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, the specific precursor effect display (second predictive effect display ZEH2) is hidden during the reception period. Then, even when the acceptance is made in the non-displayed state, "a mode in which the specific precursor effect display is difficult to visually recognize (second disappearance related display SK2-2, post-acceptance effect display UG2-2, (Direction body, etc.) ”is to be executed.

  Further, in the above-described first reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, a plurality of effects (effects shown in (e1) to (i1) of FIG. 263, FIG. 263, based on the acceptance being made). Although any of the effects shown in (e2) to (i2) is made to appear, a specific mode (first disappearance related display SK1-1 (first reception period) is generated, regardless of which of these effects is made to appear. The first disappearance related display SK1 corresponding to 1)))) can be displayed. That is, in this case, no matter which of the multiple effects appears, the specific aspect will also appear accordingly. Therefore, they are “caused by the fact that the operation by the player is accepted within the specific acceptance period. You will be able to suggest that it is a common production.

  On the other hand, in the above-described second acceptance period, the second acceptance period according to the modified example (FIGS. 268 to 270) or another example thereof, when the operation by the player is accepted, the special condition (big hit winning) A special aspect (for example, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 or a specific state) in which the appearance ratio (may be 0% or 100%) differs depending on whether the condition or the probability variation rush condition is satisfied Any of a plurality of modes including the effect using the decorative member SDY and the post-reception effect display UG2-2) can appear, and when the special mode appears, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mock image display. .. According to such a configuration, a special aspect in which the degree of expectation is suggested appears before the mock image display is hidden, and the special image makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display. The player can enjoy the effect of proceeding from the mock image display to the post-reception effect (special mode) without changing the gazing point.

  In this regard, even when the above-described specific mode (the first disappearance-related display SK1-1 (the first mode of the first disappearance-related display SK1 corresponding to the first reception period)) appears, the scale image display displays the “specific It is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "mode". According to such a configuration, when the above-mentioned special mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is suggested makes it difficult to visually recognize the scale image display (special reception period), the above-mentioned specific mode in which the degree of expectation related to the privilege grant is not suggested There is a case where it is difficult to visually recognize the mock image display (specific acceptance period), so that the "mode (specific mode, special mode) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mural image display" is provided with the directivity. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, when the reception period illustrated in each of the above-described production examples and each modified example occurs, a scale image display that suggests an object (a type of operation means, etc.) of which reception is permitted within the reception period is displayed. You may make it display both within the period when the precursor effect display before the reception period occurs, and within the reception period. However, in this case, the mock image display displayed during the period in which the precursor effect display is executed is different from the mock image display displayed during the reception period, and is performed before the reception period occurs. It is desirable to be hidden.

  Hereinafter, a modified example will be described in which the technique of performing the simulated image display in such a mode is applied to the second reception period. That is, FIGS. 271 (a) to (f) and FIGS. 272 (g) and (h) are modified examples related to the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. (I) to (l) are modified examples of the “effect when the second reception period occurs” shown in FIG. 265. In addition, in this modified example, the configuration not particularly mentioned is as described above in “Example of performance regarding second reception period (FIG. 256, FIG. 264, FIG. 265)”, and regarding “second reception period” The same can be applied to another example applicable to the "effect example".

  Now, assuming that the “second variation pattern” is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, in the modified example for the second reception period, first, the effect determination (previous notice) corresponding to the second variation pattern is made. Judgment). Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the second variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 271 (a)). )).

  However, in this modified example, when the timing tG0 before the timing tG1 described above arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (b), the "preceding precursory indication effect display SZE" is executed. There is. In the example shown in FIG. 271 (b), as another "preceding-type aura effect display SZE", another effect example (a mood image display is executed within a period in which the aura effect display is executed, and then this is temporarily hidden. Although it is supposed to execute the image display which is also used in the normal effect example in which such a thing is not performed, as for the "preceding-type aura effect display SZE", another effect example (a precursor effect display is executed). It is desirable to perform the image display as an image that cannot appear in a normal effect example in which the mock image display is performed within the period and then is not temporarily hidden.

  Then, in this modified example, while the "preceding type indication effect display SZE" is being displayed in this manner, the mock image display TMH (here, integrated mood image display) appears. That is, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), at least a part of the simulated image display TMH (here, the integrated simulated image display) according to this example is made difficult to be visually recognized by the "preceding type indication effect display SZE". The display is being started. Further, although the scale image display TMH according to this example is displayed as an integrated scale image display, an image in which the gauge image GG, the partition image KG which is the display target area of the gauge image GG, and the like are not displayed ( It is displayed as a model image display that cannot be displayed during the reception period.

  When the predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 271 (d), the mock image display TMH (here, the integrated mood image display) is displayed in a manner that is not difficult to visually recognize by the "preceding type indication effect display SZE". Become so. In this example, the display related to the "preceding type indication effect display SZE" is finished, and is displayed in a form decorated with another effect display (flame effect in the figure).

  However, as shown in FIG. 271 (c), (d), etc., the relevant image display TMH (in this case, integrated image display) that appears in the display of the "preceding predictive effect display SZE". Is displayed in a mode different from any of the modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) as the image display that can be displayed during the reception period. As a result, it becomes possible to indicate that the reception period has not yet occurred, while displaying the mock image display TMH for a relatively long time.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the relevant image display TMH (here, integrated image display) appears, the above-described multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) within the corresponding acceptance period. Among them, the simulated image display is displayed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, FIG. 232 (d)). As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game when the "preceding precursory indication display SZE" is displayed. The modes that can be displayed as the virtual image display are not necessarily the above-described four modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)), and may be, for example, only two modes.

  Then, in this modified example, when the timing tG1 arrives, as shown in FIG. 271 (e), the execution of the “normal type indication effect display TZE” is started, and a simulated image display is performed by the “normal type indication effect display TZE”. Part of TMH becomes difficult to be visually recognized (for example, priority display). Then, as shown in FIG. 271 (f), the "normal type aura effect display TZE" is displayed in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire image display TMH. While "TZE" is displayed, the scale image display TMH is hidden.

  Then, after this, when the timing tG2 arrives, as shown in FIG. 272 (g), the general image display (here, the integrated general image display IG) has the above-described plural modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). The display is started in a mode with a high degree of expectation. In this way, at the time when the image display (here, integrated image display IG) that can be displayed during the reception period starts to be displayed, a part of it becomes difficult to be visually recognized by the “normal type indication effect display TZE”. ing.

  Then, while the "normal type indication effect display TZE" and the "normal image display (here, integrated image display IG)" are displayed in this manner, as shown in FIG. 272 (h), the second Will be generated (timing tG3).

  Here, for convenience of explanation, the illustration of the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is omitted, but in this modified example as well, the "second reception device" using the second effect device (sub liquid crystal 1610) is used. The "rear specific effect" and the "precursor effect" are executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265). Further, the production using the third rendering device (speaker) (acceptable acceptance sound, output sound after the second acceptance, etc.) is also executed in the same manner as in the case of the above-described example (FIG. 264, FIG. 265). ing.

  Further, in this modification, even when the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tG3a within the second acceptance period, as in the case of the above-described example (FIGS. 264 and 265), based on the acceptance, When the second reception period ends, the post-reception production (second post-reception production) corresponding to the second reception period starts to be executed.

  Also in this modified example, there are cases where the post-reception effects with relatively low expectations are executed and cases where the post-reception effects with relatively high expectations are executed. When the post-reception effect is low, the effect is the same as the effect content (FIG. 265 (e1) to (i1)) described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  On the other hand, in this modified example, in the case where the “post-reception production with a relatively high degree of expectation” is executed as the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period, the above-described production contents (FIG. 265 ( Instead of f2) to (i2)), the effect contents shown in FIGS. 272 (i) to (l) appear.

  First, also in this example, as shown in FIG. 272 (i), at the timing tG3a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted, the "normal type indication effect display TZE" and the "regular image display (here: , The integrated image display IG) "is not hidden, and the" normal type indication effect display TZE "and" image display (here integrated image display IG) "are not easily visible. Nor.

  However, in this example, the dynamic image display as the image display is displayed while the “image display (here, the integrated image display IG)” is displayed at the time of acceptance in this way and thereafter. To continue. Further, the display area of the gauge image GG is also reduced with the passage of time.

  At timing tG3b, as shown in FIG. 272 (j), in a situation where the “second post-reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started, as shown in FIG. 272 (j). The second disappearance related display SK2 appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is executed in the second mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2). However, here, no matter how much the display area of the gauge image GG has at the time of acceptance (FIG. 272 (i)), when the timing tG3b arrives, the display area becomes "0". I am trying to do it. With such a configuration, the gauge image GG that has been reduced in display area under a certain law with respect to the passage of time (for example, the display area amount that decreases with the passage of time is in a proportional relationship). However, ignoring the laws up to that point, suddenly the display area was greatly reduced, which caused "a sudden time left to" 0 ", but we were lucky enough to make it in time for acceptance." It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Then, when the timing tG3c within the period in which the display related to the second disappearance related display SK2-2 (the mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized) appears in this way, the player within the second reception period. The second post-reception production display UG2 as the post-reception production in the first production device (production display device 1600) in response to the acceptance of the operation by the second mode is the second mode (second post-reception production display UG2-2). Will start running. It goes without saying that the post-reception effect display suggests the degree of expectation (the rate at which a privilege is given to the player). The percentage may be 100%.

  Note that the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 according to this modified example is, as shown in FIG. 272 (k), the integrated image display IG, the second precursor effect display ZEH2, and the second disappearance related display SK2-. However, it may be displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 270.

  Then, after this, first, the integrated image display IG and the second precursor effect display ZEH2 are hidden (FIG. 272 (l)). Next, although illustration is omitted, the second disappearance related display SK2-2 is hidden, and thus the second post-reception effect display UG2-2 is displayed under good visibility. Like

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of precursor effect displays are prepared as the predictive effect display that suggests that the acceptance period will occur. In this regard, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 271, 272), when specific predictive effect display (FIGS. 271 (b) to (f) and FIG. 272 (g)) among a plurality of predictive effect display is performed, The model image display related to the reception target is displayed both in the precursory period (model image display TMH) before the reception period occurs and in the reception period (model image display IG).

  In particular, in this modified example, after displaying the mock image display (mong image display TMH) in the precursory period, it is hidden in the precursory period. Since the image display TMH that is displayed (and is hidden) only during the warning period is in a different mode from the image display IG that can be displayed during the reception period, the reception period It is expected that the performance related to the operation will be improved from the time period before the occurrence of.

  Also, in this modified example, when it is received within the reception period, the image display IG is hidden based on the reception (FIG. 272 (l)). It is possible to appear "a specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" until the image display IG is hidden (Fig. 272 (j), ( k)). However, regarding the "particular mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2) in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display", the image display TMH displayed within the omen period (specific omen effect display) is not displayed. When it is turned off, it does not appear until it is hidden.

  According to such a configuration, within the precursory period (specific predictive effect display), a specific mode (second disappearance related display SK2-2) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the “black image display” that appears corresponding to the reception period. The image display TMH is hidden without displaying "." Therefore, even if the simulated image display TMH is displayed within the precursory period (specific precursory effect display), even if it is hidden before the reception period occurs, the player's notice It becomes possible to make it difficult for the misunderstanding that the reception period has ended before it occurs.

  As described above, in this pachinko machine 1, the “mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image of a muzzle image” that can appear in response to the acceptance is a specific mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the mock image display (second extinction). Plural items including the related display SK2-2) "are prepared. In this regard, in the above-described modified examples (FIGS. 271, 272), in any of those modes, it is ensured that the mock image display TMH displayed within the precursory period does not appear when it is hidden. Is becoming In the above-described modification, a mode (normal type aura effect display TZE) different from any of the plurality of modes prepared as “aspects in which visual image display is difficult to be visually recognized” according to acceptance is displayed within the aura period. It is supposed to function as a "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display" before the display is hidden. That is, in this case, since it is recognized as "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" for the precursor period, even if "a mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display" appears within the precursor period. Therefore, it becomes possible to prevent misunderstanding that the reception period has ended without the player's knowledge.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, "normal type indication effect display TZE" is displayed as "a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the indication image" until the indication image TMH is hidden during the indication period. Then, when it is received within the reception period, the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" is displayed as a "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the water image display" until the water image display IG is hidden. I decided. In this respect, the period from the display of the "normal type indication effect display TZE" to the non-display is the period from the display of the "second disappearance related display SK2-2" to the non-display. It is desirable to make it longer than this in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  When the mock image display TMH is displayed within the precursory period, in the reception period that occurs after the mock image display TMH is hidden, the type of reception object suggested by the mood image display TMH is received. Acceptance (acceptance regarding post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance period) is allowed for (operation means), and a reception target (operation means) different from the reception object (operation means) of the type suggested by the image display TMH. It is desirable that the acceptance (reception regarding the post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance period) is not permitted. That is, in the case of the above-described modified example (FIGS. 271, 272), the scale image display scale image display TMH displayed within the precursory period indicates the operation button 410 as a reception target, and therefore corresponds to this. During the reception period, reception (reception regarding post-reception effect corresponding to the reception period) is not permitted for a reception target (sword ornament 5001) different from the operation button 410.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" as the reception targets regarding the post-reception effect. In this respect, when the effect is executed in a mode such as "Hiding the image display within the precursory period after displaying the image display", among the "operation button 410" and the "sword decoration 5001" , It is desirable that the side where the jackpot pattern appears at a high rate when it is targeted for acceptance is targeted for acceptance. That is, in this case, among the "operation buttons 410" and the "sword decoration 5001", the reception target on the side where the jackpot pattern appears low when the reception target is set is the reception period corresponding to this. In advance, the effect is prevented from being executed in a mode such as "Hiding the image display within the warning period after displaying the image display".

  Among the above-described modified examples with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such a “drafting mode regarding a precursor effect” has a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and their different types. It is also applicable to the example. Further, the "draft mode regarding the sign effect" is not applied to any of the first reception period to the seventh reception period, but is different from any of the reception periods in the eighth reception period (eighth reception period). (Variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) may be prepared.

  Further, among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, with regard to such a “dramatic aspect regarding the indication effect”, the modified examples illustrated with reference to FIGS. 268 to 270 and other examples thereof. Can also be applied to.

  Further, as described above, the pachinko machine 1 can display the remaining time suggesting display (display including the partition image KG) that reduces the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) with the passage of time during the reception period. is there. In this regard, in the above-described modified example (FIGS. 271 and 272), the remaining time suggestion display can be displayed even after the production is advanced based on the operation by the player being accepted. However, since the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) can be reduced even while the effect is being advanced, it is possible to recognize "is the state of being accepted" even after the acceptance is made? It becomes difficult to do so and it is expected that the tension will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, as the remaining time suggestion display, a specific section area (section image KG) is displayed in the display screen (effect display device 1600), and the specific time is displayed. It is assumed that the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced in the partitioned area (compartment image KG). Then, after the effect is advanced based on the acceptance of the operation by the player, the display is continued not only for the specific image (gauge image GG) but also for the specific section area (section image KG). I have to. According to such a configuration, since the specific partitioned area (compartment image KG) is displayed even after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted, the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed. It becomes possible to easily determine whether or not the display area of) has decreased.

  Note that "the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is reduced after the production is advanced based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted" means, for example, that the operation by the player has been accepted. A case where a predetermined display area is left as the gauge image GG at the time when the effect is advanced based on that (FIG. 272 (j)). However, in this case, it is required that the specific partitioned area (compartment image KG) is still displayed when the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0, and the specific partitioned area (compartment image KG) is , Will be hidden after the display area of the gauge image GG is set to 0.

  Further, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, when an operation by the player is accepted, a remaining time suggestion display (gauge image GG, section image KG, etc.) is displayed based on the acceptance. Before hiding the remaining time suggestion display, regardless of how much the display area of the gauge image GG remains at the time of acceptance, the specific section region (section image KG is hidden. ), A specific image whose display area is a specific value (predetermined value) is displayed, or a specific partitioned area (compartment image KG) and a specific partitioned area (compartment image) of the gauge image GG. Only KG) is displayed (the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced to 0). That is, in this case, the gauge image GG whose display area has been reduced according to a certain law with respect to the passage of time (for example, the display area amount decreasing with the passage of time has a proportional relationship) Ignore the law of, and suddenly greatly reduce the display area, which makes me think that "the remaining time was set to" 0 "unexpectedly, but I was lucky enough to receive it" It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the modified example described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, at the time when the operation by the player is accepted (at the time when the production of the effect corresponding to the acceptance is started), it is executed before the acceptance. The "depiction in which the display area of the gauge image GG is reduced" is not ended and is continued. Then, after this, when a predetermined timing arrives, a specific image (gauge image GG) having a display area with a specific value is displayed in the specific partitioned area (partition image KG), or a specific partitioned area (partition image Only the specific partitioned area (compartment image KG) of the image KG) and the specific image (gauge image GG) is displayed (the display area is reduced to 0).

  That is, in this case, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG) is not significantly reduced at the timing (for example, the timing tG3a) at which the production of the reception is started, so that the drawing up to that point is continued. Therefore, even after the acceptance is made, it will be difficult to recognize "whether it is in the acceptance state" and it is expected to maintain the tension appropriately. In addition, at a timing (for example, timing tG3b) after the timing (for example, timing tG3a) at which the progress of the production according to the acceptance is started, the display area of the specific image (gauge image GG or the like) is significantly reduced. As a result, it is possible to make the reception seem to be on time within the valid period (reception period), and it is expected that the interest in the game will be improved.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 272, the simulated image display is dynamically displayed within a predetermined dynamic range both before the acceptance and after the acceptance. .. In this regard, when the timing tG3b when a predetermined time has passed after the acceptance arrives, no matter which dynamic position the image display is at the time of acceptance, after the acceptance, at the specific dynamic position. The simulated image display is displayed in a still state (in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), when the timing tG3b arrives, the highest button position is displayed regardless of the previous button positions. Portrayed as). Moreover, in the example shown in FIG. 272 (j), after the timing tG3b, the simulated image display is not dynamically displayed but is stopped and displayed at the displayed position. As a result, the above-described effects can be obtained more favorably.

  Among the modified examples described above with reference to FIGS. 271 and 272, such “depiction of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after being received (FIG. 272 (i) to (k))” and “ The "dynamic display and static display related to the image display" can be applied to a reception period different from the second reception period among the plurality of reception periods and other examples thereof. Further, the “depiction of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after the acceptance is performed (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))” is applied to any of the first acceptance period to the seventh acceptance period. Instead of this, it may be prepared as an eighth reception period (eighth variation pattern, eighth post-reception effect) that is different from any of the reception periods.

  In addition, the "reception of the gauge image GG and the section image KG after the acceptance is made (FIGS. 272 (i) to (k))" and "dynamic display and static display for displaying the image" are first reception. When it is applied to one of the period to the seventh reception period (any reception period is acceptable), it is desirable not to apply it to a reception period different from the applied reception period. According to such a configuration, after the acceptance is made, there may be a case where the depiction in which the gauge image GG greatly decreases (FIG. 272 (j)) and a case where the depiction does not appear, which is amusement of the game. You will be able to improve.

  Even during the reception period when "depiction of the gauge image GG or the section image KG after being received (Fig. 272 (i) to (k))" or "dynamic display or static display related to the image display" is not applied. It is desirable to perform the depiction to reduce the display area of the gauge image GG and the dynamic display itself after the acceptance. That is, in this case, the only difference is that the display area of the gauge image GG is not drawn so as to largely reduce the law up to that point, and the static display is not performed.

  In each of the above-described production examples and other examples, and their modified examples, a plurality of reception periods (for example, the first reception period to the seventh reception period, etc.) that may occur under different conditions are prepared. There is. In this respect, for a predetermined reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) of the plurality of reception periods, the symbol fluctuation in which the predetermined reception period has occurred ends. That is, the next symbol variation can be continued even after the execution is started (those that can occur over a plurality of variations), and a specific acceptance period (for example, the second acceptance) among a plurality of acceptance periods. About the period, the fourth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc.), the symbol variation is not continued until after the symbol variation in which the specific acceptance period has occurred is terminated, and the symbol variation is terminated. It may be terminated before. That is, in this case, the image display related to the reception target is displayed in both the predetermined reception period and the specific reception period, and when the operation by the player is received within the predetermined reception period, In any of the cases where the operation by the player is accepted within the acceptance period, the image display is not hidden at the time of the acceptance, and the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display Etc.) will appear. Thereby, after the acceptance is made, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the mock image display, and it is possible to suggest that the acceptance period is in the finished state. It is possible to preferably obtain it regardless of whether it is the predetermined reception period or the specific reception period.

  Also, the "predetermined reception period" is, for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, and the fifth reception period, and the "specific reception period" is, for example, the second reception period and the fourth reception period. When the reception period and the seventh reception period are set, the aspect (display related to disappearance) in which the image display becomes difficult to visually recognize is when the reception is made in a “predetermined reception period” that can be maintained over a plurality of fluctuations, It will be executed as a different mode from when the acceptance is made within the "specific acceptance period" that does not span a plurality of fluctuations. That is, in this case, based on the type of “mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display, etc.)”, it is possible to grasp whether or not the acceptance period is ended within the pattern change being executed. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in both the "predetermined reception period" that may occur across multiple fluctuations and the "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, a mock image display showing the reception target is displayed. With regard to the display of the simulated image, the "predetermined reception period" and the "specific reception period" may be displayed in different modes (display size, position, etc.). For example, in a "specific reception period" that does not span multiple fluctuations, when the simulated image display is displayed (displayed only at a predetermined position) in the manner described above, it occurs across multiple fluctuations. In a possible “predetermined reception period”, it is desirable to display (moving display) such that the display position of the mime image display itself changes. According to such a configuration, even when the “predetermined reception period” occurs over a plurality of fluctuations, it is possible to prompt the player to make the reception early.

  Further, in the “reception period” that does not span a plurality of fluctuations, while the operation button 410 may be used as a reception target and the sword ornament 5001 may be used as a reception target, it may occur while straddling a plurality of fluctuations. In the possible “reception period”, the operation button 410 may be used as a reception target, but it is preferable that the sword ornament 5001 is not used as a reception target.

  Even in the “reception period” that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, it is desirable that the indication effect display be executable before the “reception period” occurs. That is, in this case, the symbol variation is terminated while the "symptom effect display" is being executed, and there may be a reception period corresponding to the "symptom effect display" after the symbol variation is completed. From this, it becomes possible to preferably maintain the interest of the game after the variation of the symbols ends.

  In the "reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, as described above, after the acceptance is made, A mode that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (display related to disappearance, etc.) ”appears. This "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display (disappearance-related display, etc.)" is executed for a predetermined time, but when the symbol fluctuation is stopped while this is being executed. However, it is desirable that the "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display (display related to disappearance, etc.)" is continued without being terminated halfway.

  "Presentation effect display" executed corresponding to "reception period (for example, first reception period, third reception period, fifth reception period, etc.)" that may occur across a plurality of fluctuations, About the aspect that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display (display related to disappearance, etc.) ", the time from when the symbol fluctuation that was in the execution state is stopped until the next symbol fluctuation is started (the symbol that was in the execution state) The execution period (the time from the display of the precursor effect display to the time it is hidden) is shorter than the time required from the stop of the fluctuation until the hold is exhausted, and it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display. It is desirable that the time from the appearance of the mode to the end) is ended.

  As described above, in the “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, the “prediction effect display” corresponding to this is displayed. And “Disappearance related display” can be displayed respectively. In this regard, when the "disappearance related display" is displayed before the symbol variation in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed is finished, the same area as the area in which the "predictive effect display" is displayed (the overlapping area) "Disappearance related display" is displayed by using at least a part of (), and after the symbol fluctuation for which the "symptom effect display" is displayed (after the hold is exhausted and the next symbol fluctuation is started to be executed) If the "disappearance related display" is displayed on the screen), it is possible to display the "disappearance related display" by using only the area different from the area where the "predictive effect display" is displayed. desirable. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to easily recognize that this is executed over a plurality of fluctuations while paying attention to the post-reception effect.

  Further, as described above, a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) having different expectations are prepared as the image display, and the “reception period (for example, the second reception period, In the fourth reception period and the seventh reception period), the quality image display is displayed as one of those modes. However, in the “reception period (for example, the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.)” that may occur over a plurality of fluctuations, in a specific mode (for example, FIG. 232) among the plurality of modes. It is desirable that only the simulated image display of (a)) is displayed. However, "reception period (for example, second reception period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period)" that does not span multiple fluctuations and "reception period (for example, second reception period, fourth reception period, seventh reception period) that may occur over multiple fluctuations (for example, In any of the first reception period, the third reception period, the fifth reception period, etc.) ”, it is desirable that the dynamic image display is continued after the reception.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, a plurality of game states (first game state and second game state) with different game conditions (e.g., the easiness of obtaining a prize ball when the game ball is launched in the game area). The game state of) can be generated. In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “reception period” during which the post-reception production can be performed when the operation by the player is accepted is the first gaming state and the second gaming state. It can occur in any of the gaming states. Furthermore, when the operation by the player is accepted within such a "reception period", it is assumed that the "reception period" has occurred in either the first gaming state or the second gaming state. In addition, after the acceptance, the "image display is difficult to see (such as disappearance related display)" appears while the image display is being displayed, and then the "image display is difficult to see While the "mode (display related to disappearance)" appears, the image display is hidden.

  That is, in this case, an operational effect such as "being able to confirm which mode has appeared as a mock image display even after the acceptance has been made and to indicate that the acceptance period has ended" is provided. , The first gaming state and the second gaming state can be obtained even if the acceptance is made within the acceptance period that occurs.

  The "first gaming state" corresponds to, for example, a normal gaming state (low probability / non-time saving), and the "second gaming state" is generated based on the result of the jackpot determination ( The state corresponds to a "game state different from the normal game state" that can be changed. Any gaming state may be used as long as the gaming state is different from the normal gaming state.

  In this regard, further description will be given using a plurality of reception periods (first reception period to seventh reception period and the like) illustrated in the above-described production examples and other examples, and their modified examples. A predetermined type of acceptance period (for example, the first acceptance period, the fourth acceptance period, the sixth acceptance period, the seventh acceptance period, etc., of the period, but not necessarily all of them) May be set) so that it can occur only in the first gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. On the other hand, it is assumed that the third acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods is set to be able to occur only in the second gaming state of the first gaming state and the second gaming state. Even with such a configuration, the display of the image related to the reception target includes a reception period (first gaming state) of a predetermined type and a third reception period (second gaming state). It is displayed in both cases. However, in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period), in the second gaming state (when accepted in the second acceptance period), as a "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to see" Can appear in a specific mode that cannot appear (such as the fourth disappearance-related display SK4 and the seventh disappearance-related display, but it is not necessary to include all of them).

  According to such a configuration, the first game state and the first game state and the first game state and the first game state It becomes possible to grasp which one of the two game states is in the controlled state, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Note that the “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize” in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 269 and 270 also appears only when in the first gaming state (when accepted in the first acceptance period). It may be set as a “mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the image display” that cannot be obtained. In other words, in this case, it is expected that the player will be able to maintain a favorable interest in the game when he is in the most unfavorable state (normal game state).

  Further, according to the above configuration, in the second game state (when received in the third reception period), the first disappearance-related display is executed as a “mode in which the visual image display is difficult to visually recognize”. However, the first disappearance-related display can also appear in the first gaming state (when received in the first reception period). That is, in this case, since the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is only shown, the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained. Further, even when the game is controlled to the first game state, when the first disappearance related display appears, the player is made aware of the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state. Since it becomes possible to play, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

  The second reception period and the fifth reception period may be prepared as a reception period that can occur in both the first game state and the second game state, or the first game. Of the state and the second game state, it may occur only in the first game state.

  Further, as described above, during the reception period that occurs in the first gaming state, the simulated image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)). In this regard, during the acceptance period that has occurred in the second gaming state, it is possible to display only the simulated image display of a specific mode (for example, FIG. 232 (a) that is a mode with low expectation) among a plurality of modes. desirable. According to such a configuration, even if a mode with a low degree of expectation (FIG. 232 (a)) appears as a simulated image display, the possibility of being in the state of being controlled to the second game state is played. Since it becomes possible to make the player aware of it, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the interest of the game.

  In the first gaming state, when the operation by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, as a "mode in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", the same mode as in the case of being accepted appears (for example, 2 reception period, 4th reception period, 5th reception period, 7th reception period, etc.) and a case where a mode different from the case of being received (for example, 1st reception period etc.) However, in the second gaming state (third acceptance period), the same aspect as when it is accepted is necessarily made to appear as "a manner in which the visual image display is difficult to see", or It is desirable to make sure that a mode different from the case where it is accepted appears. According to such a configuration, when the operation is not accepted in the first gaming state, depending on whether the same aspect as when the acceptance appears, as "a manner in which the visual image display becomes difficult to visually recognize", It becomes possible to raise awareness of the possibility that the second gaming state has occurred.

  Same as the case where the acceptance period (third acceptance period) that occurs in the second gaming state is accepted as "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display even if it is not accepted within the period". When it is generated as "a mode that always appears", the reception period (third reception period) occurs in the first gaming state, "even if it is not received, it is difficult to visually recognize the image display" It is desirable that the "effectiveness" (set time) as the acceptance period is longer than any of the "acceptance period in which the same aspect as when accepted" always appears.

  In both of the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the precursor effect display corresponding to this is executed before the reception period occurs. In this regard, in the first gaming state, a specific precursor effect display (second predictive effect display, fifth predictive effect display, seventh predictive effect display, etc.) that cannot occur in the second game state is executed. Is desirable.

[Special reception period]
As described with reference to FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation in which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the big hit determination according to the start winning (holding exhaustion). Pattern judgment can be executed. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, thereby performing the jackpot determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movable body operation (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, and as a result, when the stop display is performed with the big hit pattern, the big hit game or the high bonus as a benefit to the player. Transition to the probability game state becomes feasible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable body movements, etc. The expected effect according to (2) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate a reception acceptable state (effective period) in which production reception is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even when the special effect is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, it is possible to generate a reception permissible state (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the production determination, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. .. Also, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a particular timing during SP reach. It is executed as a production.

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to generate a reception period during which the player is allowed to receive the operation (operation), and the operation (operation) is received by the player within the reception period. Then, the display is changed according to the type of the reception period that has occurred. Further, during the reception period, it is possible to display a simulated image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is represented as an image.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is not limited to the above “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. However, no matter which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is included in the low expected variation pattern (non-reach variation pattern). It is desirable to prevent it from happening or to lower the selection rate.

  By the way, the acceptable reception state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is that the reception of a display change or the like on the effect display device 1600 as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is only executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect operation by the movable ornament, etc. are generated, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) The performance of the game itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decline.

  In addition, in each of the examples described above and each of the examples described below, the “operation by the player” to be detected is a direct operation by the player such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword ornament 5001”. The operation is not limited to (pressing operation or sword removing operation), and “a contact operation by the player with respect to a specific part” that is a detection target with the touch sensor and “a player in a specific space” that is a detection target with a non-contact sensor. Is also included in the meaning. In short, it may be provided with one or a plurality of reception means (operation means) for receiving the operation by the player (pressing operation, sword removing operation, touch operation, non-contact operation, etc.).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, for example, the following special performance is provided. It should be noted that, regarding each performance (each configuration) described below, it is not always necessary to provide all of those configurations, and for example, even if only one performance (any configuration) is provided, amusement May be reduced, or some of the configurations that may be necessary for obtaining further effects may be selectively provided, or described as applicable to another configuration. You may make it employ | adopt the structure which has. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in game enjoyment related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1-A]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. In both cases, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, when the first reception period occurs and when the second reception period occurs. , The first operation period and the second operation period are displayed as different character information (for example, "press!" I am trying to do it. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 1-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 1-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), a display change (display after reception) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made different from each other depending on the type (display type after reception), the operation is performed while recognizing which type of display change may occur as the display after reception (operation by the player) Will be able to be carried out, and it is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game will be suppressed.

  When requesting a different action (operation mode) to the player, even if the reception period is the same type (the same display is generated after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the displayed character information different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182 (c)). In the same sense, when a player is requested to perform a different operation (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the character information displayed in association with the occurrence be different from each other.

  Also, the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and the same image display as in the first reception period are displayed. It may be possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the post-reception display by simply looking at the text information and the scale image display. You will be expected to maintain.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 1-A” is adopted, in the first reception period, the character information is not displayed until the state (valid state) in which the reception is permitted is completed. On the other hand, during the second reception period, the character information may be hidden during the acceptance of the acceptance (valid state) during the second acceptance period. There may be. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, if the operation (predetermined operation) is not performed in a relatively early time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a character, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It is hoped that it will be possible to suitably avoid the situation where the sense of tension is completely lost.

  Although this will also be described later, in the case where the “configuration 1-A” is adopted, in the second reception period, there are a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is hidden. The same display change may be made as the display change regardless of the acceptance within any of these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation is properly performed only by confirming what operation mode is requested while the character information is being displayed. This is possible, and it is expected to suppress a decline in the entertainment appeal.

[Configuration 2-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, during the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the mock image display, and during the second reception period, the mood image display can be displayed by any of a plurality of modes. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, since the performance that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, until the operation (motion) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Regarding the “plurality of mock image displays” that can be displayed in the second acceptance period, it is possible to make the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears different depending on which of these mock image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the interest. Further, any one of the “plurality of modes of image display” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the “lowest expected aspect” of the “plurality of image display” is the same as the “one aspect” that can be displayed in the first reception period.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 2-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and only one aspect is displayed as the image display in the first reception period and the third reception period. It may be allowed. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the mock image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is prevented that the mock image display is not hidden until the valid state is ended. On the other hand, the valid state (reception period) is ended in the “first reception period” of the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which the image display is displayed in only one mode. The image display will not be hidden until the end of the period, but in the "third reception period", it will continue until the valid state (reception period) ends (the valid state is continued. In the middle of that, the image display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, whether or not the mock image display is hidden in the middle of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the mock image display. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected. It should be noted that the mock image display displayed in the first reception period and the mood image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they are not necessarily the same, and accordingly, they are hidden. It may be possible to suggest the possibility of being set.

  Also, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 2-A” is adopted, in the third reception period, either the period during which the image display is displayed or the period during which the image display is hidden is displayed. The same display change (display after reception) may be made to occur even if the reception is made in. That is, in this case, since the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the mock image display is hidden, the performance using the "third reception period" ( It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing the game when creating the (non-display of the image display).

  The "third reception period (display after the third reception)" according to the configuration 2-A is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, a first reception period or a first reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 3-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, the mood image display is not hidden until the first reception period ends after the mood image display is displayed when the first reception period occurs. , It is possible to accept an operation by the player while the image display is being displayed, and it is possible to accept an operation by the player while the image display is not being displayed in the second reception period. The above-mentioned "acceptance allowable sound" is audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but is not audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 3-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 3-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, not only the "first reception period" in which the acceptance permission sound is audibly output and the reception is performed while the simulated image display is displayed, but the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output and Since there is a "second reception period" in which the image can be received while the image display is not displayed, be aware of the possibility that the display will occur after reception at various times that the player did not intend. As a result, it is expected that the interest in the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 3-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the second reception period, a mock image is generated from the occurrence of the second reception period to the end thereof. Although the display is not displayed and the player can accept the operation while the simulated image display is not displayed, in the third reception period, the simulated image display is performed only for a part of the third reception period. The operation may be accepted by the player during both the period in which it is hidden and the simulated image display is displayed and the period in which the simulated image display is hidden. That is, in this case, in the third reception period, the side surface as the first reception period (acceptance while the image display is being displayed) and the side surface as the second reception period (when the image display is not being displayed) It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it will have both. In addition, since the operation (operation) by the player may continue to be accepted after the image display is hidden, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level when the image display is hidden without being displayed.

  The "third reception period (display after the third reception)" of the "Structure 3-A" is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the structure 3-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, a first reception period or a first reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

  The acceptance permission sound may be audibly output when the first acceptance period occurs, but may not be audibly output when the second acceptance period occurs and when the third acceptance period occurs. . That is, there is a timing at which the mock image display is displayed in the third reception period. In this regard, according to the above-described configuration for the third reception period, the reception-permitted sound is prevented from being output at the timing (or before and after) when the simulated image display is displayed. . As a result, in the third reception period, even at the timing when the reception period occurs, the side surface as the first reception period (the image display is displayed) and the side surface as the second reception period (the reception acceptable sound is output. It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it will have both.

  Also, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 3-A” is adopted, in the third reception period, either the period during which the image display is displayed or the period during which the image display is hidden is displayed. The same display change (display after reception) may be made to occur even if the reception is made in. That is, in this case, since the effective state (reception period) itself continues without any change even after the mock image display is hidden, the performance using the "third reception period" ( It becomes possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing the game when creating the (non-display of the image display).

[Configuration 4-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, when an action by the player is detected within the period, the display after the first reception is displayed and the first reception sound is output, but the action by the player is not detected within the period. At times, the display after the first reception is not displayed and the first reception sound is not output, and in the second reception period, when an operation by the player is detected within the period. The second reception sound is displayed together with the display after the second reception, and even when the motion by the player is not detected within the period, the same second time as when the motion by the player is detected within the period. Although the display is displayed after reception, the second reception sound is not output. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 4-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 4-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, if the player does not accept the operation (operation) within the acceptance period, the demerit of production can occur, so that the sense of tension when the acceptance period occurs is preferable. Will be able to maintain.

  Further, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 4-A”, a third reception period is further provided, and in the third reception period, when an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period. The third reception sound is displayed together with the display after the third reception, and even when the movement by the player is not detected within the period, the same third time as when the movement by the player is detected within the period The display after reception may be displayed and the third reception sound may be output. That is, in this case, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (change after acceptance) as when the operation is accepted is generated so that a demerit-oriented disadvantage occurs. Since there will be (the second reception period) and a case (the third reception period) in which it is generated so that the demerit-wise disadvantage does not occur, the operation (operation) by the player can be received in time within the reception period. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment level when there is no such game.

  The "third reception period (display after third reception)" of the "Structure 4-A" is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the structure 4-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, a first reception period or a first reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 5-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, during the first acceptance period, the first variation pattern is started to execute regardless of the number of the determination information stored by the suspension storage unit (the number of jackpot determinations in the suspended state (suspended number)). Can be generated when the first timing arrives after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of execution of the first variation pattern, and the second acceptance period is the number of pieces of determination information stored by the suspension storage means (suspended). When the second variation pattern starts to be executed while the number of jackpot determinations in the state (holding number) is less than the predetermined number, a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started to be executed. This can occur when two timings arrive, but when the second variation pattern is started when the number of pieces of determination information stored in the hold storage means is equal to or more than a predetermined number, the second variation pattern is generated. Over down said second timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of execution are not to occur even arrived. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 5-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 5-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, when a situation in which the number of holdings is decreasing due to trying to stop the game, the acceptance period (second acceptance period) of the type that has not occurred until then will occur, It is possible to expect to be prompted not to stop the game, or even if the game is stopped, it is possible to give the impression that the game is interesting at the end.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 5-A” is adopted, the second variation pattern is set when the “number of determination information items stored by the storage unit (holding number)” is less than the predetermined number. Even when the execution is started, at the stage when the second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the execution of the second variation pattern has not arrived, the “number of determination information stored by the suspending storage means (suspended If the “number” ”is increased (beyond a predetermined number), the second reception period may not be generated when the second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of execution of the second variation pattern has arrived. That is, even if the symbol fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern) is started when the number of holdings is decreasing, if the number of holdings is increased within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation , It suggests that you are in a situation where you are not trying to stop the game. In this respect, according to the above configuration, even when the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started to be executed when the number of holdings is decreasing, within the execution period of the symbol variation If the number of holdings is increased, the second reception period is not generated when the second timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of execution of the second variation pattern arrives. , As a "reception period of a type that can appear only when trying to stop a game", it becomes possible to function more properly.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect more favorably, even if the second reception period has occurred, the “determination information stored by the holding storage means” during the second reception period has occurred. It is more desirable to end the second reception period at that time when the number of “(number of holding)” increases.

[Configuration 6-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The first reception period is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner regardless of the effect status, and the second reception period is irrespective of the effect status, the specific BGM. Since it occurs after being suppressed or in an inaudible state, it is possible to use the specific BGM to provide a performance related to the type of the reception period from before the reception period occurs. Like The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 6-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 6-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  Further, as will be described later, when adopting the “Configuration 6-A”, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period, a second reception period, and a third reception period are prepared as reception periods. The three reception periods may occur in a case where the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed mode or may occur after the specific BGM is set in the suppressed mode or inaudible state, depending on the production situation. You may do it. According to such a configuration, when the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and when the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is in the suppressed mode or the inaudible state. In any of the above cases, the relevant reception period may be the “third reception period”, and therefore, the interest of the game until the operation (operation) by the player is received is preferably maintained. You will be expected to do it.

  The "third reception period (display after third reception)" of the "Structure 6-A" is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the structure 6-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, a first reception period or a first reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Configuration 7-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, if the reception is made within the period, the first post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the first post-reception display is displayed for the effect design. In the meantime, the priority display is displayed over the display after the first reception. On the other hand, in the second reception period, when the reception is made within the period, the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the second post-reception display is displayed for the effect design. While it is being displayed, it is displayed or hidden in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the display after the second reception. In addition, the "mode that is difficult to be visually recognized" according to the configuration 7-A means that "at least a part of the effect design is a portion corresponding to the transmittance through the second post-reception display set to a predetermined transmittance. A mode that can be visually recognized only, or a mode in which at least a part of the effect design is invisible due to the display after the second reception overlapping with this, or a mode in which at least a part of the effect design is hidden Is meant. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 7-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 7-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type as the reception period by confirming whether or not the visibility of the effect design is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the operation by the player. Like In addition, the "design for production" is, for example, a design which forms a reach state as a production in the production display device 1600. It is a design that is also used for full rotation production.

However, it has been confirmed that some of the players have a feeling of disgust for the deterioration of the visibility of such effect symbols as the display after the second reception is displayed. There is. Therefore, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 7-A”, when the second post-reception display corresponding to the acceptance within the second acceptance period is displayed, the acceptance period different from the second acceptance period Is generated (for example, in response to acceptance within the second acceptance period). Then, when the operation is accepted by the player within the different period, the effect design may be made to hide the second post-reception display so that the effect design can be easily recognized.

  For example, if the second post-reception display corresponding to the reception within the second reception period is to be hidden after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, if the predetermined time elapses. In addition, the player can hide the display after the second reception by only performing a predetermined operation. In addition, the operation required for the player to display the display after the second reception within the second reception period, and the reception period different from the second reception period (the reception period that occurs according to the reception within the second reception period). The operation required by the player to hide the display after the second reception in () may be the same operation as each other or different operations. For example, within a reception period different from the second reception period (a reception period that occurs in response to the reception within the second reception period), the player uses a plurality of operating means to hide the display after the second reception. May be required to be respectively operated.

  On the other hand, the display after the first reception may be the same as the predetermined time from the start of the display (the same time as the predetermined time until the display after the second reception is hidden, or a different time). It is hidden when (good) has passed. However, with regard to the first post-reception display that does not deteriorate the visibility of the effect design, even if the player performs any operation until the predetermined time elapses, it is not hidden by this. It is more desirable to do so in order to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level of the game when an erroneous operation is performed against the player's intention.

[Structure 8-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, the first reception period can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode, and when the specific BGM is received while being audibly output in the non-suppressing mode, The specific BGM is made inaudible when triggered by, and during the second reception period, acceptance is allowed after the specific BGM that has been audibly output in the non-suppressing mode becomes audibly output in the suppressing mode or is not audibly output. Even if the acceptance is made, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output or the state in which the specific BGM is not audibly output is maintained. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 8-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 8-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, it is provided with an interesting point as to at which timing the specific BGM is brought into the “state of being output audibly in the suppression mode or the state of not being output audibly”. You will be able to.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 8-A” is adopted, in the first reception period, all the sounds that were audibly output at the time when the reception is made are inaudible (only the specific BGM is audibly output). If it is, only the specific BGM is made inaudible, and in the second reception period, when the reception is made, all of the sounds that were audibly output at that time are inaudible (only one sound is audibly output). At times, only the one sound may be made inaudible). That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to “a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not audibly output”, and when reception is made, it is audibly output at that time. It becomes possible to give a common directivity between the first reception period and the second reception period, for example, by making all the sounds inaudible, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved. become.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 8-A” is adopted, the specific BGM is made inaudible during the first reception period while the player is allowed to receive the operation (in the middle of the effective period). Although there may be a situation in which no sound is output, it is desirable that the reception period be continued even in that situation. That is, in this case, in the first reception period, when the reception is made, the specific BGM is made inaudible by this, but the reception is not performed for a predetermined time after the first reception period occurs. If not, the specific BGM will be made inaudible even if the acceptance is not yet made, so that it is possible to think that the first acceptance period has ended, and the game is played. Will be able to strongly attract the interest of the person.

  In addition, when the specific BGM is made inaudible when the acceptance is made, the “display change according to the acceptance (display after the first acceptance)” is generated accordingly, but the acceptance is not yet made. In particular, when the specific BGM is made inaudible, it is desirable that the "display change according to the reception (display after the first reception)" is not generated accordingly. That is, in this case, the first reception period continues by confirming that the specific BGM has been made inaudible, but "display change according to reception (display after first reception)" has not yet occurred. You can become aware of the possibility that you are doing. Then, when the operation by the player is accepted after the specific BGM is made inaudible and before the first acceptance period is ended, this causes the “display change according to acceptance (first acceptance After that) ”will occur, the anxiety when the specific BGM is made inaudible (the concern that the effective period may have expired) will be eliminated, and this will improve the enjoyment of the game. Will be able to.

[Configuration 9-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as operation means, a plurality of operations including a first operation means (first operation receiving portion) and a second operation means (second operation receiving portion) are performed. Means are prepared, and a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared as the reception period. Further, in the specific reception period, both the reception of the operation for the first operation means and the reception of the operation for the second operation means are permitted as the reception for causing the display change corresponding to the specific reception period. , The specific display change can be generated when the operation of the first operation means is accepted, and the specific display change is not generated when the operation of the second operation means is accepted. Since it is possible to generate a display change different from that, it becomes possible to have an interest in which operation means is operated. The "specific reception period (display after specific reception (specific display change))", the "first operation means", and the "second operation means" related to the configuration 9-A are the technology of the configuration 9-A. It is just a name used to explain the idea. Therefore, it may mean the same as the “reception period” or the “operation means” according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period or an operation means different from those reception periods. ..

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 9-A” is adopted, the specific reception period is ended when the first operation means is operated in the specific reception period, but when the second operation means is operated. The remaining time may be extended without ending the specific reception period. In other words, in this case, since it is possible to give an unprecedented rendition as a reception period using a plurality of operating means, various interesting reception periods based on such rendition are possible. Will be able to offer.

[Configuration 10-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, a mock image display that shows the operation receiving part is displayed, and in the second reception period, a plurality of mood image displays that show the operation receiving part is displayed, and the mood image display is an operation performed by the player. By this, the operation receiving portion can be executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 10-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 10-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, for example, even if a plurality of operation receiving units having different required operations (for example, pushing, pulling, etc.) are prepared, the player may perform any operation. It becomes easier to recognize whether or not it is possible to make it difficult for the operation within the effective period to be delayed.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the “Structure 10-A”, the simulated image display is executed as “a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation of the player”. There may be a case and a case where it is not executed as “a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation of the player”. That is, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, but also what kind of operation should be performed, even under the condition that the image display is displayed. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize, and it is expected that a feeling of tension until the operation by the player is accepted can be appropriately maintained.

[Configuration 11-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as the operating means, a plurality of operating means (a plurality of operation receiving portions) including a specific operating means (specific operation receiving portion) are prepared, As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods including the first reception period and the second reception period are prepared. Then, in the first reception period, a specific image is displayed by using the specific operation means, and a specific image corresponding to the specific image display is displayed to display "Specify by reducing the display area of the specific image with time. "Remaining time specific display suggesting the remaining time for which the operation of the operating device is allowed to be accepted" is performed. In the second reception period, a simulated image display of the specific operating device is displayed. A specific image corresponding to the display is displayed, and "remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time during which the operation of the specific operating means is permitted by decreasing the display area of the specific image over time" is performed. I try not to be discouraged. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” according to the configuration 11-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 11-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, even when a mock image display showing the specific operating means is displayed, "acceptance of an operation for the specific operating means is allowed by decreasing the display area of the specific image with time. Since the "remaining time specifying display that indicates the remaining time" is not necessarily performed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 11-A” is adopted, in the second reception period, a specific image display showing the specific operation means and a special image display showing the special operation means different from this are displayed. However, the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" may not be performed despite the above.

  That is, in this case, in the second reception period, both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operation means are permitted, but the above-mentioned "remaining time specific display" is given. Will not be performed. As a result, the second acceptance period occurs without the player being floated by the acceptance of both the acceptance of the operation for the specific operation means and the acceptance of the operation for the different operation means. You will be able to maintain a good sense of tension when you are there.

[Configuration 12-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, as operation means, “a first operation receiving portion that is displaced by an operation by a player, and a first peripheral decoration portion provided on the periphery thereof is provided. 1 operation means "and" a second operation receiving portion which is displaced by an operation by a player, and a second operation means having a second peripheral decoration portion provided on the periphery thereof "are prepared. Then, when displaying the first image of the first operation, the first image of the first receiving portion and the image of the first receiving portion and the first peripheral edge that decorates the periphery of the first image of the first receiving portion. A decoration image can be displayed, and when displaying a second image of the second operating means, the second image of the second receiving portion of the second operation receiving portion and the second image of the second receiving portion can be displayed. It is possible to display the second marginal decoration image that decorates the periphery, and the first marginal decoration image and the second marginal decoration image are displayed as different images. The "first operating device" and the "second operating device" of the configuration 12-A are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 12-A. Therefore, it may mean the same operation means as the "first operation means" or the "second operation means" according to another configuration, or may mean the operation means on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean an operating means different from those operating means.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operating means themselves are similar, the appearances of the first operating means and the second operating means can be significantly different from each other. As a result, it is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 12-A” is adopted, the first peripheral decoration image is displayed as an image of the first peripheral decoration portion, but the second peripheral decoration image is the second peripheral decoration image. It may be displayed as an image including at least a portion of the peripheral decoration portion different from the portion. That is, in this case, when the “first image display” having the first peripheral decoration image that is an image of the first peripheral decoration portion is displayed, the operation opportunity is given to the first operation means. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that there is. On the other hand, when the “second image display” having the second peripheral decoration image, which is the image in which the second peripheral decoration portion is not reproduced, is displayed, the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means. The situation can be provided as a situation with higher performance. In this case, the "second operation means corresponding to the second image display" has a larger operation receiving portion (first operation receiving portion) than the "first operation means corresponding to the first image display". It may be difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated even when the second marginal decoration image, which is an image that does not look at the second marginal decoration portion, is displayed, such as by being provided as a member. It is desirable not to.

  Further, in order to provide the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means as the “higher performance situation”, the second peripheral decoration image is a fictitious image that does not actually exist in the game machine. It is desirable to display it as an image of the decorative portion. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to the second operation means, a part of the second peripheral decoration image includes a portion including the second peripheral decoration part. May be allowed.

[Configuration 13-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of operation receiving portions including a first operation receiving portion, a second operation receiving portion, and a third operation receiving portion are prepared as operating means. As a reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including a specific reception period are prepared. Then, during the specific reception period, the first operation image display showing the first operation reception portion, the second operation image display showing the second operation reception portion, and the third operation image display showing the third operation reception portion are displayed. All are displayed, and when the operation of the first operation receiving portion of the plurality of operation receiving portions is received, the reception of the first image display, the second image display, and the third image display is accepted. At least the second image display and the third image display that show the operation receiving portion that has not been performed are hidden. The “first operation receiving portion”, the “second operation receiving portion”, the “third operation receiving portion”, and the “specific acceptance period” related to the configuration 13-A refer to the technical concept of the configuration 13-A. It is just a name used for explanation. Therefore, it may mean the same as or different from the “operation receiving unit” and the “reception period” according to another configuration.

  According to the above configuration, the operation image display (second operation receiving portion, second operation receiving portion, third operation receiving portion) different from the operation receiving portion (first operation receiving portion) that has received the operation is displayed. Since the image display and the third image display are not displayed, the operation receiving unit (the second operation receiving unit, the third operation receiving unit, the third image receiving unit, the third image receiving unit, the third image receiving unit, the third image receiving unit) It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is required for the operation receiving unit).

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 13-A” is adopted, in the specific reception period, even though the first image display, the second image display, and the third image display are displayed, Of the 1 operation receiving unit, the 2nd operation receiving unit, and the 3rd operation receiving unit, the operation receiving of the 3rd operation receiving unit may not be validated (not allowed). That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, when the operation of the first operation receiving portion is received, the first display change is generated, and when the operation of the second operation receiving portion is received, the second display change is generated. However, since the operation is not accepted for the third operation accepting unit and the display change caused by the operation is not generated, until the operation by the player is accepted during the specific acceptance period. Thus, it becomes possible to appropriately maintain the performance and tension.

[Configuration 14-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. In both cases, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, when the first reception period occurs and when the second reception period occurs. , The first operation period and the second operation period are displayed as different character information (for example, "press!" I am trying to do it. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 14-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 14-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  That is, in the first reception period and the second reception period, although the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), a display change (display after reception) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made different from each other depending on the type (display type after reception), the operation is performed while recognizing which type of display change may occur as the display after reception (operation by the player) Will be able to be carried out, and it is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game will be suppressed.

  When requesting a different action (operation mode) to the player, even if the reception period is the same type (the same display is generated after reception), it is related to the occurrence of the reception period. It is more desirable to make the displayed character information different from each other in order to suppress an operation error by the player (see, for example, FIG. 182 (c)). In the same sense, when a player is requested to perform a different operation (operation mode), and the acceptance period is of a different type (a different post-acceptance display is generated), the acceptance period is It is desirable that the character information displayed in association with the occurrence be different from each other.

  Also, the same operation (operation mode) as in the first reception period is requested, and the same character information and the same image display as in the first reception period are displayed. It may be possible to further prepare a reception period in which a different post-reception display is generated. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the post-reception display by simply looking at the text information and the scale image display. You will be expected to maintain.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 14-A” is adopted, in the first reception period, the character information is not displayed until the state (valid state) in which the reception is permitted is completed. On the other hand, during the second reception period, the character information may be hidden during the acceptance of the acceptance (valid state) during the second acceptance period. It is more desirable to have it. That is, in this case, in the second reception period, if the operation (predetermined operation) is not performed in a relatively early time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not there is a character, and it becomes difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It is hoped that it will be possible to suitably avoid the situation where the sense of tension is completely lost.

  As will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 14-A” is adopted, in the second reception period, there are a period in which the character information is displayed and a period in which the character information is hidden, Different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless a state in which it is difficult to recognize what operation mode is requested (a state in which the character information is hidden) is prepared, A sense of tension can be appropriately maintained through such performance.

  In addition, when the first acceptance period occurs, the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed to when it is hidden when no operation is performed by the player, and the second acceptance period occurs In this case, it is desirable that the time from when the corresponding character information is displayed to when it is hidden when the player does not perform an operation is different from each other.

[Configuration 15-A]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, during the first reception period, only one mode can be displayed as the mock image display, and during the second reception period, the mood image display can be displayed by any of a plurality of modes. The “first reception period (display after first reception)” and the “second reception period (display after second reception)” related to the configuration 2-A are for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 2-A. It is just the name used for. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, in the second reception period, since the performance that cannot appear when the first reception period occurs is provided, until the operation (motion) by the player is detected. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Regarding the “plurality of mock image displays” that can be displayed in the second acceptance period, it is possible to make the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears different depending on which of these mock image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve the interest. Further, any one of the “plurality of modes of image display” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the first reception period. In this case, it is desirable that the “lowest expected aspect” of the “plurality of image display” is the same as the “one aspect” that can be displayed in the first reception period.

  Further, as will be described later, when the “configuration 15-A” is adopted, a third reception period is further provided, and in the first reception period and the third reception period, only one aspect is displayed as the image display. It may be allowed. Then, in the "second reception period" in which the mock image display is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes, it is prevented that the mock image display is not hidden until the valid state is ended. On the other hand, the valid state (reception period) is ended in the “first reception period” of the “first reception period” and the “third reception period” in which the image display is displayed in only one mode. The image display will not be hidden until the end of the period, but in the "third reception period", it will continue until the valid state (reception period) ends (the valid state is continued. In the middle of that, the image display that has been displayed until then may be hidden. That is, in this case, whether or not the mock image display is hidden in the middle of the "first reception period" and "third reception period" in which only one mode is displayed as the mock image display. Since the performance is provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected. It should be noted that the mock image display displayed in the first reception period and the mood image display displayed in the third reception period may be the same, but they are not necessarily the same, and accordingly, they are hidden. It may be possible to suggest the possibility of being set.

  Also, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 15-A” is adopted, in the third reception period, there are a period during which the image display is displayed and a period during which the image display is hidden. However, different display changes may occur depending on which of these periods the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, a display change that cannot be confirmed unless the state in which the possibility that the reception period has ended is made aware (the state in which the image display is hidden) is prepared. A sense of tension is appropriately maintained through such performance.

  The "third reception period (display after the third reception)" according to the configuration 15-A is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 15-A. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the “third reception period” according to another configuration, or a reception period different from those reception periods (for example, a first reception period or a first reception period according to another configuration). 2 reception period).

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a mock image (such as a mock image of the operation receiving portion) related to the reception target is generated. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the edge decoration image that decorates the edge of the image, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the amusement of the game until the display (display change) after reception is executed. I am trying to do it. Such an integrated image display is generated as a result of the advance notice determination with the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to the specific timing during SP reach and the variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the operation reception performance (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high-expectation suppression reception performance. ..

  Note that the “integrated image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and thus the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image display”, and the display is performed in any of these modes.

  Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted. The reception acceptable sound is output so that it is difficult to forget to operate it. Here, "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). , Is a sound that is in a state where a reception acceptable state (reception period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect having nothing to do with the acceptable state (acceptance period) is being performed.

  In addition, each acceptance acceptable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type can be generated when the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but is low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that is generated based on the fact that a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expected variation pattern) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). Further, the second type of acceptance-permitted state is a valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice determination) that can be generated regardless of whether it is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Valid period).

  The "integrated image display" according to the present embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and second type acceptance acceptable states (acceptance period). Here, both the first type of acceptable reception state (reception period) and the second type of acceptable reception state (reception period) are receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that the occurrence occurs as the permissible state (reception period), the “integrated image display” displayed during those acceptance periods is an image of the same operation means (operation button 410).

  However, the special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as the “integrated image display” is the acceptance permissible state (reception period) of the first type. In the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) of the second type, it is possible to be displayed only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). ing. In the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) of the first type, the “integrated image display” is displayed in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)) including the special aspect based on the result of the big hit determination. A determination is made as to whether or not to display, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the “integrated image” is displayed in any of a plurality of aspects (eg, FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)) that do not include the special aspect based on the result of the jackpot determination. It is also possible to make a determination as to whether or not to display, and display the “integrated image display” in a mode according to the result of this determination.

  Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 including the configurations 1 to 15 will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely the one described as the best embodiment, and may not necessarily be provided. That is, regarding each configuration described in the specification described below, only a configuration corresponding to the configuration can be arbitrarily selected and employed when further action and effect are desired.

  First, an example in which the above configurations 2, 3, 5 to 8 are embodied will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the content of the production that is advanced when it is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice as a post-reception production, and a notice production (expectation degree suggesting production). A plurality of reception periods (reception performances) of different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception performance) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, performance determination, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, at least a reception period A (reception production A) to a reception period D (reception production D) are prepared as a plurality of reception periods (reception productions).

  Each characteristic will be described for each reception period (reception performance) with reference to FIGS. 273 to 282. It should be noted that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 272 may be prepared as a reception period different from the reception period A (reception performance A) to the reception period D (reception performance D). Alternatively, it may be realized as any of the reception period A (reception performance A) to the reception period D (reception performance D).

  FIG. 273 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the condition A is satisfied as a result of the determination and the acceptance period A (reception effect A) occurs. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of an effect in a variation pattern generated during the acceptance period A (acceptance effect A).

  Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), and "variation pattern A" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect depiction according to the variation pattern A, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 279 (a)”), During the variation effect execution period, an effect (notice effect) according to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “variation pattern A” itself. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 279 (a), a landscape depicting a mountain is displayed as the background image HG1.

  That is, when a special result is obtained by the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern A, the peripheral control MPU 1511a starts the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ as shown in FIG. 273 (a). When the timing tM2 after the lapse of a predetermined time A from the arrival (when the condition A is satisfied), the above-mentioned acceptance period A (valid period) in which "acceptance regarding display A after acceptance" is permitted is generated ("Fig. 279 (b) situation "). This acceptance period A occurs in a state in which the specific BGM is being output without suppression. Thus, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the post-acceptance display A is performed based on the acceptance (the situation shown in FIG. 279 (c)).

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such an acceptance period A, the acceptance target (operation accepting unit, etc.) ), A gauge image display that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, an disappearance related display that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image (a mode in which the image of the image becomes difficult to see), Each display is made after the reception, which indicates the degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols). Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to this embodiment is displayed as "integrated muffled image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. In addition, when displaying the mock image display instead of the "integrated mock image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when the timing tM1 before the reception period A occurs, " "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. That is, the “integrated image display IG” is displayed so as to extend over the timing tM2 when the reception period A occurs. The “integrated image display IG” is hidden when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period A, or when the acceptance period A is ended without the acceptance. It should be noted that the reception period A according to this example ends when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player when the timing tM3 arrives (see FIG. 273 (h)). ..

  In this regard, in the example shown in FIGS. 273 (a) to 273 (g) and the example shown in FIGS. 279 (b) and 279 (c), the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tM2a within the acceptance period A. It is supposed to be done. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 273 (a) to 273 (g) and FIGS. 279 (b) and 279 (c), the acceptance period is based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted at timing tM2a. When A is finished, the post-reception display A (post-reception production A) corresponding to the reception period A is started to be executed.

  In the example shown in FIG. 279, only one mode is displayed as the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception period A. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period A, the first mode having relatively low expectations as the post-reception display A based on the acceptance (for example, There is a case where "Chance is good") is executed, or a second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation as the post-reception display A (for example, "Extreme heat") is executed.

  However, although details are omitted, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception period A shown in FIG. 273 is produced in the same manner as the “first reception period” shown in FIG. 255 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (at the time when the audible output of the acceptance sound A corresponding to the acceptance is started). At the timing tM2a, the integrated muffled image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated muffled image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to facilitate the recognition of which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the integrated image display IG is displayed in the easily visible state" after the acceptance is set to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound A has already started, the same mode as when the integrated image display IG was in the reception period (shown in FIG. 255). In the example, if the display is continued as it is as shown in (e1) and (e2) of FIG. 263, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation is such that the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "after the reception effect in the execution state (here, reception sound A) is not noticed".

  Therefore, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 273 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tM2a at which the reception period A ends because the operation (operation) by the player is received. When the timing tM2b arrives, the display related to the disappearance related effect (the disappearance related display A corresponding to the reception period A) is started as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". The “disappearance-related effect” here is an image (another image different from the integrated image display IG) that is displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden. When the display of the "disappearance related effect" is started, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and the display of the "disappearance related effect" is performed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

  In other words, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, “Disappearance related display A (disappearance EF in the figure)” is displayed while “Integrated dissimilar image display IG (disposition image display, gauge image display)” is displayed. Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance related display A" is displayed overlaps with the area where "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. It is supposed to do.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated mood image display IG continues to be displayed after the acceptance is made, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized, so that the reception sound is received. It becomes possible to suggest that A is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even when the reception sound A has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the integrated image display IG in A is not recognized in which mode. Further, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound A is started, until the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized (timing tM2a to tM2b), the integrated mood image display is performed. Since the aspect of the IG can be confirmed while maintaining good visual recognition, it is expected that amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

  Further, in the reception period A, the same mode appears as the disappearance related display A regardless of whether the mode with low expectation or the mode with high expectation is executed as the corresponding post-reception display A. I am trying. As a result, even when the reception sound A is started to be executed, the effect display device 1600 can keep the expectation level as confidential.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 273 (b) to 273 (d), the display related to the disappearance related display A (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears. When the timing tM2c arrives during the certain period, the "post-reception display A" corresponding to the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been received within the reception period A is started. As the post-reception display A, a case where a relatively low expectation (for example, “Chance”) is executed or a second aspect where the expectation is relatively high (for example, “Extreme heat”) )) May be executed as described above.

  That is, in this case, the execution of the "post-acceptance display A" is started while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display A" are displayed. In addition, since the "post-reception display A" is started while the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, it is suggested that the player's gaze point while indicating that the reception period A has already ended. Is expected to be automatically shifted from the “integrated image display IG” to the “post-acceptance display A” (after the timing tM2c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “post-acceptance display A” is started in this manner, the “post-acceptance display A” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 273 (b) to 273 (d). In the displayed state, first, the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display A" are made non-display. In this way, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden, the "disappearance related display A" is hidden, and the "display after reception A Is displayed (in FIG. 279, illustration of these effect developments is omitted).

  In this regard, the “post-acceptance display A” is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations, based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 273 (d), the “post-acceptance display A” remains for a relatively long time after the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display A” are hidden. Will be executed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reception period A occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tM1 shown in FIG. 273 (f). That is, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period A is audibly output so as to extend over the timing tM2 when the acceptance period A occurs, and the player can be audibly output while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. The operation (operation) by can be accepted.

  Here, in the reception period A, as shown in FIG. 273 (f), even if the operation (operation) is received by the player while the reception acceptable sound is audibly output, the reception is performed. The allowable sound is not terminated halfway and is output only for a predetermined time. That is, as will be described later, when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player while the acceptable acceptance sound is audibly output during the plurality of acceptance periods, the acceptance permission sound is generated based on the acceptance. It includes the acceptance period during which the audible output status is terminated halfway. Therefore, when the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output during the acceptance period A, and as a result, a mode in which the audible output of the acceptance acceptable sound is continued appears, it is determined whether or not the acceptance acceptable sound is in the accepted state. It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize, and it is expected that the tension is maintained appropriately.

  As shown in FIGS. 273 (d) and 279 (c), the post-reception display A according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of the display A overlaps the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, but the post-reception display A is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. Instead, the decorative pattern SZ is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-acceptance display A. Then, the post-reception display A according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, as shown in FIGS. 273 (d) and 279 (d). ..

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 273 (h) to (n) and “an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 279 (b) to FIG. 279 (d) without passing through FIG. 279 (c)” is within the reception period A. It is assumed that the operation by the player is not accepted in.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period A occurs, the timing tM3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being received (and the automatic button function not being activated). In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tM3 (the time when the acceptance period A ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted), the timing tM2a (the action by the player within the acceptance period A is detected. In the same manner as the effect display device 1600 when the reception is made), not only do not hide the integrated mock image display IG, but also make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated mood image display IG. (In the example of FIG. 255, the mode shown in FIG. 263 (e3)).

  With such a configuration, even if the reception period A ends because the player does not receive the operation in time, the integrated image display IG is displayed within the reception period A after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what form the game was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the reception period A, when the operation by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 273 (j), the disappearance related effect (reception The display related to the disappearance related display A) corresponding to the period A is not started. At this time, this may be performed as long as it is a method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself. However, it is desirable that another image different from the integrated image display IG is not displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden.

  FIG. 274 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the condition B is satisfied as a result of the determination and the acceptance period B (second acceptance effect B) occurs. FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the reception period B (reception effect B) occurs.

  Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), and "variation pattern B" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern B is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (the effect depiction according to the variation pattern B, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 280 (a)”), and the variation effect During the execution period, the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “variation pattern B” itself. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 280 (a), a landscape depicting a river is displayed as the background image HG2.

  However, in the production related to the “variation pattern B”, regardless of which result is obtained as the production determination (advance determination), as shown in FIG. When the timing tN2 (for example, the timing within the SP reach state) at which the predetermined time B has elapsed since the start of the above has arrived, the acceptance period B (effective period) in which the “acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display B” is permitted It is generated (the situation shown in FIG. 280 (b)). The reception period B is generated after the specific BGM is output in the suppression mode or is set in the inaudible state. As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, the post-reception display is performed based on the acceptance. In the example shown in FIG. 280 (b), the reception period B is generated when the decorative pattern SZ is in the reach state.

  In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to the present embodiment, even when such a reception period B occurs, the same as when the reception period A described above occurs (FIG. 273). In relation to, the image display that indicates the reception target (operation receiving part, etc.), the gauge image display that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, the disappearance related display that makes it difficult to see the image display (the image display is visible) It becomes difficult), and the post-reception display indicating the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) is displayed according to the acceptance. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%". Note that, as described above, the mock image display is displayed as an “integrated muffled image display IG” that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display, but is not necessarily limited to this, and is separately provided. It may be displayed. In addition, when displaying the mock image display instead of the "integrated mock image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, also in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), when the timing tN1 before the reception period B occurs, the “integrated image display” is displayed. IG (displaying a general image, displaying a gauge image) "is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to cross the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is received when the acceptance is made within the corresponding acceptance period (here, the acceptance period B), or when the acceptance period B is ended without the acceptance. The fact that it is hidden is the same as in the case of the example shown in FIG. 273 (reception period A). The reception period B according to this example is set to end when the timing tN3 arrives when the player does not receive the operation (operation) (see FIG. 274 (h)).

  Here, in the above-mentioned “reception period A (see FIG. 279 (b))”, when the image of the image (integrated image display IG) is displayed, no character information corresponding to the image is displayed. , "Reception period B (see FIG. 280 (b))", when the image display (integrated image display IG) is displayed, character information related to the acceptance being accepted (here, , "Press") is displayed. That is, in the “reception period A” and the “reception period B”, both are the same mode as the general image display (integrated general image display IG) (of the plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) 232 (a) is used, when the "reception period B" occurs, the character information that does not appear when the "reception period A" occurs (here, "press") ) Is displayed, which suggests that the degree of expectation that can be suggested as a display after reception is different. In this example, when the acceptance period B occurs, the degree of expectation (ratio) in which the big hit symbol appears when the symbol is stopped is higher than when the acceptance period A occurs. Alternatively, in the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B, a mode in which the expectation that the big hit symbol appears is 100% can appear, whereas the reception according to the reception period A In the subsequent display A, it is possible to prevent a mode in which the expectation that a big hit symbol appears is 100% from appearing.

  In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 274 (a) to 274 (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tN2a within the acceptance period B. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 274 (a), the acceptance period B is ended and the acceptance period B is responded to when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tN2a. The post-reception display B (post-reception production B) will be started to be executed.

  Note that in the example shown in FIG. 280, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception period B. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period B, the first mode having relatively low expectations as the post-reception display B based on the acceptance (for example, In some cases, "10 kills!" Will be executed, or the second mode with relatively high expectation as the post-reception display B (eg, "100 kills!") Will be executed. There is.

  Although not described in detail, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the reception period B shown in FIG. 274 produces an effect in the same manner as the “second reception period” shown in FIG. 256 and the like. For example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (when the audible output of the acceptance sound B corresponding to the acceptance is started). At the timing tN2a, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  Here, after the end of the reception period, in order to facilitate the recognition of which of the multiple modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period, It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the integrated image display IG is displayed in the easily visible state" after the acceptance is set to be long. However, although the reception has been made and the audible output of the reception sound B has already started, the same mode as when the integrated image display IG was in the reception period (shown in FIG. 256). In the example, if the display continues as it is in the modes shown in (e1) and (e2) of FIG. 265, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation is such that the acceptance has been made. As a result, there is a concern that "after the reception effect in the execution state (here, reception sound B) is not noticed".

  Therefore, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 274 (b), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tN2a at which the reception period B ends due to the operation (operation) by the player being received. When (timing tN2b arrives), the display related to the "disappearance related display B" different from the disappearance related display A is started as "a manner in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". The “disappearance related display (disappearance related effect)” here is an image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated image display IG). That is. When the display of the "disappearance related effect" is started, the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is visible, and the display of the "disappearance related effect" is performed. The image display IG is gradually hidden.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "disappearance related display B" is displayed while the "integrated general image display IG (total image display, gauge image display)" is displayed. Therefore, at least a part of the area where the "disappearance related display B" is displayed overlaps the area where the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized, and thus the reception sound is received. It becomes possible to suggest that B is in a situation where it has already been executed. As a result, even when the reception sound B has already been executed, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It is possible to prevent a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that the integrated image display IG in B is not recognized in which mode. Further, even after the process for audibly outputting the reception sound B is started, the integrated image display IG is displayed until the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized (timing tN2a to tN2b). Since the aspect of the IG can be confirmed while maintaining good visual recognition, it is expected that amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

  Further, although illustration is omitted, in the reception period B, different modes as the disappearance related display B depending on whether a mode with low expectation appears as the post-reception production B corresponding thereto or a mode with high expectation. (Disappearance related display B1, B2) appears. That is, in this case, even if the “display B after reception” using the effect display device 1600 is not started yet, the disappearance related display B appearing on the effect display device 1600 is the first mode and the second mode. By confirming which one of the modes appears, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the “display B after reception” is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIGS. 274 (b) to 274 (d), the display related to the disappearance related display B (a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize) appears. When the timing tN2c arrives within the certain period, the "post-reception display B" corresponding to the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period B is started to be executed. As the post-reception display B, the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation (for example, “10 bodies destroyed!”) Is executed or the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, “100 Body destruction! ”) May be executed as described above.

  That is, in this case, the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B (disappearance related display B1 or disappearance related display B2)” are respectively displayed, and the “post-reception display B (first mode or first mode or 2 aspect) ”is started to be executed. In addition, since the display B is started after the reception while the integrated image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, it is suggested that the player's gaze point is “while accepting that the reception period B has already ended. It is expected that the "integrated image display IG" will be automatically shifted to the "post-reception display B" (after the timing tN2c).

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to the “post-acceptance display B” is started in this manner, the “post-acceptance display B” is displayed as shown in FIGS. 274 (b) to (d). Of the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B”, the “integrated image display IG” is hidden first. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance related display B" is hidden, and the "post-reception display B" is recognized under the condition that the visual confirmation is good. Is displayed (in FIG. 280, illustration of these effect developments is omitted). .

  In this regard, the “post-reception display B” is displayed in any one of a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the operation (operation) by the player being received. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 274 (d), the “display B after reception” is a relatively long time after the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B” are hidden. Will be executed over.

  By the way, in the production example (FIG. 279) corresponding to the reception period A described above, even if the reception is performed within the reception period A and the “display A after reception” is executed, the “display A after reception” is started. The background image is not switched before and after it is maintained. In this respect, in the production example (FIG. 280) corresponding to the reception period B, when the “display after reception B” is executed after reception is performed within the reception period B, the “display B after reception” is started. The background image may be switched before and after.

  With such a configuration, during the period in which the background image is not switched (timing tN2a to tN2b shown in FIG. 274), even if there is any display change in the effect display device 1600, the “post-reception display B Will be able to suggest that the situation has not yet started.

  Further, at this time, as the post-reception display B, the background image may be switched to the same background image when a low-expectation mode appears and when a high-expectation mode appears, or a low-expectation mode appears. The background image may be switched to a different background image depending on the case and the case where the high expectation appears. The background image may be switched when a mode with high expectations appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with low expectations appears.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reception period B occurs, the acceptance allowable sound is started to be output at the timing tN1 shown in FIG. 274 (f). That is, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the acceptance period B is audibly output in such a manner as to extend over the timing tN2 when the acceptance period B occurs, and the player can be audibly output while the acceptance permission sound is output. The operation (operation) by can be accepted.

  Here, in the reception period B, a long-time permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a short-time permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time are respectively included in the reception allowable sound. It is supposed to be output. In the example shown in FIG. 274 (f), the long-time permissible sound and the short-time permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the long-time allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound may be started to be output at the timing tN2 when the reception period B occurs or after that.

  Then, in the reception period B, if the player accepts the operation while the long-time permissible sound and / or the short-time permissible sound are audibly output, the long-time permissible sound is long based on the acceptance. The time permissible sound and / or the short time permissible sound is terminated halfway (halfway in the audible output state).

  Further, in the reception period B, as shown in FIG. 274 (f), when the player accepts the operation while the acceptance allowable sound (long-time allowable sound, short-time allowable sound) is audibly output. In addition to terminating the acceptance sound, the audible output of the acceptance sound B is started based on the acceptance sound. That is, in this case, in the reception period B, different from the case of the display change, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the reception period and the effect (second reception sound) performed in response to the acceptance are made. There will be no conflict (duplication) period.

  As with the “post-reception display B”, such a second reception sound does not display the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B” as shown in FIG. 274 (g). After that, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the second reception sound, different output sounds (modes) may be output depending on whether the mode with high expectation appears or the mode with low expectation appears as the post-reception display B. desirable. On the other hand, regarding the first reception sound, the same output sound (mode) is output when the mode with high expectation appears as the post-reception display A and with the mode with low expectation. Is desirable.

  In the reception period B, the long-term allowable sound and the short-time allowable sound are output as the reception allowable sounds, but these two allowable sounds may not necessarily be output and are the same as those in the reception period A. Thus, only one acceptance permission sound may be output.

  As shown in FIGS. 274 (d) and 280 (d), the post-reception display B according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of the display B overlaps the decorative pattern SZ. In this example, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ, and the post-reception display B is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative symbol SZ. As shown in FIG. 274 (d) and FIG. 280 (d), the post-reception display B according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, and as a result, The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved.

  On the other hand, FIGS. 274 (h) to 274 (n) assume the case where the operation by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period B occurs, the timing tN3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being received. In this respect, the acceptance period B is different from the acceptance period A and is set as a “reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated”. Therefore, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not received in the reception period B and the timing tN3 comes, the operation (operation) by the player in the reception period B is thereafter performed. The same post-acceptance display B as when it was received is generated.

  However, in the reception period B according to this embodiment, although the above-described automatic button function is enabled, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tN3, the timing tN2a (the player in the reception period B is set). As in the effect display device 1600 when the operation is accepted by the user), as shown in FIG. 274 (i), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image is not displayed. The display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even if the reception period B ends because the player's operation (operation) is not received in time, the integrated image image is received within the reception period B after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  After that, even when the operation by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 274 (i), when the timing tN3a when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing tN3 when the acceptance period B ends, As the "mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize", the display related to the disappearance related display B is started.

  In other words, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, and the "disappearance related display B" is displayed. Therefore, at least a part of the area in which the "disappearance related display B" is displayed overlaps with the area in which the "integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" is displayed.

  With such a configuration, even after the reception period B ends without receiving the reception, the integrated image display IG is visually recognized even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed. By making it difficult, it becomes possible to suggest that the acceptance period B has ended. Further, even when the acceptance period B has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. It is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period B.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, the mode of the disappearance related display B that appears when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period B is the operation (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B. ) Is what would appear if it had been accepted.

  That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the acceptance period B, after the acceptance period B ends, the integrated image display IG is hidden. Only by confirming the appearance of the "disappearance-related display B" that appears, it is possible to recognize whether the post-reception display B was executed in a manner with low expectations or with a high expectations. As a result, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  Then, after this, when the timing tN3b arrives, the "post-acceptance display B" is started to be executed in a mode that appears if the operation (operation) by the player within the acceptance period B has been accepted (FIG. 280 (b). 280) appears, the situation shown in FIG. 280 (c) appears regardless of the presence / absence of operation.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 274 (i) to 274 (k), first, of the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display B”, the “integrated image display IG” is not set. To display. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance related display B" is hidden.

  Note that the timing at which the "disappearance related display B" appears and the timing at which the "post-acceptance display B" is started do not have to be after the timing tN3 at which the acceptance period B ends, and the acceptance period B ends. The timing may be the timing tN3 to be performed, or may be a timing earlier than that.

  FIG. 275 is a time chart showing an example of the effect contents when the condition C is satisfied as a result of the determination and the acceptance period C (reception effect C) occurs. FIG. 281 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the acceptance period C (reception effect C) occurs.

  Now, suppose that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), and "variation pattern C" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern C is performed. Then, after that, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect description according to the variation pattern C, sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started, and according to the result of the notice effect determination within the execution period of the variation effect. The effect (preliminary effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected "third variation pattern" itself. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 281 (a), a landscape depicting a desert is displayed as the background image HG3.

  However, in the production related to the “variation pattern C”, the predetermined time C has elapsed since the variation production of the decorative pattern SZ was started, whichever result was obtained as the production determination (preliminary determination). When the timing tO2 (which may be the timing before the SP reach state occurs or the timing within the SP reach state) arrives, the “acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display C” is allowed. A reception period C (valid period) is generated. The acceptance period C is generated after the specific BGM is output in the suppression mode or made inaudible. Thus, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the post-reception display C is performed based on the acceptance. However, this configuration is not always necessary, and the acceptance period C (effective period) may be generated as a result of the notice production determination.

  In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to the present embodiment, when such an acceptance period C occurs, the degree of expectation (the proportion of the jackpot pattern appearing) is suggested according to the acceptance. Although the post-reception display C is performed, unlike the case where the above-described reception periods A and B occur (FIGS. 273 and 274), in relation to this, a reception target (operation receiving unit, etc.) is suggested. Image display, gauge image display that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, disappearance related display that makes visual image display difficult (mode in which visual image display becomes difficult to see), etc. will not be performed. .. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 275 (b), when the reception period C occurs, a scale image display, a gauge image display, and character information prompting an operation are displayed. There is no such thing. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to recognize at which timing the reception period C occurs and at which timing the reception period C ends, and even to recognize the existence of the reception period C itself. Will be done. It should be noted that the reception period C according to this example is set to end when the timing tO3 arrives when the operation (operation) by the player is not received (see FIG. 275 (h)).

  In this regard, in the examples shown in FIGS. 275 (a) to 275 (g), it is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tO2a within the acceptance period C. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 275 (a), the acceptance period C is ended and the acceptance period C is responded to when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tO2a. Execution of the post-reception display C (post-reception production C) will be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 281, only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display C corresponding to the reception period C. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period C, the first mode having relatively low expectation as the post-reception display C based on the acceptance (for example, When a mode in which the number of ghosts appearing as a ghost group is small) is executed, or a second mode in which the display C after reception has a relatively high degree of expectation (for example, a mode in which the number of ghosts appearing as a ghost group is large) is performed. It may be executed.

  As described above, during the acceptance period C, as shown in FIG. 275 (c), the disappearance related display is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted. Further, when the reception period C occurs, as shown in FIG. 275 (f), the reception permission sound is not output.

  As shown in FIGS. 275 (d) and 281 (c), the post-reception display C according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of the display C overlaps the decorative pattern SZ. However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the post-reception display C is not preferentially displayed on the decorative design SZ, but the decorative design SZ is preferentially displayed on the post-reception display C. .. Then, the post-reception display C according to this example is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display, as shown in FIGS. 275 (d) and 281 (d). ..

  On the other hand, in FIGS. 275 (h) to (n) and "an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 281 (b) to FIG. 281 (d) without passing through FIG. 281 (c)" is within the acceptance period C. It is assumed that the operation by the player is not accepted in.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period C occurs, the above-mentioned timing tO3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being received (and the automatic button function not being activated). However, during the reception period C, there is no possibility that any display change will occur with the end of the period C. Therefore, the timing tO3 (the reception period C ends and the operation of the player is Even when the acceptance is no longer permitted), only the background image HG3 is flowing in the effect display device 1600, and it is difficult for the player to recognize it.

  276 and 277 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition D is satisfied as a result of the determination and the acceptance period D (reception effect D) occurs. FIG. 282 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the acceptance period D (reception effect D) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the “variation pattern D1 (FIG. 276)” or If the "variation pattern D2 (Fig. 277)" is selected, the peripheral control MPU 1511a first performs an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (the effect depiction according to the variation patterns D1, D2, the sound output of the specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 282 (a)”). ), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the notice effect determination is additionally added to the effect of the selected “variation pattern D1” or “variation pattern D2” itself. It will be executed. In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 282 (a), a landscape depicting a mountain and a river is displayed as the background image HG4a.

  That is, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation patterns D1 and D2, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 276 (a) or FIG. When the timing tP2 when the predetermined time D has elapsed from the start of the SZ variation effect arrives (when the condition D is satisfied), the "acceptance regarding the post-acceptance display D" is permitted, and the reception period D (effective) Period) is generated (“the situation shown in FIG. 282 (b)”). As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the reception period D, the post-reception display D is performed based on the reception (situation shown in FIG. 282 (c)).

  However, more precisely, when the variation pattern D1 that causes the reach effect is selected, the reception period D is predetermined after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started, as shown in FIG. 276 (a). This occurs when the timing tP2-D1 when the time D1 has elapsed (the timing that comes after the timing when the reach state is formed) arrives (when the condition D1 is satisfied), but the reach effect is not generated. When the variation pattern D2 is selected, as shown in FIG. 277 (a), when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (condition D2 is It will occur when it is established).

  Moreover, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect is started is shown in FIG. 276 (e). As described above, before the timing tP2-D1 arrives, a state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or inaudible is generated. That is, in this case, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppression mode or in the inaudible state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is generated, FIG. 277 (e). As shown in, the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing mode at the time when the timing tP2-D2 arrives. That is, in this case, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner.

  In this way, whether the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2-D1 at which the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the change effect of the change pattern D1 that causes the reach effect is started arrives, or does not generate the reach effect. The form of the effect differs depending on whether or not it occurs when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the change effect of the change pattern D2 has started is reached.

  First, FIG. 276 shows an example of an effect when the reception period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 for generating the reach effect is started is reached. 282 and FIG. 282.

  As shown in FIGS. 276 (a) and 276 (b), in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such an acceptance period D, an acceptance target (such as an operation accepting unit). ), A gauge image display that indicates the remaining time of the reception period, and a post-reception display that indicates the degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols appearing) according to the acceptance. There is. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to this embodiment is displayed as "integrated muffled image display" that is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the gauge image display. It is not limited and may be displayed separately. In addition, when displaying the mock image display instead of the "integrated mock image display", the gauge image display may not necessarily be displayed. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), when the timing tP1 before the reception period D occurs, “ The integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) is displayed. That is, the "integrated image display IG" is displayed so as to cross the timing tP2 (tP2-D1) when the reception period D occurs. The "integrated image display IG" is hidden (not visible) when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D or when the acceptance period D is ended without the acceptance. It should be noted that the reception period D according to this example is ended when the timing tP3 comes when the player does not receive the operation (operation) (see FIG. 276 (h)). ..

  In this respect, in the example shown in FIGS. 276 (a) to (g) and in the example of following the production route of FIG. 282 (b) → FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (f) → FIG. 282 (c), reception It is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tPx within the period D. That is, in this case, the reception period D is ended based on the operation (operation) by the player being received at the timing tPx, and the post-reception display D (post-reception effect D) corresponding to the reception period D is displayed. Execution will be started.

  In the example shown in FIG. 282 (c), only one aspect is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception period D. However, although illustration is omitted, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, the first mode having relatively low expectation as the post-reception display D based on the acceptance (for example, The cut-in by the princess character may be performed, or the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation as the post-reception display D (for example, cut-in by the samurai character) may be performed.

  However, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276 (b), at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is received (here, the timing tPx), the integrated image display IG is hidden. Not to say, it does not make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated image display IG.

  Further, in the reception period D, as shown in FIG. 276 (c), the disappearance-related effects even when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tPx when the reception period D ends because the operation (operation) by the player is received. Is never displayed. That is, in the reception period D, the disappearance-related display corresponding to this (image displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden (another image different from the integrated image display IG)) Is not prepared, the integrated image display IG is suddenly hidden.

  Note that, even in the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276 (b) to 276 (d), when the timing tPx1 arrives while the integrated image display IG is being displayed, the player is in the reception period D. The “display D after reception” corresponding to the acceptance of the operation (operation) is started.

  However, in the reception period D, when an operation (operation) by the player is received, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), the “post-reception display D” is displayed on the integrated image display IG. The display is started in such a manner that it overlaps with all of the area, and is displayed preferentially to the integrated image display IG. “Display D after reception” may be displayed on the entire screen of effect display device 1600.

  With such a configuration, when the "post-reception display D" is started to be displayed based on the operation (operation) received by the player, the integrated image display IG is suddenly hidden (displayed on the layer). Will be set to (even if it remains), and it will be possible to provide a different directivity from the case of other reception periods that use extinction effects and the like. The post-reception display D according to this example is also hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started.

  Also, in the reception period D, unlike the cases of other reception periods, even if the display related to the “post-reception display D” is started based on the reception, the reception is made as a trigger. The process for displaying the "integrated image display IG" is not terminated. That is, in the reception period D, the process for displaying the “integrated image display IG” is continued until a predetermined specific condition is satisfied (here, timing tP3), and the predetermined specific condition is set. I try to end it when is satisfied. In addition, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted and the acceptance period D continues until the predetermined specific condition is satisfied, the "integrated image display IG" In addition to terminating the display process, a process of terminating the acceptance period D is also performed.

  That is, in the reception period D, when the “post-reception display D” is started to be displayed based on the acceptance, the period D is ended based on the acceptance. The processing relating to the display of the "integrated image display IG" itself is not ended, but the display on the layer is continued. However, since the “display D after reception” is preferentially displayed to the “integrated image display IG”, the “integrated image display IG” is changed to the “integrated image display IG”. As described above, the image is hidden (not visible) (in FIG. 276 and FIG. 277, the period covered by the diagonal line is displayed by the “post-reception display D”). (This corresponds to the period during which the image display IG) is hidden (invisible)).

  In this case, the “integrated image display IG” may not be completely hidden, but may be made difficult to be seen through the predetermined transmittance set in the “display D after reception”.

  Further, in the reception period D, as shown in FIGS. 276 (b) and 282 (b), (e), and (f), the state in which the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to continue is continued. In the meantime, the “integrated image display IG” is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIGS. 276 and 277), and the “integrated image display IG” is changed from the non-display state. The display state may be set (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even when the "integrated image display IG" is in a non-display state, if the player performs an operation (operation), the operation (operation) is accepted, and the operation (operation) is accepted. Based on this, the post-reception display D will be performed (see the example of following the production route as shown in FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (c)).

  In this example, if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period D, is it accepted before the "integrated image display IG" is in the non-display state (Fig. 282). (B) → FIG. 282 (c)), or was it accepted when the “integrated image display IG” was in a non-display state (FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (c)), or “integrated”? Regardless of whether the “chemical image display IG” is returned to the display state and then the reception is performed (FIG. 282 (f) → FIG. 282 (c)), the same mode as the “post-reception display D” (FIG. 282 ( c)) is made to appear.

  With such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 282 (e), although the reception period D has occurred, the reception period C in which the “integrated image display IG” is not displayed (FIG. 281 ( It is possible to provide an atmosphere as if it was suddenly replaced with (see b)), and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through such a surprise production. On the other hand, even when the player accepts an operation (operation) under a situation where the reception period C seems to be suddenly changed (the integrated image display IG is not displayed), the reception period Since the same mode (FIG. 282 (c)) is displayed as the “post-reception display D” corresponding to D, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Moreover, in the reception period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the “integrated image display IG” changes from the display state to the non-display state. According to such a configuration, when the "integrated image display IG" is changed to the non-display state, it is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere in which it is suddenly replaced with another reception period. become.

  Particularly, in this example, the "background image HG4a" in which the mountains and the river are drawn is changed to the "background image HG4b" in which a desert different from the "background image HG3" is drawn (Fig. 282 ( b) → FIG. 282 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the “integrated image display IG” is changed to the non-display state, an atmosphere like a reception period C that may occur when the background of the desert is suddenly replaced is more suitably created. Will be expected.

  In this example, when the "integrated image display IG" is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4b" to "background image HG4a". (FIG. 282 (e) → FIG. 282 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D from another reception period (particularly the reception period C) will be created more favorably.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), the post-reception display D according to this example is displayed at a position where at least a part of the display D overlaps the decorative pattern SZ (displayed on the entire screen. It may be one)). In this example, the integrated image display IG is preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative design SZ, and the post-reception display D is also preferentially displayed with respect to the decorative design SZ. The post-reception display D according to this example, as shown in FIG. 276 (d) and FIG. 282 (d), is hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the display. The visibility of the decorative pattern SZ is improved. Note that the situation shown in FIG. 282 (d) shows a situation in which the production in the reach state progresses and enters the SP reach production.

  However, when the post-reception display D is preferentially displayed for the decorative design SZ, the effect (reach state or the like) of the decorative design SZ may be viewed until the display time as the post-reception display D elapses. There is concern that the interest in playing games may decline due to being unable to do so.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, acceptance of an operation (operation) by the player is allowed during the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed, and the acceptance is performed. With this as a trigger, the processing related to the display of “post-acceptance display D” is to be terminated (see the example of following the production route such as FIG. 282 (c) → FIG. 282 (g)). That is, in this case, depending on the operation of the player, the timing of ending the display of the “post-reception display D” can be reached earlier (before the display time of the post-reception display D has elapsed). (FIG. 282 (g)), it is possible to suppress deterioration of the entertainment level of the game due to being unable to see the effect (reach state or the like) by the decorative symbol SZ by the “display D after reception”. ..

  In this example, in the reception period D, the operation content (pressing operation button 410) required to start displaying the “post-reception display D” and the period after the “reception display D” is displayed. The operation contents (pressing operation on the operation button 410) required to end the “display D after reception” early are set as the same operation contents, but these operation contents are different from each other. May be. For example, while the operation content required to start displaying the “post-acceptance display D” is “pressing operation button 410”, the operation content required to end the “post-acceptance display D” is displayed. The operation may be "extracting the sword decoration 5001", or may be a combination of "pressing operation on the operation button 410" and "extracting operation of the sword decoration 5001".

  In any case, in the period in which the "post-acceptance display D" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 282 (c), what content is the operation required to end the "post-acceptance display D". It is desirable to clearly indicate whether or not by displaying "text information (cancel in the figure)" or "display of a full scale image". In this case, it is desirable that the “display image after reception” be displayed preferentially to the “display D after reception” in a position overlapping with the “display D after reception” (in the figure, “display after reception”). D image is displayed in a position that does not overlap with "D"). Also, the “text information” is not prepared as a separate image from the “display D after reception”, but is displayed as part of the “display D after reception” itself (image on the same layer). May be set.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the reception period D occurs, as shown in FIG. 276 (f), the reception acceptable sound is not audibly output, and in this respect also, The performance common to that of the “period C” is provided, and this also makes the “reception period C” aware. Even when the “integrated image display IG” is hidden or returned to the display state, the acceptance permission sound is not audibly output.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIGS. 276 (h) to (n) and the example of following the production route shown in FIGS. 282 (b), (e), (f), (g), and (d) are within the acceptance period D. It is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the acceptance period D occurs, the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (and the automatic button function is not enabled), and the above-mentioned “predetermined specific condition (here, The arrival of timing tP3) ”is established. In this respect, in the effect display device 1600 at the timing tP3 (the time when the acceptance period D ends and the acceptance of the action by the player is no longer permitted), the timing tPx (the action by the player within the acceptance period D is detected. In the same manner as the effect display device 1600 when the reception is made), not only do not hide the integrated mock image display IG, but also make it difficult to visually recognize the integrated mood image display IG. There is.

  According to such a configuration, even if the reception period D ends because the player's operation (operation) is not received in time, the integrated image image is received within the reception period D after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what manner the display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the reception period D, when the operation (operation) by the player is not received, as shown in FIG. 276 (j), as the “mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized”, the disappearance-related The effect display is not started. At this time, this may be performed as long as it is a method of fading out the integrated image display IG itself. However, it is desirable that another image different from the integrated image display IG is not displayed for a predetermined time until the integrated image display IG is hidden.

  Next, an example of an effect when the acceptance period D occurs when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect has started is reached, 277 and FIG. 282 will be described in detail. Note that FIG. 282 assumes a case where the acceptance period D occurs after forming the reach state, and does not correspond when the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 277 occurs, but it is shown in FIG. 277. Also in the reception period D to be performed, among the effect contents shown in FIG. 282, the difference is that the reception period D occurs when the reach state is not formed and the point that the SP reach effect is not entered after the reception period D ends. Since it is basically the same as the above, the description will be made with reference to FIG. 282 for convenience of explanation.

  When the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) at which the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is reached, the acceptance period D is also the same acceptance period as the above-described acceptance period D. Therefore, the processing content performed when the acceptance is made and the processing content performed when the acceptance is not made are the same as the above-described processing content unless otherwise specified.

  However, as described above, when the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D1 when the predetermined time D1 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D1 that causes the reach effect is generated, the reception period D is generated as illustrated in FIG. ), A state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner or inaudible is generated before the timing tP2-D1 arrives. On the other hand, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is generated, FIG. 277 (e). As shown in, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or inaudible is not generated before the timing tP2-D2 arrives.

  Therefore, in the case where the reception period D is generated when the timing tP2-D2 when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is generated, it is shown in FIG. 277 (e). As described above, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner.

  However, when the acceptance period D is generated when the timing tP2 (tP2-D2) when the predetermined time D2 has elapsed since the variation effect of the variation pattern D2 that does not generate the reach effect is started, the acceptance period D is generated. In the state in which is generated, the specific BGM, which has been audibly output in the non-suppressing mode until then, is set to be in the state of being audibly output in the suppressing mode or in the non-audible state.

  According to such a configuration, the specific BGM is displayed as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode, but thereafter the specific BGM is It is as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) in which the operation (operation) by the player can be received while the audible output is performed in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state occurs. The atmosphere will change, and it will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in order to obtain such an effect more suitably, when the acceptance is made in the acceptance period B, the high expectation (eg, a big hit symbol appears) that cannot appear when the acceptance is made in the acceptance period A. It is desirable that the post-reception display may be displayed in a mode that suggests that the ratio is 100%).

  Further, in the acceptance period D according to this embodiment, when the timing tP2a when a predetermined time has elapsed after the acceptance period D occurs, the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is hidden. As described above, regarding the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppression mode or is set in the inaudible state, the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden. The timing tP2a is set to arrive before the timing tP2a.

  If such a configuration is further provided, the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or is inaudible while the general image display (integrated general image display IG) is displayed. Therefore, it is expected that the reception period B (see FIG. 274) is changed to an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the specific BGM is audibly output in the suppression mode or in the non-audible state, the timing tP2a at which the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden is set. Since it arrives, it is possible to more appropriately provide the atmosphere as if the reception period C (see FIG. 275) occurs at the timing tP2a.

  In the acceptance period D according to this example, when the timing tP2b comes after a lapse of a predetermined time after the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden, the image display (integrated image display) is performed. IG) is displayed again as described above (see FIG. 282 (f)). However, the specific BGM continues to be in the "state of being output in an audible manner in a suppressed manner or in the state of being inaudible" even after the full-scale image display (integrated full-scale image display IG) is displayed again in this way. ..

  277 (a) to (g) are operations (operations) performed by the player when the specific BGM is in the “audible output in the suppression mode or the inaudible state” during the reception period D described above. Is assumed to have been accepted.

  As shown in FIGS. 277 (a) to 277 (g), even in the reception period D, as in the reception period B, as shown in FIGS. 277 (a), (b), and (e), the specific BGM is Even if the player's operation (operation) is accepted in the “state of being audibly output in the suppressed mode or in the state of being inaudible”, the specific BGM starts the audible output in the non-controlled mode in response to this. Nothing is done, and the "state of being audibly output in a suppressed mode or the state of being inaudible" is maintained. This also makes it possible to more appropriately provide an atmosphere as if the reception period B (see FIG. 274) has occurred.

  277 (a ′) to (g ′) shows that, during the reception period D described above, the timing tPy at which the specific BGM is set to the “audible output in the suppression mode or the inaudible state” comes It is assumed that the operation (operation) by the player is received before, that is, the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode.

  As shown in FIG. 277 (a ′) to (g ′), the operation (operation) by the player is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing mode during the reception period D described above. In such a case, the specific BGM is set to "a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is inaudible" in response to the acceptance. That is, in this case, when acceptance is made when the specific BGM is in the state of being audibly output in the suppression mode or in the state of being inaudible, the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppression mode upon the reception. However, when the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode, when the acceptance is made, the reception of the specific BGM causes the specific BGM to be “audibly output in the suppressing mode or in the non-audible state. It will be. As a result, after the acceptance period D occurs, it becomes possible to urge the player to perform an operation at an early stage that can affect the specific BGM by the action (operation) by the player, and the acceptance period D occurs. It becomes possible to maintain a suitable feeling of tension.

  As described above, in the reception period D according to this example, the “impression image display corresponding to the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 282 (b)) is triggered by the acceptance. Do not terminate the processing for displaying. That is, by preferentially displaying the “post-reception display D” for the relevant image display (integrated image display IG) whose display state is maintained on the layer, “the image display corresponding to the acceptance period D ( "Integrated image display IG)" is not displayed (invisible).

  Further, in the "display D after reception" according to this example, as described above, the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted during the display period, and when the acceptance is made, this is taken as a trigger. The processing relating to the display of the “post-acceptance display D” is to be ended early (see an example of following the production route such as FIG. 282 (c) → FIG. 282 (g)). Further, at this time, when the “received image display (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 282 (c))” and the character information (cancellable) corresponding to the post-reception display D are also accepted, this is triggered. As a result, the processing related to the display is ended (see FIG. 282 (g)).

  In such a configuration, depending on the timing at which the operation (operation) by the player is accepted during the period in which the "post-reception display D" is displayed, "a simulated image display corresponding to the accepted period D (integrated simulated image In a situation in which the process of displaying "display IG)" is continued, a situation may occur in which the process of displaying "post-acceptance display D" is terminated early. That is, in this case, the display of the “post-reception display D” that has been preferentially displayed with respect to the “display of the image of the corresponding image in the reception period D (integrated image display IG shown in FIG. 282 (b))” is terminated. As a result, the "display of the image corresponding to the reception period D" is displayed again. At this time, the "reception period D" itself may be generated again.

  In this way, if the "reception period D" is generated again after the process for displaying the "post-acceptance display D" is ended early, the process for displaying the "post-acceptance display D" is terminated early. Even after the operation, the "post-acceptance display D" can be displayed again if the operation (operation) by the player is reaccepted within the "acceptance period D" that has occurred again. Like As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the "display D after reception" is ended by mistake early.

  By the way, in the acceptance periods A to D shown in FIGS. 273 to 282, the predetermined patterns A to D have elapsed since the fluctuation patterns A to C, D1 and D2 were selected as the fluctuation patterns and the symbol fluctuation was started. It has been described above as what occurs sometimes. However, the reception periods A to D do not have to occur only when different variation patterns are selected, and, for example, as described later, when one variation pattern is selected, this is triggered. May be set so that all of the reception periods A to D occur.

  Further, as described above, the reception period D is generated as a reception period having a special property as compared with the other reception periods A to C. Therefore, such a reception period D may be set as a reception period that can occur only when the number of holdings is less than a predetermined number. That is, in this case, if the number of holdings becomes less than a predetermined number as a result of the player trying to interrupt the game, the reception period D starts to occur, and it seems that the reception period A to C changes each time. It will be possible to expect that the game will not be stopped, or even if the game is stopped, an impression that the game is interesting You will be able to have it at the end.

  FIGS. 278 (a) and 278 (b) are tables showing a setting example relating to the generation conditions of the reception periods A to D when these performances are to be realized.

  First, FIG. 278 (a) is a table that is referred to when the number of reservations is "2" to "4" when the reservation is exhausted. In other words, in this case, even if the symbol variation according to the hold exhaustion is started, the number of holdings does not become "0", it is one of "1" to "3", and there is a risk that the game will be stopped. Since the situation is low, the acceptance period D does not occur regardless of which of the "first variation pattern", "second variation pattern", and "third variation pattern" is executed. ..

  More specifically, when the hold number is "2" to "4" and the hold is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, as a result of the effect determination (advance determination), 70% of the result is obtained. None of the acceptance periods A to D occur at a rate, and only the acceptance period A of the acceptance periods A to D occurs at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (advance notice determination).

  Further, when the number of holdings is any of "2" to "4", when the holding is exhausted and the second variation pattern is executed, the reception period is 50% as a result of the performance determination (advance determination). Only the reception period C occurs from A to D, and the reception period A and the reception period C occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination).

  Further, when the number of holdings is any of "2" to "4", when the holding is exhausted and the third variation pattern is executed, the acceptance period is 10% as a result of the performance determination (advance determination). B and the acceptance period C occur, and as a result of the performance determination (advance determination), the acceptance period A, the acceptance period B, and the acceptance period C occur at a rate of 90%.

  It should be noted that the reception period A is 5 from the start of fluctuation regardless of which of the “first fluctuation pattern”, the “second fluctuation pattern”, and the “third fluctuation pattern” having different fluctuation times is selected. It is possible to occur when the second has elapsed, and the acceptance period C is 15 seconds after the fluctuation starts regardless of which of the "second fluctuation pattern" and the "third fluctuation pattern" is selected. When the “third variation pattern” is selected, the reception period B can be generated when 35 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation.

  Further, the reception periods B and C are not subject to the effect determination (advance determination), and are always generated when the corresponding variation pattern is selected. It is targeted for determination (advance determination), and can be generated only when a special result is obtained in the effect determination. However, the reception periods B and C may be the target of the effect determination (advance determination), or the reception period A may not be the target of the effect determination (advance determination).

  Next, FIG. 278 (b) is a table referred to when the number of reservations is “1” when the reservation is exhausted. In other words, in this case, the number of holdings becomes "0" when the symbol fluctuation according to the pending consumption is started, and there is a risk that the game will be stopped unless a new holding is added within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation. , The reception period regardless of which of all the variation patterns including the “first variation pattern”, the “second variation pattern”, and the “third variation pattern” that are selected as the variation patterns are executed. D is generated.

  More specifically, when the number of holdings is “1” and the holding is exhausted and the first variation pattern is executed, as a result of the effect determination (notice determination), the acceptance period A to D is set at a rate of 70%. Only the reception period D occurs, and the reception period A and the reception period D occur at a rate of 30% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination).

  In addition, when the number of holdings is “1” and the holding is exhausted and the second variation pattern is executed, the acceptance period C and the acceptance period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination). However, the acceptance period A, the acceptance period C, and the acceptance period D occur at a rate of 50% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination).

  Further, when the number of holdings is “1” and the holding is exhausted and the third variation pattern is executed, the acceptance period B, the acceptance period C, and the acceptance period C at a rate of 10% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination). The acceptance period D occurs, and the acceptance period A, the acceptance period B, the acceptance period C, and the acceptance period D occur at a rate of 90% as a result of the effect determination (advance determination).

  In this embodiment, the “first variation pattern” is a variation pattern that does not form a reach state, and the “second variation pattern” and the “third variation pattern” are set as variation patterns that form a reach state. ing. Therefore, when the “first variation pattern” is selected, the acceptance period D will occur in the manner described with reference to FIG. 277. On the other hand, when the “second variation pattern” or the “third variation pattern” is selected, the acceptance period D will occur in the mode described with reference to FIG. 276.

  In addition, the reception period A, the reception period B, and the reception period C have a predetermined time (5 seconds, 35 seconds, 15 seconds) after the symbol variation starts regardless of the type of the variation pattern and the number of holdings. While it is possible to generate each when the elapsed time, the acceptance period D, depending on which of the first variation pattern, the second variation pattern, and the third variation pattern is selected, the symbol variation The time (10 seconds, 30 seconds, 50 seconds) from the start to the occurrence is different.

  That is, in this case, since it is possible to generate the acceptance period D by aiming for each type of variation pattern at a timing that does not interfere with the effect contents, the acceptance period D is set in any of the variation patterns. Can be generated appropriately.

  In the above-described production example, as the reception period, a plurality of reception periods A (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 2-A”) and reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “configuration 2-A”) There is a reception period. In this regard, during the reception period A, only one aspect (integrated mutilated image display IGa shown in FIG. 232 (a)) can be displayed as the mutilated image display (here, integrated mutilated image display IG). In the reception period B, a plurality of modes (integrated model image displays IGa to IGd shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) are prepared as a model image display. A mode according to the result of the determination (advance determination) "is selectively displayed. According to such a configuration, in the reception period B, since the performance that cannot appear when the reception period A occurs, the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected. It will be possible to improve the interests.

  Regarding the “plurality of mock image displays” that can be displayed during the acceptance period B, it is important to make the degree of expectation that a big hit symbol appears different depending on which one of the mock image displays is displayed. It is more desirable to improve Further, any one of the “plurality of modes of the image display” may be the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the reception period A. In this case, it is desirable that the “lowest expectation mode” of the “plurality of mode image displays” is the same as the “one mode” that can be displayed during the reception period A.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “configuration 2-A”) is further provided, and in the reception period A and the reception period D, only one mode of displaying a simulated image is provided. Is displayed. Then, in the "reception period B" in which the mock image display is displayed in any of a plurality of modes, it is prevented that the mock image display is not hidden until the valid state is finished. On the other hand, of the “reception period A” and the “reception period B” in which the simulated image display is displayed in only one mode, in the “reception period A”, until the valid state (reception period) ends Although the image display is not hidden in the meantime, in the "reception period B", until the valid state (reception period) ends (while the valid state continues). In the middle of the process, the image display that had been displayed until then is hidden (see FIG. 282 (e)). That is, in this case, even in the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" in which only one mode is displayed as the mock image display, the performance of whether the mock image display is hidden on the way or not As a result of being provided, it becomes possible to suitably improve the interest of the game until the operation (motion) by the player is detected.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period D, the same display change (after reception is accepted) regardless of whether the reception is performed in the period in which the image display is displayed or in the period in which the image display is not displayed. (Display) is produced (production progress shown in FIG. 282 (b) → (c), FIG. 282 (e) → (c)). That is, in this case, since the effective state (reception period) itself continues without change even after the display of the mock image is hidden, the performance (use of the "reception period D") It is possible to suppress deterioration of the interest in playing a game when creating (non-display of image display).

  In addition, in the above-described production example, during the reception period D, the mock image display is hidden on the way and then the mood image display is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the acceptance period D has ended even though the acceptance period D has not ended, the misunderstanding is resolved by the display of the simulated image display again thereafter. Will be able to.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the "reception period A" and the "reception period D" are made common in that only one aspect can be displayed as the image display, but it is accepted. The contents of the display changes that appear when the display changes are different from each other. As a result, it becomes possible to add an interest in what kind of display change will appear when the acceptance is made.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the "reception period D", the operation means (the operation button 410 in this case) to be accepted is made to emit light during the period in which the simulated image display is displayed, This may prompt the player to perform an operation (operation). Further, in this case, even during the period during which the mock image display is hidden in the "reception period D", the operation means (here Then, the operation button 410) may be made to emit light. In this respect, in the "reception period C", if the operation means (here, the operation button 410) to be accepted is not made to emit light, it is possible to determine which type of the reception period is occurring. You will be able to suggest.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 3-A”) and the reception period C (second of the configuration 3-A). Corresponding to the reception period) is prepared. Then, in the reception period A or the reception period B, when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs, a simulated image display (here, integrated image display IG) is displayed, and then the reception period A or the reception period B. The mock image display is not hidden until the end of, and the player's operation can be accepted while the mock image display is being displayed (FIG. 273, FIG. 274, FIG. 279, FIG. 280, etc.), and during the acceptance period C, it is possible to accept the operation (operation) by the player while the mimic image display is not displayed (see FIG. 275, FIG. 281, etc.), and as described above. The “acceptance acceptable sound” is audibly output when the acceptance period A or the acceptance period B occurs, but is not audibly output when the acceptance period C occurs.

  According to such a configuration, not only the "acceptance period A or the acceptance period B" in which the acceptance permission sound is audibly output and the image is displayed, but the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. Since there is a "reception period C" in which the reception is made while the image display is not displayed, there is a possibility that the display may occur after reception at various timings not intended by the player. It becomes possible to raise awareness, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the acceptance period D (corresponding to the third acceptance period of “configuration 3-A”) is further provided, and the acceptance period C occurs in the acceptance period C (FIG. 275, FIG. 281). After that, the image display is not displayed from the end to the end, and the operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the image display is not displayed, but the acceptance period D (FIG. 276, FIG. 277). 282), the mock image display is hidden only for a part of the reception period D, and a period in which the mood image display is displayed and a period in which the mood image display is hidden are shown. In either case, the player may be allowed to accept an operation (operation). That is, in this case, the reception period D includes the side surfaces as the reception periods A and B (acceptance while the image display is being displayed) and the side surfaces as the reception period C (when the image display is not being displayed). It will be possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it will have both. In addition, since the operation (operation) by the player may continue to be accepted after the image display is hidden, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted. It is expected to prevent a decrease in the entertainment level when the image display is hidden without being displayed.

  Further, the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output when the acceptance periods A and B occur, but is not audibly output when the acceptance period C occurs and when the acceptance period D occurs. That is, in this case, in the reception period D, at the timing when the reception period D occurs, the side surface as the reception periods A and B (the image display is displayed) and the side surface as the reception period C (the reception acceptable sound is It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game because it has both of (not output).

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period D, the same display change (after reception is accepted) regardless of whether the reception is performed in the period in which the image display is displayed or in the period in which the image display is not displayed. Display). That is, in this case, since the effective state (reception period) itself continues without change even after the display of the mock image is hidden, the performance (use of the "reception period D") It is possible to suppress deterioration of the interest in playing a game when creating (non-display of image display).

  In addition, in the above-described example performance, the background image that appears when the reception period A or the reception period B occurs (FIGS. 279 and 280) and the background image that appears when the reception period C occurs ( 281). This makes it possible to give the impression that the background image is different depending on the type of reception period.

  In this respect, in the above-described production example, the background image is changed during the reception period D, and the image display is not performed from the period when the image display is displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. Since the period is changed to the displayed period, it is possible to provide the dramatic effect as if the period is changed to another reception period within the reception period D.

  Further, within the acceptance period D, the background image that has once changed is restored to the original state, and the simulated image display is changed from the period when the simulated image display is hidden in accordance with the timing of the restoration. Since the period is changed to the displayed period, it is possible to provide the drama within the reception period D as if returned to the reception period before the transition.

  The background image changes within the acceptance period D when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted, and rather than when the predetermined time has elapsed. When the operation (operation) by the player is received before, the background image does not change even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the period D. As a result, it is possible to prevent the background image from changing to a different background image while the post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D is being executed, and it is possible to preferably maintain amusement of the game.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, during the reception periods A and B and the reception period D, when the reception is made while the reproduction image display is being displayed, the reproduction image display is hidden. At that time, in the reception periods A and B, "disappearing EF" as an image different from the image of the mock image is displayed in accordance with the display of the mock image is not displayed. Along with the non-display, the "disappearing EF" as an image different from the normal image display is not displayed. That is, in this case, it is possible to recognize the possibility that the "reception period D" has occurred if the "disappearing EF" does not appear when the reception is made. Even though the side surfaces A and B are provided, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game because it is not possible to understand which reception period is occurring.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 5-A”) and the reception period D (second of the configuration 5-A). Corresponding to the reception period) is prepared. The reception period A or the reception period B is shown in FIG. 278 regardless of the number of pieces of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations in the hold state (holding number)) stored by the holding storage unit. When the three fluctuation patterns (corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern of “Configuration 5-A”) are started, a timing (a reception period A in FIG. 278 in FIG. 278) after a predetermined time has elapsed since the third fluctuation patterns were started to be executed. In the case of, the timing is 5 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and in the case of the reception period B, it can be generated when the timing of 35 seconds has elapsed from the start of fluctuation), and the reception period D is When the number of pieces of determination information (the number of jackpot determinations (holding number) in the holding state) stored by the holding storage means is less than "2" (that is, "1"), this is consumed and the holding number is " When the execution of the second variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 (corresponding to the second variation pattern of “Configuration 5-A”) in the state of “”, a predetermined time has elapsed from the execution start of the second variation pattern. This can occur when the timing (in FIG. 278 (b), 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation) arrives, the number of pieces of determination information stored by the hold storage unit is "2" or more. At this time, when the second variation pattern is started to be executed, it does not occur even when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second variation pattern is started (see FIG. 278 (a)). ).

  According to such a configuration, when the game is about to be stopped and as a result the number of holdings is exhausted, a reception period (reception period D) of a type that has not occurred until then occurs, so the game is stopped. You can expect to be prompted not to be played, or even if the game is stopped, you can have the impression that the game is interesting at the end.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, when the “number of determination information stored by the holding storage unit (holding number)” is less than “2” (that is, “1”), this is consumed and the holding number is “ Even when the second variation pattern is started to be executed in the state of "0", the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second variation pattern was started (in FIG. 278 (b), 30 seconds from the start of the variation) When the "number of determination information items stored by the holding storage unit (holding number)" increases at a stage when the elapsed time) has not arrived (when the holding number increases from "0" to "1" or more), The acceptance period D may not be generated when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of execution of the second variation pattern has arrived.

  That is, even when the symbol fluctuation (second fluctuation pattern) is started in the state of "0" when this is digested when the number of holdings is "1", within the execution period of the symbol fluctuation If the number of holdings is increased at, it means that the player is not trying to stop the game. In this respect, according to the above configuration, even when the symbol variation (second variation pattern) is started in the state where the number of holdings is “0”, the number of holdings is increased within the execution period of the symbol variation. In this case, the acceptance period D is not generated even when the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second variation pattern was started (in FIG. 278 (b), the timing when 30 seconds has elapsed from the variation start) has arrived. Therefore, the reception period D can be more appropriately functioned as a "reception period of a type that can appear only when trying to stop the game".

  In order to obtain such an effect more favorably, even when the reception period D is generated, “the number of determination information stored by the suspension storage means (reservation number during the reception period D is generated (suspended It is more desirable to end the acceptance period D (end the acceptance-permitted state) at that time when the "number)" increases.

  Furthermore, even in a situation in which the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D and the post-reception display corresponding to the acceptance is being executed, the “reserved by the storage means is stored before the display time elapses. When the number of pieces of determination information (holding number) ”increases, the display after reception may be terminated (not displayed) at that time.

Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period D, the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 is started to be executed, and a predetermined time (in FIG. 278 (b), variation start is started after the first variation pattern is started to be executed. It is also generated (provided that the number of holdings is 0) when the timing when 10 seconds have passed after the timing has arrived. And
The timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the second variation pattern (variation pattern forming the reach state) shown in FIG. 278 has started (in FIG. 278 (b), 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation) If the reception period D occurs when the reception period D occurs, the specific BGM is made inaudible before the reception period D occurs, and the reception period D is generated while the inaudible state is maintained. Is designed to allow (see Figure 276),
The timing when a predetermined time has elapsed after the first variation pattern (variation pattern that does not form a reach state) shown in FIG. 278 has started (in FIG. 278 (b), 10 seconds have elapsed from the start of variation) If the reception period D occurs when the above, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output without making the specific BGM inaudible, and within the generated reception period D Set specific BGM to inaudible state (see FIG. 277)
It will be equipped with such a configuration.

  With such a configuration, when the reception period D occurs, it looks as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) that occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner occurs. Or, it appears as if the above reception period B (see FIG. 274) that occurs while the specific BGM is in the suppressed mode or in the inaudible state occurs, which improves the enjoyment of the game. Will be able to Further, the reception period D, which appears as if the reception period A (see FIG. 273) has occurred, appears as if it changed to the reception period B within the reception period D. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described production example, after the execution of the first variation pattern shown in FIG. 278, the reception period D occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing mode, and the specific BGM is audible. When the acceptance is made during the output, the audible output of the specific BGM is ended with the acceptance as a trigger (see FIG. 277). However, the audible output of the specific BGM may not be terminated with the reception as a trigger, and the audible output may be continuously performed thereafter. For example, even in the case of the example of FIG. 277 (e ′), instead of setting the specific BGM to the suppression mode or the inaudible state at the received timing tPx, the timing tPy (previously shown in FIG. 277 (e) The specific BGM may be set to the suppression mode or the inaudible state based on the arrival of the (determined timing). That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible in the middle of the display period of the post-reception display D, and it is possible to provide interesting performance.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 6-A”) and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “configuration 6-A”). ) Including multiple reception periods. The reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing mode, regardless of the state of the production (the result of the big hit determination, the result of the production determination, etc.), Since the reception period B can be generated after the specific BGM is in the suppression mode or in the inaudible state, regardless of the state of the production (the result of the big hit determination, the result of the production determination, etc.). By using the specific BGM, it becomes possible to provide a performance related to the type of the reception period even before the reception period occurs.

  Further, in the above-described production example, a reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “configuration 6-A”) is further provided as the reception period, and the reception period D is the situation of the production (the result of the jackpot determination). Or a specific BGM is generated while being audibly output in a non-suppressing mode, or may be generated after the specific BGM is in a suppressing mode or an inaudible state. I did it.

  More specifically, a predetermined time (10 seconds in FIG. 278 (b)) has elapsed since the symbol fluctuation of the first fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 278 (b) etc.) that does not form the reach state is started to be executed. When the reception period D sometimes occurs, the reception period D is generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner (see FIG. 277). On the other hand, the symbol fluctuation of the second fluctuation pattern or the third fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 278 (b) or the like) forming the reach state is started for a predetermined time (FIG. 278 (b), the second fluctuation). If the reception period D occurs when the pattern is 30 seconds and the third variation pattern is 50 seconds), the reception period D is set after the specific BGM is suppressed or inaudible. Are generated (see FIG. 276).

  According to such a configuration, when the reception period occurs while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressed mode, and when the reception period occurs after the specific BGM is in the suppressed mode or the non-audible state. In any of the above cases, the relevant reception period may be the “reception period D”, so that the interest of the game until the operation (operation) by the player is received is preferably maintained. Will be expected.

  Even in the reception period A, if the abnormal state occurs and the notification sound is output, the reception period may occur after the specific BGM is in the suppression mode or in the inaudible state. obtain. However, the above-mentioned "reception period A can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressing manner regardless of the situation of the production (the result of the big hit determination, the result of the production determination, etc.). The meaning of "in the case where the reception period A occurs under the situation where the abnormality is not notified and the performance is properly progressed, the specific BGM is always audibly output in a non-suppressed manner. The acceptance period A is generated. "

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 7-A”) and the reception period D (corresponding to the second reception period of “configuration 7-A”). ) Including multiple reception periods. Then, in the reception period A, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display A corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the post-reception display A is displayed for the effect design (decorative design SZ). While the display is in progress, it is displayed with priority over the display A after reception (see FIG. 279 (c)). On the other hand, in the reception period D, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception can be executed, and at least the post-reception display D of the effect design (decorative symbol SZ) While being displayed, the display D is displayed in such a manner that it is difficult to visually recognize it after the reception or is hidden (see FIG. 282 (c)).

  Here, the "mode that is difficult to visually recognize" means that "at least a part of the effect design (decorative design SZ) corresponds to the transmissivity through the post-reception display D set to a predetermined transmissivity. Only a mode that can be visually recognized, or a mode in which at least a part of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is invisible due to the post-reception display D that overlaps with this, or at least one of the effect design (decorative design SZ) A part is hidden ".

  According to such a configuration, by confirming whether or not the visibility of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is affected by the post-reception display triggered by the operation (operation) by the player, the reception period is set. It becomes possible to recognize the type of. In addition, "design for production (decorative design SZ)" is, for example, a design which forms a reach state as a production on the production display device 1600, and other productions such as whether or not the reach state is formed. , Is a pattern that is also used for pseudo continuous production, full rotation production, and the like.

  However, some of the players may feel aversion to the deterioration of the visibility of such a design symbol (decorative symbol SZ) as the post-reception display D is displayed. Has been confirmed. In this respect, in the above-described production example, when the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is displayed, a reception period different from the reception period D is generated (for example, according to the reception within the reception period D. When the operation is accepted by the player within the different acceptance period, the acceptance post-display D is hidden (the process of displaying the post-subscription display D). End), thereby making it easy to visually recognize the design symbol (decorative symbol SZ) (see the effect development shown in FIG. 282 (c) → FIG. 282 (g)).

  According to such a configuration, if the post-reception display D corresponding to the reception within the reception period D is “displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display”, the predetermined time is The player can make the post-reception display D non-display at that time only by performing a predetermined operation until the time elapses. The operation (operation) required by the player to display the post-reception display D within the reception period D and the reception period different from the reception period D (the reception period that occurs according to the reception within the reception period D) The operation (operation) required by the player to hide the post-reception display D may be the same operation (operation) or different operation (operation). The "reception period different from the reception period D" is terminated when the display D after reception is hidden.

  On the other hand, the post-reception display A is also a predetermined time after the display is started (the same time as the predetermined time until the post-reception display D is hidden may be the same or different time). Is hidden when is passed. However, the post-reception display A that does not deteriorate the visibility of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is hidden by any operation of the player until the predetermined time elapses. It is more desirable not to do so in order to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game when the player makes an erroneous operation against the intention of the player.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the reception period B is further provided as the reception period, and in the reception period B, if the reception is made within the period, the post-reception display B corresponding to the reception can be executed. , The effect design (decorative design SZ) is displayed or hidden at least while the post-reception display B is displayed, in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize the post-reception display B. (See FIG. 280 (c)).

  However, in the above-described production example, the “post-reception display B” and the “post-reception display D” are common in that they affect the visibility of the production design (decorative design SZ). Instead, the post-reception display B is "not displayed when a predetermined time (which may be different from the time until the post-reception display D is hidden) elapses after the display is started." Then, even if the player performs any operation before the predetermined time elapses, the display B after reception is not hidden by this. Thereby, when the visibility of the effect design (decorative design SZ) is affected by the display after reception, it is possible to provide the effect of whether or not it can be improved.

  Note that it is desirable that the reception period B is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is activated, and the reception period D is set as a reception period in which the automatic button function described above is not activated.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 8-A”) and the reception period B (corresponding to the second reception period of “configuration 8-A”). ) Including multiple reception periods. Then, the reception period D can be generated while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode, and is accepted while the specific BGM is audibly output in the non-suppressing mode. With this as a trigger, the specific BGM is made inaudible (see FIG. 277), and during the reception period B, the specific BGM that was audibly output in the non-suppressing mode is in a state in which it is audibly output in the suppressing mode or is not audibly output. After that, the acceptance is permitted, and even if the acceptance is performed, the state in which the specific BGM is audibly output or the state in which the specific BGM is not audibly output is maintained (see FIG. 274).

  According to such a configuration, in connection with the occurrence of the reception period, it is provided with an interesting point as to at which timing the specific BGM is brought into the “state of being output audibly in the suppression mode or the state of not being output audibly”. You will be able to.

  Further, in the above-described production example, when the reception is performed in the reception period D, all the sounds that have been audibly output up to that time including the production sound different from the specific BGM are made inaudible, and in the reception period B. When the acceptance is made, all the sounds (audible acceptance sound, etc.) that were audibly output at that time are made inaudible. That is, in this case, in relation to the occurrence of the reception period, the specific BGM is set to “a state in which it is audibly output in a suppression mode or a state in which it is not output audibly”, and when reception is made, it is audibly output at that time. It becomes possible to provide a common directivity between the reception period D and the reception period B, for example, by making all the sounds inaudible, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. ..

  Further, as described above, during the reception period D, the situation in which the specific BGM is made inaudible and no sound is output while the operation (operation) by the player is permitted to be received (during the effective period). Although it is possible (see FIG. 276 (e)), the reception period is continued in this situation (see FIG. 282 (e)). That is, in this case, in the acceptance period D, when the acceptance is made, the specific BGM is made inaudible when triggered, but when the acceptance is not made for a predetermined time after the acceptance period D occurs, Since the specific BGM is made inaudible even though the acceptance has not been made yet, it becomes possible to think that the acceptance period D has ended and the interest of the player. Will be able to attract more.

  In particular, in the above-described production example, the background image is changed in accordance with the timing when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the reception is not yet made, so that a reception period different from the reception period D occurs. It will be possible to provide the performance as if you were doing it.

  Note that in connection with the occurrence of the reception period D, when the specific BGM is made inaudible upon reception (see FIG. 277), a “display change according to reception (display D after reception)” is generated accordingly. However, when the specific BGM is made inaudible while the acceptance has not been made yet (see FIG. 277), "display change according to acceptance (display D after acceptance)" is generated accordingly. So that there is no That is, in this case, when the specific BGM is made inaudible, it is confirmed that the “display change according to acceptance (display D after acceptance)” has not yet occurred, and thus the acceptance period D ends. You will be able to be aware of the possibility that not. Then, after the operation (operation) by the player is accepted before the acceptance period D ends after the specific BGM is made inaudible, this triggers "display change (acceptance according to acceptance)". Since the subsequent display D) ”is generated, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in the acceptance period B, a predetermined effect sound (for example, acceptance acceptable sound) is audibly output until the timing tM3 when the period ends, and the predetermined effect sound is output. When the effect sound is made inaudible, the player is not allowed to accept the operation (operation). Therefore, it is easy to determine whether or not the acceptance period B is continuing. You will be able to recognize. In the example of the above-mentioned production, the reception period B is set as the reception period in which the automatic button function described above is activated, and the automatic button function is activated based on the arrival of the timing tM3. Is becoming

  Further, in the above-described production example, the reception period B is, for example, generated when a predetermined time (35 seconds) has elapsed since the third variation pattern shown in FIG. 278 was started, and the specific BGM Is made inaudible before a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the third variation pattern, but for the reception period D, the specific BGM is made inaudible after the third variation pattern is started. It is desirable that it does not occur during the period. According to such a configuration, in the third variation pattern, the reception period B first occurs after the specific BGM is made inaudible, and thereafter, the specific BGM is made inaudible. Since it is possible to expect that the acceptance period D will be further generated, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the reception period D can be generated only when the number of holdings is less than the predetermined number, and the first variation pattern and the second variation pattern shown in FIG. 278. In each of the variation pattern and the third variation pattern, it is assumed that the variation is allowed to occur when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the symbol variation, however, in any variation pattern, other It is desirable to set it to occur after the reception period (reception periods A to C, etc.). That is, in this case, the reception period D having a special performance can be made to function as the reception period last generated for the player who is trying to stop the game, so that the game is not stopped. It is possible to expect to be prompted, or even if the game is stopped, it is possible to give an interesting impression to the game at the end.

  In the reception period D, the post-reception display D appears for a specific time when it is received, but it is desirable that the specific BGM is not restarted when the post-reception display D is hidden after the specific time elapses. In this case, it is more preferable that the specific BGM is not restarted unless the next symbol variation is started.

  Next, as a modified example of the above-described production example, an example in which the above configurations 1, 14, and 15 are embodied will be sequentially described.

  That is, in the above-described production example, when the acceptance is made within the period in which the mood image display is displayed, and when the acceptance is made within the period in which the mood image display is hidden in the reception period D. It is decided to generate the display D after the same reception with. However, instead of this, when the acceptance is made within the period in which the image display is displayed in the reception period D, and when the acceptance is made within the period in which the image display is hidden. Alternatively, different post-acceptance displays may be generated.

  That is, in this case, more strictly, the reception period D is a “reception period D1” in which the mock image display is displayed and a “reception period D2” in which the mood image display is hidden. It is composed of two types of acceptance periods such as, and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D1, the corresponding post-reception display D1 is displayed, and when the acceptance is made during the acceptance period D2, the response is made accordingly. After the reception, the display D2 will be displayed.

  FIG. 283 is a diagram showing an example in which the above-described modification is applied to the reception period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like.

  Hereinafter, the effect example shown in FIG. 283 will be described, but the same configuration as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 will not be particularly referred to. That is, the reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 283 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and similarly for other examples. It is possible to apply.

  However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 283, first, when the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283 (b)) and acceptance is made in the acceptance period D1, a post-reception display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 283 (c)).

  On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 283 (b)), if a predetermined time elapses without being accepted (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or FIG. 277 arrives). , Image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden (see FIG. 283 (e)). Regarding the point that the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to be accepted even in such a situation (a situation in which the image display is hidden), it is different from the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 282 or the like. Is the same. However, in this modified example, when the image display is hidden (see FIG. 283 (e)), the “reception period D1” ends and a different “reception period D2” occurs. It is supposed to do.

  That is, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the “reception period D2” in which the image display is hidden, the post-reception display D2 corresponding to the “reception period D2” is displayed. (See FIG. 283 (h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through the production with a certain characteristic.

  Moreover, in the reception periods D1 and D2 according to this example, when the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) changes from the display state to the non-display state, the background image is changed. According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is changed to the non-display state, it is expected to more appropriately create an atmosphere in which the reception period is suddenly replaced with another reception period. Will be done.

  In particular, in this example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 282, from the “background image HG4a” in which mountains and rivers are drawn to the “background image HG4b” in which a desert different from the “background image HG3” is drawn. (FIG. 283 (b) → FIG. 283 (e)). With such a configuration, when the mood image display (integrated mood image display IG) is changed to the non-display state, the reception period C that may occur in the background of the desert is suddenly replaced by an atmosphere. It will be expected to be produced appropriately.

  Further, the “post-reception display D2” according to this example is different from the “group notice” of the “post-reception display C” shown in FIG. 281 (c), but it uses a haunted character. It is possible to recall the "display C after reception" to some extent, such as in common, and this also makes it more preferable to create an atmosphere that suddenly replaces the reception period C that can occur when the background of the desert. Expected to be produced.

  Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" displayed during the occurrence of the acceptance period D1. The post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of the post-reception display not related to the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C), the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more accurately, the reception period D1 occurs. It is possible to suggest that it is a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 has arrived). Like

  Note that when a predetermined time elapses after the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted after the acceptance period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277 comes), FIG. 283 (f) ), The reception period D1 occurs again, and the display is returned to the state in which the full-scale image display (integrated full-scale image display IG) is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed so as to return from the “background image HG4b” to the “background image HG4a” (FIG. 283 (e) → FIG. 283 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 will be created more appropriately from the other reception periods.

  When the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 283 (f)) that occurs again in this way, the acceptance period D1 is the same as when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 283 (b)) that first occurs. The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to is displayed (see FIG. 283 (c)).

  It goes without saying that such a reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modified example shown in FIG. 283, in the reception period D (corresponding to the third reception period of “Configuration 15-A”), a period in which a simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed, There is a period in which the image display (integrated image display IG) is hidden, but these periods are to function as the "reception period D1" and the "reception period D2", and these "reception period D1" It is decided to cause different display changes depending on which of the "acceptance period D2" and the acceptance. That is, in this case, the display change (the reception is made within the reception period D2 that cannot be confirmed unless the state where the possibility that the reception period D has ended becomes aware (the state in which the virtual image display is hidden). Since the display change) is prepared, the sense of tension can be appropriately maintained through such performance.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the reception period D includes a “period during which the image display is displayed” and a “period during which the image display is hidden”. However, instead of this, in the reception period D, "a period in which character information related to acceptance is displayed" and "character information related to acceptance is hidden. It may be made to have "the period which has been."

  FIG. 284 is a diagram showing an example in which the above-described modification is applied to the reception period D shown in FIG. 282 and the like.

  Hereinafter, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 284 will be described, but the same configuration as the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282 will not be particularly referred to. That is, the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIGS. 276 to 278 and FIG. 282, and it is possible to apply the same to other examples. ..

  However, in the reception period D (see FIG. 284 (b)) shown in FIG. 284, first, as in the case of the reception period B (see FIG. 280 (b)), although the contents are different, acceptance is permitted. The textual information (here, "please press") related to that is displayed.

  That is, as described above, the character information related to the acceptance being accepted cannot be displayed in the acceptance period A (see FIG. 279 (b)) where the degree of expectation is relatively low, It is displayed during the reception period B (see FIG. 280 (b)), which has relatively high expectations. Therefore, during the reception period D, such character information (here, "please press") is displayed, and it is expected that the interest of the game will be improved.

  However, in the acceptance period D according to this modification, as shown in FIGS. 284 (b), (e), and (f), the state in which the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is allowed to continue. In such a case, the character information related to the acceptance being accepted (here, “please press”) is changed from the display state to the non-display state (timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or FIG. 277). May be changed from the non-display state to the display state (timing tP2b shown in FIGS. 276 and 277). Of course, even when the character information (here, “please press”) is in a non-display state, if the player performs an operation (operation), the operation (operation) will be accepted, The post-reception display D will be performed based on the reception (see the example of tracing the production route as shown in FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (c)).

  In this example, if the operation (operation) is accepted by the player within the acceptance period D, the character information related to the acceptance being accepted (here, "please press") is hidden. Was it accepted before (Fig. 284 (b) → Fig. 284 (c)), or was it accepted when the character information (here, "please press") is hidden. (FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (c)) or whether the character information (here, “push”) was returned to the display state and then accepted (FIG. 284 (f) → FIG. 284 (c)), the same mode (FIG. 284 (c)) appears as the “display D after reception”.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIG. 284 (e), although the acceptance period D has occurred, the acceptance period A in which the character information related to acceptance acceptance is not displayed (See FIG. 279 (b)) It becomes possible to provide an atmosphere as if the game was suddenly replaced, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through such a surprise-like production. On the other hand, even if the player accepts an operation (operation) under a situation where the acceptance period A seems to be suddenly replaced (the character information is not displayed), it corresponds to the acceptance period D. Since the same mode (FIG. 284 (c)) is displayed as the “post-reception display D”, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Moreover, in the acceptance period D according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to acceptance of acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. With such a configuration, when the character information related to acceptance acceptance is changed to the non-display state, it is possible to more appropriately create an atmosphere in which it is suddenly replaced with another acceptance period. You will be expected.

  In particular, in this example, the “background image HG4a” in which the mountains and the river are drawn is changed to the “background image HG4c” in which the mountains different from the “background image HG1” are drawn (FIG. 284 (( b) → FIG. 284 (e)). With such a configuration, when the character information related to the acceptance of acceptance is changed to the non-display state, the reception period A that may occur in the background of the mountain is suddenly replaced with an atmosphere. It is expected that it will be produced more appropriately.

  In addition, in this example, when the character information related to acceptance acceptance is returned from the non-display state to the display state, the background image is also changed from the “background image HG4c” to the “background image HG4a”. To be changed to (FIG. 284 (e) → FIG. 284 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D from another reception period (particularly the reception period A) will be created more favorably.

  It goes without saying that such a reception period D is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 284, first, as a reception period, a reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 1-A”) and a reception period D (second reception of “configuration 1-A”). Corresponding to the period) is available. In both cases, the character information is displayed in relation to the occurrence of the acceptance period, when the acceptance period B occurs and when the acceptance period D occurs. Although the same operation as the operation by the player (pressing operation button 410) is targeted for acceptance in the period B and the acceptance period D, different character information (“press” in the acceptance period B, and in the acceptance period D) "Please press") is displayed.

  That is, in the reception period B and the reception period D, the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), but the display change (display after reception B, D) that occurs as a result of the detection of the operation. ) Are different from each other. In this regard, in this pachinko machine 1, even when the player is requested to perform the same operation (operation mode), the character information displayed in association with the occurrence of the acceptance period is Since they are made to differ from each other depending on the type (display type after reception), it is recognized which type of display change (display B or D after reception) may occur as the display after reception. With this, it becomes possible to perform an operation (operation by the player), and it is expected that a decrease in the interest of the game will be suppressed.

  In addition, although the same operation (operation mode) as in the reception period B is requested and the same character information and scale image display as in the reception period B are displayed, a reception different from that in the reception period B is made when the reception is made. You may make it further prepare the reception period which produces a back display. That is, in this case, it is not possible to completely grasp which type is executed as the post-reception display by simply looking at the text information and the scale image display. You will be expected to maintain.

  Further, according to the above-described modified example, in the reception period B, the character information is not hidden until the state (valid state) in which the reception is permitted is ended, whereas In the acceptance period D, the character information can be hidden during the acceptance of the acceptance (valid state). That is, in this case, in the reception period D, if the operation (predetermined operation) is not performed in a relatively short time after the occurrence of the period, the player is requested to perform any operation (operation mode). It becomes difficult to recognize whether or not it is, and by extension, it becomes difficult to recognize the type as the reception period. It will be expected to avoid things that are completely gone.

  In the modification described above, in the reception period D, a period in which the character information is displayed (see FIG. 284 (b)) and a period in which the character information is hidden (see FIG. 284 (e)). ), The same display change (see FIG. 284 (c)) occurs even if the acceptance is made in any of these periods. That is, in this case, even if the character information is hidden, the operation is properly performed only by confirming what operation mode is requested while the character information is being displayed. This is possible, and it is expected to suppress a decline in the entertainment appeal.

  Further, in the above-described modified example, during the reception period D, the character information is hidden on the way and then the character information is displayed again. That is, in this case, even if the player misunderstands that the "reception period D" suddenly changes to the "reception period A" in which the character information is not displayed, the misunderstanding is caused by the character information being displayed again. It will be possible to solve it.

  In the modification described above, the background image is changed during the reception period D, and the character information is not displayed from the period when the character information is displayed in accordance with the timing of the change. The period is set to be displayed. As a result, it is possible to preferably give the impression that the reception period D has shifted to a different reception period.

  In the production example described with reference to FIG. 284, when the acceptance is made and when the acceptance is allowed within the acceptance period D during which the character information related to the acceptance is displayed. It is decided to generate the post-reception display D that is the same as when the acceptance is made within the period in which the text information related to the presence is hidden. However, instead of this, during the acceptance period D, when the acceptance is made within the period in which the character information related to the acceptance is displayed, and when the acceptance is accepted A different post-reception display may be generated depending on whether the text information is received within the period in which the text information is hidden.

  That is, in this case, the reception period D is more strictly related to the “reception period D1”, which is a period in which character information related to acceptance is displayed, and the acceptance period D. It is composed of two types of reception periods such as "reception period D2", which is a period in which the displayed character information is hidden, and when reception is made during the reception period D1, the post-reception display D1 corresponding to this is displayed. When the reception is made during the reception period D2, the post-reception display D2 corresponding thereto is displayed.

  FIG. 285 is a diagram showing an example in which the above-described modification is applied to the reception period D shown in FIG. 284 and the like.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 285 will be described below, but the same configuration as the example of the effect shown in FIGS. 276 to 278, FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 which is a modification thereof will not be particularly referred to. That is, the reception period D (reception periods D1 and D2) shown in FIG. 285 is basically the same as the reception period D shown in FIG. 284, and it is possible to apply the same to other examples. ..

  However, in the effect example shown in FIG. 285, first, when the acceptance period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285 (b)) and the acceptance is made in the acceptance period D1, the post-reception display corresponding to the acceptance period D1 is displayed. D1 will be displayed (see FIG. 285 (c)).

  On the other hand, after the reception period D1 occurs (see FIG. 285 (b)), if a predetermined time elapses without being accepted (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or FIG. 277 arrives). , The character information related to the acceptance being accepted (here, “please press”) is hidden (see FIG. 285 (e)). FIG. 284 shows that the player is allowed to accept an operation (operation) even under such a situation (where the character information related to the acceptance is hidden). This is the same as in the case of the example of performance shown in FIG. However, in this modification, when the character information related to the acceptance of acceptance is hidden (see FIG. 285 (e)), the "acceptance period D1" ends and Different "reception period D2" occurs.

  That is, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted in the "acceptance period D2" in which the character information related to acceptance acceptance is hidden, after acceptance according to the "acceptance period D2". The display D2 is displayed (see FIG. 285 (h)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to actually provide a performance in which the "reception period D1" is suddenly replaced with the "reception period D2" different from the reception period D1, and such a surprise can be provided. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game through the production with a certain characteristic.

  Moreover, in the acceptance periods D1 and D2 according to this example, the background image is changed when the character information related to the acceptance of acceptance is changed from the display state to the non-display state. With such a configuration, when the character information related to acceptance of acceptance is changed to the non-display state, the character information is suddenly replaced with the reception period A in which the character information is in the non-display state. It is expected that the atmosphere will be created more appropriately.

  Particularly, in this example, as in the case of the effect example shown in FIG. 284, from the “background image HG4a” in which the mountain and the river are drawn, to the “background image HG4c” in which a mountain different from the “background image HG1” is drawn. (FIG. 285 (b) → FIG. 285 (e)). According to such a configuration, when the character information (here, “please press”) changes to the non-display state, the reception period A that may occur in the background of the mountain is suddenly replaced by the atmosphere. It will be expected to be produced appropriately.

  Further, the “post-reception display D2” according to this example is different from the “conversation notice” of the “post-reception display A” shown in FIG. 279 (c), but it uses a princess character. It is a content that can remind us of "Display after reception A" a little, such as in common, and this also makes it more preferable to have an atmosphere that suddenly replaces the reception period A where character information is hidden It is expected to be produced in.

  Further, in this example, when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D2, the "background image HG4b" is returned (changed) to the "background image HG4a" displayed during the occurrence of the acceptance period D1. The post-reception display D2 corresponding to the reception is displayed. As a result, instead of the post-reception display not related to the reception period D1 (for example, the post-reception display according to the reception period C), the post-reception display related to the reception period D1 (more accurately, the reception period D1 occurs. It is possible to suggest that it is a post-reception display corresponding to the reception period D2 that occurs when a predetermined time has elapsed (when the timing tP2a shown in FIG. 276 or 277 has arrived). Like

  Note that when a predetermined time elapses after the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted after the acceptance period D2 occurs (when the timing tP2b shown in FIG. 276 or 277 comes), FIG. ), The acceptance period D1 occurs again, and the state is returned to where "character information related to acceptance acceptance" is displayed. At this time, the background image is also changed from "background image HG4c" to "background image HG4a" (FIG. 285 (e) → FIG. 285 (f)). As a result, it is expected that the atmosphere returned to the original reception period D1 will be created more appropriately from the other reception periods.

  When the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 285 (f)) that has occurred again in this way, the acceptance period D1 is the same as when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period D1 (FIG. 285 (b)) that first occurred. The post-acceptance display D1 corresponding to is displayed (see FIG. 285 (c)).

  It goes without saying that such a reception period D (reception periods D1, D2) is similarly applied to the configuration described with reference to FIG. 278.

  According to the modification shown in FIG. 285, “character information related to acceptance acceptance” is displayed in the acceptance period D (corresponding to the second acceptance period of “Configuration 14-A”). There is a period and a period in which the "character information related to acceptance acceptance" is hidden, but these periods are to function as the "reception period D1" and the "reception period D2", Different display changes are made depending on which of the “reception period D1” and the “reception period D2” the acceptance is made. That is, in this case, when the “character information related to acceptance acceptance” is hidden, the acceptance period does not end, but a reception period different from the acceptance period that has occurred until then is displayed. Since it occurs, the performance can be favorably maintained even when the operation (operation) by the player is not easily received.

  Note that, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, it is decided to start displaying the “post-acceptance display” when the mood image display is being displayed, but regarding the “post-acceptance display”, The display does not necessarily have to be started when the mock image display is being displayed, but may be started after the mock image display is hidden.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 273 to FIG. 285, the mood image display is displayed so as to cross the timing at which the acceptance period occurs, but when the timing at which the acceptance period occurs occurs, Alternatively, it may be displayed after that.

  Further, also in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the dynamic image display is performed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic image display be continued without being terminated even if the "disappearing effect (disappearance related display)" appears after the acceptance.

  Further, also in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the “disappearance effect (disappearance related display)” is not limited to displaying a mock image, but is also applicable to a gauge image indicating the remaining time until the acceptance period ends. We decided to make this difficult to see. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, in the reception period D, even if the reception is made within the period, the display process related to the mood image display (character information in the modified example) is triggered by this. I did not let it. In other words, by displaying the post-reception display D preferentially on the layer image display (character information in the modified example) that is kept displayed on the layer, the layer image display (character information in the modified example) is displayed. Is hidden (not visible). However, even when the acceptance is made in the acceptance period D, the display processing related to the simulated image display (character information in the modified example) may be ended with this as a trigger.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIG. 273 to FIG. 285, it was decided to display the mock image display (integrated muffled image display IG) that mocked the operation receiving portion to be operated during the reception period. The image display does not necessarily have to be displayed, and can be realized by replacing it with, for example, an arrow notation for prompting an operation.

  In the example shown in FIG. 277, when the specific BGM is audibly output in a non-suppressed manner within the reception period D, whether the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed manner when the reception is triggered. Alternatively, the specific BGM may be made inaudible when a predetermined timing arrives, regardless of whether or not the specific BGM is accepted. That is, in this case, there is a possibility that the user may be made inaudible during the execution period of the post-acceptance display, and it is expected that the performance is improved.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the background images HG1 to HG4a (HG4b, HG4c) are supposed to be displayed before each reception period occurs, but the reception period is It may be displayed according to the timing of occurrence. Further, depending on the type of the reception period, it may be displayed before the occurrence of the reception period, or may be displayed at the timing when the reception period occurs. In short, as long as each of the background images is displayed and can be accepted, the above-described action and effect associated with the background image can be achieved.

  Further, in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, the reception period C is assumed to occur while the specific BGM is audibly output in a suppressed mode or in an inaudible state. , May be generated when the specific BGM is output in a non-suppressing mode.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 273 to 285, in the reception period D, a period in which a mock image display (in the modified example, character information related to acceptance being accepted) is displayed, The period to be hidden is included, but these periods are the period when the player operates (operates) after confirming that the image display (or character information) has been hidden. Even if the game is started, the time is set to be sufficient for acceptance in the non-display state, and after confirming that the image display (or character information) has been returned to the display state, the game is played. Even if a person starts an operation (operation), it is set as a time sufficient to be accepted in the display state, and the technical significance except for the so-called "blinking display" display method and the like is set. It ’s clear that .

  For example, in the reception period D, the time for maintaining the "non-display state" after the mock image display (or character information) is set to the "non-display state" is set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set it as a time value that is at least half (1.5 seconds or more) of the current time (for example, 3 seconds). In addition, after the normal image display (or character information) is returned to the display state, the time for maintaining the display state is half of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as the reception period A or the reception period B. It is desirable to set it as the time value above (1.5 seconds or more), and regarding the time from when the image display (or character information) is displayed until it is hidden, the reception period It is desirable to set it as a time value that is half or more (1.5 seconds or more) of the time (for example, 3 seconds) set as A or the reception period B.

  Or, the time from when the image display (or text information) is displayed to when it is hidden, or when the image display (or text information) is set to "non-display" The time to maintain the "display state" or the time to maintain the display state after the mock image display (or the character information) is returned to the display state is the shortest time as the time for symbol variation (required for shortening variation). It may be set as a time value equal to or more than (time). This is because such a time value is set as a time value that allows the player to end the symbol variation early although it is a time value sufficient for the player to confirm the symbol variation.

  Next, an example in which the above configurations 4 and 9 to 13 are embodied will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the content of the production that is advanced when it is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice as a post-reception production, and a notice production (expectation degree suggesting production). A plurality of reception periods (reception performances) of different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception performance) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, performance determination, etc.). In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, as a plurality of reception periods (reception productions), a reception period E is further prepared in addition to the above-described reception period A (reception production A) to reception period D (reception production D). I have decided.

  The characteristics of the reception period E will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 and 287. Note that each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 272 may be prepared as a reception period different from the reception period E (reception performance E), or may be prepared as the reception period E (reception performance). It may be realized as E).

  FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the reception period E (reception effect E) occurs.

  Now, assuming that the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion) in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), and "variation pattern E" is selected as a result of variation pattern determination. In the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (advance determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern (decorative pattern) SZ (effect depiction according to the variation pattern E, sound output of specific BGM reproduction, etc.) is started (“the situation shown in FIG. 286 (a)”), Within the execution period of the variation effect, an effect (notice effect) corresponding to the result of the announcement effect determination is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “variation pattern E” itself. In the effect example shown in FIG. 286 (a), the same background image (background image HG4a) as the background image shown in FIG. 282 (a) is displayed.

  Here, when a special result is obtained in the effect determination (preliminary determination, etc.) corresponding to the variation pattern E, the peripheral control MPU 1511a comes at a timing when a predetermined time E has elapsed since the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ was started. When the condition is satisfied (when the condition E is satisfied), the reception period E (valid period) in which the “reception regarding the post-reception display E” is permitted is generated (“the situation shown in FIG. 286 (e)”).

  In this regard, when the reception period E occurs, a precursory display corresponding to the reception period E is displayed. More specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 286 (b), the character KI of “Kunoichi” is made to appear. Then, as shown in FIG. 286 (c), the character KI throws a smoke ball to produce smoke. Then, as shown in FIG. 286 (d), a state in which the character KI speaks a dialogue such as "press the button to call that person" is displayed. At this time, the state in which "smoke" expands is depicted or "imitation image display" is displayed, but the "smoke" and "impression image display" are difficult to visually recognize by preferentially displaying the character KI and lines. Has been Then, when the reception period E occurs after such a sign display (FIGS. 286 (b) to (d)), the character KI and the dialogue are hidden, and thereby the "image display" is clearly displayed. Will be done.

  In this example, the "character KI" and "smoke" are preferentially displayed with respect to the background image HG4a and the decoration image SZ. Further, the "smoke" may be displayed so as to cover the entire background image HG4a (display screen), whereby the background image may be changed from the "background image HG4a" to the "smoke". That is, in this case, the "smoke" functions as the "background image" of the change destination. The "smoke" does not necessarily have to be displayed prior to the occurrence of the reception period E (not necessarily displayed as a precursory display).

  Here, as shown in FIG. 286 (e), in the reception period E according to this example, as an image display, the “integrated image display IG” using the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 were used. A "sword decoration image SYG" and a "special image TM" obtained by using the special operation means (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed. In this example, a plurality of "integrated mage image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special mood image TM" are displayed, but they may be displayed one at a time. ..

  That is, in this case, in the reception period E, the player is prompted to perform an operation on the “operation button 410”, an operation on the “sword decoration 5001”, and an operation on the “special operation means 1410”. This allows the player to determine which of the "operation button 410", the "sword decoration 5001", and the "special operation means 1410" should be operated.

  In this regard, when the operation of the “operation button 410” is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286 (f), the acceptance sound such as “ping-pong” is received based on the acceptance. E1 is audibly output, and a display change (display after reception E1) in which an “image that suggests that the integrated image display IG is correct” and a “samurai character” is displayed and a cityscape are depicted. A background change or the like to the background image HG5 ”occurs. In addition, after the "post-reception display E1" is displayed in this manner, the production is advanced while the "background image HG5" is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the “special operation means 1410” is operated during the reception period E, as shown in FIG. 286 (g), no reception sound is generated and the reception sound is not generated. No change in display occurs, and the reception period E is not ended (same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). In other words, in the reception period E, the "special operation image 1410" is displayed, although the "special operation means 1410" is not set as an object to be received. .. According to such a configuration, in the reception period E, a mock image display (integrated muffled image display IG, sword decoration image SYG) showing the operation means set as a receiving target in the reception period E is displayed. Since the image display (special image TM) of the operating means which is not set as the receiving object in the reception period E is mixed, it is difficult to recognize which operating means should be operated. It becomes possible to give an operation opportunity in the presence of. Regarding the "special operation means 1410" during the reception period E, the operation for the "special operation means 1410" is accepted, but this does not cause any reception sound. In addition, no change in display occurs, and the reception period E is not ended (the same as a state in which no reaction occurs and no operation is performed). Good.

  On the other hand, when the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted within the acceptance period E, as shown in FIG. 286 (i), the acceptance sound E2 such as "Boo" is generated based on the acceptance. In addition to being audibly output, a display change (display E2 after reception) in which the character KI speaks a dialogue such as "I'll re-partition!" Is displayed. At this time, the background image does not change.

  That is, after the "post-reception display E2" is displayed, the effect does not progress, but the set time (remaining time) as the reception period E is reset, whereby the remaining time as the reception period E is reset. Is returned to the state immediately after the reception period E has occurred (also referred to as "reception period E reoccurs"). With such a configuration, the operation for causing the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) to appear is not performed, and as a result, even if the post-reception display E1 (samurai character) cannot be displayed, the remaining time Since it becomes possible to redo the "reception period E" from the initial state in which the game is not digested, it is expected that the gaming interest will be maintained appropriately.

  Note that the condition for returning to the state immediately after the reception period E occurs is not "the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is accepted once", but "the operation for the sword decoration 5001 is performed a predetermined number of times in advance. "Receiving only minutes" may be acceptable.

  By the way, if the “special operation means 1410” is operated during the reception period E, it goes without saying that the remaining time as the reception period E is not reset.

  Then, as a result of performing the operation on the "sword decoration 5001" within the reception period E, the remaining time as the reception period E is returned to the state immediately after the generation of the reception period E (the reception period E has occurred again. ), The same as described above depending on which of the operation for the “operation button 410”, the operation for the “sword decoration 5001”, and the operation for the “special operation means 1410” is accepted within the acceptance period E. A phenomenon occurs (FIGS. 286 (f), (g), (i)).

  However, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which the set time (remaining time) has not been reset, a mode in which it is displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the acceptance and the set time When the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the acceptance period E in which (remaining time) is reset, the mode displayed as the post-reception display D corresponding to the acceptance is made different (after reception) The displays D1, D2, etc.) may be displayed. According to such a configuration, since the production value is generated for the display D after reception to appear without resetting, a sense of tension during the reception period E is preferable. Will be able to maintain.

  On the other hand, “an example of progressing from FIG. 286 (e) or FIG. 286 (g) to FIG. 286 (h)” includes “operation on the operation button 410” and “operation on the sword ornament 5001” within the reception period E. This is based on the assumption that neither of them was accepted.

  That is, in this case, after the reception period E occurs, all the remaining time is consumed without the operation (operation) by the player being received, and the reception period E is ended. In this respect, the reception period E is set as a "reception period for which the above-described automatic button function is activated". Therefore, in the reception period E, even when all of the "operation on the operation button 410" and the "operation on the sword ornament 5001" are not received and the remaining time is exhausted, FIG. 286 (h) As shown in, the post-reception display E that is the same as when the player performs an operation (operation) within the reception period E is generated.

  However, if neither the “operation on the operation button 410” nor the “operation on the sword ornament 5001” is received within the reception period E, the “operation on the operation button 410” is received within the reception period E. Although the same post-acceptance display E is generated, the same reception sound E (ping-pong) as when the "operation on the operation button 410" is accepted is not output audibly within the acceptance period E. There is.

  According to such a configuration, as a result of succeeding in the selective operation by the player, the same post-reception display E as when the “operation on the operation button 410” is received within the reception period E is displayed. As a result, it is possible to suggest that "Display E after reception" is not in the displayed situation, and it is expected to encourage more aggressive operation when the reception period E occurs again. Become so.

  Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E during the reception period E, and the post-reception display E1 is displayed. Therefore, a process of giving a hint as to which operation mode (operation type) is required is performed.

  FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d) are enlarged views of a part of the display screen shown in FIG. 286 (e) and show the contents of the display with the passage of time while the reception period E is continued. It is a figure which shows change.

  As described above, in the reception period E, the “integrated image display IG” using the operation button 410, the “sword decoration image SYG” using the sword decoration 5001, and the special operation means (“PUSH” in the figure). The "special image TM" obtained by using the described button) 1410 is displayed.

  That is, in the reception period E, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used for suggesting the remaining time is one of the multiple types of image display, although multiple types of image display are displayed. Only one (integrated image display IG). As a result, it is possible to imply that the operation means (operation button 410) corresponding to the “integrated image display IG” among the plurality of types of image display is to be operated.

  In addition, as the time elapses during the reception period E, the “integrated image display IG” is, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d), “movement when operated by the player”. A portion (button image BMG) of the operation button 410, which corresponds to the “operation receiving portion”, is dynamically displayed as if the operation is being performed. This dynamic display is the same as the content described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234, and is also the same when the “integrated image display IG” is displayed in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285.

  However, in this rendering example, the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special mood image TM" of the plurality of types of mushi image displays are the part of the sword decoration body 5001 that makes use of the "operation receiving part" and the special image. The portion of the operation means 1410 that is associated with the “operation receiving portion” is not displayed dynamically, but is displayed statically. It should be noted that the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special image TM" may be changed in the light emission mode such as flashing light emission.

  According to such a configuration, only the “integrated image display IG” among the multiple types of image display can express the “movement when operated by the player”. It becomes possible to imply that the operating means (the operation button 410) corresponding to the “integrated image display IG” of the types of image display is to be operated.

  Further, as described above, in the reception period E, the gauge image (predetermined image) GG used for suggesting the remaining time is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, such a gauge image GG usually has a depiction in which the display area thereof is gradually reduced as time elapses after the reception period occurs. This is used to indicate how much time remains as the reception period. Then, the usage as such a gauge image GG is the same when the "gauge image GG (here, integrated image display IG)" is displayed in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 279 to 285. is there.

  However, during the reception period E, as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d), although the gauge image (predetermined image) GG itself is displayed, “the time has elapsed since the reception period occurred. Among them, "depiction that gradually reduces the display area" is not performed. That is, in the reception period E according to this example, the display area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is displayed in a state of being maintained at the maximum value from the time when the time period occurs until the time period ends. There is. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize how much time is left in the reception period E during the reception period E, and it is possible to maintain a suitable sense of tension. You will be expected.

  In particular, during the reception period E according to this example, it is possible to reset the remaining time as the reception period E by operating the special operation means 1410, but even if such processing is performed, Since the depiction that increases the display area of the gauge image GG is not performed, it is difficult to recognize that the remaining time as the reception period E has been reset, and it is expected that the tension is appropriately maintained. Will be done.

  The "dynamic display according to the integrated image display IG" illustrated in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d) is repeated until the reception period E ends. Therefore, when the operation on the operation button 410 is accepted within the acceptance period E, the “dynamic display of the integrated image display IG” is ended with the acceptance as an opportunity. However, when the special operation means 1410 is operated within the reception period E, the "dynamic display of the integrated image display IG" is not ended with this as an opportunity. Further, even when the operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received within the reception period E, the processing for generating the post-reception display D2 is performed, but the "dynamic display related to the integrated image display IG" is ended. There is no need to re-execute or restart from the beginning, and only the "dynamic display concerning the integrated image display IG" that has been performed up to that point is continued.

  According to the above-described production example, first, as the reception period, the reception period A (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 4-A”) and the reception period E (second reception period of “configuration 4-A”). There are multiple reception periods including. Then, in the acceptance period A (FIG. 273, FIG. 279), when an operation (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display A is displayed and the reception sound A is output, but within the period. When the player's action (operation) is not detected, the post-reception display A is not displayed and the reception sound A is not output. In the reception period E (FIG. 286), the corresponding period is displayed. When an action (operation) by the player is detected within the period, the post-reception display E1 is displayed and the reception sound E1 is output, and even when the action (operation) by the player is not detected within the period, the period The same post-acceptance display E1 as when an operation (operation) by the player is detected is displayed, but the acceptance sound E1 is not output.

  According to such a configuration, if the player does not accept the operation (operation) within the reception period E, a demerit that is dramatic can occur, so that a feeling of tension when the reception period E occurs Can be preferably maintained.

  Further, in the above-described production example, a reception period B (corresponding to the third reception period of “configuration 4-A”) is further provided, and during the reception period B (FIG. 274, FIG. 280), a game is played within the period. When an action (operation) by a person is detected, the post-reception display B is displayed and the reception sound B is output, and even when the action by the player is not detected within the period, the action by the player within the period The same post-acceptance display B as when (operation) is detected is displayed and the acceptance sound B is output. That is, in this case, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the acceptance period, the same display change (change after acceptance) as when the operation is accepted is generated so as to cause a demerit in production. Since there will be (reception period E) and a case where the demerit is generated so as not to occur (reception period B), while maintaining a suitable sense of tension when the reception period occurs, It is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game when the player's operation (operation) is not received in time within the period.

  Further, in the above-described example of presentation, in the acceptance period A (FIG. 279), the character information related to acceptance of acceptance is not displayed, and the acceptance period B (FIG. 280) and the acceptance period E (FIG. 286). ) Displays textual information related to acceptance acceptance. In this respect, the character information displayed in the reception period B and the character information displayed in the reception period E are different from each other. According to such a configuration, first, when the reception period occurs, by checking whether or not there is "character information related to acceptance of acceptance", the reception of the target for which the automatic button function is activated It becomes possible to recognize whether or not it is a period. In addition, if "text information related to acceptance acceptance" is displayed when the acceptance period occurs, check the type of the text information to determine the acceptance period that is occurring. It becomes possible to recognize the type of.

  Also, in the reception period B, the appearance of the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" when the automatic button function is activated is as described above (see FIG. 274 (j)). In this regard, in the above-described production example, during the reception period E (FIG. 286), when the automatic button function is activated (when progressing from FIG. 286 (e) to (h)), the “disappearance effect” is displayed. (Disappearance related display) ”should not appear. With such a configuration, it is possible to recognize the type as the acceptance period depending on whether or not the "disappearance effect (disappearance related display)" appears when the automatic button function is activated. ..

  It should be noted that in the reception period E (FIG. 286), even when an operation (operation) is received by the player and the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is hidden by this, " The disappearance effect (display related to disappearance) may not be displayed.

  As described above, during the reception period B, the simulated image display (integrated simulated image display IG) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232). On the other hand, in the reception period A and the reception period E, it is desirable that the image display is displayed in only one mode.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period A, the background image is not changed based on the operation being accepted by the player (see FIG. 279), and in the reception periods B and E, the player is The background image is changed based on the acceptance of the operation by. With such a configuration, it becomes easy to recognize that the display after reception is displayed because the automatic button function is enabled, and thus it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  However, in the reception period E, even if the operation (operation) by the player is received, if this is due to the operation on the "sword decoration 5001", the post-reception display E2 may be displayed. Instead of changing the background image to a different background image. According to such a configuration, while displaying the post-reception display E2 according to the acceptance, the player confirms that the background image that should be originally changed has not been changed, so that the reception It becomes possible to recognize that the period E is not yet finished.

  In the reception period E, a plurality of objects (the operation button 410 and the sword ornament 5001 are included as objects (operation means) to be operated (operated) by the player, but may include special operation means 1410). Is set, and the case where the player's operation (operation) with respect to the operation button 410 among the plurality of objects is received is different from the case where the player's operation (operation) with respect to the sword decoration 5001 is received. The reception sound is output. As a result, it is possible to preferably suggest that different performances are produced depending on which of the plurality of objects is operated.

  In the reception period B, when the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A is audibly output based on the result of the effect determination (big hit determination) and the "reception sound A" corresponding to the reception period A is There may be a case where a different “reception sound B” is audibly output.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, the player is provided with a plurality of options (here, the operation button 410 is operated, the sword ornament 5001 is operated, or the special operation means 1410 is operated. Are displayed, and different displays (post-reception displays E1 and E2) appear as post-reception displays depending on which of the options is selected by the operation (operation) by the player. Then, when none of the plurality of options is selected within the period (here, when no motion (operation) by the player is detected), a specific option among the plurality of options is displayed as a post-reception display. The display (display E1 after reception) when the button is selected (here, the operation button 410 is operated) is made to appear.

  According to such a configuration, if no operation is performed within the reception period E, only the same post-reception display is always displayed. Therefore, the player can perform a selective operation within the reception period E. Will be able to encourage.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, as the operation means, the operation button 410 (corresponding to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion) of the "configuration 9-A") and the sword ornament 5001 ("configuration 9-A"). A plurality of operating means including a second operating means (corresponding to a second operation receiving portion) are prepared, and a plurality of receiving periods include a receiving period E (corresponding to a specific receiving period of “configuration 9-A”). There is a reception period for each type. In the reception period E, both the reception of the operation on the operation button 410 and the reception of the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted as the reception for causing the display change corresponding to the reception period E. The post-reception display E1 (specific display change) can be generated when an operation on the operation button 410 is received, and the post-reception display E1 (specific display change) can be generated when an operation on the sword decoration 5001 is received. Since it is possible to generate a display change (display after reception E2) different from the display after reception E1 (specific display change) without generating it, it is desirable to have an interest in which operation means is operated. Will be able to.

  Further, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, the reception period E is ended by this, but when the sword ornament 5001 is operated, the reception period E is not ended by this. I tried to extend the remaining time in reverse. More specifically, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 is operated, this is used as a trigger to bring the remaining time of the reception period E1 into the unutilized state. In other words, in this case, since it is possible to give the unprecedented rendition as the reception period E using a plurality of operating means, various interesting renditions based on such rendition are provided. Will be able to offer.

However, in the reception period E according to the above-described production example, the remaining time as the reception period E can be extended only by performing an operation on the sword decoration 5001, so that the feeling of tension is appropriately maintained. There is a concern that you cannot. Therefore, a reception period F different from the reception period E is further provided. Also in the reception period F, as in the reception period E, the "integrated image display IG" using the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are provided. The "sword decoration image SYG" and the special operation image (button described as "PUSH" in the figure) 1410 are displayed respectively. Then, even when the acceptance is made within the acceptance period F, as in the case of the acceptance period E (see FIG. 286) described above,
When the operation for the “operation button 410” is accepted, the acceptance sound F1 is audibly output and the post-acceptance display F1 is displayed based on the acceptance.
When the “special operation means 1410” is operated, the reception sound E may be ended without making any reception sound, no display change, and the like. So that it doesn't exist (the same as the state where no reaction occurs and no operation is performed),
When the operation for the "sword ornament 5001" is accepted, a reception sound F2 is audibly output based on the acceptance, and a display change (display after reception) different from the display after reception F1 (display after reception) Processing such as displaying F2) is performed. Then, in the reception period F, even when the operation on the "sword decoration body 5001" is received, the remaining time as the reception period F is not reset (not extended), and the reception period F concerned. The remaining time may be continued to be digested as it is. That is, in this case, when the operation on the "sword ornament 5001" is received within the reception period F, the post-reception display F2 is displayed with this as an opportunity, but the reception period F is ended or the reception period F is received. The remaining time is not reset, and the reception period F is continued thereafter (of course, the operation of the operation button 410 is also accepted).

  According to such a configuration, the player is presented with options of "whether to operate the operation button 410", "whether to operate the sword decoration 5001", and "whether to operate the special operation means 1410". Even if the reception period occurs, when the operation on the “sword decoration body 5001” is received, the remaining time as the reception period is not necessarily reset (not extended), so a sense of tension is preferable. You will be expected to keep on.

  Further, like the reception period E, the reception period F is preferably set as a target for which the above-described automatic button function is activated. When the automatic button function is activated during the reception period F, the operation button 410 is received within the reception period F as in the case where the automatic button function is activated during the reception period E. It is desirable to display the "post-acceptance display F1" appearing in. However, at this time, when the automatic button function is activated for the reception period F, unlike the case of the reception period E (the reception sound E1 is not audibly output), the reception sound F1 is audibly output. Is more desirable.

  According to such a configuration, when the acceptance period ends without any acceptance, it is possible to indicate whether the acceptance period was the acceptance period E or the acceptance period F. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In this case, also in the reception period F, the "integrated muffled image display IG" is displayed as a mocked image displayed by using the operation button 410, and the gauge image GG included in the integrated muffled image display IG is It is desirable that the display area does not decrease with the passage of time.

  Also, in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, there are a plurality of gauge images (predetermined images) GG used for suggesting the remaining time, even though a plurality of types of simulated image displays are displayed. It is desirable that only one of the types of image display (integrated image display IG) is associated.

  Also in the reception period F, as in the case of the reception period E, as time passes in the reception period F, the “integrated image display IG” is as shown in FIGS. 287 (a) to 287 (d). In addition, a portion (button image BMG) of the operation button 410, which corresponds to the "operation receiving portion", is dynamically displayed as if "a movement when the player receives an operation". In the “sword decoration image SYG” and the “special image TM”, the part of the sword decoration 5001 that is the “operation receiving part” and the part of the special operation means 1410 that is the “operation receiving part” are dynamic. It is desirable that the display is static and not displayed.

  In the reception period E and the reception period F, it is not always necessary to display the image of the special operation means 1410 (special image TM), and the pachinko machine 1 includes the special operation means 1410 itself. You may choose not to.

  Further, in the above-described production example, as the reception period, "reception period A, reception period B, or reception period D (corresponding to the first reception period of" configuration 10-A ")" and "reception period E (" configuration 10- A plurality of acceptance periods including “A” corresponding to the second acceptance period) ”are prepared. Then, in the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), a specific guide image display (here, the integrated guide image display IG) is displayed as a guide image display of the operation receiving portion, and in the reception period E, A plurality of mock image displays (here, integrated mood image display IG, sword decoration image SYG, special mood image TM) are displayed as a mock image display of the operation receiving portion, and the mood image display is performed by the player's operation. The operation receiving unit is designed to be executable as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving unit is movable.

  In this respect, in the above-described effect example, when the mock image display is executed as “a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by the operation of the player” (for example, the reception period A, B, E) and a case where it is not executed as "a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation receiving portion is moved by an operation by the player" (for example, reception period E). That is, in this case, not only when it is easy for the player to recognize what kind of operation should be performed, but also what kind of operation should be performed, even under the condition that the image display is displayed. In some cases, it may be difficult to recognize, and it is expected that a feeling of tension until the operation by the player is accepted can be appropriately maintained.

  In particular, in the above-described production example, a plurality of operation receiving portions including the operation button 410 and the sword decoration 5001 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), the sword decoration 5001 is used. The image display (sword decoration image SYG) is not performed, and the image of the operation button 410 is displayed (integrated image display IG). At this time, the image of the operation button 410 is displayed by the player. Is executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

  On the other hand, in the reception period E, at least both the image display of the operation button 410 (integrated image display IG) and the image display of the sword decoration 5001 (sword decoration image SYG) are displayed. , One of the integrated image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, integrated image display IG) describes the movement when the one operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation of the player. Although executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated image display IG and the sword decoration image SYG (here, the sword decoration image SYG) has the other operation receiving portion movable by an operation by the player. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

  According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or may not be executed as the dynamic display. It will be possible to realize it, and it is expected that the interest in playing games will be improved.

  Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this is received, the first display change (display E1 after reception) can be generated by using this as a trigger, and corresponds to the mock image display (here, sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed. When the operation receiving portion (here, the sword decoration 5001) is operated and is received, the second display change (display E2 after reception) can be triggered by this operation. That is, in this case, regardless of whether or not the dynamic display is being performed, the post-reception display corresponding to the type of the receiving side will appear, so that the dynamic image of the side on which the dynamic display is not performed is displayed. It is possible to add "implications for production" to the display. For example, even when the operation receiving unit (here, the sword decoration body 5001) corresponding to the mock image display (here, the sword decoration image SYG) on the side where dynamic display is not performed is operated. It will be possible to give surprise to the change in display triggered by this.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, a plurality of operation receiving portions including the operation button 410 and the special operation means 1410 are prepared, and during the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D), the special operation means 1410 is used. The image display (special image TM) is not performed, and the image display of the operation button 410 is performed (integrated image display IG). At this time, the image display of the operation button 410 is operated by the player. Is executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation button 410 is made movable.

  On the other hand, during the reception period E, at least both the image display of the operation button 410 (integrated image display IG) and the image display of the special operation means 1410 (special image TM) are displayed. One of the integrated image display IG and the special image TM (here, integrated image display IG) describes the movement when one of the operation receiving portions is made movable by the operation of the player. Although executed as a dynamic display, the other of the integrated image display IG and the special image TM (here, the special image TM) has the other operation receiving portion movable by an operation by the player. It is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement of time.

  According to such a configuration, when the simulated image display is performed, it may be executed as a dynamic display or may not be executed as the dynamic display. It will be possible to realize it, and it is expected that the interest in playing games will be improved.

  Moreover, in the reception period E, an operation is performed on the operation receiving unit (here, the operation button 410) corresponding to the image display (here, the integrated image display IG) on the side where the dynamic display is performed. When this happens, the first display change (display E1 after reception) can be generated, and the operation receiving unit (here, the special image TM) on the side where dynamic display is not performed (here, the special image TM) is generated. Here, when the special operation means 1410) is operated, no display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. That is, in this case, even if a simulated image display (here, the specialized image TM) is displayed during the acceptance period, it is not always accepted when the corresponding operation receiving portion (special operation means 1410) is operated. Therefore, it is expected that the feeling of tension during the reception period will be appropriately maintained.

  In this case, during the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D) in which the special image TM is not displayed, when the special operation means 1410 is operated, the display change (display after reception) is triggered by this. It will not occur. However, when the special operation means 1410 is operated in the reception period A (or the reception periods B and D) in which the special image TM is not displayed, a display change (display after reception) is triggered by this operation. It may be allowed to. According to such a configuration, the effectiveness of the operation cannot be judged only by the presence / absence of the display of the simulated image display, and the feeling of tension can be appropriately maintained.

  In the above-described production example, during the reception period E, the sword decoration image SYG and the special mood image TM are displayed as still images. However, for the sword decoration image SYG and the special mood image TM, the operation receiving portion (the sword decoration body 5001 in the case of the sword decoration image SYG and the special operation means 1410 in the case of the special mood image TM) is operated by the player. Anything that is not executed as a dynamic display that depicts the movement when the operation is made movable may be used, for example, a movement (rotation, etc.) different from the movement when the operation receiving portion is made movable by the operation of the player. For example, it may be executed as a dynamic display.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, first, a plurality of operation means (a plurality of operation reception portions) including the operation button 410 (corresponding to the specific operation means (specific operation reception portion) of the “configuration 11-A”) are prepared. The reception period includes the reception period A or the reception period B (corresponding to the first reception period of “configuration 11-A”) and the reception period E (corresponding to the second reception period of “configuration 11-A”). We have multiple reception periods. Then, in the reception period A (or the reception period B), a model image display (button model image BMG) of the operation button 410 and a specific image (gauge image GG) corresponding to the button model image BMG are displayed. , "Remaining time specific display that indicates the remaining time that the operation of the operation button 41 is acceptable by decreasing the display area of the gauge image GG with the passage of time" is performed.

  On the other hand, in the reception period E, a button model image BMG (integrated model image display IG) that simulates the operation button 410 is performed, but "the operation is performed by reducing the display area of the gauge image GG with time. This is not performed for the "remaining time specifying display that indicates the remaining time that the operation of the button 41 is acceptable."

  According to such a configuration, even if the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) that shows the operation button 410 is displayed, "the operation is performed by decreasing the display area of the gauge image GG with time. Since the "remaining time specifying display that indicates the remaining time that the operation of the button 41 is allowed to be accepted" is not necessarily performed, it is possible to appropriately maintain the tension when the reception period occurs. become.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, during the reception period E, the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) used for operating the operation button 410 and an operation means (sword decoration 5001) different from this are used. Even though the sword decoration image SYG is displayed, the remaining time display (the above-described remaining time specifying display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed. ing. That is, in this case, in the reception period E, although both the operation of the operation button 410 and the operation of a different operation means (the sword decoration 5001) are permitted, the above-described “ The "remaining time specific display" will not be performed. As a result, when both the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410 and the acceptance of the operation on the sword decoration 5001 are permitted, the player is not floated and the acceptance period E is generated. It becomes possible to maintain a good sense of tension.

  Even when the remaining time display (the above-described remaining time specifying display) that suggests (depicts) how much time is left as the reception period E is not performed, the remaining time as the reception period E is not displayed. Needless to say, it is decreasing.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, in the reception period E, the button image BMG that imitates the operation button 410 is displayed as an image integrated with the peripheral decoration image SSG that partitions and forms the display area of the gauge image GG. I am trying. However, the gauge image GG is displayed in such a manner that the display area of the gauge image GG does not decrease with time and the display area is maintained. That is, in this case, although the display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced at all, the remaining time as the reception period E is reduced, so that a large display area of the gauge image GG remains. You will be expected to maintain a good sense of tension when there is. The display area of the gauge image GG is not reduced until the remaining time of the reception period E becomes “0” and the gauge image GG is not displayed.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, only the button image BMG of the button image BMG that uses the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that uses the sword decoration 5001 remains. An image integrated with a specific image (gauge image GG) used for time display is displayed. That is, in this case, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the gauge image GG also corresponds to the sword decoration image SYG (and whether or not the operation reception for the sword decoration 5001 is validated). Therefore, it becomes possible to maintain the tension appropriately.

  In this case, even in the above-described reception period F, only the button image BMG of the button image BMG that uses the operation button 410 and the sword decoration image SYG that uses the sword decoration body 5001 is displayed as the remaining time. It is desirable to display it as an image integrated with the specific image (gauge image GG) used.

  Further, it is possible to generate a reception period G related to the post-reception display G. In the reception period G, the sword decoration image SYG imitating the sword decoration 5001 is not displayed, and the button embossing image BMG imitating the operation button 410 is integrated as described above. The image is displayed as the IG image display IG. However, in the reception period G, unlike the reception period A and the reception period B, the gauge image GG in the integrated image display IG does not reduce the display area with time and maintains the display area. Make it visible. With such a configuration, even when the reception period in which only the button image BMG (integrated image display IG) is displayed as the image display, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have the display area. Since it does not decrease, it is possible to maintain the feeling of tension during the reception period.

  In the above-described production example, in the reception periods E, F, and G, the integrated mock image display IG including the gauge image GG is displayed as a mock image display of the operation button 410, and then the gauge is displayed. By not reducing the display area of the image GG, it is made difficult to recognize the remaining time as the reception periods E, F, and G. However, instead of this, in the reception periods E, F, and G, unlike the case of the reception period A or the reception period B (integrated image display IG), the image display using the operation button 410 is changed to “Gauge”. The remaining time may not be displayed by displaying the image as an image that does not include the image GG. That is, in this case, the gauge image GG is not displayed at any position in the display area during the reception periods E, F, and G.

  In addition, in the case of displaying the image of the operation button 410 as the "image not including the gauge image GG", the "image not including the gauge image GG" is the "button image included in the integrated image display IG". It is desirable to be displayed as an image including at least the image BMG ”. That is, in this case, when the button image BMG is displayed, it may be displayed as an image integrated with the gauge image GG or may be displayed as an image not integrated with the gauge image GG. , It becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension when the reception period occurs.

In addition, in the above-described effect example, at least the following operating means are prepared as the operating means.
A handle portion 5012 (corresponding to the first operation receiving portion of “Structure 12-A”) that is displaced by the player's operation, and the handle portion 5012 that is provided on the periphery of the handle portion 5012 and is not displaced. A sword decoration 5001 (corresponding to the first operating means of the "configuration 12-A") having a sheath 5020 (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration portion of the "configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 146, etc.), and An operation button 410 (corresponding to a second operation receiving portion of "configuration 12-A") that is displaced by receiving an operation by a player, and a frame provided on the periphery thereof and not displaced even when the operation button 410 is operated A rendering operation unit 400 (corresponding to the second operating means of the "configuration 12-A") having a unit 415 (corresponding to the second peripheral decoration portion of the "configuration 12-A") (see FIG. 44 and the like).

  Then, when displaying the sword decoration image SYG that imitates the sword decoration body 5001, a pattern part imitation image imitating the pattern part 5012 (corresponding to the first receiving part imitation image of “configuration 12-A”) and the pattern part It is possible to display a pattern part peripheral decoration image (corresponding to the first peripheral decoration image of “configuration 12-A”) that decorates the peripheral edge of the mock image (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the mood that uses the production operation unit 400. When displaying an image display (here, the integrated button image display IG), the button button image BMG (corresponding to the second receiving portion button image of the “configuration 12-A”) that has pressed the operation button 410, and the button button image. A peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the peripheral of the image BMG can be displayed (see FIG. 287, etc.), and the pattern peripheral decoration image and the peripheral decoration image SSG are displayed as different images.

  According to such a configuration, since the peripheral decoration images are different from each other, even if the appearance of the operating means itself is similar, the case where the sword decoration image SYG is displayed and the case where the integrated image image display IG is displayed. It will be possible to make the appearances of the display and the display different from each other, and it is expected that it will be easy to distinguish which operation means should be operated.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the handle portion peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG does not include a portion in which the decorative portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1 is included, and the sheath portion 5020 is used as an image display. Although displayed, the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated black image display IG is displayed as an image including at least a portion of the decorative portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. That is, in this case, when the “sword decoration image SYG” is displayed, it is possible to preferably recognize that the sword decoration 5001 is in a situation in which an operation opportunity is given. On the other hand, when the "integrated image display IG" is displayed, a situation in which an operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) is provided as a more effective effect. Will be able to. In this case, the "rendering operation unit 400" is provided as a member having an operation receiving portion (operation button 410) larger than that of the "sword ornament 5001", such as a decoration portion that does not actually exist in the pachinko machine 1. It is desirable not to make it difficult to recognize which operation means should be operated even if the peripheral decoration image SSG including at least the portion that has been displayed is displayed.

  In this way, in order to provide the situation in which the operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410) as a “higher effect”, the peripheral decoration image SSG is the pachinko machine concerned. It is desirable to display an image of a fictitious decorative portion that does not actually exist on the machine 1. However, in order to make it easier to recognize that the operation opportunity is given to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), a part of the peripheral decoration image SSG is a part of the frame unit 415. May be included.

  Further, in the above-described production example, the remaining time display is performed only on the peripheral decoration image SSG of the handle peripheral decoration image in the sword decoration image SYG and the peripheral decoration image SSG in the integrated image display IG. As described above, the display area of 1 is partitioned and the remaining time can be displayed using the display area.

  The "sword decoration image SYG" is displayed as an image display in which a pattern part image obtained by modifying the pattern part 5012 and a pattern part peripheral part decoration image for decorating the peripheral part of the pattern part image are integrated. The “integrated image display IG” is displayed as an image display in which a button image BMG obtained by exercising the operation button 410 and a peripheral decoration image SSG that decorates the periphery of the button image BMG are integrated. .. In this respect, the "sword decoration image SYG" does not separately include the "pattern part image" and the "pattern part peripheral decoration image" as its image data, and they are integrated as one image data. It has been prepared. Similarly, the image data of the “integrated image display IG” is not separately provided with the “button image BMG” and the “periphery decoration image SSG”, and they are prepared as one image data in which they are integrated. It is supposed to be done.

  Further, in the above-described production example, first, as the operation receiving unit, the operation button 410 of the production operation unit 400 (corresponding to the first operation receiving unit of the “configuration 13-A”) and the handle 5012 of the sword ornament 5001 (“ A plurality of operation receiving portions including a second operation receiving portion of the configuration 13-A) and an operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 (equivalent to the third operation receiving portion of the “configuration 13-A”) are prepared. As the reception period, a plurality of types of reception periods including the reception period E (corresponding to the specific reception period of “Configuration 13-A”) are prepared. Then, in the reception period E (FIG. 286), the “integrated image display IG (inner button image BMG)” using the operation button 410, and the “sword decoration image SYG (inner handle part) in which the handle 5012 is used. Peripheral decoration image) ”and a“ special image TM ”of the operation receiving portion of the special operation means 1410 are displayed, and when the operation of the operation button 410 among the plurality of operation receiving portions is accepted, Of the "integrated image display IG", "sword decoration image SYG", and "special image TM", the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special image TM" are obtained by using the operation receiving portion that has not been received. Is at least hidden (see FIG. 286).

  According to the above-mentioned configuration, a mock image display (sword decoration image) that uses a different operation receiving part (handle 5012 of sword decoration 5001 and operation receiving part of special operation means 1410) different from the operation button 410 that has received the operation. Since the SYG and the special image TM are hidden, the operation receiving portion (the handle portion 5012 of the sword ornament 5001 and the special operation) where the image display is displayed but the operation is not accepted. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not a further operation is necessary for the operation receiving unit) of the means 1410.

  Further, during the reception period E, although the “integrated mage image display IG”, the “sword decoration image SYG”, and the “special mood image TM” are displayed, the operation button 410, the sword decoration body 5001, and the special operation are performed. Of the means 1410, the special operation means 1410 is configured so that acceptance of operations (acceptance regarding display after acceptance) is not validated (not permitted). That is, as described above, in the reception period E, the first display change (display E1 after reception) is generated when the operation of the operation button 410 is received, and the second display is displayed when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received. Although the change (display E2 after reception) is generated, the operation is not received by the special operation means 1410, and the display change triggered by the operation does not occur. As a result, it is possible to appropriately maintain the performance and tension until the operation by the player is received in the reception period E.

  Further, in the reception period E, when the operation for the sword ornament 5001 is accepted, a second display change (display E2 after acceptance) is generated. Neither the "decorative image SYG" nor the "special image TM" is hidden, and the display state of them is continued (FIG. 286 (i)). With such a configuration, it is possible to cause a display change that is significantly different from that when the operation button 410 is operated, and it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Particularly, in the reception period E, when the operation of the sword ornament 5001 is received, the remaining time of the reception period E is increased with the reception of the operation (FIG. 286 (i) → ( (Progress to e)), and in realizing the performance that requires further operation, it is expected to suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to lack of remaining time.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, when the operation button 410 receives an operation, the first display change (display after reception E1) occurs, but the first display change (display after reception) In a state in which E1) has occurred, the "integrated mould image display IG" is displayed, and both the "sword decoration image SYG" and the "special mood image TM" are hidden (Fig. 286 ( f)). Thereby, it is recognized that the post-reception display E1 is generated due to the acceptance of the operation on the operation button 410 even after the acceptance of the operation is being performed while the plurality of image images are being displayed. Will be able to.

  At this time, since the "integrated image display IG" is displayed at a position different from the position displayed in the reception period E (Fig. 286 (f)), the reception period E ends. You will be able to suggest that you are in a state of being.

  Further, in the above-described production example, in the reception period E, when the remaining time is exhausted, the automatic button function described above is activated, and the operation button 410 is accepted within the reception period E. The same display screen as is displayed (see FIG. 286 (h)). Also in this case, in the state where the first display change (display E1 after reception) is occurring, the "integrated mage image display IG" is displayed, and the "sword decoration image SYG" and "special mood image TM" are displayed. Since all of them are hidden, it is possible to recognize that the post-reception display E1 corresponds to the operation button 410.

  In the acceptance period D shown in FIG. 284, when the character information (please press) is hidden, the display state of the image display is maintained (FIG. 284 (e)). As for the above, the character information may be hidden at the timing when it is hidden. In this case, when the character information (please press) is returned to the display state again, the simulated image display is also returned to the display state again (FIG. 284 (f)).

[Operation reception effect characterized by the state of the image display]
As described by exemplifying FIG. 118, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the variation in which of the plurality of variation patterns is executed based on the result of the jackpot determination according to the start winning (holding exhaustion). Pattern judgment can be executed. When one variation pattern is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination, the peripheral control MPU 1511a has a plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern. It is possible to execute effect determination (advance determination, etc.) as to which of the expected effects (advance effect, etc.) to selectively appear. Depending on the result of the effect determination, all of the plurality of expected effects (preliminary effects, etc.) prepared corresponding to the selected variation pattern may be sequentially executed, or a plurality of expected effects may be executed. It is possible that none of the expected productions (such as notice productions) will be executed.

  Then, as described above, when such an effect determination (variation pattern determination, advance notice determination, etc.) is performed, the effect display device 1600 is controlled to display the effect content according to the result of the effect determination, thereby performing the jackpot determination. The variation effect based on the decorative pattern according to the result is executed together with the expected effect (notice effect) related to the background depiction (background notification) and the movable body operation (effect effect). As a result, the variation effect by the decorative pattern is executed together with the expected effect related to the background depiction and the movement of the movable body, and as a result, when the stop display is performed with the big hit pattern, the big hit game or the high bonus as a benefit to the player. Transition to the probability game state becomes feasible.

  In such a configuration, the variation effect based on the decorative pattern is provided as an effect having "a function indicating whether or not a big hit is obtained as a result of the big hit determination", and its background depiction and movable body movements, etc. The expected effect according to (2) will be provided as an effect having "a function of suggesting the degree of expectation that a big hit is obtained, that is, a ratio (including 0% and 100%)". That is, the player will enjoy the game through these effects.

  For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as a result of the change pattern determination, SP expectation (SP reach change pattern) that develops into SP reach (such as reach effect with background change) is specified. When the variation pattern is selected, no matter which result is obtained as the effect determination (notice determination, etc.), when the symbol effect based on the specific variation pattern progresses to the specific timing during the SP reach (the predetermined condition Is satisfied), it is possible to generate a reception acceptable state (effective period) in which production reception is permitted.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined fluctuation pattern is selected from the low expected fluctuation patterns (non-reach fluctuation patterns) in which even the reach state is not formed as a result of the fluctuation pattern determination. Even when the special effect is obtained in the effect determination (notice determination, etc.) corresponding to the predetermined variation pattern, the symbol effect based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing (the predetermined condition is satisfied. Then, it is possible to generate a reception permissible state (effective period) in which performance reception is permitted. However, when the predetermined variation pattern is selected, if the special result is not obtained in the production determination, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) does not occur even if the symbol production based on the predetermined variation pattern progresses to the predetermined timing. .. Further, the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs in a predetermined variation pattern is different from the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) that occurs when the symbol effect based on the particular variation pattern progresses to a particular timing during SP reach. It is executed as an effect (an effect after reception).

  That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to generate a reception period in which the player is allowed to receive the operation (operation), and the operation (operation) is received within the reception period. Then, a display change (post-reception effect) is generated according to the type of the reception period that has occurred.

  Further, during the reception period, an operation target display indicating which of the “targets of the operation by the player” is possible can be displayed. Such an operation target display can be displayed as a mock image display in which an object (operation means) to be operated by the player is represented as an image. In particular, the "motion target display" according to this example of performance is displayed as a "movement image display" that imitates the motion target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations.

  Further, during the reception period, a remaining time display indicating the remaining time during which the player is allowed to receive an operation (operation) can be displayed. Such remaining time display can be executed, for example, as a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced with time. In particular, in this example of performance, as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes (for example, a reduction rate of the display area of the gauge image, suggestion of expectation, suggestion of type of operation means, etc.) It is prepared and is executed in any of those modes.

  Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice effect determination, the variation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (valid period) at a predetermined timing during SP reach is not limited to the above “specific variation pattern”. May also be provided. Regardless of which result is obtained as the notice production, the fluctuation pattern that causes the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) at a predetermined timing is not included in the low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Although it may be included or included, it is desirable (although not necessarily required) to lower the selection rate (occurrence rate).

  By the way, the acceptable reception state (valid period) that can occur under these conditions and the like is that the reception of a display change or the like on the effect display device 1600 as long as the operation by the player is detected within the set time (valid period). Since the post-display (post-operation display) is only executed, the effect sound change in the speaker, the light emission change by the lamp, the effect operation by the movable ornament, etc. are generated, the acceptance acceptable state (effective period) The performance of the game itself is poor, and there is concern that the interest in games related to the reception period will decline.

  In addition, in each of the examples described above and each example described below, the “operation (action) by the player” to be detected is a player such as the “operation button 410” or the “sword decoration 5001”. It is not limited to those that are directly operated (pushing action or sword action) by "touch operation by the player to a specific part" that is the detection target of the touch sensor and "in the specific space" that is the detection target of the non-contact sensor. The player's action in "is also meant. In short, it may be provided with one or a plurality of reception means (operation means) for receiving the operation by the player (pressing operation, sword removing operation, touch operation, non-contact operation, etc.).

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, for example, with respect to the state of the image display when giving the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) to the player, the following special performance is provided. I have to. It should be noted that, with regard to each performance (each configuration) described below, it is not always necessary to provide all of those configurations, and for example, even if only one performance (any configuration) is provided, amusement Can be reduced, or some configurations that are considered necessary for obtaining further operational effects can be selectively provided, or can be applied to other configurations (applicable to The configuration described as (desirable) may be appropriately adopted. Furthermore, each performance (configuration) described below is merely an example, and may have any one configuration capable of suppressing a decrease in game enjoyment related to the reception period.

[Configuration 1-B]
For example, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, the operation target display (for example, the mock image display which has a plurality of modes different in expectation from the target of the motion of the player) is not displayed. It has been decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods, including a specific reception period in which the “reception validity determination that a player's action is a valid action” is permitted. The “specific acceptance period” according to the configuration 1-B is merely a name used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 1-B. Therefore, it may mean the same reception period as the "specific reception period" according to another configuration, or may mean a reception period different from the "specific reception period" according to another configuration. Good. However, in such a specific reception period, it is difficult to recognize from which timing the acceptance validity determination is permitted, and further, whether the acceptance validity determination is already permitted or not. There is a concern that it can only be enjoyed by players who are sensitive to performance.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a specific reception period occurs, a reception permission sound indicating that the reception validity determination is permitted or the reception validity determination is permitted Since it is made possible to output, by being in a state in which the operation target display (for example, a mock image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations that imitates the target of the operation by the player) is not displayed. Although there is still a situation in which it is not possible to fully recognize which target the player is performing, in a situation where the player is required to perform some action (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given) It becomes possible to recognize that there is something, and as a result, many players are expected to enjoy the effect.

  Note that the acceptable reception sound is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and may be generated before the specific reception period and ended before the specific reception period, or the generation timing of the specific reception period. It may be output so as to cross over the specified reception period, or may be output after the generation timing of the specific reception period and ended within the specific reception period. As for the acceptance-permitted sound, any sound may be realized as a sound to which a certain operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is (or is) always given to the player when this is output. In addition, "the state in which the operation target display (the image display) is not displayed" is not limited to the configuration 1-B, and the "operation target display (the image display)" is also displayed in other configurations. It may be in a state where it cannot be visually recognized on the screen. For example, it is meant to include a state in which the image is displayed on a layer but is not visible because an image on another layer is preferentially displayed.

  Further, it is desirable that the acceptance permission sound output when the specific acceptance period occurs is a sound that is output (as the acceptance permission sound) when another acceptance period occurs. For example, if the acceptable reception sound is output even when the reception period in which the same operation opportunity (operation opportunity) as the specific reception period is given occurs, the operation target display (for example, the image display) is displayed. Even if it is not performed, it becomes possible to suitably suggest which action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (given) to the player. In addition, for example, if the reception acceptable sound is output even when a reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) different from the specific reception period is given occurs, an operation target display (for example, a simulated image display) ) Is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to predict which action opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given, but some action opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (given Be able to suggest that you are in a state of being.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case of adopting the “configuration 1-B”, when the specific reception period occurs, first, the operation target display (for example, the mock image display) is hidden (is not displayed) the first display. Allow the condition to appear. Then, after that, the second display state in which the operation target display (for example, a simulated image display) is displayed may appear while the specific reception period is continued. That is, in this case, in the specific reception period, it initially occurs as a so-called "hidden button", and can be enjoyed only by a player who is sensitive to such performance. However, the operation target display (for example, image display) should be displayed during the specific reception period (before the set time (effective time) is exhausted). Then, even if the player is not sensitive to the performance, many players will be able to notice this (specific reception period) and enjoy the performance. In addition, through such performance, it is expected that the ability to perceive the occurrence of so-called "hidden buttons" will be developed.

  Further, at this time, in the second display state, it is desirable that the operation target display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations. That is, on the player side, if there is a case where the operation is accepted in the second display state even though the operation is not accepted in the first display state, an operation target display (for example, a mock image display) is displayed. Until that time, the fact that the specific reception period had not been recognized was revealed to the surroundings, and it was feared that the entertainment of the game would be deteriorated due to the fact that it was revealed to be insensitive to such production. In this respect, in the second display state, if the operation target display is displayed with one of a plurality of different expectations, even if the player accepts the operation in the second display state, the “first Although I was aware that the operation acceptance was allowed from the time of the display state, I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the operation target display (for example, the image display), so in the first display state It has become possible to expect that it will be possible to appropriately suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

  Also, due to the nature of the so-called "hidden button", the player can accurately recognize from which timing the specific acceptance period during which "the acceptance validity determination that the action by the player is an effective action" is permitted has occurred. It is difficult. In this case, if the operation (operation) occurs slightly before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the "reception validity judgment" is not made and "I thought that the specific reception period occurred, but it is a misunderstanding. There is a concern that the player may mistakenly recognize that "there was no" and that the specific acceptance period may end without any action (operation) being performed by the player. Therefore, in the case of adopting the “configuration 1-B”, even if there is an operation (operation) by the player before the specific reception period, the operation (operation) is performed at that point in the “reception validity determination”. However, after the start of the specific reception period, a "reception valid determination" is (based on) the operation (operation) by the player performed before the specific reception period. It is desirable to be able to. With such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) occurs slightly before the occurrence of the specific reception period, it becomes possible to accept it after the specific reception period occurs. Eventually, it becomes possible to execute the post-reception production using this as a trigger. However, in this case, the detection itself of whether or not the operation (operation) by the player is performed is based on whether or not the reception period during which the "reception / effectiveness determination that the operation by the player is a valid operation" is permitted is permitted. Regardless, it will be required to be executed.

  Further, at this time, for an operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the specific reception period, the operation (operation) is not displayed in the second display state after the specific reception period has occurred but in the first display. It is desirable to be able to accept (validity judgment of acceptance) as a validity judgment in the state. According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing when the first display state (specific reception period) occurs) after a little time has passed since the player performed the operation (operation), and the operation target display Even if (for example, the image display) is not displayed, the acceptance validity is determined, and the post-reception effect is started to be executed. As a result, a state in which the operation by the player is properly accepted, not the so-called “automatic reception function” when there is no operation (operation) despite displaying the operation target display (for example, the image display) It becomes possible to suggest that there is in, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration 2-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the first reception period, the operation target display (here, the operation target of the player is imitated is imitated regardless of the timing of the "reception validity determination that the motion of the player is a valid operation"). And the expected image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations is always displayed, and in the second reception period, the operation target display (here, regardless of which timing the reception validity determination is made) It is so arranged that a simulated image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations is imitated by the player as the target of the operation. The "first reception period" and the "second reception period" of the configuration 2-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods having completely different performances, it becomes possible to give a sharp impression to the player in requesting a motion (giving an operation opportunity), It is expected that the interest in playing games will be improved.

  Further, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 2-B”, a third reception period is further provided, and an operation (operation) by the player is regarded as a valid operation (valid operation) in the third reception period. Depending on the timing at which the acceptance validity determination is made, the operation target display (simultaneous image display) may be displayed or the operation target display (simulative image display) may not be displayed. The “third reception period” of the configuration 2-B is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 2-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “third acceptance period” according to another configuration, may mean a different acceptance period, or may be different from those acceptance periods. May be meant.

  According to such a configuration, it is as if the "first reception period" in which the operation target display (simulated image display) is always displayed regardless of at which timing the reception validity determination is made. Or, it becomes possible to make it appear as if the “second reception period” in which the operation target display (image display) is not always displayed regardless of which timing the reception validity determination is made, It is possible to appropriately maintain the sense of tension when the reception period occurs through the performance that gives such uncertainty.

[Configuration 3-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, one of a plurality of modes having different expectations is determined based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. 1 After the reception, the effect can be executed, and when the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion” is made within the second reception period, the expectation degree is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. The second post-reception effect can be executed in any of a plurality of different modes. The "first reception period" and the "second reception period" of the configuration 3-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 3-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the “reception validity determination” is made within the first reception period and the “reception validity determination” is made within the second reception period. At least one of the display target areas (specific areas) of the operation target display (here, the image display that imitates the operation target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is displayed. Since the disappearance EF effect can be executed using the section, it is easy to recognize that the acceptance validity determination has been properly made (the acceptance period has ended due to the operation by the player being accepted). You will be able to.

  In addition, the disappearance EF effect is displayed using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the operation target display (simulated image display). At that time, the operation target display (simulated image display) is It does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the disappearance EF effect is, for example, a meaning that includes the above-mentioned "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the muddy image display", and in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (mature image display) is displayed. The effect using a mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including, or an effect body located at a position overlapping with at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (moving image display) is displayed is executed. In addition to the mode described above, the operation target display (black-and-white image display) is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize itself (for example, the display is made smaller, the display is blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed). It may be a mode.

  Further, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 3-B”, at what timing is the acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation) in the first acceptance period? Depending on the situation, there may be a case in which the operation target display (display of the scale image) is displayed and a case where the operation target display (display of the scale image) is not displayed.

  In this case, first, when the reception validity determination is made under the condition that the operation target display (the image display) is displayed, the specific area in which the operation target display (the image display) is displayed triggered by this. The extinction EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of. On the other hand, even when the reception validity determination is made in a situation in which the operation target display (simulated image display) is not displayed, the disappearance EF effect is triggered by this when the reception effectiveness determination is made under the above-described situation (operation target display). It is desirable to execute it in the same manner as when the acceptance validity determination is made under the condition that is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suggest that the acceptance validity determination is in a secret state even in a situation where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. .. In addition, when the acceptance valid determination is made under the condition that the operation target display (the image display) is not displayed, the first reception period ends without displaying the operation target display, and the disappearance EF effect Will be executed using at least a part of the area where the operation target display was supposed to be displayed.

  Further, at this time, in the second reception period, the operation target display (simulated image display) is always performed regardless of at which timing the reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is a valid operation (valid operation) is performed. It is desirable to be displayed. By disposing such a "second reception period during which the operation target display (simulated image display) is always displayed" separately from the above-described first reception period, the disappearance EF effect is executed. Together with this, it is possible to provide a sense of security and to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

[Configuration 4-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during a reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, normally, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player is performed). Image display having a plurality of modes different from each other and different in expectation) can be displayed using at least a specific area, and the operation by the player is effectively performed while the image display is displayed. When the "acceptance validity determination" is made, it is possible to set the operation target display (display of the simulated image) to the non-display state based on the determination of the acceptance validity. In addition, when the "reception validity determination" is made while the operation target display (middle image display) is being displayed during the reception period, the operation target display (middle image display) is not displayed until it is hidden. The disappearance EF effect can be executed by using at least a part of the specific area.

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 first prepares a plurality of reception periods including a specific reception period as the reception period. Then, during the specific reception period, the game performed in a state in which the operation target display (here, the image of the image imitating the operation target of the player and having a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed. It is possible to perform “reception valid determination” in which the motion by the person is a valid motion, and when the valid reception determination is made, the disappearance EF effect is not executed. It should be noted that the “specific acceptance period” according to the configuration 4-B is merely a name used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the "specific acceptance period" according to another configuration, or may mean a different acceptance period.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the “reception valid determination” is properly performed (the state in which the reception period has ended due to the operation by the player being received). As a result, it is expected that the feeling of tension as the specific reception period for secretly requesting a motion from the player (secretly providing an operation opportunity) will be maintained after the reception validity determination is made. Become.

  Even when the disappearance EF effect is displayed, at that time, the operation target display (simulated image display) does not necessarily have to be displayed. In addition, the disappearance EF effect is, for example, a meaning that includes the above-mentioned "mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the muddy image display", and in this case, at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (mature image display) is displayed. The effect using a mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including, or an effect body located at a position overlapping with at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (moving image display) is displayed is executed. In addition to the mode described above, the operation target display (black-and-white image display) is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize itself (for example, the display is made smaller, the display is blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed). It may be a mode.

  Further, as will be described later, when adopting the “configuration 4-B”, the “specific reception period” may be set as the first reception period. Then, as a reception period, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period (specific reception period) and a second reception period are prepared, and in both of the first reception period and the second reception period, an operation target display (middle) is displayed. The acceptance validity determination may be made such that the action by the player performed in the state where the (image display) is not displayed is the valid action. Then, in the first reception period, when the reception validity determination is made that the movement by the player performed in a state where the movement target display (the image display) is not displayed, the disappearance EF effect is executed. In the second acceptance period, if the acceptance validity determination that the action by the player performed in the state where the action target display is not displayed is the valid action is made, the disappearance EF effect may be executed. Good. In this case, the "first reception period" and the "second reception period" are merely names used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 4-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, the first reception period (specific reception period) and the second reception period until the player performs the operation in the state where the operation target display (simulated image display) is not displayed. It is difficult to recognize which is occurring, but which of the first acceptance period (specific acceptance period) and the second acceptance period has occurred since the acceptance validity determination was made with this as the valid operation? Since it becomes possible to recognize, it becomes possible to prompt the player to perform an action.

[Configuration 5-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” of the configuration 5-B are merely names used for explaining the technical idea of the configuration 5-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  Then, in the case where the "reception valid determination that the action by the player is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception production (the post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception valid determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the operation target display (here, the image display that imitates the operation target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not hidden but is displayed. In some cases, when the "reception acceptance determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" is made within the second acceptance period, the post-reception production based on the reception activation determination (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period) ) Is started, the operation target display (here, the image display that imitates the target of the operation by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not hidden and is displayed. So that there is no case in the state.

  According to such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the operation target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the operation target by the player and have different expectations) And the operation target display (here, the image display having a plurality of modes with different expectations that imitates the operation target of the player) is visible. In some cases, the tension after the start of execution of the post-reception production is expected to be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 5-B” is adopted, in the first acceptance period, depending on at which timing “the acceptance validity determination that the action by the player is the valid action” is performed. When the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed, the operation target display (display of the image) is not hidden but displayed. It is desirable that the display of the operation target (display of the image of the image) is in a non-display state.

  That is, from the player's side, when the mock image display is displayed in the “second mode with high expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” (corresponding to the first reception period) It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the (post-reception production) is started in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when the mock image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity determination” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after being played, it is unavoidable that the enjoyment of the game declines.

  For example, in the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period), the mood image display is “first mode with low expectation” and “low expectation during the effective period (first reception period)”. Even if it is displayed in any of "two modes", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (further, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with low expectations). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with high expectation, even if it is possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment of the game, it is possible at this time. , If there is a case where the mood image display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation”, it is obvious that the interest of the game is deteriorated. Therefore, it is desirable to hide the mood image display. Can be said. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the mood image is displayed in the “high-expectation second mode”. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being performed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the mock image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue without doing this.

  Alternatively, even when the mock image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some players may have a problem that "when the post-reception effect is executed in the" mode with low expectations ". As an excuse, it seems that there is a person who wants to keep the display state not being hidden but the display state being continued at the time when the production after the reception is started, Even if the mock image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "lowly expected mode". In order to suppress the above, it is considered that there is a person who wants to make the visual image display invisible and invisible at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display a simulated image through the timing of "reception validity determination" within the first reception period. It becomes possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception production in the displayed state or to start the post-reception production in the state in which the visual image display is hidden and cannot be viewed. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

[Configuration 6-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” of the configuration 6-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 6-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  Then, in the case where the "reception valid determination that the action by the player is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception production (the post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception valid determination is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time is displayed (for example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time, and is expected as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image. (A plurality of modes with different degrees are prepared) may not be hidden but may be displayed, and "reception acceptance determination that operation by player is valid operation" is made within the second acceptance period. In this case, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed, the remaining time is displayed (for example, displayed in the frame image). It is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image according to the passage of time. As at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, multiple aspects with different expectations are prepared) I try not to be in a state where it has been.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is decreased with time. And a remaining time display (for example, within the frame image). At least one of the frame image and the gauge image is provided with a plurality of modes with different expectations. It is a depiction that reduces the display area of the displayed gauge image over time, and a plurality of aspects with different expectations are prepared as at least one aspect of the frame image and the gauge image) are not visible. In some cases, it is expected that the feeling of tension after the execution of the post-reception production is started can be appropriately maintained.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 6-B” is adopted, in the first reception period, depending on at which timing the “reception valid determination that a motion by the player is a valid motion” is performed. At the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not hidden and is displayed. It is desirable that there be a case where the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is not displayed.

  That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation” of the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “acceptance validity determination” (first It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this after the execution of the post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception valid determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, it is unavoidable that the game is less interesting.

  For example, in the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is “a low first expectation mode” within the effective period (first reception period). Even if it is displayed as "second mode with low expectation", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectation (further, it may be executed with a mode with low expectation). Is becoming Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with high expectation, even if it is possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment of the game, it is possible at this time. , If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", it is obvious that the interest of the game is deteriorated. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the frame image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation”. If at least one of the gauge image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to favorably suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to the post-reception production being performed in a mode with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue the gauge image without hiding it.

  Alternatively, even when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectation”, the post-reception effect is executed in the “mode with low expectation” among the players. A person who wants to keep the display state of the frame image and the gauge image not hidden at the time when the post-reception production is started as an "excuse" when it happens. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation", some of the players have a post-reception effect as "mode with low expectation". In order to prevent "frustration" when it is executed in ", I would like to make the frame image and gauge image hidden and invisible at the time when the post-reception production is executed. Person It seems to be there.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player operates the frame image and the gauge through the timing at which the “reception validity determination” is made within the first reception period. It is possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception effect while the image is displayed or to start the post-reception effect when the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be viewed. As a result, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

[Configuration 7-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, one of a plurality of modes having different expectations is determined based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. 1 After the reception, the effect can be executed, and when the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion” is made within the second reception period, the expectation degree is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. The second post-reception effect can be executed in any of a plurality of different modes. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” of the configuration 7-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception valid determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception valid determination" is started to be executed. At this time, the operation target display (here, the image display that imitates the operation target of the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and may be in a non-display state. is there. On the other hand, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. , The operation target display (here, the image of the image that imitates the target of the operation by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and should not be hidden. There is.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the case where the operation target display (display of the image of the image) is visible and the operation target display (display of the image of the image) ) Is not visible in some cases, and it is expected that the feeling of tension after the start of execution of the post-reception effect is appropriately maintained.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 7-B” is adopted, in the case where “a reception valid determination that a motion of the player is a valid motion is made” is made before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. Indicates that the operation target display (display of the image) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity determination is started. However, in the case where "the reception validity judgment is made that the movement by the player is a valid movement is made" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period has arrived, the state in which the operation target display (the image display) is displayed It is desirable that the post-reception production is started to be executed.

  That is, from the player's side, when the mock image display is displayed in the “second mode with high expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” (corresponding to the first reception period) It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the (post-reception production) is started in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when the mock image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity determination” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after being played, it is unavoidable that the enjoyment of the game declines.

  For example, in the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period), the mood image display is “first mode with low expectation” and “low expectation during the effective period (first reception period)”. Even if it is displayed in any of "two modes", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (further, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with low expectations). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with high expectation, even if it is possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment of the game, it is possible at this time. , If there is a case where the mood image display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation”, it is obvious that the interest of the game is deteriorated. Therefore, it is desirable to hide the mood image display. Can be said. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the mood image is displayed in the “high-expectation second mode”. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being performed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the mock image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue without doing this.

  Alternatively, even when the mock image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some players may have a problem that "when the post-reception effect is executed in the" mode with low expectations ". As an excuse, it seems that there is a person who wants to keep the display state not being hidden but the display state being continued at the time when the production after the reception is started, Even if the mock image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "lowly expected mode". In order to suppress the above, it is considered that there is a person who wants to make the visual image display invisible and invisible at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player "validates the operation by the player until the predetermined timing within the first reception period comes. By performing the "reception validity determination as an operation", it is possible to start the post-reception production in a state in which the visual image display is hidden and cannot be visually confirmed, and the predetermined reception within the first reception period is performed. When the "reception acceptance determination that the player's action is an effective action" is not made before the timing comes, at that point, the post-reception effect production starts to be executed even if the mood image display is not displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of being performed, a person who desires such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

[Configuration 8-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made within the first reception period, one of a plurality of modes having different expectations is determined based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. 1 After the reception, the effect can be executed, and when the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion” is made within the second reception period, the expectation degree is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. The second post-reception effect can be executed in any of a plurality of different modes. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” of the configuration 7-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 7-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period, the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the "reception valid determination" is started to be executed. At the time of being displayed, the remaining time is displayed (for example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time. (A plurality of different modes are prepared) may not be displayed and may be hidden. On the other hand, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the second reception period, at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time, and as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image, a plurality of modes having different expectations are set. Things that are prepared) are not displayed and are not hidden.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and the remaining time display (frame is displayed). In some cases, the images and gauge images are not visible, and it is expected that the feeling of tension after the execution of the post-reception production is appropriately maintained.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 8-B” is adopted, in the case where “a reception valid determination that a motion of the player is a valid motion is made” is made before the predetermined timing within the first reception period arrives. Indicates that the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is in a non-display state at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) based on the reception validity judgment is started. Although not performed, if the "reception valid determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion is made" after the predetermined timing within the first reception period comes, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is displayed. It is desirable to start the post-reception production in the displayed state.

  That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation” of the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “acceptance validity determination” (first It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this after the execution of the post-reception production corresponding to the reception period) in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception valid determination" (after the reception corresponding to the first reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the performance is started, it is unavoidable that the game is less interesting.

  For example, in the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period), at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is “a low first expectation mode” within the effective period (first reception period). Even if it is displayed as "second mode with low expectation", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectation (further, it may be executed with a mode with low expectation). Is becoming Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with high expectation, even if it is possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment of the game, it is possible at this time. , If at least one of the frame image and the gauge image continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation", it is obvious that the interest of the game is deteriorated. It can be said that it is desirable to hide it. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the frame image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation”. If at least one of the gauge image and the gauge image continues to be displayed, it is possible to favorably suppress a decrease in the entertainment level of the game due to the post-reception production being performed in a mode with low expectations. It can be said that it is desirable to continue the gauge image without hiding it.

  Alternatively, even when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectation”, the post-reception effect is executed in the “mode with low expectation” among the players. A person who wants to keep the display state of the frame image and the gauge image not hidden at the time when the post-reception production is started as an "excuse" when it happens. Even if at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the "second mode with high expectation", some of the players have a post-reception effect as "mode with low expectation". In order to prevent "frustration" when it is executed in ", I would like to make the frame image and gauge image hidden and invisible at the time when the post-reception production is executed. Person It seems to be there.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player "validates the operation by the player until the predetermined timing within the first reception period comes. It is possible to start the post-reception production in a state in which the frame image and the gauge image are hidden and cannot be viewed, and the reception acceptance effect determination that the operation is performed is performed. When the "validation of acceptance validating the player's action as a valid action" is not made by the time the predetermined timing arrives, at that time, after the acceptance is made while the frame image and gauge image are not displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the effect will start to be executed, a person who desires such an effect can enjoy the operation effect with peace of mind after that.

[Configuration 9-B]
Further, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, during a reception period in which an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, normally, an operation target display (here, an operation by the player is performed). Of a plurality of images that imitate the target and have different expectations, can be displayed using at least the specific region. During the reception period, when the "reception validity determination" is performed in which the player's motion is a valid motion, it is possible to execute post-reception production according to the type of the reception period based on the reception validity determination. To be done. In addition, even when the post-reception effect is started to be executed, the operation target display (display of the moving image) may not be hidden but may be displayed.

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 firstly prepares a plurality of reception periods including a first reception period and a second reception period as reception periods. The "reception validity determination" is made both when the "reception validity determination" is made within the first reception period and when the "reception validity determination" is made during the second reception period. Based on the above, the disappearance EF effect can be executed by using at least a part of the specific area. The “first reception period” and the “second reception period” of the configuration 9-B are merely names used to describe the technical idea of the configuration 9-B. Therefore, it may mean the same acceptance period as the “first acceptance period” or the “second acceptance period” according to another configuration, or may mean the acceptance periods on the opposite sides. Alternatively, it may mean a reception period different from those reception periods.

  According to such a configuration, the acceptance validity determination is properly made under the operation acceptance condition suggested by the image display (the acceptance period has ended due to the acceptance of the operation by the player). You will be able to easily recognize that you have become.

  It should be noted that the disappearance EF effect is, for example, a meaning that includes the above-described "mode in which the operation target display (cursive image display) is difficult to visually recognize", and in this case, the specification in which the operation target display (cursive image display) is displayed. Use a mode in which the disappearance effect display is displayed in a predetermined area including at least a part of the area, or a performance body that is in a position overlapping with at least a part of the specific area in which the operation target display (the image display) is displayed in front view In addition to the mode in which the effect is performed, the operation target display (simulated image display) is changed (changed) to a display that is difficult to visually recognize itself (for example, the display is made smaller, the image is blurred, or the transmittance setting is changed). ) May be displayed.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 9-B” is adopted, depending on when the “reception valid determination” in which the motion by the player is a valid motion is made in the first reception period, At the time when the post-reception production corresponding to one reception period starts to be executed, the operation target display (image display) is not hidden and is displayed, and the operation target display (image display) is displayed. There may be a case where it is not in a state (a state where it cannot be visually recognized).

  That is, from the player's side, when the mock image display is displayed in the “second mode with high expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” (corresponding to the first reception period) It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue displaying this even after the (post-reception production) is started in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when the mock image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect (post-reception effect corresponding to the first reception period) based on the “reception validity determination” starts to be executed. If this continues to be displayed even after being played, it is unavoidable that the enjoyment of the game declines.

  For example, in the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period), the mood image display is “first mode with low expectation” and “low expectation during the effective period (first reception period)”. Even if it is displayed in any of "two modes", there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with high expectations (further, there is a possibility that it will be executed in a mode with low expectations). Then, when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a mode with high expectation, even if it is possible to sufficiently improve the entertainment of the game, it is possible at this time. , If there is a case where the mood image display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation”, it is obvious that the interest of the game is deteriorated. Therefore, it is desirable to hide the mood image display. Can be said. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the first reception period) is executed in a low-expectation mode, at this time, the mood image is displayed in the “high-expectation second mode”. If the display continues to be displayed, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being performed in a mode with low expectations, so hide the mock image display. It can be said that it is desirable to continue without doing this.

  Alternatively, even when the mock image display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations", some players may have a problem that "when the post-reception effect is executed in the" mode with low expectations ". As an excuse, it seems that there is a person who wants to keep the display state not being hidden but the display state being continued at the time when the production after the reception is started, Even if the mock image display is displayed in the "highly expected second mode", some players are "irritated" when the post-reception production is executed in the "lowly expected mode". In order to suppress the above, it is considered that there is a person who wants to make the visual image display invisible and invisible at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (first reception period) occurs, the player can display a simulated image through the timing of "reception validity determination" within the first reception period. It becomes possible to substantially select whether to start the post-reception production in the displayed state or to start the post-reception production in the state in which the visual image display is hidden and cannot be viewed. Therefore, it is expected that the entertainment of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, as will be described later, in the case where the “configuration 9-B” is adopted, in the second reception period, regardless of which timing the “reception valid determination” in which the operation by the player is a valid operation is performed, The operation target display (simulated image display) may be always displayed at the time when the post-reception production corresponding to the second reception period starts to be executed.

  According to such a configuration, it is not always possible to select whether or not to display the operation target display (simulated image display) at the time of starting execution of the post-reception production. It becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension within the period.

[Other configurations]
Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1, when a reception acceptable state (reception period) in which a reception opportunity is given occurs, a simulated image display (a simulated image of the operation receiving portion, etc.) related to the reception target is displayed. By displaying the image as an integrated image display (see FIG. 232) that is integrated with the edge decoration image that decorates the edge of the image display, amusement of the game is reduced until the display after reception (display change) is executed. Is trying to suppress. Such an integrated image display is generated as a result of the advance notice determination with the operation reception effect (reception period) that occurs when the symbol effect progresses to the specific timing during SP reach and the variation pattern that does not develop into SP reach. It is desirable to be displayed in any of the operation reception performance (reception period) to be performed, and it is desirable to be displayed in both the low-expectation non-suppression reception performance and the high-expectation suppression reception performance. ..

  Note that the “integrated image display” according to this example is as described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 248, or as described as another example or modified example thereof, and thus the details will be omitted. For example, a display target area of the gauge image (predetermined image) GG is provided in the peripheral decoration image. In addition, a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232) with different expectations are prepared as the “integrated image display”, and the display is performed in any of these modes.

  Further, also in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) occurs, it is suggested that the operation acceptance is permitted or the operation acceptance is permitted. The reception acceptable sound is output so that it is difficult to forget to operate it. Here, "acceptable sound" means that, when a sound is started to be output, an acceptable reception state (reception period) always occurs while this sound is being output (while sound data is assigned). , Is a sound that is in a state where a reception acceptable state (reception period) has already occurred. That is, it can be said that the "acceptable sound" is a sound that is not output in a situation where an effect having nothing to do with the acceptable state (acceptance period) is being performed.

  In addition, each acceptance acceptable state (each acceptance period) according to this embodiment can be classified into a first type and a second type. That is, the acceptance acceptable state classified into the first type can be generated when the high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) is selected, but is low expected fluctuation pattern (non-reach fluctuation pattern). Is an effective period that cannot occur (an effective period that is generated based on the fact that a specific condition (selection of a specific high-expected variation pattern) is satisfied in the effect determination based on the result of the big hit determination). Further, the second type of acceptance-permitted state is a valid period (which occurs as a result of advance notice determination) that can be generated regardless of whether it is a high expected fluctuation pattern (SP reach fluctuation pattern) or a low expected fluctuation pattern. Valid period).

  The "integrated image display" according to the present embodiment can be displayed in any of the first type and second type acceptance acceptable states (acceptance period). Here, both the first type of acceptable reception state (reception period) and the second type of acceptable reception state (reception period) are receptions in which an operation opportunity is given to the same operation means (for example, operation button 410). Since it is assumed that the occurrence occurs as the permissible state (reception period), the “integrated image display” displayed during those acceptance periods is an image of the same operation means (operation button 410).

  Note that the special mode with a high degree of expectation (for example, the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d)) among the plurality of modes prepared as “integrated image display” is the first type of acceptance acceptable state (reception period). In the second type acceptance acceptable state (reception period), it is possible to display only in a mode different from the special mode (for example, the mode shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)). (This configuration is not essential). In this case, in the acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period) of the first type, in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) including the special aspect based on the result of the big hit determination, the “integrated image Whether to display "display" is determined, and "integrated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination. Even in the second type acceptance acceptable state (acceptance period), the “integrated image” is included in any of a plurality of aspects (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (c)) that do not include the special aspect based on the result of the jackpot determination. It may be so arranged that the determination as to whether or not to display is made, and the "integrated image display" is displayed in a mode according to the result of this determination.

  Hereinafter, the details of the pachinko machine 1 including the above-mentioned “Configuration 1-B” to “Configuration 9-B” will be described with reference to the drawings. However, each configuration described below is merely the one described as the best embodiment, and may not necessarily be provided. That is, for each configuration described in the specification described below, when it is desired to obtain a further operational effect with respect to any one of the “configuration 1-B” to “configuration 9-B” It is possible to arbitrarily select only the configuration to be adopted.

  First, an example in which the above “Configuration 1-B” to “Configuration 4-B” are embodied will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the content of the production that is advanced when it is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice as a post-reception production, and a notice production (expectation degree suggesting production). A plurality of reception periods (reception performances) of different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception performance) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, performance determination, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception productions), at least a 1B reception period (1B post-reception productions), a 2B reception period (2B post-reception productions), and a 3B reception period (3B post-reception productions) are included. I am preparing.

  With reference to FIGS. 288 to 303, each feature will be described for each reception period (reception performance). In addition, regarding each of the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 287, the 1B reception period (1B reception post production), the 2B reception period (2B reception post production), the 3B reception period (3B reception post) It may be prepared as a reception period different from the (production), a 1B reception period (1B post-reception production), a 2B reception period (2B post-reproduction production), a 3B reception period ( 3B reception effect). Further, in order to realize the inventions described below, only the necessary configurations of the configurations described below need be provided, and these are not necessarily required for the reception periods described above with reference to FIG. 287. It may not be provided.

  288 to 290 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 1B is satisfied as a result of the judgment (big hit judgment or effect judgment) and the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs. . 297 and 298 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the variation pattern determination is performed, and the "first B variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first B variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the first B variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first B variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 297 (a). )), During the execution period of the variable effect, an effect corresponding to the result of the announcement effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “first B variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), when the timing tQ2 when the 1B predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ comes (when the condition 1B is satisfied). , The 1B reception period (effective period) in which the “acceptance regarding reception after 1B reception” is permitted is generated (“the situation shown in FIGS. 297 (b) and (c)”). As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (when the acceptance validity is determined) within the 1B acceptance period, the 1B post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (the acceptance validity determination). become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1B acceptance period, the acceptance target (operation accepting unit) Such as) indicating the target of movement (displaying a moving image), displaying the remaining time indicating the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image over time) Depiction), disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, and 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) in response to being accepted (reception effectiveness determination) Are to be carried out respectively. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to the present embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, first, when the first B acceptance period occurs at timing tQ2, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) and 297 (b), (c), the effect display device 1600 (first In (1 production device), "instrument image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed as the integrated image display IG. The integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tQ2, or may appear before the timing tQ2 and cross the timing tQ2. It may be displayed in. It should be noted that the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is received when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the 1B reception period, or the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It is hidden when the 1B reception period is ended without any notice. The 1B reception period according to this example ends when timing tQ3 arrives when the player does not receive an operation (operation) (determination of reception validity) (see FIG. 288 (a)).

  Further, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is one of a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 232 (a), (d)). 297 (b) shows a case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a). 297 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d). Even in the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and (c). It may be done.

  Then, FIG. 288 assumes a case in which a “reception valid determination that a motion (operation) by the player is a valid motion” is made when such a relatively early timing tQ2a within the first B reception period arrives. There is. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 288 (a), the first B reception period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tQ2a (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started to be executed.

  Note that an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to FIG. 298 (h1)) is as a post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1B reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to FIG. 298 (h2)” corresponds to the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period. It may include "0%" or "100%".

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 288, at the timing tQ2a, which is the time when the operation by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the first B reception is started in response to the acceptance), "integration" is performed. In addition to not hiding the "cast image display IG", it is also made difficult to visually recognize the integrated cast image display IG.

  That is, the 1B post-reception effect according to the present embodiment includes a "1B post-reception effect display" that uses the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) and a 2nd effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable display). (1B reception specific effect) using a body, effect lamp, etc.) and 1B reception effect sound using a 3rd effect device (speaker) are realized at least as a combined effect. Although not necessarily realized as a composite effect by the three effect devices, an effect in which an integrated image image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed among the effect devices In the display device 1600 (first rendering device), the time when the "first post-reception production display" as the 1B post-reception production is started to be executed is delayed compared to other production devices. By Even after the accepted Te has been made is a possible to dare maintain the visibility of the "integrated 摸 image display IG".

  With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 298 (d1) or (d2), even after the acceptance is made, there are a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 (FIG. Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize which of a) to (d) was displayed, it is expected that the decrease in the interest of the game can be suitably suppressed. Like

  Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate the recognition of how the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition, "integrated image display after acceptance" It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the IG is displayed in the easily visible state" to be long. However, even if the reception has been made and the post-reception productions (the second production device and the third production device) are already being executed, the integrated image display IG is during the reception period. If it is displayed in the same manner as it is, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, it is delayed to notice the post-reception effect in the execution state There is a concern that "it will end up."

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 288 (b) or FIG. 298 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tQ2a at which the 1B reception period ends due to the operation being accepted by the player. When the timing tQ2b arrives, the display related to the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearance EF "Effect") is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". Is overlapped with the area where is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized and It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will be automatically moved from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tQ2b). As a result, even if the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of amusement caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, a case with a low expectation (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1)) appears as a post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to this, and a case with a high expectation ( 298 (d2) to (h2)) appear, different modes (first disappearance related display SKB1, second disappearance related display SKB2) appear as the disappearance related display. That is, in this case, as shown in (e1) and (e2) of FIG. 298, there is a situation where the “display after 1B reception effect display” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. Even if it is, it is confirmed whether the disappearance related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) appears in the “first disappearance related display SKB1” or the “second disappearance related display SKB2”. As a result, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "first B post-reception effect display" will be executed in a mode with high expectations.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 288 (b) and FIG. 298 (f1) or (f2), the display related to the disappearance-related display (the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize). When the timing tQ2c arrives within the period in which the (form) is appearing, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation by the player being accepted in the 1B acceptance period. The execution of the "post-first-B reception effect display UGB1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example where the effect progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” (when the post-reception effect is relatively low in expectations), FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, after the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 as the cut-in effect by the princess character) is displayed as the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. 298 (f2) is displayed and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations) ), A second mode ((here, after 1B reception effect display UGB1-2 as cut-in effect by samurai character) is displayed as the 1B after reception effect display UGB1 corresponding to the 1B reception period. Done It has become way.

  That is, in this case, the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1, second disappearance related display SKB2)" are displayed respectively, and "the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 ( Execution of the "first B post-reception effect display UGB1-1" or "1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2" will be started. Thus, even if the integrated image display IG is kept displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 1B reception period, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) Post production (after the 1B reception post production display UGB1 can be started without significantly delaying compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. Since the integrated BLU image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 is started, suggesting that the 1B reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze point Automatically moves from the "integrated image display IG" to the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2)". Is it is to be expected that the (later timing tQ2c).

  On the other hand, with respect to the "1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-2)", an area in which the "integrated image display IG" is displayed When it is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of (the image does not have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "1B The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGB1 (the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-2). As a result, the execution of the "1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1 (the 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started, but the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is made easy to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "the 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1 (the 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-1 or the 1B post-reception reception effect display UGB1-2)" is started As shown in FIG. 288 (b) and FIG. 298 (g1) or (g2), the “1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B post-reception effect display UGB1. -2) "is displayed, first, of the" integrated image display IG "and the" disappearance related display ", the" integrated image display IG "is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 288 (b) and FIG. 298 (h1) or (h2), "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display The display SKB1 or the second disappearance-related display SKB2 "is not displayed, and thus the" 1B post-reception effect display UGB1 (the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or After the 1B reception, the display related to the effect display UGB1-2) ”is performed.

  In this respect, the "1B post-reception effect display UGB1" has a plurality of different expectations based on the fact that the player's operation has been accepted (here, the 1B post-reception effect display UGB1-1 or 1B). It is displayed in any of the post-reception effect display UGB1-2). Therefore, the "first B post-reception effect display UGB1" is executed for a relatively long time even after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

  In addition, in the example productions (FIGS. 297 and 298) corresponding to the 1B reception period, when the “1B post-reception production display UGB1” is executed after the acceptance is made within the 1B reception period, the “1B reception period” is displayed. The background image is switched before and after the post-reception effect display UGB1 ”is started.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 298 (d) and (e) where the background image is not switched (timings tQ2a to tQ2b shown in FIG. 288), the effect display device 1600 (first time) is displayed. Even if there is a production change in (1 production device), it becomes possible to suggest that the “post-first-B production production display UGB1” has not been started yet.

  In addition, in this example of performance, the display start time of "Disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKB1, second disappearance-related display SKB2)" for "Display effect after UB1 reception display UGB1" and "Background change" ( Although it is decided to start the display at a timing (timing tQ2c) later than the timing tQ2b), the timing (timing tQ2b) at which the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1, second disappearance related display SKB2)" is started. The display may be started at the same time (timing tQ2b).

  In the example shown in FIG. 298, as the post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a low-expectation mode appears and when a high-expectation mode appears. The background image may be switched to a different background image when a low aspect appears and when a high expectation aspect appears. The background image may be switched when a mode with high expectations appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with low expectations appears.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 1B reception period occurs, it is within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 288) in association with this, In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tQ2c) of the effect after the 1B reception (the effect display after the 1B reception) corresponding to the acceptance is more than the received timing tQ2a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, in this example, when the operation by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 288 (b) and (c), it is based on the fact that the operation has been accepted. The execution after the 1B reception after reception using the second rendering device (the 1B reception specific performance) is started prior to the 1B after reception rendering (the 1B reception display display) performed using the 1st rendering device. I am trying.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tQ2a when the reception is performed in the 1B reception period, which is limited to a part of the 1B reception after reception (1B reception display after presentation). With respect to the presentation after the 1B reception itself, it is possible to start execution without delay from the same timing tQ2a.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production), FIG. 298 (d1) As shown in, the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) displays a "female kimono" in a mode in which the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1 (first reception) corresponding to the 1B reception period is displayed. As a 1B post-reception specific production UTB1-1), which is a low-expectation aspect of the post-specific production UTB1, precedes the 1B post-reception production (1B post-reception production display UGB1-1) using the first production device. Then the execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), FIG. As shown in d2), a mode in which the "male kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is that the 1B post-reception specific presentation UTB1 (first) corresponding to the 1B reception period. As a 1B post-reception specific production UTB1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1B post-reception specific production UTB1, a 1B post-reception production (the 1B post-reception production display UGB1-2) using the above-mentioned first production device Execution is started prior to.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 297, in addition to the “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has the first B acceptance period. The effect within the reception period that suggests that it has occurred is executed (FIGS. 297 (b) and (c)). Regarding the effect within the reception period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 297 (b)). ) And a mode with a high degree of expectation (see FIG. 297 (c)) are displayed in the same mode.

  That is, in this case, during the first B reception period in which the player is given an operation opportunity (operation opportunity), different modes appear in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "reception acceptance determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made within the 1B acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays the "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "is continued (although the expectation degree as the post-reception effect is not yet suggested), a different mode appears in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the expectation degree. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device depending on the time than when paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In this example of the effect, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the "specific effect after reception 1B receiving special effect UTB1-1" and the "specific effect after reception 1B receiving UTB1-2" appears as the specific effect after reception 1B 1B. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect after reception 1B BTB1. For example, it is assumed that only the "1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2" is provided as the 1B post-reception specific effect UTB1, and whether the "1B post-reception specific effect UTB1-2" appears or not The ratio) is obtained. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect after the first B reception UTB1-2" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "the specific effect after the first B reception UTB1-2" does not appear. Become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and at the time of occurrence of the 1B reception period, the timing tQ1 shown in FIG. 288 (d). In, the output of the acceptance permission sound is started. That is, the acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 1B reception period is audibly output while crossing the timing tQ2 (corresponding to “the situation shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 297”) when the 1B reception period occurs. The operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the 1B reception period, a first long permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short permissible sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time as the reception permissible sound. And are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 288 (d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after the timing tQ2 when the first B acceptance period occurs.

  Then, in the 1B reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound is audibly output, based on the acceptance being made, Thus, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound are terminated halfway (halfway in the audible output state).

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 288 (d), the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation (FIG. 297 (b). )) And a case where it is executed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation (case shown in FIG. 297 (c)). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound suggests the degree of expectation within the reception period, but unlike the “integrated image display IG”, the reception (reception) When the validity judgment is made, it will be executed as if it cannot be confirmed, so there is a tension as to when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) should be made within the reception period. It is expected that the feeling will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the acceptance allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is audibly output, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated midway. In addition to the above, when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the above-mentioned effect sound after the 1B reception is started. The 1B post-reception effect sound is executed so that the degree of expectation is suggested. For example, the sound is performed in a manner of low expectation (audible output) and in a manner of high expectation (audible). Output). That is, in this case, in the 1B reception period, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed by the first effect device, according to the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the acceptance period and the acceptance. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (effect sound after reception of the first B) performed as a result.

  Such a sound effect after reception of the first B is similar to that of the effect display UGB1 after the reception of the first B, as shown in FIG. 288 (d), "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (disappearance EF. Even after "effect" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1B post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations as post-reception effect) 297) and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In the 1B reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are each output as the reception permissible sound. However, these two permissible sounds may not necessarily be output and one reception Only the permissible sound may be output.

  In addition, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the 1B reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the 1B post-reception effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation but also a “reception sound” that does not indicate the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to "E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). And an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production), audible output in the same manner Is done. Then, such "acceptance sound" is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in an acceptance period different from the 1B acceptance period. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception production is performed, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that there is a situation, it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the contents of the post-reception effect.

  On the other hand, FIG. 289 assumes a case where the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made when the relatively late timing tQ2A in the first B acceptance period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 289 (a), the 1B acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tQ2A (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception production (1B post-reception production) corresponding to the 1B reception period is started to be executed.

  In this regard, in the 1B reception period, even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tQ2A within the 1B reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing). However, basically, the effect is advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made at the relatively early timing tQ2a within the 1B acceptance period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively as post-reception effect) (When the degree of expectation is low), and when the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as post-reception production). As a result, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, effects are executed with the content described with reference to FIG. 288 and the like. ..

  However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, in the situation shown in FIG. 298 (d) and the like, in the situation shown in FIG. It means that the display area of is further reduced. Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, as shown in FIG. 289 (d), acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the reception of the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end midway (end of audible output state).

  Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 289, the time for which the “1B post-reception effect display” based on the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is displayed is shorter than in the case of the example shown in FIG. 288. Will be extinguished. That is, although the “first B reception specific effect” and the “first B reception sound” are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (reception effectiveness determination). On the other hand, the "1B post-reception effect display" is ended (not displayed) when a predetermined timing tQ4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It has become one. With such a configuration, it is expected that a feeling of tension regarding at which timing within the acceptance period the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made can be preferably maintained.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 290 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 297 (b) to “E3 (FIG. 298 (d3) to (g3))” are the actions by the player within the 1B reception period. It is assumed that the (operation) is not performed and the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is not made.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 290, after the first B reception period occurs, the timing tQ3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tQ3 (at the time point when the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is not permitted after the 1B acceptance period ends), the timing tQ2a or Effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at timing tQ2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B acceptance period (or at the time when the effect after the acceptance is started)) 298 (d3), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not received in time and the first B reception period ends, after the end, the first B reception period is integrated. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the mock image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Then, after this, even when the player's operation (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 298 (e3), the disappearance-related display is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearing EF effect) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect" ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed after the first B reception period ends without being accepted, the integrated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to suggest that the first B acceptance period has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the 1B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the "first disappearance related display SKB1" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to let you. That is, in this case, it is expected that the player feels that the action (operation) by the player has been accepted within the 1B acceptance period, and that the expectation level may have been suggested to be low by the post-1B reception effect. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to urge the user to think that he / she did not have to perform the operation (operation) within the 1B reception period, and a decrease in amusement of the game when the operation (operation) was not received within the 1B reception period. Will be expected to suppress.

  However, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKB2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both the first disappearance related display SKB1 ”and the“ second disappearance related display SKB2 ”may appear.

  Further, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, regarding the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect), when the operation (operation) is accepted. It may be executed in a manner that can appear. That is, in this case, when the “first disappearance related display SKB1” appears in the situation shown in FIG. 298 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” means that the production has progressed (the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). Becomes On the other hand, when the “second disappearance related display SKB2” appears in the situation shown in FIG. 298 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1B acceptance period, then FIG. 297 ( This means that the production has progressed from b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” (the post-reception production with a relatively high degree of expectation has been executed). .. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 1B acceptance period, it is related to the fact that the integrated mood image display IG is hidden after the 1B acceptance period ends. By simply confirming the mode as the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" that appears, whether the effect after the 1B reception is performed in a mode with a low expectation degree or with a mode with a high expectation degree. Since it becomes possible to recognize, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 298 (f3), first of all, "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1)" Hide the "image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKB1 in the figure)" is not displayed as shown in FIG. 298 (g3). Will be displayed.

  By the way, in the 1B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (the image display, the frame image, and the gauge image) is not in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) (FIG. 297 (b)). As described above, there may be a case (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d) (see FIG. 232 (d)). When such a situation shown in FIG. 297 (c) appears, a case where the situation shown in FIG. 297 (b) described above appears and "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge) The effect will be advanced in the same manner except that the aspect as "image)" is different.

  For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 297 (c) to “E1 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 297 (b) to “E1 (FIG. 298 (d1) to (h1))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 297 (c) to “E2 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 297 (b) to “E2 (FIG. 298 (d2) to (h2))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 297 (c) to “E3 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 297 (b) to “E3 (FIG. 298 (d3) to (g3))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only.

  291 to FIG. 293 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 2B is satisfied and the second B reception period (second B reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. FIG. 299 is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the variation pattern in which the second B reception period (second B reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the "second B variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second B variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect rendering according to the second B variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second B variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 299 (a). )), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “second B variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), when the timing tR2 when the second B predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started arrives (when the condition 2B is satisfied). , The second B reception period (effective period) in which the “reception regarding the second B reception effect” is permitted is generated. As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the second B reception period (when the reception validity judgment is made), the second B reception post-effect is performed based on the reception (reception validity judgment). become.

  However, in the 2B reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the 1B reception period occurs, the reception target (such as the operation receiving unit) is suggested in relation to the occurrence of the 2B reception period. Display of the target of movement (display of the image), display of the remaining time that indicates the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with time), The disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is not displayed.

  More specifically, in the second B variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 299 (a), integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and While the effect situation in which the gauge image) ") is not displayed is maintained, the timing tR2 arrives and the second B acceptance period occurs. Then, the second B acceptance period is ended when the timing tR3 arrives when the player does not accept the action (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) (see FIG. 291 (a)).

  Such a 2B reception period is what is called a "hidden button", and at what timing is the "reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid action" permitted? Has occurred), whether the "reception valid determination" is in an acceptable state (whether under the situation where the second B reception period is occurring), and at what timing "the operation by the player is effective. No operation-related information is provided such as whether or not the “acceptance validity determination” is not permitted (whether the second B acceptance period ends), and so on. Therefore, it can be said that only the player who is sensitive to the performance can enjoy the second B reception period.

  Then, FIG. 291 is assumed to be in a case where the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made when the relatively early timing tR2a arrives in the second B acceptance period as described above. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 291 (a), the second B acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tR2a (the acceptance validity determination is made). At the same time, execution of the post-reception effect (second-B reception effect) corresponding to the second-B reception period is started.

  In addition, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to FIG. 299 (b), (c) is the second B reception after reception corresponding to the second B reception period (“second B reception after presentation display” or “ This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as "2B reception specific effect", "2B reception effect", etc.). The first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as each second B reception effect (“second B reception effect display”, “second B reception specific effect”, “second B reception sound, etc.”). In the case, the illustration is omitted, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to the situation in which the production after the 2B reception is performed in the omitted manner (first aspect with low expectation). There are some cases where it may happen. However, for such a 2B reception period, when the "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation" is made, the 2B post-reception production ("2B post-reception production display" or " Whether or not the "second B reception specific effect", "second B reception sound", etc. are executed in the manners shown in FIGS. 299 (b) and (c) (post-reception effects (first B reception) It is also possible to realize it as a type in which a low-expectation mode as a post-effect display, a specific effect after the 1B reception, and a sound effect after the 1B reception) is not prepared. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  Here, even in this effect example (second B reception period), as shown in FIG. 291 and FIG. 299 (b), the time when the operation (operation) by the player is received (second B depending on the reception). At the timing tR2a, which is the time point when the post-reception production is started), the "2B post-reception production display UGB2 (group notice production)" is not executed among the 2B post-reception productions, and "2B post-reception specific production The "UTB2-2" and the "second B post-reception effect sound (high expectation mode)" are executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progress is performed in the same manner as in the case of the 1B post-reception production, it is possible to similarly obtain the above-described action and effect.

  However, in this production example (second B reception period), as shown in FIGS. 291 and 299 (b), even if the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the second B reception period, The disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. That is, in this case, in the second B reception period, even if the player accepts the operation (operation), it is significantly delayed to notice it by just looking at the effect display device 1600 (first effect device). Becomes Then, in this case, the integrated second image display IG (“second image display” and “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed, and the second B reception period does not occur. It will appear as if they have operated (operated) below, and even in this respect, it can be said that it is realized as a production with a high degree of difficulty in playing a game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 299 (c), when the timing tR2c after the timing tR2a arrives, the operation by the player within the 2B acceptance period is performed. As a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance, the “second B post-acceptance effect display UGB2 (in the figure, a high-expectation mode, a group advance effect effect by a haunted character) 2B after reception effect display as UGB 2-2) ”is started. Then, the “second B post-reception reception effect display UGB2” started in this way is, as shown in FIG. 291 (b) and FIG. 299 (d), a predetermined time from the time of reception (reception validity determination). When (a certain period of time) has passed, it will be ended (hidden).

  It should be noted that in the production example (FIG. 299) corresponding to the second B reception period, the background image is switched when the "post-second B reception production display UGB2" is executed, unlike the case of the first B reception period. It is difficult to recognize that it has been accepted.

  Further, when the operation by the player is accepted within the 2B acceptance period, the operation is accepted as shown in FIGS. 291 (b) and (c) and FIGS. 299 (b) and (c). On the basis of this, the 2B post-reception post production using the second production device (the 2B post-reception specific production) precedes the 2B post-reception production (the 2B post-reception production display) using the first production device. I am trying to start execution.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to FIG. 299 (b) (when the post-reception production has a relatively high degree of expectation), as shown in FIG. 299 (b), the sub liquid crystal is displayed. A mode in which "ghost" is displayed in 1610 (second rendering device) is a mode in which the above-mentioned 2B post-acceptance specific effect UTB2 (post-second B acceptance specific effect UTB2) corresponding to the 2B acceptance period is highly expected. As the 2B post-reception specific effect UTB2-2), execution is started prior to the 2B post-reception effect (the 2B post-reception effect display UGB2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the explanation is omitted for the case where a mode having a low degree of expectation is executed as the post-second B reception effect, but the “second B post-reception reception effect display” and the “second B post-reception specific effect UTB2” are low-expectation modes. And is basically the same as the case of executing in a high expectation mode.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 299 (a), the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) also does not execute the reception period presentation that suggests that the second B reception period has occurred.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. However, at the time of occurrence of the 2B reception period, as shown in FIG. 299 (d), the acceptance permission sound is not output, and by this, the timing at which the 2B acceptance period occurs and the like. I try to make it difficult to recognize.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the post 2B reception effect sound is started based on this. The second B post-reception effect sound is executed such that the degree of expectation is suggested. For example, the sound is performed in a mode with low expectation (audible output) and in a mode with high expectation (audible). Output).

  In addition, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made during the 2B acceptance period, the third rendering device can hear not only the 2B post-reception rendering sound that indicates the degree of expectation but also a “reception tone” that does not indicate the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the second-B post-acceptance presentation is performed with a high expectation or a low expectation.

  On the other hand, FIG. 292 is assumed to be in the case where the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made when such a relatively late timing tR2A within the second B acceptance period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 292 (a), the second B acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tR2A (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception production (second post-reception production) corresponding to the 2B reception period will be started to be executed.

  In this regard, in the second B reception period, even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tR2A within the second B reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing). However, basically, the effect is advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made at the relatively early timing tR2a within the second B acceptance period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 292 (a), when the production progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to FIG. 299 (b), (c) (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively high) ) And the case of omitting illustration (when the expectation is relatively low as a post-reception effect), basically, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device. Means that the effect is executed with the content as described with reference to FIG.

  Especially, in the 2B reception period, unlike the case of the 1B reception period, the "display after 2B reception effect" is the same as the "specific effect after 2B reception" or "production sound after 2B reception". Since it is executed for a predetermined time (constant time) from the time when (acceptance validity determination) is made, the aspect as a post-reception effect is also at the timing when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It's the same regardless.

  The "second B post-reception effect display", the "second B post-reception specific effect", and the "second B post-reception effect sound" may be executed for a fixed time set in each, and are mutually different. It does not have to be completed at the same time.

  On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 293 and the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 299 (a) to FIG. 299 (d), the operation (operation) by the player is not performed within the 2B reception period, It is assumed that no (validity judgment) has been made.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 293, after the second B reception period has occurred, the timing tR3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the 2B acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 293, no effect related to its occurrence or termination is executed.

  According to such a configuration, the player does not know that the second B acceptance period has occurred or that he / she has not been able to operate (operate). Therefore, in relation to the second B acceptance period. It is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest in playing games.

  294 to 296 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 3B is satisfied as a result of the judgment (big hit judgment or effect judgment) and the 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs. .. FIG. 300 and FIG. 301 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which a 3B reception period (3B reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in the specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the variation pattern determination is performed, and the "third B variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the 3B variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect rendering according to the 3B variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 3B variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 300 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variable effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “third B variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 294 (a), when the timing tS2 when the 3B predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ comes (when the condition 3B is satisfied). , The above-mentioned 3B reception period (effective period) in which “acceptance regarding post-3D reception effect” is permitted is generated. As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period (when acceptance validity determination is made), a 3B acceptance post-effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception validity determination). become.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 3B acceptance period, the acceptance target (operation accepting unit) Such as) indicating the target of movement (displaying a moving image), displaying the remaining time indicating the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image over time) Depiction), disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, and 1B post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) in response to being accepted (reception effectiveness determination) Are to be carried out respectively. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to the present embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  However, the third B reception period according to this embodiment has the performance of the above-mentioned "first B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It will be realized as a special production that has both.

  More specifically, during the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 296 (b) and FIG. 300 (a), the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image)” is displayed. And gauge image) ”) are not displayed yet (timing tS2). That is, in this case, the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is secretly given to the player, and the so-called "hidden button effect" is provided.

  In this regard, the performance as such a "hidden button performance" is continued only until timing X when a predetermined time has elapsed from the occurrence of the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 296 (b) and the like. That is, when the timing X within the 3B reception period comes, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, as the integrated image image display IG, "image image display" and "remaining time display" are displayed. (Frame image and gauge image) "is displayed, whereby an operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player while the integrated image display IG is displayed. Will be moved to. The integrated image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) thus displayed is received when the acceptance (reception availability determination) is made within the 3B acceptance period, or the acceptance (reception availability determination). ) Is not performed and is hidden when the 3B reception period ends. The 3B acceptance period according to this example ends when timing tS3 arrives when the player does not accept an action (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) (see FIG. 296 (a) and the like).

  According to such a 3B reception period, in the “first display state” in which the integrated image display IG is not displayed during the period from the occurrence of the 3B reception period to the arrival of the timing X. From the above timing X to the end of the third B reception period, "integrated mood" is provided in which the player can accept the action (operation) accepted. In the "second display state" in which the image display IG is displayed, "so-called normal button performance" that allows the player to accept an operation (operation) is provided. As a result, the 3B reception period according to this embodiment has the effect of the above-described "1B reception period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "2B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)". It will be realized as a special production that has both the sexuality, and it is expected that this will improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the “second display state” in the third B reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) has a plurality of modes (for example, FIG. 232 (a)). ), (C)), and in FIG. 300 (b), the integrated image image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 232 (a). 300 (c) corresponds to the case of being displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 300. In FIG. 300 (c), the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (c). It is equivalent to the case of being done. Even in the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and (d). It may be done.

  Then, in FIG. 294, while the above-mentioned “first display state (for example, see FIG. 300 (a))” appears during such a 3B reception period (timing tS2a in the figure), “game” is displayed. It is assumed that the acceptance validity judgment that the action (operation) by the person is a valid action is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 294 (a), the 3B acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted at the timing tS2a (the acceptance validity determination has been made). At the same time, execution of the post-reception production (3B post-reception production) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

  In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to FIG. 301 (h1))”, the above “first display state” appears during the 3B reception period. In particular, as a result of the "reception valid determination" being performed, the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as the "3B post-reception effect" is equivalent to FIG. 300 (a) to "F2 (FIG. 301). (D2) to FIG. 301 (h2)) ”is an example in which the effect progresses to the“ reception valid determination ”while the“ first display state ”is appearing during the 3B reception period. This corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as "3B post-reception production." The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  Here, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 294, at the timing tS2a at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (at the time when the effect after the 3B acceptance is started in response to the acceptance). The "integrated image display IG" that had been hidden until then can be displayed.

  That is, when the player performs an operation (operation) while the "first display state" is appearing during the 3B reception period (when "reception valid determination" is made), the player is The operation (operation) is performed without recognizing which mode appears as the modified image display IG (a modified image display, a frame image, a gauge image). In this regard, when the player's operation (operation) is accepted, the "integrated image display IG" that has been hidden until then can be displayed so that the player can receive the 3B reception. When it becomes tentative to be in the “second display state” during the period, it becomes possible to recognize which mode has appeared as the “integrated image display IG”.

  In other words, the 3B post-reception effect according to this embodiment includes a “3B post-reception effect display” that uses the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and a second effect device (for example, a sub liquid crystal or a movable display). Body, effect lamp, etc.) is used as an effect in which at least a “specific effect after reception by 3B” using a third effect device (speaker) and an effect sound after reception by 3B are combined. Although not necessarily realized as a composite effect by the three effect devices, an effect in which an integrated image image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed among the effect devices In the display device 1600 (first rendering device), the timing at which the "third post-reception production display" as the 3B post-reception production is started is delayed compared to other production devices. By Even after the accepted Te has been made is a possible to dare maintain the visibility of the "integrated 摸 image display IG".

  According to such a configuration, as shown in (d1) or (d2) of FIG. 301, even after the acceptance is made in the "first display state" of the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period is ended. Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize which of the plurality of modes (FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) the integrated scale image display IG was to be displayed in. Therefore, it is expected that the decrease in the interest of the game will be appropriately suppressed.

  Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate the recognition of how the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition, "integrated image display after acceptance" It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the IG is displayed in the easily visible state" to be long. However, even though the reception has been made and the post-reception productions (second production device, third production device) are already being executed, the integrated image display IG is changed to the “second display state”. If it is displayed in the same manner as at one time, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, "I notice the post-reception performance in the execution state". Will be delayed. ”

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 294 (b) or FIG. 301 (e1) or (e2), a predetermined time has passed since the timing tS2a at which the 3B reception period ends due to the operation (operation) being accepted by the player. When (time tS2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the simulated image display is started.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearance EF "Effect") is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". Is overlapped with the area where is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG is displayed after the reception is made in the “first display state” during the third B reception period, It becomes possible to suggest that the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) is already being executed by making the integrated muffled image display IG difficult to visually recognize.

  In the case where the acceptance is made in the above-mentioned “first display state” that provides the performance as a “so-called hidden button” in the 3B acceptance period, either the 2B acceptance period or the 3B acceptance period is received. It is difficult to recognize whether or not it is in the state of being accepted in the 3B acceptance period because of the appearance of the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" that cannot appear in the 2B acceptance period. You will be able to recognize that there is.

  Further, in the 3B reception period, a case where a low expectation (FIGS. 301 (d1) to (h1)) appears as a post-third reception performance and a high expectation (FIGS. 301 (d2) to (h2)). The display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when the appears. According to such a configuration, compared with the case of the 1B reception period (when the mode of the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) differs depending on the degree of expectation), after the reception is made within the 3B reception period, “disappearance” Since the importance of paying attention to "related display (disappearing EF effect)" becomes low, it is accepted in the "first display state" that provides the effect as "so-called hidden button" during the 3B reception period. Even in the case where the above is performed, it becomes possible to properly watch the integrated image display IG after the acceptance.

  Further, in the 3B reception period according to this example of presentation, post-reception production (1B post-reproduction production) corresponding to the 1B reception period is expected as an extinction related display (disappearance EF production) that appears when the reception is made. The "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when executed in a highly frequent mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, it is possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation as long as the reception is made, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to plan.

  Note that the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKB2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 3B acceptance period, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B acceptance period is displayed when the expectation is low. Even when the "first disappearance-related display SKB1" is used, whether it is in the state of being accepted in the first B acceptance period or in the state of being accepted in the third B acceptance period. You can make it difficult to recognize.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 294 (b) and FIG. 301 (f1) or (f2), the display related to the disappearance related display (the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize). When the timing tS2c arrives within the period in which the (form) is appearing, after reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation (operation) by the player being accepted in the 3B acceptance period. As the effect, "post-third B effect effect display UGB3 (conversation notice)" is started to be executed. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1, which is a “silent” conversation notice) is displayed as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as post-reception production), FIG. 301 (f2) As shown in, a second mode (here, the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2 which is a conversation notice that refers to “chance” is displayed) as the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3 corresponding to the 3B reception period. It is supposed to be done.

  That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKB2)" are being displayed, respectively, "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (" 3B post-reception effect display " UGB3-1 "or" 3B post-acceptance presentation display UGB3-2 ") is started to be executed. Thus, even if the integrated image display IG is kept displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the 3B reception period, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) Post production (after 3B reception post production display UGB3 can be started without significantly delaying compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. Since the integrated 3D image display IG is difficult to be visually recognized, the 3B reception post effect display UGB3 is started, suggesting that the 3B reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze point Automatically moves from the "integrated image display IG" to the "3B post-reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)". Is it is to be expected that the (later timing tS2c).

  On the other hand, with respect to the "post 3D reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)", an area in which the "integrated image display IG" is displayed When it is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the (not necessarily displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "3B The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-acceptance effect display UGB3 (3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-acceptance effect display UGB3-2). As a result, the execution of the “3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3-2)” is started, but the integrated image display is performed within the reception period. It is made easy to recognize which mode the IG was displayed in.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2)" is started in this way As shown in FIG. 294 (b) and FIG. 301 (g1) or (g2), the “3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3 (3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception effect display UGB3) is displayed. -2) "is displayed, first, of the" integrated image display IG "and the" disappearance related display ", the" integrated image display IG "is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 294 (b) and FIG. 301 (h1) or (h2), "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display "Display SKB2)" is not displayed, and under the condition that the visual confirmation is good by this, "3B post-reception reception performance display UGB3 (3B post-reception performance display UGB3-1 or 3B post-reception performance display UGB3 -2) "is displayed.

  In this respect, the “3B post-reception effect display UGB3” means a plurality of modes with different expectations (here, 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1) based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted. Alternatively, it is displayed by any of the 3B post-reception effect display UGB3-2). Therefore, the “post-third-B reception effect display UGB3” is executed for a relatively long time even after the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display” are hidden.

  It should be noted that in the production example (FIGS. 300 and 301) corresponding to the 3B reception period, even if the “3B post-reception production display UGB3” is executed and the reception is performed within the 3B reception period, The background image is not switched before and after the "3B reception effect display UGB3" is started. According to such a configuration, when compared with the first B reception period, the third B having the directivity as a “so-called hidden button” even when the reception is made in the “second display state”. You will be able to suggest that you have been accepted during the acceptance period. Further, when compared with the second B reception period, it is as if the production is being advanced as a result of reception by the "so-called hidden button" even while "3B post-reception production display UGB3" is being executed. It is possible to show

  In this example of performance, the display of "reproduction display UGB3 after reception of the 3rd B" is started at a time (timing tS2c) later than the time (timing tS2b) at which "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKB2)" is started to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same time (timing tS2b) as the time (timing tS2b) at which the display of "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKB2)" is started.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the 3B reception period occurs, it is within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 294) accordingly. In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start time (timing tS2c) of the effect after the 3B acceptance (the effect display after the 3B acceptance) corresponding to the acceptance is more than the received timing tS2a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, in this example, when the operation by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 294 (b) and (c), The third post-reception reception effect using the second effect device (3B post-reception specific effect) is started prior to the 3B post-reception effect (third B reception effect effect display) using the first effect device. I am trying.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tS2a when the reception is performed in the 3B reception period, which is limited to a part of the 3B reception post-effect (display after 3B reception effect). The post-reception 3B presentation itself can be started to be executed without delay from the same timing tS2a.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production), FIG. 301 (d1) As shown in, the mode in which "Sueyoshi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the above-mentioned 3B-specific post-reception specific rendering UTB3 (third-post-specific rendering) corresponding to the 3B reception period. As a 3B post-reception specific effect UTB3-1), which is a mode of low expectation of UTB3, is executed prior to the 3B post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect display UGB3-1) using the first effect device. It is set to start. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively high), FIG. As shown in d2), the mode in which "Kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is the special effect after the 3B acceptance corresponding to the 3B acceptance period. As a specific effect after receiving 3B specific effect UTB3-2), which is a mode with a high degree of expectation of the specific effect UTB3, precedes the effect after the 3B acceptance using the first effect device (the effect display UGB3-2 after receiving the 3B). It will start to run.

  It should be noted that in the effect example shown in FIG. 301, it is suggested that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is also in the state in which the 3B reception period has occurred in the “first display state” of the 3B reception period. The effect within the reception period is not executed, and in the “second display state” of the 3B reception period, it is suggested that the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) is also in the state in which the 3B reception period has occurred. The effect within the reception period is executed (FIG. 300 (b), (c)). Regarding the effect within the reception period on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low expectation (see FIG. 300 (b)). ) Is displayed in the same manner as in the case where it is displayed in a high expectation mode (see FIG. 300 (c)).

  That is, in this case, when the player is in the “second display state” during the 3B reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) sets the expectation level. Accordingly, different modes appear, and the same mode appears in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made in the “second display state” during the 3B acceptance period, the effect display device 1600 (first In the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second production device), while the display related to the “integrated image display IG” is being continued in the production device (while still not suggesting the degree of expectation as post-reception production). Different modes will appear depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device depending on the time than when paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In this example of the effect, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on which of the "specific effect post-third B special effect UTB3-1" and the "specific effect post-third B special effect UTB3-2" appears as the specific effect UTB3 after the third B acceptance. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect after reception 3B BTB3. For example, it is assumed that only the “third-B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” is provided as the third-B-reception specific effect UTB3, and whether the “third-B post-reception specific effect UTB3-2” appears or not The ratio) is obtained. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the 3D reception specific effect UTB3-2" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "3B reception specific effect UTB3-2" does not appear. Become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and at the time of occurrence of the 3B reception period, the timing tS1 shown in FIG. 294 (d). In, the output of the acceptance permission sound is started. The acceptance permissible sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period crosses both the timing tS2 at which the 3B acceptance period occurs and the timing X at which the “first display state” shifts to the “second display state”. In the audible output of the acceptance permission sound, the operation (operation) by the player can be accepted. However, the acceptance-permitted sound only needs to be audibly output in the form of crossing the timing X, and the timing tS2 may not necessarily be audibly output in the form of crossing the timing tS2.

  Here, in the 3B acceptance period, as the acceptance acceptable sound, a third acceptable sound which is different from both the first long acceptable sound and the first short acceptable sound is audibly output, whereby the 1B acceptance is performed. It becomes possible to suggest that the 3B reception period that has the performance as a “so-called hidden button” is generated (or is occurring) instead of the period. However, the acceptance allowable sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may be executed by using either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

  Then, in the 3B reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) is audibly output, it is determined that the acceptance is made. Based on this, the acceptance permission sound is not terminated halfway (the audible output state is halfway terminated), and this does not mean that the reception period is the first B reception period, but the third B reception which also has the directivity as a so-called hidden button. You will be able to indicate that the period is occurring (or is occurring). However, the acceptance allowable sound corresponding to the 3B acceptance period may be terminated halfway based on the acceptance.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 294 (d), the acceptable reception sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3B reception period is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation. It is desirable that there be a case (in the case shown in FIG. 300 (b)) and a case (in the case shown in FIG. 300 (c)) executed (audible output) in a mode with a high degree of expectation. In other words, in this case, the acceptance permission sound indicates the degree of expectation within the acceptance period, but unlike the "integrated image display IG", confirms that acceptance (reception validity determination) is made. Since it will be executed as something that can not be done, it is expected to maintain a suitable tension feeling at which timing within the reception period (reception validity judgment) is to be made Like

  Further, even in the 3B reception period, when the operation is accepted by the player while the acceptable reception sound is audibly output, not only the acceptance acceptable sound is terminated but also the acceptance is made. Based on the above, the audible output of the effect sound after the reception of the third B is started. The 3B post-reception effect sound is executed so that the degree of expectation is suggested. For example, the sound is performed in a mode with low expectation (audible output) and in a mode with high expectation (audible). Output). That is, in this case, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed in the first effect device, in the 3B reception period, an effect (acceptable sound) performed in the reception period and a reception performed. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (effect sound after reception of the third B) performed as a result.

  Such a 3D post-reception reception effect sound is similar to the "3B post-reception reception effect display UGB3", as shown in FIG. 294 (d), "integrated image display IG" and "disappearance related display (disappearance EF. Even after "effect" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. As for the 3B post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectation as post-acceptance effect) Case) and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has relatively high expectations), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In addition, when acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made during the 3B acceptance period, the third effect device can hear not only the 3B post-reception effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation but also a “reception sound” that does not indicate the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to "F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). And audible output in the same manner in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as post-reception production). Is done. Then, such "acceptance sound" is accepted (acceptance validity determination) during an acceptance period different from the 3B acceptance period (for example, the 1B acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period different from the above-mentioned acceptance periods). If it is turned on, it will be output audibly (regardless of the degree of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception production is performed, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that there is a situation, it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the contents of the post-reception effect.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 295, the “second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 300B and 300C)” appears during such a 3B reception period (in the figure, , Timing tS2A), and it is assumed that the “acceptance validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 295 (a), the 3B acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted (the acceptance validity determination has been made) at timing tS2A. At the same time, execution of the post-reception production (3B post-reception production) corresponding to the 3B reception period is started.

  In this regard, in the 3B acceptance period, acceptance (decision of validity of acceptance) while the "second display state (see, for example, FIGS. 300 (b) and 300 (c))" appears during the 3B acceptance period ) Is made, after the acceptance is made, the “first display state (for example, see FIG. 300 (a))” is appearing within the 3B acceptance period. The effect will be advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 300 (b) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively as post-reception effect) When the expectation is low) and when the production progresses from FIG. 300 (b) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production). As a result, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect is executed with the content described with reference to FIG. 294 and the like. ..

  However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 295, in the situation shown in FIG. 301 (d), etc., the gauge image is obtained in the situation shown in FIG. It means that the display area of is reduced.

  Further, in the 3B reception period, from the time when the “display after 3B reception display” is received (determination of reception validity) like “3D reception after specific reception” and “3B reception sound after reception”. Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time), the form as the post-reception effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made.

  In addition, the "display after 3B reception effect", the "specific effect after 3B reception", and the "production sound after 3B reception" may be executed for a fixed time set for each, and are mutually different. It does not have to be completed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 296 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 301 (b) to “F3 (FIG. 301 (d3) to (g3))” are operations by the player within the 3B reception period. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is not made.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, the timing tS3 comes after the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted after the 3B acceptance period occurs. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tS3 (the time point when the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is not permitted after the 3B acceptance period ends), the timing tS2a or Performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tS2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player within the third B acceptance period (or at the time when the performance after acceptance is started)). 301 (d3), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not received in time and the 3B reception period ends, the 3B reception period is integrated after the end. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the mock image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Then, after this, even when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 301 (e3), the disappearance related display is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearing EF effect) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect" ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed after the reception of the third B reception period ends without receiving the image, the integrated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to suggest that the third B acceptance period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the 3B reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKB3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to let you.

  The “third extinction related display SKB3” is preferably not displayed in association with the 1B reception period. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-described "1B acceptance period (so-called normal button effect)" It is possible to suggest that it has both of the above-mentioned and the effect of "the second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)".

  Further, it is desirable that the "third extinction related display SKB3" is not displayed when an operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the third B acceptance period. That is, in this case, it is possible to more suitably suggest that the third B acceptance period has ended without acceptance.

  Then, after this, as shown in FIG. 301 (f3), of the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKB3)", first, "integration Hide the "image display IG". Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 301 (g3), the "disappearance related display (in the drawing, the third disappearance related display SKB3))" is not displayed. Will be displayed.

  By the way, in the 3B reception period according to this example, when the above-mentioned "second display state" is reached, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is shown in FIG. 232 (a). As described above, there may be a case (see FIG. 300 (c)) displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (c) instead of the mode (see FIG. 300 (b)). When such a situation shown in FIG. 300 (c) appears, a case in which the situation shown in FIG. 300 (b) described above appears and "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge) The effect will be advanced in the same manner except that the aspect as "image)" is different.

  For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 300 (c) to “F1 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 300 (b) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to (h1))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. Further, when the effect progresses from FIG. 300 (c) to “F2 ′”, the contents and the basics of the effect progressing from FIG. 300 (b) to “F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to (h2))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 301 (c) to “F3 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 300 (b) to “F3 (FIG. 298 (d3) to (g3))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period are prepared, the following advantageous effects can be obtained.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when it is received (cut-in notice as a post-reception production, group notice, conversation notice, etc., notice production (expectation suggestion production) A plurality of reception periods (first B reception period to third B reception period) of different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (effective period) of a type according to the result of the determination (production determination). Has become.

  In this regard, in the 1B reception period to the 3B reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (after the 1B acceptance effect display to the 3B acceptance operation) is performed based on the acceptance. (Effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, not only the post-reception effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance related display ( "Disappearing EF effect)" is made to appear further. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode was displayed as the mock image display even after the acceptance was made. The image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (display related to disappearance) ", so that the visibility is reduced. It is expected that the gaze target by the player will be naturally moved to. Note that the "disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be commonly used for a plurality of reception periods having different effect contents when received (Fig. 298 (Fig. 298). e2) and FIG. 301 (e2)).

  However, since the actual image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, the relevant image display after the acceptance is made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-reception effect display corresponding to the acceptance is already displayed, and there is a concern that the entertainment level of the game may deteriorate. is there. In this regard, when the acceptance is made in any of the first B acceptance period and the third B acceptance period, the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as “middle image display and remaining time display (frame image, While the gauge image) is being hidden (invisible) while the mode (display related to disappearance) that makes it difficult to see (gauge image) is displayed, the post-reception effect display is “displaying the remaining image and displaying the remaining time (frame image). , (Gauge image) becomes difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display) ”. In other words, in this case, after the player has accepted the operation, the "reception image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" appears. A transition relating to the display effect from the previous display (display of the image or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the display after the reception (display after the reception) will be realized.

  It should be noted that both the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on acceptance. Common in points. However, the “mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)” is shown in, for example, FIG. 298 (e1) or FIG. 298 (e2). Like, it appears so that it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are being displayed. Is done. On the other hand, the “post-reception effect display” means, for example, as shown in FIG. 298 (f1) or FIG. 298 (f2), a moving image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in the situation where it is being displayed, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). Further, in each of the examples described above, it is decided to start displaying the “post-reception effect display” when the mood image display or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is being displayed. With regard to the “post-effect display”, it is not always necessary to start the display when the mood image display is being displayed, and it is possible to start the display after the mock image display is hidden. Good.

  Regarding the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (display related to disappearance)", the "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In addition to the method that is realized by preferentially displaying an image display that is different from that (displayed in the front layer), the image display and the remaining image display that are different from the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying an image (moving image) that is made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, it is not a separate image display from the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but a numerical value (transmissivity) concerning the display characteristics of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing (for example). On the other hand, as for the method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the residual image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" with respect to "display after reception," , The gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the gauge image) is displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are preferentially displayed. Displaying after reception "is displayed (displayed in the rear layer), and the image display is displayed at least while the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is possible to adopt a method or the like realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area excluding the area to be displayed.

  Also, as a mode (display related to disappearance) in which it is difficult to visually recognize the remaining image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the area where the remaining image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the display, and the display of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself Both the method of changing the numerical value (such as the transmittance) related to the characteristics may be adopted.

  In addition, "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance related display)" means that the "reception reception effect display" is displayed before the "reception reception display". The post-effect display "appears in a situation where it has not been displayed yet. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "display after reception" is not yet displayed, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are the same as the "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)". ) Becomes difficult to see due to the "mode in which it is difficult to see (display related to disappearance)", so that it is possible to visually check the remaining image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), "Is ready to appear, so that the player's point of gaze can be changed from" the difficult-to-see image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) "to prepare for the mind. Will be able to prompt you.

  In addition, when it is received during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, etc., the "mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the general image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance related display)" It can be displayed even after the "effect display" is displayed, and is hidden while the "post-reception effect display" is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, since it is possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the performance during such a display period. Will be able to.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, as shown in FIG. 298 and FIG. "Aspect (disappearance related display)" is not limited to the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in the area that is not displayed. Then, in the area, at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but it is difficult to visually recognize "the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" (Disappearance related display) ”is displayed (for example, displayed on the rear layer) so that at least a part of the“ post-reception effect display ”is difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) makes it difficult to visually recognize not only the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) but also the “post-reception effect display”. Since it will be appeared, the performance until the display of the mood image and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the production when the display of "post-reception production display" is started It is expected to improve both sex and sex.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the "post-reception production display" before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the acceptance is made. Under the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect), it is not difficult to visually recognize the moving image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). After the reception, the presentation was made possible. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-reception productions prior to this without interfering with the production performance of the first production device.

  Moreover, in each of the above-described production examples related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is less than the disappearance related display (disappearing EF production). Also, the previous disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. In addition, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is finished.

  According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance by the second performance device having a more simplified performance. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for various types of players.

  Further, also in each of the above-described effect examples related to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the dynamic image display will be displayed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, it is desirable that the dynamic image display be continued after the acceptance, even if the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) appears.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF presentation) is not only a mock image display but also a gauge that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to see the image. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3B acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, the “first 3B reception effect display UGB3 "can be displayed, but in addition to the 3B reception effect display UGB3, the above-described aspect (second disappearance) corresponding to the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is also provided. The related display SKB2) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance related display SKB2 appears, it is unclear which of the first and the third B post-acceptance effect display appears, but when the first disappearance related display SKB1 appears, It becomes possible to estimate that the presentation display UGB1 after the 1B reception will appear.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (priority display) in an area including at least a part of the area in which the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen should be performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in front view. It is also possible to realize.

  Even when the same mode (second disappearance related display SKB2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), if the type of the acceptance period is different, the big hit symbol is stopped due to the symbol variation. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations).

  Further, in the above-described example of effect, it is possible to execute post-reception effect (post-accept specific effect) using the second effect device, and execution of post-reception effect (post-accept specific effect) using the second effect device. During the period, in the first rendering device, the relative image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the relative image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is difficult to see it.

  That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (the post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), It is possible to confirm which mode has appeared. Further, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after the reception) using the second effect device, it becomes relatively difficult to visually recognize the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). By doing so, it is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally from the “first effect device” to the “second effect device”.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the post-reception production using the second production device (the post-reception specific production) is a continuous image display (displayed in an easily visible state) before the reception and a remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device is used. The post-acceptance effect (post-acceptance specific effect) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, and is not an effect that is executed at a position overlapping at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. It is a thing.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the post-reception effect display is started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect), but is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect). You may make it start.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "region in which the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize it as an image display. However, in this case, regarding the image display, it is desirable to display such that the area displayed in the “region where the image display is displayed” tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

  Further, as described above, the “middle image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” according to this embodiment are a plurality of different expectations (integrated muffled image) as an integrated mood image display IG. Any of the displays IGa to IGd) can be displayed. Then, according to each of the above-described production examples, since the display mode including the display position and the size and the dynamic depiction is maintained and continued even after the acceptance is made, the acceptance is made after the acceptance. Also, it is possible to recognize in what manner the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the reception period.

  However, in this case, if it is in the period immediately after being accepted, there is no choice but to perform post-reception production under such conditions (maintain the display related to the full-scale image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). I won't get it. That is, the range of performance is narrow, and only limited performance (post-reception performance using only a performance device different from the first performance device) can be executed. However, when the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) appears over time, after the reception under the condition that "the visibility of the full-scale image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) may be deteriorated" Since the production can be performed, the "post-reception production display in the first production device" can be executed under such a condition. By performing the two post-operation effects having different properties (specific effect after acceptance in the second effect device, effect display after acceptance in the first effect device) in stages, a mode of displaying a mock image even after acceptance While making it easy to confirm, the role of post-operation performance can be suitably exerted.

  As described above, the “image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed separately, or the “image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, frame image, Only one of the "gauge image)" may be displayed.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects of the operation (operation) by the player do not necessarily have to be the same, and different operations may be requested. However, when different motions are required, the motion target display (the image display) is also displayed as a different display.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the “first acceptance valid determination that the action by the player is the valid action” is allowed without displaying the image (or the remaining time display) It is decided to prepare a plurality of reception periods including the third B reception period (FIGS. 294 to 296) having the “display state”. In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when such a 3B reception period (first display state) occurs, the acceptance validity determination is allowed or the acceptance validity determination is allowed. Since the acceptance allowable sound suggesting that it is possible to output, it is not possible to fully recognize which is the target of the operation by the player due to the state that the image display is not displayed. However, it is possible to recognize that the player is in a situation where some action is required (a situation in which an operation opportunity is given), which makes many players concerned. You will be expected to enjoy the performance. As a result, unlike the case of the second B reception period, the so-called hidden button is used, even though the reception image is not displayed and the “reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is an effective operation” is allowed. Even a player who is insensitive to performance can enjoy it. However, the acceptance permission sound may not be output when the 3B acceptance period occurs. Further, the "state in which the image display (or the remaining time display) is not displayed" means a state in which the image display (or the remaining time display) cannot be visually recognized on the display screen. Good. For example, it is meant to include a state in which the image is displayed on a layer but is not visible because an image on another layer is preferentially displayed. Further, the “display of a full-scale image (or display of remaining time)” here means an image displayed in any of a plurality of modes with different expectations shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d). is doing. Therefore, as long as it is not possible to determine in which of these modes the display is being performed, it can be said that the "image display (or remaining time display) is not being displayed" (conversely, For example, if it is possible to determine which one of the modes is being displayed, even if it is not displayed in a good visual mode, "a state in which the image display (or the remaining time display) is displayed" Can be said to be).

  Also, the acceptance permissible sound that is output when the 3B acceptance period occurs is realized as "third acceptance sound", but is output (as acceptance acceptance sound) when another acceptance period occurs. It is desirable that the sound is played. For example, if the acceptance allowable sound is output even when the acceptance period in which the same operation opportunity (for example, the pressing operation on the operation button 410) as in the 3B acceptance period is given, the simulated image display is displayed. Even if it is not performed, it becomes possible to suitably suggest which action opportunity (operation opportunity) is provided (given) to the player. Further, for example, if the acceptance acceptable sound is output even when the acceptance period in which an operation opportunity (for example, a sword storage operation of the sword decoration body 5001) different from the 3B acceptance period is given occurs, It is difficult for the player to predict which motion opportunity (operation opportunity) will be given when the image display is not displayed, but some motion opportunity (operation opportunity) is given (grant) Being able to suggest that you are in a state.

  Further, in the 3B reception period according to the above-described production example, as shown in FIG. 296 and the like, first, the “first display state” in which the image display is hidden appears. Then, after that, the "second display state" in which the simulated image display is displayed appears while the third B reception period is continued. That is, in this case, in the 3B reception period, it initially occurs as a so-called “hidden button”, and can be enjoyed only by a player who is sensitive to such performance. However, while the 3B reception period is continued (before the set time (effective time) is exhausted), the quality image display is displayed, which makes it sensitive to performance. Even without it, many players will be able to notice this (3B reception period) and enjoy the production. In addition, through such performance, it is expected that the ability to perceive the occurrence of so-called "hidden buttons" will be developed.

  Further, at this time, in the "second display state", as shown in FIGS. 300 (b) and 300 (c), the image display can be displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations (modes). Is desirable. That is, on the player side, if there is a case where the operation is accepted in the "second display state" even though the operation is not accepted in the "first display state", until the mock image display is displayed. In the meantime, the fact that the third reception period for B has not been recognized is revealed to the surroundings, and it is feared that the entertainment of the game may be deteriorated due to the fact that it is insensitive to such production. In this regard, in the "second display state", if the image display is displayed with any of a plurality of different expectations (modes), the player operates in the "second display state". Even if it is accepted, "I was aware that the operation acceptance was allowed from the first display state, but I wanted to see the degree of expectation suggested by the image display, so in the first display state It has become possible to expect that it will be possible to appropriately suppress the deterioration of the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the 3B reception period (first display state), due to the nature of a so-called “hidden button”, the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation” is permitted from any timing. It is difficult for the player to accurately recognize whether the period has occurred. Then, in this case, if the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it is thought that "the 3B reception period has occurred" because the "reception valid determination" is not made. There is concern that the player may misunderstand that "there was a misunderstanding" and that the 3B reception period ends without any action (operation) being performed by the player.

  Therefore, in the 3B reception period, the operation (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tS2 when the state (3B reception period) in which the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid operation” is permitted occurs. Even if there is, the operation (operation) is not “acceptance valid determination” at that time, but at the time when the 3B reception period starts (or after that), the 3B reception It is desirable to enable the "reception validity determination" (based on) the operation (operation) performed by the player performed before the period.

  However, in this case, the detection itself as to whether or not an operation (operation) has been performed by the player is whether or not the relevant 3B acceptance period in which the "acceptance validity determination that the operation by the player is an effective action" is permitted It will be required to be executed regardless of whether or not.

  For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 294, this will be detected even when the player performs an operation (operation) slightly before the timing tS2. However, at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is detected in this way, since the third B reception period has not yet occurred, based on the detection, "the operation by the player as an effective operation is received. No "validity judgment" is made. However, the presence of this detection information is stored as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the detection information stored as the memory (history) is retained within the 3B reception period. Based on this, the "acceptance validity determination in which the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made. Then, the 3B post-reception effect is to be executed based on the "reception valid determination" obtained in this way.

  With such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it is possible to receive the operation within the 3B reception period. As a result, it is possible to execute the post-reception effect (3B post-reception effect) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty level regarding the operation acceptance even when the so-called “hidden button” performance (first display state) is realized.

  However, in the case where the operation (operation) is performed significantly before (the predetermined time or more) before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, it is possible to prevent the 3B reception post-effect from being executed. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value stored as detection information.

  Note that the configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3B reception period may or may not be similarly applied to the 1B reception period or the 2B reception period. You may do it.

  In addition, at this time, regarding the operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the 3B reception period, the operation (operation) is not the above “second display state” after the occurrence of the 3B reception period, It is desirable that the “first display state” can be accepted as a validity determination (reception availability determination). According to such a configuration, it is the timing (for example, the timing when the first display state (the third B reception period) occurs) after a little time has passed since the player performed the operation (operation), and the image Even if the display is not displayed, it is determined that the reception is valid, and the post-reception production is started to be executed. This suggests that the operation by the player is properly accepted, not the so-called "automatic reception function" when there is no operation (operation) despite displaying the mock image display. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, in the above-described production examples (FIG. 294, FIG. 300, FIG. 301, etc.), the case where the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the “first display state” within the 3B reception period, and the 3B reception It is decided to make the same aspect appear as a 3B post-reception effect corresponding to the acceptance when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the “second display state” within the period (FIG. 300 and FIG. 301, etc.). However, if the acceptance (reception valid determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B reception period, and if it is accepted (reception valid) in the "second display state" within the 3B reception period. It is more desirable to make the effect contents different from each other when the determination is made in order to improve the effectivity as a reception period having the “first display state” and the “second display state”. .

  For example, in the above-described production example (FIG. 294, FIG. 300, FIG. 301, etc.), even when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the “first display state” within the 3B acceptance period, Similar to the case where the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "second display state" within the 3B acceptance period, after the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made ((not displayed until then) ) The integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed (from FIG. 300 (a) to “F1 (FIG. 301 (d1) to FIG. 301 ()). h1)) ”, or when the production progresses from FIG. 300 (a) to“ F2 (FIG. 301 (d2) to FIG. 301 (h2)) ”. However, instead of this, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made in the "first display state" within the 3B acceptance period, this is taken as an opportunity after the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made. It is desirable that the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed.

  According to such a configuration, from the player's side, the acceptance is made in the "first display state" in which it is relatively difficult to accept due to the directivity of the "so-called hidden button". After the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made, it is possible to show the success of the situation to the people around (by making progress while the image display is not displayed). You will be able to improve your interest.

  However, at this time, regarding the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), even if the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the “first display state” within the 3B acceptance period, the integrated image It is desirable to display the display IG (visual image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) so that the display can be made visible even when it is not displayed (when it cannot be viewed). That is, when the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed (whether it is not visible), if acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made, If the integrated image display IG is not displayed even after the acceptance is made, is the relevant acceptance period generated as the second B acceptance period or the third B acceptance period (first display state)? It becomes difficult to distinguish whether or not it has occurred. In this regard, even if the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this is the same as the above-mentioned "No. By making it appear in the same manner as when received in the "2 display state", the reception period is generated as the 3B reception period (the 1st display state) instead of the 2B reception period. You will be able to suggest that.

  In an example in which these configurations are adopted, if the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made while in the "first display state (see FIG. 300 (a))" within the 3B acceptance period, FIG. )-(H1) or the production progress shown in FIG. 301 (d2)-(h2), etc., the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. It will be done in the absence. That is, when the acceptance validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the plurality of modes. After the reception, the production is started to be executed, and when the reception validity determination is made in the second display state, there are a plurality of integrated image display IGs (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). The post-reception effect will be started to be executed in a state where it is displayed in any of the modes.

Or, in the “first display state” during the 3B reception period,
-Even if acceptance (reception validity judgment) is made, after the acceptance is made, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed and the 3B reception is made. A first period (first state, first timing) during which post-effects are executed,
・ When acceptance (reception acceptance judgment) is made, after the acceptance is made (after the timing at which the acceptance is made), integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge) Image)) is displayed, and a second period (second state, second timing) in which the display of the integrated image display IG and the execution of the effect after the reception of the third B are performed in parallel is further included. You can For example, in the first display state, it is desirable that the first period (first state, first timing) first occurs and then the second period (second state, second timing) occur. According to such a configuration, since the effect contents are different depending on the timing of acceptance in the first display state, the improvement of the effect as an acceptance period having the "first display state". It is expected to be planned.

  In the “first display state” of the 3B reception period, only at least one of the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing) is set. It may be included.

  In the 3B reception period according to the above-described example of performance, when the set time elapses without the operation by the player being received (FIG. 296 (f)), it is the same as when the reception is made within the 3B reception period. Post-reception productions are not executed (automatic reception productions function). However, you may make it generate | occur | produce as about the 3B reception period as a target which an automatic reception production functions. In this case, automatic reception is not performed in the first display state, but is performed in the second display state. Moreover, you may make it generate | occur | produce about the 1st reception period as a target which an automatic reception production functions.

  Further, in the 3B reception period, the timing of automatic reception may be different depending on the state of the effect (state that can be set by the player). However, regardless of the timing at which automatic reception is performed, the same post-reception effect as when automatic reception is performed in the above "second display state" and reception is performed within the 3B reception period. Should be started.

  In addition, when the above-mentioned “second display state” occurs during the 3B reception period, the 3B reception period itself has already been generated before this, but regarding the gauge image, The display (the above-described depiction for reducing the area) may be started from the state where the display area has the maximum value within the frame (the area may be already reduced). According to such a configuration, even if the remaining time as the reception period is actually already reduced, by starting the display of the area of the gauge image from the maximum value, it is possible to improve the game. The decrease will be suppressed. It is also possible to make the reception period appear as if it was the 1B reception period.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a first B reception period and a second B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, in the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display (frame) is performed regardless of at which timing the "reception acceptance determination that the operation by the player is an effective operation" is performed. Image, gauge image)) is always displayed (see FIG. 288, FIG. 289, etc.), and in the 2B reception period, the integrated image display is performed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made. The IG (black image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not necessarily displayed (see FIGS. 291, 292, etc.).

  According to such a configuration, by providing two types of reception periods having completely different performances, it becomes possible to give a sharp impression to the player in requesting a motion (giving an operation opportunity), It is expected that the interest in playing games will be improved.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is further provided with a 3B reception period, and during the 3B reception period, a reception validity determination that an operation (operation) by a player is a valid operation (valid operation) is performed. Depending on the timing, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the integrated image display IG (image display and In some cases, the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is not displayed.

  With such a configuration, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is always displayed regardless of when "reception validity determination" is made. The "1B reception period" is displayed, and the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display) regardless of when "reception validity determination" is made. (Frame image, gauge image) is not always displayed, it is possible to make it appear as if a "second B reception period" is occurring, and the reception period can be improved through the directivity that gives such uncertainty. It becomes possible to appropriately maintain the feeling of tension when it occurs.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, as shown in FIGS. 297 and 300, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge) in a mode that cannot appear in the 3B reception period. It is desirable to be able to display images)). That is, in the first B reception period according to the above-described example of performance, the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 232 (d) can be displayed, but the special mode appears in the third B reception period. It's something you can't get. With such a configuration, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is in the mode (integrated image display IGa) shown in FIG. 232 (a). When it is displayed, it is difficult to recognize whether the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period is occurring, and the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed. )) Is displayed in the special mode (integrated image display IGd) shown in FIG. 232 (d), it becomes possible to suggest that the 1B reception period is occurring.

  In addition, the acceptance allowable sound is not output during the 2B reception period, and the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed during the 3B reception period. It is desirable that the acceptance acceptable sound is output even when the acceptance is made without any action, and the post-reception effect is thereby executed. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest that the reception period is not the second B reception period but the third B reception period (first display state).

  Also, regarding the “reception sound” that is output in the same manner regardless of the mode (expectation level) of the post-reception effect, it is output during the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, and is not output during the 2B reception period. Good. It is desirable that the same mode is output as the "reception sound" during the first B reception period and the third B reception period. However, such "acceptance sound" does not necessarily have to be output in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period.

  Further, it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (for example, the first disappearance related display SKB1) that cannot appear in the third reception period is displayed in the first reception period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the first B reception period is occurring instead of the third B reception period through the type of disappearance EF effect.

  Further, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that a disappearance EF effect that can appear in the 3B reception period (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) can be displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first B reception period and the third B reception period has occurred.

  In the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period, the objects (operation buttons 410, sword ornament 5001, etc.) to which motion opportunities are given may be the same or different. Good. However, when the objects to which the operation opportunity is given are different, the operation object display (the image display) is displayed as different.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including a 1B reception period and a 3B reception period are prepared as reception periods. Then, when the “reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion” is made within the 1B reception period, one of a plurality of modes with different expectations is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. If the production after 1B reception can be performed, and the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3B reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. It is possible to execute the post-3B reception effect in any of a plurality of different modes.

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1B reception period and the "reception validity determination" is made during the 3B reception period. Based on that, the disappearance EF effect is produced by using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). Since it can be executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination has been properly made (the acceptance period has ended because the operation by the player has been accepted).

  Further, as described above, at which timing (first display state, second display state, etc.) the reception validity determination is made in the 3B reception period that the player's action (operation) is a valid action (valid operation). Depending on whether the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, and the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image) , Gauge image)) may not be displayed. In this case, first, when the reception validity determination is made under the situation where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed, this is taken as a trigger. The disappearance EF effect is executed in a predetermined area including at least a part of a specific area in which the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed. On the other hand, even if the reception validity determination is made in a situation where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, this is a trigger. As a result, it is desirable to execute the disappearance EF effect in the same manner as when the acceptance validity determination is made under the situation where the integrated image display IG is displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest that the reception validity determination is in a secret state even in a situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed. If the acceptance validity determination is made in a situation where the integrated image display IG is not displayed, the first reception period ends without displaying the integrated image display IG, and the disappeared EF The effect will be executed by using at least a part of the area where the integrated image display IG was to be displayed.

  Further, at this time, in the 1B reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of at which timing the reception validity determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action (valid operation) is made. It is desirable to do so. By providing a "first B reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed" separately from the above-described third B reception period, the disappearance EF effect is combined with the configuration in which it is safe. It becomes possible to provide a sense of directing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In the 1B reception period, when the post-reception production corresponding thereto is executed in the high-expectation mode (FIG. 298 (f2) to (h2)), the specific mode used in the 3B reception period as the disappearance EF production (FIG. 298). (E2) to (g2)) appear, but in a case different from the high expectation mode, a specific mode (FIG. 298 (e2) to (g2)) does not appear as the disappearance EF effect and a mode different from this (FIG. 298 (FIG. 298 ( It is desirable to prevent e1) to (g1)) from appearing or the disappearing EF effect itself not to appear. With such a configuration, when the disappearance EF effect is executed corresponding to the 3B reception period, it becomes possible to give an image as if the high-expectation effect is being executed, which lowers the enjoyment of the game. Can be suppressed.

  In the first-B reception period, the acceptance-permitted sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the third-B acceptance period, the acceptance-allowed sound may be output only in "one mode". With such a configuration, when the acceptance allowable sound having the "one aspect" is output, the possibility that the 3B acceptance period having the performance as "a so-called hidden button" has occurred is conscious. Since it can be attached, the feeling of tension can be appropriately maintained. The "one aspect" may be one that can be selectively output (depending on the determination) even when the 1B reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that "one aspect" is output as the aspect with the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained even in a situation in which the acceptance-permitted sound is output in the lowest expected manner.

  When the specific variation pattern is selected, both the first B acceptance period and the third B acceptance period may occur sequentially within the particular variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first B acceptance period occurs after the third B acceptance period occurs. Further, in this case, the 1B reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second B acceptance period can occur between the occurrence of the 3B acceptance period and the occurrence of the 1B acceptance period.

  Further, it is desirable that the precursor effect output when the 1B reception period occurs and the precursor effect that is output when the 3B reception period occurs are in different modes. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period occurs by the precursor effect.

  Further, in the 3B reception period, as the disappearance EF effect, a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) is made to appear when there is acceptance, and a mode different from the specific mode when there is no reception (for example, the third disappearance). It is desirable that the related indication SKB3) appears or that no aspect be displayed. On the other hand, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that the same aspect as when there is a reception is received as the disappearance EF effect even if there is no reception. That is, in the 3B reception period that has both the performance of the above-mentioned “first B reception period (so-called normal button effect)” and the above-mentioned “second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)”, It can be said that the operation is more likely to be forgotten (the acceptance period ends without being accepted) than the “first B acceptance period (so-called normal button effect)” described above. In this respect, according to the above configuration, if the user forgets to operate in the 3B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance related display SKB2) when the acceptance is made does not appear. It becomes possible to appeal to the player that he / she has forgotten to operate and is able to maintain a suitable tension when the reception period occurs thereafter. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that tend to be forgotten to operate during the 1B reception period. Nevertheless, if the action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has made a choice in the game to "do not perform the action". Therefore, for the player who made such a choice, If the "appeal of being in a situation where forgetting to operate has occurred", the interest in the game may be adversely affected. Therefore, in the 1B reception period, it is desirable that the same aspect as when there is a reception is received as the disappearance EF effect even if there is no reception.

  In particular, in the 1B reception period according to the above-described production example, the mode of the disappearance EF production is different depending on the mode (expectation level) of the production after the 1B reception (see FIG. 298). Therefore, in the 1B reception period, even if there is no reception, if the same mode as when the reception was received as the disappearance EF effect is made to appear, after the reception of the 1B reception that was made when the reception was made. It becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the effect, and it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, during the second B reception period according to this embodiment, the player who is performed in a state in which the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. It is possible to perform the "reception valid determination" in which the operation according to is a valid operation, and when the reception valid determination is made, the disappearance EF effect is not executed.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the “reception valid determination” is properly performed (the state in which the reception period has ended due to the operation by the player being received). As a result, it is expected that the feeling of tension as the second B reception period for secretly requesting an action from the player (secretly providing an operation opportunity) will be maintained even after the reception validity determination is made. become.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in both the second B reception period and the third B reception period. It is made possible to make a reception validity determination in which a motion performed by the player in the state is a valid motion. Then, in the 2B reception period, when the reception validity determination that the operation by the player performed in a state in which the integrated image display IG) is not displayed is a valid operation, the disappearance EF effect is not executed. In the 3B reception period, when the reception validity determination that the operation by the player performed in a state where the integrated image display IG is not displayed is a valid operation is made, the disappearance EF effect is executed. did.

  According to such a configuration, until the player performs an operation in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period is occurring, but after the reception validity determination that this is the valid operation is made, the 2B reception period and the 3B reception period Since it becomes possible to recognize which one has occurred, the player can be prompted to perform an action.

  Further, when the 4B condition is satisfied, the 4B acceptance period may be further allowed to occur. Also in this 4B reception period, the operation by the player performed in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed is an effective operation. Acceptance judgment can be made. In the 4B reception period, the reception is valid with the operation by the player performed in a state in which the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. When the determination is made, the disappearance EF effect is executed as in the case of the above-mentioned 3B acceptance period. However, in the 4B reception period, the extinguished EF effect is executed in a different mode depending on the mode (expectation level) of the corresponding post-4B reception effect. With such a configuration, until the player performs an operation in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed, It is difficult to recognize which of the 2B reception period, the 3B reception period, and the 4B reception period has occurred, but after the reception validity determination that this is the valid operation is performed, the 2B reception period and the In addition to being able to recognize which of the 3B reception period and the fourth reception period has occurred, in the case of the fourth reception period, it becomes possible to suggest the degree of expectation. ..

  In the 1B reception period or the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed on the operation receiving unit when the operation by the player is received. It is desirable that the disappearance EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing motion and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

  It should be noted that the above-described production examples and other examples may be realized by modifying the following configurations, and the following configuration (reception period) may be changed to different reception periods (different It may be further provided as a sign effect display). That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least the 1B reception period, the 2B reception period, and the 3B reception period are set as the reception period in which the player is allowed to receive the operation (operation). I have it. Of these, in the 1B reception period and the 3B reception period, it is possible to execute the disappearance EF effect based on the fact that the operation (operation) is received by the player (acceptance validity determination), and in the 2B reception period. As described above, the disappearance EF effect is not executed even if the player accepts the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity).

  In this regard, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 1B acceptance period (determination of acceptance validity), the production after the 1B acceptance is expected based on the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) (big hit symbol). It is possible to execute the extinction EF effect in the same manner in the case where it is executed in a mode in which the appearance ratio is low) and in the case where the 1B post-reception effect is executed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is high (the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears) You may do it. When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 298, any mode (modes shown in (d1) to (h1) of FIG. 298, and FIG. 298 (d2) to ( h2)) appears, and whether or not acceptance is made within the 1B reception period (aspects shown in (d3) to (g3) of FIG. 298), the disappeared EF One predetermined mode will always appear as an effect. In other words, the 1B reception period is the time when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing within the period (further, even when the reception is not made). The image display IG (a general image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continuously displayed. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "Which mode the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided depending on the disappearing EF effect, the effect may be too complicated. In this respect, in such a 1B reception period, any mode (modes shown in FIGS. 298 (d1) to (h1) and modes shown in FIGS. 298 (d2) to (h2)) as a post-1B reception effect. Regardless of whether or not they appear, and whether or not they have been received within the 1B reception period (aspects shown in (d3) to (g3) of FIG. 298), it is predetermined as the extinction EF effect. If one aspect is surely made to appear, the above-mentioned concern can be solved.

  In addition, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (reception effective determination) in the 3B reception period, the production after the 3B reception is expected based on the reception (reception effective determination) (big hit symbol is The disappearance EF effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether it is performed in a mode in which the appearance ratio is low or when the third B post-reception effect is performed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is high (the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears). You may do it. The 3B reception period has the effect of "so-called hidden button", and it can be said that it is positioned as a "high difficulty reception period" by that amount, so even after the acceptance is made, It is possible to obtain effect information that is different from each other from both the aspect as the oxidative image display IG (various image display, remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the aspect as the disappearance EF effect. It is desirable to give the person a stimulus in the production.

  When such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 301, the mode as the disappearing EF effect that appears when the acceptance is not made is the disappearing EF effect that can appear when the acceptance is made. It is desirable to be different from any of the plurality of modes. As a result, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period is the same as the above-mentioned "first B acceptance period (so-called normal button effect)" and the above-mentioned "second B acceptance". It becomes possible to suggest that it has both the performance of “period (so-called hidden button performance)”.

  Further, as described above, in another example for the 3B reception period, when the reception is made in the “first display state” within the 3B reception period, the integrated image display IG (result) is displayed after the reception is made. The image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are not displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. In such a situation, it is desirable to provide information (expected degree information regarding post-reception effect) by the disappearance EF effect in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, when the player does not accept the action (operation) (reception validity determination) in the 1B acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the operation is accepted. You can Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance was not made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the 3B acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "1B acceptance period ( It is possible to suggest that it was not a combination of both the effect of "so-called normal button effect" "and the effect of" second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect) "described above.

  Further, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) in the 3B acceptance period, the extinction EF effect is executed in the same manner as the appearance when the acceptance is made. You may. With such a configuration, it becomes difficult to recognize whether or not the user is in the accepting condition, and thus it is possible to enhance the performance as a “so-called hidden button”.

  With regard to these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-described effect examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof.

  Next, a case where some of the modified examples are applied to the above-described effect examples will be described. That is, FIG. 302 is a modification example related to “the effect that appears when the acceptance is made or not accepted in the first B acceptance period” shown in FIG. 298, and FIG. 303 is shown in FIG. 301. It is a modification example relating to "the effect that appears when the order is accepted or not accepted during the 3B acceptance period". In addition, in this modified example, regarding a configuration not particularly referred to, "examples of effects regarding the 1B reception period (FIGS. 288 to 290, 297, and 298)" and "examples of operations related to the 3B reception period (FIGS. 294 to 298). 296, FIG. 300, and FIG. 301) ”, and each of the above-described different examples that can be applied to the“ effect example regarding the 1B reception period ”and the“ production example regarding the 3B reception period ”. Is similarly applicable.

  In the modification shown in FIG. 302, when the player accepts an operation (operation) (reception effectiveness determination) during the 1B acceptance period, the 1B post-reception effect is expected based on the acceptance (reception effectiveness determination). When it is executed in a mode in which the degree (the proportion of big hit symbols appears) is low (see (d1) to (h1) in FIG. 302), the aspect after the 1B reception is high in the degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols) ( The disappearing EF effect is executed in the same manner as in the case of being executed in FIGS. 302 (d2) to (h2)). Here, the second disappearance related display SKB2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

  However, in the modification shown in FIG. 302, when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player (acceptance valid determination) in the 1B acceptance period (see FIGS. 302 (d3) to (g3)), As the disappearance EF effect, a mode that does not appear when a player accepts an operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) during the 1B acceptance period appears. Here, the third disappearance related display SKB3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

  On the other hand, in the modification shown in FIG. 303, when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player (acceptance validity determination) during the 3B acceptance period, the 3B acceptance is performed based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). When the post-production is executed in a mode in which the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol appears) is low (see FIGS. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the post-production of the 3B reception is expected (the proportion of the big hit symbol). The annihilation EF effect is executed in a different mode from the case of being executed in a high mode (see FIG. 303 (see d2 to (h2)). Here, the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbols) If it is executed in a low aspect (see (d1) to (h1) in FIG. 303), the first disappearance related display SKB1 is executed as an extinction EF effect, and is executed in a manner with a high expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols). If done ( Second extinction associated display SKB2 is running as extinguished EF effect to 303 (see d2~ (h2)).

  In the modification shown in FIG. 303, in the case where the player does not receive the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) during the 3B acceptance period (see FIGS. 303 (d3) to (g3)), As the disappearance EF effect, the mode that appears when the player accepts the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) during the 3B acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 303 (d3) to (g3), since the first disappearance related display SKB1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the operation (operation) is received by the player during the 3B reception period ( If the acceptance validity determination) has been made, it is possible to recognize that the effect progress shown in (d1) to (h1) of FIG. 303 has occurred. On the other hand, when the operation (operation) is not accepted (determination of acceptance validity) by the player in the 3B acceptance period, when the second disappearance related display SKB2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3B acceptance period If it is assumed that the player has accepted the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity), it becomes possible to recognize that the production progress shown in FIGS. 303 (d2) to (h2) has occurred. .

  In the 1B reception period according to such a modified example, as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when a reception is made, a post-acceptance effect corresponding to the 3B acceptance period according to the modified example (after 3B acceptance) The "second disappearance related display SKB2" that is displayed when the (production) is executed in a mode with high expectation is used. That is, in this case, in the first B reception period according to the modified example, it is possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a mode with a high expectation as long as the reception is made. You will be able to improve your interest.

  The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third B reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKB2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period according to the modified example, the post-reception effect (1B post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1B reception period is executed in a mode with low expectations. Even if the "first disappearance related display SKB1" displayed when the display is made is used, is it in the state of being accepted during the 1B acceptance period according to the modification, or the 3B according to the modification? It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the item has been received during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modified example, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the “third disappearance related display SKB3” is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). It is supposed to be displayed.

  The “third disappearance related display SKB3” is preferably not displayed in association with the third B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1B acceptance period, the acceptance period is the directivity due to the "1B acceptance period (so-called normal button effect)" described above. It is possible to suggest that it was not one having both the above-mentioned and the effect of the "second B reception period (so-called hidden button effect)".

  Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKB3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first B acceptance period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to more suitably suggest that the 1B reception period has ended without acceptance.

  By the way, during the 3B reception period according to this modified example, when the reception is made in the “first display state”, “integrated image display IG (image display, remaining time display (frame image, frame image, 303 (d1) to (h1) or FIGS. 303 (d2) to (h2), etc., when the configuration according to the above-mentioned another example such as "the gauge image)) is not displayed and the post-reception effect is executed" is applied. The production progress shown in (1) will be performed in a state where the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. That is, when the acceptance validity determination is made in the first display state, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed in any of the plurality of modes. After the reception, the production is started to be executed, and when the reception validity determination is made in the second display state, there are a plurality of integrated image display IGs (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). The post-reception effect will be started to be executed in a state where it is displayed in any of the modes.

  Even in the third B reception period according to this modification, the player is provided before the timing tS2 at which the state (third B reception period) in which the “reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is a valid operation” is permitted occurs. Even if there is a motion (operation) by the above, the motion (operation) is not regarded as a “reception valid judgment” at that time, but at the time when the 3B reception period is started (or after that). ), A configuration according to the above-described another example in which it is possible to perform (based on) “acceptance validity determination” that targets (based on) an operation (operation) performed by the player before the 3B acceptance period. Alternatively, it is possible to apply the configuration related to the first period (first state, first timing) and the second period (second state, second timing).

  In the 3B reception period according to the above modification, when the low-expectation mode appears as the post-3B reception effect (FIGS. 303 (d1) to (h1)), the first disappearance related display SKB1 is executed as the disappearance EF effect. However, the disappearing EF effect itself may not appear.

  Further, in the first B reception period according to the above modification, a specific aspect appears as the disappearance EF effect when there is acceptance (FIG. 302 (d1) to (h1) and FIG. 302 (d2) to (h2)). Although the mode different from the specific mode appears when there is no acceptance (FIGS. 302 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearance EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

  Further, in the first B acceptance period according to the above modification, when the acceptance is made, the second disappearance related display SKB2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect), but it is different from the second disappearance related display SKB2. It may be performed in a manner. For example, even if it is executed in the first disappearance-related display SKB1, whether it is in the state of being accepted in the first B acceptance period or in the state of being accepted in the third B acceptance period. You will be able to make it difficult to recognize.

  Next, an example in which the above “Structure 5-B” to “Structure 9-B” are embodied will be described. As described above, this pachinko machine 1 is the content of the production that is advanced when it is received (for example, a conversation notice, a cut-in notice, a movable body notice as a post-reception production, and a notice production (expectation degree suggesting production). A plurality of reception periods (reception performances) of different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (reception performance) of a type according to the result of the determination (big hit determination, performance determination, etc.). Here, as a plurality of reception periods (reception productions), at least a 1C reception period (reproduction after 1C reception), a 2C reception period (reproduction after reception of 2C), and a 3C reception period (reproduction after reception of 3C) I am preparing.

  With reference to FIGS. 304 to 318, each feature will be described for each reception period (reception performance). In addition, regarding each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 303, the 1C reception period (1C post-reception production), the 2C reception period (2C post-reproduction production), the 3C reception period (3C reception post) It may be prepared as a reception period different from the (production), a 1C reception period (1C post-reception production), a 2C reception period (2C post-reproduction production), a 3C reception period ( It may be realized as any one of (3C post-reception production). Further, in order to realize each invention described below, only the necessary configuration of each configuration described below needs to be provided, and these are not necessarily required for each reception period described above with reference to FIG. 303. It may not be provided.

  304 to 306 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 1C is satisfied and the first C reception period (first C reception effect) occurs as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination). .. 313 and 314 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the 1B reception period (1B reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and as a result of the variation pattern determination, the "first C variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the first C variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative pattern SZ (effect description according to the first C variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the first C variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 313 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “first C variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), when the timing tT2 when the first C predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (when the condition 1C is satisfied). , 1st C reception period (effective period) in which “reception regarding 1C post-reception production” is permitted is generated (“situation shown in FIGS. 297 (b) and (c)”). As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (when the acceptance validity determination is made) within the first C acceptance period, the 1C post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception availability determination). become.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), in relation to the occurrence of such a 1C reception period, the reception target (operation receiving unit) Such as) indicating the target of movement (displaying a moving image), displaying the remaining time indicating the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (decreasing the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image over time) Depiction), extinction related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, and 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) in response to the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) Are to be carried out respectively. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to the present embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  More specifically, first, when the first C reception period occurs at timing tT2, as shown in FIGS. 304 (b), 313 (b), and (c), the effect display device 1600 (first In (1 production device), as the integrated image display IG, "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)" are displayed. The integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) may appear at the timing tT2, or may appear before the timing tT2 and cross the timing tT2. It may be displayed in. It should be noted that the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is received when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the first C reception period, or the reception (reception validity determination) is made. It is hidden when the 1C reception period is ended without any notice. The first C acceptance period according to this example ends when timing tT3 arrives when the player does not accept the action (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) (see FIG. 304 (a)).

  In the first C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is one of a plurality of modes (for example, FIGS. 232 (a) and (d)). 313 (b) shows a case where the integrated image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a). 313 (c) corresponds to the case where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d). Even in the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and 232 (c). It may be done.

  Then, FIG. 304 assumes a case where the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made when the relatively early timing tT2a within the first C acceptance period arrives. There is. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 304 (a), the first C acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tT2a (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception production (1C post-reception production) corresponding to the 1C reception period is started to be executed.

  Note that an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to FIG. 314 (h1)) is as a post-reception production (a post-C reception production) corresponding to the 1C reception period. An example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to FIG. 314 (h2)” corresponds to the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed. This is equivalent to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C acceptance period. It may include “0%” or “100%”.

  In this regard, in the first C reception period, as shown in FIG. 304, at the timing tT2a, which is the time when the operation by the player is received (the time when the effect after the 1C reception is started in response to the reception), "integrated". Not only does the "chemically modified image display IG" not be hidden, but also it is not made difficult to visually recognize the integrated modified image display IG.

  That is, the first post-reception reception effect according to the present embodiment is a “first-C post-reception effect display” that uses the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), and a second effect device (for example, a sub-liquid crystal or a movable display). (1st C post-reception specific effect) using a body, effect lamp, etc.) and 1st C post-reception effect sound using a third effect device (speaker) are realized as at least a composite effect. Although not necessarily realized as a composite effect by the three effect devices, an effect in which an integrated image image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed among the effect devices In the display device 1600 (first rendering device), the time when the "first post-reception production display" as the first post-reception production is started is delayed compared to other production devices. By Even after the accepted Te has been made is a possible to dare maintain the visibility of the "integrated 摸 image display IG".

  With such a configuration, as shown in FIG. 314 (d1) or (d2), the integrated image display IG has a plurality of modes (FIG. 232 (FIG. Since it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize which of a) to (d) was displayed, it is expected that the decrease in the interest of the game can be suitably suppressed. Like

  Here, after the end of the acceptance period, in order to facilitate the recognition of how the integrated image display IG was displayed during the acceptance period, in order to facilitate recognition, "integrated image display after acceptance" It can be said that it is desirable to set the "time for which the IG is displayed in the easily visible state" to be long. However, even if the reception has been made and the post-reception productions (the second production device and the third production device) are already being executed, the integrated image display IG is during the reception period. If it is displayed in the same manner as it is, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the situation has been accepted, and as a result, it is delayed to notice the post-reception effect in the execution state There is a concern that "it will end up."

  Therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 304 (b) or 314 (e1) or (e2), when a predetermined time elapses from the timing tT2a at which the first C reception period ends due to the operation being accepted by the player. When the timing tT2b arrives, the display related to the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display is started.

  That is, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, while the "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearance EF "Effect") is displayed, and at least a part of the area where "Disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed is "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)". Is overlapped with the area where is displayed.

  According to such a configuration, even after the acceptance is made, even if the integrated mood image display IG is continuously displayed, the integrated mood image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized and It becomes possible to suggest that the effect (the second effect device, the third effect device) is already being executed. Therefore, it is expected that the player's gaze destination will be automatically shifted from the integrated image display IG to the post-reception effect (second effect device, third effect device) (after timing tT2b). As a result, even if the post-reception production (second production device, third production device) is already being executed, it is difficult to visually recognize, but the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed for a relatively long time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in amusement of amusement caused by not being able to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed within the reception period.

  Further, in the 1C reception period, a case with a low expectation level (FIGS. 314 (d1) to (h1)) appears as a post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding thereto, and a high expectation mode ( 314 (d2) to (h2)) appear, different modes (first disappearance related display SKC1, second disappearance related display SKC2) appear as disappearance related displays. That is, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 314 (e1) and 314 (e2), there is a situation where the “display after 1C reception effect” using the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is not yet started. Even if it is, it is confirmed whether the disappearance related display appearing on the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) appears in “first disappearance related display SKC1” or “second disappearance related display SKC2”. As a result, it becomes possible to infer whether or not the "display effect after reception of the first C" is executed in a mode with high expectations.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 304 (b) and FIG. 314 (f1) or (f2), the display related to the disappearance related display (the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize). When the timing tT2c arrives within the period in which the (form of) is appearing, as a post-reception effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted within the 1C acceptance period. The execution of the "post-first-stage reception effect display UGC1 (cut-in effect)" is started. However, here, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as the post-reception production), FIG. As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 as a cut-in effect by the princess character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. In the example in which the performance is displayed and progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation as the post-reception performance is relatively high), FIG. ), A second mode ((here, after 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2 as cut-in effect by samurai character) is displayed as the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1 corresponding to the 1C reception period. Done It has become way.

  That is, in this case, in the case where the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1, second disappearance related display SKC2)" are displayed, respectively, the "first C post-reception effect display UGC1 ( The "first C post-reception effect display UGC1-1" or the "first C post-reception effect display UGC1-2") is started to be executed. Thus, even if the integrated image display IG is kept displayed for a relatively long time after being received within the first C reception period, the reception in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) Post production (after the first C reception post production display UGC1 can be started without significantly delaying compared to other production devices, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the game entertainment. While the integrated image display IG is made difficult to visually recognize, the presentation display UGC1 after the first C reception is started, suggesting that the first C reception period has already ended, and the player's gaze point Automatically moves from the "integrated image display IG" to the "1C post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)". Is it is to be expected that the (later timing tT2c).

  On the other hand, with respect to the "post 1C reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)", an area in which the "integrated image display IG" is displayed When it is displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of it (it does not necessarily have to be displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind the "integrated image display IG", and "1C The "integrated image display IG" is preferentially displayed with respect to the post-reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2). As a result, even when the "1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started to be executed, the integrated image display within the reception period It is made easy to recognize in which mode the IG was displayed.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "the 1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1 (the 1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1-1 or the 1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1-2)" is started As shown in FIG. 304 (b) and FIG. 314 (g1) or (g2), the “1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1 (1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C post-reception effect display UGC1. -2) "is displayed, first, of the" integrated image display IG "and the" disappearance related display ", the" integrated image display IG "is hidden. After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 304 (b) and FIG. 314 (h1) or (h2), "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display The display SKC1 or the second disappearance-related display SKC2 "is hidden, and the" first C post-reception effect display UGC1 (first-C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or second After the 1C reception, the display related to the effect display UGC1-2) ”is performed.

  In this respect, the "first C post-reception effect display UGC1" is based on the fact that the operation by the player has been accepted, and has a plurality of different expectations (here, the 1C post-reception effect display UGC1-1 or 1C). It is displayed by any of the post-reception effect display UGC1-2). Therefore, the "post-first-C reception effect display UGC1" is executed for a relatively long time after the "integrated image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" are hidden.

  In addition, in the example productions (FIGS. 313 and 314) corresponding to the 1C reception period, when the “1C post-reception production display UGC1” is executed and the reception is performed within the 1C reception period, the “1C reception period” is displayed. The background image is switched before and after the post-reception effect display UGC1 ”is started.

  According to such a configuration, in the situation shown in FIGS. 314 (d) and 314 (e) where the background image is not switched (timing tT2a to tT2b shown in FIG. 304), the effect display device 1600 (first Even if there is a production change in (1 production device), it becomes possible to suggest that the “post-first-C reception production display UGC1” is in a state where it has not yet been started.

  In addition, in this example of performance, the display start time of "Disappearance-related display (first disappearance-related display SKC1, second disappearance-related display SKC2)" of "Display effect display UGC1 after reception of first C" and "Background change" ( Although it is decided to start the display at a timing (timing tT2c) later than the timing tT2b), the timing (timing tT2b) at which the "disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1, second disappearance related display SKC2)" is started. The display may be started at the same time (timing tT2b).

  In the example shown in FIG. 314, as the post-reception effect, the background image can be switched to the same background image when a low-expectation mode appears and when a high-expectation mode appears. The background image may be switched to different background images when a low aspect appears and when a high expectation appears. The background image may be switched when a mode with high expectations appears, but the background image may not be switched when a mode with low expectations appears.

  As described above, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) according to this example, when the first C reception period occurs, the time is within the limited time (thick line shown in FIG. 304) in association with this, In addition, various displays are performed within a limited display screen (effect display device 1600), thereby suppressing a decrease in amusement of the game. However, as a result of this, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the start timing (timing tT2c) of the effect after the first C acceptance (the effect display after the first C acceptance) corresponding to the acceptance is greater than the received timing tT2a. The reality is that there is no choice but to delay.

  Therefore, in this example, when the operation by the player is accepted within the first C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 304 (b) and 304 (c), based on the acceptance, The first post-C reception effect using the second effect device (the first post-C reception specific effect) is started prior to the first C post-accept effect using the first effect device (the first C post-accept effect display). I am trying.

  According to such a configuration, the execution start is delayed from the timing tT2a when the reception is performed in the first C reception period, which is limited to a part of the first C reception post-effect (the 1C reception post-effect display). With regard to the presentation after the 1C reception, the execution itself can be started without delay from the same timing tT2a.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively low), FIG. 314 (d1) As shown in, the mode in which the “female kimono” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the post-first-specific reception special UTC1 (first-C reception) corresponding to the first-C reception period. As a 1C post-reception specific production UTB1-1), which is a low-expectation aspect of the post-specific production UTC1, precedes the 1C post-reception production (1C post-reception production display UGC1-1) using the first production device. Then the execution is started. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively high), FIG. As shown in d2), the mode in which the "male kimono" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is that the 1C post-reception specific rendering UTC1 (first rendering) corresponding to the 1C reception period. As a 1C post-reception specific production UTC1-2), which is a highly expected aspect of the 1C post-reception specific production UTC1, a 1C post-reception production (using the 1C post-reception production display UGC1-2) using the first production device described above. It is supposed to start execution prior to.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 313, in addition to the “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) also has the first C acceptance period. An effect within the reception period that suggests that it has occurred is executed (FIGS. 313 (b) and 313 (c)). Regarding the effect within the acceptance period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 313 (b)). ) Is displayed in the same manner as in the case where it is displayed in a high expectation mode (see FIG. 313 (c)).

  That is, in this case, during the first C reception period in which the player is given a motion opportunity (operation opportunity), the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) shows different modes depending on the degree of expectation, and In the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "reception valid determination that the operation (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made within the 1C reception period, the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) displays the "integrated image display IG". While the display related to "is continued (although the expectation degree as the post-reception effect is not yet suggested), a different mode appears in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the expectation degree. Become. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device depending on the time than when paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in this example of production, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "1C post-reception specific production UTC1-1" or "1C post-reception specific production UTC1-2" appears as the 1C post-reception specific production UTC1. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC1 after the reception of the first C. For example, it is assumed that only the "1C post-acceptance specific effect UTC1-2" is provided as the 1C post-acceptance specific effect UTC1, and whether or not the 1C post-acceptance specific effect UTC1 appears makes an expectation (a big hit is obtained. Ratio) may be suggested. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect UTC1-2 after receiving the first C" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when the "specific effect UTC1-2 after the first C receiving" does not appear. Become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the first C reception period occurs, the timing tT1 shown in FIG. 304 (d). In, the output of the acceptance permission sound is started. That is, the acceptable reception sound corresponding to the first C reception period is audibly output while straddling the timing tT2 (corresponding to “the situation shown in (b) and (c) of FIG. 313”) when the first C reception period occurs. The operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance acceptable sound is audibly output.

  Here, in the 1C reception period, as the reception permission sound, a first long permission sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively long time and a first short permission sound that is in an audible output state for a relatively short time period. And are output respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 304 (d), the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are started to be output at the same time, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, one of the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound may be started to be output at or after the timing tT2 when the first C reception period occurs.

  Then, in the 1C reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound is audibly output, based on the acceptance being made, Thus, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound is terminated halfway (halfway in the audible output state).

  In this regard, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectations as shown in FIG. 304 (d) (FIG. 313 (b)). )) And a case where it is executed (audible output) in a mode with a high degree of expectation (case shown in FIG. 313 (c)). That is, in this case, the first long permissible sound and / or the first short permissible sound suggests the degree of expectation within the reception period, but unlike the “integrated image display IG”, the reception (reception) When the validity judgment is made, it will be executed as if it cannot be confirmed, so there is a tension as to when the acceptance (reception validity judgment) should be made within the reception period. It is expected that the feeling will be maintained appropriately.

  In the 1C reception period, when the player accepts the operation while the acceptance allowable sound (first long allowable sound, first short allowable sound) is audibly output, the acceptance allowable sound is terminated halfway. Not only is it performed, but when the acceptance is made, based on this, the audible output of the effect sound after acceptance of the first C is started. The 1C post-reception effect sound is executed so that the degree of expectation is suggested. For example, the sound is performed in a mode with low expectation (audible output) and in a mode with high expectation (audible). Output). That is, in this case, unlike the case of the effect (display effect) performed in the first effect device, in the first C acceptance period, the effect (acceptable sound) performed within the acceptance period and the acceptance are performed. It is possible to prevent competition (duplication) with the effect (effect sound after reception of the first C) performed as a result.

  Such a 1C post-reception reception effect sound is similar to the “1C post-reception reception effect display UGC1”, as shown in FIG. 304 (d). Even after "effect" is hidden, it will be executed for a relatively long time. Regarding the 1C post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations as post-acceptance effect). 313) and an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In the 1C reception period, the first long permissible sound and the first short permissible sound are respectively output as the reception permissible sounds, but these two permissible sounds may not necessarily be output and one reception permissible sound may be output. Only the permissible sound may be output.

  In addition, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the 1C reception period, the third rendering device can hear not only the 1C post-reception rendering sound that indicates the expectation but also the “reception sound” that does not indicate the expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to "G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). And audible output in the same manner in an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as the post-reception production). Is done. Then, such a “reception sound” is audibly output (regardless of the degree of expectation) even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made in the reception period different from the first C reception period. According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception production is performed, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that there is a situation, it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the contents of the post-reception effect.

  On the other hand, FIG. 305 assumes the case where the “reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action” is made when the relatively late timing tT2A within the first C acceptance period arrives. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 305 (a), the first C acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at timing tT2A (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period will be started to be executed.

  In this regard, in the first C reception period, even when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tT2A in the first C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing). However, basically, the effect is advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made at the relatively early timing tT2a within the first C acceptance period. Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305 (a), when the effect progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively as post-reception effect) (When the degree of expectation is low) and when the effect progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the degree of expectation is relatively high as an effect after reception). As a result, in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, the effect is executed with the content described with reference to FIG. 304 and the like. .

  However, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, in the situation shown in FIG. 314 (d) or the like, the gauge image is not displayed in the situation shown in FIG. It means that the display area of is further reduced. Further, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 314, as shown in FIG. 314 (d), acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made while the first short permissible sound has already finished audible output. Therefore, the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) does not cause the first short permissible sound to end midway (end of audible output state).

  Also, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 305, the time for which the “first C post-reception effect display” based on the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is displayed is shorter than in the case of the example shown in FIG. 304. Will be extinguished. That is, although the "specific effect after reception of the first C" and the "effect sound after the first C of reception" are executed for a predetermined time (fixed time) from the time of reception (determination of reception validity). On the other hand, the "first C post-reception effect display" is ended (non-displayed) when the predetermined timing tT4 in the variation pattern arrives, regardless of when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made. It has become one. With such a configuration, it is expected that a feeling of tension regarding at which timing within the acceptance period the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made can be preferably maintained.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 306 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 313 (b) to “G3 (FIG. 314 (d3) to (g3))” are operations by the player within the 1C reception period. This assumes a case where (operation) is not performed and acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is not made.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 306, after the first C reception period occurs, the timing tT3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tT3 (when the first C acceptance period ends and the operation (operation) by the player is no longer accepted), the timing tT2a or Performance display device 1600 (first performance device) at timing tT2A or the like (at the time when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player within the first C acceptance period (or at the time when the performance after acceptance is started)). Similarly to the above), as shown in FIG. 314 (d3), the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even if the player does not receive the operation (operation) in time and the first C reception period ends, after the end, the first C reception period is integrated within the first C reception period. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the mock image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  After that, even if the player's operation (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 314 (e3), the disappearance-related display is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to be visually recognized". (Disappearing EF effect) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect" ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even after the first C reception period ends without receiving the reception, the integrated image display IG is visually recognized even if the integrated image display IG is continuously displayed. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to suggest that the first C acceptance period has ended. Further, even in the situation where the 1C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue displaying the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "first disappearance related display SKC1" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to let you do it. That is, in this case, it is expected that the player feels the possibility that, if the operation (operation) by the player was accepted within the 1C reception period, the expectation level was suggested by the post-1C reception effect. The Rukoto. As a result, it becomes possible to urge the user to think that he / she did not have to operate (operate) within the 1C reception period, and a decrease in amusement of the game when the operation (operation) was not received within the 1C reception period. Is expected to be suppressed.

  However, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "second disappearance related display SKC2" may be displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). A mode different from both of the “first disappearance related display SKC1” and the “second disappearance related display SKC2” may appear.

  Further, even when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 1C reception period, regarding the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), when the operation (operation) is accepted. It may be executed in a manner that can appear. That is, in this case, when the “first disappearance related display SKC1” appears in the situation shown in FIG. 314 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C acceptance period, It means that the production has progressed from 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” (when the post-reception production with relatively low expectations is being executed). Becomes On the other hand, when the "second disappearance related display SKC2" appears in the situation shown in FIG. 314 (e3), if the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the first C acceptance period, then FIG. 313 ( This means that the production has progressed from b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production with a relatively high degree of expectation has been executed). . That is, in this case, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the first C acceptance period, it is related to the fact that the integrated mood image display IG is hidden after the end of the first C acceptance period. Just by confirming the mode as "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect)", whether the effect after the 1C reception is performed in a mode with a low expectation degree or is executed in a mode with a high expectation degree? Since it becomes possible to recognize, it is possible to preferably suppress the deterioration of the interest in the game.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 314 (f3), first of the “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)”, “integrated Hide the "image display IG". After the “integrated image display IG” is hidden in this way, the “disappearance related display (first disappearance related display SKC1 in the figure)” is not displayed as shown in FIG. 314 (g3). Will be displayed.

  By the way, in the first C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not the one shown in FIG. 232 (a) (FIG. 313 (b)). As described above, there may be a case (see FIG. 297 (c)) in which the image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (d). When such a situation shown in FIG. 313 (c) appears, a case where the situation shown in FIG. 313 (b) described above appears and "integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge) The effect will be advanced in the same manner except that the aspect as "image)" is different.

  For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 313 (c) to “G1 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 313 (b) to “G1 (FIG. 314 (d1) to (h1))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 313 (c) to “G2 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 313 (b) to “G2 (FIG. 314 (d2) to (h2))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 313 (c) to “G3 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 313 (b) to “G3 (FIG. 314 (d3) to (g3))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGd". Only.

  It should be noted that in the first C reception period according to this effect example, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the first C post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display UGC, 1C post-reception specific effect UTC, 1C post-reception effect sound) has been described above. It is decided to execute the same effect content (type) as the effect after the 1B reception corresponding to the 1B reception period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effects (post-reception effects display, post-reception specific effects, post-reception effects sound) have different effect contents (types) between the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

  Further, in the first C reception period according to this effect example, for convenience of explanation, the disappearance related display SKB is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance related display SKB corresponding to the above-described 1B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not necessarily have to be the same in the 1B reception period and the 1C reception period.

  307 to 309 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 2C is satisfied as a result of the judgment (big hit judgment or effect judgment) and the second C reception period (second C reception effect) occurs. . FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which a second C reception period (second C reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probable variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the "second C variation pattern" is selected as a result of the variation pattern determination. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the second C variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the second C variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the second C variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 315 (a). )), During the execution period of the variable effect, an effect according to the result of the announcement effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “second C variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 307 (a), when the timing tU2 when the second C predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ is started (when the condition 2C is satisfied). , The second C reception period (effective period) in which the “reception regarding post-second-C-stage presentation” is permitted is generated. As a result, when an operation (operation) by the player is received within the second C reception period (when the reception validity judgment is made), the second-C post-reception effect is performed based on the reception (reception validity judgment). become.

  However, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, unlike the case where the first C reception period occurs, the time when the operation is accepted by the player (the acceptance validity determination) (or the post-reception effect is started to be executed). In this case, the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is not displayed.

  More specifically, in the second C variation pattern, as shown in FIGS. 307 (b) and 315 (b), when the timing tU2 arrives, the second C acceptance period occurs, and the integrated image display IG (“ The "display of the image" and the "display of the remaining time (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed. The second C acceptance period is terminated when the timing tU3 arrives when the player does not accept the action (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) (see FIG. 307 (a)).

  Then, FIG. 307 is assumed to be in a case where the “reception acceptance determination that the operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation” is made when the relatively early timing tU2a arrives in such a second C acceptance period. is doing. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 307 (a), the second C acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tU2a (the acceptance validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect (second-C reception effect) corresponding to the second C acceptance period is started to be executed.

  In addition, the example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 315 (b) to FIG. 315 (c) is the second C post-reception effect corresponding to the second C reception period (“second C post-reception effect display” and “second C post-reception specification. This is equivalent to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as "production", "production sound after reception of the second B", etc.). The first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as each second C post-reception effect (such as “second C post-reception effect display”, “second C post-reception specific effect”, and “second C post-reception effect sound”). In the case, the illustration is omitted, and in reality, the production progresses from FIG. 315 (b) to the situation in which the production after the 2C reception is performed in the omitted manner (first aspect with low expectation). There are some cases where it may happen. However, regarding such a second C reception period, when the "reception validity determination in which the operation (operation) by the player is a valid operation" is made, the second C post-reception effect ("2C post-reception effect display" or " Whether or not "2C post-reception specific effect", "2C post-reception effect sound", etc. are executed in the mode shown in FIG. 315 (c) (post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect display, You may make it implement | achieve as a type | mold with which the low expectation mode as 1C reception specific sound production and 1C post reception sound) is not prepared. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  In this respect, in the example of the effect (second C reception period), as described above, as shown in FIG. 307 (b), FIG. 315 (c), etc., the time (reception) when the operation (operation) by the player is received. Accordingly, at the timing tU2a, which is the time point when the presentation is started after the second C reception, the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display (frame image and gauge image)”) is displayed. Never exist. Note that, more strictly, FIG. 315 (c) shows the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tU2c shown in FIG. 307 (c). That is, at the timing tU2a, the "post-second-C reception presentation display UGC2 (group notice production)" of the post-second-C reception presentation is not executed, and the "second-C post-reception specific presentation UTC2-2" and the "second-C reception presentation" are not executed. "Post-production sound (highly expected mode)" is executed. According to such a configuration, since the production progress is performed in the same manner as in the case of the production after the reception of the first C, it is possible to similarly obtain the above-described action and effect.

  Therefore, in this effect example (second C reception period), as shown in FIGS. 307 and 315 (b), even if the reception (reception validity determination) is performed at any timing within the second C reception period, The disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) described above is not executed. Because, at the timing when the operation (operation) by the player is received (at the time when the effect after the second C reception is started in response to the reception), the integrated image display IG ("image display" or "remaining image") is displayed. This is because the time display (frame image and gauge image) ”is not displayed and it is not necessary to make it difficult to visually recognize it.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 307 (b) and FIG. 315 (c), when the timing tU2c after the timing tU2a arrives, the operation by the player within the second C acceptance period As a post-acceptance effect in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to the acceptance, "2C post-accept effect effect display UGC2 (in the figure, a group advance effect effect by a ghost character, which is a mode with high expectation) 2C) reception effect display UGC2-2) ”as described above is started. Then, the "second C post-reception reception effect display UGC2" started in this way is, as shown in FIG. 307 (b) and FIG. 315 (d), a predetermined time from the time of reception (reception acceptance determination). When (a certain period of time) has passed, it will be ended (hidden).

  It should be noted that in the production example (FIG. 315) corresponding to the second C reception period, unlike the case of the first C reception period, the background image is switched when the "post-second C reception production display UGC2" is executed. There is no such thing.

  Further, when the operation by the player is accepted within the 2C acceptance period, the second effect device is used based on the acceptance as shown in FIGS. 307 (b) and 307 (c). The production after the 2C reception (specific production after the 2C reception) is started prior to the production after the 2C reception (display after the 2C reception) using the first rendering device.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. Then, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 315 (b) to FIG. 315 (c) (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively high), “ghost” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second production device). Is displayed as the post-second-C reception specific effect UTC2 corresponding to the second-C reception period (the second-C post-reception specific effect UTC2-2, which is a high-expectation mode of the post-second-C reception specific effect UTC2). The execution is started prior to the second post-reception reception effect (second post-reception reception effect display UGC2-2) using the first effect device. As described above, the description is omitted for the case where a mode with a low degree of expectation is executed as the second-C reception post-production, but the “second-C post-reception production display” and “the second-C post-reception specific production UTC2” are low-expectation modes. And is basically the same as the case of executing in a high expectation mode.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared. However, when the 2C reception period occurs, the reception permission sound is not output as shown in FIG. 307 (d).

  Further, in the 1C reception period, when the reception is made, the audible output of the post 2C reception effect sound is started based on this. The 2C post-reception effect sound is executed so that the degree of expectation is suggested, and for example, it is executed in a mode of low expectation (audible output) and in a mode of high expectation (audible). Output).

  In addition, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the second C reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the second C reception effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation but also the “reception sound” that does not indicate the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "acceptance sound" is audibly output in the same manner regardless of whether the second-C post-reception effect is performed with a high expectation or a low expectation.

  On the other hand, FIG. 308 and the example of progressing from FIG. 315 (b), (e) to FIG. 315 (c) show “when the relatively late timing tU2A within the second C reception period arrives. It is assumed that the acceptance valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 308 (a), the second C acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation by the player is accepted at the timing tU2A (the acceptance validity determination is made), and The post-reception effect (second C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 2C reception period is started to be executed.

  In this regard, in the second C reception period, even when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at the relatively late timing tU2A in the second C reception period (when the reception (reception validity determination) is made at any timing). However, basically, the effect is advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made at a relatively early timing tU2a within the second C acceptance period. Therefore, at the time when the operation is accepted by the player (the acceptance validity determination) (or when the post-reception effect is started to be executed), the integrated image display IG (“image display” or “remaining time display ( The frame image and gauge image) ”) are not displayed. Also, in the case of an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 308 (a) or FIGS. 315 (b) and 315 (e) to FIG. May be omitted (when the expectation is relatively low as a post-reception effect). In the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically, refer to FIG. 307 and the like. However, the effect will be executed with the content as described.

  Especially, in the 2C reception period, unlike the case of the 1C reception period, the "display after the 2C reception effect" is received in the same manner as the "2C reception after the reception specific effect" and the "2C reception sound after the reception". Since it is executed for a predetermined time (constant time) from the time when (acceptance validity determination) is made, the aspect as a post-reception effect is also at the timing when acceptance (acceptance validity determination) is made. It's the same regardless.

  It should be noted that the “second C post-reception effect display”, the “second C post-reception specific effect”, and the “second C post-reception effect sound” may be executed for a fixed time set in each, and are mutually It does not have to be completed at the same time.

  On the other hand, the example shown in FIG. 309 and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 315 (b), (e) to FIG. This is based on the assumption that the request is not accepted (judgment of validity).

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 309, after the second C reception period occurs, the timing tU3 comes without the operation (operation) by the player being accepted. In this respect, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted in the second C acceptance period, as shown in FIG. 309, no production related to the end is executed.

  Note that, in the second C reception period, only one mode (in FIG. 315, integrated integrated image display IGb (see FIG. 232 (b))) is supposed to be displayed. The integrated scale image display IGb is a mode that is not displayed during the first C reception period or the third C reception period. However, the second C reception period is the time when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made (or the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed, no matter what timing the reception (reception validity determination) is made. In (), there is no characteristic that the image display (gauge image) is not displayed. Therefore, in the second C reception period, any mode may be displayed as the image display, or may be displayed in any of a plurality of modes. Further, in the 2C reception period, the scale image may not be displayed and the gauge image may be displayed. Further, in the second C reception period, the gauge image may not be displayed, and the image display may be displayed. Further, during the 2C reception period, neither the normal image display nor the gauge image may be displayed.

  Further, according to the above feature of the 2C reception period, after the reception is made, it is possible to concentrate only on the form as the post-reception performance without paying attention to the form of the scale image display (gauge image). become. In this case, even if the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period are subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function, the 2C reception period is not subject to the above-mentioned automatic reception function. Is desirable. As a result, the case where the post-reception production occurs is limited to the case where the player himself / herself confirms the production mode during the second C reception period, and the second C reception period ends. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that the image display and the gauge image are not displayed at the time point and thereafter.

  310 to 312 are time charts showing an example of the effect contents when the condition 3C is satisfied as a result of the determination (big hit determination or effect determination) and the 3C reception period (3C reception effect) occurs. .. 316 to 318 are diagrams showing an example of effects in a variation pattern in which the 3C reception period (3C reception effect) occurs.

  Now, in a specific game state (for example, a non-probability variation / non-time saving normal game state), the start condition is satisfied (holding digestion), and the variation pattern determination is performed, and the "3C variation pattern" is selected. Then, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, first, an effect determination (preliminary effect determination, etc.) corresponding to the third C variation pattern is performed. Then, after this, the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ (effect description according to the 3C variation pattern, sound output of BGM reproduction according to the 3C variation pattern, etc.) is started (the situation shown in FIG. 316 (a)). )), During the execution period of the variation effect, an effect according to the result of the notice effect determination (notice effect) is additionally executed to the effect of the selected “third C variation pattern” itself. Become.

  That is, in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), when the timing tV2 when the third C predetermined time has elapsed after the variation effect of the decorative symbol SZ has started (when the condition 3C is satisfied). , The above-mentioned 3C reception period (effective period) in which “acceptance regarding post 3C reception effect” is permitted is generated. As a result, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (when the acceptance validity determination is made) within the 3C acceptance period, the 3C post-reception effect is performed based on the acceptance (reception availability determination). become.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device), the reception target (such as the operation receiving unit) is related to the occurrence of such a 3C reception period. Suggested operation target display (image display), remaining time indication indicating the remaining time of the reception period (effective period) (depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with time), Disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) that makes it difficult to visually recognize the image display, and 1C post-reception effect display that suggests the degree of expectation (the proportion of the big hit symbol) in response to the acceptance (reception effectiveness determination) It is supposed to be. Note that, as described above, the mock image display according to the present embodiment is integrated with the peripheral decoration image including the remaining time display (a depiction in which the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced over time). However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and may be displayed separately. The same applies to other acceptance periods.

  In this regard, the third C reception period according to the present embodiment is the above-described “dramaticity by the first C reception period (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed)) The performance of displaying an image) and the performance of the above-described "second C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance after reception starts to be executed) is displayed as a scale image or gauge image) It has been realized as a special production that has both the (and not produced performance).

  More specifically, when the third C reception period in which the player's operation is permitted to be received, first, as shown in FIG. 310 (b) and FIG. 316 (b), etc., the integrated image display IG is displayed. ("Display image" and "Display remaining time (frame image and gauge image)") are displayed (timing tV2). However, the 3C reception period depends on at which timing within the 3C reception period the operation by the player has been accepted (reception validity determination) (or the reception validity determination). At the time when the post-effect is started to be executed), there is a case where the mood image display or the gauge image is displayed and a case where the mood image display or the gauge image is not displayed.

  As will be described later, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 310A, etc., within the period (first period) from the occurrence of the 3C reception period to timing Y when a predetermined time has elapsed, the player When the operation is accepted (determination of acceptance validity) by the user, a scale image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made (or when the post-reception effect is started to be executed). If the player accepts the operation (reception validity determination) within the period (second period) from the timing Y to the end of the third C acceptance period, the acceptance (reception) At the time when the validity judgment is made (or when the post-reception effect is started to be executed), the scale image display and the gauge image are displayed. However, such an aspect is merely an example, and in short, when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made at the first timing within the third C reception period, the time (or the reception validity determination) at which the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made. At the time when the post-effect is started to be executed), the mood image display and the gauge image are not displayed (not displayed), and the reception (reception) is performed at the second timing different from the first timing within the 3C reception period. When the validity determination) is made, it suffices that the scale image display and the gauge image are displayed at the time when the acceptance (reception validity determination) is made (or at the time when the effect after reception is started to be executed).

  According to such a 3C reception period, from the time the 3C reception period occurs until the timing Y arrives, even if the reception is made, the corresponding post 3C reception effect is integrated. The image display IG is started to be executed in the non-display state (invisible state), and it is determined that the reception is performed from the timing Y to the timing tV3 when the third C reception period ends. The corresponding post 3C reception effect will be started to be executed in a state in which the integrated image display IG is displayed (as long as at least a part of the integrated image display IG is visible). . As a result, the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment is the above-described "draftiness by the 1C reception period (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed)). The performance of displaying an image) and the performance of the above-described "second C reception period" (at the time of acceptance (or at the time when the performance after reception is started to be executed) is displayed as a scale image or a gauge image. It has been realized as a special production that has both (and non-playability), and it is expected that this will improve the enjoyment of the game.

  That is, in this case, the player can visually recognize the aspect of the integrated image display IG (image display or gauge image) that was displayed during the 3C reception period by adjusting the operation timing with respect to the 3C reception period. As described above, whether to start execution of the 3C post-reception effect while keeping the integrated IG image display IG (quality image display or gauge image) displayed, or to concentrate on the 3C post-reception effect It becomes possible to substantially select whether the integrated image display IG (image display or gauge image) is hidden and execution of the effect after the reception of the third C is started. It will be possible to improve.

  In order to more appropriately realize such performance, in the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is one of a plurality of modes with different expectations. It is designed to be displayed as either (for example, FIG. 232 (a) or (c)), and FIG. 316 (b) shows an integrated image image display IG (image image display or frame image). 232 (a) is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a), and FIG. 316 (d) shows the integrated image image display IG (image image display, frame image, gauge image). It is desirable to make it correspond to the case of being displayed in the mode shown in 232 (c). Even in the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is displayed in any of a plurality of modes including the modes shown in FIGS. 232 (b) and (d). It may be done.

  Then, FIG. 310 is in the “first period (first state) (for example, see FIG. 316 (b))” of the third C reception period (timing tV2a in the figure), It is assumed that the "acceptance validity determination that a player's action (operation) is a valid action" is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 310 (a), the 3C acceptance period is ended based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at timing tV2a (the acceptance validity determination is made). At the same time, the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started to be executed.

  Note that the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (b) to “H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to FIG. 317 (h1))” is the “first period (first state)” in the 3C reception period. In FIG. 316 (b), it is equivalent to the case where the first mode having a relatively low degree of expectation is executed as the “third-C post-reception effect” as a result of the “reception valid determination”. 317 (d2) to FIG. 317 (h2)) "is an example in which the effect progresses," reception validity determination "is made in the" first period (first state) "of the 3C reception period. As a result, it corresponds to the case where the second mode having a relatively high degree of expectation is executed as the “production after reception of the third C”. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, when the “reception validity determination” is made in the “first period (first state)” of the 3C reception period, the case of FIG. 310 (b), FIG. 317 (d1) or ( As shown in d2), at the timing tV2a, which is the time when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted (the time when the effect after the 3C reception is started in response to the acceptance), the "integrated image display IG". Is hidden and not displayed (invisible).

  According to such a configuration, when the player performs an operation (operation) in the “first period (first state)” of the third C reception period (“reception validity determination” is made). In the case), the player produces after the reception in the state where the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not displayed (not visible) (here, after 3C reception). You will be able to enjoy the special effect UTC3).

  In this regard, in the third C reception period according to this example of performance, even if the player performs an operation (operation) in the "first period (first state)", the reception is still performed. When a predetermined time elapses from the timing tV2a (when the timing tV2b arrives), the display related to the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is started as shown in FIG. 317 (e1) or (e2). .

  That is, in the third C reception period according to this example, when the player accepts an operation (operation) in the "first period (first state)", "integration at the time when the timing tV2b arrives" "Disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect)" is started to be displayed even though "chemical image display IG (imaging image display, gauge image display)" is not already displayed (invisible state) And at least part of the area where "Disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)" is displayed overlaps with the area where "Integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display)" was displayed. It is supposed to do.

  According to such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suggest that the post-reception effect is in the state of being executed when the operation by the player is properly accepted.

  In addition, the performance image as the above-mentioned “second C reception period” in the third C reception period (at the time when the reception is made (or at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed), the scale image display and the gauge image are displayed. In the above-mentioned "first period (first state)" for providing non-performance, whether the second C reception period or the third C reception period is in the reception state. Is difficult to recognize, but the "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect)" that cannot appear in the second C reception period appears, so that it is possible to recognize that the reception has been made in the third C reception period. Like

  Also, in the 3C reception period, a case in which the degree of expectation is low (FIGS. 317 (d1) to (h1)) and a mode in which expectation is high (FIGS. 317 (d2) to (h2)) are displayed as effects after reception of the 3C. The display related to disappearance (disappearance EF effect) is executed in the same manner as when the appears. According to such a configuration, compared to the case of the 1C reception period (when the mode of the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is different depending on the degree of expectation), the “disappearance” is performed after the reception is made within the 3C reception period. Since the importance of paying attention to the "related display (disappearing EF effect)" becomes low, it is concentrated on what aspect will appear as the effect display UGC after the reception of the 3rd C, coupled with the fact that the image display (gauge image) is not displayed. Will be able to

  Further, in the 3C reception period according to this effect example, post-reception effects (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period are expected as the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the acceptance is made. The "second disappearance related display SKC2" displayed when executed in a highly frequent mode is used. That is, in this case, in the 3C reception period, it is possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation as long as the reception is made, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. You will be able to plan.

  The disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance-related display SKC2”. For example, as the disappearance-related display (disappearing EF effect) corresponding to the 3C reception period, the post-reception effect (1C post-reception effect) corresponding to the 1C reception period is displayed when the expectation is low. The “first disappearance related display SKC1” may be used, or a mode that does not correspond to the first C acceptance period may be used as the disappearance related display.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, as shown in FIG. 310 (b) and FIG. 317 (f1) or (f2), the display relating to the disappearance related display (the integrated image display IG is difficult to visually recognize). When the timing tV2c arrives within the period in which the (form) is appearing, after reception by the first effect device (effect display device 1600) in response to the operation (operation) by the player being accepted during the 3C acceptance period. As the effect, "post-third-C reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)" is started to be executed. However, here, in the example where the production progresses from FIG. 316 (b) to “H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to (h1))” (when the post-reception production has relatively low expectation), FIG. 317 ( As shown in f1), the first mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 that is a "silent" conversation notice) is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. In the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (a) to “H2 (FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation as the post-reception production is relatively high), FIG. 317 (f2) As shown in, a second mode (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2 which is a conversation notice that refers to "chance" is displayed) is displayed as the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3 corresponding to the 3C reception period. It is supposed to be done.

  That is, in this case, while the "integrated image display IG" is not displayed but the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is being displayed, "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (" 3C The post-reception effect display UGC3-1 "or" third C post-reception effect display UGC3-2 ") is started to be executed.

  In this regard, the "display after the 3C reception effect UGC3 (" the display after the 3C reception display UGC3-1 "or" the display after the 3C reception display UGC3-2 ")," disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2) When "is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the displayed area (not necessarily displayed so as to overlap), it is displayed behind" disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2) " The "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is preferentially displayed. As described above, by making the subject to be watched by the player (third C reception post-display effect display UGC3) difficult to visually recognize, further concentration can be promoted.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the display related to "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is started in this way As shown in FIG. 310 (b) and FIGS. 317 (g1), (h1) or (g2), (h2), the “3C post-reception reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception reception effect display UGC3-1 Or, while the "3C post-reception reception effect display UGC3-2)" is displayed, the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is hidden, and thus it is considered that the visibility is good. Originally, the display related to the “post 3C reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)” is performed.

  In this respect, the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1" means a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the operation (operation) by the player being accepted (here, the 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1). Alternatively, it is displayed by any of the post-reception reception effect display UGC3-2). Therefore, the “post-third-C reception effect display UGC3” is executed for a relatively long time even after the “integrated image display IG” and the “disappearance related display” are hidden.

  In this example of the effect, the display of the "post-third-C reception effect display UGC3" is started at a time (timing tV2c) later than the time (timing tV2b) at which the "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display SKC2)" is started to be displayed. However, the display may be started at the same timing (timing tV2b) as the timing (timing tV2b) at which the display of the "disappearance-related display (second disappearance-related display SKC2)" is started.

  In this example, when an operation by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period, as shown in FIGS. 310 (b) and 310 (c), based on the fact that the operation is accepted, The execution after the 3C post-reception effect using the second effect device (3C post-acceptance specific effect) is started prior to the 3B post-acceptance effect (the 3B acceptance post-effect display) using the first effect device. I am trying.

  According to such a configuration, even if the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) performs the disappearance-related display and then the effect display after the 3C reception is performed, the effect after the 3C acceptance is performed. As for itself, the execution can be started without delay from the same timing tV2a.

  Such a second effect device may be provided as a sub liquid crystal when the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is used as the main liquid crystal, an effect movable body capable of effect operation, and an effect. It may be provided as a production lamp that can emit light. In any case, the effect (display effect, movable effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be provided in a plurality of modes with different expectations. The degree of expectation (the rate at which the big hit symbol appears) may include "0%" or "100%".

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, it is assumed that the sub liquid crystal 1610 is used as the second effect device. 317 (d1) in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (b) to “H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to (h1))” (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). As shown in, the mode in which “Sueyoshi” is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the above-mentioned 3C post-reception specific rendering UTC3 (third reception specific rendering) corresponding to the 3C reception period. As a 3D post-reception specific effect UTC 3-1), which is a mode with a low expectation of UTC3, is executed prior to the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1) using the first effect device. It is set to start. On the other hand, in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (a) to “H2 (FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), FIG. 317 ( As shown in d2), the mode in which "Kichi" is displayed on the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is the above-mentioned 3C reception specific rendering UTC3 (after 3C reception) corresponding to the 3C reception period. As a specific effect after 3C reception specific effect UTC3-2), which is a mode with high expectation of the specific effect UTC3, precedes the 3C post-reception effect using the first effect device (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2). It will start to run.

  Note that, in the example of the effect shown in FIG. 317, when it is in the “first period (first state)” of the 3C reception period (FIG. 317 (b)), the “second period” of the 3C reception period is set. In both the period (second state) "and (FIG. 317 (c)), the reception period that suggests that the sub-liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device) is in the state in which the third C reception period has occurred. Internal production is designed to be executed. Regarding the effect within the acceptance period in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device), the mode in which the “integrated image display IG” in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) has a low degree of expectation (see FIG. 316 (b)). ) Is displayed in the same manner as in the case where it is displayed in a high expectation mode (see FIG. 316 (d)).

  That is, in this case, in the 3C reception period in which the operation opportunity (operation opportunity) is given to the player, a different mode appears in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) depending on the degree of expectation, and In the liquid crystal 1610 (second rendering device), the same aspect appears regardless of the degree of expectation. However, after this, when the "reception valid determination that the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made during the 3C reception period, the "integrated image" is displayed on the production display device 1600 (first production device). The "display IG" is hidden (although the degree of expectation as a post-reception effect has not been suggested yet), a different mode appears in the sub liquid crystal 1610 (second effect device) depending on the degree of expectation. According to such a configuration, it is possible to obtain the effect information more quickly by paying attention to an appropriate effect device depending on the time than when paying attention to the effect by only one effect device. As a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in this example of performance, the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether "3D post-reception specific production UTC3-1" or "3C post-reception specific production UTC3-2" appears as the third production post-reception specific production UTC3. However, it is not always necessary to prepare a plurality of modes for the specific effect UTC3 after the reception of the third C. For example, it is assumed that only the "3D post-acceptance specific effect UTCB-2" is provided as the 3C-acceptance specific effect UTC3, and whether or not the "3C post-acceptance specific effect UTC3-2" appears The ratio) is obtained. That is, in this case, it is suggested that when "the specific effect UTBC-2 after reception of the third C" appears, the degree of expectation is higher than when "specific effect UTBC-2 after the reception of the third C" does not appear. Become.

  Further, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the third effect device (speaker) is further prepared, and when the third C reception period occurs, the timing tV1 shown in FIG. 310 (d). In the above, the acceptance permission sound is started to be output. The acceptance permission sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period is audible in such a manner that it extends over both the timing tV2 at which the 3C acceptance period occurs and the timing Y at which the "1st period" transitions to the "2nd period". It is output, and the operation (operation) by the player can be accepted while the acceptance permission sound is audibly output. However, the acceptance-permitted sound only needs to be audibly output in the form of crossing the timing Y, and the timing tV2 may not necessarily be audibly output in the form of crossing the timing tV2.

  Here, in the 3C reception period, a 3rd permissible sound that is different from both the 1st long permissible sound and the 1st short permissible sound is audibly output as the reception permissible sound. It becomes possible to suggest that the third C reception period, which has a plurality of performances, occurs (or is occurring) instead of the period. However, the acceptance allowable sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may be executed by using either the first long allowable sound or the first short allowable sound.

  Then, in the 3C reception period, if the operation is accepted by the player while the corresponding acceptance acceptable sound (here, the third acceptable sound) is audibly output, it means that the acceptance is made. On the basis of this, the acceptance permissible sound is not stopped halfway (the audible output state is halfway stopped), which also causes the third C reception period having a plurality of performances to be generated, instead of the first C reception period. You will be able to suggest (or what is happening). However, the permissible acceptance sound corresponding to the 3C acceptance period may be terminated on the basis of acceptance.

  In this regard, as shown in FIG. 310 (d), the acceptable reception sound (here, the third acceptable sound) corresponding to the 3C reception period is executed (audible output) in a mode with low expectation. It is desirable that there be a case (shown in FIG. 316 (b)) and a case (shown in FIG. 316 (d)) that is executed (audible output) in a mode with high expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 310 (d), the effect sound after reception of the third C is, as in the case of the effect display UGC3 after the reception of the third C, “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect)”. Will be executed for a relatively long time even after is hidden. As for the 3C post-reception effect sound, an example in which the effect progresses from FIG. 316 (a) to “H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to (h1))” (relatively low expectations as post-reception effect) 316) and the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (a) to “H2 (FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2))” (when the post-reception production has a relatively high expectation), which are different from each other. It is desirable to output an output sound (mode).

  In addition, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the 3C reception period, the third effect device can hear not only the 3C post-reception effect sound that indicates the degree of expectation but also the “reception sound” that does not indicate the degree of expectation. It is supposed to be output. That is, the "reception sound" is an example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (b) to "H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to (h1))" (when the expectation is relatively low as post-reception production). And audible output in the same manner in the example in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (b) to “H2 (FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2))” (when the expectation is relatively high as post-reception production). Is done. Then, such "acceptance sound" is accepted (acceptance validity determination) during an acceptance period different from the 3C acceptance period (for example, the 1C acceptance period, or a predetermined acceptance period different from the above-mentioned acceptance periods). If it is turned on, it will be output audibly (regardless of expectation). According to such a configuration, no matter how innovative the post-reception production is performed, when the "reception sound" is audibly output, the reception (reception validity determination) is properly performed. Since it becomes possible to appropriately recognize that there is a situation, it becomes possible to encourage the user to concentrate on the contents of the post-reception effect.

  On the other hand, the effect is changed from FIG. 311 or FIGS. 316 (b) and (c) to “H3 (FIG. 318 (d3) to (h3))” or “H4 (FIG. 318 (d4) to (h4)). An example of progress is in the above “second period (second state)” within such a 3C reception period (timing tV2A in the figure), “effective action of player (operation)” It is assumed that the “reception validity determination” is made. That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 311 (a), FIG. 318 (d3) to (h3), or FIG. 318 (d4) to (h4), the operation (operation) by the player is accepted at the timing tV2A. Based on (the reception validity determination is made), the 3C reception period is ended and the post-reception production (3C post-reception production) corresponding to the 3C reception period is started to be executed.

  In this regard, in the 3C reception period, when the reception (reception validity determination) is made within the “second period (second state)” within the 3C reception period (shown in FIG. 316 (c)). However, after the acceptance is made, basically, in the “first period (first state)” of the 3B acceptance period, after the acceptance is made, The effect is advanced in the same manner as when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made (when the acceptance is made in the state shown in FIG. 316 (b)). Therefore, also in the case of the example shown in FIG. 311 (a), a case where the production progresses in a manner with relatively low expectation as the post-reception production from FIG. 316 (c) (“H3 (FIG. 318 (d3)- (H3)) ”and a case where the production progresses in a mode with a relatively high expectation as the post-reception production from FIG. 316 (c) (“ H4 (FIG. 318 (d4)- (H4)) ”), and in the first effect device, the second effect device, and the third effect device, basically with reference to FIG. 310 and the like. The production will be executed with the contents as described.

  However, as described above, the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment is the above-mentioned "dramaticity according to the 1C reception period (production in which a scale image display and a gauge image are displayed at the time when the production after reception is started to be executed. As a special effect that has both of the above-mentioned "effect" and the effect of the above-mentioned "second C acceptance period" (effect in which no scale image display or gauge image is displayed at the time when the effect after acceptance is started). It is realized, and when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made within the “second period (second state)” within the third C acceptance period (shown in FIG. 316 (c)). When the acceptance is made in a state where the reception is performed), the rendition characteristic according to the above-mentioned “first C reception period” (representation characteristic in which a mood image display and a gauge image are displayed at the time when the rendition reception reception is started to be executed) It has become a thing that appears.

  Therefore, it is clear that "FIGS. 318 (d3) to (h3) or (d4) to (h4)" are compared with "FIGS. 317 (d1) to (h1) or (d2) to (h2)". As described above, when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made in the “second period (second state)” within the third C acceptance period (in the state shown in FIG. 316 (c), the acceptance is accepted). If done), the integrated image display IG is not hidden at the time when the effect after the reception of the third C is started, and the display state is continued.

  It should be noted that such an integrated full-scale image display IG is executed at the time point when the “post-third-C reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)” is started (see FIG. 311, FIG. 318 (f3) or (f4)). Is not hidden and the display state is continued. The integrated image display IG is not displayed preferentially for the "second disappearance related display SKC2" but is displayed behind it, but for the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (conversation notice)". The priority display is provided so that it is easy to recognize in which mode the display is performed during the reception period.

  Then, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, after the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made within the “second period (second state)” of the 3C acceptance period, the “after 3C acceptance” is performed in this way. When the display related to the effect display UGC3 (the effect display UGC3-1 after the 3C reception or the effect display UGC3-2 after the 3C reception) is started, FIG. 311 (b), FIG. 318 (g3) or (g4). As shown in, while the "3C post-reception effect display UGC3 (3C post-reception effect display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception effect display UGC3-2)" is displayed, first, "integration The "integrated image display IG" of the "image display IG" and the "disappearance related display" is hidden. Then, after the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 311 (b) and FIG. 318 (h3) or (h4), "disappearance related display (second disappearance related display "Display SKC2" is not displayed, and under the condition that the visual confirmation is good by this, "3C post-reception reception performance display UGC3 (3C post-reception performance display UGC3-1 or 3C post-reception performance display UGC3- 2) ”will be displayed.

  Other performance aspects in the case of acceptance in the second period (second state) within the 3C acceptance period (for example, specific performance after reception, disappearance-related display, post-reception display performance, permissible sound, post-reception performance, The reception sound and the like) are as described with reference to FIG. 317 (or the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 301), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example productions (FIGS. 316 to 318) corresponding to the third C reception period, even if the “3D post-reception production display UGC3” is executed and the reception is performed within the third C reception period, the “second The background image is not switched before and after the "3C reception effect display UGC3" is started. According to such a configuration, the integrated image display IG is displayed depending on whether the acceptance is made in the first C acceptance period or the second period within the third C acceptance period. It is common in that the post-reception production is started to be executed during the reception, but by confirming whether or not the background image changes in response to the reception, the above-mentioned 1C reception period and the 3C reception period It will be possible to recognize which of the two is occurring. On the other hand, when the acceptance is made in the second C acceptance period and when the acceptance is made in the first period of the third C acceptance period, the reception is performed while the integrated image display IG is not displayed. It is common in that the post-production is started to be executed, but by confirming whether or not the "disappearance related display" is executed in response to the acceptance, it is possible to perform the second C reception period and the third C reception period. It will be possible to recognize which of the two is occurring.

  Further, in the 3C reception period, from the time when the “display after 3C reception display” is received (determination of reception validity) like “3D after reception reception specific effect” or “3C reception reception sound”. Since it is executed only for a predetermined time (fixed time), the form as the post-reception effect is the same regardless of the timing at which the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made.

  It should be noted that the "display effect after reception of the 3C", "specific effect after reception of the 3C", and "effect sound after reception of the 3C" may be executed for a fixed time set in each, and are mutually different. It does not have to be completed at the same time.

  On the other hand, examples shown in FIG. 312 and examples in which the production progresses from FIG. 316 (c) to “H4 (FIG. 318 (d5) to (g5))” are operations by the player within the 3C reception period. It is assumed that the (operation) is not performed and the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is not made.

  That is, in this case, as shown in FIG. 312, the timing tV3 comes after the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted after the third C acceptance period occurs. In this regard, in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the timing tV3 (the time point when the acceptance of the operation (operation) by the player is no longer permitted after the 3C acceptance period ends), the timing tV2A, etc. As in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) at the time (at the time when the player accepts an operation (operation) in the second period within the third C acceptance period), it is shown in FIG. 318 (d5). As described above, the integrated image display IG is not hidden, and the integrated image display IG is not made difficult to be visually recognized.

  According to such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) by the player is not received in time and the third C reception period ends, after the end, the third C reception period is integrated. Since it becomes possible to recognize in what mode the mock image display IG was displayed, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  Then, after this, even when the player's operation (operation) is not accepted, as shown in FIG. 318 (e5), the disappearance related display is displayed as "a mode in which the integrated image display IG becomes difficult to visually recognize". (Disappearing EF effect) is started.

  That is, in the first effect device (effect display device 1600) according to this example, while "integrated image display IG (image image display, gauge image display)" is being displayed, "disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect" ) ”Is displayed, and at least a part of the area where the“ disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) ”is displayed is“ integrated image display IG (image display, gauge image display) ”. It overlaps with the displayed area.

  With such a configuration, even if the integrated image display IG continues to be displayed after the third C reception period ends without receiving the image, the integrated image display IG is visually recognized. By making it difficult to do so, it becomes possible to indicate that the third C reception period has ended. In addition, even in the situation where the 3C reception period has already ended, it is possible to continue to display the integrated image display IG for a relatively long time, although it is difficult to visually recognize it. In this way, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the enjoyment of the game due to the fact that it is not possible to recognize in which mode the integrated image display IG was displayed during the reception period.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this example, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the third C acceptance period, "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). I am going to let you.

  The “third extinction related display SKC3” is preferably not displayed in association with the first C acceptance period. That is, in this case, even when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "stability during the 1C acceptance period (at the time of acceptance ( Alternatively, the performance of displaying a mood image or a gauge image at the time when the performance is started after the reception) and the performance of the above-described "second C reception period" (at the time of reception (or reception) It becomes possible to suggest that both the display of the mood image and the performance of not displaying the gauge image at the time when the post-production is started) are combined.

  Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the third C reception period. That is, in this case, it is possible to more suitably suggest that the third C acceptance period has ended without acceptance.

  After this, as shown in FIG. 318 (f5), first of all, “integrated image display IG” and “disappearance related display (in the figure, third disappearance related display SKC3)”, “integrated Hide the "image display IG". After the "integrated image display IG" is hidden in this way, as shown in FIG. 318 (g5), the "disappearance related display (in the figure, the third disappearance related display SKB3))" is not displayed. Will be displayed.

  By the way, in the 3C reception period according to this example, the integrated image display IG (image display, frame image, gauge image) is not in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (a) (FIG. 316 (b), As described above, there are cases where the image is displayed in the mode shown in FIG. 232 (c) (see FIGS. 316 (d) and 316 (e)). When such a situation shown in FIGS. 316 (d) and (e) appears, a case where the situation shown in FIGS. 316 (b) and (c) described above appears and when the "integrated image display IG ( "Displaying the image, frame image, gauge image)", the production is advanced in the same manner except for that.

  For example, when the production progresses from FIG. 316 (d) to “H1 ′”, the content and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 316 (b) to “H1 (FIG. 317 (d1) to (h1))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. Further, when the production progresses from FIG. 316 (d) to “H2 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 316 (b) to “H2 (FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 316 (e) to “H3 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 316 (c) to “H3 (FIG. 318 (d3) to (h3))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 316 (e) to “H4 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 316 (c) to “H4 (FIG. 317 (d4) to (h4))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only. In addition, when the production progresses from FIG. 316 (e) to “H5 ′”, the contents and basics of the production progressing from FIG. 316 (c) to “H5 (FIG. 318 (d5) to (g5))” Are the same, and the aspect of the "integrated image display IG" in the effect display device 1600 (first effect device) is changed from "integrated image display IGa" to "integrated image display IGc". Only.

  In addition, in the 3C reception period according to the example of the effect, the 3C post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect display UGC, 3C post-reception specific effect UTC, 3C post-reception effect sound) is described above for convenience of description. It is decided to execute the same effect contents (type) as the effect after the 3B acceptance corresponding to the 3B acceptance period. However, it is desirable that the post-reception effects (post-reception effects display, post-reception specific effects, post-reception effects sound) have different effect contents (types) during the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

  Further, in the third C reception period according to this example of presentation, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the disappearance-related display SKB is executed as the same (type) as the disappearance-related display SKB corresponding to the above-described third B reception period. However, the disappearance-related display does not have to be the same in the 3B reception period and the 3C reception period.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 according to the present application in which such a 1B reception period to a 3B reception period are prepared, the following advantageous effects can be obtained.

  First, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the content of the production that progresses when it is received (cut-in notice as a post-reception production, group notice, conversation notice, etc., notice production (expectation suggestion production) A plurality of reception periods (first C reception period to third C reception period) having different types are prepared, and it is possible to generate a reception period (effective period) of a type according to the result of the determination (production determination). Has become.

  In this respect, during the 1C reception period to the 3C reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, the post-reception effect display (after the 1C acceptance effect display to the 3C acceptance operation) is performed based on the acceptance. (Effect display) can be displayed on the "effect display device 1600". Of these, in the first C reception period and the third C reception period, when the operation by the player is accepted, not only the post-reception effect display is displayed based on the acceptance, but also the "disappearance related display ( "Disappearing EF effect)" is made to appear further. In other words, in this case, it is possible to confirm which mode has appeared as the scale image display (or gauge image) even after the acceptance is made, as well as the scale image display (or gauge image). By making it so that the visibility is reduced by "a mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to be visually recognized (disappearance related display)" until is hidden, It is expected that the player's gaze target will be naturally moved from "display of a picture (or gauge image)" to "display after reception". The "disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect)" can be commonly used for a plurality of reception periods having different effect contents that are advanced when received (Fig. 314 (Fig. 314 ( e2) and FIG. 317 (e2)).

  However, since the actual image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are originally displayed during the reception period when the acceptance has not been made yet, the relevant image display after the acceptance is made. If the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) is displayed, it becomes difficult to recognize whether the post-reception effect display corresponding to the acceptance is already displayed, and there is a concern that the entertainment level of the game may deteriorate. is there. In this respect, when the acceptance is made in any of the first C acceptance period and the third C acceptance period (second period), the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed as "middle image display and remaining time. While the display (frame image, gauge image) makes it difficult to see (display related to disappearance) ”, it is hidden (invisible), while the post-reception presentation display is The time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to visually recognize (display related to disappearance) ”is displayed. In other words, in this case, after the player has accepted the operation, the "reception image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) becomes difficult to see (disappearance related display)" appears. A transition relating to the display effect from the previous display (display of the image or the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) to the display after the reception (display after the reception) will be realized.

  It should be noted that both the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" and "post-reception effect display" are displayed based on acceptance. Common in points. However, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is shown in, for example, FIG. 314 (e1) or FIG. 318 (e3). Like this, it appears to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) when the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are being displayed. Is done. On the other hand, the “post-reception effect display” means, for example, as shown in FIG. 314 (f1), FIG. 318 (f3), etc., a moving image display and a remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. Even if it is displayed in the situation where it is being displayed, it appears so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image).

  In this respect, in the above-mentioned example, when the reception is made in the first period of the 3C reception period, the disappearance related display and the post-reception effect display are displayed as shown in FIG. 317 (e1). Since the display is started while the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) has already been hidden, the player concentrates on “what mode will appear as the post-reception effect display”. Will be able to. In addition, the adjustment image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed through adjustment of whether the operation is accepted in the first period or the second period within the 3C acceptance period. Perform the post-reception effect display while the state continues, or execute the post-reception effect display after turning off the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It will be possible to select whether to start the game or to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Regarding the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to see (display related to disappearance)", the "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are made difficult to see" As a method of "appearing like", the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in at least a part of the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. In addition to the method that is realized by preferentially displaying an image display that is different from that (displayed in the front layer), the image display and the remaining image display that are different from the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is possible to employ a method or the like that is realized by displaying an image (moving image) that is made so that a part of the time display (frame image, gauge image) is missing (invisible). In addition, it is not a separate image display from the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), but a numerical value (transmissivity) concerning the display characteristics of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself. It is also possible to adopt a method of changing (for example). On the other hand, as for the method of "appearing so as not to make it difficult to visually recognize the residual image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" with respect to "display after reception," , The gauge image) is displayed in at least a part of the area where the gauge image) is displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are preferentially displayed. Displaying after reception "is displayed (displayed in the rear layer), and the image display is displayed at least while the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. It is possible to adopt a method or the like realized by displaying the "post-reception effect display" only in the area excluding the area to be displayed.

  Also, as a mode (display related to disappearance) in which it is difficult to visually recognize the remaining image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), the area where the remaining image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed A method of displaying an image display different from the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) on at least a part of the display, and the display of the image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) itself Both the method of changing the numerical value (such as the transmittance) related to the characteristics may be adopted.

  In addition, "a mode in which it is difficult to visually recognize the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance related display)" means that the "reception reception effect display" is displayed before the "reception reception display". The post-effect display "appears in a situation where it has not been displayed yet. That is, in this case, in a situation where the "display after reception" is not yet displayed, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are the same as the "image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)". ) Becomes difficult to see due to the "mode in which it is difficult to see (display related to disappearance)", so that it is possible to visually check the remaining image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image), "Is ready to appear, so that the player's point of gaze can be changed from" the difficult-to-see image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) "to prepare for the mind. Will be able to prompt you.

  In addition, when it is received during the first C reception period and the third C reception period (second period), etc., "a mode in which it becomes difficult to visually recognize the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) (disappearance related display)" Can be displayed even after the “post-reception effect display” is displayed, and is hidden while the “post-reception effect display” is displayed. As a result, during the period in which the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, the "mode in which the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize (disappearance related display)" is hidden. In the subsequent period, since it is possible to provide the performance related to the "post-reception performance display" in a wider range, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by changing the performance during such a display period. Will be able to.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, as shown in FIGS. 314 and 318, “the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are difficult to visually recognize. "Aspect (disappearance related display)" is not limited to the area where the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed, but the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) It is also displayed in the area that is not displayed. Then, in the area, at least a part of the "post-reception effect display" is displayed, but it is difficult to visually recognize "the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" (Disappearance related display) ”is displayed (for example, displayed on the rear layer) so that at least a part of the“ post-reception effect display ”is difficult to visually recognize.

  According to such a configuration, the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) makes it difficult to visually recognize not only the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) but also the “post-reception effect display”. Since it will be appeared, the performance until the display of the mood image and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are hidden, and the production when the display of "post-reception production display" is started It is expected to improve both sex and sex.

  In addition, as described above, in each of the above-described production examples regarding the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the "post-reception production display" before the "post-reception production display" is displayed after the reception is made. Under the situation where it is not displayed, apart from the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect), it is not difficult to visually recognize the moving image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). After the reception, the presentation) is available. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the post-reception productions prior to this without interfering with the production performance of the first production device.

  Further, in each of the above-described production examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the post-reception specific production (post-reception production using the second production device) is more likely than the disappearance related display (disappearing EF production) to appear. Also, the previous disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect) is made to appear in a situation where it has not yet appeared. In addition, the post-reception specific effect (post-reception effect using the second effect device) is continued until the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) is finished.

  According to such a configuration, a person who dislikes the complicated performance of the first performance device can enjoy the post-reception performance by the second performance device having a more simplified performance. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game for various types of players.

  Further, also in each of the above-described effect examples related to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the dynamic image display is performed by the dynamic display as described above with reference to FIGS. 233 and 234. . In this case, the dynamic image display is not ended (until it is hidden) even after the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) appears after the acceptance. It is desirable to do so.

  In addition, in each of the above-described production examples relating to the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF production) is not only a mock image display but also a gauge that indicates the remaining time until the reception period ends. We also decided to make it difficult to see the image. As a result, even when the gauge image is displayed after the acceptance, it is possible to suppress the appearance of the remaining time.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 3C acceptance period of the plurality of acceptance periods, the “first 3C reception effect display UGC3 "can be displayed, but in addition to the 3C reception effect display UGC3, the aspect (second disappearance) corresponding to the 1C reception period as a disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). The related display SKC2) can appear.

  According to such a configuration, when the second disappearance related display SKC2 appears, it is unclear which of the 1C and 3C post-acceptance effect display appears, but when the first disappearance related display SKC1 appears, It becomes possible to estimate that the presentation display UGC1 will appear after the first C reception.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) is displayed (priority display) in an area including at least a part of the area in which the simulated image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. ). However, the production using the production device (movable body, etc.) on the front side of the display screen should be performed at a position that overlaps at least a part of the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) in front view. It is also possible to realize.

  Even when the same mode (second disappearance related display SKC2) appears as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect), if the type of the acceptance period is different, the big hit symbol is stopped by the symbol variation. It is desirable to have different ratios (expectations).

  Further, in the above-described example of effect, it is possible to execute post-reception effect (post-accept specific effect) using the second effect device, and execution of post-reception effect (post-accept specific effect) using the second effect device. During the period, in the first rendering device, the relative image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see, and the relative image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are relatively easy to see. It is difficult to see it.

  That is, in this case, even after the execution of the post-reception effect (the post-reception specific effect) using the second effect device is started based on the acceptance, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) ), It is possible to confirm which mode has appeared. Further, during the execution period of the post-reception effect (specific effect after the reception) using the second effect device, it becomes relatively difficult to visually recognize the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image). By doing so, it is expected to encourage the player to move the gaze target naturally from the “first effect device” to the “second effect device”.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the post-reception production using the second production device (the post-reception specific production) is a continuous image display (displayed in an easily visible state) before the reception and a remaining time. The execution is started so as not to affect the visibility of the display (frame image, gauge image). More specifically, the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed in a predetermined area in the display screen (effect display device 1600), but the second effect device is used. The post-acceptance effect (post-acceptance specific effect) is not an image display that is displayed using at least a part of the predetermined area, and is not an effect that is executed at a position overlapping at least a part of the predetermined area in front view. It is a thing.

  Further, in the above-described example of the effect, the post-reception effect display is started to be displayed after the appearance timing of the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect), but is displayed at the appearance timing of the disappearance related display (disappearing EF effect). You may make it start.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) uses at least a part of the "region in which the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed". We decided to realize it as an image display. However, in this case, regarding the image display, it is desirable to display such that the area displayed in the “region where the image display is displayed” tends to be gradually enlarged with the passage of time.

  Further, as described above, the “middle image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” according to this embodiment are a plurality of different expectations (integrated muffled image) as an integrated mood image display IG. Any of the displays IGa to IGd) can be displayed. Then, according to each of the above-described production examples, even after the acceptance, the display mode including the display position and the size, the dynamic depiction, etc. is maintained and may be continued, so that the acceptance is accepted. Even after this is done, it is possible to recognize in what mode the mood image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) were displayed during the reception period.

  As described above, the “image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” may be displayed separately, or the “image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, frame image, Only one of the "gauge image)" may be displayed.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the case where the “middle image display” and the “remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)” are in a non-display state may be a state in which the player cannot visually recognize, For example, it may be displayed on a layer, but by prioritizing the display of other images, the "image display" and "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" may be invisible. Is the meaning. However, if at least a part of the "image display" or "remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)" is visible from the player side, this is the "image display" or "remaining time display". (Frame image, gauge image) "is the only way to make it visible, so the" image display "and" remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) "are not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the display is being continued.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the post-reception specific effect may be realized not by the second effect device but by the first effect device (in the display screen of the effect display device 1600).

  In addition, in the first C reception period, the second C reception period, and the third C reception period, the target of the action (operation) by the player does not necessarily have to be the same, and different actions may be required. However, when different motions are required, the motion target display (black image display) and the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) are also displayed as different displays.

  By the way, when it is desired to perform the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) in the first period (first state) of the 3C acceptance period, the acceptance validity determination is made to the player before the timing Y arrives. Will be required. However, assuming that the 3C reception period is set as a “valid period that continues for 3 seconds”, the first period (first state) can only have a time of about 1 second. Becomes That is, in this case, it is assumed that the player operates (operates) slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period due to the impatience of having to operate (operate) within such a short time. It In this case, even if an attempt is made to redo the operation, if the timing Y has already arrived at that time, there is a concern that the enjoyment of the game may deteriorate due to the inability to play the game as desired.

  Therefore, in the 3C reception period, the operation (operation) by the player is performed before the timing tV2 when the state (3C reception period) in which the “reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid operation” is allowed occurs. Even if there is, the operation (operation) is not considered as “acceptance validity determination” at that time, but when the 3C reception period starts (or after that), the 3C reception It is desirable to enable the "reception validity determination" (based on) the operation (operation) performed by the player performed before the period.

  However, in this case, the detection itself as to whether or not the operation (operation) by the player has occurred during the third C reception period during which the “acceptance validity determination in which the operation by the player is a valid operation” is permitted. It will be required to be executed regardless of whether or not.

  For example, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 304, this is detected even when the player performs an operation (operation) slightly before the timing tV2. However, at the time when the operation (operation) by the player is detected in this way, since the third C reception period has not yet occurred, based on the detection, "the operation by the player is an effective operation is received. The “validity judgment” is not made. However, the presence of this detection information is left as a memory (history), and after the occurrence of the third C reception period, the detection information left as the above memory (history) within the third C acceptance period is added. Based on this, "the acceptance validity determination that the action by the player is the valid action" is performed. Then, the 3C post-reception effect is to be executed based on the "reception validity determination" thus obtained.

  With such a configuration, even if the operation (operation) is performed slightly before the occurrence of the third C reception period, it is possible to receive the operation within the third C reception period. As a result, it is possible to execute the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) triggered by this. As a result, it is possible to reduce the difficulty level regarding the operation acceptance even when the above-described performance (first period) is realized.

  However, in the case where the operation (operation) is performed significantly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period (a predetermined time or more), it is possible to prevent the 3C reception post-effect from being executed with this as an opportunity. desirable. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by setting a time value stored as detection information.

  Note that the configuration when operated (operated) slightly before the occurrence of the 3C reception period may or may not be similarly applied to the 1C reception period or the 2C reception period. You may do it.

  Further, at this time, regarding the operation (operation) performed before the occurrence of the third C reception period, the operation (operation) is performed after the above-described “second period (second state)” after the third C reception period occurs. It is desirable that the acceptance can be accepted as the validity determination (reception availability determination) in the above “first period (first state)” instead of “”. According to such a configuration, the acceptance validity determination is made at a timing when a little time has passed since the player performed the operation (operation), and the post-reception effect is started to be executed. This suggests that the operation by the player is properly accepted, not the so-called "automatic acceptance function" when there is no operation (operation) despite the acceptance period occurring. It becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are accepted as acceptance periods during which the player is allowed to accept an operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity). We have a reception period. Then, in the case where the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) At the start of execution, a motion image display (here, a model image display imitating a target of a motion (operation) by a player and having a plurality of different expectations) (FIGS. 232 (a) to (232)). (See d))) may be displayed instead of being hidden (see FIG. 318), and the “acceptance validity determination that an operation (operation) by the player is an effective operation is performed during the 2C reception period. Is performed, the operation target display (here, the operation by the player (here, the operation by the player (the operation after the second C reception after the second C reception corresponding to the second C reception period) based on the reception validity determination) is started. Operation ), The image display (see FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)), which has a plurality of modes different from each other and having different expectations, is not hidden and may not be displayed ( Whichever timing the acceptance is made, the simulated image display is in a non-display state at the time when the post-reception effect is started to be executed) (see FIG. 315).

  According to such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the operation target display (here, a plurality of modes that imitate the operation target of the player and have different expectations) When the image display (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) having the above is visible, and the operation target display (here, the object of the operation by the player is simulated and the degree of expectation is shown). There is a case where the image display (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)) having a plurality of different modes is not visible, so that a feeling of tension after the start of the post-reception production is started. Will be expected to be maintained appropriately.

  Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIG. 310, FIG. 311) the “reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion” is made. The operation target display ((see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d))) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed. If the display is not performed (see FIG. 318) and the operation target display ((see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d))) is not displayed (FIG. 317). See) and.

  That is, from the player's side, the display of the mock image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316 (d))” among the multiple modes (see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d)). When this is done, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by continuing to display the post-reception effect (the 1C post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" even after the execution is started. It can be said that it is certainly preferable for the purpose. However, when the mood image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception valid determination” (during the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the execution of the corresponding post-reception production (3C) is started, it is inevitable that the game will be less interesting.

  For example, in the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period), the simulated image display is “the first mode with low expectation (FIG. 316 (b)) during the effective period (3C reception period). ) ”And“ a second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (d)) ”, there is a possibility of execution in a mode with high expectations (further, There is a possibility that it will be executed in a less frequent manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, it is possible to sufficiently improve the enjoyment of the game with this alone. At this time, if there is a case where the mood image display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, it is clear that the interest of the game is deteriorated. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the image display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the “high-expectation second mode (FIG. 316 (d)) ”, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being executed in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the image display.

  Alternatively, even when the image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, some post-reception effects are “moderate with low expectation” among the players. As an "excuse" when it is executed in, it is desired that the display state is not hidden and the display state is continued at the time when the post-reception effect is started to be executed. It seems that there are some who think, and even when the simulated image display is displayed in the “highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316 (d))”, some players have a post-reception effect. In order to suppress "frustration" when it is executed in "a mode with low expectations", at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed, the image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen. It seems that some people want to get up.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player uses the timing (see FIG. 310 and FIG. 311) at which the “reception validity determination” is made within the 3C reception period. Whether the post-reception effect is started to be executed while the image display is displayed (see FIG. 318), or the post-reception effect is started to be executed in a state where the image display is hidden and cannot be visually recognized (see FIG. 317). Since it becomes possible to substantially select (see), it is expected that amusement of the game will be maintained appropriately.

  Further, in the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316 (b), and FIG. 316 (d)). Is not displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 315, integrated reception image display IGb), and the "reception validity determination" is made at any timing. Also, the operation target display is not displayed and is always hidden at the time when the post-reception effect (second C post-reception effect) based on the acceptance validity determination is started. That is, in this case, it is possible to indicate which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the player has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception production is executed based on the fact that the automatic reception function is activated in the 3C reception period, the operation target display (the scale image) is performed at the time when the 3C post-reception production is executed. It is desirable to make sure that (Display) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the player is not aware of it and the execution after the 3C reception is started by the automatic reception function, the operation target display (the scale image display) is performed in any mode within the 3C reception period. You can easily recognize what was displayed.

  Further, when the "third C reception period" is the target of the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, depending on the effect mode and the like. However, at any timing when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception production is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, It is desirable to ensure that the operation target display (simulated image display) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C reception is executed.

  However, in the 2C reception period, when the player does not perform the operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (the 2C post-reception effect) that is the same as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable not to do so (the above-mentioned automatic reception function is not targeted for activation).

  Further, during the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the display after the 3C reception is started to be executed while the operation target display (movement image display) is continuously displayed (see FIG. 318), the operation is performed. Regardless of whether the production after the 3C reception is started while the target display (the image display) is hidden (see FIG. 317), the production after the 3C reception (3C) Post-acceptance specific effect UTC3, 3C post-acceptance effect display UGC3, 3C post-acceptance effect sound, etc.) It is configured to have the same aspect itself. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the production mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception production and play the game.

  Further, during the 3C reception period according to this embodiment, when the display after the 3C reception is started to be executed while the operation target display (movement image display) is continuously displayed (see FIG. 318), the operation is performed. The same mode as the disappearance-related display (second display) regardless of whether the production after the 3C reception is started to be executed while the target display (black image display) is hidden (see FIG. 317) The disappearance related display SKC2) is displayed. With this, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is properly performed during the third C reception period regardless of which mode the production is advanced.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, the 1C reception period is further prepared in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period. In the 1C reception period, the reception validity determination that the motion by the player is the valid motion is Even when it is performed at the timing of, the operation target display is not hidden at the time when the post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination is started to be executed and the display is always continued. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

  Further, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display can be displayed in the third C reception period (the integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316 (b), and FIG. 316 (d)). (In the example shown in FIG. 313 (c), the integrated image display IGc) can be displayed in a different mode. That is, in this case, it is possible to indicate which of the first C reception period and the third C reception period has occurred since the reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  On the other hand, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the operation target display is also displayed in a mode that can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316 (b)). It can be done. That is, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first C reception period and the third C reception period is occurring. The feeling of tension within the period is maintained appropriately.

  During the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 316 (d) is not displayed as the operation target display, and the integrated image display IGa ((a) shown in FIG. 316 (b) is not displayed. One aspect) may be always displayed.

  Further, prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, a specific predictive effect display indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the player may be displayed. However, in this case, when the operation target display (simulated image display) is not hidden at the time when the effect after the 3C reception is started and the display is continued, the effect after the 3C reception is started. It is desirable that there be a case where the specific precursor effect display is displayed at a certain time point and a case where the specific predictive effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, if the operation target display (simulated image display) is in the non-display state at the time when the effect after the reception of the third C is started, a specific warning is given at the time when the effect after the acceptance of the third C is started to be executed. It is desirable that the performance display is always displayed.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including a second C reception period and a third C reception period are accepted as acceptance periods during which the player is allowed to accept an operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity). We have a reception period. Then, in the case where the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the above-mentioned post-reception effect based on the reception validity determination (the 1C post-reception effect corresponding to the 1C reception period) ) Is displayed at the start of execution, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced according to the passage of time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is an aspect. , A plurality of modes with different expectations are prepared) and may be in a displayed state without being hidden (see FIG. 318). In the second C reception period, “the operation (operation) by the player” is performed. If the acceptance validity determination that "is a valid operation" is made, at the time when the above-mentioned post-reception effect (second C post-reception effect corresponding to the second C acceptance period) based on the acceptance validity determination is started to be executed. The remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is reduced according to the passage of time, and at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is a plurality of modes with different expectations. Are not hidden and may not be displayed (regardless of the timing of acceptance, the frame image and gauge image are not Display state) (see FIG. 315). In addition, the remaining time display according to the above-described embodiment is displayed as the integrated image display IG, and as its mode, the plurality of modes (the area where the gauge image is displayed) shown in FIGS. A plurality of aspects) are prepared as the frame image forming the.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the remaining time is displayed (for example, the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image is decreased with time. And a plurality of modes having different expectations are prepared as at least one mode of the frame image and the gauge image (see FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d)) are visible. In some cases, and in some cases, the remaining time display is not visible. Therefore, it is expected that the feeling of tension after the execution of the post-reception presentation is appropriately maintained.

  Moreover, in the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment, the reception is determined depending on at which timing (see FIG. 310, FIG. 311) the “reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion” is made. The remaining time display ((see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d))) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the validity determination is started to be executed. The display is not performed (see FIG. 318) and the remaining time display ((see FIGS. 232 (a) to (d))) is not displayed (FIG. 317). See) and.

  That is, from the player's side, the remaining time display is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316 (d))” out of a plurality of modes (see FIG. 232 (a) to (d)). When it is performed, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game by continuing to display the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" even after the execution is started. It can be said that it is certainly preferable for the purpose. However, when the remaining time display is displayed in the "first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))" among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the "reception validity determination" (during the 3C reception period) If this may continue to be displayed even after the corresponding 3C post-reception production) is started to be executed, a decrease in the entertainment appeal cannot be avoided.

  For example, in the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period), the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is “first with low expectation during the effective period (3C reception period)”. Even if it is displayed in any one of the mode (see FIG. 316 (b)) and the second mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (d)), it is executed in the mode with high expectation. There is a possibility (and even a possibility of being executed in a low-expectation manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to sufficiently improve the enjoyment of the game with this alone. At this time, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) continues to be displayed in the "first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))", the interest of the game is adversely reduced. It is clear that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image). On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the “high-expectation second mode (FIG. 316 (d)) ”, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) may continue to be displayed. Since it can be suppressed appropriately, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) without hiding it.

  Alternatively, even when the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, some players have a post-reception effect. As an “excuse” when it is executed in a “low-expectation mode”, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed. It seems that some people want to keep the display state, and the remaining time display (gauge image, frame) is displayed in the "second mode with high expectations (see FIG. 316 (d))". Even if (image) is displayed, some post-reception productions are executed by some players in order to suppress "frustration" when the post-reception productions are executed in a "low expectations" mode. Remaining time display (gauge Image, frame image) appears to have a person who wants leave not visible are hidden.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, when the 3C reception period occurs, the player remains through the timing (see FIGS. 310 and 311) during which the “reception validity determination” is made within the 3C reception period. The post-reception effect is started to be executed while the time display (gauge image, frame image) is displayed (see FIG. 318), or the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden and cannot be viewed. Since it becomes possible to substantially select whether to start execution of the post-reception production in the state (see FIG. 317), it is expected that the amusement of the game will be favorably maintained.

  In the second C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316 (b)). , And integrated integrated image display IGc shown in FIG. 316 (d) (in the example shown in FIG. 315, integrated integrated image display IGb), and at any timing. Even if the “reception validity determination” is made, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not displayed at the time when the post-reception production (second C post-reception production) based on the reception validity determination is started. Be sure to keep it hidden. That is, in this case, it is possible to indicate which of the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period has occurred from the time when the reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the player has occurred. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the 3C reception period, even if the player does not perform an operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (3C post-reception effect) as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. (It may be a target for which the above-described automatic reception function is activated). However, in this case, when the 3C post-reception effect is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function in the 3C reception period, the remaining time display (gauge image is displayed at the time when the 3C post-reception effect is executed. , Frame image) is always displayed. That is, in this case, even if the player does not notice the effect after the 3C reception effect is started to be executed by the automatic reception function, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) will be any during the 3C reception period. It becomes possible to easily recognize whether or not it was displayed in the form.

  Further, when the "third C reception period" is the target of the above-mentioned automatic reception function, a plurality of different timings may be prepared as the timing at which the automatic reception function is activated, depending on the effect mode and the like. However, at any timing when the automatic reception function is activated, when the 3C post-reception production is executed based on the activation of the automatic reception function during the 3C reception period, It is desirable that the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is always displayed at the time when the effect after 3C reception is executed.

  However, in the 2C reception period, when the player does not perform the operation (operation), the same post-reception effect (the 2C post-reception effect) that is the same as when the operation (operation) is performed is executed. It is desirable not to do so (the above-mentioned automatic reception function is not targeted for activation).

  Further, in the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment, the case where the production after the 3C reception is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is continuously displayed (see FIG. 318) In the case where the production is started after the reception of the third C while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see FIG. 317), after the reception of the third C Effects (3C post-reception specific effect UTC3, 3C post-reception effect display UGC3, 3C post-reception effect sound, etc.) themselves are the same. Therefore, it becomes possible to select the production mode from the viewpoint of how the player wants to enjoy the 3C post-reception production and play the game.

  Further, in the 3C reception period according to the present embodiment, the case where the production after the 3C reception is started while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is continuously displayed (see FIG. 318) The same as the disappearance related display regardless of whether the production after the 3C reception is started to be executed while the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is hidden (see FIG. 317). The mode (second disappearance related display SKC2) is displayed. With this, it is possible to suitably suggest that the reception is properly performed during the third C reception period regardless of which mode the production is advanced.

  In the example of the above-mentioned production, the 1C reception period is further prepared in addition to the 2C reception period and the 3C reception period. In the 1C reception period, the reception validity determination that the motion by the player is the valid motion is Even if it is made at the timing of, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden at the time when the post-reception effect based on the acceptance validity judgment is started and is always displayed continuously. I try to be there. That is, in this case, since the 3C reception period has both the performance of the 1C reception period and the performance of the 2C reception period, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game. .

  In the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated image display IGa shown in FIG. 316 (b)). , And the integrated general image display IGc) shown in FIG. 316 (d) (in the example shown in FIG. 313 (c), the integrated general image display IGd) can be displayed. .. That is, in this case, it is possible to indicate which of the first C reception period and the third C reception period has occurred since the reception period in which the operation opportunity is given to the player. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  On the other hand, in the first C reception period according to this embodiment, the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) can be displayed in the third C reception period (integrated model shown in FIG. 316 (b)). It can also be displayed by the image display IGa). That is, in this case, when the integrated image display IGa is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize which of the first C reception period and the third C reception period is occurring. The feeling of tension within the period is maintained appropriately.

  Note that in the 3C reception period, as the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image), the integrated scale image display IGc shown in FIG. 316 (d) is not displayed, but is shown in FIG. 316 (b). The integrated image display IGa (one aspect) may be always displayed.

  Further, prior to the occurrence of the 3C reception period, a specific predictive effect display indicating that an operation opportunity is given to the player may be displayed. However, in this case, if the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is not hidden and is continuously displayed at the time when the effect after the 3C reception is started, the effect after the 3C acceptance is executed. It is desirable that there be a case where a specific precursor effect display is displayed at the time of starting and a case where the specific predictive effect display is not displayed. On the other hand, when the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) is in the non-display state at the time when the effect after the 3C reception is started, it is specified at the time when the effect after the 3C reception is started. It is desirable that the precursor effect display of is always displayed.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared as the reception period. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made (Fig. 317 (d1) to (h1) is a low-expectation mode, and FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2) is a high-expectation mode), the 3C post-reception effect can be executed, and the first C reception period When the "acceptance validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made in the above, a plurality of modes having different expectations (FIGS. 314 (d1) to ( The low-expectation mode shown in h1) and the high-expectation mode shown in FIGS. 314 (d2) to (h2)) make it possible to execute the first post-C reception effect.

  In this regard, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time of execution start, the operation target display (here, the image display that imitates the target of the operation by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and is in a non-display state. There are cases. On the other hand, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. , The operation target display (here, the image of the image that imitates the target of the operation by the player and has a plurality of modes with different expectations) is not displayed and should not be in the non-display state. There is. The general image display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated general image display IG, and the plural modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to (232) are prepared as the modes.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the case where the operation target display (display of the image of the image) is visible and the operation target display (display of the image of the image) ) Is not visible in some cases, and it is expected that the feeling of tension after the start of execution of the post-reception effect is appropriately maintained.

  Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, in the case where "the reception validity determination that the action by the player is the valid action is made" is made before the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (Fig. 310), and the operation target display (display of the image) is set to a non-display state at the time when the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the acceptance validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed, the operation target is determined when “the reception validity determination that the player's motion is a valid motion is made” after the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 311). The display after the reception of the third C is started to be executed while the display (display of the image) is being displayed.

  That is, from the player's side, when the mock image display is displayed in the “highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316 (d))” among the plurality of modes, after the reception based on the “reception valid determination” It can be said that it is certainly preferable to continue to display the production (after the 3C reception after the reception corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started in order to improve the enjoyment of the game. However, when the mood image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception valid determination” (during the 3C reception period) If this continues to be displayed even after the execution of the corresponding post-reception production (3C) is started, it is inevitable that the game will be less interesting.

  For example, in the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period), the simulated image display is “the first mode with low expectation (FIG. 316 (b)) during the effective period (3C reception period). ) ”And“ a second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (d)) ”, there is a possibility of execution in a mode with high expectations (further, There is a possibility that it will be executed in a less frequent manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a high-expectation mode, it is possible to sufficiently improve the enjoyment of the game with this alone. At this time, if there is a case where the mood image display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, it is clear that the interest of the game is deteriorated. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the image display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the “high-expectation second mode (FIG. 316 (d)) ”, it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being executed in a mode with low expectations. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue this without hiding the image display.

  Alternatively, even when the image display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, some post-reception effects are “moderate with low expectation” among the players. As an "excuse" when it is executed in, it is desired that the display state is not hidden and the display state is continued at the time when the post-reception effect is started to be executed. It seems that there are some who think, and even when the simulated image display is displayed in the “highly expected second mode (see FIG. 316 (d))”, some players have a post-reception effect. In order to suppress "frustration" when it is executed in "a mode with low expectations", at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed, the image display is hidden so that it cannot be seen. It seems that some people want to get up.

  In this regard, according to the above configuration, when one acceptance period (third C acceptance period) occurs, the player "validates the action by the player until the timing Y in the third C acceptance period arrives. It is possible to start the post-reception production in a state in which the image display is not displayed and cannot be viewed, and the timing within the 3C reception period. When the "reception validity determination that the movement by the player is a valid movement" is not made before Y arrives, the post-reception production is started to be executed at that time, even if the mood image display is not displayed. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility of being performed, a person who desires such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind after that.

  According to such a configuration, during the third C reception period, the player is given "the right to select whether or not to start the post-reception production with the image display being displayed", and the first C During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to select whether or not to start post-reception production with the image display still displayed", and the post-reception production is always displayed with the image display being displayed. It will act as a starter.

  In this regard, in the 3C reception period in which such a selection right is given, when the operation (operation) by the player is not received within the 3C reception period (when there is no reception validity determination), there is a reception validity determination. The same post-reception effects as at the time of reception are not executed (the automatic effect function is not activated), and in the 1C reception period in which such a selection right is not given, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (when there is no acceptance validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception effect as when there is acceptance acceptance determination (the automatic effect function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the compensation for giving the above-mentioned selection right is not relieved when the operation is forgotten. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception production itself will not be performed unless the determination such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, so that a sense of tension can be appropriately imparted. Will be able to. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, although the above-mentioned selection right is not given, even if the reception within the 1C reception period is not made in time, the post-reception production is properly executed. From this point of view, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately. In this case, if the post-reception effect when the user forgets to operate during the 1C reception period is started while the display of the image is being continued, it is possible to include the time when the user forgets to operate it. Thus, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned selection right.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared as the reception period. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the operation (operation) by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, a plurality of modes having different expectations based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made (Fig. 317 (d1) to (h1) is a low-expectation mode, and FIG. 317 (d2) to (h2) is a high-expectation mode), the 3C post-reception effect can be executed, and the first C reception period When the "acceptance validity determination in which the action (operation) by the player is a valid action" is made in the above, a plurality of modes having different expectations (FIGS. 314 (d1) to ( The low-expectation mode shown in h1) and the high-expectation mode shown in FIGS. 314 (d2) to (h2)) make it possible to execute the first post-C reception effect.

  In this respect, in the pachinko machine 1, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 3C reception period, the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is performed. At the time when the execution is started, the remaining time is displayed (for example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image with time, and is expected as at least one of the frame image and the gauge image. (A plurality of modes with different degrees are prepared) may not be displayed and may be hidden. On the other hand, when the "reception validity determination" is made within the 1C reception period, at the time when the post-reception production (post-reception production corresponding to the 1C reception period) based on the "reception validity determination" is started to be executed. , Remaining time display (for example, it is a depiction that reduces the display area of the gauge image displayed in the frame image according to the passage of time. Things that are prepared) are not displayed and are not hidden. The remaining time display according to the above embodiment is displayed as an integrated image display IG, and a plurality of modes shown in FIGS. 232 (a) to 232 (d) are prepared as modes.

  With such a configuration, after the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” is started to be executed, the remaining time display (frame image and gauge image) is visible and the remaining time display (frame is displayed). In some cases, the images and gauge images are not visible, and it is expected that the feeling of tension after the execution of the post-reception production is appropriately maintained.

  Moreover, in the third C reception period according to this embodiment, in the case where “the reception validity determination that the motion of the player is a valid motion is made” is made before the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (FIG. 310), the remaining time display (the frame image and the gauge image are hidden) at the time when the post-reception effect (the 3C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) based on the acceptance validity determination is started. Although it is not displayed and is not displayed, in the case where “a reception valid determination that the motion of the player is a valid motion is made” is made after the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives (see FIG. 311), the remaining Time display (while the frame image and the gauge image are displayed, the production after the 3C reception is started.

  That is, from the player's side, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316 (d))” among the plurality of modes, “acceptance validity determination” It can be said that it is certainly preferable in order to improve the enjoyment of the game that the post-reception effect based on "(the third-C post-reception effect corresponding to the 3C reception period) is continued to be displayed even after the execution is started. .. However, when at least one of the frame image and the gauge image is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))” among the plurality of modes, the post-reception effect based on the “reception validity determination” ( If this continues to be displayed even after the execution of the (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is started, it is inevitable that the game will be less interesting.

  For example, in the post-reception production (3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period), the remaining time display is “Low Expectation in the first mode (FIG. 316 (b)) during the effective period (3C reception period). ) ”And“ a second mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (d)) ”, there is a possibility of execution in a mode with high expectations (further, There is a possibility that it will be executed in a less frequent manner). Then, when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with a high degree of expectation, it is possible to sufficiently improve the enjoyment of the game with only this. At this time, if there is a case where the remaining time display continues to be displayed in the “first mode with low expectation (see FIG. 316 (b))”, it is clear that the interest of the game is adversely reduced. It can be said that it is desirable to hide the remaining time display. On the other hand, even when the post-reception production (the 3C post-reception production corresponding to the 3C reception period) is executed in a mode with low expectation, at this time, the “high-expectation second mode (FIG. 316 (d)) ”, the remaining time display continues to be displayed, so that it is possible to suitably suppress the deterioration of the entertainment of the game due to the post-reception production being executed in a mode with low expectation. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable to continue the remaining time display without hiding it.

  Or Even when the remaining time display is displayed in the “first mode with low expectations (see FIG. 316 (b))”, Among the players, As an "excuse" when the post-reception production is executed in a "low expectations" mode, At the time when the post-reception production is started, It seems that some people want to keep the remaining time display not hidden and the display state continues, Even when the remaining time display is displayed in the “second mode with high expectation (see FIG. 316 (d))”, Among the players, In order to suppress the "irritability" when the post-reception performance is executed in a "low expectations" mode, At the time when the post-reception production is started, It seems that some people want to keep the remaining time display hidden so that it cannot be seen.

  In this respect, according to the above configuration, when one reception period (third C reception period) occurs, the player "validates the operation by the player until the timing Y in the third C reception period arrives. It is possible to start executing after-reception production in a state in which the remaining time display is hidden and cannot be viewed, and the timing within the 3C reception period. When the "reception validity judgment that the movement by the player is a valid movement" is not made before Y arrives, the post-reception production starts to be executed while the remaining time display is not displayed at that time. Since it becomes possible to eliminate the possibility that the operation will be performed, a person who desires such performance can enjoy the operation performance with peace of mind thereafter.

  According to such a configuration, during the third C reception period, the player is given "the right to select whether or not to start the post-reception production with the remaining time display being displayed", and the 1C During the reception period, the player is not given the "right to select whether or not to start the post-reception production with the remaining time display displayed," and the post-reception production is always displayed with the remaining time display always displayed. It will act as a starter.

  In this regard, in the 3C reception period in which such a selection right is given, when the operation (operation) by the player is not received within the 3C reception period (when there is no reception validity determination), there is a reception validity determination. The same post-reception effects as at the time of reception are not executed (the automatic effect function is not activated), and in the 1C reception period in which such a selection right is not given, the operation (operation) by the player is accepted within the 1C reception period. If not (when there is no acceptance validity determination), it is desirable to execute the same post-reception effect as when there is acceptance acceptance determination (the automatic effect function is activated). According to such a configuration, when the third C reception period occurs, the compensation for giving the above-mentioned selection right is not relieved when the operation is forgotten. As a result, when the 3C reception period occurs, the post-reception production itself will not be performed unless the determination such as "which one to select" is made within a limited time, so that a sense of tension can be appropriately imparted. Will be able to. On the other hand, when the 1C reception period occurs, although the above-mentioned selection right is not given, even if the reception within the 1C reception period is not made in time, the post-reception production is properly executed. From this point of view, it is expected that the interest of the game will be maintained appropriately. In this case, if the post-reception effect when the user forgets to operate during the 1C reception period is started while the remaining time display continues to be displayed, it is possible to include the time when the operator forgets to operate. Thus, it is possible not to grant the above-mentioned selection right.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, a plurality of reception periods including the first C reception period and the third C reception period are prepared as the reception period. In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display or remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) can be displayed using at least the specific region. Then, when the "reception validity determination that the motion by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 1C reception period, the first degree is determined in one of a plurality of modes with different expectations based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. When the 1C reception effect can be executed, and the "reception validity determination that the operation by the player is a valid motion" is made within the 3C reception period, the degree of expectation is based on the fact that the reception validity determination is made. It is possible to execute the post-3C reception effect in any of a plurality of different modes. Further, at the time when the production after the reception of the first C is started and at the time when the production after the reception of the third C is started, the integrated image display IG (the image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image) are displayed. ) Is not hidden but is displayed in some cases.

  In this respect, the pachinko machine 1 determines whether or not the "reception validity determination" is made within the first C reception period and the "reception validity determination" is made during the third C reception period. Based on that, the disappearance EF effect is produced by using at least a part of the display target area (specific area) of the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)). Since it can be executed, it is possible to easily recognize that the acceptance validity determination has been properly made (the acceptance period has ended because the operation by the player has been accepted).

  Further, as described above, in the 3C reception period, the 3C reception period depends on the timing (the 1st period, the 2nd period, etc.) at which the “reception validity determination” in which the action by the player is made the valid action is made. When the integrated image display IG is not hidden and is displayed at the time when the effect after the reception of the third C corresponding to is started, and when the integrated image display IG is not displayed (visual confirmation) In some cases, it may not be possible). On the other hand, in the 1C reception period, the integrated image display IG is always displayed regardless of when the reception validity determination is made that the operation (operation) by the player is a valid operation (valid operation). It has become so. By providing the first C reception period in which such an integrated image display IG is always displayed separately from the above-described third C reception period, a sense of security is provided in combination with the configuration in which the disappearance EF effect is executed. It becomes possible to provide a certain performance, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the enjoyment of the game.

  In the 1C reception period, if the corresponding post-reception production (1C post-reception production) is executed in the high-expectation mode (FIGS. 314 (d2) to (h2), the disappearance EF production (disappearance related display) is displayed. Although the specific mode (FIGS. 314 (e2) to (g2)) used in the 3C reception period appears, if it is different from the high expectation mode, the specific mode as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) (FIG. 314 (e2) to FIG. 314 (e2)). (G2)) does not appear and a different mode (FIGS. 314 (e1) to (g1)) appears, or it is desirable that the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) itself does not appear. According to this configuration, when the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed corresponding to the 3C reception period, it becomes possible to give an image as if the high expectation effect is being executed. Suppress the decline in interest So that it is able to.

  In the first C reception period, the acceptance permissible sound is output in a plurality of modes with different expectations, but in the third C reception period, the acceptance permissible sound may be output only in “one mode”. With such a configuration, when the acceptance allowable sound having the “one aspect” is output, it is possible to make the user aware of the possibility that the 3C acceptance period having the above-described two effects is occurring. Since it becomes possible to maintain the feeling of tension, it becomes possible to maintain a suitable tension. The “one aspect” may be one that can be selectively output (by determination) even when the first C reception period occurs. Further, in this case, it is desirable that "one aspect" is output as the aspect with the lowest expectation. In this case, it is expected that the sense of tension will be appropriately maintained even in a situation in which the acceptance-permitted sound is output in the lowest expected manner.

  When the specific variation pattern is selected, both the first C acceptance period and the third C acceptance period may be sequentially generated in the particular variation pattern. In this case, it is desirable that the first C reception period be generated after the third C reception period is generated. Further, in this case, the first C reception period may occur. In this case, it is desirable that the second C acceptance period can occur between the occurrence of the third C acceptance period and the occurrence of the first C acceptance period.

  Further, it is preferable that the precursor effect output when the first C reception period occurs and the precursor effect output when the third C reception period occurs are in different modes. That is, in this case, it is possible to suggest which of the first C reception period and the third C reception period occurs by the precursor effect.

  Further, in the 3C reception period, as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display), a specific mode (for example, the second disappearance related display SKC2) is made to appear, and if there is no reception, a mode different from the specific mode ( For example, it is desirable that the third disappearance related display SKC3) appears or no mode appears. On the other hand, in the first C reception period, it is desirable that the same aspect as when the reception is performed as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) appears even if there is no reception. That is, the performance by the above-mentioned "first C reception period" (the performance by which a scale image display or a gauge image is displayed at the time when the post-reception production is started to be executed) and the above-mentioned "second C reception period" In the 3C reception period, which has both the sexuality (the creativity in which the scale image is not displayed and the gauge image is not displayed at the time when the effect after the reception is started), it may be difficult to select the creativity. Therefore, it can be said that the operation is more likely to be forgotten (the acceptance period ends without being accepted) than the “first C acceptance period” described above. In this respect, according to the above configuration, if the user forgets to operate in the third C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (for example, the second disappearance related display SKC2) when the reception is made does not appear. It becomes possible to appeal to the player that he / she has forgotten to operate and is able to maintain a suitable tension when a reception period occurs thereafter. Become. On the other hand, there are no elements that tend to be forgotten to operate during the 1C reception period. Nevertheless, if the action is not accepted, it is possible that the player has made a choice in the game to "do not perform the action". Therefore, for the player who made such a choice, If the "appeal of being in a situation where forgetting to operate has occurred", the interest in the game may be adversely affected. Therefore, in the 1C reception period, it is desirable that the same mode as when the reception is made as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) appears even if the reception is not made.

  In particular, in the 1C reception period according to the above-described production example, the mode of the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is different according to the mode (expectation degree) related to the 1C reception after reception (see FIG. 314). reference). Therefore, in the first C reception period, even if there is no acceptance, if the same mode as when there is acceptance as the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) appears, it appears when there is acceptance. Further, it becomes possible to recognize the mode (expectation level) related to the effect after the reception of the first C, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  In the 1C reception period and the 3C reception period, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is displayed in the operation receiving portion when the operation by the player is received. It is desirable that the disappearing EF display is executed while the depiction of the appearing motion and the area reduction of the gauge image are continued.

  It should be noted that each of the above-described production examples and other examples may be realized by modifying the following configuration, and the following configuration (reception period) may be further used as another reception period in which the type of post-reception production is different. It may be provided. That is, as described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, at least the first C reception period, the second C reception period, and the third C reception period are set as the reception period in which the player is allowed to receive the operation (operation). I have it. Of these, in the first C reception period and the third C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) can be executed based on the fact that the operation (operation) by the player has been accepted (acceptance validity determination). As described above, in the 2C reception period, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is not executed even if the operation (operation) is accepted by the player (acceptance validity determination).

  In this regard, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 1C acceptance period (determination of acceptance validity), the production after the 1C acceptance is expected based on the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) (big hit symbol). Disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) in the same manner in the case where it is executed in a mode in which the appearance ratio is low) and in the case where the 1C post-reception performance is executed in a mode in which the degree of expectation is high (the ratio where the big hit symbol appears) May be made executable. Further, when such a configuration is applied to the example shown in FIG. 314, any mode (the mode shown in FIGS. 314 (d1) to (h1), FIG. 314 (d2) as the first C reception after effect is performed. ~ (H2)) appears, and further, regardless of whether or not acceptance is made within the first C acceptance period (aspects shown in Figs. 314 (d3) to (g3)), As the disappearance EF effect, it is desirable that one predetermined mode always appears. That is, the 1C acceptance period is the period when the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) is made at any timing within the period (even when the acceptance is not made). After the end, the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) is continuously displayed. In this case, the situation is such that information such as "Which mode the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. Therefore, if different information is provided depending on the disappearing EF effect, the effect may be too complicated. In this regard, according to the first C reception period as described above, any aspect (an aspect shown in FIGS. 314 (d1) to (h1), and an aspect shown in FIGS. 314 (d2) to (h2) as post-C reception effect is shown. Regardless of whether or not the mode) appears, and whether or not the reception is performed within the first C reception period (modes shown in FIGS. 314 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearance EF effect is predetermined. Since the one aspect described above will always appear, the above-mentioned concern can be resolved.

  In addition, when the player accepts the operation (operation) during the 3C acceptance period (determination of acceptance validity), the production after the 3C acceptance is expected based on the acceptance (determination of acceptance validity) (big hit symbol is The disappearance EF effect can be executed in different modes depending on whether it is executed in a mode in which the appearance ratio is low or when the third C post-reception effect is executed in a mode in which the degree of expectation (the ratio in which the big hit symbol appears) is high. You may do it. The 3C reception period has the two performances described above, and it can be said that it is positioned as a "difficult reception period" by that amount. Therefore, even after the reception is made, the integrated model It is possible for the player to obtain different effect information from both the mode of the image display IG (a general image display and the remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) and the mode of the disappearance EF effect. On the other hand, it is desirable to give a stimulus in the production.

  When such a configuration is applied to the examples shown in FIGS. 317 and 318, the disappearance EF effect that appears when the acceptance is not made is the appearance that can appear when the acceptance is made. It is desirable to be different from any of the plurality of aspects as the EF effect. As a result, it is possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and the acceptance period has the effect of the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period" and the effect of the "second C acceptance period" described above. It will be possible to suggest that it was a combination of both.

  Further, as described above, in another example of the 3C reception period, when the reception is made during the “first period (first state)” within the 3C reception period, the integrated image image is displayed after the reception is made. This means that the display IG (display of a full-scale image, display of remaining time (frame image, gauge image)) is not displayed. That is, in this case, after the acceptance is made, information such as "in which mode the integrated image display IG (image display and remaining time display (frame image, gauge image)) was displayed" is provided. In such a situation, it is desirable to provide information (expected degree information regarding post-reception effect) by the disappearance EF effect in order to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) in the 1C acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect is executed in a mode different from the mode that appears when the operation is accepted. You can Thereby, it becomes possible to recognize that the acceptance has not been made, and if the aspect cannot appear in the third C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned “first C acceptance period”. It is possible to suggest that it was not a combination of both the performance of the above and the performance of the above-mentioned “second C reception period”.

  Further, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) in the 3C acceptance period, the disappearance EF effect is executed in the same manner as the appearance when the acceptance is made. May be.

  With regard to these modified examples, it is not necessary to apply all of the configurations to the above-described effect examples and other examples thereof. For example, an appropriate combination or only one of the configurations (modifications) may be applied to the above-described production examples and other examples thereof.

  Next, a case where some of the modified examples are applied to the above-described effect examples will be described. That is, FIG. 319 is a modification example related to “the effect that appears when the acceptance is performed or not accepted during the first C acceptance period” illustrated in FIG. 314, and FIGS. 320 and 321 are the same as FIG. 317. (Accepting in the first period) and FIG. 318 (accepting in the second period) shown in FIG. 318 in the modified example of "the effect that appears when the acceptance is made in the 3C reception period or when the acceptance is not made" is there. In addition, in the modified example, as for the configurations not particularly mentioned, "examples of effects regarding the first C reception period (FIGS. 304 to 306, 313, and 314)" and "examples of effects related to the third C reception period (FIGS. 310 to 310). 312, FIG. 316 to FIG. 318) ”as described above, and with respect to each of the above-described other examples that can be applied to the“ production example regarding the first C reception period ”and the“ production example regarding the third C reception period ”. Is similarly applicable.

  In the modified example shown in FIG. 319, when the player accepts an operation (operation) (reception acceptance determination) during the 1C acceptance period, the 1C post-reception effect is expected based on the acceptance (reception acceptance determination). When it is executed in a mode in which the degree (the proportion of big hit symbols appears) is low (see FIGS. 319 (d1) to (h1)), the aspect after the first C reception is high in the degree of expectation (the proportion in which the big hit symbols appear) ( 319 (d2) to (h2)), the disappearance EF effect (disappearance related display) is executed in the same manner. Here, the second disappearance related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

  However, in the modified example shown in FIG. 319, when the operation (operation) is not accepted by the player (determination of acceptance validity) in the first C acceptance period (see FIGS. 319 (d3) to (g3)), As the disappearance EF effect, a mode that does not appear when the player accepts an operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) during the first C acceptance period appears. Here, the third disappearance related display SKC3 is executed as the disappearance EF effect.

  On the other hand, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, when the operation (operation) is accepted by the player (acceptance validity determination) during the 3C acceptance period, based on the acceptance (acceptance validity determination). When the 3C post-reception production is performed in a mode in which the degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols) is low (see FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1), and FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3)), 3C reception after production is performed in a mode with a high degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 320 (d2) to (h2), and FIG. 321 (d4) to (h4)) The disappearance EF effect is executed by. Here, when it is executed in a mode with a low degree of expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3)), as the disappearance EF effect 1 Disappearance related display SKC1 is executed, and is executed in a mode with a high expectation (the proportion of big hit symbols appearing) (see FIGS. 320 (d2) to (h2) and 321 (d4) to (h4)) The second disappearance related display SKC2 is executed as the disappearance EF effect. As described above, FIGS. 320 (d1) to 320 (h1) and 320 (d2) to 320 (h2) show the effects that appear when the acceptance is made in the first period within the third C acceptance period according to the modification. 321 (d3) to (h3) and FIGS. 321 (d4) to (h4) show progress contents, in the case where the acceptance is made in the second period within the 3C acceptance period according to the modified example. Shows the progress of the production that appears in

  Further, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 320 and 321, in the case where the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted (reception availability determination) during the 3C acceptance period (see FIGS. 321 (d5) to (g5)). ), As the disappearance EF effect, the mode that appears when it is supposed that the operation (operation) by the player (acceptance validity determination) is temporarily made during the 3C acceptance period appears. That is, in the example shown in FIGS. 321 (d5) to (g5), since the first disappearance-related display SKC1 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, acceptance of an operation (operation) by the player during the 3C acceptance period ( If it is determined that the reception is valid, the production progress shown in FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3) (if the reception is in the first period, the production progress shown in FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1)). Will be able to recognize that was occurring. On the other hand, when the player does not accept the operation (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) during the 3C acceptance period and the second disappearance related display SKC2 is displayed as the disappearance EF effect, the 3C acceptance period If it is assumed that the player has accepted the action (operation) (determination of acceptance validity) in FIG. 321 (d4) to (h4), the production progress (if acceptance in the first period, FIG. 320 (d2) ) To (h2), it becomes possible to recognize that the production progress) has occurred.

  In the first C reception period according to such a modification, as a disappearance-related display (disappearance EF effect) that appears when the acceptance is made, a post-acceptance effect (after reception of the 3C acceptance) corresponding to the above-described third C acceptance period according to the modification example. It is assumed that the "second disappearance related display SKC2" that is displayed when the (production) is executed in a mode with high expectations. That is, in this case, in the first C reception period according to the modified example, as long as the reception is made, it is possible to give an image as if the post-reception production is executed in a mode with high expectation, You will be able to improve your interest.

  The disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the third C reception period according to the modification does not necessarily have to be the “second disappearance related display SKC2”. For example, as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect) corresponding to the first C reception period according to the modified example, the post-reception effect (first C reception effect) corresponding to the first C reception period is executed in a mode with low expectations. Even when the "first disappearance related display SKC1" displayed at the time of use is used, is it in the state of being accepted during the first C acceptance period according to the modification, or the third C according to the modification? It becomes possible to make it difficult to recognize whether or not the service has been received during the reception period.

  In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this modification, when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is displayed as the disappearance related display (disappearance EF effect). It is supposed to be displayed.

  The “third disappearance related display SKC3” is preferably not displayed in association with the third C reception period according to the modification. That is, in this case, even when the operation (operation) by the player is not accepted within the first C acceptance period, the acceptance period is the above-mentioned "first C acceptance period" and the above-mentioned "first" acceptance period. It becomes possible to suggest that it was not one that had both the performance due to the "2C reception period".

  Further, it is desirable that the "third disappearance related display SKC3" is not displayed when the operation (operation) by the player is received within the first C reception period according to the modification. That is, in this case, it is possible to more suitably suggest that the first C acceptance period has ended without acceptance.

  Even in the third C reception period according to this modified example, the player is prior to the timing tV2 when the state (the third C reception period) in which the "reception validity determination in which the operation by the player is a valid operation" is permitted occurs. Even if there is an operation (operation) by the above, the operation (operation) is not regarded as a “reception valid determination” at that time, but at the time when the third C reception period is started (or after that). ), A configuration according to the above-described another example in which it is possible to perform (based on) “reception validity determination” that targets (based on) an operation (operation) by the player performed before the third C reception period. It is possible to apply such as.

  In the 3C reception period according to the above modification, when a low-expectation mode appears as a post-3C reception effect (see FIGS. 320 (d1) to (h1) or FIGS. 321 (d3) to (h3)), disappears. Although the first disappearance related display SKC1 is executed as the EF effect, the disappearance EF effect itself may not appear.

  Further, in the first C reception period according to the above-described modified example, as the disappearance EF effect, a specific aspect appears when there is reception (FIGS. 319 (d1) to (h1) and FIGS. 319 (d2) to (h2)). Although a mode different from the specific mode appears when there is no acceptance (FIGS. 319 (d3) to (g3)), the disappearance EF effect itself may not appear when there is no acceptance.

  Further, in the first C reception period according to the above modification, the second disappearance related display SKC2 is executed as a specific mode (disappearance EF effect) when there is a reception, but it is different from the second disappearance related display SKC2. It may be performed in a manner. For example, even if it is set to be executed in the first disappearance related display SKC1, it is determined whether it is in the state of being accepted in the first C acceptance period or in the state of being accepted in the third C acceptance period. You will be able to make it difficult to recognize.

  Although the present invention has been described above with reference to some embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications are possible within the scope not departing from the gist of the present invention as shown below. Can be improved and the design can be changed.

  For example, although there is a case where a display such as "during automatic button setting" is performed in each of the above-described production examples regarding the automatic production function, the display need not necessarily be performed. In particular, in the case of the pachinko machine 1 which is set in the automatic effect mode, and is realized as the pachinko machine 1 in which the automatic effect function is always enabled and the process itself such as “setting to the effect state” is not installed, It is desirable not to display "Auto button setting in progress". In the pachinko machine 1 that is not equipped with the processing itself such as “setting to the rendering state”, the effective period in which the automatic rendering function is performed and the automatic rendering function are set in accordance with the type of operation reception production that the player is allowed to operate. A valid period that is not played may occur.

  Further, in each of the above-described effect examples, the “middle image” may be an image that prompts the player to perform an operation, and is, for example, an operation target such as an arrow image that points downward and moves up and down. It does not have to be displayed as an image of the operating means.

  Further, in the case where the automatic effect function is adopted in each of the above-described effect examples, the timing of automatically generating (automatically accepting) an operation acceptance within the operation valid period is set to any timing within the operation valid period. May be In order to appropriately give an operation opportunity to the player, the operation is performed when the operation is not detected until a predetermined timing after the operation valid period occurs and half or more of the operation effective period elapses. It is preferable that the reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) and the post-operation performance is started based on the automatically generated operation reception. In this sense, the operation reception is automatically generated (automatic reception) when the operation is not detected until the time when the remaining time within the operation valid period becomes 1 frame, and the post-operation performance is generated based on the automatically generated operation reception. It is most desirable to get it started. Further, in each of the above-described effect examples related to the automatic effect function, if the bar display is not hidden and is maintained even after the expiration of the effective period, the operation to be operated according to the timing when the effective period is ended. It is desirable to execute an effect that changes the mode of the means (for example, vibration or turning off the LED). As a result, even if the bar display is not hidden and is displayed continuously, it is expected to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that "the validity period is continuing?". Become so.

  In addition, in the above-described and later-described effect examples such as the effect example described with reference to FIG. 209, in the case where the post-operation effect is started while the mood image (or the bar display) is not displayed and is maintained. Time from the timing at which the operation is detected to the timing at which the mimic image (or bar display) is hidden (timing tf2 to tf4, timing tg3 to tg5, timing th3 to th4, etc.) “,” May have a time of at least several frames (for example, 2 frames). Alternatively, there may be only one frame of time. Even if there is such a time, the period in which the mimic image (or bar display) is displayed and the period after the post-operation performance is started overlap, and some players can recognize it. In some cases.

  In the above-mentioned production examples, when “period” and “time” are described, they may be the minimum unit “period” or “time” in control, for example, one frame period or It also means including time.

  Further, in the description example of the “help image for promoting the understanding of the effect”, the ruler is exemplified as the “reference image in which the length unit in the horizontal direction is shown”, but an image other than this may be used. May be. In short, when the player operates, it is enough to display a displayed image without being affected by the special effect. For example, it is not an image intended to promote understanding of the effect, but another function. A display image intended to be played (for example, an image indicating the degree of expectation, an image indicating the current effect state, an image indicating the state related to effect setting, etc.) is drawn so as to extend in the horizontal direction. It may be displayed as an image. Note that such an image does not necessarily have to be drawn as a single image, but may be drawn so that a plurality of images are arranged side by side and extend in the horizontal direction as a whole.

  In addition, in the example of “preventing mischief against multiple operating means”, mischievous acts are very different from fraudulent acts such as magnet goto, and it is not possible for the hall side to take strict measures. It can also lead to profits. Therefore, the image that appears based on the detection of the operation by the player (including the image that appears in the process of making the specific moving image appear) should be realized as having nothing to do with mischief prevention. Good. In short, when the player operates a plurality of operation means in a predetermined pattern (predetermined procedure), "in the effect display device 1600, a game effect according to a big hit determination is executed. Display (playback) a specific video that may not appear in the state of being displayed (may be a video with content that has nothing to do with mischief prevention (for example, move a predetermined movie to a streaming state)) ) ”,“ Even if the volume adjustment button is operated, the change in the volume setting value related to the output volume of the effect sound is not accepted and the current volume setting value is not displayed. ” Even if there is an operation on the button, the change of the brightness setting value related to the brightness of the effect lamp is not accepted and the current brightness setting value is not displayed. As long as it performs control to generate me. In this case, the player can voluntarily generate the function restriction period in which the above-described specific moving image is reproduced by operating a plurality of operating means in a predetermined pattern (procedure). Is.

  Further, in the example of “preventing mischief with respect to a plurality of operating means”, in the state where variable display of decorative symbols is performed, the partial restriction period may be always controlled.

  Regarding the example of "Preventing noise by adjusting confirmation sound when opening a store", the point is to control to the normal state where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound can be output immediately after the power is turned on. If the gaming machine is controlled to the normal state after the limited state in which the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound cannot be output, and the game is started in the limited state, the limited state is ended early. It is only necessary that the device be controlled to a normal state by setting the length of time to be maintained in the restricted state as appropriate (set from several seconds to several hours). Good. If the length of time to be maintained as a restricted state is set too short, the above-mentioned effect in the game period immediately after opening the store will not be achieved, but about the noise when the hall side sets the volume immediately after turning on the power Can suppress this.

  Further, in the description example of the "control for the volume adjustment confirmation sound according to the effect importance degree", when the first special symbol is being changed and when the second special symbol is being changed, it is an advantageous condition. Volume change confirmation sound and brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the fluctuation of the second special symbol that can be played, but during the fluctuation of the first special symbol that can be played under disadvantageous conditions. The case where the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are output is illustrated. However, it is also possible to adopt the technology for a gaming machine in which the second special symbol is not installed, for example, a specific symbol for which a lottery is performed under a more disadvantageous condition than the first special symbol is prepared. However, the volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound are not output during the change of the first special symbol (special symbol) on the side that can be played under advantageous conditions, but the side that can be played on unfavorable conditions The volume adjustment confirmation sound and the brightness adjustment confirmation sound may be output during the change of the specific symbol.

  In addition, in the description example of “the period during which the operation reception is permitted (effective period) itself performance”, the reception acceptable sound accompanying the occurrence of the special operation reception production and the occurrence of the first and second operation reception productions The effect sound may be different from the acceptance acceptable sound. Further, in FIG. 210, the acceptable reception sound is output from the timing tr1 (tr11). However, as “one sound data” extending over the timing tr1 (tr11), for example, it is assigned to the channel from the timing trA. You may make it output.

  Even if a mock image of the operation receiving section that receives an operation and a peripheral decoration image that decorates the periphery of the image are separately prepared as image data, and displayed as an integrated mage image by combining the respective image data. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 232, when the “ordinary button image BMGa” is displayed when the operation opportunity is given to one operation means (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)), There is a case where a "special button image BMGb" having a different shape is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)). However, when the “normal button image BMGa” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (a) and (c)), an operation opportunity is given to the first operation means (first operation receiving portion), and the “special button” is displayed. In the case where the “image BMGb” is displayed (FIGS. 232 (b) and (d)), the second operation means (second operation receiving portion) different from the first operation means (first operation receiving portion) is displayed. An operation opportunity may be given.

  In each of the above-described examples, the members (operating means) prepared as the operation target are those requiring a pressing operation (pressing operation) (buttons) and those requiring an insertion / removal operation (insertion / removal operation) (sword). In addition to decoration, etc., it may be realized as something that requires player action such as non-contact or touch (such as proximity sensor).

  Although the peripheral decoration image SSG does not include the peripheral decoration portion that is actually provided on the periphery of the “operation receiving portion to which the operation opportunity is given”, at least a part of the peripheral decoration portion does not include the peripheral decoration portion. It does not matter as long as it is not present, and there may be a portion that is used to embellish the peripheral decoration portion.

  Regarding the second effective period in which the operation-related image (integrated image IG etc.) is displayed in the “display mode in which the movement of the gauge image GG has a characteristic”, and the effective period in which the gauge image itself is not displayed, The predetermined set time is not limited and may be infinitely continued unless a predetermined condition unrelated to the passage of time is satisfied.

  When the specific image TG is displayed within the valid period, the gauge image GG does not necessarily have to be displayed.

  For the "automatic reception effect" described in FIG. 232 and subsequent figures, any of the implementation methods related to the "automatic reception effect" illustrated before that may be adopted. Any of the above-described implementation methods may be adopted as to how each of the scale image and the gauge image is displayed when the automatic reception performance is performed. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a reception effect is generated, the type of effect state at the time of occurrence, or the type of the reception effect (post-operation effect) itself, or the reception effect Depending on the conditions, etc., in which the same post-operation effect as when the operation was performed by the player within the effective period is executed (the "automatic effect function" is activated) If there is no operation by the player within the valid period, the post-operation effect may not be executed (the "automatic effect function" may not be enabled). The timing at which the automatic effect function is activated may be a predetermined timing within the effective period, a timing at which the effective period ends, or a timing at which a little time has passed after the effective period ended. May be

  The reception period illustrated in each of the above-described production examples (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 282 to 287, the reception periods F and G, etc.) does not necessarily correspond to the result of the big hit determination (production determination). It does not have to occur in the pattern. For example, during the period when the symbol variation is not being executed, but during the period when the symbol variation is not being executed (for example, the period when the big hit game is being executed, various interval periods, etc.) (the predetermined condition is It may occur (based on the establishment). In this case, "after x seconds from the start of fluctuation" shown in FIG. 278 is applied to the symbol fluctuation of y seconds shorter than x seconds, and after the fluctuation of the symbol of y seconds ends, "from the fluctuation start". The timing “x seconds later” may arrive, and the acceptance period D may be generated at the timing. According to such a configuration, since the acceptance period D occurs after the symbol variation is stopped in the state where the hold is "0", it is possible to retain the player who intends to stop the game. become. In this sense, it may be set as "x seconds after the fluctuation stop" instead of "x seconds after the fluctuation start".

  In addition, in the reception period (for example, the reception periods D and E shown in FIGS. 282 to 287 and the reception periods F and G shown in FIGS. 282 to 287) illustrated in each of the above-described production examples, the end condition of the reception period is “predetermined. It is not necessary to set it as "the elapsed time value has passed", and when the predetermined end condition is satisfied (for example, when 10 game balls are accepted in the special winning opening), the relevant acceptance period is set. It may be terminated.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 316 (b), as shown in FIG. 300 (a), the operation target display (display of the image) and the remaining time display (gauge image, frame image) are in the non-display state and cannot be visually recognized. You may be in a state.

  Further, in each of the above-described effects examples, the disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image, etc.) is a post-reception effect (conversation notice in which expectation is suggested depending on which conversation appears, whether the movable body operates). It is commonly used for a plurality of reception periods with different types of moving performance in which the degree of expectation is suggested depending on whether or not the cut-in display appears in which form It is possible to perform (can be executed in the same effect mode), thereby making it possible to recognize that the operation reception (operation reception) is properly performed (the reception period has ended). That is, since the post-reception production differs depending on the type of the reception period, whether it is being performed within the reception period when the contents of the production are viewed, or whether the reception period has ended It is difficult to recognize whether or not this is being done. In this regard, regardless of the type of the acceptance period, by preparing an extinction EF effect in which a common (same) effect mode can appear when the acceptance period ends, the operation acceptance (operation acceptance) is properly performed and post-acceptance effect Will be able to be suitably suggested that it is in a running state. However, as the gaming machine (pachinko machine 1), there may be a case where a common disappearance EF effect (disappearance effect image or the like) is executed in a plurality of types of post-reception effects, and for example, a specific type of post-reception effects is generated. A dedicated disappearing EF effect that can be executed only occasionally may be prepared.

  Also, regarding each of the above-mentioned production examples, modified examples, and notes that are described as “desirable”, only the further operational effects in the case of having the same configuration are described, and regarding the same configuration, Needless to say, it does not have to be provided.

  That is, in the embodiment, the one applied to the pachinko machine 1 as a gaming machine is shown, but the invention is not limited to this, and the invention is applied to a pachi-slot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachi-slot machine are fused. However, even in this case, the same operational effect can be obtained.

Claims (1)

Determination means for performing determination,
A privilege granting unit that can grant a privilege based on the determination result of the determining unit being a special result,
When a reception validity period can be generated and a reception validity determination that the player's action is a valid motion is made within the reception period, a reception period execution that can execute post-reception production according to the type of the generated reception period is executed. Means and
An operation target display unit capable of displaying an operation target display that suggests an operation target by the player during the reception period;
As the reception period, a plurality of reception periods are prepared, including a specific reception period in which the operation validity display is allowed without the operation target display being displayed,
Upon occurrence of the specific reception period, it is possible to output a reception permission sound indicating that the reception validity determination is allowed, or that the reception validity determination is allowed,
The reception period execution means can generate a predetermined reception period that is a reception period different from the specific reception period, and when the reception validity determination is made in the specific reception period and the reception validity determination is made in the predetermined reception period. A gaming machine characterized by executing post-reception production in a different mode from the case.